HomeMy WebLinkAboutORD 143 (1960)ORDINANCE NO. 143
AN ORDINANCE OF THE CITY OF `?'USTIN, CALIFORNIA
REQ UIRING PERMITS AND PROVIDING RULES AND REG-
LTL.a_TIONS FOR THE ERECTION, CCNSTRUCTIG ENLARGE-
MENT, ALTERATION, RT'PAIR, MOVING, REMOVAL, CON"
VERSION, DEMOLITION", OCCUP:° iTCY, E"LTIPMrNT, USE,
HEIGHT AND AREA OF B';TILDINGS, STRUCTURES AND
TENTS; PROVIDITNIG PENALTIES FOR VIOLATION THEREOF;
ADOPTING BY REFERENCE ORDINANCE NO. 1183 OF THE
COUNTY OF ORANGE, STATE OF CALIFORNIA; AND
AMENDING PORTIONS OR ORDINANCE'S NUMB His 57, 78,
79,81 and 95.
The City Council of the City of Tustin does ordain
as follows:
Section 1: There is hereby adopted by the City
Council of the City of Tustin, Ca..lifornia, for the
purpose of prescribing regulations for the erection,
construction, enlargement, alteration, repair, moving,
removal, conversion, demolition, occupancy, equipment,
use, height and area, of buildings, structures and tents,
that certain Ordinance known as No. 1183 of the County
of Orange, State of California, and the whole thereof,
of which not less than three copies have been and now are
filed in the office of the City Clerk of the City of Tustin
California, and the same is hereby adopted and incorpor-
ated as fully as if set forth at length herein; and the
references contained therein to the Uniform Building Code,
1958 Edition, Volume One, including Sections 5108
through 5113 and Table 51-A of the Appendix thereto,
and Uniform Building Code, Volume Three, Uniform Building
Code Standards, 1958.Edition, are likewise incorporated
by reference and adopted as fully as if set forth at length
herein, save and except such portions as are deleted,
modified or amended in the aforesaid Ordinance No. 1183;
and three copies of same have been and now are filed
in the office of the City Clerk of the City of Tustin,
California.
696
Section 2; That Ordinance No 95 of the City of
Tustin be amended by the deletion therefrom of Section 1
and Section 2.
Section.: There is hereby adopted by the City
Council of the City of Tusti-,,q, California, for the purpo,,-Ie
of requiring permits and providing rules and regulations
for the construction and installation of plumbing, Ord-
inance No. -?80, with amendments to date thereof, of the
County of Orange, State of California., and the whole there-
of, of which said Ordii2lance not less than three copies
have been and now -are filed in the office of the City
Clerk of the City of Tustin, California, and the same is
hereby adopted and incorporated as fully as though set
forth at length herein.
Section 4: That Ordinance No. 57 of the City
of Tustin is hereby amended by the deletion therefrom of
Section 1, Section 2, Section 3, Section 4, Section 5 and
Section 6.
Section �, OrdAnace No. 78 of the City of Tuus.tin
California., is hereby repealed.
Section 6: Ordinance No. 79 of the City of Tustin
California is hereby repealed.
Section 7, There is hereby adopted by the City
Council of the City of Tustin, California,, for the purpose
of requiring permits for and providing rules and regulations
governing electrical installations and wiring, Ordinance
No. 1222 of the County of Orange, State of California, and
the whole thereof, of which not less than three copies have
been and are now filed in the office of the City Clerk of
the City of. Tustin, California, and the same is hereby
adopted and incorporated herein as fully as though set forth
0
at length herein.
697
Section 8: Ordinance No. 81 of the City of Tustin,
California, is hereby repealed.
Section 9: There is hereby adopted by the City
Council of the City of Tustin3 California, for the prupose
of requiring permits for and providing rules and regulations
for the construction and installation of warm air heating,
Ordinance No. 823 of the County of Orange, State of
California, and amendments to date therof, of which not
less than three copies have been and are now filed in
the office of the City Clerk of the City of Tustin,
California, and the same is hereby adopted and incorporated
as fully as though set forth at length herein.
Section 10: There is hereby adopted by the City
Council of the City of Tustin, California, for the purpose
of requiring permits and providing regulations governing
the construction, maintenance and operation of trailer parks,
Ordinance No. 735 of the County of Orange, State of California,
and amendments thereof to date, -of which not less than three
copies have been and are now filed in the office of the City
Clerk of the City of Tustin, California, and the same is
hereby adopted and incorporated as fully as though set
foth at length herein.
Section 11: That for the purposes of adapting
the aforesaid Ordinances and building codes for use as
the law of the City of Tustin, any, each and`all refer-
ences contained therein to "County EuildingFl-i. Inspector",
"County Electrician", "County Blectrical Inspector", or
other similar references to County Officials, shall be
taken to mean, "City Building Inspector", City.Electrician"
"City Electrical Inspector", or other persons holding the
comparable position in the City of Tustin, California,
as duly appointed by the City Council of the City of Tustin,
California, and references to the applicability of the
Ordinances and Code to the inincorporated territory of
the.County of Orange shall be taken to mean the incorporated
area of the City of Tustin,, California.
Section 12: Ordinance No. 94 of the City of Tustin
California, is hereby rep:es.�d.
Section 13: Ordinance No. 85 of the City of Tustin,
California, is hereby amended as follows:
(a) 3.11 is amended to read: "Five
(5) copies of a tentative map and owner's statement of the
proposed subdivision of any land shall be filed with the
Plannigg Pommission at least fifteen (15) days prior to the
meeting at which consideration is desired, together with
a filing fee of $25.00 per tentative map containing less
t
than 21 lots, or $25.00 per tentative map, plus $1.00 per lot
for all lots over 20 and under 51, plus 50 cents per lot for
all lots over 50 and under 201, plus 25 cents per lot for all
lots over 200. When a tentative map is filed having more
than one tract number, the fee shall be e,alculated on the
basis of one tentative map and the sum of all lots shown
thereon."
(b) 4.11 is amended to read: "Except
as provided in Section 3.43, and within one year after
approval or conditional approval of the tentative map, the
subdivider shall cause the subdivision or any part thereof,
to be.surveyed and a permanent map thereof prepared in
conformance with the tentative map as approved or conditionally
approved. The tracing in.two blue line or black line prints
of the final map shall'be filed with the Planning Commissiion,
together with a checking fee, in addition to all other fees
charges and deposits required by law, of $35.00, plus $1.00
for each numbered lot shown upon said map. An.extension of
the time for filing the final map may be granted by the City
Council upon recommendation of the Planning Commission,
provided written application is made by the subdivider
within one year after action on the tentative map,.
M,
In the case of a reversion to acreage, no survey need be
made unless deemed necessary by
the City Engineer.
-Section 14: Ordinance No. 71 of the City of
Tustin, California, is hereby amended as follows:
?NMI% (a) Section 1.9 (a) is hereby amended to
read as follows: "Before accepting for filing any app-
Ilcation provided for in Section 17 (Variances), the
Commission shall charge and collect a fee of $2.0.00 for
each application for variance from the requirements for
front yard. setbacks, side yard setbacks, or rear yard
setbacks and a fee of $ 25.00 for each application for
any other type Of Variance; and before accepting and
filing any q.-
pplication provided for in Section 18,
(Amendments to zones) the Commission shall charge and
collect a. fee of $50-00 for each ap:-,lication. The
fees collected as above prescribed shall be used for the
purpose of defraying the expenses ofP Ostage, posting
advertising and other costs incidental to the proceedings
prescribed herein. A written receipt shall be issued to
the person making such payments and records of such
payments and expenditures shall be kept in such manner as
0 prescribed by law.
Sectiones if any =provision of this Ordinance
or the application. thereof to any person or circumstance
is held invalid, such inv,,:jliCJ-ty shall not affect other
provisions or application of the Ordnance which can be
given effect without the invalid provision or application
and to this end the provisions of this Ordinance are,
der.lared to be severable.
Section 16: To the extent that any Ordirarce or
provision of any Ordinance of the City of Tustin, Cal-
ifornia, shall conflict with this Ordinance, said
Ordinance or provision of said Ordinance is hereby
amended to conform 1A71-th the provisions of this
Ordinance.
Section,l?: The City Clerk shall certify to
the adoption of this Ordinance, to its signature by the
mayor, to its attestation by the City Clerk, and shall
cause this Ordinance to be.published by one insertion
in the Tustin New, a weekly newspaper of general cir-
culation, printed and circulated in the City of Tustin,
County --of Orange, State of California.
Section 18: Any person violating any of the
provisions of this Ordinance shall be guilty of a mis
demeanor. Any person who shall be convicted of a
violation of this Ordinance shall be deemed guilty of a
misdemeanor, and shall be punished by a fine not exceed-
ing $500.00, or by imprisonment, for not esceed-ing six
months, or by both such fine and imprisonment.
PASSED AND ADOPTED by the City Council of the
City of Tustin, at a regular meeting thereof held. on the
U
21st day of November, 1960
'
ayor
Attest
Li
City CIerk
MF
STATE OF CALIFORNIA)
COUNTY OF ORANGE )ss
CITY OF TUSTIN )
RUTH C. POE, pity Clerk and ex-offficio
Clerk of the City Council of the City of
Tustin, California, does hereby certify
that the whole number of the members of the
City Council of the City of Tustin is five;
that the a':)ove and foregoing Ordinance was
duly and regularly introduced at a regular
meeting of the City Council held on the 7th
day of November, 1960 and was duly Massed
and adopted at a regular meeting held on the
21st day of November, 1960, bVT the following
vote:
AYES: COUNCILMEN—Kidd, Byrd, Sheridan, Mack
NOES COUNCILMEN None
ABSENT: COUNCILMEN Humeston
ty Clerk
Cit -,11 of Tustin, California
Qi0LL"s6aZ,- W. 1222 E
F1 L 0
Of,; T !4- 1959
AN ORDINANCZ OF TIL Cali UF ,,,,TA�L OF ChLlffAitIA, i�UIRIA,
PROVIDLIG RUL -S Aia-�', 4..-GUUT1U-!- 0O11z-za-,G Z �=ICIL A
BY Rff-fZ4CC TiiP,>i CZtTAI'w -tT!TiiD "EILCTILICAL 6AF:-TY UFZ�iOUF THS STATE
OF CALI.;ORNIA," iF7rZT1n, Fmiuwz 1955, U61ED BY TH I. 6TH, -IS OF C;,LIF�aRNIA, DEP.lMi.&K
OF INDU5TRILL REIJC- Xib, DIVI.&IO,' Gk I- "Ut-;n- 1� L �Z_YETYI ?5:- w?1DT-,,U FEA.'A1TL-.-> FOR THE
VMTIOR THEREOF; AhD REPEAIX-d l< HO. 7%, 820, 908, ijq,'TIW1 3 OF MDINAiM
140. lo49, aD SF=I%i 3 OF 1U62 -
The Board of Supervisors of the county of urange, !>tate of California, do ordain
as follows:
1SWrIGN 1
Definition of Terms. For the purpose of this Ordinance, the following words., terms
and phrases are hereby defined as follows and shall be construed as in this section de-
fineds
A. County Electrical Inspector* Wherever the phrase or title *County aectrical
Inspector" is used in this Ordinance the same shdll be construed to mean the
person who has been regularily appointed as Deputy Building Lzpactor of the
County of Orange to serve as Supervising Zlectrical Inspector as in this Ordi-
nance provided. In the absence of such County Electrical Inspector through
either want of appointment or otherwise, then said phrase or title shall be
taken and construed to mean the Superintendent of Building and Safety of the
County of Orange, duly authorized and appointed as in this Ordinance provided.
B. 1.
Master Electrician. lbe Master Electrician may be the proprietors employee
or corporation officer, but shall in all cases be the person who is directly
responsible for the physical and ical manner in �;hich electrical mater-
ial, equipment and devices are placed or installed. A Master Electrician
shall counter -sign all applications for electrical parmits zvn,' shall supervise
all electrical work authorized by such permit. The name of the Master Electri-
cian, authorized as such, and the nam of the person, firm or corporation for
whom permit applications are to be counter -signed shall be set forth in the
registration with the Dapartmat of Building and safety, and it shall be un-
lawful for any %aster Electrician to counter -sign any permit application for
arW person, firm or corporation other than the person, firm or corporation by
whom or which he is employed or with whom or which he is associated or con-
nected.
2. Every person engaged in or carrying on the business of electrical wiring for
which a pernit is required under this Ordinance, except as sign electrician
or Journeyman electrician, shan be deemed to be a Master Electrician within
the meaning of this section. Such haster Electrician shall maintain a place
of business whion shall include an established office, premises or other head-
quarters which shall contain a usable telephone,, tools, fittings and fixtures
and suitable sign displaying the new of such Master Electrician. A Master
Electrician shall register Lrith the Department of Building and Safety and
present a valid State Contractor's License with a classification of C-10 at
the time of registering.
3. Limited Master Electrician. An applicant who is the bona -fide possessor of
aL valid General Buildine, Contractor's License issued by the State of California,
and identified with t classa-r1cation B-1 shall bed to be a Master
Electrician within the meaning of this Section without submitting to an exam-
ination ty the Board of Examiners of Electricians for the County of Orange on
any individual job, provided, such mgneral contractor in laufully engaged in
the business of general contracting and is employed by a written agreement to
asavne full responsibility for the execution of three or more div"ions of work
C
H
CD
inv-lying ttx use 17f �Inted buileinj crafts or trades -n such individual
4. Duties of Baster 7-lectricinn
00 it shall he is dttv of -Icrr "�Atcr �Ieetriciavi tr C-Mly with- an re-
quirements of this and al! llr,2,names -f the C-�rn�ty of (Irange, as well
as all law -7 of the �'-4tc f -T' C , 11_, niTli cable. to Glcctricpl wxTk.
(b) It steal l b: dkj%y of -_vrry _7zcr ::1-cztrician to n -ti fy the Srin-
tunden-, c BuiTdJ,:_�
, are r - -r-'ntly C-1 nny :-tnge in such 'Ibsfor Eli: c-
triBina ls i.70_
1. Sign _'t�y cr L-_:per-t1cn cng,-md in the installa-
tion or (,-I nrly 71- whetlicr fiXtd or portable.
2. Sign Electrician, No -,--rr,,n _-, cr shall Wngc in the business
of installin� or znnintafrin.- ire: tt�; elc-Arical sigms for which registrations
are recd A:: -ed ;;nde-- tbi,.-I w:t4iDrat o7z&-Ainin- a oert ca of ro-
t, ifi te
gistration t;iarof-r from tae cf building and atfety of the
County of Orar€-e. No 4hall ',-c mquirr-d for a sign electrician's
certiffcato of regiatrztf-or ii;ut �_nch annif-cmt, shall be the valid possessor of
a State Cor u: Is Tdccn-!e -aV- --- cln;sific:_tion of C-115.
D 1. Naintcnanc. Elect -i rj,-ta, 17gin-,- pc-- -�-n ctlicr than a Master Electrician, who is
regularly enploye,4- tc- i t ll, Pter, maintain, or repair electrical wiring
or equip.rcat in or on buildir.r-s or pr !Fes ouned or cccupied by bis mployer
but 'aho does not furni--ft iny matcAt` c- s. plies in the execution of such work.
2. Maintenance Electi-Icinn. No purl install, alter, mainta-_n or repair
electrical wiring or eqtTirmeant in or an build ngs r%wned or occupied by his
employer vithout first h-ving obtrlrud n certificate of competency from the
Board of Examiners fq-, the County of Ornnt-e.
Duties of 17cinterk-mcc
It shall be the duty r f" -vf -.%enns.cc clectricinn to corply with all
'�oqulruantl. s of thi�. aal^2 1. C -z -,Y- rvnn -ea c:0 the County of Orange as
well as a7.1 th'i --fe.
min, f!pplicable to electrical
woes.
(b) It shall be V.e 2-i`j c,-' :L�T as a rmaintenance electrician
to ka,_-p a dsttilea nrl !-c- _,z- ,t� of -r,-,r -irst all electrical work
conn-ected :zith er_L:ala v c c`v :_-zt-!lnticn_- -which is dzme by hire personally
or rrd,,r_- his :Trc:i �,.r.-c-1-1 shall '%c nade in dMUcate and a
copy turn: she the County ----::-oectcr each month.
4. In event that mr-a '�han one _'crla-ca 0"IeCti-ici an is mployed, the mplayer
shall doni-4-11tc the v -ho shall supervise the work of the
others,
B Journeyman Z_-,- _2-_-.17..Ldzt_1 r�rplo7cd by a 141?ster Electrician who is the
bona --fide possessor cZ a valii! ccrtlficatz --f c�=Tvetenqy issued by the Board of
Examiners of thu Gminzv of Oran._ -c q7a-ilif_y4_rzg the holder of such certificate to work
at the trade or of elaztri�_iftn for cz wages, but who does not fur-
nish any materials cT sup?lieu in t,,c cxenitim of his work.
F Owner. '.a owner 1z; e-ce.-ed t� me,°n th--, bon-i-fido cimer of the lc -gal or equitable
title to any proper,y.
0 Person. The to �Fersc.,O, whercver as -,u 4.-r hi Code-, wall extend to and be
domed to, inalw7te !:n,- per3m- A. or ccxT_%:--nt,!cn.
1. Organ jsat A a tite Board cf the -1--exe-, tc, be known an the Board of
Examiners of Floctricians c -Z -Uic 0, -z --n&7, iz. he crented. Rhe Board of
Examners all consist of the Superintendent cf Buileing ane Safety, thi- Ce tar
Electrical Inspector, One YI-ster Electrician and mt J�urncynnn Mectrician, said
IlAster ZIcatrician ame J,urneyn-m Electrician shall be appcinted by and shall
serve at the pleasure cf, the &-o-rd �1 Supervisors of the Ct,=ty e Orange. -s
compensation for their services as members 1--f such &-ard of Examiners, said Master
Electrician and said J-urneyman ZlLctrici:rin shall roccive the sum cf Five Dollars
(15.00) cnch for each mucting attc-Adef-, provided that such caTensativn shall nct
exceed the sum of Five Dl (15.00) in any ^ne day, plus mileage fr,,= his place
of rcsiOcner- tc the place -f ReMing arod return.Tire allrvancL, for mileage shall be
act the rate prevailing in the County rf Orange.
B Duties of Bc,.-vrd of Fxaydjv-rs. The Crunty E'li-etrical In Iter shall act as chair-
nnm of the Board of rxmdncrs, ane shs,11 designate the time and place for the re-
gular meetings of such Brard, which regular meetings shell, subject to the call of
such chairman, be heoie c-a&o encb tenth. x -t all moctiWa ^f the B -,-,*rd cif Examiners,
the presence of tw mLrbcrs thcren-f shall er-nstitute a quorum for the transaction
of any and all brsiness -f said Brand. Of the two mcrbers required for a*quorum,
one member of the Dr-parUtent, of Building and Safety mid either the Master or the
Journeyman Electrician must be present. It shall be the duty -f the Beard of
Examiners to prepare muf conduct such exam:nations fer determining the qVaUfi cations
of applicants for ccrtificaof ccjqK-tcncy as requiree by the terms of this Ord-
inance. It shall be the di ty of the Board cf Examimrs tc register such applicants
as shall h,,ve successfully passed such examinaticn and whc have otherwise qualified
to hold such certificates.
C Certificates of CcmPc-ten4mT- X11 certificates of corgetency issued ander this Ord-
inance shall be valid, unless; revoked or suspended f -r the terms of the Tical year
of their issuance, and shall, in every cam, expire on the thirtieth ('�W of June
follming their issuance. �'Il license fees she'll be p-,vable in advance to the
Superintendent of Building and Safety of the County of Or -Age and shall be charge -
Able for each year or porticn, of year in the; following amnunts:
1. Sign Electrician. The sum rf Five 0'5.00) per year or any portion thereof;
2. Maintenance Electrician. The ma of Ton (-,10.00) Dollars per year or any por-
tion thereof ;
3. journeyman Electrician. Tho- examimticn fee for a J,-urneymaa electrician's
license shall be the stym -f Five (-x.00) Dollars to be paid prior to taking
the exmn nation, and the renewal fee fcr such J~urueymvia license shall be the
sum of Tsm (^,12.O0) D,-Alags payable annually in advance and shall expire on the
thirtieth day of Jww in each year.
D
B
C
Cancellation of Licenses. The B,-nrd of Supervisors of the County of Orange may sus-
pend or revoke the license rf any electrician licensed hereunder for any violation
of this Ordinum or frr incompetency.
SECTION 3
Ff- electrical Permit shall bei by the Superintendent of BuiWing and Safety
to arW peram not registerce as a YPst#--r Electrician as dofinc-d in this Ordinance,
previded that the Superintendent w-ty issue a permit to a person who has registered
and has net the ort dations set fc,
.rth in this ordinance as ane frr a Limited Master
Ejectrici,�A, aW prem d that the Sj4rintendentyissue a per -1
t to theowno
r
df the legal or equitable title t- any prcpert-, in the unincorporated territory of
the County of Orange used exclusively f,)r residence, to alter, repair or install any
electrical work in cr cz buildings or prem-- ses in cc-mectieA with such residence
or accessory buildings, if the said electrical work is done by himself or by a
w&W)er of his h�usehold.
N-:^ electrical work fc%r which a permit is required shall be commenced in or on any
building or premises until a permit t< do such work shall have been first obtained
f( -r the ounor's occupancy.
N,r, electrical equipment all be: installed within c -r c n any building, structure or
prejd-qes publicly or privatel- owned, nor shall any a1tcratirn or addition be end e
in my Such existing oquJpwnt without securing a permit therefor from the Superin-
terKlent 7f Adleinr and Snfety, %.xcqpt -is or-vided in this Sccti-n =A except that
n,; permit All T)c r,;T_iref! t- sicc any -f tisk cin -s °^f elLctrical irk spcei-
f ied in the Inclusiv=e:
(1) Finer r*kir Tjrk, tLpl rpt c lamps cr thL c^wKcti,n :1 portable elec-
tr'_Icz.l Cqlu- -pmat t-ssidtaYle r,rnnncntly ins*_114Ld receptncJ4:s.
(2) TI,c, prf^vlsiras enythis Orji.-r-nee s!',aJ_I nit .,pplr t� installati-ns used by elec-
tricity supply, rpilkr�7 r -r utilit2 c3 in the exercise, of their
funeti"-ns as .1 utility.
(3) Thc in3tpllaticn, niter-lti-n -jr r,:p:.7ir f ilcctriml zquipnent installed by, or
for an clectricit179" y � q C f - I-
, - the jac �f such nrcncy in the generation,
transmissi-n, s4int_.4huti-n .-r nztL.ri_rw 7f c1cciricity.
D Lpplicr!tion for zuch rw,,r-rit dcicribIng t%c work tc b� ('-,,nc s1lall be mdo in writing
to the Electrical Inop,_-r:tnr b=r the .rs4 n, fir -m -r cn-rpirnticn installing the work.
I
11 - with or
The appli citicn shct' b*_ nce--raj,7mi�;d by pines c_MPIctc wit. ticulnti(,ns cf lead
for service, feeders and brinch cir—cuitz, as are- accoptaablc tc the Electrical In-
spection T)crarbient, s! -u- cif icat±< ns -md schedules as ran y br- necessary to determine
whether the instnilatIcn as d_scribL-11 A-11 b, in e�-nfvrmity with the requirements
of this Ordin"Mce. If it shell bL f,-_1rnd that the installati,,n as described will
conform with all, le_fn.l reqrir-_tents, nnd if thk< applicant has ccmplied with the
provisions of this C`cInance a pernit for such installation shall be issued. No
deviation may 'cc mnde from finu install, -.ti -n described in the permit without the
written approval o: the aect-rical Insoi-etcr.
Specnl Information 74;qrircd or Sign Electricitn. Beffre hanging cr installing any
gas tube electric sign, it shall bL- the euty nf the sign electrician hanging or in-
stn11-4ng the smc t- file with the office. -f the SiTerintcrklent of Btlaidinr, and
Spfety, on a fMrr ftrnished by sreh efTice for the purpf-se, the following informa-
tion respceting such sign:
(1) Manxifrcturerls nrime am -1 n,'Oress;
(2) 11n(iorwriter ls InIm! number;
3) Purchaser's name and nMress;
(h) Locat! €_,n cf siCn %,
(5) Physical eirxasi-ns;
(6) Number of a.V "IcvrIl. amoCres ('XVA) rating r4 tntal;
(7) H.w sit' -a is
The number of 'die buiielrgl� pc_rmit there."Cr.
P Maintenance F.L;ctricizrils illcquir�nents - Annu.-I Pcrriits. In lir-u of an ineIvidual
pezT.tit for ortch ii-stnll-tl'*n c- n1terrticn, an rnnual permit shall, upon application
therefor, be issue d to, any pci s- -i, firm. or ccrpr,rnti- n regularly employing one or
more registered unintr-n-knee- electricians for- the perp >sc -af installing, altering
RO lanintain-iW, olcettical - - -r >qua.-,ruznt In cr ,-n builelngs or premises owned
by
or cnccvpicd the applicant P -r such pernit. The apnlicatirn for this annual
permit shall be xkn& in writing, t- the Su7-Lrintendent -f Building and Safety, and
shall contr-In tits nzurc ane registrntic-n number of each maintenance electrician
mpl,_-qod and thea lc9n2_ desc#-ati-n rf the premiscs :,n which the wrrk is to be done
under the t.
The anintemance elcat-rician shall currently keep an accurate record in duplicate of
all clectr!cal wi-e� vU& has been e? -cher uneer the annun-I permit during- the pre-
cedIn- caler.0--z- n(-r.th and such current re cord shall be accessible tr the El.-etri-
c-I Inspector.
within fifte--cn C.-,ys f 1> irEg the cn:! -f cn-ch cnlcnenr -mr-nth., the person, firm or
ct,iperati=tea tr- -th_f,h ar nw.l -,cre it has been issued shall transmit trj the elec-
trical Ta,et--r ;i duplicate _cp7 :-f th,:: n-intenance cli ctricin I s r -or rd f elec-
trical_ vczk
G Subnia cif nfalse eltattment shall constitute sufficient cause for revoking axW
olectria,nl iosued wr:c.r the auth.--rity of this Scctivn.
N
14 5�a 7 37, =LTA
X,
NI
The person having the right to the use and occupancy of arV building,, or portion
thereof for which -work has been authorized and a permit issued under the provisions
of this Ordinance: may make written requast for the cancellation of such permit
to the Superintendent of ldin-trA Safety, with his reasons therefor. The
Superintendent of Builffng and Safety shall prompt3,v notify the person to whom
such permit was issued b7 first C17iss rail, postage thereon prepaid, addressed
to such person at the addre,,!s r--h(inin his application for the permit of the receipt
of the request for cancellation and the reasons given therefor. Thereupon and
thereafters such permit alhall be void, A new permit may then be obtained in the
same manner and tTon paymant of the same fees as are required for an original
permit.
NW CONSTRUMON
Residential.- (Single or Multi -Family) Fees listed below in this paragraph for residen-
tial now construction include all electrical :installations when formula is applied to
the square footage of area.
One cant (10) per square foot plus, $1.00 for each service, plus $1.00 for permit
issuance.
One-half cent (30) per square foot for detached or attached garages on the same
service.
Hotels and Not, -Is: Use regular fee schedule below for all areas except garages.
One-half cen-t (10) Per square foot for detached or attached garages on the same
service in hotel end tel occupanc:�s.
Cormercial. Intrial and Assemblies:
Use Regular Fee schedule
M
s '
(IX-sted Alphabetl6alY)
Pest Fee o I.C)O, pIng $1.00 for ea& service on permits Plus fe9sas listed
_r
i ns taliations.
a'' aneaf
(staff d)ssfss.f s• 1100
1000
)p @301 el8'A4lei:
r+lits withi s}ir11<.. ............. 1100
ad.-- tf-o:m Men (CtiC)
2,00
/ cial} f..r.fef•emeo.e•cm•O.iffffffAf•ffA•
s 3671 G1L'CtTiC \ -' lr5D
"--ns (Cor lSt?"C'°_2.1)not cver 15,000 W wsa .s. aem...awms.s...s..ses• R
,00
! CJ . rc iB'1) o --e» 15! V-
_6 -
-6-
For each frr-k-ttic, toaster, waffle iron, coffee maker,
or cooking device under 3, ....................................... 1.00
For each fry -kettle, toaster, waffle iron, coffee maker,
or cooking device 3,OW W. orover ..................................... 1.50
Fixtures
Irst220fixtures, each .................................................... .20
Additional fixtures, each.................. ............................... .10
Mercury vapor fixture can pole, each........................................ 1.00
Additional mercury vapor fixture on the sang_ pole-:,eae?..................... .20
Generators:
otA� more Man 5 K':=...., ............................................... 1 3.00
Over 5 KIW and not over 15 K. ................................................ 5.40
Over 15 KW. . .... •..... .......... 10.00
NOTE: For the inspection of the installation of any motor generator set, the same fee
shall be charged as provided for the: motor of the same HP, but no charge shall be
made for the generator installation when in connection with any such motor gene-
rator set.
Heaters and Heatiinf, Ar liances - Hair Dryers
each moving picture machine, including sound equipment used
For each air heater including 1650 ed ........................................
� .50
For each air heater over 1650 'd........... .................................
1.00
For each water heater ......................................................
1.00
For each hair dryer ........................................................
1.00
For infra -red drying units not over 15,000 4. ..............................
1.50
For infra -red drying units over 15,000 V...................................
3.00
Forkilns..................................................................
1.00
Home Appliances
See Table
Clothes dryer..............................................................
1.00
Dishwasher .................................................................
1.00
Furnace... .............................................................
1.00
Garbage Disposal...........................................................
1.00
Kitchen fan................................................................
1.00
For
each moving picture machine, including sound equipment used
1.00
Over
in connection therewith ................................................
S 2.50
For
each ceiling fan .......................................................
1.00
For
other permanently connected fans with a :rotor of not more; than�t%....
1.00
For
all motors (permanently connected fans) same as indicated in
2.00
Over
motor table of fees ................................. ..................
See Table
Foreach
X-ray machine .....................................................
2.50
For
each sterilizer........................................................
1.00
Foreach
dental unit .......................................................
1.00
Foreach
barber pole............... .....................................
1.00
For
each capacitor over KVA capacity .....................................
1.00
For
each welder of the transformer type ....................................
1.50
For
each self-contained vegetable and meat case ............................
1.00
Foreach
deep freeze box.......... ...................................
1.00
For
each beverage and ice cream cabinet............ ........................
1.00
Foreach
drinking fountain .................................................
1.00
For
each show case with lights .............................................
1.00
For
each time clock.. ...................................................
1.00
Foreach
building moved to a new location ..................................
2.00
For
each Murphy type kitchen ...............................................
2.50
Not -:..over I HF..............................................................
1.00
Over
HP and not
more than 1 Hr ...........................................
1.00
Over
l HP and not
over 3 HP.................. ..............................
1.50
Over '3_HP
and not
over 8 HT. ................................................
2.00
Over
8 Hr and net
over 15 ' ...............................................
2.50
-7-
Over 15 Ht and not -r 50 !E' ............................................. t 3.00
Over 50 BY and not ovcrlw RP ............................................ 5.,7,
Over 100 TV and not r ............................................ 10.00
Over 500 HT .......... .................................. 15-00
Extra outlet for portable motcrs Q,. --r 2 HT each ........................... 1.00
Outlets for Cora°azrcial. FFrte:ls T et=_ls,and Existing Rc:sidcnti:al, -and z nrking and Xmas Lots
First 20 outlets, o*,ch.................. .................................. .20
Additional outlets, each... ................ ......... .................... .11
For each 5 ft, or fraction ttcricof multi -cutlet assu+ble....,............. .10
Fcr each matltiplc appliancc: cutic:-.^ssembly ............................... 1.00
Suns and High Potc ntial Gas Tribe LiF hti
One sign and onc: trarsfor� r.............................................. 2.00
Each additional sign and one transfcrmcr at the same location
(same building,), ..........................,.................... 1.00
For each extra transformer, flasher or time clock ......................... 1.00
Each additional sign .and cne transformer on same lot ...................... 2.00
Sign and one transformer *roved to a new location .......................... 2.00
For each additional sign and transformer moved to the same
new location.......................................................... 1.00
For altering or cbanging lettering of an existing sign .................... 1.00
For connecting (hook-up) of each sign or decorative outline tubing........ 1.00
Lamp Holding Devices Used on Signs or Marques:
For each lamp holding device used in connection with a sign or marquee:
From 1 to 20 inclusive, each ..............................................
.o5
Next 100, each............................................................ .03
For each additional....................................................... .01
Temporary, Permanent or Construction Voles:
For temporary, permanent or construction poles, each ...................... 2.00
Temporary Undergrornd and Viork-with services:
Temporary Underground service............................................. 5.00
Temporary Work -with service (residential) ................................. 2.50
Temporary Mork -with service (commercial) .................................. 5.00
Not over 2 KW............................................................. .50
Over 2 Mi and not over1 K'cZ............................................... 1.00
Over 1 K(I and not over 5 KSI ............................................... 1.50
Over'5 KU and not over 10 KI-, .............................................. 2.00
Over 10 Kill and not over 15 K`I............................................. 2.50
Over 15 KI and not over 25 K74 ............................................. 3.00
Over 25 Kil and not over 50 K'I............................................. lt.00
Over 50 K'I and not over 100 KI;.... ....................................... 5.00
Over 100 V and not over 500 KI ........................................... 7.50
Over 500 MI............................................................... 10.00
NOTE: For any electrical work for which a pern+.it is required but for which no fee
is herein provided, shall be... • .................. '% 1.00
For any self-contained factory wired approvedunit.................. 2.00
A fee of ".`•10.00 shall be paic? for each annual Maintenance Electrician a'ermit at the time
such permit is issued. Fees for all new work installed under such permit since date of
last previous inspection shall be paid, awarding to the above schedule, at the time when
such work is inspected, these fees shall be in addition to fee paid at time when annual
permit is issued.
SECTIO d 5
INSrECTION JINN CERTIFICLTES. The Ccunty Electrical inspector shall have the right
during reasonable hours to entc;r arks building in thc: discharge cf his official duties, for
the purpose of r -a arW inspection or test of any electric wiring, electric devices or
_g_
Ell
Over 15 8P and not over 50 W ............................................. 3°00
Over 50 BT- and not over loo HP ............................................ 5.r)D
Ovsr I00 HP and not owr 5�' zU�..................... -..................... 10,00
Over 5D) IC.....,...,....,.........-'-.''..'.'............,....,,......... 15.00
Additional outlets, mach... ..'....,.....^...^...........'..'.............. °lO
For each 5 ft, or fraction thLreof multi-ontIct zsaeribla..........,....... "10
Signs and High Potential Gas Tube Lii.-,hting:
One
sifn and one transfory.L.r '..........~.,'.^'^~,~~,~...~.
2100
Each
additional sign and one trasafcrnmr at the al�ny location
(same building) ...................................... '...............
1.00
For
each extra transformer, flasher or time- nlocb.........................
I~00
Each
additional sign and one transformer no eaum lot....,..,.............~
2,00
' 8lgu
and one transformer moved to m new looatiuu...........,.,......'-....
2°00
For
each additional sign and transformer moved to the same
nowlocotivo.......'.'''''-'.--'.--'.',-'..'.-''...''''..'''''...^....
l°OO
� For
sItoring or ebanging lettering of an existing eigu.,.....,............
I°OO
For
connecting (hook-up) of each sign or decorative outline tuziug",......
1,00
Lamp
Rolding Devices Used on Signs or Marques:
For any self-contained fact -cry wired approved unit ..................
For
each lamp holding device used in connection with a ezgu or marquee:
at the time
From
l to 20 inclusive, oxrh..,..,...,,,..,,.....~...,.......,.,..'''..,..
o5
Next
IOO, eacb,...,',......,...'....,...'.,'..-..,.,-'..,...'.'..-.'......
.03
Dermit is issued.
poles,Temporary, rermanent or Construction -oles:
For temporary, permanent or construction aacb..,..........,'..,.... 'L', 2~00
Z2m2orary Underground and Work -with services:
NOTE: For any electrical work for which a permit is required but for which no
fee
For any self-contained fact -cry wired approved unit ..................
2.00
A fee. of ",10.00 shall be paiel for each annual Maintenance Electrician Ter -mit
at the time
such porrit is issued. Fees for all new work installed under such permit since
date of
last previous inspection shall be paid, acrcrdin,-, to the ;7bove schedule, at
the time when
such work is inspected; these fees shall be in addition to fee paid at time
when annual
Dermit is issued.
02CTIOA 5
INSPECTION MID CEPTIFIGLTF-S. The, [conty Electrical Inspector shall have the z1ftt
during unable hours to enter nAy building in the discharge cf his official duties, for
the purpose of making any inspection or test of any electric wiring, electric devices or
electric material installed or contained therein.
Upon such ccmpletion of any irstalln.tit-n c -f clctrical equipment which has been made
under a permit ether than an annu,%l permit, it shall bc th,_ duty rf the persca, firm or
corporation makin,r- the installati-n tr: a,:tify the Ccunty Electrical Inspector who, shall
inspect the installation as sora As th�:reaftt--r prneticn-ble.
When the County 21lectrical Inspector finds the installati-n to be in conformity with
the provisions of this Ordinanc(f, he shall iusuc to the pens; n, firm or corporation mak-
ing the installation, a certificate of apprciral, with duplicate copy fer delivery, to the
owner, authorizing the use of the installation and connection to the supply of electrici-
ty and shall send written notice of such -authorization to the agency supplying the elec-
trical service -,.,Then the final Certificate of Occupancy h:as been issued.
`4hon a certificate of apT)roval is issued authc-rizing the connection and use of a temp-
orary installation, such certificate shall be issued to expire at a ti e to be stated there-
in, and shall be revocable by the County Electrical Inspector for any cause. For such
temporary service a fee cf Five ('5.00) Dollars shall be paid by the applicant to the
Department of Building and Safety and such service sli-all not exceed a period of thirty
( 30) days.
vJhen any electrical installations authorized by a permit or an annual permit is to be
concealed against inspection by the permanent placement of parts of a build;ng, the person,
firm or corporation instn1ling the work shall not conceal such work until it has been
inspected and approved by the Countv Electrical Inspector.
At regular intervals the County Electrical Inspector shall visit all premises where
work mav be done under an annual permit and s' -all inspect all electrical equipment install-
ed under such permit since the date of his last previous inspection, and uponexpiration
of the annual permit &all issue a certificate of approval for such work as is found to be
in conformity with the provisions of this Ordinance or Electrical Safety Orders of the
State of California, after the fee required by Section 4 has been paid.
If upon inspection, the installation is not found to be fully in conformity with the
provisions of this Ordinance, or Electrical Safety Orders of the State of California, the
County Electrical Inspector shall at once request the person, firm or corporation making
the installation by written notice to correct such defects which have been found to exist
Work on such installation shall net proceed until corrections have been made and shall no;
be covered until approved by the County Electrical Inspector
SECTION 6
RE -INSPECTION. The County Electrical Inspector may make periodically a thorough re-
inspection of the installation in or on buildings or premises of all electric wiring,
electric devices and electrical material now installed or that may hereafter be installed
within the County of Orange and when the installation of any such wiring, devices, or
material is found to be in a dangerous or unsafe condition, the person, firm or corpora-
tion or political subdivision owning-, using or operating the same shall be notified in
writing of such fact and shall make the necessary repairs or changes required to place
such wiring, devices and m=aterial in a safe condition and 'gave such work completed with-
in fifteen days; or other reasonable period specified by t1he County Electrical Inspector
in said notice and shall pay such fee as are required by this Ordinance. The County
Electrical Inspector is hereby empowered tc disconnect or order the discontinuance of
electric service to such wiring, devices or -material so found to be defectively installed
until the installation of such wiring, devices or m-terial has been made safe as directed
by the County Electrical Inspect -r. 'my pers=nn, firm or corporation or political sub -di-
vision ordered to discontinue such electric service shall do so within twenty-four (24)
hours and shall not rece meet or allow any such service to be reconnected until notified
to do so by the County Electrical Inspector. provided, however, that no re -Inspection
shall be made in nny dwelling house, while the Same is occupied as a dwelling without the
consent of the occupant thereof. lNe person or persons shall hinder or prevent the County
Electrical Insnector from making any electrical inspection except in occupied dwelling
houses. The County Elactricnil. Inspector shall make periodical inspection of all theaters
and motion picture hcuss.
-9-
11 Installation. 411 electrical installntPenn (Industrini, cromnercial and rcsidtn_
tial) in the unincorp-r;Ac4 area f t County cf Orf%nre s;',nll bv in ennformity with
the i)rnvisirns of this Ordin-!nce, the rlcctrien.1 SiftV.,r Owers of thc. St-tc of
Calif-riin, and with npprrved strne.nres frr safety to life and property. In evcry
case where no spucific type -r class of nnterinl, -r nc specific standards of in-
stnllntion arc-, prescribed in the Electrical S-ifcty Orders or by this Ordinance,
conf^rmity with the regulati�-ns rs laid down in the latest editif�n with supplement,
of the National Electrical Code, as approved by the Lmerican Standards '.ssociati(n
shall be prima facit, evidence of ccnfcrmii(y with approved standrrds frr safety to
life and property.
B Materials. 1.11 electrical TvAcrials, devices, appliances fittings --ind equipment
installed cr used in the abf-ve described territory shall be in conformity with the
provisions of this Ordinance, the Electrical Safety Orders of the State of Calif-
ornia, and with approved standards for safety to life and property. Listing or
libel-ing as conforming to the stpndf,rds of Underwriters' Laboratories Inc., as
approved by the United States Bureau of Mines, the imerican Standards "Issociaticn,
The United Stntcs Bureau of Standards, or other similar institutions of recognized
standing shall be prima-facie evidence of c-,nf(-?rmtiy with approved standards of
safety to life and property.
C Used Materials. Previously used materials shall not be roused without the written
approval obtained in ar"vn, nce from the County Electrical Inspector.
D Documents on File. Tireo copies of the new Electrical Safety Orders are on file
at the office of the Clerk of the Countv of Orange and are hereby incorporated by
reference and made a part of this Ordinance in accordance with the laws of the
State of California.
E Nameplate. The maker's namepl-te, trademark, or other identification symbol shall
be placed on the outside where it is visable at time of inspection on all electrical
materials, devices, appliances, fittings and equipment used or installed under the
provisions of this Ordinance.
F-1 Wire Sizes: A.W.G. Wherever conductor or wire sizes are referred to or specified
by number in this Ordinance, such number shall be construed to 'mean the number of
gauge of such wire according to Standard Merican Jire Gauge speciftentions, abbre-
viated
bbr -viated
as "JIWG".
F-2 Minimum Wire Size: For the supply of current to general appliance and convenience
receptacle circuits, no conductor smaller than No. 12 wire shall be installed.
No convenience receptacle or appliance receptacle shall be installed or operated
on a general lighting branch circuit at W time :in any occupancy.
F-3 Conductors: Conductors normally used to carry current shall be of copper unless
otherwise provided in this Ordinance. .,There conductor sizes are given in this Ord-
inance, they shall apply to copper cfm-laictors. If other materials are used, the
size shall be changed accordingly.
F-4 Conductors -Identification: Coneuctors shall be Identified as Follows:
Sikglo conductors No. I and smaller intended for use as identified neutral con-
ductors of circuigs shall have the outer covering finished to show a white color.
Neutral condretors larger than Nr_ I shall have a white outer covering, or shall be
identified by a distinctive permanent marking at each terminal and at pull box,
junction box (,r sivailpr wiring enclosures. The c-vering of all ungrounded conduc-
tors shall be finished, to show s lie color other than white.
F-5 Insulated c-nductors
exc(pt where used -s
systems. Coneuctc-rs
groun,4ing pwp-ses,
used solely for grounding purpcscs shall be green in color,
the crrm,-n 1,rounding conductor fcr service equipment and wiring
having a F-reon covering shall net be used for other than
IM
F-6 Definition of Feeder: Any, conductors of a wirinf-- sygter beumen the service equip-
ment, or the 7eaerator switchboard of an isolated Plant, and the branch circuit
over-curm-nt device.
pROXDqT-
0
.[ -
F-7 F CIR=- :rmryEa WM-S NOT EXCEMIBLE
Where single -pole circuit breakers are used for protection If ungrounded conductors
in a branch circuit, t-�o breaker handles shall �c arranged to discc4mect all un-
grounded conductors simultanecuslY.
T!OF GMUFS OF OCXI' _UCNY
aROME OCCUI-LNCY ST.11GE Sr.MNG UX.,CITY
M V1 SIT ON IN "NY 01,1 '_MOM
r'.sscfibly Buildings es or more
2. -,sscMb1_Y Buildings No 300 or more
3. Assembly Buildings No Less than 300
4. Stadiums, -leviewing Stands and
I.musement lark Structures not in -
eluded within Group , nor TAvision
1 and 2 and 3, Chrmip B Occupancies.
D 1. Mental Hospitals, Dental Sanitariums)
Jails, Prisons, Reformatories, and
Buildings where personal liberties
of inmates are similarily restrained.
2. Nurseries for full-time care of chil-
dren under kindergarten are (each
accomoti.ating more than five persons).
Hospitals, Sanitariums and similar
buildings (each accomodatinp more than
five persons).
3. Homes for the 'ged and homes for chil-
dren of kindergarten age and older
(each accomodating more than five
-gersons).
1. Sterve and handling of hazardous
and �-J_ghly flmmnble or explosive
materials other than flammable
liquids.
2. Storage and paneling of Class I,
II ancl III flammable liquids, as
specified in U.B.C. Standard 9-1;
dry cleaning plants using fla-rin-
able liquids, paint stores witl-i
bulk handling; paint shops and
spray painting rooms and shops.
3. �Ioodworking establishments,
Planing mills ane. box factories;
shops, fnetcrics where loose, com-
bustible fibres or dust is manu-
facturce, processed or generated;
wnrchcuses where highly combustible
ruitcrial is stored.
4. Repair garages.
5. =aircraft repair hangars.
F 1. Gasoline fillingandservice sta-
tions, storage grnraMs where no re-
pair work is cone except exchange
of parts ane maintenance requiring
no open fly jw, welding or the use of
birhly fl.1mable liquids.
2. ,Aalcsnle and retail, office build-
_11-
071
ings, drinking mad entim- cstabli&
mants hpvirij- an riccvper.t loath rf 1 ss
than 100, Trintinr plants, municiprtl
"ice and fire: stations, flCtoMCS
nivi wcekshops using not
cc-,,bustib1(_, st�)r-
rcI7,ms f��r ccrbustiblc
igL nnO
aces, p.-dnt stcrc s witr cout b- 1k
'.;�cti-n LO' f^r �cfin-
ition r 'sst;ribly 13uil�in;7s).
3. arcraft hangars where ro rc.pr.ir
work is dont,: except ouxchanr(, c -f 'arts
and, maintenance requiring; n� cpcn
flame, weldirV-, or the use of highly
fl-vm.rible liquie.s, and open parking
garage s.
Ice: plants, power plants, pumping
plants, cold storam, and crcameries,
factories and workshops using incom-
bustible and non -explosive materials,
storage and sales rooms of incombust-
ible and non-qMlosivc materials.
H Hotels, apartmcnt houses, dormitories,
lodging houses, convents monasteries
(eact, accom oeating more than 10
4rscns).
Dwellings.
1. rrivato garages, sheds and minor
buildings used ns accessories only
when not over one thousan(I square
feet (1000) sq.ft. in area.
2. Fences ovor six feet (61) high.,
tanks and towers.
03CTION
M
Wiring ethoes.
A NoN_F&,TjJLIC ME:,THED C'BLD: Sinfrie Family Dwellings and !ccessory Buildings
Thereto:
Non-metallic sheathed cable shall not be used for exposed wiring. Non-metallic
sheathed cable shall not be embedded in mf?scnry, adobe, concrete, fill, plaster
or similar finish. Mcn_me�ql)
I -ic sheathed cable shall not be used in unfinished
cellars nor in basements, nor in spaces under floors of buildings without base-
ments or cellars where space is in eycess of 4, feet high, nor for portable cords.
B 11JZHORED G,'BLE: Single Family Dwollin[,s ansa accessory Buildings Thereto:
Ar I
..mored cable shall net be used for exposed wiring. armored cable shall not be
embedded in masonry, concrete, adobe, fill, plaster or similar finish. 1.rmored
cable shall not be used in unfinished cellars, nor in basements (nor in space
under floors of buildings without basements or cellars where space is in excess of
4 feet high, nor for portable cords).
C LOT VOLSVIE RUJOTE COMROL wiring systems including the control of lighting,, con-
venience and appliance branch circuits, the wiring method shall be installed as
follows:
1. In all R and I Occupancics, and accessory buildings thereto, the low voltage
wires in concealed leentions shall be securely fastened in a workmanlike manner
at the location of each switch risme . In exposed locations the low voltage wires
shall be installed in rigid metal conduit, electric metallic tubing or other
approved metal wiring systems.
2. In all i'_ to G Occup ancics inclusive, the low voltage wires shall be installed in
the type of raccways, rc<quircd for the branch circuit conductors*
3. Secondary wirintE shall have, approved insulatinn for not less than three hundred
Wlts. No wirc smaller than Nr . eighteen (18) 1,.4.G. shall be used.
-12-
4. In figur-* ng the size, of boxes requirr-d, each rclav shall b.- firrured as rc-
qruirinr a rdrj"= cf three is inches in aediticn. to the size needed for the
nurber cf wires in the box. If the relay is larger than three crbic inch. -,S, the
size of the box shall be increased acc^rdl..Vly.
5. Low voltace ssa tch, s used to o.-critc the relays shall be cif-4)rr-,vL,1 t.vpL and
shall Iv- sccurce to a plaster rin.T or in an apprr-vec' brx or by som other
suitable, means.
6. The relays shall be af'equntclv fastf-at:0 t- fl -,c outl- t bc-x `_n which it is in-
staller! and. in such m- -mr that it m7 ' v rcadily b,; mrinved and reinstalled after
the outlet brae containing sl.,tm is crrtocalt,;? without reserving plaster or tht;
finish of the buileifr_
7. :approver' relay r-,sscrbly (-r _TTr-vcd relays ane relRtLAI equipment properly in-
stalled in approved metal cabiqct ray be placed in attic space vhcr"; thLrc is
a minimum vertical c1car,-nee cf three (3) feet and walkways -M. provided to
relay assembly. them- space is less than three (3) fest, relays s' -!,n.11 be
installed within one (1) foot cf scuttle, and so placed as n:,t to obstruct attic
area. .^, switches' light shall be installed not stere than three (3) fLA from said
assembly with switch installed --head of scuttle hole.
8. Relays shall not in: installed in fluorescent fixtures or recessed fixtures
unless such fixtures with relays installed are approved by a recti-vnized testing
laboratory.
9. i4hcrc non-insulste(i staples are used to fasten low voltaic conductors in place,
such uninsul,--teO staples shall fasten a single conductor only. '4here insulated
sta,plcs are used, ,)r other approved method, such staple m�.y fasten or support
more than one con(.4.uctor.
10. They low voltage c^nr'.uctor may be installed in the same conduit or raceway with
the other wires of the circuit provided the law voltage conductor has an insul-
riti-m equal to the conluct�rs of the circuit.
D DUrLEX DJEIIIIiGS: Duplex DwelMngs.
The minimum wiring requirements shall big flexible metal conduit.
E Electric wirin,: installed in or on structures Ventified li�r the Uniform Building
Code under nA" to OR" Occupancies inclusive (Sec Table of Groups of Occupancies
in Section 7). The electric wiring c'nelosures shall be approved riFid metal con-
uit or electrical metallic tubing.
F FLEXIBLE !-T'T,L CONDUIT: Flexible metal conduit shall not be used; (1) 4here ex-
posed; (2) Where exposed to rain :,r excessive moisture; (3) Embedded in masonry,
concrete, adobe, plaster,or similar fin bb. Flexible metallic conduit may be used
where impracticable to install rigid ^rtal conduit or electrical mctallic tubing.
G ELEMITL ME -MMIC TUBYG: Electrical Ifetallic Tubing may be used in hollow
mens-nry ane adobe walls when used. with water tight fitting s. Electrical Metallic
Tubi-)(, shall not be used underground in slabs or where exposed to the weather or
excessive moisture.
H 112IGID ?ML CONDUIT. Gnlv=-nizo-!, sheradized, or equal ri,�—V. natal confluit shall be
required in ennerete or masonry floors and w1las, under, -;round ane nutside of build-
ings erw1here Wosed to the weather. Undergroune raceways may be of other approved
materials. Conduits or raceways installed in the ground shall b.- buried at least
one Pnot under grade. level unless prf-tectcd by at least four inches of pavement.
DI .ECT BT-RI;J, WIRMG
I pKV -SSIBI.E USE OF MUCT BUZI-'Ll IMM: Direct burial crnductors may be used as
n wiring; meticd only between separate buildings and structures and shall not be
used as a wiring :thee' between separate points .-n inclividual buildings or struc-
tur, a or between abutting buildings. Direct burial conductors may be used as a
wiring method only where buried in the earth outside of the ext ricr perimioter
ft
Wills and fnf tincs oDirect buildirv-s. burial conductors shall not be used as a
wiring nethod. underneath sidewalks or pavement.
-13-
EXCEF TIOIM:
1. Direct burial cf.nductcrs irmy be run !,t ri,;-ht aa: -les V -Ie -,r sic ewilks nr erivc-
ways th-.t nrc n^t m-rrc "nn 12 feet wide:.
2. Direct burial c-,neuctnrs "...y be used undernenti the nsrh-nIt r?,Viw of nutc-
mobilc T,,-xking lots, aut-mrbilc sales lets, drive: -in the tors and V-& like.
Direct burial cable fcr circuits -f -ver 600 volts n -.y -rly be used m airports and
sirulnr rmmises. Such wiring7 r. -y rely bt, instillcrl by special permission and in
conformity with th-s requircm.-nts the D,..partm,:..qt cnnsiOars nfecssnry tr., insurr,- a
re-ascnably safe installntiI n.
rjjSTj'.TV.T ION OF DI-_rCT BTU.71I CONDUCT01,S OF L, --Sr- T_H,.N 600 V)I,TS-
(a) Direct burial conductnrs shill nct bt inst-lIcd in unconpnctcd filled --Tound
or in locati.ns under drainat-t- ditches.
(b) Mctal arnored direct burial cable shalt be installed Pt lcnst one fact below
the E.round surface, except when in wirin;, cneInsures apri-rcve'd for th, leca-
tions involved.
(c) Other types of dir--ct burial cable shall be installed rs fc-11�ms.
1. The conductcrs shall be buried at least 16 inches below the grcune surface.
2. The conductors shall be inst:,llcd in a trench independent .f any trench for
piping conduits.
3. The conductors shall not be laid in any trench through sr1id rock or contain-
ing sharp rock, unless suitable bedding and covering, earth is employed.
L. The cr:nductors shall be soparatoO at least eight inches from any piping or
conduit crossing the conductor trench.
5. The conductors shall be pr^tccted on the top side by a creosoted redwood
plank at lt-nst six inches wide and two inches in thickness.
6. he grcrndin;: conductor installed as direct burial wire shall canply with
all the requirements of this Ordinance for ungrounded conductrrs.
7. Wher, dircct burial conductors enter or leave the earth, the ernductors
shall be inst^llcd. in raceways--mr,lved fur the conditii7ns involved..
3. Direct burial concluctors shall only be splicw_d or to --ed in accessible pull
boxes or juncti^n boxes.
9. '.11 wires of Vie sane circuit shall be installed in the same trench.
OLTTSI^E WPk.K: No open wiring requiring more than - nc set of knobs or insulators to
each circuit shall b� installed On the outside of buil(lin-s. Knobs or insulators
shall be of the sella type, and nails rr spikkjs shall not be considered as ade-
quate support for such knnbs or insulators. L11 open wiring shall have the mini-
mum clearance as contained in the State Electrical Safcty Orders.
K ACCESSIBLE SKZVI CE GIOUTIP, CL:-'-': The service -ne cl?-np shall be accessible at
all times and shall be accessible with-ut the necessity of crawling in at the time
rough -in inspection.
SECTION 9
IL
J LTEIZATIONS AND iMITIONS
A Alterati:'.ns or extensions to an alteration and renewals of existing installations
shall be mpea in corpliance with the provisions of this Ordinance.
B In locations where metallic condi)-it is rquired, but the existi;' instaUat:Lcn was
lawfully installed ancecrding to any other local ordinance, code or order the: existing
type of installation may be used provided such additicn Or extension does not ex-
ceed fifty per cent (5DZ) of the connected load to any circuit or circuits.
C Wherc, such acIditions, -tltcr,-ti.-ns �r extensi!-ns are due tr dnnape bir fire, any
part repaired, altered, or exteneed shall be of a type required by this Code, pro-
vided such dnmape exceeds fifty rcr cent (50%) of the area of the structure, or
wirin7- system.
D 4hem such -,Oditions, alterntlans, or extensions are made tr -a structure to make it
suit,,ble for different 4c�ccupancy classificiticns, those portions directly affected
by such_ltcratib n,-&'Iticn, and/or extensic,n must be installed according to the
St.indards of the esti W &-des.
E
H- I
A T,(,cati(,n ff service llea0s. Service he -ads shall be located --n that wall nearest
the utility, ccmT*ny lincs or poles, not less than ten (10) fey t ab vethe r`rrvoe
and not less than three- (3) feet from any door cr window, even with or sli,-htly
above the scernc, floor ceiling and/cr t� a locaticm approvexi by t�w- serving
utility. In addition, all service heads sh,-.11 be locntce at least one fc^t (I ft.)
ab*,vc the point of attachment of service drn-ps.
B-1 In buildin.--s served at n -It mover 150 v:�lts t- pre'und,, n. sinf-,le set nf service on -
trance cf-nductcrs may be run t- not exceed six (6) sets f service equinment on my
occupancy if !r--ured at the n -Int of ontrnnce— For anv othcr eccupnncy r -r installa-
tions invelvinj more than W so or supplied at over 150 v-lts t-7 grount'., the entire
current shall be taken thr^Wh one nnin service switch. K� service switch shall be
located more than six feet six inches (6 ft. 6 in.) tc- the hanr;le in the OF posi-
tion above the floor or around level.
B-2 V , IN SWITCH -YAUITLED- Ln approved service entrance switch or breaker shill be in-
stalled for each service meter, ane located on the load side of the meter; service
switch or breaker my be lcented inside or outside the structure provided it meets
the requirements of the power serving agency, but shall be located at the nearest
rcieily accessible aad practicable point to where the service conductors enter the
structure.
B-3 Service shall be cciiplete for rough inspecti^n and all ccndilctors shall be insulated,
and installed.
C-1 M-THOT) OF IHST'.IL:.71ON OF SERVICE: Every service shall be installed in galvanizedj,
sheracilzed or equal rigid metal conduit anO in accordance with provisions of this
Ordinances and all service- equipment conduits and fittings installed on the exterior
of any building shall be listed and appr-ved by a recognized testing laboratory
as rain -tight.
C-2 SMVICES FOR SIMS, TM-01UNRY -oUS, 1,LITM PO4-S � Nib OCCUMIC-ES OF LESS THAN
100 SQ. FT: The minimum size for service conduits shall be nct less in size than
that required for the c-nductors installed therein ane' in no case smaller than three
fourth (3/4") inch trade size and No. 8 conductors.
C-3 Commercial and Store Buildings L to 0 Inclusive, 100 sq, ft. and Over.
The minimum service requirements shall be:
Conduit - 111 trade. size
Cnnductors - 3 No. 6 A.W.G.
Switch - 60 ampere
Circuit Brepker - 50 ampere
D-1 SINGLE FAMU TWMTNGS M. -PER 800 SQUARZ FEET:
The minimum service requirements shall be:
Conduit - 1" trade size
C-neuctors - 3 No. 6 A.U. G.
Switch - 60 ampere
Circuit Breaker - 50 ampere
Provisions shall be made in the service panel for a minimum of 10 single P --le over -
current protective devices in addition to the main switch or circuit breaker.
j)-2 SIMOU FU]ILY 17MLINGS, 800 SQUARE FEET 11M OVM-
The minimum service requirements shall be -
Conduit - 11" trade size
Cnaductcrs - 3 No, 1 1,.--I.G.
Switch - 100 arpere
Circuit Breaker - 100 ampere
rrodsi-ns shall be made in the service panel for a minimum of 20 single P010 Over -
current protective devices in a0diticn to the main switch cr circuit breaker.
-15-
H
7 r
6-3 ere spaxe circuit prntective &vices re prc•vidod, or space f -r future circuit
rr-tective devices are prrvided ,,n the buss in any flush m�-untemd pmcl, then rnee-
ways of suff icient c.Tacity to permit utiliv% tlicn cf such Spares I -r spices shcll be
pr(,virled tc -,,i accessible Incn-tic.n. Such accessible lcc:iti�n is defined as
adhere sufficient attic space is availablL, r. -.r ur0r-rfl-,,:r space is available, a race-
way shall terrJAnte convenicntiv fcr future usia in each such space. Whdre this
crinclitirn dc;cs nrA exist, then such terri.r.ti ns sh=all be aprrcved by the ElLCtriCal
Inspector.
'-4 Feeder condluctrrs in single fardly ftellinf7s shall lave ,, current carryinr7 capacity
equal tthat cf the scrvicc entrance c:-nCuctnrs.
n-6 Sub -feeders- ;I ane? I Occupancy - the minimum size sub-V,,eders shall be Nc. 8 ...U.G.
wire.
0-7 fit;, LEX - JIMUNG 1 0 CCM - "ICYt
The combined minimum service requirements shall be:
Conduit - li" trade size
C-nductors - No. 1 A. T.G.
The minimum service for each individual occupancy shall be:
Conduit - I" trade size
Conductors - 3 Nn.. 6 A. . G.
Switches - 60 ampere
Circuit Breaker - 50 amporf
Service entrance c,-nductcrs shall have a current carrying capacity sufficient to
carry thQ Icad. The branch circuit prCItoctive- devices shall be located in and for
each occupancy.
TI -3 MULTI-FLFILY "IELUNG H OCUTISCY:
The minimum service requirements f, -r c:^nbined unit ccci,pancy lend shall be:
C,)ncl.uit - 110 trade size
Conductors - 3 11c. I AL. ;.G.
The minimum feeder or sub-feedor fer each indivieu.-ii occupancy sliall be:
RicewaY 3/4" tradc size
Comductors - 3 N-. 8 L -9-G.
Switches - 60 ampere
Circuit Breaker - 40 ampere
Service entrance condo t-Irs shall have ri current carryilmg capacity sufficient to
carry the lead and in n(- case smaller than No. 1 .' T. G.
Branch circuit protective devices shall be located in and f-il each multi -family
occupancy with kitchen facilities f, -r cocking.
?1-9 Relocated buildings shall c7n_f',Drm t- tbc, minimum st-andr-xds as required in this Ord-
inance for new buildings.
P-10 Existing buildings where additions or altk-rati.ins occur which require added load
capacity, shall be provided with - new service entrance switch, multi -breaker or
panel of adequate capacity to serve the intended lc act, but in n-- case less than 60
amperes if a switch is usee, or 50 arperes if ^ circuit breaker is used. The mini-
mum size service- entrance cc-neuctnrs shall be 3 6
EXCEM011- Or-vp H Occupancies excepted from requirements herein subject to
a,-prt-vz-1 cf Electrical Inspect -r
-11 FA VIM LOC'MOVS: Branch circuit distributi-n panels shall not be lr.cktcLl in any
clothes, linen, or broom closets.
TIM AN-) TAIM WIRE SE'%.VICD-. All single phase lighting 1^tnds -f less than 3500
watts or nA more than twr (2) circuits W. be servx-d by two (2) wires. Where an
instnllnti,�n has bcan wired and .arranged for three (3) wire service, no two (2)
wire energ_y supply -r tv- (2) wire service shall be cxnncctee thereto without the
written approval cbt,-Ined in advance from the County Electrical Inspect -)r.
-16-
TVgi ORAJY jLvD PEXANENT SEWTICE POLES: With the exception of the following require-
ments, all such poles shall comply with Public Utilities Conmission 2egulations.
The minimum service riser shall be 31b" galvanized, sheradized or equal rigid 1.tetal
conduit.
The minimum service conductors shall be insulated No. 5 A.4. G.
The service ground wire shall be raninuir of TTr ;,.,,!.G. enclosed in
i" galvanized,
sheradized or equal rigid metal conduit.
The ground rod shall be either 3/4" galvanized pipe with a closed end, an
approved solid 1" rod of brass, corner or corper covered iriven to a depth of
81-011 below ground level.
Zeceptacles shall be of a three wire polarized type and if for 120 volt or 2hO volt
shall be of the type that is not interchangeable.
B111,41CH CI:CUIT -1,EQUIRMIENTS M -ii H & I WI,— NG.
A LIGHTING OUTLETS. Each single family dwelling and each occupancy of a multi-
family dwelling shall have not less than one fifteen (15 a, -T.) ampere general
lighting branch circuit with a maximum of 12 lighting outlets per circuit installed,
minimum wire size shall be No. 1h A.W.G.
A-1 Every room shall have at least one switched general lighting outlet. Living rooms,
bedrooms, family rooms, and dens may be excepted, provided at least one switched
wall rece-,.-tacic is installed and suprlied by a lighting branch circuit in addition
to the required convenience r,ceptacles.
A-2 All closets provided with lighting outlets shall be operated by a wall or door
switch (no pull chain receptacles permitted, and the lighting outlet shall be so
located in the ceiling or wall over the door as not to be within 12 inches hori-
zontally or directly over any shelving.
L-3 Entrance doorways providing access to premises from exterior shall be provided
with exterior illumination suitably located. The illuminating source shall be con-
trolled by an interior switch conveniently located near the doorway.
B FU1ZNj_CES- L. switched light outlet shall be provided at every horizontally mounted
forced air furnace loc,-tion, the switch shall be located ahead of the passage
opening.
C GENMAL MrIPLVITCE CDZUITS (H and I Occupancies): In addition to required fixed
appliance circuits th(,m shall bc two twenty ( 20) ampere capacity branch circuits
wth a minimum of two (2) outlets per circuit (or one 3 -wire 20 ampere circuit)
shall be installed for the small apnliance load in kitchens. The required number
of kitchen receptacles shall be divided squally between these two circuits. k
3 -wire circuit may be looped from receptacle to receptacle, provided outlet boxes
have sufficient room for number of conductors and outlets are equally divided on
ungrounded conductors. These kitchen circuits may be extended to supply receptacles
in pantry, dinette, breakfast room and dining room, but shall not supply other
receptacles. Not more than six (6) r,:ccptacl,--s shall be connected to each 2 -wire
circuit or cquivilent and shall not include the outlets for clock and/or fan.
Clock and fan outlets may, be connected to kitchen lighting or other circuits.
C-1 Parts of rooms or areas where laundry cquipmcnt maybe installed shall have a
service area appliance circuit with not more than h outlets conm-cted thereto.
This circuit shall be in addition to any required fixed appliance circuits.
C-2
,*X'Dj.Ij.NCE VE:CEFV_CTES: L11 appliance rccertacles shall be rated at 15 ampfrf-, -
125 volts, And said receptacles shall be three: -wire grounding type with parallel
slots and "U" shaped slot for ground blade and shall be pc.�rmanently and effective-
ly grounded in an avoroy-d mnnn�r. Said rt-ceptacles shall te, inStallLd on all
appliance circuits. °.11 receptacles in service areas, bathrooms, g. -Wages, Patios,
IM
outdoor loc,-tions, laundry tr---s, fe grinders, dishwastmtrs, forced air
furnaces, built-in rLfrigr-rntors, built-in freezers, garpge door z-rs, or at my
location within 5 fc,et horizontAly of my grounded surf arx- where portable working
tools my tw- attached ther-tea, shall be of an approved grant'led typic.
C-3 Multiple ar,,T;liance outlet assemblIt-s, such as prLfabric.-tcd idtchen load ccntcars,
regardless of the number of circuits or roce-ptnelL:s contained therf-in, is accept-
able in lieu of only one of the rtquirod tritbar of kitchen rLCCPtaCl#_'3. Kini-aurn.
sub -feeder to nU multip1_ Mpliance asst-Ablics Shall be" No. 8 Said load
center shall not bc us; -.d for branch circuiting.
C MAD CD ',KE=M ZQT,7P7-1Z": Jhen such. equipment is r;.;quirz:d to be grounded, the
equipment ground wire nest form an integral p, -rt of the ccrd asserbly, such cord
assembly shell be a minimum of No. 16 . G. S.P. T. -3 thermoplastic hard finish or
equal.
c-5 R)oD 'iAsm Ganmi xvnm cra.17TIT Each single favily dwLlling and each
occupancy of a multi-farily dwelling shall have installed therein nn individual
food vast,_ grinder branch circuit. Said circuit shall be supplied with a minimum
No. 12 1.0T.G. wire and a 15 av;y,re indicating type switch. S. -id switch shall tae
located in the wall adjacent to the sink. Food waste grinder shall be wired with
a minimum of Yo. 16 !..'T.G. 3-vir-- S.P.T.-3 thermoplastic hard finish cord or equal
and an approved grourx1ing type receptacle and cord grip cap must b,- used.
D Twenty ampere (20 amp.) circuits shall supply general aprliance ortlet circuits
and convenience outlet circuits only.
E Each single: family dwelling or each occupancy of as multi -family dwelling shall have
at least one twenty ampere (20 a -p.) convenience outlet circuit supplyin�7 current
to outlets as required by this Ordinance with -a maximum of 12 convenience outlets
per circuit.
F FIXED APPLL,XCES: Such as food grinders, dishwashers, washing machines, dryers,
laundry tray locations, built-in refrigerators, built-in freezers, furnaces, air
conditioners, and built-in heaters, or any other fixed appliance with motors larger
than 1/20 H.P. span be on a separate brPnch circuit supplied by No. 12 L.W.G. wire.
MINIMLI" :M( V11_V2TRTS RR DOMES -11 P ELECTUC1,^_N1GES 'Ns CLOTHES DTITERS:
'dire Size
1. Standard or Builtin range with oven
over 9 K.W. .......................................... 3 No. 6 in
1" Metal
raceway
2. Standard or Built-in range with oven 9 K.W.
or less, group H Occupancy .............................. 3 No. 8 in
3/4" me tal
raceway
3. Cooking urdta with soparatoe oven
(a) 4 ulemants or less ....6 ................ 3 No, 6 in
3/4" metal
racewny
A&
3 Aco 10 in
- "
Wtal
Clothes dryers — aa. 6' T. 7.or loss......•.•.•..... 10 in
3A* metal
racomw
W V s G L' T'Fr •- 1- t last one mromadIng type
receptacle shall be installed in reew contftAnimpor more unA basim or lavator-
ies.
H 1.11 220 volt circuits shall be %tred in mtel race , tlb-- size of sold raceway
to be dctcrmdned by the r am' of the conductors to be uswU
I H . ND I TYPE O : H : In every rom receptacle outlets shall be provided for
every twelve (12) feet of usable Ali space mod located so that no point along the
floor line in my usable wall apece is mmc than sic feet from an outlet in that
space. ("- usable: wall space is my Wee three feet wide or ter). + m- clue
to structural features receptacle in the wall would be inpractical, a receptacle
in the floor shall be considered as mecting this reqviremnt.
J Every livable row shall have provided red installed the winimum outlets as required
by this Ordinmum.
K SPLICES: 111 branch circuit omuluctors installed at outlasts shall be safety and
mechanically spliced so that not , than tho requires e— of conductors shall
be attaichod to any electricasl. device.
EXCEPTION.- Ba=de wired or pressure type receptacles vY be excepted from the above
ruire tts.
... �,., • Y... ,y .k yr. Y. v. W . 1 Y. i, 1 , �I ! Y 1. •a 1....
'k, h94` 1,.. t .,, .. ...+ s. 'r1 ..,:'.x. ... t, .... t y.. r t ♦ � a 1 . c. c;t r � � as i
:. Y.r ,..,.. 1.,: Y + -:.:. 1 - a�1 a_.t _ a r t.r s ,t a •', . -.1 �1 :: ..r..t ...,.. 1. r _.r.r - v 1
SECTIM 12
C' ICUL' TI OF LO: -D.
A VOLTf.GE 9'ZOP: Every interior systen of wiring for light and haat installation shall
be so installed as not to exceed three (3) per cent voltage over-all and for
power installations not to exceed five (5) per cent, voltage drop over all, based
on allowable load. 'lard lighting installations may be installed so as not to exceed
five (5) per cent voltage drop over-all.
CALCMITION OF SE-WICE ti S t LO'ffi: Lighting loads shall be based on
three (3) watts per square foot of total floor area not including open porches or
garages. First wattsdemand over 2500 wattsdemand. Convenience
outlets are included in the lighting load and need not be calculated. 4ppliaunce
circuit to be figured at 100% demand. :11 fixed heating or additional appliance
loads shall then be aWed after their demand has been taken. the following is a
table of demand nllcwawes for water haters, space heaters and air conditioning.
T)emand factors may be applied to reduce the sizes of service, feeders, sub -feeders,
in dwellings and apaartent houses supplying the following types of load.
H-1 CV.TJ.L LTGM7NG MR, ILL .: it . In the occupancies listed in the table
in Section 12 (unit load and factor dersnr' table), a load of not less than the unit
load of Column I. shall be included for each square foot of floor area. In deter-
mining the load on the "watts per ware foot" basis, the floor area shall be com-
puted from the outside dimensions of the building, aparbrent, or area involved, and
the number of floors, not including open porches, garages, in connection with dwel-
ling -occupancies, nor unfinished spaces in basements or attics of dwellings.
All convenience" outlets of 20 arip. or less rating in Wmgle-family and multi -family
dwellings <nd in gust rooms of hotels ( except those connected to the appliance
circuits specified) W be considered as outlets for general illumination, no
additional load need be inched for such outlets.
8-2 OTHE' LOPS: For lighting other than general illumination and for appliances
other than motors, a loace of not less than the unit load specified below shall be
included for each outlet:
Outlets supplying specific appliances and other loads...... limp. rating of appliances
Outlets supplying heavy duty, lamp holders ................a 5 asps.
**Other outlets ............................................. 12 amQs.
: This provision not applicable to receptacle outlets provided for the
connection of fixed lighting units to facilitate servicing and replacement.
�3 EIMPTEMS. The idnimm loads for outlets paragraph 2 wall be modified as followst
.-2f)-
com-
putedin accordanceD
linear(b) Show Andow Lighting. For show window lighting, a load of not Its$ than ODD
watts per t ofshow window,measured d t '-along base,
may be allowed }...:thet . y load
per outlet.
ruiti-outlet assemblies
each .,... or47ractino thereof hand continuous
shall be considered as am outlet of not lesz thPn 11. ampere capacity; except
in locations 4ierc a turber of a-pli,:�noes Pre likely to be used simultaneous-
ly, then each one foot or fraction thereof shall be considered as one cutlet
of not less then it PrPeres.
C Feeders Unit Loads and Demand Factors.
1. Computation of Load Currents. Current carrying capacity for various voltage$
shall be computed as follows: Line voltage between 100 and 125 volts shall
be computed as 120 volts; Line voltage between 210 and 250 volts shall be
computed as 240 volts. Three phase 4 wire lighting shall be computed 120-208
volts.
2. Circuit Ratings in Dwellings. On a two -wire and on each side of a three -wire
general lighting branch circuit, the total connected load wall not exceed
fifteen amperes (1$ .).
On a two -wire and on each side of three -wire convenience outlet and/or appu-
ance circuit, the total convenience lost' shall not exceed twenty amperes
(20 amp.)•
A General Lighting. The donand factors specified in this paragraph may be applied
to the computed branch circuit load for general illumination:
( See `cable following)
UNIT I OI DS ND FE=,, '' Ad) FCTORS
Type of Ccl.A Col. B Demand
Occupancy Unit Load per Load to ',yhirh Factor
Sq.Ft. Demand Factor
ciatts) :implies ( dptts)
Armories and Auditorium 1 Total _fattage 100%
Banks
Barber Shops a
Beauty Parlors
Churches
Clubs
Court Rooms
2
Total Wattage
100%
Total. 4attage
100%
3
1
Total viattage
100%
2*
Total 'zit
100%
2
Total Pattage
1004
-21-
EM -
IM
In any of the above occupancies
except single-family dwellings
and individual apartments of
multi -family and dwellings:
Assembly Halls and
Auditorium 1 Total Wattage as specified for the specific
Halls, Corridors, Closets, occupancy
Storage Spaces
(} For sub -feeders to areas in hospitals and hotels sphere entire lighting is likely
to be used at one time; as in operating rooms, ballrooms, dining rooms, etc., a
demand factor of 100 percent shall be used.
S IXL i.PPLIWES. The small appliance load as specified in sub paragraph B-2
and thel6aputed branch circuit load for receptacle outlets in other than dwelling
occupancies for which the allowance is not -ore than 12 amperes per outlet, may be
included with the gene=ral lighting load and subject to the demand factors in paragraph
C of this section.
U&IIMM &,,$_BCi . in single-family dwellings, in individual apartmeats of
multi-fwdly dwellinp3 having provisions for cooking by tenants, and in each hotel
suite, having a serrbW pantrYs a feeder load of not less than 3000 watts shall be
included for l arpliances (Portable appliances supplied from receptacles of 20
ampere or less rating), in dining r , kitchen, and pantry, if the load is sub-
divided o or more feeders the computed load for each shall include not less
-22-
Anel - Single FhadlY
32500
or - less
o,ver
Alines - ti -F
less
(other than Hotels)
3a
Next U7,000
Over 120,000
Garages - Coranorcial
Total dattage
(Storage)
a
Hospitals
2
50,000 or less
Over 50,000
Hotels, including apartment
20,003 or less
houses without provisions
Next OD,000
for cooking by tenants
2
Over 100,000
Industrial Commercial
Total dattage
(Loft Buildings
2
Lodge Rooms
11
Total dattage
Office Buildings
2
20,000 or less
;rer 20,00
Restaurants
2
Total t-lattage
Schools
3
15,000 or less
Over 15,000
Stores
3
Total 'lttage
ldarehorsea Storage
a 12,500
or less
Over 12,500
EM -
IM
In any of the above occupancies
except single-family dwellings
and individual apartments of
multi -family and dwellings:
Assembly Halls and
Auditorium 1 Total Wattage as specified for the specific
Halls, Corridors, Closets, occupancy
Storage Spaces
(} For sub -feeders to areas in hospitals and hotels sphere entire lighting is likely
to be used at one time; as in operating rooms, ballrooms, dining rooms, etc., a
demand factor of 100 percent shall be used.
S IXL i.PPLIWES. The small appliance load as specified in sub paragraph B-2
and thel6aputed branch circuit load for receptacle outlets in other than dwelling
occupancies for which the allowance is not -ore than 12 amperes per outlet, may be
included with the gene=ral lighting load and subject to the demand factors in paragraph
C of this section.
U&IIMM &,,$_BCi . in single-family dwellings, in individual apartmeats of
multi-fwdly dwellinp3 having provisions for cooking by tenants, and in each hotel
suite, having a serrbW pantrYs a feeder load of not less than 3000 watts shall be
included for l arpliances (Portable appliances supplied from receptacles of 20
ampere or less rating), in dining r , kitchen, and pantry, if the load is sub-
divided o or more feeders the computed load for each shall include not less
-22-
s a.
4. HEA ::PILI" M: Any heading appliance in a dwelling rated at
more than 1650 watts, shall be wired for not less than 200 'colts, the conductors
to such heating appliances shall be installed in a metal protected If such
heating appliance is portable, the receptacle shall be of a suitable capacity. In dwel•
lings and apartment hcusess two or more fixed air heating appliances, rated at not
less than 1650 watts each, and operatingat not less than 2hO volts may be installed
in a heavy chug heater branch circuit, protected by a single act of overload pro-
tective devices provided the total connected loans does not exceed 35 averes per
conductor. Heavy duty heater branch circuits may be two -wire derived from either
a 120-2140 volt single-phase sourc e, or a 240 volt three-phase source, or they any
be three-phase three -wire derived from a three-phase 2W volt source. The tap
from such droit to the heating appliances shall in no case be less than No. 12
!.il.G. wire nor over eighteen (18") inches in length. All ungrounded conductors
shall be switched at each heating appliance. Only those conductors supplying
a fixed heater shall enter a heater enclosure, all such conductors shall enter
through the bottom of such enclosure. This sub -division shall not be construed
to permit heaters for different apartments or occupancies being connected to the
same circuit.
5. APPMVED %Ts D MUMM WTERS using not more than one (1) 250 watts infrared lamp
may be installed an a lighting branch circuit by reducing the allowable number of
lighting outlets by two (2), for each single lamp device used. However, not more
than two (2) such devices shall be connected to any one (1) lighting branch cirduit.
Any number of multiple larp and single lamp heaters the total wattage not exceeding
1500 watts or the total nwiber of 250 watt lamps not exceeding six (6), may be
connected to a separate 20 ampere branch circuit.
6. j_TER_TUM7MS, SPI tE HE° E, M* rr,%TRS: Demand factors may be applied to reduce
the size of services, feechers, and sub -feeders in dwellings and apartment houses
supplying the following type of load: Nater Heaters, space heaters and dryers of
2000 watts or over as follows:
NO. of Units % Demand
1-2 100
3-5 85
6-10 70
11-20 60
21-35 50
36-60 50
61-100 35
over 100 30
The size of each and every appliance shall be noted on the application form.
7. MWND-FILCW, Fort. ELEMICIL RIN : The values in the table below apply
-23-
to one or more cooking
baking appliances but axe no4plizable to other
appliancose
ODIUM I
ODIUM II
Ranges Over
Ranges Ower
1650 Watts and
359matte
No. of Ranges
under35 .watts
1
80
80
2
75
65
3
70
55
4
66
50
62
45
6
9
43
6
53
40
8
36
9
51
35
10 and over
49
34
The size of each and every a shall be noted on the
application form.
Unless statements are filed in writing from the canner or authorized agent starting
capacity of ranges, each range shall be figured at not less
than 12 K. W.
EXAMPIIEs
House area 551 x 32* is an all electric home having%
1 - 13.2 DI RANZ
3 - 3 KV SPACE HEATEMS
1 -4 91 SPACE WATER
I-2.5 Mi WATER BUTER
1 -1650 WATT BATH BEATER
1 - 1 F.P. PUMP
CALCUTATION OF .
55 x 32 a 1760 sq. ft. x 3 watts c 5280
2500 watts 100 demand_
2780 Watts _
Total Light Demand
2 - Appliance Circuits a
13.2 KW RAID 60% Demand
2.5 Kid Hot Water -
3 - 3 KW Heaters =
-24-
2500
834
3334
3000
6334
10560
15,500
1 - I IM PtM 1560
Total daatts 33,279
Total. Watts 33,273 - 138.65 amperes
"
Switch shall then be 20D amps.
All other fixed 111ppliance Outlets to be figured as ger name plate ratings.
Air conditioning and heat pvmqm shall be 100% Demand and where there is more than
one (1) r.�tor, the largest motor shall be figured at 125%.
SECTION 13
C0M4ERCI4L STO'M 3M KA, .BIN ai' S:
A Electric Wiring Installed In or On Structures Identified by the Uniform Building
Code under ".0 to "Hu Occupancies Inclusive. See Table of Groups of Occupancy
in Section 7. Electric wiring enclosures shall be approved rigid metal condrit
or electrical metallic tubing. flexible metallic conduit may be used where im-
practicable to install rigid metal conduit or electrical atallic tubing.
B Commercial and store buildings shall be wired for general lighting as requiring
a minimum of 3 watts per square foot of floor space in salesrooms, display res,
offices and other rooms devoted to similar purposes. fall other spaces shall be
wired as requiring 1 watt per square foot. In addition to the above, circuit
capacity shall be provided to an accessible location at each store window, for
200 watts per lineal font of glass measured horizontally at the base of the win-
dow. An appliance circuit shall be run to the front of each store building and
outlets located in or near all shwa windows or front openings, not to exceed four
(L) such outlets shall be installed on aq}r one circuit. A convenience outlet shall
be provided to include not more than eight (8) outlets per circuit.
Entrance doormiys providing access to premises from exterior shall be provided
with exterior i11 tion suitably located. The illuminating source shall be
controlled by an interior switch conveniently located near the doorway.
Where there am no show windows, extra circuit capacity shall be provided at the
panel for show vindcu circuit.%
-2e
frontA sign circuit shall be provided and installed to an accessible location at the
Pall commercialand store
building
.Z..YC - occupancies.-:tcircuit and/or
o
outletbe controlled + ;: ., Mitch located withineight of the r 4 r.
outlet, or by a lock type Mitch if out of eight of SUM.
Not to exceed four V) transformers of Wo v.L. wall be connected to W such
circuit. ,,ai trmsrormore shall comply with i-rticle 28., para. 2552 (d) of the
Electrical Safety Orders of the State of CaUfornia.
C Location of Branch Circuit Protective Devices. Branch Circuit protective devices
shall be installed IN and FOR each occupancy. Nothing contained in this orrai.nance
shall be deemed or comtrued. to permit the installation of any electrical device
outlet or circuit in any occupancy, the control of or the protection of which is
not accessible to the occupant at all times except, remodeled existW, occupancies
is changed to a different classification as defined by "Table of Groups of Occup-
ancy", then protective devices way be located at one central point. No parts of
any circuit shall supply electrical energy to more than (1) one occupancy.
D Community Buildings and LauncIry Locations. - Calculations for feeders or service
for above buildings shall be based on the table in Section 12, C -3a of this or-
dinance. No more than two (2) convenience outlets per circuit at ironing board
locations.
E Transfornmerst lZemote control, low emergency power and signal circuits shall be
installed in accordance with Article No. 725, of the National Electrical Code.
F Calculations of Toad: The branch circuit load for lighting and appliances shall
be computed in accordance with the provisions of this section. Where in normal
operation, the maximum load of a branch circuit will continue for a long period
of time, such as store lighting and similar loads, the mininuin unit loads speci-
fied shall be increased by 25 per cent in order that thewiring system may have
sufficient brands circuit and feeder capacity to insawe safe operation. A wiring
sketch Mall be either attached to or drawn on the back of the application form
unless plans for the job include a wiring layout.
0 Trailer Park Aring refer to the Orange County Trailer Park Ordinance No. 735.
QMW TtWEach fluorescentvapor of
W tube light shall be provided with a fixed nwoeplate, legible after installation
which shall correctly state the nanufacturer's name or trade nut, and the voltages,
amperage, total watts and power factor. No such equipment shall be installed inwhich
the power factor is less than go per cent. All above listed equipment shall have
Underwriters Laboratory label or recognized testing laboratory label. Every such light
shall be effectively 3J • 3, a.:..• either a... permanent :. • approved metallic.• b
polarizedctim
to a grounded circuit "stem or by a flexible approved cord one conductor of which shall
be a grounding conductor connected to a sewate blade of a polarised attachment cap in
such a manner that a grounding connection is made when such cap is inserted into a
SECTION 1h (A)
ALL F'LUO'tESCENT IND SLI14 LINE FIXTURES: Fixture Mounting. Fixtures containing ballasts
or transformers shall be vaunted not less than li inches from low density cellulose
fiberboard or similar combustible materials unless the fixtures are approved for sur-
face contact with such materials. Fixtures having exposed ballasts or transformers shall
be so installed that such ballasts or transforimrs shall not be in contact with combust-
ible material.
SECTION 15
E.MgGE UCY "NIS EXIT LIGHTM REQG : NTS.
A EXIT ILL "TION: Exits shall be illuminated at all times with light, having an
intensity of not less than one foot candle at floor level.
B EXIT SIGNS: At every exit doorway, and wherever otherwise required to clearly
indicate the direction of egress an exit sign with letters at least five inches
(50) high shall be provided from all areas serving the occupant load specified
in this tion. In Interior stairways the floor level leading direct to
the or shall be clearly indicated.
s -
19 Groups B. C, D, and H, with an occupant load of mom than 50,
2. ::11 other occupancies servingan occWent load of mra than 100,
C ILLUMINATION OF SIGNS: Exit signs shall be lighted in the following occupancies
with two electric lams of not less than l5 watts each in the manner specified
in this sub -section.
1, Two separate sources of supply shall be required for Croup "A" occupancies
and Divisions 1 and 2 of Group B except buildings with occupant loads less
than 750 persons used as churches, lodge rooms, recreation halls and gym-
nasiums,
2, Separate circuits, one of which shall be separate from all other circuits
in the building, shall be required for the following occupancies:
(a) Groups A, B, and C occupancies with an occupant load over 300 persons
and not otherwise regulated in this sub -section.
(b) Group D and R occupancies with an occupant load over 100 persons.
(c) Group F occupancies with an occupant load over 19000 persons.
SECTION 16
That a certain printed document, three (3) copies of which are on file in the office
of the County Clerk of the County of Orange, being marked and designated as "Electrical
Safety Orders of the State of California", effective February 1955, issued by the
State of California, Department of Industrial Relations, Division of Industrial
Safety, be and the same is hereby referred to, adopted and made a part hereof to
the saw effect as if fully set forth in this Ordinance.
SECTION 17
This mance shall be known and may be cited as the Electrical. Code of Orange County,
-28-
The provisions of this Ordinance shall apply to and affect all of the unincorporated
territory of Orange County, except work located primarily in a public way, public
utility towers and poles, mechanical equipment not specifically regulated in this
Ordinance, and hydraulic flood control structures.
SECTION 19
The Superintendent of Building and Safety of the County of Orange is hereby vested with
the authority to enforce all of the provisions of this Ordinance.
S LIMON 20
It shall be the duty of the Superintendent of Building and Safety to issue permits for
electrical installations and wiring under the provisions of this Ordinance whenever
the applicant for such permit shall have complied with all of the requirements hereof.
W 0
The Superintendent of Building and Safety shall collect such fees for electrical in-
stallation and wiring permits as are provided to be paid by this Ordinance. Said
Superintendent of Building and Safety shall make no refunds on fees collected amounting
to One Dollar ("1.00) or less; that in cases where refunds are made the amount to be
refunded in any event shall not be more than eighty-five per cent (65) of the amount
of the fee paid and that no refunds of any fees or parts thereof shall be made after
120 days have elapsed from date of the issuance of the permit.
SEM10if22
r ... :., .. , r f - s a ,: s r w � �Y , t � .;:. -- : r . r re.r .s a.... � a x ♦ ..�
a-:. s. C t.r • {'. _ t 4*'= to s. - r:
Ci:ii33.Lii" '
Any person, firm or corporation violating any of the provisions of this Ordinance shall
be deemed guilty of a misdemeanor and upon conviction thereof shall be punishable by a
fine of not more than $500.00 or by imprisonment in the County Jail for a period of not
more than six months or by both such fine and imprisonment. Each such person, firm or
corporation shall be deemed guilty of a separate offense for each day or portion there-
of during which any violation of any of the provisions of this Ordinance is co tted,
continued, or permitted by such persons, firm or corporation and shall be punishable
therefor as herein provided.
SECTION 24
Ordinances No. 786, 820, 908, Section 3 of Ordinance No. 1O49, and Section 3 of Ordi-
nance No. 1062 of the County of Orange are hereby repealed, provided, however, that
the provisions of this Ordinance, in so far as they are substantially the same as
existing ordinances, must be construed as continuations thereof and not as noir en-
actments.
SECTION 25
This Ordinance shall take effect and be in force thirty (30) days from and after its
adoption, and prior to the expiration of fifteen (15) days from the passage thereof,
shall be published once in the Daily Nears Tribune , a newspaper of general
circulation printed and published an ounty o range, State of California, to-
gether with the names of the members of the Board of Supervisors votin, for and against
the same.
(SEAL)
AT1MSTs
L. B. WA14gE
County �,le
rk- axid a Q�f�icin Clerk
of the i^d'bf�Si�er�tiilrs of
Orange,unty, 'Californtia
By
STATE ii CA ,�•IA)4
Ss. '
ChUilian -of e or Supervisors
of Orange County, California.
ORA _ ),
B. WALIA*i fity Clerk and ex -officio Clerk of the Board of Supervisors
do hereby � X al4% regular mit � of the Board of Supervisors of Orange County,
iforniay of ober , 1959, the foregoing Ordinance can-
UiningsectTm__$vw considered section by section, and that the said Ordi-
nonce mw passed and adapted as a whole by the following votes
-30-
I
S C.N. FEATHERLY, WK. H. HI IN, WILLIAM J. PHILLIPS,
C.M. NELSON AND WILLIS H. WARNER
IN WITNEE,6S WHEREOF, I have hereunto set Mr hand and affixed the off ficial seal
of the Board of Supervisors of the County of Orange, State of California, the 14th
dayof October , 1959.
,m
i�. . �1
County Clerk a -okf ioia Clerk of the
Board i-t-tVerASWS of OraUP,
Co , California.
(SEAL) $Y�.�.�`
v Vemmm,
vd r
Publish Daily News Tribune
actober 23, 1959
18 NOES: SUPERVISORS NONE
19 ABSENT: SUPERVISORS NO',Z
4V
1
C^WtY Court HOu", Santa Ana, California. and is hereby fixed as
ss.
COUNTy (F ORANGE
2
the time =4 place for a public hearing in the matter oft adoption of
23
3
the said proposed ordinance and the adoption by reference of that car -
above and foregoing Resolution was duly and regularly adopted by
4
tain code known and designated as "Electrical Safety Orders of the
26
5
State of California" effective February 1955, issued by the State of
Bioard.
6
California, Department of Industrial Relations, Division of Industrial
26
7
Safety;
Ist day of Sentember
30
BE IT FURTHER RESOLVED AND ORDERED that notice of the hearing
31
County- bair, Zlor k of
' 044
herein scheduled shall be given by publication once a week for two
A,
10
successive weeks in the i 1 News Trlbine
2
11
a newspaper of general circulation printed and published in the County
12
of Orange, State of California, the first publication thereof to be
13
made at least fifteen days preceding the hearing herein scheduled;
14
that the said notice shall contain those matters as required by Section
1115
50022.3 of the Government Code,
16
AYSS: SUPERVISORS WM. H. UIRSTEIN, C. M, FEATHERLY' WILLIAM J.
PHILLIPS, C.M. I--'-LSON A10 WILLISH. WARNER
18 NOES: SUPERVISORS NONE
19 ABSENT: SUPERVISORS NO',Z
4V
STATE OF CALIFORNIA )
21
ss.
COUNTy (F ORANGE
22
1, L. B. W&LIACE, County Clerk and ex -officio Clerk of the
23
Board of Supervisors of Orange County, California, hereby certify that
24'the
above and foregoing Resolution was duly and regularly adopted by
25
the said Board at a regular meeting thereof held, on the 1st day of
26
1959, and passa4.-by-&'urian 1maus vote of said
27
Bioard.
26
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, ItQ hav* ,,a
fiireiin-4e 'm�,seal this
29
Ist day of Sentember
30
31
County- bair, Zlor k of
' 044
32
A,
T'.
BY Deputy
I
NMCK OF PUBLIC HEARING
IN THE MATTER OF ADOPTION OF A PROPOSED
2
ORDINANCE BY THE BOARD OF SUPERVISORS OF
THE COUNTY (IF ORANGE
3
4
NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that the Board of Supervisors of the County
5
of Orange, State of California, has fixed 'wine= a&
6
the 14thday of October 1959, at the hour of 9:-c
7
o'clock A. M. of said day in the Chambers of said Board in the County
8
Court House, Santa Ana, California, as the time and place for a public
9
hearing in the matter of the adoption by said Board of Supervisors of
10
an ordinance, the purpose of which is to provide rules and regulations
11
governing electrical installations and wiring and to require permits
12
therefor and to adopt by reference that certain code entitled, "Elec-
13
trical Safety Orders of the State of California" as effective February
14
1955, issued by the State of California, Department of Industrial
15
Relations, Division of Industrial Safety.
is
Copies of said Electrical Safety Orders of the State of Cali -
17
fornia proposed to be adopted by reference are on file in the office of
IS
the Clerk of the Board of Supervisors in the County Court House, Santa
1.9
Ana, California and are open and available for public inspection.
20
Dated: Se-ote.mbpr I _2 1959.
21
BY ORDER OF THE BOARD OF SUPERVISORS OF THE COUNTY OF ORANGE
22
STATE OF CALIFORNIA.
25
L. B. WALIACE
County Clerk and ex -officio Clerk of the Board
26
of Supervisors of Orange County,
California
25
26
(SEAL) By
27
Deputy
Publish
Dally News Tribune
28
Sent ember 17 anO 24 19,79
29
30
31
32
E
.AL Mr IL NCLWN
LANG NK
&X"#"M1T"VM
Mayo Q MCI.ELL”
ASIOMATC
cava. C"aimm
NORTH Y
SANTA ANA. CAiIFOi HiA
PHOOM Kft481MLVi-9341
August 26, 1959 LE, fl F„y cies
�„a der. uYy
Gentlemen:
I present to you a new electrical code for your consideration
with my recommendation for adoption.
There have been about eighteen months of work go into this code
by a committee composed of members of this department and others
from various building departments throughout the County.
There is complete agreement among all city building departments
and ourselves that we would all try to secure adoption of this
and other mechanical codes by our legislative officials, so as
to bring about uniform regulations throughout the County.
Meetings and hearings on this code have been held with the National
Electrical Contractors' Association, electrical engineers and de-
sign engineers with complete agreement as to text of the code.
Included in this code is a new fee schedule which would authorize
fees about twenty-five percent higher than those we have had for
the last twenty 'rears. We feel that these higher fees are neces-
sary to help defray the rising cost of departmental operation.
Respectfully submitted,
k) =-
C. W. HUE;,
Superintendent of
Building & Safety
1
ix Tm 39AXIM aw jwWwwww"MAW44
i-0
7'
k 4- ALLAW AW. -I 7 7,711 JF W-
7,7'jr-,
......... ......... ....................................................
at wh" me &=end in a rrwm *we V" pow*" IN a" aovw
1A 1"d WA TMM emmmuft 1 09 .17ft *w et
"d mftg m 0, . **how 01 .a.. ......
be* &We mdmho and in as rewAm and eadm bwe at
sw awwapqw pre"r. =A aft in a supplemseft wd a" VAfte
pubakid *weft on no faftvfwg dmft% ft-Vdk
.............................
........................................................................
........................................................ / ..............
mmhsft*sd am tolove =0 am_dg at.........
•XGIM7 PuMk IR SM f1w 00 VDMW
of Ono*% aft" of cawwv*u
F4 f
ILW
"AporTXN On m8s.0"D
ORM-4-NAINCEIt 804RD
Or 8 1 S OF TIM
COUNTY OF ORANGZ
NOT= Is Hza"y OWNS
that the'Roard of $uperviaors of
the Cminty of ormwe, state of
California. has fixed Weduesday
it,. 1401 dAY Of October, IM, at
the hour at SM -o'clock &M.
fsaid day in the Chambers
of aid Doard in the County
CVnrt Renee, Santa Ana. C&LJf0X-
td.�.S the time and place for a
puale halzing in the matter of
the goopt;som by -Ad Board It
f3twpemisors of an ordinance, the
pr,,poa,
of which is to provide
"&,es and regulAtjobs goveri
wauicii symanat andnwng
inn and to regisLeY lwxm'ts there -
fee and to adopt by reference
that Certain cotta erdlil
tricot safety Ord of the state
of Camoruta'. as effectthive Feb -
by e $tat4j
roar; lam.
of Cal
Department of 'In-
dustrial $elations.Division of
Industrial Safety.
Copley a eald Electrical Safe -
State of Call -
%=Op= to be adopted
b, reference are OD file in the
of" of the Clark of the Board
of supea'Q tit the Count!
Ans. CJIitf?!-
C;ounty 'Z1ej7j
- -jid eX-offIC10
Clark of theBoard of Super.
1130rG of Orange COUnty-
u CasteiX
FILED -
SEP 2 8 1959
L & WAUACE, Cal" CW*
I
In
m
#4 €PWMWM
air my xmmw "ONS4
.POOR#0{
z. ........w..w.. ,.
.., ... ....
....................................':
.:
....................... ........ q'w. . . ............._...............
,fw ilea k a pft#04 omm"Vm pwmkba to an
lrr�cm.
4
amt some an ria Z3.vd ow at Calabar.
l emdA*Isa waroftmm^amionwaft
t
..!•f•f..w.,.,R„www.fsr•e•,.,,,,,ws,.•w,s.•.,,,...•..,.,.s.,.f.s•r.•. •f
s..f.w ........................w •...... —Z ...................
Ilia -
.,
Yk
r
t ^
gym
.. U&
a away am ...aor of .........
.,
4
„
s
x
4
W
}
x.
' 3
a is
NEIcg TRIBUNE ybilertOA. Ca,iL PAVE 1!
LEGAL NOTICE LEGAL NOTICE f ,_LEGAL NOTICE
LEGAL NOTICE Frear evening, October 22, lug )
.,a. _ I LEG 0.L NOTICE LEGAL NOTICE
ineta11tL10II W0.s lswiullY Installed accos<ling to any °Cher IoWjj &4-11ho&%i Ahi/ ROOAt9 CONTAiNiNQ LAVATORY FACILITIJ.S:
ortllntnce, code or order the existing type of tnata118ttoa may be
At
;east n. g mdh e P recent t shaft be installed m roams. ,?
used provided such addition or exteitslon does not exceed fifty. rutiounin one ox m a -.h bast o laearortes. CALCCLATSON OP IA4D: 2�
per Cent 150?;.) of
the connected load m any ci[cutt are elrculu. -. g All 726 Batt ctmnHx h 1 be sired 300
in metal raceways, the alae Of' 15x3! equalE 17288 aq ft. x 7 watts egaela.... 3280.
C Where aitch nddltfons, aimmAl.re or extenstona are tlne to dam4^EJsaid raceway to be d...rmufed by rhe number antl sin d the 2 Rtttea d mnnnd E�qusls ......:.. "
by hr. etty Pert paired. altered. or eztendetl shall tri of a type mndnrtor5 to he used' eceptaela ontleta �
a2' ` required by this Code, provided sue damage eseeeds fifty per east) R. AND I TYPE OCCUPANCIES: to a •cry rtwm Total
* ' (50?0) at the area °[ the stt'ttctare, or wiring system. shalt be Pm:ltlerl for ever]' ta'elre 112) A•et of nsnble wallms ewaa 2- ppUsa<eDCurcuiita egtatsequals "•"'•"••' �,.`•'
P D Where each additions, alterations. or extend- are made m A ]ocatad so tt no pole ei'ng the fluor line a any d334
50
'atturntre-t0 make 1t ettttabie or
tllflerenG acmtpaney classttfe8t30ae. spaeE Ss more tl sit alx t et from an outlet to that space. IA xwble 100gi t
those pbrttona directly aftEEted by such atterarion. addition, and=or watt spec L. t p three feet a'irle or greater). it bete tltte m
extenatlott must be installed according to the Standards
of the st chiral features A rereptacle in the, wall would be SmDractloa4 11.2 EW R a M'^� %Pd 2306 r
t
existing Codes. SECTION 10 litaele m the floor shall be considered as meethtg this re- 7— EW Hestare squalor 4
gttU mpnt. •'
and installed the minimum !-i 8W Hceter equrla• •• '
SERVICE ENTRANCE REQIIIREMENTB IJ E r1-Svable :aim shall hac'e provided -_
A. taxation of senlce Ffeads. Servlet heads shall be located on tbati outlets as required by this OrdluanaC. lE i7g ;
4S
.wail nearest the utility company linea or poles, not teas t➢et ten g SPLICES: A31 branch lrntt r nductors installed at ontleta shall IS.SdO g.>d�v epulis .. •. lBbg
z
(76) feet above. the ground and not less than three
(3} feet I[om` quires L4 abcrnf i it conductors lafmtlbetattaehedmto any enelrtrlcat li-1850 WRtt Nate[ 3Ia. 1>em►rad .............
yid
an -doom or window, evert wlth or slightly above the second Aeor num u c 1-1 IF Pump _
r. ee13 andlor to a location approved by the serving utility. to dfyhY• - .•••••• ..
•�' addition, ell service heads shall be located at least one fact (1 It.)� E%CEPTION: Hack WAed are Preasiit, type reesptscies maybe ex- •fMet Watts .... ••- - ••••" t
above the point of attachment oT secvle drops.. EXCEPTION: from the above requirements. Total Watts 22ZX equals 136'00 ampere
E=1 In buildings served at not over 156 volts to Rrouad, a single Set tai L. GARAGES. Accessory to tlweliingas or duplexes (group 1) shall be 2M v
service entrance couduotor may. be rasa
to
not exceed nix t6! mired LER a minimum of switched light outlestbe� ndbe0nn ugly 00 wir-2 inch conduit ASITIns
of aervlca equipment On 0.ny ocCttpancy li gxoitped at the pomL Of� grotmdmg type reCepaci+. Baal W1rinR. LL ejWaefl, 176.60 smpa eq
eilLrnCe.. For aeY other occupancy or lnatailatlona mYolvmg mor /tali') lectYlcal metallic-ttiU,ug, All wiring m tletachetl garages switch
thenwNPYOD� PQ�ttlet6 to be 11gu[ed M lies item0 IAata x
thea .those are upPlted et over
150 volts to ground, the emirs shalt be stn underground m galvani2ed.rtgld metal CaudUlt o[ Equal• Ali atbgr.,ILgEd i
current .shalt be Laken throng➢ one am aentce awlte➢. lto LgCEPTION: Overhead (12 high) may be used wham horlROIItaL run retmmlp. and heat .Dumps abalt be 100"m INmand amS�
rrvlce switch shall be foCeted mor than six .feet sty inches In rxcess oP 56'. Air Cwditi°a1nQ
•s . N ft..0 in.! to the handle in the ON ltoslUix above the fm�' there tre more tMn Dae (1) motor' the 18THeat math aYsB 180s
M ACC&SSORY OR OTHER BUILDSNGS: 8eparteiy located oa thq -
yr oundlevel, same lot are prEmiaea shalt have rotmectmg onductdrs run under- •t� SECTION t3
-0 t IN SWITCH REQUIRED: An approved service entrance Switch be g rad m Ealvaniatd, aberedlaId or equal rigid metal conduit: `
`-hrwker shell: be Installed for each eervlca meter, and laeatad on � EXCEPTION1; Overhead (12' sign) may be Used when horizontal [un COEl j OM STORE AND MA aARa E� U�H,SDt "tae IdeatHurd IN t�
t lad'elde OI the meter; service ewitca or breaker -may be located in exress o1 50': A Ei(seY'1c Wlrmg Ynstalied A" to . H' O""rnclN tnr7sseivs. ' ct
!nerds qr-outside the Atruotcre provided it meets the requirementak 11=9j.g Code 'hide[ ' tion f: SlEOtMe
'et :the Power aerving: agency, but =11 be located at the nearest SECTION 12 � Table: of Groupe .°veil surd "peccY to � is
tMdily eccessfble and'. becticable Point to where the service nuen
CALCULATION OF LOAD. �� wndnit or Np➢TCN
¢u0Lor6 the
etnmtur. ` a VOLTAGE DROP: Every Interior, system of wfnng for tight end Ctoaare obeli be aper be used w4ars S6aPradtloiii0
r3:EervlCe shall:.he complete for rough Inepe rtloa and all bandueEms haat matattaituu shalt be p ufatated as t of m exceed three (5i yer tuMge• lrpg161e metalUc conduit mag
o- atoll be faeutated, end
in
cent voltage drop over-all and for power lnataliatfoaa not to exceed lttaa8 rigid meta age ea bultdlags p)al1 be "d": for tooth
T-'%M"OD OP'INB'SALLAT;ON OF SBRVICE: Avery prase obeli.. 6e five (5) per Cent voltage drop over all, based ou ahawable load. ffim,munt of 2,..w"'A Dp' tb r4 9004 .
,Installed in galvanised, slieredixed or equal rigid metal conduit and; Yard ligating u stntbuic.s may be IWARlled p as act Lo execed H iCod rOuvlritxg a d lay rooam„AKicN affil. other rWiNtl4r:
fa.: accordance with pmviatoaa of thio Oztltnance.: >nd all p[9 Slra f5) Per cent voltage drop over -5141. mealam'ooma• shall be wWd'a0
etptt meIIt 'o0➢dolts and littinga fnstslled on the Cateeim' Of aw CALCIILAITON OF SERVICE AND SUB -FEEDER LOADS: L1ght4fR aPateslOiHar .p ptirp°ae6�DoIlt 1k.,YO the abov0.,'mmUt4'
; lnE ahali be hated and approved by a recognized teONag abbe+ loads s➢ati be based n three l3) watts per square foot of -.tont to , v1dM t0 an seam[", 1omt"'n Aawh01t"
YMy Its rain-tliht. ' floor area not mciudha Open porches or garages Flret 2500 lratta 1 s Pix
3='BEt[VTCtB FOR BIONS, TEb1PORARY PDLEB, WATEit PUMPSAND 1007; demand °ver 2500 alts 30'0 demeud. Convenience ontleta An apDlYSttca:N(t '�
i+JtlfpIIPANOIEe OF L88S-TITAN 100 BQ: PI.: The mmimum nfaa fm ate included in the /lghtiuq load antl need not be calculated. 1 watts Der lineal toot of a> tads' sma' ,
^{etvice wadttita shall be'nat less In btu thaalil tegvlred for the butiding and ODU„sae
dUr�tor-metaled LhErta and to no case smelter than teras+ +LPPliance circuit to be tlgured at 10030 demand, Ail Itxed heating bait N.tde
;mai. 'rude n and n a A.W.G. e coatlthe. additional xpphanc.c loads sha11 then be added at their •of; rash st int opeain®f. sot 411 9ppj'.=ik) 0U4bovH0t- -''�y=
or
't£mnmereiai end etorc Buildings A to Q Inclusive. 30D aq. ft. end demand has beeb dal ala The following 1s a sit o[ de it wWawe .
atlomantts far water heaters, apace heaters Rnd alT condttfoafnR. be�fMal tn� JWA tang ,t4C) so ptrm� In k„
, Over. The minialum service requirements "I be: Demand factors may ve applied to reduce the sires of service+ ymrldvfce... Ooortrsya Pbas
Conduit -1” trade size feeders, sub -feeders, in dwelling sad apm'tment hou�x supptylnR Eyea`fian ided with
axtector plttminatlon ttiltablg
CondnOtora-3 No, e-A.W.Q. the Soliowtne tyPEs o[ load. puri "➢all DE twatmlled by an 1114Erlat�tWli� °°n '):
Switch -80 amParc 'E•1 Q11N£RAL LIaifTIINQ FOR QENERAL ILLUMINATION: In toe Oe- t the, dgort[9y.- C1N1nIL 8a!>astiy; sht.
Circuit Brookes -50 ampere r:upanehs lord to the table in Section 12 lUnit toad and fect°r i t(�r are tib "�W[ wDt
LZ,FAMILY DWEt,LINUB VNDER 600 BGifARE FEET: demand table), a load °t noc less than the unit load ofColumn A Wt'e't� t➢e panelior e➢ow�"'..d°tliP%'to a$.s
.'$6e mmimurA service requirements shall be: atuii be mctuded Sor each square foot of floor area. In det� %1.19 DtdJlded and
Conduf i" [rade' a LaE toad on the "watts ter square foot" basis. tete 21Oor ares snail Aj, , A eh efTtr,ontoteit [dlsl and'
Datldibngd ,
C°adLLCtOra-3 No. B A.W.Q. be romplued Piom the otusltle dimenxlon5 1 rite buvdluR. apart- 210Y, tit tDM tt and/Or cutlet s6af1 be cera u -O 4y a INA-;
BWIGeh-6D ampere - me.nt. or arca involved. and the number of Sloors. tent lnclueing rte Ngtl and/or 0utdet or a.77
'�+`"' 4•
C/reutt Hrcaker-50 ampere - .open porches, garages in c°nnectfon With dweaing ocenpanclm, acre p0)ed`'wit➢in mg➢L dd ttte sign ttl60 •� idm,l b► 1
P[defeena "heti m made 1.ar cite prvice panel fora mfnlmum of Is '. unttnisttetl spaces in basements or aeries of dweilmgs. - vyy¢p„M out of slg4t Of sign $
8111g1a pole OYET-CUrtE➢t D[OLEaG190 deYleas m Wd1U0n SO life main All CanYEnlEnee outlets M.20 amp• at tele rating in 6ingle-femi]Y eaceed'fwr f#7 EI'en>dm'mlraOust,
,snag-W1yLaTl sem,
`' awl�y orefrult bleaker. and multi-Samtty dwellings anfl In guest some of hotels (except aleft el[cuit.: Ail G[AnsfOrmera ImeR di
2 BIR6LE FAMILY. DWELLMQB, 6� SQUARE FEET 6ND OVER: - those connected to the Split am, circuits specified) may be con -2M2 (d) of the gle0tricsl Safet7 O M®nom antF -t”
,. '7'118 mmlm»m prefer requirements "hell be: - Ndered AS outlets for general illumination„ no addltenal load need C LNB<ids Of Sm.ch Oibre imata)led IN RISC,
Coadsslt-3i5" tittle wise f ; ve included for such cuticle.
,CondUOtioTar-3 No. 1 A.W.O. E -y OTHER LOA1tB: For tighting other than general . in. Illumination aAd dacevin � tn'thts ommanCa I-11til.,
i o�tly�t or
Bwiteh-iP7 ampere for appltanees otaer than motors, s load of not less than the unit
1b.,wo Bt.ker-100 ampere load specffted 4Elow snail be 1peluded for eac4 Outlet: in aper"e loltce„Ln4E�CnYst'..the coonntmlOf aoT Or tee --:7g ma °i 0xis4tgg '('
•„Piovismns:siu)i: be made In the Surelee panel for a mmimum of p ,Antlers suDPiymg specula aPPllancea and other . t(� ag dEDva¢ b0 ”
hem 0ler-Currant prOteetiYe devidee m;admtioII m the main .lands - .. Amp. rating f. SOPllaneea ataeraale m tbe OccLLPanL at'.aR EImM ex t. •`
',.:awttch"or clover Braker. otdaPenclas a cYan6ed r s tllttereat cta"1f as It X11-ialDPiy
Quttets atlPPiy'tng heavy duty lamp holders............ 3 amps.
D=2 Wher.apa[e ,Z,= protective devices are Provided or apace I. reOther outlets .... . .. .... .. .... .... i, -i amps. ,tabp,:pt Qrupa:of Occap6ney", teen protect! 'de-i4a8" tmty be ,_
9utare dlrult protective devices are pmvidsd on the bees many ••sat ap"g,Sble to receptacle outlets pm- IoeMted at sae central point. No parts cation' Olrau
aeNOTE: Th1S provtafo° tions. - gtratlat4Dn0
flush mounted panel, thea raceways of in ftiateat capacity to permit vld o for the connection of fixed tighting units to faclittate cervlcing D n�eaKgyty il Bs s°a aLaundrgl )CODs tM to ,
utlfaatioa o2 "tie➢ ep, then
n spaces sh IS be pmvtded to an aCceas[bfe gid replacement. It prv(ce fol above ,buildings shall be Ifaeetl Pit
'-locatSoa. Such accessible 1006t10. fa doff led AS follows: Where :8 S.�CEpTIONS. The minimum loads for outlets paragraph 2 shall traders n 12. C-5, dithis 0rmnaa0e. NO mor thRn two (2) 0 ,
sutflefent attic space a available or underfloor apace 1s availebi0. a be modifier( ea follows: t°ea1e � ontleta PET circuit at ironing bttard:'irroatlOUs
OW
raceway shall terminate conveniently for tutor vas in tech such a Ranges. For household electric ranges, the branch cimult load Eemote content. 10w smergEneq,M If�O.d 7 •`
space. When this condition docs not exist. thea Such mrmmHtlega (stay be compiled m accordance ow Table So. E %i ranatOrtntre:
'shalt be approved by the ateetrlat Inspector. to stroll be lustalled Sn aCeotdamta't!1ih
D•4 FeMeT cooductore In sittgte Tamily dweiimga s4W have a current {b) Show Window L1g4tUtg. For show TO he, 1g� ting, a load or LYa Natbnel ElecLncal Cone. apd
carrying Cageclt equal to that of the service eniTance conductors. not fest than 2p Watts Per Itnear foot of show lin lieu measured 1, q_—tions o1 Load: The I. -n, f clrcvitwit 9 e' ti�n0ma of
' y hOHrontatty 91otlg Its base, nay be allowed !n Ilan oZ the >VaOp e4a11 bre comPutedln eco°rdanoe um load ot= beti�
' D+g+Sub-feedCra: H and I Occupency-the minimum Wu sub-feedsr specified load Per ouuet. Where rat mm�mi ° rtlan, Loa fuaNns
a6➢haall1 b►No:B A.W.O: wlr. {p) biutti-Outlet Apembllea. Where fixed multi•mttiet aseembuee P
D.1.DUPLEX=DWELLINQ 2OCCUPANCY: tW18-ooncmv the mmpl emumtli�mlt lords spamried 'tltalStan l th
:Tho combined minimum relay xEqutzemaata shalt be: are employed, each itve fest or lraetfan thereof of each aeparte a"aiimf0i3sr loatls irm ut Hens' Bleel t ttttE
and conttnuoua length shell ¢xet•Opt to lOCattona wheretlatnumabei stmt bJ 2S Pet cent m .order that the wiring "eq0
COadi11t-1 =s'tmde size )pas tban 1Sz ampEte capaCRY; df'
Conductors --No.) A.W.O. t Dranc4efrulL and [cedET renPacity 50 !nears aPor+t'
Tho mtafmum. proles for race mdlvldual ocquDanc7 ;ahaL be: of appitancea are likely to ba used almnt(pneously, then each one ctesige sketch shall be either attached 10 of drawn' oa
foot or fraction therpt shall be considered as one octet of sot Aav(g
Conduit -l" trde alae v lean than 1+e ampecea tpp apPBCatlon f0?m uniam. plana for the job SOCiU� 0 M1r40� 4
Cowduetora-7 No. 8 A.W.Q. C Fepdem Unit I,oatla and Demand Factors. park Wtttug safer m the Orange CoUffty T=aHa' FarE Ordt °'r'
Bw5tc4ea-00 ampere 1.Co Uwtion of Load Cunenta. CnTrenL asrryfng CaWclty for Ssymlt• ,
CIrtLLE Banker -SO amnerc pd AS 120 volts: line voltage nave No. 731• BI3CTfON 14
Bervlaaircuit are toadtlCtOra shalt have a ClI[rent earzYlvg capacity vRYlous yoitages shah be computed ore follows: gene rNtage between O Tmtler
ssstTlcent, to:EatTy the load. The branch CiiOtflt pmtecttve devlca 1a0 and 175 olu hall be eomim !dad with a ft-waBl®'. a'
Sul be seated In and Tor pack ie. m ce, bep C4 wire It tmR shall be laomDf� ° asv12140
tor' ch Si Tdrea OASISOUB TBBE LIQHTS: Each
ftttoracEnt ftxtur. ➢aatmtrf
U 2. Ctrutt Ratiaga Sa DWellinge. On a tW0.w1r and On tachxlde N a lure d. ➢Seh volmge gas tube I1g➢L ahallbe Prov
D•8 MULTI•FAMILY DWELLR44 H OCC FANCY: P : ta4at "tYALttl'^ s "t
The minimum prv{ca raqutrEmeats for combined Unit ceCupsucq IIs amp•)• factutK'e same Or trade mark, sod Life voltage amperage
Gadd u
Sul sheti be . three•Wir genanl fighting brsnCh'. cieoult, Chs total Corrected plate, •legible atter installation which shall corrcetlq "Late
Co.
trade sire load aitaU not asceEd tllteen ampEtYs cent.
COnductors-1-3 ra l A.W.Q. sWil sot PowecrUi dtot lsSe Labomv,ry Lbel m'Rraeo46nikE4 PmOht >
On a two -wire and on a01t aide M three -Wire convenience quttac and getrET Tactor. No suc4 aquipmsnf shah be install in whldh.
andiox apDlaap mrait, the tNa1 : conveaauce load such liRat be et[ecttvety gr0undld, >:tikner liy' a
The minimum feeder Or sub -feeder for Wit individual occupancy{ eaceed twenty sen las 130 amp•/. ended of ' a.
` ItuCewaX !�' trade sip rntaaen. end 4PDr0aed mEtallit aonnECtfon to a g[o
,bail he: ; A Oeweraf Ltghttn6• Tito demand fseEo[a. sPpllfed m t➢e WragraP4 IaUpl. Every 7
COnmlct°rr 3 adeB A.W.Q. may he a»PUCd Lq t➢e Computed bmacA CJmWt load 10r' ge>Mrai a irm.oC by a teduclwr �nnvECtEd of a pPareteu MaAE of an pniaslBeLL y
9.1101-60 ami a tllumlaatfon_ - -lBsa Tphe fMiowlaa) - lett, cf mantdcaD 1n such a manner that a grouading CounesUon is
ClrcuR nk - 4V ampere rhes such cop U lnprted Into se Palarile t Plug•
6rrvlee Efttra acid tetora shall have • mtrrvt sarrJing tapeMty IIHIT IgAf)s ANO pEgDER DEMARD PAC7'ORB BEC7'ION 14 (AI
' WW `-.'_-CN. ■ Al,l, FLUQR�CENT AND BWM LINE FIXTURES: Fixture MOantlnR
titiff fenrt to erre the roan exact in no CSM small : Lien 1 A. .Q. �_� CN. A Hemsad
Brat h lreutt 1 tttttve deviees Shalt BE bested m 6tl@ for each TiPa of M Which .rum plxiures cant6lt11n6: bellasta or translo[mera.Ghali be mountatl at ioae \'
rat )tt-lanlitY M tpa tcY with kltr•7 SaCl Utfvs for Crokl!ie. trait 1paeamdaP �) +i lie inches :Inion low density etluirtaE :flberboarii or almtla[ tam•
" D.e R lli-red M ndloRs shall CMt4orm to the mlalmum auadatda as BeCupatuy pm gq :AppllExdlWpt r a are approved tar amtrfaet enntnct
!j reqs{red m tsfa ogmatanCE feu new bull } - (_W, — b ibis materials mesa the flgtu d ailed, M transfabe 5
`T>r'/0 E luting i)uadin$a Where addt��Oat m' an'tS ! as Maur 4 h �.. 7ata1 W.,tage k h anCh m0te[Ia1a Fl�ct t a h la !xp yb
" Total Nattaka 10ga 1 tx p S t 1 d list !th bailout o tranettf m fa a➢all n01 be in
gtt{rc addEd load Ca$aClLY. anati;be .. itih a - 'x i AraOTted aad.AudlLnrltifis8
e moot axlLeD mato-hraaer nr'eaa�t aAng J%a� aawtia and n.,kr. �'f inv 25
E erre the..mttlf�M but m no NM rasa'*than �.a R*er^m '.rh£T - { �nrt• ♦ `-
_�.-Mears .. - I.^.E.,.•;4.r�, x..0 kXll 11C lire ri R ...M
n Hotels/mtlY jx 1 1.�0 8 1X117 • r
O 20 (h.9
arran-eI f a' r .. Commercial y I I {L 1 1 " -
a tw 1 1 uta II t i alt ra t *1 t t
m aplua+al obtalncd at Inco from tae C.11;171 b ala 1 500 0 r s
Inspector, O 50 000 I t C 1. i
F TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT SERVICE POLES Ri!h the - !; li a apartment 0000 Irss 0'. 4
Capt ton of the following xeq irements, all Such poles shalt Comply n -t + -xP 1'islous '+ t b000U iC It it tii(t t ic. k t 1
lth Public Utlhills Commissien RogubTio is. -' 2 over 10.000 �0.
The minimum service riser shall be N" galvanized, Sheradized or tl 1 I 1 f m mercial� n m 1Ti- is s ..t
equal rigid metal conduit. Lr (t 3 2 T 1 R t 'e 10n ; 1 1 ( 1 n i 1 fax Cin 'A'
The minimnm servlte conductors shell he insulated No. 9 ARG.. Inge Fnnnu 1'x i �l Rs..,..e 00. i I I n 1 r C 1 B ex ept b,ldtnes
Ti crvic, ground wire shall be minimum of No. 6 A.W G o -'.,Office Buildings 2. 20.)00 nr fess 10 :. 7 t 1-'u I t -rd as enurchos. i.dr;e
Closed
In '='• Solvnnlzad. sheradized oY quaff right metal a d lit O 0.000 -0'.. I t r
The ground rod, be either "' galvanized ptpe withca cl d!"rstaumnts 2 Total -{i'a:cepa IOO ., 2 1. f 11th s{ it be scnsla'r linin a'1 o::ter
end, an approved Solid rod o1 brass, cop Per or copper a Bred" drools 3 15.000 or less 100`,. s the bu..Gm hall be mq.thed far the following oc-
tlrnen to a depth of 8••0" below grmmd level. Over 15,000 50 , pa s
BeerPtacles shell be of a three wire polarized type and if for 120urr 3 Toral Wal.a;e 100' (al C ps A. R..'nd C c 1 '. a with n occ:lp,nt load over
volt of 249 volt shalt be bt the type Lhat 16 not ittteronangeabte. �SVnrehauses Storage ,s 12,500 or teas 100"„ 700 l arsons :Inn noI t 'wise regu:ateda In this sub -section.
SECTION 11 Over 12,500 59'.0 ib7 c Cup D and H uccupantles with an occupant load oeer
BRANCH CIRCUIT REQUIREMENTS FOR R & I WIRING. In any of the above occupancies 100 prrwns
A LIGHTING OUTLETS: Each single family dwelling and each Cc-:SxrPP1 7ncle-na tly dwefitngs (cl Group F occupancies with an occupant load over 1.000 persons.
cupancy of a multi-femlly dwetting shall have not less then one: rad indlvkluIt apartments of SECTION 16
fifteen (15 amp.} ampere general' lighting
branch clrruit with a� udtt.tamand as elfings: That a certain Printed document. 1h:re 131 copies of which ars on fila
maximum of 12 lighting outlets per circuit installed, minimum, Ann', Y Halls and in tae o[flce of the County Clerk of the. County of Orange, being marked
wire size shalt be No. lA A.W.G. Auditerhim i Total Wattage as epemf isd for and designated as "Etecerical Safety Orders of fire State of CA Ifornia". ..
A -i Every room shall have at least one switched general lighting out- Balis. Ca p.C,.s, Closets, the specific occupancy effective February 1955, issued by the State of California. Department of
let. LSvmR rooms, bedmams, famiip rooms, and dens mny Dt 1; air a Spaces ?� Industrial Relaslone. Dieision of Industrial Safety, be and the same Is
excepted, (*1 for sub -feeders to areas In hospitals and hotels where entire 1(giting he[eb part hereof to the same effect
p provided at least one switched wall receptacle la installed is 'likely to be used at one
time;
as in operating roams. ba6room,, Y referred to. adopted and made a
and supplied by a lighting branch circuit in addition to the required dining moms, etc., s demand factor of 100 per cent shall be used, d fully set forth To This Ordinance.
conven coca receptacles. SMALL APPLIANCES- The small appliance load as specified in sub- SECTION 17
A-2 All cloeeta provided with lighting outlets shall be operated: by a paragM h A-2 mad the computed branch circuit load for receptacle IMS Ordinance shell be known and Wray 11e cited as the Electrical ('jOde.
wall or door Switch (no pull chain receptacles Permitted) and the -mallets fin other than dwelling occupancies for which the allowance 18 02 Clan a County. ,
lighting outlet an 11 be so located in the ceiling or Wail over the net more than 1?: am ren per outlet, may be Included with the general SECTION IB - --
door n not to be within 12 inches hortaontsUp or directly over any ilghtin lona and subject r to the demand tactors in pAragraph C of th10 Ths Provisions of this Ordinance :shall apply to and affect all of the
,halving. g UMI.'Parated territory m Orange County, exce Pt work locate primarily
A-3 E¢ttanee doorways providing ceesa to FTemlaes from exterior Ghali sectiol,DWELLING OCCUPANCIES. It single-family daellfngs, 1t, lndSvidU0.1 ID a pUb.1C Way, pnblib utility towers and polos, meentnlCai equipmeAt
be p;pvlded with extortor illumluatton stutabiy located. The ll- w aMmen,',s of nulla -family dwellings hnving provisions for cooking by not specifically regulated !n thin Ordinaries, and hydraulic flood control
luminatin¢ source shall be cattrollefl by an interior switch Con- tenants, and In ash hotel suite, having n serving pantry, a feeder staktures.
venlently beat near .the doorway. load of not less than 3000 watts shall be Included Por small appltanaas SECTION 19
B' hharizonj:dRy Mountedhforced'air furnace locatlonphall berthed 6WH',t weal PP lances supplied from receptacles of 20 ampere or less The Buperintendent of Building and Safety of the County of Orange is
EEPURNACESht utlet (Portable a 1 neN6 D
be Ices ed ahead hf the passage opening. rating}, in fllning room, kitchen. and pantry. If the load Ss sub- Y vested with the authority to enforce all of the provisions K
C GENERAL APPLIANCE CIRCUITS tH and I occupancies): In sada- divided through two or more feeders the computed load for each Shall this
Ordinance.
tion R Tegnited ilia appllonee eitculto there Shari be Iwo 1-111 .1 lee not lase than 3000 Watts for small call T races. In A.W.G.ass Wheel IL SECTION 20
t20) ampere CaPaelty branch circuits with a minimum of two t27 ins feeder supplying an occupan�gg be smeller than No. 8 A.wue. Wall be the duty of the 8uperbttendant of Buudfng Wd. Ssfaty to.'
outlets par clmult (or one 3 -wire 20 wtpere circuit) shall be m- 4. HEATING APPLIANCES IN DWELLINOB: Any heating appliance is los permits Por electrical lnetellatfona and wirSng under the peo-
stalle4 for the email apPllance load in kitchens. The required num- a dwe111ng"rated at more than 3850 watts, snail be wired for not vlmoos of this Ordinance whenever the applicant for such pstmlt
per of kitchen receptacles shall be dividedd equally between these less than 200 volts, the conductors to such heating apPiiances shall eba0 have
complied with all of the requtreatento hereof, a..
two elrCutts. A S -wife circuit may be IoEped from eeaptacia to box tnatxtied In a metal protected system. If such hexing CJty. tx: SECTION 21
tworanCircu, provided outlet bonen' have `autftead tooinr fol atlmlwr
is portable, the recept{t( L shall be of A suitable capacity. In Tan 8npedntendtio of Building and Safety mall ooaaot eutsh foo for
tit CoaduCtora sad outlets ere equa/lp dtvlded oh unRmunded con- dwellings aad apartment houses, two or more fixed air heating ekeb7cat instailatlon and wlrtng permits ae are pmvided to be hT
doctors. .Thai ktLehen eiemnis IDaY be extended to eupDiy re- ,! ""appliances, rated at not less then 1659 watts each, end ops;Sting tbk Ordirmnce. Said 8uperintandent of Building and safety email
ceptaclnin pantry, dinette, breakfast room and dining room, but at not less than 240 volts may be lnatatled In a heavy duty heater nn'rriunda an fees collected atnovntfng to Oap: Dollar til.d9la teat.
:9lit not suppply other receptacles. breakfast
Not more than six t81 ra- branch circuit, Protected bye a singl0 set of overload protective that fa caaes Where refunds are made, th amounL b be refttndaI III
l-eeptacias shalt be ebattcet0d to- each 2 -wire alr0utt or equtvskat and . devices proyitled the total onnected coed does not excel 35 anyavent ehall not be more than elghtilre par epnt tga*A,} of Lha,,,,,
ahW not
Include the outlets for clock andlor 4sn. Clock and fan>, amperes per conductor. Heavy duty heater branch halecircus may be ►want of the fee paid. and that no ratuadA. of .ay fan or
outlets may bE connected to kitchen An
or tithe! Clmults, twcMirs derived from elthar a 120-249 volt Bingle-phue course, or taAtof shall be matle aftCi 120 daya. have elapsed the date
C-1 Parts of rooms or areo where laundryy equipment may ba faatalled a 24D volt three-phase source, be they may be three-phase the
fealmoe of the pstfnit.
".ai1s1L Tisre a sOrvlee area appliance circuit with not mon lona 4 ': wire derived from a three-phase 240 volt .ottree. The tap from such SECTION 22 ,
WLleta connected thereto. This cireufL shalt ba in edmtio8 W CtTeutt to the beating appllarleCs spelt m no Case be leas taan No. 12 H'py-section, nub-seeWOn, senLnnce, chu." or phraw at thN QnOtm"
as required fixed. appliance circuits. A.W,G. wire nor over elghteeA (18"j incnee 1t, length. All ungrounded n Ar any reason held to unconOLlWtlonal of aMd, such 'duchmus
n.a Avm.tawrw—W1sTACLsit: All anottance iecentacles 6ha11 be rated conductors Abell be switched at each hotftgl 9Ppliance. Only those 011111 not affect the validity. of the remaining Portloaf of _this
.. - �__. . t,es«a. wt, -_ ___-..... flmtnotice
enter through the bottom of such en- epg papa this
shall not be construed to permit heaters plytgr. and fit III A
or occupancies being connected to the eAhas sub -sec
3ILING ,]]EATERS using not mora titaA cwaituLlonal or
d- hunt, inav be installed on
: Rgntlag
may
eoAtainad therefA, Y acceptable in lieu of only one of 4he requhed :
number of 250 watt lamps not exceeding x (lit'C
branch circuit.
number of kitchen receptacles. Minimum sub4eeda t0 all mulnpte
Appliance assemblies shall be No. B.A,Wx1. anlad seater "Ne I
to a aepante 20 ampere
WATER-HEATERS,.SPACE HEATERS AND DRYERS: Demand factor
not D tread for broach clooIPM>si4T: When such equipment 16 re I
s-4 CORD To fort
form
rs. an sub
"fc%.9' lnpdwelmge raAdaapartment houses AAPP1Yltlgethe fotOWltt
toad: Water Heater, space heaters and dryers of 2000 trA
ttt
qutlras8dia'to be grounds, aha equ D�myeat around wale maul an
a and seeingrd Assembly sial
1�Inlmus
tYPe of
or over as [Chows:
of i4ot ., 6herm inish so
eqq
'BRANC'H CIRCUIT RE UTAED: mach
No. of Units % Demand
- 1.2'100
-,FOOD WASTE GRINDER
single SamHp dwalitng and each occupancy of a multf-famAy dwr11- -
3-5 85
!ng dealt have thus led therein an Individual food Waste arhldet
o =U1.1
8.10 70
h etrcult, gold olnoult aha11 be - llpllad with- t
brancSo
11-M1 80
21-35
No 12 AW,G, wire and a 16 ampere mdleating tYPa sWiteh. SSM
switch shall be locatedin the wall adjacent to the ein1L Food
36.80
wads grindes eha11 ba Viewith a minimum ht No. 18 A.W.G.
ei-108 2s'
30 '
2 -wire E,P.T,•3 thermoplastic hard Is or or equal and An
tpprova ground lns tpp0 roeeptecIs and cord grip cap must be heed.
2pPU"m
Over 100
The size of non and every appliance *bail be noted on the 0111101D
.ton form. '
Twentp Ampere t amP.l circuits shall supply genariI
outlet clreutts and eonvanitn. 0utA circuits only. 7,
DEMAND FACTOR FOR ELECTRICAL RANGED; Tne values to W
cooking and baking Appliances bt
E XaCh winkle It fly dwstllog or each occupancy of A multi-tamfly ,
dWelhAi spall havo at last one twenty xmpera (20 AMP.) oma• +
table below apply to on th more
are not applicable to other appliances. "
venfeties outlet circuit AupPly/ng current to outlets n required by
this Oedlnonce w1Wi a maximum of 12 aonveni0nee ouWete. pt,
Column I
Range. Over Colump II
eirsuit.
P FIXED APPLIANCES: Such as food grinders, dtshwashers. Washing '
IB50 watt. and Rang6e. Over
No, of Ranges under 3500 watts 35,000 watts
maeritnnt dryers, laundry tTsq lomLlona, bu1iL-In re1[Igeotw's, :
biRWn iCaexars, furnaces. At eondltlote[s. antl built -1t, hots[., err
1• 80 e
' tusnpttwwoth�r�aeppitasr apAainch aclrcWt atPPftb toyiied by No. r than AWA wire
FOR DDMESTto ELECTRIC
3 70 85
4 66 50
M4NIsiVM REQUIREMCINTS
RANOX6 AND CLOTHES DRYERS: Wire No
6562 45
59 43
1. Standard rrr But it -1t, range Wit oven ,.„ 3 No. 6" 111
it 4300
8 53
.:
aver 9 X.W........,.•.............................. P' Metal
9 31 35
raceway'
2. Standard or Ed lit -1w ran8e with oven 9 KW,
10 and ever 49 34
Th. else of each and every Appliance .hall be noted on the appltntb
of laws, group 1s 17cc¢vancy .......................... 3 No. 8 to
es • metal
torm.
glass statements are filed In wrlting from the owner or authorfa
raceway
" agent anitmtt Capacity of ranges, each range ahaH be figured at a
Y{.W.
3. Cooking menta or separate Duan. 3 No, t
ta) 4 elements or leo.................................. s.• meW
iesA than 12
HouAt re.
EouAa area SS'x32' Is an all electric home having:
racewag
tb) Separate ovorta-46 X.W. or leo................... 3 N0. 30 t6
1-132 KW HANDS
ay metal -:
4, Clothes dryers -4.7 KW, Or It44.................... 3 No. f0 4
3— 3 XW SPACE HEATERS
1-4 I:W SPACE HEATER
1— 21 KW WATER HEATER
?�' metal
1-1650 WATT BATH 1LEATSR
faCet[&I
tom'.
1-1 H.P. PUMP '
ie e a
•.
for b
"Por"t
or po
one of
uovidl
twice shalt. take
Ro Adontion. an,
Chalrma&et
s
n 10 Fmk.
do t
of 1
the
'1971:wuYeRVI80R8 NONB -... $.
igegrT: 9VPBRYIt4OR8 NONE
1N WITS, WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand d amASS
dt1 �tatal seat of !ha Board of 4,Opcetr October,
at Lha Oountp 4haagb
rlof calUoruls, the 14th day of Oothbee. 1999,
CauntY Clark and ex-0It1010 Clark the
Board o1 sIT 'Ishra of Orange• Count , caBtortth
MUM L. C44
J!� DAILY News Triblthe October .11%, 939 u�
a
a
LEGAL NOTICE LEOML NOTICE LEGAL NOTICE LEGAL NOTICE LEGAL NOTICE LEGAL NOTICE
---- e -_ t -- .
who
I. net laretrl employed Any hist other tins n Masse Icor each air heater over 1630 W.
• Electrician, electrical
la ng or yequipment
to install, airing maintain, a For
each meter mate[ .-.......... IncrK ], Mt� Hospitals, Mentn. Sam•
. ........... ...
repair or Occup wiring s employer
b to o i buildings fur or Y 3011- For
each hair dryer ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,>.'oW6* ,,,,,..,,.,,........ 1 c form to Jails. d SuI. fit.
owned or pekes i by his action f much
who dots uoG taiaNh MY am•. lror latra-red drying units not over 15.000 W ................ .... 1 SG fohen pies, a n tl Bu»dlrIn-
terlx3 or supPtfin In the execution of nnoh work. For Sure -red drying u.tts over 15.... W ........................ 3' when ptrs Lmtl ilbertiee of fn-
:. Maintenance wiretr or i No person or fnet6l1.i alter, weednabs' far Sure ....................................................... 1.00 matIn are elm11pi11Y restro7ned.
tarn or repair electrical wtrlas or equipment i of on buildiage owned Cont Appliances L Nurseries for full-time cart of "
Or otcupled by hie emplat'er wltliaUti first having OhC"�fKl a ert:3kaH tRothea -dryer ............................................. ... ... 1.00 children Under kingelm'i.en,
a[ competency from the Hoard o1 prominent far the county of Orsaga.. shtasher l.Co ah trach accomodating mora
........................................................
3. Duties of Maintenance Electrician. matt ............................... e...........,.............. 1.00 thea five persona). Hcapitate.
(a) It shall be the duty of every lialnteaams eleetrt*m to SatWge Disposal .................................................. 1.00 Sanitariums and sJmllRr build- .
e:omDty with all requirements of this and all other Ordinances 01 tbt Kitchen fan ............ •, ............. _ • . • • • • • • • • . • • • • • • • -• • • • ^ • • 1.00 lugs (each accomodating more a
County 0f Orange ab well AS all the laws o1 the state of California. W Miscellaneous - than five perwrisi• -
pllcmu, m electrical work. For each moving picture machine, Including Sound - L Homes for the Aged and
(b) It shalt be the duty of any pawn Employed sa a ma equpment uxd m connection therewith : 2.30 ° homes. for children Of kinder-
tamence deetrfctan to keep a detailed and pceurete record o1 nay a lot' each catling fan ........................ 1.00 ' gnrt+a age and ober (eaali
all electrical work connected" with exlatiag oi• new usiallntleas-which L par other permanently connected inns wltri a motor of nut accomodw mg more than flue
dont bylhlm personally or under his sup...Won• Such retard sura be more than !+ HP .. ....... ... ............ 1.00 Ixraonal.
malt In duplicate and A copy furnished the County Electrical Inspector Put all mot om (permanently connected falls) as•
each month. _ imtllatad•in motor table of fees ...... ............... see Table L Storage fait aandLng of has -
i. Ica event that more than one maintenance electrician U em- fir each X-ray machine 2'50 , ardovs and highly it, bis
Rloyed. the em foyer shalt deal nate the maintenance electriglsa who Por each sterillaer............................................. 3.00 or explosive materlala other -
Op gq ..... .....
Small Supervise tha work of the othArm. " , For each dental unit .............. I.On _ titan tiarnmsbto It.ulda. -
E, Journeyman Electrician. Amy. f»dividai employed by a Maetr Sar. aid barba! Ocie EI Storage and hsadtlaR 0[ Crass
EUetrleIan who to the bona -fide possessor of a valid certificate of eon- For each capacitor over.5 EVA capaelty ,.................. ....... SAO I, If nod III ilammalp- It
potency Issued by'the Board of Examluera of the County ,s .Orange per each welder of the transformer type .... .......... >. 1.00 autda, s apecfiled 1n U.H.C.
qualifying the header of such certificate to work At the'trode or catling each self-contained vegetable snit meat case .. i standard 9-1; div claiming
of electrician for celery or wages, but who doe. not furniM any all-, each deep freeze box ...................... plant. using flammable It-
Wrials or supplies in the execution of his work. , r Inch beverage pad ate cream cabinet .. 1.00 quids, tapaint stores With bulk
P. Owner. An Owner is deemetl to moan tit bona -fide owner of the tar Inch drinking fountain ... 100 battdlfIIa: paint sboPs and
legal or equitable tfCle to any PlopettY• < ' 'lion each show case with ligata ............... ....... 1:00 my painting tooms and
6. Perwn- The term Petaim ' wherever used In this Code, shag per each time clock ....... ... .. .. .. 1.00 ��,
d to and bt;deamed to include any person, firm or eorpomtbn. Tor each hulldhag moved •to a aew•locatlon .. ... 2.tb ' t WtwdwotklaR ait►biish»tents.
SECTION 2 Sbr sash Murphy type kitchen ................ ..... ... 2A0 i� yy]anlnR m111s and box foe -
A. OrgaaUatfua of.the.Board -.of Examine . The Hoard, to be YRowh tars- - 1'. tor1In: shops. factorieqs where
the Hoard of Examine» or Elstrlclsae of a County of Orange, is t Ove IIP •••-•••••-••.•• Y 1.00 loam, combustible nbre or
�Cioa a ..............................
atobp-crested. The Hoard M'Examiners dial cuasist of the 8uperin- Orem a ICP
and not morethan 1 HP ... I� ;dust U .manufactured, pro -
tandem of Building and Safety, the County Electrical Inspector• -One Over 1 HP and not over 3 HP ... ... 1.1� )` ' • caused or generated: wart
eater Electrletaa. sad one Journeyman Eleetrichmi said Master Eftp five 3.IIP sad not over g HP ... 200 a' where hUaly ComWt-
tiMtan end douraepmaq Electrician shall be appointed by and shall Orae a HP and not aver 15 ICP + -2.50 ]` ' tlbhe7Q matstlal a
ve at the pleasure of, the Hoard of Supervtwas; of the -County of Over 35 HP and not over SO AP $.300 a- $, Bepalr garages. '
ge:. An compenptfoa for. their servfca& as members of such' Board er SO 7CP and not over 100 HP 5100 i. •' .g, Alfcfafi tepafr haagas•
ssmfners, said Master' Elactriatan and. said Jou^ney,Oan ffitctriean er Soo HP suet not overl5o0 HP 10.00 i. ;
shall receive the mum Ot-lgve. Dollars ($3.00) Itch for tach meeting'at: over 500 HP -10.00
r ..... 1.00 L O WU" filling and ernten
ndtd: provided that such compensation M.It-not exceed the win d llztra outlet for portable motbU over 1 FIP'eich
Fl IMitam (i5.00). 1n anp .Oris dor, plus mileage from his place of 9htkt$ far Commercial, Hotels, MoUls and Existing Eesidential , v anitt etora¢tlp strhCeepet `
nCe to the Dlac. otmeSeting and roturp. Tna allpwaas for mites[. aid Parking and Christmas Leta $ f M�IebanE..of Part. sad mean -
shall be at the rote PrevtAlhg■ in the Coun4y of Or9aga. • MrM 20. outlets, each ........... .. y: n Sbmanoe rorlutrl no Opan '
' r, H. - Dutiea of Board of Lxamfase: The COuat!mbd trice In ``V ApdHIODft}'outlets, Seth ............ .. 10 t tWneg yie}ding, Or the We a! '
Bail act as ehafrman.. of the Board of Examhacra, and 'shall datgw ib[ ash s it. or fraetton thereof multiro.tlet assemble .10 x, s iiia tlamae,ats 33OtUds. y
,tae ttme'aad lace f� tae regular moatinge ot. soon Board. which L00 ,5`n q L.: aµt and rettdl;
pp raga• }br Inch mutipit apPitance outlet nssembip. ?r buadingt-dtlnkfM andoffiga T
tar hteeshaga eehaiL' adnjeCt w the alt of s.ch ehoirman, be held. nue aOgns sad High Potential Gas Tab. Lighting: dt"t-
oach ;month. Avail. meetirs6s of Lha Hoard of Esamfael'a, the-preatae Ona sign and out transformer . f 2A0 'j.1 ]� stabtlMments bavinR as
of two; memhere (hereof shall constitute s quorum for the traneaction M Each additional sign and one transformer at sae mine (it open '' ty .lead of lop • this
sup and all m since of std -Hoard. Ot ..the :two membem ..100 I
� 100, prtht3ng Eaats.. mualcE- ;„�;
a quomm, one member Ot the l]eAartmont of Huliding and Safiety d 1ae'aon (same build{ngt .. _ i,•� ,
etthe Neater or the Journeyman Elwtrlciea must be I(or ataSxtra tmnsfocmer, tlasaer or ttmt cloc]t ...E ppEyeo an� Lint atitlow,
:tit tae Baty o/ Me Board: of Examin a to pzoent. It Zara addltlanat sign and one transformer on came lot .. 2 OD 3aciari®s and wmksaoM uainE
such ezammatioas for determhain 4IIe PrePsro sad tondnM Siam snit one transformer moved to a new location 200 ,: matlrUU: not Edgh1Y. Liam- 4
emrtltlCatb •Of comp.Eeooy fa requglred bs the• taermBoLhApplicants
lekmnIIeaafCla., loan sett atlditionat sign end transformer moved to the 109 r arabin o[. eombustlbls,' storage
It $halt. be the duty of the Board of Examinerew came new location ................... sad ria rooms for o0mbua-
ceats as ahall.hAve Successfully'regtater aura aptill- freer altertn or changing lettering of iii exlettng�slgli ids W. Sze paint btore with- ,
passed .such examination and who: have par center Ing (book -up) of each alga br it Orativo out bulk gandilni {gees Es- i)
mth4COq 111.11 d w hoid'eucla t 4rtlncate. Outline tubtag •••••••••.•'.•••••• •'•••• '••"'• "••.. 100 Ra tion alk Ir de1131 f1 a K
C, }pertif tre of Competency. All eerfiflcatca of tom tent ts-
''said under this Ordinance shall be valid, unless revoked or�atia y Lamp Holding Devices Used on signs Of Maz4aces aembEltBuildings), Ino res-
Pended POr ewh limp holding device used in connection with a sign ^ 2 AjroTai b►aielti `,•;
for the terms of the floral -year of theft fasusnee,. end sbail. In eveq ` pair work ii done except s -
q or marquee: From 1'to ZO Inclusive- each f .00
nes, et !res On the thirtieth dayofJune IollowfnR their issuance. All Next 106, each ...................................•OI change
e of pelta "C' inalo :.
p02
ilcne :flea atilt M Aapabie in advance w the Superia4endent of Hu1M• • • • • ^ • • ^ • • • • • •' •' •"
CC no
and Batety:of the ounty of Orange and Msll be charitable for ark Por each additional -. 4,y flam0. A, mi the ns of
:Temporary, Permanent or Constructlonl�olea:' Cote atN
y'eatot'portionofpsr,faGhetollowlagam0uats: pby temPoron. permanent or construction poles, each f 200 ,3highly`-;
1. 51 Of The num of Five {.5.00} per year or nay pm.. 'lawn q UnaergrnMadume and Work -with services
Of"
gamRea•
' the2 Xslatenanee EltettlefalL The rum of Ten i1O.0o) Dot Temporary Underground Semlce .. .. f 500 „ r
per year or attp portion thereof; ( Dollars Temporary Woik-with service (restdeatfal) 200
Temporory Work with service (commerctaU ... 500 , • 4otwid �•
-i. Journeyman Electrician. The examination fee for a journey- ,W # I and cramerls. taewrica and ` ..
d elsctWIM's itoense bhaiI be Lha sum 19 Five {$5.00) Dollars to be got over ;z KW ;
Over !i KW and not over 1 KW 1.00 r workshops nt ltv Incombaet-
ppaaid prior to taking the a the gum o ono the renewal fee for such ••'
)Ottrnsyman 110cAea shill be the sum of Two {fZ.06) i3olUrs payable aa- ............. 1.50 ,s4, .t. bylE4 Wit' nOIIroxpUalvt mater, 'k
Over 1 KW and not over 5 KW 200 - fWs, storage and Arm= nuWy In advance and shall expire on the thirtieth day Of June fn cash Over 5 KW and not'over 30 KW ..250 - t of lncombwtiblu and aoa-ex-
per' Over 10 KW and not over 15 KW - 2,W piaave materia". '
D,. tianceltotlon o1 Licenses. The Botnd of Suptrviwns 0f tae County Over 15 KW and not Duct 2sKW 9.iN1
of Ont may suspend or revoke the Ilcedsa Of any e1. It
licensed pyet a3 KW and not aver 50 KW ..... ....... ... $.
here»ndAr for any violation of this Ordinance or for incompetency. Over 50 KW and not over 100 KW ........ 500
Hotels. ipiztment ficoses,
SECTION 3 Ove }qI KW and not over 500 KW 750 ` docmltmis, lOdRtoORg •novas. t
A No electrlOsi AermfE ahem be issued by the Superintendent of •••••••••-•..... .• - •,•• it W paOnYtefle tefeh
Hufldlog sad sal" 10 any perwn not registered e a Master Electrician Over SQO r A yg • et • _ " •" - OOn��®, moat .. than 10
deemed In this Ordinance, provided that the Superintendent may NO leR no teeeta herald 1provided, shell ba permit ..,....feed •bi� L00 � Pero"). .
lsene a Permit w s totrwn who pas zegi8,.ered and nes mr;, the on- POr Ony self-contained factory wired aPbroveA unit .. .... 200
A1t101U sit forth in t U Ofdinans as an8 far s Limited Mater Elec• A fee of 810.06 shall be paid for each annual Mafatenance Eleetrtefen`� I
few provlde8.that tit Superintendent may Issue a permit t0 It Mut aG th0 tfm¢ such Permit Is Srsneit Fera for all new work 1n DweHlnRa.
tit currier of the legal or liftable title w any. property 1n the unin- stalled tender such permit share date of lst.prerious inaptettoa shall be
ratliorattd terrlwry 0f rho County o[ Orangt used eaoltistveiy for roar- paid. according to the above Schedule, at the rima when much woi"A 1S ' ' ;ff 1 private MragAn sheen Spit
dsnet,. to aitet, raDaft of lastali any elactrtcal work 1n Or o0 bvittlmgs m lnape[ted; these tees shall be in addition to fe0 pub at time when mgiinor bundlbRs need Am ra-
^tmises m connection with such a.ltlrnce nr atceswry buS(dings. 1t annual pacmft fa feaued. ' ; o.aotia eply when a" war
'tis said slsetrlcal wOfk U 4one bp:httnaelt or by a member of ha house SECTION 5 one thmaand sq- lath
INSPECTION AND CERTIFICATES, The County Electrical Insgotor ty, 110001 W tt• in arM•
B: No alwtrkmi work for whfeh a permit to
to anuli be coni. f F
faanoed 1n oe on any :bufleins; or rtrriiErs until a perrah to tlo such shall' have the rlggat during rswnable hours to enter any build Ing in t , 2. Limit Wes to res t: G$'} Itfp. '.
wdrk shall have seen "Sinai obtained for tit owner's caro an". the discharge of hIS aftfcl ovt!a, for the purpose of ain.king any in -
C. No ejectrlaal tqutPmont snail bt fnatsllM xlthipap or oa an ;Ptoilon or teat of any ,tectal. wiring, electric davits or elwtrfO meter
rt nisi ,
kliiiding, str»eturo'or pramiae puWfOly or prlvattty owrttd nor shalt ths1x11ed Or contained therein. 3' wain Mtth
nnv Alteration or addition bt laiQe in auY such
"hat r Vpon Hoch completion Of any installation of electrical e.uipment t �y
g tq.iP .ane ) A NOX•S/CI•ALLtO gCeATB� CAK.DS ' lf9BEP.:»
wiahout seavring a lr$trplt thocetor from tho Suprrlute0dept o1 etldlba which he. been made antler a permit other than an annual permit, 1t ..
mad Safety, except as Provbed in 4hU groilnn And tzetpt teat mom permit shalt be the duty o[ the perwn, firm OT Corporation maKUR the fn- P • Accessory Buildings TharbW..
wut bt rtgmr.d to exsute any of the ctrtuaea of electrlca! work ntrecuts Mntiptfon to n0itfy the County Eleatrfcal Inspwtor who aha l inspect Nan•matr.tllo MMtlied sable shall hot b neltd„ '
Ica ccs followingg paragKphs (1) to (3) tnehwfve; Lha uufattaflan t won tm thereafter practicable. Nop•mtU611o'MWChad able Mall not . SCO la
(1) Yu repair work. Lha teplaCement of Iampe bt the inn- W1xn thS Cannty Eltctrlwl Inapa ¢Cot iI it. the installation to be In conaro4e, Rll, plater or :amliar fintali, N -mIft bw
nxtIan Of portable atettrkal tgitlpatent to suitable Pt 1 shall not be l used a hnflniMed'a ate nst.ln
tierpi- conformity vita the prcW.tO»s of Lhis Ordinance, he shat] isue to the R�ppa�aoeet under floors Of bundltig. tilt gni
tftintntfyfnattitad [eteptaelee, prJ sop, farm 0r tor maklnt tUa 1neLeaaLlop, a eer4lricatt at 1Eee �1�l a44ppqp of a lmet fit
h, nor B)r PartabU'
{2) 7ne pfovlelmn..of this �'dlflanr. Wial1 not spiffy t0 lnslaaa-�aPp:'Ofal, with dupilcate copy for de lvtrY to the owner, authOrlslaR ino f s. AIIMOlEBD CABL11 Single Fam y Dwtltla •nit A
It uaM by atsrtrleitp supDiY. mllway or Elly to Inhim,1 n 11t*' o{ +lie lnstatlatlon ono tonneotfon to the etpply Ot elstrlety and 'PlfeeeLa: Armored E¢ibie shall no4 b. tptd `iBz ex
C1tilltfa !n tho es¢roUs of their Inner on as a Utell,v, (ri.a11 ae++A wrl4ten no Will of such authotfzotfon to tat aaency supplvlag j bred stilt shall not bt ambaddtd:in mtinmP ,
{1) To Instai3atfon, alttfluma a! repair oe atectrleai ei hvmoat i'lle eclricat xrvlce when the final Certf[IeRta of Ocouparicp has heea c ppletar at' semuar lentM. Armoetd-tabic Mh> »at
installed by car for ap olectticav avppty aarnry for i,, ver tv»rn ► Of of approval els issued authorizing the room," ott finished oeliare, aor, In baMmehte (not• In space
Of such aatncp in the ganentlon, tmnamlrafOn, distribu and u.a o! a wmpata[y niatntln[ton, auca cerGiflrate shall be fuauad bulidinge without bsemSntit car oellaa wdera
tion ormetering at eltotrkrity. I e es�.1•n e.c a oma to bt stated tharnln, and shall be revacablt by the a fast higgh, nor far portaote ¢units
D, Applir;.ata» for saran permit dozaNbing iht work to nes tlont ansa+_,+ip p Ettatrlcal inspettoe for any roux, IWr ouch temporary service p LOT VOLTAQE REMOTE CON'IRtOL wteina s>'
•bt rondo iii wrltiffe to t)fS I;.rOLMra1 Insym Or by the person, firm or,a f_,of Py 1a9 e11 Daifare .bail ae Paid by the ePplirsnt to ih« Or- rane.enl <+t li l)1 h.c )nlrillone. x»d appltenoa
nofpOeAueft inalafilna tilt work. 'I`ht At' trail n snail nt arenmtabied partmtnt a{ H1110, and SAfety ono tush wrvlCO shall not r.�-1-1 a p•Irma mal la l I ill Ur b x11 d n tt Ilaws•
t4 nY flianX Fam9 s e Wit
e.alt ustto'. of load far a®er9Ca, ftetle.+& and t,irtad at tlilrty 1301 syn. 1 7 nli H a I O -.11� -� scat latae r I lut me ea
'+• b $1, a', F -tint. to the Etecuic.l Immertlan Depart When spy ti¢ctPlcnl Inatl
S CY it Ytep a may at na6eisMtry 4o de&stmt + it n La 41 4t1n e I d a'. i t 1 1 41 I I +7 ++�, i li ec �tnn al
Y e I J I !!i h ref antarml9 with t [1 n r I a 1 11 I i
y f of a h Ii I I w 4 �fi4 a N
' 1 that ti' 1 A K 11 it Ali 1 4 , 1 + d '.rv^d-,� :•v-,a"r� .'t;i.c},",
I
de,e
t p 1 ail wC1, Ax Is found
be tr r rm +, n,r •t I s n d r Et al
_ I th 5 tr O de f the State of C.1,1 1u. a,. er cue fee required by Sec ion
f l• u W tt a - lttl sin:4 has bfPt1 p td.
•1 inapPptlon, the ln. .!incl h -Is not fallml t he f I. con-
i:'.) U 1t . 1 n.b 1 fnimlty With the provi=f s of this Oratnance. EI! t 1 S f t. O -
i3i rr baser n i ar l_ a acts of the State of California. the County Elec i. t I pester shed at
(4) Loratlorr of i" y address, s a request the person. firm r mPoreticn t a>,lnL rl'111 istslintion by
(5) Physical dimensions; '.,it tj notice to -r,-t Sash odeffcls whi°h have been ound to ..ftt.
,G) Nu other of transformers and kilovolt amperes (KVA) rat-.' Nnrk on such Installation shall not proceed until corrertu ms bave been
In I; of total; made and shall not be covered until approved by the County Electrical
(7) Ilcw sign is supported: (Inspector. SECTION fi
(el The number of the building permit therrfnr.
F. Maintenance Elettiteinn'a Requirements—Annual Fer; tits. In lieu; HE -INSPECTION. The County Site Ica! Inspector may make perl-
of an Individual permit for each Installation or alters, uun an annual per ndir'liy R ih rou€h relus rC llim e` .Ile installatlon in of a>n buildings or
mit .hall, upon applfcatlon `therefor, be issued to tnY Person, firm or, premi.Ps fall el[•etric wising, electric devices and electrical material
(XIrPOratIOA i¢gWAr y emD10Yltog M or more regl.sterrd maintenance now It .illcd r that may hereafter be, installed IV thin the C,orty of
electriClnne for the purpox of inatailingg�� altering and ma:nu;nun::.ler.', Orrtpce and wizen the tnstnuatfon of any -rich •icing, devices, or a
trlett wiring Ot ,egWPment is,. or on bvlltltngs or Premises owned ori terlal is found to be in n dangerous nr unss[e condition, the person. flim
dean ed by Lha appplicant for such permit. The app licut lon for this .1. It cora•°rattan
or PotiWcel subdivision owning. using or operating the
'nusa ppeerIamlit shalt be made In writing to the Superintendent of Building' "-bah be norlffed itt writtlra f .lull fact and;s the
and S&Iety. and shall contain the name and registration number of each rY repairs or thangrs rrenquired to place such lring, tl i and
mafater, ce electrician employed and the legal description of the prem -.,tori,[ in a safe contlfiton required
such eak completed within ILI-
lss6 on Ihich the work'ia to be done under he permit. [ d-yS; or I .or reasonaale cried Spec tied by the Counuv Electrical
The. mAintimanee electrician shall currently keep an accurate T¢COM InsPC.tOi in said notice and
Ht on Iles, of aR elactneal work which hoe bean dant under it, annual Ordln-nce, he Cotmty Elfct
psmlft durlhgg Lha pteeedtng calendar month and such current record eon ter or order the dissent
sktµl be sceesible to the Electilcal Inspector. devices or material an folio
- Within fifteen days following -the end of each calendar month, the s[atlation nt such wirin de
pataan, firm or corporation to which an annual permit has been issued rested by the County BI tr
1.11 transmit to the electrical insppeetor a duplicate copy of the maim etion os Political bn tw
reliance electrician's record of elsout cal work done. or shall do bo within two
O. Submlealon of s fats. statement shall constitute suf[lcle it any allow any such service to
qvu foe revoking any electrical permit issued under the authority oflhre County Electrical i ---I
t4als Section, shalt b. made In y dwell!
SECTION a dwelling with. t tilecense
FEES FOR PERidITS, INSPECTIONS AND PENALTIES (persons 111-11 i ruder or pre
Feet Be aired making any to .tit si lnsPe
[al The idea renuired in this Section must be paid to the Superin-'The County Ele trl.al^InspP.
or
Of
al approvsinrtla
on an else- type
same fees as are re•1 tie.
Or[
.panty of any building are
:horleed and a permit in
,j
•ate rw "lenge wire.
• �•� tri rac.aoya, req.uWd mP Lite b
9.' i Rall
bellapprovedinsulation far not les.
,r 'I l lie No aas smaller the° NO. tis for fig) A
b ed
a. lit - 1i the size of bases, molp1 il. f_u may she
tis, r n n tegnlring s minitnum at three cubic Inches !n ad,
telae to I'llneeded h. fThree or ecnmcfnch., the I_ the be..
be Sntre0.sed Aernrdmgly.
S. box
LOW vol teas switches Used to operlidate the one" shaft be a
�pprenld
type
x of b aoime Otlbe arWtable marts ter rfaB e< 1
d. The trlay's hail be d
which a is lU11pitfd d In ,such ..near the, is may eie�
removed and rfiits. it atter the outlet box containing eat
OnrfAled without removing Plaster or the finish of the but
T. APRtOred relay assembly or aDProved relays and related e
meat properly Installed In apDtoved metes cabinet may be p
ttiT,, -1-1 'Pull
waere nd mxlkwa a Is ere�pnip (delve lto arolay aese',
,,,here space 1s less it foot ,ben three td) feet. relays .hall M 1pea�n
&tilWite area. (A switchedalight sand be pinsctnlied Aot meal"
three lit foot from said assembly with switch installed
of wattle hole.
shall pay fell [ee es are required by thea
IT!
Iis
fou
ni
vent
stet
F
9. Relays shall not be Installed in fluorescent fixtures of tae
tical Inspector is hereby empowered to ass-
innetrce of electric service to such wiring.
ifxtures unless such textures with rtteya installed are: an
by a recognized testing laboratory.
labor,
to :be defectively Installed until the in-
0. Where non•insulatetl , era used to tester taw vet
s or material has been made safe as dl-
cat Inspector. Any person, firm or turner •
Any
- _ doctors in place, such vainsulated etapiw µrag. festeaa
conductor only. Where Inillijted, ata used, or
ordered to urn, in ch elertru3
..
approved method, such staple may reason or lit PPart moi.
Or" hours and shall not reconnect
be reconnected unto notified t0 do w by -
one conductor.
10. The low voltage ponductor rally bt lnetaited !rt the ami. col
or. Provided. however, that no re-mepecWoa
Ifo seI. Occupied
erson
or raceway wltb the Otho Wfrw of the. elrouft yyIOvid.d flu
voltage COgdUCLOI Aja aA lneulaW4A
the o-whileoccupant thereof. NO or
the County Electrical Inspector from
the mrcuit equni to note
D DUPLEX DWELLINGS; Until" Dimillit"
coon except Ili oeotlpled dwelling houses.
shall make periodical inspection of All
Tae ml'.1' Wlring R Ulrements ghat, W Dex)tih metal 00
i EletW o wtring insts.etl fes re on s an*" ffle ref"
ousel.
SECTION 7
ed by the
form Building Coda andel "A" W R^.. OcoUDlmptog fAelseSva
Table of Groupe of Occupeoctes 1n Section 7). The.
ALLATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
slaGdFlp;q
encfoeuees Shaw bd approved rigid metal [wdW;
trlcal installations !Industrial, commeretU
' metallic ttikhl q _ _
It I
the proviµonses, Lhis l,dtonu ace,oth. Eor'lece
01
HiE�
'mo4tuTs;
y State of Csiaom and with approved stand-
ad property. In" every case where no &pactf 0
fgf
similar- finish.
. or o apeclfto standards of installation are
,.I Safety Orders or by this Ordinance, con•
Practicable to
G tu$L 1ng.RICAL
,ra ss, laid down 1n the latest edition with sup•
ECT
be
Electricµ Code. as approved by the American
d3 be prima facie evidence Of conformity alto
P
used in .hot
` tight Httmga.
afety co elle and property.
otricai materials, devices, apphancea fittinge
grmMd 1n µa
:moLture.
or used in the above described territory snail
l
X RIGID- METAI
metal conduit
re provfatons of tries Or it_.::, the Electri
California, and with approved atanderds
walla; uadergrc
to of
as
Unito te10
PeLsb d
Wast
CgnQitIts Orn tae
ratoLtsttles Inc&bastng
aPProv¢8tbynthe
he American'tsndarde Asaocintlon, The United
leant oqe fab,
ds, or other similar inatltUtlons of recognized
Inches of payee
.facie evidence of conformity with approved
y'.
_
PsaitiosiaLz
and .lb`r,tg.
'tevfoualy toed materiels eh bell not be reused
-andtiatara pea,
novel obtained 1n advance from the Covgty
bbNrW,ad=
een sopen
Is.Three copies of the naw Electrical Eatery
office o/ the Clerk of the County of Grange aufl
lietiresn aAilti
UesQ as a with
iy reference and made 6 mart °£ this OI Items
the atterlor
asgs1oUeto»pe
at the State of Cµtf n1d.
we alk
aaker's nameplate, trademarks - or other iQentl.
listed on the outside where It Is vieibie at time
s
aura
E
rlesl materials, devices, appliances. ifcttnga and
Iunder Lhe Drovlalona of this. Orellnano..
____________ ____w..•,,.w n. wire .free are re-
Y,Z.>
waters' or dri4e
2..... meas, lnmlaP;:
A tosueti person e4 the address shbavn in his apyticatloti foi'ierred tb or apcease. oy numoe. ... .----• ---
tit of the repelypt of Lha request for nnccttntton And ure�0e canstruetl to mean Lhe number of gauge such Wire accordlgg to
r�
given 4heretOr. TTiGrett o: anQ Lbeteafier, such Fermat .hail Standlyd American Wlre Gauge specltltion.,a, abbreviated as AWO".
A new"permit mayt iioen be abtaiaed in the wine manner F -f. Minimum WSre $tae: For Lhe supply of current So general P_
supply
D&ymant of trio wine Sees N are required for Rn trig!.µ. pitance and convenience reeeptncte clrcutts, no co.I. ret waalter thea
1I:o. ]f A.W.O. alta .11.11 be lnatelleQ. No convenience reoeptaCie or ap-
NEW CONSTRUCTION pllance receptacle shall be lnatatlpd or operated on a general lighting
(Single az a1Wt!-04mf1y7 Feer listed below 1nthls paragraph I branch circuit at an9 time 1n any occpp&ncy.
dal tiew tonstruetfoa faelluQt ail electrleal mstallatioaa whsa F-0. Conductors: Conductors noIntel need to carry currant shall
�Itod to int square footage of exec. be of MpPer unless otherwise provided in this Ordinance. ,,here 0011-
t tic) per squaro foot Dlug, 91.90 for each service, plus 51.00! duster alae. era given fn this Ordinance. the,
shat] apply Z to rPer
ittfmv&ttce. wnductars. It other matexiata are used, the size shall be @tinged &c�,
,-sent (?St) per equate toot fox. dsNched or attnaheQ gn-I cortltn ly.
. the rams a¢rrtca. F-�. Conductor.-ldentlflcatlon: Conductors ahjtl be Identified N
.brats- Uw regular Its schedule below for all areas excelt'Foilows:
Single ennductore No. 1 sad amel3er Intended for uw N Identified neo•
f cent (tsc) ptr square foot for detached or attached guageal oral conductors of circuits shall have the outer covering Dnlahsd to show
amt service fa hotel and motel otcupaneiea, a white color. Neutral condnttors IorRlr Chia No. 1 sil have 6 whim
Industrial and Assemblies: outer covert ng, or shall be identifled by a dlt oil'v. permanent mark-
Ulat.Fee schrnu,e inz at see terminal and at pull box, iunetfan box or .!mbar wfrl°gg
REGU6,AR FEE SCHEDULE'
Th I"Imm, The covering of elf ungrounded conductors µu11 be finish
(Listcd Alphabetically) to show wird color other than White.
Permit Fos ats1,0(r, Dltis 91.40 !or each texvks on Parrott, P-5. Insulated conductore used solely for grounding PUIPaws shall
Parts tees ea, listed below for lirauilntiaM. b! gran 1n color, except where used its the common grounding
doctor for service equipment and wiring sY®time. Conductors having a
Itatrkat range (standard) 9 I.00, pouA.....tug shall not be used for other than grovading Purpoaee.
g upits with oven (domeatfct 1.061 •9. Deitnitton of 8'eetltr: Anv -0 ebb of n bb system be-
�flditWnsi oven (domasticl - --- I. tween the service equipment, or Lha generator swltchboaTd of as leo•
Ftttrft tensa ICommeecufl • •- •- - 2.06, fisted plant, and the branch clMlit over -currant device,
fCardin21i not Durr 15,00(1 W ....................... i.SUi
,plant.
OF CIRCUIT HREAKER RANDLEB NOT E%•
tComon mill) orae 15,666 W . ......... ................. S.inl'CFFIAHLE
a-ktifie, to=„tor, wa^,« i•un, coffee maker Whety eingie-pDit clrarllt breakers an used fur protection of tingro rUlo
'mg device under lio00 W. .............. •............. 1.00'Pd conductors In a branch circuit. the .maker handles :Hail W or-
-..lie, z t err, watt..• trnn, r,Ufiee maker ( ranted urdisOenna¢t all unggrmmdnd conductors a11r U tala"UslY.
Ong davice .,00u W, or over 1.50 TABLE OP GROUPS OF OCCUPAN_ CY�_
--- eEP STAGE SEATING CAPACITY
CROUt OCCUPANCY IN ANY ONR ROt)M
IO�e DIVISION
tixttain PafH ..... .. �•.... ]000 4r more ai u. fixture Ort ......••••••••••••••••
pule. tach 1,20: .'A __1. Assembly 13 Yes
moreUry vapor £IaLum 4s, tine game pole, CUC14
I' Law than 1000
trap 5 KW ............ .......... S 5Mr!E 1. Assembly BuhdmRs, ,Yes 000 or more
NN ill not Over 15 KW .. Se°7 2. A;aelnblY Htlnf3inga No
W 1466 3, Aae�mhly Hrhidfpas No Leat tbau SOD
r the Inayeel n of the imliolistic at ai ma t verrt-•nr eri•� 1. Stadiums, ftevlewln: Stands
rap 4ws s^lull t,r charged ss, pr0.ided f tr,rr t the wine, and Amtfawasat Park Sente-
rt n[t r»art! anuli b. made for the g not a.vi u.utahation wndn! turfs not included within tlltAlgn wit any cleh motor anaPat4l as t, ar.0 A nor D1Vlalnn 1 And 2
adNle iso Appiisncea — Nsir7tYers l and 3 OCaitp H OccUpantlee•
, Hw1ax LncluQU'A 1950 W ........................•.•. 9 •W•
a
e6Lical 14e
walls he
!the we
a in
apRrrift or topped i
Y
e ' i SECTION 9
ALTERATIONS AND ADDITIONS
A 11ltuerraa110°6 m estebefon t0 all alteIMIA and ra°twaia ell
ulat.1 at,.. hall 99 made f1 comp leanas With the Prot
this OrdiA&noe,
to lossRoaa wham not” conduit M required, but eqe
A
RM
/ed
STATE OF CAUFORNIA
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS
ELECTRICAL SAFETY ORDERS
Reprinted From
California Administrative Code
Title 8. Industrial Relations
EFFECTIVE FEBRUARY, 1955
Issued by the
DIVISION OF INDUSTRIAL SAFETY
965 Mission St., San Francisco 3
909 S. Broadway, Los Angeles 15
Sohl by
PRINTING DIVISION, DOCUMENTS SECTION
Sacramento 14, California
Price $1.50, plus tax
trl*ftd & CALIFORNIA ITATI FMINTINO OFFICE
EDMUND O. BROWN
Governor of Califs- a
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS
John F. Henning, Director
D&ARTMENT OF INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS
DIVISION OF INDUSTRIAL SAFETY�CSIBIiITBES OF THE
Thomas N. Saun Chief DIVISION OP INDUSTRIAL 5AFMY
Supervising Eiectricai Safety Engineer, E. E. Carlton
in 194e Division of Industrial Safety, Created by act of the Legislature
ged with the responsibility
of supervising places of em_
ployment to see that they are safe. Its functions
INDUSTRIAL SAFETY BOARD
previo
eised by the Industrial Accident prevention Bureau, ugly were eser-
John F. Hanning, chairman
which had its origin
in 1814 within the Industrial Accident Commission.
Eason J. Davis
Ralph B. Bronson
Under Division 5, Section 6312 of the Labor Code, the division has
authority to:
J. F. Hatton
R. R. crunsky
Enforce all laws and lawful orders requiring work and work places
to be safe;
Investigate disabling or fatal industrial injuries;
Check whether work
places are safe;
Prepare standards of industrial safety {Safety Orders),
which if ap-
proved by the Industrial Safety Board have the effect
of law; and
Establish special orders, or rules and regulations to cover a specific
individual place of employment
A list of Safety Rules and Orders ' to date of publication
The Industrial Safety or process of work.
approving pro Board is the body responsible for reviewing and
Posed Safety
appears on page IY of this booklet They apply to all places of ,
employment under the jurisdiction of the Division of Industrial
Orders. The board consists of five members
who are appointed by the Governor for overlapping
Safety of the Department of Indutrial RehUons. Price lists and
terms of four years.
The Director of the State Department of Industrial Relations
information relative to then and other state publications will be
man of the board. is chair -
furnished on request by the State Printing Division, Documents
JOHN F. HENNINGI
Bec ion, Bammento 14, CaMbruis.
Direeter. Depar&Wat of Indxetrfat Retst{o«e
Clis&rasa. loduotrW
ggfetg Board
E!J
0
f_ 54 "-n-ss ?I 181
D*Uihd Analysis
Rev'sim F" February SS, 1951
Article _ & 3ICAL SAFtsaT ORDERS
INDUSTRM UFM
1, - "
The list of Industrial S&fdY Orders and InsPectieftPOM
2. Genteel
3- 04101de Wirvac—ather -a..
issued by the Division of Industnel Sahtr is - _ H' and Lmw Voltage
Orders and Forms are for ask by Printing Division,
Documenis 5. W - -ft
e; As
'
Section, Sacramento. Price bil eel
g
Aerial Passenger Tramway Safetya
r and Ina
Boiler and fired Pressure:
S. Tn
Compressed Air Safety Orders
Its Switchag a
Construction Safety Orden,
13. Swi FUturs,andPbselboatift
Electrical Safety Orders
13 . Applinneft
Elevator Safety Orders
14, Cepuften
General Industry Safety Orden
5
Logging and Sawmill Safety Orders
1 4L Storage Battarift
IT. Wiring Itlra
Blares Bell Signals (printed on
Design
I& woritjalC space
Biline Safety Orders
and
19. Mined Tunads under
Petroleum SafetyOrders—Drilling and Pry
and Similar Lmanse
rs
Petroleum Safety Orden— ding. rtat' a Handling So Ciao" and
Loading Safety Open Pr 21° Eleva
Pneumatic Explosives , and Quarry
and and
Escalate=
Baine Safety Orders
Ship and Boat Building Safety
Article 4. services—High and Low—voltage
Article
22. H&Urdo" TAMttose
23. Garages and Oem
24. Mstion icttars Studios facia
25. isuad Recording and sissilar
20. E' t
Picture Prejeetors lad
Equipment
27. meters, Including Motion Picture
5
21k Signs and Outline
20 Isolated Plants 0 D V Lishtlt,
3u Circuits andEquipment0
at More Titan oVolt, o Operating
31. %-ys Equipment tr
332 Electric
emneq Lighting
cwelders
34. Lightning
Arrestors
35. Remote -Control
and Signal Circuits Ierg9 Power
38. Communication Circuits
37. Provisions for Accident Prevmtion—
HIA-voltage circuits meetand Blquip-
3B. 'Tables
Tunnel Safety Orders DETAILED ANALYSIS
Unfired Pressure Vessel Safety Oz4evs
Article I.
Definitions
Window Cleaning Safety
2300. Definkinag
Section
230s. General Article 2.
General
Materials
2.403. Voltages
INSPECTIONREPORT
. Installation and Maintenance
2309. Connections and splices
231Mounting Requirements
(Prise Noted as Pa of 50 )
2310 Article 3, Outside wiring—Ot1 her than Services
ices
No. 152—Elevator Inspection Report
2317. O
� Outside ]festoon Lighting
No. 21T—Elevator R R
3318 Candi an g
2321. Outdoor Lights ng
NO. 000 -Rosier
2310 U Conduction
2322. T-ney Cantaett Conductor.
No. 001—Unfired Pressure Vessel
No. 002—Liquefied Petroleum Gas Installation
Article 4. services—High and Low—voltage
Dzsc*xAWnr'e M"Pro
2330. Service Equipment
233L Overcurrent Protection
2332 Meter Treneformere and Meter
2333. Testing Equipment
ding and Guarding
HIGH-VOLTAae; S=vie.e
2834. High-vsita is serer
3333. High.voltage service Equipment
8
Detailed Analysis (Register Sk fle.8-2-W55)
rer+
2340. General Requirements fee
Wiring Methods
2941. Conductor.
2342. Open Wiring on Insulators
2343. Concealed Knob -and -tube Work
2844. Bare Conductor Feeders
2845. Armored Cable
2318. Nonmetallic Shathad Cable
2547. Nonmetallic Wsterpreof W
2848. Rigid Metal Conduit
2549. Elsetrical Mebane Tubing
2350. Flexible Metal Conduit
2851. Flezible Liquid -tight Metal
Conduit
Article & Automatic OvercurreaL Protection
2385. To Be of Approved Type 23M Use of Overcurrent Devices
2388. Link Peace 2M Services
2887. Fusee and Fused Wickes 2371. Motars, and Motor Circuits
2886. Circuit Breakers 2TM Central Circuits
Article T. Grounding
SxsTAK9 AND Ooovrts GaWNDEW CONMMCUM
SM. Direct Current Supply
237& dlternatias-eurreat Systems 23M Grounding
LooaTloa or Gaorwvm OutnNM NM
2379. Location �Qroosaing
CoNDUQTDa ENCLosuaim
2860. Grounding of Cssdult and Otbw
Metal Raceways or Zadasurea
zquwj=T
2361. {bounding of Fixed Equipment
2382. Grounding of Portable Equipment
MaTacos Or GaovaatNo
2N& Methods of Grounding
( 5% iAta ) Or bMUSs'RtAL SalraTt Detailed Analysis
aasd Circuit Breakm's
224413. Knife S stanstlas of Swi ad 2415. Isolating Switches (Diseoanee.
2414. Rating of Switchas tare)
2418. Circuit Breakers
Article 11* Switchboards and Panelboards
- Switchboards- L - tion and A-- 2422. Paneibosrds
ability
2421. switchboard,, material and
wiring
Article 12.
24.'r7. General
Wiring of Fixinrug
• Lamphelders and
24M EleorieDischarguLightins
IAA Volts or Len --
F ixtaree
243L &iectrie Discharge Lighting -
More Than I, OW Volta
2432. Grounding
2437. General Attlde 1& Appliances
2436_ IRBtRUAtion at 2440. Control and Protection of
. Iufra-red Lamp Inlastriad Bat,liances
Ing Appliances 2441. GroAppending
2448. capacitors Article 14. Capacitors
2451• and $.arae. Resistors and Reactors
QVIDUNUM Article 18
G Storage Batteries
2458. General2458. Racks and Trays
GROU111096 CONDUCTOR Cola 2457. Insulation of Batteries 2459. Battery Roome
7. G Article 17. Wiring Installation Design
I TnA.% Rs axs 2404. Polarity Identirteation of Systems 2408. Thirty -ampere Branch Circuits
and Cirenits
2M IRSURUMATrawdernwm and 2465. Branch Circuits 2409. Fifty -ampere Branch Circuits
Relays 24ft Fifteens -ampere Bran 2470. 3eavy-d
uty Lampholder Branch
Ln�u& 267.Tv(;ircaits CIrcuits
Lightning Arresters decide 18. Working Space and Guarding
2475. General Requirements
Artich 9: Transformers
2406. Trandarmers 2407. Transformer Installations and
Ehelemon
Article 19• Mines, Tunnel Under Construction or Repair and Similar Locations
2480. Geaasi
24M General Article 20.
2486. Types of Conductors
2487. conductor Sinn
2468. Wiring Method
Comrecr CONDUCxoRIS
2459. Installation of Contact Condor
tors
2490. Coilectom
2491. Disconnecting Man
Cranes and Hoist
2492. Floor Operated Crane ontrsis
2493. Limit Switch
2494. Contact Condnetom
2495. Crane Motors
2496. Floor Operated Crane,
GUAMUIG AND Gwuxmo
2497. Ralston -
249$. Grounding
General Amide 21. Elevators, Dumbwaiter's and Eneautere
2504. Live Parts 2W& Elevator Maehbas Room or
Conductors and CahlnEnclosure
2W& 2509• Grounding
IntsUafion
260'T. switches 2818 Powe $a g
184 INDUSTRIAL RMATIONS 8 l)lV1SU)-N OF I-NDUSTRIAL 8.ttTTY 185
t too. - l
OatailedAautlys� < 3--g-i9- Article 1. Definitions
Article 22. Elazardess Locations
section Section
2514. General 2516. Chase II IsdaRatleas
2515. Class I Installations 251T. Class III Installatiens
Article 2& Garages and Smaller Occupancies
2522. General
Article 24.
2526. General 252& StW Lgbtmg and Effects
2527. Wiring 2112k Substations
Article t
2682. General 20L Stavage, Batteries
2684. Installation =5 Amplifiers and Rectiners
Article 28. Metion-pieture Predeet"s a" Equipment
2688. General 25M rNinipmeat and Projecium of tb
Professional Ty"
Article 27. Theaters, I ure Fleum
2542. General 2M& Dressing Room
2548. Stage Switchboard 2M& Portable Switchboards
2544. Stage Equipment
Article 28. Sigma and Ouffine
2549. General
and Outline
2550: Enclosures
fteeeding NO Volts
2551. Signs and Gndias LightisgC--
. Provides for
600 Volts or Less
Accidents Due to Proximity of
Arty 29 ted Plants Volts
2561. General
2M& Batteries
2562. Branch Oreaibr
256L Greandbag
Article 80. Circuits and Equipment Operating at Mwe Than 000 Volts
256T. General
25W Onstral and Overcurrent
2588. Installation of Oanduclets
protection
Article 8L
X-ray Equipment
257T. General
2579. rs and Capacitors
2578. Control
25W Guarding
Article 32.
Emergency Lighting
2584. Emergency Lighting
Article 82 Electrw Welders
2688. General
2568. Resistance welders
25ST. Transformer Are welders
2591. Lightning Arrest
orale 45. Remote-costral, Low power and C rcaits
2694. Ge
25M Class Z Systems
25M Chu 1
Article 88 Oammunicatim circuits
25+99. General
Article 87. Provisions for Acadent
proven ' Mage Circuits
2802. Defiaitioua a t
Fro for tleff
. Provides for
A Employeesto to aployew
Employees
Accidents Due to Proximity of
on Underground High-voltage
Hisb-volbge Lines
Electrical Conductors and
Provisions for proventtull
Equipment
Accidents to Employees Working
on B **hags Nara
em- t Employeforprevee in
Eugh-veltme
and 8witelkyards
Article 1. Definitions
- thfollowing
se e ao-
cepteethe meaning Of e 'various terms ed intesorders.
(1) (as applied to wiring methods). Not
Permanently closed in by the structure or finish of the building;
OLP" Of being removed without disturbing the building
structure or fiaw
(2) A (as applied to equipment). Admitting
ekw approach not guarded by locked doors, elevation
or other effective means. (See also "headily Accessible. I)
(3) AdJ Motor. One in which the speed
can be varied gradually over a considerable range, but when
once ntusted remains by
such Aunt tors designed for practically ariation of fed strength.
(4) AppHalics, Appliance is a current -consuming equip.
meat, Sled or portable, such as heating or motor-
operated
equipment.
ti�
(5) APProved. As applied to materials, devices, fittings,
and appliances, means approved by the Division of Industrial
Safety.
which, when AskareL A synthetic nonflammable insulating liquid
explosive Pum by the electric are, evolves only non.
(7) Authorised Persoll. One who is properly authorised
to Perform speeifie duties under the conditions existing.
(g) Btanch Circuit. That portion of a wiring system
extending beyond the final automatic overload protective device
of the circuit.
(A) APPUAM Branch Circuits are circuits supply-
ing energy either to permanently wired appliances or to
attachment plug receptacles, that is, appliance or conven-
ience outlets, or to a combination of permanently wired
appliances and additional attachment plug outlets on the
same circuit; such circuits to have no permanently aoa
neeted lighting fixtures.
(B) Combination Lighting and Appliance Breach
Circuits are circuits supplying energy to both lightint
outlets and appliance outlets.
(C) Lighting Branch Circaits are circuits supplying
energy to lighting outlets only.
(D) Motw Branch Circuit. Circuits from the motor
branch circuit protective device to the motor, incl
uding
the controller and overload protective
186 INDus RmA a 8
Artiois 1. DeAnitioia $ �•-A
(9) CabivaL An enclosure designed either for surface
or Such mounting, and provided with n frame, matt or trim in
which swinging doors am h
(10) Cable. A stranded conductor (single-ft"neter
cable) or a combination of condueters insulated from me
another (multiple -conductor ).
(11) Circuli Breaker. A device designed to open, under
abnormal conditions, a t t injury
to itself. The terra as used in thew orders applies to
the automatic type designed to trip on a predetermined "Ice
Of current.
(12) Code. The word e" wherever used herein
be understood to mean the Electrical Safety Orders of the Divi-
sion of Industrial Safety,
(13) t?ommuiticaCircuits. A circuit which is pari at
a so-called "central station " Such circuits inelade
telephone, telegraph, distriet messenger, intercommunicaties
equipment, public address systems, fire and burglar
watchmen, and aprinider supervisory circuits with their
dated battery and nngmg power
(14) ConoWaL Rendered inaccessible by the strueetan
or finish of the building. Wires in concealed raceways an
considered concealed, even thang1s they may become sceemAk
by withdrawing them.
(15) donde. A wire or cable or other form of stets::
suitable for carrying current.
(16) Controller. A device, or group of devi
serves to govern, in some predetermined manner, the electru
power delivered to the apparatus to which it isi
(17) Cord. A email, very flexible insulated cable.
Nora: There to no aAarp dividin tine in respect to size between a an<,
and a table.
(18) Cutout Boz, An enclosure designed for murfea
mounting and having swinging doors or covers
to and telescoping with the of the box proper. (8s
Cabinet.)
(19) Dead Front (as applied to switches, circ
breakars, switchboards and ). So designed,
and installed that no eurrent-earrying parts sr+
erposed on the front.
(20) Demand Factor. The demand factor of any systat
or part of a system, is the ratio of the maximum demand of taw
or part of s system, to the total connected load of d!
1791412, or of the pact of the aptess =Wisr consideration.
d Drnsmw or Iaemmusratar, SAPWr
63-2-19-55)187
!ice Artiol* 1, DesnMona
from (21) which derive their supply
t individual transformers or banb
Of do have their
interconnected, orfrom e iaadividual service switches. wordings
(22) A device, p of devices,
or other 'y conductors vie t can a ccs,
connected f of supply, Of Is
(23) DmcprosL So constructed or protected twat an
accuninktion Of dust Will not interfere with its successful
operatim
(24) So constructed that dust will not miter
the enclosing too.
(25) Duty. (A) 0ouftuoUL Continuous duty is a
requirement of service that demands operation at a sub-
6taRtMUY constant load for an indefinitely long time.
(B) lutermitt0ft Intermittent duty is a require.
Iffent of service that demands operation for alternate inter-
vah of (1) load and no load; or (2) load and rest; or (3)
head, no load and rest.
(C) Periodic. Periodic duty is a type of intermit-
tent duty in which the load conditions are regularly
recurrent
cf (D) bort-time. Short -time duty is a requirement
rvice that demands operation at a substantially eon-
staut Ind for a short and definitely specified time.
t of
"m*` tbat d nfi. Varying duty is a ds operation at loads and for intervals
Of time, both of which may be subject to wide variation,
(26) Effective. Capable of performing the particular
function specified in the order, with safety.
(27) Electric Riga. A Seed or portable, self-contained
electrically illuminated appliance with words or symbols
designed to convey information or attract attention.
(28) Enclosed, Surrounded by a ease which will prevent
accidental contact of a person with live parts.
(29) Equipment. A general term including material,
fittings, devices, appliances, fixtures, apparatus, and the lilae,
used as a part of, or in connection with, an electrical installation.
(30) EZplosion Proof Explosion -proof means enclosed
in a ease capable of withstanding an explosion of a specified gas
or vapor which may occur within it, and of preventing the W.
tion of the specified gas or vapor surrounding the enelosure
by
spall s, Sashes, or explosions of the gas or vapor within,
188 INDU L EFS _-s =Ui # Utv l et. s"- Tr 189
Articl® 1. Definitions C 55,a ftp -,s-5S
Artiote t. Definitions
(31) Exposed. (As applied to live ) Rspeng
means that a live Part can be inadvertently talacd IN
approached nearer than a safe distance by W persm. it h
applied to parts not suitably guarded or isalstaL
(32) Exposed. (As applied to wiring ) Aceee
Bible; not concealed.
(33) Externally Operable. (As applied to
that is enclosed in a ease or eab' ) Capable of being
without exposing the operator to areing or
parts.
(34) Feeder. Any conductors of a wiring Vstm be
tween the service equipment, or the generator switchboardde
isolated plant, and the branch circuit over
(35) Fitting. An accessory such as a lockwa% had*
or other part of a wiring system h 1
perform a mechanical rather than an electrical
(36) Fes. A fuse is an o t prateetin'
with a circuit opening fusible member directly beeW as
destroyed by the passage of over -current dwougli it.
(37) ftrago. A building or portion of a builft i
which me of more self-propelled
flammable liquid for fuel or power are kept for
rental,rpurpose epair. exhibition
these orders the term garage SUR apply to th he
orgoorsonwhich an& vehiclesare kept and abe to aq &ere
&orsbelow this level if there are any w dt
Boom
(38) (kQMMWftg Onaductar. A conductor whiek is
to conned the t, device or wiringi
deetre& or deetrodes.
( )gurdo&CeverecL Wielded,fe2elma
otberwise protected, .c
bs means of suitable WM Or essef
bmiers, rags or screem mats or Platforms,ta tia>a
bilitr of danger= contact or approach by PMM ar
to a point of -
Any circuit ham a
ON" of ictclitial of more than SM DIU (7W Tab MhM V"
caw
411 IMMINSIML X'+et 'lyaMM1Jleto Ffsese se"
speaare
' yVL #let intmIsa for Oe
ese&n�rdm Of a "a litliting
termbatimc ® =-rkolldw-
(43)3) Live Part. live parts are those parts which are
clectneally connected to points of potential different from that
of the earth.
(44) Location. (A) Dry Location. A location not nor-
mally subject to dampness or wetnc. A location Classified
as dry may be temporarily subject to dampness or wetness,
as in the ease of a building under construction.
(B) Damp Location. A location subject to a moder-
erate degree of moisture, such as some basements, some
barns, some cold storage warebouses, and the like.
(f;) Wet Location. A location subject to natura-
tiem with water or other liquids, such as locations exposed
to the weather, wash rooms in garages, and like locations.
installations underground or in concrete slabs or masonry
in dist contact with the earth, shalt be considered as wet
(45) Low voltage Circuit. Any circuit having a di$er-
enee of potential 600 volts ( 750 volts where specified in certain
orders) or less between any two conductors of the circuit.
(46) Multioutlet Assembly. A type of surface raceway,
designed to hold conductors and plug receptacles, assembled in
the field or at the factory.
(47) flatlet. A point on the wiring system at which our -
rent is taken to supply fixtures, lamps, heaters, motors and
current-eonsuming equipment generally.
(48) Outline Lighting. An arrangement of incandescent
lamps or gaseous tubes to outline and call attention to certain
features such as the shape of a building or the decoration of a
window.
(49) Panelboard. A single panel, or a group of panel
units, designed for assembly in the form of a single panel;
including buses, and with or without switches and/or automatic
overeurrent protective devices for the control of light, heat, or
power circuits of small individual as well as aggregate capacity;
designed to be placed in a cabinet or cutout box placed in or
against a wall or partition and accessible only from the front.
(See switchboard.)
(50) Place of Employment. "Any and every place,
whether indoors or out or underground, or elsewhere, and the
premises appurtenant thereto, where, either temporarily or
permanently, any enterprise, project, industry, trade, work or
business is carried on, or where any process or operation directly
or indirectly related to any enterprise, project, industry, trade,
work or business, is carried on, including all excavation, demo.
lition and construction work, and where any person is employed
,.c
190
Article U til'finit D"
i ns
(51) PortableApplian& Aim wharm capable of being
readily moved where established practice or the, conditionsof
use make it necessary for it to be detached from its source of
current by means of flexible attachment plug
(59) Qualilled Persm One familiar with the
tion or operation of the apparatus the hazards in
(53) Raceway. Any channel for holding at
busbars, which is designed expressly for, and used solely for,
this purpose. (Raceways my be of metal or insulating
and the term includes
duit, electrical metallic tabin& underfiaor raceways, eellWa
metal floor raceways, xurfnee metal rawwam wiraways, bei
ways and awdliary )
(54) Raintight. So e0ndmeted or protected that expo•
sure to a beating rain will not result in the entranw of water.
(55) Readily Accessible. Capable of being reaehed
quickly for operation, renewal, or inspection, without
Ing those to whom ready access is requisite to climb over er
remove obstseles or to resort to portable ladders, chaiM etc.
(56) Receptacle Outlet" An outlet equipped with one at
more receptacles, not of the ll Vm or provided With
one or more points of attachment within one foot or jola
intended to receive attseltment plug sap.
(57) Ismate Control Circuit. Any electrical ekea
which any other circuit h a relay or an egwv&
len
(58) 8e00atdaryl9' A distribution system whereh
secondarythe mains of an alternating current system are ink
conneeted and supplied through transformers connected it
Parallel on the secondary side through fuses or automaw
switching to prevent the feeding of fault cur-
rent
p mart' side of the transformers through the am
ondary mains. Such a system is also often called an alterneft
ourreut automatic low -voltage secondary network.
i
191
Article t. 00finitiem
() Servs. The conductors and equipment for deliver -
i - from the electricity supply system of the serving
y to the Wiring s.,stem of the premises served.
() BUTIM Cubile. Service conductors made up in the
form of cable.
(61) Swvkw Conductors. That portion of the supply
conductors Whieh extends from the supply main, duct, or from
transformers of the serving agency to the service equip..:ent of
the Prenzises supplied. For overhead conductors this includes
the conductors from the last line pole to the service equipment.
(62) Service Drop. That portion of overhead service
conductors between the pole and the first point Of attachment
to the buil
() Service Entrap Conductors — Overhead. The
service entrance conductors for an overhead service is that
portion of the service conductors which connect the service
drop to the service equipment.
(64) Service Entrance Conductors—Underground. The
service entrance conductors for an underground service is
that portion of the service conductors between the terminal
box located either inside or outside the building wall, or the
point of entrance in the building if no terminal boa is in-
stalled, and the service equipment.
(65) Service Equipment. The necessary equipment,
usually consisting of circuit breaker or switch and fuem and
their accessories, located near point of entrance of supply con.
ductors to a building and intended to constitute the main con•
trul and means of cutoff for the supply to that building.
(66) Service Raceway. The rigid metal conduit, elec-
trical metallic tubing, or other raceway, that encloses service.
entrance conductors.
(67) gaiting (of circuit -breaker). The value of the
current at which it is set to trip.
(68) Signal Circuit. Any electrical circuit which sup.
plies energy to a device which gives a recognizable signal. (Such
circuits include circuits for door bells, buzzers, eode-calling
systems, signal lights, and the like.)
(69) Suitable. Capable of performing with safety the
particular function specified in the order.
(70) Switchboard. A large single panel, frame, or
assembly of panels, on which are mounted, on the face or back
or both, switches, overeurrent and other protective devices,
M2 NDUMIAL ULLATEGNS TM21
Article a, 0el3eitie0e I Rei M me. 2-..2.
bums, and usually instruments, `tehbm:>a
ace_ Me from the rear well as f the f t d are cei
intended to be installed in cabinet& (See P l )
(71) Switches. (A) Zsclosed Type SwitdL A switeli
which is so designed anti ens . ted that no eurrefid
carrying parts are normally exposed, and so designed the
the operator cannot come into contact with the
carrying parts during ordinary operatikm. This tens
includes all approved types of externally operable switein
and circuit -breakers which meet the above requirements.
(B) General -use Switch. A switch intended for um
as a switch in general distribution and branch circuit& it
is rated in amperes and is capable of interrupting its raW
current at its rated voltage.
(C) Isolatiing Switch. A switch intended for '
ing an electric circuit from the source of power. It has to
interrupting rating and is intended to be operated
after the circuit has been opened by some other me
(D) Motor -circuit Switch. A switch, rated in hors
power, capable of interrupting the maximum operating
overload current of a motor of the same horsepower as the
switch at the rated vol
(72) Vaporproof (so-calledvaportight). So constructed
or protected that the specified vapor will not interfere with ib
successful operation.
(73) Ventilated. Provided avith a means to permit eir,
culation of the air sufficiently to remove an excess of heat, fulls
or vapors.
(74) Voltage (of a circuit). The greatest effective dif
ference of potential between any two conductors of the eirevit
eoneerned. (On various systems such as 3-phase 4 -wire, singlt
Phase 3 -wire and 3 -wire direct current, there may be varim
circuits of various voltages.)
(75) Voltage to ground. In grounded circuits, the volt-
age between the given conductor and that point or conductor of
the circuit which is grounded; in ungrounded circuits, thl
greatest voltage between the given conductor and any otlm
conductor of the circuit.
(76) Waterproof. So constructed or protected that
moisture will not interfere with its successful operation.
(77) Watertight. So constructed that moisture will not
enter the enclosing case.
TITLZ 8 DIVISIONof INDUMIAL SAFETY 193
(Register Na, 3-2.19.55) Article 2. General
(78) Weatherproof. So constructed or protected that
exposure to the weather will not interfere with its successful
operation.
Naas: Authority cited for EleCtriml Safety Orders (Sections 2..W through
Mss): Sactiaa 65M TAbw Cede. Additioamd authority cited: Sections 6312 and
Labor CodkL
fir Fera: 1. OrigisaW tea 4.20.43 (Title s).
2. A t filed 5-746 ( Register 3) .
$.
ReTWMOf Meetrical Safety Orders (Seetioua 2300 to 2806) filed
221't1-551: r9eftire thirtieth day thereafter 1 Register 13, Nr. 4).
4. AMMeDdineat filed 2-9-M; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Regis.
ter 5k Na. S).
Article 2. General
5. GeMMLL (a) Application of These Orders. These orders,
Orders. 2300 to 2606, inclusive, known as "Electrical Safety Orders,"
apply to all electrical utilisation equipment which operates at more than
25 volts or which generates, transmits, transfers, or utilizes more than
50 watts, in all places of employment in the State of California, over
which the Division of Industrial Safety has jurisdiction; and these orders
shall also apply to the installation of transformers, service equipment
and other equipment, used for the supply or control of electric energy,
when such equipment is installed in such places of employment (whether
such equipment is owned by the employer or by the agency supplying
the electric ).
It is the intent to include within the provisions of these Electrical
Safety Orders all electric supply stations (such as public service com-
panies' transformer installations) which are installed primarily for the
supply of energy to one consumer, on or adjacent to whose premises such
stations are bated, but not to include generating stations, substations,
or transformer stations in general, owned or operated by serving agencies.
(b) PerhAts for Variations From These Orders. When the divi-
sion finds that, under such conditions as shall be specified, a variation
from the terms of a safety order will give such freedom from danger as
the employment reasonably permits, the division, upon written applica-
tion, after investigation and such hearing as the division may direct,
may make and enter its order permitting such variation from the terms
of the said safety order in a place of employment, upon such conditions
as it may specify and upon the provision and use of such safety measures
and appliances as shall, in the judgment of the said division, secure the
safety of employees. A copy of said order shall be conspicuously posted
at the place of employment.
An appeal from a decision of the division, concerning a permit for
variation from these orders may be made to the Industrial Safety Board.
When the division has reason to believe or upon receipt of a com-
plaint that a variation does not provide such freedom from clanger as the
employment reasonably permits, the division after notice to the employer,
and to the complainant where a complaint has been received, and after
194 INDUYnnaL R a
hearing, may ecntin*ce in form suspend, revoke or modify the cooditiona
specified in such order.
Where death or serious personal injury at the place of employment
appears, in the judgment of the division, to be attributable to a varifi,
tion from the terms of a safety order, the division May set ask% or
amend said variation order after to the employer and ameh beer.
ings as the division maydirect Notice of be
uously posted at the place of employment
No declaration, act, or omission of the division or of its represents,
lives, other than a written order authorizing a variation
under this order, shall be deemed to ex pt, either wholly or ra PWl
expressly or impliedly, any employer or place of employtuent from full
compliance with the terms of any safety order,
(e) New fastatlations: Addi and Reneymb of
Existing Installations. New installations and additiong and altexations
to existing installations, which are made after them orders become
effective, shall conform to all of the applicable orders herein. Existing
installations in compliance with the 19M Electrical Safety orders win
not be required to conform to these orders, except where the hazard pre-
sented by the installation is, in the judgment of the chief of the di ' .
of such severity as to warrant control by the application of then
(d) Special Requirements. Where these orders give special
requirements for special classes of installations, or for installations
special conditions, such special requirements shall take precedence ova
the general requirements of the orders in any point of apparent coaft
or inconsistency. In the absence of orders covering any particulha
point all applicable orders contained herein be complied with,
(� : _ or man Sarwrir
Sk tie. 3--2Artlelo S t+anor�obi
ri a- Bureau of Mines or similar institu-
tions
of re RM Provided- however, that the division may
rmaterialso e to approve nsso such item for cause. The division may accept
listed, 'or labeled and a ces which are not approved,
asngs to the standards of any of the above
mentioned institutions u satisfactory evidence that they are so de-
signed AW ted t they will operate safely under normal
"Mating( Order 2306-b.)
(b) Requirements for Acceptance. Materials, devices,
shall be $tti apparatus and appliancesdesigned for use under these orders
judgedwith reference to the fallowing considerations
which de tion by types, sizes
the c
' and a voltages, current
(1) Suitability for installation and use in conformity
w9tlt the requirements of these orders.
devices (2)dMechanical strength and durability, including, for
ed to enclose and protect other egaigment, fire
sdequaey of the protection thus provided.
(S) El insulation.
(4) llecting effects under normal conditions of use and
a under abnormal conditions likely to arise in service.
(b) Arcing effects.
(6) Working space and guarding.
(c) Wire Gauge. Wire sizes are those of the .American Wire
Gauge (AWG).
HiatwV: L Amendment Med 2-9.55• e3
inter 55, No. 3). ec 0 thirtieth day thereafter (Res.
(e) 'U&r and "Should "' Throughout these orders the wend 2307
"shall" in used to indicate requirements, whale the "should" m be made n a workmanlike manner shall be soadesigned, on -
used to indite recommendations, or thai in advised but set structed, installed and main B ecn-
��• as it as reasonably��� that the hazard will be reduced, as lar
possible. Installations of new utilization equipment
(f) Titles and Subtitles. The titles and subtitles follow' eat and conductors, and extensions, repairs and changes in existing installs_
order number ate intended to serve as a tions shall be made only by, or under the supervision or direction of,
orders and are not general guide and index to these qualified puns
to be considered as a pari of say History: L Renumbered from f
order.
H+OO*- l t day (SR
hKer 55, Ne. 3).
meat a d Electrical mat sled Type
fit f Naterials and Zqv*
lianect
Used m rases eleetrieal ' fittings and aPP
tions which are covered by them ard�s
shall be of approved tyge. The Division of Industrial Safety will else,
$if*' as -Approved" elect ' teriak deviees. fittings, and app&
installations,that have been approved,
ed, ormanufacturedARM used = electrical as conformingto the standards of to
ormer 32345(f) and filed 24.w; ereear,
ddrUeth day thereafter (Resister 55, No. 3).
• Voltages. (a) Circuit Voltage. Throughout these orders
the voltage shall be that at which the circuit operates, whether the circuit
110 supplied by a battery, generator, transformer, or rectifier. In general,
the Tequirements of these orders shall be taken as based upon the use
of apparatus, apPlianem, materials and wiring devices for eireWu oiler.
ating at not over 600 volts, except where specifically covered. (Ree
definition of "Voltage ")
History: 1. Renumbered from former i{2M and filed 2.9.55; effeetiso thietk b
day theraft- (Resister 55, No. 3).
196 Ilerutvratats RxLas 72TU8
Articles. Outside wiring--Ot"r Th- s— ttisa * g t 3—g 1
3309. Connections mid Splices. (a) Ternsinals. Cousection of
conductors to terminal parts sW1 insure a thoroughly good canneetion
without damaging the conductors and shall be made by means of prer
sure connectors (including set screw type) solder lugs, or spLim to
flexible leads either soldered, brazed or welded, except that Na g or
smaller solid conductors and No. 10 or Smaller stranded conductorsr
be connected by means of clamps or Screws with terminal plates ha
upturned lugs. Terminals for more than one conductor 11 be of a
type approved for the purpose. Stranded conductors of flexible
and cable shall be soldered together at their ends, or other approved
means shall be used to prevent the separation of the of the
ductors where they are fastened under clamps orbinding serews.
(b) Splices. Conductors shalt be so splieed or joined as to be
mechanically and electrically secure without solder and unim an
approved splicing device is be soldered with a fusilde
metal or alloy or brazed or welded. All ftiliees and jointa and the free
ends of conductors shall be covered with an insulation equivalent to that
on the conductors.
History: 1. Repeater Bled 2-9-0; effective thirtieth day thereafter (ReKwa
65, No. 3).
2. Renumbered from former 12M sad aw 249-w; effective thirtiam
day thereafter (Register,'.Ko. 3).
3310. Mounting Requirements. (a) _ Firnr Supports Itaquirej
Electrical apparatus and equipment .shall be firmly secured to surfaeta
upon which it is mounted.
Hbtory: 1. Renumbered from former f2311 and tiled ; eaeedve thirties
day thereafter (Recister ;i8, No. 3).
Article 3. Outside Wiring --Other Than Services
5316. General. (a) Califarn!&PabHcUtflit
The 1942 Rules for Overhead Line Construction of the California Public
Utilities Commission shall be complied with in all features of line aan-
strvetion employed in outside wiring, except as modified by this
(b) Scope. The requirements of this article shall apply to elee-
trieai equipment or wiring attached to the outside of or run betwets
buildings or structures. Equipment and wiring for service canductm
shall comply with Article 4. Equipment and wiring located in hazarilm
locations shall comply with Article 22.
(c) Wiring'' Method. Outsidewiring may be installed in (1) rigs
metal conduit, (2) in busways, (3) sat electrical metallic tubing, (4) a
multiple conductor cable suitable for the purpose, or (5) as open ew
ductors on insulating supports in accordance with Order 2317(e). When
such «pen conductors are exposed to mechanical injury, or are ec located
that persons are liable to come into contact with them, or bring conduct.
tTn%z S Div x or INDUSTRIAL SAFETY 197
N -3' -2 -t9 -SS) Artists& Outside Wiring.—Other Thanevvioes
'ng material intocontact with them, the conductors shall be installed in
rigid cal conduit, buswaYs, or in electrical metallic tubing, or shall be
tably pro.tected by screening or guarding.
Conne of more than 750 volts run on exterior building walla
installedshall be
for the in rigid metal conduit or metal covered cable approved
(d) tion. Conductors in cables or raceways shall
be of the rubber covered type, thermoplastic type, or other types
suitable for the purpose, and in wet locations shall be lead avered or
other type suitable for the pur
Sam of Can The size of conductors shall conform to
following.the
(1) Insulated conductors in raceways shall conform to the
allowable current carrying capacities of Table 1.
(2) Overhead conductors shall be not smaller than No. 10
for spans up to 50 feet in length, and not Smaller than No. 8
for spans 50 feet to 150 feet.
(3) Overhead conductors of over 750 volts shall be not
smaller than No. 6 unless in multiconductor cable. Conductors
in muiticonductor cable shall be not smaller than No, S.
5317. Open Conductors. (a) Supports. Open conductors shall
be supported on glass or porcelain knobs, racks, brackets, pin type, or
strain insulators, or other means suitable for the purpose.
(b) Clearances. Low -voltage and gigh-voltage Conductors. All
conductors of outside wiring shall comply with clearances specified in
Rubs for Overhead Line Construction of the California Public Utilities
Commission . The following table for overhead clearance is extracted
from Table 1 of those rules.
Efini-was vertical clearance
Natareofeleataee L"-v0ltape
0-750 volts
Hick -voltage
7so.20,000 volts
1. Above trade of railroads whseh transport
freigbt cars where not operated by overhead
contact wires ____� -- 25 feet
2. Above tra+dw of railroads
28 feet
operated b' over
head contact wirn______-- 27 feet
3. Above streets and along streets in urban
30 feet
areas and above streets in rural areas_____ 20 feet
Above arm (other than thoroughfares
25 feet
possible4.
where it is possible to drive vehicles _--___. 16 feet
5. Above arms accessible to pedestrians
25 feet
only_ 12 feet
6. Above 8feet
17 feet
12 feet
(c) Clearance From Buildings. Conductors shall have a clearance
from buildings as follows: (1) Open low -voltage conductors
other than signal and communication system conductors shall
be Supported independently of buildings or structures; except
that open lows voltage conductors may be attached to buildings
under the following conditions:
lMmeT=*L RYSATMM ?MR I TrrLR 8 Dwmm ov 1"USTRUL S"XTr
198 rThaP5*rVk*5
199
Arti,10 & Outside W'r'n9__0*h* Articles. Outside Wiring—Othor Than Urvioes
(A)Tbey slign net be attached to my bu9djWV
other structure at am than one point of aft t, units
they are substantially supported an crose-arm in a*
manner that the nearest conductor will eksr all Pabon
of the building, or buildings, or structures along Wkd
by
they paw not lwa than thm feet horizontally
(B) Where suchconductors an run on aws4ras
attached to a buildin& or buildings, or strueturesse W
vided in this order, , or on poke, they shall clear an portiess
of all buildings, structures, and roofs over which they pas
by not law than eight feet TerticsIlY.
(2) Open low-velftge conductors Sh011 be M11114111011 Z01
lea than three feet from windows, doom or suntlar location
(8) Open high-voltage conduetm in excess of 7-0 %
shall be substantially supported independently of buildings a
structures and shall have a clearance from buildings or am
tures as follows:
(A) They " be maintained not less than six ise
horizontally from buildings or other structures or IM
portion thereof for voltages greater than 750 volts. When
the vertical distance above ground of conductors of 7,5
volts or less is in excess of 35 feet, this horizontal dw
ance from buildings my be less than six feet, but " ht
not lea than four feet.
(B) They " be kept not less than 12 feet vertiesk
above any pat of buildings or structures over which *q
Paw (C) Where open high -voltage conductors eta
through the wall of any building. they $hall be run to tb
building at as nearly a right angle with the wall of *
building as practicable. and there shall be not more da
3 feet of open conductor between the one point of attack
went and the entrance fid-0
tors shall not be run through the roof of any building. I
sign, reading "HIGH V, OLTAGE," shall be placed on tb
outside of the wall immediately adjacent to the ON!
where the high=roltage conductors enter the building.
(d) Protection an P"- Conductors installed in the form d
lateral or vertical rum or risen supported by polest shall conform to *
Provisions of Rules for Overhead Line Construction of the Califorsk
Public Utilities Commission, wherein inch eanducton are speciflosk
treated.
(a) 1mgm or Low voltage TwMinationz on Exterior of
Ind Othw! 6trV441 Where open wires terminate on a building a
other stmeture, there shall be not more than four feet of open eondue-
tors betweect the point of attaebment and the conduit terminal fitting.
Ri*terx: 1. AawwInwat Akd 24-55; tft-dive thirtieth day thereafter (Reg-
i0er 55, NO. 33.
2318. Conductors an Buildings. (a) Installation. All wiring
an the exterior of buildings shall be in rigid conduit or electrical metallic
tubing made raintight, or in cable approved for the purpose. Lead -
covered unarmored cab" shall be installed in metal conduit or in elee-
triftl metallic tubing. Conduit or electrical metallie tubing installed on
the exterior of buildings shall comply with the requirements of Article 5.
23M UsAwground Conductors. (a) Mechanical Probiefion.
Conductors installed underground shall be protected against mechanical
injury by being installed in duct, conduit, cables suitable for the pur-
pose, or by other suitable means.
(b) Underground Vaults. Manholes in which it may be necessary
for men to work shall comply with the Statutes of 1911, Chapter 500, an
amended by Statutes of 1917, Chapter 575.
(c) Protection Where Entering Building. Where underground
conductors enter a building, they shall have mechanical protection in
the form of rigid conduit, auxiliary gutters, cables approved for the
purpose, or other approved meaus.
(d) Protection an Poles. Underground conductors carried up a
pole shall conform to Order 2317(d).
2320. Outside Festoon Lighting. (Such as autopark lighting and
lighting for outdoor games.) (a) Overcurrent Protection. Where
outside festoon or flood lighting is supplied by circuits passing through
or installed on a building, that portion of the circuit within or on the
building shall be protevted in accordance with the requirements for
overcurrent protection of interior wiring systems. Any portion of such
a circuit which is not within or on the building need not be protected
=required by this section.
(b) Insulatiom Conductors of festoon streamers shall have an
approved covering.
(c) Lampholders. Lampholders and receptacles shall be of
molded composition or other approved weatherproof type. When lamp -
hU_
olders of the medium or the mogul sizes are used, the leads, except for
approved decorative lighting outfits, shall be not smaller than No. 14.
(d) Supports. When the span exceeds 40 feet, the conductors for
festoon lighting shall be supported by a galvanized iron or steel mes-
senger wire of sufficient strength to sustain the load and supported by
approved strain insulators. Conductors or messenger wires shall be
securely supported and shall not be attached to any fire escape, down.
spout, or plumbing equipment,
2W 1xvusmiAL R
Artists 4. Sarvioaa—ti®gh- and Lasa- ( per, S--2.
(e) Attachmento(LamPhOWSM WhenkniphoWergareattaeW
as pendants, they shall have the conneetiosts to circuit
(f) Overhead Clearamm Festoon lightingo
f atim
surfaces accessible to pedestrians only shall be not less than 12 feet ahm
the ground, but where it is possible to drive a vchkie
at any time, this distanee shaft be not Ian than 15
ductors for festoon lighting ll be not Smaller than No: 12
ported by messenger wires.
autov: i. Amadneist sled 244M. efiectiv* thktift day ttenafter (lot
inter tla. No. s).
2521. Outdoor righting. (a) LossUon of LzMgW For oaldeft
lighting, limps, where practicable, shall. be located below all Z
duetors, transformers, or other electrical equtment. Adequate elm.
ances Shall be provided for
2522. Trolley O=Uct Cmductom (FW cimue colketoM ga
Article 20.) (For trolley conductors at mineg, tunnels and other
ground locations, we Order .) (a) Treabegat d Treaty Cep
duotors. Trolley conductors, together with -
ng am
seugers, span wires, and appurteissum shan waorn to the Wovision
of Rules for Overhead Lane Candrueticia of the Caliternis
Utilities Commission wherein =& equipment are specificany treatmL
Article 4. Serview-- _ and Low -vol
LOWVOLTACK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2328. tianeral. (a) 0116 Set! of 841rVift
Only. No building shall be supplied by more than one set of
entrance conductors .from the same traWamer (or bank of buts.
formers) for the same elm of service ezeept:
(1) Two or more sets of service entrance end
ucton
may be installed for additional
same sumer when the total of for the
ngle phets
Services exceeds 400 amperes.
(st � K No, sem- . � *a OF I �*sre„t, 1�►Aar:
201
e�awieo�—High- and Low-vottags
(b) Berviose ThTough Bundift&
No overhead service, no under-
ground buianoscrv'ec, and 80 service f an isolated plant shall supply one
Pane , unl such buildings are under single oecu.
le"t two or t, Conductors in cossduit or duet placed under at
urn °f concrete th a building, or buried in two inches
of brick or in emerete within a wall, shalt be considered out-
side the buil '
(c)hmblionofserviceantraace Conductors. Serviry
entrance
!Onductws except where approved bus duct is used shall have an insulat.
h which will normally withstand eapoaure to atmospheric
and other eo�ndationa of rad which shall prevent any detrimental
d.
ssf cut-nent t c:osaductors, objects, or the
(1) is Ilse of service entrance condos orssthat have
a n°urinal voltm,®e to ground of not more than 208 volts, a
grounds neutral service entrance conductor without an insul-
ating covering may be installed provided it is grounded to a
water pipe at the building served. Such a bare grounded neutral
conductor from an overhead supply shall be in rigid conduit,
electrical metallic tubing or an approved type of servic
entrance calla; and from an e
underground supply shall be
in -stalled as provided in Order 2327(c).
(2) Except as provided in paragraph 1, underground serv-
ice entrance conductors up to the point of attachment to service
equipment shall be covered with rubber, cambric, thermoplastic,
Paper or other approved insulating material. Service entrance
conductors installed underground, or in concrete slabs or
masonry in direct contact with earth, shall be lead -covered or
of other types specially approved for the purpose.
(3) Except as provided in paragraph 1, service entrance
conductors extending along the exterior of or entering buildings
shall be rubber -covered or thermoplastic -covered types or in
approved service cablea.
(2) Two or more sets of service entrance conductors msy(d) Size of Service Entrance Conductors. Service entrance con -
be installed for the same class of service for the doctors, including underground, shall have adequate current-earrying
sumer if located more than 150 feet apart (measured in a capacity to safely conduct the current for the loads supplied. The
straight liney
). shall be not smaller than No. 8 from the service head to the service
(3) Buildings of multiple occupancy may have two of Switch. The neutral of the service entrance conductors shall be of a
more separate sets of entrance conductors. If the to carry the maximum unbalanced load to which it may
voltage does not exceed up to six sets of entrain acted. y be sub.
conductors may be tapped from a single set of main serves (e) Splices and Taps in Service Entrance Conductors. Service
entrance conductors. entrance conductors shall be without splice or tap except as follows:
For the purpose of this order, different classes of service shall lK (1) Approved eiamped or bolted connections in a meter
° power (for ex ml* enclosure are permitted.
a standby service for elevators), Standbyby (lit or po), fim (2) Taps to main service entrance conductors are per-
i lighting, a single Phase power, polyphase powerw., gray, mitted as provided in Order 2326(a), or to individual sets of
bination lighting and power° weld'nsg and multiple phase lighting service equipment as provided in Order 2330(b).
r
1,.0 ATW-"'s t X111 It aalaa. l irafr>< 03
Ariwts g iasF-Rich-anti L - t amt=* fie- a --a- $ ,bee s�-ie 3 Article 4, tea xi®ea—Nigh- and Low-vettase
(3) Coonectiong WV peratitted, when an undergrew Open aecrice entraileaconductors shall clear all portions of a
service conduit or duct enters the buildingat a point whirie it building by at Jew, eight feet vertical dis tanee'e. Exceptions will be
permanentlyaccessible- A metal junction box may be UwWW permitted, provided in either (1) or (2) :
at such point, AIRCI the entrancenetor duct and t (1) Open iierviee entrance conductors of 0-600 volts may
entrance conductors y terminate t Su&abox SWhl be less than eight feet but not less than 12 inches above the
equipped with a tight fit securely f it ve, f, or parapet ll of the building served, provided
place. The service the serviceis located not more than 18 inches back of
shall have approved insulation. be installed in the outer edge of said eave, roof, or parapet wall.
approvedrigid coodult or other (2) open service entrance conductors of 0-300 volts may
(f) Conductors In Service
and , u other be t t feet, but not less than 12 inches above the
entrance conductors be decorative appendage,eave, roof or parapet wail of the build-
icei provided -
in service raceways, (V'r (A) The service head is not more than 18 inches
Sistery: i. Amendment tiled $ -
later . NO. 3), back of the exterior face of the building wall, and
• Underground 1 be (>vi) deearative appendage, save, roof, or para-
Ua pet wall less than eight feet below such conductors is
derground service condo nonmetallic.
injury by being installed in duct... conduit, in the form of sa armored
cable approved for the purpose or by other approved mean& (e) Location of Service Head. Above the Ground. Service heads
(b) Protection on PQIeL Where underground seryke eauducte"shall be located so that the service heads, service drops and the open
are carried up a pole, they shall be ` in with between the service head and the point of attachment will have
2317(d), clearances above the ground not less than those specified in the follow.
(c) Protection Where ere undergmust Mable: Miaimanotearxnee
service conductors enter a buildia& they sWM have mechanical PrOW Nato" of clearance 0-750 vote+ 750-90,000 gotta
tion in the form of rigid conduit, auxiliary gutters, the metal tape of y Aboverailroadsof which transport
an approved service cable, or other approvedm freight ears where not operated by over-
head shall extend to the enc for the service t oz seed contact wires_��-_--per _ 25 Leet 28 feet
p 2. Above tracks of railroads operated by
when the service switch is installed on a switchboard, overhead contact wire--_____----- 28 feet 80 feet
protection shall extend to the rear of the switchboard. a.er at ecruabove al -- urban
---- 16 feet 25 feet
3ERME HEAD 4. Above areas (ether than thoroughfares)
where it in possible to drive vehicles__-__ 18 feet 25 feet
M. Service DM CmftdoM (a) LocaMon of Service ROM 5. Above areas accessible to Pedextrhm only 12 feet 17 feet
With Relation to the The service head should be locate( (d) Location of Service Head to Allow for Clearance. The serv-
where directed by the serving agency. In all cases the 'onb .
be to the buil , with one ' see head shall bet located that the service drops, when attached to the
such that the service drops may
of attachment only. The be l located _then wsl building or structure as provided in Order 2328 (a), together with the
be a substantial support far the drops at the point of attachment. Th wires between the service head and the service drops, will have the
open wires between the o point of attachment and the service following clearances from fire escapes, balconies, stairways, exits, doors,
pe windows
other openings, at any of which human contact might be
not exceed
x four f The
conduit su expected: (1) Wires which are less than eight feet above, or three feet
supported. below the level of surfaces of fire escapes, balconies, stairways and walk
(b) Location of Service Read Above Roofs and BUSCUM Tb ways shall have a horizontal clearance of not lei than three feet from
service head ftR be so located that the service drops, when atWM Stich surfaees. (2) Wires which are at or below the level of the top of
to the building as provided in Order (a), willclear structure doors, windows, and other openings shall have a radial clearance
the roof of the build' served, and any f over which the from the boundariesof such openings of not less than feet, This
Pam not 1 tvertical clearances
.fied in the Rules to c e may be reduced for the which are above the level of
Civ Tei u of "f ` Public Utilities top of such o provided the clearance obtained is the ffiaxi-
mi 'on. mum practicable.
effective &7 (ItIP
History: i 63. Flet 3)•
I_,qDT:Wr%1A,L RELAIT20NO Trrug a DIVelpoy OF INDUSTIMAL SArETY 205
AM440 4. servio*�;Sh- Oed La`otega ^rtic%,L Services--Hish. and Low -voltage
2M. ser7ice raltrar" Oneductm in Cc OR Ikildillgil. (s)
Vr=ing Xtthrvic't entrance `)"doctors exten$ ` &"mg tie M
Urf-'s- and in buildings shall be enclosed it
app> mil -ed e-eondueservioi
Metal Or ju� app multipltcr
tutr',
'n',
a.,* on the exterior of buildings shall be raintigh
Service ]go&& S,
,rvice nKwways shall beewuipped vA 11
rai:.A;qt servi'��e tea:. Drip lof)Ps shall be formed On iZividual
'i w, ti,,.m To prevent the entrance of moisture, the connection bet
he em
t &.rv; ee ent� ante t(,nduet4rjrr and these drop conductors shell be
_
mad#.6 at a point below the service he Where service heads are use�
conductors of IsPP(hil
its polarity shall be brought out through KV1rate4
bushed holes.
('e- Terminating Raceway at Service Zquipment. Where ces,
A: service con,
d uit, electrical met& le tubing, or service cable is used for
durtors, the inLer end shall enter a tern:' box or cabinet, or be ma&
up directly to an equivalent fitting, enclosing all five metal parts, eta*
that if the service disconnecting means is mounted on a switchlimi
having exposed bus bars on the back, the raceway may be equipped witi
a bushing which shall be of the insulating type unless lead -covered am
ductors are used.
DISCONNECTING MEAM
(2) Not Rim than one service switch of this group is for
the same elatss of servi4x- for the stime consumer.
(3) Where the number of service switches at the same
location exceeds six, the entire current shall be taken through
one wain di'-vollneeling switch.
(4) The service rim shall be continuous to the last service
switch and cutout or to the bus on the switchboard but taps
may be, made to the individual service switches.
Exceptions tothis order will be allowed as provided in Order 2331(d).
(a) Di"Ounfictijen of GrequIded Conductor. If the switch or cir-
enit.breaker does not interrupt the grounded conductor, other means shall
be provided in the service cabinet or on the switchboard for disconnecting
the grounded conductor from the interior wiring.
(d) Mme Thain One Building. In a property comprising more
than one building under single occupancy, the conductors supplying
each building served Aa be provided with a readily accessible nice=,
within or adjacenit to the building, of disconnecting all ungrounded
conductors from the source of supply. The disconnecting means shall be
arranged to be locked in the open position.
(e) Shuliftaneging Opening. The disconnecting means shall simul-
taneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors.
2M. Service mquipmens. (a) Puzed ftl$e� h (f) Servift Switch—Type. The service switch shall be an
Breakers. Wherever in this order a switch, a or a switch =i
fuses, are called for, the requirements may be MMA by the use of a andaged externally operable fused switch, or circuit breaker, except
approved manually tripped circuit breaker. The switeh or circuit bresia that where the service switch is mounted on a switchboard of other than
shall plainly indicate whether it ie in the opsit or closed position. WhM "dead front" type, accessible to qualified persons only, and meeting
a circ uit b er is used, #here be an overt t unit in ead the requirements of Order 2421(g), an exposed knife -type fused switch
ungrounded coaducior of the circuit. For of circuit ens, w way beArticle 6. LChere fuses are use�ci, there be a in _ used.
(g) Rating of Service Switch. The service switch shall, unless a
eonduetar. Unless there a f switch installed in the 01 tb demand factor has been granted by the Division of Industrial Safety, have
line side of the eii cult breaker and at the arating sufficient to carry the total connected load, and shall have a rating
breaker shall be a type whish cannot be held cl on overload. baariot less than the rating of the cutout base or the setting of the circuit
automatic circuit breakers shall not be used as service switclaea un
th breaker in series with it. Where a 2 -wire service supplies more than
fuses are also used, or unless other seetions of these orders two branch circuits, or a 3 -wire service supplies more than four branch
omission of the overeurrent protection at the service switch. circuits; the rating of the service switch on such service shall be not
(b) Service Switches. A service switch shall be provided for
set of service entrance conductors. It shall be located at the n
readily accessible point to the entrance of the service entrance
doctors and installed in accordance with Order 2412(g) except
service entrance conductors of less than 300 volts May Supply
than one individual service switch provided
(1) All service switches shall be grouped At the
readily accessible point of entrance.
ead I= than 60 amperes and the rating or a service entrance circuit res er
kres! shall be not less than 40 amperes. All service switches shall be of a type
cam. which will safely interrupt their rated current at rated voltage. To
Ilis interrupt current greater than 1200 amperes at 250 volts or less, or
600 amperes at 251 to 600 volts, a circuit breaker or a switch of special
design approved for such purpose shall be used. Where a circuit
breaker is used in lieu of service fuses, the circuit breaker shall have
,suitable short-circuit interrupting capacity.
o
208 IxDuwwAL RxYATmm
Arlieie 4. 6orvtaa--High- and Low- t 3-2-" (Mincer 96, Ne. 3-- —19-55)
(h) Connection to Termfimls. The
shall be attached to the disconnecting means by pressure
clamps or other approved means. Connections which depend upon zoldn
shall not be used.
(i) Nun does Locations. Service equipment installed in
ous locations shall comply with the requirements of Article 22•
History: 1. Amendment filed 2-5-55; effective thirtieth day themfter 6
ter 55, No. 3).
2331. OvereurrentProtectian. (a) Where Required.
lee entrance conductor except grounded neutral conductors,be
protected by an approved overcurrent protective deviec, The ratingj
the fuse or the setting of the circuit breaker shall be in accordance Wit,
Table 1, except when a higher rating is necessary to carry motor st
currents, in which case the rating shall be as required in Order 2396
(b) Not in Grounded 0onductor. No overeurrent device b
inserted in a grounded service entrance conductor except a circuit brealm
which simultaneously opens all conductors of the circuit.
(e) More Than One Building. In a property comprising mm
than one building under single occupancy, the conductors supplying ead
building served shall be protected by overcurrent devices„ which may b
located in the building served or in another building on the same propertl
provided they are readily, accessible to the occupants of the bufldM
served.
(d) Relative Location of Overcurrent Device and Other
Equipment. The relative arrangement of the service switch and f
and the meter shall be such that the switch shall be on the line aide of tb
fuse, and such that all wiring and devices supplied through the servie
entrance conductors shall be protected by the fuse and entirely ao
simultaneously disconnected by the switch, except under one or more a
the following conditions:
(1) Where service equipment is operated electriealiy, tk
control eireuit may be connected ahead of the service equip
INDUSTUAL Ss>!Zsr 207
4, 8ervi —Hioh- and Low-vokage
line e of the serviceswitch, and fusm or between the service
switch the service fuses. Provided that the requirements of
the following (A) of this order is complied with:
(A) Wbm the metering equipment is placed on the
line side of the service switch and service fuses, the serv.
ice conduit or entrance cable shall terminate in an approved
termiud chamber or box suitable for the enclosure of
nleter test links or testing facilities as required by the
serving cy. The terminal boa, if of indoor type, ,;call be
Provided with a base receptacle made for use with standard
detachable type meters, or with shutter end wall, or trim,
or adapter base to accommodate standard bottom connected
The terminal box, if of outdoor type, shall be a
weatherproof receptacle, either an integral part of the
weatherproof meter or weatherproof base receptacle made
for use with standard detachable outdoor type meters; or
shall be a weatherproof box completely enclosing the con-
nection block and meter; or a weatherproof box enclosing
the conneetioti block and making a weatherproof fit with
the meter or meter box. The terminal box shall be kept
BMW and made accessible only to authorized persons,
History: 1. Amendment Sled 2-5.85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Regie.
ter 55, No. 3).
2332. Meter Transformers and Meter Testing Equipment.
Enclosing and Guarding Instrument Transformers. Instrument trans.
formers used in connection with meters shall be enclosed in a suitably
grounded metal cabinet, or other approved enclosure, unless installed on
a switchboardd or in a transformer room or other similar enclosure which
is accessible only to authorized qualified perms.
(b) Meter Testing Equipment (see also Order 2331(d) (4)).
Where the relative arrangement of the service switch, fuses, and meter
is such that both the switch and fuses are on the line side of the meter,
a suitable enclosure shall be provided for test links for testing facilities
if required by the serving agency.
ment, if suitable overcurrent protection and disconnee-tin 2333. Grounding and Guarding. (a) Enclosure. Live parts of
means are provided• service equipment shall be enclosed so that they will not be exposed to
(2) Where outside current supply is utilized for the oper accidental contact. unless mounted on a switchboard, panelboard, or
anon of fire alarm or other protective signaling systems, 6 controller accessible to qualified persons only,(see Order 2421 r
switch for such circuits may be connected on the line side of O located in a room or enclosure free from eaiy ignitible material. Such
service switch and fuses. an enclosure shall be provided with means for locking or sealing doors
(3) Where time switches are installed to operate the potes giving access to live parts.
tial circuits of meter installationthey- may be connected a (b) Grounding. Service equipment shall be grounded as follows:
the line aide af the service switch
(4) Where no live or wiring of the metering equip (1) The enclosure for service equipment shall be grounded
meat are or 'ble to other than employees of t,in a manner specified in Article 7.
(2) Service raceways, and the metal sheath of service
serving agency, the metering equipment may be placed on tl
cables shall be grounded.
a (P"iator 5 hila. �2-89.558 xt6�ts 0. $� WT 209
8orvicso—Nish- and Low-voltapa
(e) Conductor BiM Service entrance conductor$ shall be not
•. smaller than leo_ g,
T'=` (f) • Service conductors and their supports, including
1ir+• r - - r.aa insulators shall have strength said stability sufficient to insure main -
sr : ,- _, -` tenance of adequate clearance.
M r a =f ` - -4'= dl and Per(g) - at ow. There shall be a conspicuous
e -4 "-' � a =;' = :'1" where an overhead high -o ltat " sign placed on the outside at the point
n ,I i _ :, �- ,sr * as _ gh-volts a service enters any building. Where the
_ conductors are not in conduit, a similar sign shall be placed on the inside
- _ ^:� of the buildi
* _ ug also, .at the point of entrance.
fist; <Y : ar -: v ' ' (h) A ent to Buildings, Open hi h voldrops
Vin` sa, , r -- r a shall be attached to the buildingat one Point of attachment tvonly,and
o. shall be suitablyguarded against accidental contact. There shall e not
er, N t g g.
Hca .'MV - of re than three feet of open conductor between such point of attach -
Ment and the point where the service enters the building.
' Zq P (a) Secondaries to Be
Hi -vol• semi rsa t H; - tage Service ni ment.
Ina'LIUMin g nor— va, as Servicei For the purpose of this order, the secondary
- 514Uinductors, not the primary, shall be considered as the service condue-
r Y he to hors where the high-voltage .me -sr -!,a 5ftle-ing Methads g tage is transformed to 600 volts or less. The
Service equipment specified in Orders 2330 and 2331, will, therefore, be
may be opm and =guard4 isvErequired where the voltage of the secondaries does not exceed 600 volts,
am tmy Sul,' be - supported and sW be =regardless of where the transformers are located, and high-voltage serv-
tamed at Jje27imew MCA 105 than the mh7dmum required b'trice equipment will not be required.
RaLas&rO t; , etion of the Exception: High-voltage service equipment may be installed in lieu
e, __ .. a on for thee0M&ti0ns existing at 60f low -voltage service equipment.
1, Coad=uws having approved insulation =y t : (b) Overcurrent protection. Overcurrent devices shall be pro•
id m4tal conduit, iron or steel pipe apprnvaltvided in accordance with one of the following:
P 1bre conduit, conerete duct, or other (1) By means of an automatic circuit breaker capable of
dam t being tripped manually which interrupts all ungrounded eon -
`°l o condaletors arc lei flee ductors simultaneously. The circuit breaker shall have suit-
e t adoor, window, fire escape. Platform or other ssrfs able current -carrying and interrupting capacity and shall
to *% ;eh pemms Ease at sled I have an overcurrent device in each ungrounded conductor so
ns from coming into accidental "o arranged that the operation of any one device will open all
w, the orbringing conducting material into es ungrounded conductors. Isolating switches, which shall be
tact was . readily and safely accessible to authorized persons, shall be
# i i h s re high-voltage services are installed in a ME provided between the lines of the serving agency and the
^"ham ttan a substation or transformer vault or tM service circuit breaker. Removable truck panels and metal-
:=sre..i a conductors within and upon the baM clad switchgear units, which cannot be removed unless the
:rhe*,aired in permanently grounded metal ecadvit circuit is disconnected and which, when removed from the
.e �bla P�,th�a�l� or wiped pints shall be used ah` normal operating position, automatically disconnect the eir-
1 1 cuit breaker from all live parts are considered as complying
' � . At �.tost! -% s aT�otel cables where other minateof and
either
with this order, and no isolatingswitches will be required.
cabAPr-,A
2--92103
210 lisnv
Ankle 4. 8orvieer-High- sud Law -
(2) Approved oil- to (without a 66- IV- -rs_ � I $Arm $l]
each ungrounded conductor. The t its Artiek & Wiring Methods
6e a Article 5_ Wiring that they will be readily felt' `ole Alethods
top of the cutout will be preferably23"for Wiring Methods.
but in no ease more than six and one-half fM
f abovean five forremote
emo retcontrolof t wa a mall apply to all wiring installations eace�t
or platform Oil -lined cutouts have sui a cation systems lgY Power, and signal systems and communi.
carrying and interrupting capacity. Providcd in Article 35,
(3) By means of suitable high-v(alta" cutouttsam as Hntvrat' �thi°1q'"k;� intended to a i tce
than oil -filled type). When r vault cutouts are ( equipment Meeh ae'notore, motor rnatroll ns conductors
d thhe like nleie
in a building or transformer vault, be of a waylak(b) Vol I.imi Wiring
approved for use in buildings, w such cutouts be a for volt not eaeedi methods speei$ed in Article 5
not suitable to interrupt the circuit ordersme of Article 5 , unless specifically limited in
full load an a e while Ily Pet totted elsewhere in
these orders. used for Volta" over 600 where
approved switch shalt be installed (either in
primary or secondary circuit) to interrupt the entire {e) Pro t Corrosion and Mechanical In
This switch shall be readily d safely 'ble and doctors and equipment shall be Protected against jury. Con-
veniently located with respect to thehigh-voltageeireuk. l l injury g inst corrosion and meehan.
conspicuous sign shall be p at such cutouts reading, eHb (I) I '� with the fallowing;
Not Open Under Where necessary, eutou; s metallic elbo ways, cable armor, boxes, cabinets and all
be interlocked with a suitableswitch or circuit b wA, eouplittgs, and fittings, unless ttutde of cor-
vent opening of the cutoutsunder is °n -resistant materi
The cutouts corrosion inside and out shall be suitably Protected against
so located that they may be readily and safely operated tug of a roe (except threads at joints) by a
refused, and so that the blowingof the coat' PP ved corrosion -resistant material • except that
perms. This will require that cutouts other than not ferrousferaceways, fittings and boxes protected from P
filled type be either -xtiek operated, or the * where the enamel may be used Onlycecati on
ns
enamel is rotes indoors and in locations
by a single operating handy Such f shall either the x Tweeueriea, hide cels ted against chipping
located that the bottom of the cutout (in its c Ott atorase.ag roo,ns, sme houses, fertiliser H ion,,
Will be not len than seven feet above the floor or platf t rou$d • e®me statek�, ane ,m i oast uin ,' a=gip mills' .Haar miu.
shall be installed in a suitable enclosure. The doer of >iere Orme mtrosice eoaditions are likely to be pr�eaent be occn
enclosure shall be interlockedto prevent opening of the & ](T)el Conductors shall be ad
unless the fuses are disconnected from the entire load or meinjury, equately protected from
all sources of suPPAT• Fuses shall be accessible frout a du (d)
,an space, 1�lace. Raceways, cable assemblies, boxes, cabinets
azul fittings, shall unless otherwise (4} By means of suitable h' of provided, be
rupter switches Fuses shall be ai in of d load , fi8aeeways and cable assemblies seely fastened in
suitable shall be mechanically to
or similar enclosure. The door of such cabinet or etall1c boxes in is and other enclosures, except as provided for non.
shall be m interlocked with the switch to prem Order 2355(i).
Opening of the door unless the fuses are disconnected (e) guns Continuous, Raceways and cable assemblies shall be
sources of supply. �eoniinuons from outlet to outlet and from fitting to fitting {e} I,ocatin t+High vol service equipment m ways shall be continuous from outlet to outlet ander- Conductors
be enclosed in metal-enelcaed switchgear, tted for auxiliary gutters and for , except as per.
cubicles, in fire P within the raceway itcex wtceways there shall be no splice or
switehrooms, or in a transformer vault or enclosure. The equi (f)
� be so located that it will be readily and safely accessible m Length Pree of Conductors at Outlets.
erly qualified and authorized and will not be conductor shall be left at each outlet and switch t least six inches of
other pe ltp of joints or the connection of fiatu Point for the making
inees a are intended - loop without joints through mp oldwhece "p.
eon
BiHsry: 1. effeefirOty soy tkereafter
No a and similar device, rs, recep.
2. Ast0-111"Mt AW 2-8455; e3'e dye thirtieth day themilter
t- 5k Na 3).
212 I.'qMMTWAL :s TM21
Article 8. Wiring M (Register K Ne. &-2•
(g) Boxes at outlets. An approved box shall be installed at ew
outlet, switch point, or junction point of conduit, electrical metallic tot
ing, surface metal raceway, armored cable, or nonmetallie sheathed
and at each outlet and switch point of a ed knob -and -tube w
(h) Boxes and Fittings Where Conductors Are BrouAt (t
Except as provided in Order 2340(i) a box or terminal fitting ha
separately bushed hole for each conductor shall be used where,,6
change is made from conduit, electrical metallic tubing, nonmeta
sheathed cable, armored cable and surface metal raceway wiring to
ca
sealed knob -and -tube work. A fitting used for this purpose &hall mak
no taps or splices and shall not be used at fixture outlets.
(i) Bushing in Lieu of Box or FittiA bushing may be ;
lieu of a box or terminal fitting at ends of conduit or electrical
tubing where conductors leave the conduit or tubing behind a swim
board, or where more than four conductors leave the conduit or tulait
at control apparatus or in similar locations. Such a bushing shall be
the insulating type except for lead -covered conductors.
(j) Through Stade, Joists and Rafters. When, in exposed or el
sealed work, conductors in insulating tubes or cables are run thraq
bored holes in studs, joists or similar wood members, holesshall be bm
at the approximate centers of wool members, or at least two inches fn
the nearest edge. Where there is no objection because of weakening f
building structure, armored or nonmetallic sheathed cable may be It
in notches in the studding or joists if the cable at those points h la
teeted against the driving of nails into it by having the notch cove
with a steel plate at least one -sixteenth inch in thickness, before bul
Ing finish is applied.
1TI= S Div== or INDUSTRUL SAFE 218
(Register 55, No. 3-2-19.65) Article 5. Wiring Methods
(4) Control circuits operating at voltages less than the
voltage of the motor or other device which they control may be
run in the same conduit, box, cabinet, etc., containing the cir.
suit wins of the motor or other device when the control circuits
are supplied from an individual transformer, or other external
source. The insulation of all of the conductors shall be not less
than that required for the conductor of the higher voltage.
(5) Conduetors carrying direct current may beinstalled
in the same conduit, box, cabinet, etc., with conductor:; carrying
alternating current when the direct current is derived from a
generating or rectifying device which is supplied from the same
transformer or bank of transformers which supply the alternat-
ing current provided that the voltage of neither direct current
nor alternating current conductors is more than 600 volts.
(6) 'Wires of different systems may occupy the same meter,
meter socket or meter connection or loop box, if such enclosure is
sealed by and accessible only to authorized agents of the serving
agency-
(7)
cy(7) Wires of different systems may terminate in the same
exit sign box (without barriers) if the wires of the different
systems are so arranged or secured that they can not come into
contact with each other. Wires of different systems may occupy
the same fixture stem or canopy of emergency lighting fixtures.
(8) For exceptions and special provisions relating to ele.
vator circuits, see Order 2506(e) ; for sound recording, sea
Order 2533(d); for remote control, low-energy power and
signal circuits, see Order 2596 (e) ; for communications systems,
see Order 2599.
(k) Conductors of Different System& Conductors of differe (1) Inserting Conductors in Raceways. Raceways, except those
systems shall not occupy the same conduit, electrical metallic tW&med for exposed work and having a removable cover or capping shall
first sheath, raceway, wireway, busway, gutter, outlet box, junction box, Pbe installed sa a complete raceway system without the conductors
box, fitting, fixture or cabinet, except as permitted by the foll0liftll wires, if used, shall not be installed until the raceway system is
exceptions to this order: is place. Graphite, talc, or an approved compound may be used as a
(1) Wince of different systems may occupy separate lubricant in inserting conductors in raceways. Cleaning agents or lubri.
partments in gutters, boxes, cabinets, etc., when such cempreanta having a deleterious effect on conductor coverings shall not be used.
meats are separated by barriers of not less than No. 16 U (m) Supporting 'Vertical Conductors in Raceways. Conductors
gage sheet iron, or other material of equivalent strength, ri0in vertical raceways shall be supported at intervals not greater than
fastened in place; provided, however, that high-voltage and kthose specified in the following table:
voltage wires shall not be installed in different compartieff No. 18 to No. 0 ---- ---- ---------------- not greater than loo feet
of the same gutter, box, cabinets, etc., except for electric d - No. 00 to No. 0000 ----------------------not greater than so feet
charge lighting. 250•000 C.M. to 85DMo C.M----------------- not greater than 00 feet
(2) Secondary wising to electric discharge lames of I t 350.001 CM. to 500,000 C.1f.----------------not greater than 50 feet
500.001 C.M. to 750.000 C.M----------------- not greater than 40 feet
volts or less may occupy the same enclosures as the branch t Above 750,000 C.M.------------------not greater than as teet
suit conductors. Thefollowing methods of
(3) Wires of different systems may terminate in the mesupporting cables are recommended:
ewe of a double throw switch, or similar device (withouth(1) By clamping devices constructed of or employing
riers), if the wires of the different systems are insulating wedges inserted in the ends of the conduits With
secured that they cannot eonie into `contact with each ®that• cable$ having varnished cambric or thermoplewtie insulation
It may also be neesesary to clamp the conductor.
214 INvu iau_Nsl $
Arnett L Wiring Moths" a3'ste Nes. STMA
(2) By inserting boxes at the required jutervaja in .
insulating supports are installed and spewe'l a
manner to withstand the weirht of the ndue
thereto, the boxes being provided with covers,
(3) In junction box by de
90 degrees and carrying them horizoutaHy to a distance
than twice the diameter of the cable, the cables being
two or more insulating supports,e
thereto by tie wires if desired.
(n) Raceways Exposed to If porn
an interior raceway system are exposed to widely different teas.
peratum
as in refrigerating or cold plants. Provision shall be =& e
prevent circulation of air from a warmer to a colder section thr000 h
raceway.
{o} Electrical Coating of XeW and 1*1mm
Interior metal raceways, cable . d o Raceways metal f
condctors, shall be metallically joined together into a coutiffes
electrical conductor, and shall be so connected to all boxes, fittiggsa
cabinets as to provide effective electrical continuity.
(p) tlrotinding Metal RacewayL Yetal raceways, cable arm
and fittings shall be grounded as prescribed in Article T.
or I aa. SAFZVV 215
Artiste 5. Wiring Mgthods
n (a) Ge . The intent and purpose of the
follow' to ro ' that conductors shall have mechanical
strength, . cation, capacity adequate for the particular
conditions under whioh they are to be
7%*prol-irions
of this are ant intended to airply to conductors which form
or
an iatewrat rt of is t t as rs
motor eO®trolle, and the tike, or which
1� f
(b) Mnd=tw 1=UhU0jL Conductors shall be insulated, except
when uninsula ed Muductors atmsPecitIcallY permitted in these orders.
(1) WetZRO04tiOUL Insulated Conductors used under.
ground, ill concrete dabs or other masonry in direct contact
with earth, in wet locations, or where condensation or accumu-
lation of moisture within the raceway is likely to occur, shall be
mo ature-r t, rubber-eovered (Type Bir) ; moisture -resist.
ant, thermo -covered (Type TW`); lead -covered; or of a
type approved for the purpose Such conductors are not gait.
able for direct burial in the earth unless of a type speeifleally
approved for the ,purpose.
(2) Corrosive Conditions. Conductors exposed to oily
greases, Vapor gases, fumes, liquids or other substances having
a deleterious effect upon the conductor or insulation shall be of
a type approved for the purpose.
in metal raceway orr cable {q} alternatiaeat th ea€ (c) Minimum S% of Conductors. Conductors whether solid or
e army, or a current of k stranded, shall be not smaller than No. 14 except as otherwise provided in
amperes enters a metal enclOSUM the conductors of circuits opewn these order&
on alternating-eurrent shall be so arranged as to avoid overbestingi
the metal by induction. If the capacity of a circuit is sueh that it. (d) Stranded Conductors. Except when used as busbars, con-
impractieable to run all conductors in one enclosure, ad duetors No. 6 and larger, installed in raceways, shall be stranded.
nate may be used provided the conductors a any one is (e) Conductors in Multiple. Conductors in sizes 1/0 or larger may
balanced ed and include one be ran. in multiple provided they are of the same length and have the
Induced ear:eaq is as can be a by so � same crcular-mil area and
is oat 40010"re that the ewreat In cape wilt be qa t tea. type of insulation. Where conductors are ran
current is the opposite direction. in multiple, they shall be so terminated at each end as to insure equal
In the tam of circuits - di. = ug ."sum or aim, division of the total current between all conductors that are involved
X-ray apparatus, the currents carried by time cto,-s are that a ' a
duetor may be placed in a metal raceway or cable armor without c&usft ftaawt & (f ) Neutral Conductors--8iae. Neutral conductors shall be of the
isdueth'a•size required to carry the current to which the may
Where the cand ore of a throughal in ti, obare neutral permitted for services only shall be calculatedsubsfor the cabe ected. m
of a metal abiao. the effect of induction may be dimistated by eatting 11t,
_*
metal between the individual wtthe conductors „I ing the capacity of insulated conductors.
or by PAWAr au the Conductors in the cirmit throush an hsalatiag tdedc, ■ (g) Neutral Conductors—InsuIation. The insulation of the neu•
to eo:er a hole is the metal cobiaet snMcicndy lease for an the cauduetats d ttralconductor shall be the same as that of the other conductors of
elrcalt
BogWred. Suitable corers shall be installed on,services, feeders, subfeeders and branch circuits, except that:
{r} Covers (1) An approved insulated neutral ma
boxes, $tons, mild enclosure to prevent aidetttal contact f other conductors are lead -sheathed. Y be used when the
parts or mechanical injury to parts or insulation contained
(2) The neutral of a may be uninsulated under the
i�isknyt: 1. New sa (r)filed W : eli'eetioe ' t$ day conditions
ifi
(R ilk iia 3). speced in Orderer 2326 (c).
q r+
7�
VIM
Tn%z 8 Divaum or JN�DUSTSIAL SAF
55, Me. 3--2-19,5S) rT 217
Article 5. Wiring M.kjj.
Ported by Meam of a knob or cleat within six inches of a tap.
In buildings Of mill construction mains not smaller than No.
81 where not liable to be disturbed
inches and run direct from timbers may be separated about six
to timber, being supported
from each timber only. if circuits of No. 8 or larger are run
across open splices where 'lot liable to be disturbed, they may
be supported at distances not greater than 15 feet if approved
noncombustible, nonabsorptive insulating separators providing
not lea than two and one -half-inch separation bet-7een con-
ductors are installed at intervals of
not, over four and one-half
feet.
".22nic tam (3) When nails am Used to mount knobs
smaller than they shall be not
10 penny- When screws are used to mount knobs,
or when nails Or screws are used to mount cleats,
,w w
they shall be
Of a length sufficient to Penetrate the wood to a depth equal to
un
?,MT at least one-half the height of the knob and fully the thickness
n,
of the cleat. Cushion washers shall be used with nails,
�X4
(d)Spacing.
e]Deee(h Open conductors in dry places and for voltages not
ng 300 volts shall be separated two and one-half ches from each
Other and one-half inch from the surface wired over;inand, except &,i
Provided in Order 2342(b), for voltages from 301 to 600 volts shall be
mix _--D=-= separated four inches from each other and one inch from the surface
-,z wired over. In damp or wet locations a reparation of at leas
from thesurface wired over s r shall be maintained for all voltages.
t one inch
T-Jrnz (e) Dead Ends. Open conductors shall not be dead -ended at a
_Z:�:,_=7 ardt�i ISMMe.
Or receptacle unless the last support is within 12 inches of the
11111
AAAMM004ar 'JIMM- '34
WL M Tie Wires. No. 8 or larger conductors supported on solid
"am TMW knobs shall be SCMMY tied thereto. If conductors are used for tying,
Seem they shall have an insulation of the same
"atl A&M Which they confine.
'M _:I� 4M,24L type as that of the conductors
77- , ill' W7
77__ Zama at�� MML-W
faeftrww- Passing Through W8118 and timbers
conductors shall
beseparated from contact with walls, floors, timbers or partitions through
f'�r 1=22r, =0 which they pass by tubes or bushings of noncombustible nonabsorptive
rr.", fyn -=mrr er �s pp-acisc� insulating material. If the bushing is shorter than the Mies a water -proof
�,zn z permitlei Ideeve of noninductive material shall be inserted in the hole and an insu-
1M, 'u-M-orazzi.-M'dating bushing IS into the sleeve at either end in such a manner
aon to keep the conductors absolutely out of contact with the sleeve. Each
conductor must be carried through a separate Porcelain tube or sleeve.
(h) Separation v -
"J" Metal wOrs- Open conductors shall be sep-
-M s1m;orted gazarated at least two inches from metallic conduit, piping, or other con.
ducting materials or from any exposed lighting, powers communication
-Maer "ruzzorF ims or signal conductor, unless separated therefrom by aeon and
�r ail JI-Irem At less e" #IMAY fixed nonconductor additional to the insulation of the conductor.
IMC If any insulating tube is used, it shall be "cured at the ends.
218 INDusTRuL RELATwxs
Article 5. Wiring Methods (Register 55, N0.3Tr= 8 DIVISION INDUMIAL SAFZTY —2-4-55,
(Register s%NO.S--2-19-55) OP 219
(i) Separation From Piping in Damp Laeati=L Open eoudwtm
located close to water pipes or tanks, or in other damp katkvssW
be so placed that an air space will be permant-utiv maiuti1 6IW'X"
anea
them and pipes which they cross. Where praetirable, conductors SW
run over, rather than under, pipes upon which moisture is likely to P*
or which may leak.
(j) Protection From Mechanical Injin:7. Where open eond
arose ceiling joists and wall studs, and are exposed to mechaniW
they shall be protected by one of the following methodr,
within seven feet from the floor shall be considered exposed W medule.
ieal injury.
(1) By guard strips nota than seven -eighths irA k
thickness and at least as high as the insulating supp^ plaw
on each side of and close to the wiring.
(2) By a substantial running board at least oneha ind
thick back of the conductors with side protection& Runciae
boards shall extend at least one inch outside the owductmi
but not more than two inches and the protecting sides " it
at least two inches high and at bast seven -eighths inch &id
(3) By boxing made as above and furnished with em
kept at least one inch away from the conductors within, Whee
protecting vertical conductors on side waus the boxing ad b
closed at the top and the holes through which the eendudes
pass shall be bushed.
(4) BY conduit, in which case the rules for conduit Ali
be followed, or by metal piping in which case the eonduetee
shall be encased in continuous lengths of approved &mlile ti*
ing. The conductors passing through conduit or piping shell tr
so grouped that current in both directions is approxiinstd.,
equal.
(k) In Accessible Attim Conductors in unfinished aeeeuffi
attics or roof spaces shall be installed in accordance with the requim
menta for concealed knob -and -tube wiring.
(1) Ta Concealed Spaces. Conductors shall not be in contact will
any object other than their insulating supports. If ran in conceak
spaces they shall be installed in accordance with the requirements fe
concealed knob -and -tube wiring.
(in) Drip Loops. Conductors entering or leaving locations mi+
Ject to dampness, wetness or corrosive vapors shall have drip IW
formed on them and shall then pan upward and inward from the outli6
of the buildings, or from the dump, wet, or corrosive location, thrN0
noncombustible, nonabsorptive insulating tubes.
2348. Cond Knob -and -Tube Work. (a) Scope. Olsiceelli
knob -and -tube work shall also comply with the provisions of Order 2311,
Article 5. Wiring Method*
(b) Use- Concealed kROb-and-tube work may be used in the hol.
lows of walls and ceifings. It shall not be used in commercial
gara.es, in theaters, in motion -picture studios, nor in hazardous loca-
tions. ConeTaled knob -and -tube work shall not be used for systems of
more than 3W volts between conductors nor where the conductor
exceeds No. &
(e) Supports. Conductors shall be supported at intervals not
exceeding four and one-half feet by knobs and tubes. There shall be a
knob within six inches from each tap. If such support is impracticable
and the conductors are in a dry location, they may be fished if sepa-
rately enclosed in flexible tubing extending in continuous lengths from
one support to the next or to an outlet box, or from one outlet box to
another. Otherwise, conduit, armored cable, electrical metallic tubing or
nonmetallic sheathed cable shall he used.
(d) Conductor SePaMU011. Conductors shall be separated at
least three inches and maintained at least one inch from the surface
wired over. At distributing centers, meters, outlets, switches or other
places where space is limited and the three-inch separation cannot be
Maintained, each conductor shall be encased in a continuous length of
flexible tubing. Where practicable, conductors shall be run singly on
separate timbers or studding.
(e) Separation From Other Objects and Protection. Conductors
shall be separated from other conductors and objects as follows:
(1) The provisions as to rigid supporting and clearance
from foreign wires and other objects as specified for open wir.
ing shall be complied with.
(2 - ) Conductors passing through cross timbers in plastered
partitions shall be protected by an additional tube extending at
least 3 inches above the timber.
(f) In Unfinished Attics and Roof Spaces. Conductors in unfin.
ished attics or roof spaces shall comply with the following:
(1) Conductors in unfinished attics and roof spaees shall
be ran through or on the side of joists, studs and rafters, except
in attics and roof spaces having head room at an points of
less than three feet in buildings completed before the wiring is
installed.
(2) If conductors in accessible unfinished attics or roof
spaces reached by stairway or permanent ladder are run
through bored holes in floor joists or through bored holes in
studs or rafters within seven feet of the floor or floor joists,
such conductors shall be protected by substantial running
boards extending at least one inch on each side of the con-
ductors and securely fastened in place.
(3) If ewTied along the sides of rafters, studs or &W
joists, neither running boards nor guard strips will be required.
220 IxDusTRUL R=ATo-xs
Artiote b. Wiring Methods{ 3_2_U41
(g) Thermal Insulation. Concealed knob -and -tube VrOrk mayt
installed where approved thermalb in
(it) Grounding. Each fixture. outlet box, switch box or Paui
nently installed eleetrieal appliance, having exposed Metal SmAft
and installed within eight feet vertically and five feet
any grounded floor or surfacm shall be eff'e€:tivel, n
less than No. 14 A.W.G. copper wire.
(i) Outlet Boxes. Approved outlet boxes shall be imulled at i
outlets and switch points and the llexible tubing shall extend from fi
last knob into such boxes. Nonmetallic outlet be
5344. Bare Conductor Feeders. (a) Um By special
from the Division of Ind may be sig
for feeders only. Such bare conductors may be installed
Only
ia an
channel or shaft of noncombustible ins of g
construction; and only if the voltage between conductus don ad =a
600 volts. Bare conductors shall not be used in damp or wet loonfin
nor in any hazardous location, nor where subject to
except in storage -battery ; noir in hoistways or elevates Ad
(b) Size and Capacity of Canducters. The maximum pernima
current shall be 1,000 amperes per square inch o4 crosssectieagl ons
copper conductor in unventilated enclosures, and 1,204 ampem p
square inch in ventilated en
(e) Branch Tape. Branch taps from bare conductor feedem
be installed as provided in Order (e).
(d) Accessibility. Where the installation of bare eondu&
feeders is permitted, the chase, channel or shaft shall be suitably eadw
with noncombustible material. The conductors shall not be seeeml
to other than qualified
TITLE 3 D (w INDUSTRIAL SAFETY 221
(IR044tor 5% Pio. 3--2-19-5S) Artioio A Wiring Methods
insulation. Armored cable shall not be used (1) in any hazardous loca-
tions; (2) where exposed to corrosive fumes or vapors; (3) in storage.
battery ; (4) on exam and hoists except as provided in Order
2488(cOff) ; nor (5) in ' .ways or on elevators except as provided in
(e).
(b) Support& Armored cable shall be secured by approved
ft�Plea, straps, or similar fittings, oo designed and installed as not to
injure the cable. Cable shall be secured at intervals not exceeding four
and one-half feet axi within 12 inches from every outlet box or fitting,
except where cable is fished and except lengths of not over 24 inches at
terminals where flexibility is necessary.
(c) Exposed Work. Exposed runs of cable shall closely follow
the surface of the building finish or of running boards except:
(1) Lengths of not more than 24 inches at terminals where
flexibility is necessary.
(2) In accessible attics and roof spaces, for which ase
Order 2345(d).
(3) On the underside of floor joists in basements where
supported at each joist and so located as not to be subject to
mechanical injury.
(d) In Accessible Attics. Cable in readily accessible attics or roof
spaces shall be installed as follows:
(1) If run across the top of floor joists, or within seven
feet of floor or floor joists across the face of rafters or stud-
ding, the cable shall be protected by substantial guard strips
which are at least as high as the cable.
(2) If carried along the sides of rafters, studs or floor
joists, neither guard strips, nor running boards shall be
required.
(e) Supports. Conductors shall be supported on noncom (e) Protection at Cable Ends. At all points where the armor
nonabsorptive insulating supports of adequate mechanical sbvng& terminates, a fitting shall be provided to protect wires from abrasion,
unless the design of the outlet boxes or fittings is such as to afford equiva-
(f) Fin Cutoffs. If floors are pierced, suitable lent protection, and in addition, an approved insulating bushing or its
vertical travel of fire shall be provided. equivalent approved protection shall be provided between the conductors
and the armor. The connector or clamp by which the armored cable is
2W. Armored Cable. (a) Use. Approved armored sable IN fastened to boxes or cabinets shall be of such design that the insulating
be used as the wiring method, if properly protected from leftkuk bushing or its equivalent will be visible for inspection. This bushing will
injury. Armored cable (T,vpe AC or ACT) may be used for both e'M not be required with lead -covered cables which shall be so installed that
work and concealed work in dry locations: and imbedded is P1051frW the lead sheath will be visible for inspection.
on briek or other masonry, except in damp or wet location& Armored ei(f) All bends shall be so made that the armor of the eable
{Type ACV) s ldi 4 and larger r be for w� not be injured, and the radius of the curve of the inner ed of an
in dry locations in build'zngs. sable fl contain lead edge y
conductors ('Type ACL), if used where exposed to the watt1w a' bend shall be not less than 5 times the diameter of the cable.
continuous moisture, for underground runs and embedded in MOM,, (g) Grounding. The armor shall be grounded as prescribed in
concrete or fill in buildings in course of construction, or where 61110 Article 7 of these orders.
to oil
gasoline or other conditions having a deteriorating effect 00 t
20.2
Article 6. Wiring Methods
maso. Nonmetallic Sheathed Came. a Use.
sheathed vable shall not bewfor f-zzj��. N"--=e'anie sh'*'
cable steal I not be usi!d as; sf-rvif* orf r;_n�_t - n -,:- �iha_ it be emb'dd,,
in masonry, concrete, fill, plaster ,)r Ffmil ar fn:_;��i. The cable in r
run or flahed in the air vrj*,(Is of er;n.re-e
where such walls are not exprA,d Frr or tile vm�
moistum V
dampness. Nonmetallic sheathed in tmfinwjt�
cellars, nor in basements, nor frr
es. _Nfr-collie sbntle
cable shall not he installed (1) in garages - -
'' - , k -! in theilaW
(3) in motion -picture studios; f4) in battery, rooms; (5) it
hoistways; (6) in any hazardous, locatin in breweries, ice libiwA
cold storage warehouses, and sl Imilar wet le at~orss where subject t
mildly corrosive fumes and vapors,
(b) Supports. NonmetaUic sheathed cable shall be secured
Approved staples, straps, Or similar fittings, so designed and instaw
not to injure the cable. Cables be secured in place at intervals w
exceeding four and One-half feet and within 12 inehes from every outk
box or fitting, except that in concealed work in 2nished buildings who
such supporting is impracticable, the cable may be f6hed from ou&
to outlet.
Rei;TMA I TITLE 8 Divanox or I1.%DusMAL SAM"
(Register 5,5. Nc,. 3--2-1,3.55, 223
Article 5. Wiring Methods
(c) In Accessible Attics. Cable in accessible attics or roof lipm
shall be installed as follows;
(1) If ran across the top of floor joists, or within sew
feet of floor or floor joists, across the face of rafters or sW
ding, the cable shall be protected by, substantial guard strip
at least as high as the cable. If the Attie is not accessible if
permanent stairs or ladders, protection will. only be require
within six feet of the nearest edge of scuttle'hole or a&
entrance.
(2) If carried along the sides of rafters, duds or flet
Joarta, neither guard strips nor running Wards shall be requited
(d) Bends. Bends in cable shall he so made, and other handy
shall be such, that the protective coverings of the cable will not be injured
and no bend shall have a radius less than five times the diameter of 6
cable.
(e) TYPU and Sites. Grounding Conductor. Cable shall be'
approved type, in sins 14 to 4, inclusive, and in 2 or 3 -wire assemblie
and in addition may have an approved size of noninsulated copper ON
ductor laid next to the insulated condueors to be used only for grou'll
ing purposes.
(f) FittbP and 0ounectibim Grounding. Cable shall be ruse
continuous lengths, without joints, splices. or tap& from outlet bas l
outlet or junction box, or other approved ternAual fittings, and shall b
aseu,red thereto by means of approved devices which substantially el"
the openings. Where grounding is required by Article 7 of these Ordet
the grounding conductor shall be connected to the boxes or fittilp V
approved means. Approved outlet 1=xe er tzinzs shall be installed'
all outlets and switch points.
2347. Nonmetallic Waterproof Wiring. (a) Use. The Division
of 121-113::trial Safety may approve nonmetallic waterproof wiring to be
um -d f4.,r work in breweries, ice plants, cold storage warehouses
or similar wet lovati,Bns where subject to mildly corrosive fumes and
vapors. if the v4dtagm does not exceed 300 volts between conductors or
150 volts to ground. Sueb wiring shall comply with the requirements of
Order 2340.
(b) Conductors. Rubber- or thermoplastic -sheathed multiple-
eonilm-tor cable approved for the purpose shall be used. The individual
conduetors of the cable shall be not smaller than No. 12, except that
the cable may contain an approved size of conductor, with or without
individual insulation, to be used for equipment grounding purposes only.
(r) Supports. The cable shall be supported on insulators ap-
proved for the purpose and spaced at intervals not exceeding three feet.
(d) Attachment of Fittings. The cable shall be securely fastened
to All outlet boxes, fittings and cabinets. A moisture -proof seal shall be
provided twtween the cable and all outlet boxes, fittings and cabinets.
(e) Passing Through Walls. The cable shall be enclosed in rigid
conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or approved insulating tubing, where
passing through walls, and where so enclosed, the enclosure shall be
sealed with a suitable fitting.
(f) Protection. The cable shall be suitably protected from
mechanical injury.
(g) Boxes and Fittings. Boxes and fittings shall conform to the
following!
(1) Outlet boxes, fittings and cabinets shall be constructed
of Cast metal, insulating material or other material approved
for the purpose.
(2) Switch plates, fixtures, and similar parts shall be of
insulating material when mounted on boxes, fittings, and cabi-
nets of insulating material.
(h) Grounding. Metal boxes, fittings, or cabinets shall be
grounded in accordance with Article 7.
2348. Rigid Iffetal Conduit. (a) Use. Rigid metal conduit may
be used under all atmospheric conditions and occupancies. Conduits and
fittings exposed to severe corrosive influences shall be of corrosion -
resistant material suitable for the conditions. If practicable, the use of
dissimilar metals throughout the system shall be avoided to eliminate the
possibility of galvanic action.
(b) Wet Locations. In portions of dairies, laundries, canneries,
and other wet locations, and in locations where walls are frequently
washed, the entire conduit system, including all boxes and fittings, used
224 INDUSTRIAL Rrs.avcONS
Article 5. Wiring Methods Registar 55. No. TIM1TITLE a Drrmom of IND SAF"r 225
$ -,2 (Register 55, No, 3-2-99-55) Article & Wiring Methods
tlicrewit i shall be made watertight, and the conduit shall be izovAt
so that there is at least one-fourth inch air space between the condufti, .
the wall or other supporting surf
(c) Minimum Sire. No conduit smaller than one-
trical trade size, shall be used, except for enclosing the leal, q MOW
as permitted in Order 2394(e).
(d) Number of Conductors in Raceway. The maximum mm
of wires or cables of any given size installed in any one conduit r
electrical metallic tube shall be as shown in Tables 3 4 5 $,
Conduit aim
i"
-----------------------------------------
}� ----------------------------------------
1"
---------------------------
---------------
1I- ----------------------------------------
1 " ---------------------------------------
2" ------------------------------------------
--------------------------
3" and la -------------
Mesimsnt distance
between ripid metellie
conduit supports
-------- 10'
-------- 1Q'
-------- 12'
-------- 14'
-------- 14'
-------- 18'
-------- 16`
1 ,----------------------- WVconditions specified in the heading of each ieular table. Each length of conduit
(regardless of size) made up with threadless
(e) Reaming, All ends of conduits shall be reamed to type couplings and connections shall be securely fastened in place at least
rough edges, every 10 feet- Such couplings and connections shall always be made up
t, and where buried inr used
(f ) Bushings--Locknuts. Where a conduit enters a boa or conduit runs wet places,roshall be of thncrete or e approved wor in atertight otype. in
fittings, a bushing shall be provided to protect the wire from a
unless the design of the box or fitting is such as to afford equi t (k) Grounding. Conduit shall be grounded as prescribed in
Lection. The conduit shall be secured in outlet box, junction bmeArticIe I of these orders
cabinet by a loeknut on the outside and a locknut on the inside of the be X49, glee Metallic Tubing. (a) Use. Electrical metallic
or cabinet,
or cabinet, unless the conduit is screwed inter a ih ed hub in the mtubing may be used for beth exposed and concealed work. Electrical
metallic tubing protected, from eorrasion solely by enamel shall not be
(g) Couplings. Couplings and eonnectors used with eonduit used- Electrical metallic tubing shall not be used (1) where during
be made tight. Running threads shall not he used on conduit for emm installation or afterwards, it will be subject to severe mechanical injury;
tion at couplings in wet locations or underground, (2) in cinder concrete or fill where subject to moisture, unless protected
(h) Conduit Bends. Bends of rigid metal eoaduit shall be m on all sides by a layer of noncinder concrete at least two inches thick;
that the conduit will not be i ends o. The radius of the curve of the' (3) in any hazardous locations except as otherwise provided in Article
edge of any field bend shall be not less than six times the internal (4) where exposed to corrosive vapor except as permitted in Order
eter of the conduit. Care shall be taken to see that bends in conduit err 9(b)•
so made as to avoid reducing the internal diameter of the conduit t (b) Corrosive Fumes. If tubing is exposed to corrosive fumes or
the bend. vapors such as may exist in meat packing plants, tanneries, hide cellars,
(i) Number of Bends, Arun of conduit between outlet and �tco g rooms' glue houses, fertilizer moms, salt storage, some chemical
let, between fitting and fitting, or a outlet and fittingshall ks' metal refineries, pulp mills, sugar mills, round houses, some
stables, and similar locations, tubing and fittings of corrosion -resistant
contain more than the equivalent of four quarter bends, including tharliaterial suitable for the conditions shall be used. The use of dissimilar
bends located immediately at the outlet or fitting. metals throughout the system shall be avoided to eliminate the possibility
(j) Bourg Conduit in Place. Conduit " be installed as pf galvanic action.
complete system without the wires, and shall be continuous from outlett (c) Wet Locations. For tubing installed in concrete or other
outlet, and from fitting to fitting, and shall be mechanically and eket6masonry in direct contact with wet earth, or in other permanently wet
tally connected to all fittings. The fittings shall be so connected that adqoestions, the conductors shall be of the lead -covered type, or of other
quate electrical continuity from one conduit to another will be type specially approved for this purpose. In portions of dairies, laundries„
The entire system shall be securely fastened in place. Conduit shall eriesand other wet locations,
firmly fastened within three feet of each outlet box 'unction boa, uently washed the entire tubing and in ideations where walls are
l c4frequently , g system, including all hoses and
inet or fitting. Conduit shall be supported at least every 10 feet. HOwfittings used therewith, shall be made watertight and the tubing shall be
ever, straight runs of rigid conduit made up with approved threde oun}ed so that there is at least one-fourth inch air space between the
coupling and uninterrupted by outlet boxes, junction boxes or cabinetabing and the wall or other supporting surface.
may be secured in accordance with the following table, providing sue
fastening prevents transmission of stresses to terminus when conduit i
deflected between supports.
Article G. Wiring Methods TrM
8 DITMON OF INPUSTRUL UVE'ry 227
(it) Minimum and Maximum Sizes.(Rogister 5'% No. 3--2-19-56) Artiolo Wiring Methods
In
shall be of appr(wed tyjpe and �- .Zw' ,hwrer on approved assemblim to equipment where the use of one-half
two inches. No tubirig -'ritiiisch flexible r or larger rize flexible facetal 4-onduit is not practicable in which case
Ault] be used, except frjr bar* netal conduit of three -eighth inch electrical trade size may
'�Ox
motors as permitted by Order 2."�14' e,. be used.
(e) Number of Conductors in Raceway. TI, t*r ofwirar (e) Supports. Flexible metal conduit shall be secured by approved
toned in any run of mtta-11-": Z- 'tl2rt'i th4 IlIeRns at intervals not exceeding four and one-half feet and within 12
in Order 2348(d). �"Uiches on each side of every outlet box or fitting, except where conduit
is
(f) Threads. Tubinghall nct fished and except lengths of not over 24 inches at terminals where
slu- c- nor conattiflaxibRity is necessary.
to boxes, fittings, or cabinets by mewts (A T h r�-&-' 7. iL ttt, woof the tdk
except by fittings approved for the purposee- . (d) Number of Conductors in Raceway. The maximum number of
(g) Couplings and Connectom Ttri-adl-s ty e0uwn-es or cables of any given size installed in any one conduit or electrical
Pe PliUP ametallie tube shall be as shown in Tables 3, 4 5 and 6.
connectors used with tubing shall alway* be r-ade ulput, and " I, ti-,ti
,
of the watertight type if bur.ed in rnasvar. =e= etc sl ur if inn g (e) Reaming. All ends of conduit shall be reamed or burred to
in wet places, remove rough edges.
(h) Bends—How e. Bends in the tubing shall he so ma&d (f) Conduit Bends. Bends of flexible metal conduit shall be so
the tubing will not be injured and that the interuald` *,terof the that the conduit will not be injured. The radius of the curve of the
will not be effectively reduced. The radius of the curve of the inuft;inner edge of any field bend shall be not less than six times the internal
of any field bend shall be not less than six times the interrga dilluediameter of the conduit- Care shall be taken to see that bends in conduit
of the tubing. an so made as to avoid reducing the internal diameter of the conduit at
(i) Bends—Number in One RUIL A run of electrical metallics the bend.
ing between outlet and outlet, between f7ttln-- and fitting, or bets (g) Number of Bends. A run of conduit between outlet and out -
outlet and fitting, shall not contain more than the equivalent of fiK between fitting and fitting, or between outlet and fitting shall contain
quarter bends, including those bends located immediately at the not more than the equivalent of four quarter bends, including those
or fitting. bends located immediately at the outlet or fitting.
(j) Securing Tubing in Plam The electrical metallic tubi (h) Grounding, Conduit shall be grounded as prescribed in
shall be installed as a complete system a-, provided in Order 2340, lArticle 7 of these orders. Continuity of grounding shall be assured by
shall be securely fastened in place at least every 10 feet and within *Wroved fittings.
feetof each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. History: L Amendment filed 2-9-55; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Itegls-
ter 55, No. 3).
(k) Grounding. Electrical metallic tubing shall be grommial
of 6 2351. Flexible Liquid -tight Metal Conduit. (a) Use. Approved
specified for other metallic raceway wiring methods in Article 7 flexible liquid -tight metal conduit may be used as the wiring method
orders. where exposed to moisture, oil, grease or corrosive conditions. Flexible
2MG. Flexible Xetal Conduit. (a) Use. Approved &x1liquid-tight metal conduit shall not be used (1) where it will be subject
metal conduit may be used as the wiring method, if properly protedO mechanical injury; (2) where it will be in contact with moving or
from mechanical injury. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used ]vibrating objects liable to damage or wear through the liquid -tight
where exposed to rain or otherwise exposed to excessive moisture, usleovering; (3) under conditions where its temperature, with or without
conductors are of the lead -covered type or of other type spedithe enclosed conductors carrying current, would exceed 60° C.; (4) in
concealed location unless accessible for inspection and replace -
approved for the conditiowk, � 2 '> in hoi�-tways; ex� ept as Prov,
Order 2505(c) ; (3) in storage batttry rvoins, 4in auy ruoin or Ctment; (5) in hoistways, except as provided in Order 2505(e) between
Pertinent classed as a Class I. Divon I location: (5) where rabirlser and limit switches, interlocks, push buttons or similar devices;
i '1sl
covered conductors are exposed to oil, corrosive fumes or vafan4(6) in storage battery rooms, except where approved corrosion -resistant
other substances that have a deteriorating effect on the coed fittings are used; (7) in any hazardous location classed as Class 1,
their insulations; nor (6) for*ervikes. Division 1; (8) in any other hazardous location, except where it is
(b) lGainlain Sim No flexible metal conduit less than cull -L necessary to employ flexible connections; nor (9) for services.
ineb eleetripal trade size shall beI
v�i,ptti as, porinitted for 110
(b) "
one-half inch electrical trade be imed except as permatted in
Order2394(c).
red
by apo)pro� at Flexible t f e fect
and within 12 inches on each. We of every outlet box or fitting,
lengths of not over 24 Inches at terminals where ftubility is neeessay.
(d) Nunibes of 0anducters in Raceway. The maximum number
Of wires or cables of any IPTIM X= installed is say me flexible liquid.
tight metallic conduit bees Amm In Tubles 3,4i 5 and 6.
(e) Coadsit Seauls. Benda of flextWe HqW&Aight metal coadeft
shall be es made that the conduit well not be injured. of the
Ow" of the inner edge of any Wd bond Aa be not less than six times
the internal diameter of the couduW ewe don be U&aa to see that
bends in conduit we ro made as to avoid reducing the internal diameter
of the conduit at the bend.
(f) Number of Dands. A ran of ht maW conduit
between outlet and outlet, between Ruing and
n
r between outlet
and fitting shall contain cot then the,equivalent of four quarter
bends, including thou at the outlet or ftig
(g) Wet or Cacradve Locatiew Flexible fiqu~t jectal con-
duit systems shall be made fiquid-tigitt with
corrosive fumes or vapors may mist„ all fittings shall be of
resistant material suitable for the
throughout the atem shall be avoided to tem .
sy' 'ty of
galvanic action.
(h) arowuiiag. Fkar'bie ' ' ' t metal conduit shall be
grounded as prescribed in Article 7 of these arders. Continuity of
grounding shall be assured by approved fitfingL
ffUterw L t Stied 241-M. sewuye tbirtMb,ft flmLft,(
ter M Ns. 3).
2352. Mineral lnsulat" Metal 8heathed. COAL (a) Use. min-
eral insulated metal sheathed be for Wei feeders
and branch circuits in both exposed and concealed work in dry or wet
locations, and embedded in PkAter Sunk an brick or other masonry.
It may be used for underground awns and embedded in concrete or fill
or where exposed to oil or Other conditionshaving a deteriorating
effect on the metal The sheath of mineral immlated-metal
sheathed cable exposed to destructive earrosm eonditmw, uch as
some types of cinder fill, alesn be protected by materials suitable for
those condition&
(b) BUaarts. Mineral insulated sheathed cable shall be
eeoured by approved mmm at Intervals not exceeding air feet except
where cable is fished.
Tram ti onisc= or ISMUNIIIIIAU SAVIETT 229
( ss, eta.sem- � Art a W WAs e11eth-18
(e) W t loo&U=L In locations where walls are frequently
ineludwg all boxes and fittings need
therewith, shall be made watertight.
(d) Reads. All bemds shalt be so made that tht cable will not
radiusbe damaged and the of the curve of the inner edge of any bend
shall be not len thm five theas the diameter of the cable.
(e) Twuslisatillf Seal. At all pointe where mineral insulated -
metal sheathed cable terminates an approved seal shall be provided
immediately stripy to prevent entrance of moisture into the
mineralinsulation and in addition, the conductors extending beyond
the sheath shall be 'insulated with an approved insulating material.
(f) pftti9CL whm mineral insulated -metal sheathed cable in
connected to boxes or equipment, the fittings shall be approved for the
conditions of
(g) Grounding. Mineral insulated metal sheathed cable shall be
grounded as specilled for other metallic raceway wiring methods in
Artiele ? of them orders.
Bid": L New nedea gni 240; eowtire ddrdeth day d (Bad
gggg Buitm NISW ]tagways. (Not wireways, or busways, or
auxiliary gattem) (a) Use. Rseeways shall be of approved types
and d:ail be used only in exposed dry loestions. Raceways shall not be
used (1) where concealed, except that the back and sides of multioadt
�asnjblies may be surrounded by the building finish, provided the cover
may be removed; (2) where subject to mechanical injury; (a) where
the voice exceeds 300 volts between conductors unless the metal has a
chi of not Im than .040 inches; (4) where subject to eorroave
vapors; (5) in bektweys; (6) in storage battery rooms; nor (7) in any
hazardous locatiaL
(b) Sin Of OM&RdDm No conductor larger than No. 6 doU be
installed in surface metal raceway.
(e) Number in Bew
aosT. The number of crdao-
tors installed in any raceway shall be not greater than thea for
which the raceway n approves
(d)Walls end !!cors. Nmeept in et
ammblies, raceways may be extended through dry walls, dry
PutitiOm
and dry floors, if is unbroken lengths where
passing through.
(e) g�eweys. If combination metal race are
used beth for and for lighting and power circuits, the d9lereat
wystgsag shall be run in separate compartments, identified b7
sharply
contrasting Colors Of, the interior finish � the mine relative out the p ra tion of
compartmeats shall be maintained through
(f) UnWoutlet Aumbly. lit let assembly, and all Stump
with the assembly, shall be approved for the purpo&*�
(g) Grounding. Metal raceways shaR be grounded as prescribed
in Article 7 of these Orders.
Iristom: L Resmabe"d fmat ftrew 1= =a smendment Ned zoo;
ef-fi- tbUtk* dRy *Amdtw (Regiam 2% Nft 3).
2U4. Underflow Racemays. (a) Um Underfiew raceways
may be used when installed beneath *a surfisee of concrete or other
flooring materials, or when bud Rush with the concrete fiow and
covered with linoleum or equivalent Row covering, Open -bottom "
of raceways may be used in concrete Ali between the rough and the
finished floor only. Underfloor raceways shall not be need (1) if subject
to corrosive vapors; (2) in any hazamlous location; (3) in commercial
garages; nor (4) in storage battery rocam
(b) Covering. Raceway coverings shall conform to the following -
(1) RACOW&P Not Over Few Inches WW Half.
round raceways not over four inches in width, and� except as
permitted in paragraph (3) of this order, flat -top sections not
over four inches in width shall have not Im than three-fourths
inch of concrete or wood above the raftway.
(2) Raceways Over Four blobas in Wkift or Wn Lou
Than ORO -half ]RCh SeParatiam Flat -top raceways over fo=ur
inches in width or placed less than one-half inch apart, shall
be covered with concrete to a depth of not less than one and
one-half inobeg,
(3) R&DOWSYS FhWh With Concrete. Approved metal
fiat -top raceways not over four kches in width may, in office
occupancies, be laid flush with the eancrete, floor surface if
covered with substantial linutemn not less the. oueeji-
ghth inch
in thickness or with equivalent ficer covering. When more than
one and not more than three raceways are each installed
flash with the concrete, they most be (1) ew*uous with eaeh
other and joined to form a,
rigid amembly, or (2) spaced not
less than one-half inch a".
(a) BIM of Oonduclam NO Conductor larger than N, 0 shall be
installed in underfloor rairewayw
(d) Number of ft"Rctm in ftamey. The combined ereass
National area of all eonduetars shall not exreed 40 pereent of the interior
area of the raceway; except that it the T&I"Wav- contains only armored
cable or nonmetallic sheethedrable, these requirements shall not apply.
(0) BOW and Taps. Splices or tap. shall he made only in jun,
tift boxes.
(f) Diseauthmed OuGets. When an outlet U discontinued. the
conductors supplying the Outlet shall lw removed from the raceway.
f)"awyn or IX=CSTmkL S"M 231
TITLB 6 ArUcte & Wiring M*tkv&
(RoOkW W 1411- "-IS-SS)
(a) Opm-bonew, Itacemy—How Laid, Open -bottom raceway
shall be W on a smooth pad of emerete extending at least one inch 08
carb, side of the raceway and at Imq one inch thick except that this
thi,knen may be, redueed to one-fourth inch where the raceway CrOam
a ran of conduit, and exctPt that in lieu of a concrete pad, fittings
Which will protect the conductors from contact with piping, structural
steel and Other, obstrwtms may be used. Raceways shall be Meehan-
imlly secured to the concrete pad.
(h) Laid in Straight Ltm& Underfloor raceways shall be laid so
that a straight line from the center Of One junction box to the center of
the next junction box will coincide with the center line of the raceway
system Racewsm "I be made modmicallY secure to prevent disturb-
ing this aligroneat during constrUCtiOn.
(i) Xwkm at Znds. At every end of line of raceway., a fitting
shall be installed extending through the floor to mark the line of the duct.
Where a dud line is interrupted by another duct line, but cOntinuss in a
straight live beyond, and has junction boxes or outlets on either Bids Of
the crowing liap, so markers an necessary at the interrupting point.
(j) Dead Xuds. Dead ends of raceways shall be closed.
(k) Low Points. Raceways, with their fittings, BIUM be 50 Se'
ranged that there will be no low points that May form traps for Water in
the raceway run.
(1) gpo" Fittings at Avjgles. Where raceways Are run at Other
angles than right angles, special fittings shall be provided.
(m) juRction Boxes. Junction boxes shall be leveled to the GO"'
grade and Weird against the entrance of water. Junction boxes used with
metal raceways shall be metal and shall be electrically continue= with
the raceways.
(n) I=BrtL Inserts shall be leveled to the floor grade and me"
against the entrance of water. Inserts used with metal raceways shall be
metal and shall be ele,.brMany contmaous with the raceway. IneartS Not
in or on fiber raceways before the floor is laid shall be mechan"lly
secured to the raceway. Inserts set in fiber raceways after the floor is 190
shalt be screwed into theraceway. After cutting through the raceway
wall and setting inserts. chips and other &A gba be removed from the
raceway, and tools shall be used which are so designed an to prevent the
to,, from entering the raceway and injuring conductors that may be in
placeOarmactiam to ftbinela and Wall OUUOIL 00101000tiOw to
esbi.ets and exkmijons from cells to outlets shall be made by mom of
rigid or flexible ouduit or by means of fittings approved for the PUrPOG&
232
�rti.a a Wiring M Ixntstr>oal. Tau (Register$
(P) X&MW Jaunts to ito WMUWGOL AR *ats aImC eagag of
M Bad
bete junction boxy • y,�
atter the this
building
ants!! not interrupt the ralnired
underfloor raceway mag be used for of
power and
wiring the .are run in
separate Coal ts, and the relative of
is maintained throughout the promigM
(r) Underficar, ragaways of gggW sUn be
rally +sontinuols and grounded all PCOGGribed fair other meW
ways in Article 7 of these and ata as as , rilig race•
the sources of supply. Where #s
imsconducting
material, all metal fixtures and s 8W be
d
additional grounding by of
od in the racowayip, Wherever
armored cable is used it shall be
Of theorders.VOMW Article 7
m
History: 1. Resumtxred tram
Im— P= end amendment Simi 2 -o -M;
s6,so. i).
28W` CeDuhn• X" Floor s. (a) For the
Purposes of this order a "cellular metal ficar recewayi, be defined
as the hollow spaces of cellular metal flocra, together with ani
table
fittings, which may be approved as enclosures for electrical conductors;
a "cell" shall be defined as a ainirk
eeUuIar
metal floor member, the axis of the cell in a
metal door member; a "header" ahall be the axis of the
way for electrical Conducoss es e use race -
of a celluhir metal floor, therebypermi the a ceDls
of electrical
Conductors from a distribution tetter to the
(b) IIso. Conductors shaII not be hmta&d in Cellular metal fioor
raeeways (1) where subject to vapor; (2) in any
location; (3) in commercial hazardous
or to the ares below the flow butnot
battery mems. No electric be . _ usWW (4) in sturage
herder which contains a pipe for cteam, water, air ger„ in other
service than or
dsetciev,
(e) muss of Conductors. No emductor, larger than No. 0 ahsii he
installed in aallular new flow raftways.
(d) Number of Csaducters isRgessmy. The combined crew
sect%wsl area of an ernduCtors 2118H not exceed 40
area of the herder feeding the ' a ud percent r the interior
Mains only armored or sheathed thattheraceway
menta shall not applerequire.
TITLE 8 Divisom or INouxr uL Sarsrr 233
(Re~ es, Me. -1e-55) !title a Wiring Methods
(e) $pliers and taps shall be nude only in
header awass units or junction
(f) Discontinued Outlets. When an outlet is discontinued, the
conductor* suppl.-Ong the outlet shall be removed from the raceway.
(g) Markers. A suitable number of markers shall be installed
extending through the floor for the future locsbW of cels and for system
identifiestim
(h) Junction Boxes. Junction boxes shall be leveled to the floor
grade and the entrance of water. Junction boxes used with
them raceways shatl be of metal and shall be electrically Continuous with
the
(i) Inserts. Liserts shall be leveled to the floor grade and sealed
agar the entrance of water. Inserts shall be of metal and shall he elso-
trieally continuous with the raceway. A iter cutting through the tali wall
and setting inserts, chips and other dirt shall be removed from the race-
way and tools sMU be used which are designed to prevent the tool from
entering the cell and injuring the Conductors.
U) Connection, to Osbineft and Extensions From Calls. Connec-
tions to cabinets and extensions from cells to outlets shall be made by
means of conduit or fittings approved for the purpose.
History: 1. Renumbered item former f2354 and sled 2.9465; effective tbktte*
day tbet-fter (Resintur 55. No. 3).
23M "Wkwways. (a) Use. Wireways may be used only in dry
IwAtions, except that approved weatherproof wireways may be use in
wet locations or outdoors. Wireways shall not be used (1) where subject
to seven mechanical injury or Corrosive vapor; (2) in hoistways; (3) in
any hazardous location; nor (4) in storage battery rooms.
(b) Size of Conductors. No conductor larger than 500,000 C.M.
shall be instaliai in any wireway.
(e) Rambasr of Ooudwtors in Wkeway. Wireways shall Main
not more than 30 conductors at any cross section, unless all conductors
in excess of 30 are for signaling circuits or are control conductors between
a motor and its starter and used only for starting duty. The am of
the cry -sectional areas of all contained conductors at any cross motion
of a wireway shall not exceed 20 percent of the interior a nal
area of the wireway.
(d) 14dices tad Taps. Splices or taps, made and insulated by
approved methods, may be located within the wireway if they are -
ble by means of hinged covers. The conductors, including splices and
taps, shall not tall the wireway to mon than 75 percent of its area.
(e) ftpportL Wireways shall be seeurely SUPPOrW at '
not exceeding five feet, unless specially approved for supports at
greater intervals,but in no case shall the distance between supports.
exceed 10 fest.
284 INDUNTRUL REYATKUS Taua
Ankh h Wkkro Motkoda t _ 3-4-
aft wirrmus, MW extend UUM
vers* uc
through dry walk if in
(11) Dad of wkewVa shall be
be ) with rigid hoasWiraways, -
surface metal raceway or armond COWL tubing
(i) Qg. Wireways shall be grounded an Vr,,UVM is
Article 7 of these orders, and whes, grounded sball b
at expansion joint, or tdomping seatioui,-
Hi"I'M L Res
ho(N No. 3).
057. $nswaya, (a) lea- BUseraws my his wed for exposed
work and for hafts cosidwtorg, DWIMM not be used
(1) where subject to same juschaniesd - - (2)
in
hoidways (3) in any hasard ; (4) OUT=" Inspors; in storage battery roam;
nor (5) outdoors or in wet or
for the purpose,
not (ex) Support Bumnays � at is
greater inter claeding d but inn no -tauce unless SPINIU01b, approved fbdweea at
porta
exceed 10 feet. If a d kstalled in
avertical - the sup.
Ports for the busbars shall be
eroW installation.
ihro gh dry vans if in unbrokenWall$, h. Be,
FEw
ora of fede door to provide
Ws2'7-
(d) Dead )lie. Dead ends of basways shall be ci
(e) Branches From eh b shall be
aside with bunwaya or with rigid
metallic tubing, surface acetal r wag:armored cableor for porbMa
aPPlianees, with suit" cord assemblien approved for h,ard
If ilia Rating of over"Mrsat current
ng • and Ra
standard rating of the overcurrrent d neat _ the bmnMY does not d to be
a
ng need, but not exceeding I50 t of t of the
the
busway.
(g) Redaction in Sins oft my
be omitted at points where ars.
the smaller b does not reduced m
rating at equal to ird ththe m - 5t) fled anti a t
device neat back on the liars and setting of tthahe t
ia free from with 'sueb busway
t ITMS s DismaiMe. t --a ) I �' wear 285
s. Widal VAMM"
(h)BranchObVRA& Wherea hassway is used as a feeder, devices
or plug4si oomseeflow for tapping off branch circuits from the busway
l emt&W *a evercurreat devices required for the protection of the
branch circuits, except an permitted is Order 2369(c).
Rating Oiroaits. A bus-
(�) � � i one of the types described in
® be a
lZ. �+ or setting' of the o t device
. -ng the ampere rating of the branch
circuit sad the circuit shall in m!l easnform with the regtuiresnents
of 1? a to wits of that rating.
) 31arking. ys shall. be marked with the voltage and cur-
rent is for- they are and with the msnufacturer's
nome or in sinh manner as to be visible after instaliatim
It is recommended that where secondary systems are operated
nogrounded, acombinatim ground
detector and potentialiaer plug be
used as an a fitting for b y systems to establish a definite
potential difference between the bus lairs and the grounded casing of
the baswaya. Thin will serve to drain off any static or other charge from
the entire busVIRY 9Y including its connected apparatus, supply and
branch circuit conductors.
(k)Grumftg. Basways shall be grounded as prescribed in
Article 7 of these orders, and when grounded sban have bonding junipers
at cytmrfflon ioirto or teleseoping sections.
History: 3. Renumbeed f vM fWMW ;2356 and filed 240; STs tbkdML
any UMVaner ( 55, No. 8).
2M OW4 Switch and Junction Boxes and Fittings. (a)
Scope, The provisions of this order shall apply to the installation of
outlet, switch, and 'junebonboxes and fittings as required by Order
2NO(g)-
(b) NommstsWc OUILIA Boxes- Nonmetallie outlet boxes may be
used only with open wining on insulators, concealed knorand tube work,
ed cable, and with nonmetallic waterproof wiring'
(c) Metaft on" Boxes—tlroanding. When used with knob-
and tube work or nomociallie sheathed cable, metallic outlet boxes shall
be grounded when. within eight #set vertically or five feet horizontally
of a grounded
(d) DaMPOrWetLOOMMOUL Boxes and fittings installed in damp
or wet locations shall be weatherproof.
(e) Depth of Bosh for ouncesbed Wars. Outlet boxes for eoa-
have an internal depth of at least one and one-half
• except that when the ' of each a box will result'ia
injury tohanding or is impracticable, a box not Tess ftu
oaa.bnjf inch -internal depth may be iustal1ed.
F,.
236 IDS BUA=O sa TrrLN
Artieie s. Wiring ab**& t els pia ;
(f) S AoaeraL Bomea, fittions and eshinets be
"Yf in place. -
in sise, which are aftelied to Airmly secured exposed ramunT by thread.
Wined designedOther connection purpose,we owaaend as In,
scribed in paragraph (2 this
em as -
MM
building inwhich k be
giber
ound
to a stud, joint to similar AMA phanturd Usk or. to 8 metal
or wooden MPPQrt which is aseared to sach 8 structural unk
Wooden supports shaU bejarb in
thickness. lAth of wood, metal Or composition died act be
considered a structural mdL
(2) Rzpmd Welt. is exposed work amid in essigooled
work in existing
and outlet boxes buildings ha as or lea
(1) of this order without disturbing the building
boxesmsy be mounted directly upon the plaster gurfees if
aecnr* fastened in plim
(g) Fall act JMMUOIR DORM Pull and junctimt boxes shalt con-
form to the following.
(1) Uluimvm Bills, For raceways of one and uar-
ter-inch trade size and lorgw, ecaUdning, conductors of No. 6
or larger, the minimum dimensions of a pull box or a junefim
box installed in a raceway died conform to the
(A) Straigbt Pulba, in straight pulls the length of
the box shalt be not less thm eight times the trade dima-
star of the largest raceway:
(B) AvSk or V P aUL Where angle or U pulls are
master, the cau. • the
hoz and the OPPowke wall of the box Aa be not lope
than 6 times the trade diameter sof the raceway. This dis-
tance shall be increased where necessary to
t safe
iwAlUctift of condo wit ranging oto eon-
ductor immutim The dktanee between raceway entries
ndO$Wg 00 same coudadw doll be not lem
times the trade of the lima six
(C)lzcqAim& Thelimitations of sub
(Ater1)ain i (B) of sure intendedto apply to
boxer or kO� supplied with to typos of
recessed > forand having hubs or
terminal bushings and its.
Taw • DMWW of bMVXUMAL SAMY =7
tee$ crai.1.1--3-19-552 Artiele L Wiring1AeMVe4e
(2) in ora Sozas. In pall boxes
sr junction boxes having any dimansion over six feet, 811 eon-
duetors shall be cabled
or reeked up in an approved manner.
(h)Nmebor of Oonduders In a Box. Bozell shalall eanductors enclosed inl c sufficient
size to provide free space (1) maximum number of conductors, not coating
fixture wires, permitted in outlet and junction home shall
be as in the fonewing tables with the exceptions noted:
One, sex"
MMier of eenaeef—
Pees dinessiessNo. 14 NO. U 1Ve.19 NO-!
1;z8! M _- 65 4 6
1fz4 -- e 1 a e
1} z 4 Nie ---------- --- 11 e 1 e
11z4ft - 11 12 16 8
26 z 41i ____ _w_ 20 16 12 10
2 z l} z2# 6 4 4
2} z if z21 ---------_' 7 1 i
a z li z 2t — --- ------
Shaftw gown of Isere Than 11 inch t»Pth
Yen&Wej—d
Be, dinfoligne trete sere No. I# No. le No. 10
31 --- 4 4 ;
4-- --------- a a 4
The above tables apply where no fittings or devices, such
as fixture studs, able clamps, hickeys, switches or r
are co tained in the box. Where one or more fixture studs, cable
damps, or hickeys are contained in the box, the number of eon-
ductorsshall be one Leas thea shown in the tables, with a further
deduction of one for each flush devise or combination of fiash
device mounted on the same strap. A conductor running
throWh the box is ecunted as one conductor, and each conductor
terminating in the lox is also counted as one conductor- If single
Bush boxes are ganged, and each section is occupied by a flush
device or eondhatin of flush device on the same strap, the
limitations will apply to each section kdivid>ially-
(2) For combinations not shown in the above tables, the
following table shall apply: r.-.. wiftIn see
'.tris. 14 — _ 2.� eubleC"k ham4
No. 12
NIL 110 IRS e"k,inell"
No. s ---- a es>ae inebes;
(3) The limitations in Pare (1) and (t2) of this
order shall not appy to terminal ,rithout wsad nsterg
.or to types of boxes or M111111
hubs or recemed parts for terminal bushings MA W"U*
288 I
nrtleb a wirins Maths& { 5%
(i) Conductors
ing boxes or fittings shall be protected from abrasion, and skan conform
to the following:
coad(y) 0P0niuP to be CW$INL Openings tbraugh which
uctom enter sboll be
(2) Ysia1 Boxef andIf outlet or
fittings are used with o ' `
work, conductors shall enter through insulating bushings or, in
dry Plate, through AmIde tubing thelad
insulating support and firmly secured to the box or fitting
Where raceway or cable is used with meW outlet homes or tit-
gs, the raceway or cable shall be secured to such boxes and
tting&
(3) N If nonmetanie boxes are used
with open wiring or ecus -tube work, the
tors shall enter through individual holes. Where fienhis tubing
is used to encase the eonduetcr, the tubing shall extend how
the last insulating support and may run into the boa or ter-
minate at the wall of the boa. If nonmetallic sheathed cable is
used, the cable assembly shall enter the box through a knockout
opening. Clamping of individual conductors or cabin to. the box
is not required if supported within fi inches of the boa.
(I) Cleves and Canopus. In completed installations each outlet
boa shall be provided with a cover unless a feature campy is
(1) Nonmetallic eovem and plata shall be used with -
metallic outlet bore& Where exposed to mechanical injury, metal
covers shall be used.
(2) If a fixture canopy 0r pan is any combustible wall
or ceiling finish exposed between the edge of the canopy or pan
and the outlet iron shall be covered with noncombustible
material.
(3) Covers of outlet boxes having boles through which
flexible cord pendants pns, shall be provided with b=biop
designed for the purpose or shall have smooth, well ow -
faces on which the cords may bear, ed hard rubber
bush -
logo shall not be nod.
(k) Vmmd opmftgL %med Openings in boxes, cabinets and
fittings shall be effeetivell closed by metal plugs or plates affording pro.
teetion substantially equivalent to that of the, wall 0f the litting.
(t) Boxes Enclosing Flush Devices. Boxes used to endow flush
devices shall be of such design that the be completely enclosed
on back and aides, and that substantial support for the'em will be
provided. Screws for supportingilea shall he in attach-
ment of the device contained therein.
Twat s 2"
OF Ia�o S�rars
t 3-4-15-55)watch S. wtrtaa Metheda
(m)podavot is Wga In walk or ceilings of concrete, the or
other noncombustiblet ls, boxes and fittings shall be se installed
that the front of the box or fitting will not set back of the finished
surface more than One-f0urth i in waw and ceilings enustruct0d of
wood or other combustiVe materiaL outlet boxes and fittings shall be
flush with the finished surface or project therefrom.
(n) Repshft pladw. Except on walls or ceilings of concrete,
tele or other noncombustible material, a plaster surface which is broken
or incomplete shall be repaired so that there will be no gaps or open
spaces at the edge of the box or fitting.
(o) jundign Sam to Be Aecoolible. junction bona shall be so
installed that the wiring building way be rendered le
without removing an, Dart of the
(P) Exposed Extonsism In making an exposed extension from
an existing outlet of coneeaW wiring, a box, extension ring or blank
aver shall be Mounted over the original boa and electrically and
mechanically secured to it The extension shall then be connected to this
boa in the manner prescribed for the method of wiring employed in
making the
shallbe Sam" at Fixture pittlets. Bones need at outlets for fixtures
designed for the purpose. At every outlet used exclusively for
lighting, the box shall be so designed or installed that a fixture may be
attached.
(r) groundiuff. Metal boxes, and fittings used with conduit, elea.
tried metallic tubing, armored cable or metal raceway $hall be grounded
when and in the prescribed in Article 7 of these ordem
Histwm: 1 be"A fmn loaner 12351 aa fled 24455; eftetive tbirdeth
day dweaft- (mer f6, No. 3).
2359 CaUncts and Cutout Boxes. (a) Scope. The provisions
of this order shall apply to the installation of cabinets and cutout boxes.
(b) Damp or Wet Locations. In damp or wet locations, cabinets
and cutout boxes of the surface type shall be so placed or equipped as to
prevent moisture or water from entering and accumulating within the
cabinet or cutout box, and shall be mounted so that there is at least one.
quarter inch air space between the enclosure and the wall or other'suP-
porting surface. Cabinets or cutout boxes installed in damp or wet 1068 -
tions shall be wca L
in Wall. In walls of concrete, tile, or other noncom-
bustible material, cabinets shall a
(e) be installed that the front edge of the
cabinet will not set back of the finished surface more than one-fourth
inch_ In walls constructed of wood or other combustible material, cab-
inets shall be liush witk the finished surface or project therefrom -
(d) II Usused openings in cabinet or cWtoat
boxes shall be effectiwdY dosed to afford protection substantially equiva.
Int to that of the wail of the cabinet or cutout box.
240 hMVSUUL BirIATIMB TIM; a
Article L Wiring atm( Register 5%y.
(e) Onducton Zatecring 0alfteft w Onticat BcgML Candudgm
entering cabinets or cutout boxes " be Protected firma, abragicat and
shall conform to the following-.
(1) Openings to 13e GkssgL Openings Groqlk which
conductors enter shall be adequainly close&
(2) Metal, 0abinsts cmd Vajou Boam If ggeW cabinets
or cutout boxes are used with open wiring or anuesaW kwb.
and -tube work, eveductora shall enter through insulating bical,
ings, or in dry placesthrough fiezMe tubing extending fnm
the last insulating support and firmly secured to the cabinst or
cutout box.
M Insulation at luddw Wheire ungrounded conductors of
No. 4 Or larger enter a raceway in acabinet, pull box, junction boa, or
auxiliary gutter, the conductors shma be protected by , alt tial busit.
ing Providing a smoothly rounded insulating surface, Mku the condL._
tors are separated from the racelemy fitting by substantial insulating
material securely fastened in place,
(9) RPIIMIG in. Xndwwf*L Cabinets and cutout boxes shall am
form to the following:
(1) Cabinets and cutout boxes sha be selected which have
sufficient space to OWOMMD&te &Ueanducton installed in them
without crowding or damaging conductor insulation.
(2) Switch Or emUctor endamn-es shall. not be used on
Junction boxes„ troughs or raceways for conductors feeding
thfongh or t&PPiW A to Other switches unless special designs
we employed to provide adequate space for this p=Mw_
(h) Grocinding, Cabinets and cutout boxes shall be grounded as
prescribed in Article 7 o them orders,
JBIWIF. 1* Renumbered team fereser 12M asci Zed 2 -WO; effective Wrlita
"Y the (awrigice 35. X. 3),
2M Auxiliary Gutters, (Not wireways or linsway, or surface
metal raecwayL) (a) 11110- Auxiliary Batters used to supplement
wiring spaces at mater centers,
similar distribution centers, switchboards and
ar pomts of interior wiring WAe,,,, may enclose conductors or
busbarv, but shall not be used to e,,ke switehM e devices or
other appliances Or apparatus- A- IMI-HINTY gutter shaU be provided
When there I I than two ecf switches to be
�pPi through one a� of da of approved tinga or junction oozes maybe used in 1aeaz of
Ilt-
(b) Eztanslo°s t
it
shall cans � t 'cork dug e
Order 235 Fro ' � of (leder 'fon � with
Tr= 8 Dfrtameq OF INDUIA-IMUM, SAF'ETT 241
(Register W No. Article L Wiring MOthOft
(c) ftppa-L Gutters shall be supported throughout their entire
laugh at intervals not exceeding five feet
(d) Covers. eeversshall be securely fastened to the gutter.
(e) Numba of Conductors in Raceway. Auxiliary gutters shall,
not contain eacre than 30 conductors at any cross section. unless all con-
ductors in ext,
,M of 30 are used for signalling ialling circuits or an control
,,onductors between a motor and its starter and used only for sUrdug
duty. The sum of the tross-sectional areas of all combined conductors at
any crow section of an auxiliary gutter shall not exceed 20 percent of
the interior cross-sectionid am Of the gutter.
(f)Carryft O&p&dty of ooppw lkrL The current carried con-
tinuously in ban conductors is auxiliary gutters shall not exceed 1,M
amperes per square inch of cross section of the conductor.
(g) GUM-&nca of Due Live Parts. Rare conductors 9WM be
securely and rigidly supported so that the minimum clearance between
bare current-earrying metal parts of opposite polarities mounted on the
same surface shall be not IM than two inches, nor less than one inch for
parts that are held free in the air. A spacing not less than one inch Mh&U
be secured between bare eurrent-carrying metal parts and any mew
surface. Mequate provision 81-11 be made for expand— and contraction
of copper bare.
(h) splimin and Taps. Splices and taps shall conform to the f01 -
lowing (,) Splices or taps, made and insulated by approved
A
methods, may be located within gutters if they an accessible
by means of removable covers or doom The conductors, includ-
ing splices and tam shall not fill the gutter to more than 76
percent of its area.
(2) Taps from bare conductors shall leave the gutter
opposite their terminal connections and eonductors " not be
brought in contact with uninsulated current -ear yang Parts of
oppos(3ite polarity.
) All taps shall be permanently identificd at the patter
as to the circuit or equipment which they supply.
(4) Tap connections ma conductors in awdliarY gutt4m
shall be provifrom
with overcurrent protection. ilL ecadbIrMiA7
with the provisions of Order 2369(e).
0onsuvAlan. Auxiliary gutters shall be confitIrm" in
accordance with the following -
(1) Gutters shaU be 80 c0naftmeled and 'nAaM that ads-
quate eleetz-Ad and mechIMICIII cmtlamtY Of the cognPlete race -
Way. system wM be secured.
(2) Gutters shall be Of substantial consUvotion MA "H
provide a complete enclosure for the ecuteingil conductors. All
surfaces, both interior and exterior, shall be ma%* PMUC"
2 !®1_2(1'3
242 lNMISraun. Bss.AzmNs Tn= it
Artists e. Wiring Methods (Register K McLS_e-Mft
from osrrceiam Corner 'Joints dell be =ade tight and where
the assembly in held together by rivets or bolK these shaIl be
spaced not more than 12 inches apart.
(3) Suitable bushings, shields or fittings having amseth
rounded edges shall be provided
gutters, through partitiorsk around beads, between Cattess
and eabinets or junetien boxes and at other locations where
necessary to prevent abrasion of the insulation of the
Hitters: 1. Renumbered hes a said timed ;
day thereafter (24916ber 56, No, 3).
2361. Flexible Gorda (a) Use. Flexible cord shall be of a
type suitable for the use and purpose and may be used for (1) pend-
ants;
endants; (2) wiring of fixtures; (3) connection of portable lamps or appli-
ances; (4) elevator cables; (5) wiring of cranes and hoists; (6) for the
connection of portable or movable equipment, or moving parts of fixed
equipment; (7) to prevent the trausinission of noise or vibration. Flex-
ible cord shall not he used (a) as a substitute for the fixed wiring of a
structure or building; (b) where run through in walls, ceilings, or
floors; (e) where run through doorways, windows, or similar openings;
(d) where attached to building surfaees; or (e) where co behin
building walls, ceilings, or flags. Flexible eords shall be of a type ap-
proved for the use and purpose.
(b) Splices. Flexible cord shall be used only in continuous
lengths without splice or tap, except suitable molded or vulcanized splices
may be used where properly made.
(e) Minimum Sine, Flexible cords shall be not smaller than No.
18, except that tinsel cords, or eords having; equivalent characteristics,
of smaller size may be approved for use with specific appliances.
(d) Overcnrreat Protectioa. Flexible Gorda shall be considered
as protected by the overeurrent devices required in .Article 6.
(e) Terminal 0tmnft ioaa Flexible cords shall be so connected
to devices and to fittings that tension will not be tratistaitted to joints
or terminal screws. This shall be accomplished by a knot in the cord, wind-
ing with tape, by a special fitting d for that purpose, or by other
equivalent meat
(f ) Bushings. Flexible eords shall, where passing through covers
Of outlet boxes or other enclosures, be protected by approved bushings
or fittings especially designed for this purpose, or shall have well-
rounded surfaces on which the cords may bear. So called hard rubber or
composition bushings shall not be used.
Aietertr: 1. Rea fres Laino i2M sad 81sd 3$55; efeetiee thirtieth
day thereafter (Register 56,10'x. 3).
Temparary lutall1dions. A less permanent class of eon-
:struction for temporary power and lighting installations may be used
during the period of construvtiou of buildings or other constraction, or
TltT>� ll � or fa-nr .0 ;S.�rr 243
(Restster 5% No. 3-2-19-55) Artiste a J►utana;>t+ Ov�urrr^t ProNett�n
for esperimental and development work, than would be required for
permancul installations, Electrical wiring and equipment which is to be
used during construction work or for experimental or development work
which will exten+i over a period of more than one year shall be installed to
eon€orm to the orders for permanent installations.
(a)GeneralUqtat for Wiring' Conductors operating at
not over3Mvolts between conductors may be ran as open work. Where
them Conductors are located within eight feet of the floor, or where they
would be exposed to mechanical injury, or where persons are likely to
come into contact with them. or bring conducting materials into contact
with them, the conductors shall be run in grounded metal raceway or
shall be otherwise adequately protected. Branch circuits may be run with
Type S cord or equivalent. Conductors of circuits above Soo volts shall
rmanent installa-
ti installed in necessary,
fie'withecable
or equivalent may be used to Supply
tiaras. Where n ry, Type
portable or movable equipment and sled 24 r -55; eaeetire thirds*
His": i Renumbered
y athereafter Rer 5{5 %lo. 31-
Article 6. Automatic Overcurrent Protection
(Cutout bases, fuses and fused switches; thermal cutouts, thermal
relay , and circuit breakers; protection of wires, circuits and appliances.)
i For the overcurrent protection of services, feeders and subfeeders
and branch circuits for motors, see Article 8.)
(For the location and identification of switches, fuses, control devices
and overearrent protective devices, see O� dtits $Iled on switchboards
(For further details regarding
and panelboards, seg: Article 1L)
236th. To Be of Approved Type. (a) Oeneral. Automatic over -
current protective devices shall be of approved types.
2366. Link Fns. (a) Restrictions. Link fuses, when per.
nutted es other secng 600 amperres ahese nd withshall
suitable cutout bases and
talled only in
capacities exceeding
enclosures.
2367. luso and limed Switches. (a) OeneraL Faros and
fused switelses shall comply -with the following requirements:
(1) Fuse shall be installed in approved dead -front eabi-
nets, This shall not apply to fuses on the back of switchboards or
controllers, nor to fuses on front of switchboards or controllers
on which exposed knife switches or other live parts are per-
mitted.
(2) An individual switch shall be installed directly abead
of every fusible cutout in circuits exceeding ut5o volltes to ground
and directly ahead of every eartri ge- ,'pe
gardless Of
voltage or amperage, except as other sections of them orders meet/
specifically permit the omission of such switebeL
244 IxDusnuAL $t `S " TIMIR i
Miele 6 Auftme e t s Register W Vis,.
(3) Owlicbes; installed in connection witis plug-lype a&
outs shall be placed an the line
(4) Switches will not be required todisconnect:
for the protection of instrument, relay and emtml ei—its only.
installed on switchboarOK or control pa
(5) A device which is approved as a combination switch
and cutout, and which is so arranged that persons will ad be
exposed to accidental contact with ow live parts of the device
while the funs are in cireuior while they are being
will be considered as morting the requiremmlis of this Mier fa
disconnecting the
(6) The screw shell of plug type fusebolders shall be
nested to the load side of the dreuitL
(b) V~UUMSUMOUbigFussibablarL Plugfusesandfuse-
holders may be used where the voltage between conductors dees not
exceed 125, or on any circuit of a system having s grounded neutral, if
no eonduotor of the circuit exceeds 150 volts to
(e) Plug Fuses sad Fuseholilm of Type & Where Type_S
(tamper resisting) plug fuses are to be as t device
required by these orders, the fuses, and fuseholders shisill conform to the
Mowing requirements:
(1) Classificatim Plug tuns and fuseholders of Type S
shall be classified at not over, 125 ; 0 to 15 amperes, 16 to 50
amperes,
(2) Fuses UnMe Only h& Fisseboldw of the Same Ciassi-
JIMUM Faxes of the 16- to elassification shall not
be usable with fuseboldm or adaptm of the 0. to 15 -ampere
classification.
(3) ere and Adaptarx. Fuses, fuseholders and
adapters shall be no designed that a fuse other than a Type S
fine cannot be used in a fusehokler or adapter designed for
Typesfuses
(4) TMspersJk ty. Fuses, fuseholders and adapters
shall be so designed as to be subject to tempelring or bridging
only with difficulty.
(5) hive Pat& Fuses and fusehdilers when installed
and assembled together shall have me live pares
(6) Adapters to Be Newomimble. Flue adapters shall
be so designed that wheri once inselrteil in a falieholder they
cannot be removed, except that adapters without the locking
device may be used in installations existing befog the effeetive
tate of these orders.
Tr= g Dtvmm or leer--sxtsL S AFmrs 245
g
56- ttss, 9tr ? Act' i. Rueca+utie Owrow'rent Pt*'aotl"
(1) bstarchmWasibility. Fuses, fuseholden and adapters
of various Manufacturem ARUbe interchangeable with auk
other, and the plugs, with adapters shall be suitable for use In
the EdWu4*w type fuliel101der.
(g) pjWC Typa, Fuses and fuseholdera shall be of the
F1vg V if--
(gi Rating, F.aeh fuse, fusehoider and adapter
shall be marked with its ampere rating.
(10) liar ' . Fuses of the 0- to 15 -ampere rating shall
be distinguished from those of larger rating by an hemagsind
Opening in the esp through which the mica or similar window
shows, or some other prominent hexaggaal feature such as the
form of the top or cap itself, or an hexagonal recess or projection
in the top or cap.
2M Circuit Breakerz. (a) Branch Circuit Circuit '
An air circuit breaker, used for overcurreut protection on branch light-
ing or appliance circuits, shall be of such a design that any alteration
of its trip point (calibration) or the time required for its operationon
overeurrent will be difficult.
t SW 2*45; effective tblrtleth day theredi er ($e6la
2M. IIsa of OvereswreIg Davloas. (a) 4ana*L In general,
overcurrenat device shall be provided in all oetaduetor. The
tential. interior
and shall be placed in each ungrounded
overca at the int where tate
overeurrent devise shall be located point canduater
receivee its supply except where specifically permitted by this or SUM
motions of these orders to be located elsewhere.
protection of Conductors. A conductor shall be
(b)
c:ousidered as properly, by the automatic overeurresit protective
device employed is series with it when the fuse or circuit breakerrating
is not greater than the allowable carrying capacity of the condueW
and 2,
(ace ordinc to teas §�i�arl of in5xtiation+i} iS b other in Tables
sectia of
eseept as this requirement is specifically Y
eleese orders. (See Article R for motors, and Article -24 for motion'pie-
ture studios.)
(c) Taps. Conductors of less current-earrying �'
pacify t the feeders or snbfeedera by which Chep are
supplied shall � red as properly protected from
under any one of tin following conditions:
(1) 9Vhere tate overeurmnt device protecting the bits, aaeii n
feedex, or subfeeder ah» protects tate smaller cottdnetor is
accordance with Tables 1 and 2.
{9f where the wnaller ebndnetUr hes a L�ttrrent earryreg
capacity of not Jess; than the sum of the alfowabh► surnat
carrying capacities for conductors of the eireaits m' kiadk we
246 l"USMAU RUATMSx I
Artiste s. Automatic OVWWJrr*nt
or more, which it supplies, provided the tap is not over 3 fed
long and provided it does not extend Wood the switaboanL
panelboard or control devices which it supplies, or is enelmd
in conduit or metal gutter. In e l be
overcurrent protection for circuits supplied by the unfused tW
(3) Where the smallerconductors; have a e t
capacity at least one-third that Of the conductorfrom which
they are supplied, and provided the tap is suitably
from mechanical injury, is not over 25 feet long, and terminates
in a single circuit breaker or a single externAr operable final
switch which will limit the kind on the tap to that allowed by
Order 2369(b). After passing through the single circuit breaker,
or externally operated fused switch, the conductors MY sQPF]Y
any number of circuit breakers or fused swi
(d) Grounded conductor Not to Be ro OverewrOut
device shall be placed in any permanently grounded eouductor, wdm
the device simultaneously opens all conduetors of the circuit.
(e) Redaction is Sire of Grounded 0031ductUm Where a change
occurs in the size of the ungrounded conductor, a similar change may be
made in the size of the grounded conductor.
(f) Location. Enclosing Live Parts. Overcurrent devices shall
not be placed where exposed to mechanical injury. Overcurreut devices
shall not be plated in the vicinity of easily ignitible material. unless of a
type especially approved for use in such locations.. Except schen mounted
on approved switehboards or panelboards installed to conform to the
requirements of Article 11, overcurrent devices shall be enclosed is
approved enclosures. They shall, in all cases, be placed in ray aeow
sible locations and so that no live parts will be Vesed to accidentst
contact.
(g) Moist Locations. Overeurrent devices when installed in loea-
tious exposed to moisture shall be mounted in approved for
the conditions.
(h) cutout cabinets to Be VWtisaL Cabinets enclosing over -
current devices shall be mounted in a vertical position if prase
(f) Paws in Multiple. For the protection of conductors, except
the conductors of motor brauch eireuits, having earrymg
capacities exceeding the rated capacity of the largest approved cartridge
type fuse, cartridge fuses arranged in multiple may be used. Provided
as few fuses as possible are uwd and the fuses are of the same type,
eharaeteristios and rating, and provided the fiteholder terminals am
mounted on a side continuous pair of substantial bus bars, or have an
equivalent arrangment that will, eliminate any potential d-affferenee
between the terminals of the all of the fuses are arranged to
be disconnected simultaneously by one switel, The tow capacity of the
fuse. shall not exec"i the aalloovable earrying capacity of the wire.
l31i+: 8 oe laDt At, t AF==rr 247
(its+ He-g-2-ts-55) Article r. tirouaellae
(j) rIxters, Vim s Fixture wire or flexible cord, Sim
No. 16 or 18, and tinsel cord shall be considered as protected by 15•
ampereo rreut de • as provided in other seeUS f Own
orders. Flexible approved for case with specific appliances,
shall
be considered as pec.ted by the overcurrent device of the branch circuit
whenconformingto the following- 20 ampere circuits No. 18 and larger;
mpere circuits, 10 amperes capacity or over. Fixture wires of the
mom permitted for taps in Order (f) shall he considered as protected
by the overcurrent protection of the 20,30 and 50 ampere branch circuits.
(h) Fused Rosetteg, Fused rosettes shall not be used.
(1) Number of overcurrant Uuits. An overcurrent device (ince
or overeurreut trip unit of a circuit breaker) shall be placed in each
ungrounded conductor. Circuit breakers shall open all ungrounded con-
ductors of the circuit. Individual single -pole circuit breakers complying
with Section 2416(b) may be used for the Protection conductor of conductor
of ungrounded two -wire circuits, each ungroundedended conductor of
three -
no -phase d c. or a circuits, or for each negro
lighting or appliance branch circuits connected to four -wire three-phase
provided lighting or appliance circuits include a
systems,grounded conductor. The number and position of the overcurrent units
such trip Mils and relays shall be as
Ameadzueot filed 24KI5.5 -, effectiveee thirtiethday thereafter (Resis-
iel
Hi
Sietery: L
to 55. Ne. 3).
*3, , wives. (For equipment at services, including automatic
overcurrent protective devices, see Article 4.)
237L Motors and Motor circuits. (For overcurrent protection
of motors and motor circuits, see Article 8.)
23M 0011trolObvults. (a) ondedonofovercutrnntProtection.
Control circuits, whether for motors or other devices, need not have
overcurrent Pr'On+
when they are installed as required by Order
2398(i). Article 7. Grounding
Circuits are grounded for the purpose of limiting the voltage upon
the circuit which might otherwise occur through exposure to lightning
or other voltages higher than that for which the circuit is designed; or to
limit the maximum Potential to ground due to normal voltage,
SYSTEMS AND ciRGUlTS
2377. Direct. -current Supply Systems. (a) Two -wire Direct -
Current Systems. Two -wire direct-current systems supplying interior
wiring systems and operating at not more than 30o volts between d -
tors shalt be grounded on one conductor, unless such system
in used for
supplying equipment in limited areas and the circuit is equipped with a
ground detector
M T-cm-wrwL&LP,
Area 7. Orem""
(b) Tbr wire Dire t BYattmIL Thre—i-i l�
rent sup interior wiring *Mtems, groundoi an lb
neutral at me or more eat at WEVi4aal services w
elsewhere on the Interior qstraw
2M rift - €a) , •
alt�na t
alternating-eosrent whring vsmtems, be grounded if they an be so
grounded that the maximum voltage to ground does not exceed IN vdk
Higher voltage eitruits mai he moi.
(b) Turam CIrcults. Electric furneft circuits need net be
grounded.
(e) Ohrattift of Lou Than 50 Volts. Circuits of less than 50 Vohs
need not be grounded except as follows -
(1) If suppled by transformers of more than 250 tO
gromd) If supplied bytransformers from ungrounded qatems,
(9) If run overhead outside of buildings.
itieeertr:1. Aneadment Sieg dog dereafter (
ter Ni„ ito. s).
LOCATION OF GROUNDING CONNE
9978. Location of GromdIng C (a) CarreM OW
(IMM ding Oondutors. The gmunding of wiring -.vst"M circuits,
egnipment. arresters, cable armor, eenduit, or other metal raonmP m
a proteetive measure shall be so arranged that there will be no dre-
tMable posasge of current over that grounding'
porary currents set up under accidental conditions, while the groGodiNg
eoadnctora are perforneing their int active ate
to be eoidered as objeetiotaable If a$
'Dusan over a grouadit� conti�tor due to def multiple
(1) � mare of such � abated > aa• (2)
Hasa abawil be changed, or (3} the etitttaity of the ttetdw the
trrounding eenneetions bye suita�c interni (I)
shrill be talo► to limit thus eurrent.
(b) Grounding Connections for AlL
alternating-eur t circuits which we to be
have a connection to a grounding electrode for each silt of individual
service entrance eenducte m The emnection shall be made on the suPPlY
aide of the service discouneetion mmn&ing connection for
an interior wiring Watem be me& at me point onky at the building -
(e} 001advAor to fie Grenada& For al ting -current interiOr
wiring SYsteMS the eondueter to be grourdetl "! be the identified cow
doctor. The identified conductor is ommonly known an *,the white wire."
(d) isolated For as interior wiring system orcircuit
which in requited to be grounded to an
exterior wondary distrihtttioll ce t4 fa, the grottttaiit^ag moectitm
?nix 8jkvMW ow IXVV*T%U'L 8"'SIT 249
Adie" 1. Oreundino
e
be
.,f aupl,S', or at
or other sqU*0�jL
the switchboard. on Of Ltntrsding the
Co"OtMIMR FAMLOGURE6
2M Grandlog d owdaft and Other is" ]taeewapa or Usk -
3t tut, cable armor, and other metal
fa) be grounded, whether the son -
raceways or res for wires,s are grounded or not, exempt
taitted interior wiring runs of lest than 25 feet which are
interior m' ,enclosuresnil metal, arilosituated
where not
free tact
within eightfeet ertually or five feet harivINARRY from
grounded surfsem and service Cable lg MUL Metal
serves} or &rnorjng A" be grounded.
EQUtPNENT
'allSzed ( be per',
noncar grounded under the following :
ihy ural efieetively
(1) If equipment is supplied by mala of Mf3a1-olati
(2) If equipment is located in a weL location and is mot
isolated:
(9) If r..oui,; surface or ebiithin Toneb of SL i who
contact with any grounded n (4make
eIf equipment is located within reach of a person ataad•
inB on the grO°nd' locatian;'aee Article 2L
(a) Ifequi einahazardous
(6) If equipment is in electrical contact with metal �'
metal loth; tea with any tsemiaal at more than
150 ( toground. pment aP+
(g) (Rounding of equipment mounted on polo "a m-
ply with the Rules for Overhead Ione Construction of the Cali-
fornia Public Utilitiesi -
(b) Tiled Exposed, noncurrent -carrying
metal parts of the hdnds of equipment regardless veitaee
shall be grounded: Order 24W.(1) Frames of m as specified .
Controller eases for motem
3) Electric equipment Of elevators and cranes.
(4) Xlectrie equipment in garages, theattua and motion
apt pendant lamps on etreci to of not mor
than e 1 Nolft to
(5:s0� PiCture ground -
(5 -11 equipment,'
(g) Ejectrie signs and associated equipmwit.
250 INWnSUL RxzATVoW mm t
(7) iormrd mai
the
dground and from the it.
(8) Switchbowdftamomd&UuttumwApportingswb&ing equipment. except that frames of .
zed-earresk iia*
releritr switebboords mod not be grounded if age**
Mercury-vapor,discharge and finorwaft
lighting (1$)
an provided in Oodkr
8!!1(x).
(13) Switch; madeircuftbraskerencloassew
(14) Troadormer cases, keludiur instrument iraas_
foamsn as required. by Order (b).
(15) Capacitor
(e) Nor gs@trie squipsagat The following metal parts sholl be
grounded:
(1) PromesandtrwUcfelectricallyaperstederseft
(g) The metal franc of m soadeetrically dries elevator
ear to which electric conductors are attached.
(3) Ituid-operated metal shifting ropes Or cables d cloo'
trio elevators.
nd al Mete . �,
grill work, ek,
arou
2M MvEsding of PwW& Equipinent (a) GMUSL B"
pond metal of portable egai t be
grounded as follows:
(1) In hazardous locations.
(8) as required bi (a). .
(3) a apparatus and portable hesting
operating at move thea 150 valts to
METHODS OF GROUNDING
(b) Ocattam Grounding 0oadvAW. The groundingconductor
and for circuits also, be for grounding, equipment, conduit
metal raceways or enclosures for conductors.or
cable sheath and service equipment
(c) bdftd Sections. Isolated sections of conduit, cable UNW,
or other metal raceway, req be- Order 2WO (a) to be
Preferably be grounded by interconnecting to grounded conduit,
armor, or other metal raeewkv, or when ticis is 1u,practieable. be WParcte
grounding eonnee
TWA 3 or lr. 261
( i e% tea S -2 -19 -fm
(d)
(d) Ketal boxes, cabinets and flttinga, or nen-
t 1 of faxed equipment, if metallically e metal raceway, be considered to grounded caor
acated or
grounded byconnected theyromay be grounded
.
tat one conductor ran with circuit sondus-
(t' $ a conductor mW be not Mated, but if it is provided
with as individual owning
thisand is part of a cable, the covering
be finiahed to sitow,
a green color.
(3) By a separate grounding conductor installed the SUN
as a grmndft conductor for conduit and the like.
(e)Electric equipment secured
to and is contact with thegroundedstructural metal frame of a building,
milbe deemed to be grounded. Metat ear frames supported by Matti
bolat•
ng cables attached to or running over sheaves or drums of elevator
machi
bed to be grounded if the machine is grounded
accordance with these orders.
Noncurrentrcerrying metal parts of
portable equipment aUn be grounded in any one of the following ways:
(1) By means of the metal enclosure of the conductors
feeding an& equiPment, provided an approved mnit9proog
p1ug or equicaimt used, Date prong for the purpose of ground -
in
the enclosure, and provided, further, that the metal
encl re is attached to the plug and to the equipment by -
nectors approved for the purpose. An additional contact ehafil
be provided is the receptacle for grounding purposes.
(8) By means of a grounding conductor ran with the eir-
euit conductors in cable assemblies or flexible cords, provided
an approved soultiprongplug or equivalent is used, one
prong conductor to
for the of such ground
grounded metal raceway or cable armor; this conductor may be
but if an individual covering n provided for
color. AnAddis
couductor, it shall be finished to show a gra grounding
tional contact shall be provided in the receptacle for
purpooeL (g} to Circuit Oadsoator. The grounded
mum
arrvien conductor on the supply side of the service disconnecting
may be used for grounding
meter housing and services t. The
grounded circuit conductor on t) load std' °fth
means sball not be used for grow ng -equipment,
raceway8 gkd424452: eEeetive thirtieth der thereafter (
RMW
H+ s= z
ter 2a, sea a>.
G"U"DiNG CONTINUrry
WL Bonding. (a) Balding at BUTJCS ZqeP=QNL S"vk'e
conduit, service maways, and service cable sheaths and maiming "
be grounded. Where then are meta cabjects or fittings interpesed in tbe
service run, the fleet'01's Of M-ewsY' or sheath or amer shall' Balm
threaded connections are employed. be bonded together by mum
approved for the purpose.
(b) Nam Of AUWJ3kg Eleetriesi "VIAiRR-
ity at serviee equipment SW be assured by Omwe the following mum:
(1) Threaded coupfiags, and threaded basses an enclisaris
with joints made up tight where rigid conduit it involvell-
(2) Appra"den-phu-oma&uptkhtforekeriodnew
he tubing.
(3) Bonding jumpers meeting the Other requirements of
this artier. Bonding junipers shall be used wound concentric
or eacentrie knockouts.
(4) Other deview (not leamuln &Rd bushings}aha PPMed
for the purpose. For service the lockout hushing da"
loeknut type of contact OUR not be depended on for bandino.,
metal boxes, cabinets and the like, irrespective of the voltage of
circuits contained therehL
(a) N"= Of Asanting 0outbroity—other Than ffavices. The
electrical continuity of metal racaVIT or jewal sheathed cablee shell be
assured by one of the methods specifie4l in Paragraphs 1, 2, 3 and 4 of
Order 2384(b), or by, one of the following methods -
(1) Threaffim fitfift% made up tigK with conduit or
armored cable.
(2) Two lo"uts or equivalent, one inside and One out-
side of boxes and cabinets.
(d) Loosely Jdated NeW Raceway& Expansion joints and tele-
ftopim sections of raftways shall be made deetr"W continue= by
bonding jUIRPM or other approved meam Metal trouglt raceways cord
in connection with sound recording and reproducing. made up in M'
tions, shall contain, a grounding towlattor to which each section shall be
bonded.
, (e) Nuwdau Locations. In lisaardous locations, regardless Of
the voltage involved, the elechical continuity of metallic raceway I , bow
and the him, shall be assured by am of the methods specified in order
2M(b).
(f) Bonding Jumpam Bonding jumpers diall conform to the
following - (1) Material sad Shis. All bouiting jumpers shalt be of
copper or other ewrosion4esistant material and shall be of suf-
ficleat " to havecurreavearrying capacity not less than is
required for the earrespondirmwrounding conducW-
Tn%3 a DIVISION OF 1 a SAFETY 253
Artiole 7. Or0UI%dI"4
(2) Bendb* jumpers shall be attached to Cabinets and the
like in amanuerprovided in Order 2387(t).
GROUN9044 ELECTRODES
2M growding MactrOdw (a) WSAIV Pipe. A continuous
metallic underground cold water piping system shall always be used as
ding cleetroile where such piping system in available.
(b) C)tba AvuU" Zbetrades. Where a water system as ds -
scribed in Order 2385(a) is not available, the grounding eo"Oection may
be made to any (1) of the frame if effectively
The metal rame of the building,
grouaded.
(2) A local metallic underground Piping system, Metal
wen casing, and the like, other than gas piping systems or
sprinkler 940ML in Orders
Made Usetr9deL Where electrodes described
2385(a) and 2U5(b) are notavashle, the grou'a"gelectro"shallm
a"
sist; of a driven, pipe, driven "d, buried plate or other device approved
for the purpose and conforming to the following requirements:
(1) plate EICWode& Each plate electrode shall present
net less than two square feet of surface to exterior soil. Else-
tro of iron, or steel plates shall be at least one-quarter inch
in thkkness. Electrodes of nonferrous metal shall be at IONA
0.06 Inch in thickness.
(2) Pipe Electrodes. Electrodes of pipe or conduit shall
be not less than three quarter inch internal diameter, and if Of
iron or steel shall be gaivanized- or iron
(3) Rod Zlectrodes. Electrodes of rods of steel
quarter inch in diameter. Approved rods
shall. be at least three for
of nonferrous materials or their approved equivalent used
electrodes " be not lem ULM one-half inch in diameter.
bwL@R&tIO8- Electrodes shall. as far as lirseticabla, he 'a -
(d)
lent moisture level., Except where.rock <bottom is
bedded below Persia! rods shail be driven to a depth of at least tight
encountered, pipes or
feet of size or number of electrodes used. Pipes or rods when
regardless ,
rth shall be of one piece. Such Pipes
less than standard commercial Length
or rods shall have clean metal surfaces and Shall not be eavered
paint -od
with , enamel or other Poorly conducting materials Where rock
bottom is encountered at a depth Of IM than four feat' electrodes IW
be buried in a horb*ut&l trench, and if pipes or rods are used an the
electrode they rhall eo=PIY with paragraphs (b) and (e) of this order
and shall be not less than eight, feet in length. Each electrode 81MU be
separated at lead six feet from any other electrode, including those
used for Arw circuits, radio, lightning rods, or any other purlxme.
254 lNerSTRIA& REL&TXWS Mat
ArtioN T. Grounding (Resister 6% ML 3-2."
(0)
--b" -
(e) Resistance, Buried or driven electrodes shall, it praefisaw
have a resistance to ground not to exceed 25 ablas If the resistasse is set
to low m 25 ohms, two w more electrodes connected in paraW ad
be n o&
0saftneon metallic underground water Wisest systems in Wawa base a moot,
uses to sada l teas three Metal tri load watMe
vadogroutut well the likev bare. in geousi, a
tedatasee substantially below 25 ebm& It is recommended that is i;
is seen sry to use buried as driven e
additiesd grounds, sua as connections ton be placed as
fordbbbutim chenit. it k am t r -le win
Installed, and periodically afterwards. be toted tor
(f) RaHway Tracks. Rails or other grounded conductors of elee
trio railway eircuits shall .not be mod as a pound for other thea rad -
way lightning arresters and railway equipment, t, armaNd a"
metal raceway, and the hike, if other efeetive grounds are a ; and
in no ease shall such rails as other grounded eanductorsof railway ein
amts be used for grounding interior wiring systems other than those sag -
plied from the railway circuit iteeM
(g} IIsi of Lightning lfta�. Lighting rod conduetora a� tb�ivaa
pipes, rods or other d lar rotbt,
n� be med far . , eg - t and the harts This
t shall naw pr�eibit tim tlmr of separate s�
gtonmi el that are tive�: Iarorided for elecirio wirtag
tit sail ognipm�t, for i - _ amt fair l�htnissg
taction,
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
M& Gmandiug OwAmtom (a) Material. The material for
the grounding conductors shall be as follows:
(1) For System or Common, Grounding Conductor. The
grounding conductor of a wiring system sho be of copper er
Other corrosion -resistant material. The conductor may be sold
or stranded, insulated or bare. Except in cases of bus-bw% the
grounding conductor shall be without joint or splice throughout
its lauffth. If the grounding conductor is not of copper, iia elee-
tricral resistance per linear fait shall not exceed, and its
strength sha4 be not less than that of the allowable copper etc'
dnotorfor such a purpose.
(2) For Conductor Emdesures and Equipment 0MV. The
Pounding conductor for equipment and for conduit and adW
metal raceways or enclosures for conductors, may be a condudef
Of Coppet or other eorresion-resistaut materials, stranded sr
solid, insulated or bare. a bus bar ora rW conduit, or#1 edpipe.
except that under coa&mus favorshle to carrmon a groundog
conductor
tired of copper
or other emoswa-remstaut rea,"rid "I
OF lz%IMMTML Slp&TT 255
W Na 2- -55➢ "a* T. Grounding
(b) Installation. AVhere concealed within building walla or
ceilings, a grounding cond'artor':o. 6 or lamer, may be ottaehed to the
on which it is carried. In all other locations the grounding con-
ductor shall be in metal way, cable armor or shall be protected from
mechanical injury by Cather suitable means. Metallic enclosures for
ing Mors shall be eontinuous from the point of attachment
tc+ cahiamts or equipment to the grounding electrode, and shall be
securely fastened to the gmund clamp or fitting, Instaiiation of the
metal raceway shall cxsmply with one of the systems of circuit wiring
' in A,rtic% 5.
(e} Dire t Cironiis. The carrying capacity of the ground.
ing condttctar far adirect-current supply bvstem ar generator shall be
not kaa than that of the largest conductor supplied by the system. Tile
grounding conductor stall in no ease be smaller than No. 8 copper.
(d) Al -current Circuits and Service Egopment. The
sine of the grounding conductor for an alternating -current system. a
Comecon grounding conductor, or a grounding conductor for service
equipment shall be not Was; than given in the following table, except that
where connected to electrodes as described in Order 2385 (e), the ground-
ing conductor need not be larger than No. 6 copper itseq
Him of erooadis/ wsdootor
For wiring
t system and/or For service
S 8 w, '-ry-r63 secrice service equipment
vssaaetsr'orogsivekstjar parelkw t eyaipmcs
owdsctors Coale
Cado
pper
wig or pipe
No. Gave/
2 or quer--------------- --- }
1 or 0 ----- o
00 or 000 ----- ----------------- 2
iE
Over 000 to SM 000 C.]l------ ----- 2 1
Orer SA- 000 to 800 000 C.N. _ --- 0 1
over 000,000 to 1.100A00 C.N. ---- 00 000 1
Over 1,1000C.N.------------
Conduit or pipe cannot be used alone as the grounding conductor
for a wiring system Wire sig apply both to bare and to insulated con-
ductors.
(e) Interior Raceway and Equipment. The size of the grounding
conductor for conduit, cable sheath or armor, and other metal
raceways
orenclosuresfor conductors, and for equipment, shall be not lea than
given in the following table; except that where connected to electrodes
as described in Order 2385(c), the grounding conductor need not be
larger than No. 6 copper or its equivalent.
25r,
Imni7sra1AL l at r
T1i1S.lE I
Article 7. Grounding
Resistur 'WNo. a.2.
R*finp ar eett&ip *f
eutoaotio overcurrent
sim, *1
device in circuit
*heed of equipment
C
Condom
conduit. etc, net
wire
or pipe
offoeftling (emperes)
she.
(in")
ibwk
1b -------------------
___ 1a"
}�
i
30 ------------------------
14
;
--- 12
00 -----------------------
10
100 ---------- -"-----------
S
i
200 -----------------------
a
400 -----------------
- - - d
3
ti
1}
goo ----- ----------------- a
1}
t
1000 ----------------------- 00
1
2
1200 -------------- _______O00
1
2
Portniaelble only when
part of an appreve4
cable. ansevebty.
(f) Portabhl and Pendant Zqalpsaelst For grounding portable
or pendant equipment, the conductors of which are protected fm
or circuit breakers rated or set at not exceeding 15 am Nic.18 cop
per wire may be used. Conductors of Rte. 16 and 18 copper whichwe
used for grounding portable equipment shall. be part of an. sppmwl
flexible cord assembly. For grounding portable or pendant equipatest
protected at more than 15 amperes, the table in Order 2386 (a) he
followed,
(g) Outline Mghtig. Isolated noneurrent g metas parts
Of outline lighting systems mac be bonded together by a 1\o.11 conductor
Protected from mechanical 'MM`, if a conductor ec6plying with Order
2386(e) is used to ground the group.
(b) Oomamn ltaoawaf Agroundilggeouductormayberuninthe
same metal raeewnv with other conductors of the System to which it is
connected.
(i) Oonthnnity. No automatic cutout or switch shall be placed in
the grounding eonduetor of an interior wiringetc m unless the opezing
Of the cutout or atritch disconnects all sunecs of
Hitterp; 1, Antemlateut filed ",,%; ve th'
ter 364 No. 3).
GROUNDING CONDUCTOR CONNECTIONS
M7. Grammug 0ouneations. (a) Grounding clondedw to
ltaceaay. The point Of COMIneetion of the grounding emadoetw to
astagior metal r1kes'111YA, table armw and the like shall be as new n
practhcable to the Source of supply aqui shall be so chosen that no rtax W
or cable armor is grounded throngb a run of 4-mallers4ze than is MW
for in Order M(e),
'b' Grounding Conductor to - The grawunding
tion to the eleetrotle shall b,-1"atcwl as f +)t W'S'
T12%3 a DIV :4 or INDUSTRIAL SAtIFTv 257
(Register 55. No- 3-2-tS-55) Artier 7. Grounding
(1) S, or common grounding conductors shall be
attached to a continuous cold water piping system. Tse point
of &twbmnt of all grounding emductors to grounding else -
bad" shall be accessible. Equipment may be grounded to a cold
water pipe new the equipment
(2) I%e grounding conductor shall be attached to other
electrodes permitted in Orders 2385 (b) and (c) at a point
which will assure a permanent ground. The point of attachment
shall be
(e) to and The grounding am -
doctor, bond, orbondingjumper shall be attached to circuits, oonduits,
cabinets, equipment, and the like, which are to be grounded, by means
of suitable lags, pressure connectors, clamps, or other approved mean.
Soldered. lugs or connections shall not be used.
(d) ® to 21gotrodes. The grounding conductor shall
be attached to the grounding electrode by means of (1) an approved
bolted ;lamp of asst bronze or brave or of plain or malleable cast iron,
or (2) a pipe fitting, plug, or other approved device, screwed into the
pipe or into the fittin, or (3) other equally substantial approved miss.
The grounding conductor shall be attached to the grounding fitting by
means of suitable lugs, pressure connectors, clamps, or other approved
means. except that connections which depend upon solder shall not be
and. 'Not snore than one conductor shall be connected to the
grounding
eleetrcnle by a single clamp or fitting, unless the clamp or fitting is
approved for the number of conductors connected to it.
(e) Ground Clamps. For the grounding conductor of a wiring
system the sheet metal strap type of ground clamp is not
considered
adequate ung it has a rigid metal base seated on the 'eater pipe or
other electrode and the strap is of such material and dimensions that it
is not liable to stretch during or after installation.
Ground clamps for use on copper water tubing and copper, brave,
or lead pipe should preferably be of copper; and those for use on galvan-
ized or iron pipe should preferably be of galvanized iron. Ground clamps
shall he so designed as to avoid mechanical injury to pipe or tubing.
(f) protection of A t. Ground clamps or other fittings,
unless approved for general use without protection, shall be proteeted
from ordinary mechanical injury (1) by being placed where they are usit
liable to be damaged or (2) by being enclosed in metal, or wood, or
egnivalent protective
(n) Olixn Surfaces. If a nonconduetive protective eoating,'such
as paint or enamel, is used on the equipment, conduit, couplings or
fittings, such Ming shall be removed from threads and other contact
surfaces in order to insure a good electrical connection.
�- r 1. � MMS
Qrkia�t T. 'Re
INSTRUMENT
2^ a
INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS, RELAYS
?�6bwft=va Tftsdortmen SIMI 2skys. (a) hdrmw
Trand „ eireurts of current and pd=W
instrument trusslormers shall be pv=WW if the windim Me
connected to circuits of SW volts Or more to gremad. and, if OR V51W
boards, shall be grounded wespective eI` voltage, emePt that the 1111so'&
cry circuits of current and potential transformers Which have their
Mary Connected to . Of t or aro ad
1 to be gro provided that no live parts or wiringwe
or aceesnble to k►tbar, t tl
(b) butzmeSt T911111110MW Gum Cases Or ft=m Of
meat tranaf be gmunded, where accessiMe to other this
(e) Cam of Md Rd&Y*—OPwdbg T4611s
750 or Less. Instruments, meters and re which operate with
wud-
ings or working parts at 750 volts or lew shall be grounded es "0116-
(1) S44 oat Bwftbboar& or Owatral PUG& hatm
nutts. metem and relpyanot located on switchboardsorembil
panda, which operate with windings or working parts at 88
softs or more to to other than qualM
shall have metal Pub
(2) On DaA&ftt Switchbouds or Oubd Paedt.
Instrumesuts,meters and relays (whether operated from eurtesd
and potential - m oremmnected direetbr in the dM110
on switchboards or eoutrel panels having no live parts tat tie
front of the panels shan have exposed. noneurrent-carui
metal parts grounded.
(3) On U or Control Paae>>t
�
eoa rerument&meters re�Ts (whether ofrom
b t
on witor em having directly
a live parts w
the front of pauels shall rmt have their grounde& Maud
insulating rubber or other suitable insulation, be ice'
Tided for the operator if the voltage to ground exceeds 150
ors and aelays—operatingV~Oar 7N. ere instru ct and relay, have eurrent-esrr.1-
ing parts over '450 Vohs tan ground, they Shan be isolated by.elevation or
Protected by suitable barriers, g ed cal ar inaatlatitig cors w
guards- Their caste sR be_. except as follows:
(1) In electrostatic ground detertars the internal growd
aa9111cuts of the i-truments are conneeted to the
me and rel a the ground detector shall be boated bF
Tn%x 8 !'Divi sea-* OF Iaa.,a.-,jaasAl. SAVLTr 259
t
me. $–•Z -is- � dArt;cSe S notating machinery and Its p*rsk—
(e) Cara Conductor. The grounding conductor
.ts Of• t tratisformers and for instrument
for secondary circu
lee actonaller Haan No.111, if of copper, or, if of other metal,
shall have equal eoudattassec_ Cam of instrument transformers, ins""
mass, meters and relso which are mounted directly on the grounded
mew surfaces ofreg or grau33a1ed metal switchboard panels shall
be to be , and no additional grounding conductor
will be
LIG4tTt+tlMii ARRESTERS
Ligb (a) Sigh and Low 9oltaga 8esvitesl-
TitghtuingarresteM vdscre installed on high or low voltage Services
with the Rules for overhead Line Con -
shall be iroundeq in accordance
struction of W® (Wiferainpublic utilities Commission.
Arm 0Rtoting XNehinery and Its Control Apparatus
t rwidena for haaardow locations see Article 22.)
2 (a) jdautification of Motors. Each motor shall
be provided with a nameplate which shall give the maker's name, the
rating in volts and amperes including those of the secondary if a wound -
rotor type of motor, time normal fuitload speed and the interval during
which it can operate at full load starting Bold, before reaching its rated
trz Batt= . TbR t9 outin-
a interval shall be 5,15, 30, or 60 minutes, horse-
power
rce-
nous. For a motor rated at one eighth horsepower or larger,
the power ratite be marked, exeeptthatthe motors of are welders maybe
marked in amperes. A motor provided with a thermal protective device
integral with the motor shall have a marking which will so indicate. For
an alternating current motor rated at one-half horsepower or larger,
except a pol"base wound -rotor motor, the name plate -with lockedrotor,
arked
with a code letter to show its input in kilovolt -amps
(b)WORUBVItion of Co1rollers. A controller shall be marked
with the makers name or identification symbol, the voltage, the current
m, horsepower rating, and such other data as may be needed to properly
indicate the motors for which it is suitable- generators
(e) of T�nsht. Terminals of motors,
and eout,&=banbe suitably identified by marking or color, where
amunry to -indicate proper connections.
(d) GuardingLive parts. ;liotors or generators operating
vo ez of at
5o volts to ground and having exposed R�
!Denied outside !nearing brackets 1:110 be provided with suitable perma-
nent s reens, covets, or enclosures to sbield live parks.
Artiota a Rotating M its Coatnofl
AWfa'at-
(e) The wiring to fted meters
shall be 1>1 condart, armored cable, electrical m
raceways or otber approved metal enclosorw Terminal eseleacen w
metal construedon aball be provided at tk
motor terniank For mown of me horsepower or ==Uer, this 1w
urinalonalown may be separated from the mater not over six
felt
=a the connectionbet the motor and enclosure my be made
wires U201W than No. 14 but got smaller than to- Ili,povided *a
the full -load catrad
have carrying Capacity of at least M percent of
rating of the motor and are of armored a air
sudeged in Bible, or conduit, cr .� metaffie tabiag
IMMunerthan
armored able or armored cord or metal raceways
and eleetrieaAg couneeted to the terminal enclosures at each end. Tag
terminal enclosures or h be of ample to Properly mdm
MM
deg Mumftw t=it
a
on of Conductors for ndw Ch=dtL (aa)
od V&weealar coaftown far
xAom service, feeder and
r conductors supplyingaccording t two or more motors ShM11 of have �
Dd Ica
wlwe-
gopacity f the full -load current rating of the largest motor 32
D nlua the a= of the full -load current ratings of the remainder
(b) 8aeiee. Feedw and ftWeedw Cmdudm for
Load, Service, feeder and subfeeder emidueters supPiying a cow
bifid lighting (or lighting and appliance!) and a grVUP of two or
more motors shall have a muthman eurrent-earrFing capacity eq
to the required capacity for the lighting an poi appliance lead pla
the required capacity for the group of meters (determined in
with the provisions of Order ). The eurrent to be added for a
dagle motor " be 125 percent of its t.
(c) Rotor Branch tirceft 0ondockors. t onduetors an
individual motor sluffl have a earrying ea itv than 1 cut
cur
of the motor full -head current rating: provided, t condUetm
motors wed for -time. inte attent_' - dutyname
, MV
have a eam-wing cal cit. ansa lo"ilaean the l rcentai e of the motor
plate current rating as shown in the following table:
ptvs oe IN USMI . �r.•+'r 2i1
TMS a Artiots flotatir+Y Maohieay and Its Apparatrol
tus
� of nacre ptete osaraa! ratiiu
3d -ani
1-asiast, 13 awle voting Ooni�
"'W Mang
Joining or
� ,wafting ro" tAe- - lie 120 150
Ineamittoot
Md Powmager dora-
",a.taal draw -
a are VVIdem for
85 85 go• 140
-_
Rats, an and Coat4asaing 85 90 go 140
-_-__-----_. lie 120 1110 goo
Varying lots - ------ or ►oAer at the of the autbod-
tjoa ed orelog the regutatioas.
• Thualigns aim applies 'br Lee =,r-, int du 4amom'—d au"
MAW
Any Motoris cesideyed to be for continuous duty nniew the nature
Of the apparatus which it drives is such that the motor will not operate
tmntinuonsly with load under any condition of use.
(d)gecondaXy. The conductors connecting the
of a wound -rotor ". motor to its controller shall have a
secondary dih >s not dere than 125 pereent of the full -load
secondary current of the motor. Where the sea the uetorastor m
rying rapacity between
from the controller, the carven in the following
controller and resistorshall be mut leas than that gi
table:wonsdaraarryrine a st vire
a� y
owervat
Resler®: day do"i0cati— 55
Sbwftg datf —__ — -- 95
Iatermittmt lots
C"tiaaoa dais -
(e) gaDW, Where a reduced heating of the conductors
results from motors operating on dam'-eYcle, intermittently: or from 'a
erating at one
motors not optime, a demand factor may be granted for
be Of 8 capacity jen than
service, feeder or subfeedeinr cidneto�rovmided the duetor is of saffi-
lipecified for the maximum lead determined by the Giza
cleat carrying Orders 2395 (a) and (b), Psupplied and the character of their loads and
and nuov,,current protection mbers of MOtarsof these conductors ahall`be based an the
duties
demand factor granted• {a}
n prewation of ilfotwa and>!
liar or` Circuits. The rating of the,fuee or setting
of the eirenit breaker a automatic overeureeat pretedtion
262 INDunwAL RuATwm 7=1
Article s. Rotating 1144141140try and Its Connive' tnm;inftrs%Ne'&_2_1*
Apparatus
against short circuits Or grounds for wxvke- feeder or subigider m
ductors shall be not greater than the starting fuTa tg) se rating of tit's uft
requiruzg
largest "tar
of the full -load currents 4�the othr of
og
dated conductors
than required for the tell grit ' mm
over'=rant
roteetive de
sued serviee� feeder or
an
grounds.
(b) Rating or Be Lead. Theratingofthefon
or setting of the eirenit Mbre;a!e:r ='as automatic overcuirreal; l�
teetion against short circuits or grounds for
service, feeder or mWook
conductors for a combined fighting (or fthting and appliance) lead md
motor load shall be not greater than the rating or setting for the MOW
load (as determined in accordance with Order 23%(a)) Plus the litiltillt
and/or appliance load. Where largo sized conductors than requilId be
the connected load an installed, an o protective device =lF
be used to properly protect the larger sized serrim feeder Or nk-Ndw
conductors against short eircuits or grounds.
(a) Rating Or Setting fm IndividisaL U911011! IMINVIL N4*
branch circuit overcurrent devices shall be capable of eaMnBg the fort-
ing current of the motor and shall be Provided in each. motor bC1M& dr-
ealt, except where other sections of these orders specifically Permit tk
emission of such protective devices. Branch amwt overeurreut rmftdm
devices shall provide short-circuit Protection. for the motor branch Arellill
conductors, the motor -running overcurrent prot"ve device, and tie
motor Motor branch circuit ovezearrmt proteetm Bev m $Wall om*
with the following subsections I, ?, 3 and 4.
(1) The maximum rating or setting of motor 1110131* cos
cult protective devices shall be its given in Table &
(2) When fuses are used as motor branch eireuit Prot""
deviem they shall be placed in an ungrounded eouduelflm
(3) When circuit breakers we used im motor bmm*
circuit protective devices, they shall be operative to open an
ungrounded conductors and shall be equipped with GToCcurost
units in accordance with Order =9-L
(Fair it& inaziber or o mate remand ft noter rone"
protertles. we Order ZWT,)
(4) When circuit U"kera are used as Motor Was* gJ16
ODA Protective devices. they shall have a eontinuom G131110"
carrying capacity
. of at lead 115 percent of the full -10111d Carr"'
rating of the motor.
(d) Several Noters on Ole Branch Circidt. Two or more godors
May be connected to the same branch eircuit under the f0lW"'89
conditions.
Dn'suis or 1.%VUSTXUL SAM'f 263
TMZ 6 Articic a. Rotating Machinery and its Co"rel
263( ss. No. 3-2-19-55) Apparatul
(1) Two or mom mutors each not exceeding I horsepower
in rating and each having a full -load rated current not exceed -
six azapereN May be need on a branch circuit protected at
not more than 20 amperes at 125 volts or less, or 15 amperes
,it Wo Yells or jeaL Individual running overcurrent p
is rotection
quirec
not re 1, unless the motor is automatically Buried or in
out of eight of the darting location -
(2) Two or more motors of any ratings, each having indi-
vidual
running overcurrent protection, may be connected to the branch circuit of a provided all of the following
Angle mach'ile,
conditions are complied with:
(A) The bran& circuit shall be protected inaccord
imee with the requirements Of Order 2396 (a). In no Calls
Alan overeammt protection be more than 200 anifem at
250 volts or leg% or 100 amperes at 600 volts or IML
(B) The conductors of any top supplyinga single
motor need not have individual branch circuit protection,
provided they comply with the following:
1. No conductor, from the individualUP tothe
. overcurrent device, "I have a current-
motor-runnmg less than ne-third that of the branch
carrying capaeit,,y o
it extend more than 25 feet,
circuit conductors, nor shall
unless the conductor has a current -carrying capacity not
b1n matof the branch circuit conductor.
I No conductor, from the motor -running. overcurrent
device to the motor, "I have a current-earrying capacity
legs than 125 percent of the motor full loads
(e) Cmbtw& oggreurrent protection. Motor branch circuit
overcurrent protection and motor -running overeurrent Protection, may
be combined in a single overcurrent device if the ratingon or setting of the
overcurrent protectiipecilled in Order
device provides the running
2397 (f) Selection orSetting of Protective Device. If the values for
branch circuit protective devices given in Table 13 and Table 14 do not
sizes
correspond to the standard ' or ratings of fuses, tionadjustable
cult breakers, or thermal devices, or possible settings of adjustable cir-
cuit breakers adequate to carry the 1094 the next higher size, rating or
setting may be used. egeeti®e thirtieth day thereafter (Reg-
Hidwv... L A Wed 24-0;
inter 5rh N106 3)-
2W. Xotw_running ovaeurrent prot8dim (a) 0imthroons
- Motor-runniug overeur-
Duty 1gotess_4gere Than One 3[arsepawOr
rent protective devices consisting of circuit breakers, controllers with
overcurrent unitsv thermal cutouts, fuses or other devices approved for
*a purpose sholl be installed for each motor rated at more than one
264 Irane:airi AL RUATSOM
Artists & Rotating Machinery and Its Cen"( g� � MM II
Apparatus
horsepower to protect the motes, the apperst" end &
motor branch eirenit conductors
conditions. Ths pro by am of dba tdiagiog
mom:
(1) A separate overemixTeatt device which isre9pers" to
motor current.. Tho =&4mum rating or setting af this deise
shall be not more than 125 percent of
rating for motors marked to have a tempuatwe rise W am
400 C., and not more than 115 pmmt for all otbor types ad
motors values may be moldified sm permitted by Older
2397(f).
(2) A protective device integral via the now wMeh is
responsive to motor current or to beth motor ourrold and too.
perature. This device shall be apprared for use wft the enter
which it protees on the basis that it will interrupt mercut to
the motor when the motors operated in an ambient tompon.
tune of 400 G and with overearreed of the percentageTakes
given in math (1) of thin Mler. If the motor correct hdw6
rupting device is separate from the moor and its control eievilit
is operated by a protective device integral with it
shall bees arranged that the opening of the control eirceft va
result in interruption of eunent to the motw.
(b) pas 8oraspoww or Lasa, Minsemny gtarlaiL AIW mow of
arta horsepowcr or less which is manually darted and which in Within'
sight of the starter loestiaa shall be considered as being sufficiaidly pre,
tooted by the automatic overearreat protective devices need to POW
the motor branch cireait conductors. Any am& matur whichis en
sight of or mesa than 50 feat &an the starter location AO be proteotol
sa speoi$ed in Order 2397(e).
o � Aa Art} motor
Of (0) 0241s a be
pro -
tooted against overcurrent by the use of one of the
(1) A separate overcurrelet device whieb is respeadve to
motor currerttt. This device shall be rated or set at act am On
125 percent of the motor M lead current rating for motors
marked to have a temperature rise riot over 400 C., and st
not more than 125 percent for all otter MMS of
(2) A protective device integral with the , which is
responsive to motor current or to both meter current and "w
Pmtm*. Thin device obaft be approved for we with the now
whieh it proteets am the bass that it will prevent dmWm
0et"of the stutter due to overload or bei'tare to start.
If the motor eurreat interrupting deywe Is separate from
motor arsai its emud eireak is operated by a protective &terse
integral with the motor. it must be so a n cl that the opening
Of the Matrol circuit will rt -salt in interruption of current to
the motor.
TITLV 6 llMROV Of lstu-SWIM. SA z"rr 265
(Roaivtsr teat -2- ) Aaairtet; Rotating machinery and itoControl
Apparatus
(3) If part of an approved assembly which dog not nor-
mally subjkvt the motor to overloads and which is also equipped
with other safety controls (smA as the safety combustion enn-
trels of an oil burner) whieli protect the motor against damage
due to stalled rotor current. Where such protective equipment
is nFA it shall be indicated on the name plate of the assembly
where it will be visible after installation.
(4) If the impedance of the motor windings is sufficient to
prevent overheating due to failure to start, the motor may be
protected an specified in Order 2397(b).
(d) Wound -rotor Beconderim The secondary circuits of wound -
rotor alternathw-current motors. including conductors, controllers, resis-
tors, etc., shall be considered as protected against overcurrent by the
motor -running oserearYent devise.
(e) luterosittent and Similar Duty. A motor used for a condition
of service other than eontinuoup, is considered as protected against over -
current by the branch circuit overeurrent device. Any motor is considered
to be for continuous duty unless the nature of the appantw or load
whirl, it drives is such that the motor cannot operate eantimeaudy with
load under any condition of use.
if) Saiscitim or getting of Protective Device. Where the values
gweifiPci for motor -running overeunent protection do not correspond to
the standard class or ratings of fuses, nonadjustable circuit breakers,
thermaa cutouts, thermal reia3s, the beating elements of thermal trip
motor switches, or possible settings of adjustable circuit breakers ade.
quate to carry the load, the neat higher size, rating or setting may be
used, but not exceeding 140 percent of the motor fullloved current rating.
If not shunted during the starting period of the motor, the protective
deuce shall have sufficient time delay to permit the motor to start and
ac -,Aerate its load.
(g) Shunting During Starting Period. If the motor is manually
started (including starting with a magnetie starter having push-button
control), the running overcurrent protection may be shunted or cut out
of circuit during the starting period of the motor, provided the device by
which the overcurrent protection is shunted or Put out cannot be left in
the starting position, and the motor shall be considered as protested
against overcurrent during the starting* period if fuses or time -delay
eirerit breakers rated or set at not over 400 percent of the fnU4oad cur.
rent e.f the motor, are in the eireuit as to be operative during
the starting period of the motor. Table 13 shall he used for overcurrent
proteetion of Mors marked with a code letter. The motor -running over -
current protection shall not be shunted or cut out during the starGug
period if the motor is automatically started.
266 l.rmss TRuL 5v4-& N
Rotation Machin, and its cast tR.ea�reiii. Na to
Apparatus
(h) FUSS, Wkft forms
are used as motor -running Wreemoner
protective deviees, a fns sW be inervied m e
(i) D*V'm Other 2%m 7=05-42 Whiab . If
desimi
other(') fuses are need formotor-runniag the
table shall govern the Nei um alocation of am
current units such as trip cmlr,, rele^
aromber and howen of
xud of avatar owed
ANNIPPIO Bee is oubub
rob" or
I-Phose A.G. 2•wire. I-Pbeea A.a or D.G. 1 in
or D.G =Xwewa" tor
1-pb&n A.G. 2-wiea IvIone, A.M or D.C.. Iin Vagroundod
of D.G, ome
1 -Phase A.G. 3-wim I•Pbase A.a or IRG_. I in claw %*-
or D.G
9-pbut A.G. 3
wite. 216ase A-C,untroundod
2 Pbsas A& twire, 2-Phave A.G 2 is
o, conductor Cresuded ens
I-Dhaas A.G. 4 -wire, 2iAm A_C- Z me per Pluse ta
grounded or untrasuded ungrounaid am-
doetwu
3 pbtts A.a S -wk% A.G. to" Por Plast In
of en- aur
wke
2 Pltw A a 3-mir% 3-pbrae A.Q. Z i a any 2 oeadae
E Plate A a two
3
IlPbate A.O. am 3 is ungroundod
S'P1ttt A.a 3 -wire, 34*Rw A.a. 2 im say 2 coed-
3pbattAa tea
A.G. tin any -ad—
twounded-Rout"a or on- two coast the
grounded neutna
(?) Fussbw of Cps DwbL
noelItOtOr-runuiRg overcurrent pro devices,b?� than foam or tbs9-
ungrounded coadmim
to the motor on ovcreurrent. W dmUltℜusl�, disconnecta8
(k) Moter Omirtr011Or as RwindogA
motor embelk
RUM'
eu � serve as the overeurre t de ' if the n at si e -
ata Opera tive bath the starting ts complies with Order239c (i} •10
� � in the Of s
D•C. motor, and in the runali*sg position in the ewe of an A.G. .
(1) Tbarad 0111601RUand Zday& Thermal eutents, thermal :r
hays, and other devices for
able of we Rd 4W
ug
short-ei iN shall be approved and
T1lf.E $ lkvts m Or lA`ntPay UL SsFErr 267
( aa, NO -S-2-19-6 ) /4rRiclo, L Retating Machin" and Its Con"
Apparatus
(m) Rating of Protective Davies. Motor -running ov,�reurrent
devices other than fuses shall have a rating of at least 115 percent of the
full -lead rating of the motor.
2568. NOW OomkVVWL (a) controller RequirOIL Each motor
shall be provided with a controller capable of starting and stopping the
motor which it and for alternating current motors, shall be
capable of interrupting the stalled rotor current of the motor which it
controls. A single cont roller may serve a group of motors when that group
of motors drives a egaveyor system, several parts of a single machine or
piece of apparatus as metal and woodworking machines, cranes,
hoists and similar apparatus.
(b) Ragag. The controller shall have a horsepower rating, which
shall not be lower than the horsepower rating of the motor, eztsept as
follows:
(1) staflonary lllofien' of One-eighth Horsepower or Lees.
For a stationary motor rated at one-eighth horsepower or len,
that is n y left running and is so constructed that it can-
not be damaged by overload or failure to start, such as clock
motors and the like, the branch circuit overcurrent device may
serve as the controller.
t2) Stationary Motor of Two Horsepower or Lea. For
a stationary motor rated at two horsepower or less, and 300
volts or his, the controller may he a general -use switch having
an ampere rating at least twice the full -load current rating of
the motor.
(3) Portable I>ltaw of One-third Horsepower or I.m.
For a portable motor rated at one-third horsepower or len, the
controller may be an approved attachment plug and receptacle
having a current rating at least twice the foll-load sarrnt
rating of the motor.
(4) Circuit Breaker as Controilen A branch circuit
circuit breaker, rated in amperes only, may be used as a con-
troller_ When this circuit breaker is also used for overeurrent
protection. it shell, conform to the appropriate provision of this
article governing overcurrent protection.
(e) opening conductors to Motor. The controller need not open
all ungrounded conductors to the motor, unless it also serves as the dis-
connecting
(d) in armouded conductors. One pole of the controller may be
planed in a permanently grounded conductor provided the controller is
ee designed that the pole in the grounded conductor cannot be opened
without imul yopening all conductors of the circuit.
268 NWSTMaL RMATI - 1
Artiole & Rotating Ifiaebbory and tb „,§, Mr -3_'T.
Apparatus
(e) Lows of ire OcatroUse. A motor
ahinery shall be within sight of the controller beation
following conditions is complied with:
(1) The controller or its disconnecting mum is
of being locked in the arm position.
(2) A man tit
starting of the motor, is placed within sight of and ad mue
than 50 feet from the motor t tt� be
placed in the rem trial . of the mator-eastral "up
ment.
(f) AdjustaM"psed Notom Adjustable -speed
trolled by means of be so equipped
that they cannot be started under weakened Sold, unless the motor a
designed for such starting
(g) tlpeed Limitation. Noehines of the following Is
Nr
with speed
limiting d ' tcharaderioin
Nr the machine, the vatem, or the
thereto, are such as to safely limit the speed. or miless the machme 's
always under the manual control of a quabled
(1) Separately -excited direct eurrent motom
(a)2 Series inoters.
Motor tuns and convertersbe drive
at excessive speed from the direct current end. as by a momi
of current or decrease in lead.
(h) Remote itoutral Ohvults. Conductors of remote control
cults shall be installed in conduit or be otherwise suitab%v r—teeted fm
mechanical injury where they extend beFond the eontro� device iudL
Control circuits shalt be so arranged that they will be €li.,ee *aceted
all sources of supply when the n ting meaus spedEed in Order
?399 is in the open position, except as follows
(1) A separate disconnecting switch may be used €or tit
control circuit if located immediately adjacent to the
disconnecting means.
(2) A separate disconnecting means may be used fa W
entire control circuit in 'bidindmd maltmiotOEaii -2&00
(such as metal or woodworking machines, a '. pow shanix
etc-) where it is impossible or irapraeticable to operate auy�
of the electrical equi t or any of the machine
other parts are inoperatim
(3) A separate disconnecting means may be used far tia
entire control eircWt where it is necessary to have all of 0
motor- ova t protective de for d
iRMOra nneete3 in segue so that all =4, —'.1a be sty.
.aa...kia•s +a€_ir when any over3oad device opeDS-
TrrLZ a Orvasov or isa Sst
tRaciabW 5% No. 3---19-55$ Article t Ratatifts Machinery ace to Central
Apparatus
(m) Remote Control Protection. The eon-
duetors of the control circuits of trolled apparatus ani devices
shall be considered as being properiY Protected by the motor branch
eine" o t .
(j) ft c Bin of Cosdueton. Con-
ductors, whether wild or shvindeed, shall be not smaller than No. 16 for
remote conte circuits vlene the motor branch circuit overcurrent pro-
tective device does not extra ed 15
(k) Guardiag Live Paris. Self-contained manually -operated con-
trol equipment and all of themanually-operated parts of other control
equipment, shall be enclosed and shall be arranged to be operated from
the outaide of the enclosing Motor control panels shall be enclosed
or guarded as required in Article 18.
(d) Zmergency Stop Device. When the nearest mannal control
device of a motor is so located that it is not safely and gniddy accessible
from the location of the driven machinery, and the nature of the hazard
from unguarded moving parts is such as to justify it, a suitable device by
which the motor may he quickly stopped in case of emergency shall be
provided and installed in one or more locations at or near the driven
machinery. such device may, for example, be a suitable switch in the
motor circuit, ora switch or stop button in the control circuit.
(nes) 1 -vim'- pl-oteatiam. The control device for each motor
of mon than 1 horsepower shall be provided with low -voltage protection:
(1) when the motor drives a group of two or more
(2) When the motor drives a machine of such type that it
is necessary for a person to regularly or frequently place him-
self
imself in such a position, relative to the moving parts of the
machine, that he would be exposed to probable injury by the
starting of the machines.
(3) when a motor, regardless of horsepower, driven a
pump supplying an oil burner, unless equipment is provided
with an approved reignition device.
(4) This order shall not apply to individual drive machines
which create no hazard by such restarting; nor to uMbines, the
control dekices of which automatically return to the "off"
position when the control lever is released by the operator.
(u) mounting. Controllers shall be mounted in such a manner
as to guard again^ t mechanical injury, oil, coolant, dust and dirt.
(o) Cot trcl Enclosures. Compartments used for control enclo-
suresshall be readily accessible and shall not contain moving parts not
direct] •- eonneeted to electrical control equipment, and aball be so
locatea as to guard the control devices against oil, coolant, chips, and dirt.
g _ t_ ad la d 2241,0; efeeUve thirtieth day ibeteafte� (itis
fig' No.
270 INDUSTRIAL t -e Mul
Artlolst Rotating Rtaohi y a t�
Apparatus
2M. Discons (a) GencraL An -
uely operable d6eunnecting means shall be connected in the dn* a
the line side of each motor and its controller except as provided in Or&
2399(b). The disconnecting means shall disconnect
the controller from all ungrounded supply
2398(h).) The disconnecting memis may be in the same eadissre wh
the controller.
(b) Motors by a Bftk Discomeatft Meam A sim&-
disconnecting means, which ll have a rating s
by Order WN (d) fora single motor whose rating equals the SUIR dfit
horsepowers or currents of all the Motors of the grouPr BUT serve s
of motors under either of tke following .
(1) When a number of motors drive several Park d a
single machine or piece of apparatus such as metal and 104
working machines, cranes, halsts, power shovels, ete., whert de
construction or use of the machine is Such that it VWX Is
impracticable to attempt to repair the motor, eQUIXIIIIIN, w
machine while any part of the machine is in operStim
(2) When a group of moters is under the Praceti0a of
set of overeurrent devices as perraitted by Order 2396 (d)•
(e) Location. The disconnecting means aliall be is—ted wMim
convenient and readily traversable distance of the control eqwpmW
which it disconnects, but not nftessar4 on the same floor level. The
connecting means shall be arranged to be locked in the open posibm if
it is not within sight of the motor starter. A distance of 50 feet SIA 10
considered as equivalent to being out of sight.
(d) Type. Each diaeorineeting means shall be a
switch (rated in horsepower) or a manually operable eirewt IMIMW
except as follows:
(1) For ftflonary motorsof iAthbor powerorldl
the branch circuit oveacurrent device may serve as the '
necting means. d
(2) For motors rated two power or less oPeratiNg
300 volts or less, the d' may be a
switch (not horsepower rated) having an ampere rating at
twice the full -load, current rating of the metor-
(3) For motors above 50 horsepower, the dilwOuMedisr
means may be a rales switch, provided, hewever, VW
when the voltage ex . 2€V), the rating of the d'
switch shall not be less than 400 a a
(4) For a portable motor rated two hompower or IMOAOA
operating at or an a r o -red attachment p
receptacle having a current rating at lest Wee the fu
current rating of the motor may serve as thedi-sconueeM
INSIMIL
IT= 8 Drvwoti CW Iant'a Ut. 'IAF ETY 271
(Register No. "-19-56) Artialet. Rotating Machinery and lta Control
Apparatus
(5) Service switches shall not be required to have horse.
power the service switch is the ouiy dw
connecting means. When the fuses required do not exceed 200
amperes, but paragraph (3) of this order requires a 400 ampere
broueb circuit switch, the rating of the service and sobfeeder
switch through which such branch circuit switch is supplied
shag be not lea titan 400 amperes.
(e) Growaded Conilactom One pole of the disconnecting means
may be placed in a permaseaW grounded conductor if the disconnecting
means is so designed that the pole in the grounded conductor cannot be
opened without simultaneously disconnecting all conductors of the
circuit
(f) Indicating Type. The disconnecting means shall plainly indi-
eate whether it is in the open or dosed position.
24M Qraundft. (a) General. Exposed noncurrent -caroling
metal parts of Motors, generators and control equipment (such as frames
of motors and eontrol panels, operating levers, and easings of controllers,
switches, eta) Shall be permanently grounded as required in Article 7
under the f .
(1) All motors (whether fixed or portable) in all locations
classed as hazardous in .Article 22.
(2) All motors (whether fixed or portable) regardless of
voltage, at all locations when exposed grounded surfaces (aueh
as metal ftames of other machines, plumbing fixtures, grounded
pipe or conduit, and conducting floor or walls) exist within the
reach of persons when touching the metal parts under consider-
ation. Grounded surfaces within five feet horizontally of the
parts considered and within eight feet vertically of the floor or
working platform are considered as being within reach.
(3) All portable electric tools which are held in the hand
while being operated (regardless of voltage).
(4) When the motor is not otherwise eSeetively grounded
and when the voltage exceeds 150 volts to ground, a bond will be
required betwo the motor frame and the rigid conduit or elec-
trical metallic tubing in cases where the rigid conduit or glee-
tricel metallic tubing does not terminate n a junction box which
is grounded to the motor frame. When the voltage does not
exceed 150 volts to ground, the motor frame may be grounded
through fiezible metal conduit whieh is properly connected to
the motor and to the rigid metal conduit
24M. Generators. (a) Location. Generators shall be located
in dry plaers. unless of a type approved for the location. Generators
luted in a room where any hazardaut proem is carried on, or where
they will be exposed to able ga-e or fiyings of combustible mate-
rials, shall comply with the provisions of Article 22, Hazardous I
272 Ia
Artlets s. Rotatiae M t `
Apparatus
(h) tom. wgitha
plate giving the maker, -name, the rating in kilrowu%
to
amperes, the volts
the rating VA
the revolutions per mute
(e) overourrmtProtecam constantTotentialex-
cept alternats rrent emexters ftabe prabdal
from exe alive current by '
(1) Two-irtrageneratom'Two- ,dir t-er
erators many I:sa'e 0"re tt tip^ '
if ties overearrent dr0ee is wtuated kv t sire entreat 9W
eratcd, except that
shall
not Opest the shunt
(g) 05 WIN W Leas Generators operatingat
or les protected 'b T Wrr*Ut la
y Zdard
these Will w are
wtM
not more than 15D percent of
their foll-load rated MML
(3) T ,
used in emiunetion with the balancer setsto
obtain matrill
for 3•wrire *Vtma shan be equipped with ov
wrhaeh win disemsect the 3- in the Case of
sin sag of voltages, or currents,
(4) Tbraaa k*,
direct-current generators, whethw compoundOr
shunt v=L
shall be equipped with overcurrent devieft, one in
each Was"
tore lead, and as Connected as to be actuated by the
Wift
comsat from the everearrewt
devices " a'
si.Ct either of a double—pole, d ba i j react breaker.or d s
4 -Nie circuit breaker connected in t ani eq
ualim bob
and tripped be t overeurroat elev` s case in each
armalart
lead. Such protective de.ie sisal lie se* intele-'Viked t
hat new
pole can be opened wits~ t sim ult° � 11, s§�. n
leads of the armature from. the s;%VezL
(d) Sin of Oondwtam The conductors the _reserstcr W
minals to supplied equipment shall 1mve a carrYIng ear ' iv
act IM *a
115 percent of the same plate current rnz• 'Neutralt to w '
be of the required to _ normal
ch tW OF
be subjected.
(e) Protectiost of Lave Parts. Lire its Of eras 'd arac
than 150 volts to ground *ban be protected as re ln' by Order 204
for
(f)- 'Exposed:*8�*vet as � %-Mg — 'tal par" st
generator be in a � 3<a w zl-i do m
Article 7. nye
I.
inns $ llsys s,N or NIArSTRIAL SAMTT
Arlis9a # Teanaf�
( t+ S—a2-11-
Article 9. Transformers
UK T�raWwaaara. (a) AppUeafim This order applies to the
installation of an trawformers inviuding tr ormers operating at volt -
in cacen of Wo volts, except a (1) Current and hof other
formers; (2) _ tuts a component
apparatus and which Coutwas to the to for ;
(3) UwnfOmms far 190 with X-ray and h-fre4 ; (4) tress-
formem Med with (3m 2 trol, low energy power and signal
Circuity Which aboll onstwin to .Article 35; (5) trauslarmers for signs
lightingand outline which 6WI conform to Article 28; (8) trans-
formers for electric diwlwW lightingwhich ahall eOnform to Artiste 18;
and (7) transforraers installedon poles or pole structures which sbati
Conform to the Rules for Overhead Lim Construction of the 081ifornia
Publie Utilities commisdom
(b) OverOMMIGIML PrOtectim goch transformer or bank of trans -
f ra operating sa a unit sholl be seperstelY protected by one of the
folio -
(1) BaCh tramhrmershall be protected by an -
rent device in the primarY Connection, rated Or 94 at na the more
than 400 percent of the rated primary current
trans-
former, emept that an individual overcurrent device is not
1a as if tie Vrimry circuit over+eurrent devise provides the
protection spedw n this paragraph.
(2)A transfarmer having an Overcurrent devise in the
secondary ecamcfical, rated or set at not more than 400 pereent
of the rated secondary current of the transformer, or a trMI
former equipped with a eoordinated overload Prateetian
by r is not required to have an individual
ov nt device in the primary Connection provided the pri-
t device is rated or set to open at a
Current value not mom than sm tunes the rated Current of the
having not more than $ pezvent
and not more than four times rated current of the
transformer for trandormers having more than 6, but not
More
than 10 percent pedaum
(3) A frau wueed for secOudary network operation,
mawW as spieeffied in Order 2407, and accessible to authorized
andqoardied persausosby is not required to have an individual
overeurrent device in the prrmary conneetion, provided; that an
overcurrent device is provided in the sewndarg ; and
in addition, an automatic Cirmit-breaker actuated by a reverse
current relay set to, ope, the circuit at not more than the rated
currentsecondary of the transformer, shall be provided in the
,e,,,U,y Connection of
transformer -
(c) Overcurraut rretwflys Device. Each transformer or bank
oftran,f ers operating as a snit shall. be separately protected by
am
of the f -
zihazlk jZ
1T=0=17--- L,0,7'
rhe -aai* M
:U"ipzr iaal� w,
'iir t0K
di-d1:v!-d '=a7:M wnuxw iw'-dilm w,
.—°_ MU _* -rau-'J, 7- Ma Mze�_� - tezt-'W'Lie =a iv :za :�Jff up of fi�
--UMM -min 711 -=M ±7�_- 51W�hn
mitW
_uaisx �ii—n _zzscisltu -at mmlaing ;rmudaze
3CAa je it _t -_r. :a' sil
wharm, 10= --nam -UMU= _AM azaz Mimald zu zzd=zpt lit lir-
Mauzzair
49mTei nati
-Q =ar-
,=-tie A�Iar kdtpz�
1=.!_=__ M _71�1 insa _3* rlsb'q all
Meesseme xmi vm-'eme=- -M Mia -'"Fft U 6
d
.VAaC'.�MwJMMM in z3flivil!
�'ettk -ne, cuT.Mng d -zo
, iptem -nace�i
9M i imall
'nsem =U
zM L A: -- a
_=MM
'be Ede
g0e
-1 En
:Mk- ME isms
!css *Am RM
tv qzmt -a -
MY -2
ML
Trl%z 9 Divisio,.%- or- l%-DxN,,-ratAL SArrTY 275
(Regisler 51L Ne.3-2-119-551 Article 1. Traneformere
addiiiint an antomatie circuit breaker actuated by a reverse-eurrent
relay set to open the eirevit at not more than the rated secondary current
of the transformer shall be provided in the secondary connection of each
transformer.
(e) Pwifflel Operation. Where transformers are operated in par-
allel they may be protected as a unit if their electrical characteristics
are sneh that they will divide the load in proportion to their rating and
temperature rise recommended by the manufacturer.
(f) Name Plate. Each transformer shall be provided with a name
plate giving the name of the manufacturer; rated kilovolt -amperes, fre-
quency, primary and secondary voltage; and the amount and kind of
insulating liquid, if any, if the transformer rating exceeds 25 kva. If
Class B insulation as defined in the American Standards for Trans-
formers; is used in the construction of dry -type transformers of more
than 100 kva, the name plate shall so indicate.
Grounding. Transformer cases and other exposed noneur-
rent-carrying metal parts of transformer installations including fences
shall be grounded in accordance with Article 7 of these orders.
(b i Dry -type Transformers Installed Indoors.
Transformers rated more than 25,000 volts shall be installed in
a van't,
(i) Askarel-insulated. Transformers Installed Indoors. Askarel
insulated transformers installed indoors and rated in excess of 25 kva
shall lx: furnished with a pressure -relief vent. If installed in a poorly
ventilwed place they shall be furnished with a means for absorbing any
gases generated by arcing inside the case, or the pressure -relief vent shall
be connected to a ebimney or flue which will carry such gases outside the
building. Askerel-insulated transformers rated more than 25,000 volts
shall be installed in a vault.
(j) Oil -insulated Transformers. Oil -insulated transformers in.
stalled indoors shall be installed as specified in Orders 2407(c), (d), or
(e) except as follows:
(1) NVhere the capacity of the transformer or bank of
traysfot.niers aetinl- as a unit does not exceed 100 kva, the
provMons for transformer vaults in Order 2407(c) apply except
that the vault mpy he constructed of reinforced concrete not
less than four inches thick.
(01 Where the highest voltage of neither the primary
nor th,- ,,,-t,ozA-try windings exe(".la 600 volts and the total
capaeily of all such transformers in any one room does not
rx.-C(4i M hvn. siieb transformers may be installed and treated
equipment; provided, however, that oft.
ffllel transformers shall not he installed in close proximity to
readily i{-nitible material, nor in hazardous locations, nor in
huMMLIN which are not of fire -resistive construction (for the
INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS TITLE bi
276 (Register 55, No.3-2-is-1653
Artists & Tesneformsrs
purpose of this order, buildings of corrugated iron with wooden
studding will be considered as of fire st ve construction)'
Emade to
In all oases, suitable to other combustible
s transformer oil fire from spreading
material. ormera of a Total rating
(3) Electric furnace trungf
not
eZC8eding 75 kva mals be installed without a vault ane
or room of fire-resistant construction if arrangementsother eeMU7
to prevent a transformer oil fire spreading
bustible material are provided.Ve thirtieth day thereafter (Ram
IIiatory: 1. Amendment filed 424-52: end
ter 28. t\o. 3)
2. Amendment Qled 2-94W; thirtieth day thereafter (>Eks
tater 35, NO. 8).
2407. Transformer InaUnstions and End0surm
thane containing a aou->samumbue liquid not be
installed in an enclosure of fireproof construction where the transh'rmers is at
Air cooled transformers and
a Voltage of MAW Volts or less.
(a) Inatatllaiion of Transformers � ulWhere transformarii
es for Overhead Line
are installed on poles or pole structures, shalt aPPiP
Construction of the California Pubhe Utilities
Commissim (b) InstailationofTrandormarsinanoutdoor Enclosure- Where
transformers are installed in an outdoor enclosure, the enclosure shall
onsistbe of a substantial fence not less than eight feet high. The fence
c
shall so construeted that persons cannot readily climb it. Where any
exposed eurrent-carrying Part is more than eight feet above the ground,
the height of the fence shall be not less than 10 feet, unless the fence
is located morethan five feet horizontally from the nearest such current -
carrying part. The fence if of metal shall be grounded in accordance
with Article 7 of there orders. The gate shall be kept locked, and a
permanent sign legible at 12 feet shall be posted on the gate, forbidding
usnanthoris4ed persons to enter. No fence shall be required where all
current -carrying conductors and parts entering the transformers are
Iced -sheathed and protected from mechanical injury, or are enclosed in
metal raceway; the sheath, or the metal raceway, shall be wiped -In or
screwed to the transformer cases, making a watertight construction,
and all sheaths or raceways and the cases of the transformers shall be
effectively grounded.
When the enclosure is adjacent to platforms, balconies, roofs,
windows, or doors, suitable screens shall be provided to prevent periroea
coming into contact with eurrent-carrying parts, or bringing conducting
materials into contact with then.
(e) Transformer Vaults. Transformer vaults shall conform to
the following:
(1) The walls and roof of vaults shall consist of rein-
forced concrete not Toes than six inches in thickness, or of brick
not Im than eight inches in thickness, or of construction of
equivalent fire rating.
TITLE 8 Divia ow or INDUSTRIAL SAFETY 277
(Register 5% No. —2.141-65) Article !. Transformers
(2) Each doorway leading from the vault into the building
shall be provided with a tight -fitting fire door of a type approved
for openings in Class A situations.
(3) A door sill or curb of sufficient height to confine within
the vault the oil from the largest transformer shall be provided
and in no ease shall the height be less than 4 inches.
(4) Doors to transformer vaults shall be kept looked and
a permanent warning sign legible at 12 feet shall be posted on
the door, forbidding unauthorized persons to enter. Where
spring or other automatic locks are used, they shall be no
arranged that the door may be readily and quickly opened from
the inside of the vault.
(5) The enclosure shall be provided with means for venti-
lation adequate to prevent transformer temperatures in ext
of those at wbich the transformers installed therein may be
safely operated.
(6) Ventilation openings shall be located as faraway as
possible from doors, windows, fire escapes, and combustible
material.
(7) Vaults ventilated by natural circulation of air shall
have a combined net area of all ventilating openings after
deducting the area occupied by screens, grating, or louvers, of
not less than three square inches per kva of transformer capse
ity in service except that the net area shall be not less than one
square foot.
(S) All ventilating openings not connected to chimneys
or Dues or vented to the outdoors, and all windows shall be pro-
vided with automatic dampers made of metal of thieknew not
less than No. 10 (U. S. Standard gauge for sheet metal) ;to
prevent the emission of smoke or fire.
(9) Vents from transformer vaults shall not open into any
enclosed ventilating system which connects with any other
portion of the building.
(10) All ventilating flues or ducts shall be of fire-resistant
construction.
(11) Ventilating openings shall not be through the vault
door, except where door opens to outdoors.
(12) Pipe or duct systems foreign to the electrical instal-
lation and passing through the transformer vault shall contain
no appurtenances inside the vault (such as faucets, valves, or
pipe fittings) that require maintenance. Piping or other faeil-
ities provided for Ike protection or for water-cooled
trans-
formers are not deemed to be foreign to the electrical
tion.
(13) Materials shall not be stored in transformer vault.
(d) InstallStiOU, of Trandormsn ig a 8nil W (no a vtsalt)
Transformers may be installed in a building, or in a room of a buil
provided that the building is of flrepnof construction, or the room is out
280
Article 10.
1-NDUSTRIAL RELATIONS TTTT_V a
Switch" and Circuit Breakers (Resister 6% me. 3—t -Was)
241$. Knife Switches. (a) Maximum Capacity. jWfcawitehea
rated at more than 1200 amperes at 250 volts or Ins, and for sure than
600 amperes at 251 to 600 volts, shall be used only as isolating swit"
and shall not be opened under load. To interrupt current greater than
1290 amperes at 250 volts or less, or 600 amperes at 251 to 600 vdt@, a
circuit breaker or a switch of special design approved for suab purpose
shall be used.
(b) Position oKnife Switches. Single -throw knife awitcheashail
be so placed that gravity will not tend to close theaL Double -throw knife
gwitehes may be mounted so that the throw will be either vertical or
horizontal as preferred, but if the throw be verfieal a locking device "
be provided which will inure the blades remaining in the open position
when so set.
W Connection. Knife switehex, unless of the double -throw jyM
GINO be so connected that the blades are dead when the switch is in the
open position.
1 2414. Rating of Switch". (a) Marking. Switches shall be
Permanently marked with the current and voltage and, if horsepower
rated, the maximum rating for which they are desi-ne(L Circuit
breakers shall be Marked with their ampere rating which will be
clearly visible after installation of the circuit breaker in an enclosure
Or cabinet. The markings of either switch or circuit breaker shall be
visible when the circuit is energized.
(b)ORM012T, Switches and circuit breakers shall have an am-
pere rating not lea than the ampere rating of the lead unless a demand
fUtor shall have been granted. They shall have a voltage rating not last
than the nominal operating voltage of the eirenit controlled by the switell
Or eirenit breaker.
Amo*&_t filed 2-44%-. effiK-tire thirtieth day thereafter (Eft,
later M No. 3).
2"L 1whithag Switch" (Discomeactm). but_
ing switch" 108Y be single�pole or multiple -fie. The I They shall be provided
with xWtRUe Meaus for safe normal operation. With high -potential dis-
umseetoM this will usually consist of an
control Mechanism, or an insulated exteras insulated hookerremote
I operating lever.
(b) Warning SiguL Unless so interlocked that they cannot be
opened under lead, isolating switch" shall be Provided with permanent
warning *108 legible at 12 feet reading sabetentianr as fallowa: "Warm.
*Disc�nosato"—Do Not Open Tinder Lead I, When group of iso -
'sting switches is installed in One room or compartment, a single em-
*cUOUS sign my be sofileient.
(e) Aecouible to Other! Than Qualified Persons. When isolating
switches are installed in MY mm or locatiort to which other than quali-
fied persons have JIthey shall, for all voltages be protected by suit-
7"Ma a
(Register K No." D1VWOX OF INDUSTRIAL SAFETY 281
-19-5s) Article 10. Switches and circuit Breakers
able enclosam or eagingL It is not intended to require that all enclosures
be made of metaL The door or cover of the enclosure Abel! be kept cloud,
except when opened for operation or inspection. If a go t
bottom of the enclosure is loss than seven installed that the
Or cover shall be kept looked If installed a feet above the floort the door
a greater height ihin seven
feet, a latch Or Other suitable means may be used for keeping the door
or cover closed' When the isolating switches are operable from the ex-
orior of the enclosure, and also when provided with remote control
MaChAttism, the operating handle or lever shall be provided with meeng
for locking, and shall be kept locked when in open Position and when in
closed position, or in lieu of such locking they shall be interlocked with
suitable interrupting switches, circuit breakers, or equivalent devices,
in such
under load. manner 83 to Prevent opening or closing the isolating switch"
switches are installed in ooms,
d) Accessible to Qualifted Peru= only. When isolating
r
lated places, to which only q pgrtmentli, Or Other enclosed or ilap.ualiffeOOM d
shallpersons are permitted access, they
be provided with enclosures, guards, Or ficreens that, will prevent
accidental contact; or
(1) They shall be so located that persons will not be liable
to come into contact with, or bring conducting tools or nate-
rials into contact with the live parts; or
(2) When isolating switches are installed above wcrk
spaces, the -v shall be suitably enclosed or guarded as specified in
this order, or they shall be elevated above the floor not Ion than
eight feet for voltages between 600 volts and 2500 volts to
ground, and not lea than eight and one-half feet for voltages
over 2500 volts to ground.
(3) Isolating switches on circuits from 0 to 600 volts us I y
be installed under the same conditions as Other switches rated
at not more than 600 volts
(e) Sectinuallging Oil Switches. Each set of disconnecting Hake
811411 be provided with a viewing window of three-inch minimure diars.
eter, with a minimum Of two windows per switch. The switch shall be
arranged to be locked in the
equipped with Open Position. Each switch shall be
for isolating a connecting diagram. Suitable means shall be, provided
these Oil switches for service or repair.
Hist": I. New subsection (e) filed 2-9-55; effective thirtieth day there - atter'
(Register 5k NO. 11).
2416' Circuit Rmakers. (a) General. All circuit breakers"
shall have readily and safely accessible means for their manual opening.'
Circuit breakers shall he capable of being closed hy hand for main-
tenance purpose& Circuit breakers shall indicate whether they an in the
open or closed position.
(b) Disconneirting Keanx. Where single -pole circuit breakers
are used for the protection of ungrounded conductors in a branch
circuit, the breaker handles shall he arranged to disconnect all an.
grounded conductors simultineously.
282 FrrotssTRUL ROATioins
5
Artiole 11. 8wtfchboards and PaODtbsar" (firSk Na
(e) 1pobAin$ Me&= for Oil S
suitable air break isolating (disconnecting) switch shall be installed to
isolate each oil switch or oil circuit bre.aker from all sources of
It shall be readily and safely accessible to the person making an inspea.
tion, adjustment, or repair of the oil switeh or oil eireoit breaker. It
shall be so arranged that it may be locked in it
is located within sight of the Person making as 1113lis&JOU, adjustment,
or repair, or in a room or enclosure accessible to property qualified and
authorized persons only. isolating itc be either single -pole or
multiple-pole,unless multiple -pole switches are specifiesUy required by
other seeuniu; of theme ordersRemovable truck panels and metal."
switch -gear units, which, when removed from the normal operating posi,
tion, automatically disconnect the oil switch or eircuit breaker from all
live parts are considered as complying with this order, and no isolating
switches will be required. In highly corrosive or hazardous location
suitable isolating means of other than air break shall be used, or the
isolating means shall be installed in an enclosure approved for Joestiana
of the particular -hazard involved.
HjUwV. -l. New section, Indading former PM(a) and (d). ,
e8eetive thirtieth day thereafter (Register W6 No. 3).
Article 11. Switchboards and Panelboards
Thu article does not apply to switchboards, 1 and du-
tribation boards in utility company operated central stations, substations
or Mated plants which directly control energy derived ftvm generators
or transforming devices, nor to such boards or portions thereof used
exclusively to control "eaminimicatim or signal circuits operated by bat-
twift requirements of this article shall apply to battery charging
Panels if currentin taken from light or power eirenits.
(For mal Provisions
)
i in tens, see Order )
Ssritebbeards: Locadem and A 'ty. (a) Locatim
SWItChboards which have any exposed live parts shall be located in per-
tdy dry locatiow andwhere under t supervision
and assemble only to qualified permL
(b) Wet Locations, If a switchboard is in a wet location or out -
of a building, it shall be enclosed in a weatherproof enalosm or
(e) ft* BMW& Switchboards shall be co co ted or placed
as 10 reduce to a minimum probability of communicating An to
adjacent costly 'tible
to a �d) � , < shall not be built ttp
a of tsft �
,u an t u
TTTLR S Divistow or Iz.IRmtste.t, SAtTTy
(R*e!6tW ft No.3--E-"-5$) Artiefa 11. 8witahbonrds and Penetboards
(e)Clearance Areand 8witc1iboard. Adequate clear working
With secure footing,.shall be provided and maintained about All
swi e working space baek of the board shall be kept clear of
foreign material and shall not be used for storage purposes. The working
spaces sholl be so arranged as to give the authorized ts ready
and safe access to all parts requiring attention, inspection, adjustment,
or repair, and so that the operator will not be endangered by live putts, or
by the moving parts of machinery or equipment located near the howd..
Sec Article 18—Working Space and Guarding for clearance about
switchboards and
(f) on. Illumination shalt be provided for the front of
all switchboards and for the back of switchboards which have parts
equipment requiring adjustment, replacement, or repair. The lights and
switch used for the control of such illumination shall be so located that
they will be readily and safely accessible.
2421. Switch • Material and Wiring. (a) Material. Tis
bases of switchboards shall be made of noncombustible material.
(b) Kara Lire Parts. Bus bars, if rigidly mounted, may be of
bare metal, except where low -voltage busbars are required to be ,taped,
or otherwise covered, as a means of protection against accidental contact
as for example, where fuses are installed on the back of switch
(e) Conductor Covering. Insulated conductors when closely
grouped, as on the rear of switchboards, shall each haves fissio4vtgrdsit
outer covering.
(d) Protection of Instrument Circuits. Instruments, pilot lights,
potential transformers, and other switchboard device with potential
coils, except potential transformers used in metering, or where the opera-
tion of the overearrent device might introduce a hazard in the operMicis
of devices, shall be supplied by a circuit that is protected by standard
overeurrent devices of a rating not greater than 15 amperes,except that
for ratings of two amperes or less special types of enclosed fuses may be
(e) ,Relays, sndl tTran
formers. Instruments, relays, meters and instrument tr era
located on switchboards shall be grounded as specified in 't
(f) Grounding. Switchboard frames and structures supporting
switching equipment shall be grounded, except that the hwm for
current single -polarity switchboards may be insulated for the &I volifte
of the circuit in lieu of grounding.
(g) Type Required. All switchboards, when the voltage bet*eft
any two conductors of the eireuit exceeds 300 brolts or from my M246AW
to ground enxeceds 150 volts, shall be of approved d
the voltage does not exceed 3W volts between conductors or 160ts trom
any conductor to ground, switchboards with switches of the alpos6d
284 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS T1= �
Article it. switchboards and Panelbowds (Regeeter61 tia=-2- j
knife -blade type may be used when installed in ; in swft&
board rooms or switchboard enclosures; or an platforms, galley* at
balconies. Such spaces shall be accessible to properly qualified and
ized perms only. All switchboards shall be of approved type.
(h) Switches or Control Devices Back of switchboards. SwitehM
starters or control devices shall not be installed on the wall or grMe back
of "live -back" switchboards unless working space is provided and
tained as required by Order 2475.
(i) Separation of Bare Live Parts. When two or more cou.
taetors, switches, relays, or other devices having bare live parts or
terminals, are mounted adjacent to each other in one cabinet or en.
closure, suitable barriers shall be installed between them.
Exception: When all the devices or groups of intereognected
devices in the cabinet, enclosure, or panel are simultaneously de,
energized by a single disconnecting means, barriers will not be re-
quired.
The above requirements are not applicable to multi -car elevator
installations.
kislory: 1. Amendment Sled Y-tl-W; effectica thirtieth dot tbftvdtor (Regis•
ter Std, No. 8).
9182. Panelboards. (a) Number of Oveircurreut Devices on One
Panelboard. Not more than 42 overeurrent devices of a lighting and
appliance branell circuit panelboard shall be installed in any one cabinet
(b)Overcurrent Protection. A panelboard supplied by eondas-
tors'having overeurrent protection greater than 200 amperes shall be pro-
teei+ad�on the supply side by overeurrent devices hang a rating not
meter than
that of the panelboard. Snap switches rated at 30 amperes
or 110as and employed in panelboards shall. have overcurrent protection
n6tiii excess of 200 amperes.
(e) Damp or Wet Locadans. Pauelboards in wet or damp loss -
tions or outside a building shall be installed in a weatherproof endows
or. cabinet, installed in aeeordanre with Order 2359(b).
(d) Relative Arrangement of Switch= and Funs. Panelboards
shall have fuses of all types placed on the load side of the switches.
Switches shall be so arranged that the blades will be demi when the
Switches are open.
(e) Dead -front Pansibuards and zatiosed Branch CireuitCatodis.
All pauelboards and braneb circuit cutouts shall be approved dead-fraut
(cutouts installed in entout boxes shall not be used in lieu of
boards or enclosed branch circuit cutouts). Panelboards containing ar-
tridge type fuses will require separated to give seem to the switch"
and to the fuses, unless some other suitable method is employed to pre -
vast WOODS eoming into accidental contact with eurrent-carrYing zairtill
while operal in -
.r the switch( .
a DIVISION OF IN®LSTRIAI, SAFETY 285
(Register as, We 3 — A -:a )
Article /2. Fixtures
(g) Separation of Live Parts. The minincum separt2ion between
Imre live Farts of cutouts installed adjacent to other cutouts, shall be not
lees for pasta of like polarity than that required for parts of different
polarity.
Article 12. Fixtures
2W. GeneraL (a) Live Parts. Fixtures, lampholders, lamps,
eontttes and receptacles shall have no live parts normally exposed to
(b) Damp, Wet or Corrosive Locations. Fixtures exposed to the
weather or installed in damp or wet locations shall be of weatherproof
or other types approved for such locations and shall be s> constructed
or installed that water cannot enter or accumulate in wireways, -lamp-
holders or other electrical parts. Fixtures installed in corrosive locations
shall be of a type approved for such locations.
(c) FWares Near Combustible Material. Fixtures shall be so
constructed, or installed, or equipped with shades or guards that com-
bustible material will not be subjected to temperatures in excess of 90" C.
(194° F.).
(d) Space for Conductors. Canopies and outlet boxes' taken
together shall provide adequate space so that fixture conductors and their
connecting devices may he properly installed.
(e) Temperature Limit in Outlet Boxes. Fixtures shall be of
such construction or so installed that the conductors in outlet boxes
will not be subjected to temperatures greater than that for which the
conductors are approved.
(f) Outlet Boxes to Be Covered. In a completed installation,
each outlet box shall be provided with a cover unless covered by means of
a fixture canopy, lampholder, receptacle, route, or similar device. Any
combustible wall or ceiling finish exposed between the edge of a fixture
canopy
materials pan and an outlet box sball be covered with noncombustible
(g) Connection of Fluorescent Fixtures. Fluorescent lighting
fixtures may be connected to the outlet box by mcansof an aggrowed
cord where the fixtures are suspended below the outlet boa. The cold
shall hang free in the air and shall not be subjected to strain or meehan-
icalinjury.
(h) Supports. Fixt:ares. lauipholders, rosettes and receptacles
Shall be seenrely and adequately supported. A fixture which weighs
more than six pounds or exceeds 16 inches in any dimension shall not be
supported by the screw shell of a lampholder. A fixture which weigU
more than 50 pounds shall be supported independently of the outlet box.
(i) Marking. All fixtures requiring ballasts or transformers
shall be plainly marked with their electrical rates and the manufac-
turer's name, trade -mark or other suitable means of identification. The
286 INnus`rmAL RELATioxs TITLE g
Article 12. Fixtures ( '. No -3 -2 -
electrical rating shall include the voltage and frequency, and sha indi-
te the current rating of the unit, including the or
auto -transformer.
Hlslory: 1. Amendment filed 3-0-L5; eaeetin thiftifth day thereafter (Re-
later 55, No. E).
242L Wiring of Fixtures. (a) Polarisation of Fixtmtes. Each
fixture shall be so wired that all screw of lampholders are emneeted
ton grounded identified conductor.
smaller than
ffid Oond n tBim Fixture Zg_ conductors shall be ample for the
iced
(e) Conductor lnsulation. Fixtures shall be wired with eoudue-
rs hating insulation suitable for the current, voltage, and temperature
which the conductors will be subjeeteti. Where fixtures are 'indsUed in
sap, wet, or corrosive locations, conductors shall be of a type approved
for Nov" Parts. Stranded conductors shall be
a and other movable parts. Conductors shall be so
ight of the Suture or movable parts will not put a
illation of Conductors. Conductors shall be secured in a
will not tend to tut or abrade the insulation,. Condueto s
eted from abrasion where they pass through metal. Lzposed
or fixture wire shall not be used to supply permanently
insgltledfixturumallow COM or watt
(f) Cousections, Splices and Taps. Fixtures shall be so installed
that the connections between the fixture conductors and the circuit cow
may be inspected without requiring the tion of any
part of the unless the fiatare is eonneeted by means of a plug and
Splices and tape shall not be located within fixture arms or
sb=L No un splices or taps shall be made within or on a fixture.
(g) Fixture Rsoswsys. Fixtures shall not be used as a raceway
for 'eireuit conductors unless the fixtures meet the requirements of
=approved raesd4sys, except that the cendnetors of a single brasth-circuit
be carried through (1) Aa installation of fixtures approved for
to end aaably to form a continuous raceway; or
(2) An installation of fixtures which an connected W
pther by approved whW. .
2M tiers and Receptacles. (a) Lampb4d9M Sorsw-
'1'M Lampholdere of the -shell type shall be installed for
mre dere only.
(b) ultalt I alis e � The ungrounded
device
shall de o duof of the circuit.
TITLE 8 Drrtuox or INDUSTRIAL SAFLITY 2$7
(Register 55, No. 3--2-19-55) Article I& Fixtures
(e) Wet LOCLUOM Caszosive Vapors. Lampholdere and rresep.
tacles installed out of doors, in damp or wet locations, or here corrosive
vapors exist shall be of a weatherproof type.
(d) Receptacles. Eating and Type. Receptacles installed for the
attachment of portable cords shall be rated at not less than 15 amperes,
125 volts, or 10 ampertis, 250 volts, and shall be of a type not suitable
for use as lampholders. Receptacles shall have a rating not less than the
following when connected to circuits having two or more outlets:
15 ampere circuits-------------------------------- 15 ampere rating
20 ampere circuits-------------------------------- 15 ampere rating
3o ampere circuits------------------------------ 20 ampere rating
50 ampere circuits-------------------------------- 5o ampere rating
(e) Moor Receptacles. Receptacles located in floors shah be
enclosed in approved boxes especially designed for the purpose, except
where the location is free from mechanical injury or moisture.
(P) Receptacles. General. Receptacles for attachment plugs shall
be of approved concealed contact type, and shall be so designed and eon-
structed that the plug may be pulled out without leaving any live parts
exposed to accidental contact, except that, when the receptacle exceeds
25 amperes, it may be of a type having a self-closing cover which will
prevent accidental eontaet. Where different voltages, frequencies, or
types of current (A.C. or D.C.) are to be supplied by portable cordo,
refs-pf v.les shall be of such design that attachment plugs used on such
circuits are not interchangeable. Attachment plugs or other connectors
supplying equipment at more than 300 volts shall be of the skirted type
or otherwise so designed that ares will be confined within the can of
the plug or receptacle.
All surface type receptacles shall be enclosed in cases of metal or
other durable material. Flush type receptacles shall be installed in
approved boxes.
Attachment plugs for use in work areas shall be eneased in metal
or otherwise so constructed that they will endure rough use.
(g) Portable Handlamps. Handlamps of the portable type sup.
plied through flexible cords shall be of the molded composition or other
type approved for the purpose. Brass -shell paper -lined lampholders 960
not be used. llandlamps shall be equipped with a handle and shall he
equipped with a substantial guard attached to the lampholder or the
handle.
(b) Rra=41hell Sockets. Brass -shell, paper -lined mekets or
other metal sockets or lampholders of a similar nature shall not
he used within five feet horizontally or eight feet vertically of grounded
surfaces or equipment unless they are attached to grounded metal race-
way or their case is grounded by other approved methods.
History: 1. Amendment filed 2-M; efieetire thirtieth day thereafter (leg.
later 55, Na. 3).
288 iNDvsTnAL RYLAam t
ArVele 12. Fixtune (rtes' x11, 24M. Electric Electric Discharge ` 1, VOHS or Lam. (a)
QeneraL Equipment for use with eleetrie discharge lighting
and designed for an open circuit voltage of 1.000 volts or less shall be of
a type approved for such service. Transformers of the oil -filled, type shall
not be used.
(b) ifixture Mounting. Fixtures having exposed ballasts or
transformers shall be so installed that such ballasts or transformers shall
not be in contact with combusible material.
(c) Auxiliary Equipment. Auxiliary equipment, including re-
actors, capacitors, resistors, and sinular equipment whers not installed
as part of a lighting fixture assembly shall be enclosed in aceemble,
permanently installed metal cabinets. Where display eases are net
permanently installed, no portion of a secondary, eireuit may be included
in more than a single ease.
(d) Auto -transformers. An auto -transformer which is used as
part of a ballast for supplying lighting units and which raises the voltage
to more than 300 volts shall be supplied only by a grounded system.
24M. Electric Discharge Lighting=13%re Than 1,000 Volts. (a)
Genual. Equipment for use with eleetrie discharge lighting systems
anis designed for an open-eimuit voltage of more than 1.000 volts shall be
of a type approved for such service.
(b) control. Fixtures or lamp installations shall be controlled
either singly or in groups by an externally operable switch or circuit
breaker which will open all ungrounded primary conductors. The switch
or eireuit breaker shall be located within sight of the fixtures or lamps,
or it may be located elsewhere if it is provided with means for locking
in the open position.
(c) Transformer Ratings. Transformers and ballasts shall have
A secondary open-virenit volts-" of mut more than 15,000 volts with an
allowance on test of 1.000 volts additional.
(d) Transformer Type. Transformers shall be of an approved
enelcd tvge Transformers of other than the askarel insulated or dry
typesban uotbe need.
(e) Transformer Secondary Connections. The high-voltage wind-
ings of transformer shall not be eonneeted in series or in parallel. except
that for two transformers. each having one end of its high-voltage wind-
ing grounded and connected to the enclosure, the high-voltage windings
maybe connected in serir-ito form the equivalent of a mid -point grounded
transformer. The grounded ends shall be connected by an insulated em-
daetOr not smaller than No. 14.
(f) Utica of Transformers. Transformers shall be aceessible
after installation. Transformers shall be so located that adjacent conn-
byustitle materials will not be subjected to temperatures in excess of
90e C
TITLE 8 Dmmx or INoaSTRIAL SAFETY 389
(Rggkftr K No. 3--2-19-55) ArUcle 13. Applianem
(g) Wiring Method. Secondary tlonductors. Approved gas -tube
sign cable suitable for the voltage of the circuit shall be used. For instal-
lation of conductors, we Order 2553.
(h) Transformer Loading. The lamps connected to any trans-
former shall be of such length and characteristics as not to cause a condi-
tion of continuousover-voltage on the transformer.
(i) Niec umicel Injury. Lamps shall not be located where nor-
mally exposed to mechanical injury.
(j) hemp Terminals and Lamphoiders. Lamps or lamphoiders
or both shall be so designed that there shall be no exposed live parts when
lamps are being inserted or are being removed.
(k) Narking. Each fixture or each secondary circuit of tubing
having an open -circuit voltage of more than 1,000 volts shall have a
clearlky legible marking in letters not less than one-quarter inch high
reading, "Caution ______ volts." The voltage indicated shall be the rated
open -circuit voltage. This sign shall be visible after the fixture is installed.
2M Grounding. (a) general. Fixtures and lighting equip-
ment shall be grounded in accordance with the provision of Article I
of these orders.
Article 13. Appliance
207 Ocnes'al. (a) Scope. This article shall apply to electrical
appliances for general commercial or industrial use.
(b) Haan Plate. Each electrical appliance shall be provided with
a name plate, giving the maker's name or trademark and the normal
rating in volts and amperes, or in volts and watts.
(c) Narking of Heating Elements. Individual heating elements
which are a part of an electrical appliance containing more than eats
heating element shall each be legibly marked with normal rating in volts
and amperes, or in volts and watts.
(d) Hag Devices, Voltage Limitation. Portableheating de-
vices which do not have the enclosed or sheathed type elects shall
not be used on any circuit operating at more than 150 volts to
Heating devices which are fixed as to location and have the elements
suitably enclosed by means of screens or grilles may be used on circuits
of not more than 300 volts between conductors. Heaters having the
enclosed or sheathed type elements may be used on eir(Mitt of not am
than 600 volts between conduewra.
243L Installation of Appliances. (a) Insulation of cards.
Fier-ble cords used to connect heating appliances shall comply with
the following:
290 INDUSTRIAL RUA
Article 13 Appliances8
(Register 55,Na3_2 1
(1) Flexible cords used to connect Smoothing irong, or
to connect portable electrieally-heated appliances rated at
more than 50 watts and which produce temperRuires is wwsa
of 121° C. (250° F.) on surfeeft with which the cord is liable
to be in contact, shall be of approved type heater eord.
(2) All other portable eleetrieally-heated appliaueso, Shall
be connected by flexible cord approved for the
(b) Portable Immersion Heaters. Electric heaters of the portable
immersion type shall be so constructed and installed that current -carry.
ing parts are effectively insulated from electrical contact with the sub.
stance in which immersed.
(e) Protection of Combustible Xateriai. Each electrically heated
appliance that is obviously intended by size, weight and service to be
located in a Beed position shall be so placed as to provide ample protection
between the appliance and adjacent combustible materiaL
(d) Stands for Portable Appliances. Eaeh smoothing iron and
Other portable electrically -heated appliance, which is intended to be
applied to combustible material shall be equipped and used with an
approved stand, which may be a separate piece of equipment or may be
a part of the appliance.
2439. Infra -red Lamp Iatiustriai Heating Applianc (a)
Lempholders. Infra -red heating lamps rated at 300 watts or lens may
be used with lampholders of the medium -base unswitched porcelain type,
or ether types approved for the purpose. Serew-shell lampholders Mall
not be used with infra -red lamps over 3oo watts rating unless the lamp -
holders are especially approved for the purpose. These lampholders may
be operated in series on circuits of more than 150 volts to ground provided
the voltage rating of the lampholders is not less than the circuit voltage
and provided the lampholders are mounted on fixed (not portable) units
wired in conduit or other approved metallic enclosures or raceways.
(b) Overourremt Protection. The overeurrent protection of the
branch circuit to each bank of lamps shall not exceed 50 amperes.
(c) Conductor Sise. Not less than No. 12 wire shall be used to
impply each bank of lamphoiders.
(d) Dicoonneoting Means. A readily and safely, accessible switch
or eirenit-breaker shall be placed in the circuit to each bank of lamps
4thay may be safely disconnected from all sources of supply when it
is necessary to replace lamps.
(e) Live Parts. All live parts shall be suitably enclosed or
guarded against accidental contact.
2449. Coatrei and Protection of Appliances.
Each appliance shall be controlled by an { indicating switch,
by i separable connector, or by an attachment plug which will diwm-
aeett the appliance from all ungroundedconductors of its supply circuit.
TITLE a Divisiox or INDUSTRIAL SAFZTY 291
(Register 55, No. 3- 2-18-55) Article 14. Capacitors
(b) Attachment Plugs ami Connectors. The rating of the separ-
able connector or attachment plug shall be not less than the rating of the
appliance connected thereto. Attachment plugs or connectors shall be
capable of interrupting their rated current.
(c) 396tw4hiven Appliances. A switch or circuit breaker which
serves as the disconnecting means for a motor -driven appliance shall be
located within sight of the appliance or shall be Capable of being locked
in the open position.
(d) Overcurrent Protection. Appliances, other than such motor -
operated appliances as are required by Article 8 to have additional
overcurrent protection, shall be considered as protected by the over -
current device protecting the branch circuit in accordance with Articles
6 and 17 of these orders.
3441. Grounding. (a) Heating Appliances. Metal frames of
all stationary electrically -heated appliances shall be grounded in the
manner specified in Article 7 of these orders. The noneurrent•earrying
metal parts of portable immersion type heaters operating at any voltage
shall be grounded. Portable heating appliances shall be grounded as
required by Article 7-
(b) Appliances Other Than Heating Type. In general, exposed
noncurrent -carrying metal parts of appliances shall be grounded as
required by Article 7.
Article 14. Capacitors
2448. Capacitors. (a) Application of Other Ordem This
article shall not apply to capacitors constituting a component part of
other apparatus and conforming with the requirements for such appa-
ratus. Capacitors installed in hazardous locations shall comply with the
provisions of this article, except as modified by Article 22. Capacitors
installed on poles shall comply with the Rules for Overhead Line Con-
struction of the California Public Utilities Commission.
(b) Location Capacitors shall be enclosed in vaults or outdoor
fenced enclosures complying with the provisions of Order 2407, unless
they are askarel insulated or unless each unit contains not more than
3 gallons of a combustible liquid.
(c) Mechanical Protection Appropriate provisions shall be
made to minimize the possibility of damage to capacitors from external
r21laes if the capacitors are located where they are exposed to mechanical
injury -
(d) Transformers Used With Capacitors. Transformers used
with capacitors shall be installed in accordance with Order 2407. The
kva rating Shall be not less than 135 percent of the capacitor kva rating.
(e) Drainage of Stored Charge. Capacitors shall be provided
with a means of draining the stored charge.
292 INDusraur. Rrr.avro-vs Tnu
Artie[* KCapacitors t m►tee. 8
(1) Tfma of DisdWIM 17he residual voltage of a eapae.
itor shall be reduced to 50 volts or len will& one mfnnts after
the capacitor is disconnected from the mum of supply in the
can of capacitors rated 600 volts or less and in ilve nijusita in
the case of capacitors rated nwe than 600 volts.
either permanently eof Dbeharge. The discharge eueart spas be
of the capasaw
or capacitor bank, or provided with automatic an= of ees-
necting it to the terminals of the capacitor bank on removal of
voltage from the line Manual means of switching or
W the diseharge circuit shall net be used. The windiagg of
motors, of transformers, or of other equipment directly esn-
neeted to capacitors without a switch or overeurreat device
interposed, constitutes a suitable discharge means.
(f) Capacitor Rafng The rating of capacitors, are can.
seated on the load side of a motor overcurrout device shall not exceed the
value required to raise the no-load power factor of the motor to uasy.
Capacitors of this maximum rating will ustually result in a fall -bad
power -factor of 95 to 98 percent.
(g) Capacitor Circuits. Capacitor eircuits shall eWorm to the
following:
(1) Conductor Rating. The rating of capacitor circuit
conductors shall be not lees than 135 percent of the rated eur-
rent of the capacitor, The rating of conductors which caused
a capacitor to the terminsh of a motor or to motor circuit am-
duetors shall be not less than me -third the rating of the motor
circuit conductors or the rating shall be determined as explained
above if this method gives a greater value
(2) Ovetrreut Protection. An evemn-rent device shall
be provided in each ungrounded conductor, except that an over -
current device is not required for a capacitor connected els the
load side of a motor overeurrent device. The rating or setting
Of the overturrellt device shall be as low as practicable without
causing unnecessary opening of the circuit. A. rating or setting
Of 165 to 850 percent of the rated current of the capacitor will
be suitable under average conditions although the setting or
rating may have to ezeeed 250 percent in some
(3) A. disconnecting device doll
be provided in each ungrounded conductor, except that a dis-
connecting device is not required for a capacitor connected on
the load side of a motor disemceting device. The disroustecting
device need not open all ungrounded emdueton simultaneously.
diselsonecting devicehe used for disconnecting the
NIP111citor from the line as a regular operating procedure. The
continuous curreftt-c� capacity of the disconnecting
of vic ice shall be not less than 135 pereent of the rated current
TITLE 8 Drvnmm or Ixnvsratan SAPErY 893
(Rogistor [[£[, Na 3--2-19-551 Article 1& Resistor* and Reactom
(h) Ratio or Setting of the Motor Overeurrent Device. If a
motor installation includes a capacitor connected on the load side of the
motor overeurTent device, the rating or setting of the motor overcarreut
device shall he determined as provided in Order 2396, except that instead
of using the full -lead rated current of the motor as provided in that order,
a lower value corresponding with the improved power factor of the motor
circuit be sued.
(i) iiroundiug. Capacitor cases shall be grounded (except when
installed on poles) in accordancewith Article 7.
(j) CuuAing. Unless installed in a vault or locked room, sees$-
m'his only to authorised persons, capacitors shall be so enclosed or guarded
that persons cannot come into accidental contact or bring conducting
asterisk into accidental contact with any live parts, terminals or boom
assoeiatedwith them.
(k) Yams Plate. Each capacitor shall be provided with a name
plate giving the maker's name, rated voltage, frequency, kva or amperes,
number of phases, and if liquid filled, the amount of liquid in gallons,
together with a statement that the liquid will or will not burn, an the case
may be. The name plate shall indicate whether or not a capacitor unit has
a discharge device inside the ease.
Article 15. Resistors and Reactors
245L Resistors and Reactors. (a) Location. Resistors and
reactors stall not be placed where exposed to mechanical injury. If in
the immediate vicinity of easily ignitible material they shall be of the
oil -immersed type or shall be enclosed in metal boxes or cabinets. Oft
Article 22 for hazardous locations.
(b) Space Separation. Unless attached to a switchboard or other
noncombustible material, or unless mounted as provided in Order 2461(x),
resistors and reactors shall be separated from combustible material by a
distance of not Less than one foot.
(c) on or in Proximity to Combustible MateriaL If placed within
a distance of one foot from combustible materials, resisters and resetGal
shall be installed as follows:
(1) Slab or Panel. They shall be attached to a slab or
panel of noncombustible, nonabsorptive material such as dale,
soapstone or marble.
(2) Size of Slab. The slab shall extend beyond the edges
of the device and shall have a thickness proportioned to the mine
and weight of the device but shall be not lea than incl[
thick.
294 IxuusrwAL Iiru.,.vto-vs TMX 8
Artiate It dtorago Oattsriss
(3) Supports. The slab shall be secured in position by
supports independent of those fastening the device to the AW
Bolts which support the device sliall be countersunk at Ind
one-eighth inch below the rear surface of the slab and shall be
covered with insulating
(d) Mounting. Casings when mounted on plain surfaces shall
make contact with such surfaces only at the point of support, an air gpece
of at least one-quarter inch being maintained between the casings and
surfaces.
(e) Conductor Insulation. If insulated eonduetors are used for
connection between resistance elements and eastleWlers, the conductors
shall be suitable for an operating temperature of not less than 900 a
(1940 F.), except that for mo 'ng service other conductor '
naulet-
tions may be used.
(f) Incandaftent Lamps as Rubtort Incandescent lamps may
be used as protective for a e� ra, or may be used
as resistors in aeries with other devices and shall conform to tbe
following:
(1) Mounting. They shall be mounted in porcelain re-
ceptacles on noncombustible supports.
(2) Voltage. They shall be so arranged that they cannot
have impressed upon them a voltage greater than that for which
they are rated.
(3) Ramo Plate. Each lampholder shall be provided
With a name plate, permanently attached, giving the wattage
and voltage of the lamp to be used in each receptacle.
(4) Not Barry Main Current They shall not carry or
control the main current nos constitute the regulating resistance
of the deviee.
(g) Rhaudst Contact Arms, Xotorstarting rheostats shall be
so designed that the contact arm cannot be left an intermediate WgmatL
The point or plate on which the arm rests when in thestartingpositiem
shall have no electrical connection with the resistor. Such rheostats, if
intended for use on dn'eet-eurrent circuits, shall be equipped with auto-
matic devices which will interrupt the supply before the speed of the
motor hes fallen to less than one-third its normal value.
(h) Grounding. ]Resistor cam or enclosures shall be grounded
in accordance with Article 7.
Article 16. Storage Batteries
apply to'aafteraL 11 stationary(a) a pro ons of this Article shall
installations of storage batteries said or
alkali as the eleetro)vte and ' ting of a number of cella connected in
scHftwith a ttoncinal voltage in exem of 16 volts,
TITLE 8 Dwanon or Imitw fnuL SArary 296
mister 5% No. 3- 2-19-55) Artiale It. 8torage 9at1sr4aa
(becalci •on of Nominal flue of Voltage,
The nominal battery voltage
shall
and 12 volts per cell for the ar cell for the load -acid type,
'type.
(e) Wiring and Apparatus Supplied From Batteries. Wiring,
appliances,and apparatus supplied from storage batteries shall be sub-
ject to the requirements of thane orders applying to wiring, appliance,
and apparatus operating at the same voltage, except as otherwise pro.
vided for communication systems in Article 36.
2W. Insulation of Batteries. (a) Batteries of Not Over 250
Volts. The provisions of this order shall apply to storage batteries
having the cells so connected as to operate at a nominal battery voltage
not exceeding 250 volts.
(1) Cells in lead -lined wood tanks, where the number of
tells in series does not exceed 25, shall be supported individually
On glass or glazed porcelain insulators. If the number of the
cells in series exceeds 25, the cella shall be supported individa
ally on oft insulators.
(2) Cells of the alkali type in jars made of conducting
material shall be installed in trays of nonconducting material,
with not over 20 cells in a series circuit in any one such trslsy,
or the cells may be supported singly or in groups on pwaclain
or other suitable insulators.
(3) Cells in unsealed jars made of nonconductive nuderia1
shall be assembled in trays of glass or supported on glass or
glared porcelain insulators; or, if installed on a rant, shall be
supported singly or in groups on glass or other suitable
insulators
(4) Cella in sealed rubber or composition containers ishan
require no additional insulating support N the total nominal
voltage of all cells in series does not exceed 150 volts. If .the
total voltage exceeds 150 volts, batteries shall be•seetionatind.
into groups of 150 volts or less and each group WWI have the
individual cells installed in trays or on racks. If trayser rads
are required for this type of cell, such trays or racks shall be
supported on glass or glazed porcelain insulators or oil type
insulators.
(5) Cella in sealed glass jars with or without wood trays,
require no additional. insulation.
(b) Batteries of Over 250 Volts. The provisions of Order 2W(a)
shall apply to storage batteries having the cells so connected an to operate
at a nominal voltage exceeding 250 volts and, in addition, the provision
of this order shall also apply to such batteries.
(1) Cells shall be installed in groups having a total from. `
inal voltage of not over 250 volts, in trays or on stip
on oft insulators; except that if each individual cell, or sub-
group in the tray or rack, is supported on oil he
Article 16. storage Batteries €tiagester a5, �0 3-2 N �
additional insulation for the group n be pro ; sad
except saled
cells of not over 10 ampere capacity in
glass jars may be grouped in trays, ties total ai Mageof
all cells in all& a group not to exceed 250 volts, and
IM to be supported on 6 or porcelain
the trays being mounted on racks supported on oil
insalstan
with a total nominal voltage of not over 500 volts for all a&
in series on each such insulated
Maximum protection is secured by sectionslisiag
eachhW
voltage; batteries into cell groups
insulated from adw
2M. Rasps and Trays• (a) Reaks. Racks, as required in Gk
article, refer to frames designed to support calk or tray: They shall be
substantial, and made of :
(1) Wood, co treated as to be resistant to deteriotaft
action by the electrolyte; or resistant to flag
(2) Metal, so treated as to be
action by the electrolyte. and provided with
nonconducting
members directly sup the or with bmIst-
jug material on --xiductingmembers; or
(a) Other ;- nUar suitable construction -
(b) Th,ys, Trays refer to frames such as crates or shallow bates
Renally of wood or other nonconducting material, 80 cOnaftuetel of
treated as to be resistant to deteriorating action by the eleetrolyte.
Rattety Rools& (a) Use. Separate battery rooms or es-
abasnrea" be required only for batterim in laiisealed jars Ib
where the to parAty at the 8 -hour d' age rate once&
(b} W Me**& la storage better., eondueiozs,
tubw
OM wiring, or conductors in rigid conduit or
shall be used U the Riring
(e) 9 ed cam
*=duet^ Type V, shall not be
(d) DM OODBe, ,,dutcrs shall not be taped.
(e), R&SOiT Rigidmetalconduit, or electrical metallic tellingin'
if . shall be of -rc•' t
material or shon be suift* tsoAd from corrosion.
used#) b>. If metal rar,Wav or o r covt��
the at 12 ' of e� at the
or 110011111511
conneoW to a salt terminal sW1 be free f ?
and shall be b by a z I, 61
The of the v I b eed list tir t t+n
r e by apraRv
or by gall m �;-
rubber a
tape' or other suitable material shill a� _'_. , f "' t1 S Ver _ -
TITLE S Divamox or Irrousraw. SAFETY 297
(Itsitaster14Ne, -12-55) Article 17. Wiring Installation Design
(g) Ventilation. Provision shall be made for sufficient diffusion
and ventilation of the gases from the battery to prevent the accumu-
lation of an explosive mixture in the battery room.
Article 17. Wiring Installation Design
24K Polarity Identification of Systems and Oirouits. (a) tiest-
aral. All interior wiring systems required to be grounded by Article 7
shall have a grounded conductor which is identified throughout the
system
(b) Oonnection to Grounded System. No interior wiring shall be
electrically connected to a supply system unless the latter contains, for
any grounded conductor of the interior system, a corresponding con-
ductor which is grounded.
(c) Auto -Transformers. Transformers in which a part of the
turns are common to both primary and secondary alternating current
circuits, ordinarily known as auto -transformers, shall not be permitted
for any interior wiring system or circuit except as follows:
(1) Auto -transformers used for starting and controlling
induction motors whether included in starter cases or installed
as separate units.
(2) For supplying a circuit having an identified grounded
conductor which is solidly connected to a similar identified
grounded conductor of the system supplying the auWtmns-
former.
(3) For increasing the secondary voltage to a value
greater than the primary voltage.
(d) Connections to 8crew4Shells. A grounded conductor, if ran
to a lampholder, shall be connected to the screw -shell.
(e) Unidentified Circuits. Two -wire branch circuits and. multi -
wire A.C. circuits may be tapped from the ungrounded conductors of
circuits having identified grounded neutrals. Switching devices in such
circuits shall have a pole in each ungrounded conductor. Polyphase cir-
cuits having one conductor grounded shall have that grounded conductor
identified.
(f) Identification of Terminals. All devices provided with ter-
minals for the attachment of conductors and intended for connection
to more than one side of the circuit shall have the connecting'terminals
properly marked for identification, unless the electrical connection of
a terminal intended to be connected to the grounded conductor is clearly
evident,
(1) Attaehment-plug receptacles and attachment -plug
caps, one terminal of which is intended for connection to a
grounding conductor, shall have such terminal suitably
identified.
298 I l 1 AL RUATFONS Trr= I
ArtircM 17. Wiring In9ftll8ticn Deman tRogieftr K Ne.3-2.
(2) In the am of devices with screw the identifieil
terminal shall be the one connected to the st-rew ell. This does
not apply to screwle which serve as fusehoMers.
History,: 1. Ammdwest 5€rd 2-9-=; effiectwe h d2y tht ser (
ter 55.10.3).
SM. Brand; Circuits. (a) aengral. The provisions of this
order shall apply to branch eircuits supplyingor aPPUGM
leads, including motor -driven and electrically heated appliances or
eces-
hingtirms of such loads. A branch circuit shall be one of the types specified
in rho following gectiom4 except as provided in other sections of theie
adeas, or in Artie 8 for motors.
(b) aWgigificaflost. Branch circuits recognized by this article
shall be clandied in accordance with the maximum permitted rating or
setting of the overeurrent device, and the elassifications for other than
individual branch circuits shall be 15, 20, 30 and 50 amperes. when con-
duetva of larger' an are used to provide for voltage drop, the rating or
setting of the qweifted overeurrent device aMU determine the circuit
(e) 7[ulti v re Branch ChragiM Branch circuits recognized by
this article may be installed as muldwire eireuits. A multiwire branch
ekenit as referred to herein is a circuit co 'ng of two or utore
vonduciora having a tial difference between them,
!:;"
tis
overriia.3- lHa asi 13raae1l t reaila Artirie 15: Stale F,gai�eat Larca>D:aat
M I+esa. Artide
(d) Lbeltagm of Voltage of Lighting Chvuits. Alternating enr-
rent branch circuits anpplying lampholders, fixtures, or receptacles of
15 amperes or less rating shall not exceed 150 volts to ground, except (1)
the voltage may exceed 150 volts to ground. but shall not exceed 300 volts
to ground for branch circuits supplying lighting fixtures only that are
equipped either with screw lampholders or -ithlaulli
holders of other types approved for the application, mounted not less
throe sight feet from the fioor, which do not have switch control as an
integral part of the, ; (2) for infra -red heating appliances in ac'
cordanee with Order (a).
Direct current circuits supplying lighting shall not exceed 250 volts
between any two conductors nor 250 volts between any conductor and
(e) NgatrahNottoDelatercogusecte& where multi -wire braneb
eirruits we employed. tral conductor of each multi -wire bramb
eivenit shall be carried from the branch circuit distribution center to the
outlets and be connected to theneutrals; of any other circuit,
except at the aftibution camer.
Tura s DrnNM OF INDUSTRIAL SAFZVT 2"
(Ra lsUrSk NO. 3--2-19-55) Article 17. Wiring installation Design
(f) Conduckm Circuit conductors shall have a carrying Weo-
ity of not Jew than the rating of the branch circuit and not lea than the
maximum load to be served, except:
(1) 'raps to individual iamphoiders or fixtures, taps not
over 18 inches long to individual outlets, or taps to infra -red
lamp industrial beating appliances, may be of less Capacity than
the branch circuit rating; but not less than the load to be served,
and not smatter than No. 12 for 50 -ampere circuits and No. 14
for smaller circuits.
(2) Fixture wires and cords may be of smaller sirs, but not
less than Into. 18 for 15 -ampere and 20 -ampere eircuits; No. 14
for 30 -ampere circuits and No. 12 for 50 -ampere circuits. Fix-
ture wires and cords shall be of a sire not lea than that required
for the load to be served.
24M Fitteen4mpere Branch Cfrouits. (a) General. MUM
-
ampere branch circuits shall comply with the following:
(1) Conductors smaller than No. 14 shall not be used.
(2) Automatic overcurrent protective devices shall have a
rating or setting not exceeding 15 amperes.
(3) Such a circuit may supply lighting outlets, receptacle
outlets, or appliances, or any combination of such loads.
2414?. Tweni_y-ampere Branch Cireti ts. (a) tiensrsL Twenty -
ampere branch circuits shall comply with the following:
(1) Conductors smaller than No. 12 shall not be used.
(2) Automatic overcurrent protective devices shall have
a rating or setting not exuding 20 amperes.
(3) Such a circuit may supply fixed lighting, or applf-
ances, or any combination of such loads.
246& Thirty ampere Branch Cirenits. (a) tislaeral. Thirty -
ampere branch circuits shall comply with the following:
(1) Conductors smaller than No. 10 shall not be used.
(2) Automatic overeurrent protective devices shall have
a rating or setting not exceeding 30 amperes.
(3) Such a circuit may supply fixed lighting, or appli-
ances, or any combination of such loads. The rating of any one
portable appliance shall not exceed 24 amperes.
2469. Fifty-ampm Branch Circuits, (a) tienstal. Fifty4Mm
pere branch circuits shall comply with the following:
(1) Conductors smaller than No. 6 shall not be used,
(2) Automatic overeurrent protective devices shall bav*
a rating or setting not exceeding 50 amperes.
(3) Sueh a circuit shall supply only hazed lighting, infra-
red lamp heating devices and fixed appliances, or any combing
ti=au of such loads.
300 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS TTM a
Article 1& Working Space and Gwrdins (It"Tater M No. "-win)
2470. Heavy-duty Lan (a) GasnL
Heavy-duty lampholders as referred to in . include
base lampholders of the mogul type, and other lamphelding devises
required for lamps exceeding the maximum rating of the medium -base
lamp. Heavy-duty lampholder branch circuits shall eomply with the
Mowing:
(1) The conductors shall be of such sin as will be pro.
tested by the branch circuit overearrent protective devicea, but
in no ease less than No. 12.
(2) The branch circuit overeurrent protective device shall
have a rating or setting not exceeding 50 amperes.
(3) If the rating or setting of the overeurrent protelitin
deviceexceeds 20 amperes, sudr a err it shall supply only
mogul lampholders, mercury-vapor lamps, or other approved
heavy-duty type lampholders, except that lamphdders of the
medium base type approved for this use may be connected to
such a circuit where they are combined with me or sire
mercury-vapor lamps as integral parts of a single approved
lighting fixture.
History. 1. Repealer seg (5) filed 2.9.55; effective tUrtietb daytime -
after (Register 55, No. 3).
Article 18. Working Space and Guarding
96711. General Requirements. (a) Enclosing and Guarding Live
Parts. Live parts shall be enclosed, isolated or guarded to prevent
accidental contact by perms and objects.
(b) Workepsee About Eq t. Sufficient space shall be pro-
vided and maintained about electrical equipment to permit ready and
safe operation. Where parts require examination, adjustment, or repair
during operation or while live parts are exposed, adequate working space
shall be provided and maintained to permit this work being performed
safety. This workspace shall not be less than two and one-half feet, un-
less otherwise modified by speeifie conditions set forth in these orders.
(e) Entrance to Warkspacie. At least one entrance not lea than
24` inches wide and six and one-half feet high shall be provided to give
access to the working space about electrical equipment. On switchboard
and control panels exceeding 48 inches in width, there shall be one en-
trance at each end of such board where reasonably praeticabk Where
bare live parts at any voltage,or insulated live parts above 600 volts,
on bated adjacent to such entrance, they Shall be suitably guarded.
(d) Tabu of Working speoe. The minimum clear working space
about electrical equipment, such as switebboards, control panels and
T1TLZ 8 Divaimir or INDUSTRIAL SAM" 301
(iReaieter55, N4.3-2-11-55' Article 1& Working Space and Got"i"li
similar equipment, shall be not less than met forth in the following
table unless otherwise specified in these orders:
VORW to froma Conditions
A 8 C
0- 150 ---------- 21 feet 2} feet 3 fest
151-600 --- ____—._-------- 2f feet 3} feet 4 feet
001-2500 -----r----------- 3 feet 4 feet 5 feat
2501-7540 4 feet 5 feet $ fest,
ever 7500 _�--_ _--- _-- 5 feet 6 feet 9 feat
Where the conditions are as follows:
(A) Exposed live parts on one side and no live or grounded
parts on the other side of the working apace (insulated wire or
insulated bus bar conductors operating at not more than 300
volts shall not be considered live parts) or exposed fivepartson
both aides effectively guarded by suitable wood or other insulat-
ing materials.
(B) Exposed live parts on one aide and groundedon
the other side. Concrete, briek or tile walls will be eousi= as
grounded surfaces.
(C) Where there are switches, starters, control devices, or
panelboards mounted on the wall or grille directly back of live.
back switchboards; or where there are exposed live parts on both
sides which are not effectively guarded.
E1lxeptions for Switchboards and Control Panels. (1)
Working space will not be required back of assemblies of safety
type switches or dead -front switchboards or control panels when
there are no renewable or adjustable parts, ;such an fuses,
switches, eta., on the back, and when all connections are'acees-
sible from other locations than the back of the board.,
(2) When switchboards or control panels do not exceed
600 volt$ and are of a total width not more than 48 inches, the
minimum clear working space back of the board shall be 24
inches and there shall be an entrance, conforming to Order
2475-e, on each side to give access to such working space., This
exception permitting reduced working space shall not apply to
condition (C) of this table, or where more than one oil eireait-
breaker is mounted on the rear of such board.
(3) Where projections, such as column or pilasters not
more than two feet in width, extend into the working space
back of the switchboard or control panel, the clearance re-
quired by the Table of Working Space may be reduced not
more than 12 inches at such location; in which ease a guard
consisting of insulating material shall be placed over the li"
parts opposite such projections and shall extend not Use than
six inches on either side of the projection. This exception shall
apply only to boards or panels having a total width of more
than 48 inches, and shall not apply where switches, control
devices, or other equipment is installed an the wall or grille
directly beck of the board.
902 l ones rxsnt. 1.E 1 a aca�cs "3-,2 )
Article I& Working Space and Guarding (Register
(e) Working Space is !rant of Switddmr& and Control
the front of
In all cases where there are live y
exposed on switchboards or control panels, the working is front of
such boards
or panels shall be not leas than three feet. This order I not he con-
strued to prohibit the placing of switehes and control devices above
direct connected motor generator sets, above pumping units, or above
other machines, provided they are readily and safely a . -'ble and the
machines are guarded.
(f) pasuVvtqs and Open Spaft& Where the working space is
in a passageway or is part of a general open space where other work is
carried on during inspection, adjustment or repair of electrical installa-
tions or equipment, then the working e required by these orders shall
be suitably guarded or isolated by a fenee, partition, or screen, in such
manner as to prevent persons passing by, or persons performing other
work, from interfering with the inspection, adjustment or repair for
which the space is provided; and also to prevent such persons inad-
vertently coming into contact with, or bringing conducting material into
contact with, exposed live parts.
(g) separation FtOmHigh-patentsal3q ' Whenswitches,
outouts, or other equipment, operating at Sill} volts or less„ are installed
In a room or enclosure where there are exposed live parts or exposed
wiring operating at more than 600 volts, the low -potential equipment
shall be effectively separated from the space occupied by the high -
potential equipment by a suitable partition, fence, or screen.
Exoogtioa- Switches or other equipment operating at 604
volts or lees and searing only equipment within the high-voltage
vault, room or enclosure may be installed in the high-voltage
enclosure, room or vault if seeessu'ble to qualified persons only.
(h) Eaeloaing Cam of Insulating MeteriaL Where the guards
or enclosing cam are of a type which must be removed to gain access to
the galla guarded while such parts are alive, and are so constructed or
installed that they are liable to be brought into contact with live parts,
they shall be constructed of suitable insulating material.
(i) Opus In Onards. When guards or enclosing casings,
which are installed to prevent accidental contact with current -carrying
parts, are of a type which form other than a solid enclosure, the size of
the openings and their location with reference to the current-earrying
puts which they are intended to guard shall be such that persons are
not liable to come into accidental contact with such parts, or to bring con-
ducting objects into contact with them.
{ j) Fartitions, Sopam or Feng When live parts are protected
by guarding, suitable permanent substantial partitions, scream,
or fences, shall be provided and shall be arrangedthat qualified Per-
sons only may have seem to the space within reseb of the live parts.
Tr= 8 A o8 INDUSTRIAL Saarsrr ;o
(Rogister 5% No. 3- 8-119h55) Article i& Working Space and Guarding
The guarding shall be so arranged as to permit ready and safe
Ly qualified persons for operation or for making adjustm^nt or repaim
ltaiting shall not be used for guarding where such material as pipe or
metal bars are Handled in the vicinity and, in general, they will not be
approved for guarding equipment located in the work rooms of shops,
factories, or similar places, or for the guarding of equipment operating
at more than 600 volts, unless such equipment is at all times under the
observation of a qualified attendant. Where the voltage exceeds 600 volts,
permanent and conspicuous warning signs shall be provided, reading
substantially as follows.- "Danger -High -Voltage --Seep Out."
(k) Xechavield injury. Electrical equipment at any voltage, if
installed in locations where it would obviously be exposed to liability cf
mechanical injury, shall be suitably enclosed or guarded.
(1) Deteriorating Agencies. Suitable guards shall be provided
to protect electrical equipment when installed in any location where
dripping oil, excessive moisture, steam, vapors, or other injurious agents
exist, unless the equipment is designed for such condition.
(m) Signs. Warning signs shall be installed at the entrance to
all buildings, rooms or enclosures containing exposed live parts. These
signs shall be conspicuous and legible at a distance of 12 feet and shall
forbid unqualified persons to enter.
(n) Larked Rooms or Enclosures. The entrances to all buildings,
rooms or enclosures containing exposed live parts or conductors oper-
ating in excess of 64(1 volts shall be kept locked, except where such
entrances are at all times under the observation of a qualified attendant.
All loeks at entrances to, or exits from, buildings, rooms, or enelos ras
containing electrical equipment shall he of such types that they may be
readily opened from the inside of the enclosure without the use: of a key,
except where padlocks are used.
(o) Illumination. Adequate illumination shall be provided for all
working spaces about electrical equipment The light outlets shall be so
arranged that persons changing lamps or making repairs on the light-
ing system will not be endangered by live parts or other equipment. The
points of control shall be so located that perms are not liable to oosse
into contact with any live part or moving part of the equipment while
turning on the lights.
(p) Headroom. The minimum headroom above working spam
about switebboards or control boards, where there are live parts exposed
at any time shall be not less than six and one-half feet, provided that
for such boards operating at not over 600 volts, this headroom may be
reduced to six and one-quarter feet. Where equipment such as sign
transformers is located in accessible attics the headroom about equip-
ment requiring adjustment, repair or maintenance may be reduced to
three feet.
304 INMISTRIAL RZEATMM TIM e
Articte 14. Mines, Tunnels Under Construction er (Etegister W N6.3—g-16.M)
Repair and Similar Locations
(q) Elevation of Unguarded Kira Pasts. Unguarded live parts
above working space shall be maintained at elevations not less than that
required by the following table:
PelNye Aftwoum
47,509 -------------------- -- S Meet
over 7.500 --------- -- __ «—_____ sfsete "
History: 1. Amendment filed "_ -512; effective thirtieth day iter (Regis.
ter -08. No. 3).
2. Amendment SIQ 2955; etfeedso (Regm-
ter 55, No. 3).
Article 19, Mines, Tunnels Under Coonstruetion or Repair
and Similar Locations
2M. General. (a) Other Orders. The requirements of this
article shall be deemed to be additional to or amendatory of, those pre-
scribed in Articles 1 to 18, inclusive, of these arders.
(b) Explosive asses. Before installing or using any electrical
equipment in places containing methane gas or other explosive
the Division of Industrial Safety shall be advised of the actual condi-
tons and all installations and operations shall be made according to
specific orders to be issued by the Division for that particular location
(c) Guarding power and Lighting Conductors. All underground
Power ,and .lighting conductors shall be installed in a workmanlike
manner and shall be protected by location, or by guarding from liability
to damage from the nasal mining hasardle, or from aesidentai eontaet.
Cables shall be so placed or protected that they will not be liable to injury
by falling materials.
(d) Conductors. Metal - armored lead - sheathed or steel - taped
lead -sheathed cable, or lead -sheathed cable in acetal eonduit or pipe, or
other cable approved for use in mines and tunnels shall be used for all
high-voltage (over 600 volts) circuits. All low -vol (under 60 volts)
wiring, except for lighting; branch eireuits, shall be installed is
approved metal raceways with conductors having an insulation approved
for the nse and purpose; or it may be installed as specified in this order
for high-voltage wiring. Where laeceessery, type S cable or equiva eut may
be used to supply portable or movable low -voltage equipment.
(e) Lighting Chvuits. No underground lighting branch circuit
shall be operated at a voltage exeeeding 3W volts between any two eon-
ductors nor 150 volts from any conductor to ground where aueh circuit is
supplied by alternating eurrent. Where the ch circuits are supplied
by direct eurrent, the voltage between any two conductors and from VW
conductor to ground shall not exceed volts. I4hting branch circuits
installed as open wirings shall be supported on noneombu9tible. 111661,
rJor arot ice insulators and as far a% Possible to one side of the track walk-
way. Where daug;cr exit, a,f ae id,%taal a•tantaci uiih exl a1 wires of
TMMR a v of INDus'rajAL SAFwy 305
(Resioter5%No. 3--2-t9- ) Article 19. Mines Under Construction or
Repair and Similar Locations
lighting; branch circuits, the wiring shall be guarded. Danger of wei-
dental contact shall be asNumed to exist wherever unguardenl conductors
are located within eight feet vertically or five feet horizontally of a
walkway, track, or a fixed ladder.
(f j TrSISdonnem Transformers shall be installed in accordance
with Article 9 of the orders.
(g) Tf'olley Wires Vu&rgrouud. Trolley wires shall be supplied
with digest current, the voltage of which shall not exceed. 300 volts. The
contact conductors shall be of hard drawn copper or other approved
material not less than No. 0, and shall he securely supported on approved
hangers. Open, unguarded trolley wires shall be placed not less thae
nine feet above the track, or not less than six inches outside of the rail
and not less than seven feet above the rail. They shall be placed higher
than the distances above specified where possible, and shall be installed
on the side of the track opposite from shelter holes or traveling way.
Trolley wires within eight feet horizontally of the sides of ladders or of
chutes or platforms shall be of the enclosed type or guarded by noncon-
duetiug -ruards on both sides of tite troller for at least four inches above
and four inches below the wire at the lowest point of sag. The sag be.
tween supports of the trolley wire shall not exceed three inches. The
{cased-, shall be so installed and maintained that they will not come into
eontaaet with the trOley wires and so that the opening between their
lower edges does not exceed six inches on curves or four inches on
tangents.
(h) Trolley Wires Above Ground. Trolley wires outside of under-
ground workings shall be substantially supported and so maintained 86
to provide a minimum clearance above the track in accordance with the
following table:
Location, .1704 t
Public thoroughfares -------------------------------------- 19 feet
Driveways ---------------------------------------------- 16 feet
Space a to pedestrians only--------------------------- 9 feet
Trolley wires shall be guarded where there is probability of percent
or tools, or conducting materials coming into contact with them.
(i) Third RaHL Third rail systems shall not be installed under.
ground.
(j) Grounding and Bonding. All noneurrent-carrying metal
Parts of electrical evluiptnent shall he permanently and effeetively
•rounded to conform to Article 7. Where a grounded return system is
used. all metal pipes awl rails in the tunnel shall be effectively bonded
torpether at intervals not exceeding 500 feet. At a point outside of the
shaft, trine, or tunnel not more than 500 feet from the first bond within
the teuanel, then shall be etieetively bonded together and grounded. The
s-92363
Tnu
306 IxousratAaa liza sTuox ( 8
Rsgiahr� No." -"
Article 2R Cranes and Hoists
tracks of all main haulage systems using the rails as the return
on a direct current system shall be bonded at every rad j0 a the
joints are gelded, and eross bonding between rails shall
on shall be made fPlaced or
intervals not exceeding 20e feet. Special openings in the track so a to
bonding around all switches, frogs,
insure a continuous return.
Article 20. Cranes and hoists
2466. tfeneral. (a) Scope. The provisions of this article "
apply to the installation of cram, crane runways, hoists and
(b) Other Orders. The requirements of this article shall be
deemed to be additional to, or amendatory of, those prescribed in Arti-
cles 1 to 18 inclusive, of these ordeal.
WIRING
2486. Type of Conductors. (a) Type of Imuktim Conductors
shall be of the rubber -covered or theimoplastic 4Pea, except:
(1) Conductors exposed to severe external heat, and thea°
between resistors and contact plates, if not exposed o Or� M
shall be asbestos insulated (Types the
temperature does not exceed 90° C. (194° F.), slow4mrning
(Type SB). Conductors exposed to moisture shall be rubber -
covered or Type AVIS. If rubber-eorered conductors are
grouped, the group shall be taped with a flame -proof eoverin&
(2) Contact conductors along runways, crane briers and
monorails shall be effectively isolated or effectively guarded.
(See Order 2489.) These contact conductors may be of hard -
drawn copper wire, copper, aluminum, steel or any alloys thereof
in the form of tees, angles, tee rails, or other stiff shapes. Con-
ductors of suitable enclosed type may be used in Iien of guarded
bare conductors. SO or equivalent MY(3) Flexible conductors, Types S,
be used to convey current. Cable reels, take-up devices or other
suitable means for supporting the flexible conductors may be
employed.
(4) Varnished-esonbrie conductors (Type V) or aalietoa
varnished cambric (Type AVA and AVB) may be used in dry
locations.
Trm S Divulsom or IaeausreuL Sauer: W7
(Register 66, No. s—z-is-ss) Article 20. Cranes and Holm
2W. Conductor Sim. (a) Current -carrying Capacity. The
allowable current -carrying capacities of conductors shall be an follows:
Current -carrying Capacities of Conductors Having Rubber or Thermoplastic
Insulation Which Supply Crane and Hoist Motors
Amperes
Bias Far motors having per motes ]raving
AW9 119- sad 60-miaate 5- and Is-ashm"
XCY slorFtimsraticps short-NmerstLNs
16------'------------------- 10
11
14--------------------------- 20
22
12------------------------ ffi
28
10--_--------------------- 35
39
8_ ----- --------------------- 45
so
6--------------------------- 57
as
5------------------------- as
72
4-------------------------- 77
as
3---------------------------- 90
as
2------------------------- 107
118
1------------------------ 130
1434
0------------------------__ 10e
176
oo_�—__----____------- 195
215
000------------------------- 245
270
0000 ----- ----------- — --- --- 300
�
250—_-_— ----------- —----- --- 350
300-------------------------- ',tic
450
350_-------- --------------- 4eo
510
515
No
450---------------------- 565
fte
rrn --------- -------- 620
vee
(b) Minimum Sire. Conductors shall be not smaller than No. 14
except on fractional horsepower cranes and hoists, (1) No. 16 Type S
cord or equivalent may be used if properly supported and protected
against mechanical injury, or (2) No. 16 may be used provided the con -
doctors are protected against mechanical injury by being installed in
metal raceway.
(c) Size of Wire Contact Conductors. The size of contact wig
shall be not leas than the following:
Distance bet re-ra end Hinz N
acre" issulaters Wire
0-30 feet -----___— --- --- ------ ---------- ------------ Bo. 4
U -Meet--____------- _ ---Ne- 4
oyer 00 feet ----- -------- -------------- ----- --- --die 2
248& Wiring Method. (a) Enclosing Wires. Conductors other
than contact conductors and except wires between resistor SWUM °heli
be installed in metal raceway.
(b) Open Conductors. Short lengths of open conductors at re-
sistors and collectors need not be enclosed.
(e) Flexible Connections. Where flexible connections are neees-
sary to motors and other equipment, flexible metal conduit, armored
cable, or multiple rmiductor rubber -covered cable may be employed.
3U8 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS
Article 20. Cranes and Hoistst�S Ka �t
(d) Pendent Push-button
cable is used with a suspended push-button station, the elation dAle
supported in some satisfactory manner that will protect ties aanrW
conductors against strain.
(e) Conduit Fittings. Where man than four coodnctua d
crane and hoist circuits leave conduit or electrical metallie tuft a
approved bushing of metal or insulating material haTing a
for all conductors may be used. The conductors 9W be
and painted with insulating paint. The
nate as close to the wire terminal& as convenience in hasift Il
permit.
(f) Common -return. if a crane or hoist is operated bysiontlen
one motor, a common -return conductor of Proper sarreai a O* %
pacity may be used.
CONTACT CONDUCTORS
5489. Installation of Contact Cox (a) Bare tltaa
All bare ungrounded contact cm►d
in 6*8
become effective shall be effeetively dated or effectively PRAW
if
barriers or by enclosures of suitable material ar approved a
lid
persons may not come into accidental coutnet with them Or kieg tae
ducting material into contact with them.
Pe
No person other than qualified person shall 'be
overhead of buildings where personal danger exists became Of "VOW
bare contact conductors, unless the switch cont
conductors is locked in the open position -
Where
Where contact conductors are located outside Of buildings
mammae
clearances as prescribed by the Californk Pine liter do not �tst>R
Rules for Overhead Dine Coustruction, such
are such that
guarded; Provided, however, if the opera material in Pene" on
's
either come into contact or bring eonducti�
the eonduetors, the Division may require effective
When an installation madeto the effective date si tl�
is found to be hazardous, such tallation, or Put them mil IK
required to be reconstructed as the Division of Industrial Sdoy
msf
direct.
(b) Contact Wires. moires used as contact e "be
secured at the ends by means of approved strain i
nsulatom 71 vim
shall he so mounted on approved insulators that the
extreme
one aud maw
displacement of any wire will not bring it within
inebes of the guard ar the sur€aee wired over.
mak em,
(c? Supports Along Crane Runways. Sires � as
to °t ca,nclllctors and earrk l slam, run `s shall be supper
snlsltillg sllplseart$ lmiadekl at intcrvsls;ot exceed ng
20 feet >a
duelOI-s shall be sel,arata al I4a�t less than SiS inches exrtiimy be V
hoi.tc where= s �l�aa i � Of r`,`t less than three inches c be .
tHa'x°a . •fist'. °st to 4 il: l ae-x'x n I3 t=t1�tln, supportsnerefified 1111"n'
to -V) tea°t. the
s�^ljar ba=il l'etae a ndltetors being,
t iollately,
a
�si s Dmsm OF IvtussTalAL S 1F1;Ty 309
(Register 555. No. 93--9-3.555) Article 20. Cranes and Hoists
(d) supports an Bridges. Ilridge contact wires shalt be kept at
least two and one-half inches apart and, if the span exceeds 80 feet,
insulating saddles shall be placed at intervals not exceeding 50 feet.
(e) Supports for Rigid Conductors. Conductors along runways
and crane bridges, if of the rigid type specified in Order 2486, shall be
carried on insulating supports spaced at intervals of not more than 80
times the vertical dimension of the conductor but in no case greater than
15 feet. Such conductors shall be spaced apart sufficiently to provide a
clear electrical separation of conductors or adjacent collectors of not less
than 1 inch.
(f) Track as Circuit Conductor. Monorail, tramrail or crane -
runway tracks may be used as a conductor of current for one conductor
of a single-phase, or one phase of a three-phase alternating-eurrent sys-
tem furnishing power to the carrier, crane or trolley, provided the follow-
ing conditions are fulfilled
(1) All sections of track shall be effectively bonded to pro.
Tide a continuous electrical connection.
(2) The power for all phases shall be obtained from an
insulating transformer.
(3) The voltage shall not exceed 300 volts.
(4) The conductor supplying the rail serving as a eondue-
tor shall be effectively grounded at the transformer.
(g) Electrical Continuity of Contact Conductors. All sections of
bare rigid contact conductors shall be mechanically joined to provide a
continuous electrical connection.
(h) Contact Conductors Not to Supply Other Equipment. Con-
tact conductors shall not be used to supply any equipment other than the
crane or cranes which they are primarily designed to serve.
History: 1. Amendment Sled 4-24-52; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Regis-
ter 28,N o. 8)-
2490, Collectors. (a) Sparking. Collectors shall be so designed
as to reduce to a minimum the sparking between them and the contact
conductor.
2491. Disconnecting Means. (a) Crane Runway Conductors.
A disconnecting means shall be provided between the runway contact
conductors and the power supply. Such diseonneeting means shall con-
sist of a motor -circuit switch or circuit breaker. This disconnecting
means shall be located in a readily and safely accessible place where the
center of the grip of the operating lever will be not more than six and
one-half feet above the floor or ground. The disconnecting means shall
be arranged to be locked in the open position, shall open all ungrounded
conductors simultaneously, and shall he placed within sight of the crane
or hoist and the runway eoutaet eoauluetors.
310 I:aAUBTRIAr. Rtn,A NS ?MR I
Article SL Cron" and Hoiab (Resimbw 14 No.
(b) Cab or Cage Opm'ated Cram& Wherecranesare oliffoled
from cabs'a ekeuit-breaker or an externally Operable switch, S111111ble
of interrupting the circuit under maximum loads, and resdilly cm
trolled by the operator, ahall be provided in the leads from the man
collector wires.
(o) gaup• of Diflionnecting Spons for Crones. On bath alter
natingenrrentanddirect-current crane 'vtt the
ampere rating of the switch or eirelrit b leg Oxy 2491(6),
:tend main line �ntaetora shall be not 2 than 50 percent of the acro
'.biped short-time ampere ratings of the noises, n� lase than i5 pereeat
of t3� sum of ,the abort-tip ampere ratings of the required fie
any single crane motion.
2192. Floor Operated Crates Controls. The controller or eco-
Wim for floor operated cranes shall automatically return to the "off"
position when the control button, lever: or rope is released by the ogle`
ator.'This shall not apply to preset or automatically controlled eruRs.
249L Limit 8w&k Each hoist motor shall be equipped with
an effective enclosed type limit switeb, so placed and arranged as to
disconnect the motor and apply the brake in time to stop the motor before
the book'psseea the highest point of safe travel. The limit switch
preferably be operated directly from the hook or block.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
1490. Masi Conductors. The main contact conductors shall
be protected by anovercurrent device.
UK Cram Maters. Where more than one motor is employed
on a crane, each motor shall have its individual: automatic overeurreat,
in accordance with the provisions of Articles 6 and 8 of those
ordsl,s; provided, however, that where two motors operate a single hoist,
earriage, track or bridge and are controlled as a unit by one controller,
thepair of motors with their leads mag be protected by a single auto
matie overcurrent protective device. Only one safety type switch of
eircult breaker will be required in the bridge cage or in the trouk9
aims to`'diseannect the protective device for all of the motor circaita
Iadividnal switches will not be required ahead of each cutout.
2M door Operated Cralsm Individual protection for each
motor on a floor controlled crape or monorail shall be provided
satomatically resetting overlo ssl relays.
Mittery: 1, Amendment and ; *een" thirtieth day thereafter (Bella'
ter 55. No. 3).
GUARDING AND GROUNDING
27. If a eraue operates over reeft
combustible material, the resistors shall be placed in a well-vemtilli"d
sabinst emposed of noncombustible material so constructed �tit *ill
lu�
ant emit or molten , a where the
TITLE a Dlvtstox OF Ixousrauu. SA€L-TT 311
(R"toter, 55, No. 3-2-19-55) Article 21. Elevators, Dumbwaiters and Escalates
in a eage or cab constructed of noncombustible material which encloses
the sides of the cage or cab from the floor to a point at least six inches
above the top of the resistors.
2498, Grounding. ,Motor frames, tracks, the entire frame of a
erane or hoist, and cases of controllers shall be grounded in the manner
specified in Article T of these orders.
Article 21. Elevators, Dumbwaiters and Escalators
2503. General. (a) Other Orders. The requirements of this
article shall be deemed to be additional to, or amendatory of, those pre-
scribed in Articles 1 to 18, inclusive, of these orders.
(b) Voltage Limitations. The nominal voltage used for elevator,
dumbwaiter or escalator operating control and signal circuits, operating
equipment, driving machine motors, machine brakes, and motor -gener-
ator sets shall not .exceed the following:
(1) For operating control and signal circuits and related
equipment including door operator motors: 300 volts except
that higher potentials may be used for alternating current or
for direct current provided the current in the system cannot,
under any conditions, exceed 8 :milliamperes for alternating
current or 30 milliamperes for direct current.
(2) Driving* machine motors, machine brakes, and motor -
generator sets: 600 volts, except that higher potentials may
be used for driving motors of motor -generator sets.
History: 1. An.eadment filed 2-9-0; effective thirtieth day thereafter (1%ia,
ter 55, No. 3).
2500 Live Parts. (a) Enclosing slid Guarding Live Parts. All
live parts of electrical apparatus in the hoist -ways, at the landings, or
in or on the cars of elevators and dumbwaiters, or in the wellways, or
the landings of escalators, shall be enclosed to protect against acci-
dental contact.
History: 1. Amendment filed 2-9-55; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Regis-
ter 5s., No. 3).
2505. Conductors and Cables. (a) Insulation. The insulation
of conductors installed in connection with elevators, dumbwaiters, or
escalators shall comply with the following:
(1) Control Panel Wiring. Conductors from panels to
main circuit resistors shall be flame-retardant and suitable
fora temperature of not less than 90° C. (131° F.). All other
wiring on control panels shall be flame-retardant and moisture
resistant.
(2) Traveling Cables. Traveling cables used as flexible
connections between the elevator or dumbwaiter car and the
raceway shall be Type E, EO or ET elevator table, or other
313 I itaar' TNN IT= g
Article t1. Ei+vaters, Qwnla vak- atm ( K ales 3--t "
approved type: and shall have retardant moistar,
resistant outer Cover.
(3) Other Wiring. All wiring in the raceways and in
or on the cars of elevators and dumbwaiters, and in the well -
ways of escalators and in the machine room of eleeat0m
dumbwaiters and escalators, shall be t and
moisture resistant.
(4) Thickness of Ifisulaticis. The thickness of the
isan-
lation of all wiring shall be suitable for the voltage to whki
the wiring 1.s subjeeted.
(b) Minimum Size of Conductors. The minimum size of eondue.
tors used for elevator, dumbwaiter and escalator wiring, except for
conductors which form an integral part of control equipment shall be
as follows:
(1) Traveling Cables
(A) For lighting circuits: No. 14
(B) Operating control and signal circuits: NO. 30
(2) Other Wiring
.All operating control and signal circuits: No. 20
(c) Wiring Method. All conductors located in hoistways and in
escalator wellways, in or on cars and in machine and control roams,
not including the traveling cables connecting the car and ho6atway
wiring, shall be installed in rigid conduit. electrical metallic tubing,
mineral insulated -metal sheathed cable or metal wirewatys,. subject to
the following exceptions:
(1) Flexible conduit or armored cable may be used in
hoistways and in escalator wellwaysv between risers and limit
switches, interlocks, operating buttons and similar devices.
(2) Short runs of flexible conduit or armored cable may
be used on ears if so located as to be kept free from oil and if
securely fastened in place.
(3) Type S, SO or ST cord may be used as flexible con-
nection; between the fixed wiring on the car and the switehn
on ear doors or gates.
(4) Conductors between control panels and machine
motors, machine brakes and motor -generator sets, not exceed-
ing six feet in length, may be grouped together and taped or
corded without being installed in a rne*w y provided the
taping or cording is pointed with an insulating paint. When
so installed, the cable groups stall be supported at inter
of not more than three feet and so located as to be free from
meebanical da
Where motor generators and hin- motors are lo'
Bated adjacent to or underneath control equipment and ars
provided with extra length terssund leads, not exceeding 92
TITLIK a Divisiox ov INDUSTRIAL SAFETY 313
(Roaiew Sy, Me. 3-2-12-55) Article 21. Elevators, Dumbwaiter& and Escalators
feat ill 1,11g, b, such leads may be extended to connect directly
140 ,-01111v01ler ?erinin tl scuds without regard to the carrying
raluo-ity of Article S.
t5) Auxiliary gutters may be used in machine and con
-
troi rooms between controllers, starters and similar apparatus.
ilixiv+g: 1..%Imndn`*'to chat'.0:«i; effcrtire thirtieth iiag thereafter tit"is-
ter 55, -No. 3a.
25W Ingtallafiest of Conductors. (a) Conduit Fittings. Where
more than four eonductors of elevator circuits leave conduit or electrical
metallic tubing, an approved bushing of metal or insulating material
having at single hole for all con+i,xtors may be used. The conductors shall
be buncbea, taped, and painted with insulating paint. The conduit or
tubing shsll terminate its close to the wire terminals as convenience in
haudling will peri it, bitt in no ease shall t lie conduit or tubing terminate
less than 6 il;ches futon the floor.
(b) MeW Wireways. The sum of the cross-sectional areas of
all contained elevator circuit conductors at any cross section of a wire -
.way shall not exceed 5) percent of the interior cross-sectional area of
the wireway.
(c) Number of Conductors in Other Raceways. The number of
conductors installed it% a raceway other than a wireway for elevator
:tlteratinz and contt'eil circuits may be in accordance with Table 5.
(d) Supports. Supports for conductor raceways in the hoist
way or escalator wellway shall be securely fastened to the guide rail or
to the hoistway or wellway construction.
(e) Different Systema in One Cable or Raceway. Conductors
for operating, control, power and signal circuits of 600 volts or left
may be run in the same traveling cable or raceway system, provided
that all conductors are insulated for the maximum voltage found in the
cable or raceway system, and all live parts of the equipment are insu-
lated from ground for this maximum voltage. Such a traveling cable or
raceway may also include a pair of telephone conductors for the car
telephone, provided such conductors are insulated for the msaimum
voltage found in the cable or raceway system.
Conductors of different systems entering terminal enclosures shall
be separated by barriers rigidly fastened in place so that conductors of
the different s.%stems cannot come into contact with each other.
(f) Foreign Wires. No electrical conduits or cable, except the"
used to furnish or control power, light, heat or signals for the elevator
or hoistways, shall be installed in the elevator hoistway.
(g) Suspension of Traveling Cables. Traveling cables shall be
so suspended at the car and hoistway end as to reduce the strain on
the individual copper conductors to a minimum.
Cables exceeding 100 feet in length and having steel supporting
fillers shall be suspended directly by the steel supporting iilIaM
314 Not7wroAL llYr,ATw--cs TITLE a
Artlele 21. Elevates, Dumbwaiters and Escalators (ftetpisterK me.3-2.ts.1$1
Where nonmetallic fillers are used, the cables shall be suspended
by looping the cables around the supports -
(h) Hasardolis Locations. In hazardous Dations„ traveling
cables shall be secured to explosion -proof cabinets by heavy duty
rubber -bushed threaded connector bushings sealed off at the enclosure
as provided in Order 2515(2).
(i) Protection for Swinging Cables. Traveling cable supports
shall be so located as to reduce to a minimum the possibility of damage
due to the cables coming in contact with the hoistway construction or
equipment in the hoistway. Where weessary, suitable guards shall be
provided to protect the cables against damage.
aiatery: 1. Amendment aced 24-55; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Regis,
ter 55, \o. 3).
2W7. Switches. (a) Power Disconnecting Means. A manually
and externally operable motor-eircuit switch or eireuit breaker for dis-
connecting all ungrounded leads to the motor and control equipment dM
be installed in the circuit to each electrically controlled elevator
machine and shall comply with the following:
(1) This disconnecting means shall be visible from the
elevator machine, in a readily and safely aceeWble location,
with the operating handle not more than six and one-half feet
from the floor, and shall be of a type which may be lacked in
the Open position.
(2) No provision shall be made to close this di9o011necths9
meatus from any other part of the building
(3) This order shall be interpreted to apply to the switch
or eireuit breaker in the circuit supplying the motor which
drives the generator, where the elevator is controlled by on -
trolling the field of a generator.
(4) Where the motor disconnecting means is not witkm
sight of the motor -generator, elevator control panel, and the
elevator cage motor, an additional manually operable diseW
neeting means shall be installed at each location.
:iota: A lockout type stop button in the control circuit will be accW-
able is lieu of the disconnect switch at the elevator Cage .
(5) If practicable and in compliance with the above, the
disconnecting means shall be located adjacent to the doe of
the machine room or endostire.
(b) Lighting Control Switch. The les_hling eontrol switch for the
machine room or enelosetre shall be reaclila- and safely a-e-ible on the
wall within IS ineht-� of the lock- siat, of the 610 or and shall be of the ex-
ternally operable type,
for Machine Room or Enclosure. (a) Gl
ZqKIPMOKL Elevator, dumbwaiter and escalator drivind.t machine,
motor -generator +yet«, Nmtrollers and auxiliary eontrol equipment
IT= a Division or Ixuus:rarax, S3AMTY 315
(gee as, Na3-2-W55) Article 21. Elevators, Durabwaitara and Eaoalaten
be installed in a room or space sat aside for that purpose, by means of
an enclosure or wire grille or the like, to prevent acc*dental eontaet
by persons or objects room or enclosure may also contain other
machinery used for the control and signaling of the elevator.
(b) Clearame Around Grouped Control Panels. If a group of
three or more elevator -control panels having wiring on the rear is located
in a single machine room, there shall be a working space of at leas 36
inches back of the live parts, and not less than 18 inches on at least one
end of the group. There shall also be at least 36 inches of working space
in front of the panels.
(c) Clearance Around dingle or Double Control Panels. An
installation consisting of one or two panels having wiring on the rear
shall have at least 24 inches working space back of the live parts, and at
least 36 inches working space in front of the panel or panels; and there
shall be at least 1S inches working space at one end of each panel. Where
control panels have parts or equipment mounted on the rear and require
adjustment, examination or repair during operation or while live parts
are exposed, there shall be at least 36 inches working spam back of the
live parts.
This order in not intended to prohibit inventing the controller OR the saad dss%
enclosing the rear of control, pantie in rema3ns removable cabinets, nor the of aes0iaey
equipment in front or rear of central panels, provided the working; span IS not
rest.icttcj if such ramneft are installed, the prescribed dineassions of dear eases appig
when the bath of the cabinet is removed.
Histery: 1. Amendment sled 2-8-M; epeative thirtieth day thereafter (ilei
later 53. No. 3).
3508. Grounding. (a) Metal 8soeways Attached to Cars. Oon-
duit or armored cable attached to elevator cars shall be bonded to
grounded metal parts of the car with which they come in mated.
(b) Electric Elevators. For electric elevators, the frames of all
motors, elevator machines, controllers and the metal encloslim for all
electrical device in or on the car or in the hoistway shall be grounded.
(e) lion electric Elevators. For elevators other than electric, if
any electrical conductors are attached to the car, the metal frame of the
ear, if normally accessible to persons, shall be grounded.
(d) Sand -operated Cable. All hand -operated metallic shipper
ropes or cables shall be grounded.
(e) ((rounding to Building Frames. Equipment mounted on
members of the structural metal frame of a building, shall be deemed to
be grounded. Metal car frames supported by metal hoisting ebb%
attached to or running over sheaves or drums of elevator machines shall
be deemed to be grounded when the machine is grounded in accordance
with Article 9 of these orders.
316 INimsTlttAr. ltELATrov-s 7ma a
Article 22. Hazardous Locations ( MRo-3—t-"
2510. Power Rectifiers, Where metailie rectifiers or other typea
of rectifiers, which are incapable of absorbing, electric energy, are
used to transform alternating current to direet current for the opera
tion of a direct current elevator motor or motors, means shall be pw
vided on each elevator controller to absorb a sufficient amount of energy
regenerated by the elevator motor or motors under overhauling lead
conditions, to prevent any elevator from attaining at any time a speed
of more than 125 percent of its rated speed (speed in the up direction
with rated load in the car).
History: 1. New section Sled 2-9-55; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Aw
later 55, No. 3)•
Article 22. Hazardous Locations
3514. t#eneral. (a) Other Orders. The requirements of this
article shall be deemed to be additional to, or amendatory of, those pn-
scribed in Articles 1 to 18, inclusive, of these orders.
(b) Scope. The provisions of this article shall apply to loeatises
in which the apparatus and wiring are subject to the conditions indiait
by the following elassifications. Where the apparatus and wiring are
installed in rooms or sections of the building in which the partieular
hazardous conditions do not prevail, such wiring and apparatus may be
of the type approved for such locations.
Enclosed areas supplied with positive pressure ventilation frac a
nonhazardous source may be classed as nonhazardous areas for the
purposes of this Article 22. Wiring and apparatus within this area
be so arranged to prevent energizing the wiring and apparatus until
ventilation has been established, and arranged to automatically de-Ma-
gize the wiring and apparatus when the ventilation fails. Provided bm
ever, that where the process is such that a hazard would result frons
de -energizing wiring and apparatus, ventilation may be assured in tbb
arm through a separate source of supply for the ventilating equipimIL
Suitable devices shall be provided to automatically transfer from the>
mal supply to the emergency system in ease of failure or damage to 11111
normal supply. Audible and visual, signal devices shall be provided,
where possible, to give warning of derangement of emergency supply
system.
Location where open flames are ordinarily used will .anally rot be
considered as being hazardous under tit is article.
(e) Class I Locations. Class l locations are those enclosed seas
in which flammable volatile liquids, gases, vapors or mixtures an W
may be present in the air in quantities sufficient to produce MW"
or ignitable mixtures.
Enclosed areas in connection with glass I hazardous location% see
roofed areas having at least three walls, or open sumps or pits iota
which highly volatile liquids are run, or areas surrounded by buildbW
or firewalls, in which explosive vapors may accumulate. For large, 'reds'
ventilated rooms, the liazanlous arta :,hall not be deemed to eittad
TrMS a Divisfox of It VII-STalAL SAFETY 317
(Ryister 55, No.+3-1-119-55) Artiete 32. Hazardous Locations
more than 25 feet beyond a source of infrequent hazard, such as a pump
handling flammable liquids.
For the purpose of theme orders a flammable volatile liquid shall
be one having a flash point lower than 80° F. as determined by the
Tagliabue open cup method.
Cities I locations shall include the following:
(1) tineas I, Division L Locations where flammable vola.
the liquids, gases, vapors or mixtures and other highly flam-
mable substances are manufactured, processed, used, handled
in open containers, discharged into the air, in quantities suffi-
cient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures, or are stored in
such a way that a hazardous condition may continuously, or
frequently east in the atmosphere; interiors of spray booths
and areas in the vicinity of spraying and painting operations
where flammable volatile solvents are used.
See California Administrative Code. Title 10, Article 50 for electrical
requirements of the State Fire Marshal for safety in hospital operating
rooms.
(2) Gass I, Division 2. Locations in which flammable
volatile liquids or flammable gases are manufactured, processed,
used, or handled, but in which the hazardous liquids, vapors or
gases will normally be confined within closed containers or
closed from which they can escape only in case of
accidental rupture or breakdown of such containers or systems,
or in case of abnormal operation of equipment.
piping without valves, checks, meters and similar devices would
not ordinarily be deemed to introduce a hazardous condition even though
used for hazardous liquids or gases. fAcations used for the storage of
flammable liquids or of liquefied or compressed gases in sealed containers
or closed systema would not normally be considered hazardous unless
subject to other hazardous conditions.
The area and all equipment thereon within the distances
specified in this order shall he considered as Class I, Division 2
locations and shall comply with the requirements for Class I,
Division 2 loeations:
(A) An area within 25 feet of the well casing of all
producing wells; in oil fields or producing zones of oil
fields, having a gas pressure sufficient to cause the well to
flow or cause gas to be liberated to the atmosphere in quanti-
ties to create a hazard to employees should such h'berated
gas become ignited; wells into whieh gas is being injected;
or producing gas wells.
(B) An area within 50 feet of the easing of all oil wells
in the process of drilling.
(d) Class n Locations. Class 11 locations are those enelosed areas
whieh are hazardous because of the presenee of eowbustible dust. Ent'hwed
areas, in connection with Class Il locations, are roofed areas having at
818 IxutrSTater. Rs'r.e1 WNW TMX 8
Artists 92. Hazardous Lssstistw ( 5k m*w3-.2.
least three walls, or open pita in which combustibled or
generate, or areas surroturded by buil ' or bre in Which c"
bustible dusts generate or accumulate. For large well ventilated
the hazardous ares shall not be to extend more than 25 fess
beyond a source oftnfregnent II locations shun
following.
(1) Class IL Division L Locations (1) in which
tibia dust is or may be is suspension in the air confluallsoly,
intermittently, or periodically operating
tions, in quantities sufficient to produce explasive or igeitilk
mixtures, (2) in which duds of an electrically conducting
nature may be present in quantities sufficient to prodage
esxpltleive or ignitable mixtures.
This classification may madam: (1) the working ares at grain
handling and storage pleats. (2) room containing grinders or
loners, graders, scalpers. open noveYwo Or SPOUM Open him or IMPPM
when or blendem automatic or hopper seeks. packuw devater
hada and boots, stead: teas, a4 (escept air
metal colleetors vented to the .suable). and all similar dust prodmin
machinery and equipment in gram processing plants, starch gdaste, ager
pslverlsing plants. malting gats. hay grinding punts. and other "M
panda ofAngaroaten; (3) eeat pulverizing planta (except when the pol-
v equipment Is eased&* -tight) . (4) all working arcs wise
metal dada and powders an paefted or dud
(except in tight eantaima); (5) and all other similar locations what
combustible dust ma under normal operstiag conditions, be in Is
the air In quantities stifildent to produce explosive or i guitible ndrhuW
ble dusts which are electricalCv neecoadveRag will ladlde
dna produced in the handling and processing of grain and grail
pulverised splen, starch a potato and wood dower. polveshol
sugar and cocoa, dried egg and milk powders, oil meal from, baus ani
seek dried hay. aed other organa a materials which my Pradom eeada
tible dusts when processed or handled. Meeb-Acally
dusts will iadude dusts from pulverized roil. coke and chareoaL Metallic
dusts from magnesium, aluminum and aliumamn breave are ParbEdub
bmaidasn, and every precaution must be taken to avoid *Ritim and
(2) Chea IL Division 2. Locations in which eom
dust will not normally be in suspension in the air, or will trot
be b'kely to be thrown into suspension by the normal or abnorod
operation or the hiture of equipment or apparatus, in quantilm
sullefint, to produce explosive or ignitible mixtures, but (1)
where deposits or aeammnlationa of web dust may be
to interfere with the safe dissipation of heat frena dedrilld
equipment or apparatus, or (2) where such deposits or
aeouns-
latiom of dust on, in or in the vicinity of electrical
might be igufted by ares, sparks or burning materials from As*
equhmmo-
Locations where doeserece, concentrationswWU
art be IdWy. but arbere dust acrumichitlain might form on. In Or Is do
of electrical fOs only dosed ting �and ensh eyom dead bins my include ( on end areas
TTii7aE s DMMM OF INUMMIAL SeFrry 819
(RNisterM No. 3-2-19-55) Article 2Y. Hazardous Locations
and equipment from whieh apprteiable quantities of dust would escape only
sender abnormal operating conditions; (2) rooms or areas adjacent to
Class It. 1)icisiuou 1 locations, and into which explosive or igneitible con.
centratious of sus; 'Jun might be communicated only under abnormal
Operating conditions; (3) roome or areas where the formation of explosive
Or Iguitible 0011ventratiOns of suspended dust is prevented by the operation
of effective dust contra! equipment; (4) warehouses and shipping rooms
Where dust producing materials are stored or handled only in bags or
containers; (5) and ,4her similar locations.
(e) Clues III Locations. Class III locations are those enclosed
areas which are hazardous because of the presence of easily ignitible fibers
or flyings, but in which such fibers or flyings are not likely to be in sus-
pension in air in quantities sufficient to produce ignitible mixtures.
Enclosed areas in connection with Clam III locations are roofed areas
having st least three walls or pits wherein easily ignitible fibers or flyings
accumulate or generate. Class III locations shall include the following:
(1) Class III, Division 1. Locations in which easily
ignitible fibers or materials producing combustible flyings are
handled, manufactured or used.
Such locations may include (1) some parts of rayon, cotton and oto
textile mile; combustible fiber manufacturing and processing planta; cotton
sine and rattan -seed mills; (2) than processing planta; (3) and establ6a-
ments and industries involving similar hazardous processes or conditions.
(2) Cit- III, Division 2. Locations in which easily
ignitible fibers are stored (except in process of manufacture).
Maty Aguitible atm and flyings will Include rayon, cotton (including
cotton linters and cotton waste), ideal or henequen, line, Jute, hemp tow,
cocoa fiber, oakum, baled waste, kapok, Spanish mom, aresider and other
materials of similar nature.
History: 1. Amendment filed 4-2452; effective thirtieth dny thereafter (negin.
ter 26, NO. 3).
2515. Clams I InstaRations. (a) tienaral. The general rules of
these orders shall apply to the installation of electrical wiring anal equip-
ment in locations classified as Class I under Order 2514(c) of this article,
except as modified by the following sections of this order.
(b) Service Sgsipment. For Class I, Division 1 locations, service
entrance equipment, switchboards, and panelboards shall be of a type
approved for use in such locations.
For Class I. Division 2 locations, service entrance equipment, switch.
boards or panelboards shall be of the type approved for Clans 1, Divan
1, or of a type having all sparking or arcing contact parts enclosed in
vapor proof enclosures or immersed in oil.
Service entrance equipment, switchboards, and panelboards should
not he installed in hazardous locations if it in practicable to install them
in a uonbazardous location.
(e) Transformers and Capacitors. (1) In Class I, Division I loea-
tieme, transformers and capacitors allU be Installed only in
approved vaults which shall conform to Order MM, or be of a
type approved for (less I locations.
320 IVDt-MIAL REIATIONM I Ma I
Article 22. Hazardous Locations (ftsiefte M me. 3-2-12-M
(2) In 1, Division 21 1wations, the -11stallatio, f
transformers and capacitors shall conform to Artiele q of
thew orders.
(d) Maters, Instruments and Relayx. The installation of meters
nstruments and relays %hall conform to the following:
(1) In (*Ia,,s 1, Diriit)n I loeations, meters, instruments
and relays, hieluding kilowatt-hour meters, instrument trans
formers and resistors, rectifiers and thermionic tube-, shall be
provided with explosiowliroof erelosures approved for Cls, I
locations.
It is recommended that such equipment be located Outside
of the hazardous area where practicable.
(2) In Clw� I. Division 2 loeatiouF, the installation of
meters, instruments anti relays shall conform to the following;
(A) Meters, instruments and relars in which an
incorporated contacts for making or breaking current "
conform to paragraph (1) Of this section unless general
purpose enclosures are provided and such eontaets an (1)
immersed in oil, or ( 2� enclosed within a vapllr_prd of
housing.
(R) Resistom resistance deviems thermionic tubes,
and rectifier, which are used in or in connection with
meters. Instruments, and relays, shall conform to paragraph
(1) of this seetiOu, except that enclosures for resistors which
operate normally at approximately room temperature may
be of general purpose type.
(C) Instrument transformer windings. impedanee,
coils, sok voids and otherwindin-es which do not incorporate
sliding Or make -r -break contacts -hall be provided with
enclosures which may be of general purpose type.
(e) WU'W X#AOds- Q I In Mss I. Division I Locations rigid
metal conduit with threaded joints. and explosion -proof boxes
and fittings shall be the wiring methodemplo�red. All threaded
joinshall be Made up with -
at least five f till threads engaged.
Where necessary to employ flexible connections, approved flexi-
ble fittings of
cNPlo`i(wn-Pr09f type shall be used.
(2) In Cl
ms I. Divisionrtzid metal conduit
with full threaded fitli"tt
, of . or eleetriml e he explosion -proof or vapor --proof
type
metall! tllhinz with approved threaded
fittiu!Rs- Sb -I'll be the Wirill-, method eujphred. Where neeeK.;ary
to employ flexible, eonfleet '�AN, fl
cable approrNI for �nvh jj�o jj
!t� eNitle metal eonduit or flexime
he
M Wing. (1) 1" cl.,s I, ltiaisiolY I bwatiotvz, the conduit
system shall he: eale(l 'Iff 11, Prevent the passage of gases, vapors
or flames from ime P"rji" ,f the
another as follows: electrical installation to
TITLE 8 Divmtox or INDUMIAI, SkMY
321
Article 22 Hmrardous Loostieft
(A) In each conduit run entering ar enclosure for
switches, circuit breakers, fuses'relays, resistors or other
apparatus which may produce arcs, sparks or high tem-
peratures. Seats shail I be placed As close 81 practicable and
itn no ease more than IS inches from such enclosures,
(B) In each conduit run leaving the Class Is Division I
hazardous area. There shall be no box, or fitting in the eon-
duit between the seal and the point at which the conduit
leaves the hazardous area,
(2) In Class I. Division 2 locations, seals hall be located
ae follows:
(A) In each conduit run entering a, ,,luaurc which
is required to be explosion -proof. Seals shall be placed as
close as Practicable and in no case more than 18 inches from
sv<It enclosure.
(B) In each conduit run leaving the hazardous
"
There shall be no box, or fitting in the conduit between thea.
e
seal and the Point at which the conduit leaves the hazardous
area.
(3) Where seals an required, they shall conform to the
following for both Clam 1, Divisions I and 2:
(A) Endcaures for connections or for equipment
'hall be Provided with approved means for seeing, or seld-
ing fittings approved for Class I loeationseltsdi be Used.
(B) Approved sealing compound " na be affected
by the surrounding atmosphere or liquids, and shall nc#
have a meIntinglpoint of less than 930 0. 00 F.).
(C) the completed seal, the minim(20um thickness of
the sealing compound shall be not less than the trade an
of the conduit, and in no ease lea than finch.
(D)Splices and taps shall not be made in fittings
intended only for sealing with compound, nor shall 6W,
Ing compound be used in other fittings in which splices or
taps are made unless additional space is provided for seal.
ins in the fitting.
(E) Where there is a possibility that water or other
condensed vapor may be trapped at any point In the race.
way system, approved means Wall be provided to Prevent
accumulation, Or to Permit Periodic draining of such water
or condensed vapor.
(g) Switches. Chvmitbreaksrs and Kotor Ooftwallem (1) is
Cla&, 1, Division 1 locations, switches, eirenit breala% tam
and motor controllers, including push buttons, Ms" a",sQ.
Jar deviecs "I be provided with enclosures. The anchssars In
ea`!' `41,W. together with the enclosed"tak shall be
approved as a complete assembly for use in teadefts.
Irrnos si• iisr a t ZlTf.E i
32tiats >11t. Hazards" (Itsvistm+i fle-3-l-�•l�j
'T'TTif.E i Dzvnnc�x of Irmvsraiuc. HAVETT 323
(RegisterSri, No. 3-2-19-53) Article 2L Hazardous Loeatleas
(2) In Cie. I, Division 2 10clitiOns, Switches, -
breakers, motor controlism and fuses shall conform to the fal-
(j) Lighting PiKtUrea. (1) For Class 1, Division 1 locations,
lighting fixtures shall be of the explosion -proof type. For Class I,
lowing:sad
(A) Circuit-breakers,L
Di ' 'locations,2 fixtures shall be of the type permitted by
Division 1, or of the vapor -proof type.
intended to interrupt current in the normal performance
(2) For both Class I, Divisions 1 and 2, lighting fixtures
of the function for which they are instaRed shall be Fm-
shall conform to the following:
vided with enclosures approved for Class I 1
general purposeenclosures are provided and (1) the inter
(A) Back lighting fixture shall approved abe
piste assembly for locations of thiss shuns, and shall be
ruption of current occurs ,� idlhl a vapor -proof encieum
or (2) the current interrupting contacts are oft-imMersed
clearly marked to indicate the maximum wattage of lamps
for which it is approved.
and the device is approved for locations of this elan and
(B) Pendent fixtures shall be suspended by threaded
division.sad circuit
This will include
rigid conduit stems or by other approved means.
(C) For Class I, Division 1 locations, portable lamps
and cireuit-breakers; motor coutrdlers, includingshall
switches,, jactor-verlead re-
be of the explosion -proof type approved for use in
Class I locations. For Claes I, Division 2 locations, portable
buttons, pilot
circuit
teetive devices. and aircuit
lamps shall be of the type permitted in Clam I, Division 1
control Of lighting and appliance envaitL
of a ispe in which the opera is
is as other approved liquid and is p
locations, or of the vapor -proof type.
(k) Appliances, trued and Portable. (1) Fixed and portable
immersed aU
within general Purpose Vm4ogurcsi,or is enelosed with a
enclosure, may be used for the prof of
appliances shall conform to the following:
(A) In Clam I, Division 1 locations, appliances,
vapor -proof
motltrs, a and pwWA6 lamps provided the flow
including electrically heated and motor -driven appliaaees,
are approved for the Pare
'
shad be approved for Claes I locations.
(B) In Class I, Division 2 locations, eleetrieallr
(b) tlontrolTmdermersand ( 1) In Classy Di
with any switt
heated appliances shall be approved for Claes I locations.
Motors of motor -driven appliances, shall be of explosion-
1 locations,together
associated withthem, shallbe provided with
proof type approved for Clam I locations, or of a type
nism
Proof40610=0approved for Cerin I loeatiom
having no contacts, commutators, or sparking parts, er of a
(2) In Class I, Division 2 locations, enclosures for the
totally enclosed type.
windings of transformers may be of general purpose
be d pe.
(1) li'lexdde Cords. Where it is necessary to use portable lamps
Redden and impedance coils shall provxi
for CISIM
or other portable current consuming devices in either Clam I'Division 1
g—proof cneicgures approved an complete es
or Division 2 locations, Type S cord or equivalent shall be used. Such a
I locations,
flexible cord shall contain one extra insulated conductor which shall be
(i) noon and c;{UMMtom (1) In Cia_cs I, Division l locations,
and other retatmg electrical machinery sba3
properly connected to form a ,grounding connection for exposed non-
current -carrying metal parts of the device. Metal lamp guards attached
motors, generators
be of one of the following _ .
ftygeappro� forCGsn
to portable band lamps composed of suitable nonconductive material
are excepted from this order. Suitable seals shall be provided where the
(A) Encloaedeapl -
flexible cord enters bocce, fittings or enclosures of expl -proof type.
I loatA)
(B) Totally enclosed, ventilated type supplied
(m) and Attachment Plugs. For Clam I, Division 1
positive pressure ventilation from a nonhazardous ga"c"
locations„ receptacles and attachment plugs shaU be of the polarised type
'flexible
so arranged to prevent encr!0ziug the machines until
arranged to autcros '
providing for connection to the grounding conductor of theBard
and shall be approved for Class I locat*ons. For Clam I, Division 2 low
tilation basbeen established, and
de -m i the equipment when the air supply fails,
tions, such receptacles and attachment plugs shall be of the pa -
type a 60
leeations, maoto
(2) In ClI. Division 2 motors. genera6
and other rotati electrieal chiluery shall be of a type p�
type having no -
witted for I. Division 1, or of an are -tight
location where they are to be need,
lydens.
mitted in Class I, Division 1, or of a
commutators. or sparking parts, or of the totally enc type.
(a) �. �, g�ote-control and Communication
(1) In Clam 1, Divisiau 1 locations, all apparatus
TrM a
324 ixo $ai,sxmfats
Article 4L Hazardous Location$ (Reeietert�i, No.a—t. }
equipment of signalling, ahtrm, remote control and Beim
tion systems, irrespective of voltage, unless of the -powered
type shall be approved for Claw I l0estiOnel-
(2) In Class I, Division 2 locations, signal, alarm, remote -
control and communication systems shall conform to the fol-
lowing:
ol,lowing: and make and
(A) Switches and circuit breakers,
break contacts of push-button, relays and alarmbells horns, shall have explosion-proofeneltleturea approvedor
Class I locations, or vapor -proof enclosures'or unless gen-
eral purpose enclosures are provided and current interrupt -
ins contacts are (1) immersed in oil, or (2) enclosed within
a vapor -proof endi
(B) Resistors,, resstance devices, thermiouie tubes
and rectifiers shall have explosion -proof enelosares for
Class I Dations, or vapor -proof enclosures, except that
enclosures for resistors which operate normally at approxi
mately room temperature may be of general Purpose type'-
(C)
type(C) .Protector enclosures which may be of general
purpose type shall be provided for lightning Protective
devices and for fuses.
(o) Live Parts. There shall be no exposed bare live parts in
Claes I, Divisions 1 and 2 locations.
(p) Gra imilfng. For Class I, Divisions 1 and 2, the wiring and
equipment shall be grounded in conformity with the following:
(1) The exposed noncurrent -carrying metal parts of equip-
ment such as the frames or metal exteriors of motors, Swed or
portable lamps or appliances, lighting fixtures, cabinets, caees,
and conduit shall be grounded as specified in Artiele 7 of these
orders.
(2) The double-locknut type of contact shall not be
depended upon for bonding purpows, but bonding jumPen
with proper fittings or other approved means shall be need- If
flexible conduit is used as permitted in Order 2515(e), bonding
jumpers with proper fittings shall be provided around such
conduit, or fittings of the irpe which thread into the eonvobr
tions of the flexible conduit shall be used.
(3) Wiring in a Class I Dation. when supplied from a
grounded alternating current supple system in which a
grounded eonduetor is a part of the service. shall have the
grounded service eonductor bontwed to the raceway system and
boad-
to the grounding conductor for the rseewaY cyst@m• T
he
ing con neetion to the grounded serriee conductor shall be made
on the supply side of the service diseouneeting
Means -
(q) Tooft and Ropeks. ,Special precautions shall be taken isg
lasting or repairing all el °meal e€puipment in Clary 1. Divisions 1 and
tions, to insure that the conditions are safe while such work is axing
done.
TrrLZ a DlvistoN or IxoumuL SAfrETY 325
(Register 9% No. 3-1-"-56) Article 2L Hazardous Locations
ir) Spray Booths. Where flatuniable volatile liquids are used, no
motors, lainps or lighting fixtures of any type shall he located within
spray booths. in ventilalm, duet, connected therewith, nor in any loea-
tion where there is a possibility of readily ignitable residues lodging
upon them. Motors in spray -painting establishments located out -6' I
paint -spray booths and ventilating ducts outside of the hazardous a_ea
may be of any standard totally -enclosed type or of the open induction
type having no brushes, make and break contacts, collectors, or other arc-
ing or sparking parts.
Illumination of hazardous areas through panels of glass or other
transparent material is permissible only where the panel effectively
isolates the hazardous area from the area in which the lighting unit is
located; the lighting unit itself is approved for the location in which it in
located; the transparent panel is of a material or is so protected that
breakage will be unlikely, and the arrangement is such that normal
accumulations of hazardous residue on the exposed surface of the panel
will not be raised to a dangerous temperature by radiation or conduction
from the source of illumination.
(s) Electrostatic Paint Deposition. (1) High-voltage Pow+
Supply. High-voltage power supply equipment shall' be
located outside the spray booth and shall be suitably enclosed
either in a metal cabinet or enclosure, or shall be enclosed by
othQr approved means. Bare high-voltage conductors outside the
spray booth shall be suitably enclosed to prevent persons or
conducting materials from accidentally coming into contact
with the conductors.
(2) Interlocking of System. The equipment shall be so
arranged electrically that the electrostatic field cannot be estab-
lished until after the ventilating system and the conveyor are
both in operation. Failure of either the conveyor or ventilation
equipment to operate shall automatically de -energize the eleetro-
static field.
(3) Electrode Structure. The electrode structure shall
be mounted inside the spray booth by suitable means.
(4) Safeguards Against Electric arcing and
.Approved mechanical or electrical devices shall be provided for
positive safeguarding against arcing or discharge between the
electrode structure and material or equipment.
(5) Isolation of Process. Where required, adequate
fencing or guarding shall be provided to maintain a safe
isols-
tion of the electrostatic process from other work or storage in
the area and to protect perms. Aeem doors to enclosed sow
booth areas where electrodes are located shall he provided iNith
automatically operated interlocking switches to interrupt the
bigh-voltage power supply to the electrodes.
innaa i:toos
TIM 3
Leeat+c (Reg>s��' S5. Ha.3-2-
19-0
2L H
I'e enc _amine signs legible at 12 feet
i6} Si8'meading subsuntiall'7. I?+:BI--IiIGIi-iCI.TAG3I••
sadShall be posted on the high-voltage power supple enclosure and
the spray
(7) Grounding- Ey ed nesnc ntca-r.ing metal
apparatus• protection s- Wil=ls_,
parts of else
fencing and ob" is In p is to the _ - wits
t a
permanently ently grounded in
� Aificle 7 of them orders,
t) ilk lling
li�mnacne All wiring located $ ieesr
comply with the pro ' ' for Claes I,
Division
LL fi 4 `_4-5
ter 2L Na g).
CUM II tions. (a,, General. The general rules sf
doese orders, don apply to the ` tion of electrical wiring said
as Class II under this article exaPt a zssdi-
wtythe feBoviag acefiewof this order.
aitnoteg
p�
(b) t.10serviceentrancthis -
nifflkee allfin
bewawitchboards should be placed in Include dwaL
1
we) and Ca(1', In ClaStanm II, conform to atfollowing ca
pacitors
iAl Transformers andcapacitors emtaiumc atha >
will bum shall be instated only in
approved v111111111
egaftessing to Order 9— i , in addition (1) the dost' If
4hazardous at"
IT* nips, cot^,smuaai wise- ::aa the
shall have th sides of the VA
fire on
and the doors 1 be carefully fitted and pre
Mutable (such as weather strappinopenitign g) tO mic"assol'
and of dtast into vault . _ tdooll
anisate Duly oleic the ;: air.
comm
relief a� - mea
side air shall be provided. do Rd �
(B) Transformer, paste which
lain a liquid It, will turn *W1 , I' be it's ells
omformin; to uhf f: ,r It' transformers be
cat rs ntainin; 4�il that , ' ern. or (2)
cap
eel u
rtz'r.>3 a Dix or IxnuirmtA . $Amer✓ 827
(Register 55, No. 3-2-19-55) Article 22. Haaard*us Locatiom
(C) No transformer or capacitor shall be installed in
a location where dust from the production of magnesium,
aluminum or aluminum bronze powders may be present.
(2) In Class II, Division 2 loestaons, transformers and
capacitors shall conform to the following:
(A) Transformers and capacitors containing a liquid
that will burn shall be installed in vaults conforming to
Order 2407.
(B) Transformers containing askarel shall be installed
in accordance with Order 2407.
(C) Dry type transformers shall be installed in
accordance with Order 2407, or shall (1) have their wind-
ings and terminal connections enclosed in tight metal hous-
ings without ventilating or other openings, and (2) operate
at voltages not exceeding 600 volts.
(d) Wiring Methods. (1) In Class II, Division 1 locations, wir-
ing shall be in rigid metal conduit with threaded boxes and fit-
tings. Boxes and fittings shall be of the dust -tight type. Where
it is necessary to employ flexible connections, a short length of
flexible metal conduit or Type 8 flexible cord with bushed At.
tings may be used. An additional conductor for group shall
be provided in the flexible cord unless other means of grounding
is provided.
(2) In Class II, Division 2 locations, wiring shall be in
rigid metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing. Where flexible
connections are necessary, the conditions for Claes II, Division
1 shall apply.
(e) Sealing. (1) In Class 1I, Divisions 1 and 2 locations, when
a raceway provides communication between a non -dust -tight fit-
ting or enclosure and one which is required to be dust -tight,
suitable means shall be provided to prevent the entrance of dust
into the dust -tight enclosure through the raceway. This means
may be (1) a permanent and effective seal, (2) a horizontal
section not less than 10 feet long in the raceway, or (H) a vertical
section of raceway not lees than 5 feet long and extending down-
ward from the dust -tight enclosure.
(f) Switches, Circuit Breakers, Motor Controllers and Fuses. (1)
1n Claes H locations, switches, circuit breakers, motor am-
trollers and fusee, including push -buttons, relays and similar
devices, which are intended to interrupt current in the normal
performance of the function for which they are installed, awl
be provided with dust -tight enclosures approved for Clam 11
locations.
(2) In locations where dust from the production of
nesium, aluminum or aluminum bronze powders may be present,
fuses, switches, motor controllers and circuit breakers shall have
dust-tistht enclosures aoeei8ally avoroved for aneh i
9 alt 1%-Dri grist R1 �:ax:0' � ?I' u S
Article 9L Hs w"- L (ResEster i its $-2-t9'iil
(g) Control Transformers and 2 in Class II, Divi
sion I locations. control trausformerior impedance coil* and
resis-
tors, and any overeurrent device: or switch'ng
associated with themchall have €hist -tight enclosures approved
for elan II locations. 10 eontmi transformer. impedance
or resistor shall be installed in It location where dust from the
Production of magnesium, aluminum or aluminum bronze pow-
ders mayv be present unless provided with a dust -tight enelesare
speeiacaiit approved for suy b lwationt-
(2) In CUSS Il, IDiy +'icon 2 l=xatinns. control transformm
and impedance coils shall be pr€=e lded with iga t metal heings
without ventilating op$n r:_ -s.. Resist's' saki ris"anee decic�
shall have dust -tight Incl ur approved �r t: la.-_ 11 1twatiouL
(h�nowsandOeveratOm �1= I'a t a -s 1I P vision I locations,
mpg generators and other e e M(111 Machinery sw
-enclosed iatrbe totalv .1. totany-enc used pipe-sen-
tilate?. or "Ally -en fa^-eocled a-1 shall be approved for
Class 12 lotet ons. mot,, - -- rezierators or c -cher rotating eleetri-
Calmachin,,T shall not isa_talled in ic-eations where d-ast from
the productRin of bronze
r�maers gnat prem t2:'tl ' �L•:`li °" r3 t3!ally-
e and , ^ a'.Iv k e�saced
fi'r Soh kVati r'__
e2) In Ciao 11 Divislon 2 l -atit"_ stors. reneratma
and other r tatirr_ etc trial m =r
'inera Sw be the: apMved
far Class II. DixisZon I k ti's n_. or where the equipment is
reads le for routine cleaning and tenanet. self
in tcS i€ ls^2t=tc3�_`� C,f iIe qi iTh'' stsr rd ops
tape hires w thct 4 "iia caacT.- F triiu_al or other
of swi ' ins m am "incl ._ motor ;'vcrcllrrelt
jericks'.r intim r�rat rc*s at e deviate ; av be used- Standard
opena2nri^. :mai_ $;'aa
an7v=Ls or r;,'-cvi2c erracic wait n -twit moo
t,onsiugs or m&F be ezh,!, i in -a e dam. t�-htroomse
'tt of o.' Ione:: wi« + nt b
lible
a r zY'c uizdint. 19
r --=s or ;;4aps ;;4as h� ll tt a' ,* r y vet 'atr+y f ar a
Seam
of ckan aar, 1 i1
tt'rs ; c cTats z elm ; II
?i: e.
?I= s Dunmos or INDusmar. SAFETY329
tRagiatorSS.No. 3-4-19-95 ArtieM ?2. Hazardous Locations
(3) Lighting 1fttures. (1) Lighting fixtures for Class II Joea-
tions shall conform to the following:
(A) For Class II, Division 1 locations, each fixture
shall be approved for Class 1I locations and shall be clearly
marked to indicate the maximum wattage of the lamp for
which it is approved. In locations where dust from mag-
nesium, aluminum or aluminum bronze powders may be
present, fixtures for fixed or portable lighting, and all aux-
iliary equipment shall be dust -tight, and shall be specill-
cally approved for such locations.
For Chase II, Division 2 locations, lighting fixtures for
fixed lighting shall provide enclosures for lamps and lamp -
holders. Enclosures shall be designed to minimize the
deposit of dust on lamps and to prevent the escape of sparks,
burning material or hot metal.
(B) Pendent fixtures shall be suspended by threaded
rigid conduit stems or chains with approved fittings, or by
other approved means.
(C) Where wiring between an outlet box or fitting
and a pendent fixture is not enclosed in conduit, flexible
cord approved for hard usage shall be used, and suitable
seals shall be provided where the cord enters the fixture
and the outlet box or fitting.
(D) Portable lamps shall be dust -tight, and Shall
be approved for Class II locations. They shall be clearly
marked to indicate the maximum wattage of lamps for
which they are designed.
(k) Flexible Cords. Flexible cords used in Class II locations shall
(1) be of a type suitable for extra hard usage (such as Type S), (2) con.
tain one extra insulated conductor as a grounding conductor where
grounding is required, and (3) be provided with suitable seals to prevent
the entrance of dust where the flexible cord enters boxes or fittings which
are required to be dust -tight.
(1)
.Receptacles and Attachment Plugs. (1) In Class II, Division
1 locations, receptacles and attachment plugs shall be of
ized type providing for connection to the grounding conductor
of the flexible cord, and shalt be approved for Chas n locations,
(2) In Class II, Division 2 locations, receptacles and
attachment plugs shall be of polarized type providing for can.
nection to the grounding conductor of the flexible cord, and
elm shall be so designed that connection to the supply circuit cannot
Portable- 4 _; gti be made or broken nshile live arta are cx
a a i for { p poscd.
ins . .ter {m) 8rgm d, Alarm, Remote -control and Local Loud Speaker tater+.
11 Fate ` a communicatioaa tema. (1) to Class It, Division Y loea�
m
s _ a. $ye
„fit sa tions, signal, alarm, remote -control and meal loud speaker inter.
` " `' communication systems shall conform to the Mowing,
330 INDUSTRIAL gFr.ATIONs 1T1Ya>E
Article 22. Hazardous Locations (Reggstn5% Mo 3.2
(A) Where accidental damage or breakdown of
lation might cause arcs. sparks or high temperature,
rigid
metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing shall be the wir
ing method employed, and the number of conductors is a
raceway shall be limited only by the requirement that tie
cross-sectional area of all conductors shall not exceed 40
percent of the area of the raceway.
(B) Switches, circuit breakers, relays, eontactors and
fuses which may interrupt other than voice currents and
current -breaking contact for bells, horn, howlers, airy
and other devices in which sparks or arcs may be prodfo
shall be provided with dust -tight enclosures approved for
the location, unless current -breaking contacts are immer
sw
in oil, or unless the interruption of current occurs witEa
a chamber sealed against the entrance of dust, in which
enclosures may be o€ general purpose type.
(C) Resistors, transformers and 'choke coils which my
carry other than voice currents, and rectifiers,
tubes and other heat generating equipment or apparatus
shall be provided with dust tight enclosures approved for
Class II locations.
(D) Where dusts are of an clectrkAlly-condadillg
nature, all wiring and equipment shall be dust -tight.
(E) Where dust from magnesium, aluminum or alu-
minum bronae powders may be present, all apparatus and
equipment shall be dust -tight and shall be
approved for such location.
(2) In Class U. Division 2 locations, signal, alarm,
control and local load speaker intercommunication
shall conform to the following:
(A) Enclosures shall conform to sub (i -B)
of this order, or shall be in tight metal enclosares
teleseopiag or tight fitting covers, and having no opeamp
throutth w after lir—stallatica, sparks or bulsks
materialmight pe -
(B) The windin,;s and terminal conn dW*
formers and choke coif shall be provided with tight mdd
enclosures without ventilating open
(C)resistance device
thermionic tubs
andtectiflers shall conform to subparagraph (I -C) da
section
except that enclosures for resisters which opff*
at approximately room temperature may be of
purpow ty
(it' Live PAM Thore Taall be ro ex it"l lmre live parts to
f'1
it
TITLE 8
(Registerft No. 3- 2-g_Iar,,) OX OF I"Usrx Article
S � ay 331
(o) DSII 2L Hasardous LeeatlaM
Iowa for Claes III id•rrurg and equipment shall r'ound-3 as fol-
tous: be g
(1) Exposed noneurrent-carr'vin
meat such as the frames or metal exteriors of mato
Parts of
re,
and rtable conduit or appliances, lighting1s, fixed equip.
orders, shall be grounded as specfied in Areabi
(2) The double locknut t
de�depended upon for bonding b of eontaet shall not be
Proper fittings or other a Purposes, but bond j,nn�
flexible conduit is used, bondm Proved means shall be used. If
OW Provided around such c°nduutm, Jumpers with proper fittings
grounded {3) Wrung rn a Class II location, when supplied from a
grounded conductor
is
aupplY system in which a
eonduetor ' part of the service
grounded thegrnd-lee conductor bonded to the raceway system shall have the
to the bonding conductor for the raceway system. The bend.
ing connection to the grounded service conductor shall he made
on the supply, side of service disconnecting means.
2517. Class M �tallation
these orders shall aPP1Y to the installation on off electrical wiring
rules of
article ceptas trmodifi d b C� nI under Order 2514 end equip -
except the following sections of this order. of this
(b) Service Equipment. No service entrance equipment, switch-
boards or panelboards should be placed in locations of this
tieable to locate them elsewhere. If th'�-
shall a enclosed in dust -tight metal is not practicable, all�Ii'� PParts
external operation only, or shall be located o separate r cabinets with
Provision
built of or lin Provision for
'losing � with substantial noncombustible materials ��
g doors, so constructed and installed as to adequately with
flying$ or lint. equateiy exclnda
(c) Transformers and Capacitors. (1) In Class III 2locati
transformers and capacitors shall conform to the followingn0.
:
<A) Transformers and
liquid that will burn shall be installed
containing in vault, a
� to Order 2407, -
and ratted1in excess 0 5 b a shall a klirel or equivalent
Pressure -relief vents, (2) be () be provided with
absorbing any gases generated b arcing vi`led with means for,
or the premure-relief'Vents shalt be connected to the ,
or flue which will carry such gases outsidethethe buildbdving,
and (3) have an air space of not I than 6 '
the transformer cases and an inches
material.
Y adjacent combustlbht
or all (C) type transformers shall be installed in VaWta
all {1) have their windings and
1»zat aatt z I:rs t e;•r�- Baa Trns I
ArN,krtl' ac; sax
sl* OLHaz>,rdaus t -as
enelF a is=t'_.� --� a_ sect exceeding
nth¢r r,f.�r.its� a�.
g p volts.
R met
(d) Wiring 41gt R 77- w ro to
tubing gball 1,¢ ti a �clt l nzth of
to flrzsblr c,trsoert� � a`
emp Y
flexible metal enn4nit r kr
em COMUMBUS MA POOL Is
(c) Switches, � � . .�,, 4 and fum
-tet
Class III locations est -u are 'smtemckd
including push bnti - g - _ 'inti for which
x�
to interrupt current t � � - � _ fi?«m �c ap-P -9
they are inatfalle�i shaU be 7
for Class II 1 =A Rairtem z�
acae:v, -
(f) Omtrol � sttrd, si t
` a '- II: --,s
t t rpt seas sea
fore evils and ` a-,, f
&'
ices motors. .;, . Vie.-� s�-a '
approved for 11 t aI I _c
n- -ea
have dust ht ,-gra ors an£s Other "Ut-
(g) Nows =A$ ,t sent;?:ated
i'g eleetrice -'eg' nr shell be
eaciosed t a4f *o ad
lined -it
enclosed an b R' ; a z rl, vmUt'W
l
L. l
- e3duat roe- maxdessing sol
' rVZrVe
mum *e evve: e! The sqaIrr8 emtM
mar
Re fer
t e� drat . s•
-
353MIL-les -Ir
61141311dard *PM In -le -
of Other "?a3 1^t - r If
-1 ase
cegisels
or Mi"Xielee � -
zas-
} - ---zesl :tnew bpwisgL
of the
Irecuss SSIlocations-
f tTl°e
fer Chia 11 locatioms-
- t ill
aid - f0
Mett aof
1 e . � !3%11010ldm
w-
-r
athe
sx:aa a ;t Isom
bra is
MILE a Dzvmox of INuusTauL SIFFTY M
(Register 55.No. 3-2-19-55) Article 2L Haz"eueLoo•tione
(2) Pendent fixtures shall be suspended by threaded
rigid conduit stems or chains with approved dtt.ings, or by
other approved means.
(3) Where wiring between an outlet box or fitting and
a pendent fixture is not enclosed in conduit, flexible cord
approved for hard usage shall be used, and suitable seals
shall be provided where the cord enters the fixtures and the
outlet box or fitting.
(4) Portable lamps shall be dust -tight, and shall be
approved for Class II locations. They shall be clearly
marked to indicate the maximum wattage of lamps for
which they are designed.
(j) Flexible Cords. Flexible cords used in Class III locations
shall (1) be of a type approved for hard usage (such as Type 8), (2)
contain one extra insulated conductor as a grounding conductor where
grounding is required, and (3) be provided with suitable seals to prevent
the entrance of dust where the flexible cord enters boxes or fittings which
are required to be dust -tight.
(k) Receptacles and Attachment Plugs. (1) In Class III, Divi-
sion 1 locations, receptacles and attachment plugs shall be of
polarized type providing for connection to the grounding eon-
aluctor of the flexible cord, and shall be approved for Class II
locations.
(2) In Class III, Division 2 locations, receptacles and
attachment plugs shall be of polarized type, providing for cm-
nection to the grounding conductor of the flexible cord, and shall
be so designed that connection to the supply circuit cannot be
made or broken while live parts are exposed.
(d) Signal, Alarm, Remote -control and Local Loud Speaker lMw-
communication Systems. In Class III locations, signal, alarm, remote -
control and local loud speaker intercommunication systems shall conform
to the following:
(1) Where accidental damage or breakdown of insu-
lation might cause arcs, sparks or high temperature, rigid
metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing shall be the
wiring method employed, and the number of conductors;
in a raceway shall be limited only by the requirement tbA
the cross-sectional area of all conductors shall not exeeed
40 percent of the arra of the raceway.
(2) Switches, circuit breakers, relays, ctmtsetwa and
fuses which may interrupt other than voice currents and
current -breaking contacts for bells, hormh howlers, eirtne
and other devices in which sparks or arcs may be produced,
shall be provided with dust -tight enclosures approved for
Clam II locations, unless current -breaking toutaeta an
immersed in oil. or unless the interruptialt of current aellm
33I 1--mrsTR€at. 11.t.A Rn �a
Article 23. Garages and Simitar occupancies gRgsste K ao•3-2-
�� itlain at chamber •€ ulcd against the entranceof dust, h
which case enclosures may be of general purpow type.
(3) Resistors, trans€ormers and choke
carry other than voice cuarenta, and ret
tifiers, tkeru'uie
tubes and other heat generating equipment
or appa*u
shall be provided with dust -tight ertclemm aliProvea fR
Class Illoca ions.eWher enclosure
reaistOr o taPiMAY be Of a
room temps
gageW
purpose type.
(4) Where lints ir $y an equipment shall be �
an electrielk-tes'
ducting nature, all wiring
tight.
(m)Storage Battery Charging Equipment. Storage batten
charging equipment shall be located in separate rooms built or havild
substantial noncombustible c as to
�u�deSyiugs or lint, and shall be ventilated.
(u) hive Parts. Thera shall be no exposed bare live parts h
Class III locations.
(o) Grounding. Waring and equipment shall be groo" as
follows for Class III locations:
(1) imposed noncutrrent carryin6' metal Paris of e
ment such as the frames or metal exteriors of motes, fad a
portable lamps or aplilianees, lighting fixtiutes ties
and conduit shall be groanded as specified n
ord
eonta� lsassll �# ba
2) The doubie-lacknut type of but bond* depended upon for bonding Purposes, -.
with proper fittings or other approved means shall be mal
flexible conduit is used as Permitted in order 2516(d), aath
jumpers with proper fittings shall be provided ariimd
III lotion, when - iris
(3) Wiring in a Class a
a grounded alternating -current supply n bw tit
grounded conductor is a part of the service, shall
conductor bonded to the raeewsy emote
grounded service w
tor
the � conductor for the raeewa-v �� mak
eonneegr taien to the gVg11a�3t. service discontornecting
be
the supply side of the service
Im
o3emt fila cl 24-55 a eff ive tbirtk4l day
giatery: 1. A
Bier � \o. 3i•
Article 28. os. Similar t.�'cuPanetea
0
The requirements 01
252% General. (a a�
to be additionalto, or
article tdlall be deemed ordem
p ra in .Guilt 1«s I to 1t1, inclusive, of these
TITLE 8 DivanoN of IxnasntiAL S"zTY 835
(Register K No. "-19-55) Article K Motion -picture Studios
(b) Scope. The provisions of this article shall apply to airplane
hangars, garages, gasoline service stations, and other 10c4tions where
gasoline or other highly volatile motor fuel is stored, dispensed, or where
service and repair operations are carried on with this type of equipment.
The provisions of this article shall not apply to any portion of a building
which is suitably cut off from the garage and not used for the above
purpose.
(c) Wiring and Equipment. All wiring, motors, switches, con-
tactors, relays, resistance or impedance devices or other devices or
apparatus which in their normal operation tend to create ares, sparks, or
high temperatures shall be of a type approved for use in Class I, Division
2 locations, when installed in pits. Wiring and equipment approved for
use in Class 1, Division 2 locations will not be required in any portion of
a building classed as a garage, except in a pit, when such portion of the
building is adequately ventilated.
This order is not intended to require wiring and equipment approved
for use in Class I, Division 2 locations for underfloor receptacles and
underfloor outlets in aircraft hangars.
(d) Lampholders and Guards for Portables. Portable lamps shall
be equipped with handles, lampholder, hook and substantial lamp guard
attached to the lampholder or handle. Lampholders shall be of the
unswitched type and shall not provide means for plug-in of attachment
cord caps. Lampholders shall be of the molded composition or other type
approved for the purpose. Metal -shell, lined lampholders, either of the
switched or unswitebed type, shall not be used.
Where portable lamps are used in pits or other plate in which
flammable volatile liquids or vapors are liable to settle, they shall be of
a type approved for use in Class I, Division 2, hazardous locations.
Article 24. Motion -picture Studios
2556. General. (a) Other Orders. The requirements of this
article shall be deemed to be additional to, or amendatory of, those pre-
scribed in Articles 1 to 18, inclusive, of these orders.
(b) Scope. The requirements of this article shall apply to a
motion-pieture studio, exchange, factory, laboratory, stage, or a portion
of the building in which motion -picture films are manufactured, exposed,
developed, printed, cut, edited, rewound, repaired or stored.
5527. Wiring. (a) Permanent Wiring. The permanent wiring
shall be in approved metal raceways except that eommunieation circuits,
and sound recording and reproducing equipment may be wired as per-
mitted by the articles covering these installations. (See Articles 25
and 26.)
(b) Portable Wiring. The wiring for stage set lighting and step
effects, and other wiring which is not fixed as to location, shall be dose
with approved portable cables and approved flexible cords. The
require-
ments of this order shall not apply to portable lamps or other sleetriMil
INDUSTRUL RUAT'O-'CS T= 8
336~mter 55, Ka. 3-2-"
ArtiGIO 24. Motion- Pictuft StOd**
equipment used as Pr011ertit"; "I a 'Ll"t iter M"'. U11 a studio $Ule
or lot, or on location- wiring in -Irtssingr000ssW
(c) Dressing RoolaWiriug- F'_'t'd
be installed in accordance with Article 5 of thea-, orders.
1) Lamps at patching and Viewing Tables. Only approved em
porcelain keyless larnpholders, equipped vi*
position tior metal -sheathed able means to guard lamps trona nievbani4mt injury and from film
and film scrap, shall be used at patching, viewing and euttiw tables.
(e) Lamps in Film Storage Vaults. Lamps in film storage Yalit'
shall be in rigid fixtures, equipped with vapor -tight globes- Lamps 8W
be controlled by a switch having 4 pole in each um.,rounded conductor.
This switch shall be located outside of the vault. This switch shall dkew
nett from all sources of sUPPIV all ungrounded conductors terminaft
in any outlet in the vault. No ;lectrie motors, heaters, port" US* a
other portable electric equipment shall be located in the film A"*
vaults.
(f) Portable Lamps. Portable lamPS wid work littlits shall be
equipped with approved portable vards, approved coin tion
posior
sheathed porcelain socket neW-
s and substantial guards The requirements of
this section shall not apply to portable lambs used as properties in I
motion -picture set, on a studio stage or lot, or on location.
(g) Zndostng and Guarding Live Parts. Live parts
enclosed or guarded to prevent accidentalcontacby persons and ob*k
ty operable t type- Rheostats Ad be
All gwitehes shall be o the external.
placeidl in approved cases or cabinets which enclose all live parts, bavW
only the operating handles
(h) Grounding: Conduit. armored cable or metal raceways, ad
an noneurrent-earrying metal parts of appliances, devices, and equils'W-
shall be grounded as prescribed in Article 7 of the orders.This da
not Apply to pendent and portable lamps, nor to stage lighting And 013`0
sound equipment, nor to other portable or senu;crtaie special dw
equipment, operating at not more than 150 -volts to ground.
2M. Step Lighting and Effects. (al Switches sad
for Sup got Lighting and Effects. Switches used for stadio!"Ie Ot
lighting and effeets (on The st,"gelz And lots and ou 1048tiOD) 4W be of
the externally operable ty-pe. When contactors Are ��d .9 the SOA`
113, externally operable type swikl`
Twfing means for fus,- all illiliv'kl . each ewt
ted at a distance
do
(such as a tumbler switch) for the control ofas
rom the costs
,e of not more than, six feet f
loca
addition to remote control switches.
Zzooption: aneoA single externally operable svritA sesef be
8!10
used to Simultusly dim oliTteet all the contacts"of not more thusOW
lavation board. if located at a distance
from the location bow&
TITLE a Dwoom or lzmummub SArzTY 337
(Ragistww "o.3-2-ta-55) ArtioN M MoUon-pIvt#re61k4WW
(b) Enclosing or Guarding Un Parts. Current -carrying parts of
-bull-switehes,""loestion boards," "spiders," and pluggingboxasball
be so enclosed, guarded, or located that persons cannot accidentally come
into contact with them or bring conducting materials into contact with
them
(e) Portable Ara Lamps. Portable are lamps shall be nubstan-
tially constructed. The are rJiaU be provided with an enclosure designed
to retains and carbons and to prevent persons or materials from
coming into contact with the are or bare live parts. The enclosures *hall
be ventilated. All switches shall be of the exftm&Uy operable type.
(d) Overcurrout Protection—Short Tim. Rating. Automatic
o,kereurrent protective devices (circuit breakers or fuses) for feeders,
and sulifeeders for moving -picture studio stage set lighting ad the Stage
cables for such stage set lighting, shall operate on not more than. 400
percent of the values given in Table 1.
(1) The feeders from the substations to the stages shall
be protected by means of circuit breakers having suitable eur-
rent-carrying Capacity (generally located in the substation).
The circuit breakers may be double -pole, or two single -pole
breakers may be used. There need be no pole or overcurrout soil
in the neutral conductor. The circuit breaker setting for each
feeedersbafl not eTeeed 400 percent of the carrying capacity of
the feeder, as given in Table I for the kind of insulation =ad.
(2) Overcurrent protection (fuses or circuit breakers),
shall be provided at the "location boards." The fusec in th*
"location boards" shall be not larger than 400 percent of the
carrying capacity of the cables between the "location boards"
and the plugging boxes.
(3) Where plugging boxes are not provided with OvIff+..
current protective devices, each cable or cord smaller than No
8 supplied through a plugging box shall be attached to the
plugging box by means of a plug containing two cartridg* f=n
or a circuit breaker. The rating of the fuses or the setting of
the circuit breaker shall, be not more than 400 percent of the ad*
carrying capacity of the cables or cords as OTIM in T&blu I
and 2 for the kind of insulation used.
(4) Work -lights, stand -lamps, and fixtum shall be on-
neeted to plugging boxes by means of plugs containing two
cartridge fuses not larger than 20 amperes, or they may be con-
nected to special outlets on circuits protected by faces or ehw&W
breaker settings of not more than 2D amperes. Plug bass AMM
not be used unless they are on the load side of the face or circuit -
breakers on the "location boar -do."
(e) plugging RsxoL Each receptacle of plugging bom d"
have a safe current -carrying capacity of not Im than 80 MMIMPWIL
1141DUSTRUL RMATI NS 71lT.1s 8
f35, Ne.3–at
Article 21s. sound Recording
and similar EquiPnwnt
fig. Sui stations. (a) gigh'v conform
to Article 30.
High.voltage wiring and equipment
shall (b) Low-voltSge Zqu'P nL Low-voltageswitch
boards SW
conform to Article 11. wire D.0 6e•
(c) Overcurrent protection of .
craters shall have overeurrent protection safe current- consisting of f `
kUhm
carrying capacity. The circuit may be
having le, and need not have a or o as9
single pole two -pole,
in the neutral
Iead (whether it is grounded or )'
{d} Working space and . Working spaceand
to Order 2475. For gurft
in permanent fixed su tions a Mader WH(d).
of live parts on motors and gen than 250 volts
ge of more
D.C.
Switchboards for voltao
eondueterswhen locates ins d not be dead -front.
to qualified pelsomus t in Mable
(e) portable substations. Wiring and equipment po
t'ow'n par
substations shall conform to the due to the to avaikble, the
be
mtineat fixed subsea io be r but
provided that the equipment"be
working spaces ma+v do his work safely, and so that
otha
so arranged that the Operator may _
perms in ;the vicinity cannot acceatslly ffi oOwilk than
tact With 0"
rent -carrying' parts or bring conducting t
contact
while they are energised. metal parts sltiali be
(f) Grounding. Noneurrent-carrying
grounded except the frames of D -C. circuit breakers installed OR sw
boards. .
Article 25. Sound Recording and Similar EqQVment
2fi3:. Gam. (a) other Orders. Except as modified by °
article, wiring and equipment froom source of power m anderbetm
devices connected to the interior wiring systems shall ea®si?bP
ti" to 18, isciusive, of orders. Wiring and equipment fer
_input, radio-frequeney, sudio-frequency �
address, speech,' fated with rads receiving SULUM
amplifying equipment associated with Article 36 This
and
tralised distribution systems eom, -' } his
shall apply to installations of equipment
and wiring mead
recording and reproduction, eentraliseddistribution
address, -input and elect )
seams
tom. (a) R m
—
The number of conductors in a conduit or other raceway as f
Leith `Tables 3, #, 5 and 6, exceptor 1 may be
(1) Two ed the ale
in th uarter lash uit, p
of eseli cable d .11 square iach-
2T2LE' 8 Dtvmws or Irmusmaut, SAFETY 339
(RosiaterSkMe. s"='tg•ec3 Article 25. Sound Recording
and similar Equipment
(2) Two 2-conduetor No. 19 lead -covered cable may be
installed in one-half inch conduit, provided the sum of the cross-
sectional areas of the cable does not exceed 32 percent of the
internal cross-sectional area of the conduit.
(b) Wirewags and Auxiliary Gutters. Wireways and auxiliary
gutters shall comply with the provisions of Article 5 with the following
exceptions where used for sound recording and reproduction:
(1) Conductors in wireways or gutters shall not fill the
raceway to more than 75 percent of its cross-sectional area.
(2) If the rover of the auxiliary gutters is flush with the
flooring and is subject to the moving of heavy objects it shall
be of steel at least one-fourth inch in thickness or other material
of equivalent strength; if not subject to moving of heavy objects,
as in the rear of patch or other equipment panels, the cover
shall be at least No. 10 U. S. S. gauge. (.1345 inch).
(3) Metal -trough raceways may be installed in concealed
places if run in a straight line between outlets or junction
boxes. Covers of boxes shall be accessible. Edges of metal must
be rounded at outlet or junction boxes and all rough projec-
tions smoothed to prevent abrasion of insulation or conductors.
Raceways made of sections shall be bonded and grounded in
an approved manner in accordance with Article 7.
(e) Grounding wireways and Auxiliary Gutters. Metal wire -
ways and auxiliary, gutters shall be grounded in accordance with the
requirements of Article 7.
(d) Grouping of Conductors. Conductors of different systems
grouped in the same conduit or other metallic enclosure, or in approved
portable cords or cables, shall comply with the following requirements:
(1) Power -supply conductors shall be properly identified
and shall be used solely for supplying power to the equipment
to which the other conductors are connected.
(2) Input leads to a motor -generator or rotary converter
shall be run separately from the output leads.
(3) The conductors shall be insulated individually, or
collectively in groups, by insulation at least equivalent to that
on the power-sapply and other conductors, except where the
power -supply and other conductors are separated by a lead
sheath or other continuous metallic covering.
(4) Flexible cords and cables shall be of Types P, K. 8, SJ,
or other types specifically approved for the purpose for which
they are to be used. The conductors of flexible cords, other than.
power -supply conductors, may be of a size not matter than
No. 26 provided such conductors are not is direct electrical
connection with the power -supply conductors and are eqUiPPIld
with eurrent-limiting means so that the maximum power Under
any condition will not exeeed 1,50 watts.
$ INDugratet. IIi�ATIONS TITLE a
and
Article
i le 21ar BoEquipment
Rordng
(Rog WHO-s-Z-�-Iil
2528. Substations. (a) High vo Wiring and
High-voltage wiring and equipment shall conform to Article 38.
(b) Low -voltage Equipment. Low -voltage switchboards shell
conform to Article 11.
(e) ooercurrent Protection of Gencratom 'Three -wire D.C. go,
craters shall have overcurreut protection
The ring
in tOf ekteit
having safe current -carrying
rs 1247 be
single -pole or two -pole, and need not have
or u� undovvercurrent sail
in the neutral lead (whether it is grounded
(d) Working Space and Guarding. Working space and gaardisg
in permanent fixed substations sha Qo rs, see Order 2394475. For
gulw
of live parts on motors and gene
Switchboards for voltage of not more than 250 volts D.C. betl M
conductors when n� nsubstations eed not be dOr ead-witchboardfroDt. rooms
accesible
to qualified pe
(e} Portable Subetationg. Wiring and equipment in portable
pev
substations shall conform to the orders applying to installations mfle
manent fixed substations, but, due to the limited space ment ble,
working spaces
may be reduced, provided that the equ
so arranged that the operator may do his work safely, contact with Or -
persons
perms in the vicinity cannot aecidentally came into
tset with tbra
rent -carrying' parts or bring conducting objects c
while they are energised• metal parts sW be
(f)Grounding. Noneurrent-carrymg
grounded except the frames of D.C. circuit breakers installed on switch•
boards.
Article 25. Sound Recording and Similar Equipment
X32, general• (a) Other Orders. Except as modified et fibarticle, wiring and equipment from source of power o and 1>
devicesconnected to the interior wiring systems shacompwith
pt
tidies l o 16, inclusive, of these orders. Wiring and equipment
Input, radio-frequency, audio -frequency tio>w in a*
amplifying equipment speech -input, associated with radio receivmg stn
my with Articlemomied for 001
iralii� distribution systems, f equipmhis artille
ent and shall apply to installations of eq p
recording and reproduction, centralised distribution of 80111d, i
address, speeeh'mput systems and electronic organs.
tion. (a) Humber of Honda UZ-
The number of conductors in a conduit or other
racewsy
with Tables 3, 4, 5 and 6, except as follows:
(1) Two
lead -covered cables May 00
in three-quarter inch condult, provnled the
of each cable does not ex •11 square inch•
TPT= $ Drmox of INDusTatst. SAFETY 339
(Register 55, me. 3-4-19-55) Article 25. Sound Recording
and Similar Equipment
(2) Two 2 -conductor No. 19 lead -covered cables may be
installed in one-half inch conduit, provided the sum of the cross-
sectional areas of the cables does not exceed 32 percent of the
internal cry -sectional area of the conduit.
(b) Wireways and Auxiliary Clatters. Wireways and auxiliary
gutters shall comply with the provisions of Article 5 with the following
exceptions where used for sound -recording and reproduction:
(1) Conductors in wireways or gutters shall not All the
raceway to more than 75 percent of its cross-seetionai ares.
(2) If the cover of the auxiliary gutters is flush with the
flooring and is subject to the moving of heavy objects it shall
be of steel at least one-fourth inch in thickness or other material
of equivalent strength; if not subject to moving of heavy objects,
as in the rear of patch or other equipment panels, the cover
shall be at least No. 10 U. S. a, gauge. (.1345 inch).
(3) Metal -trough raceways may be installed in concealed
places if run in a straight line between outlets or junction
boxes. Covers of boxes shall be accessible. Edges of metal must
be rounded at outlet or junction boxes and all rough projee.
tions smoothed to prevent abrasion of insulation or conductors.
Raceways made of sections shall be bonded and grounded in
an approved manner in accordance with Article 7.
(c) Grounding Wirmmys and Auxiliary Oatters. ]!fetal wire -
ways and auxiliary gutters shall be grounded in accordance with the
requirements of Article 7.
(d) (trouping of Conductors. Conductors of different systems
grouped in the same conduit or other metallic enclosure, or in approved
portable cords or cables, shall comply with the following requirements:
(1) Power -supply conductors shall be properly identified
and shall be used solely for supplying power to the equipment
to which the other conductors are connected.
(2) Input leads to a motor -generator or rotary converter
shall be run separately from the output leads.
(3) The conductors shall be insulated individually, or
collectively in groups, by insulation at least equivalent to that
on the power -supply and other conductors, except where the
power -supply and other conductors are separated by a lead
sheath or other continuous metallic covering.
(4) Flexible cords and cables shall be of Types P, g, S, SJ,
or other types specifically approved for the purpose for whish
they are to be used. The eonduetors of flexible cords, other than
power -supply conductors, may be of a sine not smaller than
No. 26 provided such conductors are not in direct elsetriGal
connection with the power -supply conductors and are equipped
with current -limiting means so that the maximum Power Water
any condition will not exceed 150 watts.
ops
Aet`U48IL
em-
Te�'�ii%.ar fi=at` � � Dig+ �=�,�r
1", As -s mer suPPl7
. a. be pa -a am at as ',U qadn
Nmduet -* by a
Instana
a ;r -or ._ ra a batteries
21:x- bee
1601 . isstened in
v.og ba.. =- o -a 2s shaU be rubber-
(bi sera, r-ther ap `n v sem- sui fit
sdw purpose,- ••- �sisallbe
• itce-�� _ ..s:
(e)
Vida as eireni urban s^g�-s t h
(1) have ove2 i prstec :� nit es. 15
suppliedexils, Shan ben bs u�
theocerl p- .ti .n be not
lli) pe- t of the car -T * �t� WinbT s .rzcuit
($) �, . .� a v:ere7 p Bd
g' csroui n .:-tea by the eirezet
I10 pe. SjObe p aced i:� L-Szh gocitice fid.
' when ^p lighnng
(3) "
St,
C cirruam
S5- iY�,2rc Car z ='
grreiet3. fly: ex,. oneai9wt
have Dues be 1, tai as Dear AS PIL,
(4) int
fmable to the twhere ia riT ie'Ipply.
sal a,: _ AmpUers sad M
SM be - and, a . be of a ty pe aF fw lb
d&ws doll t - - 1=c8tkIns ;tall be s
fes- *e purpow
c lent sentt:ati �a>i be prodded to pn'
(b) tiT Within– the bc"Ising of SOO'
vast adangulmrue int
sodreedAUL
all be , seta
del) ,� =ere curl a a
They sball also be so c.:ated or p
1n . -
pment
_g£i,ts:� _ Equi
AIVUSO 2& e Is Of M& 962MIL (a' �•3aOrdw T �r arse 4
be to be in �u-zae�
Ulicis shall prescribed in Artiew. 1 ta, is. ® ` Iusa� g of
ectom ibe ,, sea c aa1
(b) Pry is gvvNed tPsT"hea- .�� t' -D n
tore blow
j,cur. U
TITLE a DivmaoN or INvutirauL $1rwy $41
(Register 55.No. 3--2-19-55) Artieb 26. Motion -picture Projectors end
Equipment
in motion -picture studios, shall be located in an approved projection
room. Such projection room shall not be considered as a hazardous loca-
tion as defined in Article 22.
(c) Nonprofessional Type Projectors. Projectors of the nonpro•
fessional or miniature type, if employing only approved slowburning
(cellulose acetate or equivalent) film, may be operated without a pro-
jection room.
2639. Equipment and Projectors of the Professional Type. (a)
Motor -driven Projectors. Motor -driven projectors shall be approved
for the purpose as an assembly or shall comply with all of the following
conditions:
(1) An approved projector shall be used.
(2) An approved projector lamp shall be used.
(3) Motors shall be so designed or guarded as to prevent
ignition of film by sparks or arcs.
(4) Projectors shall be in charge of a qualified operator.
(b) Wiring in Projection Rooms. Wiring shall be installed in
metal conduit or other approved metal raceways, in accordance with
Article 5 of these orders. A separate circuit shall be run to each of the
projection machines, stereopticons, and special effects machines. The
conductors shall be of sufficient size to carry the rated current of the
machine, but in no case shall the conductors supplying any machine be
smaller than No. 10.
(e) Conductor Insulation. Asbestos -covered conductors type AA
or other types of insulated conductors having a maximum operating
temperature of 200° C. (392° F.) shall be used on all lamps or other
equipment when the ambient temperature at the conductors as installed
will exceed 50° C. (122 F.).
(d) Lamp Guards. Incandescent lamps in projection rooms or
booths sh.11 be provided with an approved lamp guard unless otherwise
protected by noncombustible shades or other enclosures.
(e) Location of Equipment. Motor -generator sets, transformsn,
rectifiers, rheostats, and similar equipment, for the supply or control of
current to are lamps on projectors shall, if practicable, be located in sep-
arate rooms. If placed in the projector room, they shall be so located or
guarded that arca or sparks cannot come in contact with film, and motor
generator sets shall have the commutator end or ends suitably protected
from mechanical injury by wire screens or other suitable meam
(f) Equipment Prohibited in Projection Room. No switehesi
overcurrent devices, or otber equipment not normally required or used
for projectors, sound reproduction, flood, or other special alieet IWOP
or other equipment shall be installed in such booths or t
remote.eontrol switches for the control of auditorium lights or a swig
for the motor operating the curtain at the motion-pieture sereen.
0,11- ,r
a
by •.
he tollo
-in vaa
'".
%M att, �
"
e
SP.. sx
TITLE a DIVISION OF INDUSMAL SArerr 3"
(Regi N. No.3--;i-19-55) Article V. TMaters, Including
Motion -picture Houses
2543. Stage Switchboards. (a) Dead -front. Stage awiteh-
boards shall be of the dead -front type.
(b) Control and Overcurrent Protection of Receptacle Circuits.
Means shall be provided at the stage switchboard for the control and
individual overcurrent protection of branch circuits to stage and gallery
receptacles used for portable stare; equipment. Stage and gallery recep-
tacles shall be installed in approved pockets or enclosures.
(e) Metal good. Stage switchboards shall be provided with a
metal hood extending the full length of the board to protect all equip-
ment on the board from falling objects, unless the switchboard is recessed
in the building construction or is of the completely enclosed, dead -front
and dead -rear type,
(d) Dimmers. Dimmers shall conform to the following:
(1) If dimmers are installed in ungrounded conductors,
each dimmer shall have overeurrent protection not greater than
125 percent of the dimmer rating, and shall be disconnected
from all ungrounded conductors when the master or individual
switch or circuit -breaker supplying such dimmer is in the open
position.
(2) Resistance or series reactor type dimmer* may be
place -d' in rithe---r leg of the circuit.
(3) An auto -transformer type of dimmer shall be ener-
gized by a circuit operating at not more than 150 volts be-
tween conductors and the grounded conductor shall be eom-
mon to both the input and output of the auto -transformer.
UK Stage EgaiPment. (a) Circuit Loads. Footlights, bor-
der lights, and prosaeenium side lights shall be so arranged that no
branch circuit supplying such equipment will carry a load exceeding 15
amperes; provided that where heavy-duty lampholders only are used,
such circuits may conform to the provisions of Article 17 for circuits
supply heavy-duty lampholders.
(b) Footlights. Footlights shall consist of individual outlets with
lampholders, wired with conduit or flexible metal conduit, or the con-
ductors shall be encased in metal trough composed of not lest than No.
20 U.S.S. sheet metal gauge (.0359 -inch) treated to prevent oxidation.
Conductors shall be soldered to receptacle terminals, which shall be kept
at least one-half inch from the metal of the trough. Disappearing foot.
lights shall be so arranged that the current supply shall be automatically
disconnected when the footlights are replaced in the room desIgned
therefor.
(e) Cables for Border Lights. (fables for border lights Mall be
of approved type and shall be suitably supported. They shall be employed
only where flexibility is required.
R=AT10"_S Tn%z 8
344 (Ralliste, M
Article
Malian -Rictus Home"
p,,eptaeles intended for the connection of are
(d) 200OPtscim
by conductors sat wider than o- & pts l iteted3 for the
em-
nectian of mesad nt lamps have n=at less tisan 15 am
(e F Lamps is Sone Docks.. Lames installeel in �-es.e �rcl<s ahold
be so Iocated and guarded as to be free frau nsectsaaaicaa injury and pre
,vide an air space of not less than two inches between such lamps and
any combustible material.
(f) Ourtaju ljotom Curtain motors having brushes or sliding
contacts shall be of the totally-enclOmsed- er-el—d-fan—led- eUCkAed-
pipe-ventilated types; or have brush or sliding-contaet end of motor
enclosed by solid metal coven; or have brushes or sliding costileft
enclosed in substantial, tight metal housings -
(g) 11" Damper Control. if stage line dampers are released by
an clectrieal device, the circuit operating the latter shall be normalbe
closed and shall be controlled by at least two externally Operable swtebM
one switch being placed at the electrician's station and the other when
tThe device shall be designed for
designated by the inspection as rite. I
the full voltage of the circuit to which it is connected- no resistance being
insexted. It shall be located in the loft above the scenerY. and SW be
enclosed in a suitable iron box having a tight. sem-closing door -
i
(h) Special Ifacts. Electrical devices Used for s'alulating light-
ning, waterfeW and the Like, shall be 9D constructed and located that
flames, sparks, or hot particles cannot cone in contact with combutillis
material.
(j) Borden and prosconinin Si t& Borden and proseenlm
sidelights shall be constructed as pre-geribed in order 2544(b), da 110
suitably stayed and supported, and shall be so designed that the ft"d
of the reflectors or other adequate guard,
. will project the lamps frost
mechanical injury and from aecidental contact with se"ner.7 or OtW
combustible material -
(j) Are Lamp Rheostats. JZhft-,sta!s shall be enclosed in a Wall,
stantial, properly ventilated metal ease affording a clearance of at 10A
one inch between cose and resistance ejcjnent, if the rheostat il
mounted on the Imandard. a clearance of three inches above the fim
shall be maintained. Asbesteo-coverred t ----re AA conductors or equivallilt
shall be used between the rheostat and the la --,P-
'% Pendants. Lamp I-Udsnts SW
2W. Diressing ROOML �a,
not be installed in dressing room&
ece_.,," be
(b) Leaps. Incandescent lamps shall be r d. or
equipped with open-end guards securely fastened i-.
place on the Got -
let box.
TITLE a DIVISION OP INDUSTIO&L SAFETY 345
(Resister K No. 3-2-19-55) Article 27. Theatem. Including
Motion -picture Houses
2546- Portable Switchboards. (a) Supply. Portable switch.
boards shall he supplied only from outlets especially provided for this
purpose. Such outlet s3inl: o nsl,t of externally operable, enclosed fused
switches or circuit !eakers mounted on the stage wall or at the switch-
board in locations readily accessible from the stage floor.
W Overcurrent Protection. Circuits from portable switchboards
directly supplying equipment containing incandescent lamps of the
medium base or smaller types shall be protected by overcurrent devices
having a rating or setting of not more than 15 amperes. Circuits for
heaiy-duty lampholders may be used it overeurrent protection conforms
to the provisions of Article 17. Other circuits leaving the switchboard
shall be provided with overcurrent devices with a rating or setting not
higher titan the current required for the connected load.
W Enclosure. Portable switchboards shall be placed within an
enclosure of substantial construction which may be so arranged that the
enclosure is open during operation. Enclosures of wood shall be com-
pletely lined with sheet metal of not less than No. 24 U. S. S. gauge (.0239
inch), and if not of eorrosion-resistant, type shall be well galvanized,
enamelled, or otherwise properly coated to prevent corrosion.
W Switches and Circuit Breakers. All switches and circuit
breakers shall be of the externally operable, enclosed type.
to 1, Din~-ners. The terminals of dimmers shall be provided with
enclosures, and dimmer face plates shall be so arranged that accidental
contact cannot be readily made with the face -plate contacts.
(f) Interior Conductors. All conductors within the switchboard
enclosure shall be stranded and, except for cables feeding to or from the
switchboard, shall be asbestos -covered type AA or other types approved
for a maximum operating temperature of 200° C. (392° F.). Each con-
ductor shall have a eurTent-earrying capacity at least equal to the rating
of the circuit breaker, switch or cutout which it supplies, except for con-
ductors for incandescent lamp circuits having overcurrent protection
not exceeding 15 amperes. Conductors shall be enclosed in metal troughs
or securely fastened in position and shall be bushed where they pass
through metal -
(g) Pilot Light. A pilot light shall be provided within the enclo.
sure and shall be so connected to the circuit supplying the board that the
opening of the master switch will not cut off the supply to the lamp. This
lamp shall be on an independent circuit having overcurrent protection
of a rating or setting of not more than 15 amperes.
W Supply Connections. The supply to a portable switebboard
shall he by means of flexible cord (Types K or 8) terminating within the
switchboard enclosure or in an externally operable fused master switch
or circuit breaker. The supply cable shall have sufficient current -carrying
I -
RELA'floNS TITLE 8
:146
Article 28Signs and Outtim Lighting (Re9i5t*rS% No.
-
capacity to carry the total load On the aw'te"bord and al'sIlhe pr"terled
by overeurrent devices. be of the approvefl type and
(i) Stage Cables. Stage e8bleg shall from clamps and type
shall be so arranged that strain shall be taken v Pais
screws. Cables shall be Protected by metal i(bnlushwiintghsinwthhepr�,',Lvtzthcare can-
�l.,board
through metal or wood enclosures. The to Qt ,
enclosure of terminals or binding POs-ts to which stage cables
neeted shall permit convenient seem to the terminals.
Article 28. Sigun and ()utline Lighting
25491. General. (a) Other Orders. The requirements of this
article shall be deemed to be additional to, or amendatory of, those Pre-
scribed in Articles 1 to 1g. inclusive, of the -se orders.
(b) Approved Construction. Approved signs Shall be used and
shall be so etaistrueted that no ungrounded current-earrying Parts wil
- bee k, to contact of ejuph�vjvs on or in the buildng. Tk
norinalb, ,p(v,,e - in grounded circuitsishall be
Septa reeeptaelf,
'ell
screw 'Al contact or all si ircuit. The maker's name
colineeled to the grounded �nduetor of the cand conspicuously
and the approximate weight shall be permaneutty
marked on the exterior of signs. Signs shall not be attached to any fire
escape, nor be so installed as to interfere with the use of any fire eacape.
Eacl, outline lighting installation, and ea -a
(c) Switch Required. '
sign of other than the portable type, shall be controlled by an externallY
operable switch or eircuit-breaker which will open all ungrounded con-
duetom The switch shall be within sight of the sign or outline the open
ing
which it controls, or it shall be capable Of being locked in
position. d similar devices couu011mg
(d) Rating. Switches, flashers an
transformers shall be either of a type approved for the purpos% or
have a current rating not Im than twice the current ratio.- Of tin
transformers. terminal boxes and other
(e) Qrvanding. Signs, troughs. tube term
metal frames and enclosures shall lie grounded in themanner Of
xpeeifi�
in Article 7 of theordorders.isolated noneurrent-earrying metal PsrtB
outline lighting May be bonded by \o- 14 conductors and grounded in
accordance with Article 7.
(f, Load of Branch Circuit- Circuits shall be so arranged tbal
the number of outietb, legaps and transformers connected to them SW
in no ow place more than 15 amperes an a branch eimuit-
(g) Mwking. All signs shall be marked with the maker's nsW--
and for incendewent-jamp sigog with the number of IstophoNeig, ad
for electric discharge signs with input rating in amperes or volt -amps
Trandoram" shall be marked with the maker's U03010i and trandorss"
TITLE a Dwaitow odr INDusrmt, SAPETY 347
(Register 55. Ne. 3-2-19-55) Article 26. Signs and Outline Ligitting
for electric discharge signs WWI be marked with the input rating in
amPtrea or volt-amperes, the input voltage and the open -circuit high-
tension voltage. The marking of the sign shall be visible for inspection
after installation.
2550. Enclosures. (a) Conductors and Terminals. Sign boxes,
eabinets and outline troughs shall have conductors and torminala
enclosed.
(b) Cutouts, Flashers and Similar Equipment, Cutouts, flashers
and similar devices, if a part of the sign, shall be in a separate compart-
wentt. If not a part of the sign, they shall be enclosed in approved metal
boxes the doors of which shall be arranged so that they can be opened
without removing o6aruetions or finished parts of the enclosure.
(c) Enclosures Exposed to the Weather. Enclosures for outside
use shall be weatherproof and shall have an ample number of drain holes,
each not larger than one-half inch or smaller than one-quarter inch.
Wiring connections shall not be made through the bottoms of enclosures
exposed to the weather unless the enclosures are of the raintight type,
or other methods are used which will prevent water from entering the
raceway.
(d) Material. Except for portable signs of the indoor type, signs
and outline lighting shall be constructed of metal or other noneombusti-
ble material. %Vood may be used for external decoration if placed at lent
two inches from the nearest lampholder or current carrying part En-
closures shall have ample strength and rigidity. Sheet copper Shan be at
lead 20 ounce (.028 inch). Sheet steel shall be of not less than No. 28
U.S.S. gauge (.0149 inch) except that for outline lighting and for electric
discharge signs sheet steel shall be of not less than No. 24 U.S.S. gauge
(.0239 inch), unless ribbed, corrugated or embossed over its entire sur-
face, when it may be of No. 26 U.S.S. gauge (.0179 inch). All 3netallie
parts of enclosures shall be galvanized or otherwise protected from
corrosion.
255L Signs and Outline Lighting -400 Volts or Less. (a) Wir.
ing Method. Conductors shall be installed in rigid metal conduit, flex-
ible metal conduit, eleetrical metallic tubing, armored cable, or matal
troughing.
(b) Insulation and Sime. Conductors shall be of a type approved
for general use and, except in portable signs and for short Is&& Dal-
manently attached to lampholders or ballads, shall be not Smaller diest
No. 14.
(e) Exposed to the Weather. Conductors in rigid conduit, elec-
trical metallic tubing, flexible metal conduit, armored eabl% or in inew
troughing exposed to the weather, Shall be of the lead -covered type 4*
other type specially approved for the conditions, 4meept where rw "Ofta
dult, electrical metallic tubing, or other metallic enclosures an mAe
raintight and arranged to drain.
T1TT+>!i s Dtvromm or IN usTatAL BAPETr 349
(Revisterss. Na 3--3-19-55) Article E9. Signs and Outline tdehtina
(d) Transformers, Transformers shall comply with the follow -
(1) The transformer secondary open -circuit, voltage shall
not exceed 15,000 volts with an allowance on test of 1,000 volts
additional, In end -grounded transformers the secondary open -
circuit voltage shall not exceed 7,500 volts with an allowance on
tests of 500 volts additional.
(2) Transformers shall be of a type approved for the
purpose and shall be limited in rating to a maximum of 4,500
volt-amperea. Open core and coil -type transformers shall be
limited to 5,000 volts with an allowance on tests of 500 volts,
and to indoor applications in small portable signs.
(3) Transformers used outdoors shall be of the weather-
proof type or shall be enclosed in the sign body or in a separate
metal box.
(4) The high-voltage windings of transformers shall not
be connected in parallel; and shall not be connected in series,
except that two transformers each having one end of its high-
voltage winding connected to the metal enclosure may have
their high-voltage windings connected in aeries to form the
equivalent of a midpoint grounded transformer. The grounded
ends shall be connected by insulated conductors not smaller
than No. 14.
(5) Transformers shall be safely accessible.
(6) All metal enclosures even though portable shall be
permanently and effectively grounded in accordance with
.article 7, exeept that a No. 14 wire may be used for bonding
together isolated tube -terminal boxes or outline systems.
(e) Tubing. Electric discharge tubing shall conform to the fol-
lowing.
(1) The tubing shall be of such length and design as not
to cause a continuous over -voltage on the transformer.
(2) Tubing shall be adequately supported on noncom-
bustible. nonabsorptive supports. Tubing supports should, if
practicable, be adjustable.
(3) The tubing shall be free from contact with flammable
material and shall be located where not normally exposed to
mechanical injury. If operating in excess of 7,500 volts, the
tubing shall be supported on noncombustible, nonabsorptive,
insulating supporta which maintain a spacing of not less thea
one-fourth inch between the tubing and the nearest
(f) Terminals end Receptacles for Blectria Discharge
Terminals and receptacles for electric discharge tubing shallcomply
with the following:
(1) The terminals of the tubing shall be inaftessible 16
unqualified persons and Mated from eombusti'bk material cud
grounded metal or ehan be enclosed. if enclosed they,Aaft ha
TIM
350 l)NAUSTRaAa RraArs (e�aterel�.eta 3
Artlsh m. Isolated Plants o-sevolts
separated from grounded metal and combustible material by
noncombustible, nonabsorptive insulating mat appti*ovedfor
the purpose or by one and of air. T
ermials
shall be relieved from stress by the independent support of the
tubing. receptacles designed iaz
(2) If tubes do not terminate in
the purposes all Pave parts of tube terminals and conductors
shall
be so supported as to maintain a separates of at least am and
one-half inches between conductors or between conductors slid
any grounded metal.
(3) Electrode reeeptaeles for the tubing shall be of Ron
-
combustible, nonab,--ptive insulating material approved for
the purpose.
(4) Where electrodes; enter the enclosure of ontdoor
or of an indoor sign operating at a voltage in excess of 7,5A0
volts, bushings shall be used union receptacles are provided.
Bushings shall be of noncombustible, nonabsorptive materials.
(5) In the exposed type of show -window signs, terminale
shall be (1) enclosed by receptacles approved for the purpose
or (2) where hanging in air, free from grounded
fiber, phenolic composition,a ts
enclosed in sleeves of vulcanized
or
other suitable material which overlaps all live by
one-half inch. be used
(6) A flexible, nonconducting seal may
to close
the opening between the tubing and the receptacle or bushing
against the entrance of dust or moisture. This seal shall not be
in contact with grounded conductive material and shall non
be depended upon for the insulation of the tubing_
less
(7) metal enclosures for electrodes shall be of not
than No. 24 U.S.S. gauge (.0239 inch) sheet metal.
(8) Enclosures of insulating materialtshall benoncOw
ge of the
bustible, nonabsorptive and approved
circuit.
(g) Live Parts. Live parts shall be enclosed or suitably guarded
to prevent accidental contact.
Article 29. Isolated Plants 050 Volts
aft GeslaraL (a) Ott Orders. The requirements of this
article shall be deemed to be additional to, or amendatory of, those Pa'
scribed in Art' 1 to 18, inclusive, of these orders. This artcle e�
apply only to isolated generating Tants and systemai with willislit
an auxiliary storage battery, operating at is potential of less than 50 volt+.
Attention shall be given to the relatively low voltage at which tie
plants to thus requiring a greater current for equivalent ere O
and inga ten' am of conductors, Std
dedoevolt o
s
and appliances pared with those of tbe
TITLE S Atvrstox or I"versiAt, SAmmy 351
(Register's No. 3-2-tf•SS) Article 30. Circuits and Equipment Operating
at Mon Than MD volts
Branch Circuits. (a) Conductors. Conductors shall be
not smaller than No. 12, and for appliance branch circuits supplying
more than one appliance or appliance receptacle, conductors shall be not
smaller than No. 10.
(b) Connected Load. No more than eight lampholders or reeep-
tacles, nor a total lead of more than 320 watts, shall be connected to a
branch circuit. Motors or appliance of rating more than 320 watts
shall have a separate branch circuit.
(e) Lampholders. Standard lampholders of rating not less than
660 watts shall be used.
(d) Receptacle Rating. Receptacles shall have a rating not less
than 15 amperes.
(e) Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent protection shall comply
with the provisions of Article 6.
2563. Batteries. (a) Location. Batteries shall be located in
rooms or spaces having adequate ventilation.
(b) Support. Battery jars and cells, if not composed of insulat-
ing material such as glass or hard rubber, shall be mounted on insulating
supports of p l€tas or porcelain.
2564. Grounding. (a) Machines. The grounding of frames of
engines or generators is not required.
(b) Conduct. One of the circuit conductors shall be grounded
if conductors are run overhead between buildings.
Article 30. Circuits and Equipment Operating at
Afore Than 600 Volts
2567. General. (a) Other Orders. The requirements of this
article shall be deemed to be additional to, or amendatory of, three pre-
scribed in Articles Ito 18, inclusive, and Article 22.
(b) High-voltage Services. For high-voltage services, see Order
?334.
(c) Insulation. Conductors, devices and equipment shall have an
insulation or separation between parts of different potential and between
lice parts and ground, sufficient for the particular voltage employed.
(d) Interrupting Capacity. Overcurrent protective devices or
equipments of the fusible link or eircuit-breaker type shall have adequate
interrupting capacity for the short circuit current to be'int,errapted.
(e) Canstant-aarreat UP=
station and transformer vaults, a(
not be installed in buildings, and
circuits Mall not be installed in bui
352Operating t
Article 30. Cireui# and Equipment
st Mora Than x00 Veks yard wiring
(f) High.tol� Yard �'�� Ate' -voltam
Ur
with deza i�1fi acrd 2311.
be installed to conform onuduetnm (a) v
ggg$, InatallatiofMable for the voltage and the
coaddiass
conductors shall be of a ty wed.
under which they are Conductors shall be rum is rigid metal etsa-
]sthod red cable suitable for the and
purpm
duit,(br ew uet, Armo ti er moults, transformer
pmpeeq
except: {1) in substations, s-witeh rds �
and in the space back Of high only; (2) outside overhead wiring for
authorized and qualified persons 3 flexible table
shall comply with Orders 2,316 used
and 231T i gable equipment
to suppl}'
the use and purpose may,i No circuits of more than 25+� �
(e) Conductor Loe�►tion othse than. a reel'
between conductors shall be s tolled m any vaer or . t
station, transformers vault
� IX' f°
>
room, except asp@ byconcrete, brick, �
Condctors in conduit � g mless than, twojuebeethf ilbt
em
lent fire -ratan
sidered outside the and n. Where
Oo adu ed on is d
work lis er itted, the conductors shall be support .
for the purpose. Opts
ply, porcelain, or other ma apps"° . SM Le h '
ductora shall be separated not less than
apparatus and devices- They shall � not less than twoledig
from the surface wired over, and for voltages exceeding ing i Rd lea
inelndlne `iitsulaee £
than three inches Conductors and stability t insure tenan
tbI
awl have supports -
,sufficient strength
short-tireuit current.
required e2 Pot heads or wiped joints sha1111e
(e) Lesdcow dConduc les terminate, where lead
d eitber Pat
used where paper -insulated lead-shminaLd cab shall be used
heads or some other suitableter other a terminate-
sheathed
erminate
sheathed cables having insulation
f) Conduit to Conduits ,halltus or to �d b
( enclosures of appara
secured to the caning• erlsid
shields or to the
x shield, or enclosure, tip
boxes bolted or otherwise'securedt¢ t�acl�nr�, in substations, � m
in transformer vaults, iransf
spm of high-vo1 swi If
(S)of '4..fttaj toad t.
$brbus-tea a rubber i indicated in the f
F
r. t trt alitev
Ae�l. tip � teras,. �
tape. te, n"d
a elrsraa wires
as textile a9a fie. a a wv' lige }resat$
Tn%z 8 DWAM OF INAUSTRUL SAF6Tr 353
(Register 55. No. -19-55) Artiole a0. Circuits and Equipment
Operating at More Than 500 Volts
The semiconducting shield shall be an approved type.
Vottsye in Ike *bow wAioh
*Aieldify it regwrod
Neutral Neutral
ifetlied of tostwution arouaded uuyrauuded
Ia aacts er metal eondaito
is get or dump louts ------------ 2 2
In ducts or vestal tondafts
is permanently drj laeatisaa--- ------- et 2t
on issollatmg, only if multiple comiuctor------ 6 2
t s 11 dry atota8lie oandufts is some cases may contain auf stent moisture
to allow roma atioa or o:ooe and thvst damn�a nonshlelded cable at voltaitee above 2.000.
For Live practice it may be desirable to shield below the Ilmits gives.
(h) Grounding of Shielding. The shielding of shielded cable,
whether of the metallie or semiconducting type, shall be stripped back a
safe distance from the terminals for the voltage employed. The shielding
shall be grounded.
Osmtrol and Overcurrent Protection. (a) Bneloanre of
Apparel=. Switches, circuit breakers, and control apparatus installed
indoors on circuits exceeding 5,000 volts between conductors shall have a
metal enclosure such as metal -enclosed switch -gear, trucks, and cubicles,
or he installed in a fire-resistant switchroom or motor room or in a trans-
former vault_
If live parts of equipment in metal enclosures are accessible by
means of a door, the door shall be provided with a lock so that it cannot be
opened by unauthorized persons, or with an interlock which will prevent
opening unless the parts thereby exposed are de -energized.
(b) Overcurrent Protection. (For protection of high-voltage
transformers, see Article 9.) Each high-voltage feeder or circuit, each
high-voltage motor and each bigh-voltage unit of apparatus shall be
separately protected by one of the following:
(1) By means of an automatic circuit breaker capable of
being tripped manually which interrupts all ungrounded con-
ductors and has the number of overcurrent units specified in
Order 2369 (1). Where the motor control device meets all of the
requirements of this section of this order, the motor circuit
switch may consist of suitable isolating switches, installed to
conform to Order 2415. Fuses will not be required when the
taps between the buses and the motor control device are of the
same carrying capacity as the bus, or are at least one-third the
carrying capacity of the bus and are not more than 2;5 feet 10
(2) Approved oil -filled cutouts (without switches) In
ungrounded conductor. The cutouts shall be so located that they
will be readily and safely acleemble and so that the top of the
cutout will be preferably not more than Ave feet, but in ne
ease more than six and one-half feet above the door or plat.
fora►.
(3) By means of suitable bigh-vo tsge fulled cu(olbo
than oil filled type) in each ungrounded condudor. Vkft
Itct,USTItIA1, RELATrnz a
354( 5%utaa—a
Article 31. X-ray Equipn"nt
voltage fused cutouts are ted in a ing, or t
randermar
fault, they shall be of a type designed
for in buildings, and
where such cutouts are not suitable to interrupt switch he 't
manually while carrying full load, an approved
or can,
tactor shall be installed to i y and pt the safety�tire eadr
This switch
readily and ve n-
or contactor shall be
iently located with resp@et to the high-voltage circuit Unless
fused cut-uts are interlocked with the switch to Prrel t Opening
>d
of the cutouts under, load, a conspicuous Under placed be
such fused cutouts reading, "Do Not Ogethey nay n readily and "The
cutouts shall be f located thatshat the blowing of the fuse
ly
operated and refused; and uire that cutouts other than
will
not endanger persons. This will req
the oil -filled type be either hoop -stick operated. or gang operated
by a single operating handle. Sueb fuses shall either be so
located that the bottom of the cutout (in its closed position)
VI be not lea than seven feet above the Boor or platform, or
shall be installed in a suitable enel+sure- The door of such 611,
prevent openinof char
closure shall be interloekedt ed Even the enure load or from
all sources of supply
unless the fuses are Fuses shan be accessible from a clear
-
floor space.
(4) By means of suitable high-voltage Erased load inter-
rupter switches. Fuses shall be installed in a suitable cabinet
or similar enclosure. The dear of such cabinet or enclosure shall
to revent openiog
of the
oor unless the fuses are discocally interlocked 11-ith nnected from all sources
Of suPPly. will Isolating Nam for H*b Voltage Chet" led to
isoW
able air break Mating (disconnecting) switch shall be instal
Of ImP*
each oil-switeh or high-voltage circuit breaker from all �thet
unlessautomatic disconnecting switeh-gen equipment mdum
draw out type is used. The isolating switch _hail be installed to
with Orders 2416(c) and 2415. In bigbiy corrosive or hazardous lo
tions suitable Mating means of other than air break shall for a6w
isolating' means shall be installed in an enclosure approved
of the particular hazard involved -
(d) (}rounding. Eric]
osures of metal and all exposed noncurrent
ed U
carrying metal parts of high-voltage equipment aundingII be �isPw'
conform to Article 7 of these orders, eaeept where gro
Bally exempted. ; efeatiee thirtieta day taereatter (
giocry. 1. Amends filed 4
ter 2& Ne. 3)-tbidk*day thereafter
I Amendment AW 2"; effeeth*
Ister M No. all.
Article 31. X my Equipment
The requirements of
W7. Qwsmt wtWe AM be (tobe additional to, or amendatory of,
*1110
scribed in Articles 1 to 16, inclusive, of
these ordem
TIM a Division eV ItaocszstAL SArmT 355
(Resister SL Ne.3-2-11-55) Article 31. X-ray Equipment
(b) Scope. The provisions of this article shall apply tc all appa-
ratus embodying X-ray operating at any frequency, for medical use, for
examination of fabrim metals, or fruits. or for any other purpose. Unless
approved for the location. X-ray and related apparatus shall not be
installed nor operated in Hazardous locations or operated on a supply
potential of more than 600 volts.
(c) Canductom All conductors in the higb-voltage circuits that
are not in raceways shall be of the approved shockproof type.
(d) Fluoroscopes Tables. Leads on fluoroscope tables shall be ade-
quately insulated or suitably enclosed to prevent inadvertent contact.
(e) Milliammeter. If one side or midpoint of the higb-voltage eir-
enit is grounded, the milliammeter shall be connected to the grounded
lead and need not be guarded.
(f) Wiring Terminals. Equipment covered by this article shall
he provided with suitable wiring terminals or leads for the connection of
eond,ietors of at least the size required by the load corresponding to the
input rating of the equipment.
(g) Connection to Supply Circuit. X-ray apparatus permanently
installed sliall be connected to the power supply by means of a wiring
method tza<,ct± tlx:• gcnaeral requirements of these orders, except that
apparatus properly supplied by branch circuits not larger than a
30 -ampere branch eireuit may be supplied through suitable plug and
heavy-duto• cable or cord. Transportable X-ray apparatus of any capacity
may be connected to its power supply by approved heavy-duty table or
cord. An approved disconnecting means of adequate capacity shall be
provided in a location readily accessible from the X-ray control. For
apparatus requiring 115 volt tine fuses of 30 amperes or less, a plug and
receptacle of proper size and of an approved type may serve as a diseon-
neeting means.
66'Ji a. Coats eL (a) Stationary llgnipmemt. The low - voltage
circuit of the step-up transformer shall contain a circuit breaker having
no exposed live harts and which shall under all operating conditions
protect the radiographic circuit against fault conditions. If the design of
the high-voltage transformer is such that branch fuses having a current
rating lower than the current rating of the circuit breaker are required
for adequate protection for fluoroscopic and therapeutic circuits, they
Shall lie added for the protection of these circuits. The circuit breaker
shall he installed as a part of the equipment or directly adjacent thereto.
The circuit breaker shall be manually operable or else there shall be at
least one other switch which is manually operable in the low -voltage
circuit of the step-up transformer either as a part of the equipment or
directly adjacent thereto.
(b) Portable Portable equipment shall eompty with'
Order 2578 (a), except that no circuit breaker is requiredwben the "-
voltage parts, including the X-ray tube, ora within the mWe ftetAk
a
35s I �.z. a TITLE
Article 31. X-ray Equip--*
{Regieftr65, Me. 3 -2 -WIG)
enclosure which is provided with a proplocateder meat m for
gr the n m6- The
circuit breaker, when requires, ban bepie
equipment.
(c) GeneraL In addition to eomplyiag with ceders 2578{a) or
(b), as the ease may be, medical X-ray apparatus be provided with
controlling means as follows
) jadiagrapbic Type. A timer shall be provided and
controlled by a switch which stall be designed to open auto
maticallY except when held closed by the operator.
(2) V110=80006 Type- A switch shall be provided
which shall be devigned to open automatically except when hdd
closed by the operator -
(3) Therapy. A timer shall be provided which 'a not of
the repeating type- and
(d) Indtastrial Z -ray `pparatua. ed to open hioautand "Wt except
A switch which shall designed
�tiimer shall be provided.
when closed by the opera
{e} )root Switches. Switches operated by foot pressure shall be
loft
provided with a shield over the contact button to avoid aecid men used
unless the equipment is of the fully enclosed shockprooftype;
for radiographic work, the foot switch shall return automatically to tlts
X-ray oil position when foot pressure is remote
(f) Independent fbntxol. If more than one piece of apparatus h
of
operated from the same high-voltage circuit, each piece ei each group
apparatus as a unit shall be provided with a bigh-voltage switch or equim
lent approved disconnecting means • This disconnecting means shill be
constructed, enclosed, or bated so as to avoid contact with its live parts
2M Transformers and Capacitors. (a) GencraL Trans'
formers and capacitors which are part of an X-ray apparatus "W
be required to conform to the requirements of Order 2407.
he
(b) Draining Capacitor Changs' Lznless all he
lgits of capacitors, and of the conductors connected trewith, are
l sat eight feet from the floor and are inaccessible to unauthorized Pat -
sons, or unless when within eight feet from the floor are within
endw
ures of grounded metal or insulating material, capacitors shall be Pn'
aided with an automatic means for dise and grounding the
whenever the ormer primary is disconnected from the senna d
supply.
2MGurding. (a)All high-voltage parts shall be
mounted yin grounded en to Either air, oil or other suitable ism
lating media may be used to insulate the voltage from the ii�usm
enclosure. ui cot may bl
ZzoLive of high-voltage eq p
with toinstalled ble switches to open the enppiy
TITLE a DmuwN or lrousrxist. Saxgrr 357
(Reyiator5S.Ma3-2-11-55) Artini* 32. EmorpencyLighting
tea the X-ray unit except while the door of such room or enclosure
is locked from the outside.
(b) Enclosures of Wood. Wooden cabinets containing high-volt-
age parts shall be lined inside with approved fire-resistant material. The
high-voltage parts shall have adequate spacing from the walls of the
cabinet. High-voltage equipment containing a liquid that will burn shall
not be installed in wooden cabinets. Cabinets shall provide sufficient ven-
tilation for safe operation of the equipment therein.
(c) Therapy Tubes and Equipment. X-ray tubes used in therapy
shall be mounted in enclosures of grounded metal or insulating material
approved for the purpose. Unless fully enclosed in cabinets or cases of
grounded metal or of approved insulating materials, all high-voltage
parts of generators, rectifiers, filters and cooling equipment shall be
installed in a separate room or enclosure. Suitable arrangements shall be
provided whereby the switch controlling the supply circuit to such equip-
ment will necessarily be open, except while the door of such room or
enclosure is locked from the outside.
(d) Grounding. Noncurrent -carrying metal parts of tube stands,
fluoroscopic and other apparatus shall be grounded in the manner pre-
scribed in Article 7.
.Article 32. Emergency Lighting
2583. Emergency Lighting. (a) Scope. Where emergency
lighting is required by local ordinance, the State Fire Marshal, or other
governmental agencies, such systems shall include all required exit
lights and all other lights specified as necessary to provide sufficient
illumination to enable persons to see their way out of the building.
(b) Tests and Kaintenance. Systems shall be operated and tested
sufficiently frequently to assure their maintenance in proper operating
condition, and batteries shall be maintained in fully charged condition.
(c) Source. Current supply shall be such that in event of emer-
gency within the building or group of buildings concerned, emergency
lighting shall be available. A separate and independent service used
exclusively to supply emergency lights, exit lights or emergeuey equip.
ment shall be provided where required by this article. This emergency
service shall be supplied by one of the following methods:
(1) By a different serving agency than that sup the
regular lighting or equipment.
(2) By different primary mains from the same or a differ.
ent substation than the mains supplying the`regular lighting or
equipment.
(3) By a suitable storage batt (automobile es rNt
lead batteries of other than the scaled jar type ate not considered
suitable) which complies with the following requirements t
Safi INDUVMREALRELATIONS
Article 31. X-ray 9"ip"Se"t t 88
enclosure which is provided with a proper means for grounding. q"
circuit breaker, when required, shall be located in or on the portable
equipment.
(c) General. In addition to complying with Orders 2578(a) or
(b), as the case may be, medical X-ray apparatus Shall be provided with
controlling means as follows:
(1) Ra+diagraphia Type. A timer stall be provided and
controlled by a switch which shall be designed to open auw
matically except when heli closed by the Operator
(2) Fluoroscopic Typs. A switch shall be provided
which shall be designed to open au except when held
closed by the operator.
(3) Therapy. A timer shall be provided which is not of
the repeating type.
(d) Industrial X-ray Apparatus. RacUographia and
Types. A switch which shall be designed to open automatically except
when held closed by the operator or a timer shall be provided.
(e) Foot Switches. Switches operated by foot pressure Shan be
provided with a shield over the contact button to avoid accidental closing
unless the equipment is of the fully enclosed shockproof type. When used
for radiographic work, the foot switch shall return automatically to the
X-ray off position when foot pressure is removed.
(f) Independent Control. Iff more than one piece of apparatus is
operated from the same high-voltage circuit, each piece or each group of
apparatus as a unit shall be provided with a high-voltage switch or equiva-
lent approved disconnecting means. This disconnecting -as= shall be
constructed, enclosed, or located so as to avoid contact with its live parts.
2579. Transformers and Capacitors. (a) General. Trans-
formers and capacitors which are part of an X-ray apparatus shall not
be required to conform to the requirements of Order 2407-
(b) Draining Capacitor Charge. Unless all current -carrying
parts of capacitors and of the conductors connected therewith, are at
least eight feet from the floor and ate in ble #o unauthorized per-
E'oruul
of grounded metal ar insulating tenial, capacitors shapro-
with an automatites
ever the transformer primary is ectad faro the source of
supply.
2580.Guardft.(a) GasAff.ML All high-voltage parts shall be
mounted in grounded enclosures. Either air, oil or other suitable iDan-
lating media may be used to insulate the high tNe from the groomed
enclosure.
]bz:Live parts of high-voltage equipment may he
installed in separate room Of enclosures which are proms
with suitable ated switches to qpeo the supply eiraoit
TITLE a Dxvnwx OF INDUSTUUL SAMTY 357
(Reai*twMNo. 3--2-19-53) Article 3Y. EmorpencYUahtina
v{ the X-ray unit except while the door of such room or enclosure
is locked from the outside.
(b) Enclosures of Wood. Wooden cabinets containing high-volt-
age parts shall be lined inside with approved fire-resistant material. The
high-voltage parts shall have adequate spacing from the walls of the
cabinet. High-voltage equipment containing a liquid that will burn shall
not be installed in wooden cabinets. Cabinets shall provide suffieient ven-
tilation for safe operation of the equipment therein.
(e) Therapy Tubes and Equipment. X-ray tubes used in therapy
shall be mounted in enclosures of grounded metal or insulating material
approved for the purpose. Unless fully enclosed in cabinets or cases of
grounded metal or of approved insulating materials, all high-voltage
parts of generators, rectifiers, filters and cooling equipment shall be
installed in a separate room or enclosure. Suitable arrangements stall be
provided whereby the switch controlling the supply circuit to such equip-
ment will necessarily be open, except while the door of such room or
enclosure is locked from the outside.
(d) Grounding. Noncurrent -carrying metal parts of tube stands,
fluoroscopic and other apparatus shall be grounded in the manner pre-
scribed in Article 7.
Artlele 32. Emergency Lighting
2585. Emergency Lighting. (a) Scope. Where emergency
lighting is required by local ordinance, the State Fire Marshal, or other
governmental agencies, such systems shall include all required exit
lights and all other lights specified as necessary to provide sufficient
illumination to enable perms to see their way out of the building.
(b) Teats and Maiutenance. systems shall be operated and tested
sufficiently frequently to assure their maintenance in proper operating
condition, and batteries shall be maintained in fully charged
(c) Source. Current supply shall be such that in event of esner-
gency within the building or group of buildings concerned, emergency,
lighting shall be available. A separate and independent service used
exclusively to supply emergeney lights, exit lights or emergency equip-
ment shall be provided where required by this article. This emergency
service shall be supplied by one of the following methods:
(1) By a different serving agency than that supplying the
regular lighting or equipment.
(2) By different primary muins from the same or a differ-
ent Substation than the mains supplying the regular lighting or
equipment.
(3) By a suitable storage battery (automobile batteries or
lead batteries of other than the sealed jar type are not considered
which implies with the following requirements :
INnusrsiAL };ELATlo.`1S TITLE 8
356(Register 55, Na 3-2-t9-56)Article 32. Emergency Lighting
(A) Has capacity to supply all such lights and equip-
ment for one-half hour and atilt have a terminalvoltage of
not less than Ij volts per eell. on the
(13) Is connected to a low rate
charger located same premises which will automatically maintain maximum
charge schen battery is not supplyingr located on the
(C) Is cow to a high rate charge
same premises which will fully recharge it automatically
from a terminal voltage of 1t volts per cell in not to exceed
16 hours. with the foregoing
(D) Is maintained esP lights or equipment
requirements as long as it suPP such
(4) By a generator set, driven by some form of prime
mover and of capacity sufficient to supply circuits earrying
emergency lights and equipment, with suitable means for auto-
matically starting the generator on failure of the normal service.
(5) By a suitable dry -cell battery one half upacity to
supply all such lights and equipment
wa and wags Each hallway, corridor, exit
(d) xa11 fo er, or vestibule shall be provided with emergency
geway, lobby, Yone outlet
lipghting. Such lighting shall consist of nit less than �t or lei equipped
lengt3►
with a lighting fixture or lanipholder far each fifty
of such hallway or similar passageway- is uired by Order
(e) Ezit Lights. Where emergency lighting req-
25S3ta), suit lights shall be provided over all required swim and at other
pointe where the line of travel to an exit is not plainly evident Erit lights
shall not be over two feet above exit openings. Exit lights over door
ways or exit openings shall be behind a suitable glass panel or other
suitable in h o word "Exit" material. Letters of the word and p"Exit sbsll
on or cut! snob g lights shall have at least two lamp -
be at least five inches in height. Exit lied by
an emergency lighting serviceholders, one of which shall be Supp `
and the other by the general lighting• required to have emer-
(f) Stairways for occupancieslight_
geney lighting by Order 2583 (a) shall be provided with emergency ods
ing consisting of a lighting outlet equipped with a fixture or lampholder,
within five feet of the top and bottom of the stairway for each 8tor7,
and for each landing which is over 20 rigs from both top and bottom
Of such stairway, or of equivalent lighting, suPpiled from the req
emergency serviee, devie�
(g) Derangement Audible and visual signal
shall be provided, where possiW to give warning of derangement of
emergency illumination current their proper fuse-
emergency
and to indicate when batterus or generator rets are carrying
theemergency illumination load.
TITLI3 8 DIVISION of INDUSTRIAL SAFETY 356.1
(Register S& No. 3-2-19-65) Article 33. Electric Welders
(h) Automatic Transfer. Suitable devices approved for the pur-
pose shall be provided to automatically transfer from the no -:nal supply
to the emergency lighting system in case of failure or damage to the
normal supply system. Where both the emergency lighting and the normal
supply system are kept lighted, the automatic transfer device will not be
required.
(i) Control. Circuits for emergency lighting shall be controlled
through one switch accessible only to authorized persons. Thi circuits
shall not be connected to or controlled by a stage lighting control.
(j) Circuits Required to Be Kept Energized. Emergency lighting
systems, where required by this article, shall be kept energized whenever
such building or pt+rtion thereof is occupied and there is not sufficient
natural light therein or therefor to permit persons to easily, conveniently
and safely use hallways, stairways, corridors or similar passageways.
Article 33. Electric Welders
2586, Geenerai. (a) Other Orders. The requirements of this
article shall be deemed to be additional to, or amendatory of, those pre-
scribed in Articles 1 to 18, inclusive, of these orders. This article covers
extensively used types of welders which require special treatment, as
distinguished from welders which do not require special treatment and
welders noun eonant.)a use and not yet developed to the extent that rating
and construction standards are possible. Alotor-generator are welders are
covered by the appropriate orders of Articles 1 to 18. inclusive. and do
not require special mention here.
2587, Transformer Are Welders. (a) Capacity of Supply Con-
ductors. The current -carrying capacity of conductors shall be as
follows
(1) Individual Welders. The current -carrying capacity
of the supply conductors shall be not less than the rated primary
current of the welder.
(2) Group of Welders. The current -carrying capacity of
conductors which supply a group of welders may be less than
the sum of the rated primary currents of the welders supplied.
The conductor rating shall be determined in each case amrd-
inQ to the welder loading based on the use to be made of each
welder and the allowance permissible in the event that all the
welders supplied by the conductors will not be in use at the
same time. The load valve used for each welder shall take into
account both the magnitude and the duration of the load while
the welder is in use.
Conductor ratings based on 100 percent of the rated pri-
mary current of the two largest welders, 85 percent for the
third largest welder, 70 percent for the fourth largest welder.
and 60 percent of the rated primary current for all the remain-
ine welders. should provide an ample margin of safety under
3611.2 IsDusTRUL Tna:es 71M 8
Artlele 33. Ebatrle Walden (�-
high production conditions with respect to the lmaxmulm per
miible temperature of theconductors. Percentage values lower
than those given are permissible in came where the work is auk
that a high operating duty cycle for individual is
impossible.
(b) overcurrent Protection. Overeurrent protection aign be
provided as follows: If the nearest standard of the overcurreat
device used is under the value specified in this order, or if the rating or
setting specified results in unnecessary of the Overcurrelit
the next higher rating or setting may be
(1) Each welder shall have overcurrent protection rated
or set at not more Than 200 percent of the rated primary ear.
rent of the welder, except that an overearreat device M WA
required for a welder having supply conductors protected by
an overeurrent device rated or set at not more than 200 percent
of the rated primary current of the welder.
(2) Conductors which supply one or more welders duan
be protected by an overeurrent deviee rated or set at not mm
than 200 percent of the conductor rating.
(e) Disconnecting Means. A controller shall be provided in the
supply connection of each welder why is not equipped with a con,
troller mounted as an integral part of the welder. The controller AA
be a motor-eireuit switch or a eireui er. The ampere ratite shall
be not leas than the rated primary current of the welder. The horsepower
rating of a switch used as a controller shall be not las than the numerical
value obtained by multiplying the rated primary current of the Weldw
by 0.1, 0.2 or 0.25, respectively, for 2`- , 440- and 550 -welt welders. Tlmae
factors apply to 2 -pole
(d) Name Plate. A name plate giving the following information
Shall be Provided: Name of manufacturer, frequency, primary voltage
rated primary current, maximmu open-eireuit secondary voltage, rata!
secondary current. basis of rating, i.e., the duty cycle, 30 -minute rating
or toil -minute rating.
Resistance Welders. (a) Capacity of Supply Condactem
The current carrying capacity of the supply canducters necessary be
limit the voltage drop to a value permissible for the satisfactory per.
formanee of the welder is usually greater than that required to Prevent
overbeetilig ae prescribed in the following paragraphs (1) and (2) :
(1) The eurreni-carry sng capacity for ceaducton
individual welders shall conforin to the following:
(A) Y The eurrent-carrying c
paeity of the supply conductors for a welder which moi
be operated at different timen at different values of Pr -'-.Mary t or duty be not lea than 10
percent of the rated prissary current for seam and auto
TME a Dmisio- OF INDUSTRUL SAF9TY 3N.3
(Register 63, Wei—E-89-55) Article 33. aiseb ie Wdtdm
maticallY fed weldern, and 50 percent of the rated prisury
current for manually operated nonautomatic welders.
($) Specific Operation. The current carrgia� ,.
pacity of the supply conductors for a welderwired for a
Gliscifie operation for which the actual primary currant
and duty cycle are known and remain unchanged ehali be
not las than the product of the actual primary nairgat
and the multiplier given below for the duty gale at which
the welder will be operated.
DULY ewe__--_ 90 u► ao los 20 is io TA cal or leas
Meru *er .71 .e$ Ss .00A6.Ss .32 .27 U
(2) Groups of Welders. The current -carrying capacity
of conductors which supply two or more welders shallbe not
less than the sum of the value obtained as explained in para-
graph (1) of this order for the largest welder supplied, and 60
percent of the values obtained as explained in paragraph (1)
of this order for all the other welders supplied.
(3) ZXPUMU= of Tam. (1) The rated primary cur-
rent is the rated kva multiplied by 1,000 and divided by the
rat -3 primary voltage, using values given on the name plate
(2) The actual primary current is the current drawn from the
supply circuit during each welder operation at the particular
heat tap and control setting used. '(3) The duty cycle' is the
percentage of the time during which the welder is loaded. For
instance, a spot welder supplied by a'60 -cycle system (216,000
cycles per hour) making four hundred' 15 -eyrie welds per hour
would have a duty cycle of 2.8 percent (400 multiplied by 15,
divided by 216,000, multiplied by 100). A seam welder operat.
ing 2 cycles "on" and 2 cycles "off" would haves a duty eayctbe
of 50 percent.
(b) Oveercarrent Protection. Overeurrent protection shall be pro- .
vided as follows: If the nearest standard rating of the overeurrent
device used is under the value specified in this order, or, if theor
setting specified results in unnecessary opening of the *reorreut de.
vice, the neat higher rating or setting may bound.
(1) Each welder shall have an overeurrent
or set at not more than 300 percent of the rataei
rent of the welder, except that an OvOrloartinit
required for a welder having a supplq', elreuft�� b9
overeurrent device rated or set at not mmira p
of the rated primary; current of the welder.
(2) Conductors which supply one or more
be protected by an overcurrent device rated or ret
than 300 percent of the conductor rating.
s—aassa
,trig 4
Arlb+�we �i4 �l eervM+t+.ar#rai, i„�+w sns=gf £R�s�tRr *�. Ei�m. ��
Maher sr..f t3�yre9 r,argx=��
#,) Dfwinnectmg Meens. 4, t witch or eircuit- er is
Iavvisled try whiel, taeta wo�itkr awl its contral equipment embeice.
nte,l frrnn tl�e aupply eireuit- 'Tkt rrrcapacity lef tilie
situ, �,nnrrtirag rrrraug 4.&11 be asst less than the supply
deternwined as explained in this article. The supply circuit ceiteit my
he iswolax tlwe welder disconnectinc means disconnect'if the circuit supplies
one welder.
(d) Name date. A name plate giving the following infamsfin
shall be provided: Name of manufacturer, frequency, primarywitam
rated kva at 50 pereent duty cycle, maximum and minimum, opea4seek
sccwcoliclary voltage.
Article 34. Lightiting Arresters
5591. Lightnitsr Arresters. (a) Beops, When lightning a,-
resters ars provided On lighting or power eircuits, they shaft be inkU
in accordance with the Provisions of this Article -
(b) 0022aotionis-4 isst and Material. The eouneetk= betwess
the arrester and the line wire or bus, and between arrester and volied
shall be of copper wire or cable or the equivalent, and, exec$ m FuMd
on secondary services in Order (a), Beall not be mslkr t1eia Ado. t
and shall be made as short and as t as PrVicticaW STsidigg sefs'
tae possible all bends and turns, espeeiaft sharp bends.
(e) humUtion. Lightning protection accessories such m sap
electrodes, and choke coils if used, shall have an insulation freer
or from other conductors at least equal to the insulation required at
points of the circuit.
(d) Ground . l igbtning arresters shall be grounded is the
manner prescribed in Article 1.
Article 35. Re este-c trol. Low
Power and Signal Circuits
The provisions of this article shall apply to electrical eireum u
control any other circuit tlsrc,1, a relay or an equi t devassified in ths
ice;
which lave it car power supply f=
� � to s dere
)owing arlicle: anti Ut c rc ii
VW
gives s reeiv nizaW signal trnl ad
Sw General. :&" C'1 Remote
ak cir iaat shall 1'ec a A'S follows"hich i<
POW
i i al k
with t~
r 2W(
S)
s i flea the
.
ami
ci .ts in ) M
s DrnmN or IVnUSTatA.L SAFETY 3".5
(Register 5% No. 3-2-19-55) Article E5. Romete-eentrel. l ow-onergy
Power and signal ciraalb
(2) Circuits which are neither remote -control nor signal
circuits. but which have the power limited in accordance with
Order 2595 shall be classed as Low-energy Power Circuits and
shall be treated as Class 2 remote -control circuits.
(3) Remote -control circuits to safety -control devices, the
failure of operation of which would introduce a fire or life
hazard, shall be considered as Clan 1 circuits.
(4) Remote -control and signal circuits, which use o n-
ductors in the same cable with communication circuits, shall
be classified as communication circuits and shall meet the
requirements for communication circuits in these orders.
2595. Blass 1 Systema. (a) Wiring Method. Conductors and
equipment of Class 1 remote -control and signal systema shall be installed
in accordance with Article 5 of these orders except as provided in this
order.
(b) Other Articles. The wiring method required in Order 2595
(a) does not apply where other articles of these orders specifically,
permit or require other methods for remote -control or signal eircuits.
(c) Conductor Sizes. Nos. 18 and 16 gauge conductors may be
used if installed in a raceway or in flexible cords or cables approved for
the purpose.
(d) Oonductor Insulation. Conductors suitable for the purpose
shall be used.
(e) Mechanical Protection. All conductors of remote -control cir-
cuits shall be suitably protected from mechanical injury.
(f) Overcurrent Protection. Conductors shall be protected
against overcurrent in accordance with Article 6 except as follows:
(1) Where other articles of these orders specifically per-
mit or require other overcurrent protection.
(2) Conductors of Nos. 18 and 16 shall be considered as
protected by overcurrent devices of 15 ampere rating or setting.
(3) In remote -control and signal circuits having main
and branch circuits, the branch circuits need not be individually
protected against overcurrent, if the operating voltage does not
exceed 30 volts.
(g) Location of Overcorrect Protection. Overourrent devices
shall be located at the point where the conductor to be protected receives
its supply unless the overcurrent device protecting the law conductor
also protects the smaller conductor.
(h) Circuits 8ztending Beyond One Build1W Claasi I resects.
control and signal circuits which extendedens building
WWI also meet the requirements for outaudg _ in these ardsm
IirnusTMAL RVATtor:a TM i
3M.6 (Resi4t*rftN& ---
Article 85. Remote -control, Low-eaereY
Power and 8lenai Circuits
(i) {hounding• trot and signal circ
nits
Class 1 remot �
be grounded in accordance with Article 7 follows:
(1) If supplied by a separate controltransformer
a system having a nominal, voltage to ground of more
Van
150 volts
(2) If ran overhead outside of building, and � ran m is
uctors opwWn
be liable to accidental contact power coed
at a voltage exceeding aW
Clan S (a) Limitation 2 remete-coatrel
and siggnnal systema=
26depending on the voltage shall have the
limited as follows: satintt at not more thea 15 vol
(1) Circuit ope If Protection of not more than Svc
ts Ed
rating. the
having f the went current
sSupply is from a transformer � or
device having inherent current -limiting ",the
proved for the purpose, or from primary batteries,
current protection may be omitted.
ut got 1MR
(2) Circuits operating at more than 15 of not son
than 30 volts, and having overeurrent Protection
than three amperes rating. If the current anpply a
transformer or other device having inherent current -11 ..
characteristics and approved for the purpose, or from primau
batteries, the oeescurrent protection may be omitted.
3) Circuits operating at more than 30 volts but act
more than 60 volts, and having oycreutreut protection, 10 ad
more than 11 amperes rating If the current supply is h'm a
c anaformer or other roved for the purpoevice having t the
characteristics and sup
protection may be omitted ore than 60 volts but ad RIM
TO trotecttoa M
(4) Cireuits operating at
than 150 volts and having overcurrenP
more than one ampere rating, provided that such X ae
equipped with cumn►t-limiting' m ° II fag
protection which will limit the eurrent as a result of :
to not exceeding one ampere
`an end ii8ountiug• Where tuQr+.at�
(b) Ov t of overeurrent P
limited in Cl 2 systems by
be approved
the p 0W
protection and its mounting shallof an
current protection of di t ra '
ugg shsIl not be
of a
protection may be an ant part
type. The overcurrnnt p approved for the p
or other power supply Ravine ap saPplgmi
'franRiormcr devices
ro for the p and be re s be
w in
2 (e) tems shall be approved
100
volt-amperes- They 111111ratell output to not ex w the voltagebe applied to the
wbere plainly visible to
,wber or not of the current -limiting
type-
TITLZ E Oa mi; OF Ixnirs-raui, SAmy 858.7
(Register 55, No. 3 -2-71.55) Article 85. Remote -control, Low-eneroY
Power and Signal Circuits
(d) Ins tion. Supply Side of Overcurrent Protecti::n. Trans-
formers or Current limiting Devices. Conductors and equipment on
supply side of overcurrennt protection, transformers or current -limiting
devices shall be installed in accordance with Article 5 of these orders.
Transformers or other devices supplied from light and power circuits
shall be protected by an overeurrent device with a rating or setting not
exceeding 15 amperes.
(e) butallation. Load Side of Overcurrent Protection. Trans-
formers or Current -limiting Devices. Conductors on load side of over -
current protection, transformers or eurrent-limiting devices shall be
insulated and shall comply with the following:
(1) Conductors shall be separated from conductors of
light and power circuits as follows :
(A) Conductors shall be separated at least two inches
from any light or power conductors not in a raceway unless
permanently separated from the conductors of the other
systems by a continuous and firmly feed nonconductor,
such as porcelain tubes, or flexible tubing, additional to the
insulation on the wire.
(B) Conductors of Class 2 remote -control and signal
circuits shall not be placed in any raceway, compartment,
outlet box, junction box or similar fitting with conductors
of Class 1 remote -control and signal circuits unless the eon-
ductors of the two systems are separated by Is partition, or
with light and power circuits unless the conductors of the
two systems are separated by a partition provided that
this shall not apply to conductors in outlet boxes, junction
boxes or similar fittings or compartments where such con-
duetors are introduced solely for power supply to remote -
control or signal circuits.
(C) Conductors may be run in the same abaft with
conductors for light and power if the conductors of the two
systems are separated at least two inches, or if the con-
ductors of either system are encased in noncombustible
tubing. In hoistways conductors shall be installed in rigid
conduit or electrical metallic tubing except as provided
for in Order 2505(c).
(2) Conductors bunched together in a vertical ran in a
shaft shall have a fire-resistant covering capable of preventing
the carrying of fire from floor to floor except where conductors
are encased in noncombustible tubing or are located in a fire-
proof shaft having fire stops at each Scor.
(f) Circuits Extending Beyond One Building. Class 2 remote -
control and signal circuits which extend beyond one building and are
so run as to be subject to accidental contact with light or power eondue-
tors operating at a voltage exceeding 900 volts, shall also Meet with the
requirements for protection of and installation of outside Wiring for
communication circuits.
Ixtmsrmet, RMA'r>oxs TOU 2
858.8lineae. N*.a—s-"
Article 86. Communication Circuits
Article 36. Communication Circuits )
(bIt
(bee article 35 for M to �� L ow-ene= d of this article
8598. (leneral. (a) Scope. The pro ,
apply to telephone and telegraph {except rads¢}'district meneum
ke
and similar Central statin Circuila sad
and burglar alarms,gwthin the scope of this article and installed in I
apparatus coming 1 with the provisions of Article 22.
hazardous locations, shall comply
The provisions of other sections of these mall rat AW
Charging generators,betterstorage batteries, and other
tions ate signaling provided that such equipment is not is
tion system equipment,
commercial electrical supply systema'
The requirements of Article 37 shall.
tus forming not aP� h commun.
duetoa
supplying power solely to appy
system, where such conductors are in Communication t� e� b is
tively grounded continuous metal sheaths, and that they
in
such cables are owned and operated by the sans Farcy
maintained only by sutharised and qualified empioycos.
{b) Protaative Devitt A protector approved for the
shall be provided on each rarcuit, aerial or underground, leesteti witt:la
the block containing the building served as to liable to accidental �
tact with light or power conductors operating at a voltage
not
volts, and on each circuit run partly ar entirely in aerial wire &
PM
confined within a block. Such circuits are classified a ascan a e
word44 block'$
`block'$ as used ill this article shall be Co codosed by and inea sq tle
or portion of a city, town, or village
alleys so enclosed but not any street.
(1) Lonelier. The protector shall be located
the building as Dwas practicable to the Point
d trance the F*doctors enter. In the ease of an underground
teetor may be located at the jnnctian of the underground and
the aerial wires.
(2) Rasardous Locatim& The protector shall not be
located in any hasardous location as defined in Article 22,
aw
in the vicinity of easily ignitible material.
ls. The protector sW be
mounter on as noncombustible, protectornonabsorptive insulating bw
ttef
and shall of an er be each line �
the ff
and the ground, and a the arrester except fuse in each �e paragraph protecting
plainly
The Protector terminals shall
011tW to m&&
line, instrument, and ground. the
(4) 0We'Yuses provided the BMW proteeting
may be an .bentering a bdlosth of tiny
cab*
TITLE 8 DMSWN or INoaaraisL S!laTT 858.9
(Roaisler 5% No. 3-2-19-55) Article 3L Communication CMouits
grounded and the conductors in at least a section of the cable
between the exposure and the arrester are No. 24 or smaller.
A protector without fuseg may be used where insulated con-
ductors are used to extend circuits to a building from a cable
having a grounded metal sheath provided the protector is
approved for its purpose.
(c) ljastalkUou of Unexposed Conductors. Conductors from the
protector to the equipment or, where no protector is required, conductors
attached to the outside of, or inside the building shall comply with the
following:
(1) sepanWon From other Conductors. (A) Light and
Power Conductors. Conductors shall be separated at
least 2 inches from any light or power conductors not in
metallic racceways or metal -sheathed cable unless perma-
nently separated from the conductors of the other system
by a continuous and firmly feed nonconductor, additional
to the insulation on the wire, such as porcelain tubes or
flexible tubing.
(B) Lightning Conductors. A separation of at least
six feet shall be maintained between communication Con-
ductors on buildings and lightning conductors.
(C) In Raceways and Boxes. Communication con -
due -tors shall not be placed in any raceway, compartment,
outlet box, junction box or similar fitting with conductors
for light and power circuits or with Class 1 signal and
control circuits unless the conductors of the different
systems are separated by a partition; provided that this
shall not apply to conductors in outlet boxes, junction boxes
or similar fittings or compartments where such conductors
are introduced solely for power supply to communication
equipment or for connection to remote -control equipment.
(D) In Shafts. Conductors may be run in the same
abaft with conductors for light and power if the conductors
of the two systems are separated at least two inches, or if
the conductors of either system are encased in noncom-
bustible tubing.
(d) Installation of Exposed Conductors. Circuits which require
protectors (see Order 2599 (b)) shall comply with the following:
(1) Separation From other Conductors Attached to
Buildings. (A) Light and Power Conducts. Open
conductors attached to buildings shall be separated at lead
four inches from light or power conductors not in conduit,
or Csb1% unim permanently separated from conductors of
the other system by a continuous and firmly fixed MM -
Conductor additional to the insulation on the wires, such
as porcelain tubes or flexible tubing.
358.10 IN-Dus'r$aer. R TM%} ' Tam t
Article Se. Communication Circuits (RegisterK Ne.; -.g.
(B) Lightning Conductors. AseParationefatieut
six feet shall be maintained between conductors oat bu
ings and lighting protection conductors.
(2) Separation From Woodwork Ogen eoudueton
tached to buildings shall be separated from woodwork by.
supported on glass, porcelain or ocher ting
approved for the purpose, eccegt that such k
not required where conductors approved for the a,
used to extend circuits to a builctiug from a cable havm
grounded metal sheath.
(3) Insulation. (A) Single or Paired Coaftiors. Fad
conductor, from the last outdoor support to the
shall have %.-inch rubber insulation. In addition, the esti
ductor, either individually or over the pai4 shall be
with a substantial fibrous covering or equivalent prc
Conductors approved for the purpose having rubber'
tion of a thickness less than specified above, or having othe
kinds of insulation may be used.
(B) Cables. Conductors within a cable of the nem
sheathed type, or within a cable having a robber
of at least %2 -inch thickness and covered with a solistsaW
fibrous covering, may have paper or other suit" .
tion. If the metal or rubber sheath is omitted, a&& tw•
ductor shall be insulated as required in sub
(3-A) of this order, and the bunched conduetma dull be
covered with a substantial fibrous covering or Ka"
covering.
(4) Uteriag Buildings. Where a protector with foal
is installed inside a building, the conductor shall Oft tic
building either through a noncombustible,
nonabsorptive �'
lating bushing or through a metal raceway except wheae tit
entering conductors are in metal sheathed cable, awd O
through masonry, or are approved for the p e, in t
used to extend circuits to a building from a cable
grounded metal shmth. Raceways --hall be equipped v'ith a
approved service head. More than one conductor Mal 016,
through a singleraceway
ahead of til eanz. Conduits or Oth" protect, -hall be
lie racewayslocated
(e) Overhead Conductors. The Rules for Overhead Ow
Commissionbe 0"M
struction of the California Public -Utilities
with in all features of overhead
• underground is
of 00
(f) Vnde rground v with the municaton circuits entering buildings shall pl-
TITLE 8 Divinos or INDUSTaa®a, SAMY 358.11
(Ropiater, No 5—-39=55) Article 3. Communication Circuits
(1) tion From Light or Power Conductors.
Underground conductors shall not be placed in a duet co.tain.
ing light or power conductors, except in a section separated
from such conductors by means of brick, concrete, or the
partitions.
(2) Underground Block Distribution. Where the entire
street circuit is run underground and the circuit within the
block is so placed as to be free from liability of accidental con-
tact with light or power eirenits of over 300 volts, it shall be con.
sidered as an unexposed circuit and shall comply with the pro-
visions of Order 2599 (c).
(g) Grounding. Equipment shall be grounded as follows:
(1) Cable Sheath. The metal sheath of aerial cables
entering buildings and which are liable to contact with electric
light or power conductors shall be grounded at or within the
building or shall be interrupted close to the entrance to the
building by an insulating joint or equivalent device.
(2) Protector Ground. The protector ground shall
comply with the following:
(A) Insulation. The grounding conductor shall
have not less than one thirty-second inch of rubber insole.
tion and shall be covered by a substantial fibrous covering
or equivalent protection. Conductors approved for the
purpose having less than one thirty-second inch rubber
insulation or having other kinds of insulation may be used.
(B) Size. The grounding conductor shall be not
smaller than No. 18 copper.
(C) Run in Straight Line. The grounding eondue.
tor shall be run in as straight a line as practicable to the
grounding electrode.
(D) Mechanical Injury. Where necessary, the
grounding conductor shall be guarded from mechanical
injury.
(E) Electrode. The grounding conductor shall pref-
erably be connected to a water pipe a)stem. In the absence
of a water pipe, connection may be made to an effectively
grounded metallic structure, to a ground rod, a pipe
driven into the earth or an effectively grounded electrical
service raceway. Steam or hot water pipes, or lightning
rod conductors shall not be employed as electrodes for
protectors. The requirements for separately made elec-
trodes for power and lighting system grounds, those for
358.12 INDUSTRIAL RFI.ATWNa 71M D
Article 37. Provisions for Accident Prevention— (Resistor Mo.3-2
High-voltage Circuits and Equipment
communication systems, and those for lighti ing protection
shall not prohibit the bonding together of all
electrodes.
(F) Fdeetrode 001111octiou. The grounding
for shall be attached to a pipe electrode by means of a boM
clamp to which the conduetor is soldered or otherwim
connected in an effective manner. The connection to Ih:
grounding electrode shall be made as elan to the earth a
practieable.
(h) Spm purpose Rwitohea. In central offices and brand
ofdees, switches of the exposed knife type may be used as special
isda
starting switches on eireuits operating at not more than 300 volts
between
any two conductors or from any conductor to ground provided that
such switches are equipped with suitable barriers and are mounted aI
switchboards accessible only to properly authorized and qualified
penm
History: 1. Amendment filed 2-9-455; effective thirtieth day t (RW
aster illi, No. 3).
Article 37. Provisions for Accident Prevention—High voltage
Circuits and Equipment
M, (a) DeWtioia& "Meetricai Stations." Generating do -
tions, receiving stations, distributing stations, industrial stations or eom-
mereial stations, housing or enclosing conductors, switellgear, bwv-
formers, rectifiers or rotating equipment used for the generation,
conversion, modification or distribution of electrical energy. Such
stationi
may be buildings, portions of buildings, vaults or outdoor enclosures.
(1) Sigh -voltage." A voltage in excess of 750 volts
between conductors or between any conductor and ground -
(2) "OverbetA Lino." All high-voltage electrical ow
ductors (either bare or insulated) together with their support-
ing
upporting poles, structures and appurtenances which are located Out-
side of buildings.
(3) "WegVMd& or Safety Device." Any funetionol
method or device for mitigating or preventing a specific
(Shall be given a broad interpretation.)
(4) "Underground." All high-voltage equipment and
conductors located below the ground level
e
trenches, dad
lines, or in encu entered through
sive of those electrical stations covered in Order 26K
26tlB. provision for Preventing Ac&1ents Due to Prozboity Of
1119111—voltage Idnes.
(a) QsnKVI p(mg, No person, firm, or corporation, or amt
of same, shall require or permit any employee to perform guy
function
in proximity to high-voltage ; to enter upon any land, building, or
Tn%z 6 DIFISIOX OF INDUSTRIAL SAFETY 358.13
(Register fA, No.S--2-t9i-il£) Article V. Provisions for Accident Praysntion—
High-voltags Circuits and Equipment
other premises and there to engage in any excavation, demolition, con-
struction, repair, or other operation; or to ereet, install, operate, or store
in or upon such preiftises any tools, machinery, equipment, materials, or
structures (including house moving, well drilling, pile driving, or hoist-
ing equipment) unless and until danger from accidental contact with
said high-voltage lines bas been effectively guarded against in the manner
hereinafter preseribed.
The Division of Industrial Safety will act in an advisory capacity
to any employer contemplating any operations near high-voltage lines;
however, full responsibility for compliance with this order shall rest
with the employer.
(b) Giearance or Safeguards Required. The operation, erection,
or transportation of any tools, machinery, or equipment, or any part
thereof capable of vertical, lateral, or swinging motion; the handling,
transportation, or storage of any supplies, materials or apparatus; or
the moving of any house or other building, or any part thereof, under,
over, by or near high-voltage lines, is hereby expressly prolu'bited, if at
any time during such operation, transportation or other manipulation it
is possible to bring such equipment, tools, materials, building or any part
thereof within six feet of such high-voltage lines. Except, however, that
when sueh high-voltage linea have been effectively guarded against
danger from accidental contact, either by:
(1) The erection of mechanical barriers to prevent phys-
ical contact with high-voltage conductors;
(2) De -energizing of the high-voltage conductors and
grounding where necessary;
(3) Removal of the high-voltage conductors; then, and
only then, may the six-foot clearance above mentioned be re-
duced. The six-foot requirement shall not be reduced by move-
ment due to any strains impressed (by attachments or other-
wise) upon the structures supporting the high-voltage line
and upon any equipment, fixtures or attachments thereon.
(e) Warning Sign Required. The owner, agent, or employer
responsible for the operations of equipment, shall post and maintain in
plain view of the operator on each erane, derrick, power -Novel, drilling -
rig, Lay louder, hay stacker, pile driver, or similar apparatus, any part
of which is capable of vertical, lateral or swinging motion a durable warn-
ing sign legible at 12 feet reading: "Unlawful to Operate This Equip-
ment Within 6 Feet of High Voltage Lines.
(d) Notiijestion to power Company and Responsibility for Ste•.
guardsWhen any operations are to be performed, tools or ma
terials
handled, or equipment is to be moved or operated for
six feet of the work lot be
ny
high voltage line, the person or persons responsible Hue shall promptly notify the operator of the high-voltage theths
to be performed and shall he responsible for the completion
safety
ith an work whieub uuld Orderr the (teaelearanes,
558.14 I.KDUMUL RMATIO-Ns TM2 I
Article 37. Provisions for Accident isr"cantion— (Resister 5%
High-voltage Circuits and Equipini"A
(e) EXOMP140M The fWWOing Orders 26M (0- (b)® W U1
(d) shall not be construed all applying to, and are not intended to q*
to, the construction, reconstruction,operations, and maintenance of &�w
head electrical conductors (and their supporting structures and w
ciated equipment) by authorized and qualified electrical Working; as
to the authorized and qualified employees of any person, firm, or wrlw
ration engaged in the construction, Operation, and 10 J&
tenance of overhead electrical circuits or eondueton (and their rapport-
ing structures and associated equipment) ofrail transportation qdock
or electrical generating, transmissiog, distribution, and emmusicatim
systems. This subsection, when applied to railway
strued as permitting operation of standard rail equipment, which is =.
many used in the transportation of freight and/or passengers, ad tk
operation of relief trairis, ir other equipment in emergeneies, at dWm
of lea than six feet from any bigh-voltage conductor; but shall be em
strued as prohibiting normal repair or construction operations at &
tortes of less than six feet from any highvoltageconductor by otha
than properly qualified and authorized Persons (Or emPlOYM Ulk
the direct supervision of an authorized Person who is familiar will' the
hazards involved, until the safety provisions of the foregoing 0111013
2603 (a), (b), (e), and (d) have been complied with.
WK provisions for preventing Accidents to 2huploYeell Wwk-
ing on M&-voltap LbLeL (a) Purpose of Order. This order is
intended to provide uniform requirements relating to work on higlt-v&
age Ime% the application of which will provide greater ssletY is
employees engaged in the construction, maintenance or operation Of W*
lines.
(b) Hoops of Order. This order shall apply to work done on W01
voltage lines supported an overhead structures and not located Vi"
station and switelyard enclosure. This order does not apply to work dow
inside of any building, vault or manhole.
(a) Employees Responsibility. The employer shall furnish 04
safety devices (except personal tools and appliances) as may be =*
airy to perform the particular job safely. The employer shall tial e'
safety device at such intervals as may be neeessam to a8gare that it is i.1
good condition and adequate to perform the function for wbielt it."
intended. The employer sMU promptly repair or replace SAY dem
found to be unsafe.
(d) ZmployWs Duty. It shall be the duty of the employ to
inspect each safety device, tool or piece of equip t, hriliM
by the employer or by himself, each time he uses it and he shall Ula M
those that in good condition. itillo
(e) Accers to Imulators. The employer shall furnish a of
Cr:table platforms or devices to permit employees to work on Wilillil
lators suspended from palm towers or structures who simh NOW
of ispubiton it" not Otherwise safely accessible.
TIT= 8 Divisios of IN DUSTRIAL SAFETY 358.15
{Register 55.Wo.3-2-19-56) Article $7. Provisions for Accident Pr*~tioe—
High-voltage Circuits and Equipment
(f) Riding Span Wires. No employee shall ride any suspended
wire or cable until it has been determined by reasonably available means
that such wire or cable is of sufficient strength for the purpose. No
employee shall ride any suspended wire or cable on other than a cable -
riding chair designed for the purpose, except that other riding means
may be employed when use of such means is less hazardous.
(g) Inspecting Poles Before Climbing. Employees shall make a
careful inspection of each pole before climbing to assure that such Pole
is in safe condition for the work to be performed thereon. Any pole con-
sidered to be unsafe shall be adequately guyed or otherwise supported
before the employee shall climb it.
(h) QuaWled FRAPIPYee"taudbY Workmen. Only qualified
employees or employees under continuous supervision or instruction of
a qualified workman shall be assigned to work on lines or equipment
energized in excess of 750 volts and except in "trouble" trouble " work or emergen-
cies involving hazards to fife or property, no such employee shall be
assigned to work alone. During the time an employee is doing work on
any energized parts of the line the other employee shall act only as an
observer, for the purpose of preventing an accident; provided, however,
that such standby observer will not be required in connection with work
on trolley distr'j-,ution circuits not. exceeding 1,500 volts D.C. where
there is no nn etor of opposite polarity less than four feet therefrom,
or where such work is performed from suitable tower platforms or other
similar structures.
(i) Hoisting Cables—Conductive Material. Steel cable shall not
be used to raise transformers, poles or any other material near high-
voltage fines, except:
(1) When the cable is rigged below all energized wires a
sufficient distance to prevent the possibility of electrical contact
between such wires and the cable or conductive material being
raised. or
(2) When the cable and any conductive material being
raised are adequately protected by insulating covering placed
on such energized wires.
use of any cable after deterioration to a degree that it is unsafe,
shall be discontinued.
(j) Winches. -When winches or similar devices are being oper-
ated, the operator shall not leave the controls while the winch is in opera-
tion or is being used to hold a load.
(k) Grounding Ds -energized Lines. This subsection applies to
lines normally operated at a voltage in excess of 7,500 volts. Nothing
herein ball preclude working on energized lines by meaus of suitable
devices.
$58.16 lxoti
Artiolo 37. Provisions for Ao&Wmt Prove ' tReg' �, Pea
High-voltaso Circuits and Eq
(1) Any expand ungrounded part of a
operated at a voltage in exeem of 7volts, net be wedid
on until de -energized and not until the normally live prb
have been toed for indieation of voltage and all ecaductial d
the line circuit have been -circuited and Pounded apaut
all possible sources of supply Energized'
which crow over a d ed line are to be considered Psi.
sible sources of supply.
(2) When working on conductors of a high- sae
energised line, there shall be a miannum of one ground be.
tween the place where the work is being done and the on
possible taus de -energized
line supply.
If conditionsthat seebou worked upon to more than od
thele nn�en le
supply, there shall be a minimi of two
grounds„ one on each side of the place where the work is beieg
performed on the linea.
(3) Suitable grounding devices shall be used. They
be first conneseted to a ground before being brought in maw
with any de-energined conductor of the eircuit to be
When removed, they shall be removed from all circuit
endue -
tore before being disconnected from ground. Grounds dead he
co placed that one of them is readily visible to at least out
member of the crew.
M Prorfaion for Preventing Accidents to EmpUyexa Work-
ing on Underground Righ-valtage Ekcirical oonductors and ZVJP-
meft
(a) Purpose of Order. This order is intended to provide
uniform requirements relating to work on underground high-voltage
eondnetors and equipment, the application of which will provide side
workin8 conditions for employees engaged in the construction, reew
struetion, maintenance, or operafian of such installations.
(b) floope of order. This order shall apply to work on under-
ground high-voltage conductors and equipment, and to the opera
n to rasa or lower conductors and equipment to such >usle>~
ground
(e) tieaeral Provisions. (1) Employer's Eesponsibifity. The
employer shall furnish such equipment and safety devices
(except personal tools and appliances) as may be necesmY to
make the employment, or place of employment as free friss
danger to the life and safety of employees; as the nature of the
employment reasonably permitL The employer shall
Or test each such safety device at such intervals as niff be
reasonably necessary to assure that it is in good condition sad
adequate to perform the function for which it is intended. TW
employer devise foundto be ptly� ede
repair or replace any such
R'Z= $ Devmiox or IxoUSTaIAI, SnrETY 358.17
(etegister83, Ho.8-2-19-35) Artialo 37. Provisions for Accident Prevention—
High-voltage Circuits and Equipment
(2) EmploysVil Duty. It shall be the duty of the em-
ployee to inspect each safety device, tool or piece of equipment,
whether provided by the employer or by himself, each time he
uses it, and he shall use only those in good condition.
(3) QuaMed Persons—Standby Persons. Only qualified
persons shall be assigned to work on underground conductors
or equipment energized in excess of 750 volts. Persons in train-
ing who are qualified by experience and training shall be per-
mitted to work on underground conductors or equipment
energized in excess of 750 volts while under the continuous
supervision or instruction of a qualified person. Except for
replacing fuses, or operating switches, or other operations which
do not require the person to contact energized high-voltage con-
ductors, parts of equipment, or emergencies involving hazards
to life or property, no such person shall be assigned to work
alone. During the time the work is being done on any exposed
conductors or exposed parts of equipment energized in excess
of 750 volts, a qualified person shall act as an observer at each
work location for the purpose of preventing an accident. Where
any hazard to the workmen is involved, the following shall be
ot""- ed.
(A) An observer shall be stationad on the surface
when any manhole is entered.
(B) An open manhole shall be watched until all work-
men
orkmen are out.
(4) Raising and Lowering Equipment. All hoisting
cables shall conform to Order 3988 (a) of the General Industry
Safety Orders. Wire rope shall be used to raise or lower equip-
ment only when
(A) The wire rope is rigged at least six feet from all
exposed energized conductors or equipment, or
(B) The energized conductors or equipment aro ade-
quately covered.
(5) Winches. All winches or other hoisting devices shall
conform to Orders 3999 and 4002(b) of the General Industry
Safety Orders.
(g) Working upon De energized Conductors and aigaip-
Mont. Precautions which shall be observed:
(A) Clearances are required on wqwsed ungrounded
conductors or equipment normally operated at a voltage
in execia of 7,5M volts. They shall be obtained by the Per-
son directly in charge of the work to be performelL Where
conductors ar equipment are to be d ised by the per-
son directly in charge of the work, that person " be
a+�te a7. prov'sa+oaas "�'
ttl-voltage Gt't+ �"� ,.
.7 -a
or
I
lall
_ ,
iiourxn
wark
(d)
f
d#otordt lir �
barriers or esuicaror
„lam of _
tt,
TITLE 8 IsDvsrRIAL RM Artoxs 358.19
(Regieterili% No.3—y-tl-55) ArtieN V. Provisions for Accident Prevention—
High-voltage Circuits and Equipment
while under the continuous supervision or instruction of a
qualified person. Except for replacing fuses or operating
switches or other operations which do not require the person
to eoutwt; energized high-voltage conductors or parts of equip-
ment, no such person shall be assigned to work alone. During
the time the work is being done on any exposed conductors or
exposed parts of equipment energized in excess of 750 volts, a
qualified person shall act as an observer at each work location
for the purpose of preventing an accident.
(4) Access to Insulators. The employer shall furnish
suitable equipment or devices to permit employees to work on
insulators or bushings attached to poles, towers, structures,
or equipment when such insulators or bushings are not other-
wise safely accessible.
(5) Iospacting Stractures, Poles or Platforms Before
Climbing. Employees shall make a careful inspection of each
structure, pole or platform before climbing to assure that
such structure, pole or platform is in safe condition for the
work to be performed thereon. Any structure, pole or platform
considered to be unsafe shall be adequately guyed, braced, or
otherwise supported before the employee shall climb upon same.
(6) Identification. All switchboards shall be provided
with readily legible circuit name plates. A name plate shall
be provided for each high-voltage circuit -breaker, and for each
set of disconnecting switches and grounding switches.
(7) Replacement of Lamps. When lamp bulbs are to be
rep]seed near energized equipment, proper safeguards shall
be used.
(8) 'Warning Signs or Tags. Before work may be
started on any deenerg'tzed high-voltage circuit, warning signs
tags shall be tion cre
f such switches would ate als of all s
witches
where the openhazard.
w
(g) imajuinand Lowering gquillu"t. All hoisting
sables shall conform to Order 3988(a) of the General Industry
Safety Orders. Wire rope shall be used to raise or lower equip-
ment only when:
(A) The wire rope is rigged at least six feet from all
exposed energized conductors or equipment, or
(B) The energized conductors or equipment are ade-
quately covered
(10) Winches. All winches or other hoisting devices
shall conform to Orders 3999 and 4002(b) of the General
Industry Safety Orders.
ground
Tn%z s DMMON or INDUSTMAL SAMT 358.21
hinter 51, Ne.3-2-19-SS) Article 30L Tables
article 38. TabUs
Table 4—Maximum Allowable Continuous Currant-ofterYinil
Capacities of Conductors in Amperes
RAW
pm"
Type R
DWRW
Th—
RU
TYPQ RH
AetMeta
AWG
vmaimmi
mcm
Con
Ty
TypeTW
,UXbrit
.V
Typo HW
VW -Cam
is -------------------------------------------
3
—
is ----------------------'---------------•----"-6
14--------------------------------------•-----
Is
—
is
12
20
25
Is
so
30
40
40
50
--------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------
$----------------------------------------------
70
9605
2go
z—
go
110
.............
10D
120
125
150
00
ISO
175
too
210
000_________ __ __------------------------------
OWL—
225
270
2"
260
2306 7
WO
330
300 ----------------------------------------------
359
0
m
----------------------------------------------
400 ---------------------------------
326
Soo
490
bee______________________________________________400
090______________________________________________
SOO450
540
We
700_______________________•_______________-______
750 ------ -
m
139
-------------------------
000____________________________________•_________
W
ON
ON
720
ON
------------------------------------------
G 3o
70
1710
. set
m
10201.
-----------------------
-------------------- ------
930
1129
--
----
- -------------------------
1050
ISSO
History: 1. Amendment filed -1-24-:P.; effective
thirtieth daY thereafter Regis-
ter '!-. No. ';).
358.20 INDUSTRIAL REXATIVOIS TMM S 1
Artioto V. Provisions for Prevention— E Q6.No."
Htoh-voltage Circuits and aowi
(11) Grovadhig De4mirgind 00nd=&UM Precautiess
which shall be o
(A) Any exposed ungrounded part of a conductor or
piece of equipment normally operated at a voltage in exons
of 7,500 vats shall, not be worked on until 'sed,
and not until the normally live parts to be grounded ban
been tested for indication of voltage and all conductors
have been grounded. This s1aU not preclude the relsoyd
of grounds for teat
(B) Grounds shall be so placed that one of thud: is
readily visible to at least one member of the crew.
(C) Suitable grounding devices shall be used. They
shall be first connected to a ground before being brought
in eontaet with any de4nergtaed conductors; they shall be
removed from the conductors first before removing the
ground connection.
(D) This order shall not preclude working on easer-
gised conductors or equipment by means of suitable deviece.
(18) Working Upon d Cosdaetm nisi
Equipment. Precautions which shall, be observed.
(A) Clearances are required on exposed ungrounded
conductors or equipment normally operated at a voltage in
excess of 7,500 volts. They shall be obtained by the person
directly in charge of the work to be performed. Where cow
duators or equipment are to be de -energised by the person
directly in charge of the work, that person shall be directly
reopensible for determining that the conductors or equip-
ment are disconnected from all sources of supply.
(B) After authorized persons have been notified that
such conductors or equipment are cleared for work, or the
proper clearances obtained, tests shall be made to determine
that conductors or equipment are de -energised before
work is started.
(C) Grounds shall be applied where the do not
increase the working hazard.
TTnZ 8 Dwmox or NnuerauL Saararr 8b8.81
(Resistew 516 N463-2-19-611) ArtkN S& Tam
Article 88. Tables
Table 1—Maximunt Allowable Continue" Cueront-carrying
Casualties of Conductors is Amp"--
an
AWO
Rubber
`aw
TYJW�
7baas
it�r
' rue AH
POW
7ba.a.
Penned
6
vaaw
ab---------------------------------------------
0
7d___________________________________
O
--
14___________________________________
16
is
12-----------------------------------------------
70
36
10-----------------------------------------------
so
70
8 ------------------------------------------------
40
40
a'-----------------------------------------------
6o
60
:------------- -----------------------------------
70
66
_-----------------------------------------------6o
96
$-------------------------------------•-------'--
90
Ito
1------------'---••-'-----•---------------'----
100
120
0-----------------------------------------------126
in
00-----------------------------------------------00
169
1
on--- ------------------------------------------
176
310
0000 --------------------- •-----------------------
226
270
260___--_-__-_---_________--_______________
260
300
-----------------•---•------------------------
276
330
9---------------------•----------'___-'_—'_'-
300
M0
------'--------'---'--•----'-•---'------_-----
626
no
600---------------------------------------------
400
460
we----------------------------------------------
460
6a
7W---------------------------------------------
we
an
?b0--- ------------------------ ----
M
060
M----------------------------------------------
us
IMO
990----------------------------------------------
600
709
IAA------------------------------------------
96o
700
t
I.260---------------------------------------------
1•ue----- ----------------------------------------
730
060
1
I,750--------------------------------------------
980
1130
2.000-------------------------------------------
1050
IM
History: 1. anmmhnent filed 4-24-52; effective thirtieth day thereafter $egis-
ter 2S, No. 3).
INDIE MAL RUATICISISMiele 'moi i
t RtN•�,t-tMR
.� g4. Tables
Capao"y of l kmMs Cee/ Sad
Table 4--MlowabN C Fixtur Wir in AmmPereo
joew oe I@M 4enM1notsm, of W C W p.)
- as €30
edeadeAeroie or erdeit r fdNet
s► sa ---
a
a
4
a
{
7
•
i
Is -
s„12
and eallRt
abom4wmw
wYsawseYeeaw
wo not
t
Ti?LE $ Dlvmm or IxDusrauL SArmy Sam
(Register ft NO -3-2-14-06) ArKalo SL Tables
Table 3—iNumbor of CaWwtare in Conduit or Tubing
t I- Cwrd, Tom W -lit, R R owl 4Y ad am
tfarpdaftrAuN TaidTw
Rnateee6ee
It�
t4t
edeadeAeroie or erdeit r fdNet
1
a
a
4
a
{
7
•
i
Is -
s„12
12
to _._ _.—._ —___
a_— __ _
4
a
as
1
alt
a34
e...—__— ----- —----- ..._...
a
a
134
a
a
3
a
a
s
Im
I =_-_:---=--:_
i
i
211
21%
2114
214
a”
1
1%
aa
2
ix
a
:
a.
a
E
a
E
E
a
a
a
JIL—_�-.__--__--.�_
I
E
s
a
a
i
a
SOL r--._.— ------ ---- __
Im
E
VA
a
a
a
a34
a}4
4
a
a
+
{
14
E
a
+
{
______
+
44
f
a
44
4
SOL --- —------- ---_::
1
a
1
434
t
e9a_----- --._._-.-. -_
E
a'
a34
4
4�
a
e
e
e
a
4
e
f
•
e
s
i
a
4
e
e
e
4
w.
a
+
+
e
t
f
�n._.
a-----.-•-•-. .. _----_
E
4
{
i
n
4
•
.............
IAN..______ _
a
4
4
a
e
t
--------
--------
- -
tAlo__
434
49
i
o
---•--
-.»....
.........
».
auto___---_-----_----
as34
°
--------
-------
--------
-----
---....
i
i
i
tahoe a ea+Re m of ariit r eteekarol MdAle tddot due uR rend N ten Y SIMO ad SMS edm1d•aero as tae etstlad of tae aeatr tueie k4a rd to ed two ah. 4 bsdd d ad see ML 4 Ma
erietae aollaartelY Y 1-M3 oaeiek rlaMs
ROAM"
Table 4--Bomberof Conduste're To CqmjvA or Tobias
- .- -.las see wst-411111tv-
Table S.-Migivoibw 61 Ce"awellem in C*'%* *rTs"
as WaIr
eMs. w opd NOW
al�dar sots
Tn%z 8 Divissox OF INDUSTRIAL SAFETY 358.25
(Register". NO -S-2-19-55) Article 38. Tables
Table 6 -Combination of Conductors
For 0 w f4mboostims mr vow6vtom fte Comm ort mob Athe am of the
01"4KIUMBI am of the ImIld" VW&KIM W21 bt Wt OW == m Own up or the hAtrim, am-seaked
am of the twAdt w fthft a shmm ID aw Bowie t".
Pwcmt Am of C@Mwk w Tubho
Nuadw of emductm
Ora
2 3 4 4
........... 53 3. 43 40 40
#0 38 36
9v=Cmd.d - ------------ , I
vw mwkbw ap" ramw." for i -MOW Ind wbm it is
hwadkg& to do Arm d do rang duo to
shvetwa cesdifimm- ----- - ------------------------- 00 so so so
Table 7-Dinmnsiom and Percent Area of Conduit and Tubing
A" v(DieftRw Ubbshr t1wComblokime of Wkqe PwvMW bgldk #
Tri
bond
&801
Not bad awrold
Ladearaad
FM
IN,
hAw
TOW
1 C.&
2Cm4
3 0�
4 Owl,
I C�d
2 Coad
3 od
Cl
4 OTW4
Loud. I
100%
33%
31%
42%
wmf�
4W.
"%
.
30%
40%
CM&
38% WE
13
:'.o
824
'
Is
:09
"'N
.12
I"16
.17
:09
:12
21
:ft H
20 5
I----------
1.049
1.369
:n
86
1.59
.46
so
1
.21
.47
A
:"
60
:47
a
.26
"
.24
68
.369 .30
57 w
1.612
2.04
1:09
.63
88
: 82
1: 12
.61
:82
78
: :71
1
2-07
2.469
3.36
4.70
1.78
2.51
1.04
1.48
1.44
2.06
1.34
1.92
1.86
2.63
1.01
1."
Lu
1.92
1.29 1.18
1.82 1.09
3W----
3.60
IIAS
733
9.90
3.91
5.25
2.29
sm
17
NO
1:9'6
4.00
JIM
221
2:97
2.96
0:96
1:71 a.47
4
4.036
4AW
12.72
15-96
.74
145
3.94
4."
47
:-
38
7.00
8:77
3:82
4.78
"I's
4.83 4.469
"W 1
6.06
20.00
U.0
111 GO
ISM
6 .10
.96
3 .00
12.42
8.00
11.56
11.00
15.89
6.00
8.97
8.00
U."
76.04
7.0'
10.98 10.11
26 j". US `RUL TED4StS TITbi
358.4Rw'�•Ra3-t�t�
Article 88. Tables
12222 9992 'm*22 *X*$ tppiSt
s%ee a Rasa an $334
4m*= 2**a Sala 2233 3384
-ms= faa2 ass% sou tisk
13 -�
ga�lr NSM w=. 820 an
_�.,,� .,�.• •sus »�-�
TITLE s Dmmox or INDuwmiAL SAFETY 558.27
(Rg1etw5%"3—tt-W55) Artiele SL Toblee
3%3* 2388 sage 988$2 8$$8 8822 ss'ss Fall sill 2259
*28* uses sass 88822 Rens sass sass em sass Rill
sass eggs ss__ amiss sass mess sass sass alas alas
agas g$__ sxxa 22299 mals IRAN gals 1111 1111 1111
3838 3$3$ 983o 3e3o3 81$3 $883 8288 9224 sage $$$r
ugms t:%9s 3342 0$99$ goat: Beau g9gt: 8$$S MM 229Rw
2322 %s32 as$a 39$99 gags gag* sass flat mss am
AMEX 2«ag Eggs Evans x$712$ asse game $91tia
3M.28 IxMutrrSIAL RIMATMM
ArUclo Sk Tob1M
Ran *His an a
ails 13311 am all
im 9011 Ina an
239.3 HIM ss'Me MH
TIM 8 DIT[MN OF INDUSTRIAL SAFETY 858,29
tR�i�Eer6g,plss g—Y_1g.I Article 98. Tanta
S
"Al ails gifts 1111
Ilia lags Ilii
Y
h
�.. .... ..... .... .....
uldidd 6.3d didii o -
a
$131 Rill Hila sea fill' � m
alas ma. Cliff fill stili
Tznz a D1 mws of INDUSTRIAL SAFETY 358.31
(Rplebr5etiM-3-3-H-56) Article SL TAWWOo
Table 11—Fall-lad Current •
♦wd2r5 A.G Old= (44ft)
HP
12.__-._-___,._....,..,�-...._..
1
Sleuth" 2se Sed .110,synchre"Cudsy sramr
1101
'!ilZE:
INDVSTR ALArOlb R>SL► t r .a -2-M i�
MV
2as09 VOY
440V
aloe
�, Tebiee
Table 3—puN•iet4i
o.4.y4mi aMua
Cu*rMe
U0
_______________
HP
—"
------ —
<
is
4.6
i3
LAi
----------------
--------
43
----'---
1...._.»--•^"'—'..__.__
s.4
3.2
1.6
La
----------------
--------
SA
Ili............ ......--------- ..»��t
/
2._'—'—"•'••'•-.__-•--
g
aA
63
------•---
It
a
4 w
--....--
79
is
Ite
a
4
a.!
_--- ....
___-
`,
»»»•-------'_
t�IL
's15
6!
as
.............. _
no
in
o
is
80. ................111»
--
----- --------
______
------
__
—_
_
..
» ...
- —
U_..______.__________
�
a �
28
IS
18
22
46
101
.............�_�`..�
_ __
4.7.:
211
t IN
2)<
N
M
4x4
N
U
48
0s all 775
11 W
37
47
!ul
as
5.7 7
0
so_.__ __________
spowar awsift
w6Ra14�
>M
1n
212
as
70
Isa
Tznz a D1 mws of INDUSTRIAL SAFETY 358.31
(Rplebr5etiM-3-3-H-56) Article SL TAWWOo
Table 11—Fall-lad Current •
♦wd2r5 A.G Old= (44ft)
HP
12.__-._-___,._....,..,�-...._..
1
Sleuth" 2se Sed .110,synchre"Cudsy sramr
1101
2as6'
4M9
MV
2as09 VOY
440V
aloe
2400Y
I.a
_______________
________
________
------ —
»___"__._
is
2A
1<!
1.0
----------------
--------
--------
----'---
1...._.»--•^"'—'..__.__
s.4
3.2
1.6
La
----------------
--------
------
--------
/
2._'—'—"•'••'•-.__-•--
8.8
11.2
4A
&.4
2.2
2.8
1.8
2.3
------- -----•--
-------•
--....--
---'<_---
2---- _•___.____<.___-•_—_-'-
-------
a
4
a.!
_--- ....
___-
as7
6
_______ _______
o
is
a
10.............
--
----- --------
______
------
__
—_
_
..
» ...
- —
U_..______.__________
_ __»
R
28
IS
18
22
_______ _______
6 47
___ _
__
is
_ __
4.7.:
N
M
4x4
N
U
48
0s all 775
11 W
37
47
!ul
as
5.7 7
0
so_.__ __________
___�_
76-----
>M
1n
212
as
70
Isa
U
63
as
Ia 111
111 140
21 182
w
70
Ba
44
57
74
i1
12
17
ii
_______t
"1
311
415
las
156
208 '
CO3
168 -
28 1.228
4! _._ ...
114
7
182
92
NO
145 1
22
25
• These sloes of fall -Ind c-04 me for muton runni-9 st llic"dr u:�ual for belted motors and motors with
Mf1a1 tot4se ehaintnialat�< 2lotors built for eepcclaI4 low spt'Av or high torques mar require more rutillat
i et:t®a. k which am the wemeplm. eurrcut r-11 should be u�rd. Curreul in ccu'moo conduct" K 2.~.
' a.eyw q riffi he 1.41 th—>uMnpt oc gh—
TA
t I. f ata lM iP. F the Above 1gures should ler mdtlplled by mid d i .2resp
S, tti1rt17.
zi is
ILS
31
IR
it
lr i
to •°^ � a � !
v -
_ w _ 0*4&nwOW.W'socar-10*1100— go
go" ITO
lii�2
{444e+A l a� i� ,00k I .47
388 ,� INDURTSUL RJOLL Reg€s{te 55. N..> =t
Ar"Ole 8i. Tables
Table 12--1raR- Cnrraat4
11rsslMleAL Metas
age nw-11 anom taooed i 2sta
ladw
HP
ltgf AMY 44{Y MIT I =V wr 44N Mw Isw
4 t1 A
1 ..............
•__.__----- 1 3.5 1.5 1.4 « __
I«---.....--_-••...... a s 32.8
i....«._-------- --
-_......«__. 1s7 i iw-
7}� «.._....«.__...«..__ .«. tt uit
29
15. --- «-«---- «----- «--- -. M 26 at
2L — _------ «--- -«_-_-- M 32
41 111.6 IS 41 U 9
40.«. ....... «.«....... _,. «._.. _ iM 56 13 146 64
W. ...... ..__._...... .... ..__.._. 1M
M A ]2
e0..«------...««_««_.._ -- 1n M MM in 6• y
7{«_,«____'....«_._..« « « g1 tit M 2i
166....«.............«.� ...._.... 2N 1ffi M
I — ------------ ---«_««_ _._...« 3M
30 no Md 31 _ iN 3Mt
IM..........«««.«,.__.-- -««___ 4e! In d no in
266.....«.«_«_-......_
tar f U41w aettsW of in ead = ma "estm t anew an wasseeMK 111940 este fd, ,
aero { M to prteet. dit
" egg epee of ast+s are ler aelest e�6 at "pear Tod fir head algae ad Newft
sued tegst AwaweMte MaNte 110119 fat aepder 1w 0"0 err No mom acs "@A -waft
as ak istaYla orae lee eaeoskte owma!alga[ AwA he WOL
i!'cashadMpaast!Ir. the bwe>pee"beet{tr 100100d 161.1 adf.w.testedtai2•
TiTLB a DivanoN of INDQSTBSAL SAFETY 358.33
(Register 55. No. 3-2-19-55) Article 38. Tables
Table 13—Maximum Rating or Setting of Motor.Branch.Circuit Protective
Devices for Motors Marked With a Cods Letter indicating
Locked Rotor Kva
(— N—at d fulli—I curtest
Typo d mew Im sting Circui4breakr•r 9etdng
(8. colw table Inetantoncow Time
-limit
F, 718181 Cr, 1 ty:. ty�
and pdyphwe+gnierci rage and mynehrmoue j
wattage, reaatw w reartw dwpc�:
50
150
2 ___ '00
bels---------------------------•-------- 250 .._ 200
belt ------------------------------------ 300 --- 1 250
AC apuirret eat and warkmim, wive" wide auto to m -
Code ktlw A________________________________ ______ 159 .__ /e0
Code letterB to E____________________________________ 200 ._. 299
Cade tett" F to R------------------------------------ 250 --- 200
Ta 7iee ghee to the lug ohm eW ow" the MUW of tbedha/t OM K dstlt-
brealmm
Sysebmwas eotwe of de tee-tagoe, Iver-mwA toe (usH6f 450 RPM w low), each m we wa l to Win
arttie< to aster or
- q fig„ UP dHgdeal. do ad teals a fast Lat1tR OF 4kWAk4 "
Table 14—Maximum Rating or getting of Motor -Branch -Circuit Protective
Devices for Motors Not Marked With a Code Letter Indicating
Locked Rotor Kva —
The 'ahas glee" 1n she Wt eynw alm ease the ratlep of em-wiltutable, tlae-1htN typte N dread
WeateRfxftemm eaters of the lar-twgae. tw-gees! type (uwa6y 450 RPM w lower), web m we o,ed to it,N-
rwl� teat etc.. atdrb at"t ere teloadud, de cot req dre a tun ratim w etmut-treater sdtt®.
rdt•a.�d rwewi.
Per—t of rut -load current
Tyu of .,,ocor
ttme ratrt
tSrcuit-Ueater 9"ti wt
reecala'tinable
A, r. 0,
instantanewe
�
Time -limit
_
7, 8, 91
8.9)
type
type
L%9lo-phwe.all type______________________________________
3W
_.. �
250
3quirmitage - it ayncbtanow (l�il-roltme, ruiaior and react.,
atwtjng)...............................................
300
___
250
gittwtelt:-Ft and epottmma (aawtya w""r starhugl:
�
290
Trot morethsn 30 amRras------------------------------
Mthan 20 amhtna-----------------------------------
�
...
...
(
200
- ! -Rd
than aaapeso---------------------- _--------
250
_--
2SO
nae
MGM than 30 a rmlrzn___________________________________
200
Womd-,atw----------------------- ----------------------
IN
.._
tS0
Itireriturn+nt•
Not mere thea ai R.P...................................
160
24
Ibti
17S
175
fS0
The 'ahas glee" 1n she Wt eynw alm ease the ratlep of em-wiltutable, tlae-1htN typte N dread
WeateRfxftemm eaters of the lar-twgae. tw-gees! type (uwa6y 450 RPM w lower), web m we o,ed to it,N-
rwl� teat etc.. atdrb at"t ere teloadud, de cot req dre a tun ratim w etmut-treater sdtt®.
rdt•a.�d rwewi.
(:
$5$.34 Tablas
Artiob 3a.
"ChTris Coils w
Table t6 -Number t4vr pm *mwvm1Um" i
4fesoe
9 wipe.: d A.c orD a ::s�:
C. a D.0. ass eRee
t wir AA�.QaTaDelw4 bon>l
t wr+ aa+i at mod
u
Taw i. i.
ttftr
=1s
Teo WN it cash
Tine (aabr and
TOO Ow is mb modOW 4800-a O swim"
Two omin wh —1448moo
Few Im to S" owdubm)-
F4M Nse idp4b ��1[44416tfNb�
Tbm (am s+4dta4�Med
7�Qa tmad
ibtee (4et sa mb
'pbt4stasea4ed udsdet3.t
F4M (msbr4s4i
t o sells WAM t utiles M a as wsbletlka rt a MW0
Ma a N44sdrf #• !feet M 4t 1�M s4R rM6kt
aYbeMAW" theseamort&Mr<+e�s �y i*M*dWwry 1e!
t 2. 110M 11M� q- � itdea - —
aNiranaral� Uum
aweat4ataidesdr4Ati :b
l utdo pre oneasteaK nests sea 4ss Ass do tone aeearsea
anrM lis ad No Ass dear Ar 4eee� sce st sebet tl46 bm � Mamma� a_
,A mod" i cit. ffi e •
b N 4ba� M --
Table ti -Input Kilovolt-AW4-- W `� N
for Cede Lgkmr Motors
Gobi~ �Ldetia�,:
3.9- S N
A . --- - �__. �- -- 2.26- �
6
.......... ................ .'....... -'_..w_ w__..��__�.___.-----
Lo
..... _..... ...r...... ....
$........................N.w - .µ _ .M � _ - �
T...._................wa
111.41-
..................
'sts/
Trnz 8 D1vir x OP INDUSMAL SAFETY
BLBCMCAL SAFETY ( SDE
(6t sister 55.No.3-2-WSS)
a e � _wr r�W�
MLLI
----------------------
e at F►tti-------------------
or
E6i6 b (2)
23"o
241E ; "
'404 c (a
2300 a)(1)
2391(a
0)(a)
$226(!
Tab
220ita)
2340(.)
2667
2241(!)
2E97(s)
2206th))
2440
2209 ), (b)
230(a)(6)
m
Athletic Field LiLhtCsK--_""'----
i C,, eD �y �m(c-Yard Whiff-- Ea14to). te)
;Att ,
__ $288(a)
22a4(b)
I,ow Voltage --___
S%bvo)ta8o— --- — -----------------
--
etiiAArm Cable 7sNalled in-------------------------- - 2a46(a))
2343(21
geadtoom Wheys Wiring 1a 1°stalled----"_______________�
--_
(k)
Knob and Tabs Wirini------'-------------'_-
n,.an Wirleuton
-- 8242)
-- ---- 8800(a)(7)
or cu'oust aassaw. 2406
,tom_-- ---- WIN. (t3
----- 2430(d)
2444(¢)
----------- 2464(c)
Bakelite �vaes 1*. Pa'tolttal AVb";0*00" «
Bakelite Boxes: In pM 13oaas �_�a____- 2644
858.36 INVUSTRAL RWA 2ma =
Covera and
with watt-------------------`----`----
(f)
supporthur.StceebooSIn—
swam
iS346(e)
_______________
around CondueEw'4t -'—"-----` S34f(b)
Neutral Conductors
Current Carrying Catacity--------------------------
234A(q
Permitted in Svrvtce Entrance------------------------
Between Contact— W FamM---_!___-_
23421(!)
5438(8)
Barriers ------- -----
Battery Rooms -------------------- _
Bonding Flexible Conduit at Motors - - � �---_--Y�_ 2364(d)
Bonding Rnoeways—)►
Hazardous Locatiom--------------_--
-------
2384
13641ata))
Material of Jumpr—--------------- --
(b)
Entrance---------- ---'--__-----__-_--i
-------_- -
lerviceSf�oriBo: ate
c
Connectins RacemayaEO_------------------------------- S4N (f)
Covera and
with watt-------------------`----`----
(f)
supporthur.StceebooSIn—
-------
_iSSSt(e)
- -
To Do Awessi
y ----- 2=(a)
--r__�___—��__
6466 to
DrarAh
24"
For _ __
(c)
'2436(!)
2464(e)
I443fra
Ren wttb Cwt___ -_—_--- -----------
tk rIA"t t eooeft_ l ^3aa 3 Ra �-
^..144 f dD
%votowle too
tot to Norka
mots)
)
241:12sea
13ts6r-t-=jit ----
i'tm �.
--
g'44(t)
. r «<4
I,**"- .t-
22TIom a Drnum OF INDUSTRIAL SAFETY
RIWMCAL SAFETY CMDM
(Resister 552 No. 3 -2 -WING)
aset46ti
uat—Degaittmt ----------------------- 2360(s)(9)
nets. Bee ram Ytt - 2100(a) (10)
a--Definklon ----------------------
as: 8a s cad Cabling
o
Corms C. Ruta—ADPitc+E�------- S22i41221411)or Be Public Uti=�pa-
-
>pla fee Bs_______..._-___—__—___--_--_�___
witma _--- 5446
Co��M_-----_�_E090
Cndoneere—X Oro U;;
2423 e
switch R�f�ired Ahead af_---- -- _ 5567 s
star Metal Ftoor Raceways—Provldom for Use-_---------- 226St" ((11 to{!)3
ant owes switchboards—Tweph— --- --- -------` SilOtb . �o)
age FtVM Open to Closed wirtns-Ge—al-----------
Srip---------------- ------------------- ------- sass ,.)
AtjrervineHead --____--_-----------------------
At wort Lomt mon______---------------------------- 2542((62}y)
s to Extort Anstatiatiot�-_------------------------ 12"1e i!)
nit Breakers Dettnttion—_-_--_------ ----- 52ss(d
As Motor Aiseonneet_-�_—_ _�----------------------f2Sata
An Service Switch __---___---- ---1. St(b
As Branch Cheats T.)Asssaaset-- ---------_—_-__-- (
Current capacity for Motor Circuits --- ---------------N_ 241i(Le (4)
Handle 'eta ---------------- ---------------------
Rlgh Vottteeggce�--Tdenttamtimt ---- — ------- 2417(7){6)
Iig ting Hissed Positions --------------------
Iir
n TBlademaiga Voltage services----- `--_---- b) (1)
Oil Circuit Breakers-------------------- ----- --- Elis a}
Manual Opening and Closing---------------------- --- )
Ma:`klt: C`;trrer+t RAt1PR __..___-_---_____-__—___ 2t6i(a)
Nontamperable Trim Machsniem-------------------------
Overearrent Proteoiius—ls Becb Wire _-------- 2366(1)
General.
--------------- ---------------------------- 2326(a)
Prot tion From 3dechanteal Injury---- 2336(b)))
Regstrsd is High Volta" service--------------------- 2414(a.
------- 2326(6)
Safe A_—SA Required :��� �,-e Mw— --_—__
m
as a
Cle.n.From l Ech--Lim work
- Overhead TAms
(2)
2aivinj(2)
2326(b)
3324ttf
-__ 2314tc
___..
l334(c
221?(e){2)
---..
--- 23811
__
WAS
Ixi)Us2arAL R>al.a.'8
Cleat Insulators-Insiallat _- __� � 5
Clods ffiotors as C ativa _
oft
Cl B -z: as FttWhere ' Eatm - ���_ 234f(s){I)
Cabinets andlam _:M ----
Code die Letter Defiwtt� '_ -))
Motor Locilmd Rotor Currents ___-------------
Cathode
__-_-- ta)tta)
Cold Catho�� Plate >aitta_- _-- Tessei8
Color mtl. -(i to to nettsc ln-------- - - --- ,- ±j24ta)
C thm Race�Va--Surfae M-W-__�PortableC.itefe 2m(d)({)
FeedRsLoad-Yates amt Lights --- -Eire
gerricsa �'-- ____'_'__"---______
Cemb—lbl'' t"' Near
a3fi(b)
Fiztare RauxRenting
sad 1?an-; ,_--__ - g24"
Fr000m ed 8eathtg Dethw_ ���______„__M_�_')tfd24f)
sad Iiece___-___"'�.__"- -- __'- 243E(e)
» l4f7
IInserting outer - ---'� _ :4al(a)
COmMAU
Commumbatioa�r n W Conductor
con -tGeCircult
tensa101
tion M� »� �------ s?tom
At
ao _r[igh \*itltige�- _�-_ aaff((abb
s0tam ��ioeRw+sl�"""_' EaEE80f4{li)(14)
carrytarcapactir
(s)ti5)
T.lis et
Jim mm--Carreat carac* (&
-�rgJrtmy tE41M
TMN S Dwmoxolp INDUSTRIAL SA Ty
(e*q;f.roo.a--s-ts-s5) ELECTRIcar.Set.p�
!06y=--------------- ff4lta) 341(c)
B8 I:airaaatc AotW,---- --"_'y "_- --- if
--- aHass�rd LoixtMru -__ ----------� Es4grs)
za
ting Rooms __^--- '----'-_- -- -------- 23408),
saii(f
g in
ftZ�Fitus*'ter Iric7i From Wet WADA---- -__---_ 2248(1)
Comtaded Laa9Fltungs ��______
Interior '8 hiteg Circuits �- ---- ---- -- 2i48 i)
8ervioa gwltch Rating --- --- ----------------- y-- sale a)
LbnaectioII
Of Cooductore-gnabes sad Jointa_� j
t'oastaat Current Ltgbtirm saotema.-Ijtt0 ts- -- EEOi a)
ConetrudloVol
n work-Temporat� wtrtng _-s---"'--'---- 2507 ai
Contact Conductors: gee --_-_- Eft!
Continuity of Grounding Throug Ravewa
Flexible Conduit _- yn
General -�- _----------_M28"(h)
�� 2X49(o)
croatFnR{2383(a)
tt om---------_ 23E4(a)
,
(b)
Armored DR
Cabo -_-- _
Nonmeta!!h: isheathed CaDla__---`_---_- -- 2E45(e)
T'onmetalva waterPrnC Cable_____--__--_ -- __ 23;234Y`d))
Control Ci�rcal�nd7 ----- ----------_- EE40{d)
actor also_________- -- Ea88(I)
t7f8con esti Ahead of aerdoe Disconnect___--------------- fiEitd) {i)
nlRDiatmnnectbig Yeats __—_-_------------_-- 288E 6
Went a48tmtu ht same RaOeWay '______� 2240 k (4)
tW'�nm tou-(irons Operathm ________�
Low Energy --��- _ -__ 2220 h
may Contain Lockout f� HoGat�` ------- 2504
Notulrad
-- fEE?f
Protecting From J16cbaaicalInlury {e)
w---------------- Ea08t!!
Switch Not Required Ahead of ----- -----111198fb;
�ontrolietL-Dednitba---__-_ F� ----------------------. 28611.h?
m
$58.40 INDUSTRIAL RV ATIONS Tau
(Register K Na3-t-tom
se
,peer Conductors 2341(t)
Current Carrying CaPaatsarvk-----_-- - 2386(a)
For Grounding Neutral
at Sa�l�'o-.-_-------------
,rds and Cables
Table E
Allowable Current Carrying Capacltisa_---'- '------ E4a7(0)
Clamping Device Required --.--------------------------__ a367(e).(f)
ConnectIn Fluorescents _—_----------------- ---_—__ 2365( )
a�urreat Proteetton, -------------------------
Hasardous Areas- Ciao l ---- — ------------- — 3316(k)
Hasardow Areas—Class II ------------------------------
14al(t)
Male Ping Not permitted On Load >9ad--------------
Movable EqulPrnent 2362(a)
Low VOfts,---------------- ---'------------------- ES6t(b)
High Yoltace-___---'-- ____----------------• 23t1ta)
Normal Uses permitted----------- --------------- E3E2(d). (t)
Separate Groundiug Condaetor--Gresa------------------ E341(c)
Rise Limitation
Splices to Be Yu)caul:ed_---- --- 2161 (b)
Supplying Setters Mad A ------------------
e tat Work--------------------- 1361
ords Not �� peerrmitted for 2361(a)
Attachinngg —
to Building 811111------------- --- 2361(!)
Conceded Wiring --- --------------------------------- _ 2361(a)
Filed Wiring ------------ ---'-------------- 2"l(a)
Passbut Through Doors or Windows---------------------' 2361(!)
passing Throuth Walls or CMltnga--- ---- -------_ S35E(j}
.Ord Psndaate—Bushtd Botea in Covers s
;orre0lve Coaditings 24752))
1$iecb4W Eqa�men tin tis>tatal--- 2349(b)
EieotrfCttl McGtirie liabimg-- __----------� --� 2427(b)
Fb:tares-__-------- 2351(a). (9)
Fleziblet�LonIA Tight Metal Coiduit- a
= ro�ag� 8 motor --------- 3ili(c)))
R aired ------ 223429(6)
lesuhtion—Types oq
MA geseptactes.__—_—__----- a344(c)
List or Corrosive Locations-__------------- 2347(a)
Noamabtme Waterproof Whim- -_----__-------_------ 2342(9)
tne—Drip
]'Mier pi—ed—tal Rscowaya sad E+ttti eat----- 2240(C)8torsge batterlr Rooms__—
Covers9akelite Not Permitted Where Exposed —'-- —� 22FIM(1)
aR g� a InjuryCovers ------- on j3340 (r)
9022010 MA FittiaRa is General ------ ----- - ---------'2421(f)
(�µeets and Pattsls_------------ _---_-_"---- s3M5lM
casupies
LiveoParb- Coatsol �at -- --may--- 3414 6)
Rxioust )Ave
2486
Cranes and Hotels _---------- -_-
General _ - -_--_--
Trslier *fie,—Usstalat DstaDa____--___----_— 1MVC)
Csoa10t�10--Ogtalds Wires we --------_--V2406U)(2)
Curtis Around FliMg------------ ---- - _1E44T(d),Ifl
Current C&M-let Capactly-00" tccosa w----'-"-'----- 2341(t)
General _-«-__ --- --- _ _ 2466(1)
HiiMlt Ckcattscutout laug--Den'Itt's
See Fare Panels - 2343
—
_ _ _ (.)
Loe4ntio �___--'-__----------____-- - E3"(0)(12)
422
Dess Required —�--� =--- ra- '�r �(
_ ME1 a)
ea 1f ------�__�-------------- --- ----
readers to IM-9,tris W ------ 2395Interior Wktw Circuits(
Feeders
Bowe 0Swvk._--- - tree
n - —'_ -`_— ffit------__--
�vemostakm 't— of me ----- - --- -------
Design
TTBX 8 DivistONOF INDUSTRIAL SAFETY
ELECTRICAL SAFETY ORDERS
(Register 95. Ni- "-19-15)
Aeu Mer- From
rot--------- ----- 2342fh
-_--------- !!?1fe .
Raceways and Fittings in Gatsral---------- ---------'_
2a41(d
mer—Thester Stage --_'-----'---------------------""' 2141{ti
ct Burial of Conductors -----------------------'----_---'_
et Current
3344(221(6)
Different Systems In Raceway --- —_-------------- -_
System --_--______ 23T? (a)
Grounding SulWH7 __----___
Siwe of Groun ng onductor___----------____----_---- 2E1e a
d( C
ounected Outlets is
Ei66(t)
Cellular Meta) Raceway------- --- ---__________________ 2164(2)
------
Underfloor Raceways ------ ---------------------
Where Oe
Rods
onnects
Ahead
i�ere--`--------------
2414(e)
fdo
aBiadf
N(a)(E!)
onnecting M— -------------------
Dflltion
See Switches
similar Metals 2325 b
Electrical Metallic Tubing ---------------------'-'-----
Conduit 2346 a
Fiez)ble Liquid Tight _____-_------------------
mKid Coolalt ___-- _-_�--_ az a��..t..• iiZe wiv-------- 2324(
- -
High Nottage Fttree
_ _ 2569(a). (b)
Gearral—__�_—_--_-----`--------------
------ 24040)
---------------
TrEquip
2639(a.)
Equipment
x-ray SwitchesSee
241E(b)
Locking Device for Off Position _-- ------ __
---
Drip Loops
Open Wtring in W� 7,oattbs------- — ----------- -------- 4 11E b )
Wires Eater Raceway---------------------- cyCrj
Where Oe
Rods
2336 cDriven
—_-
a)(11)
Dry TTn* Transformers --'�------------------ ---'-----
2
-------
Dust Proof—Deflaltlon_— -------------------------- --_ 2514
Equipment. Use of —_-________----___---_ -- Ei4e<i) (E4}
i ti)
Dust Tight—Dadultlon _-----_---___---_____--__--_--
Dust--------___--____-
Duty. Contlnvons, Etc. Doflntttoa___.-.----
1344 i
(
Lighting
24'5
2292(•)(1?)
2249(h). (2)
:24i�:�
Tabes E ti 7
234* 1
2;4'4
2€ s
"Ito'
141(a
Tma
$58.42 INDI7STBtAL'I7ELAr10N8 Re4i*e .Mat
aediaa
Elevators
Orounded bT Hoisting Cable_----------------- - --'may 2362(e)
Wirf in Ganeral___________________» ----- —
as 2500tp
Elevator Shafts-Ra""Ys loot 1>ertatiEtd--------------
Emergency Lights
Automatio Transfer SWitch--- --'--'-----"'ti 2588=8
General Provtb)
isloM___- 2533(e)
sources oL Assure- ___-
ed Su y-- ------- biaehiaei_~»_ 2892(1)
Emergency Stop Devlsx-- oton on -~ 8604
Voltag8005
Employees Working on High 3000
ing__----- --'-----"_— '_- 284018)
Ground clamDa------------------- - Delis)
2475(1•)
°r ------- ------ 2405(.
x Yarutton From Orders_ 2805(b)
R =e---------------_-_-_~_� 2333tU
Systema ------------------ EE(s)(1)
2384(4)
lug1a Racevrava___~ _a_____ ~1919
a -Cord iBtrtng Pa�ntttes__------ _—
23U(a)
dttat-- ---------^-_"- ----_ 2800(a)(39)
---- ------------____ 8480(.)
2800(a)(11)
'ts--------- 2444(j),
seas__~»-~�________» -__
Bred on EnalasarM-__ -
w-_-
2340(x)
2415(8)
42�(Ls)
_M
_ 230418)
2313({)
2425(8)
__ Voltage- _ ------ ________'-------_-_ ~»-____
iifahM
voltage --- -------------------- -------`---
24n(0
Shat Lighting and t------ ---------------
---------------'_�2421(b)
j2420(8)
Kra »__�_»___--------------'_________~__`_19-19
21(s)
to mica) 11darS
p
Esc
0rB M------`__�_______^_'___-----'_
is
3fotioa picture studios ----- „_-------- �_»»- ---
s«_-.--]
Moten------------------------~» -------------""'-
42�(Ls)
p.I.Dl aectorster ------ Buatray ---- -'
lW
2313({)
-------__--_-'------------------------ _ 2333(8)
signs and buten Lit 2552(t)
__ Voltage- _ ------ ________'-------_-_ ~»-____
iifahM
voltage --- -------------------- -------`---
2551(!)
2523(b)
Shat Lighting and t------ ---------------
---------------'_�2421(b)
j2420(8)
Swlteb ----------- --------------
-------------- 25M(b):
Telephone Switchboards in Cent -a1 2
------ (a)
Time Switches.etc.------"-----"'»~Y
to mica) 11darS
p
Esc
0rB M------`__�_______^_'___-----'_
ly
Tn%z 8 D1visiON OF INDUSTRIAL SAFETY 858,43
EIJMMCAL SAFETY ORDERS
(ft,siater55, Mai -2-19-55)
Beads
Fares 1 lugMato (0 to 55 Vdb)___»�_~____-_»__M_ 2551
Feeder-Laltba » --------------- 8800(8)(84)
Feeders bleed Powe' and LightM____r__-_-_--____~------ 8305 (a). (e)
Gruu6a Of 33atom____»__--__-_-_'_---- -'--------- 2300(5)
Oversize--Ezceos capacity Perasittod for Voltage Drop---- 34Y6�)
Fence 13eLWean H1gh voltage sad Love eats - - -_-_ 8830( )
Fecacee a� O
Requirements ------
Lo closed Wiring-------------- 8340(b
steing BOxea aGi PaM1s ~_»--~ still
em>e a ioiab of flatten_~- ------ 23 (o)
q»______~��------------------
rmored Cable___-_-.---_»__ _-_--_»_-_--_ 8148 •16 _
(Loading Redw)- Sulk Punta_--_-- -- EN0
Be Displaced BY Whlug--------_19_19__--- 2344(t)
-- 2310
---- ----_»
ata d Spay of Wail'------------- 834310
2300(a)(36)
Es e' Irl:tures » ~
Adeguata Space for8853 Conducton-~----- -------- --- _'_.
Adequate Support-IncsudeecwL-------'-- ~---_ 1)
Adequate Support_+7uoregcent and Othes________________ 8489 (0
CombmRibie M term -Near or Over ------ ---- ------------ hj
{8430(.
Conductors _Det&M of Inabllatton----------------- 2188 (V to
Connecting Raceways to~_-_----------------- Z427(b)
Corrosive ---------
f8340(r)
Covers Hequbred oa posses. Flt(3nSe------------------------ j8429(t)
Damp or Wet LoMtioM_---- ------------------- 2340(k
Different Systems Contained in------------------------- - 2428(k (9)
End to End Mounting --- ---- --------------- -- 2428(8
--~---------------- 22427 (a)
Frees m
g.� Conducts' Nass Sxtdiag Six iz Inches ---------------- 2840(1}
Outlet BozRegrind 8858(9)
FiaoLeroeatandOthera »______'-------------- )
pb4�ariaatiou-mow BhaU Connected b Neutral----------
Temperature Limb for Conductors_~- -- : 34 8 (g)
Used---
Usan RteewaT -----
2369
tam
OvarWcua�rent Protection-- ----- - 8480(h). (a}
2350{t (s)
24ssta ((g
8850(((.
8850(8
8358(0
235018)
2351H, to
aaal�a
8851 b
f351ta
235118
1351ta
44 a
------------------------------
2866 a))
x DBoton- !iM 3[otors »_ 3320(1)
I. IAL P.=---WNS Tnw OF INDUtlf W" SAIMM
858.44
{ lao.i-•rt.2) Rti➢(.MCAL SA7$1'z OMM
Frame of Metal B®ttding for awssm
Grounding Equ4 ----------------_--' 24
Use as olrottmlteS�__
CIrenttw--G
2i4►1
irurnatre
Sameseat Spam for
nolo and Se
JessaBringin
lti)
Lead Frost T"*
a5r24+ed
Flush M tiag-
24astii
4
rum. 00 Iwaad eSNOW
Jim AN
i
011M. sow— -_ _
,ra
saparsto Dow*
t
Severstl4n atSam a� E -
)
Sameseat Spam for
bi
Vertical Ajamd -m�f2mtb)(3)
a5r24+ed
High
Jim AN
i
1st 1
lac
USPIk-has -
as
t()
hear
Not to z
Cat)awse of
zwwwF
�.. ...
*bft-. _
s
SMOn
R
r
t
M,
------ 2392(a)
or Ground ----- - —_
nsformers
11 boards--------------- _—_—_----_—_r-___ 84210)
--- — --_ 2221(&)
isipn>ent ---26&4
lama--Gste�'&1----�__—---------- --
2978(d)
----
------------
— �i21211
(tons-- -------------- sass
Arrestors ------------------------ --_._ 2329
Switchboards----------- — - — - — ----_ 2627)
tare slow*Squip-out______________ {b_ 24N(&
D" --_ _ _______ ___________
A ror Gro&ndlog Equipment___----- ----- 229E b?
cinnr in Each Building---- ---------------_ EE78 tb
wr arnQ -' Yeealar
Ozone Shields --High Voltage wit's ----------- 298E
Portable ggaipment - __--_------ -- --- 26
99( for Communication Circuit_—__--___------- iAr9t.
pooWas of Grounding Denned------------------------ -- za28(a}
-------------------- ({
Raceways ffi General_-_-- - ---- -- 2286 f)
RaUway Traake-d4a tar Grounding �eott'�------- (sea
--------
Relays ------------------------------'-- 2461(h)
Resistors, Rs&ato*s ------------------------------- E38a(f)
Separate Ground Contact In PIMM--------------- -�23EE
Service gqu(ppsnt and Baa°way----------- "-'--- 2980(b)
di EElectrical Y�nfpmest--__- 2991cables a
of rounElectrte E►erators ---------------- ----- 2281 e
Sw4tdeboar'ds----------- ---- --------__-�_'��_ 9484(.
Transformers -------------------- ------ a86<&
water Pipe for Efiiituda------------------------_-_--__
X-ray Apparatus ------'-
-------------------------- aa1(b
Grounding� Sf -2979
(&)Alt ran _„ 2441
Appiie=M ---------
-_ - ---------------�r___------- 46(a --- 24(1
(at)
Dedaiw 29d8
_--aducaPerb4tted__--_--
11M (b)
commonG.Und
358.46 INDUsTRIAL RISAnoxs
tttagaler 64 Na�ti}�
Grounding Conductor—Cantlnued
mom"
Conasaled in Wall ------------ ---------------
Green Color Where Placed In
_
23113141. ft)
Objmeat onabta Curren
(s)
Point of Connection to Be Accessible-
2aa7(b)
Point of Connection to
Raceway
(►)
Point of Connection to --- ----------
-----atection From Co
at tion
protecOn n From b(echank al Injury------------
(a)
all (b)
Separate Around Conductor in Cables______________________
2M(f)
Sise of Condncters for D. C. and A. C--- ------- —
_ 2
Six* of Conductor for Instruments ___------ --__
to ((sea)
2MA
Rise of Conductor for Portables_ --_-_._____w___
(h
Without Joint or 2386(a)
Qronp operation at Motors: See Motors
Guarded—De6nnton--_-------' ------ ----- a(a) (18)
Lose
Guarding Against Accidental Cottsat: Sea I4rte`
In W7: Sea 1146111MICKI Injary
Guarding Agatnet Mechanical
Guard Strips --Armored
Nonmetallic Sheathed Cable -
2346(4
I
Open rInsulators----~
Open Wiiing _
2341
Gwad Fencefor Shielding ---------247#8D
Gutters
Downs —_--
(stngtr�yf Ben Ban--_____---
now
fee Tones-- to loss Switches or iUsea—_
Not t ftel p Switch"
an"
2896 )
Not to ilfistead Over a9 Fest___#
ermmitted_____
Number at Conductors Permitted—
?
(e1
ProteSpliceting u4w at JQIia and Bear --
Protesting
a
Z's" i Feet-- — '
"' meq)).
W1ras at S? ---
2a4ltk).(p
Hand Tool—Portable- SM Petmb%
Handle The--Ch"K Hrasksrs (2 (j) (a)
Hud Rubber Bodiless not P ---------
2MU)
Haw11005
kes Plug at>� ReclCits
Delp a)
___--
•tad
2aa4 dl
Claaa I I,scathr>u___
CYnm 11 LOcatlons---__--Cablea
cofft
C
�p
H Aresad 11.1behl
Attie a" Rea!
TITLE 8 DIVISION OF INDUSTRIAL $AFRIT MAT
BUWMMLL ORDERS
(Rep(ausr (4i. No.3-2-10-56)
Big'A= Only to Authorized Employees 620!(016
General —__------------------ 2#6! a)
_a laa4 b)
Articles 5
Ruin
Tet to J►PPiq In Gmerw_----- -______— _ 834! b))
Branch Circuit PrMectiaa__-- ------- r__--__-__-� 2649 6 '..
Circuits Ia __________________ »_(225477(0)) (9f)
C rases (ibtafnad From Dispatcher for Work m____«»_--t2696(c) (12)
.� 25"(r)
De-aergizinp Grounding for Work on--- ------------------ 12i�a(c} (li
Defln111,011----------------- ----------- 2a100({# (44,
Door Interlocks to Lien Pacts of Equipment --_—_— 1453"1
MoctrhW Discl" rge Lighttsg '------------
Electrical Stations --Work Performed 46
Enclosures To Be IAcked—Sovlm-------_----------- 23'84 6
{2aasc
Tratwt[omee� 2666 a
_ _ � 2407
Fused Cutouts—Eapulaton Not to Endanger Persons------- 2406 b
2498 ((c (8)
Door Interlocks on Enclosures____--___--__---__-__ th)), (b)
226319159ta) tic)
For Use Within Buildings----______________________ 24a6(c) ca)
12236 b
Hooimtick Operation---- ----------- 2335th
Locating 7 Feet Above Floor -------- —_—------- _____2336(b
2406
6(C (a)
Warning Sign— Under Load--------------- f2826(c)
Iwo! Open - 2406(c) (3')
Identlfleatim of Switches, Circuit Breakers---------------- 2609 (c (6)
Insulation on Conductors—_—___-- 2567 e
Interrupting Capacity—overcurrent Devices--------------- -11, d
Isolating Blades-�uardWS L/ve Parts -------------- 2416(a . (d)
Isolation From Low Voltage 4764
LAraltatlon,
(d
3'476 d
Llmltatlon of High Voltage In Buildings. ----------------- 2668(c
E83'fi b (2)
Load Interrupter Switches _-_--_------------------------- 3'446 c)j (6)
2569(b) (4)
- 3407(.)
Locking Doerr and Gates ----- 2476(n))
256!((e)
Movable squipment Fleslbie gable_____________________ 1856<b)
Oil Filled Catouts (Fused Disconnects)-____—_._-__---- J2:
406(c) t2)
2669(b !)
Close Overhead Wltw
y Abow Structures ---------------------- 2317(c) (a)
Ent Horb,ou
Bu ding serai ---------------------------- 2317(c) (a)
services
-- ----------- 2334(c (4)
Minimum Stse---__--------------------------- 2319(o
Not Pasr Root----------------'--'---------- 231 (0) a
2317(c) a
Open Itutaihtion--_-_"-2691
Y994(h)
QuaiMed Workmen (M1y---�_r____�_---��------- 85os((-'1) si
Separating LOW Voltage Equipment in Sams Enclosure---__ S{'4t6(6)
-1%Coaductora
tathd Uad®rgrannd--- -------------------_-_-_--__—_ Yaa4{b)
Overhead Ltaea----- —_-__ __ -_ 2334 c
Shielding Drops From Gbn4et—_�_�_ __—��_ 2334th
Warning Signs --Entering Building _------------- 23341h
3}43tCR
S..."CM-1.5ad Break Device
>41snr and Gottlae
Transformer Installs ions_ __ )
Warn1ng on Fenemr and Siusrds-..—
Wtriag fs nit-----_----- -----
MOM M
9
DIVISION INDUSTRIAL SAFMY
M.49
$58.418 INDIISTAIAL RV ATIONS
�'
TirrLz 8 RDM
F.LF.('78lCALSApRTTORDERB
IC
tRalGeter 5S. No. 3-2-19-55)
sman
H'gWork fa Statkute .d1 Switch Tarr___--_--__»__--.___ 26
oeoe.ri..r Waring (truit.4
seen"
$49440):.. '
Work on Overhead 2W
Auto Transformers SnpplyiM -----------------
E3t!(s)
Work on Underground E)quiluaeat------ ste6
Work Perrortued in Pto=imttF of-_-._______� stt3
ru.ow;------------------------------------------»» 344)4
t:rurral Rr•tairea�ea[s '-----'---'---'-_----'».-'�1E4
pFBo�tiat(t
Hoistq r—
— -- -_- n83(e)
int.•rs. rke
)
' Coma
Lh or to lactating Blades Z(i)
Holsting Cabs Conductive Materiel Around Mgh
21Yl4(i)
Yolta`e_----- S2t85(c) (4)
lilgh Voltage F'um Compartments
2334(b) f3)
_»____»».__--»_-_»_
24$ to 40
How in Covers to bs>#uspotl«_»»»»_-_-_--_-�_w_ a3t1(�
Holm to studs or Joists __»-„-_ 2340(])
Tranemrawr ____ ____________
-..
intermittent [tnty Motors-RatittlM- ------------------------ E3l7{o
Hookstiek O ration- Y
pe � Type oltago Fuasa___-_-_�_____� Eaa6fb)(E)
HOrpilOwer Ra Re4ttiroa
Centretlart 2398(b)
:_.
Banning Protection Not Re4uind. .--------------
iet.•rrul ti..x Calutcity on Sh.ert Circuit 2547td
Hlsrh V -1189e r.4uipmeat ____-_ Es3ltg
_ ____-___»_____�.____—__
Motor Disconnect switch_-_____-__-�_______-
23l9(d
Service Circuit Breakers----------------------------
_
__ s38@taiii{iii
Service switch _-_--__�-� -_- 2399(13 (5)
Swig Controlling A. C. Weid4ra»»_«-- 2687(c)
_-__
Hot Stick Line Tools- Yo)taga Work__--_-- _ _ 26l4tk)
--
,
”
��•••:o�•-d 1>,-antth.n --------------------------»---_ -- E381(a)
Ptaninm(a to 5e Volts) -------------- 6 .
- -- - - lE8a(e)
)
Identification
Circuit Breakers_______
Motor Name
E414(a)
Rn.•e.rays-�Gtiottnding _. -----�--------
1-latink glades (Disconnects)
Vi Breaker,
---- 3a72 td
'
2649(c) ,
Plstes_____----�_____-_-__�-_ 2394(a)
Terminals of Motors. Generators, Coatroliers_2394(e)
Ah••ad --f ,•nis
Hiah Voitaor General - _ - --------------- 2326(b) (1)
------- _-___
Identifying
Neutral Conductor ----- -__Y._--_�--__---��--_--2341th)?
Switches
High voltage -Service ___ -------------------
2416(0)
Low Voltage --General --------------- -------------- 2413ta)
2416 to . (a)
)
and Branch Circuits _-- ------ ---------
_ ____��___—_
Taps Leaving Gutter* ___««_«_ ..
---� 241E(h)
----- l36t(h)(a)
Current Ratings -------------------'------------------
Guarding Live Pnrta _---------------- ---'-'--__---_-_
25894)c
2415(b). (a)
Terminals for Conaeetkm to Nentlal_�------____..
Illumination
- ___ 2464(f)
In Corrosive Locations ----------------------------------
Interlocking With Breaker ------------'-"------------'--- 24t.fe
-
- --'-
.
Aronad.Zdpuipment to Gepral____�_W___�_
AroundSwitchboards-____�-_«�--'�-____--
_ ---_ 2476(0)
-- 2420(f)
Locked Enclusures -_-------------------'--"�-_
Mems of Operating ------ --------- -(2416(ac
------------'--------1.241b t b
Immersion t Lams________«_-______________
Inceaden�gsnOtMlaampa UseCloy as ResatOCs._w_-_�-__�__--
2451(9)
2451 (f)
�-
Opening IImler Load ----------"-- -----'-- -------'1S
3446
2416(o)
21aiM`koBreakand Closed Positions
aft_-_
urs _»»«-____«__�
2416(x)
Provt-siona rar i: ------------------,_
.:
234x(])
Switches -_«««___ 2399(f)
Inductive Heat from A. C- Wires to Raceent" _ «-�« 2346(4)
mist=--Cond,actors Pa4sing Through _________________
Boxes: See Boxes
2343
Industria) Lighting Circuits Over 34q \Feta---------------
IAfn-Red Lam Res
(i43E (d)
Junction
and Tube Wiring. Concealed (See Open Wiring. also)
_ _
-12358(k)
ps-Iadestrw (tag w -�_______--_
2466 it)
g;
Knob
Unused Openings -------------------------18369(d)
Inserting Conductors to RacewwF
Inspecting wood Puree >)etara CI1mWr� «_____
- 2244) (1)
~--- 2644(g)
I{nockout,--Sealing
Installation of al4uigment
instruments
_ _-_- 2367
_ __
LaMAl"'A Voltage Circuit Breaker- _-------------------------
-- --- ---- ----- -- 8 !(6)4)4)
-----2360(43(3)
H'wt�
2367(a) 4)
t.
Switches Gutters -------- -------------------------
"P. Leaving ate, Also)
Flet
2429(h)
or—dug Casae « _„ 2388tc ,(d)
__---_-________ 2427(0
�
�'
I.Am;hoider- (see rounding ---_ ------`-------'------
Shell SodcCtt-G ------------------
--
2439ta)
s4E9(a
Grounds Cond
ng mors-Iletaga -_w-
Instrument Transformers
23U(e
&
Brass yeclal Types --______ _ __-
Intra -Teed- __»
348ttc
Not Lor Plug Re�Coaditiotta ------_---"-- tsdita
_
GroWUIAunding
tiwatMing 8aecgatiaitle'a aaa C«aaas
andral _-- _-nom
- 2332
-------_'- 2398 (a). (ls)
is Wet Loeattoas --------------__�E341tb)
(3)
____
I
Ctianit Fromm
Covered WitasYRebulra6
2226
Open to Clad Wtrffig -„ as4atk)
7irie Wird In CondWts------- ----------- -�- E359if)
Lighting --- ----'--- 2326
_
Field - -"-'- "--`----------------------
2465(d)
Open Wtring >✓iateriag Bolas___- ----------------
2sb$U))4)2)
-- 2359(e)(2)
Athletic
Uat-tee Festoon ----------'------- ---------------
--
---- aasita)(4E)
service Runway ________�----------------------_
Insulating Fiber Inserta-At-- o Cable w
aaa9(e)
»_ 2a45te)
------- --------
Yat-ge �d�t1o� Panels
IAghtiag thtUet Det
tie o0,
2681
IMR"tlag Material. Camp to He Mads of------------- --__ - 2416(li
Irlwlattsg
(®ts 56 Volts) _----------"--'-�____-___-
Lighting Panels'
------ __-----'------- Ea89
Mate on Floor at Switchboards �__-_»__�___�
I
2288(c) (2)
Lighting rusts
Lightning
GroutArrestersdNng� Grtwnding Neutral »_».__._
2a86(t1
Conductor* for Hip V
Conductors
«» _- 2661(e)
Arrester t�
Rod �e�'le-"
--- 2341
u4) tleaerat w____________ __w-_
232610
L;ahustnt --------.--,.»
-
ilarvloe Whp
___»_ E32l/c)
2309 (b)
LinkFaper Ids WA Roel _� W_______»---•»_-
A
2997(0,
2:16(a)
stable
Suitable _____-_ _v _
Live Swl --»---_."--
Use Bar ser
ter'lroof Wiring -_
Kaob««�«__«___
_ as44te
2341(e
o0, Frp -------------»�
usell Front
Fuses _- "
Lhnlmtleras te �e "--`� -_---- ---�
Per-itteA to Dr! Lacatlo- j ----------
4w-------------
Overhead lap Whirrs _
for Interior
aa4ate
2311<:). (b)
faa4a(o).(a)
Oa17 »_------- - a t►�
lave Part-Drt9niflins
l.ma-BreaknisYcon q•,•aaraor.4eh----------------``" s;t
Wim'--
234ud
For High °gnYoltsp«----------'--
«--
« _««_ «___»-««
1
------ 42(g).tm1
►YtAtaN'»-_.»--»
R tinterrupter
t Wada
Load Sgi6oA-
TMA
if;ri rt► 4.. -y = = * Its. 1
i'f= E DMMMOPIMMMIALSAFEff M.61
BLWTRlCAL Sl YWY OBDMB
(Register Ede, Nal—$ -H-55)
Permitted Ahead
e1
Test chLftto a� ®t In.rt+l6aReoepuseles-4Dwitalle at a_« «� (a)
Ylncral hwdato& Pa d 19 —andd cob
Citreit Breaker taay��trr___--____-
Clock Motors and Other Dhinhu Live Types ____ ----- -------- 2399 b
Code Letter --Locked Rotor Currents __ 2294WName Plata Date, __—_�__..._��_«___--_-
Table No.
is
Controllers-- for Use -------- -----------_----'.2899
C011ttollwa! Ses Varl� Dstalla Under Controllerss
Demand Fad of Feeder2a9b (e)
Direct Current--$tartin3 Rhaoeta.ts 24bIf:)
Disconnecting Ymaa (See Details Under Switches) ---------
2299(at) to
�narseacp Stop Device ----`- ------_ 2E9911t)
Exposed Live Part _--`--------- ----- 2894(d)
Fractiona=l Aoraepow� JJf289f(d
Automatically started -------------------------------iEb97l'a
Runtileg—S)vercurrent Protection..............
__----_ '
- S8l7tb
Several on 4.)t:a Circuit --------- ---------------------- 2396(d
Terminal Roe, --------------------------------------- 2194(s
--
Fawn in xvi,itipbNot Permitte------------------------ 2269(1)
Grounding Frame or Case ------------------ 2400
Group GronP Feeder—Elea and Protection_ _____________..__-___ 2390(a)
Group operation on One Machine ___ 2396(d
Provisions ---- 12899(b)
Control Chcult Disconnect --__________________
Controller Speeideations ------- —____---- E888ta
High Impedance Windings (Torque Motor)-------------- 2297(c (4)
Installation Data __________Nos. 8 to 16
Tables ----------------------------
Intermittent Duty t ptytection—Not Rs4utred----_- 2297(o)
Runnier ------- 2895(c)
Table_--______-_-_-« «——-------- _
I.ocigbRkotor Currents _ _ ---No. 19
Low voltage I'rotect�n -__ _------__-_-- _-«-2398(m)
out at Sight of Starter — ---- -- -----__-_«--«- 42392 (a
Paralleling of Fries Not Permitted---------------- --- 2849(t)
Remote Control Circuits: Sea Control Clrcults
Running—overcurrent Protection
Combined Protection --------------------------- ---- 229t(•)
Conductors Required In ------------------ -- 2897 i(1
Fosse Substituted ____--------------------- E38t h
General Requirements _r----------------------«�__ 2397 •
Incorporated in Controller _------------------------- FEDS([a
Integral With motor --- ------------------------------ �sEST a))(2)
ler IaOermtttant Duty------------------ 2397ta)
ONu�t of of Starter------------------------------ Sa97tb
Omits for Finatkmal H P.-- ----------------- 9337
116 t of Motor Current___— 317 {( t)
Spunk g H«r ------- --------==------e___-.s- !!t( t
Shunt'ns Durlta[ lttarNng�
.ADI Qoadltet[a'a----------------
Tbertnal Cat"to and Relays-- 29#
Thus DORY Regntce-1, ---- -- -- -
rerun
►„»Ai .k OiaMka_�s;:�c 3�*�ax's __
�t �a�(44)
------------
c)
-� a•e
I1,rkKd VOW
1.4,,'kno
iw,cknryo .,me*a Oir^*'
I)
43_ty
r>
Lockout Mwousnoo
y
C
Z r)
ieE)
---- --
tat)
Law
21114410
alf4d)
LAW IPeftsaft,)
LOW
a)
i'f= E DMMMOPIMMMIALSAFEff M.61
BLWTRlCAL Sl YWY OBDMB
(Register Ede, Nal—$ -H-55)
Permitted Ahead
e1
Test chLftto a� ®t In.rt+l6aReoepuseles-4Dwitalle at a_« «� (a)
Ylncral hwdato& Pa d 19 —andd cob
Citreit Breaker taay��trr___--____-
Clock Motors and Other Dhinhu Live Types ____ ----- -------- 2399 b
Code Letter --Locked Rotor Currents __ 2294WName Plata Date, __—_�__..._��_«___--_-
Table No.
is
Controllers-- for Use -------- -----------_----'.2899
C011ttollwa! Ses Varl� Dstalla Under Controllerss
Demand Fad of Feeder2a9b (e)
Direct Current--$tartin3 Rhaoeta.ts 24bIf:)
Disconnecting Ymaa (See Details Under Switches) ---------
2299(at) to
�narseacp Stop Device ----`- ------_ 2E9911t)
Exposed Live Part _--`--------- ----- 2894(d)
Fractiona=l Aoraepow� JJf289f(d
Automatically started -------------------------------iEb97l'a
Runtileg—S)vercurrent Protection..............
__----_ '
- S8l7tb
Several on 4.)t:a Circuit --------- ---------------------- 2396(d
Terminal Roe, --------------------------------------- 2194(s
--
Fawn in xvi,itipbNot Permitte------------------------ 2269(1)
Grounding Frame or Case ------------------ 2400
Group GronP Feeder—Elea and Protection_ _____________..__-___ 2390(a)
Group operation on One Machine ___ 2396(d
Provisions ---- 12899(b)
Control Chcult Disconnect --__________________
Controller Speeideations ------- —____---- E888ta
High Impedance Windings (Torque Motor)-------------- 2297(c (4)
Installation Data __________Nos. 8 to 16
Tables ----------------------------
Intermittent Duty t ptytection—Not Rs4utred----_- 2297(o)
Runnier ------- 2895(c)
Table_--______-_-_-« «——-------- _
I.ocigbRkotor Currents _ _ ---No. 19
Low voltage I'rotect�n -__ _------__-_-- _-«-2398(m)
out at Sight of Starter — ---- -- -----__-_«--«- 42392 (a
Paralleling of Fries Not Permitted---------------- --- 2849(t)
Remote Control Circuits: Sea Control Clrcults
Running—overcurrent Protection
Combined Protection --------------------------- ---- 229t(•)
Conductors Required In ------------------ -- 2897 i(1
Fosse Substituted ____--------------------- E38t h
General Requirements _r----------------------«�__ 2397 •
Incorporated in Controller _------------------------- FEDS([a
Integral With motor --- ------------------------------ �sEST a))(2)
ler IaOermtttant Duty------------------ 2397ta)
ONu�t of of Starter------------------------------ Sa97tb
Omits for Finatkmal H P.-- ----------------- 9337
116 t of Motor Current___— 317 {( t)
Spunk g H«r ------- --------==------e___-.s- !!t( t
Shunt'ns Durlta[ lttarNng�
.ADI Qoadltet[a'a----------------
Tbertnal Cat"to and Relays-- 29#
Thus DORY Regntce-1, ---- -- -- -
358.52 INDUSTRIAL RU ATIONB
_«-««____----
OilCircult Branham -«_._-- ... ^--«.................... #lb8b(0)
(Rplater5ls, N4L$-4-ti-fy
Motors—Continued
section
Several on One Circuit______________________________
__ Zs"id)
Speed Limitation Precaution*—D.C. Machines_________ 2399<g)
Terminal Box Required ---------------------------------- �1394te
Termins—Identiacatiou ___ __--
al
Torque Motor—High Impedance Type_____________________
22"4ei
23271 c) (4
WCurrents ---- «-----------------
Mounting EgRotor��P4m Supports ------------- «_____._
a339sld)
Movable Equipment ---------------------- —----------- --___2341(x) ( )
MtiltionWtAaNaab)�r—Dallatt4oa-__---_----_---_--__—;3
(a)(2)
Multiple Conductor Cable—DMn-Quts#de Wires «-___—----------- — !3)5(C2363(t)
Multiple Conductors (Paralleling) -----
2341 to)
Multiple Facing (Not for Motors)—Provislow for Use
Multiple Occupancy Bu Entractes
2379(0)
Multiwin Branch Circuits_______«________1!464/*)
2494tb)
Name Plates
_«-««____----
OilCircult Branham -«_._-- ... ^--«.................... #lb8b(0)
Appliances and Heaters --------------- -------
- - -
Arc Weeden
" a e
Capoettor'e ---------- w— ------ —__ --------------d
Cotttrollera _«_---_—____«________«_______
-__-____ :.'•.: eh.
Fixtures R'ith Ballasts or Transformers- ----------------- 342741)
Generators ---------- --------------------------------- _4-11b)
Hach Vcdtage Switchas—For Ideatidcatiom_______ _ ?&04(c)ti)
Mot (,uds I.Atter: Etc - — 32941 a)
i3s�ed)
Resistance Ws)dera __«�___ w_
3368(1) (1)
12358 ( 1). (it)
Stltae— ------ «--- ------------------------
Spacial AsremDties Com Proteetoa
------ ----------_ 339itc)t3)
Switchae--Circelt Breakers —_«------ ------- «--«---_ 1414
-----------
(n
Neon LIghtdat --__-� » « � �- ._~Y«_---
sSS!
Neutra! )tot
A. C. _«._ _
2379(0)
Acresribie Attics _ ____________________
Other Ob]ects------------------------------
2494tb)
consent to Saar SbeD of Lamps_____________
i2429(a)
Connection Terminal Required to Service"')2464(d)
Current
at Capm-----«----------- -- 2341(r)
Gying MCF'«-------
*3-7fa)
P)aBranch Circuits
ttd— ________—_
Grounding Z"hw*lkt. Not to Be Used for
_ l3SI(b)oFwmtirW
239!(4)
------
Id-AtWft
-------- 2383(6)
(h)
bmiatbm RN )2494(a)
Not to De la«�-----_«�r----------_-- -341(6)
in Interior Wiciag C'tecuits_--____
2495(1)
Opened by Ceatrollw„4d)
Opening In a Switch
Wk's
i44t'ta)
y-�_-
Rea Rare is
_399(0)
_„__«_—_—_—.-----_---_ -- x326(0)(1)
New $Us for Service I� _____---'_»------------------ 2329(4)
- t to 8a G ed_�««__ _331(0)
On
sare wk— to Raw S+tiwate Boase
----___-- 2358(t)(3)
-----------
' __ 33b8(j3(1)
t1wt” a« --.._«-_--r_---_._ __________-_
-'--
t234N)
")2333 (b)
__________«------------ --.-- 2349(*)
_
AtticsNam 40h,"Al t .Mc3
foads to 4.. ----------------
.---- 1344(e)
i"d"--- ------------------------ 2346(d)
Iftsairesand---------------------- 346(.2)
234i(t)
L"ama"on-0 or
t __« ----- ----- _-_---- --«
-- 3i4fb)
tie414M 24cxea-.-..-- .-
�--- -------------- 23511 4 0 4 3)
«_______________________ 3349(*)
ELECTRICAL SAFETY ORDMS
TITLE iDmwx OF INDUSTRIAL' SAFETY 0&58
Nonmetailic Watarpront N01Rs14
w� Fitttaea-Inauht�e Material----------------- $$4?iMri
Ia Wkewaya and Gauers_«-««--- «----- «__---__--__-
Objectfonal Current Plow In Ground Conductor-----«
on High Voltage Wort ----- «---- s_—«
tway. ur�.�a e.
WBurner Equipment — ------- --------------
_«-««____----
OilCircult Branham -«_._-- ... ^--«.................... #lb8b(0)
Oil Filled Cutouts (Found Dfac oanects)
4335Chi (!)
High Voltage Service ------ -_-_'-------------------------
2400(0) (2)
Protecting ormen «__«_ _________________________
Oi1Fl1)ONTranatormnrn
2409(3)
Installed indoors «----- ---------------------------- _
2407(a)tn(f)
Installed in Various Enclowi �ee--------- ---------'-------
Oil Swttdna, Sectionalising—ProvMMns for Usn_______________
2416(x)
One Point of Attachment: See Attachment to BuAdings, Services
___-__-____
3368(1) (1)
12358 ( 1). (it)
Opamhlg in ao:w.—m* B. Closed __--------------
_______
(k)
Openings In Cabinets ---------------------------------------
2367
Open Knits SwitcheOn Switchboards ---------------------'12421
(g)
2605(C)(3)
O(xn liar,?,u?+^F•..._4:atchmtt!e to Rtand bY---------------___.__-_
Open Wir1nR ____---_---
2342(k)
Acresribie Attics _ ____________________
Other Ob]ects------------------------------
23
Contact Wath
Damp I. cations -------------------------- -__ ____
42(1)
3340(h). (1)
Enterinm Itw*ways _ __ _ _ _______
Fishing in Concealed Spaces of Walls --------------------
2343 tel
2343 (h)
G.,,oding Fixtures and Boxes___________________________
On lnrumu.ra Within Building9--------------------------
-342
2343
Knob and Titbe--Detalis of installation-------------------
__________
2542(1)
(hitMt Boxer wad ti nes_____________ ---------
2314(0)
Ce�.�
on Outside Of
Protect From Mechanical Injury----------- 2242tW)
Separating Brom Equipment -------------2342(h)
---
Separation From Other Circuits_-____--------------------
Thermal Insulation In Walls -- !342(66)
Tftrough Walls and Floors _-------- « 33'1(9
Outdoor I igDtoring—lotstfim Lama--- -- ---- -------- 3loota (47)
Outlet Boxes (2246( at
Required at dolga (x
and Shits--___ _-_--____)3243<tT
See Boxes for Other Details
Outltnr Llishftff 2300(a) (48)
Definition - 2649
Law Voltage --- --"-------------- 2562
Rich Voltage------------------------------------i2820(b)
Outside of Bmt)d1116 -Wit'"S Under Two Inches of Concrete___--- 12224(b)
outside Whin _ _--------------------- 2320
000
Open on 211gat sulattorrss_ildttl-- ---------- --------- ---- 1811(4 )
Overrclrreot ProttctMm __ _ «- += Y 84 2(b)
AheaFFluoraof FaceOperato t - ------ ---- -----«__«« 8nuta)
Far Dubliner Poses or Clrtmtt Hraatari for t)tt�''Wia116
•••-pr'OYI —.Fions - ,wmMLeu Vat or Result of Floor-
ne
Overhand LiC------------------- 2413(2)
oraia Ut0)it Cam-
misefon Aum
Overhead Wim„_�„-„ - 2319(s)
------
O-Uft Above ground a”
CI ®a 3i17(y)
Sins Required ------ -_ --- „ itaquir�_-__-_-------„__ s317(d)
Supysrta-Inaulatura2216(e)
Oaono Protection -High YWtage �fireL,�- �__�_� 8946(2)
Padlocks for.Lo�i!n�
Paint to Be 8ers�poidnder Ground _„"--`-__'--'- 22871E
Panelboard-DeltnItion - ------ S3 ta�1t49)
PParilienng boards (s°e Detalls T%n pyo Pa j� -- 2422
Conductors „- 2341(5)
buses (Not for motors)_-_ - -----� 2269(1)
Trina0017nka __-- 2406(0)
Phasing A. C. Conductors in Raceways- 2340(4)
Pilot Plants-Eiperlmesutatoperatfo�---"-'-Zi42tj3t4)
pilace �oyumst-Ionaltiaa_�_- Cord Wiring 2363
„ 2360(5)(50)
Plugs and)geeapy
For R aV
In Hazardous
i. -_ ' 2345(6)
-- 235a(a)
toioad___„,_._-„_- 2367(-)(6)
as for Use- ------ __.___------- 2367(c)
2367(b)
of B o!- -- 2412(2)
23a2(k)
a429(f)
:Otmt Sources at _--'___ 2429(f))
-- - __ 2429(e)
�t Permit____ 2429(d)
2429(a)
(3)))
to4(f)
niglcntasat Plug 49 Contro)ler _ '392 (b) (3)
Attachment riew as _---_•---__------------_-
Grounding „--„„- 2399(d) (4)
»---- «�_ (2393
i� Ilandime- _-_-- ---- ----- 1!400
'429(u)
i522 (d)
2549(e)
2134(d(
.30a(a)
233+ (h)
2538 (b)
B0011(0le
Public UtFltty Commlmdm RUIN ------------------------------ 8316
Pull and Ju Dozen_ ------------ ------------ 285"g)
Pulling Conductors In Raceways ____------------------------ 23400
QualldedA Voltage _______
EkVilpment_______- 2475 C6)
auned W _ -----__-- 2200(2) (aE}
Quauftd
orkmen Only
Access to Guarded Egnipment ---------- ----------------- 24760)
Allowed Around Voltage ---- ----------------------- 2336 0
Arsenal - ------------------------ 2421(8)
Install and Yafatain---„--------- -------------------- 2297
200+(h)
Marking an Wsh Voltage-----,------------------------ 260a((o ((i))
8600(c3(2)
R Boor Fitting at Each Outlet---------------------------- 2240(2)
From Open to Closed Wiring______________________ 2240(6). (1)
C ely Installed Bofors Pulling Wires- -_ 2340(t1
Connecting to Bozos and Fittinis_-�_- - 2340 (d'
Continuity of Electrical Flow to ()round_____„__ _ 2340If)
o
Continue R� From PItUnE to Fitting--____---- -„�_ 23400
Definition ________________------ -- ---- ------- ------- 2300a) (52)
Discontinued Outlets ----------------------------------j226+
iti255(f)
Fire Stops Not to Be Displaced _--__„__ 234+(t)
(Iroundbw----------------------------------- 12249(D)
From A. C. Wires------------------
Elevattor shafts-- ----
-----__-_ _
at
cor
Range Pings (BaYNtt
--- ---- --------------------------- 2300(a)(54)
e Caned) -Not Permitted
Wbere Subject to Mechanical Iajury--- -------2429(r)
0475(k) Readily AoceeeB�is-I/eIInitba_w�„____ 12476(6)
Resmiog>snd: of Conduit_„____„ __- 2200(5)(66)
2308(5 {a9)
Plugs. San Plum
EHeske Co DeCniuon �---------------- -
Control Circuits
•-.0
53599(b) Prat -ax NIM 1ag11iN —--- -------- _ :a +a )
260® 1'roteenn Cable-------------- 2049 0i
2603 Running6 arms r1ng--------------------2849rt)
*sate -----•---------
Running Tb-� Molars
a duh -=rot Pormttted to
!94:(0 (2)
Wet Looatisas__ 2348 (g)
858.86 INDUSTNUM REI.ATIONS Silts 8
(Rases tie.S—t-
Sats Acew
Circuit Breakers ----- — --------
1t41lti)
Fuses --------------- -------__----_----_-- 2418([)
Isolattag Blades___________________________2416(.
Switches ----------------- — ------ — --- -- --- __________ 2412(1)
Safe Design and installation ---------- »__» —(2207
Safety Equipment High Voltage Work- am
----------4
Scow Shona l
Identifying 24"(t)
Of Lampholders—Coaneated to Neutral- --- --»---------- 12464(x)
2464(6)
Screw Shell Sockets—Not for IIn as Plug Reeeatacles___-_—__— 242!(&)
Sealoffs in Raceways
Hasardoue Locations----___---_M�__—_—_
Refrigerating Rooms_— ------------- ----- ---_—_' !E!4(a)
Se&k Required for Metes ZDnclosura_»-----^-_-'---- -- ---28a40nSI tk))tp
Seomd&rks Considered the Swvlca condactora----------- w— 22a6ta)
Secondary Current of Motors --------- -------------- -------- 2326(6
Secondary :Network—Deflnttion--------------------- ------- 2366(2)(6!)
SoccedarNetwork Ties—ProteMimi------------- --_— 2406(d)
Sectionalising On Switchea—Provrioup for Use--------------- 2416(e)
Secure Footing Around Switchboards. _ -------- ---______ 2420(e)
RuOewas is Genera) ------ — --------- _--- la46(d)
Separation of Baro Part*—Patnd. __-- 2421(9)
142! Q
Low Voltage From High 2475 11)
Separation at am Bars-_ 2360([)
E421(1)
Separation at Open Co re_-- __�_�__�_ 2242(d)
a343(d)
Sel.tMa�an Wiring Fina 2342(6). ())
2343(.)
Series D. C. ]tote[*-41pe64 Umttattoa-a---------- - Mille)
Series Lisht611 Systems—Ht16 Voltxee------_------»___w 2867(e)
8ervlce— lieu -r»-_- _----------------- ----- noeia)(6s)
80rvkeable—DsiNtnm _W--_------------ -- 2300(a)(66)
Serrke'C mtms__'Deinitm --------_—�—� 3306(a)(61)
High Voltage Sign Where >n& )Sti91d1a1— -____ 2334([)
Junction BOX iniJadmeiouad --_—___-_ 1326 (0) (3)
_ __ _ - 2336 (2)
------------ -- )
w...0 er - t �torl2l8ntld:tom------- Nta)<623
Neutral Net
Neutral to !lave Connection %%CMINM at 8arvbe__—_—_ E334(e)
ProtiollOU In Bub t2331(2)
Pothetdeto be Used _------- --'--------------- 2334(4)
somor connections Not -_--____---_ ----------- 2334(11)
-
Tam � �--- 121126 (e)
gruces am------)2a24(b)
VntiWwguatt�edd�tNte�utr -----------------
--------------------
- i (�))) te)
foully CoatrolNd ----------------- ----- - 2331(a)i)
veers a DWRWN GF INDUSTRIAL SAFETY 358.57
ELEC:TBICAL SAFETY ORDERS
(Reiff Bis No.3--R-'x-55)
CSl
_--'------------------ ----
current a"
-- ta" Instrument Transformers-_--_-__-- _ 2232
Different Classes of s)Qrvlcs—__-----__----- _ 2216(a)(9)
.Emergency Lighting _12821(6)(1)
12663(0)
Equipatent Grounded From Neutral ---------------
2333(i)RIP0sed VO P— — -- ---------------- a
238
()+omdtng Equipment and Raceway -----------------------
2880(b0lb
Multiple Occupancy Buildings_____________________________ 2326(x)(2)
Serving More Than One Building —__________________ -----
Service Hoed
CAbove Ground--__---------------------------
Exposed vnre Not Over 4 Feet--------------------
8$2Sie828(c*
)
ta28(a)
Location- -------- ------_-'---------------------- 2339(6)
Flared Above Service Drops
------ -----------------------
BequiiM------------------------------ 2838 b
Separate Hole for Each Wire --------
-------------
CSl
_--'------------------ ----
current a"
-- ta" Instrument Transformers-_--_-__-- _ 2232
Different Classes of s)Qrvlcs—__-----__----- _ 2216(a)(9)
.Emergency Lighting _12821(6)(1)
12663(0)
Equipatent Grounded From Neutral ---------------
2333(i)RIP0sed VO P— — -- ---------------- a
238
()+omdtng Equipment and Raceway -----------------------
2880(b0lb
Multiple Occupancy Buildings_____________________________ 2326(x)(2)
Serving More Than One Building —__________________ -----
-330(d)
2331(c)
Speclul T3,P s of Service________________________________
12326(a)(3)
_2326(b)
Sopp;y-g un— Ummiug T—ugh Another_____________
T1uee-Phase Faur-tti --------------------------- ------- 2326(a)(3)
Service----------------------------------------- 2522(b)
service Switch
Ahead of Service Fuses -----------------------------------
2381(d)
Circuit Breaker Substituted for__________________________
33o(a)
Dtxpnaectiox of Neu ttai__________ ____________________
2330(.)
H wer Rated Type Requirements_____________________
Required—High Voltage______________________
2399(d) (5)
2335(b)
I,on,do -Break
of Overeurreat Units ----------------------------- 2330(a)
Number
geadilyAoceeeiblsto0ocupxuta------------------------- 2330(d)
Six Switches Froin One Set of Entrance Conductors__.____
2330(b)
Type and Rutins---_-------------------------
2330(e) to
(a)
Where Required----------- ----------------------------
on Customer's Premises-----------
t830(b)
2305(a)
ServingAgency—Equipment
Setting (of Circuit Breakers)—Deanition----------------------
2300(a2306(a) (67)
Shall Versus should ----"----------------------------
Sheltering Fro
Equipment inGeneral---------------------------I-
- 2476(()
2401(2)
Generators -------------------------------'---------- 2420(h)
-------------- ------- 2412(e)
From Accidental Contact
SbleW
H:xnosed High Voitaee,Near Windows -
---- !384th}
Ei..l�.
__-_ 2567(d)
-__- 2!00(&)(62)
_-_-----`------ 2862
--------------- 2561
--__ 2540
2476(p)
358.58 1"USTRIAL, RELATIONS Trm a
(Rogister W No.3-2-{i-66)
sectim
Simultaneous Opening All Conductaft 2429(b)
23M(d)
Motor Running Protection_- _-- —_ 2390(e)
s4as(f)
SkirtedTy eDPlugs Ragetred for Sigbu vd---- ----
_ 2436 (dl
Smootiring ns,—Beating Devhses---- —_
Solder Lup and Sotdr2d joints---�-- --- E23�tb)
Soldered Conneotbns—Not for Service Wtr�_—..�-------- 2309(a)
Soldering Endo of Straadad Condnctoas__—_— --------'» 263E
Sound Rsasrd1n61utDmtnt-- ""-" -- EE66Eh)
Space in Boxes and Cabinets--_--- ------------ 12369es)))
Spacing Cabinets, Panels From Wet Walla—w--------------}2E42(L). (1)
Spacing Knob and Tube Wiring From Pipes and -'_(2343(d)
Spacing Open Conductors OR Insulators- 1
1342(d))
Spaoing Raceways From Wet Waus-_---_----- -------"12249 (2)
—_ ca.-%— 414—it Breakwa From Wet W:cam -------- 2412(s)
o1"—ICards ami Cabl" ---- ---
------ '-" n"(h)
--__ 2360(h)
In Gott---_--_— ---- __
In Service W(ras_---- _---- ____ _�____---_��__
-_—
2326(*)
2309
Methods of Makfu and Iasu�tta�g-_--_-------__.._�_
2396(a)
Not Permitted in (ironer Conductor
Not to Be Palled in Raoeways_-
-----
---------- 2346(e)
BPi'a7 Boothe
""'----_--
Ric
_____ 26160)
defiers!
Paim2nts��
Electrostatic Paha ----
------" — Ei4(s)
Stage Lighting �nlpment—o -----
-"'
Motion Picture Studios ------ --
------�_ 2636
2643
Theodora----------------------------"--____—__�
(E604(h)
Employee --High voltage Wart_
— ____(EW-ho(3)
Standby
2606(c)(3)
Stet Sam w.unima Between Coat.WM eta--- 2421 (1)
[J
Goiters
R ya 1n feral--
2366(2)
W)reways am Besways__________________
------"{2367(b)
SnDp�nt v2rtiaal in Raceway-------------------
9 ace xetat Rsaeways
2340(m)
Duhrout6
From
2363(2)
236for D)
Wire a)»: No. 6�_�-__�-_�_r�__--__
!36
2363(b)
mum
36ultiosttet A 17 --
Nat ft use With Oyer 2@! volts_ ------�---------�2429<$i
2E63(f)
_� 2363(a)
�tac2 Swi(ahs..wiPlas
2240( )
23#0 2s,#0 (a)(7e)
SoldboarA— its
S
and Par�-Barriers
24ri121 f1)
Required Between �-_—_---
--
Bwtfttcbee
T W
aus�e;
-_.----- 3476 d
T11'i.� a DNMN OF INDUST UL SAF WT
ELECTRICAL SAMY ORDEW
(Regi 5►Me. B-.5-10.55)
Retraces to JEactesurs at xr__�-�-------
Fame on Back
muminstlen----- -----» - 244"
--- 24s1 b
1=1411 -------- _�___�_- [r2267 s,))(1)
Give haat Types --- --------------12420(&). (e)
-- (2431 g)))))
Material of Backboard ______�—__----_-_�__—__--- 2421 a
Near yultable Material ____—_-_--- 2420 0
Near Moving Parts of Madtl�ry--- — ------------- ---- 2120{e
Near Stage _-- - - 2640
QmllfiedPetson2Only_---»--_--------------------- 2421(Lj
Rnbbv Matson Fkwr_---------------------------------- 2338 c (2)
Separation of Baze Brut Baro aats_—_________—____-- 2421(1)
Switches Mounted IS of rd -------------------------- 2421h )
Telephone— Live Parts-------- ------- 2699 h)
Theater and --------------------------------- 2643
Westherproof Types ---- — ---------------------- ------- 2420(b)
Switch Boxes: Ses Boxes or Outlet Bozos
Switches
Automatic Transfor Emergency Lighting ________________ 2663(h)
Definition --------- ------------------------------ 2200(a)(71)
Enclosed. Externally Operable, Knife Blade
Accidental Closing by Gravity ----------------------- _2412(b)
Biadea Dead in Open Position----------------------- 413(e
2422(d
Current Ratings --Knife Blade Type___________________ 2413(a.
Different Systems in Same Cass-. _r----------- 2340(k_ (2)
IndieattOn or Upon Or L'Iaeea rmmauna______
In Sight of Controller __—---- ----------------------
Locking in ()pen PoaIt!on
Matoro------------------
Services —---------------------------------- --
Maximum Ratings Permitted —__________________—_--
Name Plate Required ------- ---- —_— ------ —______
Not to Be Used for Gutter ---------- —
On the Line Side of Plug Fuses _____________________.
Opening Neutral Conductor --- —__—_-__-____-�__'_
Permitted for Use as Controller_—_--____w_�__�_
Pr=ttlon From Mechanical Ininry... _____-___..
PaUouta, Swingways. Eta. Used as 8wiboh-------------
Readily, Accessible
Live Front
(4)
358.60
Taps in Service Entrance
bMUSTM" RUATMS
t 5s. N a
6aet4.a
Nea, is
--= -- 22-40 3 to 7
U)
tures, a,-anop"s--- -«___--,� _ E4ET()
rht Couautt-60 De;teea.C. e
_-__- -_ 2362(a))
Is
EltYina��il_-_�__--__ ----_--E36E
�urixL�- -3techanicat injury
___ E36E
(:)
336E
7
_---- ----- - i326(a)(3)
-_ __---»----___----_
Tinsel Cords -Fat SpeeW Pnr3�oaaa___-_-_-�_M-_
Torque
rr
-.m,
-_ 2361 c)
236913)
motors (Hlsh lmpudence) --
Transform «--_- ---
--
ers — 2397(c)(4)
Aekarel-Iwulated-Indoors �_____-_____--_-----_-_- 2404 (1)
Connections Cbmpletslp ILlncMeed___-------____W__-
Curb$ for Bmainx
2404(b)
(j) (2)
Dry TTDea--Iadoora _- ----- ----
124usfht
2467
»�'!O DlschaM Idtht)nt--_-«-�___ 430(c). (d)
8431
Electric Furnace --___ 2552 (11
74tclosurp __«_»_ "-' -__-_- 2406((q) (3)
Secondaries ____�_______-_-« -____---____ 2 006(b) (i)
-------�____-
Groundbax 2406(a)
Iustrumeut-(ImuadF� Cam aml-"«-"--------- 2407 (e)
btmtritment-R Ofremenis ----- 2363
I.sad-$rWak I}ik unuota Re9utaea_ --- -_ 2332
LoW EuOtxy Control -- ------ 2406(c) (3)
Low Yoitaxe Banka I ------ - - - 2596(c).(e)
ndoor--r______________________-- 2406(1)(2)
Nauru Plate Data_«________2406(f)
Neat Lixbtfai--_«_----------------------_ 431(c) t0
2552(d)
—« 2406(1)
In Various2407 a) to
24070
2407
rim 24HRbl. (a)
2406(
2446(a)
---------------- ---------_w-_- 2406(i)(l)
_ 2579(a)
rim S Dwmw OF INDU67RIAL SAMY
E4AVMCAL SAFETY ORDLTs
(Register 54160.3--2-19.50
Access to QW&HOOd Persau Only ------------------------
in'slum 7unnelf------------------------------------
Not to Few Other CIrculte -----------------------------
Ftakefor Use ----------------------------------------
Trestle Bud fimOr--Hanalu Guards_-.
Tr71'uce � wi�mill- AroundJodsts_-________________.
Tn b esdatCr' —----- - -------- ---_
Taano)e-whit in —_- ---- --- -______________,
Taro-trfb Concrete Outside the Butidtn$___-,
P'roWtkw From 3fechanicat jujury ----------
Undetwumad Ufsb Voitrs'e wm*-4"vmtiux hklw
Under Two laden of Outside
Unused b-Pbds Be0ulred-_-_--_Y:-_
Vaporpeoa--__--____--_
garb" ,fere
Pariatiom F""s PlOrAlift for—
Maui--Tranebrmr
sas.sZ bmusmuL RziATwxs
(R*gieler W N4ti a
Warnlnt etsn.
g+aNw/
D@ Ntd ()Fee Under 1—d
switchesards __-_—��---------- —�_—�—
Threadless p the for Rae@waya_
--------
High voltage Cutouts
5a348(i)
316(d)
2341(h)
!3p! (b) (3)
Iiwlattng Switches -----
___ ____
2416(b)
High Volta"
r�a -"'-'
a606(c))(8)
— 1431(&)
__
N
Paint
3516(@)(4)
On Fences and
OverheadBs6tdtng—______
2475(3)
2311(c)' 8)
_--
bill-- 24760n
>iatt? to
Service WhYet Bntar4 ___ 2334(8)
2503rc)
Unlawful to ppente sixvoN------
Waratng S)gnala- Lfgnt S7 cn"-----�---
----- 2583(8)
23"(2)(76)
Waterproof—Dolln►tbn► --- _�_-------_------
Wab ht Degnitfon --- — --------_�_
2300 a)(77
Weatherbeed—TO Have Separatb Wk''►
2381(b))
WaaD.DNneph�ot _--- - ____�
--_—__ 230(a)(78)
run* Cablasts _ ___
-�w-[236!(b)
2431(c)
Lamp Socket —.— -__--_ _____�—__—______
2320(c)
2331(d)(4)
Yard WhiW (Sae Outl(de Wtrind}-----------------
a4a0(b)
WeldersAre
2697
DeTrAnd Factors for
2681(a)(2)
Horsepower Rated gw((�a�_____�_��_____—___
_— 2597(c)
Other Than Regular --
Welders _
DW
JIM
in?
2588(a)
8588(2)
Wet
2427(b)
Jtip (b)
Paas Pant
3432(c)
SOam(ag.Rapwaya. Om -quarter, Iawh Pie= Wet Wall—i23497c)
&58.63
r_ 8 204(5)
switchesards __-_—��---------- —�_—�—
Threadless p the for Rae@waya_
--------
Wives �
5a348(i)
316(d)
2341(h)
White Wta-Id-ttWW
3604(01))))
High voltage Wort
f6M06(n)(9 , (li)
Wbadotn and Doors
(33)7(c)(2)
Direct BALI --------------------------- 2241( (1)
JW Car2341 (b) (2)
-')23a3(d)
>h voltage Wha@—_----
WMe Lm 26. hd�_�_'_---__
--- 2407(b)
1306(0)
ttmpiwrtaanGrounds-_-O-T
2333(e)Wireal
2366(a)to(b)
/morays-
i 1[WI@d!: Si@ Arty 6
2606
Overhead Und-Wo work-'_ �-- _ _- — --- — '--__
alis a DMMNOPLIMUSIMALSAFICTY
&58.63
opa■ wxhtn Battdi�a—_—____--------__--�=
r ))
(fle5atWK Nab-2-tg-56)
--------'---M--�f
Wbr
8oc(ioss
YoltaBs Lyr�tta bs lieneral_-__---___-'-_---
2340(b)
Not Ear Yotera, C�troileaai. EYc.______________________
2340(a)
23411b) (2)
drmuad tie and(i+�eoae._..—__----------_-_'-_-__---__
P1teG ___ ___—�---------------_---_-'---_ 2341()
Direct BALI --------------------------- 2241( (1)
JW Car2341 (b) (2)
mt,- >r..r ymtkma— ----- -------------------------- 23#1(b)(1)
onaYtta4or of
.w
---------------- *516
opa■ wxhtn Battdi�a—_—____--------__--�=
r ))
23441
for Sa'vks
--------'---M--�f
2319())
—�-
Under Two I
Outside Building ---
V9W king Span and (ivardmg
tlS34(b)
About In (iwual_—
_- - E475(b}
Betrasca to at � Sgeee_ - y 2476(0
----------------- E475(c)
Headromm — y E476(p)
�__------:_
Lbw Parte
—________—��--_�__„_—�
E472(a)
Near M.W Part of 3(acblaaq. ----- 24"(0)
Switchboard
0(e)
Workmanlike Installations
ork Perf�owd Naar lllgh Yolts@e -----
-------12
'--------------- 2207
Create and -- -------------------
Electrk
Ed93
2606
Overhead Und-Wo work-'_ �-- _ _- — --- — '--__
E111104
Wound Rotor Sii
%ray Sqa
Ueneral Provielomme Lar
Gr+3umiir+c
_v_.
Sni(b)
Yard WhiW (Sae Outl(de Wtrind}-----------------
_ illi
}
358.64 INDUBTU" RUATMM
t�Nw �t
82942 2-38 zx
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
10
11
12
13
14
z 25
all 16
17
1s
PM
K11
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30'
31
32`
AN ORDINANCE OF THL CO.LJN iY tai Ott)Lt'JGE, STATE OF CAL T c 0 t J <'
AEgUTAING P&t14ITS ANIS Fa0VIDING allLES !%AD P�LWJlTLAEIJid4L;
THE ERECTION, CONST UCTION, ENLAL'G ILNT, ALL:�iiATIta^�,
kWAIR.% MOVING, 2'&1OVAL' CONV:;IkSION, D&IOLITIONv oCCUp,NCy,
EgUIP1•1ENT, USE, HEIGHT$ AREA, OF BUILDINGS, STRUCTWl ES AND
TENTS; PROVIDING PENALTIES FOR THE VIOLATION ':ttiL& OF;
ADOPTING BY .ALSFEt jjNCE THE UNIZO&I BUILDING CODE, 1958
EDITION, VOLUME I INCLUDING SECTIONS 5108 THROUGH 5113
AND TABLE 51-A OF THE APPENDIX THERETO, AND UIVIFORmL
BUILDING CODE, VOLUME III, UNIFOR14 BUILDING CODE STANDARDS,
1958 EDITION; AND REPEALING ORDINANCES NOS. 922, 955, 1035
AND SECTION 1 OF 1049, AND SECTION 1 OF 1062 OF TUE COUNTY
OF ORANGE.
The Board of Supervisors of the County of Orange, State of
California, do ordain as follows:
' SECTION 1. There is hereby adopted by the Board of Supervisors
of the County of Orange for the purpose of prescribing regulations
for the erection, construction, enlargement, alteration, repair,
moving, removal, conversion, demolition, occupancy, equipment, use,
height, area, of buildings, structures, and tents, that certain code
known as Uniform Building Code, 1958 Edition, Volume I including
Sections 5108 through 5113 and Table 51-A, of the Appendix thereto,
and Uniform Building Code, Volume III, Uniform Building Code Standards,
1958 Edition, and the whole thereof, save and except such portions
as are hereinafter deleted, modified or amended, of which code not
less than three (3) copies have been and are now filed in the office
of the Clerk of the County of Orange, and the same are hereby adopted
and incorporated as fully as if set forth at length herein.
SECTION 2. The provisions of the Building Code of the County
of Orange shall apply to and affect all of the unincorporated
1
1
2
3
4
S
6
7
$I
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
28
21
22
23
24
25`
26
27
28
29
territory of Orange county, except work located primarily in a public
way, public utility towers and pole,, mechanical equipment trot
specifically regulated in this Code, and hydraulic flood coc,trol
structures.
SECTION 3. Whenever any of the following names or terns are used
in said Uniform Building Code., each such name or term shall be deemed
and construed to have the meaning ascribed to it in this section as
follows: "BUILDING OFFICIAL" shall mean Superintendent of Building
and Safety. "CITY" shall mean the County of Orange or the unincor-
porated territory of the County of Orange as the text may require.
"CITY COUNCIL" shall mean the Board of Supervisors of the County of
Orange.
SECTION 4. Sub -section (h) of Section 104 of said Uniform
Building Code is hereby amended to read as follows:
"(h) Moved Buildings
A. Buildings or structures moved into or within the
County shall comply with the provisions of this
Code.
B. No building or structure shall be moved or
relocated unless and until a permit to relocate
the building or structure has been issued by the
Superintendent of Building and Safety to the
owner of the premises to which the particular
building or structure is proposed to be moved.
Such permit shall be designated as a 'relocation
permit.'
C. aelocation permit - Issuance - Enforcement.
1. Application - Conditions.
a. Every application to the Superintendent of
Building and Safety for a relocation permit
shall be in writing upon a form furnished
by the County Building Inspection Department,
2.
3
4
7
10
11
12
13
14
E88 16
i 0,
0 Z
8017
is
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
20
27
28
29
30
31
32
and shall set forth such infor-matiun as that
Department may reasonably require in order to
carry out the purposes of this 6ectionb. ,
No permit shall be issued to relocate any
building or structure which is so constructed
or in such condition that it does not, or
which cannot be repaired or reconstructed to
conform to the requirements of the Uniform
Building Code; or, if the use of the proposed
site for the purpose intended is prohibited by
the zoning laws or ordinances of this County;
or,if the structure is of a type prohibited
at the proposed location by any other law or
ordinance. If the condition of the building
or structure in the judgment of the Super-
intendent of Building and Safety admits of
practicable effective repair, the permit
may be issued upon condition as hereinafter
provided.
c. If the unlawful, dangerous or defective con-
dition of the building or structure proposed
to be relocated is such that remedy or cor-
rection cannot practicably and effectively
be made in the judgment of the Superintendent
of Building and Safety, the application shall
be denied.
d. The Superintendent of Building and Safety
shall in issuing any relocation permit,
impose therein such terms and conditions as
may be necessary to assure compliance with
the requirements of the Uniform Building
Code. The terms and conditions upon which
3.
1
each permit is granted shall be specif4Led in
2
writing in the permit or appended in writing
3
thereto.
4
2. Aelocation Permit - Lond &equired.
5
a. leo relocation permit shall be issued unless the
6
applicant therefor shall first post with the
7
Superintendent of Building and Safety a bond
8
executed by the owner of the premises where
9
the building or structure is to be located as
10
principal, and by a surety company authorized
11
to do business in this State, as surety.
12
b. The bond, which shall be in form joint and
13
several, shall name the County of orange as
14
obligee, and shall be in an amount equal to
d
26IJ
15
the cost, plus twenty-five per cent (25%) of
681
o�
16
the work required to be done in order to
117
comply with all of the conditions of such
is
relocation permit as estimated by the
19
Superintendent of Building and Safety. In
20
lieu of a surety bond, the applicant may post
21
a bond executed by the said owner, as prin-
22
eipal, and which is secured by a deposit of
23
cash in the amount named above, and conditioned
24
as required in the case of a surety bond;
23
such a bond as so secured is hereinafter
26
called a 'cash bond' for the purposes of
27
this Section.
28
c. No bond, however, need be posted in any case
29
where the Superintendent of Building and
30
Safety shall determine that the only reloca-
31
tion involved is that of moving a building
32
temporarily to the regularly occupied
ti
n
oil
business premises of a house mover or that
of moving a building to adjacent property
of the same owner, but the exceptions herein
made shall not apply unless the Superintendent
of Building and Safety finds that no such
security is necessary in order to assure
compliance with the requirements of this
Section.
3. Relocation Permit Bond - Conditions.
Every bond posted pursuant to this Section shall
be condtioned as follows:
a. That each and all of the terms and conditions
of the relocation permit shall be complied
with to the satisfaction of the Superintendent
of Building and Safety.
b. That all of the work required to be done
pursuant to the conditions of the relocation
permit shall be fully performed and completed
within the time limit specified in the reloca-
tion permit; or if no time limit is specified,
within ninety (90) days after the date of
execution by the County Highway Department
of the permit required under Ordinance No. 352
of the County of Orange. The time limit
herein specified or the time limit specified
in any permit may be extended for good and
sufficient cause by the Superintendent of
Building and Safety. No such extension of
time shall be valid unless in writing and no
such extension shall release any surety from
any bond.
5.
a
1
4. Default in Performance o� uonctitions - a'eut.±ccs to a;a>
2
Given.
3
a. Whenever the Superintendent of 13uilding and
Safety shall find that a deLault has occurred in
5
the performance of any teal or condition of any
pei^rait, written notice thereof shall be given
6
to the principal and to the surety on the bond.
7
b. Such notice shall specify the work to be done,
8
the estimated cost thereof, and the period of
9
time deemed by the Superintendent of Building
10
and Safety to be reasonably necessary for the
11
completion of such work.
12
c. After receipt of such notice, the surety must,
13
within the time therein specified, either cause
the required work to be performed, or failing
14
therein must pay over to the Superintendent of
-15
Building and Safety the estimated cost of doing
16
the work as set forth in the notice, plus an
additional
17
sum equal to twenty-five per cent
18
(25%) of said estimated cost. Upon receipt of
18
such monies, the Superintendent of Building and
Safety shall proceed by such mode as he deems
20
convenient to cause the required work to be
21
performed and completed, but no liability shall
22
be incurred therein other than for the expendi-
23
ture of the said sum in hand therefor.
24
5. Cash Bond - :Manner of Enforcement.
25
if a cash bond has been posted, notice of default
26
as provided above shall be given to the principal,
and if the compliance is not obtained within the
27
time specified, the Superintendent of Building
28
and Safety shall proceed without delay and without
29
further notice of proceedings whatever, to use the
30
cash deposit or any portion of such deposit to
cause the required work to be done, by contract or
31
t
otherwise, in his discretion. The balance, if any,
39
of such cash deposit shall upon the completion of
6.
a
Q
the work be returned to the depositor or to his
successors or assigns, after deducting the cost
of the work plus twenty-five per cent (25%.)
thereof.
. Option to Demolish Building; or Structure.
When any default has occurred on the part of
the principal under the preceding provisions, the
surety shall have the option, in lieu of complet-
ing the work., required, of demolishing the building
or structure and clearing, cleaning and restoring
the site. If the surety defaults, the Superin-
tendent of Building and Safety shall have the
same option.
7. Period and Termination of Bond.
The term of each bond posted pursuant to this
Section shall begin upon the date of the posting
thereof and shall end upon the completion, to the
satisfaction of the Superintendent of Building and
Safety, of the performance of all the terms and
conditions of the relocation permit. Such com-
pletion shall be evidenced by a statement thereof
signed by the Superintendent of Building and Safety,
a copy of which shall be sent to any surety or
principal upon request. When a cash bond has been
posted, the cash shall be returned to the depositor
or to his successors or assigns upon the termination
of the bond, except any portion thereof that may
have been used or deducted as elsewhere in this
Section provided.
S. Entry Upon Premises.
a. The Superintendent of Building and Safety, the
surety, and the duly authorised representatives
7.
1
2
3
4
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
M
of either, shall have access to the premises
described in the relocation permit, for the
purpose of inspecting the progress of the work.
b. In the event of any default in the performance
of any term or condition of the relocation
permit, the surety, or any person employed or
engaged in its behalf, or the Superintendent
of wilding and Safety, or any person employed
or engaged in his behalf, shall have the right
to go upon the premises to complete the re-
quired work or to remove or demolish the build-
ing or structure.
c. It shall be unlawful for the owner or his
representatives, successors or assigns, or any
other person, to interfere with or obstruct
the ingress or egress to or from any such
premises of any authorized representative or
agent, of any surety, or of the County of
Orange, engaged in the work of completing,
demolishing or removing any building or
structure for which a relocation permit has
been issued after default has occurred in
the performance of the terms or conditions
thereof.
9. Relocation permits - Exceptions.
The provisions of this Section relating to the
posting of bonds shall not apply where the build-
ing or structure is to be moved to a location
inside the limits of any incorporated city in the
L ty of Orange or to a location outside of the
County of Orange. In such cases, if the Super-
intendent of Building and Safety finds t the
IM
K
building or structure is so constructed and in such
condition that it may be removed with safety, the
permit shall be issued without the requirement of
a bond.
10. relocation Permits - Fees.
a. Before any application for a relocation permit
is accepted for filing, a fee of fwenty-five
Dollars (425.00) shall be paid by the applicant
to cover the cost to the County of Orange of t:he
investigation of the condition of the building
to be moved and the inspection of the proposed
new location. 'The application fee herein
provided for shall be in addition to the build-
ing permit fee required by this Code, and
shall be in addition to any other fee or
charge required by law or ordinance. Where a
main building and buildings accessory thereto
are to be moved from the same location to the
same new location, the fee shall be Twenty-
five Dollars (425.00) for the in building
and Ten Dollars (410.00) for each accessory
building.
b. If the bond herein required is not posted
within six (6) months after notice to the
applicant by the Superintendent of Building
and Safety of the required amount thereof, a
new application shall be filed and the re-
quired application fee paid before the relo-
cation permit may be issued.
c. The provisions of this Section relative to
fees and bonds shall not apply to the
relocation of buildings or structures to
1 9.
2
a
1
2
31
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1 141
15
16
17
is
19
20
21
22
231
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
1 31
91
I
De uLed by a gQvernmntal ageacy ror a
goveriLmental purpose."
5. Section 2J2 (d) o.-'-- said LMiZoimi gain dual; Code is
hereby amended to read as iollows:
"(d) Aight of Entry. Upon presentation oz proper creden-
tials the Building official or his duly authorized
ID,
representative may enter at reasonable times any
building, structure or premises in the unincorporated
territory of the County to perform any duty imposed
upon him by this Code. Every person who denies or
prevents, obstructs, or attempts to deny, prevent
or obstruct such access is guilty of a misdemeanor."
SECTION 6. Chapter 3 of said Uniform Building Code is hereby
amended by adding a new table, designated as Table 3-B, to read as
follows:
of TABLE 3-B - CONVEASION PEMIT FEES
Occupancy Group Affected Floor Area Fee
Converted to (Sq. Ft.)
A to 1, inclusive Single -Story and up
to 1,500 square feet $10.00
toF, inclus!Ve- More ThAfin 'One -Story or
More Than 2,500 sq. ft. $25.00
H to 1, inclusive More Than One Story or
More ore Than 3,000 sq. ft. 415.00
NOTE: Above fees do not include the fees for the building
permit covering necessary alterations, repairs for the
conversion, nor fees for electrical, pl ing or heating,
and ventilating permits."
SECTION 7. Paragraph entitled "EXCEPTIONS" of Section 301 (c)
of said Uniform Building Code is hereby amended to read as follows:
"EXCEPTIONS: When authorized by the Building Official,
plans and specifications need not be submitted for the
following:
W
a
01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12i
13
14
15
16
17
is
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Croup J, Division 1, OCCUI)ancies of Zype V
conventional wood stuff; construction not -
exceeding 603 square .feet in area.
2. Small and unimportant reg."
SECTION S. Section 302 of said Uniform Building Code is hereby
amended by adding a new Sub -section (f) to read as follows:
"(f) Cancellation of .Permit. The person having the right
to the use and occupancy of any building, or portion
thereof for which dark has been authorized and a
permit issued under the provisions of this Code,
may make written request for the cancellation of
such permit to the Superintendent of Building and
Safety, with his reasons therefor. The Superintendent
of Building and Safety shall promptly notify the
person to whom such permit was issued by first
class mail, postage thereon prepaid, addressed to
such person at the address shown in his application
for the permit, of the receipt of the request for
cancellation and the reasons given therefor. There-
upon and thereafter, such permit shall be void. A
new permit may then be obtained in the same manner
and upon payment of the same fees as are required
for an original permit."
SECTION 9. Section 303 (b) of said Uniform Building Code is
hereby amended to read as follows:
"(b) Application Processing and flan -Checking Fees.
At the time of submitting application for permit,
an application processing and plan -checking fee
equal to if of the building permit fee as
set forth in Table No. 3-A shall: be paid to the
building ffici .'1
11.
M
K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
la
13
14
18
16
17
is
271
al
29
30
31
Sl
SECTION 10. Section 303 of 6aid Uniform building Code as hereby
ensued by adding a new Sub -section (c) to read as follows:
°'(c) Refunds. The Superintendent of Building and Safety
shall make no refunds on fees collected amounting
to One Dollar (41.00) or less; that in cases where
refunds are made the amount to be refunded shall
not be more than eighty-five per cent (557.) of the
amount of the .fee paid unless the fee paid for the
issuance of the permit has been made for an area
outside of his jurisdiction or that duplication of
permits has been made and two fees have been
collected for the same job, in which case one -
hundred per cent (100%) may be refunded, and that
no refunds of any fees or parts thereof shall be
made after one hundred and twenty (120) days have
elapsed from the date of the issuance of the
permit.'
SECTION 11. Section 304 (e) of said Uniform Building Code is
hereby amended by adding to the end of the first paragraph therein
the following:
'such as underpinning, roof sheathing, and plaster inspec-
tion of the 'brown coat'."
SECTION 12. Section 305 (b) of said Uniform Building Code is
hereby amended by adding a third paragraph therein to read as follows:
"Each special inspector applying for registration as a
special inspector for the Department of Building and
Safety in the County of orange shall pay 45.00 with
his application prior to examination by the examining
board. A registration card shall be issued to each such
special inspector that the board qualifies. A renewal
fee of $5.00 shall be charged on July ist of each year
thereafter."
12.
a
Zi
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
141
SECTION 13. Section 306 (a) of said Uniform Building Code A
hereby amended to read as allows:
"No building or structure in Groups A to 1, inclusive, shall
be used or occupied, and no change in the existing occupancy
classification of a building or structure or portion thereof
shall be made until the Building Official has issued a
Certificate of Occupancy therefor as provided herein."
SECTION 14. Chapter 3 of said Uniform Building Code is hereby
amended by adding a new Section to be designated as Section 307, to
read as follows:
"Section 307 - Procedures for obtaining plastering permits
and Payment of fees therefor.
a. Permits: It shall be unlawful for any person,
firm, or corporation, whether acting as principal,
servant, or employee to do or cause or permit to
be done any plastering work within the area
covered by this Code without first obtaining
a permit therefor from the Superintendent of
Building and Safety of said County.
b. To Whom iermits May Be Issued:
(1) No permit shall be issued to any person to do,
or cause to be done, any plastering regulated
by the Uniform Building Code, except to a
person who is a bana fide possessor of a
valid contractor's license issued by the
State of California and identified by the
classification C-35.
(2) Home -owner Permit - A plastering permit
be issued to any person to do plasteringi
regulated by the Uniform Building Code
in a simple family dwelling or a duplex
used exclusively for living purposes,
134
M
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
5
all
16
ill
if 17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
including the Usual accessory buildin," ;s and
quarters in connection with suc."'I builWing's,
provided chat any Suc'-a person is tile buaa
fide owner of any such dwelling and accessory
building and quarters and provided that said
owner shall personally perform all labor in
connection therewith.
c. Application for Permit: Any person legally
entitled to apply for and receive a permit shall
make such an application on forms provided for
that purpose. Tie shall give a description of
the character of the work proposed to be done
and the location, ownership, occupancy and the
use of the premises in connection therewith.
d. Cost of Permits:
(1) Every applicant for a permit to plaster
shall state, in writing, on the applica-
tion form provided for that Purpose, the
character of the work proposed to be
done and the amount and kind, together
with such information pertinent thereto,
as may be required.
(2) Such applicant shall pay for each permit
issued and at the time of issuance, a fee
in accordance with the following schedule
and at the rate for each amount shown
thereto.
(3) Any person who shall commence on plastering
work for which a permit is required by this
Code without having first obtained a permit
therefor, shall, if subsequently permitted
to obtain a permit, pay double the permit
fee fixed by this Code for such work.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
a
9
10
11
12
13
14
It 15
17
is
19
20
21
22
23
i
24
25
26`
27
nft
TABLE J_G - PLASfLRINC FLXM1f
.Bob by the Square Yard
Fees
20 ar s or Less . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21 yards to and including 23.21E yards . . . . . .
. Bio+ ee
. 42000
201 Yards to and including 1,000 yards
per sq. yd.
1,401 yards to and including 3,000 yards
per sq. yd.
3,001 yards and up
per sq. yd.
Example: .Bob 3,200 Square Yards
200 yds . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.00
201 to 1,000 Yds. . . . . . . .
• 8.00
1,001 to 3,000 yds. . . . . . . .
. . 10.00
3,001 to 3,200 yds. . . . . . . . .
. . .50
Total Zee . . . . . . . . .
. :20.50"
SECTION 15. :paragraph entitled "SIALIWAV of Section 420 of
said Uniform Building Code is hereby amended to read
as follows:
i1SmuW Y: Two or more risers shall constitute
a stairway.
EXCEPTION: For single story Group A and I,
four
or More risers shall constitute a
stairway."
SECTION 15. Section 504 (a) of said Uniform Building, Code is
hereby amended to read as follows:
"Section 504 (a) General. Buildings shall adjoin or have
access by easement of record not less than fifteen feet
(151) in width to a public space, yard, or street, on
not less than one side. -Required yards shall be per-
manently maintained. For the purpose of this Section,
the center line of an adjoining street or alley shall
be considered an adjacent property line. Property
corners upon which buildings are to be located shall be
identified with survey markers in accordance with the
legal description .furnished with the application to
build. All property corners set as required herein
shall be pe anently marked or tagged with the registra-
tion or license number of the engineer or surveyor under
whose supervision the survcy was made. Eaves over
required shall be not less than thirty inches
15.
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
a
9
10
11
12
13
14
17
is
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
(30") from tile side and rear property line,5. Eaves
extending beyond walls required to be J'ire-resistjive
shall be of incombustible material. or ane -hour fire -
resistive construction."
SECTION 17. Section 1501 of said Uniform building Code is hereby
amended by adding a new division, designated as Division 3, to read
as follows:
"Division 3. Tents, as defined in Section 1506 hereof."
SECTION 18. Chapter 15 of said Uniform Building Code is hereby
amended by adding a new Section numbered 1506 to read as follows:
"Section 1506 - Tents.
a. No person shall erect or maintain any tent
house or other like structure (hereinafter
referred to as 'tent') wherein canvas, burlap
or cloth is used for any part of an exterior
wall or roof without first having obtained a
permit so to do from the Board of Supervisors.
The Board of Supervisors may, upon application
made and approved as hereinafter provided, grant
permission to erect a tent to remain for a period
of not more than thirty (30) days subject to the
following conditions:
(1) No goods, wares, or merchandise shall be
stored or held for sale in any tent, except
in one occupied for the purpose of conducting
and holding a circus, carnival, wild west
show, rodeo or other similar show or exhibi-
tion. Nor shall the provisions of this
section apply to cases where the sale or
storage of such goods, wares or merchandise
is merely incidental tot chief purpose
for which such tent is erected or used.
16.
') I
__1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
�d� 18
02
16
17
18
19
20
91
241
(2) °she oiniei or agent shall furnish an affidavit
that all teats to be used which are covered
by said permit have been treated by flame -
proofing solution so as to render them
resistant to the action of :tire.
(3) The fire control officers may tame samples
of the proposed tent fabric for the purpose
of making flame tests.
(4) The flame -proofing solution or process shall
be of a type approved by the underwriters'
Laboratories, .Inc., or by any other recognized
testing laboratory satisfactory to the fire
control officer.
(5) Where shall be at least one (1) twenty-two
(22) inch unit of exit for each one hundred
(100) persons which number of persons shall,
for the purpose of this section, be determined
by dividing the floor area available for
occupancy by seven (7). In cases where fixed
seats or benches are to be used in any such
tent, such number of persons shall be deter-
mined by dividing the total available linear
number of inches of said seats or benches
by eighteen (18). In no event shall there
be less than two (2) emits, each having a
clear and unobstructed passage of not less
than three (3) feet. Adequate signs, having
letters of sufficient size to be easily read
and placed upon a contrasting color background
indicating location of exits, shall bemain-
tained not only at the exit but at other
rots in the tent wherevern essary to
17.
0-1
clearly indicate the direction of e6ress,
and lights s1lail 'be kept lighted during
all times that the tent is used or occupied.
(6) Fire hose 2ines and other auxiliary fire
equipment shall be maintained in such numbers
and sizes as may be required by the fire
control officer.
(7) All electric wiring must conform to the
ordinances of the County of orange, and must
be approved by the Electrical Inspector.
(8) No lighting shall be used except incandescent
lamps.
(9) All heating or cooking appliances must be
approved by the fire control officer.
(10) Where the tent is to be used for sleeping
purposes, the applicant shall furnish an
affidavit from a doctor who is licensed to
practice in the State of California stating
that due to illness it is necessary to use
the tent for sleeping purposes,
b. Every application for permission to erect a tent
in the County of Orange shall be in writing and in
such form as may be required by the Board of Super-
visors. In addition to any other information that
the Board of Supervisors may require, such applica-
tion shall state the approximate dimensions of the
proposed tent, the location at which it is proposed
to be erected, its distance from the nearest struc-
ture and the purpose for which it is to be used.
Such application shall be signed both by the appli-
cant and the owner of the property upon which it is
proposed to erect such tent, or their duly authorized
representatives.
a
01
1
c• The application shall be filed with the Super
2
p -
intendent Of Building and Safety. The. ,auperin-
3
tendent of Building
4 and Safety and the fire control
4
officer shall thereupon make such investigation as
S
may be rewired to determine whether the proposed
e
tent will create an unreasonable hazard to life
7
8
or property and whether the erection or maintenance
thereof will injuriously affect adjacent or
j nearby
property or the residents of the neighborhood.
1
The Superintendent of Building and Safety and fire
111
control officer shall each by appropriate endorse -
12
ment upon such application and in accordance with
13
their determination as aforesaid approve or dis-
14
1S
approve such application and transmit the same to
g
the Board of Supervisors. If the application pplication be
disapproved by the ;superintendent of Building and
17
Safety or the fire control officer, the Board of
18
Supervisors dust reject the same, and if it be
19
approved, the Board of Supervisors may, in its
21
discretion rant
s 8 permission .for the erection of
$1
such tent.
22
d• The Board of Supervisors may revoke any y Permit
granted for the erection and maintenance of a tent
E4
within the County at any time prior to the expira-
ES
tion of the thirty (30) day time limit for the
26
violation of any condition upon which, the permit
27
�
is issued or when in its opinion, the health,
2$welfare,
safety and morals of the residents of
89
thet y or any portion thereof are adversely
30
affected by the continued presence of such tent.
31
Upon t revocation of y such permit the person
�3
to whom the permit was granted shall, within the
x
19.
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
tjxae specified by the Board of Supervisors,
remove such tent."
SECTION '19. Section 1707 of said Unifor,,11 Building ode is hereby
amended by adding a new Sub -section (c) to read as follows:
(c) =fetal Water Table. Type V buildings of concrete
slab floor and wood frame wall cunstruction
covered on the exterior as provided for in Section
47102 4711, 4712, 4713, 4714 for exterior plaster
shall be provided With a metal water table consist-
ing of a combination sill flashing and plaster
ground. The flashing shall extend not less than
one and one-half inches (1211) above and one inch
(1") below the finish cement floor level and on the
lower edge shall break at an angle providing a fall
to the outside of one-half inch (I") in seven -eights
inches (7/811) and return to the foundation to pro-
vide a stabilized plaster ground, the lower edge
to be designed for free drainage, and plaster
other than finish coat shall not be allowed below
this water table. The upper angle of this ground
shall be perforated at six inch (6") intervals
with a one-quarter inch ('") round weep hole. No
portion of this perforation shall encroach on the
outer one-half of the upper angle. Building paper
as noted in Section 1707 (a) shall extend over the
perforations but not more than one-half inch
SECTION 20. Chapter 17 of said Uniform Building Code is hereby
amended by adding a new Section to be numbered 1713 and to read as
follows:
"Section 1713. Shower Stalls. Shower stalls and bathtub
enclosures used as shower stalls shall be plastered with
Portland Cement Plaster as required for the first two coats
K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
16
17
is
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
of exterior work. Master shall be carried six inches
(6") above ti -Le si-iower head. :`fetal reinforcement and
backing shall be as required for exterior plastering in
Chapter 47.
EXCEPTION: afetal or other type shower stalls may be
used when approved by the Building
of f ic ial.
SECTION 21. Section 2302 (b) third paragraph therein of said
Uniform Building Code is amended to read as follows:
"Floors in office buildings and in other buildings, where
partition locations are subject to change, shall be de-
signed to support, in addition to all other loads, a
uniformly distributed load equal to 20 pounds per square
foot. The partition load shall be included in the deter-
mination of lateral forces."
SECTION 22. section 2303, the last sentence of the second
paragraph therein of said Uniform Building Code is amended to read
as follows:
"No increases shall be allowed for vertical load acting
alone except as permitted elsewhere in this Code."
SECTION 23. section 2504 of said Uniform Building Code is
hereby amended by adding a new Sub -section, designated as (j), to
read as follows:
11(j) Deflection. Joists, beams, planks and other members
shall be so proportioned that their deflection under
twice the dead load shall not exceed one two -hundred
and fortieth of the span length.
EXCEPTION: members with camber mechanically
fabricated to offset the deflec-
tion produced by twice the dead
load. "
21.
M
K
1
2
3
4
51
g',
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
w 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
3j
27
28
29
30
31
32
i
SECTION ION 24. Table No. 25-L of Chapter 25 of said Uniform
"TABLE 140. 25-E -- GROUP CLASSIFICATION ICATION OF ME Gi LS G
T 0-INCi1 I Ui-IBEa Nisi' INCLUDED IN f ' LL 25-A
SPECIM --T= 1 uNIF01 .i
GRADii. BUILDING
CBD:
STANDA&D
NUMBEIt
,e3;I�iMs
Douglas
Far oastRegion)
StwxZard or Zetter
Red Cypress)
Hemlock
- gest Coast
Standard or Better
25-6-58
Douglas
Fir (Inland)
No. 1
25-4-58
Larch -
Western
No. 1
25-7-58
Douglas
Fir (inland)
No. 2
25-4-58
Larch -
Western
No. 2
25-7-58
/ \ 2"X4" only.
\ !
GROUP II
Bald Cypress (Tidewater
Red Cypress)
No. 2
25-2-58
Fir White
No. 1
25-12-58
Fir, White
Construction
25-12-58
Hemlock, Eastern
No. 1
25-5-58
Pine, fled (Norway Pine)
No. 1
25-12-58
Redwood, California
Select Heart
25-10-58
Spruce, Eastern
No. 1
25-12-58
Spruce, Sitka
Construction
25-12-58
Douglas
r n
Fir; Balsam
No. 1
25-12-58
Fir, White
Standard
25-12-58
H lock, Eastern
No. 2
25-5-58
Pine, Ponderosa, Lodgepole,
Sugar, Idaho White
No. 1
25-12-58
.Red Cedar, Western
Construction
25-12-58
Red Cedar
No. 1
25-12-58
Cedar, Incense
No. 1
25-12-58
Redwood, California
Sap Common
25-10-58
Spruce, Englemann
No. 1
25-12-58
Spruce, Sitka
Standard
25-12-58
Douglas a
Fir, White
No. 2
25-12-58
Fir White
utility
25-12-58
.,
utility
25-6-58
Fine, Ponderosa, Lodgepole,
Sugar, Idaho White
•
i; Cedar, Western
'led Cedar
No. 2
25-12-58
Cedar,
Redwood, California
Merchantable
25-10-58
Englemann
No.
M
S��CZIUN 25. Sectioc-1, 2504 o -F said uniform 6uildia, codes is
k
hereby aMLndLd by adding a new -vub-section, designated as (k), to
read as follows:
S
11(k) .0lope of Trussed &a.;L'ters. frussed rafters shall be
limited to a minimum slope of 3 in 12. &al:Lers
less than 3 in 12 in slope shall be supported by
beams or girders."
SECTION 26. Sub -section 2 of Section 2508 of said Uniform
Building Code is hereby amended to add an C�,PTIX to read as
follows:
"EXCEPTION: Exterior wood frame walls that are to be
stuccoed shall be provided with resistance
to strand wire tension by the installation
of fireblocking at the mid -height of wall
between the first four studs from all
corners."
SECTION 27. Section 2806 (a) EEC-iWTIONS, Paragraph I thereof,
of said Uniform Building Code is hereby amended to read as follows:
111. interior bearing walls may be supported on masonry
or concrete piers. The pad to be not less than 16" X 1611
set at least 8" in the ground. The stem if cone or
pyramid shaped to be 10" in diameter or 10" X 10" at
the base thereof and 8" in diameter or 6" X 6" at the
top thereof respectively."
SECTION 28. Section 3203 (d) of said Uniform Building Code is
hereby amended by adding a new paragraph to read as follows:
"Composition shingles shall not be used on roofs which
have a pitch of less than four inches to the foot run,
except where the pitch is less than four inches to the
foot run but not under three inches, a I.ever of thirty
pound felt shall be laid before the shinglz--s ai�e applied.
Composition shingles shall not be laid on roofs with less
than 3 in 12 pitch."
23.
M
0
29
30
31
S!CEION 29. Section 3203 (JLE) (1) of said Unifurm Duildin-, Code
is hereby amended to read as allows;
Ill. Any composition roofing or any built-up composition
roofing consisting of layers of r3ofing, roll roof-
ing, felt membrane, or gravel, the sum of whose tire -
retardant values as set forth in Table iio. 32-A
equals not less than 13."
SECTIO14 30. Section 3203 (f) (3) of said Uniform Building Code
is hereby amended to read as follows:
"3. iloofings for Group J occupancies. On detached
buildings housing Group J, Division I occupancies,
any composition roofing having a fire -retardant
value equal to not less than 6, as set forth in
Table No. 32-A, may be used, unless otherwise
required because of location as specified in
Parts IV and V of this Code."
SECTION 31. Section 3203 (f) of said Uniform Building Code
is hereby amended by adding a new sub Sub -section numbered 6, to
read as follows:
116. Gravel, crushed brick or crushed stone built-up
roofings shall not be used on roofs with a pitch
of over three inches rise to twelve inches run."
SECTION 32. section 3203 (f) of said Uniform Building Code
is hereby amended by adding a new sub sub -section numbered 7 to read
as follows:
117. Sheathing strip. Sheathing under wood shingles or
shakes shall be spaced on centers the same distance
as the shingles or shakes are exposed to the weather
and when not thicker than 1" nominal shall be nailed
with two 8 -penny nails at each point of bearing.
where exposure does not exceed 5�1' to the
weather, l" X 31' strip sheathing may be used.
3
Where exposure does not exceed 7 �" to the
weather, 1" X 4" strip sheathing may be used.
Where shakes measuring 3/4" or more at the
butts are used, 0 k 6" strip sheathing
shall be used. All strip sheathing shall
be Standard grade Douglas Fir or better."
SECTION 33. Chapter 32 of said Uniform Building Code is hereby
amended by adding a new Section numbered 3208 to read as follows:
"Section 3208 (a) Valleys under Composition roof coverings.
Valleys under all composition roof coverings shall have not
less than two layers of 90 pound mineral surfaced roofing.
The lower layer shall be not less than 12" wide and the
second or top layer shall be not less than 24" in width.
All valleys under slate, burned -clay tile, rigid
asbestos shingles, burned -clay shingles, wood
shingles and shakes shall be covered with not
less than I layer of 14 pound asphalt -saturated
rag felt or approved equal not less than 3611 in
width, applied in a water tight manner before the
required metal valley is installed.
(b) Metal Valleys. All metal valleys shall
be not less than 18" in width and shall
have an inverted water breaker in the
center line thereof not less than 1-�"
in height.
When wood shingles or shakes are laid with an
exposure of more than 7V to the weather, metal
valleys shall be not less than 24" in width with
inverted water breaker in the center line thereof
not less than 1�" in height."
SECTION 34. Section 3303 of said Uniform Building Code is hereby
amended by adding an EXCEMON to Sub -section (c) to read as follows:
2-5.
M
M
1 "&4CEPTIOIN. Any exit door in Group F or G occupancies
2 may be locked by a key, provided that:
3 1. The door is maintained unlocked during
4 business hours and there is an approved
S readily visible sign adjacent to the
6 doorway stating in not less than 1" high.
7 letters 'This Door To Remain Unlocked
8 During Business Hours.'
S 2. When employees are present, exit doors
10 in a minimum number as specified in
11 Section 3302 (b) shall be maintained
12 openable from the inside without the use
13 of a key."
14 SECTION 35. Section 4401, 3rd paragraph therein, of said
15 Uniform Building Code is hereby amended to read as follows:
16 "Any material or structure temporarily occupying public
17 property, including fences or walkways, shall be ade-
1s quately lighted between sunset and sunrise and permits
19 obtained, where required from the proper governing body."
20 SECTION 36. Section 4506, the third paragraph therein of said
21 Uniform Building Code, is hereby amended to read as follows:
22 "The lowest part of any movable awning or hood frame
23 including any fringe shall be not less than seven feet
24 (71) above the ground immediately below, except that a
25 cloth valence may provide a minimum head clearance of
26 six feet, six inches W 6") above the ground mediately
27 below."
28 SECTION 37. Section 4711 (c) 1 of said uniform Building Code
28 is hereby amended by adding a fourth paragraph thereto to read as
30 follows:
31 "The thirdcoat shall not be a brush coat."
32 SECTION 38. Chapter 47, of said Uniform Building Code is
26.
0
K,
1 hereby amended by adding a new section thereto numbered 4716 to read
2 as follows:
3 "Section 4716. Accoustic aad Insulating Plaster. Accoustic
4 and insulating plaster, when used for wall and ceiling cover -
5 ing upon any building or structure, shall first be approved
6 by the Superintendent of Building and Safety. Such approval
7 will be given only when in the opinion of the Superintendent
a of Building and Safety the use of such materials does not
9 create a hazard to life, limb and property. The Superin-
10 tendent may request tests and samples of all such materials
11 to be approved. All requests for approval of such materials
12 shall be made in writing and directed to the Superintendent
13 of Building and Safety."
14 SECTION 39. Penalties for Violation. Any person, firm or
corporation violating any of the provisions of this Ordinance or
16 of the Code, which is by this Ordinance adopted, shall be deemed
17 guilty of a misdemeanor and,upon conviction thereof, shall be punish-
if
able by a fine of not more than Five Hundred Dollars (Y500.00), or
19 by imprisonment in the County Jail for a period of not more than
20 six (6) monthsor by both such fine and imprisonment. Each such
21 person, firm or corporation shall be deemed guilty of a separate
22 offense for each day or portion thereof during which any violation
23 of any of the provisions of this Ordinance is committed, continued
24 or permitted by such firm or corporation and shall be punishable
25 therefor as herein provided.
26 SECTION 40. Ordinances Nos. 922, 955, 1035 and Section I of
27 1049 and Section I of 1062 of the County of Orange are hereby
28 repealed, provided, however, that the provisions of this Ordinance,,
29 in so far as they are substantially the same as existing ordinances,
30 must be construed as continuations thereof and not as new enactments.
31 SECTION 41. If any sect -ion, subsection, paragraph, sentence,
32 clause or phrase of this Ordinance is for any reason held to be
27.
3
K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
a
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
18 16
17
is
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
unconstitutional or, invalid, such decision shall rot affect tw,
validity or constitutionality of the :emaining pQrtions ol" this
Ordinance. The Board of Supervisors herei.,,y declares that it would
have passed this ordinance and each section, subsection, paragraph,
sentence, clause or phrase thereof, irrespective of the fact that one
or more of the sections, subsections, paragraphs, sentences, clauses
or phrases thereof be declared unconstitutional or invalid.
SECTION 42. This ordinance shall take effect and be in force
thirty (30) days from and after its adoption, and prior to the expira-
tion of fifteen (15) days from the passage thereof, shall be published
once in the Huntington Beach News —, a newspaper of
general circulation printed and published in the County of Orange,
State of California, together with the names of the members of the
Board of Supervisors voting for and against the same.
(SEAL) A'
Cha ot the BOa-rd—OleTupervisors
Xff EST: of Orange County, California.
I L, B. WALLACE
Count
#,Uork and ex -officio Clerk
OU- -�404rd-af Supervisors of
O,r-* ".?California
Ar#9 es, ....... .
By -
Deputy
C
Is L.–Bi-iALLACE, County Clerk and ex -officio Clerk of the Board
of Supervisors do hereby certify that at a regular meeting of the
Board of Supervisors of Orange County, California, held on the 11th
day of Xar*h —, 1959, the foregoing Ordinance containing
forty-two sections was considered section by section, and that the
said ordinance was then passed and adopted as a whole by the follow-
ing vote:
28.
j
AYES: SUPERVISOAS G - X- F' FLY, WR. H. iii RSTEINS WILLIAM Jr.
PHILLII-S, G.M. NULSON AND WILLIS H. WAR .R
NOES: SUPEAVISORZ NO
ABSENT: SUPEa.VISo&S NONE
IN WITNESS VREREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the
official seal of the Board of Supervisors of the County of Orange,
State of California, the 11th day of mnh-- -, 1959.
Publish Huntington Beach News
March 19, 1959
M
L. B. WALLACE
County Clerk and ex -officio clerk of
the Board of Supervisors of Orange
County, California
By
Deputy
29.
a
K
2
UAL I Fji;LN ia-�
3 February 10
4
5 On motion of Supervisor Phillipe duly seconded aiid
6 carried, the following Aesolution was adopted:
7 WHEREAS, this Board proposes to enact an ordinance entitled
a "An Ordinance of the County of Orange, State of California, requiring
9 Permits and Providing rules and Regulations for the Erection, Con -
10 struction, Enlargement, Alteration, Repair, 1-Hoving, removal, Conver-
11 sion, Demolition, Occupancy, Equipment, Use, Height, Area, of Build -
12 ings, Structures and Tents; Providing Penalties for the Violation
13 Thereof; Adopting by reference the Uniform Building Code, 1958 Edition,
14 Volume I Including Sections 5108 through 5113 and Table 51-A of the
L 15 Appendix Thereto, and Uniform Building Code, Volume III, Uniform
16 Building Code Standards, 1958 Edition; and Repealing Ordinances Nos.
17 922, 955, 1035 and Section I of 1049, and Section I of 1062 of the
18 County of Orange", and
19 WHEREAS, the purpose of the enactment of the proposed ordinance
20 is to adopt by reference, the Uniform Building Code, 1958 Edition,
21 Volume I, including Sections 5108 through 5113 and Table 51-A of the
22 Appendix thereto, and Uniform Building Code, Volume III, Uniform
23 Building Code Standards, 1958 Edition, and to provide rules and
24 regulations governing, and require permits for, the erection,, con -
25 struction, enlargement, alteration, repair, moving, removal, conver-
26 sion, demolition, occupancy, equipment, use, height, and area of
27 buildings, structures and tents, and providing penalties for the
28 violation thereof; and
29 WiFAEAS, three (3) copies of said Primary Code are on file for
30 public inspection in the office of the Clerk of this Board, and
31 WI&iLMD the title of the proposed adopting ordinance and the
32 title of the Primary Code to be adopted thereby have been read in
Resolution No. 59-164
1 1.
11
2
3
4
5
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
0511 16
o 17
is
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
public session of this ward as required by Section 50U22.3 of the
Covernment Code,
NOW, THEAEFO&L, BL If RLSkA,1ED AND ORDE,�ED that Wednesday_ 31
the 11th day of March , 1959, at the 'aUur UE 9:30
o'clock A H., in the Chambers of this Board of supervisors in
the County Courthouse, Santa Ana, California, be and is hereby fixed
as the time and place for a public hearing in the matter of the
adoption of the said proposed ordinance and the adoption by reference
of that certain code known and designated as the Uniform Building
Code, 1958 Edition, Volume 1. including Sections 5108 through 5113
and Table 51-A of the Appendix thereto, and Uniform Building Code,
Volume III, Uniform Building Code Standards., 1958 Edition.
BE IT F-01RTHER. RESOLVED AND ORDER LD that notice of the hearing
herein scheduled shall be given by publication once a week for two
successive weeks in the - Huntington Beaah News . a newspaper
of general circulation printed and published in the County of Orange,
the first publication thereof to be made at least fifteen (15) days
preceding the hearing herein scheduled; that the said notice shall
contain those matters as required by Section 50022.3 of the Government
Code.
AYES: SUPERVISORS WILLIAM J. PHILLIPS, WM. H. HIRSTEIN, C.M.
FEATHERLY, C.M. NELSON AND WILLIS H. WARNER
NOES: SUPERVISORS NONE
ABSENT: SU.','EaVISOS NONE
) ss.
COUNTY Gz 01,ULWE )
IX L. B. WALLACE, County Clerk and e. -t -officio Clerk of the Board
of Supervisors of Orange County, California, hereby certify that the
above and foregoing Resolution was duly and regularly adopted by the
said Board at a regular meeting thereof held on the 10th day of
2.
N
K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12!
13
14
66 Z 15
0
Ea 16
i I
2
81 17
is
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
m
February 19592 and passed by a unarlimot-,; vot$a 0� said
Board.
Imy WIMESS WtILA760i, I have hereunto set Twj hand ami seal t1ji,,;
ay of ZShru&r Igrg.
County Clerk-, & ex*-6-Efici0 Clerk of
the Bolar."rviSors� ..,of Orange
C?- n4t�y5l?4eGa li Lo rn ia
By
. "777T!"41117-
beputy
0
I
K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
a
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
441
jD
kl'� LAl`ich isy"JE � 0 S J1 " L& JI S F
j
fil.IL CoUiiry
iiu�_T I I L4
fICL IS iiEaELY that tae "aard o- Supervisors he
County of Orange, State of Caliiornia, has fixed Wednesday
the llth day of March 1959, at the hour of _2.
- :10
o'clock:. A .14. of said day, in the Chambers of said Board in the
County Courthouse, Santa Ana, California, as the time and place for
a public hearing in the matter of the adoption by said Board of
Supervisors of an ordinance, the purpose of which is to adopt, by
reference, the Uniform Building Code, 1958 Edition, Volume I, includ-
ing Sections 5108 through 5113 and Table 51-A of the Appendix thereto,
and Uniform Building Code, Volume III, Uniform Building Code Standards,
1958 Edition, and to provide rules and regulations governing, and
require permits for, the erection, construction, enlargement, altera-
tion, repair, moving, removal, conversion, demolition, occupancy,
equipment, use, height, and area of buildings, structures and tents,
and providing penalties for the violation thereof.
Copies of said Uniform Building Code are on file in the office
of the Clerk of the Board of Supervisors in the County Courthouse,
Santa Ana, California, and are open and available for public inspec-
tion.
Dated February 10 1959.
BY ORD FA OF THE BOARD OF SUPERVISORS OF THE' COUNTY OF ORANGE,
STATE OF CALIFORNIA.
Publish Huntington Beach Newl�
I
February 19 and 26, 14959
L. B. WALLACE
County Clerk and ex -officio Clerk of
the Board of Supervisors of Orange
County, California
0
K
Al
I
I
U N
Is i i. to I N 4 4" 1111 E
1915108 Edition
Volume I
AUITHORIZEDEDP; ION
COPYRIGHT_ 1958
1,%
vTc_F"Mac„v 9a t -,LSI -L CF UU I I UAM, KIAIS
El
IN
vim
THE I \IF()H\I III, 11.1)I\f: t'01)E
detelopint,id +rf haUt•r h�tit�Eie�� r�*n�Pet.�Siun �tr�i _r,�_�tar
-afolc to the public. thrott t lilt* etitninitF!+til of to•tAft- re,i
Idles. fit %I I iti>III . iitili I1 It itl IRihtI,- Ial" IIIiif'aill; I! ire i,atit, Iin'_
laic- : lai Ilit, ;•r:utlinu of fall ju<tiec t all hlil'IiW! material -
un the fair ha<i. of lilt* trite merit- of t,aelt cats€eriat: anal EFS
iht* Ilvvvfipntrttt of it "'Ilml econonti. fa,r tilt, future
:'r�i\t 111 I0 Cilie, thra wdi nnhtil-t*tl .final etlnrtal4t, tteahttz l'At
>(ntehtral de-i_m and tilt, hazard-.
1'111: 1\111`0101 lit 11.1)I\t: tali;E a.a: lir-t pttl3li-Iw'1
hr tilt* Pacific Goa -t lloil(ling 011icial- Cotift,renet, ,tt the
`sixth annual liusitte-- llerlin,_� hehi in lh,wn:y. Ari€tolit.
Ortohcr 171-21. 192--
\v" Edition .,f tilt, Cml'- haze 6", peabli-taeti lit 1034t.
19=3:3. 1937, 1910, 1013. 1916. Illi°)_ lt):a _:atrti 1951:: folinx
in_• ,Ilicial action oft tilt, Ib -or ttf annual i3u-itte-- lectin
"I'he I't3, 1-Ailia.n of the I. nifarna koiolirtu (_odr cwlt,aio-
nerr rhaliter-,-voiiius.-tah•ecti.att-, itami �tita,iard- approxt.,
lav lilt Arliat* inemlier- ill the "l tirtb-EiEth at*.€ze rl Bu -int-,
NIvoill� ttf the lntertrational t mi"'rem". of 11ail,lin- Of-
ficial'. `rldentlier 1t1.l3. 19:>
1
9
01-TIANE OF CONTENTS BY PARTS,
ClUPTERS, AND SECTIONS
no i 'ro I +1: 1111;
1 , iroinl ill tt.i)IN' colt:
Part I-Admlinistrative
CHAPTER 1.
Title and Scope
SEC, 101.
Title ..-_
102.
Purpose _
103.
Scope
194.
Application to Existing Buildings .
105.
Alternate Materials and Methods of
Special Inspections ..
Construction ......
106.
Tests ......
CHAPTER t.
organization and Enforcement
SEC. 201.
Creation of Department .......
202.
Powers and Duties of Building
fa4)4.
Official ...... ............................ _. ....
2wi.
unsafe Buildings
204.
Board of Appeals ....
205.
Violations and Penalties .. _ _ .....
CHAPTER s.
Permits and Inspeetions
SEC. 301.
Application for Permits
5` 302.
Building Permits .__...__..__
5; 303.
Fees ._........... ._ ...
.f: 309.
inspections .....
305.
Special Inspections ..
306.
Certificate of occupancy -
19
19
19
19
24
21
22
22
2:3
24
24
25
26
27
23
29
29
and Abbreviations
Par' :.,Definitions
CHAP. -ER 4.
Definitions and Abbreciatlons ...........
31
Part MRegtiTements Based on Occuilancy
^HAP'i'ER g.
Classification of all Buildings by [Tse+
Zar occupancy and General Require-
mznts for all Occupancies
SEC. 501.
Occupancy Classified -- - ...
37
37
502 ,
Change iA Use --- .. .. _ .. ......
37
503.
Mixed Occupancy ... .- .
39
fa4)4.
Location on Property . _ ... .
39
505.
Allowable FIoor Aromas. ..-._ .___ ......
45
.:,06.
Allowable Area Increases .__..............
507.
Maximum Height of Buildings
47
ftig•
anti increases - .............
Fire -Resistive Substitution
47
509.
Arcades ..... _. _
47
CHAPTER 6.
Requirements for Group A occialla-les
SEC. 601.
Group A occupancies Defined .............
48
6Li2.
Construction. Height. and Area
fig
Allowable ..._. _.... __._.
48
603.
Location on Property
5
8
rage
rage, cHArTzR IL ReWAremeaft for Grasp F 00CUPDOCIM
SEC. 1101. Group F occupancies Defined .............. 61
604. Exit Facilities .... ............ 4"S 1102. ConstructiM Height, and Area
Ventilation, and Sar�i .......... 41
605. Light, ngs ... ... .. 49 Allowable .... ..........................
606. Enclosure of Vertical Operu 49
--1103. Location an Property ... ............... --- 61
607. Fire-Extinguishing Systems -------------- 49 1104. Exit Facilities - - - - --------- ............. - 61
60g Special Hazards ------------------ .... * ..... ------
49 1105. Light Ventilation, and Sanitation ...... di
�
Exceptions and Deviations 1106. Enclosure of Vertical Openings ........ - 62
609. 1107. Fire-Extinguishing Systems ................ 62
1108, Special Hazards ...................................... 62
CHAPTER 7. Requirements for Group
B 50 1109. open Parking Garages .......................... 63
B occupancies Defined
SEC. 701, Group and Area
702. Construction, Height. 50 CHAPTER III. Requirements for Grew G oceopaNK"a
Allowable -------------------------------- 51 SEC. MI. Group G occupancies Defined .............. 65
703. Location on property ------------------- --- ---- 51
704, Exit Facilities ........... ............. lI=. Construction, height, and Area
and Sanitation Allowable ....... . ......................... ............... 65
70.5, Light, Ventilation, 51 ....
706. Enclosure of Vertical Openings 1203. I-acation on Property ...................... - 65
707. Fire-Extinguishing Systems 51 IM. Exit Facilities .................. -- 65
51
... .... .. --.. IM Light, Ventilation, and Sanitation ... ... 65
708 Special Hazards ................... ..... .. 52 12M. Enclosure of Vertical Opening* .......... 65
709: Exceptions and Deviations
I17. Fire-Extinguishing Systems 65
IM Special Hazards ...................................... 65
CHAPTER S. Requirements for Group C OM"Pagries
SEC. 801. Group C occupancies Defined -------------- 53 CHAPTER I& RequiletalAft for GroepH
OOMPUNABS
Group H Occupancies Defined ............ 67
on, Height and SEC. 1301.
802. Construction, 1W,,- Congtructin-M Height, and Area
Allowable ----------------------------- --
803. Location on Property Allowable . ........................................ 67
-------
804.
130& Location on Property ............................
Exit Facilities . ...........
67
805. Light, Ventilation. and Sanitation 1394. Exit Facilities ..........................................
67
806. 1305. Light, Ventilation, and Sanitation 47
Enclosure Of Vertical OpeRIBIP * -------- 4 5-4 of Vertical Openings .......... 68
807. Fire-Extinguishing Systems 130L Enclosure
-Extinguishing Systen - - --------------
------------ ------ ---- --- 130:7. Fire
808. 23011. Special Hazards - ----- - ---- ........... . . .........
Special Hazards
no. Exceptions and Deviations .............
Ing. Existing mdUbW (See Appendix?----
IL
CHAPTER 9. Re4virements hr Gfm*eles CEMPTER Requilvasewts for axom I oeevpanls"
0
SEC. 901. 56 SEC. 1401. Group I[ (Occupancies Defined
Group D OCCUP-4- Dollard -
Height, and Area Height and Area
M. constructim 1402.
Allowable -------------- 54 AVIourable . ..... - ------ --------- --------------
70
903. Location on Property ------------- 56 -1403. on Property ..........
904. Exit Facilities 56 1404. Exit ftc1lities ... . ........... --------------- - --------
and Sanitation 56 Vefitfttion, and Sanitation
9M Light, Ventilation, 1405. Light.
9W. Enclosure of Vertical Openings ------- 57 k=1 openings ..........
1406. Enclosure
..............
907. Firs-ExtingUlaidug SYst-3 .... 57 1407. Fire-ExtiZ=18yatehe
go& spWal Hazards - ------ 5THazards ...... . ........ . .........
140S. Special 2,
1409. E-epti-I and DevistIONS
Retintre-MIN
CHAPTER io. Requiremesda for 61-V E oceispancles 1410. 3itairamn occupancy
_7
SEC, 1001. Group E occupancies Defined -------- - _.58 CHAPTER 1& Requitensents for
1002. Congtractlon, Height, Rod A-SEC. 1591. Group j occupancies ... ...
Allowable - - --------- ---------------- 59 1502. CaustrUctIOU. Height, and Area
1003. Location an Property 59 Allowable - --- - -- - - ----------------------------
1004. itFacilities ---------- 15M. Location on Property ..................
1M. Light, Ventilation. and SardtItim - 59 150,L Light and Ventilation ..---...-
1 Enclosure Rings 59 150. Spechd Hazards .................................
Of Vertical OW
1007. Five-Extinguishing Systems - _..-
1 .
----i0ft. Special Hazards 7
roe
Part IV-Requiremests awa an Leestiin rim
on
Zones
CHAPTER is. R-te-ti-sa us'rire loam . .......... ------ 73
....... 73
SEC. 1601. Gene . -- in Zone i4c. 74
1602. Restrictions Fire No. 2----
1603. Restrictions in Fire X0.3 ----- ... T5
1604. Restrictions in Fire
0
Based an TYPes *1
CHAPTER 21. Type IV 8094104P
part V-31tetluiremelits
88
2102. Structural Framework
constructloa
an Rjaings by TYpeo
2103. Exterior Wallsand Openings
88
of
CHAPTER 17' Of C Co"Uwd General Requ
89
2105. Stair Construction
mento
76
89
..........
SEC. 1701- Ganort'11'
SEC. 2201. Definition ......
1702. Structural Mme
Usable Space under Floors
76
77
90
1703. ....
1704. Roof coverings ..... --•........-•.....
Materials Allo"a
77
77
2204. Stair Construction
Unprotected
1705. vertical Opentrip ----------
Part VK -Engineering RegWations-QUAW a"
.,,,06. Enclosure of
1707. Weather Pcrsoxoryctwlg=3-9-8-9-*O--a-r--Y
CHAPTER 23. Live and Dead Loads
17o8. Members . ..... . ...... .............
79
91
Im. parapets ._...........
91
2303. Method of Design .................. ..... ...... ...
1710. Cormem
1711. Toilet Compartment'- -
for Electric
so
92
1712. Clearances
Ranges and Hot plates -------- -- ------ ----
8-6
2306. Reduction of Live Loads
CHAPTER I& TAW 1
81
94
SEC, 1801- Definition ---------------------
Ftamework - ------ ---
at
2309. Retaining Walls .......... --- ... - -
letural
1802. SW Waits aivd
1803. Exterior
81
82
95
104. Flogs .... . .... ..
82
2312. Earthquake Regulations (See Appen-
2845. Stair
1846. Rooft •----•--
82
95
1 9. "P. II83
95
CHAPTER ft MUNDWY
--w-tion
SEC. 1901- 1" Vreasisoverk -- ------ -- --------
Struct
83
97
1902.
190& =U-Mam",
84
2403. Materials ..... --------- ......... - ---- --- - - .....
1904. Flows - ------------------ --- ---------------------
- -------- -- -----------
--- 84
101
190. statecaftuvetion -
--- 84
2406. Gypsum Masonry ... .... ... ---- .................
----------- -- ------- ------------------
2407. Reinforced Gypsum Concrete .... ...
104
CHAPTER IL M 96804P
85
2409. Stone Masonry ... ...................... ------------
sEC. 20M Dtftlti- ------ -111- ------- -- -----
---
2410. cavity Wall Masonry ... ..... ... ... .......
. 106
203_ fttwior Walls, Opening- and
85
2412. Solid Masonry ................... .
Partitic - --------- ----------- - ---------- ------- ---
FUM - - ------ - --------
---86
109
2M. ------------------------------
"M StI& Construction,
as
87
2415. Reinforced Hollow Unit Masonry.... ....
-------------------------------- ----------------
2416. General Construction Requirements
112
2417. General Design .... . . ..... ..
112
2418. Bearing Walls
page
CHAPTER 21. Type IV 8094104P
SEC. 2101. Definition . ... .... .... ..
88
2102. Structural Framework
89
2103. Exterior Wallsand Openings
88
2104. Floor Construction
89
2105. Stair Construction
89
2106. Roof Construction
89
CHAPTER 22. Type V RulkUngs
SEC. 2201. Definition ......
90
2202, Sheathing . .........
90
2203. Exterior Walls and Openings
90
2204. Stair Construction
90
Part VK -Engineering RegWations-QUAW a"
Design of the Materials of Comitructim
CHAPTER 23. Live and Dead Loads
SEC. 2301, Definitions -- ------- -- . ... .............
91
2302. Loads --- . .. ................... - -- --- ---- -----
91
2303. Method of Design .................. ..... ...... ...
91
2304. Unit Live Loads -- ----------- ..... ..........
92
t3O5. Roof Loads - --------- .... . . ....... - ....
93
2306. Reduction of Live Loads
94
2307, Wind Pressure ........ - ... ........... .......
94
2309. Live Loads Posted .. ... ...... .. -
95
2309. Retaining Walls .......... --- ... - -
95
2310. Footing Design .------. --- .................
95
2311. Walls and Structural Framing ...........
95
2312. Earthquake Regulations (See Appen-
dix, and map on inside back cover) ....
95
2313. Anchorage - - -------------- .... .. ... .... .........
95
CHAPTER ft MUNDWY
SEC. 2401. Scope ...... ---- - - -------- --
97
2402. Definitions -------- - ---- ---- .......... ... .... ......
97
2403. Materials ..... --------- ......... - ---- --- - - .....
97
2404. Tests ------ ----------------- ......... . .... ------
101
2405. unburned Clay Masonry ............. ........
102
2406. Gypsum Masonry ... .... ... ---- .................
103
2407. Reinforced Gypsum Concrete .... ...
104
2408. Glass Masonry .. -------- -- -- ----- - ...... . ..
.. 106
2409. Stone Masonry ... ...................... ------------
- 106
2410. cavity Wall Masonry ... ..... ... ... .......
. 106
2411. Hollow Unit Masonry ..... .. . ......
107
2412. Solid Masonry ................... .
IOT
2413. Grouted Masonry ------ ................
109
2414. Reinforced Grouted Masonry ....
III
2415. Reinforced Hollow Unit Masonry.... ....
Ill
2416. General Construction Requirements
112
2417. General Design .... . . ..... ..
112
2418. Bearing Walls
114
2419. Nonbearing Walls ... --- -- ---- - -------
116
2420. Columns . -- .. ........ . . ... -
117
9
aw
CHAPTER 25•
Wood
2705.
Limiting Dimensions
i201
SEC. 2501.
General --- ------- ...........
118
2706.
Compression Splices _ . _
202
2502.
Definitions and at .
118
2707.
Gr
Gross and Net Sections
202
2503.
Size Structural
al Members ................
Members
133
2708.
Connections
203
2504.
Allowable Unit Stresses ....--..._.............
133
2711,9.
Rivets and Bolts -
205
2505.
Columns -
137
2710.
Welded Connections
_ .- 206
2506.
Timber Connections and Fastenings .- 137
2711.
Construction Details _ . _...
_...- 206
2507.
Vertical Members or Assemblies _.-.---
141
2712.
Lacing .._... ___ _
207i
2508.
Mrs Stops144
" " -----....
2713.
Pins and Pin Holes _ ........_.-_ .........-..
207
2509.
Horizontal Members s or Assemblies
144
27 14.
Bearing Plates and Anchorage - .......
_ 208
2510.
Wood with Masonry or Concretee......
...
.. 146
2715.
Light Steel Construction -
.... 208
2511.
Wood Diaphragms .. ................ ........------
246
2716.
_.
Expansion ......... _...
_...- 210
2512.
Stressed Skin Panel Design
150
2717.
Workmanship _ ._.....____ ___........
........ 210
2513,
................
Glued Construction ...... ......._....--...
150
2718,
Painting __._._....._..
211
2514.
Heavy Timber Construction .-..-..._....
.. 152
2515.
Wood-Joisted Dwelling Construction .. 153
Part VII-Debuled Rqpdafiow
2516.
Foundation Ventilation, Durability,
and Termite Protection ........_................
157
CHAPTER 28.
Excavations, Feuad&U9vu4 mad.
Retaining Watts
CHAPTER 26.
ate
SEC. 2801.
Quality and Design
212
2802.
Excavations ........ ..... __.....-........... __
..... .. 212
SEC. 2601.
Quality ..................._. .... __ _...._-_....
159
2803.
Sail Classification ............ ---- ............_.
212
2602.
Design
--.- 159
2804.
Allowable Soil Pressures .....................
213
2603.
Definitions ._ ....................... ...---- ------------
159
2805.
Soil Requirements _....... ........... .-.....
........ 213
2504.
Materials
161
2806.
Design of Footings ........................
_. 215
2605.
Tests .... .. ..... .. ................._...._--
161
21107.
Grillage Footings ................... .........
215
2606.
Quality of Concrete ..................._.__---
162
2808.
Piles -_-...--- ... ............ .................. ...............
216
2607.
Proportions and Consistency _ --------------
163
2608.
Control of Proportions .-----
164
t2EI,iPTER 29
Vested tangs
2809.
Mixing and Placing Concrete --_.---_
-_- 164
SEG. 2901.
General
220
2610.
Forms and Details of Construction
--. 165
2903.
--.... _.-._.- ...........
Veneer of Masonry Units ...
...
220
2611.
Assumptions for Resign .. - . - .. --
- 168
2903.
its ...........
Veneer of Nonstructural Units.
220
2612.
Symbols and Notation ..........................
168
2904.
Special Requirements for Glass
2613.
Allowable Unit Stresses in
Veneer
22t
Reinforcement ........................_........_
169
2614.
Flexural Computations -_.---- .--------- . -.•---
169
CHAPTER 30
Endesure of vertind operrings
2615.
Shrinkage and Temperature
Reinforcement ..................... ._.....,
174
SEC. 3001.
Enclosures: When Required .....
-:--- 223
2616.
Two -Way Slab .._... ..........._.._ ------------
174
3002.
Elevator Enclosures ..........
----- .. 223
2617.
Shear and Diagonal - ------------
175
3003.
Other Vertical Openings l� --
223
2618.
Bond and Anchorage -.._ _ .. ._.__--
._.. 277
3004.
Air Ducts ._..._.........- -.
--.- 223
2618.
Fiat Slabs _._.---------- -------------
180
2620.
Reinforced Concrete Cohurms; and
CHAPTER 3L
Flow Constractliss
Walls ,......__ _ .............._ ......_......__..._
180
SEC, 3101.
General - .
2621.
Footings ..--------.---
188
3102.
Concrete Floors .....................
224
2622.
Precast Concrete Joists
192
3103.
Steel-Joisted Floors .....
2623.
Composite
192
3104.
Ceibdar Steel Floors -----------------
_... .,224
224
2624.
Plain Concrete -------- _..... . .......__ ...._._
192
3105-
------------
Wood Floors ... .............---- .......
....._'225
2625.
Prummaticaily Placed Concrete ...
193
2626.
Bolts ...._ ............._.._......-......._. -------
194
CHAPTER 3l,'
Eoof Construction S" Covering
SEC. 3201.
General ---_ ._. ...............
2t6
CHAPTER 27.
8"d said iter t4saft and )
Construction ....... ........_...........
.........`226
3203.
Roof Coverings ........ _:
226
FEC. 2701.
Quality and Design__ ___- _ ___
_ 133
3204.
Roof insulation ........
231
2702.
Aliowable'Unit Stresses__....._
._ 195
3205.
Attics: Access and Areas ....
....... 231
2703.
Eccentric
Hoof Drainage .... <::, ::..:
._.._'
2TO4.
Beams and Girders. ___ _
._ 1919
10
i
u
CHAPTER 34. 84ughts
SEC. 3401. Skylights --- ......... -._._............... .......... 245
CHAPTER 38- Says. Porrokes, ami
SEC. 3501. Bay and Oriel Windows ........................ 245
3502. Balconies and Porches __--------------------- - 245
CHAPTER 38 Peadwmms Mi Bed MUCIMM
SEC. 3501. Penthouses and Roof Structures 247
3602. Towers and Spires .................................. 247
CHAPTER 37
Fimey Yeaft Md Fkeplwm
Fens*
CHAPTER 33.
Stairs. Zsfbh i eats
370& _
SEC. 3301.
General ..... ------------------- ------------ .----
233
3302.
Exits Required ------------------------------
-- 234
3303.
Doors - ......................_------------ ----- ----- -
-- 235
3304.
Corridors ....-------------------- ................. --..
235
3305.
Stairs ...... .------- _..............--- -
---235
3306.
Ramps ................ _..........
--- 238
3307.
Horizontal Exits --- ....._-------------------------
. 239
3308.
Exit Enclosures --- .. ... .. ...................
239
3309.
Smokeproof Enclosures -----------------
.... 239
3310.
Exit Outlets .......... - ...-.- ..-..-...
240
3311.
Exit Courts ..... ..... ......._...........-------
240
3312.
Exit Signs and Muminatiws ................
240
3313.
Aisles ......_....-........
241
3314.
Seats .... ............. ..... ...........--- ............
- 242
3315.
Bleacher Seats . ..... ....................._...-.-...
242
3316.
Exits: Group A Occupancies --- --- ..._..
242
3317.
Exits: Group B Occupancies ...............
243
3318.
Exits: Group C Occupancies ....-----------
243
3319.
Exits: Group D Occupancies ................
244
3320.
Exits: Group E Occupancies -,-
--- 244
3321.
Special Hazards ._ ........................---------
- 244
CHAPTER 34. 84ughts
SEC. 3401. Skylights --- ......... -._._............... .......... 245
CHAPTER 38- Says. Porrokes, ami
SEC. 3501. Bay and Oriel Windows ........................ 245
3502. Balconies and Porches __--------------------- - 245
CHAPTER 38 Peadwmms Mi Bed MUCIMM
SEC. 3501. Penthouses and Roof Structures 247
3602. Towers and Spires .................................. 247
CHAPTER 37
Fimey Yeaft Md Fkeplwm
SEG. 3201.
Scope and Definitions -----------
248
370& _
Chimneys -- - ..............._..... ...
249
3703.
Types of Chimneys Required ---___..._--._
250
3704,''
Metal Smokestacks --_.._..----- --- .__.__...-_
251
3705.
Type A or Vents ------ ------- .-----------
232
3706.
Type B Flues or V ....
- 252
3707.
Type G Flues or Vents __-------- _------------
- 254
3703
Special Type: A Flues or it - --._._._
254
3709.
Smoke Pipes .--___._____..__.__
255
3710.
Me cw Vel Connectors --------------------
- 255
3711,
Intexvowmection of Vents ------- ----
-----
3712
Water pester Y
____ 256
3713
*1110bbees ----------------------
n
Pege
CHAPTER 33. F%m-MxUnvkhMc Systema
SEC. 3801. Automatic Systems: Where
Required..._ -- ............................................ 259
3802. Detailed Requirements .......................... 259
3803. Dry Standpipes ........................................ 260
3804. Dry Standpipes: Detailed Require-
ments........................................................ 260
3805. Wet Standpipes: Where Required ...... 261
3806. Wet Standpipes: Detailed Require-
m.nts... ....................„.._............................. 261
_
SEC. 420E General
4202. TestingMalarials --- 'eml G
--------
4203 ApplicsUon of Co
Interior's --
4294. Fluldwes Based oh
U
raw
CHAPTER S& Sidra, Exits, a" Occupant Loaft
SEC. 3301. General ........---...---................................ 233
3302. Exits Required ----------------------------------__. 234
3303. Doors ......... .......... .-------- ----- ---- 235
3304. Corridors .._.-..------------------------ ------------ 236
�. ......236
CORRECTION SKEET
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
1958 Edition, Second Printing
LEASE refer to your copy of the 1958 Edition of Volum
I, page S. If this page Indicates ". Printhg" under
PI,
Edition," please stake it, fo"wfeg correcHoas:
Page 44. Table No. 5-C. Under "Types of Construction"
delete the column head "I -Flour or H.T." from Type II, and
under Type III, change the column head "I -Hour" to "1 -Hour
or H.T."
Page 90. Section ftll (b). Change the first line to
(b) Openings in Nall%. in Fire Zone No. 2 open
Page 331, Table No. 23-C. Change column --Value of C-
as follows: .15 ; ,05 with a minimum of five pounds per
square foot; .25:.25:.05; .025.
Pagc 358. Section 5109 (a). Change to read as follows-.
See. 5109, fa) Clearances. Applian( s having open flames
shall not be installed where the vertical clearance to com-
bustible construction is less than thirty-six inches 136"). A
twenty -four -inch (24") vertical clearance over open flame
gas appliances is permitted if the underside of the combusti-
ble construction exposed to flame is protected with a mini-
mum of one -fourth -inch (':i"s asbestos millboard coveted
with No. 28 gauge or heavier sheet -metal covering. and the
Projection extends a minimum of nine inches (9") beyond
the outer dimensions of the appliance. Reduced clearances
shall be as set forth in Table Ne 51-A. For electrical appli-
ances, see Section 1712.
3ifl3 Types of Chl ,
3TN. Metal Sukokestacks ....
3705. Type A Flum or Vents ...
3706. Type 8 F1ues or V ------------------------ 252
3707. Type G Flues or Vents ----- - - --- - ---- __ 254
3r7ft Special Type A Fluns or Vents ... .... 254
VW Smoke Pipes .... - - ----------- .... 255
3710. Irian or V _.- _
3711. Interconnection of i° _----- _.__._._.__ 256
3712. Water Heater Vents and Manifelde-.256
..
3713. Fieepls _.. ------- _._,....... 257
12
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE '-''--"
I ...... 261
1858 Edition, Second Printing e -
PLEASE refer to tour copy of the 1958 Edition of Volum 261
L page S. If this page indicates "Second Printing" under 263
"Authorized Edition," please make the following corrections: """"' 263
Page 44. Table No. 5-C. Under •Types of Construction"
delete the column head ••1 -Hour or H.T." from Type II, and
under Type 111, change the column head •'1 -Hour" to "]-Hour
or N.T."
Page 90. Section 2'...(13 (b). Change the first line to
(b) Openings in Wall%. In Fire Zone No. 2 open
Page 334. Table No. 23-C. Change column "Value of `C"'
as follows: .15 ; .05 with a minimum of five pounds per
ri -r 4'`
square foot; .25; .25; .05; .025.
Page 338. Section 5109 (a). Change to read as follows:
Sec- 5109. (al Clearances. Appliances having open flames
shall not be installed where the vertical clearance to com-
bustible construction is less than thirty-six inches (36"). A
twenty -four -inch (24'1 vertical clearance over open flame
gas appliances is permitted if the underside of the combusti-
ble construction exposed to flame is protected with a mini-
mum of one -fourth -inch / %") asbestos millboard covered
with No. 28 gauge or heavier sheet -metal covering, and the
projection extends a minimum of nine inches (9") beyond
the outer dimensions of the appliance. Reduced clearances
shall be as set forth in Table No. 51-A. For electrical appli-
ances, see Section 1712.
PAirt
pwatecum
CHAPTER 42. ftenter wan and Calling lilt
SEC. 4201. General ......... ___
4202. Teding and Classification of
N,
ftv
CHAPTER LIE. Flie-mmungutablut SPASM
SEC. 3801. Automatic Systems; Where
Required............. ........ ...............
259
_..,
259
CORRECTION SHEET
260
- 28Q
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE '-''--"
I ...... 261
1858 Edition, Second Printing e -
PLEASE refer to tour copy of the 1958 Edition of Volum 261
L page S. If this page indicates "Second Printing" under 263
"Authorized Edition," please make the following corrections: """"' 263
Page 44. Table No. 5-C. Under •Types of Construction"
delete the column head ••1 -Hour or H.T." from Type II, and
under Type 111, change the column head •'1 -Hour" to "]-Hour
or N.T."
Page 90. Section 2'...(13 (b). Change the first line to
(b) Openings in Wall%. In Fire Zone No. 2 open
Page 334. Table No. 23-C. Change column "Value of `C"'
as follows: .15 ; .05 with a minimum of five pounds per
ri -r 4'`
square foot; .25; .25; .05; .025.
Page 338. Section 5109 (a). Change to read as follows:
Sec- 5109. (al Clearances. Appliances having open flames
shall not be installed where the vertical clearance to com-
bustible construction is less than thirty-six inches (36"). A
twenty -four -inch (24'1 vertical clearance over open flame
gas appliances is permitted if the underside of the combusti-
ble construction exposed to flame is protected with a mini-
mum of one -fourth -inch / %") asbestos millboard covered
with No. 28 gauge or heavier sheet -metal covering, and the
projection extends a minimum of nine inches (9") beyond
the outer dimensions of the appliance. Reduced clearances
shall be as set forth in Table No. 51-A. For electrical appli-
ances, see Section 1712.
PAirt
pwatecum
CHAPTER 42. ftenter wan and Calling lilt
SEC. 4201. General ......... ___
4202. Teding and Classification of
N,
Page 44. Table No. 3-C. Under "Types of Construction"
delete the column head .11 -Hour or H.T." from Type II, and
under Type III, change the column head "1 -Hour" to 111 -Hour
or H.T."
Page 9o. section 2283 (b). Change the first line to
(b) Openings is Wall%. In Fire Zone No. 2 open
Page SS4. Table No. 23-C. Change column "Value of `C "
as follows: .15 ; .05 with a minimum of five pounds per
square foot; .25; _25:.05:.025.
Page 358. Section 5to8 (a). Change to read as follows:
Se: 3109. (a) Clearances. Appliances having open flames
shall not be installed where the vertical clearance to com-
bustible construction is less than thirty-six inches (3$"). A
twenty -four -inch (24") vertical clearance over open flame
gas appliances is permitted if the underside of the combusti-
ble construction exposed to flame is protected with a mini-
mum of one -fourth -inch (%") asbestos millboard covered
with No. 28 gauge or heavier sheet -metal covering, and the
projection extends a minimum of nine inches (9") beyond
the outer dimensions of the appliance. Reduced clearances
shalt be as set forth in Table No. 51-A. For electrical appli-
ances, see Section 1712.
Nice
CRAM= as. salM >d. sod 140,18
SEC. 3301. GAnend------------------ ------------- _r, ._-------
sem. Exits ------
233
235
CORRECTION SHEET
236
_ 236
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
238
238
1858 Edition. Second Printing
s. 239
refer to your copy of the 1938 FAMOR Of VQkMM
239
PLEASE
I, page S. H this page indicates "SecOld Printing" uMftr
246
"Authorized Edition," please Rake the fellmin -
v_ 346
"Authorized Edition," pk'ase make the follondng eorrecHons:
246
Page 44. Table No. 5-C. Under "Types of Censtructiot"
241
delete the column head 111 -Hour or H.T." from Type II. and
,. 242
under Type III, change the column head "I -Hour" to "14100
242
or H.T."
-242
243
Page 9o. Section 2263 Cbl. Change the first lime to
. 843
(b) Openings in Wall%. In Fire Zone No. 2 open
244
244
Page 334. Table No. 23-C. Change column "Value of 'C "
244
as follows: .15 ; .05 with a minimum of five pounds per
Nt-} 4V2
square foot; .25; .25; .05; .025.
245
Page 358. Section 5109 (a). Change to read as follows*
Sec,. 5109. (a) Clearances. Appliances having open flames
shall not be installed where the vertical clearance to eom-
246
bustible construction is less than thirty-six 6'
ix inches (3)- A
twenty -four -inch (24') vertical clearance over open flame
246
gas appliances is permitted if the underside of the combusti-
ble construction exposed to flame is protected with a mint -
mum of one -fourth -inch ias') asbestos mi)lboard covered
with No. 28 gauge or heavier sheet -metal covering, and the
247
projection extends a minimum of nine inches (9") beyond
the outer dimensions of the appliance. Reduced clearances
;M7
shall be as set forth in Table No. 51-A. For electrical appli-
ances, see Section 1712.
es
_248
3708. __.-_
3703.
�
3704. 311stal Stanhestacka ... ..__._.......
251
3705. Type A Flues or Vests .. _._
252
Type B:FIRMS or T __.__ .__c_-_ _.___
_ 252
3707. TYPO C or Vesta ____.._ ------ -
254
A Flow or Vents __......
254
--------- --- _:,
255
3710 or ___._,
255
3711. Interenssection of Y __........ _..._
956
3724
357257
3713.
Page 44. Table No. 3-C. Under "Types of Construction"
delete the column head .11 -Hour or H.T." from Type II, and
under Type III, change the column head "1 -Hour" to 111 -Hour
or H.T."
Page 9o. section 2283 (b). Change the first line to
(b) Openings is Wall%. In Fire Zone No. 2 open
Page SS4. Table No. 23-C. Change column "Value of `C "
as follows: .15 ; .05 with a minimum of five pounds per
square foot; .25; _25:.05:.025.
Page 358. Section 5to8 (a). Change to read as follows:
Se: 3109. (a) Clearances. Appliances having open flames
shall not be installed where the vertical clearance to com-
bustible construction is less than thirty-six inches (3$"). A
twenty -four -inch (24") vertical clearance over open flame
gas appliances is permitted if the underside of the combusti-
ble construction exposed to flame is protected with a mini-
mum of one -fourth -inch (%") asbestos millboard covered
with No. 28 gauge or heavier sheet -metal covering, and the
projection extends a minimum of nine inches (9") beyond
the outer dimensions of the appliance. Reduced clearances
shalt be as set forth in Table No. 51-A. For electrical appli-
ances, see Section 1712.
CHAPTER lit Fbe Systsels
Sly. 3861. Automatic Systems: Where
...... z5>i
CORRECTION SHEET
......... 259
.......... 260
e-
1--xWURM BI'ILDING CODE
.... 266
1958 Edith. Second Printing
...._ 28i
re -
refer to your copy of the 1958 Edition of Volutes
.. 091
PLEASE
L p 3. H this page indicates "Second Printing" under
'
... 273,
"Authorized Edition," pk'ase make the follondng eorrecHons:
—263
Page 44. Table No. 3-C. Under "Types of Construction"
delete the column head .11 -Hour or H.T." from Type II, and
under Type III, change the column head "1 -Hour" to 111 -Hour
or H.T."
Page 9o. section 2283 (b). Change the first line to
(b) Openings is Wall%. In Fire Zone No. 2 open
Page SS4. Table No. 23-C. Change column "Value of `C "
as follows: .15 ; .05 with a minimum of five pounds per
square foot; .25; _25:.05:.025.
Page 358. Section 5to8 (a). Change to read as follows:
Se: 3109. (a) Clearances. Appliances having open flames
shall not be installed where the vertical clearance to com-
bustible construction is less than thirty-six inches (3$"). A
twenty -four -inch (24") vertical clearance over open flame
gas appliances is permitted if the underside of the combusti-
ble construction exposed to flame is protected with a mini-
mum of one -fourth -inch (%") asbestos millboard covered
with No. 28 gauge or heavier sheet -metal covering, and the
projection extends a minimum of nine inches (9") beyond
the outer dimensions of the appliance. Reduced clearances
shalt be as set forth in Table No. 51-A. For electrical appli-
ances, see Section 1712.
4708.
Interior Plastering: Application of
ftv
u-;.......
__ .......
Plaster ...................... ....................
303
Materials
277
4709.
Interior Plastering: Staff ............ .......
304
of Structural Members
.. 281
4710.
Exterior Plastering: Backing ..._..
304
s c- , xrcatiOns .
285
4711.
Exterior Plastering: Application ........
305
,zvz=.
a , xzz , on"Mgs .
285
4712.
Machine Applied Plaster ......................
306
? »c ae awmbties for
4713.
Pneumatically Placed Plaster ..............
306
't Openings _.._
285
4714.
Portland Cement Plaster ............. .........
306
-.tet 0"vtmr.-k--
290 +
4715.
Gypsum Wallboard .... ................... .._.....
307
iter Uw of PWWRe Stmetas sad
Part X1-Special
Subjeebs
P4aj+ety
CHAPTER 4E.
PUm Storage
ot Pedestrians Lasiat
(See Appendix, Chapter 48)
or
CHAPTER 49.
Meebanical Reldgeraftm
. t�
r _. - --- _-----_..-._
291
(See Appendix. Chapter 49)
'im-p c-w 1 se of Streets and
CHAPTER b0.
Prefabricated ConsUveden
t
Ani
to Storage on Public
291
SEC. 5001.
General ....................... ........... ....... ...........
309
-- _..._..._.........-.
292
5002.
Tests of Materials ..................................
309
4A
X-v-ng X:z ar on Public Property ....
292
50113.
Testa of Assemblies................................
309 ;
ct cif Urilities ............._.....--....
292
5004.
Connections......_....................................
309
?"^re of Pedestrians on Public
5005.
Pipes and Conduits ------- ----------------------
309
292
5006.
Certificate and Inspection ....................
310
,eKr,-m
-- Siuex-alk Excavations
-- 293
CHAPTER 5L
Heat-Predudsig Applisnem
"'�= 4L
rersumeat OeevPUKY of Pubue
(Sea Appendix, Chapter 51)
CHAPTER 52.
Plastics
UN-
-----
294
mzo Apra-s ----.--
294
SEC. 5201.
General
' ... 311
CIM
54ace b6cow S k - -
-- 294
5202.
Installation......................................
812
_
r ,Ai ------
---
294
5203.
Interior Finish and Trim ....----_.........
... 312
-
_ __.._.....................
294
5204.
.........
Exterior Wall Panels ...................
313 "
- Awr-zrp or Hoods ... .........
295
5205.
Glazing of Unprotected Openings
...... '313
i u _.
295
5206.
Roof Panels ...... _.................................
313
5207.
Skylights..........................................
314
COLIRTM AL
- )
5208.
Light-Transmitting Panels in
Monitors and Sawtooth Roof, ...:.........
316,
5209.
Plastic Light Diffusers in Ceilings
...._ 316
VWC at
+
5210.
Partitions ...........................
318
5211.
Exterior Veneer ............... ..............
318
}
and lmstaitati,n
5212.
Awnings and Canopies .....
318
WaRboard
5213.
Greenhouses ....................... ......:.:....
319
5214.
Sign,, Fences, and Similar Structures 319
1
_ _ . . ...........
.. ° _ -- -------------------
296
296
CHAPTER$ 53-59. (No Requirements)
4t
11 Lathing ...
rrt : hing ...........
297
r ' g: Lath and Plaster
gilt XQ-
ISM
P .
2VIATWr en : Suspended and
297
CHAPTER99.
y f;"h
-
e`
l e r r g. Number of
SEC. 6001.
Validity ............ ......... ........:.....
320
� twM Thjrknes%299
6M.
Uniform Building Code, Standards 320
f
(oi >r 1 r
6003.
Ordinances Repealed
Af&gid
302
6004.
Date >Effeetive
14
ig
A U4 V H3
SEC. 5101.
Construction, Installation. and
page
APPENDIX
339
CHAPTERS 7, 13,
23, 23, 43, 49, and 51
340
SEC. 702.
Reviewing Stands ._-----_-----
329
1309.
Existing Buildings ............ _ ----
330
2301.
Weights of Building Materials ..... ____
331
2312.
Lateral Bracing (Earthquake
344
5106.
Regulations) ---- ----- ...............
333
2516.
Termite Provisions ------ ___ ---- ---
336
5108.
Photographic and X -Ray Films
4801.
(classes of Film Except) ...
337
4802.
General Regulations ..... __
337
4803.
Motion Picture Film ..............
337
4901.
Refrigeration Systems (General)
338
4902.
Scope ..... ----- ____ .............. ........
338
A U4 V H3
SEC. 5101.
Construction, Installation. and
Performance Requirements ..................
339
5102.
Fresh -Air Supply for Combustion
340
5103.
Access .............. __ __ _
342
5104.
Residential Space -Heating Devices
and Controls .. ..............
344
5105.
Space -Heating Furnaces; and Boilers
344
5106.
Room or Space Heaters ___----
351
5107.
Water Heaters ... __ ----------
354
5108.
Incinerators .......................... _ ..... -356
5109.
Miscellaneous Domestic Appliances
358
5110.
Commercial Food Preparation
Equipment - .......... ____ ___
359
5111.
Industrial Heating Equipment -- -------
363
5112.
Heating and Power Boilers .. ...... . .......
363
5113.
Fuel Supply and Storage
Facilities - ... __ ......................
INDEX.__'. .......................... =
M
Ir HOW TO USE THE UNMFx BmDING CODE
THE following procedures will be helpful in the use of the
Uniform Building Code:
1. Determine the Occupancy Group in which the use of
the building most nearly lits --the '101" sections of Chapters
6-15 Inclusive. Where portions of the building are used for
different purposes, wells of specific fire -resistive ratings may
be required. Section 503.
2. Determine the Type of Construction which it is desired
to use --Chapters 17-22 Inclusive.
S. Check the location of the site as to local Fire Zone
from the city hall and check limitations in that Fire Zone -
Chapter 16.
4. Check Area lAmItstions for the particular Occupancy
Group and Type of Construction -Table No. 5-C. If allow-
able area In not adequate, check Allowable Area increases,
Section 506, for possible Increase of area, or change Type of
Construction to one allowing greater area.
5. Check Number of Stories, Table No. 5-D. for allowable
number of stories for the particular Occupancy Group and
Type of Construction. It allowable number of stories in not
adequate. check Xaxhuum Height of Buildings, Section WT.
for possible In-, or change Type of Construction to one
allowing a greater number of stories.
6. Check DetaRed Occupancy Requirements in the ap-
propriate chapteri Chapters 6-15.
7. Check Detailed Consbuction Requireasentai in the ap-
propriate chapter, Chapters 17-22.
& lacallas on Property In relation to side and rear prop-
erty lines and other located on the same property
should be guided by Sectbuildiionngs 504 and Table No. 5-A. Thin
will help determine wall and opening requirements.
9. Design and other Detailed Requireasents are found In
Chapters 23-52.
b
1938 F.D1r10N sections 181-184
INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE OF BUILDING OFFICIALS
PART I
UNIFORM BUILDIl+ G CODE
ADiMINISTRATIVE
ordinance Ne.. ------- _» » --_---
n CHAPTER I—TITLE AND SCOPE
An ordinance regulating the erection, construction, 0111-
largement, alteration, repair, moving, removal, conver:IM
Seas 10L This ordinance shall be known as the 'Building Tltile
Code," may be cited as suck and will be referred to herein as
demolition, occupancy. equipment. use, Might, area. and
this fie-"
maintenance of buildings or structures in the City of
Sec. 18L The .pose of this Code is to provide minimum purpose
».._........ »..» ..._.........».. »»». _»» »»»»._ .
providing for the issuance of permits and collection of fees
standards to safeguard life or limb, health, property, and
public welfare by regulating and controlling the design, con•
therefor; declaring and establishing Fire Districts; providing
structlen. quality of materials, use and occupancy, location
penalties for the violation thereof, and repealing all ordi-
and maintenanceof all buildings and structures within the
nances and parts of ordinances in eonfiict themvtth.
certain equipmentla
Be it ordained by the ....... .._.......... _.... --_.-.__.. ..»_..»»»»»»
Wherever is reference made the Appendix,
the provisions in the Appendix shall not apply unlet spe-
of the City of ................... .---- ___ ........ _...... _as .follows:
cificaily adopted.
Sec. 10114 The provisions of this Code shall =apply to the am"
construction, alteration, movingdemolition, repair, and urn
Of any building or structure within the city,. except, work
located primarily in a public way, public utility towers
,and
Poles. mechanical equipment not specifically regulated in this
Code, and hydraulic flood control structures.
Additions, alterations, repairs, and changes of use or cecu.
pancy in all buildings and structures sWi comply with the
provisions for new buildings and structures except as other.
wise provided in Sections 104,'x, and 502 of this Code.
Where. in any Specific cue, different sections of this Code
specify different materials, methods of construction or other
requirements, the most restrictive shall govern.
See. 10L (a) funeral. Buildings or structures to which
additions, alterations, or repairs are made shall comply with to
all the requirements for new buildings or structures except Sundisp
as specifically provided in this Section.
Fd.r construction in Fire Zones ace Chapter I0.
(b) Alterations, and Sepoks: Men #has n per
Cant. When additions, alterations. Or repairs within any 12.
month period exceed 50 per cent of the value of an existing
building or structure, such building or structure shall be
uu Lde to conform. to the requirements for new buildings or
structures.
(c) Additions, Alterations. isad ro iP t3Mt.
Additions, alterations. and repairs exceeding 5 'pe
a
per cent but ;
not exceeding 50 per cent of the value of an existing building
or structure and complying with the requirements firer w
buildings or may be made to such or
structure within any 12 -month period without ;making the `
entire building or structure comply. The now ;coast
�
is
sects 104-106 UNiFO= BU HMINti CODE 1838 EDITION
Application
to Existing
shall conform to the requirements of this Code for AL new
building of like area, height, and occupancy Such building
Buildings
or structure, including rpw additions, shall not exceed the
(Csut'd.)
areas and heights specified in this Code.
(d) Additions, AlteratlsvA6 and Repairs: 25 Per Cent or
Less. Structural additiom alterations, and repairs to any
portion of an existing building or structure, within any
12 -month period, not exceeding 25 per cent of the value of
the building or structure shall comply with all of the re-
quirements for new buildings or structures, except that
minor structural additions, alterations, or repairs, when
approved by the Building Official. may be made with the
same material of which the building or structure is con-
structed. Such building or structure. including new addi-
tions, shall not exceed the areas and heights specified in this
Code.
(e) Nonstructural Alterations and Repairs: 25 Per Cent
or Les. Alterations or repairs, not exceeding 25 per cent of
the value of an existing building or structure, which are
nonstructural and do not affect any member or part of the
building or structure having required fire resistance, may be
made with the same materials of which the building or
structure is constructed.
(f) Repairs: Rent Havering. Not more than 25 per cent of
the roof covering of any building or structure shall be re-
placed in any 12 -month period unless the new roof covering
is made to conform to the requirements of this Code for new
buildings or structures.
(g) Existing Occupancy. Buildings In existence at the
time of the passage of this Code may have their existing
use or occupancy u ontbuY4 if such use or occupancy was
legal at the time of the passage of this Code, provided such
continued use is not dangerous to bite.
Any change in the use or occupancy of any existing build-
ing or structure shall amply with the provisions of Sections
300 and M.
(b) Moved RuNding& Buildings or structures moved into
or within the city abaft CMPly with the provisions of this
Code. See Section 1001 (c) for requirements in Fire Zones.
(1) Mslatenaaas AN buildings or structures both existing
and new, and all parts thereof, shalt be maintained In a safe
and Unitary couilition. All devices or safeguards which are
rcqwr*dithis re Code in a in u or structure when
e
n
working order. The Owner or Isis si
tel agent aRbe
responsible for the anamfousure of and structures.
sections 106.100
vided he uUdiA that theOffleial may
io approve any such alternate pro- Alternate
videdcompies with the proposed design is satisfactory and Magnin and
Provisions of Chapter 23, and that the McUm" of
material, method, or work offered is, for the purpose inConstruction
-
tended, at least the equivalent of that prescribed in this (Coated.)
Code in quality, strength, effectiveness, fire resistance, dura-
bility, and safety.
The Building official shall require that sufficient evidence
or proof be submitted to substantiate any claims that may
be made regarding its use.
For the requirements as an approved fabricator see Sec-
tions 305 and 402.
See. 100. Whenever there Is insufficient evidence of com- Tests
Plianee with the provisions of this Code or evidence that any
material or any construction does not conform to the require-
ments of this Code, or in order to substantiate claims for
alternate materials or methods of construction, the Building
Official may require tests as proof of compliance to be made
at the expense of the owner or his agent by an approved
agency.
Test methods shall be as specified by this Code for the
material in question. If there are no appropriate test
methods specified in this Code, the Building official shall
determine the test procedure.
Copies of the results of all such tests shall be retained
for a period of not lees than two years after the acceptance
of the structure.
ABnnate Seo. ISL The of this Code are not intended to
sad PrOvsot the uss of any material or method of construction
weamwe of not wpeeuftft Prescribed by this Coft provided say such
alternate ben been appmrod.
20 21
Sections 201-202 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
1958 EDrrcox
CHAPTM 2—ORGANIZAnON AND
sections -
'91 The Building Ofecial
F.NFORCFA ENT
x or any employee
with the enforcement of this Code, acting in good
faith and without malice for the
Creation
is estaunder in the city
yyctithe
iEhe
city in the discharge of his
duties, shall not thereby render himself liable personally and
h hereby relieved from
DepartmentGu
inSDepartment"e. whierebal all be , of
i g1di
all Personal liability for any
age t may accrue to Persons or
al deli
Building designated by the appointing authority.
property as a result
cf any act required or by reason of any act or omission in
discharge of his
Powers and
Sec. 202. (a) GeaeraL The Building Official is hereby au-
duties. Any suit brought against the
B� ding Official or employee, because of such act or omission
Duties of
Building
thorized and directed to enforce all the provisions ofd
Code. For such purpose he shall have the powers of a police
Performed by him in the enforcement of any provisions of
this Code, shall be defended by the legal department
Official
officer.
of the
y unfit final termination of the proceedings.
(b) DeputiesIn accordance with the procedure and with
the approval of the chief appointing authority of the munici-
may COOPeru Of Other Officials. The Building Official
in type requestd shall receive so far as may be necessary
pality, the Building Official may appoint such number of
of other Officials oOfhthe c les, the assistance and cooperation
officers, inspectors and assistants, and other employees as
y
shall be authorized from time to time. He may deputize such
employees as may be necessary to carry out the functions of
Sea 208 (s) Query. All buildings
are structurally or structures which Usrate
the Building Department
ded with adequate egress, bandbw
or which constitute a Are hazard. or
(c) Reports and Reew s. The Building Official shall sub-
mit a report to the city less than
are otherwise (I&U er_
ous to human life, or which in relation to existing use can-
hazard to safety or health,
proper official not once a
year, the rk of the department during the preced-
ason oalltute f
or public welfare, by
re
inm�ent�t�ntenance, dilapidation, obsolescence,
period, He shah 'i
g pe incorporate in said report a summary of
abaof specified in this Code or any other
effective
his recommendations as to desirable amendments to this
Code.
ordinan ce. are, for the purpose of this Section.
unnife buiidings, All such unsafe buildings are hereby
The Building Official shaft keep a permanent accurate
declared to be
rePlar, rehab public nuisances and shall be abated by
ties demolitiin or
account of all fees and other moneys collected and received
under this Code, the names of the upon whose
removal in accordance
and (et ofprocedurthis specified Subsections (b), (c), (d),
account the same were paid, the date and amount thereof,
together with the location of the building or premises to
(b) Notloe to Owaee The Building Official
which they relate.
shall examine
Or cause f reported examined every building or structure or par -
ported as dangerous
(d) Right of Entry. U
Upon presentation of grog creden-
or damaged and, if such
is found to be an minsfe building as defined
dais the Building Official or his duly authorized represent&-
in this Section,
the Building OMciai shall give to the
fives may enter at times arry structure,
or city to perform any duly imposed upon
or structure written notice statin de elects thereof. buildingr of such
notice This
cce ay require the owner
himpremises Code.
or person in charge or the
building Or P!emises, within 48 hours, to
(e) Stop Orders. Whenever any building work is being done
contrary to the provisions of this Cade, the Building Official
commence either
removal required oi repairs or improvements or demolition and
buildingo or portions thereof,
may order the work stopped by notice in writing served on
in
and all such work completedcture
date of notishall ce, within 90 days from
ce, rniless Otherwise
any persons the or causing such work
to be done, and any such persons shall forthwith stop such
stipulated by the Building
Official If necessary. such notice shall also require the
wwork til authorized by the Official to proceed
building, Portio f to be vacated forth-
with azul resat
(f) Occupancy Violations. Whenever any structure is being
required repairs and im-
ProvMants are completed. inspected, and approved by the
Building OfficiaL
used contrary to the provisions of this Cade, the Building
Official may order discontinued the structure.
thereof, by
service
Proper service � such notice shall � b
&parr the y personal service
mord. R he shall be found
or portion vacated nonce seated on any person
causing such use be tin Such person shall dice
within the
,city Amita. If he L not found such
sm�vlce may be within the city limits
d
continue the use within vs after receipt of such notice
m
ormg-
akeke the structure. or comply with the
by fl-
wvgis
provided, that Is such notice is
re
requirements this t' vi however. that in the
rented period within with owner or person in charge
lo required to COMAY with the
event of an unsafe ce l apply,
order of the Budding y
shall as of the date
receives such notice.
22
some" 2011-206 UNIFORM BUILDING CODZ
Unsafe
(c) Posting of Signs. The Building Official shall cause to
Buildings
be posted at each entrance to such building a notice to read:
(Cont'd.)
^DO NOT ENTER. UNSAFE TO OCCUPY. Building De-
partment, City of---- ---------- --..__------------ Such notice shall re-
main posted until the required repairs, demolition, or removal
are completed. Such notice shall not be removed without
written permission of the Building Official and no person
shall enter the building except for the purpose of making
the required repairs or of demolishing the building.
(d) Right to Demolish. In case the owner shall fail, neg-
lect, or refuse to comply with the notice to repair, rehabili-
tate, or to demolish and remove said building or structure
or portion thereof, the City Council may order the owner of
the building prosecuted as a violator of the provisions of
this Code and may order the Building Official to proceed
with the work specified in such notice. A statement of the
cost of such work shall be transmitted to the City Council,
who shall cause the same to be laid and levied as a special
assessment against the property.
(e) Costs. Costs incurred under Subsection (d) shall be
paid out of the City Treasury. Such casts shall be charged
to the owner of the premises involved as a spacial assess-
ment on the land on which the building or structure is
located, and shall be collected in the manner provided for
special assessments.
Board of
See. 204. In order to determine the suitability of alternate
Appeals
materials and types of canstruction and to provide for rea-
sonable interpretations of the provisions of this Code. there
shall be and is hereby created a Board of .Appeals, consisting
of five members who are qualified by experience and training
to pass upon matters pertaining to building construction.
The Building Official shall be an ex officio member and
shall act as Secretary of the Board. The Board of Appeals
shall be appointed by the Mayor and shall hold office at his
pleasure. The Board shall adopt reasonable rules and regu-
lations for conducting its investigations and shall reader
all decisions and findings in writing to the Building Official
with a duplicate copy to the appellant and may recommend
to the City Council such new legislation as is consistent
therewith.
Violations
Sec. 20th. It shall be unlawful for any person, firm, or
andPanamacorporation
to erect, coftstrmt. eabov atterrepair: move.
improve, remove, convert or demolish, equiP. use. OCCUPY, or
maintain my building or structure in the city; or cause the
Same to be done, cmhtrary to or in violation of any of the
provisions of this Code.
Any , or viola any of the pro-
visions off the be a
and each gueli person shall be deemed guilty of a separate
offense for each and every day or portion thereof during
which any violation of any of the provisions of this Code is
committed, cea or permitted. and upon conviction of
any be punishable by a fine
of not more or by traPrisounient, for not more than
90 days, or by both Such See and imprisonment-
ns ent.24
21
19M EDrm-v
CHAP= 3--PFALN S AND INSPECTIONS
See- 30L (a) Permits Require& No person, firm, or cor.
poration shall erect, construct, enlarge, alter, repair, move,
improve, remove, convert, or demolish any building or struc.
ture in the city, or cause the same to be done, without first
obtaining a separate building permit for each such building
or structure from the Building Official,
(b) APPHeaties. first file an To obtain a permit the applicant shall
first
for application therefor in writing on a form fur-
nished
purpose. Every such application shall:
L Identify and describe the work to be covered by the
permit for which application is made;
2. Describe the land on which the proposed work is to be
done, by lot, block, tract, and house and street address,
or similar description that will readily identify and
definitely locate the proposed building or work;
3. Show the use or occupancy of III parts of the building;
4. Be accompanied by plans and specifications as required
in Subsection (c) of this Section;
S. State the valuation of the proposed work;
6. Be signed by the permittee, or his authorized agent,
such
who amuathortybei required to submit evidence to indicate
,
7. Give such other information as reasonably may be re-
quired by the Building Official.
(c) Phuhs and SPedifiCatiom With each appliration r— s
building permit, and when required by the Building Official
for enforcement of any provisions of this Code, two sets of
plans and specifications shall be submitted. The building of-
ficial may require plans and specifications to be prepared and
designed by an engineer or architect licensed by the state to
practice as such.
ZXC11CPTIONB: When authorised by the Building Official
fops and specifications need not be submitted for the
following:
L One-story buildings of Type V conventional wood -
stud construction with an area not exceeding 600
square feet;
2. Grate J. Division 1, occupancies of Type V conven-
tional
wood stint construction;
3. Small and unimportant work.
(d) as Picas and plias and
sPecifications RUB be drawn to scale upon substantial paper
or cloth and shall be of sufficient clarity to indicate the
nature and extent of the work proposed and show in detail
that it will conform to the provisions of this Code and all
relevant haws, ordinances, runs, and regulations. Ths first
sheet of each set of plana shell give the house and street
0
Sects met
Application
ia
Sections 3914104 UNIFORM BUHAUNG CODE
Application address of the work and the name and address of the owner
for Permits and person who prepared them. Plans shall include a plot
(Ooard.) plan showing the location of the proposed building ami of
every existing building on the property. In lieu of detailed
specifications, the Building Official may approve references
on the plans to a specific section or pont of this Code or
other ordinances or laws.
Computations, stress di and other data sufficient
to show the correctness of the plans, shall be submitted
when required by the Building Official.
Building See. > (a) The aPPhCaU0M plans, and speci-
Permits fications Sled by an applicant for a permit shall bechecked
by the Building Official. Such pians may be reviewed by
other departments of the city to check compliance with the
laws and ordinances under their jurisdiction. If the Building
Official is satisfied that the work described in an application
for permit and the plans Wed therewith conform to the re-
quirements of this Cale and other pertinent laws and ordi-
nances, and that the fee specified in motion 303 (a) has
been paid. he shall issue a permit therefor to the applicant.
When the Building Official Issues the permit he shall
endorse In writing or stamp on both ants of plans and
specifications -APPROVED." Such approved plana and speci-
fications shall not be changed, mo&&k or altered without
authorisation from the Building 091cial, and an work shall
be done in accordance with the approved plana
The Building Official may issue a permit for the construc-
tion of part of a building or structure before the entire plans
and specifications for the whole building or structure have
been submitted or approved provided adequate information
and detailed statements have leen filed complying with all
pertinent requirements of this Code. The holder of such per-
mit shall proceed at his own risk without assurance that the
permit for the entire building or structure will be granted.
(b) Seteuthea of PLma. Orme set of approved speci-
ffcations, and compute be retained
Official for a period of not less than 90 days from date of
completion of the work covered therein, and one set of aem
proved pians and specifications shall, be returned to the
applicant which set shall be kept on such building, to work
at all time during which the wok authorized thereby is in
Progress.
Plans, submitted for checking, fon which no permit is
lssued, and or which no action is taken by the applicant for
90 dulls, shall be returned to the last known address of the
aPPlitant; to renew acts on said Plans. a payment of a
riE9r plan -check fee shaH be
(c) VWkft. The issuance oraPPiav+d of and specifications �a petrol construed to
be apermit for. or an of any Violation of any of
the provisjous of permit Presuming to give
*"b—'W to johita - cancel the PCO11bleas of this Code
NO
shall be valid, except la so far as use work or use whichit
autborba to lawfUL
El
1938 EDITIO\
The of a permit based upon plans and
kions shall not prevent the Building Official from thhereafte
requiring the correction of errors in said plans and specifics -
UO"
or from preventing building operations being carried
on thereunder when in violation of this Code or of any other
ordinance of the city.
(d) Expiration. Every permit issued by the Building Of.
ficial under the previsions of this Code shall expire by
limitation and become null and void, if the building or work
authorized by such permit is not commenced within 60 days
from the date of such permit or if the building or work
authorized by such permit is suspended or abandoned at any
time after the work is commenced for a period of 120 days.
Before such work can be recommenced a new permit shall
be first obtained so to do, and the fee therefor shall be
one-half the amount required for a new permit for such
work, Provided no changes have been made or will be made
In the original pians and specifications for such work; and
Provided. further, that such suspension or abandonment has
not exceeded one year.
In (e) Suspension writinor �oeaDon' The Building Official may,
I inions of this Goode wheneved or r the permit issued under pro.
d In error or
on the basis of incorrect Information supplied, t Is or in violation
of any ordinance or regulation or any of the provisions of
this Code.
Sections M -M
r
Permfti
(cased.)
Seo. 30L (a) BalldlagPermit )Fees. A fee for each build- Fess
ing permit shall be paid to the Building Official as set forth
in Table No. 3-A.
The determination of value or valuation under any of the
Provisions of this Code shall be made by the Building OHlcial.
Where work for which a permit is required by this Code is
startedfees
or roceeded withspecified sbeu 2be do b ed, b mg said permit, the
such doable fee shall not relieve an but the payment lof
complying with the Y Perms fres fully
tion of the work nor fkO many of this Code in the execu-
her•ein. fromY other Penalties prescribed
TABLE NO- 3-'1—BUILDING PERMIT FEES
TOTAL VALUATION
Less than $20.nclu......
FEE
__ ....................No
$2iD.00, to and including $200.Uo
Fee
............................_
More than $100-00, to and More than $400.011 o and including $400.00-_........_....
......(tt.99
SN
Afore than $700.{0, to and irncludin g $700.00 .
More
Each additional $1.000.00 or fraction, to off......-
3.00
609
laaddditi $25.000.00
._ -----
Each-- - ......
$1.000.00 or fraction, to and
_,.. 3A0
including $50.0o0.00
- .............
Each additional j1_-._...._....._...-
,090.00 or fraction, to and
2.50
including $100,000.00 ---_..-.-- • -- .
Each addi' - ....----......-._...._...__.
j1,00o.00 or fraction
ISO
more than $100.010.00 - ...................
Lee
27
r'•. iitt,l *4111 P =a It to .4 Ji," SJ,4 P I rs td � �: 19M EDITION
0.i V6.44 9 k..,.Ic1a.1 Jr—.. %i,.x„'. . _ .
l.,ai I.L. i., ia-•I.ila -'I !:. t.R r-, s.t.. s �*-_..
i a.i s-I,F.;-lila, l; aa.t i,i (.l.,/. <.I.r.� t+sl,� • '� aP.a Ye<', stz .::g� t.
r.„ll as th- i. 11,11#w p-,-11 tk.- vs .e tants 1€: 'Tate .' 3-A.
rNal�ta�.�liatlx a.,l..--, "1 (.tl lioswrai. All a: a.niblraN.f l°•n <,r wrrk fear ;rhich
•t l,uiuili. Fm t,.,ptlstA wl.all has owbler.l tis inmromtifm by the
11k,iloli,pi i tpia.i«.t, aril i nrtmin tyl'a ft t.t e•snfttrtsctiun shall
hnvu t;+.uttui„•um Fnapei.th.n by alt,aial lrinpeetors, as specified
iii ti i:tloa "Aw"i-
i b) ia+pattua Itneard Card. Work requiring a building
i,t,riwit Omit not kw t•umuiertcari until the permit holder or
him ai;vut mhail have poitttd an inspection record card in a
cuuspkvuotls pian- on the front promises and in such position
ltm to allow th« Mudding Official conveniently to make the
required entries thereon regarding inspection of the work.
This card shalt be maintained in such position by the permit
holder until the Certificate of Occupancy has been issued.
(c) Approvals Required. leo work shall be done on any part
of the building or structure beyond the point indicated in
each successive inspections without first obtaining the writ-
ten approval of the Building Official. Such written approval
shall be given only after an inspection shall have been made
of each successive step in the construction as indicated by
each of the inspections requite: in Sub -tet ier _ d,. A survey
of the lot may be requi:ed'cv zhe =.rg CMcial to serifs
compliance of the strseture v. =ih a -
There shalt be is final ar3
inga when completed and
•ry �, a _
(d) Called 4. a 'yrstrViCtUrsl
framework of any part zf *--v shmE be
covered or erg ' y=e _y _
obtaining the apMval t a..t C 7 -
Ttae Itul)din g iL A cr axe dBW p 't
honor or Iris a9vTt --afzCA- m
Tv pe 1 I.WWngsaimsNIL11 r .
ttie rawnsiruvtWW .a. z?iE ” : zr- -, the
ht'tde^r ter Ain agemt W zx -,IV .t <r z=- -F —r th
I” h►wr -
t.
;zt.
,...a - ..,E. � ..: � .: 'e �... . -a-z.. Min_ --L Meed
the -00t
0
Sections 304-M
3. LATH INSPECTION: To be made after all lathing, Inspections
Interior and exterior, is in place and all plastering ma- (Contd.)
terials are delivered on the job, but before any plaster
is applied.
4. FINAL INSPECTION: To be made after building is
completed and ready for occupancy.
(e) Wier 10111111CUML In addition to the called inspec.
tions specified above, the Building Official may make or re-
quire any other inspections of any construction work to as-
certain compliance with the provisions of this Code and other
laws which are enforced by the Building Department.
For the purpose of determining compliance with Section
104 (i), the Building Official may cause any structure to be
reinareCted-
Sea SOIL (a) General. In addition to the inspections to be Spend
made an specified in Section 304, the owner or his agent Impecilims
shall employ a special inspector who shall be present at all
times during construction on the following types of work:
1. CONCRETE: On concrete work when the design is
based or an f. in excess of 2000 pounds.
2. MASONRY: Masonry work shall have special inspec-
tion when required in Chapter 24.
3 WFEMINO: On all structural welding.
4. REINFORCED GYPSUM CONCRETE: When cast -in-
place reinforced gypsum concrete is being mixed or
deposited.
S. SPECIAL CASES: On special construction or work
Punusual hazards or requiring constant In-
�CliB TION: The Building Official may waive the re-
quiresneat for the employment of a special inspector If he
AM" that the construction or work is such that no un-
usual hazard exists.
(b) Special Impactor. The special inspector shall be a
qualified person approved by the Building Official.
Tim special Inspector shall furnish continuous inspection
on the construction and work requiring his employment. He
shall report Code violations mm and othfile er information as rOffieW In equired.
(c)
noting all
(c) Approved Fabricators. Special inspections required by
this sect(an and elsewhere in this Code shall not be required
where the work is dote on the premises of a fabricator app -
proved by the Building Official to perform such work with-
out special inspection. The certificate of approval shall be
subject to revocation by the Building Official if it is found
that any work ,done pursuant to the approval is in violation
of this Code.
Sea SOL (a) Use or Occupancy. No building or strlc. CartIfiesie of
tore In (mss A to H, inclusive, shall be used or occupied, oempigmy
and no change in the existing occupancy classification of a
28
section ass
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Cer"AM1e Of
Occupancy
building or structure or portion thereof shall be made until
the
Building Official has issued a Certiffcate of Occupancy
therefor as provided herein.
(b) Change in Use. Changes in the character or use of a
building shall not be made except as speeiked in Section 502
of this Code.
(c) CerU§Mte Iamed. After Anal inspection when it is
found that the building or structure complies with the pro.
visions of this Code, and a request has been made by the
permittee or owner, the Building Official shall issue a Cer-
tificate of occupancy which shall contain the following:
1. The use and occupancy for which the certificate is
Issued;
2. A statement that the floor -load aim as required by
Section 5308, have been installed;
3. A statement that the room -capacity s%7M an inquired
by Section 3301 (i), have been
4. A certification that the building or structure
Compiles
with the provisions of this Code.
(d) Temporuy Beate. A temporary Certificate of
Occupancy may be Issued by the Building official
for the use
of a portion or portions of a building or structure prior to Use
completion of the entire building or structure
(e) PesUng. The Certificate of Occupancy shall be posted
In a conspicuous place on the Premises
and shall not be
removed except by the Building Official.
M
IOU EDITION
slecftass NINA
PART II
DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
CHUTM 4-4MMI MONS AND
ABBREVIATIONS
SM
a revia�ti . GenersL % For the purpose of this Code, certain De/uttises
Phrasm words and their derivatives
shall be construed an specified in this Chapter. Words used
in the singular include the plural and the plural the singular.
Words used In the masculine gender include the feminine,
and the feminine the masculine.
Sao. 48L AGIUCULTURAL BuIMING is a building lo- ACated on agricultural '
Property and used to shelter farm
produce, in which there is non habitati r oar farm
14 not used by the public. on, and which
ALLEY Is any public space, public park or
less than sixteen f 6') bort not less than ten feet thoroughfare
In width which has been dedicated or deeded to the
for public public
ALTER or ALTERATION In any change, addition or
modification in construction or occupancy.
APARTMENT is a room or suite of rooms which is oceu-
pied or which is Intended or designed to be occupied by one
family for living and sleeping purposes
APARTMENT IGsllsE is any building. or portion thereof,
which is bull% rented, leased, let, or hired out to be
occupied, or which is occupied as the tome or residence of
three or more families living independently of each other
and doing their ow cooking in Incl !tats and apartments, the said building, and shall
APPROVED as to materials and type of construction,
refers to approval by the Building Otdciai as the result of
Investigation and testa conducted by him, or by reason of
accepted principles or tests by national authorities, technical
or scientific organizations.
APPROVED AGENCY is an established and recognised
agency regularly engaged in conducting tats or fundshing
Inspection —10ek
the w agency los been approved by
APPROVED FABRICATOR is an established and
fled una, tor corporation approved by the Burg
0114cial Pursuant to Section 305 (c) of this Code.
AREA (see Arts").
31
Sections 402-404 UNDO=[ DUILDING CODE
(Osst.� in ASSEMBLY BUIZDING is a brrtldittg used, in whole or
Part for the gathering together of persons for such
Purposes as deliberation, worship, entertainment. amuse-
ment, drinking or dining, or awaiting transportation.
ATTIC STORY is any story situated w
holly
the roof, so designated, arranged. or built as to bemed for
business, storage, or habitation
B Sec. 40L BALCONY is that
Of an assembly room, the lowest�portion of the seating space
is
four feet (4') or more above the level of tee
BASEMENT is that Portion of a building between floor
and ceiling, which is partly below and Partly above
grade
(as defined in this Chapter), but so meted that the vertical from grade to the floor below fs less than the ver-
tical distance from grade to ceiling. (gee "Story,")
SBA Yw WINDOW fs a octangular, curved, or polygonal
main wanoof tthe bbed uii�ding foundation extending beyond the
BUILDING is any structure built for the suppmt shelter
or enclosure of persons, animals, chattels. or property o!
any kind.
BUILDING, EXISTINGi is a building erected prior to the
Permit has been issued. °r oae for which a legal building
BUILDING OMMAL is the officer, elm ed with the ad-
ministration and enforcement of this Code, �
authorized deputy, regularly
C Sec, "L CAST STONE is a buil
ding tr, on orctured
rum cement in building or sconcrete pree� , used � . nes r or
fteft ceiling CELLAR is that Portion of a building between floor and
this Chapter) � sib Partly the below grade tis defined in
m
grade to the floor below distance
from
vertical dfatance from grade o ceiling- Sgreater than the
CHIEF OF TIM FiER DEp tory ")
Fire Department or lis ty autforIzedhe head of the
CITY, as used in Lists is�Puty, any Political .
Much adopts this code for tion within Its } .
commonuse by more qtr tenant Is A o to general or
or ocsuPal y
corriido"r, PRIYA4� is other than
a
COURT is an
Court
raore m" by
the wells ntirely of tqWOthe an
Inner co two or
urt Other courts are of a builaw.
in a
All
ffi
19M EDITION
Sections 403-M
walls, Per
Sec. e weight of the DeIIai;tops
permanent
spartYtions, framiDEAD LOAD In a building is thng, floors, roofs, and all (Count.)
other nary construction entering Into and
becoming a part of the building. D
DWELLING is any building or any portion thereof, which
is not an "Apartment House" or a "Hotel" as defined in this
Code. which contains one or more "Apartments" or "Guest
mss," used, intended, or designed to be built, used, rented,
leased, let, or hired out to be occupied, or which are occupied
or wing purposes.
Sse. 406. EXISTIN3 BUILDING. (See "Building, Exist-
ing-,,)
E
EXIT is a continuous and
to a unobstructed means of egress
public way and shalt include intervening doorways,
corridors, ramps, stairways, smokeproof enclosures, hors-
zontal exits, exterior courts, and yards.
See. 407. FAMILY is an individual or two or more persons
related by blood or marriage or a group of not more than five F
persons (excluding servants) who need not be related by
blood or marriage living together in a dwelling unit.
FIRE R ISTANCE or FIRE -RESISTIVE CONSTRUC-
TION Is construction to resist the spread of fire, details of
which are specified in Chapters 42 and 43 of this Code.
FLOOR AREA is the area included within surrounding
walls of a building (or portion thereof), exclusive of vent
shafts and courts.
FOOTING is that portion of the foundation of a structure
which spreads and transmits loads directly to the soil or the
FRONT OF LOT is the front boundary line of a lot bor-
dering on the street, and in the case of a corner lot may be
either frontage.
See. 49L GARAGE is a building or portion thereof in G
which a motor vehicle containing gasoline, distillate or other
ovolak� fdarnmabie liquid in its tank, is stored, repaired,
t.
GAEAGE, PWVATE, Is a building, or a portion of a
building, not mase than one thousand square feet (1000 sq.
ft.) in area, in which only motor vehicles used by the tenants
of the building or buildings on the premier are stored or
kept• (Sea Section 1501.)
GAXA4s rUWA ; Is any garage other than a private
garage -
GRADE (Ground Levd) to the average of the finished
ground level at the center of all walls of a building. In case
waft are Parallel to ami within ave feet (5') of a sidewalk,
the above ground levet shalt be measured at the sidewalk.
Sections 488-416 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Defla ns"$ GRADE (Lumber) is the classification of lumber in regard
(Cont"d.) to strength and utility.
GUEST is any person hiring or occupying a room for liv-
ing or sleeping purposes.
H Sec. 409. HEIGHT OF BUILDING is the vertical distance
from the "Grade" to the highest point of the coping of a
flat roof or to the deck line of a mansard roof or to the
average height of the highest gable of a pitch or hip roof.
HOTEL is any building containing six or more rooms in-
tended or designed to be used, or which are used, rented or
hired out to be occupied, or which are occupied for sleeping
purposes by guests.
I See, 410. INCOMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL is any material
which will not ignite at or below a temperature of 1200
degrees Fahrenheit during an exposure of five minutes and
which will not continue to burn or glow at that temperature.
Tests shall be made as specified in U. E. C. Standard No. 4-1-
58.
J Sem 411. No definitions.
H See. 412. No definitions.
L Sem 415. LINTEL is the beam or girder placed over an
opening in a wall, which supports the wall construction above.
LIVE LOADS are all loads except dead and lateral loads.
M Sec. 414. MARQUEE is a permanent roofed structure at-
tached to and supported by the building and projecting over
public property. Marquees are regulated in Chapter 45.
MASONRY is that form of construction composed of
stone, brick, concrete, gypsum, hollow clay tile, concrete
block or tile, or other similar building units or materials or
combination of these materials laid up unit by unit and set
In mortar.
MASONRY, SOLID, is masonry of solid units built with-
out hollow spaces.
MEZZANINE or MEZZANINE FLOOR is an Intermedi-
ate floor placed in any story or room. When the total area
of any such "Mezzanine Floor" exceeds 331A per cent of the
total floor area in that room, It shall be considered as con-
stituting an additional "Story." The clear height above or
below a "Mezzanine Floor" construction shall be not less
Ulan seven feet (71).
N Sac, 416. No definitions.
O See, 410.00CUPANCY is the purpose for which a building
Is used or intended to be used. The term shall also include
the building or room housing such use. Change of occupancy
54
1958 EDITION Sections 416-420
is not intended to include change of tenants or proprietors. DeflalHons
ORIEL WINDOW is a window which projects from the (Coat -d")
main line of an enclosing wall of a building and is carried
on brackets or corbels.
Sec. 417. PERSON Is a natural person, his heirs, executors,
administrators, or assigns, and also includes a firm, partner-
ship, or corporation, its or their successors or assigns, or the
agent of any of the aforesaid.
PLATFORM, ENCLOSED, Is a partially enclosed portion
of an assembly room the ceiling of which is not more than
five feet (51 above the proscenium opening and which is
designed or used for the presentation of plays, demonstra-
tions, or other entertainment wherein scenery, drops, decor-
ations, or other effects are to be installed or used.
Sam 418. No definitions.
Sec. 419. REPAIR Is the reconstruction or renewal of any
part of an existing building for the purpose of its mainten-
ance. The word "Repair" or "Repairs" shall not apply to
any change of construction.
Sem 420. SHAFT is a vertical opening through a building
for elevators, dumb -waiter, light, ventilation, or similar
purposes.
SHALL as used in this Code, is mandatory.
STAGE is a partially enclosed portion of an assembly
building which Is designed or used for the presentation of
plays, demonstrations, or other entertainment wherein scen-
ery, drops, or other effects may be installed or used, and
where the distance between the top of the proscentum open -
Ing and the ceiling above the stage is more than five feet (51).
STAIRWAY. Two or more risers shall constitute a stair-
way.
i STORY is that portion of a building included between the
upper surface of any floor and the upper surface of the floor
next above, except that the topmost story shall be that por-
tion of a building included between the upper surface of
the topmost floor and the ceiling or roof above. If the fin-
ished floor level directly above a basement or cellar is more
than six feet (61) above grade such basement or cellar shall
it be considered a story.
STREET is any thoroughfare or public park not lees than
sixteen feet (161) in width which has been dedicated or
deeded to the public for public use.
STRUCTURE is that which is built or constructed, an
edifice or building of any kind, or any piece of work arti-
ficially built up or composed of parts joined together in
some definite manner.
35
P
0
Section 421428 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
T See. 421. No definition$.
1858 EDITION 901-M
U Sec. 422. U.B.C. STANDARDS is the 1858 Edition of the
PART III
--=`"
"Uniform Building Code Standards," also known as "Volume
III" of the Uniform Building Code. See Chapter 80.
REQUIREMENTS BASED ON
V See. 425. VALUE or VALUATION of a building shall be
OCCUPANCY
the estimated cost to replace the building in kind, based on
current replacement costs, as determined in Section 303(x),
CBAPTEi R 5—CLASSIFICATION OF ALL BUILD-
VENEER is a facing of brick, stone, concrete, tile, metal,
INGS BY USE OR OCCUPANCY AND GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL OCCUPANCIES
or similar material attached to a wall for the purpose of
providing ornamentation, protection, or insulation but not
counted as adding strength to the wall.
Sec. 501. Every building, whether existing or hereafter Occupancy
erected, shall be classified by the Building Official accord- Ciasel4kd
"'.`
WSea 424. WALLS shall be defined as follows:
ing to Its use or the character of its occupancy, as a build-
Ing of Group A, B,
Bearing Wall is a wall which supports any load other than
C, D, E, F, G, H, I, or J, as defined in
Chapters 6, 7, 6, 0, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15, respectively,
its own weight.
(See Table No. 5-A.)
Faced Wan to a wall in which the masonry facing and I
Amy occupancy not mentioned specifically or about which
backing are so bonded as to exert a common action under
there is any question shall be classified by the Building
load.
Official and included in the Group which its use most nearly
Nonbearing Wali is a wall which supports no load other
resembles based on the existing or proposed life and are
hazard.
than its own weight.
Parapet Wall is that part of any wall entirely above the
Sec. M. No change shall be made in the character of oc- Chow
roof line,
cupancy or use of any building which would place the build- in Use
Retaining Wall is any wall used to resist the lateral dis-
Ing in a different Group of occupancy, unless such building
is made to comply with the requirements of this Code for
Placement of any material.
that Group.
WINDOW. (See "Bay Window"; see "Oriel Window.")
EXCEPTION: The character of the occupancy of exist -
X Sec. 425. No definitions.
Ing buildings may be changed subject to the approval of
the Building Official, and the building may be occupied
Y Sm 428. YARD Is an open, unoccupied space, other than
for purposes in other Groups without conforming to all
the requirements of this Code for those Groups, pro-
pro -
a court, unobstructed from the ground to the sky, except
where specifically provided by this Code, on the lot on
vided the new or proposed use is less hazardous, based on
life and fire risk, than the existing use.
which a bonding is situated.
No change in the character of occupancy of a building
shall be made without a Certificate of Occupancy, as re.
quired in Section 308 of this Code.
Seekr
Sea 503. (a) General. When a building is used for more Mated JI
-
than one occupancy purpose each part of the building comoccupancy
prising a distinct "Occupancy," as described in Chapters 5
through 15, shall be separated from any other occupancy as
specified in Section 503 (d).
When a building is used for more than one occupancy
y;
purpose, it shall be subject to the most restrictive require.
ments for the occupancies concerned.
EXCEPTIONS: 1. When a one-story building houses
more than one occupancy, each portion of the building shall
conform to the requirements for the occupancy housed
therein. The maximum floor area of any separate oecu-
paney shall be the area allowed by Bection 505, multiplied
s8
37
I
section 583 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
1058 EDITION flections 503-505
Mixed by the percentage of the building occupied by such
Occupancy occupancy.
members supporting the separation shall be protected by
(C=ud.)
equivalent fire -resistive construction,
2, Where minor accessory uses do not occupy more than
10 per cent of the area of any floor of a building, nor more
See. 504. (a) General. Building shall adjoin or have access Location
to a public space, yard, or street on not less than one side,
than 10 per cent of the basic area permitted in the occu-
by Table No. 5-C, the major use of the building shall
on
Required yards shall be permanently maintained. Property
For the purpose of this Section,
determine the occupancy classification provided the uses are
separated as specified in Section 503 (d).
the center Iine of an
adjoining street or alley shall be considered an adjacent
(b) Forms of Occupancy separations. Occupancy Separa-
tions shall be vertical or horizontal or both or, when neces-
property line.
Eaves over required windows shall be not less than thirty
inches (30") from the side
sary, of such other form as may be required to afford a
complete separation between the various occupancy divi.
and rear property lines. Eaves
extending beyond walls required to be fire resistive shall be
of incombustible material or one-hour fire -resistive con-
sions in the building,
struction.
(c) Types of Occupancy separation. Occupancy separa-
Ilona shall be classed as "Four -Hour Fire -Resistive," "Three-
(b) Fire Resistance of Walls. Exterior walls shall have
fire -resistance and opening protection as set forth in Table
Hour Flre-Resistive," "Two -Hour Fire -Resistive," and "One-
Hour Fire -Resistive."
No. 5-A, Part III, and in accordance with such additional
1. A "Four -Hour Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separation"
provisions as are specified in Part IV and Part V. Distance
shall be measured at right angles from the property line. The
shall have no openings therein and shall be of not less than
above provisions shall not apply to walls at right angles to the
line.
four-hour fire -resistive construction.
property
l. A 'Three -Hour Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separation"
shall be of not less than three-hour fire
(c) Buildings on same Property. For the purpose of de-
termining the required exterior wall protection, buildings on
-resistive construction.
All openings in walls forming such separation shall be pro-
the same property shall be assumed to have a property line
between them.
tected on each side thereof by Class "A" fire doors and such
doors shall be kept normally closed. The
When a new building is to be erected on the same prop -
total width of all
openings in any 'Three -Hour Fire -Resistive Occupancy Sep-
aration" wall in any one
erty with an existing building, the assumed property line
from the existing building shall be the distance to the prop-
story shall not exceed 25 per cent
Of the Iength of the wall in that story and no single opening
erty line for each occupancy as set forth in Table No. 5-A
and Part V.
shall have an area greater than one hundred and twenty
square feet (120 sq, ft.),
EXCEPTION: Two or more buildings on the same prop -
All openings in floors forming a "Three -Hour Fire -Rests-
five Occupancy Separation" shall be
ertymay be considered as
y portions a one building withins is he
area n a line b505
protected by vertical
enclosures, extending above and below such openings. The
walls of such vertical enclosures
the limits a
limits specified in Section In hislcasge,, the space
between buildings shall be considered an inner court for
shall be of not less than
two-hour fire -resistive construction
the purpose of determining the exterior wall construction.
and all openings therein
shall be Protected on one side thereof by Class "B" fire
doors, and such doors shall be kept
When the buildings so considered house different occu-
pancies or are of different types of construction, the area
normally closed.
"TWO
shall be that allowed for the most restricted occupancy
3. A -Hour Fire-Resiative Occupancy Separation"
shall be of not less than two-hour
or construction.
fire -resistive construction.
All openings In such separations shall be protected on one
side by Class "B" lire doors,
See- =. (a) One-story Areas. The area of a one-story Alloway
building shall not exceed the limits set forth in Table No. 5-C Floor Areas
and such doors shall be kept
normally closed,
except as provided in Section 506, nor the limits specified
4, A "One -Hour Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separation"
Shall be of not less than
in Chapter 18.
For
may be buildings
lncr�eased 332A per cenre Zone No. 3 the basic area
t.
one-hour fire -resistive construction.
All openings in such Separations shall be protected with Class
C" fire doors, and such doors
(b) Areas of Buildings Over One story. The total area
shall be kept normally closed.
of all floors of buildings over one story in height shall not
(di Flro Ratings for
'"a rat'onnxdivisions shall be provide ee thei vari
exceed 200 per cent of he area allowed for one-story build -
Ings. No single floor area shall exceed that permitted for
andvarious
occupancies as Sat forth Table No, 5-B.
occupancy separation
one-story buildings. Basementswablareas, and cellars need not be in-
eluded in the total allowable areas,
re
shall be sY Is required he minimum
Where the O�cu our Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separation."
Fancy
�
(c) separation of Arcs. For the purpose of this section,
Separation is horizontal, structural
each portion of a building separated by one or more twntinu-
38
s8
Table Na 5-A
A
I
�o ,G
cw
>N� U
9 y n
G
k
z
^moo v
e
�z
�
a o
t
ht C
g,3C
r°»Q
a
0 o mN
�ttl
ZE
d�C
yy 04
}.z
hy7 �M
wG 4 wti
Nil
4p� �
4
atc o8
o1= �
F
m
wn
°'>pp
e
z
zF
3
4
8
1r,
Q« z
�
zy
app Yae
�is_r
r�
M
fi "
za
N
F�
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
C
Yc`
r'p.r
9wt
<fiW
1958 EDITION
C
G
U
Table Na 6-A (Dear,.}
ai
A
I
�
M
cw
9
Y
�
A
a
1r,
lZm2
zy
z�
z$y
za
w, C
S
C`
p
L
y
It
a•v
'°.
$ T'°.
eg
V
� ece
.�'c.'°..s.
c�+
-c.a
a„!'
ss.c.'tsyg
aaa
s.'°..«
pY'SFypp
3
•GT
o
o
�'�
CCCC
C Y
CCC
EC°
C
83
'fig
g'5
`gg
it
x
•+
v
fq
.°ems�.°c.c°
.+
G
M
.c° -c°
..
s°.gs°
N
.°egg
wt
z
„�
N
.y
..
ry
u
'ro'`o
T.•o ;
$
a i
�'•
.os :»ME i
tO g»^�
lbs E.
Sea:
_ 01�'a»'flc
gl-
wm-'NgY
i
g62,
C g° cY
0 it
•��
m•.c •G c (
taura�g�
•o I•°.
?
g
-4:
gym:
x�
aY
- 11
i
a
°p"EQ','e 8•r gy>
it
°
!Ell
�$
= x :
2NE iy'Yn
Ar
M1z-g
�•e°Acs
ticn
9
'O'.:
G
OgOCk °
•'pp^pp�
°�hwwACr
Qp
G�j�;g.
Yn
T
g
sw°
"z^..�c$,sad^so
•gtto
ayn
is^
°n
5vcc�n�u
-
vygy}!eon eEoapp
Cg
t±„
nc.?Cgt°gn
x
�Y9YC°x
CgaYtECM.
qgi�
Y I
"�O
C9
��
6
Y9-
•i
Np
ai
Table Na 6-A (Cont'd.) UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 1958 EDITION
0
s
a
w
iad
O
it
law o
o t
c
r•1
r1
N
M
s
W
w
1w
M
�
�MWMrM
4
rl
N
eel
N
ri
Z
Z
�GGG
H
.-1
ri
H
ri
VI
M
M
M
H
z
z
z
Z
z
4Ry�
P@;
W
x,x�x.x�n�x�x�lxa�ttsxv
YR
'r+
*'�
ti�
x
�E
M
O
Zana"xy2a"za"2aZa2w22aza
M
M
00
0$
oo
ar
o o�
o0
i3
`Q',n
r
N
N
r
N
H
N
•nu Hsi`
��.0".�
H
ad
��22
� •s�
�
�s
� 3s
� nam u
8
�
8u
My+
�°, v
a= w
No
00oE'x'`°°t'
Z
oa
o
i3
C4
0
ey
c ••
M
N
rl
W
N
rl
H
—N
N
N tlf
N
N eA
N
wf
ry
E
ci
y=6'
tYo4 i
o i
udC
'y�
€
�s
w
N
gu
W
H
Z
w I-
o
a
ii
'
.
w
ux� i
mE
V
O.r
noE
�
c
A_
m
rl
Z
Nww�w�z
W
U]
Ei
Tabes Ne. 5-8
h
r•1
r1
N
M
N
N
ti
rl
N
eel
N
ri
Z
Z
�GGG
H
.-1
ri
H
ri
VI
M
M
M
H
z
z
z
Z
z
4Ry�
YR
'r+
*'�
ti�
H
M
M
M
M
M
rl
N
.y
Z
i3
M
N
N
"N
N
H
N
N
rl
H
N
Z
aaa�pppppp
My+
Z
i3
C4
M
N
rl
W
N
rl
H
H
N
Z
w �"
W
M
w
w
N
..
rl
H
x
V
m
rl
Z
Nww�w�z
W
M
W
W
.N
z
&�
w
A
M
M
N
Z
�zzz
m'
31
razz
�z
S7
+L'
Ri
O
A
�
t�7
6�i
�
G4
�
fn
CI
�i
►�
`s'
UJI
Table No. 6-C
E
""'UBM BUILDING CODE
1958 EDITION
Sections 5054"
ous fire -resistive walls extending from the foundation to the
roof at all points may be considered a separate building.
Such area separation wall shall be not less than four-hour
fire -resistive in buildings of Types I, II, and III construction
with openings protected as required for Class "A" openings
and shall be not Iess than two-hour fire -resistive in buildings
of Types IV and V construction with openings protected as
required for Class "D" openings. The total width of all
openings in such fire -resistive wall, in each story, shall not
exceed 25 per cent of the length of the wall in that story.
See Chapters 6 to 16 inclusive for special occupancy pro-
visions.
Sec. 600. (a) General. The increases of floor areas per- Aliewaide
mitted in this Section may be compounded when applicable, Area
except that such increases for approved automatic fire- Inereasss
extinguishing systems shall not apply when other provisions
of this Code require such fire -extinguishing installation.
(b) Separation on Two Sides. Where public space, streets,
or yards, more than twenty feet (20') in width, extend along
two sides of a building, the areas specified in Section 505
may be increased at a rate of one and one-fourth per cent for
each foot by which the minimum width exceeds twenty feet
(20'), but the increase shall not exceed 50 per cent.
(c) Separation on Three Sides. Where public space, streets,
or yards, more than twenty feet (20') in width, extend along
three sides of a building, the areas specified in Section
505 may be increased at a rate of two and one-half per cent
for each foot by which the minimum width exceeds twenty
feet (20'), but the increase shall not exceed 100 per cent.
(d) Separation on All Sides. Where public space, streets,
or yards, more than twenty feet (201) in width, extend on
all aides of one- and two-story buildings and adjoin the en-
tire perimeter, the areas specified in Section 505 may be in-
creased at a rate of five per cent for each foot by which the
minimum width exceeds twenty feet (201). Such increases
shall not exceed 100 per cent, except for buildings not ex-
ceeding two stories in height of Group G occupancy and
one-story buildings housing aircraft storage hangars and
as further limited in Section 1002 (b) for aircraft repair
hangars.
he area of
building of Unlimited
roroup Area. roup G, and Division 5 of Group two-story
occupancies shall not be limited, if the building is pro-
vided with an approved automatic fire -extinguishing; system
throughout, as specified in Chapter 38, and entirely sur-
rounded by public space, streets, or yards not less than sixty
feet (601) in width.
The area of a one-story Type II or Type IV building of
Group G occupancy shall not be limited if the building is
entirely surrounded by public space, streets, or yards not
less than sixty feet (60') in width.
45
Table Na 5-D
N
UNIFORM BUHMINO CODE
M
z 7
1958 EDITION sections 506-509
(f) Automatic Fire -Extinguishing Systems. The areas spe-
cified in Section 505 may be tripled in one-story buildings
and doubled in buildings of more than one story if the build-
ing is provided with an approved automatic fire -extinguishing
system throughout as specified in Chapter 38.
Sae. 507. The maximum height and number of stories of Mulinnew
every building shall be dependent upon the character of the fight of
occupancy and the type of construction, and shall not ex- BoUdmgs
ceed the limits set forth in Table No. 5-D, except as pro- and
vided in this Section. The height shall be measured from the Increases
highest adjoining sidewalk or ground surface, provided that
the height measured from the lowest adjoining surface shall
not exceed such maximum height by more than ten feet
(10').
The limits set forth in Table No. 5-D may be Increased by
one story if the building is provided with an automatic fire -
extinguishing system throughout installed in accordance with
the provisions of Chapter 38. The increase in height for
sprinklers shall not apply when other provisions of this
Code require automatic fire -extinguishing systems through-
out or when the increases under Section 506 (f) are used.
EXCEPTIONS: 1. Towers, spires, and steeples, erected as
a part of a building and not used for habitation or storage,
are limited as to height ouly by structural design if com-
pletely of incombustible materials, or may extend not to
exceed twenty feet (201) above the height limit in Table No.
5-D if of combustible materials.
2. The height of one-story aircraft hangars aball not be
limited if the building is provided with automatic are -
extinguishing systems throughout as specified in Chapter
38 and is entirely surrounded by public space, streets, or
yards not less in width than 150 per cent of the height
of the building.
See Chapters 6 to 16 inclusive for special occupancy pro-
visions.
Sec. 508. Where one-hour fire -resistive construction
throughout is required by this Code, an approved automatic
Sre extinguishing system, as specified in Ghspter 38, may be
substituted, provided such system is not otherwise required.
See. 509. Arcades connecting buildings and used exclu- Are"M
sively as passageways need not be considered as adjacent
buildings for the provisions of this Chapter, provided that
the walls of the building adjoining the arcades are finished
with the same construction as required for the exterior
walls of the building, with no communicating openings
between the arcades and the building, except door*; and
provided that the arcades are of not less than one-hour
fire -resistive construction or entirely of incombustible mats -
rials, or of heavy timber construction with two-inch (21)
nominal sheathing.
47
P.
a
a
}
z
z
z
a
N
d
y
V
z
N
1 N
N
M
ygzz
i a
N
N
N
a
N
N
N
N
W
W
'0
co
U
c
o
�"
—
�_.
z
z
1
N
N
N
SSE
x
x
ri
H
nl
N
V
�O
_T1
3
9
g
gig
gm
g
i1lYdri�±)
H
.i
N
M
.i
e�i
M
C?
ti
M
z 7
1958 EDITION sections 506-509
(f) Automatic Fire -Extinguishing Systems. The areas spe-
cified in Section 505 may be tripled in one-story buildings
and doubled in buildings of more than one story if the build-
ing is provided with an approved automatic fire -extinguishing
system throughout as specified in Chapter 38.
Sae. 507. The maximum height and number of stories of Mulinnew
every building shall be dependent upon the character of the fight of
occupancy and the type of construction, and shall not ex- BoUdmgs
ceed the limits set forth in Table No. 5-D, except as pro- and
vided in this Section. The height shall be measured from the Increases
highest adjoining sidewalk or ground surface, provided that
the height measured from the lowest adjoining surface shall
not exceed such maximum height by more than ten feet
(10').
The limits set forth in Table No. 5-D may be Increased by
one story if the building is provided with an automatic fire -
extinguishing system throughout installed in accordance with
the provisions of Chapter 38. The increase in height for
sprinklers shall not apply when other provisions of this
Code require automatic fire -extinguishing systems through-
out or when the increases under Section 506 (f) are used.
EXCEPTIONS: 1. Towers, spires, and steeples, erected as
a part of a building and not used for habitation or storage,
are limited as to height ouly by structural design if com-
pletely of incombustible materials, or may extend not to
exceed twenty feet (201) above the height limit in Table No.
5-D if of combustible materials.
2. The height of one-story aircraft hangars aball not be
limited if the building is provided with automatic are -
extinguishing systems throughout as specified in Chapter
38 and is entirely surrounded by public space, streets, or
yards not less in width than 150 per cent of the height
of the building.
See Chapters 6 to 16 inclusive for special occupancy pro-
visions.
Sec. 508. Where one-hour fire -resistive construction
throughout is required by this Code, an approved automatic
Sre extinguishing system, as specified in Ghspter 38, may be
substituted, provided such system is not otherwise required.
See. 509. Arcades connecting buildings and used exclu- Are"M
sively as passageways need not be considered as adjacent
buildings for the provisions of this Chapter, provided that
the walls of the building adjoining the arcades are finished
with the same construction as required for the exterior
walls of the building, with no communicating openings
between the arcades and the building, except door*; and
provided that the arcades are of not less than one-hour
fire -resistive construction or entirely of incombustible mats -
rials, or of heavy timber construction with two-inch (21)
nominal sheathing.
47
Section 601 -MS VNIFOEM BIIILDING OODE
CHAPTER 6 --REQUIREMENTS FOR
GROUP A OCCUPANCIES
Group A
Sec. 601. Group A Occupancies shall be:
Occupancies
Anyassembly building with a stage and an occupant load
of 1000 or more in the building.
For occupancy separations see Table No. 5-B.
For occupant load see Section 3301.
Construction,
Rohit,
See. 602. (a) General. Buildings or parts of buildings
classed in Group A because of the use or character of the
asci Area
Allowable
occupancy shall be of Type I construction and shall not be
limited as to location in fire zones, occupant load, height, or
area.
(b) Special provisions. Stages and enclosed platforms as
defined in Sections 420 and 417 shall be constructed in ac-
cordance with Chapter 39.
The slope of the main floor of the assembly room shall not
exceed one In five.
Loeatloffil
Else. 605. Buildings housing Group A occupancies shall
on property
front directly upon at least one public street not less than
twenty feet (201) in width, in which front shall be located
the main entrance and exit of such building.
The main as-
sembly floor sball be located at or near the adjacent ground
level.
For fire -resistive protection of exterior walls and openings,
as determined by location
on property, see Section 1503.
Int
ramutim
SM 604. Stairs, exits, and smokeproof enclosures shall be
provided as specified in Chapter 33. (See also Section 3316).
entllation,
>
used by human beings and all dressingu�ms shallbepro
sanitation
vided with light and ventilation by means of windows or
Skylights with an area not less
than one-eighth of the tater
floor area, one-half of which shall be
openable, or shall be
Provided with artificial light and a mechanically operated
ventilating system. The
mechanically operated ventilating
system shall supply a minimum of five cubic feet (5 cu. ft.)
per minute of outside air with a total circulated of not less
than fifteen cubic feet (15 cu, ft.)
per minute per occupant in
all Portions of the building and such system shall be kept
continuously in operation
during such time as the building
is occupied. If the velocity of the air at the register exceeds
ten feet (10') per second, the
register shall be placed more
than eight feet (8') above the floor directly beneath.
all Parts of the
humarhts ibe� building customarily used by
Sbeings shall be on a separate circuit from that of the
mge and shall be
controlled from the box office. All lights
in corridors, exit courts and exit passageways shall be pro-
tected by a wire cage.
AH registers or vents supplying air backstage shall be
48
1958 EDITION
equipped with automatic closing devices with fusible links. Llglit,
Such closing devices shall be located where the vents or Ventilation,
ducts pass through the proscenium walls and shall be oper- and
ated by fusible links located on both sides of the proscenium Saultatim
wall and both inside of and outside of the vent or duct. (Contd.)
There shall be provided in an approved location at least
one lavatory for each two toilets for each sex, and at least
one drinking fountain for each floor level.
For requirements for floors and walls of toilet compart-
ments, see Section 1711.
See. 606, Exits shall be enclosed an specified in Chapter 33. Eamesse^e
Elevator shafts, vent shafts, and other vertical openings of Vertical
shall be enclosed and the enclosure shall be as set forth in opesdnge
Table No. 17-A. (See also Chapter 30.)
Sec. 607. Automatic fire -extinguishing systems, stand- Flee -
pipes, and basement pipe inlets shall be installed as specified S Extingulatilas
in Chapter 38.
Sea 808. Stages shall be equipped with automatic venti- Special
lators as required in Section 3901. AtaA1111s
Chimneys and heating apparatus shall conform to the re-
quirements of Chapters 37 and 51.
Motion picture machine booths shall conform to the re-
quirements of Chapter 40.
Flammable liquids shall not be placed or stored in any
Group A occupancy.
Every gas service to the stage portion of the building shall
be separated from any other service to the building and
each building shall be provided with an approved Shut-
off valve at a convenient and conspicuous place outside the
building and adequately marked.
Exterior openings in a boiler room or room containing
central heating equipment, if located below openings in
another story or if less than ten feet (101) from other
doors or windows of the same building, shall be proteced
by Class "E" or "F" fire doors or windows.
Every boiler room or room containing a heating plant
Which burns liquid or solid fuel shall be separated from the
rest of the building by a "Three -Hour Fire -Resistive Oecu-
pancy Separation," except that openings may be protected
with a single Class "A" fire door on the room side and such
door shall be kept normally closed. Every boiler room or
raum containing a heating plant which burns gas as fuel
shall be separated from the rest of the building by not less
than a "One -Hour Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separation."
EXCEPTION: Where boilers and central heating plants
burning liquid or solid fuel are located at grade level, they
may be separated from the remainder of the building by
a "One -Hour Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separation.'
Sec. 609. Gymnasiums and similar occupancies may have Ex
running tracks constructed of wood or unprotected steel or and
Iron. Devistless
4(1
Sections 701-702 UNIFORM BIJUMINO CODE
CHAPTER 7—REQUIREMENTS FOR
GROUP B OCCUPANCIES
(croup B Sec. 701. Group B Occupancies shan be:
Occupancies Division 1. Any assembly building with a stage and an
Defined occupant load of less than 1000 in the building.
Division 2. Any assembly building without a stage and
having an occupant Ioad of 300 or more in the building.
Division S. Any assembly auiiding without a stage and
having an occupant load of less than 300 in the building,
Including such buildings used for school purposes leas than
four hours per week.
Division 4. Stadiums, reviewing stands, and amusement
park structures not included within Group A nor Divisions
1, 2, and 3, Group B, occupancies.
For occupancy separations see Table No. 5-33.
For occupant load see Section 3301.
Construction, Sec. 702. (a) General. Buildings or parts of buildings
Height, classed in Group B because of the use or character of the
and Area occupancy shall not exceed, in area or height, the limits
Allowable specified in Sections 505, 50e, and 507.
EXCEPTION: Division 4 structures of open skeleton
frame type shall not be limited in area or height.
(b) Special Provisions. Stages and enclosed platforms as
defined In Sections 420 and 417 shall be constructed in ac-
cordance with Chapter 39.
Divisions 1 and 2 occupancies shall be of not less than one-
hour fire -resistive construction throughout, except that a
fire -resistive ceiling shall not be required in one-story build-
ings of Type III, i V, or V construction having
frame roof. Division 2 occupanciesu an open
Of 1000 or more shall be of Type with an occupant load
ype II. or III construction.
EXCEPTION: Gymnasiums which have not more than
two balconies, each with an occupant load not to exceed
300, and which am not located over usable spaces, need
not have one-hour fire-realstive protection.
Division 3 occupancies located In a basement or above the
first story shall be of not less than one-hour fin -resistive
construction.
Group B assembly roams having an occupant load of 1000
or more shall not be luted in the basement.
Division 3 occupancies with an occupant loadof 50 or
from such ars located over usable space. shall be separated
construction.a by not less than one-hour fire -resistive
For attic s)?acs partitions AW draft stops nee SeCtien 3205.
(cam 4 Erection and structural main -
conform to the requiremeOf structures nts Division 4 occupancies Shan
suchspecificCode and where there
sstety f reqwhaprovide adequate the fo to Which may be subjected.
so
1958 EDITION
Sections
Structures housing Division 4 occupancies, other than
those of open skeleton frame type, when mora than one -- ht,
-o
in story in height or four hundred square feet (400 sq. ft.) and Area
construction. area, shall be of not less than one-hour fire -resistive Allowable
construction.
When the space under a Division 4 Occupancy is (�rL)
any purpose, It shall be separated from all parts of such Divi-
sion 4 occupancy, including exits, by walls, floors, and ceil-
ings of not less than one-hour fire -resistive construction.
EXCEPTION: The underside of continuous steel deck
grandstands when erected outdoors need not be fire -pro-
tected when occupied for public toilets.
The Building Official may cause all Division 4 structures
to be re -inspected at least once every six months.
Sec. 703. An buildings housing Group B occupancies shall Location on
front directly upon at least one public street, not less than Pry
twenty feet (201) In width, in which front shalt be located
the main entrance of such building.
For
as determined by locationonon property, ace Secton of exterior Walls ion w4 and
Part V.
Sc 704. (a) General. Stairs, exits, and smokeproof en- Exit
closures shall be provided as specified in Chapter 33. (See also FacM#es
Section 3317).
(b) Amusement Structures. Stairs and exits for Division
4 amusement structures shall be provided as specified In
Chapter 33, subject to the approval of the Building Official.
Exit signs shall be installed as specified in Section 3812 and
where required by the Building Official.
Sea 706. All portions of Group B occupancies customarily bight,
used by human beings and all dressing rooms shall be pro- Veltliatioa,
vided with natural or artificial light, ventilation, and sant- and
tary facilities as specified In Sections 605 and 1711.
sawuum
Elevator shafts706. , vent be endosed a s specs ified in vertical Chapter 33. Enelonars
wukW
shall be enclosed, and the enclosure shall be as net forth In Opof s
dW
Table No. 17-A. (See also Chapter 30.)
Sec. 707. Automatic fire -extinguishing systems, standpipes, Pyre.
�pb�ane� t pipe inlets shall be installed as specified in g
systems
Sea 708. Chimneys and heating apparatus shall conform Speclai
to the requirements of Chapter* 37 and 51. lissorlifs
Motion picture machine booths shall conform to the re-
quirements of Chapter 40.
Flammable liquids shall not be placed or stored in a
Group B occupancy.
Each building shall be provided with an approved outside
gas shut-off valve conspicuously marked.
81
Sections 708-709 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Special Exterior openings in a boiler room or room containing
Hazards central heating equipment, if located below openings in
(Cont'd.) another story or if less than ten feet (10') from other doors
or windows of the same building, shall be protected by
Class "E" or "F" Are doors or windows.
Every boiler room or room containing a heating plant
which burns liquid or solid fuel shall be separated from the
rest of the building by a "Three -Hour Fire -Resistive Occu-
pancy Separation," except that openings may be protected
with a single Class "A" fire door on the room side and such
door shall be kept normally closed. Every boiler room or
room containing a heating plant which burns gas as fuel
shall be separated from the rest of the building by not less
than a "One -Hour Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separation."
EXCEPTION: Where boilers and central heating plants
burning liquid or solid fuel are located at grade level, they
may be separated from the remainder of the building by
a "One -Hour Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separation."
Exceptions Sec, 708. Gymnasiums and similar occupancies may have
and running tracks constructed of wood or unprotected steel or
Deviations iron.
In gymnasiums and in multi-purpose schoolrooms having
an area not greater than thirty-two hundred square feet
(3,200 sq, ft.), one -inch (1")nominal tight tongue -and -
grooved or three -fourths -inch (?i") plywood wall covering
may be used on the inner side in lieu of fire -resistive plaster.
EE
1958 EDITION
8 -um s 801-898
CHAPTER S—.RE@UIREMEM FOR
GROUP C OCCUPANCIES
Sec. 801. Group C Occupancies shall be: I
Any building used for school or day-care purposes more GrsapOccupancies
C
than four hours per week, involving assemblage for Instruc- DeOsed
tion, education, or recreation, and not classed in Group A
occupancies or in Divisions 1 and 2 of Group B occupancies.
For occupancy separations see Table No. 5-8.
For occupant load see Section 3301.
See- 802. (a) General. Buildings or parts of buildings
classed in Group C because of the use or character of the Hdght,
occupancy shall not exceed, in area or height, the limits asci Ales
specified in Sections 505, 508, and 507
(b) Speelsl Provhdons Rooms having an occupant kuui
or
storyOf more than 100, and rooms used for kindergarten, erst-
second-grade pupils, shall not be located above the first
story above grade except in buildings of Type I construction.
Laboratories, wood -working and metal -working shops, ma-
chine shops, paint shops, storage rooms, and similar areas
shall be separated from each other and from classrooms by
not less than a "One -Hour Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separa-
ration."
Where there is usable space under the first floor of two-
storyanIncluding Mthe first floor shatland V bebe of a construction I construction, ctiup to
and the first floor shall be unpierced for human access.
Balconies and bleachers over usable space and all janitor
closets shall be protected with materials approved for one-
hour fire-reaiative construction.
All curtains, drops, and drapes shall be flame -proofed.
Stages and enclosed platforms shall be constructed in
accordance with Chapter 39.
The provisions of Section 1803 (b) shall not apply to open_
Ings in buildings not more than three stories high when such
openings are not less than thirty feet (30') from adjacent
property lines and not less than thirty feet (301) from bcent
lags on the same property.
UJId-
For attic space partitions and draft stops, see Section 3205.
Ses. 11111. (a) General. Group C occupancies shall front Location on
directly upon at least one public street, not less than twenty Proms
feet (201) In width, in which front shall be located at least
one required exit.
For fire -resistive protection of exterior walls and openings,
as determined by location on property, see Section 504 and
Part V. u
(b) Spacial provW91L Exterior walls or
Gropant load C occupancies having an occu parts of walla n
ad of 1than
as
Sae. 808. Chimneys and heating apparatus shall conform
to the requirements of Chapters 37 and 51.
Motion picture machine booths shall conform to the re-
quirements of Chapter 40.
Each building shall be provided with an approved outside
gas shut-off valve conspicuously marked.
Exterior openings In a boiler room or room containing
central heating equipment, if located below openings in
another story or if less than ten feet (10') from other doors
or windows of the same building, shall be protected by Class
"E" or "B"' fire doors or windows.
Every boiler room or room containing a central heating
plant which burns liquid or solid fuel shall be separated
from the rest of the building by a 'Three Hour Fire -Resistive
Occupancy Separation," except that openings may be pro-
tected with a single Class "A" fire door on the room aide and
such door shall be kept normally closed. Every boiler room
or room containing a heating plant which burns gas as fuel
shall be separated from the rest of the building by not less
than a "One -Hour Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separation."
ERCEPTtONi Where boilers and central heating plants
burning liquid or solid fuel are locate at grade levet, they
may be separated from the remainder of the building by
a "One -Hour Fire•Reristive Occupancy Separation."
Qrt
1958 EDITION
No flammable liquids shall be placed, stored, or used in
any Group C occupancies, except in approved quantities as
necessary in laboratories and approved utility rooms, and
such liquids shall be kept in tight or sealed containers when
not in actual use.
See. M. For requirements for gymnasiums and similar Exception
buildings, see Section 709. sd
Roof covering shall be a "fire -retardant" roofing as speci_ Devistloas
fled in Section 3203.
A building which will have only the first floor accessible
to not more than 20 pupils at any time, may be used for
school purposes with the following exceptions to Code re-
quirements:
1. Exterior walls or parts of walls which are less than
three feet (3') from adjacent property lines shall have no
openings therein and shall be of not less than one-hour fire -
resistive construction as specified in Chapter 43.
2. Classrooms may have only one exit not less than two
feet six inches (2'6") wide.
UNIFORM BunmiNGl CODE
f Sections
100 persons, when within ten feet (10') of adjacent property
fire -resistive construction.
,?
linea, may be of one-hour
stairs,
ter (See also Senclosures
tion 3318).e
n Chapte Chaand
FacilitiesExit
pproof
provided
vet y�n�
See, M. All portions of Group C occupancies shall be
light and ventilation, either natural or arti-
aad
provided with
ficial, as specified in Section 605.
Toilets shall be provided on the basis of the following
gaaitsqm
ratios of toilets to number of students: Girls BOYS
Elementary Schools ............................ 1:45 1 100
Secondary Schools ..............................
In addition, urinals shall be provided for boys on a basis
of 1:80.
There shall be provided at least one lavatory for each
two toilets or urinals for each sex and at least one drinking
fountain on each floor.
For requirements for Boors and wails of toilet compart-
ments, see Section 1711.
Enclosure
ge e, 806, Exits shall be enclosed as specified in Chapter 33.
Of Vardeal
Opentap
Elevator shafts, vent shafts, and other vertical openings
shall be enclosed, and the enclosure shall be as set forth
In Table No. 17-A. (See also Chapter 30.)
ifire-
See, 307. Automatic fire -extinguishing systems,
gaguishiag
installed as specified in
and basement pipe inletsshall be ii
Systems
Chapter 38.
Sae. 808. Chimneys and heating apparatus shall conform
to the requirements of Chapters 37 and 51.
Motion picture machine booths shall conform to the re-
quirements of Chapter 40.
Each building shall be provided with an approved outside
gas shut-off valve conspicuously marked.
Exterior openings In a boiler room or room containing
central heating equipment, if located below openings in
another story or if less than ten feet (10') from other doors
or windows of the same building, shall be protected by Class
"E" or "B"' fire doors or windows.
Every boiler room or room containing a central heating
plant which burns liquid or solid fuel shall be separated
from the rest of the building by a 'Three Hour Fire -Resistive
Occupancy Separation," except that openings may be pro-
tected with a single Class "A" fire door on the room aide and
such door shall be kept normally closed. Every boiler room
or room containing a heating plant which burns gas as fuel
shall be separated from the rest of the building by not less
than a "One -Hour Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separation."
ERCEPTtONi Where boilers and central heating plants
burning liquid or solid fuel are locate at grade levet, they
may be separated from the remainder of the building by
a "One -Hour Fire•Reristive Occupancy Separation."
Qrt
1958 EDITION
No flammable liquids shall be placed, stored, or used in
any Group C occupancies, except in approved quantities as
necessary in laboratories and approved utility rooms, and
such liquids shall be kept in tight or sealed containers when
not in actual use.
See. M. For requirements for gymnasiums and similar Exception
buildings, see Section 709. sd
Roof covering shall be a "fire -retardant" roofing as speci_ Devistloas
fled in Section 3203.
A building which will have only the first floor accessible
to not more than 20 pupils at any time, may be used for
school purposes with the following exceptions to Code re-
quirements:
1. Exterior walls or parts of walls which are less than
three feet (3') from adjacent property lines shall have no
openings therein and shall be of not less than one-hour fire -
resistive construction as specified in Chapter 43.
2. Classrooms may have only one exit not less than two
feet six inches (2'6") wide.
Sections 901-905 UNIIs RK BUILDING CODE
CHAPTER 9—REQUIREMENTS FOR
GROUP D OCCUPANCIES
Group D Sea 901. Group D Occupancies shall be:
Duties Division 1. Mental hospitals, mental sanitariums, jails, pris-
ons, reformatories, and buildings where personal liberties of
inmates are similarly restrained.
Division 2. Nurseries for the full-time care of children
under kindergarten age (each accommodating more than five
persons).
Hospitals, sanitariums, and similar buildings (each accom-
modating more than five persons).
Division 8. Homes for the aged and homes for children of
kindergarten age and older (each accommodating more than
five persons).
For occupancy separations see Table No. 5-B.
For occupant load see Section 3301.
1958 EDITION
Sections 905 -sea
For requirements for floors and walls of toilet compsrt,
ments see Section 1711.
Sea 908. Exits shall be enclosed as specified In Chapter 33. raciagum
shallebe enclosed, andtthe enclosureo hallvbe Iasi etef rth Openings
in Table No. 17-A. (See also Chapter 30.)
907. Automatic
ll' s p Fire -
and basement Pipe inlets shall be installed specified inChapter 38. EzN091d"dag
Systems
Sea 908, Chimneys and heating apparatus shall conform SpooW
to the requirements of Chapters 37 and 51.
usawils
Motion picture machine booths shall conform to the re-
quirements of Chapter 40.
Storage Of volatile flammable liquids shall not be allowed
In Group D occupancies and the handling Of such liquid
shall not be permitted in any Group D occupancies in quan-
Utiea of more than one gallon unless such handling complies
with U.B.C. Standard No. 9-1-58.
Each building shall be provided with an approved outside
gas shut-off valve conspicuously marked.
Every boiler room or room containing a heating plant
which burns liquid or solid fuel shall be separated from the
rest of the building by a "Three -Hour Fire -Resistive Oceu-
pancy Separation," except that openings may be protected
with a single Class "A" fire door on the room side and such
door shall be kept normally closed. Every boiler room or
room containing a heating plant which burns gas as fuel
shall be separated from the rest of the building by not less
than a "One -Hour Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separation."
EXCEPTION: Where boilers and central heating plants
burning liquid or solid fuel are located at grade level, they
may be separated from the remainder of the building by a
One -Hour Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separation.,'
57
EXCEPTION: Group D occupancies shall not include
buildings used only for private residential purposes or for
a family group.
Construction,
Height
Sea 902. (a) General. Buildings or parts of buildings
classed in Group D because of the use or character of the
and Area
occupancy shall not exceed, in area or height, the limits
Allowable
specified in Sections 505, 506, and 507.
(b) Special Provisions. Division 1 occupancies shall be of
Type i or II construction throughout. Occupancies in which
the personal liberties of inmates or patients are restrained
within the building shall have floors of incombustible con-
struction.
Division 2 and 3 occupancies shall be one-hour fire-re-
slative construction throughout. Division 2 occupancies more
than one story in height and Division 3 occupancies more
than two stories in height hal be of Type I or II con-
struction.
For attic space Partitions and draft stops, see Section 3205.
Location on
property
Sec. W& For fire -resistive protection of exterior wails and
openings, as determined by location on property, see Sec_
tion 504 and Part V.
Eslt
Fadiitles
Nee. 864- Stairs, exits, and smokeproof enciosuree shall
be provided as specified in Chapter 33.
3319). (See also Section
V ght.
— 9ft All
es
used by human bebeings shall be rtions of provided
�
with 11 htandven
t l8tkm by means of windows or skylights with an
area
X111 to one-eighth of the total floor area, one-half of which
or shall be
provided with artificial light
and a mechanically
in Section M.ally oixrated ventilating system as specified
56
1958 EDITION
Sections 905 -sea
For requirements for floors and walls of toilet compsrt,
ments see Section 1711.
Sea 908. Exits shall be enclosed as specified In Chapter 33. raciagum
shallebe enclosed, andtthe enclosureo hallvbe Iasi etef rth Openings
in Table No. 17-A. (See also Chapter 30.)
907. Automatic
ll' s p Fire -
and basement Pipe inlets shall be installed specified inChapter 38. EzN091d"dag
Systems
Sea 908, Chimneys and heating apparatus shall conform SpooW
to the requirements of Chapters 37 and 51.
usawils
Motion picture machine booths shall conform to the re-
quirements of Chapter 40.
Storage Of volatile flammable liquids shall not be allowed
In Group D occupancies and the handling Of such liquid
shall not be permitted in any Group D occupancies in quan-
Utiea of more than one gallon unless such handling complies
with U.B.C. Standard No. 9-1-58.
Each building shall be provided with an approved outside
gas shut-off valve conspicuously marked.
Every boiler room or room containing a heating plant
which burns liquid or solid fuel shall be separated from the
rest of the building by a "Three -Hour Fire -Resistive Oceu-
pancy Separation," except that openings may be protected
with a single Class "A" fire door on the room side and such
door shall be kept normally closed. Every boiler room or
room containing a heating plant which burns gas as fuel
shall be separated from the rest of the building by not less
than a "One -Hour Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separation."
EXCEPTION: Where boilers and central heating plants
burning liquid or solid fuel are located at grade level, they
may be separated from the remainder of the building by a
One -Hour Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separation.,'
57
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
tV A "t M t0--BEQUIBIPMErNTS FOR
6t; HIP E t , ATPANCM
=z� asp E tkcupancies shall be:
t..teu'a %1 and handling of hazardous and highly
dYfz#+�a 4r m*,xg cmive materials other than flammable
---1#jsuullc
and handling of Class I, EL and III
tWrsftA31iV ggxi t as set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 9-1-58;
FIALMts U$ing flammable liquids, paint stores with
paint shops and spray painting rooms and
A Woodworking establishments, planing mills
-ShOM factories where loose, combustible
ir tS manufactured, processed or generated;
vwmbwl=ts Nitwit highly combustible material Is stored.
9. Papair garages.
BleRsIMM i A repair hangars.
"I" - tions see Table No. 5-B.
' see Section 3301.
Mtxi7 fa= gible liquids shall be deemed to be
now Irtila a: ftsh point below 190 degrees Fahrenheit as
rJxe elemed cup tester, provided that liquids
a Usk 7sutt aisrve 138.5 degrees Fahrenheit shall not
ext !A' 30- 141117 flammable when used in a closed
rrntg rparem meeting the requirements of U. B. C.
<" ?"t �Tn, . i r • ;i fr>r a Class III rating.
w "ai frMM$. Buildings or parts of buildings
n le berausee of the use or character of the
!4144 "A f .sed, in area or height, the limits
as144'sa VIS, 506, and 507.
4- Division 5 occupancies shall have
§w 4f Mt loss than ane -hour fire -resistive can-
. i4 sisrrrninded by public space, streets, or
- ,MA4 WAY feast (60') in width.
+ As; wokf-4sen allf wed by Section ;106 id) shall not
444 A" A*0 ftrr aireraft repair hangars.
1� sflae soft wilbre flammable or explosive liquids
4 " *Pared nawYrs shall he entirely protected with
rrrsii51 rr yiariala agalust saturation.
i s timet "11ar1Y="Its tea+t (ttfl') in ht ight. the strac-
raw = Sr s mat) 60 1x014e411" i with uut less than four-hour
100"tont9eot+ saint it's floors shall be of not Iess
-#AJ,0rra 9{e-ipsls{Yrs rmistrialion,
arwa,x patl.iiteasr and draft stops ser Seetion 3205.
hovisgg 0 u,a.r area not eceeeding
ml {t..7 shall have
h,aYr OW -resistive ton-
^`^�.:x; §,n uearr raaw iY,aYa ave ea+a) t"" (ri s pre,l r£y line
as
1958 EDITION
and of not less than one-hour fire -resistive construction when tions II"g
more than live feet (5') but less than ten feet (10') from
a property line, when located in Fire Zone No. s.
Sec. 1003. For fire -resistive protection of exterior wails
and openings, as determined by location on property, me 1[
Section 504 and Part V.
be provided s sStaipecifiedsMU
3320). SnChapter ande33 of
al�sorgeet �t
FaclifitfifIn
Where ramps are used for the transfer of automobiles
from one floor to another such ramps shall meet the 1lrotmd
floor level at a point not less than twenty feet (1'0') fund
the exit from such building. from
Sec. 1005. All portions of Group E Occupancies custom.
arily used by human beings shall be provided with light and pmt'
ventilation by means of windows or skylights with an area ad
-half c! which
equal to one-eighth of the total floor area, one
shall be operable, or shall be provided with artificial light
and a mechanically operated ventilating system as specified
in Section 605.
In all buildings used for the storing or handling of auto-
mobiles operated under their own power, and in all build-
ings where flammable liquids are used, exhaust ventilation
shall be provided sufficient to produce one complete change
of air every 15 minutes. Such exhaust ventilation shall be
taken from a point at or near the floor Ievel.
notERsC�eedlt g an areMON: In auofiflveathousand aircraft hangtin
sq. ft.), the Building Official may authorize the uare omission
et OM
Of such ventilating equipment where, in his opinion, the
building is supplied with unobstructed openings to the
outer air which are sufficient to provide the necessary
ventilation.
Every building or portion thereof where persons are em-
ployed shall be provided with at least one toflet. Every
building and each subdivision thereof where both sexes ere
employed shall be provided with access to at least two toilets
located either in such building or conveniently in a building
adjacent thereto.
For requirements for floors and walls of toilet compart-
ments, see Section 1711.
1006, Exits shall be enclosed as specified in Chapter 33, Enchwism
Elevator shafts, vent shafts, and other vertical openings Of V
shall be enclosed,'
and the enclosure shall be as set for
In Table No. 17-A. (See also Chapter 30.) th
maybe g phis are of an automobile ramp enclosure
ed with fusible
links and arrannormaged an s to be but self sell be lf-closing when released.
50
UNIFOICM BUn,DING CODE
Sections 1001-1008 ishin systems, stand-
sm. 1007. Automajl a inlet xst 11 be installed as specified
phctingulahiug pip�apt = basement pipe
Systems in
See. 1008. Chimneys and heating apparatus shall conform
Spa" to the requirements of Chapters 37 and 51.
Every boiler room or room containing a heating plant shall
be separated from the rest of the building by a Four-hour
Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separation.
EXCEPTION' In Divisions 4 and 5 unit heaters may be
installed provided they are at least seven feet (71) above
the floor. flammable
In any room in which
lea gloworflamedcapablle of
iged
niting
stored as device aP r shallgenerating
installed or used within
igniting Baso
twenty-four inches (24") of the floor. gasoline, fuel oil,
The use, handling, storage, and sale of g _
and other flammable unless such use handlshall not be ing, storage, and
itted in any
Group E comply
withoccupancy
sale comply with U. B. C. Standard No. 9-1-58.
Dry cleaning plants in which highly
flconstruction ammaabl and shall not
solvents are
used or stored shall be of Type
exceed one story in height. All partitions shall be of four-
hour fire -resistive construction, except for the necessary
shafting. All open
Inge
for the vent ducts, piping, and
Inge in exterior walls, except wall vents, shall be protected
by Class "E" or "F' fire doors or windows. Wall vents hav-
ing an area of not less than sixteen square inches (16 sq.
In) each, shall be placed in the exteri r walls near rt horizontally. eEach
line, not more than six feet (61) a mer -driven fan exhaust
building shall be provided with a po d and operated
system of ventilation which shalleof air in each room
so as to produce a compchange
every three minutes.
Each machine in dry cleaning establishment which uses
a volatile flammable liquid shall have an adequate steam
line directly connected to it, so arranged as to have the
automaticallysteam ooccur in in the machind to the e of such machine
shouldan explosion
Equipment or machinery which generates or emit com-
bustible or explosive dust or fibers shall be provided with
an adequate dust collecting and exhaust system installed
in conformance with U.B.C. Standard No. 10-2-58, unless the
building or portion thereof housing such machinery Pro-
vided with an automatic fire -extinguishing system conform-
ing to the provisions of Chapter 38. The fire -extinguishing
system for such occupancies having a floor area of less than
three thousand square feet (3,000 sq. ft.) may be a type
conforming to the provisions of Exception 2, Section 3802.
ED
1958 EDITION Sections 1101-1105
CHAPTER 11—REQUIREMENTS FOR
GROUP F OCCUPANCIES
Sec. 1101. Group F Occupancies shall be: Group
Occupancies
ivies
Division 1. Gasoline service stations, storage garages Defined
where no repair work is done except exchange of part and
maintenance requiring no open flame, welding, or the use
of highly flammable liquids.
Division 2. Wholesale and retail stores, office buildings,
drinking and eating establishments having an occupant load
of less than 100. printing plants, municipal police and fire
stations, factorie and workshops using materials not highly
flammable or co•,ibustible, storage and sales rooms for com-
bustible goods, paint stores without bulk handling. (See Sec-
tion 402, for definition of Assembly Buildings.)
Division S. Aircraft hangars where no repair work is done
except exchange of parts and maintenance requiring no
open flame, welding, or the use of highly flammable liquids.
Open parking garages.
For occupancy separations see 'table No. 5-B.
For occupant load see Section $301.
Sea 1102. (a) General. Buildings or parts of buildings Construction,
classed in Group F because of the use or character of the Height,
occupancy shall not exceed, in area or height, the limit and Area
specified in Sections 505, 506, and 507. Allowable
(b) Special Provisions. Motor vehicle service stations shall
be of incombustible or one-hour fire -resistive construction, in-
cluding canopies and support over pumps.
In storage garages, floors shall be entirely protected
against saturation.
Storage areas in excess of one thousand square feet (1,000
sq. ft.), in connection with wholesale or retail sales, shall be
separated from the public areas by a one-hour fire -resistive
occupancy separation.
For attic space partitions and draft stops see Section 3205.
Sec. 1103. For fire -resistive protection of exterior walls LOoatioa On
and openings, as determined by location on property, see Property
Section 504 and Part V.
Sec. 1104. Stairs, exits, and smokeproof enclosures shall EFS
be provided as specified in Chapter 33.
ties
Sea 1105. All portions of Group F occupancies custom- Light,
arlly used by human beings shall be provided with light and VentfttlM
ventilation by means of windows or skylights with an area and
not less than one-eighth of the total floor area or shall be Saoltathm
provided with artificial light and a mechanically operated
ventilating system. In no case shall less than two changes
of air per hour be provided.
61
Sections 1105-1108 UNIFORM WELDING CODE
Light,
In all buildings used for the storing or handling of auto -
ventilation,
mobiles operated under their own power, and in all build -
and
ings where flammable liquids are used, exhaust ventilation
Sanitation
shall be provided sufficient to produce one complete change
(Oont'd.)
of air every 15 minutes. Such exhaust ventilation shall be
taken from a point at or near the floor level.
EXCEPTION: In public garages and aircraft hangars
not exceeding an area of Ave thousand square feet (5000
sq. ft.), the Building Official may authorize the omission
of such ventilating equipment where, in his opinion, the
building is supplied with unobstructed openings to the
outer air which are sufficient to provide the necessary
ventilation.
Every building or portion thereof where persons are em-
ployed shall be provided with at least one toilet. Every
building and each subdivision thereof where both sexes are
employed shall be provided with access to at least two toilets
located either in such building or conveniently in a building
adjacent thereto.
Such toilet rooms in connection with food establishments
where food is prepared, stored, or served, shall have a non-
absorbent interior finish on Boors, walls, and ceilings, shall
be separated from such food establishments with close -
fitting, tight doors with a vestibule between, shall have hand
washing facilities therein or adjacent thereto.
All toilet rooms shall be provided with an exterior window
at least three square feet (3 sq. ft.) in area, fully openable or
a vertical duct not less than one hundred square Inches (100
sq. in.) in area for the first toilet facility with an additional
fifty square inches (50 sq. n.) for each additional toilet faci-
lity; or a mechanically -operated exhaust system, which is
connected to the light switch, capable of providing a complete
change of air every 15 minutes. Such systems shall be vented
to the outside air and at the pont of discharge shall be at
least Ave feet (5') from any openable window.
For requirements for floors and walls of toilet compart-
ments, see Section 1711.
Enclosure Sm 1106. Exits shall be enclosed as specified in Chapter
Of vertical 33.
Openings Elevator shafts, vent shafts, and other vertical openings
shall be enclosed, and the enclosure shall be as set forth in
Table No. 17-A. (See also Chapter 30.)
Five- See. 1167. Automatic fire -extinguishing systems, stand -
Extinguishing pipes, and basement pipe inlets shall be installed as specified
systenn in Chapter 38.
Spatial Sem 110. Chimneys and heating apparatus shall conform
Hasards to the requirements of Chapters 37 and 51.
No storage of volatile flammable liquids shall be allowed
in Group F occupancies and the handling and use of gasoline,
fuel oil and other flammable liquids shah not be permitted
62
1958 EDITION
Sections 1108-1109
In any Group F occupancy unless such use and handling
comPly with U. B. C. Standard No. 9-1-58.
Devices generating a glow or flame capable of igniting
led or used within twenty-
furline vapor inches (24") of the floor iall not be n Jany room In which vo at
ile
flammable liquids are used or stored.
er
or room
plant using Everyii olid or11 quid fuelshallbe separated froma central tthe
rest of the building by a "Two -Hour Fire -Resistive Occu-
pancy Separation." Every boiler room or room containing a
central heating plant which burns gas as a fuel shall be
separated from the rest of the building by not less than a
"One -Hour Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separation."
EXCEPTION: In buildings not more than two stories in
height a "One -Hour Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separation"
may be used.
Sec. 1109- (a) Scope. Except where specific provisions are Open
made in the following Subsections, other requirements of Par
this Code shall apply, king
(b) Definition. For the Garagsa
Parking garage is a structure of
o e this Section, an open
tion more than one tier in height w which s at or le n50tper
cent open on two or more side; and is used exeIusively for
the parking or storage of passenger motor vehicles having
a capacity of not more than nine persons per vehicle
(c) Construction. Construction shall be of incombustible
materials. Open parking garages shall meet the design re-
quirements of Chapter 23. Adequate curbs and railings shall
be provided at every opening.
(d) Area and Height. Area and height of open parking
garages in Fire zones No. 1. No. 2,
Subsection (e). and No. 3 shall be limited
as set forth Table No. it -A except for increases allowed by
TABLE NO. 11-A—.OPEN PARKING GARAGES
AREA AND HEIGHT
TYPE AREA
Ty
Type
HEIGHT
TypeII Unlimited
75-000 per tier
TYPe IV—one-hour
Unlimited
8 tiers
�•� Per
Type IV—anprotected 30,000 per tier
5 stories, 6 Hera
3 stories, 4 tiers
TABLE NO. 11-B._OPEN PARKING GARAGES
EXTERIOR WALLS
DISTANCE FROM
PROPERTY LINE
FIRE ZONE
TO BUILDING NO I FIRE ZONE FIRE ZONE
NO.
0'-30' 2 -hour —'�--
10-20 1 -hour 2 -hour
NO.J
1 -hour
1 -hour
No
63
Sectio■ 1109 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Open (e) Area and Height Increases. Area of structures open
Garages on three sides may be increased 25 per cent and one tier in
Catd.) height. Areas of structures open on four sides may be in-
creased 50 per cent and one tier in height.
(f) Location on Property. When located adjacent to inter-
ior property lines, exterior walls shall be of the degree of fire
resistance set forth in Table No. 11-B and such walls shall be
without openings.
(g) Stairs and Exits. Where persons other than parking
attendants are permitted, stairs and exits shall meet the re-
quirements of Chapter 33, based on an occupant load of two
hundred squar, feet (200 sq. ft.) per occupant. Where no
persons other t, an parking attendants are permitted there
shall be not le=i than two stairs three feet (31) wide. Lifts
may be installed for use of employees only, provided they
are completely enclosed by incombustible materials.
(h) Standpipes. Standpipes shall not be required.
(i) Occupancy Separations. Occupancy separations shall
be installed as required in Chapter 5 between open parking
garages and other occupancy such as sale of gasoline or oil.
(j) Flre-Extinguishing Apparatus. At each stair and lift
Opening on each tier there shall be provided one hand fire
extinguisher of a size and content approved by the Fire
Chief. Automatic fire -extinguishing systems shall be in-
stalled as specified in Chapter 38.
(k) Enclosure of Vertical Openings. Enclosure shall not
be required for vertical openings except as specified in Sub-
section (g) for stairs, exits, and lifts.
(1) Ventilation. Ventilation, other than the percentage of
Openings specified in Subsection (b), shall not be required.
(m) Prohibitions. The following uses and alterations are
not permitted:
I. Automobile repair work.
2. Sale of gasoline or OIL
3. Parking of busses, trucks, and similar vehicles.
4. Partial or complete closing of required openings in
exterior walls by tarpaulins or any other means.
64
1958 EDITION Sections 1201-1208
CHAPTER 12 -REQUIREMENTS FOR
GROUP G OCCUPANCIES
Sec. 1201. Group G occupancies shall be:Group G
Ice plants, power plants, pumping plants, cold storage, occupancies
les
creameries.
Factories and workshops using incombustible and nonex-
plosive materials.
Storage and sales rooms of incombustible and nonexplosive
materials.
For occupancy separations see Table No. 5-B.
For occupant load see Section 3301.
See. 1202. (a) General. Buildings or parts of buildings Construction,
classed in Group G because of the use or character of the Height,
occupancy shall not exceed, in area or height, the limits and Area
specified in Sections 505, 506, and 507. Allowable
(b) Special Provisions. Fire protection of the under side
of roof framing may be omitted in all Types of Construction.
For attic space partitions and draft stops see Section 3205.
Sec. 1203. For fire -resistive protection of exterior walls Location on
and openings, as determined by location on property, see Property
Section 504 and Part V.
See. 1204. Stairs, exits, and smokeproof enclosures shall Exit
los
be provided as specified in Chapter 33.
Sea I=. All portions of Group G occupancies custom- Light,
arily used by human beings shall be provided with light and Ventilation,
ventilation as specified in Section 1105. and
Every building or portion thereof where persons are em- Saultatia
ployed shall be provided with at least one toilet. Every build-
ing and each subdivision thereof where both sexes are em-
ployed shall be provided with access to at least two toilets
located either in such building or conveniently in a building
adjacent thereto.
For requirements for floors and walls of toilet compart
menta, see Section 1711.
Sec, 120L Exits shall be enclosed as specified in Chapter Enclosure
33. other vertical openings are not required to be enclosed. of Vertical
Openings
Sec. 1207. Automatic fire -extinguishing systems, stand- Fire.
pipes, and basement pipe inlets shall be installed as specified Extinguishing
in Chapter 38. sys
Sec. 1208. Chimneys and heating apparatus shall con- SpeWal
form to the requirements of Chapters 37 and 51. Ilaards
65
UNnr(113M BUILDING OODE
In any room in which volatile flammable liquids are used
or stored, no device generating a glow or flame capable of
igniting gasoline vapor shall be installed or used within
twenty-four inches (24") of the floor.
The storage, use, and handling of gasoline, fuel oil, and
other flammable liquids shall not be permitted in any Group
G occupancy unless such storage, use, and handling com-
ply with U. B. C. Standard No. 9-1-58.
Every boiler room or room below the first floor containing
a heating plant shall be separated from the rest of the
building by a "One -Hour Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separa-
tion."
Ell
c
1958 EDITION Sections 1201-1205
CIL,PTm 1—BEQUMEME'NU FOR
GBOUP S OMUPANOM
See. laol. Group H occupancies shall be: Group H
Hotels, apartment houses, dormitories, lodging houses. Demes
Convents and monasteries (each accommodating more
than 10 persons).
For occupancy separations see Table No. 5-B.
For occupant load see Section 3301.
Sec. 1302. (a) General. Buildings or parts of buildingsU o"m
classed in Group H because of the use or character of the Height -
occupancy
occupancy shall not exceed, in area or height, the limits rill Area
specified in Sections 505, 509, and 507. Allowable
(b) Special Provisions. Group H occupancies more than
two stories in height or having more than three thousand
square feet (3,000 sq. ft.) of floor area above the first floor
WWI be of not less than one-hour fire -resistive construction
throughout.
For attic space partitions and draft stops see Section 3205.
Sec. 130L For fire -resistive protection of exterior walls location on
and openings, as determined by location on property, aft Property
Section 504 and Part V.
Sec. 130L Stairs, exits, and smokeproof enclosures shall Zx1ts
be as specified in Chapter 33.
All stairs and exits in Group H occupancies shall open di-
rectly upon a street or alley or upon a yard or court not less
than four feet (41) in width directly connected to a street or
alley by means of a passageway not less in width than the
stairway opening into such passageway and not less than
seven feet (T) in height.
Buildings more than one story in height shall have no
transoms or ventilating openings from guest rooms to public
corridors.
Doors opening from guest rooms into public corridors
shall be incombustible or of wood not less than one and
three-eighths inches (1%") thick at any point.
Sec. 1305. (a) windows. All living rooms, kitchens, and Licit,
other rooms used for living, eating, or sleeping purposes shall Ventilation.
be provided with windows with an area not less than twelve and
ware feet (12 sq. ft.), nor one-eighth of the floor area of thiattatien
such rooms.
The window area in bathrooms, water closet oompart-
ments, and other similar rooms shall be not less than three
square feet (3 sq. ft.) unless a mechanical ventilation system
capable of producing a change of air every five minutes and
connected directly to the outside is provided.
f7
Sections 1305-1308 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 1058 EDITION
Light,
Ventilation,
When such required windows are installed, not less than
one-half of the required area shall be openable.
and
Sanitation
Required windows shall open on a court, yard, or street
either directly or through a porch with a
(Coni'd.)
minimum clear
height of not less than seven feet (71) and a depth of not
more than seven feet (71). Such porch shall be at least 50
per cent open on at least two sides.
Fire-
The width of such courts or yards shall be not less than
Extinguishing
three feet (3') when such courts or yards are not more
Systems
than two stories high measured down from the top of the
building and shall be increased at the rate of six inches
Ills
(6") for each additional story in height. If such court is
entirely surrounded by the building, it shall have a width at
least 50 per cent greater than that otherwise required.
(b) Room Sizes and Ceiling Heights. Every room re-
quired to have windows by Subsection (a) shall have a
ceiling height of eight feet (81 in at least 50 per cent of
its area. Rooms used for living, eating, or sleeping purposes
shall have an area of not less than eighty square feet (80
sq. ft.). Kitchens shall have a superficial floor area of not less
than fifty square feet (50 sq. ft.); superficial floor area being
herein defined as clear floor space, exclusive of fixed or built-in
cabinets or appliances.
(c) Sanitation. Every building shall be provided with at
least one toilet. Every hotel and each subdivision thereof
where both sexes are accommodated shall be provided with
at least two toilets located in such building, which shall be
conspicuously marked, one for each sex. Not less than one
toilet shall be provided for each 15 persons or major frac-
tion thereof that such building is designed to accommodate.
One toilet shall be provided for each apartment.
For requirements for floors and walls of toilet compart-
ments, see Section 1711.
A kitchen sink shall be installed in every kitchen.
Enclosure
Sec. 1306. Exits shall be enclosed as specified in Chapter
Of Vertical
33.
Openings
Elevator shafts, vent shafts, and other vertical openings
shall be enclosed and the enclosure shall be as set forth in
Table No. 17-A. (See also Chapter 30.)
Fire-
Sec. 1307. Automatic fire -extinguishing systems, stand -
Extinguishing
pipes, and basement pipe inlets shall be installed as specified
Systems
in Chapter 38.
Sec. 1308. Chimneys and heating apparatus shall conform
Ills
to the requirements of Chapters 37 and 51.
The storage and handling of gasoline, fuel oil, and other
flammable liquids shall not be permitted in any Group H
occupancy unless such storage and handling comply with
11. B. C. Standard No. 9-1-58.
Doors leading into rooms in which volatile flammable
0s
Sections 1M-13011
liquids are used or kept shall be protected by Class "C" Special
Hazards
doors and shall be kept normally closed.
Every boiler room or room containing a central heating (Cont'd.)
plant using solid or liquid fuel shall be separated from the
rest of the building by a "Three -Hour Fire -Resistive Occu-
pancy Separation," except that openings may be protected
with a single Class "A" fire door on the room side and such
door shall be kept normally closed.
EXCEPTIONS: 1. Such furnaces may be used without
a "Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separation" in buildings not
more than two stories in height.
2. In buildings of Type V construction a "One -Hour
Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separation" may be used.
Existing
See. 1300. For existing buildings see Appendix Section 1300. Buildings
Sections 1401-1405 UNMORM RUXIMING CODE
1058 EDITION sections 1400-1410
Sec. 14x6. Dumb-waiter shafts, clothes chutes, and other Enclosure
CHAPTER 14—REQUI UMMNTS FOR �
vertical openings shall be enclosed and the enclosure shall of Vsrtied
GROUP I OCCIJ1sANCIEB
be as set forth in Table No. 17-A. (See also Chapter 30.) Omega
(iron I
Group
See. 14x1. Grow I Occupancies shall be:
p
Sec. 1407. Fire-extinguishing systems when installed shall Fire -
conform to the requirements of Chapter 38. 8
des
Dwellings
Defined
For occupancy separations see Table No. 5-B.
Sec. 1408. Chimneys and heating apparatus shall conform SPecial
For occupant load see Section 3301,
to the requirements of Chapters 37 and 51. Hazards
Flammable liquids shall not be stored or used in Group
teostruetion,Sec,
Height.
1402. Buildings or parts of buildings classed in Group
the
I occupancies in quantities in excess of one gallon and all
such flammable liquids shall be kept In tight or sealed con-
amt Area
I because of the use or character of occupancy shall not
exceed, in area or height, the limits specified in Sections
tainers when not in actual use.
Allowable
505' 508, and 507.
See. 1409. Group I occupancies constructed on the roof of Exceptions
Location onSac
14aS. For fire resistive protection of exterior walls
multiple-storied buildings shall be considered as an addi- a�
exposure. ev{stlsas
tional story in so far as the construction location 11
Property
and openings, as determined by location on property, see
stairs, exits, and fire-extinguishing apparatus are concerned.
Section 504 and Part V.
A carport open on two or more sides need not have a
Fait
Sea 1404. Stairs and exits shall be provided as specified
fire separation between the carport and the dwelling-
Faeilitles
in Chapter 33.
Windows between the carport and the dwelling shall not
Light,
Sec. 1405. (a) Windows. All living rooms, kitchens, and
be openable. Doors may be of any type, provided that any
sash used in a door be fixed: doors between Is dwelling and
Ventilation,
other rooms used for living, eating, or sleeping purposes
a carport shall be self-closing.
and
shall be provided with windows with an area not less than
Sanitation
twelve square feet (12 sq. ft.) nor one-eighth of the floor
Sec 1410. The following are the minimum requirements Mahmn
area of such rooms.
which shall be completed and approved before occupancy Is Oooapnael
The window area in bathrooms, water-closet compart-
( permitted or utilities connected: to
menta, and other similar rooms shall be not less than three
1. Foundation, framing, roof covering, and exterior wall
square feet (3 sq. ft.), unless a mechanical ventilation system
covering•
capable of producing a change of air every five minutes and
connected directlyto the outside is provided. p
2. Kitchen and bathroom separated by partitions, ceilings,
When such required windows are installed, not less than one
and doors.
half the required area shall be openable. In lieu of the fore-
f 3, Water closet, kitchen sink, and sewage-disposal system
going requirements a mechanical ventilation system capable
installed when required.
of producing a change of air every five minutes and connected
directly to the outside may be installed.
Required windows shall open on a court, yard or street
either directly or through a porch with a minimum clear
height of not less than seven feet (7'). Such porch shall be
at least 50 per cent open on at least one side.
(b) FAom Sim ami Ceiling Heights. Every room required
to have windows by Subsection (a) shall have a ceiling
height of not less than seven feet six inches (7' 0^) in at
least 50 per cent of its required area with no portion less
than five feet (5') in height. Rooms used for living, eating,
or sleeping purposes shall have an area of not less than
eighty ware feet (So sq. ft.). Kitchens shall have a super-
ficial floor area of not less than fifty square feet (50 sq. ft.),
superficial floor area being herein defined as clear floor space,
exclusive of fixed or built-in cabinets or appliances.
(c) asuftation. There shall be no opening from a room in
whk:h a water closet to located into a room In which food
is prepared or stored.
��
70
7 i
Sections 1501-1505 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
CHAPTER 15—REQUIREMENTS FOR
GROUP J OCCUPANCIES
Group J
Sec. 1501. Group J Occupancies shall be:
Occupancies
Defined
Division 1. Private garages, sheds, and agricultural build -
Ings when not over one thousand square feet (1000 sq. ft.)
in area.
Division 2. Fences over six feet (01) high, tanks, and
towers.
For occupancy separations see Table No. 5-B.
For occupant load see Section 3301.
Construction,
Sec. 1502. Buildings or parts of buildings classed in Group
Height,
J because of the use or character of the occupancy shall he
and Area
one of the Types of Construction as specified in Part V of
Allowable
this Code. The floor area shall not exceed one thousand
square feet (1000 sq. ft.). The height shall not exceed one
story.
When any building exceeds the limit specified in this Chap-
ter it shall be classed in the occupancy group other than
Group J that it most nearly resembles.
Location on
See. 1503. For fire -resistive protection of exterior walls
Property
and openings, as determined by location on property, see
Section 504 and Part V.
Light and See. 1504. Private garages which are constructed in con -
ventilation junction with any Group H or I occupancies and which have
openings into such buildings shall be equipped with fixed
louvered or screened openings or exhaust ventilation with
exhaust openings located within six inches (8") of the floor.
The clear area of the louvered opening or of the openings
into the exhaust ducts shall be not less than sixty square
inches (60 sq. in.) per car stored in such private garage.
Under no circumstances shall a private garage have any
opening directly into a room used for sleeping purposes.
Special Seo. 1505. Chimneys and heating apparatus shall conform
Hazards to the requirements of Chapters 3T and 51.
Flammable liquids shall not be stored, handled, or used in
Group J occupancies unless such storage or handling shall
comply with U. B. C. Standard No. 9-1-58.
iE
1958 EDITION
sections 1001-1002
PART IV
REQUIREMENTS BASED ON
LOCATION IN FIRE ZONES
CHAPTER 16—RESTRICTIONS IN FIRE ZONES
Sec. 160L (a) Fire Zones Defined. For the purpose of General
this Code, the entire city is hereby declared to be and is
hereby established a Fire District and said Fire District
shall be known and designated as Fire Zones One, Two, and
Three, and shall include such territory or portions of said
City as outlined in an ordinance of said City, entitled: "An
Ordinance Creating and Establishing Fire Zones." Whenever
in this Code reference is made to any fire zone, it shall be
construed to mean one of the fire zones created by said
ordinance.
(b) Buildings Located In More than One Fire Zone. A
building or structure which is located partly in one fire zone
and partly In another shall be considered to be in the more
highly restricted fire zone when more than one-third of its
total floor area is located in such zone.
(c) Moved Buildings. Any building or structure moved
within or into any fire zone shall be made to comply with
all the requirements for new buildings in that fire zone.
(d) Temporary Bulldings. Temporary buildings such as
reviewing stands and other miscellaneous structures con-
forming to the requirements of this Code, and sheds, cano-
pies, or fences used for the protection of the public around
and in conjunction with construction work may be erected
in Fire Zones No. 1 or No. 2 by special permit from the Build-
ing Official for a limited period of time, and such building or
structure shall be completely removed upon the expiration of
the time limit stated in such permit.
(e) Center Lines of Streets. For the purpose of this
Chapter, the center line of an adjoining street or alley may
be considered an adjacent property line. Distance shall be
measured at right angles to the street or alley.
Sec. 1602. (a) General. Buildings or structures hereafter
erected, constructed, moved within or into Fire Zane No, i In Fb.a Leas
shall be only of Type I, II, III-H.T., III -one-hour, or IV -one- No. 1
hour construction and shall meet the requirements of this
Section. (For regulations covering open parking garages see
Section 1109.)
EXCEPTION: Unprotected Type IV buildings not more
than one story in height nor more than twenty-five hundred
square feet (2500 sq. ft.) in area shall be permitted if the
exterior walls are twenty feet (20') or more from adjacent
property lines.
73
secuooa 1*2-1803 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Restrictlons
In Fire Zone
(b) AlteraUons. No building of Type IV construction in
excess of one thousand square feet
No. 1
(Cont -d.)
(1000 sq. ft.) in floor area
nor any building of Type V construction already erected In
Fire Zone No. 1 shall hereafter be altered,
raised, enlarged,
added to, or moved, except as follows:
1. Such Type IV building may be made to conform to all
the Provisions of Sections 1002 (a) and 2103.
2. Changes, alterations, and repairs to the interior of such
building or to the front thereof facing a
public street may
be made, provided such changes do not, in the opinion of
the Building Official, increase the fire hazard of such building.
3. Roofs of such buildings may be covered only with a
"fire
-retardant" roofing as specified in Section 3203. See
Section 104 (f) for repairs.
4. Such building may be moved entirely outside the limits
of Fire Zone No. 1.
5. Such building may be demolished.
(c) Occupancies Prohibited. No Group E. Division 2 oc-
cupancy having a floor area exceeding fifteen hundred square
feet (1500 sq. ft.) shall be permitted in Fire Zone No. L
No Group E, Division 1 or 5 occupancies shall be permitted
In Fire Zone No. 1.
EXCEPTION: This shall not apply to dry cleaning
plants not using highly flammable liquids.
Restrictions
See. 160L (a) General. Buildings or structures hereafter
In Fire Zone
erected, constructed, moved within or into Fire Zone No. 2
No. 2
shall be one of the Types of Construction as defined in this
Code and shall meet the requirements of this Section.
For fire -resistive protection of exterior walls and open-
ings, as determined by location on property, see Section 504
and Part V. (For regulations covering open parking garages
see Section 1109).
EXCEPTION: Unprotected Type IV buildings not more
than one story in height and not more than twenty-five
hundred square feet (2,500 sq. ft.) in area shall be per-
mitted If the exterior walls are ten feet (10') or more from
adjacent property lines.
Roof covering shall be "Fire -Retardant" roofiing as speci-
fied in Section 3203 (e). See Section 104 (f) for repairs.
(b) Alteras. No building of Type IV construction in
excess of one thousand square feet (1000 sq. ft.) in floor
area nor any building of Type V construction already erected
in Fire Zone No. 2, shall hereafter be altered, raised, en-
larged, added to or moved except as follows:
1. Such building may be made to conform to the provisions
of Section 2103 for Type N and Section 2203 for Type V
construction.
2. Changes, alterations, and repairs to the interior of
such building or to the front thereof facing a public street
74
.J
1858 EDITION Sections 1003-1304
may be made provided such changes do not, in the opinion
of the Building Official, increase the fire hazard of such
building.
3. Roofs of such buildings may be covered only with a
"fire -retardant" roofing as specified in Section 3203. See
Section 104 (f) for repairs.
4. Such building may be moved entirely outside the limits
of Fire Zone No. 2.
5. Such building may be demolished.
B. Combustible finish on the outside of walls may be re-
placed by or covered with exterior plaster as specified in
Chapter 47.
(c) Occupancies Prohibited. No Group E, Division 2 oc-
cupancy having a floor area exceeding fifteen hundred square
feet (1500 sq. ft.) shall be permitted in Fire Zone No. 2.
No Group E, Division 1 or 5 occupancies shall be permitted
In Fire Zone No. 2.
EXCEPTION: This shall not apply to dry cleaning
plants not using highly flammable liquids.
Sem 1004. Any building or structure complying with the RestricUega
requirements of this Code may be erected, constructed, m MM Zane
moved within or into Fire Zone No. 3. No.3
75
Sections 1701-1703 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
PART Y
REQUIREMENTS BASED ON TYPES
OF CONSTRUCTION
CHAPTER 17—CLASSIFICATION OF ALL
BUILDINGS BY TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION
AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Sec. 1701. The requirements of Part V are for the various
Types of Construction and represent varying degrees of
public safety and resistance to fire. Every building shall
be classified by the Building Official into one of the Types
of Construction set forth in Table No. 17-A. Any building
which does not entirely conform to a Type of Construction
set forth in Table No. 17-A shall be classified by the Build-
ing Official into a type having an equal or lesser degree of
fire resistance.
No building or portion thereof shall be required to con-
form to the details of a Type of Construction higher than
that type which meets the minimum requirements based on
Occupancy (Part III) or Location in Fire Zone (Part IV)
even though certain features of such building actually rvn
form to a higher Type of Construction.
Where specific materials, types of construction, or fire -re-
sistive protection are required, such requirements shall be
the minimum requirements and any materials, types of con-
struction, or fire -resistive protection which will afford equal
or greater public safety or resistance to fire, as specified in
this Code, may be used.
Portions of buildings separated as specified in Section 505
(c) may be considered a separate building for classification
of types of construction. When there is no such separation,
the area of the entire building shall not exceed the least
area permitted for the types of construction involved.
Structural Sec. 1702. The structural frame shall be considered to
Frame be the columns and the girders, beams, trusses, and span-
drels having direct connections to the columns and all other
members which are essential to the stability of the building
as a whole. The members of floor or roof panels which have
no connection to the columns shall he considered secondary
members and not a part of the structural frame.
Upbis Spaces Sec. 170L Usable space under the first floor shall be en -
Under Floors closed except in Group I and J occupancies and such en-
closure when constructed of metal or wood shall be protected
on the side of the usable space as required for one-hour fire -
resistive construction. Doors shall be self-closing Incombus-
tible or solid -core wood not less than one and three-eighths
inches (1%1) In thickness.
70
.. �t
n � .. .
1958 EDITION Sections 1704-1700
See. 1704. Roof covering shall be "fire -retardant" except Roof
In Type V buildings housing Groups H, I, or J occupancies, Coverings
where it may be as specified in Section 3203 M.
Skylights shall be constructed as required in Chapter 34.
Penthouses shall be constructed as required in Chapter 38.
For use of plastics in roofs see Chapter 52.
EXCEPTION:Roofs of cedar or redwood shakes having
a nominal thickness of one inch (1") at the butt may be
used in buildings of Group F, Division 2, occupancies of
Type V construction, where there are no general require-
ments for fire resistance, provided that the horizontal
clearance between cornice and property line, except street
fronts, is not less than ten feet (10'). This provision shall
be applicable only in Fire Zone No. 3.
Sec. 1705. (a) Partitions. Regardless of the fire-resis- Unprotected
tive requirements for permanent partitions, temporary par- Materia4
titions dividing portions of stores, offices, or similar places Allowed
occupied by one tenant only, and which do not establish a
public corridor, may be constructed of:
1. Incombustible materials
2. One-hour fire -resistive construction
3. Wood panels or similar light construction up to three-
fourths the height of the room in which placed, when more
than three-fourths the height of the room, such partitions
shall have not less than the upper one-fourth of the parti-
tion constructed of glass.
For use of plastics in partitions see Section 5210.
(b) Show Windows and Cases. Show -window frames,
aprons, show cases, and other appurtenances on the first
floor of stores or other similar occupancies may be of wood
or unprotected steel or iron.
(c) Trim. Trim, picture molds, chair rails, baseboards,
handrails, show -window backing may be of wood. Unpro-
tected wood doors and windows may be used except where
openings are required to be fire protected.
Materials used for interior finish of walls and ceilings, in-
cluding wainscoting, shall be as specified in Chapter 42.
(d) Loading Platforms. Exterior loading platforms may
be of incombustible construction or heavy timber construc-
tion with wood floors not less than two inches (2") nominal
thickness. Such wood construction shall not be carried
through the exterior walls.
(e) Insulating Boards. Combustible insulating boards may
be used under finished flooring.
See. 1100. (a) General. Enclosures for elevator shafts, Enclosure
vent shafts, and other vertical openings shall be as set forth of Vel
in Table No. 17-A and all openings therein shall be protected openings
by Class "E" or "F" fire doors for exterior, openings and
Class "B" doors for interior openings. (See Chapter 30.)
77
Table Na 17-A UNIFORM BUH DING CODE
Z s
Z
z
z
z z
z z z
> g
v
i5
4
Z
z
z
Z
z z
z z z
z�
3
.f
z
?
.1
Z z
$
.• Z z
1
91
1t
M
.�
�►
�
M .�
h h N� ffi N�
1
Z88
r
�e
1
1968 EDITION Sections 1'106-1
EXCEPTION: In Type V buildings, chutes and dumbEnclosure
-
waiter shafts with a cross-sectional area of not more than of Vertical
nine square feet (9 sq. ft.) may be lined with approved inOpenings
-
combustible materials covered with not less than No. 26 ( t%)
U. S. gauge sheet metal with all joints in such sheet metal
locklapped. Ail openings into any such vertical enclosure
shall be protected by metal or metal -clad doors with either
metal or metal -clad jambe, casings, or frames.
(b) Construction. Exit enclosures shall be constructed as
specified in Sections 3308 and 3309.
(c) Guard Rail. A parapet wall, or handrail, which is at
least thirty-six inches (36") in height shall be provided
around all open shaft enclosures extending through the roof.
Bee. 1107. (a) Building Paper. Asphalt -saturated felt free Weather
from holes and breaks and weighing not less than.24 pounds Protection
per hundred square feet (100 sq. ft.) or approved waterproof
paper, shall be applied over studs or sheathing of all exterior
walls. Such felt or paper shall be applied weatherboard
fashion, lapped not less than two inches (2") at horizontal
joints and not less than six inches (6") at vertical joints.
Building paper may be omitted in the following eases:
1. When exterior covering is of approved weatherproof
panels.
2. In back -plastered construction.
3. When there is no human occupancy.
4. Over water-repellent panel sheathing.
(b) Flashing and Counter Flashing, Exterior openings
exposed to the weather shall be flashed in such a manner
as to make them weather-proof.
All parapets shall be provided with coping of approved
material. All flashing, counter flashing, and coping when of
metal shall be of not less than No. 26 U.S. gauge corrosion -
resistant metal.
Sea 1108. All members carrying masonry or concrete walls Members
in buildings over one story in height shall be fire -protected Carrying
with not less than one-hour fire protection.
EXCEPTION: Fire protection may be omitted from the
bottom flange of lintels, shelf angles, or plates that are
not a part of the structural frame.
See. 1709. Parapet walls not less than thirty inches (301) in Perapeft
height shall be provided on exterior walls of buildings located
in Fire Zones No. 1 and No. 2 when the walls are required to
be fire -resistive due to their location on the property.
Parapet walls not less than twelve inches (12") in height
shall be provided on exterior walls of buildings located in
Fire Zone No. 3 when the walls are required to be fire-reds-
tive due to their location on the property.
parapet
wan shall 1 shave the same fire resistance as re -
quiz for
79
0
1959 EDITION Sections 1801 -IM
CHAPTER 18—TYPE I BUILDINGS
Sec. 1801. The structural elements in Type I Buildings Defialtion
shall be of steel, iron, concrete, or masonry.
Walls and permanent partitions shall be of Incombustible
fire -resistive construction.
Materials of construction and fire -resistive requirements
shall be as specified in Chapter 17.
Sec. 1802. Structural framework shall be of structural Structural
steel or iron as specified in Chapter 27, reinforced concrete Framework
as in Chapter 26, or reinforced masonry as in Chapter 24.
For additional requirements for Group E occupancies, see
Section 1002 (b).
sec, 1805. (a) Exterior Walls and Inner Court Walls. Ex- Exterior'
tenor walls and inner court walls shall be as set forth in Waft m
Table No. 17-A, except that walls fronting on streets having Openings
a width of at least fifty feet (501) in Fire Zone No. 1 or
thirty feet (301) in Fire Zones No. 2 and No. 3 may be of
unprotected incombustible construction with all structural
members fire protected as set forth in Table No. 17-A.
EXCEPTION: 1. In Group F, G, and H occupancies
exterior and inner court bearing walls may be two-hour
fire -resistive where openings are permitted.
2. In other than Group E occupancies exterior and
inner court nonbearing walls may be of one-hour fire-
tive construction where unprotected openings are per-
mitted and two-hour fire -resistive construction where fire
protection of openings is required.
(b) openings in Walls. Openings in exterior wails, Includ-
Ing outer courts, shall be protected by either Class "E" or
'IF" fire doors or windows when:
1. They are less than twenty feet (201) from the adjacent
property line.
2. They are in Fire Zone No. 1 and are less than fifty
feet (5(V) from the opposite side of a public street or public
place. The sum of the widths of such openings shall not
exceed 50 per cent of the total length of a wall in each story.
3. They are in Fire Zones No. 2 or No. 3 and are less than
thirty feet (301) from the opposite side of a public street or
public way.
Openings In inner court walls of buildings over one 'story
in height shall be protected by Class "E" or "F' fie doors or
windows when the least dimension of the court is less than
forty feet (40').
4. No openings shall be permitted in exterior walls of
Group A, B, C, D, E, and F occupancies low than fits fat
(5') from the property line, and no openings in Group 0, ii,
E1
r
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
sections 1109-1112
Parapets
EXCEPTIONS: Parapets shall not be required on the fol-
(Cont'd.)
lowing walls:
1. When the roof construction is entirely incombustible.
2. When the roof has an angle of more than 20 degrees
with horizontal.
3. On buildings twenty feet (20') or less in height.
Cornices
Sec. 1710. Except in Type v construction, cornices, eave
overhangs, architectural projections, and similar appendages
shall be constructed of
aslspecified incombustibleal rias
n Chapter 45
and when over public property
See. 1711. The floors and walls of public toilet compart-
Toilet
menta in A to H occupancies and those within two feet (21) of
Compart-
front and sides of urinals shall be finished with a smooth hard
menta
surface of cement, tile, or an approved equal. Walls shall be
so finished to a height of four feet (41) above the floor. Each
water -closet compartment shall be not less than thirty inches
(30")in width.
Clearances
See. 1712. Electric ranges or hot plates shall not be in -
for
stalled where the vertical clearance between burners and
Electric
combustible construction is less than thirty-six inches (36").
Ranges
A twenty -four -inch (24") vertical clearance may be per -
and Hot
mitted if the underside of the combustible construction is
Plates
protected with a minimum of one -fourth -inch (%") thick
asbestos millboard covered with No. 28 U.S. gauge or heavier
sheet metal and the projection extends a minimum of nine
inches (9") beyond the outer dimensions of the appliance.
For other ranges or hot plates, see Section 5109 (a).
0
1959 EDITION Sections 1801 -IM
CHAPTER 18—TYPE I BUILDINGS
Sec. 1801. The structural elements in Type I Buildings Defialtion
shall be of steel, iron, concrete, or masonry.
Walls and permanent partitions shall be of Incombustible
fire -resistive construction.
Materials of construction and fire -resistive requirements
shall be as specified in Chapter 17.
Sec. 1802. Structural framework shall be of structural Structural
steel or iron as specified in Chapter 27, reinforced concrete Framework
as in Chapter 26, or reinforced masonry as in Chapter 24.
For additional requirements for Group E occupancies, see
Section 1002 (b).
sec, 1805. (a) Exterior Walls and Inner Court Walls. Ex- Exterior'
tenor walls and inner court walls shall be as set forth in Waft m
Table No. 17-A, except that walls fronting on streets having Openings
a width of at least fifty feet (501) in Fire Zone No. 1 or
thirty feet (301) in Fire Zones No. 2 and No. 3 may be of
unprotected incombustible construction with all structural
members fire protected as set forth in Table No. 17-A.
EXCEPTION: 1. In Group F, G, and H occupancies
exterior and inner court bearing walls may be two-hour
fire -resistive where openings are permitted.
2. In other than Group E occupancies exterior and
inner court nonbearing walls may be of one-hour fire-
tive construction where unprotected openings are per-
mitted and two-hour fire -resistive construction where fire
protection of openings is required.
(b) openings in Walls. Openings in exterior wails, Includ-
Ing outer courts, shall be protected by either Class "E" or
'IF" fire doors or windows when:
1. They are less than twenty feet (201) from the adjacent
property line.
2. They are in Fire Zone No. 1 and are less than fifty
feet (5(V) from the opposite side of a public street or public
place. The sum of the widths of such openings shall not
exceed 50 per cent of the total length of a wall in each story.
3. They are in Fire Zones No. 2 or No. 3 and are less than
thirty feet (301) from the opposite side of a public street or
public way.
Openings In inner court walls of buildings over one 'story
in height shall be protected by Class "E" or "F' fie doors or
windows when the least dimension of the court is less than
forty feet (40').
4. No openings shall be permitted in exterior walls of
Group A, B, C, D, E, and F occupancies low than fits fat
(5') from the property line, and no openings in Group 0, ii,
E1
r
sections 1803-1806 UNIFORM BUMDING CODE
I, and J occupancies less than three feet (31) from the prop.
erty line.
Floors Sec, 1804. (a) Wood Sleepers. Where wood sleepers are
used for laying wood flooring on masonry or concrete Are -
resistive floors the space between the floor slab and the under-
side of the wood flooring shall be filled with incombustible
material in such a manner that there will be no open spaces
under the flooring which will exceed one hundred square feet
(100 sq. ft.) in area and such apace shall be filled solidly
under all permanent partitions so that there is no communi.
cation under the flooring between adjoining rooms.
Floom
or(unproteco�ted steel exceptthatin Flre Zonfloors e Nobe �f wood
I they
shall be of incombustible materials as approved for one-hour
Are -resistive construction or of heavy timber construction
as specified for floors in Section 2514 (b).
Not more than two mezzanine floors shall be in any room
of a building.
No mezzanine floor or floors shall cover more than 33%
Per cent of the area of any room.
stair see. 1806. Stairs and stair platforms shall be constructed
Construction of reinforced concrete, iron, or steel with treads and risers
Of concrete, iron, or steel. Brick, marble, tile, or other hard
incombustible materials may be used for the finish of such
treads and risers.
Stairs shall be designed and constructed as specified in
Chapter 33.
Boob See. 1808. Roofs more than twenty-five feet (251) above
any floor. balcony, or gallery may be of unprotected in-
combustible materials.
Where every part of the structural steel framework of the
roof of a Group A, B, or C occupancy is not less than twenty-
five feet (25') above any floor, balcony, or gallery, Are pro-
tection of all members of the roof construction may be
omitted.
Where every Part of the structural steel framework of the
root of a Group A, A or C occupancy is more than eighteen
feet (181 and Iess than tweny-five feet (251) above any floor,
lakesuy, or gallery, the roof construction shall be protected
yb g of not lees than one-hour fire -resistive con-
Ro0fis may be sheathed by wood planks of two -and -one-
half -inch (2i41) nominal thickness when such sheathing is
more than thirty feet (301) distant from any floor, balcony.
or Mary and when such plank sheathing is protected on
the underside by a ceiling of not less than one-hour fire -
resistive cmotraction.
Roof covering shall be a "fire -retardant" roofing as specified
in Section 3203.
1058 EDITION sections 1881-Im
CHAPTER 18—TYPE H BUILDINGS
See. 1801. The structural elements in Type II Buildings DeArditon
shall be of steel, iron, concrete, or masonry.
Walls and permanent partitions shall be of incombustible
Are -resistive construction.
Materials of construction and Are -resistive requirements
shall be as specified in Chapter 17.
See. 1002. Structural framework shall be of structural Strnua
steel or iron as specified in Chapter 27, reinforced concrete Framework
as in Chapter 26, or reinforced masonry as in Chapter 24.
See. 1003. (a) Exterior Walls and Inner Court Walls. Ex- '
terior walls and inner court walls shall be as set forth in Wada sed
Table No. 17-A, except that walls fronting on streets having Openings
a width of at least fifty feet (501 In Flre Zone No. 1 or thirty
feet (301) in Fire Zones No. 2 and No. 3 may be of unprotected
incombustible constructive with all structural members Are
protected as set fort* in Table No. 17-A.
EXCEPTION: 1. In Group F, G, and H occupancies
exterior and :nner court bearing walls may be of two-hour
Are -resistive construction where openings are permitted.
2. In other than Group E occupancies exterior and
inner court nonbearing walls may be of one-hour Are.
resistive construction where unprotected openings are per-
mitted and two-hour fire -resistive construction where Are
protection of openings is required.
(b) Openings in Walls. Openings in exterior walls, inciud-
Ing outer courts, shall be protected by either Class "E" or
"F' Are doors or windows when:
1. They are leas than twenty feet (201) from the'adjalent
property line.
2. They are In Fire Zone No. 1 and are Ion than fifty
feet (50') from the opposite side of a public street or pdblic
place. The sum of the widths of such openings shall not
exceed 50 per cent of the total length of a wall in each story.
3. They are in Fire Zones No. 2 or No. 3 and are less than
thirty feet (30') from the opposite side of a public street
or public way.
Openings in inner court walls of buildings over one story
in height shall be protected by Class "E" or "li" Are doors
or windows when the least dimension of the court is 14118
than forty feet (401).
4. No openings shall be permitted In exterior walls of
Group A, B. C, D, E, and F occupancies less than flue fest'
(51) from the property line, and no openings in Group G, II,
I, and J occupancies less than three fast (31) from the prop
arty line.
8!3
Sections 1904-1906 UNIFORM BIIILDING CODE
Floors Se& 1904. (a) General. Where wood sleepers are used for
1988 EDITION Sections 2001-2003
laying wood flooring on masonry or concrete fire -resistive
the space between the floor slab and the underside of
CHAPTER 20 -TYPE III BUILDINGS
the wood flooring shall be filled with incombustible materia]
in such a manner that there will be no open spaces under
Sec. 2001. Structural elements of Type III Buildings mai-._)eanftion
the flooring which will exceed one hundred square feet (
b e of any materials permitted by this Code.
sq. ft.) in area and such space shall be filled solidly underder
Type III, One -Hour buildings shall be one-hour fire-resis-
T YP
all permanent partitions so that there is no communication
tive construction throughout.
under the flooring between adjoining rooms.
Type III, Heavy Timber buildings shall be Heavy Timber
(b) Mezzanine Floors. Mezzanine floors may be of wood
Construction as provided in Section 2514.
or unprotected steel except that in Fire Zone No. 1 they
Exterior walls shall be of incombustible fire -resistive con -
shall be of incombustible materials as approved for one-hour
struction.
fire -resistive construction or of heavy timber construction
Materials of construction and fire -resistive requirements
as specified for floors in Section 2514 (b).
shall be as specified in Chapter 17.
Not more than two mezzanine floors shall be in any room
For requirements due to occupancy, see Chapters 6 to
of a building.
15, inclusive.
No mezzanine floor or floors shall cover more than 331/.
For requirements in Fire Zones see Chapter 16.
per cent of the area of any rwm.
Sea 2002. Structural framework shall be of steel or iron Strimtnrei
Stab Sea 1908. Stairs and stair platforms shall be constructed
as specified in Chapter 27, concrete as in Chapter 26, masonry Framework
Construction of reinforced concrete, iron, or steel with treads and risers
as in Chapter 24, or wood as in Chapter 25 and this Chapter.
of concrete, iron, or steel. Brick, marble, tile, or other hard
Incombustible materials may be used for the finish
Sec, 2003. (a) Exterior Walls and Inner Court Walls. Ex- Exterior
of such
treads and risers.
terior walls and inner court walls shall be an set forth in Walls,
Stairs shall be designed and constructed as specified in
Chapter 33. p
Table No. 17-A, except that walls fronting on streets having Openings, and
a width of at least fifty feet (50') in Fire Zone No. 1 or thirty partitions
?
feet (301) in Fire Zones No. 2 and No. 3 may be of unprotected
hoofs See. 1906.
incombustible construction with all structural members Noe
Roofs more than twenty-five feet (251) above
protected as set forth is Table No. 17-A, with s minimum of
any floor, balcony, or gallery may be of unprotected incom-
one-hour fire protection.
k
bustfble materials.
Where every part of the structural steel framework of
EROEPTIONS: 1. In Group F, G, and H occupancies
exterior bearing walla may be of two-hour incombustible
the roof of a Group A. B, or C occupancy is not less than
twenty-five feet (25') above any floor, balcony, or
construction where openings are permitted.
gallery,
fire protection of all members of the roof construction may
2. In other than Group E occupancies exterior n
be omitted,
i ng walls may be of one-hour incombustible construction
Where the structural steel framework of the
where unprotected openings are permitted and two-hour
roof of
a Group A, B, or C occupancy is more than eighteen feet
sG'construction where fire protection of open -
(191 and less than twenty-five feet (25') above any floor,
Inge irequired.
balcony, or gallery, the roof construction shall be protected
3. Bulkheads, not more than thirty inches (30') high
z'
by a ceiling of not less than one-hour fire -resistive con-
below show windows, need not be of incombustible or fire-
atruetian.
resistive material.
{
Roofs may be sheathed by wood planks of two -and -one-
half-inch (2%') nominal thickness
(b) Openings is Walls. Openings in exterior walls, Includ-
"E"
-
when such sheathing is
more than thirty feet (30') distant from any floor, balcony,
ing outer courts, shall be protected by either Class or
"F" fire doors or windows when:
or gallery and when such plank sheathing is protected on
the underside by a ceiling of not less than
1. They are less than twenty feet (201) from the adjacent
k.
one-hour flre-
resistive construction,
property line.
Roof covering shall boa "fire -retardant" roofing as speci-
fled
2. They are in Fire Zone No. 1 and are less than fifty
in Section 3203.
feet (501) from the opposite side of a public street or public
place. The sum of the widths of such openings shall not
exceed 50 per cent of the total length of a wail in each story.
3. They are in Fire Zones No. 2 or No. 3 and are less than
thirty feet (30') from the opposite side of a public street
84
or public way.
88
Sections 8003-2005 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
openings in inner court walls of buildings over one story
Exterior
WSW
height shall be protected by Class "E" or "F" fire doors
Openings, and or windows
wh n the least dimension of the court is less than
Partitions forty
(Cont'd.) 4, No openings shall be permitted in exterior walls of
Group A, B, C, D, E, and F occupancies less than flue feet
I, a)nfrom d J occupancies lessthan three fand no eet openings
from the prop-
erty
oP-
erty line.
(c) partltlOne. permanent partitions in Type III, one -
Hour buildings shall be of one-hour fire -resistive construc-
tion. In Type III H.T. buildings they shall be of solid wood
construction formed by not less than two layers of one inch
(1") nominal matched boards or laminated construction
three and Ave -eighths -inches (3%") thick, or of one-hour
Are -resistive construction. Bearing partitions when Ion -
ore than two stories and
a r000ted of f. Partitions shall be coshall not nsttruort t d as specified in Section
2507 (e).
rum Sea 8004. (a) General Floors may be constructed as
specified in Chapter 26 for concrete, Chapter 24 for masonry,
Chapter 25 for wood, and Chapter 27 for steel or iron.
Wood joists, beams, and girders supported by masonry
walls shall be anchored thereto as specified in Section 2313.
Ventilation shall be provided between the ground and a wood
floor as specified in Section 2516.
(b) Heavy Timber Floors. Heavy timber floors shall be
constructed as specified in Section 2514.
(c) Wood Sleepers. where wood sleepers are used for
laying wood flooring on masonry or concrete fire-restative
BOOM the space between the floor slab and the underside of
the wood flooring shall be filled with incombustible material
in such a manner that there will be no open spaces under the
flooring which will exceed one hundred square feet (100 sq.
ft.) in area and such space shall be filled solidly under all
partitions so that there is no communication under the
flooring between adjoining rooms.
(d) Mezraaine Floors. Mezzanine floors in Fire Zone No.
1 shall be constructed of not lessthan one-hour fire -resistive
construction or of heavy timber construction, as specified
for floors in Section 2514.
Not more titan two mezzanine floors shall be in any room
of a building.
No mezzanine floor or floors shall cover more than 33%
per cent of the area of any room.
$taR See. 2005. Stairs may be constructed with any material
allowed in this Code except that in Heavy Timber buildings
stain shall be constructed with wood treads and risers of
not less than two-iueh (2") nominal thickness, except when
built on laminated or plank inclines as required for floors,
:. 86
1958 EDITION
when they may be of one -inch (1") nominal thickness or Stair
may be constructed as required in Type I buildings. construction
in buildings four or more stories in height, stairs and (Coat'd.)
stair construction shall be as required for Type I buildings.
Stairs and exits shall be designed and constructed as speci-
fied in Chapter 33.
Sec, 2000. Roof decks shall be as required for floors in Roofs
Section 2004.
Roof covering shall be a "fire -retardant" roofiing as speci-
fied in Section 3203.
87
sections 6101-2103 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
1958 EDITION sections 21044100
CHAPTER 21 TYPE N RUQ.BINQS
Seo. 2104. Floor construction shall be of incombustible Flow
material, provided, however, that a wood wearing surface Construction
Definition
IV
Sea 2101. The structural elements of Type Buildings
or finish may be applied over such incombustible material.
shall be of incombustible materials.
Type IV, One -Hour buildings shall be of incombustible
Sec. 2105. Stairs shall be of any type permitted by this Stair
Code and shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 33. Construction
construction and one-hour fire -resistive throughout.
Walls and permanent partitions shall be of incombustible
See 2106. Roofs shall be of incombustible construction. Roof
materials.
In Type IV, One -Hour buildings, roofs may be as specified VAnstraction
Materials of construction and fire -resistive requirements
in Section 1806.
shall be an specified in Chapter 17.
Roof covering shall be a "fire -retardant" roofing r.s speci-
For requirements due to occupancy, see Chapters 6 to 15,
fied in Section 3203.
inclusive.
For requirements in Fire Zones see Chapter 16.
Structural
See. 2102. Structural framework shall be as specified in
Framework
Chapter 27 for iron and steel, Chapter 26 for concrete, and
Chapter 24 for masonry.
Exterior
See. 2103. (a) Exterior Walls. In Fire Zone No. 1, exterior
Walk and
walls within twenty feet (201) of a property line shall be of
Openings
not less than two-hour are -resistive construction.
In Fire Zone No. 2, exterior walls within twenty feet (20')
of a property line shall be of not less than one-hour fire -
resistive construction.
EXCEPTIONS: 1. In Fire Zone No. 2, exterior walls of
a building not greater In area than one thousand square
feet (1000 sq. ft.) are not required to be of one-hour fire-
reslative construction if three feet (3') or more from a
Property 11-
2. Exterior walls fronting on streets having a width of at
least fifty feet (50') in Fire Zone No. 1 and thirty feet (30')
in Fire Zone No. 2 may be of unprotected incombustible
construction. All structural members shall be fire -protected
as set forth in Table No. 17-A.
(b) Openings In Walk. In Fire Zone No. 1, openings in
a
the exterior walls within twenty feet (20') of a property line
shall be protected by Class "E" or "F" are doers or windows.
The sum of the widths of such openings shall not exceed 50
per cent of the total length of a wall in each story.
EXCEPTION: This shall not apply to openings which
ince directly upon and are fifty feet (50') or more from
the opposite side of a public street or public place.
In Fire Zone No. 2, openings not on street fronts and
which are within ten feet (10') of an adjacent property line
shall be protected by Clan "E" or "P, fire doors or windows.
Openings In Inner court walla of buildings over one story
in height shall be protected by Class "E" or "F" fire doors
or windows when the least dimension of the court is less
than forty feet (40').
88
89
UNIFORM BUII DINT" CODE
$eet<es" net TyrE V BUILDINGS
CHIAI'T'Ex' 22—
See, 2201. 'type V Buildings may
be of any materials
nnitloa allowed by this Code• shall be of one-hour fire -
V, One -Hour buildings t
resistive construction throughout. and fire -resistive requirements
of constru 17.
shall be as specified in Chaptersee ,Chapters 6 to 15,
For requirements due to occupancy'
inclusive.ts m Fire Zones, see Chapter 16.
For requiremen
three stories in height sal
Type V build igs�t story covered with solid
h3h�t�ag Sec 2262. TYP {h;ng, when
have all exteriorw° this Section' . Such shea
of w.,4 s Itsspecified applied diagonally
of woad materials:
Sheathing shall be one or more of the following
Wood not less than five-eighths inch (%"} thick'16")
not "I than seven -sixteenths inch (7/
Fiberboard with U. B. C. Standard No. 22-1-58.
thick complying not leas than one-half inch (�4") thick
OYPs sheathing Standard No. 22-2-58. thick
comply with U. B. C. Stan inch (5/16"}
co
plywood
not less than five sixteenths
with U. B. C. Standard No. 25-11-58.
exterior
gec 2.03. (a) Exterior Watts• In Fire Zone 'eonatruc
�, r d walls shall
be of not less than one-hour fire -resistive
s tion. fronting on a street haw
gC0Edth of Exterior walla be of unpro'
tug a width of at least thirty feet r m y be Protected on
teeted incombustible construction, or may
the exterior with materials as required for one- on
resistance structural
embers shall be Ste protected
as ret forth in Table WO.
hs Walls. In Fire Zones No. 2 and NO 3 open -
en feet lE)'
(b) rotith' by Class "
lugs not a street Property
line shall be p within
Of an adjacent property
or '-V fire doors or windows. over one story
openings in inner court walls of buildings ,F" fire doors
in height shall be pcourt is less
protected by Class "E" or
in windows `Niru the least dimension of the
than forty feet (la).
For anclosare of vertical openings* see Section 1706am ML .
Stair construction may tothehhe r anyof typeit
Of
ilss�
ted In
iCode end shall coupes
fD
w u '
Sections x301
1®68 EDITION
PART VI
ENGINEERING REGULATIONS—
QUALITY DESIGN OF THE
F ONSTRUCTION
MATERIALS
CIIA� 23-- LWE AND DEAD LOAD
i
1 The following doWtions give the meaning of Dedetttsd
Be& � sa used in this Chapter:
certain term® include
DEAD LOAD. The dead load of a bund ming,
the weight of the walls. permanent st construe-
roofs, and all other permanent stationary
floors omen- a part of s building,
t
tion entering into and becoming
load includes all loads except diad
ISE LOAD. The live
and lateral load°. I,e,as
See.(a) 0��, Buildings and all, parts thereof
shall be of suinclent strength to support the estimated or
actual ion to their own
mposed dead and live loads ink sditre noted .
proper dead load without
ovided that no building or put there•
where in this Code, P live l— that' those
of shall be designed f Impact ahaUlbedconsidered in the d811n specified
tlk his chapter. Imps loads occur•
any structure where impactecce designing office
(b) Spec! Provisions shall
placed upon any space
two
Boors for a load of 2000 pare wherever this load upon an
and one- unloaded nodi would ProdUCe °tresses greater than
distributed load of 50 pounds
those caused by Is uniformly
per square foot' to to be used for industrial or cohe mlerf-
In designingroresthe actual live load causes to be Put, shalt
clap purposes or art of the building ther�f. and
which the building of such bonding part
be used in the designOr apparatus
special provision shall be made for mapparatus ild cause greater
loads when suchin forsuchin Section 204.
load than spechand in other buildings, dWPed
Floors in office btions uildings subject to change �.
ptpartaup rt in additlon to an other load°, !� niy
tributed load equal to 20 pounds per
Square
Public garages andre Placed,al !Industrial
haail a"
which loaded truckspport a ooncanh� am
the
wheelloadsystems Odesigned°ded true Pled in any p°
fire %3W Any system or m� togrotinn beetDeWw
tined nhaii well e�Rablts ad -it r ci rattof viechanim
Sections 2305-2307 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
1958 EDITION Sections 207-2313
Roof When the form factor, as determined by wind tunnel tests
On open-framed structures the area used in computing WIM
wind pressure shall be one and one-half times the net area Freasure
Loads or other recognized methods, indicates vertical or horizontal
(O-Vd.) loads of lesser or greater severity than those produced by
of the framing members in the side exposed to the wind. (Courd.)
the loads herein specified, the roof structure may be de-
Greenhouses, lath houses, and agricultural buildings shall
signed accordingly.
be designed for a wind pressure of not less than 10 pounds
Snow load, full or unbalanced, or wind load shall be con-
per square foot.
sidered in place of loads as set forth in Table No. 23-B, where
(c) Design. The overturning moment calculated from the
such loading will result In larger members or connections.
wind pressure shall in no case exceed two-thirds of the
dead load resisting moment.
Reduction Sec. 2306. The following reductions in unit live loads as
may be
of Live Loads set forth in Table No. 23-A for floors shall be permitted in
used to calculate thetde d load resisting moment
the designing of columns, piers, walla, foundations, trusses,
beams, and fiat slabs.
(d) Combined Wind and Live Loads. For the purpose
Except for places of public assembly, and except for live
of determining stresses all vertical design loads except the
loads greater than 100 pounds per square foot, the design live
roof live load and crane loads shall be considered as acting
load on any member supporting one hundred and fifty square
simultaneously with the wind pressure.
feet (150 sq. ft.) or more may be reduced at the rate of0.
per cent per ware foot of area supported by the
i
ges 2308. The live loads for whip each floor or art there- Live Lead
s
ember. The reduction shall not exceed 80 per cent nor
member.
�
of of a commercial or industrial building ted
f; is or has been de- posted
"R" as determined by the following formula:
signed shall have such designed live loads conspicuously
posted by the owner in that part of each story in which they
D
R=23.1 I+L
le metal ess, and it shall ito
unlawful
evde
!
remove deface notices. The occupantf the
t,
ing shall be responsible for keeping the actual load below
WHERE
the allowable limits.
R--Reduction In per cent
Sec. 2309. Retaining walls shall be designed to resist the Retuidug
D=Dead load per ware foot of area supported by the
lateral pressure of the retained material in accordance with Waft
member
accepted engineering practice. Walls retaining drained earth
L=Unit live load per ware foot of area supported by the
ice.
may be designed for pressure equivalent to that exerted by
a fluid weighing not less than 30 pounds per cubic foot and
member
For storage live loads exceeding 100 pounds per square
having a depth equal to that of the retained earth. Any sur-
charge shall be in addition to the equivalent fluid pressure.
foot, no reduction shall be made except that design live loads
OU columns may be reduced 20 per cent.
Sec. 2810. See Section 2805. poems
{(" See- 2307. (a) General. Buildings and structures and every
Plessas portion thereof shall be designed and constructed to resist
Deshp
Sec. 2311. Walls and structural framing shall be erected Waft ladfi
the wind pressure as specified in this Section. All bracing
true and plumb in accordance with the design. Bracing shah Olsvetund
be placed during erection wherever necessary, to take care of 1inadag
systems both horizontal and vertical shall be designed and
constructed to transfer the wind loads to the foundations.
all loads to which the structure may be subjected.
(b) Wind pressure. For purposes of design the wind pres-
Se_ 2312. For provisions covering Lateral Bracing (Earth-Martliqualm
sure shall be taken upon the gross area of the vertical
quake Regulations) see Appendix Section 2312 and Seismic Ilelfulatlaus
Projection of buildings and structures at not less than 15
Probability Map of the United States on inside back cover.
Pounds per ware foot for those portions of the building less
than sixty feet (60') above ground and at not less than
Sec. 2313. Concrete or masonry walls shall be anchored Anohaluge
20 pounds per square foot for !hose portions more than
to all floors and roofs which provide lateral support for the
sixty feet (60') above ground
t-
wall or are required to provide stability for the wall. Such
horizontal forces
The wind Pressure
P upon roof tanks, roof signs, or other
P
anchorage shall be capable of resisting the
specified in this Section or a minimum force of 200 pounds
exposed roof structures and their supports shall be taken
as not Is- than 30 pounds per square foot of the groes area
per linear foot of wall, whichever is the larger.
Of the plane surface, acting in any direction. In calculating
j
the wind pressure ou circular tanks, towers, or stacks this
Pressure shall be assumed to act on six-tenths of the pro.
jected area.
9e
95
19M EDITION Sectlow 2"1-2493
CHAPTER 24—MASONRY
Sea 240L All masonry shall conform to the regulations Boope
of this Code.
Sea 2492. For the purpose of this Chapter certain terms DeAaigeen
are defined as follows:
DIMENSIONS. Dimensions given are nominal; actual
dimensions of unit masonry may not be decreased by more
than one-half inch (%,).
GROSS CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA OF HOLLOW UNITS,
the total area including cells of a section perpendicular
to the direction of loading. Fie -entrant spaces are included
in the gross area, unless theme spaces are to be occupied In
masonry by portions of adjacent units
MASONRY UNIT, any brick, tile, stone, or block *on-
forming to the requirements specified in Section 2403.
Sea 2498. The quality and design of masonry materials Malisdalis
used structurally in buildings or structures shall conform to
the requirements specified in this Chapter and to the fol-
lowing standards:
U.S.C.
MATERIALS AND DESIGN DESIGNATION
Building Bride
Clayor Shale ......... .------------- ................. ................ 24- 1-58
Sand -Lime --.................. ........... - ........................ 24- 2-58
Concrete........................................ ...........-.......... 24- 3-58
Concrete Masonry Unita
Hollow Load -Bearing ..- . ......... ........._.-......... ..... 24- 4-58
Solid Load -Bearing ----------------- :24- 5.58
Hollow Non -Load -Bearing .._............... .......- 24- 6-68
Structural Clay The
For Walls—Load-Bearing ..._............... ........ 24- 7-58
For Walla—Nonbearing ....... ....................... ..... 24-:8-58
For Floors . ........................ -............ .._............... ... 24-'9-58
Gypsum
'tion Tile or Block ......_..........._ .............. 24-10-M
General...--•--....................•-•------......................... 24-11-M
Reinforced... ----- ----------------------------- ....._... ......... ' 24-12-58
Cast Stone .... ....... ........ 24-13-58
Cement
Portland Cement ... ..................... ....................... 26- i -W
Air -Entraining Portland Cement... ..... 24-14-W
t '
Masonry Cement ........................ . ' 24-15-58
Lime
24-16-M
Quicklime ------------------------------- - — ............
Hydrated lame for Masonry Purposes 24-17-M
y
...
Mortar
Other than Gypsum ............................. 24-16-66
Aggregates for Mortar ............... _..................... 24-19-W
Testing
`
Brick .................... .............................. 24-20-M
Gypsum ..._............ .._.._. ...... .......... 24-21-58
97
SWUM 2403 UNn ORM BUILDING OODE
Mat"Jals (a) General. Every masonry unit shall have all surfaces,
(Conted.) to which mortar or grout is to be applied, capable of devel-
oping the masonry strengths required in this Chapter.
(b) .Brick Made from Clay or Shale. Building brick of
Clay or shale shall be of a quality at least equal to the
requirements set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 24-1-58. When
in contact with the ground, brick shall be of at least Grade
MW. Where severe frost action occurs in the presence of
moisture, brick shall be at least Grade SW.
(c) Brick Matte from Sand-I3me. Building brick made
from sand -lime shall be of a quality at least equal to
the requirements set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 24-2-58.
When In contact with the ground, brick shall be of at least
Grade MW. Where severe frost action occurs in the presence
of moisture, brick &hall be at least Grade SW.
(d) Concrete Brick. Building brick of concrete shall be of
a quality at least equal to the requirements set forth in
U.B.C. Standard No. 24-3-58.
(e) Concrete Massary, units. Concrete masonry units
shall be of a quality at least equal to the requirements set
forth in V.B.C. Standards Nos. 24-4-58 or 24-5-58 when used
for bearing walls or piers, or when in contact with ground or
exposed to the weather; or equal to the requirements set
forth in U.B.G. Standard No. 24-6-58 when used for nonbear-
ing purposes and not exposed to the weather. Solid units sub-
ject to the action of weather or soil shall be Grade A.
(f) Structural Clay Tile. Structural clay tile shall be of
a quality at least equal to the requirements set forth in
U.B.C. Standard No. 24-7-55, Grade LB when used for bearing
walls or pieta, or Grade I when exposed to the eather
or soil; or equal to the requirements set forth to wu.B.C.
Standard No. 24-8-M when used for interior non -load-bearing
Purposes; or equal to the requirements set forth in U.B.C.
m m
Standard No. 24-9-58 when used for floor construction.
(g) GypsuUnits and Gyps=%. Gypsupartition file or
block shall be of a quality at least equal to the requirements
set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 24-10-5& Gypsum shall con-
form to U.B.C. Standard No, 24-1148. Reinforced Gypsum
Concrete shall conform to V.B.C. Standard 24-12-58.
(h) Cast Building Stoma. Cast building Stone shall be
equal to the requirements set forth in U.B.C. Standard No.
24-13-58. Every concrete unit more than eighteen inches (18-)
in any dimension Shall conform to the requirements for
concrete in Chapter 26.
(i) uabaraed Clay BrW Unburned clay brick shall con-
form to the requirements speeitied in Section 2".
(j) Stane, Natural stole Shall be sound, clean, and in con-
formity with other Provisions Of this Chapter.
have ) Stracturrti Glass nadir. structural glass block Stall
faces =Vaud surfaces to allow On all all
the 1) GlissaiiBy brick shall contaSm to
otural to for bulkift brick of clay or
98
RM
1958 EDITION Seton 240E
shale, and glazed structural the shall conform to the struc- Materksis
tural requirements for structural clay tile. (COMM)
(m) Reinforcing Steel. Reinforcing steel shall conform to
the physical and chemical requirements for metal reinforce-
ment in concrete, as specified in Chapter 26 of this Code.
(n) Water. Water used In mortar, grout, or masonry
work shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of
oil, acid, alkali, organic matter, or other harmful substances.
(o) Cement. Cement for mortar shall be Types 1, II, or
III pertland cement as set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 26-1-
58, or Types I -A, H -A, or III -A air -entraining portland ce-
ment as set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 24-14-58, or Type U
masonry cement as set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 24-15-58.
EXCEPTION; Approved types of plasticising agents
may be added to portland cement Types I or 11 in
the manufacturing process, but not in excess of 12 per
cent of the total volume. Plastic or waterproofed cements
so manufactured shall meet the requirements for portland
cement as set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 26-1-58 except
in respect to the limitations on insoluble residue, air -en-
trainment, and additions subsequent to calcination.
(p) Lime. Quicklime shall conform to V.B.C. Standard
No. 24-16-58. Hydrated lime shall conform to the requirements
of U S.C. Standard No. 24-17-58. Lime putty shall be made
from quicklime or hydrated lime.
U made from quicklime, the lime shall be slaked and that
screened through a No. 16 -mesh sieve. After slaking, screen-
ing, and before using, it shall be stored and protected for not
TABLE NO. 24-A—MORTAR PROPORTIONSe
(By Vol—)
TYPE
PAIN. COM-
PRESSIVE
STRENGTH
OF 2"CUEESrD
PORT-
HYDRATED LIME
OR LIME PUTTY
MA,
SONRY
CEM
DAMP
LOOSE
AT DAYSMia.
Max.
TYPE II
AGGREGATE
— —
Not Iess
A
2,000tk••
JA**
—
than 2%
and not
moraB
7501,5
1
—
3 times
the am
Of the
C
750
—
— —
1
volumtes
Of UW
cement
D
350
1
lu 2
—
thanes
.Mormr when applied shall have a flow after suction for one minute of rot
less than 70 per cent of that immediately before suction when determined by
the method of water -mention test set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 24.15.58.
•'When plastic ec waterproof cement is used as specified in Section 2483(0},
lime e or putty may be added but not in excess of ontAet" the
volutin of cement.
99
UNMRM BUHMING CODE 1958 EDITION
TABLE NO. 24-B—ALLOWABLE SHEAR ON BOLTS
Masonry of Unburned Olay Units
DIAMETER of Bovis I
(Iadx�)
nsEDMErm
(las6al
SHEAR
(Pj
g(u
12
200
uJ(�
15
300
ii
18
400
1
21
500
1%
24
O0
Materials less than 10 days. The resulting lime putty shall weigh not
(Oostd.) less than 83 pounds per cubic foot.
(q) Mortar. 1. General. Mortar other than gypsum mor-
tar used in masonry construction shall be classified as set
forth in Table No. 24-A. Tests made to classify mortar by
compressive strength shall be as set forth in V.B.C. Standard
No. 24-18-58, using the proportions and materials proposed for
use.
2. Strength. The strength of mortar using cenentitious
materials set forth in Table No. 24-A shall meet the mini-
mum compressive strength shown. Tests to verify compli-
ance with the requirements of this Section may be required
by the Building Official. (See Section 2404.)
(r) Grout Grout shall be composed by volume, of one
part portiand cement and three parts sand, to which may
be added not more than use -tenth part lime. Sufficient
water shall be added to produce consistency for pouring
without segregation of the constituents of the grout. See Sec-
tion $713, paragraph numbered 4.
In grout spaces in brick masonry two inches (2") or more
In horizontal dimension and in grout spaces in fined -cell con-
struct(on four inches (4") or more in both horizontal dhnen-
aiwia, the grout may contain an addition of pea gravel equal
to not more than two parts by volume of cement used. Such
pea gravel shall be graded with not more than five per cent
passing the No. 8 sieve and 100 per cent passing the three-
eight1winch (%") sieve.
Grout shall attain a compressive strength of 2000 pounds
Per square inch at 28 days. Tests to verify emnpressive
strength may be required by the Building Official
(a) Mortar Lboltatioe& Masonry foundation
walls and footings shall be laid units used in e A mastter. Tar.ype
Typa
D mortar shall be used
See Section 2415 (a).' in interior nonatructuval walls
(t) Aggregates. Aggregates for mortar duan be of a qual-
ity at least equal to that set forth in U.B.0 Stamilard N0.
24-19-M.
S
(u) Rate of Absorptlem At the time of iaying, burned
clay units and sand -lime units shall have a rate of absorption
not exceeding 0.025 ounces per ware inch during a perm
of one minute. In the absorption test the surface of the unit
shall be held one-eighth inch (%') below the surface of the
water.
(v) Re -Use of Masonry Units. Masonry units may be re-
used when cleaned, whole, and conforming to the other re-
quirements of this Chapter appropriate to the type of unit
Seo. 2404. (a) General. Tests of materials shall be made Testa
in accordance with the standard method prescribed for the
material in question.
(b) Load Tests. When a load test is required, the member
or portion of the structure under consideration shall be sub-
ject to a superimposed load equal to twice the design live
load plus one-half of the dead load. This load shall be left in
position fora period of 24 hours before removal. If, during
the test or upon removal of the load, the member or portion
of the structure shows evidence of failure, such changes or
modifications as are necessary to make the structure ade-
quate for the rated capacity shall be made; or where lawful,
a lower rating shall be established. A flexural member shall
be considered to have passed the test if the maximum de-
flection D at the end of the 24-hour period neither exceeds
L >1
D = — nor D = and the beams and slabs show a
200 4000t
recovery of at least 75 per cent of the observed deflection
within 24 hours after removal of the load.
WHERE:
L= span of the member in feet
t=thickness or depth of the member in feet.
¢ Y (c) rreiindnary tests. When the strength of masonry is
to be established by preliminary tests, the tests shall be trade
in advance of the beginning of operations, using prisms built
of the same materials under the same conditions and insofar
as possible with the same bonding arrangement as for the
structure. in building the prisms, the moisture content of
the units at time of laying, the consistency of the mortar, and
the workmanship shall be the same as will be used to the
structure.
The compressive strength shall be computed by dividing
the ultimate load by the net area of the masonry turod-in
construction of the prism.
L Send geagawy. In solid masonry, test prisms for beams
and slabs shall be approximately eight inches by t inches
by twenty-five inches (8" x S" x 25"), built ins horizontal
position with unselected units laid as stretchers th lnmtting
® bond, two bricks wide and three courses high- With one -mit
inch (%-) joints. Prisma representing walla stall be ap-
proxhmately eight Inches by sixteen inches (8" x 18") In
101
1
sections 2406.2487 UNIFORM BUILDING OODE
MIXTURE
(d) Bond. The bond in gypsum masonry shall conform to
A
the requirements for bond in masonry or hollow units speci-
Compression—Bearing
fied In section 2411.
(e) Method of Laylug. All units in gypsum masonry shall
by weight of wood chips, shav-
be placed in side construction with cells horizontal. The
10
entire bearing surface of every unit shall be covered with
Modulus of Elasticity
mortar spread in an even layer, and all joints shall be Sited
Not more than three per cent
with mortar.
# Deformed dowel
Reinforced Sec. 2407. (a) General. Reinforced gypsum concrete shall
1000
Gypsum consist of a mixture of gypsum with wood chips, shavings, or
ings, or fiber.
Ooncrete fiber or other approved aggregates, premixed at the mill with
only water added at the job. Precast reinforced gypsum shall
conform to U.B.C. Standard No. 24-12-M and shall contain
not more than three per cent, and cast -in-place reinforced
gypsum concrete not more than 123 per cent of wood chips,
shavings, or Aber measured as a percentage by weight of
dry mix.
Reinforced gypsum concrete shall develop the minimum
ultimate compressive strength in pounds per square inch set
forth in Table No. 24-C when dried to constant weight, with
tests made on cylinders two inches (21) in diameter and four
inches (4") long or on two-inch (2") cubes.
Tests when required shall fonow the procedure set forth in
U.B.C. Standard No. 24-21-58.
For special inspection, see Section 305(x).
slabs
Dealgia, For established
(accordance he
in with princecast
iples of inecchhani
I
safe load, uniformly distributed, shall be taken as one-Afth
of the total load causing failure in a full-size teat panel with
the load two lines distant
applied along each one-fourth of
the clear span from the support.
The minimum, thickness of reinforced gypsum concrete
shall be two inches (2") except in the suspension system.
which shall be not less than three inches (W). Hollow precast
reinforced gypsum concrete units for roof construction shall
be not less than three inches (3") thick and the shell not less
than one -half-inch (%") thick
Precast gypsum concrete units shall be reinforced and, un-
less the shape or marking of the unit is such as to insure its
being placed right side up, the reinforcement shall be placed
symmetrically so that the unit can support its load either side
�-
UP.
In slabs of the suspension type, the reinforcement a mil
4
consist of wires with continuity through multiple spans and
anchored at the smile. The wires shall be supported in the
{
top of the slab by the roof or floor beams and shall be tightly
drawn down as near to the bottom of the slab
at old -spun
as lire protection requirements will allow, but not closer than
one-half inch (%'). Provide= shall be made in the framing
of the and bays of this system for resisting the forces
i
due to
end anchorage of the wuv& The wires shall las designed for
.-
a tsnaton in POUIlds Par feet width ofdab wu
squad to: —
w = The total Dad in Pounds per square feat
L = The clear spas in feet
a
d = The sag of the wises M feet
n
104
19M EDITION
(c) Stresses. The maximum allowable unit working
stresses in reinforced gypsum concrete shall not exceed the
values set forth in Table No. 24-D except as specified in
Chapter 23. Bolt values shall not exceed those set forth in
Table No. 24-E.
TABLE NO. 24-C— UM IULTIMATE
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
Reinforced Gypsum Concrete
CLASS
MIXTURE
COMPRESSIVE
STRENGTH
(Pounds per
Square Inch}
A
Not more than 123/ per cent
Compression—Bearing
100
by weight of wood chips, shav-
5W
10
ings, or fiber.
Modulus of Elasticity
B
Not more than three per cent
200
# Deformed dowel
by weight of wood chips, shav-
1000
>� Deformed dowel
ings, or fiber.
860
TABLE NO. 24-D—ALLOWABLE UNIT WORKING
STRESS
Reinforced Gypsum Concrete
TYPE OF STRESS
CLASS A CLASS B
(Pounds per Square Inch)
Compreasion—Flexural
125
220
Compression—Bearing
100
186
Bond and Shear
10
20
Modulus of Elasticity
200,000
600,000
Nate: RA forced anchored or electrically welded wire mash reinforcement shall
be wosidered as meeting the bond and shear require ata of this Section.
TABLE NO. 24-F—SHEAR ON ANOHOR BOLTS
AND DOWELS
Reinforced Gypsum Concrete
BOLT OR DOWEL SIZE II
(laches) 1
EMBEDMENT
(Inches)
SHEAR
(Pounds)
# Bit
4
250
34 Boit
4
350
# Bolt
4
500
34 Plain dowel
6
200
# Deformed dowel
ti
250
>� Deformed dowel
8
860
186
...K...,„ 11
IN'
Sections 2468-8416 UNIFOEM BUH.DING CODE
1858 EDITION Section/ 2410-2412
GIs"
Sec. 2468. (a) General. Masonry of ginss blocks may be
width. The facing and backing of cavity walls shall be bonded Cavity
Masonry
used in non-load-bearing exterior or interior walls and in
with three-sixteenthe-inch (3/161) diameter steel rods or Wan
openings which might otherwise be filled with windows, either
metal Use of equivalent stiffness embedded in the horizontal Masonry
isolated or in continuous bands, provided the glass black
joints. There shall be one metal tie for not more than each (Cont'd.)
panels have a minimum thickness of three and one-half
four and one-half square feet (4% sq. ft.) of wall area. Ties
inches (3%") at the mortar joint and the mortared surfaces
in alternate courses shall be staggered and the maximum
of the blocks are treated for mortar bending.
vertical distance between ties shall not exceed eighteen inches
(b) Horizontal Forces. The panels shall be restrained let-
(18"), and the maximum horizontal distance shall not exceed
thirty-six inches (36"). hods bent to rectangular shape shall
eraily to resist the horizontal forces specified in Chapter 23
be used with hollow units laid with the eells verU.
for bearing walls.
cal other walls the ends of ties shall be bent to 90 degree
(c) Size of Panels. Glass block panels for exterior walls
angles to provide hooks not less than two inches (2") long.
shall not exceed one hundred and forty-four square feet (144
Additional bonding Use shall be provided at all openings,
sq. ft.) of unsupported wail surface nor fifteen feet UW) in
spaced not more than three feet (31) apart around the per-
any dimension. For interior walls, glass block panels shall not
imeter and within twelve inches (12") of the opening. Ties
exceed two hundred and fifty square feet (250 sq. ft.) of un-
shall be of corrosion-resistant metal, or shall be coated with
supported area nor twenty-five feet (25') in any dimension.
a corrosion-resistant metal or other approved protective
(d) Mortar. Glass block shall be laid In Type A mortar.
Both vertical and horizontal mortar joints stall be at least
—ung'
(c) 11sx1mnot Height. The maximum height of cavity
one-fourth inch (14") and not more than three-eighths inch
walls shall be as specified in Section 2418 (e).
(%") thick and shall be completely tilled.
(d) Stresses, The allowable unit working stresses in cavity
(e) Expansion Joints. Every exterior glass block panel
wall construction shall not exceed the values set forth in
shall be provided with one-half-inch (%') expansion joints
Table No. 24-13. 3301t values shall not exceed those set forth
at the sides and top. Expansion joints shall be entirely free
in Table No. 24-F.
of mortar, and shall be filled with resilient material.
Seo. 2421. (a) General. Hollow unit masonry In that type Hollow
stone
Seo. 2468. (a) General. Stone masonry is that form of
of constriction made with hollow masonry units in which Unit Masonry
Masonry
construction made with natural or cast atone in which the
the mitts are all laid and not in mortar.
units are laid and set in mortar, with all joints thoroughly
t"
All units shall be laid with full face shell mortar beds.
filled.
All head and end joints ,ball be filled solidly with mortar for
(b) Construction. In ashlar masonry, bond stones uni-
a distance in from the face of the unit or wall not less than
the thickness of the longitudinal face shells.
formly distributed shall be provided to the extent of not less
than 16 per cent of the area of exposed facets
t
(b) Construction. Where two or more hollow units are
Rubble stone masonry twenty-four inches (24") or less in
used to make up the thickness of a wall, the stretcher courses
thickness shall have bond stones with a maximum spacing
shall be bonded at vertical intervals not exceeding thirty-
of three feet (3') vertically and three feet (3) horizontally,
)`
four inches (34") by lapping at least four inches (41) over
and if the masonry Is of greater thickness than twenty-four
the unit below or by lapping at vertical intervals not exceed-
inches (24"), shall have one bond stone for each six square
ing seventeen inches (171) with units which are at least 50
feet (6 sq. ft.) of wall surface on both sides
per cent greater in thickness than the units below; or by
(c) Miaimont Thlolmem Stone masonry walls squall in no
f
bonding with corrosion-resistant metal ties conforming to
the requirements for cavity walls. There shall be one metal
case have a minimum thickness of less than sixteen inches�.
tie for not more than each four and one-half square fat
be
'
s4% sq. ft.) of wall area Ties In alternate courses shalt
(d) Stresses. The allowable unit working stresses in stone
staggered, and the maximum vertical distance between ties
masonry shall not exceed the vetoes set forth is Table No.
f .
shall not exceed eighteen inches (18"), and the maximum
24-G. Bolt values shall not exceed those set forth in Table
fr
horizontal distance shall not exceed thirty-silt inches ().
No. 24-F.
Walls bonded with metal ties shall conform to the require-
menta for allowable stress, lateral support, thickness (ex-
Cavity Wan
Sec. 2416. (a) General. Cavity wall masonry is that
at typeo
cluding cavity), height, and mortar for cavity walls.
MMoaty
of construction made with brick structural clap
concrete units or any b tiwt such units
►
¢
shall be so con.
An hollow unit te
in which facingninryand backing se
completely separated ex-
strnetedS unit stresses do notream&
those set forth
cept for the metal ties which serve as bonding
is Table No. 24-G. Bolt values shah) not exceed those set
(b) Constractlem In cavity walls neither the facing Uw
forth in Table No. 24-F.
the backing shall be less Man three and inches
s
Sec 2412. (a) General. Solid masonry shall be brick, cots- Saihd
(3%') in net thickness and the cavity shall be not hal thancrate
brick, or solid load-bearing concrete masonry units, Nasomy
ono inch (1") eat hat width nor more than three inch" (2") in
laid contiguously in mortar.
108
¢
167
g
Sections 2418-2413 UNH^OM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 24-F—ALLOWABIA SHEAR ON BOLTS
For All Masonry Except Gypsum Old Unburned Clay Units
sand
Masonry
(Ocat'd.)
Granted
Masonry
DIAMETEROF I
BOLT
(Inches)
EMBEDMENT SOLID I
(Inch,&) I MASONRY
(Shea, in Pa1a8&) I
GROUTED
I MASONRY
(Shear is Pond&)
%
4
350
550
%
4
500
730
%
5
750
1100
%
6
1000
1500
1
7
1250
1850-
1%
3
1500
2250`
•Permitted only with not less than 2500 p.s.L units.
All units shall be laid with full shoved mortar joints, and
TYPE A MORTAR
all head, bed, and wall joints shall be solidly filled With
MATERIAL
mortar.
Tension
(b) Constraction. Bonding shall be by either of the fol -
Tension
)owing methods:
C°m'
1. Headers. The facing and backing shall be bonded so
Com'
that not less than four per cent of the wall surface of each
face is composed of bonders (headers) extending not lees
Flezurc
or Shear
than four inches (4") into the backing. The distance be-
Flexure
or Shear
tween adjacent full-length headers shall not exceed twenty-
No
four inches (24") either vertically or horizontally. In walls
No
in whidis a single bonder does not extend through the wall,
Yes
bonders from the opposite tides shall overlap at least four
Required
inches (4"), or bonders from opposite sides shall be covered
with another bonder course overlapping the bonder blow
at least four inches (4").
2. Metal Tia. The facing and lacking shalt be bonded
with corrosion -resistant metal ties conforming to the re-
a
quirements for cavity walls. There aha)1 be one metal tie
for not more than each four and ace -half ware feet (4%
4500 plus Psi
sq. ft.) of wall area. Ties in alternate coluses shall be stag-
gered, and the maximum vertical distance bahvesn ties shall
200
not exceed eighteen inches (191), and the maximum horl-
7.5
zontai distance aDall not exceed thirty -enc inehes (36"). Walls
? '
se bonded shall conform to the allowable stress, lateral sup-
10
port, thickness (excluding cavity), height, alad mortar r%
15
quiremento for cavity walls.
1500 to 2500 psi
(c) Moisture Content. For moisture content, sex Section
2403 (u).
(d) Stresses. All solid masonry shall be so constructed that
the unit stresses do not exceed those set forth in Table No,
r
24-G. Balt values shall not exceed those set forth in Table No.
7.5
24-F.
- tier. 2413. (a) General. Grouted masonry is that form of
B
therein as the work
1(B
INS EDITION section 2419
(b) Materials. At the time of laying, all masonry units Grouted
shall be free of excessive dust and dirt. For moisture con- Masonry
tent, ase Section 2403 (u). Only Type A mortar shall be (OonSd.)
used.
(c) Construction. Requirements for construction shall be
as follows:
1. All units In the two outer tiers shall be laid with full
shoved head and bed mortar joints.
2. All longitudinal vertical joints shall be grouted and
shall be not lees than three-fourths inch (R") in thickness.
In members of three or more tiers in thickness, interior
bricks shall be embedded into the grout so that at least
three-fourths inch (%") of grout surrounds the sides and
ends of each unit.
3. One exterior tier may be carried up twelve inches (12")
before grouting, but the other exterior tier Shall be grouted
in lifts not to exceed four inches (4") or one unit, whichever
is greater.
TABLE NO. 24-G—ALLOWABLE WORKING STRESSES
IN UNREINFORCED UNIT MASONRY'"'
-Net ace..
—Allowable working stresses psi gross esoss•sectinal area (except as noted)
1011
TYPE A MORTAR
TYPE B & C MORTAR
MATERIAL
Tension
Tension
Grade of Unit
C°m'
in
Com'
in
pression
Flezurc
or Shear
pression
Flexure
or Shear
Special inspettion
No
No
No
Yes
No
Required
Solid Brick Masonry
4500 plus Psi
250
10
200
15
7.5
2500 to .1500 psi
175
[20
10
140
15
7.5
1500 to 2500 psi
125
10
too
15
7.5
Solid Concrete Unit
Masonry
Grade A
175
6
140
12
6
Grade B
125
6
100
12
6
Grouted Masonry
4500 plus psi
350
25
12.5
2500 to 4500 psi
275
25
12.5
1500 to 2300 psi
225
25
12.5
Hollow Unit Masonry
85
12-
6-
70
lo-
5 -
Cavity Wall Maawsry
Solid units
Grade A or 2500
P plus
140-
12-
6-
Ito.
lo-
5-
Grade S 0r 15oo to
2500 Pu
too-
t2-
6-
80-
10-
5-
Hollow units
]0-
12-
6-
50-
10-
--
Scone Masonry
Cast Stone
400
84
320
8
4
Natural Stooe
140
8
4
too
B
4
Gypsum Masonry
20
—
—
20
—
—
Unburned Clay Masonry
1 30
5
4
-Net ace..
—Allowable working stresses psi gross esoss•sectinal area (except as noted)
1011
Table Na 24-H
UN11F025M sUn D1NO CODE
------------
S.8j I tg! p
sea 2414. (a) General Reinforced grouted masonry shall $chdarced
conform to all of the requirements for grouted masonry Gree ed
specified in Section 2413 and also the requirements of this Masonry
Section.
E
(b) Construction. The thickness of grout or mortar be-
tween brick and steel shall be not less than one-fourth inch
QQQQgQ
in one -half-inch QAI) horizontal mortar joints.
1!
C g
3
designed and constructed that the unit stresses do not exceed
those set forth In Table No. 24-H. Bolt values shall not
Z
exceed those sot forth in Table No. 24-F
Sea 2415. (a) General. Reinforced hollow unit masonry
4
is that type of construction made with hollow masonry units . HeVM Ulaft
M
S8$$$_
Ws
or grout, and in which reinforcement is embedded. Only Type
_s
A mortar shall be used.
(b) Construction. Requirements for construction shall be
y
gi 6a o 8
doe dos
preserve the unobstructed vertical continuity of the cells to
-`
. g r
'� ri o 6f3
Aj,
All head (or end) joints shall be solidly filled with mortar
in
19W EDITION
Sections 2413-2415
4. if the work is stopped for one hour or longer, the hori-
zontal construction joints shall be formed by stopping all
tiers at the same elevation and with the grout one inch (11)
below the top.
(d) Stresses. All grouted masonry shall be so constructed
that the unit stresses do not exceed those set forth in Table
No. 24-G. Bolt values shall not exceed those set forth in Table
24-F.
sea 2414. (a) General Reinforced grouted masonry shall $chdarced
conform to all of the requirements for grouted masonry Gree ed
specified in Section 2413 and also the requirements of this Masonry
Section.
(b) Construction. The thickness of grout or mortar be-
tween brick and steel shall be not less than one-fourth inch
(24"), except that one -fourth -inch (14") bare may be laid
in one -half-inch QAI) horizontal mortar joints.
(c) Stresses. All reinforced grouted masonry shall be so
designed and constructed that the unit stresses do not exceed
those set forth In Table No. 24-H. Bolt values shall not
exceed those sot forth in Table No. 24-F
Sea 2415. (a) General. Reinforced hollow unit masonry
is that type of construction made with hollow masonry units . HeVM Ulaft
in which certain cells are continuously filled with concrete Mammy
or grout, and in which reinforcement is embedded. Only Type
A mortar shall be used.
(b) Construction. Requirements for construction shall be
as follows,
1. All reinforced hollow unit masonry shall be )Kilt to
preserve the unobstructed vertical continuity of the cells to
-`
be filed. Walls and erose webs forming such cells to be filled
shall be full -bedded in mortar to prevent leakage of groat.
Aj,
All head (or end) joints shall be solidly filled with mortar
for a distance in from the face of the wall or unit not lees
e
than the thickness of the longitudinal face shells. Bond shall
be provided by lapping units In successive vertical COMMON
or by equivalent mechanical anchorage.
2. Vertical cells to be filled shall have vertical alig aumt
sufficient to maintain a clear, unobstructed continuous vesti-
`
cal cell measuring not koa than two inched by three i 1
(2" a 3").
3. Cleanout openings shall be provided at the bottom is of
all cells to be fined at each lift or pour of grout where inch
{
lift or pour of grout is in excess of four fest (4) In hdaht-
debre almn
Any overhanging mortar or other obstruction or
be removed from the insides of such cels walls. The C1saa-
onta shall be sealed before granting, atter UWPOCUOIL
4 Vertical reinforcement shall be held m t at r
and bottom and at intervals not exceeding 19dl*MntM 03
the reinforcement.
5. An cells containing reinforcement akanbe filled'WSW
a
with grout. Vertical cells containing rein d" be
Ailed solidly wiUk grout in lifts not exceeding eight teat (3")
!pin
koot.
111
0
Sections 2415-2417 UNIFORM BUII VINO CODE
6. When the grouting is stopped for one hour or longer,
the pour of grout otion ne ad joints e half incises (1%1) belowthe
top of the uppermost unit.
se
(c) Stress. Ail reinforced hollow unit masonry shall be
so designed and constructed that the unit stresses do not
exceed those set forth in Table No. 24-H. Boit values shall
not exceed those set forth in Table No. 24-F.
General Sea 2416. (a) Freezing All masonry shall be protected
Construction against freezing for at least 48 hours after being laid. No
Requirements masonry shall be built upon frozen material.
(b) Cording. Corbels may be built only into solid ma-
sonry wails twelve inches (12") or more in thickness. The
projection for each course in such corbel Shan not exceed
one inch (1"), and the maximum projection shall not exceed
one-third the total thickness of the wall when used to support
structural members, and not more than six inches (8") when
used to support a chimney built into the wall. The top course
of all corbels shall be a header course.
(c) Wood. No structural masonry shall be supported by
wood members.
EXCEPTIONS: 1. Wood piling as specified In Section
2847.
2. Wood floor and roof members used in horizontal
trusses and horizontal diaphragms.
3. Basement walls supporting one-sWry dwellings lat-
erally supported by wed floor members.
4. Wood walls or trusses may be used as vertical re-
sisting elements for one-story masonry buildings.
General Sec. 2417. tap [net of units. In walls or other
hedge structural members composed of different kinds or grades
of units, materials, or mortars, the maximum strew shall not
TABLE NO. vs 41KINI UMVVATHICKNESS OF
TYPE OF MASONRY
I
MAX RATIO
HEI
THICKNESSLENGTH
NOWNAL
MINDAM
THICK_
NESS
CEWJa)
Bearing Waft:
UnburnedMasonry
10
16
tr� Msse�
14
it
16
cavity Wall Masonry
18
8
Hollow unit masonry
18
8
Solid Masonry
20
8
Grouted Masonry
20
7
6
Reinforce Grouted Masonry
25
Reinforced Hollow unit Masonry
25
6
Nesbearing Waits:
Exterior Unreinforced Walls
20
Exterior Reinforced Walls
30
2
Interior Pwilitomi Unretufarced
35
2
Interior P&rUUorA Reinforced
48
2
IT
19M EDITION see" 91117
exceed the allowable stress for the weakest of the combine- General
tions of units, materials, and mortars of which the member Design
Is composed. The thickness of any facing which is used to (CeaM)
resist stress shall be not less than one and one-half inches
(W).
(b) Thickness of Waft For arbitrary limits of waft
as specified in this Chapter, nominal thickness shall be
used. Stresses shall be determined on the basis of the not
thickness of the masonry, with consideration for reductions
such as raked joints.
The thickness of masonry wane shall be designed W that
allowable ter are not
exceeded and no that mssonry walls shall noum stream specified In Me t exceed the
heigtht or ick-
ness specs iHed minimum
in thin Chapter and as get forth in Table
No. 24-I.
(c) Plein. Every structural pier whose width is less than
three times its thickness shall be designed and constructed
as required for columns.
(d) Chases and R808116m_ Cheses and recesses In masonry
walls shall bethe required strength or required are rdso an esistannceoof the walto ll.
(e) Pipes and Conduits Embedded In Masonry. No pips
or conduit shall be embedded in any structural masonry or
required fire protection.
EXCEPTIONS: I. Rigid electric conduits may be em-
bedded in structural masonry when their location has been
detailed on the approved pians.
2• Any pipe or conduit may pass vertically or horbum-
tally through any masonry by means of a sleeve at least
large enough to pass any hub or coupling on the pipe nae.
Such sleeves shall be placed not closer than three diam-
eters, center to center, nor shall they unduly impair the
strength of construction.
3. placement of pipes or conduits In unfilled tares of hol-
low unit masonry shall not be considered as embedment.
r (f) Arts and Lintels. Members supporting Mary
shall be of incombustible materials
(g) Asebwage. Masonry walls that mat or intersect shall
be bonded or anchored as required in Section 2313.
structural members framing into or supported by walls or
columns shah be anchored.
(h) Combined Awl and Flexural Strenes. Members sub-
( jeet to combined axial and flexural stresses shall be so pro-
f. f„
portioned that the quantity F. t F. shall not SNOW 1
WHERE:
f. = Computed axial unit stress, determined from total
axial load and gross area.
132
flections 2414-2418
UNIFORM RUUMING 00DE
General F. = Axial unit stress permitted by this Cale at the
Design point under consideration, if member were carry-
(Cont'd.) ing axial load only, including any increase in
stress allowed by this Section.
f" = Computed flexural unit stress.
Fb = Flexural unit stress permitted by this Code, it
member were carrying bonding load only, includ-
ing any increase In stress allowed by this Section.
(i) Allowable Reduction of Bending Stress by Vertical
Load. In calculating maximum tensile fiber stress due to
lateral forces other than earthquake forces, the maximum
tensile fiber stress may be reduced by the direct stress due
to vertical dead loads. In calculating maximum tensile fiber
stress due to earthquake forces, the maximum tensile fiber
stress may be reduced by not more than 50 per cent of the
direct stress due to vertical dead loads.
(j) Unrelnforeed Masonry. Design and construction of
elements of plain masonry shall be such that unit stresses do
not exceed those set forth in tables in this Chapter for the
various masonry units.
(k) Reinforced Masonry. 1. Design for construction. The
design and construction of reinforced masonry shall be based
on the assumptions, requirements, and methods of stress
determination specified for reinforced concrete in Chapter
2% except as specified in this Chapter.
2. Stresses. The compressive strength of reinforced ma-
sonry assumed for design may be determined by tests as set
forth under Section 2404, using as maximum working
stresses those set forth under Special Condition in Table
No. 24-I% Such working stresses shall be substantiated by
test samples of the work as directed by the Building Ofilcial.
(1) Allowable Stmises. The unit stresses to reinforcement
shall not exceed those specified for reinforcement in con-
crete. Boit values shall not exceed those set forth in
Table No. 24-F.
Beartag See. 2418. (a) General. Masonry wails shall be designed
Waft as specified in Section 241T and to withstand all vertical
and horizontal loads as specified in Chapter 23, and with due
allowance for the effect of eccentric loads.
(b) Rod Support. Beams, girders, or other concentrated
supportedoads ywall enping fleat three Inches(3) hlength pierll
nry not
Is= than four taches (4") thick or upon a metal bearing
plate of adequate design and dimensions to distribute the
loads safely on the wait or pie; or upon a continuous rein-
forced masonry member projecting not less than three tnebee
(3 the face of the well, or by other approved
Joists shall have bearing at least three Incites (3") in
length upon solid masonry at lest two -and -one fourth
inches (27A") thick; or other provisking shun be made to
distribute safely the kmws on the wall or pier.
(0) V MU In Flexural 0onsisdatsesm in computing flex-
ural whom reinforcement occurs, the effective width
114
1958 EDITION 1ledim
shall be not greater than four times the wall thickness in Bearhg
solid masonry nor more than one and one-half times the Wags
unit length in hollow masonry. (C+sat'd.)
(d) Distribution of Concentrated Loadd. The allowable
working stresses in bearing directly under concentrated
loads may be 50 per cent greater than those given for axial
compression in Tables No. 24-G and No. 24 -Ii.
In calculating wall stresses, concentrated loads may be
distributed over a maximum length of wall not exceeding the
center -to -center distance between loads.
where the concentrated loads are not distributed through
a structural element, the length of wall considered shall not
exceed the width of the bearing plus four times the wall
thickness.
Concentrated loads shall not be considered as distributed
by metal ties, nor distributed across continuous vertical
joints.
(e) Plain Masonry Walls. 1. Ratio of height or length
to thickness. The ratio of unsupported height to thickness
or the ratio of unsupported length to thickness (one or the
other but not both) for solid masonry walls or bearing par-
titions shall not exceed 20, and shall not exceed 18 for walls
of hollow masonry or cavity walls. In computing the ratio
for cavity walls, the value for thickness shall be the sum of
the nominal thicknesses of the inner and outer widths of
the masonry. In walls composed of different kinds or classes
of units or mortars, the ratio of height or length to thickness
aboii not exceed that allowed for the weakest of the com-
bination of units and mortars of which the member is
composed.
2. Minimum iblekneas. The minimum thickness of bear-
ing walls of plain masonry shall be twelve inches (12") for
the uppermost thirty-five feet (35') of their height, and shall
be increased four inches (4") in thickness for each succes-
sive thirty-five feet (351 or fraction thereof measured down-
ward from the top of the wall.
EXCEPTIONS: 1. The top story walls of a building not
exceeding three stories or thirty-five feet (35') in height,
or the walls of a one-story building, may have a wall
thickness equal to eight inches (8").
2. The thickness of unreinforced grouted brick masonry
walla may be two inches (2") less than required by this
Subsection, but in no case less than seven inches (T")
except in one-story dwellings.
3. In Group I occupancies not more than three stories in
height, masonry waffle may be of eight inches (8") nominal
thickness when not over thirty-five feet (35') In height.
Such walls in one-story single-family dwellings and one-
story private garages may be of six inches (5") nominal
thickness when not over nine feet (9') in height. pro-
vided that when gable construction Is used an additional
six feet (6') is permitted to the peak of the gable.
When a change in thickness due to minimum thickness
requirements occurs between floor levels, the greater thick-
ness shall be carried to the higher floor level.
ills
Bastions 2418-2410 UNIFORM BUIMING CODE
ANNUUM 3. Streams. The axial stress in unreinforced bearing walls.
WWft or portions thereof, shall not exceed the values set forth in
(mrd') Table No. 24-0. Bolt values shall not exceed those met forth
In Table No. 24-F.
(f) Reinforced Memory Wails. 1. Klainawn thio.
The minimum nominal thickness of reinforced masonry bear-
ing walls shall be six inches (8"), and the ratio of height or
length to thickness shall not exceed 25.
2. Stresses. The axial stress in reinforced masonry bear-
ing
earing walls shall not exceed the value determined by the fol-
lowing formula:
h
f. = 0.20 f. `1 –(—�
` 34t
WHERE:
f. = Compressive unit axial stress in masonry wall
f'. = Approved ultimate compressive masonry stress
as established in section 2417 (k) 2.
3. Beinforeesuent. All walls using stress permitted for
reinforced masonry shall be reinforced with both vertical
and horizontal bars.
The minimum area of total reinforcement shall be not Is=
than 0.002 times the groes cross-sectional area of the wall,
not more than two-thirds of which may be used in either
direction. Principal wall steel shall be limited to the maxi-
mum spacing of four feet (V) on center. The minimum
diameter shall be three-eighths inch (#').
Horizontal reinforcement shall be provided in the top of
footings, at the top of wall openings, at roof and floor levels,
and at the top of parapet walls. Only horizontal reinforce-
ment which is continuous in the wall shall be considered in
computing the minimum area of reinforcement.
If the wall Is constructed of more than two units in thick-
ness, the reinforcement shall be equally divided into two
layers, except where designed as retaining wails.
In bearing walls of every type of reinforced masonry there
shall be not less than one one -half-inch (%') bar or two
three -eighths -inch (%") bens on all sick of, and adjacent to,
every opening which exceeds twenty-four inches (24") in
either direction, and such bars shall extend not less than 40
diameters, but in no case less than twenty-four inches (24")
beyond the corners of the opening. The tars required by this
paragraph shall be in addition to the minimum reinforcement
required.
B 8 Mae. 2410. (a) tienecuL Nonbearing walls may be con-
WASS atreuted of any masonry as specified in this Chapter.
(hb 111ek Every nonbearing masonry wall shall be
so ronat ructed ami have a sufficient thickness to withstand
all vortical loads and horizontal loads. where specifically
reget9rad by Chapter 2.3. but in no cam shall the thickness
14 each wails flachating plwter when applied) be lei than
iha vaibess mt forth In Table No. 24-L
lie
1058 EDITION
(e) Wire -Mesh Reinforcement. Wire -mesh reinforcement
may be used to resist tensile stresses when embedded in
plaster applied to the surface of any nonbearing wail. Wire -
mesh reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of
Chapter 26, and plaster &hall conform to the requirements
of Chapter 47.
(d) Anchorage. All nonbearing partitions shall be an-
chored along the top edge to a structural member or a sus-
pended ceiling, or shall be provided with equivalent anchor-
age along the sides.
All exterior nonbearing walls shall be anchored along all
edges to structural members.
Sec, 2420. (a) (ienersL Masonry columns shall be con- GAasnm
strutted of reinforced masonry and as required by this
section.
(b) Limitiag 1Ma3es510ns, The least dimension of every
masonry column shall be not less than twelve inches (12"),
unless designed for one-half the allowable stresses, in which
case the minimum least dimensions shall be eight inches
(8"). No masonry column shall have an unsupported length
greater than 20 times its least dimension.
AIlo computed Loads. e e maxiformula:
/Toad on columns
alai) Drr
P = A. (0.18f'. + 0.65 p.f.) [ i – { 3;t f
WHERE:
P = Maximum concentric column axial load
A. = The gross area of the column
f'. = Approved ultimate compressive masonry stress; as
established in section 2417 (k) 2
p. = Ratio of the effective cress sectional area of vertl-
cal reinforcement to the gross area, A.
f. = See Section 2620 (c)
h = Unsupported height of column In Inches
I = Thickness of column In Inches
(d) RelnforcesmaL 1. Vertical Reinforcement. The ratio
(p.) shall be not less than 0.5 per cent nor more than four per
cent. The number of bars shall be not less than four, nor
the diameter less than three-eighths inch
Where lapped splices are used, the amount of lap shall be
sufactent to transfer the working stress by bond, but in no
case shah the length of lapped splice be less than 30 bar
diameters, and wedded splices shall be full butt welded.
2. Ties. Lateral ties shall be at least one-fourth inch
(34") in diameter and shall be spaced apart not over 16 bar
diameters, 48 tie diameters, or the least dimension of the
column lateral ties shall be placed not le" than one and
once -half inches (1%") and not more than five inch" (6")
from the surface of the column.
114
section 2501
kN Y"
UNIFOBM BUILDING CODE
1958 EDITION QeoHei >fi9!
See. 2582. Except where otherwise provided, the following
CHAPTER 25—WOOD
terms and symbols used in this Chapter have the meaning and j
Indicated In this Section: NeUWor
See. 2501, (a) Quality and Design. The quality and design
GLUED LAMINATED LUMBER, lumber composed of an
of wood members and their fastenings used for load -support-
assembly of wood laminations bonded with adhesives in
ing purposes shall conform to the provisions of this Chapter,
which the laminations are too thick to be classed as veneers.
and to the following standards:
See definition of structural Glued Laminated Lumber.
U.B.C.
GLUED BUMT-UP MEMBERS. structural members, the
\4ATEalALS AND DESIGN
Grading
DESIGNATION
sections of which re Imposed of combinations of sawn
a
lumber, in which all
All Species of Lumber .-----....._--_......................
25- 1-58
lumber or plywood, or glued laminated
parts are bonded together with adhesives.
Cypress—Tidewater Red -------------------------------_-
25- 2-58
25- 3-58
GRADE (Lumber), the classification of lumber in regard
Douglas Fir, Coast Region ..................._..--
Douglas Fir, Inland Region .................... ..__
25- 4-58
to etre and utility ht accordance with U.B.C. Standards
ng
Hemlock, Eastern .................... _..._......_............
25- 5-58
Nos. 25-1-58 to 25-10.58.
Hemlock, West Coast..
25- 6-58
GRADE—STRESS (Lumber), a lumber grade defined in
Larch ....._._----- .----•- _....-__..._____.._._
25- 7-58
such terms that a definite working stress may be assigned
Oak, Red and White ............ ........... _...._.
25- 8-58
to it as set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 25-1-58.
Pine, Southern .................•--------------------- __--- .....
25-9-58
NOMINAL SIZE (Lumber), the commercial mise design-
Redwood..............................................................
25-10-58
tion of width, and depth, in standard sawn lumber and glued
Douglas Fir Plywood and Softwood ...-_.......__.
25-11-M
laminated lumber grades; Somewhat larger than the standard
net size of dressed lumber, in accordance with U.B.C. Stand -
All Other Species and Grades
and No. 25-1-58.
(See Table Na. 25-E) •-••••-•---------- --•....... ...........
25-12-58
NORKAL LOADING, a design load that stresses a mem-
Structural Glued Laminated Wood
ber or fastening to the fun allowable stress tabulated in
this Chapter. This loading may be applied for approximately
All Species of Lumber ................ ....
25-13-58
10 years, either continuously or cumulative)gg,and 90 per
Douglas Fir ................... ........_.......... _......... ......
25-14-58
cent of this full maximum design load may A applied for
Pine, Southern ............ ...........--__--___-----------_-----
25-15-58
the remainder of the life of the structure. See U.B.C. Stand-
Hardwood-------- -_.---------------------- _.__---- ------------ --
25-16-58
and No. 25-1-58.
Treated Wood .... ........... ........- ------ _.--.......... _.........
25-17-58
PLYWOOD—DOUGLAS FIR, a built-up board of lami-
veneers conforming to U.B.C. Standard No. 25-11-58.
natedWood
Poles ----. _ .. -_- -
25_18g
STRUCTURAL GLUED LAMINATED LUMBER, any
Round Timber Plies ..................._......_......_.___
25-19-58
member comprising an assembly of laminations of lumber in
Spaced Woman ..._.._....._..._.......... _._.......... __-_..
25-20-58
which the grain of all laminations is approximately parallel
longitudinally; in which the laminations are bonded with
Flexural and Axial Loading . ---.
- -- -
25-21-58
adhesives; and which is fabricated in accordance with U.B.C.
Joints
Standards Nes. 25-13-58, 25-14-58, 25-15-58, or 25-16-58.
Timber Connectors .................... ._........ ._..___..
25-22-58
SYMBOLS AND NOTATIONS, as used in these regula-
Bolts..........
25-23-58
tions, are donned as follows:
Drift Bolt and Wood Screws .......................-...
25-24-58
A= area square inches of net Groes section,
Lag Screw ..._..._._.-.--... ..--._•-.---_.............-.._-
25-25-58
b=breadth of beam or of cross section in inches.
t
Flat Panels with Stressed Coverings ....___...__.
25-26-58
c =compression parallel to grain, allowable unit stream
Adhesives ..._.._........»........... _. .............
25-27-58(n
pounds per squere inch.
d=least dimension of column, in inches.
Test for Gin Joints ........ ................_._._..........._.
25-28-58
E=1110"118 of elasticity.
]Plank ami Beam ......-.-.•
25-29-58
f=extrerns fiber in banding, allowable unit stress In
.................
pounds per squ— Inch
(b) Workmanship. All members shall be framed, anchored
in Inches.
g= deji t pth of tea} u r, allowable unit strew In pounds
tied. and braced S as to develop the s
strength
per square inch
necessary for the for which t Y
I=moment of inertia of member.
(c) Fabrication. Preparation,tion, and installation
1= span in inches or laterally unsupported length of
a column in inches.
of worm members and glues and mecksatd devices fort
f
"
N = allowable unit stress on inclined surface is pounds
practices- good
e $gnre
P(Turn to page ISS.)
lite
in
TWO Na WA
UNUPORK BUUMING COOR
ESC
S4 L
Fi
A
ri
Wz
F4
14
14
E72
T T T
00
z
Vo
:D
xM
R
lag
- - - - - -tib
Sal
04
wl
rt -V -0
-0 -P
z
l
0 " o .6
c+t-V
C-3 C-13 t-0 C-3
o0
Von
0
'Tt.
ltliltei
qqq CkAtZ
viae
r4 g. §. 1
1,14
0 DI os
ismsuglt
ok rr.
alga
pan
404
UA
ign zDrl!lDDN
z
T&W Na WA (091W
I=
ri
ri
14
14
E72
00
z
Vo
:D
xM
R
Sal
04
wl
z
l
0 " o .6
�gro
o0
Von
'Tt.
0 DI os
ismsuglt
ok rr.
404
z
4A
Z2� 2 ut' lo
e
E-
11.0
Ego b r
-fie
a tu i 4� 14 r.
r.
g,l I
W110M 9I -OT -:3 09 loMg
[-. %- Iz
Igo
lillflis 11 sift
Hourffi
:Dz
I=
� — 1111 1— 111--l—r"'N"
P
TAND No. WA (C=VqL) UNIFFORK BURNING CODE
bry
.000
00
go
1?
CJ
i 70
r op
cogen
:6 g C!
P4
0
,
Mz
so -ss -g cc t• IN s 000 0-0 0-0
Cq*l 4qo
O
i-1HHHN
4,4 0. 1504 104 2 0" OM 104 0 rq
gw
q
co
OID at
U.,01
'00 go"Co" ca
MM� "CA L
4D
me
ZZ
00
v vAP,* cj
co
;9AW4— m9
Iza
S Cb IRE
F -H - -ViM
----SASti
mMNOWMNO
XXZZ lzzzz
.81
114 IK 1 14 1
a -W
go
<
41140 0
ihs 0
Z a
VIE
Ix Cl
low EDITION
F�
a
2"M No. W -A (CmrL)
M
Ct
so -ss -g cc t• IN s 000 0-0 0-0
Cq*l 4qo
6tcoi NN
aqoq g� q tq riot! kqzcq tP"ooqkqci
NCI
i-1HHHN
4,4 0. 1504 104 2 0" OM 104 0 rq
co
OID at
AA
me
9
co
;9AW4— m9
XXZZ lzzzz
M
TWW Na 25-A (OMM)
UNUPORM BUn-DING CODE
ki7LI
6
x
z
O
,
to
W
Cli
Om
Os'i0N0*,a'tetAOZAHOmOwSO OCww0]0
00
---- k'5=0 0 U'3 kM m
C4
0,1
vvvvvmv
00
mmt-vv" tIt"t1:1�i0o
It -i �t .Oi
to
14
t- So a
jj?jk k
0 :3 :3 =
v 42 to WC41000
312-11"
ava 42 w ul
Hlfluu
0
a
ki7LI
w
o�aFi dd 7u0�o-o3C�V� cUCt� O jai
S�pjyO�myyyyyy ° �mmo v°p7 w tr�
d. �' % oy °°
�'"O1 °0L3p+,}kpp.1:7,4R'.0Go ,y yo�
moov'04y dP. p�R
� ° ^P�iw�mmi�7vp Ck cmi °�°°'�
CMyF ��yQ d t^ mR1F 'p Yi C �,C
iW y N � Nm
m
OFW�'y C..�i U� �'i7
-MAm
_ (pr{ w v v 7m� omi
19 yip Dov Om COGC C°"��+F'C� ° �N pw 0-33
VQ F w w m
�, ,V�u'GOm CWFR at Nt' w�y�"�0 1.08- r&. AC3
�ammu>5 m vm^ s°�as Zvi
p �camm a ommo�a ;z!C4 xY mFd
bow be 4)
��v^o°-Cad �VuFis�o2,9x�Ri;.S fo?. HCS CQm
O U ^
L7 j'jCce... W'a
10
Pas
y '$
N P�47 btl C7'
EA
0 IN
3 CS
arc c=T y�
pQ �f a
102,
o
w S� M C L
CO`s r.m =a'C.x r» - °
b6 C ... w
v� .C.4`w
° �^
9 a0
be E
1
1958 EDITION
Q �
84G
� O
O�
MILEWas
7A v'i'a}
N
m
Vic
Z115 Z 15
Oo�
�a
116Q$
C
M
P
T" NO. 25-8
m
W pW°� Rtioe
Vr! �
W ti
� ti�t�
•*q
y
y
.°
~�
6eeca :�
8$
$8$
8ti$
8 PUR
88
8
�
8w
GFGF=,,••
G✓p.w. d7a �.
FINHM `.4w.
a
o�
_07Ci
MOQO2pC
Woo UR
�•ii$`
mr 0
M
r4
Y
W�
31�
OR
o
M
q
u
pp
OA
A
�
a
its
m
Table No. 25-C
09
eel N' ..o o12
W
as._1FZ
�
L na4'a
rz
W
<a
=zWT
88 8g gg g 8
.�
W
pppp pp pp 8 p p 88
N6
e
z
0 `
w
ILYl,
Y
WIZ
a
O<�
�a
28av
Qo
�Pli
vQQ
�cn
ns E
iSN 2525a 25N N
� e
nCKA
O
N
m
xz
UNIFORM BUHMING 00M IBM EDITION
Table No. 26-0 (ComVL)
e
aL=
eel N' ..o o12
v
0
Rm
'S-$$$��8�88888888
:Jv,L
ry �
m7+
0
s g QQ QQqq gy
g N p NN N$ H gg$
9
88 8g gg g 8
.�
pppp pp pp 8 p p 88
N6
O
".'
.o�
xsxx`3- ` x� -
^e2��:YA�c
•.
WIZ
a
O<�
.1-r=
•E
8g$ gg g� E g o
�Pli
[i
�cn
ns E
iSN 2525a 25N N
zd?
a'
N
Table No. 26-0 (ComVL)
e
aL=
eel N' ..o o12
:Jv,L
' aa_
OZ•= -8g
88 8g gg g 8
h
g Q
WIZ
a
O<�
.1-r=
•E
8g$ gg g� E g o
[i
_.
ns E
iSN 2525a 25N N
zd?
a'
N
}'U�
r� QQ qq gg
I1wa«
Ta
9.y
= «
QQQQ gg QQQ
--- -- Ng
Q
s= ti
0
Sop pp 88 8 88 B o
x
y141
x xx x
�z
s3-
zzz zz zz z z z
�Q
F
zz
22
M
N�zw-A
_
<OO�B<y?O�E<g< �^
Kw
Ca
q:
i nx� x=� " N
_
:«3:
m — z z Zz 2 2 x
_�Z
R)z
�nK
MI
a
p
Table No. 25-D
It
UNIFORM BunMING CODE
N Ne1HN NN
4444 r* r H
U1203U1203am tl� e9i 40 M00 00 N
TAW Na "
x
s
► $ I's
nn nn nn er
�� ��
x
$
�sa1l1111
eye
9:1
yxx
NN HN 00N b00 toN
:i ri :+.ti
O F
'� 3�•S �^
" 0$
trIW
��gp+
ri ri ey ey Ti rt
Fg Oj
22
go to 4 40
tiff ti;moi ties AA A9
�y QQj Ool
0000 WW SON
N . s
cit
14
��a'.T
O p(
F�xw�zS��
x� 2.'E
NN 01� 00 On I bb
c
Table Na 25-E UNIFoRm BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 25 -E- -GROUP CLASSIFICATION OF THE
GRADES OF TWO-INCH LUMBER NOT INCLUDED
IN TABLE NO. 25-A
1958 EDITION Sections 2502-1100111
P = total load in pounds. Defiftit1ees
q = oompresaion perpendicular to grain, allowable unit and
stress in pounds per square inch. Notations
R=reaction, in pounds
t = tension parallel to grain, allovnMe unit stress in
pounds per square inch.
V =vertical shear at section under consideration.
lid = ratio of length to least dimension.
P/A
=compressive strength or maximum axial load, in
pounds per square inch.
s = augle between direction of lead and the direction
of grain, in degrees.
TREATED WOOD. Pressure treatment or the term "pres-
sure impregnated with an approved preservative" is that
treatment of wood which is in accordance with U.B.C. Stand-
ard No. 25-17-58.
Sea. 2M& (a) Required Shea. Wood members shall be of She of
sufficient size to carry the dead and required live loads with- Stractwai
out exceeding the allowable unit stresses as hereinafter blembess
specified.
, (b) Sias MW&ermlna#om6 Minimum sizes of lumber mem-
bers required by this Code refer to nominal sizes. U.B.C.
Standards Nos. 25-1-58, 25-13-58, 25-14-58, 25-15-58, and 25-
16-58 dressed sizes shall be accepted as the minimum net
sizes conforming to nominal sizes. Nominal sizes may be
shown on the plans. Computations to determine the required
sizes of members shall be based on the net dimensions (ac-
tual sizes) and not the nominal sizes. If rough sizes or sizes
or shapes other than U.B.C. Standards Nos. 25-1-58, 25-13-
58, 25-14-58, 25-15-58, or 25-16-58 dressed sizes are to be
used, the actual net sizes shall be specified on the plans.
Sea. 2506 (s) Anowahis Unit Stress on Plans. Where Allewalde
structures are designed for use of stress grade lumber, Unit Stresses
structural glued laminated lumber, for plywood used struc-
tuand the
rally,
'the shall be shown 1e on the plans filedwi unit stresses or the se building
department.
(b) Strewes. 1. General. Except as hereinafter provided,
stresses shall not exceed the allowable unit stresses in
pounds per square inch for the respective species and grades
and grade combinations as net forth do Table No. 25-A for
solid sawn lumber; Table No. 25-B for Douglas
Fir plywood; and Tables No. 25-C and No. 25-D for struc-
tural glued laminated lumber.
For modification of allowable unit streams for structural
glued laminates lumber, nes also Section 2513.
The allowable unit shames in extreme fibes In bending
"r as sat forth ht Tabes No. 25-C and No. 25-D ably W
members with the wile face of the lamination perpendicular
to the direction of the load. When the wide fate of the
lamination In parallel to the dtrwUc t of the 1044 the bend-
ing
endleg streseen as sec forth in Table No. 25-A shalt apgly.
The allawable unit sUwm as aK forth In Tables No.
25-A, No. 25-C and No. 25-D and adjustments thereof, a"
stresses as sat forth in Table No. 25-B, apply also to lumber,
to structural glued laminated lumber. and to exterior type
Il<3
CXiFORM
SPEC]ES
�ttKl\tU.ltBUILDING
CODE
STANDARD
NUMBER
GROUP I
Douglas B'ir (Coast Region)' construction 125- 3-58
Douglas Fir (Inland) No. 1 25- 4-58
Larch Western No. 1 25- 7-58
GROUP U
Bald Cypress (Tidewater
Red Cypress)
No. 2
25-2-58
Fir, White
No. 1
25-12-58
Fir, White
Construction
25-12-58
Hemlock, Eastern
No. 1
25- 5-58
Hemlock, West Coast'
Construction
25- 6-58
Pine, Red (Norway Pine)
No. 1
25-12-58
Redwood, California
Select Heart
25-10-58
Spruce, Eastern
No. 1
25-12-58
Spruce, Sitka
Construction
25-12-58
GROUP III
Douglas Fir (Coast Reg€mP
Standard
25- 3-58
Douglas Fir (Inland)
No. 2
25-4-58
Fir, Balsam
No. 1
25-12-58
Fir, White
Standard
25-12-58
Hemlock, Eastern
No. 2
25- 5-58
Hemlock, West Coast'
Standard
25- 6-58
Larch, Western
No. 2
25- 7-58
Pine, Ponderosa, Lodgepole,
Sugar, Idaho White
No. 1
25-12-M
Red Cedar, Western
Construction
25-12-58
Red Cedar
No. 1
25-12-58
Cedar, Incense
No. 1
25-12-58
Redwood, California
Sap Common
25-10-58
Spruce, Englemann
No. 1
25-12-58
Spruce, Sitka
Standard
j 25-12-M
GROUP IV (See Section 2504(b) para. 5)
Douglas Fir (Coast Region) Utility
B 25- 3-58
Fir, White No, 2
25-12-M
Fir, White Utility
25-12-58
Hemlock, Western Utility
25- 6-58
Pine, Ponderosa, Lodgepole,
Sugar. Idaho White No. 2
25-12-58
Red Cedar. Westernti y
25-12-58
Red Cedar 2
25-12-58
Cedar, Incense No. 2
25-12-58
Redwood, California Mem table
25-10-M
Spruce. Euglemann No. 2
25-12-M
Spruce. Sitka Util€ty
25-12-58
1958 EDITION Sections 2502-1100111
P = total load in pounds. Defiftit1ees
q = oompresaion perpendicular to grain, allowable unit and
stress in pounds per square inch. Notations
R=reaction, in pounds
t = tension parallel to grain, allovnMe unit stress in
pounds per square inch.
V =vertical shear at section under consideration.
lid = ratio of length to least dimension.
P/A
=compressive strength or maximum axial load, in
pounds per square inch.
s = augle between direction of lead and the direction
of grain, in degrees.
TREATED WOOD. Pressure treatment or the term "pres-
sure impregnated with an approved preservative" is that
treatment of wood which is in accordance with U.B.C. Stand-
ard No. 25-17-58.
Sea. 2M& (a) Required Shea. Wood members shall be of She of
sufficient size to carry the dead and required live loads with- Stractwai
out exceeding the allowable unit stresses as hereinafter blembess
specified.
, (b) Sias MW&ermlna#om6 Minimum sizes of lumber mem-
bers required by this Code refer to nominal sizes. U.B.C.
Standards Nos. 25-1-58, 25-13-58, 25-14-58, 25-15-58, and 25-
16-58 dressed sizes shall be accepted as the minimum net
sizes conforming to nominal sizes. Nominal sizes may be
shown on the plans. Computations to determine the required
sizes of members shall be based on the net dimensions (ac-
tual sizes) and not the nominal sizes. If rough sizes or sizes
or shapes other than U.B.C. Standards Nos. 25-1-58, 25-13-
58, 25-14-58, 25-15-58, or 25-16-58 dressed sizes are to be
used, the actual net sizes shall be specified on the plans.
Sea. 2506 (s) Anowahis Unit Stress on Plans. Where Allewalde
structures are designed for use of stress grade lumber, Unit Stresses
structural glued laminated lumber, for plywood used struc-
tuand the
rally,
'the shall be shown 1e on the plans filedwi unit stresses or the se building
department.
(b) Strewes. 1. General. Except as hereinafter provided,
stresses shall not exceed the allowable unit stresses in
pounds per square inch for the respective species and grades
and grade combinations as net forth do Table No. 25-A for
solid sawn lumber; Table No. 25-B for Douglas
Fir plywood; and Tables No. 25-C and No. 25-D for struc-
tural glued laminated lumber.
For modification of allowable unit streams for structural
glued laminates lumber, nes also Section 2513.
The allowable unit shames in extreme fibes In bending
"r as sat forth ht Tabes No. 25-C and No. 25-D ably W
members with the wile face of the lamination perpendicular
to the direction of the load. When the wide fate of the
lamination In parallel to the dtrwUc t of the 1044 the bend-
ing
endleg streseen as sec forth in Table No. 25-A shalt apgly.
The allawable unit sUwm as aK forth In Tables No.
25-A, No. 25-C and No. 25-D and adjustments thereof, a"
stresses as sat forth in Table No. 25-B, apply also to lumber,
to structural glued laminated lumber. and to exterior type
Il<3
seotiH SM UNnronm DUUMING OODE 1958 EDITION
AllowabD plywood that have been pressure -impregnated by an ap-
Unit proved preservative.
stns Studs, joists, rafters, planking two inches (2") or more
(Osnru.) in depth, beams, stringers, posts and similar load-bearing
members shall be of at least the minimum grades set forth
in Table No. 25-A and in Groups L II, and Ill set forth in
Table No. 25-E. Lumber set forth in Group IV of Table No.
25-F may be used only under conditions specifically approved
by the Building Official.
Stresses for grades and species other than those tabu-
lated shall be established by the Building Official; for sawn
lumber when determined in accordance with U.B.C. Standard
No. 25-1-58; and for species and grade combinations used in
structural glued laminated lumber when determined in ac-
cordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 25-13-58.
Allowable unit stresses of plywood other than Douglas Fir
shall be determined according to the species.
2. Stresses in poles or piles used as structural members.
Induced stream in pounds per square inch for normal load-
ing of round poles or piles when used as structural members,
except modulus of elasticity which shall be the same as for
sawn lumber, shall not exceed 60 per cent of the basic unit
working stresses for clear lumber for the species as set forth
in U.B.C. Standard No. 25-1-58, and the pieces shall meet the
requirements of U.B.C. Standard No. 25-18-58 for poles or
U.S.C. Standard No. 25-19-58 for piles.
(c) Identification. Ali species set forth in Tables No. 25-A
and No. 25-E shall be used only when identified by a grade
mark of, or certificate of inspection issued by, an approved
lumber grading or inspection bureau or agency.
All plywood when used structurally, including among
others, use for siding, roof and wall sheathing, subnooring,
diaphragma, and built-up beams, shall conform to perforam-
ance standards for its type in U.B.C. Standard No. 25-11-58;
it shall be identified as to grade and glue type by an approved
agency. In addition to the above requirements all plywood
when permanently exposed in outdoor applications shall be
of exterior type.
The allowable unit stresses for structural glued lami-
nated lumber as set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 25-13-58
and in Tables No. 25-C and No. 25-D shall be used only when
the material and workmanship are in accordance with
U.B.C. Standards Nos. 25-13-58, 25-14-58, 25-15-58, or 25-
16-58, respectively, and are inspected and identified in a
manner meeting the approval of the Building Official.
(d) Conditions of ServMa. Tie allowable unit stream as
not forth in Table No. 25-A and adjustments thereof apply
to lumber used tinder conditheas continuously dry, such as
In most covered structure& under each cone oflase
the modulus of ty maybe 10 per amt for r
lumber that Is surface seasoned before loading to the maxi-
mum allowable load. Except for cominvankin parallel and
compression bar to the grain. they also apply to
lumber used tinder conditions where the moisture content of
the wood In in when � at or the saturation
ously subnnrg*&
When used under continuously wat conditicau, the allow,
in
able unit stresses as set forth in Table No. 25-A for com- Allowable
pression parallel to grain shall be reduced 10 per cent and Unit
for compression perpendicular to grain shall be reduced Stere
one-third. (()oat%)
The allowable unit stresses as act forth in Tables No.
25-A, No. 25-C4 and No. 25-D and adjustments thereof
apply to sawn lumber and to structural glued laminated
lumber that has been pressure -impregnated by an approved
process and to the heartwood of durable species under dry
or other conditions of use,
The allowable unit stresses for structural glued laminated
lumber as set forth In Tables No. 25-C and No. 25-D shall
be for dry conditions of use where the moisture content in
service is less than 15 per cent, as in most covered struc-
tures. For wet conditions of use, the maximum percentage
of the dry -use stress permitted shall be as specified in the
footnotes applicable to the respective tables.
(e) Adjustment of Allowable Unit Stream for Duration
of Load. The allowable unit stresses as set forth in Table
No. 25-A for sewn lumber and Tables No. 25-C and No. 25-D
for structural glued laminated Iumber, and the values for
mechanical fastenings as hereinafter established, shall be
applicable as follows for the various durations of loading:
1. Where a member is fully stressed to the maximum
allowable stress, either continuously or cumulatively for
more than 10 years under the condition of maximum design
load, the allowable unit stresses used in the design shall not
exceed 90 per cent of those in the tables.
2. When the duration of the full maximum load does not
exceed the period indicated below, the allowable unit stresses
shall be increased in the tables as follows:
15 per Cent for two months duration, as for snow
25 per cent for seven days duration
33 1/3 per cent for wind or earthquake
100 per ant for impact
Allowable emit stresses given In the tables for normal load-
ing conditions may be used without regard to Impact U the
stress induced by impact does not exceed the allowable tett
stream for normal loading.
The above increases are not cumulative. For combined
durations of loading, the resulting structural members shall
not be smaller than required for a longer duration of loading.
(f) Seriseatal Shear Adjustment. The vitt strew In hori-
zontal shear in member`s of rectangular section strewed in
flexure shall be computed by use of the following formula:
SR
H =
Wim: 2 b b
R=reaction, pounds, under the following conditions:
(1) Distribution of load to adjacent beams through f400r-
Ing or other members shall be considered.
(2) All kinds uniform or concentrated, within a distance
of the height of the beam from the nearest sapport.
shall be
135
•.N ,
see" 4604
UND3'OUN BUILDING CODE
1858 EDITION Sections 4604-2.686
Allowable
(3) All concentrated loads located at a distance from the
unit
support of one to three times the height of the beam
c q
Stresses
shall be considered as placed at three times the height
N =
(008m)
of the beam from the support.
c sinle + y cosy
(g) Adjustments of Allowable Unit Stresses for Joist De.
Sec, 4605. Columns, posts, struts, and other members in Cohmsuiis
tails. 1. Compression. In joists supported on a ribbon or
ledger board and spiked to the studding, the allowable stress
compression parallel to grain shall be designed structurally
in compression perpendicular to grain may be increased
as provided in this Section
50 per cent„
(a) Solid Columns. Simple solid wood columns consist of
Allowable unit stresses in compression perpendicular to
a single piece of sawn lumber or structurally glued lami-
grain as set forth in Table No. 25-A shall be increased in
nated lumber.
accordance with the following factors for bearing less than
The safe load in pounds per square inch of net cross-
six inches (6") in length and located three inches (3") or
sectional area, for simple columna or other solid members
more from the end of a timbm
stressed in compression parallel to grain, shall be deter-
mined by the following formula:
Length of bearing
0.319
(inches) 1 1% 2 3 4 6 or more
P/A=
Factor 1.75 1.38 1.25 1.19 1.13 1.10 1.00
(1/d)-
but the maximum unit load (P/A) shall not exceed the
allowable unit stress in compression parallel to grain (c) as
For stress under washers or small plates the same factor
set forth in Tables No. 25-A, No. 25-C, and No. 25-D.
may be taken as for a bearing, the length of which equals
Columns shall be limited in maximum length between
the diameter of the washer.
points of lateral support to I= 50d, except that the indt-
2. Shear. Allowable unit stresses in shear for joint details
viduai members of spaced columns shall be limited in maxi:
Shall be 150
forth in TablesNo. 85 A, 1�Tor wear values as set
25-C, and No. 25-D.
mum length to 1= 80d.
The safe load on a solid column of round cross section
In computing the horizontal shear in eccentric joints the
shall not exceed that permitted for a square column of the
same cross-sectional area
effective depth of the member shall be assumed as its actual
depth less the distance from the unloaded edge to the nearest
The safe load on a simple solid column of other than rec-
edge of the nearest connector. Where bolts alone are used,
tangular or round cross section shall be determined by the
following formula:
the distance from the unloaded edge to the center of the
nearest bolt shall be substracted.
s�
P/A =
(h) Boles and Notches. Girders, beams, or joists may
2.727(1/r)$
be notched or bored in any part of the section within three
Wll :
times the beam depth from either support. Such notches or
holes shall not exceed one-fifth of the depth of beam except
r = least radius of gyration of the section.
at point of support and as hereinafter provided.(b)
Where girders beams, or joists are notched at points
Spaced Columns Spaced columns or compression
of support, they shall meet design requirements fornet sec-
members shall be based upon design principles acceptable to
tion in bending and in shear The shear at such point shall
the Building Official, or the design principles set Earth for
not exceed the value calculated by the following formula:
spaced columns in U.B.C. Standard No. 25-20-58.
4bd' H
(c) Axial Loading. The allowable axial unit stresses are
V=— ( 1
subject to adjustment for duration of load and conditions of
WHERE: 3 1 h !
service as specified in Section 2504.
d=actual depth of beam at the notch
(d) Combed Flexural and Axial Loading. Members sub-
h=total depth of beam.
jected to both flexural and axial loading shall be designed in
Where notches or holes are made in other of
i
accordance with the provisions set forth in U.B.C. Standard
portions
the beam, the net of beam shall be used in
No. 25-21-58.
determining the bending streaining ngth,
tco;n The unit stress
normal to a inclined to the Aber
'-
Bee- 25M 2508. (a) Timber connectors may Thabw
be used to transmit stress between wood members and be-
of a
Zr
wood member shall not exceed that determined from the
tween wood and metal members. The allowable loads and a A
formula:
installation of timber connectors shall be as set forth In Fastedup
U.B.C. Standard No. 25-22-58.
lib
137
Thaiher
Coeesedons
sed
(
UN [FORK BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 25-F—HOLD]ING POWER OF BOLTS
Loads Parallel to Grain (p)
LENGTH OF BOLT
( MEM-
BER (Iaehes)
DIAMETER OF BOLT (Inds)
35 % % 31 1 1j(e 1
1%
910 1160 1390 160 1860
2%
1150 170 210 2610 010
3%
1160 1810 2570 3310 3990
4%
1160 1810 2600 3534 4480 5380
5%
1810 2600 3550 4610 5800
6%
1810 2600 3550 4630 5850
7%
1810 2600 3550 4630 5850
9%
2600 3550 460 5800 7240
1135 1
4630 5850 7240
* This assumes dressed " lumber. Safe toads for other Iengthe of bolt in main
membermay be obtained by interpolaira.
Safe loads and design practices for types of connectors
not mentioned or fully covered in U.B.C. Standard No. 25-22-
58 may be determined in a manner approved by the Building
Official.
(b) BeItL Bolted joints wherein bolts are used to resist
or transfer stresses in wood structures shall be designed in
accordance with the provisions set forth in U.B.C. Standard
No. 25-23-58. Safe loads in pounds for bolts in double shear
and in seasoned lumber of the following species: cypress,
southern; Douglas Fir (coast and inland region); larch,
western; pine, southern yellow; in joints consisting of three
members in which the side members are one-half the thick-
ness of the main member, shall not exceed values set forth
in Tables No. 25-F and No. 25-G. (For other species see
U.B.C. Standard No. 25-23-5&)
(c) Drift Bolts or Phe. Connections of wood structural
members involving the use of drift bolts or drift pins shall
be designed in accordance with the provisions set forth in
U.B.C. Standard No. 25-24-58.
involving the use of wood
screws shall designed in a�rdance with the provisions
set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 25-24-5&
acshall
(rewa �gScrews. Connections involving the use of lag
set forth in U.B.C. Standar) ogned in �e with the provisions
(f) Nans and gplkAft, I. Sale lateral strength. A em -
3110u wire nail driven prependfeular to grain of the wood,
when used to fasten wooden members together, shall not be
subjected to a greater load causing shear and bending than
the safe lateral strength of the wase Hall or spike as set
forth in Table No. 25-H,
A wire nail driven parallel to tot.,; grain of the wood or too
mailed shall not be subjected to mare than two-tbirds of the
lateral load allowed when drivels i. to grain.
1958 EDITION Tables No. 25-0-25-1
TABLE NO. 25-G—BOLDING POWER OF BOLTS
Loads PerpeadleWar to Grata (')
LENGTH OF HOLT
IN MAIN MEM.
SER- (Inches)
DIAMETER OF BOLT (taches)
% % i4 35 1 13G 134
1%
40 490 540 600 660
2%
700 790 880 970 1050
3%
920 1090 1210 1340 1460
4%
920 1300 1510 1660 1810 1970
5%
1300 1750 2020 2210 2410
6%
1250 1750 2260 2590 2850
7%
1170 1690 2250 2820 3250
9%
1520 2120 2750 3450 4130
11%
2570 3290 4040
• This assumes dressed time lumber. Safe bads for other keatba of bolt in main
member may be obtained by interpolation.
TABLE NO. 25 -H --SAFE LATERAL STRENGTH AND
REQUIRED PENETRATION OF COMMON
WIRE NAHA
Driven Perpendicular to Grain of the Wood
I
SIZE
STAND-
WIRE
iLOADS
PENS-
TRA71ON
(Pounds)
DOUGLAS
OF
ARD
LENGTH
GAUGE
RE,
OUIREDSOUTH.ORWOOD
FIR
RED.
OTHER
NAIL
(Inches) -
(leeks)
ERN
SPECIES
PINE
6d
2
11%
1
70
58
An
8d
2%
1034
134
100
82
determined
10d
3
9
1%
120
98
by
12d
31A
9
1%
10
106
Building
16d
3%
8
1%
160
123
Official
30d
4%
5
234
230
188
40d
5
4
2%
270
220
50d
5%
3
2%
310
250
60d
6
2
3
360
295
TABLE NO. 25-I—SAFE RESISTANCE TO WITH-
DRAWAL OF COMMON WIRE NAHA
Inserted Perpendicular to Grabs of the Wood, in Pounds
per Linear fad of Penetration Into the Main Umber
KIND F SIZE of NAIL
WOOD
Douglas Fir a 6d 8d 10d 12d 16d 20d Sod 4Od 50d 60d
southernRedwood 27 29 35 35 39 48 52 56 61 67
Other Species; An determined by the Building Official
100
section 2506 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 1958 EDITION
TABLE NO. 254—NUMBER OF NAILS FOR
CONNECTING WOOD MICKBERS
Groups I and J Occupancies
CONNEMON
BOX OR COMMON
Joist to sin or girder—too nail
2-18d
Bridging to Joist—too nail
2- Sd
ixS subfloor to joint—face nail
2- 8d
2 -inch subfioer to joint or girder
2_16d
Plat to joist or blocking
16d-16" o/c
Stud to plate—end nail
2-16d
Stud to plat—too nail
3-16d or 4-8d
Top plat spike together
16d-24" o/c
d intersections
2-16d
ceiling joi—laps
st&—to late—toe nail
2-16d
—laps over partitions
3-16d
—to parallel alternate
rafters
g 16d
Rafter to plat
Continuous 1 -inch brace to stud
2-18d
2 -inch cut -in bracing to stud
2-164
1 -inch sheathing to bearing
2-
Corner studs and angle
i6d-3-30" o/c
Timber 2. Sate rmistanoo to withdrawal. A wire nail driven per -
COO= pendicular to grain Of the wood shall not be subjected
to a ater load, tending to cause withdrawal, than the
Fastenbrgs safe resistance of the nail to withdrawal, as set forth in
(Ccat'd.) Table No. 25-L
Nails driven parallel to grain of the wood shall not be
allowed for resisting withdrawal forces.
penetSra Spacing
to penetration, Common wire nails shall have
set forth In
Table No. 25-H. Nails or spikeiece s, for whichpoint the a
thewwire gauges
or lengths are not specified in Table No. 25-H, shall have a
required penetration of not less than 9% diameters, and
allowable loads may be interpolated.
For wood to wood joint the spacing center to center shall
be not lest than the required penetration.
Edge and end dlttancet shall be not less than one-half of
the for Penetration'
Idol
be bored of a diametersmaller than that oere necessary, to f the�lb. ciull
4. Groups I J occupancies. The number and size of
nails connecting wood mantra of Groups 1 and J oceu-
pancles shall be not logo than the amount set forth in Table
No. 25-J. Other connections shall be nailed to provide equi-
valent strength.
(9) Joist Hangers and Framing Anebom Connections
dePcnOther g upon joist m
used where approved tis not otherwisecovered may be
Sea 2507. (a) Columns or Post. All wood columns and vertical
post shall be framed to true end bearings; shall extend Members or
down to support of such design as to hold the column or Assemblies
post securely in position and to protect it tae from de-
terioration; and shall be supported in basement by piers
projecting at least two inches (2") above the finished floor
and separated therefrom by an approved metal barrier, or
when pressure -impregnated timber is used, it may be placed
directly on concrete or masonry.
Untreated wood columns in basements, when built into
masonry partitions or walls, shall be exposed on at least two
sides.
(b) Stud walls and Bearing Partitions. 1. Placing. Studs
In walls and partitions may be placed with their wide faces
Parallel to the wall or partition, provided the studs are
considered an columns and are designed accordingly. Stud
walls shall have top and bottom plates except that joist
may be supported by a let -in ribbon as provided in Section
2509(a).
2. Sire. Except as otherwise provided, exterior stud walls
and bearing partitions for buildings of two stories or less
shall consist of not less than two-inch by four -inch (2"x4")
studs; for buildings of three stories, the studding shall be
not less than three-inch by four -inch (3" x 4") or two-inch
by six-inch (2" x 6") to the bottom of the second floor joists,
and two-inch by four -inch (2" x 4") for the two upper
stories.
3. Height. Unless supported laterally by adequate fram-
ing, the maximum allowable height shall be ten feet (30')
for two-inch by three-inch (2" x 31) stud framing; fourteen
feet (14') for two-inch by four -inch (2" x 4") stud framing;
sixteen feet (16') for three-inch by four -inch (3"x4") stud
framing; and twenty feet (W) for two-inch by six-inch
(2" x 6") stud framing.
4. Spacing Except for one-story detached buildings of
Group J occupancy, where twenty-four inch (241) spacing
may be used, no studding shall be spaced more than sixteen
inches (16") on center unless vertical supporting members
In the wails are designed as columns, or such walls may be
constructed of not less than four -inch by four -inch (4" x 4")
post spaced not more than five feet four inches (514") on
center, or of larger members designed as required in this
Chapter, or may be of post and beam framing with plank
sheathing not less than one and one -half -inches (1%") thick.
5. Corners and bracing. Angles or corners where stud
walls or partitions meet shall to framed solid. All exterior
walls and main crow stud partitions shalt be effectively and
thoroughly braced or sheathed with approved mels ade-
grately nailed along all edges.
6. Pipes in walls. Stud partitions staining plumbing,
heating, or other
spaced a oto lbe so framed and the give proper clearance for intsunderneath so the
piping, Where a partition containing such piping runs
dibe Iloor the Joists
ti p be doubled � to permit � of
146 241
Section 2506 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 25-d—NU3BER OF NABS FOR
CONNECTING WOOD MMNM BS
G[enoS I and d Occupancies
CONNECTION
BOX OR COMMON
Joist to Bili or girder—toe nail
2-16d
Bridging to joist—toe nail
2- 8d
ix6 subfloor to joist—face nail
2- 8d
2 -inch anMfloor to joist or girder
Plate to joist or blocking
11618" o/c
Stud to plate—end nail
Stud to plate—toe naff
2-161
3-16d or 4 Sd
" -
Top plates—spike together
161-24 o /
laps and Intersections
2-16d
Ceiling joists—to plata—toe nail
2-16d
—laps over partitions
3-16d
—to parallel alternate
rafters
3-16d
Rafter to plate
Continuous 1 -inch brace to stud
3-16d
2- 8d
2 -inch cut -in bracing to stud
2-16d
1 -inch sheathing to bearing
Corner studs and angles
16d-30" c/o
Timber 2. Safe resistance to withdrawal. A wire nail driven per-
cooeeetions pendicular to grain of the wood shall not be subjected
and to a greater load. tending to cause withdrawal, than the
Fastenings safe resistance of the nail to withdrawal, as set forth in
(Costa.) Table No. 25-I.
Nails driven parallel to grain of the wood shall not be
allowed for resisting withdrawal forces.
3. Spacing sad penctradem Common wire nails shall have
penetration into the piece receiving the point as set forth In
Table No. 25-H. Nails or spikes, for which the wire gauges
or lengths are not specified in Table No. 25-H, shall have a
allowable
required
Penetration
may of Dot
inter less
than
9% diameters, and
For wood to wood joints the spacing center to center shall
be not 1634 titan the required penetration
Edge and end distances shall be not leas than one-half of
the required penetration.
Hoke for nails, where necessary to prevent splitting, shall
be bored of a diameter smaller than that of the nail&
4. Groups I a" J occupancies. The number and size of
nails connecting wood members of Groups I and J oecu-
panciea shall be not less than the amount sot forth in Table
No. 25.1. Other connections shall be nailed to provide equi-
valent strength.
(g) Joh Hates a" Frandag Anchism Connections
depending upon Jolot lumpra or framing anchors. ties, and
other mechanical fastenings not otherwise covered may be
used where approved.
140
ion EDITION seettoa 2607
Sec. 2507. (a) Columns or Posta. All wood columns and Vertical
poste shalbe framed to true end bearings, shall extend Members or
supports of such design as to hold the column or AmewbUss
post securely in position and to protect its base from de-
terioration; and shall be supported in basements by piers
projecting at least two inches (2") above the finished floor
and separated therefrom by an approved metal barrier, or
when pressure -impregnated timber is used, it may be placed
directly on concrete or masonry.
Untreated wool columns in basements, when built into
masonry partitions or walls, shall be exposed on at least two
sides.
(b) Stud Walls and Bearing Partitions. 1. Placing. Studs
in wails and partitions may be placed with their wide faces
parallel to the wall or partition, provided the studs are
considered as columns and are designed accordingly. Stud
walls shall have top and bottom plates except that joists
may be supported by a let -in ribbon as provided in Section
2509(a).
2. Size. Except as otherwise provided, exterior stud walls
and bearing partitions for buildings of two stories or less
shall consist of not less than two-inch by four -inch (2"x 4")
studs; for buildings of three stories, the studding shall be
not less than three-inch by four -inch (3" x 4") or two-inch
by six-inch (2" x 6") to the bottom of the second floor joists,
and two-inch by four -inch (2" x 4") for the two upper
stories.
S. Height. Unless supported laterally by adequate fram-
ing, the maximum allowable height shall be ten feet (10')
for two-inch by three-inch (2"x3') stud framing; fourteen
feet (14') for two-inch by four -inch (2" x 41) stud framing;
sixteen feet (16') for three-inch by four -inch (3" x4") stud
framing; and twenty feet (20') for two-inch by six-inch
(2" x 6") stud framing.
4. Spacing. Except for one-story detached buildings of
Group J occupancy, where twenty-four inch (24") spacing
may be used, no studding shall be spaced more than sixteen
inches (16") on center unless vertical supporting members
in the walls are designed as columns, or such walls may to
constructed of not less than four -inch by four -inch (4" x 4")
posts spaced not more than five feet four inches (5141) on
center, or of larger members designed as required in this
Chapter. or may be of post and beam framing with plank
sheathing not less than one and one -half -inches (1%") thick.
5. Corners a" bracing. Angles or corners where stud
walls or partitions meet shall to framed solid. Ali exterior
walls and main cross stud partitions shall be effectively and
thoroughly braced or sheathed with approved mels ads-
quately nailed along all edges.
1'1 6. Pipes is walls. Stud partitions containing plumbing,
heating, or other pipes shall be so framed and the joists
underneath so spaced as to give proper clearance for the
piping. Where a partition containing such piping runs
parallel to the floor joints. the joists underneath such pard -
tions small be doubled and spaced to permit the passage of
141
1958 EDITION Section 2507
the interior with piaster, tile, or similar materials and are Vertical
subject to water splash, the framing shall be protected with Members of
15 -pound asphalt -saturated felt. Assemblies
For provisions covering maximum allowable spacing of (Contd.)
gypsum, wood, and fiber insulation lath, see Section 4703.
For provisions covering maximum allowable spacing of
supports for metal and wire lath on wood studs and rafters
and method of attachment, see Section 4705,
For provisions covering maximum allowable spacing of
gypsum wallboard on wood studs and rafters and method of
attachment, see Section 4715.
(f) Exterior Wall Coverings. 1. General. Exterior wood
stud walls shall be covered on the outside with the materials
and in the manner specified in this Section.
2. Weatherboarding. Studs or sheathing shall be covered
on the outside face with one layer of building paper when
required in Section 1707 (a).
Weatherboarding shall have an average thickness in place
of not less than live -eighths inch (%") and a minimum thick-
ness of not less than three-eighths inch (%"). Horizontal
Joints in the weatherboarding shall be tongued and grooved
or shiplapped joints, or such weatherboarding shall be laid
shingle fashion and lapped not less than one-half inch N").
Siding patterns known as rustic, drop siding, or shiplap
shall have an average thickness in place of not less than
nineteen thirty-seconds inch (18/32") and shall have a mini-
mum thickness of not less than three-eighths inch (%").
Bevel siding shall have a minimum thickness measured at
the butt section of not less than seven -sixteenths inch
(7/16") and a tip thickness of not less than three -sixteenths
inch (3/16"). Siding of lesser dimensions may be used, pro-
vided such wall covering is placed over sheathing which
conforms to the provisions of Section 2202.
All weatherboarding or aiding shall be securely nailed to
each stud with not less than one will, or to solid nominal
wood sheathing with not less than one line of nails spaced
not more than twenty-four inches (24") on center in each
Piece of the weatherboarding or siding.
Nails shall be so located as to hold the bottom of the
weatherboarding or siding secure and thereby to hold tight
the top of the piece below. Where such nailing is not pos-
sible, two nails to each stud shall be used to hold each piece.
3. Plywood. Where plywood is used for covering the ex-
terior of outside walls. it shall be of the exterior type not
less than three -eighths -inch (%") thick. Joints shall occur
over framing members not less than two -inches (2") thick,
unless wood or plywood sheathing is used, or joints are
lapped horizontally or otherwise made waterproof to the
satisfaction of the Building Official.
4. Shingles or shakes. Wood shingles or shakes and
asbestos cement shingles may be used for exterior wail cov-
ering provided the frame of the structure to covered with
building paper as specified in Section 1707 (a). All shingles
or shakes attached to sheathings other than wood shall be
secured with approved mechanically -bonding nails or by
1Q11i"RM BVHMING CODE
Scones Sol
Ver"
such pipes and shall be bridged. Where plumbing. heisting,
in or partly in a partition, necessi-
or
A
or other pipes are placed
tating the cutting of the"soles or plates, a metal tie not lees
and one and one-balf-inches
(t aaaNd)
than o wide shall be fastened to the plate across and to each
with not less nails.
France
sidthick
sada of the opening
Fothan
e o apace
7. Separations from chimneys
materials, see section 3702 (j).
chimneys and combustible
In bearing partitions the top plate shall be
8. Top plates.
doubled and lapped at each intersection with walls or parti-
and lower members of the top
tions. Joints in the upper
plates shall be staggered not less than four feet (C).
9. Foundation plates. Stud walls o non onry Or
have foundation plates ed in
concrete shall
Section 2806 (a)-
10. Foundation studs. Foundation studs shall be not less
above, and when exceeding four
In size than the studding
feet (C) in height shall be of the slue required for an addi-
tional story. walls and partitions shall
Foundation studs under bearing_
be thoroughly and effectively brace
11. Bridging. Ari stud pard r walla over ten feet
have bridging, not lass than two inches
(101) in height shall
(2") in thickness and of the same width as the stud, fitted
the studs at their mid- hhe
snugly and spiked into s
other means for giving adequate lateral support
of Section 2508 may
Bridging meeting the requirements
serve as required fire -stopping.
12. Headers. Ali oPenings four feet (41) wide or less in
with headers equivalent to
hearing walls shall be provided
double headers not less than two inches (2") thick, placed
on edge, seen" fastened together, and all openings more
than four feet (41) wide shall be trussed or provided with
headers or lintels. Such headers or trusses shall have not
or
less than two-inch (2") solid bearing at each end to th
or
or bottom plate, unless other approved framing roethod
joint devices are used.
walla framed
(c) Willis Without: Studs. Detached one-story buildingsof
Group J occupancy may have exterior
out studs when of vertical two-inch (2") or thicker piisnks,
ot more than five
or when having a total floor area of
hundred square feet (500 sq. ft.) may be vertical inch
(1") boards and battens.
(d) Laminated Wafts and Partitions- Walls and partitions
Of not feas than
may be of laminated construction
nominal thickness, with the structural assemb
inches (4-) ly
designed to support all loads.
(e) lateriar Walls akd Partitions_ Interior partitions shall
be framed, and firestopped as specified for ex-
constructed,
terior walis, except that interior nonbearmg partitions may
to Group I occupancies, nonbearing
have a single top plate_
partitions ts^ro-inch by three-inch (2" x 3') studs spate six-
teen inches (161) on center may be used. are covered an
Where wood -frame and garb
1958 EDITION Section 2507
the interior with piaster, tile, or similar materials and are Vertical
subject to water splash, the framing shall be protected with Members of
15 -pound asphalt -saturated felt. Assemblies
For provisions covering maximum allowable spacing of (Contd.)
gypsum, wood, and fiber insulation lath, see Section 4703.
For provisions covering maximum allowable spacing of
supports for metal and wire lath on wood studs and rafters
and method of attachment, see Section 4705,
For provisions covering maximum allowable spacing of
gypsum wallboard on wood studs and rafters and method of
attachment, see Section 4715.
(f) Exterior Wall Coverings. 1. General. Exterior wood
stud walls shall be covered on the outside with the materials
and in the manner specified in this Section.
2. Weatherboarding. Studs or sheathing shall be covered
on the outside face with one layer of building paper when
required in Section 1707 (a).
Weatherboarding shall have an average thickness in place
of not less than live -eighths inch (%") and a minimum thick-
ness of not less than three-eighths inch (%"). Horizontal
Joints in the weatherboarding shall be tongued and grooved
or shiplapped joints, or such weatherboarding shall be laid
shingle fashion and lapped not less than one-half inch N").
Siding patterns known as rustic, drop siding, or shiplap
shall have an average thickness in place of not less than
nineteen thirty-seconds inch (18/32") and shall have a mini-
mum thickness of not less than three-eighths inch (%").
Bevel siding shall have a minimum thickness measured at
the butt section of not less than seven -sixteenths inch
(7/16") and a tip thickness of not less than three -sixteenths
inch (3/16"). Siding of lesser dimensions may be used, pro-
vided such wall covering is placed over sheathing which
conforms to the provisions of Section 2202.
All weatherboarding or aiding shall be securely nailed to
each stud with not less than one will, or to solid nominal
wood sheathing with not less than one line of nails spaced
not more than twenty-four inches (24") on center in each
Piece of the weatherboarding or siding.
Nails shall be so located as to hold the bottom of the
weatherboarding or siding secure and thereby to hold tight
the top of the piece below. Where such nailing is not pos-
sible, two nails to each stud shall be used to hold each piece.
3. Plywood. Where plywood is used for covering the ex-
terior of outside walls. it shall be of the exterior type not
less than three -eighths -inch (%") thick. Joints shall occur
over framing members not less than two -inches (2") thick,
unless wood or plywood sheathing is used, or joints are
lapped horizontally or otherwise made waterproof to the
satisfaction of the Building Official.
4. Shingles or shakes. Wood shingles or shakes and
asbestos cement shingles may be used for exterior wail cov-
ering provided the frame of the structure to covered with
building paper as specified in Section 1707 (a). All shingles
or shakes attached to sheathings other than wood shall be
secured with approved mechanically -bonding nails or by
M
1
Sections 2507-2608 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
1858 EDITION Section 2iffi9
approved corrosion -resistant nails on furring strips attached
Wood shingles or shakes may be applied over
2. Approved devices or other manner of support may HorluslM
be used in lieu of bearing. Memhes or
to the studs.
fiberboard shingle backer and sheathing with annular grooved
thickness of wood shingles or shakes between
Wood members bearing on or in contact with masonry Or
concrete at or below adjacent ground Ievel shall be as specs- (Confd.)
nails. The
wood nailing boards shall be not less than three-eighths inch
fled for foundation plates in Section 28M (a).
isle").
5. Weather -resistant metal. fainted, treated, or noncor-
(b) Built-up Members. 1. Beams. Laminated built-up
metal may be used on stud walls. When sheathing is
beams with through lamination not less than two inches (2")
rosive
the installation must be approved by the Building
in nominal thickness may be used in place of solid timbers
omitted
Gal dissimilar
OfficialContact dlIssformedkor
bemten ns 0") parallel n thmaybe s
ntedasmich(1idpnpiked
by appsvedmethods.
together with not less than 16d spikes at twelve -inch (12")
net may be used.
centers, staggered. Unless so spiked, or if the depth of
6. Exterior plastering. See Chapter 47.
beam is more than ten inches (101), the laminations shad
T. Masonry veneer. See Chapter 29.
be connected together with bolts not smaller than one-half
Inch (%") diameter spaced not over two feet (21) apart,
staggered or equal. Fastenings shall be placed at a maxi -
Fire stops Sec. 2508. Fire -stopping shall be provided to cut off all
vertical and horizontal), and
mum of one-fourth the depth of the member from the top
and bottom es.
concealed draft opening s (both
form an effective barrier between stories, and between a top
2. Trusses. The design, fabrication, and erection of timber
story and roof space. It shall be used in specific locations,
trusses shall conform to the provisions of this Code.
as follows:
1. In exterior or interior stud walls, at ceilings and floor
tgand h and Bridging.of
more than eJoist at= Rafter8 Blocking
iR to than
levels.
four -inch (4") depth shall be stabilized against overturning
2. In all stud walls and partitions, including furred spaces,
or buckling from superimposed load as follows-
so placed that the maximum dimension of any con-
space is not aver eight feet (81.
1. At ends and at each support, by solid blocking of not
less than two-inch thickness the full depth
coaled
3. Between stair stringers at least Once In the middle
(2") and of
joists, by naliing to studs when supported by ribbon boards,
portion of each run, at top and bottom, and between
or by approved hangers or fastenings.
studs, along and in Pane with run of stair adjoining
stud walls and partitions•
2. Between supporta as required so that joints will be
4. Around top, bottom, sides, and ends of sliding door
stabilized every eight feet (8') and rafters every ten feet
(10') by solid blocking two inches (2") thick and the full
pockets.
depth of the joist or rafter, or by wood cross bridging of
5. In spaces between chimneys and wood framing. loose
not leas than one inch by three inches (1"x 3") or metal cross
bridging of equal strength. Where cross bridging is used,
incombustible materials shall be placed in incombustible
the lower ends of such cross bridging shall be driven up and
supports, or a metal collar tightly fitted to the chim-
nailed after the floor or subfloor has been nailed.
ney and nailed to the wood framing may be used.
6. Any other locations not specifically mentioned above,
as holes for pip M shafting, behind furring strips
(d) Joists under Bearing Partitions. Joists under and
parallel to bearing partitions shall be doubled and well
such
and similar places which could afford a passage for
mote than ed, or may fe separatedby solid blocking spaced at no
flames
Fire stops when of wood shall be two-inch (2") nominal
(e) Headers. header joists over six feet (6') long and
thickness. U width of opening is such that more than one
thicknesses
tail joists over twelve feet (12') long shall be hung in joist
eof lumber
piece
or beam hangers or framing anchors or secured by other
of l") material with joints broken
I or methods affording equivalent support. Trimmer,
and header joists more than four feet (4') long shall be
Horlsolow See . (a) Bearing. Every beam, girder, and joist
have bearing so that the compression
doubled. Headers shall be not less, than twenty Inches (20")
from face of chimney breast Trimmers and headers shall
shall sufficient area
Ailsa ss to in values set forth in Tables No. 25-A,
fire
in Sections3702vided with I-- from $ j) im nd 3713
perpendicular
No. 25-G, or No. 25-D are not exceeded.
places as specified (e).
ZXCXPTWNs: 1. Two-iawh (2') Joints when nailed to
(f) Wood M Entering Masonry or Concrete. The
adjacent studs maybe supported on a (1") "18
ends of wood members masonry or s walls
ribber.
from opt shall be sepparatering
not ifour
14Q�
Ill
Sections 2509-2511 UNJXOZ;M BUILDING CODE
Horizo sl
inches (4") of solid masonry. Other wood members shall be
back not less than four inches (4") from the exterior
nos
r
set
face of walls, except on street fronts.
Assemblies
(ltd,)
Ends of wood beams or joists entering masonry or con-
crete walls. unless pressure -impregnated with an approved
Ratio
preservative, shall be provided with a one -half-inch
3:1
air space on aides and end.
Ends of wood beams or joists entering masonry or con-
conventional
crete walls shall be beveled so that top edge does not enter
more than one inch (1").
4:1
(g) Anchor& and Ties. For anchorage of wood joists or
special
beams to masonry walls or concrete walla, see Section 2313.
3%:l
(h) Floors. See Sections 2514 and 2515.
(i) Roofs. See Sections 2514 and 251L
we" with
MASOW7
See. 2510. The vertical dead load of structural masonry
or concrete shall not be supported by wood members, other
or Concrete
than wood piling, except as herein provided. Wood may be
combined structurally with masonry or concrete if provision
4:1
is made for the different rigidities and other properties of
omitted at inter-
the materials, and as provided in Section 2416 (c).
Wood
Seo. 2511. (a) General. Wood and plywood diaphragms
may be used to resist horizontal forces in horizontal and
vertical distributing or resisting elements, provided the de-
flection in the plane of the diaphragm, as determined by
calculations, tests, or analogies drawn therefrom, does not
exceed the permissible deflection of attached distributing or
resisting elements.
Permissible deflection shall be that deflection up to which
the diaphragm and any attached distributing or resisting
element will maintain its structural integrity under assumed
load conditions, i. e., continue to support assumed loads with-
out danger to occupants of the structure.
Connections and anchorages capable of resisting the design
forces shall be provided between the diaphragms and the
resisting elements. Openings in diaphragms which mateaially
affect their strength shall be fully detailed on the plans,
and shall have their edges adequately reinforced to transfer
all shearing
Sise and shape of diaphragma shall be limited as set forth
in Table No. 25.K.
In buildings of wood construction where rotation In pro-
vided for, transverse shear resisting elements normal to
the longitudinal element shall be provided at spacings not
exceeding one and one-half times the width for conventional
diagonally sheathed diaphragms or two times the width for
special In da sheathed
or plywood wood analPhr&g—
dial
Y
$MH not be considered as ing lateral
form by rotation,
(b) blagenaft Sheathed Diaphragms. 1. Conventional
acdon. Such wood MAO up Of
diaphragms
ane (1") (sal a an angle of
1958 EDITION
TABLE NO. 25-K—MAXIMUM DIAPHRAGM
DIMENSION RATIOS
section 2511
approximately 45 degrees to supports. Sheathing boards Wood
shall be directly nailed to each intermediate bearing member Diaphragms
with not less than two 8d nails for one -inch by six-inch (Cont'd.)
(1"x6") boards and three 8d nails for boards eight inches
(8") or wider, and in addition three 8d nails and four 8d
nails shall be used for six-inch (6") and eight -inch (8")
boards, respectively. at the diaphragm boundaries. End joints
in adjacent boards shall be separated by at least one joist
or stud space, and there shall be at least two boards be-
tween joints on the same support. Boundary members at
edges of diaphragms shall be designed to resist direct tensile
or compressive chord stresses and shall be adequately tied
together at oornera
Conventional wood diaphragms may be used to resist
shears, due to wind or seismic forces, not exceeding 300
pounds per lineal foot of width.
2. Special construction. Special diagonally sheathed dia-
phragms shall conform to conventional construction and, in
addition, shall have all elements designed in conformance
with the provisions of this Code.
Each chord or portion thereof may be considered as a
beam, loaded with a uniform load per foot equal to 50 per
cent of the unit shear due to diaphragm action. The load
shall be assumed as acting normal to the chord, in the plane
of the diaphragm and either toward or away from the dia-
phragm. The span of the chord, or portion thereof, shall be
the distance between structural members of the diaphragm
such as the joists, studs, and blocking, which serve to trans-
fer the assumed load to the sheathing. shall include Special diagonally sheathed diaphragma
con-
ventional diaphragma sheathed with two layers of diagonal
sheathing at 90 degrees to each other and on the same face
of the supporting members.
Special diagonally sheathed diaphragms may be used to
resist shears, due to wind or seiambc loads, Provided such
shears do not strem the nails beyond their allowable safe
lateral xtrength and do not exceed 600 pounds per ledtoot
of width.
147
DORMNTAL
IAPHRAGMS
VERTICAL
DIAPHRAGMS
Maximum
Span -Width
bia■imum
Height -Width
Ration
Ratio
1. Diagonal sheathing,
3:1
2:1
conventional
2. Diagonal sheathing,
4:1
3%:1
special
4:1
3%:l
3. Plywood, nailed all
edges
4. Plywood, blocking
4:1
2:1
omitted at inter-
mediate joints
section 2511
approximately 45 degrees to supports. Sheathing boards Wood
shall be directly nailed to each intermediate bearing member Diaphragms
with not less than two 8d nails for one -inch by six-inch (Cont'd.)
(1"x6") boards and three 8d nails for boards eight inches
(8") or wider, and in addition three 8d nails and four 8d
nails shall be used for six-inch (6") and eight -inch (8")
boards, respectively. at the diaphragm boundaries. End joints
in adjacent boards shall be separated by at least one joist
or stud space, and there shall be at least two boards be-
tween joints on the same support. Boundary members at
edges of diaphragms shall be designed to resist direct tensile
or compressive chord stresses and shall be adequately tied
together at oornera
Conventional wood diaphragms may be used to resist
shears, due to wind or seismic forces, not exceeding 300
pounds per lineal foot of width.
2. Special construction. Special diagonally sheathed dia-
phragms shall conform to conventional construction and, in
addition, shall have all elements designed in conformance
with the provisions of this Code.
Each chord or portion thereof may be considered as a
beam, loaded with a uniform load per foot equal to 50 per
cent of the unit shear due to diaphragm action. The load
shall be assumed as acting normal to the chord, in the plane
of the diaphragm and either toward or away from the dia-
phragm. The span of the chord, or portion thereof, shall be
the distance between structural members of the diaphragm
such as the joists, studs, and blocking, which serve to trans-
fer the assumed load to the sheathing. shall include Special diagonally sheathed diaphragma
con-
ventional diaphragma sheathed with two layers of diagonal
sheathing at 90 degrees to each other and on the same face
of the supporting members.
Special diagonally sheathed diaphragms may be used to
resist shears, due to wind or seiambc loads, Provided such
shears do not strem the nails beyond their allowable safe
lateral xtrength and do not exceed 600 pounds per ledtoot
of width.
147
Section 2511
Wood
{Coo
UNIFORtiI BUILDING CODE ion EDITION
(c) Plywood Diaphragms. Horizontal and vertical dia-
phragma sheathed with plywood may be used to resist hori-
zontal forces not exceeding those set forth in Table No. 25-L,
or may be calculated by principles of mechanics without
limitation by using values of nail strength and plywood
shear values as given elsewhere i XPi Code.
than that
thick-
ness for horizontal diaphragms
set forth in Tables No. 25-M and No. 25-N for corresponding
joist spacing and loads, except that one -fourth -inch (14")
plywood may be used where perpendicular loads permit. Ply-
wood used for horizontal and vertical diaphragms shall con-
form to U.B.C. Standard 25-11-58.
An boundary members shall be proportioned and spliced
where necessary to transmit direct stresses. Framing mem-
bers shall be at least one and five -eighths -inches (1%')
wide. In general, panel edges shall bear on the framing mem-
bers and butt along their center lines. Nails shall be placed
not el
edgeess not more than twelve incheshtba inch ({(112") apart along i�r-
mediate supports and six inches (6") along panel edge-bear-
osand
sdl befirmlyivvtle the
fmngmembers.
Nun panthan wevmshall
be Used.
When blocking is omitted and the panels are arranged so
that load is applied perpendicular to the unblocked edges
and to the continuous panel joints, shears shall of exceed
two-thirds of the values given for sec -inch (6") nail
spil�
in Table No. 25-L. For other panel arrangements
Shall not exceed one-half of the tabulated values for six-inch
(6") nail spacing.
TABLE NO. 25-L—ALLOWABLE SHEAR FOR WIND OR
SEISMIC LOADINGS ON BLOCKED DOUGLAS I=
PLYWOOD DIAPSBAGMS
(Pounds per Foot)
For Douglas Fir and, 8011thun Plae Frarmlai
(For other species adjust values accordingly)
NAIL SPACING ON ALL PLYWOOD PANEL EDGES;
COM -
MINIMUM MON For Frametq 3imber Far Framitex At�ber
PLYWOOD• NAIL 2% inch" or Mas in Lt» than 2}{ Iseba
TfiIC6NF.SS SIZE Wuieh bid nat Lem than 116
laches in width
6' 1 4" 3" 6" 4" 3"
5/16"00 6d 5811 4204?5 550 375 420
" Sol 400 6i)0 635 360 b30 Goo
" 10d 480 1 320 S50 425 640 '�
tWhrn the force acting 11mic either b.. soder- •x any line 'If e`en•
tins paxcI i(ants exceeds'bfe*urths ,f the tabulated value. nail sl'ac-
ion .Pang such bmndary or litre shall be reduced b: --third.
'Far U,agI . Fir plyw:mo-I glades having inner plies cin s _es «her than
D+,ugfac
Mt use next greases ahickoc$s oc reduce she— o-rec-i * rth.
--Th., values oay be used with nor-fourab.iac's (S¢`) plywcwd where per-
pendicular loads seessit its
uee
149
Tables Nos. 25-M and 25-N
TABLE NO, 25-M—MINIMUM THICKNESSES OF
PLYWOOD SUBFL00RING
(Plywood Continuous over Two or More Spans; and Face
Grain Perpeadleotar to Supports)
1. Bt Ic ttng installed at edges, unless twenty-five thirty-setro ds -inch
(2513_ ) wr ud strip finish door fs used. If wood strips are perpendicu.
lar to supports, one-half inch ('/a") Douglas Fir can be used on twenty-
four -inch (24") span.
2. These include Group I and It woods for Western Softwood Plywood,
i. e., Western larch, Western hemlock, Noble fir, white fir, Sitka
spruce, Port Orford and Alaska cedar, and redwood, in accordance
with L.B.C. _+ta:0a.,d No. 25.11-58.
TABLE NO. 25-N—MIND" THICKNESS OF
PLYWOOD ROOF SHEATHING
(Plywood Continuous over Two or More Spans; and Face
Grain Perpendicular to Supports)
PLYWOOD
THICKNESS
MAXIMUM SPACING OF JOISTS
—Rerideatial
PLYWOOD
40 ps.f.
16
SO P.M.
16"
101) p.s.f.
TfiCC1CN6SS'
3s"
16"
5b"
20"
20"
20"
16
24"
24"
24"
24
WESTERN SOFTWOOD PLYWOOD'
"
�16" I 16"
16"
"
24" 24"
24-
1. Bt Ic ttng installed at edges, unless twenty-five thirty-setro ds -inch
(2513_ ) wr ud strip finish door fs used. If wood strips are perpendicu.
lar to supports, one-half inch ('/a") Douglas Fir can be used on twenty-
four -inch (24") span.
2. These include Group I and It woods for Western Softwood Plywood,
i. e., Western larch, Western hemlock, Noble fir, white fir, Sitka
spruce, Port Orford and Alaska cedar, and redwood, in accordance
with L.B.C. _+ta:0a.,d No. 25.11-58.
TABLE NO. 25-N—MIND" THICKNESS OF
PLYWOOD ROOF SHEATHING
(Plywood Continuous over Two or More Spans; and Face
Grain Perpendicular to Supports)
PLYWOOD
THICKNESS
! MAXIMUM SPACING OF SUPPORTS, C TO C (Inches)
i -10 ps.f. 30 ps.f. 40 ps.f.
Douslas Fir
Plywood
" rough=
16
16
16
" rough'
241
24
24
^ rough'
321
32
30
^ rough-
42'
42
36
481
481
42
western Softwood
Plywood
1%" rough
161
16
16
,%" rough
201
20
20
?.§" rough'
26'
26
26
gs^ roughs
351
35
34
4 "a1
401
40
37
t. These spans shall not be exceeded under any load condition.
2. Provide adequate blocking or suitable edge support when spans exceed
twelve inchta t12") #or five -sixteenths inch (5116"); sixteen inches
(l6") for three-eighths inch M )- twenty-four inches (24") for one-half
inch (y,")t thirty-two inches (32") for five-eighths inch (%"); and
tbirty-six inches (36") for three-fourths inch (N").
3. Provide adequate blocking ce suitable edge support when span exceeds
twenty-four itches (24") for o -ate -half inch (ya"); twenty-eight inches
(2s") for fire -eighths itch (%b ); and thirty-two inches (32") for three.
fourths inch (14").
1
�3
UK
,
Sections 2512-2515 UNIMRSI BUILDLNG CODE
suwwed Sec. 2512. Stressed skin panels shall be designed in ac- 1958 EDITION Beetles 2535
Skin Panel cordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 25-28-58.
Ded5s 2. laminatiore. The individual laminations in struetu ni Glued
Glued Seo. 251L (a) Design and Allowable Unit Stresses, L De. glued laminated lumber shall be not more than two inches
Coastrnction sign lormalas. Glued ]aminated and glued built-up strut- {2rtion thick In thickness
approximately such laminations in the stressed (Conte.)
turas members shall be designed by the applicable engineer- of the member. parallel to the neutral plans
ing formulas used for sawn members, plywood, and as other.
wise provided without exceeding the allowable unit stresses shall eosin tri rA s, The lumber, at the time of laminating,
Specified in Section 2504 and modified is this Section grade and species specified.
2. Curvature factor- For the curved portion of members,4. Moisture —tent, The maximum moisture content of
the allowable stress in bending shall be modified b multi- the wood at the time of gluing shall not exceed 18 per cent
plication by the following curvature factor: Y and shall be not less than seven per cent. The range of mois-
ture content of laminations assembled into a single member
t shall not exceed five per cent at the time of gluing.
1-2000 1 -- } 5. Surfaces. Surfaces to be glued shall be fres from dust,
\ R / dirt, and grease. Each lamination shall be smoothly sur -
WHERE: faced and be of uniform thickness with a maximum allow-
able variation of one sixty-fourth inch (1/84-) for softwoods
t=thickness of lamination in inches, and one one-hundredth inch (1/100-) for hardwoods. Lumber
R =radius of curvature of a lamination in inches, surfaces shall not be sanded before gluing, except that fac-
and t/R. shalt not exceed 1/125 for softwoods and 1/100 for tory-sanded Plywood shall not be prohibited.
hardwoods. No curvature factor shall be applied to stress in 8. Joffita Joints in structural glued laminated lumber
the straight portion of an assembly regardless of curva
elsewhere. ture shall mean the contact surfaces between two adjacent pied
Of wood glued together. An edge or face joint is parallel to
3 Radial tension or eausprenefolL The radial stress in. the grain of the wood An end joint is at right angles to
duced by a bending moment in a curved rectangular mem- thegraing ai pieces wood. A scarf wood are lJoint is a sloping
hem or bevel
her shall be limited to the allowable stress, S„ when com-
a M (d) Adhesives. 1. General, Adhesives shall cover struc-
puted by the equation Ss = tural gluing exclusive of plywood. Adhesives shall provide
211 bb an adequate bond, shall subject the wood to no deleterious
WHERE: chemical reactions, and shall withstand without deteriora-
tion the expected conditions of service.
M=bending moment in inch pounds 2. Quality. Adhesives shall conform to U.B.C. Standard
R=radius of curvature at center line of member in No.25-27-58.
inches.
When Al is in the direction terming to decrease curvature 3 Use. Interior tyle adhesive may be used only in in.
(increase the radius), the stress is in tension and shall be termor and protested locations where moisture content of the
limited to an allowable stress equal to one-third the allow- wOod intim not exceed 15 per cent
able stress In shear. Exterior type adhesive may be used under any conditions
When AI is in the direction tending to increase curvature Of exposure and shall be used where subjected to high
(decrease radius), the stress is in compression and shall be humidity.
limited to the allowable stress in
to grain. compression perpendicular 4. Tela. where sufficient evidence of the quality of ad.
hedve to be used Is not available, the Building 09M Wl may
(b)
The methods ofdesignof bolts and con- require tests to be made as set forth in U.B.C. Standards Moors and their allowable when used with gluedNos. 25-27-58 and 25-28-58.
laminated lumber. shall be the same as provided for their 5 Adhesitn
use with fawn lumber P Gluing practices shall take into
considerate the characteristics and limitations of the ape.
tanFabetomi"cine adhesive used, and shall conform to good Practice as
meatal lumber Xendem L Strordanc withglued to Preparation of wood surfaces for gluing, control of ten.
gaol Practice and M forth in U.B.G Perature and moisture Ment of materials, maintenance of
Snitandards Noa. 25-13-5&,, 20-14-58. 25-15-58 25-18-53 adequate pressures. and compatibility of the adhesive with
All work shall be under the supervision at quangWd any other wood treatments �kmg lo s&
personnel.star e ffi Pot life. ly-t e
I59
manufacturer of the vaccordance ie the endattaau of the
151
Sections 2813-2514 UNIFORM BUMDING COI
Glued
(e) Inspection, 1. Inspection agencies. All structut.
laminated lumber shall be inspected during laminatia
Construction
(Cont'd.)
glued
y an approved inspection agency.
2. Certificate of Inspection. Each structural glued lami-
be stamped identifying im er
nated member shall
certificate n as
shall be accompanied by pec
and
required in Section 5006 (b)•
Head
See. 2814. (a) Heavy Timber Framing. All wood columns
framing shall be directly superimposed
Timber
Contraction
in such structural
one above the other (no girders or bolsters between col-
umns), and shall be provided with reinforced concrete, steel
or cast-iron caps, pintles or base Plates, or be connected by
timber splice blocks fastened to columns by connectors or
by bolts housed within the contact faces. No wood column
shall be less than eight -inches (8") nominal (n its least
dimension.
Beams, girders, and joists shall be not less than six inches
(6") nominal in least dimension,)) miialor less than in c tional arta.
inches (48 aq.
square
Where adjoining ends of girders and beams meet at col-
umns, they shall be closely fitted and crosctied by approved
reinforced concrete, steel or iron post caps or metal straps,
or shall be intertied with columns by through bolted corbel
and splice blocks or side bolsters with load transferred by
housed within the contacting faces or by bolts.
connectors
Approved wall plates. boxes, or hangers shall be provided
where wood beams, girders, or truce rest on masonry or
concrete walls.
Framing members of wood root trusses or arches shell
be not less than four inches (4") nominal in least dimen-
that top and bottom chords of trusses may be
sion, except
built up of elements of not less than three -inches (3") nom-
inal thickness when an automatic fi Litt ui3bing S" teomr
in
is installed in the building, as specified
between elements is either solidly
when the space .parallel
filled or is tightly closed for the full length on the underside
thereof with a wood cover plate of two-inch (21) nominal
thickness.
(b) Heavy Timber Floors. Heavy timber constructed $Dors
be not less than three -inches (31) nominal splined or
shall
tongued and grooved plank or may be of laminated sob
to the provisions of paragraph (d).
construction conforming
Structural floors shall be covered with one -inch (1') "em'
Flooring
incl flooring laid crosswise or diagonally.
halt mcu t'fa"► Ucb
not extend closer than one
(%") $Pace shalt be covered by a w ding fas-
the
tend to the wall and so arranged that it will not obstruct
tened corbeling Of
swelling or shrinking movements of the floor.
masonry walls under floor may be used place Of
such molding.
(c) Heavy Timiger Root Decks. Heavy timber '
umber of not
stall be oft and or sphned of & double
IM than two inches (2") nominal this "
boards With
thickness of ane -inch (r) acquittal thickness
saes•
1958 EDITION Sections 2514-2515
tongued and grooved joints, or with staggered joints, or of Heavy
square -edged lumber of not less than three -inches V) Timber
nominal width set on edge and securely spiked together. Qenatructles
When supporting roof loads only, wood bolsters intertying (Cont'd.)
adjoining girders or connecting roof trusses with columns
may be used.
(d) lAnduated Floors or Deeks. A laminated lumber floor
or deck built up of wood members set on edge, when meeting
the following requirements, may be designed as a solid floor
or roof deck of the same thickness, and continuous spans
may be designed on the basis of the full cross section using
the simple span moment coefficient.
1. Laminations shall be driven up and spiked closely to-
gether with a row of nails near each edge at spaced inter-
vals and staggered vertically. Nail spacing in each row
shall not exceed eighteen inches (18") for two -inch -by -eight -
inch (2"x8") nominal width and be proportional for other
plank widths. Nail length shall be not less than two and one-
half times the net thickness of each lamination.
2. A single span deck shall have all laminations full
length.
3. A continuous deck of two spans shall have not more
than every fourth lamination spliced within quarter points
adjoining supports.
4. A continuous deck of more than two spans shall have
not more than every third lamination spliced within quarter
points adjoining supports.
5. Joints shall be closely butted over supports or staggered
across the deck but within the adjoining quarter spans.
6. No lamination shall be spliced more than twice in any
span.
(e) Heavy Timber Root Anchorage- In heavy timber con-
struction every roof girder, and every alternate roof beam,
shall be anchored to an exterior or interior wall or to an
interior column; roof planking where supported by a wall
shall be anchored to such wall at intervals not exceeding
twenty feet (20'). every mot:itor and every saw -tooth con-
struction shall be anchored to the main roof construction.
Such anchors shall consist of steel or iron bolts or straps of
sufficient strength to resist the computed vertical uplift of
the roof.
See. 2818. (a) General. In addition to the other provisions ween utdod
of thia Chapter, the provisions in Subsections (b) to (f) are Dwelling
applicable to dwelling construction.
(b) Floor Joists. Where the floor joists are not designed as
specified in this Chapter, the maximum allowable spans based
on lumber surfaced four sides and on a live load of 40 p.s.f.
shall be as set forth in Table No. 25-0.
(c) Girders. Girders supporting fust floor joists in dwell-
ings shall be not less than four Inches by four inches (4" x
4") for spans of five feet (51 or less, or not lees than four
inches by six Inches (4" x 6") (placed on edge) for spans
not more than seven feet (4').
ffli3
kw
3�♦a
aq Ep m O �+b Oil � C u�
°aw= a v8�wa �pw=' yp
a^Uu«w'wGa"3 °m i�o0'+Q y C�
��'W^w �m�o x�mo°= � �°' a3 y� Pa3�=�.aa�.'wzo•R $,� ow«epi
AD'�• p,A ���i° '�°moy o+G O.. .0 o'
&ciAcoft$o� =am3o~> gDax,a
be
a v°Ow ONeta �wmW ^... m w3 aam ww.' p �"� ii waDm�u9 wg. a+6ip u•°C1
°��$ 4"'°aQm..taz..,z Vpm� �� me vev& �>'wsm.SoEwa p aEat•, M$w�o'
cd�Cuadpoazo
w �mL ®.mUi7�:45CWA
°OS�£�
.v0
�
•SO
Ooww OaC a$IEO faYeis$pgO3a b�Nm>mJ+p¢Va$=C�3waExa'"Cmi.zx^:Gtp.;i2a®mem .®=SimOy ppfix°O:dOw�mC0w� A ^ioCw'whS�oC'i�a8�O7wcN:mUmGOawCmcam8Qomaoj NOIla r.oo$1wme6 :
�xv
!.
ba'�'',o3a�°R �8�mm�8���88s ea�c8~om�°M �'�e��a�cY aa,a a�"6.�°°°�' �.a�•�
�hq �Qy a bi z 3'a •° a �v., kti � : u m aeQ m'o �,� � '° $ .,
8..8'o.8 =w®,ay�w jAom°o + rSr".EAa
49.5mswwas o
W ds omwO »�sO ah.9 raw
Co»a. «xawo
74
o OR
000
O&O
a
a 4 Qo za g Sga l o o�'om°�=i Sc.�id 0w8°. Ko
pQ{za`�iy .a i'ig3tg� gni «awrt� $"ai=y,�p`so aam zop7°y®o°�° v«o
D op .S ai aw . a �i to $'Oor,m CE—A Mov
yG{ OCy3MmOgalrM a�ID.%
P. i u®l
i2
8$3_ a EA �i O w mum .0 aiU •+w
A,ji,
,
da a.
w j a M� aR oai R « Vm.+ .�C� o�a�i va7 a3 ooQ o4n`Nom
iL z8 y4oi+_to'"x m ^ �ORc38°° u=°=r�,qo=-`" " my;�vho .tip w8.
9Np G6 'COU wmm �. sAu+j OQ a S Mad O.m wC�� a^Vz ao.m�° wawa �. z°.. cs •0 .��"�'' °w
sb. CE..4U Ow w+MO wa�iw^mom w�wO'3m.. sa«='bull "
RX} w$$ u=+¢w O p m w=+ Camm m•.+tpmad °
t,�Ow"m .CSR
C.VG .w.ao �aov�8" � °mR..p wD ai°�aa°i�f7•opa�ia F.C,.,
°«aS3o2so�C�""'> Cwtied .+m3 omSoo «m^L
w fS m .cZ O'4..=. w Y.+'O'rR'0 w.ri = _
w i► bmw 06 w p mw C^.YauV
�"w�tt G... M 4^ 388 w aw mw
Moo.9asmoa ww=>ta'8®amu a'vm$
_ w C —•ad J~m ,o " nmw.�_°'m.° a �uoom .-.C�xO j!'°'z-;
32 �aaay = S.�ca w=" c�ummw as EwmE38®� .�wa.a,,mw�z... �Sodo=
mmC,Vtad f+®'Pmv a• -•O.. ad �.w. =O O
°tea KC. A.+•a Csi°�v.C3wm80 �,."°w
,Ass a3 ��z vaJm 3zgi wc,..CC,am: >ao° =y�tmw
. pmw`y a3.�^LS .a=. �m�,0 ji'mm$ Smite®O,Y, .m.m«>r �=w+~.+^mor-50 •O t5° w
E$ w: Lz^.°�3�Yx aw aims° od:»8
m ® mza.a3Oom °'y8w a®= .ash s;x.a c=E z=
NO
si+��i�C°a��a o•G R�a. ism a�'�= �`�~' ��eG 42
QaO ..iso.a wa mm 3MOa0V<3U �m.a««�d2w� wY VOi-CO.ma waw �::.X►
aar
W
8
�i
MZiiass
'3 '°ld at9°.L
ul quot las
•ugaaayi sassans aya
Waoz! slut paptn:p at= aagmn( to saps s.
®I aa++8
g.u' m s l:ua$ aeaS
sip I q
-SZ
iZ
uo paq aq dem
Y'St °N
l
'L
I'8L
81
Z1 x Z
it1
6 -OT
i1-6
OT -91
$-LT
9 -ST
T
4-8T
1-19
9-0
6-6i
8 -ZZ
E1
Z ST
-8L
9-ZL
U-fiL
OT-!tT
t
0-81
9 -LZ—
5-iZ _
OL -TL
9-iT
S—£i
iZ
9i
OL x Z
i
9_8
9--16
8 OL
6
0-ZT
8 -SL
8 -SL
9 %1
8 -LL
6-81
ZT ' "_
- - - --
S-Oi
0_ 1 -OT
0-91
IL-iL
01-91
'_ __
6 -LL
8-9T
01-8
9-6T
---
i1 -OT
— ---
�L
iZ
g x Z
01-11
{{ g
OT -2
---
go
0-6
8-6
6 -ii
6-01
& ii
9T
Zj
--------- -
8-L
Z -L
IT -6
8-T1
9'Oi
9 -SL
S-ZT
9-91
L 8
9'L
;Z
x Z
11-9
Z-fi
115
6-4
► S
TT 9
9-g
9
01-1
01-6
1-8
9-0 1
9T
ZL
_ _ ----
IT -S
OT-i
9-9
0-L
i-8
9�L
a�i�
6-6
a tai
0-6
-----
°lut'g
Z- Ti
ao
a"Rta$
9u paJ
___-- ---
(sa9ruI)
(saq-j)
AO
motag
Suglsrj
Irdl
alixpaJ
Sv�tu3
Susiaa;�
aatsc
t pa Id
5a,t
f.3
aaalscjd }
inoya�M
paaalscgd
b 500'23
Lslof
11001.4
lupga'j
a s
Yraasctd
antic
&' id
ya,ealsetd
pasaaseid
an«yac Rx t
an
30
d0
�ZIS
\Y.1S _S1IIti l4\i°1'4` IC"11CI`.0\1\
aaxnbs sad spunod 482151 'ioog
'saj i4I #o A481aia$ spanad uaaag—�O'I Q�fd3Q #oo# aMilbS lad spnnod 0i-"1IV� 31PI
•"Slor moo'L;, #t03 sxvis WIC 1,,Orrl T--O-gz
m
z
.v xw 4- orae •9-r9 loI a(Qct_ U. qml in to
-
9'YT IT'ZT 6-81 8-9T
L -TS
6-6T
9-€9
9 -ZZ
6Z
91
ZT X Z
8'LT "T 6 -ZZ S -OZ
L-tz
I -M
O -LZ
;-5Z
ZT
i-09 "1 9-58 9-£Z
T -LZ
_T -LZ
01-6Z
8 62
3 -TT 9-01 "1 OT-ZI
€-LT
9-91
9-6T
9 -LT
tZ
91
OT X Z
01-€T 5-91 SILT 8-51
"9
't
TT -81
6 -ZZ
8';Z
I-19
9'YZ
ZI
LT -ST £-$I Z' I -8T
-ZZ
6 -TZ
S -g L -L 0-11 01-6
T-91
8-11
IT -6T
Z-€1
-9T
iZ
9T
8 X Z
R -OT S'6 2-91 O-ZT
OT -91
9-H
8'Li
T
ZT
OT -IT 8 -OT 5-51 01-91
,
6 -LT
S-91
9-61
9-91
8-4 9•5 OI -L TT -9
i-6
-TT
S 8
S -OT
OT -OT
LT-ZL
6 6
TT -TT
iZ
9T
9 X Z
OT -9 Z'9 9'6 9 8
-L Z -L TT -OT 6-6
5
I -ST
6 -TT
€-91
8-€T
ZI
TT
#-# 6-€
9-5
LT -t
T-9
5-9
tZ
b X Z
6-
6-9
0-9
9-L
8-9
91
L 9 9-5
OL -L
IT -9
8-8
6-L
ZT
9ut(ea�y Rut(cs,} Suejna7 au�gea�
aueicaJ �ua(iaJuvju-y
xgsi9a3 gs�u,3
�uy"J
yseua..g ys,u�3
(sayauli
sa au
i y
yxia�{ gsau+.3 ysen�3 q=.aee:{
ria,u ug luatisxYSa,S 4tuaxxi3uS 8u+asoshiny
Suiu+xiatng 8uauw.idng
8ui:'oddu5 euelux3dnca
,LSYOi
�}
,LSSO
ION
i I a n,.J
30
30
AlAoOld
a € YYY 3uau.J
upjeD
i 11 ac�,J
� 'JtiY�YdS
3215
(wgsul gsur iaa3D
p= uo ill aadvpmed WkQg3g •ao�T w4_d Mu_poq uo Ioof a"bs aad spnnod �—(iVOZ rdt11'I
(ZI-9 uwq4 wool -dam)
y� 41mv 8 VO 9XV&s 3IgYMori iV S -5Z -ox 3'Isvz
rs,
A Alai
i 19: S Hal AtW�aatAbyW
!a!
A slit
Bpi 1 l , W H . M !
00 U, 12 1A
1 10P 11 r-
�sOb�VNOaeipc
slam Wj 11
NO Mrs yQ111. lm-t�
0pt3I A f 1Oa+ 321gll Evil H W! I
1 Pill 1141t W MAIS
�am
UN rz 1 A 1� : ! AV ilia 11H
2 >�-'.' >1 ;Qmg: Z wit
AV KAU �-i
ej go]
W11 t mix W9 Q v
b'l '.. a �. 44'1 : 113? an ml U'll" 1
1 04 bp U1.1 vo 15 1 111 JAqA pi 1!;.
IRP-0,140.1 1 MITIP! �Fa�sta,�OC�RYVma
%his AS MOHR 1.0 AM
days of"MINS a 1 8 w I " 4,
Igo
A-; 0 t 4
10 E HOW
4o
s'
-I
as o H a 1 i A 10, Mimi io
till 1
O—H, 1
I.S.
1
WS
be ba
isle
mat cdti 16
will 6 let Iji IN 11
'1 11 ,
tog u— .2111 In I moil
t.j
oat GO S
I
Nb 1W�cLH
OZ51 WE Ic. Ap
0 Jbi
1z loop 41 oil
21W all n" WE a
r bo A
Tos' rad OIJ I . ao S. p I Wit 1m OAF ,
bow 0 . gag
who
IS.
w�
gm
w
E+
��
c
�
0p0016 pp
Uw
OrfiON
NNC9M
aF
W
�'!.
W
L
o
a
v'
�F
FrnW
z
o
Zav"
w
p�0
to
c- m to 10
WOV
3
W
� a q u a t: YO a 0 ,Q U a a a c: .,. •yy � .•. a o'OO m i m ai Q a amn .^Or G
k.0 aT7��. O.C�•"•m G�yM^��a�CG,�C� w.^'�,.y �� �.a+0 V h0 ^..
qm m�X•^y Q'yaa�+�"'6k'aS��QC'v"m M«+ �aM��aomawc�Y
s+ aOk AY .CY-,°^-O'"'C uCo3 c�"wF+ra�a'dA_pU�
w� �a^'Ci7 Fra �'gcOU �cOCb m+'O-'aaRivigiyc0^.'.�+p �W�'OC�.CcOdm V �aS
o� m.a�",,�.'''"• V'~'0��7Op�'L.'�bO^y+auC�CY b4vafSO.+.Y.^..O�ad�'�i
tY•'O ��asO, �Om��Ctiu^'cH.=o'mesora,o aa"O'a�+bp��d
oyY �.�eio �itlamid' mc,�� amap°maw V.,osm.'�Yk.aybno°'o
m,1U.,c�i,am,
ayeo w'poai vNOA° l~C^mps occ''�*' Kaf °n3 "�'mou�3aRa
NM$ �yOxd O°a.o pp°O""w ��ow,�'r°�n'M�sR9,m 1Y•+�.�AY sa, amid asaro�
wY° ,���,y� UZ.em�3macy? w..,a:.�,[o•.-' m..�ao'�•+YY���'
°yam
OOa �Y •O kHy mVdkry GYJa�a O,'O..,Y Vaf ''aGV �...k kk�aa a44
kkm
kw o+'v,+C OMO,apa�'�R'msa,0'craO��mc°i E'1MR3F�ap�p,�
a p Y k O a o m O a OY AY m Cf y a� y 0oa•- Q pp
wal�YcdvY"k"C.�.'yR�a'' ptiyYOi+CI+O+,,aO,(amSy�+dp
M-
0
kOOv CY3^COo GD Vxa�'ba
109
O m m 3 o a qOj k a m a U a�y°+NAQ°
doCd
a y1 �amivam�ad"���sac�a>o"�� yc�moOAMar�bo
'p a .K'h m GOOF .ryUaaa qq
HYat y" a..p 1 odk>Raipp pok�ako�OTl0 A:oimd yat aty
Cd o at .» ,a ... b a ++ s~ o0 o m ,+ ao a k a .., zt o q •^' p .., ,C C
to =6 "m .+ waSYryj. NOOm- WYwOYascr as3asP+°+ m 0 3
'� �'Y�.� cmv a.d w d � a w Q.S a v a c �:' °.�.N °' O � °y"Y 7 W ^ °+�• �. � o � of v
m
oe°°cq>�o 0a0o oo� w ',' i, s~ p� Ca.;; y ,x � +•+ m a �,•.-. y '� o m a a o .a +-� w � ^ k r� aQ
'u o y,,,p0 oo.aa kR7 a aa'aw�d+"im k M Mach a�y�Mas�°p ��'
.000'� �k.ato `.r�y�y�� oa�.c'�p�w3aa°ia'� ° oatMa N�..r"'ikr'y059N aOi�
� vvra+OOOa�i V.59A
bD ++ a a OD
.r,'o� ,r~Oa' v d ti mO,.,m amia aa,alm b4
c! 40. �o y^atm y ym dak Yalal 3�a1? kv.{
w o x m o a> m C p., w o co, o m x ash a Ym„ o o a k
+or+
Oc�oi�0oao>H
E-
0 co+3m�a�yY c a G°�waco +°, °a mmR,oYa �'dw..
�p, .wO
oaFY m^y 0O91.9vY O%Ow 13 oo
L ; "tko $k,1'
aar?o
05
O
ti
j�
ami ad y, v F a u d« y a F , w d k.r d r; < o k m6a••;� w p0 otF.+
ww..
�.,, a• '4' o d w�cd aaooko«-k�a ��°F° °aw
31-
Z5j-f�"
«�d$ ��.c ad.d° v o k�Fd,d.,ca'i.s°« cd.�waR'idu°vdF wq o,.,>,
DOw� U
116 ...R qand td.ucd. alkw wp^ w w'k a+w+ k w°Omd ,I"aS :,.+
M adO R
1.1-00 k — = D boil G k^ aa,, p, rd ar, C
gow±+d cRi�oato a�++rd,o aaNnwr����d�dU.krC7^C q['G'��"o+�do U�^cdi
of aaiOmD+ c�""k"a yO2�`" oada�fr'°kod.`s0awi
awd«q' pa,� Zyd, Fw', bb,�d+d+m Fd.N dca c°, -CE wdUF� O,k FO'k
'L.O tdr
-0.00 :p2sq �t°i iT F� ) O'�6�ikdmd.4 OL ro°Ok°.: nia QUdw°p�i1URd�p 't7w ydi dk
p k F 0, k'a •.. k k.... 40.
... ca ° ,y b0 k."'p r'O.I k« V p pwY'a m% d« 0 QS F d
at v d k p y k 00 4) k� > F �Q'+d+ t" i9 kw � > d0+.+ "ir +ma k„: °,G F I{�♦0 00 0 FO, dF.. d+"' �!''-�
O "� yi' P, w � 1 ° w F ° C°.7 6. ►d. SFdY 'a edFi eai aui O3 0 3 °Fi 67 W' yd 'Cf w 'dv R fes., w cd d *6. {«ter
wd°'°�+d' Cdiw Com. dfU.'. l�',�.+f°. Od„4C^ r.. cdOF OwVF.u�V 6ki .00
F� �d•Oo Y
owowwo
'O and W$ boa ' a0i ++ a0dla d9.01. �,'Fp'd "��e�'do; -'k >,� 02 k°oa
woke .kw"''k,k �+°mniami 0.'Fd k'kkpd� F« del'd°d wmm
ok �oa:dd+�^^
a'y� k d myXjcl
C«`�3°qiao°<FdbtieedG'mC M�Ga$dk"0�0
dY+Ck+ waO'.�kOiq �kFdQ.N0bO9•V�mv r. go
a�mcdf0QdGkd0yd�o;"iwIw'cdc'tIkLCaaa.iiwwyUadc'od FRSG a0.dxGCv"�'l•��-adc�mk3i',^wwy�ppFd�
Ur0q.p6°..�i.h
Ur5C
daOmG ow tR_v Um
0:wbcmo
da "0kz e p� 0 ab4:gw
as cc beS0 vm 'a Go '; m
akH'Og k F dwbakk^dpQ
Z000 1 aN-k OU�U� .0 .0 ykgq^admQQdE�^wA VOdkda04idOC'7i
MN.wd.-�Owd.dmi�6mmlMvl,44m.'da�.7 wa°dk$dv^u��ti �gimd
v° O.F.+ C° rok .dC 7 'k tiS w w OU7 O w O aki 0..0 O .G td.. "' �c a~i w d -o
IS 4003 W d
crS aas i'a adoca �°m $«,� I0cadk='F.= m dYd'�.WaOa°�
r
a
ki � N'ClmkddYk ,a Iw
q at a0 ^O ,G ^O.Oa�O kk° w�b0abidaid U¢7 d — —ID
eivk ktakx��'i9S 14, 'CE, CYekdtakd ,Okdy�++>+ �k
a� $.,y« S"�a�mma0�s°>,m�
ryCs L E>, Em ;-a k °� x� dd d^N7w.7'Cl+d+ �.dcOdtea"zd .cdaaa$, oa �'otgtaR��SSSS,.
d% Uasd.vakd„, $mF d'QRS~+ aFiw idiom kYyF,I.t�... d�� mwk�p.d>,2
aip wdaid wd Yd [°X-�GcidmdN c°i6°°^°da�uk �oo'C�d°QOC d�ao�k
.k. d FY4Q k0 ++ d af� F a k d cd'A d kw Y R a F aY D m
�f U Vd aO�FY�i c.a, p U'k ^N o'�'iF^aj d.0>'10NiU+a R.••� aldo l.. d•�id al Oi as
1~3 4Y k rr bpku dv pdc d mf�a+m �. yydd d F F 0> '10 doUd W y a«dku'k^ a a!
O, 5d ^^N.k «,dp P. P1�17 $aim YwvM o0w0 mW a�dw
bpia�°o.Cad s' «w�,x,� �::�mat�as- c.S pgrmxc`i'dov� �odO��w��
+dui .`,3 d i.. o rJ at .o ' ^d d at aP d w - k Q'i «Yr oS. +'' t aS W �,-
'aM.->. °j Op,:�OatM�m OdUwY «E, 0�'kdaYi�� y� a3 �'a amiU o,ho iawbl .k lA .d,dyy
rca,,.0d� 2,f.5 d�wd`,R0 �as�om "!SW14 ^"%.�i Yd$.'°+a�ips°.� >o oeiobe%� cFdi�aa�i
i F N d O d °� O !�, m � k Odd Ci �i a< bA'� � U '"' y F.• k k .^S A
' a' m FU..
a w�k� wo w«k>F o R>,N F m pm �bgm0NYd d kpa a1�F C 0 V k--
m'dk0dm d'a 'a w k'�vuU F k �p a! am 'a ud. wmRt
ID wd °add.`d.'��dm.�
vvmOM aC' ai �3d AFm a.kd ,atkk.s +v 45
Qd1r ama�� q kt°>...m0•^fMma>kR"b U MRS 4'M
dm O by .p.."'dEA dM otF�>,'., �'aw.o Fk.iO°Op amid d^3
y3Uad Wad ^RS m. d0 ya ew° R++kGd�d'a °-,a >{y� oQ'
k°'.'r3 N a cFiu d C."y�°'" 'kd N`�«��M mmaki
aaq° aC�a O r;d�w FFkk V'OkaL7Y> y;Uua^aFi O.
oo�c�1�fmc�}bQ ocd."FS0^pOUir��Avc ��d'ami9%i�„Nk:+O� 17wy�E'�m�' bao
k d �p ,Cf tm la x �. a/ w _k, v � `�'a Q'^ � va! ° W 's
�La UU,X M F m^ Oi+" o C. �'F'Cf �a O'O
°a°Hmd" �M�ti a$c%�"O0' cd°°�arc°u'� Q�w°.c
��+ E
d �""�«yam, $ w Mm a mm►°.�ckd,.M, od°mO3 2�7d�MO wdkk$ d ;d5°S
�q.'k°mwAy,a~i U� aSCOv -•vim ami �'kv°.0 >o
wued9w..,at
upa noddmogC.ON Owwdd k0a�o o o �depdtw° woad d Rt
Z ....m0 U%-, 0.u00o�'O t�°k« d%°";Gdpk ba
n
�-.om�dM o 'o
o
Yes„ � i6
� Gr
a
.�a'�bOtO aim O� A « G+'C.+,apAK� roan„^,C a�kw0
Qu � ru
y 'S'
wami c `Oc, Ir - «H p 3 a
v^ tiUa+ a� � 60 ay�,iapOtyd d�Gv� dR%Oa�
Cha ia,o 'ap •4� dRwC� •°viG3 Komn `�'+'C.'�
.p° o a•� a war ° Q a G++;vR
aK C•.+�" a� a �".OHm�pR ya.•.O '"7a
,a, m.., aRi� tiR v ai m�d
U W O ° v V C a .p .0 ar CO K ,p C .°, Carl •w m
H '•"
s"ar►a+�k0a `f ar G ,0 .p...pa�m vu9v aavidK
Ow ,C GO a •ian ay°,p^ Oa ..i R' O
w 4} 'r M `C w a� '� td R Gwi U CH> °q �•. Q' m '�'>
3a K
csQ Q� �•M°, � Camari y•^arC� � araS: mai uc°.
a+Uy aga G^ar C...`40) ..,s m'Om aa:3a KFLa
Um yOKa° �mvf. a, Jm•.o r.em041,
0 Irl a�7y'd ti�gN aip
`r,a°aARcai oq�aai.arna~'y 5dR'aGi•-:a,,a Q °o'°°CL�c6
°afc~iAaHia cid bDa�OUga acgs...ar'"'a`- ma S-�mOmary.+ia.
a,.0 m C ° H'yCR •" U�.. ar C'Q
RA.^ °b F, �w a COU Co m O mSC+
a
V Qai>dwaU�am.°H•"' qm iFCLa+GcH + 7+:fK.+Jt •G
0 aUC�y OmK +pao�+�^apy„a
01 CD cdV
.c4'E
d go,
, ma.a.
Q �H27 maa ama vaUU m27arama +-'°U'OR ?+
Ga3 °� Ra,k,�� ^�'A �� o Nsw
Mia)1
mOarmvWA Cuss
0
�: ��ams �rrcacaagami ycmaCv�oa
° � � � aCiA � y a G.0 v�',rm, am v2✓ � a� G.
E«�C
.K owv
m 'v ..•m,C •.o+ 'OmuRx« cam".K •VA
�r V ar KO ��a�i� .-aiOabp. a�byb
O�oO�rm'� ? °a :. �0mary 'C•+c�d�ia`�+
U•-.GIn,OCpO�ma K umN y'OmN
�Rp�aariR^` b0+ �Kda0�C"sa�Ksa
C •p o P. aGi bA d ar
Wows xG a parasb 30'o°b0o
�yCdob0�amaic>ar0POvi'aG«aod
arR'wA X 41!j.5
AC
ta.. O' K m E
•'i~iy U a a www w yy°-arW'C�,"'O cd p A ce0
w r o v R, m o .O t3+.:,cGd 'aO •a0 u U v
+v>ara_ cRR.��ppRa
•p .+•� .0 a P4oq m K N ++ H
i•Q«,� a aw y � a� rwn ami v OA o.: ar y� �
��ayyd) O AwaaiCroGK040
L aai� ° K °A a U•i. ar O cad a,4'Q eydU N
cd
cd 0-
;4
d ma°Gmai
W3bm„�Gy�°24n yarKora«opo
waocC a>i .0 vaH cd $2.
C, sm.0°�Ca
R'Cid Y.�R C R. �d +,G+,K > »! S�"s. ow.G O.Hi y°, O
CL'a:� u a UI m K R. O +-� O "p f'w O K O m K m ... U
Q0""27 ° w ®?,°AR a ar dKHK.^» a> °HK.+mam
cai a~�a'Koa'Ca m«at at RRA+"arwopoa,cZm aOKa27� °1 10 :9 a>
G7 AL1 OH �wc"im taw Cho«y�R+� aHmG ^a oway° > cd ay.0
apar a' vo'^'.Gmarmm ardvarvydaa+ yM ia� o aariR0v.go
par q7 N a+
ai aai K Q� m m cd Rm 0 G a a 'a •0F °O boy vR 0 m R ar�� m 9'0
wmb a Rc,'3ao�"Id CbOC a%�R^.,^.0 ++°Ya'a'dvcd Hm z Ac�aro vi�AvI'o :+
cd
.95 .0-10 C= w o,ti-1oac.Ko� �Aoa�Ka�q 4A�0ar.00m
hard a s 27 O y aR ar., a k E s- K a� m Cal Ez Ev i mi+ � p v �R
a R rC. cai >` Ew aAc: caiaaaridERm ° as W K aK +' °CW09
D aC a AO'ap••� a ,a+ ++ a a"+.Cd°�Ho K
R y 0 4 ,a, p H 2 a� G� Y aa5 m 1.+ a� ai a Hw ^ .c ° R° W a 0:5
R� a�� aa. Y° a.' a K o a.a v s aai
w ^.'3A 3 0«+° a.0 Rw 'Cm yw �+� aR� A arRR a C^ F'.y ba G.S C m O C a Cid A!; 40 d%-Vw
Q as a .a K R t+ H a 27 .-. O H „., a m .0 d ar q{ ar ar ,F+.�C�'. a �.. �y �d
C4° ar ^>'a+00.ri TJ0 U t6 Cj a`O .K ""' Hm K ^a•3G w10 +' CY ^•^' msdmE VSA
.Q .a ,arC y C tk Cz C `O' w.ar. 3 aFp""', arH m0 cd.0 C N A ° 6'°°` aG' am m«."0.�.°.' R.c'ORM dna
Q� is a K O K ar a u K +; a
K ami at .aG ¢.�.G i'' �j +H-�R . p• R'i azm+.; .o F m« C + cd a UR m R" fir"'^p d a 6Gi a C a.t R"� aaiA �aar+
7+ ar c ° U o y m a 27 C a a F 60 "a "'0 m A .;?C 5 .0=1 0 0 .'+, m ,�°„ S. v K E a
O a Cc.m Kam
(�0b0,u coo Ubpar^pCU�^ CK N K Uar .+uGHU w•.� ar. a! +-�
mp asaSm G ou +p+>+ 'OGC G « ma a •pots aya Ha C� ARm
°�''i. 6t 'Cy 27F y$� Kw ^ ,C q+ar CO.^,moa 0'«.K �wH uOK HOa FH0a° a4. amya, m'O
Em,°„^�mK27 HaAmaG..Co. p�'UaraG�at u� bOk araaari. •�� df. tiwaCGp �Ham>°'�sm.�A
war >b4arK '0«. «t+id as H ..K.A �0 aH r.,m a•p Kara.�'y S Sw H'r"Har,7
a°iEar (:°arc °H'°^auai a«d um°aaA '"marG°'aaraa�°vpoC+'pCHp�omr>m° m
w. a aS w ^ RCA KOM C Hcd RK�G aK bp P.vN Dai maaF.0
ar Har a p,O.G., ° y a' m H $OA ar a« H a �, c d oR K° cRi� cd H... G p p 1.M
to 0.r, K o Azz"0A . a p°; a a.0 p Oa O COMA
ar G- eA cdeaCarC" bG bo wp., ara ar�;.,'Oa gto27 a a 'a. m
� y m aoOtz.arGb C++H a .GR b[.rHaKaq"" �p...a...aaoo'pR m... as
figA
m..» p.K •..a arOM0 .0 a,,, ., Cq,a^•-� arHaE•~CH U Pa k�ta
„®bw SU ara^mZ !C R 2s Oar«Hm ,. U^is arCaar».•C k O ar m..«++
K.+a0ai^ar°aae°, 0^accm�maay�q�ar4AA�°06as''""epj a arW - m a a �A cod, 'v a C H y k v a G'' P Q a TLL2sw'. ar
m x. ar K� r a r w O H U
�0a$ar�^ a`°'ao~ya woXG��a�a�+arKGa2sa«�"�iRKi'yA�cd 0°"�,m
$ea%��wv« �mwMar °ywE°oa«m d21 CIO, Qo «a« o•wcd
« cy��bo
_w
viipiia
x1 4
Eiji r-,
.0bQ
co 0 MOO, OJO
.04.,
00,4 CDV4
A Cd t4
'1' wl-w-C
00 0�19 =1 g
ls. A �
w &.y= jyp 102 S 0
"as
-a cd
'El
tonot 1 0
4 41• E
ol
cl z r. Zu g.
ON 0!F
go ov ar
bo i;3 1 §J
4:5 E4 k Cd—t, Cd no. 0
r o .0 54l'ah
0. ::
Dt,
ws
M., M-
.40 0
45 v
gol.
.2.5-
5.2 a s
vm C) to 0 g-
017 {t-
VIA I -so J
r. g
A waGC, W—O—M"E air 1=66 w.ocr, 0
.•V .-a
cis -4:! 0— :6
'; — v 6v 0:2 a paoa
a
r -A
w =01 4 f Ong :t 04
�a1111 II 11 II II II II II 11 if if [Iif if
DJ h Asa
E j -Z
ta. 12
A,
gill rag 0
VOW
C., R ;;
pis Rvq
0
Im
V4
ws
M., M-
.40 0
45 v
gol.
.2.5-
5.2 a s
vm C) to 0 g-
017 {t-
VIA I -so J
r. g
A waGC, W—O—M"E air 1=66 w.ocr, 0
.•V .-a
cis -4:! 0— :6
'; — v 6v 0:2 a paoa
a
r -A
w =01 4 f Ong :t 04
�a1111 II 11 II II II II II 11 if if [Iif if
DJ h Asa
w
f.7 •anu ue�{3 .lair, a.�X t.;.�e a�.a uaJu.�a
•a0u to mn�u!u!u< e
,! sra�e i'apeotune
Nle apapro „as•a�ls Xua. tia4 IIat3a.aia'1 pau:[ndaa;m a9 IP'q` 'eaae lin! aql nc ! a
r[ gi to saX �a ai e.nul ly r:aac Pape q aq1 Io uu!suauu 3 a ls a g s, 1 I ', •pt!gl
f {! uaa.K aq aaaehgi ;scat aq; uaga ri{0o is 'i P. I IleIed aqi iu gland
I li!uliad aq llegs asea,iaul
soft
SLTTas
SSI ./SLZ£OSL SM '14'00 n/ ........... ..I..M199Z 'oaS aS
........... .._..... _................ uaau ans;iua;usao PuapS£1 £IT ad
lint ++4
SOi 061 OS+6 09 �T 11199010
'1 90 0 ..._......._..........._ ................_.......... ! o Ilyuag
__........._.. sauq;o i1Y
(ciuq do; ;daaxa) sSm;ooj Run -Z uI
OSS 009 ......._......_...............................................:......
OSZ " s.iuq dol
SK ON 009 0091 OS£ '.101.0 x (Pa$°°q aq Isnui) ejuq uistd
Q OTL SLI 061 SsL '.180.0 x
s�aq;o I[Y
'wILO'0 s (sst3q do3 Idaaxa) s3ul;oo; AVA-Z uI
LSI OSi "!sauq dol
SL SSLL1 001 'd50'O sauq pauuojaQ
OOT 06 SL SL '.lSO'9 >s "s1lum .tuags a;a.iouoo Paa(oj�;ag
09S''0 >s .............. —,............... ......... . " ssu oo
OK 09E '•1ZT'0 s uwnioa jo a2pa wo(jiPua�uuasip Iu s'CIldua 3rr
06L as;;ul6a'o sal I ssJ°ua o; 6iqu;Ins dnslueq
06L OOZ 09I 06Z '.180'0 s "trulqutoa u q Puu sdn trlls jo uol;
puu sauq Iuu{pn;ixuoi g3i•n swuag
nlsO6lEO0 >s aian4q7 asreq ssn; qIo
06 cL paluaoi S aadoid 10 sdiil
Puu sauq ivu,Pnllwuoi q3+.+k s(aeag
Eit 06 SL 49 (uolsua;�ieuo tr °Tula+ qam OU 411-w sumag
889T An °! iP Io arnsuaui g su) , : [uag5
fN7ET ....._..............._...... .
9Ztt 00E ',IS6'O ++Iu[d ul uolsua; u+ ss2i Ia aaq�
_._ _
'! I acua llx
$Isd & O j v " Zt s x._. ._SI u -- ; --- volssa,idu(oa uI ssa.i;s Iagt; amaajxa
Or,L£
000
mni(u� 9099 �a5
,L •Ixupq Moi aauu £"
i� A+otaq u.alogs -P�+oaauui NQIL.II?3,lg�Q
aia3auoJ I0 {{3�Ua.71x aU„q ata.lauoa '
%I. O gZl.i fs jis
Sul? 404
II m:i .3°2YM/Y21IY
L1 )I�t07 SKI S3SlsX"Z .LIKil �i8YA1tYIZV'--f�-8� .0.:41111 +L
sectleak 2814 UNIFORM BUILDING COM
Flexural 7. In slabs other than ribbed floor construction or sat
Clostpixtations slabs, the principal reinforcement shall not be spaced farth, r
S ) apart than three times the slab thickness.
8. In structural slabs of uniform thickness the minimu.,
amount of reinforcement in the direction of principal etre,,
shall be
For structural, intermediate and hard grades
andrail steel.............................................................0025 bd
For steel having a minimum yield point of
56,000 PAL _...............................................................002 bd
(b) Dlstwwe between Lateral Supports. The clear distance
between lateral supports of a beam shall not exceed 32 times
the least width of compression flange.
(c) Depth of Beam or Slab. The depth of the beam or slab
shall be taken as the distance from the centroid of the
tensile reinforcement to the compression face of the struc-
tural member. Any floor finish not placed monolithically
with the floor slab shall not be included as a part of the
structural member. When the finish is placed monolithically
with the structural slab in buildings of the warehouse or
Industrial class, the over-all depth shall be at least one-half
inch (%") over that required by the design of the member.
(d) Requirements for T-)Teams. Requirements shall be as
follows:
1. In T-beam construction the slab and beam shall be
built integrally or otherwise effectively bonded together.
The effective flange width to be used in the design of sym-
metrical T-beams shall not exceed one-fourth of the span
length of the beam, and its overhanging width on either
side of the web shall not exceed eight times the thickness
of the slab nor one-half the clear distance to the next beam.
2. For beams having a flange on one side only, the effective
overhanging flange width shall not exceed one-twelfth of the
span length of the beam, nor six times the thickness of the
slab, nor one-half the clear distance to the nearest beam.
3. Where the principal reinforcement in a slab which is
considered as the flange of a T-beam (not a rib In ribbed
Boors) is parallel to the beam, transverse reinforcement shall
be provided in the top of the slab. This reinforcement shall
be designed to carry the load on the portion of the slab
assumed as the flange of the T-beam. The spacing of the
bars shall not exceed five times the thickness of the flange,
nor in any case eighteen inches (18").
4. Provisions shall be made for the compressive stress at
the support in continuous T-beam construction, care being
taken that the provisions of Section 2610 relating to the
spacing of bars, and Section 2609 (e) relating to the placing
Of concrete, shall be fully met.
5. The overhanging portion of the flange of the beam shall
not be considered as effective in computing the shear and
diagonal tension resistance of T-beams,
172
M4 MIG i1NIMRM BUILDING CODt:
The effectiveness of compression reinforcement in resisting
bending may be taken at twice the value Indicated from
calculations assuming a straight line relation between stress
and strain and the modular ratio given in Section 2611, but
not of greater value than the allowable stream in tension.
Sbrinkage and Sec. 2616. Reinforcement for shrinkage and temperature
Temperature streams normal to the principal reinforcement shall be pro -
Reinforcement vided in floor and roof slabs where the principal reinforce-
ment extends in one direction only. Such reinforcement shall
provide for the following minimum ratios of reinforcement
area to concrete area (bd), but in no case shall such rein-
forcing bars be placed farther apart than five times the stab
thickness nor more than eighteen inches (18"):
Floor slabs where plain bars are used ....................... 0.0025
Floor stabs where deformed bars are used ................ 0.002
Floor slabs where wire fabric is used, having weld.
ed intersections not farther apart in the direction
of stress than twelve inches (12") ....._..................... 0.0018
Roof slabs where plain bars are used ........................ 0.003
Roof slabs where deformed bars are used ................ 0.0025
Roof slabs where wire fabric is used, having weld-
ed intersections not farther apart in the direction
of stress than twelve inches (12") ...._.............._...... 0.0022
Two-way See. 2616. (a) General. This construction, consisting of
glgpy finers reinforced in two directions and supported on four
sides, includes solid reinforced concrete slabs, concrete joists
with fillers of hollow concrete units or clay tile, with or
without concrete top slabs; and concrete joists with top
slabs placed monolithically with the joists. The slab shall be
supported by walls or beams on all sides and if not securely
attached to supports, shall be reinforced as specified in
Subsection (b).
(b) Reinforcement. Where the slab is not securely attached
to the supporting beams or walls, special reinforcement shall
be provided at exterior corners in both the bottom and top
of the slab. This reinforcement shall be provided for a
distance in each direction from the corner equal to one-fifth
the longest span. The reinforcement in the top of the slab
shall be parallel to the diagonal from the corner. The rein-
forcement in the bottom of the slab shall be at right angles
to the diagonal or may be of bars in two directions parallel
to the sides of the slab. The reinforcement in each band
shall be of equivalent size and spacing to that required for
the maximum positive moment in the slab.
(c) Des1Sm. The slab and its supports shall be designed by
approved methods which shall take into account the effect
of continuity at supports, the ratio of length to width of
slab and the effect of two-way action.
(d) Slab Thickness. In no case shall the slab thickness be
x less than four inches (4") nor less than the perimeter of
the stab divided b180. The
Y spacing of reinforcement shall
I
174
i
# =z
-- ..... ..,
8817
Shear sad Stirrups. tIN1FOR1►18 r,(;
Perpendicular of
jld
t y paled ulatudiareiifocent Wb
ebd�mi
Wd...........................................................................
Snctined stj be PdIcUJar roportioned by
rruPs Placed
Formula (5).
meat shall not used alone the longitudinal
the shearing as web
unitbattesa reinforcement
{r) exceeds 0.081', or 240rnent when
wh u
id) �t l.
effned portion of any longitudinal bar fourths of
n of t7hly the center three- Of t
web reinforcement e
m
Pose, and that !a bent up for
hall be considered effective for that
ars shall be bent
diameter not
less around
than six times the bar size, a pin having the web reinforcement g }
or
of a single group of parallel consists of a single
distance from the au bare all bent u g bent bar
PpOrt' the required Pat the same
shall be computed
b yForraula (4). area of such bars
.............................................................. —(4)
In }.sin a
la
Where hue a isshall�slonot exceed 0.04}a 6}d, or 120
bent up at different bid
distances from the r °r
area shall be determinedgroups of bars
by Formula (5);pport' the required
(
Aid (sina................ ..
i- cos a) ...........— ........(5)
bent bars
haare used alone as web
scribed ab spaced that the reinforcement, they
°Ye in his Subsection effective inclined portion
Subsection
de -
to of this Section, anaeeh the requirements of
unit stress shall not exceed 0.08 }'� nor 240
the allowable shearing
The shearing wait
stress
Menmakingof bars are employed shall o be ten special arrange -
comparative tests, to destruction, that determined b
Pro
conformitywftth thand of similar specimOf ens reinforced of the
safety being applied Mona of this Cos.de relnfore in
In both the same factor
a
(the
type of reiaforo
of orcein n Is useodr ent Where more than one
Web, total shearing
the web the same
.
shall be resisnforee
portion
resistances coin be assumed as thetanea of tthehis portion of
}tea of
. ' such cO7nputationsh
a ehearinvarious
Parashearing
tel
shall be included Only once, tan a sof the
and no one type of r nforcent
ent
shall be assumed
to resist more than 2
8 A
w
,M
Section 2618
UNIFORM BUILDING color
Ind am
Bond shall be similarly computed on compressive reinfa
that'd.)
ce.
ment, but the shear used in computing the bond shall lie
reduced in the ratio of the compressive force
assumed in the
bars to the total compressive force at the section. Anchcn:ne
shall be provided by ernbedmert past the as Him to decclop
the assumed compressive force in the bars at the bond
in Table No. 26-B. stress
Adequate end rage l be Provided for e
members
reinforcement n all flexural to which Formula (6)
does not apply, such as footings, brackets, and
other tapered
or stepped beams in which the tensile reinforcement is n,)t
Parallel to the compression face.
(b) Anchorage Requirements. Tensile negativereinforce-
ment in any span of a continuous, restrained, or cantilever
beam, ar in any member of a rigid frame shall be
adequately
anchored by bond, hooks, or mechanical anchors in or through
the supporting member. Within any such span every rein-
forcing bar except in a lapped splice shall be
extended
least 12 diameters beyond the point at which It is no lont
needed to resist stress.
At least one-third of the total reinforcement provided tint
negative moment at the support shall be extended beyond
the extreme position of the point of inflection a distaw,
sufficient to develop by bond one-half the allowable stress in
such bars, not less than one-sixteenth of the clear spin
length, or not less than the depth the
of member, whichever
is greater. The maximum tension in any bar must be devel-
oped by bond on a sufficient
straight or bent embedment (,l-
by other anchorage. See Section 2618 (f).
The bar may be bent across the web at an angle of nut
less than 15 degrees with
the longitudinal portion of the
bar and be made continuous with the reinforcement whiol!
resists moment of opposite sign.
Of the positive reinforcement in continuous beams not less
than one-fourth the area shall
extend along the same face
of the beam into the support a distance of six inches (6").
In simple beams, or at the freely supported end of continu-
ous beams, at least one-third the required positive reinforce-
ment shall extend along the same face of the beam into the
support a distance of
six inches (6").
(c) plain Bars in Tension. Plain bars in tension shall
terminate in standard hooks
except that hooks shall not be
required on the positive reinforcement at interior supports
of continuous members.
(it) Anchorage of Web Reinforcement. The ends of bars
forming simple LT- or multiple
stirrups shall be anchored bs
one of the following methods;
I. Welding to longitudinal reinforcement.
2. Bending tightly around the longitudinal reinforcement
through at least 180 degrees.
3. Embedment above or below the mid-depth of the beam
on the compression side, a distance
sufficient to develop the
r
178
Sections 2616 UNDFURM BUILDING CODE
Hooks shall not be considered effective in adding to the
compressive resistance of bars.
Any mechanical device capable of developing the strength
of the bar without damage to the concrete may be used in
Hou of a hook. Tests must be presented to show the adequacy
of such devices.
Flat Slabs See, 261% (a) Scope. The term "flat slab" shall mean a
reinforced concrete slab supported by columns with or with-
out flaring heads or column capitals, with or without de,
pressed or drop panels and generally without beams or gird-
ers. Recesses or pockets in flat -slab ceilings, located between
reinforcing bars and forming cellular or two-way ribbed
ceilings, whether left open or filled with permanent fillers,
shah not prevent a slab from being considered a flat slab;
but allowable unit stresses shall not be exceeded.
(b) Design of Fiat Slabs as Continuous Frames. Any
type of flat -slab construction may be designed by application
of the principles of continuity,
(c) Design of FDat Slabs by Moment Coefficients. Arbi-
trary coefficients may be used when the construction con-
forms with the following:
L The ratio of length to width of panel does not exceed
1:33.
2. The slab is continuous for at least three panels in each
direction.
3. The successive span lengths in each direction differ by
not more than 20 per cent of the shorter span.
(d) Details, The details of the design and construction
of flat slabs shall conform to U.B.C. Standard No, 26-15-58.
Behiforced Sec. 2620. (a) Limiting Dimensions, The following Sub-
Conerele on reinforced concrete and composite columns except
cohmm Subsection (g) apply to a short column, for which the unsup-
and Walls ported length is not greater than 10 times the least lateral
dimension. When the unsupported length exceeds this value,
the design shall be modified as shown in Subsection (g).
Principal columns in buildings shall have a minimum diam-
eter of twelve inches (121), or in the case of rectangular
columns, a minimum thickness of ten inches (10") and a
minimum gross area of one hundred and twenty square
inches (120 sq. in.). Posts that are not continuous from
story to story shall have a minimum diameter or thickness
of six inches (61).
(b) Unsupported Length of Columns. For purposes of
determining the limiting dimensions of columns, the unsup-
ported length of reinforced concrete columns shall be taken
x as the clear distance between floor slabs,
EXCEMONS: I. In fiat -slab construction, it shall be
the clear distance between the floor and the lower ex-
tremity of the capital.
4= 160
U"
three tniea the aide dim ��� BiTILDING CflAI:
to spacin enaion for square ba
a" Waft t inch- "I or
bane andloneb.not less Uiazi on and oneCh,.
1CwY adjacentr he �g aSgregate used. Klose apacise maximum sz:
Pairs of bare at a lapped Splice. g aPP1Y to
In the column in ertiioai are used,
�h� Where lapped splices
la a a follows.. as follows: minimum amount .,t.
I. For deformed bare with concrete having an ultimate
strength of 3�0 pounds Per square inch or above, 20 than)f hi of bar Yield
intermediate or hard -grade steel. For
Of higher yield point, the amount of la
one diameter for each 1000 bar''
P shall be increased
Founds per square inch working ware inch abm
concrete Strengths are less than 30008 stress. When tl,
inch, the amount of lap shall be one- pounds
values given above. third greater t an m
II. For lain h° tfl,
100 Per cent bas an that um amount of lap shall hr
F greater than
m• Welded splices or other ositived for deformed bars
used Instead of lapped splices. Welded splices tions may
ably be used in cases where the shall prefer,
and one-half inches (11, � syn a bar diameter exceeds one
h defined as one in which approved welded splice sha!!
and that will developthe bars are butted and welde,i
stress of the reinforinin tension at least the
g steel used. Yield point
lu Where changes in the cross see of -':
occur, the longitudinal bars -bell be offset in a region
where lateral su a column
floor slab or menPport is afforded b
are offset the slo ties or reinforcing spirals
capital.
of the colo Pe of the inclined P Where bars
above and br shall not exceed P°rti°n from the axis
the column, the °ffset shall bee In six and the bars
Parallel to the axis of
rP) shaPlilg� rMatoreement. The ratio of spiral reinforcement
be not less than the value given by Formula (8):
P` = 0.45 Q-1) P`
WHIME
P = ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to ratio
of the concrete core (out to out of spirals] vol -
R = ratio of gr)SS area to eo
` -- useful limit stress re area of column,
Useful a$ 40,000 °f spiral reinforcement, toberod- of hot Pounds per square inch for hot -rolled
The Inuare
for o d ainch for 11rd
rawn;,e re. e nd60 000 Poon dsspeer sPer quare
continuous
Spiral reinforcement shall consist of
vertical spaces s hold I Y in place and evenly spaced
ung at least two for1e to line by
SPfraIS twenty inches
182
i1NIIrORM sun wo CODE
2636
Releforead
inch (}y») in diameter and Shan be spaced apart not over
48 tie diameters or the least dimension of
Concrete
16 bar diameters,
the there are more them four ongitudical nal
Columns
ADS WSW
di es shall be provided so that every len
ined on and has lateral
(Cast<d )
rt el stet that providedbyby�a 90 -degree Omer
support e1
of a tie.
I<indts of rolums section. In a tied column which for
3.
architectural reasons has a larger dross section than required
by consideration of loading, a reduced effective area (A<)
of the totaln ea may be used in
not legs
the provisions of Subsectioone-half
(d) I-
4. Combined axis( and bending load. For tied columns
to combined axial and bending
which are designed withstand
stresses,the limiting steel ratio of 0.04 may be increased to
by lapping shall not ex-
0.08. Te amount of steel spliced
ceed a steel ratio of 0.04 in any three-foot (3') length of
column. The size of the column designed under this provi-
be less than that required to withstand
sion shall in no case
the axial load alone with a steel ratio of 0.04.
(e) Composite Columns. 1. Permissible toad. The per-
column stencasedof truc-
missible i n con-
steel oron a ea t-tronpcolumn thoroughlye
and
with both ven
by Formuldinal
ment,rshall notexc d that gia
= 0.225A<f<-I-f.A,-f-f,A...................................................(9)
WHERE
A. = net area of concrete
= Aa—A.—A,.
A. = cross-sectional area of longitudinal bar reinforce-
ment.
A, = cross-sectional area of the steel or east -iron core.
tress in metal core, not to exceed
f,. = permissible unit
16,000 pounds per square inch for a steel core; or
10,000 pounds per square inch for a cast-iron core.
The remaining notation is that of Subsection (c).
2. Details of metal core and reinforcement. The cross-
sectional area of the metal core shall not exceed 20 per
the column. If a hollow metal core
cent of the gross area of
is used it shall be filled with concrete. The amounts of
longitudinal and spiral reinforcement and the requirements
as to spacing of bars, details of splices, and thickness of
protective shell outside the spiral shall conform to the
limiting values specified in Subsection (c), paragraphs 2,
3, 4, and 5. A clearance of at least three inches (3") shall
be maintained between the spiral and the metal core at
except that when the core consists of a structural
all points,
steel H -column the minimum clearance may be reduced to
two inches (21).
3. Splices and connections of metal cores. Metal cores in
composite columns shall be accurately milled at splices and
positive provision shall be made for alignment of one care
184
Section UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Bellotareed Y. Pape eehummi. The permissible load on columns con-
Cannella of steel pipe filled with concrete shall be determined
cokwom by Formula (11):
sail Wags P = 0.225f.A. + f.A.(Coam..........................._.. -............._......•(11)
) The value of f, shall be that given by Formula (12):
h `
f. = 18,000 — 70 % 1 F-.......................... ................. (12)
WHERE
f, = average unit stress In metal core.
is = unsupported length of column.
K = least radius of gyration of metal core section.
(yield point of pipe)
F=
45,000
If the yield point of the pipe is not known, the factor F
shall be taken as 0.5.
(g) Long Columns. The maximum permissible load iv on
axially loaded reinforced concrete or composite columns
having a length, (h), greater than 10 times the least lateral
dimension, (d), shall be given by Formula (13):
/ A
p=P1 i 1.3—.03—................................................(13)
d
where P is the permissible axial load on a short column as
given by Subsections (c), (d), and (e)•
The maximum permissible load P on eccentrically loaded
h
columns in which — exceeds 10 shall also be given by
d
Formula (13) in which P is the permissible eccentrically
applied load on a short column as determined by the pro-
visions of Subsections (i) and (j). In long columns subjected
to definite bending stresses, as determined in Subsection (h),
the ratio hid shall not exceed 20.
(h) Bending Moments in Columns. When the stiffness
and strength of the columns are utilized to reduce moments
in beams, girders, or slabs, as in the case of rigid frames, or
in other forms of continuous construction wherein column
moments are unavoidable, they shall be provided for in the
design. In computing moments in columns, the far ends may
be considered fixed. Columns shall be designed to resist the
axial forces from loads on all floors, plus the maximum
bending due to loads on a single adjacent span of the floor
under consideration.
(ii Columns Subjected to Axial Load and Bending. 1.
} ?Members subject to an axial load and bending in one prin-
cipal plane, but with that ratio of eccentricity to depth Olt no
greater than two-thirds, shall be so proportioned that:
i f, f.
i .+ F does not exceed unity.-........... .........................(14)
186
Jus -MI UNIFOR K BVILDINO CODE
TABLE NO. BEINFORGED
IIIg
LLS
COBBEABII(I�O$W
LiM' IIRATIO—
MAX{MliM DISTANCE BETWEEN MINIMUNI
I{F.iGHT STORY I SUPPORTS TO WALL THICKNESS
(Feet) THICKNESS (Ine6ca)
3 6
39 26
1 25 7 I 7 I 6
I
Basemene a a a
0.2f'e............................(17)
SOd
When the reinforcement in bearing walls is designed, placed,
and anchored in position as for columns, the working atreesea
shalt be on the basis of formulas for columns. For calculating
cehmw
Iii Waft
wall stresses, concentrated loads may be assumed to be
(&)
distributed over a maximum length of wall not exceeding the
center to center distance between loads nor five times the
width of the bearing.
The area of the horizontal reinforcement of reinforced
concrete walls shall be not less than 0.0025, and that of the
vertical reinforcement not less than 0.0015 times the area
of the wall if of bars, and not less
of the reinforced section
of welded i
than three-fourths re fabric. Walls
much
more than ten inchesst 0") thick, except for basement walls,
shall have the reinforcement for each direction placed in two
layers parallel with the faces of the wall. One layer consist-
ing of not less than one-half and not more than two-thirds
the total required shall be placed not less than two inches
(2") nor more than one-third the thickness of the wail from
the exterior surface. The other layer, comprising the balance
of the required reinforcement, shall be placed not less than
three-fourths inch (/") and not more than one-third the
thickness of the wall from the interior surface. Bars, if used,
shall be not less than No. 3 bars nor shall they be spaced
more than eighteen inches (18"1 on centers. Welded wire
reinforcement for walls shall be in at sheet form and spaced
not less than four inches (4") center to center of the wires.
Reinforced concrete walls shall be anchored at all points
of lateral support. Such anchorage shall be capable of resist-
ing the horizontal forces with a minimum of 200 pounds per
lineal foot.
(k) Nonbearing Partitions. Nonbearing partitions of re-
inforced concrete shall have a thickness of not less than one
forty-eighth of the distance between their supports nor less
than two inches (2").
` , FesOep
Sec. M1. (a) Loads and Reactions. Footings shall be
proportioned to sustain the applied loads and induced reac-
tions without exceeding the allowable stresses as prescribed
in Section 2613, and as further provided in this Section and
in Section 2624 (e) for plain concrete.
ISS
Section MI, UNIFORM BUILDING CGDE
determined shall be distributed across the corresponding
(Ceara) resisting section in the following manner:
In two-way square footings, the reinforcement extending
In each direction shall be distributed uniformly across the
full width of the footing.
In two-way rectangular footings, the reinforcement in the
long direction shall be distributed uniformly across the full
width of the footing, In the case of the reinforcement in the
short direction, that portion determined by Formula (18)
shall be uniformly distributed across a hand -width (B) cen-
tered with respect to the center line of the column or pedestal
and having a width equal to the length of the short side
of the footing. The remainder of the reinforcement shall
be uniformly distributed in the outer portion of the footing.
Reinforcement in band -width (B} 2
Total reinforcement in short direction (S+ 1)
where "S" is the ratio of the long side to the short side of
the footing.
(d) Shear and Bond. The critical section for shear to be
used as a measure of diagonal tension shall be assumed as
a vertical section obtained by passing a series of vertical
planes through the footing, each of which is parallel to a
corresponding face of the column, pedestal, or wall and
located a distance therefrom equal to the depth for footings
on soil, and one-half the depth for footings on piles.
Each face of the critical section shall be considered as
resisting an external shear equal to the load on an area
bounded by said face of the critical section for shear, two
diagonal lines drawn from the column or pedestal corners
and making 45 -degree angles with the principal axes of the
footing, and that portion of the corresponding edge or edges
of the footing intercepted between the two diagonals.
Critical sections for bond shall be assumed at the same
planes as those prescribed for bending moment in Subsection
(c); also at all other vertical planes where changes of section
or of reinforcement occur.
Computations for shear to be used as a measure of bond
shall be based on the same section and loading as specified
); for the determination of external bending moment in Sub -
„s:.,".. section (c).
The total tensile reinforcement at any section shall provide
A. a bond resistance at least equal to the bond requirement
as computed from the following percentages of the external
shear at the section:
L In one-way reinforced footings, 100 per cent.
%. 2. In two-way reinforced footings, 85 per cent,
In computing the external shear on any section through
a footing supported on piles, the entire reaction from any
pile whose center is located six inches (0") or more outside
the section shall be assumed as producing shear on the sec-
tion; the reaction from any pile whose center is located six
190
Sections 26254M
UNIFORM BUILDING ooDE
TABLE NO. WD—ALLOWABLE BAR ON BOLTS
DIAMETER
EMBEDMENT SHEAR
(1 -ha)
(Socha) (Pounds)
j,
4 750
gfi
4 1000
5 1500
3y
6 2000
1
7 25W
1%
3 3000
1%
9 3804
raeusnatically (c) Water. The water content at the time of discharge,
Placed Including any moisture in the fine aggregate, shall not exceed
concrete three and one-half gallons per sack of cement.
(CoWd.) (d) 9fixing. The cement and aggregate shall be thoroughly
mixed prior to the addition of water. At the time of mixing
the fine aggregate shall contain not less than three per cent
moisture.
(e) Rebound. Any rebound or accumulated loose aggregate
shall be removed from the surface to be covered prior to
placing the initial or any succeeding layers of pneumatically
placed concrete. Rebound may be re -used If it conforms to
the requirements for aggregate, but not in excess of 25 per
cent of the total aggregate in any batch.
(f) Joints. Unfinished work shall not be allowed to stand
for more than 30 minutes unless all abrupt edges are sloped
to a thin edge. Before resuming work, this sloped portion
shall be cleaned and wetted.
(g) Damage. Any pneumatically placed concrete which
subsides after placement shall be removed.
soft See. 2818. Belts shall be solidly embedded in plain or
reinforced concrete, and the connection shall be designed so
that the shear on every bolt is not more than the values
set forth In Table No. 28-1).
194
Per�iNI1^O$il[ $nILpINQ 00Dt
Usk Sectio
inch shall not exceed those
aPactfted in this
t ) (a) Tenalm
Ctructural
a Steel o lie teeL et section ......_....
Cast Iron on net tion_.........._....._..................:20ow
section
.......................
allowed)
l8 jet On based on nominal dt {not aIIowed)
at root Of ameter
thread ............. .....
(b) Gampm sloe ....................... .20,000
Columns, gross aftuon:
For axiallY Ioaded columna with values
of //r
not greater than 120_
17 _ 0.485
For exiallY loaded
columns
with values Of 1/r (main members)
18,040
greater than 120-
i
18,000r= 200r
For axiallY loaded columns q
secondary members) with vax'alaeag and other
of t/r
greater than 120 ..............18,000
Hate Girder 1 + — --
Webs GirderStiffeners, section 18,000x+
Rolled Sections
Por main compression ..- .
a toe of fillet.................20,000 $
exceed 180 and for bracing, members, the ratio
of
I/r shall On east -iron eolumne, w strata, and similar members 200•
with
square or fixed ends:
= 9ppp — 40 t/r
With ap
minimum gross diameter of six inches
the ratio t/r never in excess of 74. (6") and with
In the foreformulas
MumOWorking ed ess length of th per square in hml equals unit
�h-- ed I
r`
a u the
colo and r eq als the least radiusor mof�ion member in
mn or compression member. gyration of the
Y
plate gird- and bullion in extreme fibers of rolled sections,
coin em
up members ......
unit ..........................20,004
ite7fge of strea9 in
value computed member as geRureesh ware inch in the
PuteH
from the following 1111 not exceed the
td g formula:
With
r
bt not in excess of 600 ....................................
20,0pp
. _.
166
UNTFORM RUU0ING CODE
Una (f) Reversal Of Strew The sectional area of the portion
between connections, of members subject to reversal of
stress, need not be increased by reason of the reversal, but
MINIM) shall be sufficient in area and disposition to provide for
the maximum compression, and the maximum tension,
separately.
The sectional area of members subject to loads (other than
wind loads) producing alternating tensile and compressive
stresses shall be augmented, at the approach to a connection,
by riveting or welding on additional material, so that the
augmented section shall comply with the following rule;
To the net total compressive stress, and to the net total
tensile stress, add arithmetically 50 per cent of the smnMr
of there two; and proportion the connected material and the
connecting rivets, bolts, pins, or welds, for each of the tw ,
Increased stresses thus separately obtained at the unit
stresses prescribed in this Section.
(g) Members Carrying Wind Load Only. See Section 2363
(h) Allowable Unit Stresses for Used Steel. The allowabi,
unit stresses assigned by the Building Official to any stet'
not complying with the requirements of Section 2701 shall in
no case be more than 80 per cent of the stresses given it
Section 2702. In designs where used steel is provided for,
proper allowances shall be made for holes, reduction in sec-
tion by rust, or other defects.
Reeeehie See. 2703. Every member and combination of members
Lords shall be designed to provide for any stress due to an eccentric
load or force, whenever the increase in stress due to eccentric
load or force exceeds 10 per cent of the stress due to a
direct load or force on the member or members; bit a
member framed directly to a central web of another member
shall not be considered an eccentric load or force in casr, the
resultant of the load or force acts parallel with the said
central web.
Rivets, bolts, and welds subject to shearing and externally
applied tensile or compressive forces shall be so proportioned
that the combined unit stress will not exceed the unit stress
allowed for shear.
Members subject to both axial and bending stresses shall
be 30 proportioned that the quantity f -F f,
shall not exceed unity, in which F. F.
F<' Axial unit stress that would be permitted by this Code
If axial stresses only existed.
Fe= Bending unit stress that would be permitted by this
Code if bending stresses only existed.
r-U
It axial stress (actual) = the total axial stress
divided by the area of the member.
f> =Unit bending stress (actual) =the bending moment
divided by the section modulus of the member.
189
section JIM
UNIFdBM BUHMN4 Cotp
Beams and wired by the foregoing, shallGirders not exceed eighty-four inches
(84') or that given by the formula;
WORM) 11,000 t
d= _
til v
in which d equals the clear distance between stiffeners, i
inches.
Plate girder stiffeners shall be in pairs, one On each side
of the web, and shall be connected to the web by rivets spaccc:
not more than eight times their nominal diameter apart.
Intermediate stiffeners may be crimped over the Range
angles.
..
(ewawto Horizontal eeThe
lateral force
On crane nysprovide for the ffctofmoving crane
trolleys shall, if not otherwise specified, be 20 per cent of
the sum of the weights of the lifted load and of the crane
trolley (but exclusive of other parts of the crane), applied
at the top of rail one-half on each side of runway; and shall
be considered as acting in either direction normal to the
runway rail.
The longitudinal force shall, if not otherwise specified, be
taken as 10 per cent of the maximum wheel loads of the
crane applied at the top of rail.
(f) Flange Connections. Rivets and welds connecting the
Ranges to the web shall be proportioned to resist the hori-
zontal shear due to bending as well as any loads applied
directly to the flange.
shall coonform t The heti requirements oickness of f Section n partsing 05 (b)angea
Unstiffened cover plates on riveted girders shall not extend
more than 18 times the thickness of the thinnest outside
plate beyond the outer row of rivets connecting them to the
angles. The total cross-sectional area of cover plates of
riveted girders shall not exceed 70 per cent of the total Range
area.
If the girder is subjected to substantial fluctuations in
loading, stiffeners, lateral plates, or other appurtenant
material shall not be welded to the tension flange, except at
Points where the maximum flange stress is less than half
the allowable.
(h) Cover Plates. Cover plates, when required, shall be
of equal thickness or shall diminish in thickness from the
Range angles outward. No plate shall be thicker than the
Range angles.
) Flange Sections. The gross section of the compression
flange of s plate girder shall be not less than the gross
seetin of the tension Range.
(i) Bard Beams, Rolled beams shall be so proportioned
that the unit compression stresses at the web toe of the fillets
200
101
i
37d� RT6: UNIFORM $[RLDINQ CpUE
Ll"Steelwork exposed to industrialrequired. a or vapor shall be
( ) given special Protection as
(b) Projecting Ebmeots Under
elements of me �mPreasioa Pro'
camPression due too bendingected shall to axial core Jechng
have iatioa ofrewidtt to
thickness not greater than the following:
Single -angle struts .......................................
Double angle struts. 12
girders, columns, or other Plates projecting from
Pneasion fl Pression members; com-
aerns f beams; stiffeners on plate girders;
flanges or stems of tees ............. _
The width of plates shall be taken from ....... 16
to the first row seen
rivets or welds-, the width of leg of angde e
channels, and zees, and of the stems of tees, shall be taken
as the full nominal dimension; the width of flanges of beams
and thea shall f taken as one-half the foil nominal width"
The thickness of a sloping flange shall be measured halfway
between a free edge and the corresponding face of the web.
When a projecting element exceeds the width -to -thickness
ratio Prescribed in the preceding paragraph, but would con-
form to same and would
with portion of satisfy the stress requirements
Member
its width considered as removed, the
removal of r will be considered acceptable without the actual
the excess width.
- 27K Compression
spliced suffimembers when faced for bearings
wall be ciently to hold the connecfW members
accurately in place. Other joints in riveted work, whether
in tension or compression, shall be spliced so as to transfer
the stress to which the member is subject.
madGre�. 27117• (a) Riveted Holes. In computing net area the
Seetilms;Net diameter of a rivet hole shall be
( V) greater than the nominal diameter of ten as he rivet. inch
(b) Pia How In pin -connected tension members, the net
section across the pin hole, transverse to the axis of the
member, shall be not less than 135 per cent and the net
section beyond the pin hole, parallel with the axis of the
'he body Of the member
member, not less than go per cent, of the net section of
In all
Pt ° Heeledriveted members the net width across
t' the Pin hole, transverse to the axis of the member, shall
Preferably not
Dei, at the pin eight times the thickness of the mem-
(c) Ohsdn of Holes. In the case of a chain of holes extend -
r lath a
across s Part in any diagonal or zigzag line, the net
c gross width part shall be obtained by deducting from the
chain and ad sum of the diameters of all the holes in the
ding to the section so obtained for each gauge
# ;. space in the chain. the �
� £ x, melon to A B
g = trai%ve'>!1e of two successive holes
two holes.
P'f ., 202
xltiil
UNt`O$M BUILDING CODE
TABLE NO. 27-A—)MINIM M 1 GFIDISTANMS
MINIMUM EDGE-DISTANCE(Inches
RIVETDIAMETER FOR PUNCHED HOLES )
(laebea) In Sheared In Rolled Edge In Rolled Edge
Ed" of Plate. o)
Struetunl Shears•
2 I i
1
21% 1# 1
2 IX
'Ma7 be decreased % iWh when holea are near and of beam.
(rip connected member and the extension secured by sufficient
rivets to develop the strength of the filler.
(h) Me- Under Stiffeners. Fillers under plate girder
stiffeners at end bearing or points of concentrated loads shall
be secured stresses. sufficient
. rivets to prevent excessive bending
and bearing
(i) $i Joints.
tension orr comAll joints in riveted work, whether in
copression, shall be so spliced as properly to
transmit all stresses, except as se an 8d in Section open
2706.
The minimum distance from the center of any rivet or
bolt hole to any edge shall be as set forth in Table No. 27-A.
The minimum distance between centers of rivet holes shall
be three diameters of the rivet.
The maximum pi
members corn tch in the line of stress of compression
Posed of plates and shapes shall not exceeF
16 times the thinnest outside plate or shape, or 20 times
the thinnest enclosed plate or shape with a maximum of
twelve inches (12^); and at right angles to the direction of
stress the distance between lines of rivets shall not exceed
32 times the thinnest plate or shape,
sections with two For angles in built
gauge lines, with rivets staggere(L the
maximum pitch in the line of stress in each gauge line shail
not exceed 24 times the thinnest plate with a maximum of
k :F eighteen Inches (1g»),
In
ension
three if et six i chestwo fes '"^peed of two angles, a pitch of
Pression members(3) will be allowed, and In corn.
e8t (2% but the ratio 1!r for each
angle between rivets shall be not more than three-fourths
of that of the whole member.
The pitch rivets at th
left member. shall
not e ends of built-up compression
length
f exceed four diameters of the rivets for a
equate one and one-ha1P times the maximum width
of the mem
a q, The minimum distance between the center of any rivet
connected m
# w under ted or stress, and the end or other boundary of the
ember toward which the pressure of the rivet is
shall be
' not leas than the shearing area of the rivet
2711 UN" O" $UIIA
IN6 GORE
TABLE NO. 27-N—ALLOWABLE UPAT WORKING
STRESSES FOR STATIC LOADS
V
(butt weids)_..20,000 lbs, per Sq, in.........................._.13,600
9999Mffin
Iba. per aq, in.etal .... ...20,000 lbs, erp sq. in.
Which are carried on rivets, shall nave such stresses dew!
oiled by the shearing and bearing values of the
rivets or bolts.
Welded
Cooneetious
See, 2710. Fusion welding may be used (in place of rive,
ing or bolting) for connecting structural
steel or wrought -
iron parts or members to one another, but in no case shall
the stresses in such joints
exceed the allowable unit working
Stresses given in Table No. 27-B,
Maximum fiber stresses due to bending shall not exceed the
values prescribed above for tension
and compression, respec-
tively. In designing welded joints adequate provision shall
be made for bending stresses due to eccentricity,
the
if any, to
disposition or section of base metal parts.
The same proportional increase in the above working
stresses shall be allowed for the various
given conditions as
specified in Section 2702 (f) and (g),
1:-B.C. Standard No. 27-8-58 shall be followed in the design
and execution of structural
welding,
Detaft C tion
Se. 2711. Trusses shall be riveted or welded structures,
and only when there Is sufficient
reason to Justify, as where
riveted field connections become unwieldy, may they be
designed as pin -connected structures.
All Joints in riveted work, whether in tension or com-
pression, Shall be spliced properly
to
Bracing shall be transmit the stresses,
they forces when thea buildi
bucilent to withstand safely wind and
well a after completion. ng is in the process of
erection a
When two or more plates are in contact they Shall be
stitch riveted with rivets not
more than twelve Inches (12")
apart in either direction.
The ends of beamS, channels, girders, and trusses that
bear on masonry a reinforced concrete shall be so framed
a
ta
ry oflcree llntbeexceeded, stresses ad anchors ampe size
strength shall be
and
provided thoroughly embedded in the
masonry or reinforced concrete construction.
Ile
rods shall betresses d holes Proportioned themresist shallplacedeia. respective
spring of the arches
%practicable.
a the
V
'2ft ,M DUUMING C®i)E
by plates wherever necessary
st one plate shall be as wide
Mow. Where angles are used
mt rivets to distribute their
the full cross section of t}re
made to transfer the colunr,;
ations.
vel and to correct elevation
Y.
to accord with the following
s two inches (2") or less in
t Planing or straightening:
,wo inches (21) but less than
ay be straightened by press -
'aces if presses are not avail
four inches (4") or over in
bearing surfaces (except as
ction).
rolled-steel bearing plates
surfaces (except as noted in
olumn bases which rest on
routed to insure full bearing
efficient size and number to
studs, steel joists, and other
frame of light steel con -
rolled sections, or sections
specially formed light -gauge
ton of both usedalone or in
als of construction. Such
ty be of a determinate truss
joined together by are or
In the case of expanded
nay be left intact to form a
ratio of 1/r shall not exceed
shall be accepted as recog-
s design of light steel struc-
rise specifically provided in
shall be so constructed that
members shall intersect at
be made in the design for
;menta shall be of sufficient
shearing stresses.
lAght
Sted
Construction
UNIFOOSM 13UIMING 001;F,
Pin holes shall be reinforced by plates wherever neeessarz
to give proper bearing. At least one plate shall be as wide
as the projecting flanges will allow. Where angles are used
this plate shall contain sufficient rivets to distribute their
portion of the pin pressure to the full cross section of the
member.
See. 2714. Provision shall be made to transfer the column
loads to the footings and foundations,
Column bases shall be set level and to correct elevation
with full bearing on the masonry.
Column bases shall be finished to accord with the following
requirements:
I. Rolled-steel bearing plates two inches (21) or less in
thickness may be used without planing or straightening;
rolled-steel bearing plates over two inches IV) but less than
four inches (41) in thickness may be straightened by press-
ing, or planed on all bearing surfaces if presses are not avail-
able; rolled-steel bearing plates four inches (411) or over in
thickness shall be planed on all bearing surfaces (except as
noted in paragraph 3 of this Section).
2. Column bases other than rolled-steel bearing plates
shall be planed on all bearing surfaces (except as noted in
paragraph 3).
3. The bottom surfaces of column bases which rest n
masonry foundations and are grouted to insure full bearinog
contact need not be planed.
4. Anchor bolts shall be of sufficient size and number to
develop the computed stresses.
Sec. 2715. (a) General. Steel studs, steel joists, and other
supports used in the structural frame of light steel con-
struction shall be light -weight rolled sections, or sections
made of commonly accepted or specially formed light -gauge
Hat rolled sheets; or a combination of both usedalone or in
combination with other materials of construction. Such
studs, supports, or steel joists may be of a determinate truss
design with elements effectively joined together by are or
resistance welding, or by rivets. In the case of expanded
sections, a portion of the metal may be left intact to form a
connection. For steel studs the ratio of I/r shall not exceed
180.
U.B.C. Standard No. 27-3-58 shall be accepted as recog-
nized engineering practice for the design of light steel struc-
Lura1 members, except as otherwise specifically provided in
this Code,
the lien web or
nes of force of ashallsed members
n o nested members shall intersect at
a point or proper allowance shall be made in the design for
any resulting stress. The web elements shall be of sufficient
strength to resist effectively the shearing stresses.
sew.. ....
Section 2715
1958 EDITION
All connections shall be riveted, bolted, or welded. All steel- bight
1 be thoroughly cleaned angConstruction
work, including welds and connections, except and where entirely Steel
encased in concrete, shat
one coat of acceptable metal protection well worked into the
joints and open spaces.
notSeel used tlss than tNo. o 8 UaS iStanda dcgaugetural lin th emers ll be
kn ss
EXCEPTION: Steel used to form load -carrying panels,
including ribbed roof deck construction, shall be not less
than No. 22 U. S. Standard gauge in thickness.
(b) Stresses. The unit design stress in structural members
of light steel shall not exceed the minimum yield strength of
the steel divided by 1.85. For steel conforming to Grade C
3
(minimum yield point 3,000 pounds per square inch) of
vorking
U.B.C. Standard No. 27-2- m I ch. Steele
ss
58 the maximum
shall not exceed 18,000 pounds p
er Grade C shall be suitably identified as
higher strength than
to yield point and ultimate strength.
(c) Construction Details. Steel studs or other steel sup-
porting members used in the structural frame of light steel
oiats shall be connected to the sup -
construction and steel jporting beams, girders, foundations, or other steel support"
Ing members by are or resistance welding, riveting, bolt-
ing, or other approved methods. All such welds in light steel
construction shall be made on two sides or two edges of
each bearing in such a manner as to resist effectively the
stresses developed. Resistance welding shall develop the full
strength of the member welded.
Steel floor and roof members supported on masonry and
reinforced concrete shall have end bearings at least four
inches IV) in length and the ends of such members resting
on rovided
approved oist anchors thoroughly embedded or reinforced concrete shall be therein. with
Bearing plates, when required by design, shall be securely
welded, bolted, or riveted to such floor
and roof members,
studs, or other supporting a
Bearing studs or other vertical bearing members shall rest
on a sole or plate having an effective width equal to the
depth of such member and having a sufficient cross section
to transfer the required loads of the vertical member resting
thereon unless such bearing vertical member is thoroughly
embedded in the concrete foundation. Such soles or plates
shall be effectively anchored to the foundation.
When bearing studs or other vertical bearing members are
spliced, the full strength of such members shall be developed
in the splice.
Where studs do not continue full length from one story
through the next story above, a cap plate or steel member
plate
be provided aper story.oSuch cap plate e lower or sillds or a Bill
plate shall
plate on the upper
208
YJ'16-1717
MRN
be of sufficient strength to distribute B�H�� CfillR
i� from the upper story studs to the lowerstoryAll horizontal or diagonal
adequately Ute i ,dg
and bearin genal ties or bracing i �xteriior ic,,l;s
g Partitions shall be effectively arc welded, boir„f,
or riveted
suPPorUng tomasothettstructuralry. frame or effectively anchored to
Where plumbing. in heating, or other pipes or conduits are
Placed In orparrtl cuttingan exterior wail or bearing partition
necessitating member in id walof l, or plates, bracing or
reinforced so as to such members shall nc
atreases im provide sufficient strength to resist ti e
to transfer h thereon or Proper provisi shall be mane
stresses to the points of support.shall
Sec, trac Proper Provision shall be made for expansion
and contraction.
.-F See. 2717• All workman
Practice in modern structuship shall be equal to the best
ral shops.
Drifting to enlarge unfair holes shall not be permitted.
Holes that moat be enlarged to admit the rivets shall be
reamed Poor matching of holes shall be cause for rojection.
All material shall be clean and straight. If straightening
or Battening is necessary, it shall be done by aprocess that
will not injure the material. Sharp kinks or bendy shalt be
cause for rejection.
Rolled sections, except for minor details, shall preferably
not be heated, or, if heated shall be annealed.
All steel castings shall be properly annealed.
Material may be punched on inch (1/16") larger
than the nominal diameter of the rivets whenever the thick-
neem of the metal is equal to or less than the diameter of the
nets. plus one-eighth inch (+), eo the metal is thicker
than Ute diameter ri the rivet, Plus one-eighth in
the holes shall be drilledch
, or subpunched and reamed.
Holes for shop -turned bo
drilled from thIts shall be aubpunched and
ream.d or e solid. Holes for field -turned bolts
shall oe subpuncbed in the sh
When op and reamed in the field.
for punchingang hChing and reaming is required the die used
shall be one -sixteenth inch (1/16") smaller
ass
than the nominal diameter of the rivet. Rivet holes, after
embling, shall be reamed to a diameter one -sixteenth inch
tl/16") greater than the nominal diameter of the rivet.
Turned bolt holes, after assembling, shall be reamed (for
S, bolts in the geld} to a diam
larger than theter one -fiftieth Inch (1/50")
e diameter of the turned bolt.
Rivets are to be driven hot, and, wherever practicable, by
Power. Rivet heads ahali be of hemispherical shape and
uniform fin size Throughout the work for the same size rivet,
after full, neatly finished and concentric with the holes. Rivets,
with heads driving,
shall be Ught completely filling the holes, and
each in full contact with the surface.
s Cdedjng Ill Fhed uniformly to a temperature not
They shall not be driven after their
210
2"1-2803 BUILDING
PART VII
DETAILED REGULATIONS
CHAPTER 28—EXCAVATION4 FOUNDATIONS,
AND RETAINING pfALL$
turaliY in excavations, foarid
otindysi� of materials used stn,'
form 7o the requirements specified in ch pt, 23 24ai1 V-1.
and 27 of this Code,
25, °6.
aceser
. 2802. Excavations for buildings and excavatiow
danee"Or to life to shaland l be Protected and guarded against
have retaining walls of masonry Permanent cot excavations shall
strength to retain the embankment°r concrete of any Suri
charged loads. No excavatioforan Purpose
with any suri
fowithin one foot W) Of the angle of repose or natulral slope
ottitnie soil under any .footing or foundation, unless sue,,
teeted aofoundation is first properly underpinned or pro -
Any
settlement.
to a depth of twelverson making et or causing an excavation to he made
Protect the excavation so (12ai or less, below the grade, shall
ininert
will not cave in or settle, but shall n tthe Soil Ofabe liablepfor the
expense of underpinning or extending the foundation of
buildings on adjoining properties where his excavation is
not in excess of twelve feet (121) In depth, Before commenc-
ing the excavation the person making or causing the ex-
cavation to be made shall notify in writing the owners
Of adjoining buildings not less than fore such
10 days be
excavation is to be made that the excavation is a be made
and that the adjoining buildings should be protected. The
Owners of the adjoining Properties shall be
to the excavation for the purpose of
Ing buildings, given access
Protecting such adjoin -
Any Penson making or causing an excavation to be made
exceeding twelve feet (121) in depth below the grade, shall
Iprotect
or set the
and shall extend the foundation the adjoining soil will not cave
of any adjoining
buildings below the depth of twelve feet (12') below grade
at his own expense. The Owner of the adjoining buildings
shall extend the foundations of his buildings to a depth of
twelve feet {Sing below grade at his own expense as provided
in the feet (121 Paragraph.
son
S"- 2803a
< ) General. The classification of the soil undc
'rmtCh"Wicatlen all � n of ad f every building shall be based upon the exam -
site when re equal ti est borings or excavations made at the
Y the Building Official. The location of
212
TOW No. 28-8
;g!.'
w
m
. ,
aogaa
UN
� _Mal
e M a
zE�j S
+ F
go
a Eaw
its
Eff.
XM T
Qaz'b w
UNIFORM BUILDING COO1;
1858 EDITION Sections 2805-2807
require load tests or other adequate proof as to the per -
safe bearing capacity at that particular location. To
determine the safe bearing capacity of soil it may be tested
by loading an area not less than two square feet (2 sq. ft.)
to not law than twice the maximum bearing capacity desired
for use. Such load shall be sustained by the soil until no
additional settlement takes place for a period of not less
than 48 hours in order that such desired bearing capacity
may be used. Examination of subsoil conditions may be
required when deemed necessary.
See. 2806. (a) Footings and Foundations. Footings and Design of
foundations, unless specifically provided, shall be constructed Footings
of masonry or concrete and shall in all cases extend below
the frost line. Footings shall be designed to minimize differ-
ential settlement. Mortar used in foundation walls and foot-
ings shall be as specified in Section 2403 (s).
Bearing walls shall be supported on continuous solid
masonry or concrete footings or piles, which shall be of suf-
ficient size to support safely the loads imposed as determined
from the character of the soil. Foundation walls supporting
wood shall extend at least six inches (61) above the finished
grade adjacent to the wall at all points. Foundation plates or
sills shall be bolted to the foundation or foundation wall with
not less than one -half-inch (%') bolts, embedded at least
seven inches (7") into the masonry and spaced not more
than six feet (6') apart.
EXCEPTIONS: 1. Interior bearing walls in one-story
buildings may be supported on piers.
2. For Type V buildings (except Group H and I occu-
pancies), isolated piers of solid masonry or concrete may
be used for post and girder construction.
3. A one-story building (except a Group I occupancy)
which does not exceed four hundred square feet (400
sq. ft.) in area, including additions, may be constructed
without a masonry or concrete foundation if the walls
are supported on a wood foundation plate.
Foundation plates or sills shall be no wood other than
Foundation Grade redwood, Foundation Grade cedar, all
heartwood cypress, or any species of wood pressure -treated
with an approved preservative, all marked or branded by
an approved agency.
Minimum foundation requirements for stud bearing walls
shall be as set forth in Table No. 28-A.
Foundations for all buildings where the surface of the
ground slopes more than one foot (1') in ten feet (101) shall
be level or shall be stepped so that both top and bottom
of such foundation are Ievel.
(b) Structural Design. Except for special provisions of
Section 2808, covering the design of piles, all portions of
footings shall be designed in accordance with the structural
provisions of this Code.
See. 2807. When grillage footings of structural steel shapes Grillage
are used on soils, they shall be completely embedded in Footings
215
concrete with at least six inches (so) on the bottom amt at
least four inches (41) at all other points,
piles See. 2808• (a) General. The allowable axial and later,:(
loads an piles shall be determined by an approved forma}a,
by load tests, or by a foundation investigation by an
approved agency. A foundation investigation shall be made
if required by the Building Official.
(b) Loads. 1. AxW loads. The allowable axial
load on a pile shall not exceed the value given by the
following formulas unless such load is otherwise determined
as specified in Section 2805.
Allowable Axial Load = R/4 for all piles.
WHERE
W + 0,25P
12 Wh
R (for steel piles) = W + P
RL 24,000
S +
AE
12 Wh W + 0.1p
R (for other piles) = W + P
RL 24,000
S+
WHERE AE
R = ultimate driving resistance, in tons.
W = weight of striking parts, in tons.
h = height of fall of striking parts, in feet.
Wh = striking energy, in foot tons.
P = weight of pile, in tons.
S = permanent settlement of pile under the average
of the last 10 blows, in inches.
L = length of pile, in feet.
A = average right cross-sectional area of pile ma-
terial, in square inches.
E = modulus of elasticity of pile, in pounds per square
inch.
2• Group action. Consideration shall be given to the re-
duction of allowable pile load when piles are placed in
groups- Where 3011 conditions make such load reductions
advisable or necessary, the allowable axial load determined
for a single pile shall be reduced by any rational method
or formula approved by the Building Official.
3. Static load tests. When the allowable axial load of a
single pile is determined by load test, one of the following
methods shall be used:
Method 1. It shall not exceed 50 per cent of the yield point
order test load. The yield point shall be defined as that
218
section 2W UNMRM BUnDING CODE
PRO (e) Round Wood Piles. 1 Quality. Except where untreated
(CaRrIL) piles are permitted. wood piles shall be pressure -treated in
accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 25-17-58. The bas;(,.
material shall conform to that of untreated piles.
2. Untreated Piles. Untreated piles may be used only when
it has been established that the cut-off will be below lowest
ground -water level assumed to exist during the life of the
structure. Every wood pile shall conform to the specifica-
tion for Class A or Class B piles in U.S.C. Standard
25-19-58.
(f) Precast Concrete Piles. 1. Quality. Precast concrete
piles shall be cast in one piece and prior to driving and at
28 days after pouring shall develop an ultimate compressive
strength (f.) of at least 3000 pounds per square inch.
2. Reinforcement ties. The longitudinal reinforcement in
driven precast concrete piles shall be laterally tied with steel
ties or wire spirals. Ties and spirals shall be spaced not
more than three inches (3") apart, center to center, for a
distance of two feet (21) from the ends and not more than
eight inches (8") elsewhere.
3. Gauge of reinforcement. The gauge of ties and spiral::
shall be as follows:
AFor piles having a diameter of sixteen inches (16") or less,
wire shall be not smaller than No. 5 gauge.
For piles having a diameter of more than sixteen inches
(16") and less than twenty inches (20"), wire shall be not
smaller than No. 4 gauge.
For piles having a diameter twenty inches (20") and
larger, wire shall be not smaller than one -fourth -inch I ")
round or No. 3 gauge.
4. Stresses. Precast concrete piling shall be designed to
resist stresses induced by handling and driving as well as
by loads.
;i.:. (g) Unessed Cast -fn -Place Piles. 1, Quality. Concrete
.a; piles cast in place against earth in drilled or bored holes
shall be made in such a manner as to insure the exclusion
of any foreign matter and to secure a full-sized shaft.
The length of such pile shall be limited to not more than
30 times the average diameter, Concrete shall have an
ultimate compressive strength (f,) of not less than 2500
Pounds per square inch.
2. Friction. Any uncased cast -in-place pile may be as-
sumed to develop a frictional resistance equal to one-sixth
of the bearing value of the soil material at minimum depth
as set forth in Table No. 28-B but not to exceed 500 pounds
Q= square foot unless a greater value is prescribed by the
Building Official after a soft investigation as specified in
Section 2805.
3. Csmbhwd friction and bearing prohibited. Frictional
resistance and bearing resistance shall not be assumed to
act simultaneously.
218
I'anser of
Units
f
COAPM 2S_VMVFn' EUV.D1N6 cOnL
Sec*
to 2001. (a) Lhanatle.
to the strength of an Veneer shall not be
Y wall, assumed
at any Point more veneer shall not be attach to wood
ground elevation, than twenty feet (20') above ethe adjacent
(c) horizontal Fe
Veneer shall not be
resist
Section 2902, torees, except as "Chlirap an to
(d) Exceptions -Y provided Ir,
aPPly to Interior veneer oflimunits in this Chapter shall not
less in thickness, units five-eighths inch
apply awn veneer whi ich constructed
of this Section
Ing to the requirewhich
mason shah
(b) Verticat is of Chapter 24, iY conform -
load other than the Loads-
oload Of eer shad su y vertical
tible above openings shall be supported the pp
above.
material, Pported upon lintels inemebusr
(a) Anchorage. 1,4
approved
ting Wallwith corary.v neer shall be attached to the
Supporting
method, deli resistant mo
to twice the weight "signed to resist a horizontalmetaties,
o other e
Veneer ght of the attached veneer,
than No.
ties,
, if strand wire, shall be
embedded in theW. & M. gauge wire and shall have thicknessess In hook
than 1,; 22 U mortar joint, or if aheet me
not more than twgauge °Ogated. Each tai, not less
shall be spaced not square feet at s , tie shall Support
center horizontally, more than twea ft.) of wall area and
Y -four inches (24") on
In Iieu of such wire ties, an approved
to veneer to wireties
acked reinforcement attached direct
the studs ma
(d) Su ed,
Ported u PPefo The gs weight oht of masonry veneer shall be sup -
Pon footings
Point spaced not (over twelve eetr(121) verticatible lly above a
sup -
EAC twenty
CEPTION: )above the adjacent in ground elevation.
footinto gs, frame walls shaallt be uPPor�ted veneer
attached
en
ly
apply to Yea r of proof iegu)a �s $ection snail
rreents °$ Chapter
(b) >( ted by the requiro
For the Purpose of this Section,
no
1855 EDITION
Sections 290E-2904 r'
veneer of nonstructural units shall not be assumed to Veneer
support any superimposed loads. of Non-struc
A
(c) Anchorage, Nonstructural material used as veener Uaig
- (Coat d )
t
ural
shall be anchored to the supporting wall by corrosion
resistant metal ties not less in thickness than No. 9 w. 8 M.
gauge wire, and spaced not more than twelve inches (12")
apart both horizontally and vertically.
EXCEPTION: Approved units, or units Of flat tile,
stone, or terra cotta which are manufactured with scored
surface may be cemented to a masonry or concrete wall or
exterior plaster with
Pr Type A Portland cement mortar,
Provided the mortar bond is sufficient to withstand a
shearing stress of 50 Pounds per square Inch after curing
n.
for 25 days.
2904.
) General. In
mens of s aChapter all veneertOf glass shaion to the ll comply with Spee ce
the regulations in this Section.9 rements.
Glass veneer shall not be attached to any exterior wall for 4'��-
at apoint more than thirty-five feet (3S') above the adjoin-
ing ground elevation. ...._....::�::
(b) Dimension. Glass -veneer units shall be not less than
one-eighth inch (%") in thickness. Units less than three -
sixteenths inch (3/16") in thickness shall be not larger
in area than one square foot (1 sq. ft.). Units not more than
one-fourth inch (V4") nor less than three -sixteenths inch
r
(3/16") in thickness shall be not larger in area than four
square feet (4 sq. ft.).
No unit shall be larger in area than ten square feet (10
sq. ft.) or more than four feet (4') in length.
(e) Attachment. Every glass -veneer unit shall be attachedf
{
to the backing by approved corrosion -resistant ties and shall
:
be supported upon shelf angles. ..i
EXCEPTIONS: 1. Below a point twenty-two feet (221)
above the adjacent ground elevations, the ties may be
omitted.
2• Below a point three feet (3') above the adjacent
ground elevations, the ties and shelf angles may be
omitted.
(d) Mastic. The mastic shall cover not less than one-half
Of the area of the unit after the unit has been set in place
and shall be neither less than one-fourth inch (i's") nor
more than one-half inch (%") in thickness.
The mastic shall be insoluble in water and shall not lose
its adhesive qualities when dry.
Absorbent surfaces shall be sealed by a bonding coat before
mastic is applied. The bonding coat shall be cohesive with
the mastic.
Glass -veneer surfaces to which mastic is applied shall be
clean and uncoated.
221
Section 3"4
UNNOW
RURDING C001
(e) MW Aedes, 81:4II be. of
taut of corinelon-res s.
>� 4 of the ed veneer. times. the weight
Veneer
) The shelf angles shall be spaced vertleaUy in alternate
tal joints but not more than tffiwfeet (39 apart,
The tally than th se Width Of be thespaced not farther apart horizon-
tally unite.
(f). Exterior glees veneer eh" be applied onl-.
upon masonry. concrete, or exterior plaster.
rat dEcom"psexisel -'*bkW 131ase'veneer' units WWI be sepa.
"PensiOn Jointat least one�tthirtyother and fmy--see ioining nk 2 j in
(1/64 )clearance bThere etwcett bolts least
and the adj t gig inch
EOMON sectim 3601.3004
CHAPTER SO—ENCLOSURE OF
VERTICAL OPENINGS
Seo. 3603. Vertical openings are required to be enclosed .
'as set forth in Table No. 17-A. For enclosures of stairways Man
,and ramps see Chapter 33. Required
Sec. 3002. Walls and partitions enclosing elevators shall ffievator
be of not lees than the fine -resistive construction required Moolosames
under Types of Construction in Part V. Enclosing walls of
elevator shafts may consist of wire glass set in metal frames
on the entrance side only. Elevator shafts extending through
more than two stories shall be equipped with an approved
means of adequate ventilation to and through the main roof
of the building.
Sea. $003. Ali shafts, duets, chutes, and other vertical Other
openings not covered in Section $002 shall have enclosing Vertical
walls conforming to the requirements specified under Type Openings
of Construction of the building in which they are located.
Sec. 3004. Air ducts passing through a floor shall be All Ducts
enclosed in a shaft. The shaft shall be as required for
vertical openings in Part V. Dampers shall be installed
where ducts pierce the shaft enclosure walls. Dampers shall
conform to U.B.C. Standard No. 30-1-55. Air ducts in Croup I
occupancies need not be enclosed in a shaft if conforming
to Chapter 51. (See Appendix.)
222 1 223 N%1: 4
3102 3104 UNUM M, SU MUN4 CODE
CRAPM n— "AMM CONSMUonoN
Sec. 3181. Fktor construction shall be of materials and
construction as specined under (kc npacy in put
III and
under Types of Construction in part V.
All floors shall be so framed and tied into the framework
and supporting walls as to form an Integral
building. part of the whole
The types of floor construction used shall provide means to
the d girders f� spreading
by installing
either ties or btid ging, with no laterally unsupported length
of joists being permitted to exceed eight feet
(8') except
as otherwise specified to Sections 3102 and 3103.
Flee -reactive standards of floor Construction are specined
in Section 4305.
Centerville mac. $102. Concrete slab floors shall be not less than two
Inches (2") thick, Topping when poured monolithic
with
the slab may be included as a structural part of the slab.
Sleepers for the nailing of a wood floor
shall not decrease
the required structural depth of the slab unless placed in
the direction of span and then shall
M
not be placed more than
one-half inch (%,) into the slab.
steel -
d See- 8103. Steel -jointed floors shall consist of steel joists
as specified in Section 2715. When used in
F7san Type
11 buildings they shall have a reinforced concrete or g uni
slab not less than two inches (21) thick on sand
placed
secured to the top thereof, and a fire -resistive ceiling as
specified in Section 4305, on the under side thereof fully
covering and protecting the joists; provided that when such
Joists are used in places where unprotected wood joists are
Permitted the steel joists need not be protected with fire -
resistive materials as specified above.
The reinforced concrete or gypsum slab placed on and
secured to the top of the steel joists shall be sufficiently
reinforced to support all dead, live, or other loads between
Joists. Joists shall be securely cross bridged at intervals not
to exceed eight feet (8') along the
joist length.
Bridging shall be provided during the period of construc-
tion to support adequately
.;
I the top chord or flange against
ateral movement and such bridging shall be designed to
hold each joist in a vertical
plane. Sufficient permanent
bridging Shan be installed to stay the joists laterally and to
transmit any horizontal forces in
either direction perpen-
dicular to the direction of the joists. Such bridging shall
consist of solid concrete
sections, structurat steel shapes or
wit h, Portal bridgingdiagonal rods, or other bridging
w ill Provide
equai stiffness' Any row of bridging shall
tat Pa transferring 500 pounds from h joist to
the adjoining joeach
Cellular Sec. $104. (a) GeneraL Cellular steel floor construction
!! PMors $ball Consist of sheet or strip steel formed into an ante.
Imo..
Ubinro" RUILDINO CODE
CHAPTER V,4W F' OONSMUOMN
AND COVERING
Geneva SM 5201. Roof covering shall be as required under Occu.
Pancy in Part III, Location in Part IV, or Types of Con.
struction in Part V. All roofs shall he so framed and tied
into framework and supporting walls as to form an integral
part of the whole building,
En
See . The generall requirements for construction of
floors that concrete or igypChapter
u am roof slabsllshall be not lto ess except
n
two inches (2") in thickness.
Roof trusses shall have all joints well fitted and shall
have all tension members well tightened before any load is
placed on the truss, Diagonal and away trracing shall be
stresses used to brace
materialssiin trusses shall be ses. Theo sabspecified in
Chapters 25 and 27. The minimum net section of the mem-
bers after framing shall be used in determining the strength
of the truss at any point.
Plywood roof sheathing, unless of exterior type, shall have
no surface or edge exposed to weather and shall be of mini-
mum thicknesses set forth in Table No. 25-N.
Sec. 5203, (a) General. Roof coverings for all buildings
shall he either "fire -retardant" or 'Ordinary" roof coverings
as specifically required either by Location in Part IV or by
Types of Construction in Part V. The roof covering shall be
securely fastened to the supporting roof construction.
(b) Composition Roofing Materials, For purposes of this
Section, certain terms an designated as follows:
RASE SHEETS, ane or more layers of saturated felt or
saturated and coated roofing products over which is placed
a cap sheet, asbestos shingles, composition shingles, gravel
surfacing, ceramic, or other similar surfacing materials.
bers
saturated and coated both sides Of withca bituminor ouscom-
pound and surfaced with mineral granules, mica, talc,
ihnenite, asbestos fibers, or similar materials, except on the
.n_portions of split cap sheets.
CZME"INC* MATERIAL, built-up composition roof thor-
tghlq mopped solid between layers with bituminous com-
using not less than 20 pounds of hot asphalt or
st less than one and one-half gallons of cold bituminous
unpound In accordance with roofing manufactureeo pub -
shed specifications or hot coal tar pitch, using 30 pounds
!r w
one hundred are feet (100 sq. ft.) of roof area.
FELT, roofing felt made from organic or asbestos fibers
taurated With bituminous compound.
SPOT CEMENTING, intermittent application of asphalt
sling agent in an amount not less than 10 pounds per one
EDITION
m
hundred square feet (100 sq. ft.) of roof area at points not Root
more than twelve inches (12") apart. Coverings
(c) Materials. All materials shall be delivered in original
packages bearing manufacturer's label. Mineral -surfaced cap
sheets, asphalt shingles, and smooth -surface cap sheets shall
bear the label of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., for
Class A, B, or C roofing.
Nails for composition roof shall be not smaller than No. 12
gauge, with heads not less than three-eighths inch (%") in
diameter for shingle application and nine -sixteenths inch
(8/181) for built-up roofs and shall be long enough fully to
penetrate the sheathing to a maximum three-fourths inch
1% 1). Smaller bead nails may be substituted providing metal
discs are used with them. Exposed nails and shingle nails
shall be corrosion resistant.
(d) Application. Base sheets shall be nailed to the roof
sheathing using not less than one nail to each one and one-
third square feet (11A sq, ft.) of roof area, or base sheets
may be spot cemented to an existing composition roof, or
spot cemented or fully mopped to a suitable deck.
Asphalt shingles shall be nailed according to manufac-
turer's printed specifications, but for strip shingles of square
tab type, weighing approximately 210 pounds per square and
measuring twelve inches by thirty-six inches (12" x 38"),
no less than six nails shall be used per each strip.
Hot asphalt shall be applied at a temperature of not less
than 375 degrees Fahrenheit and shall in no case be heated
to a temperature higher than 425 degrees Fahrenheit at
the kettle.
Coal tar pitch shall not be heated above 375 degrees
Fahrenheit.
(e) Fire -Retardant Roof Coverings. A fire -retardant roof
covering shall be any roof covering which meets the require-
ments specified for any one of the following roofings, 1 to 7
inclusive, or shall be any roof assembly bearing the label of
the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., for Class A, B and C
roofing.
1. Any built-up composition roofing consisting of mate-
rials whose fire -retardant values as set forth in Table No.
32-A equal not less than 15 points Including a top covering
selected from parts (b), (c), or (d) of said table.
2. Hydraulic compressed rigid shingles not less than one-
eighth Inch (%") thick, composed of portland cement and
asbestos fibers, laid over a layer of saturated felt weighing
not less than 14 pounds to one hundred square feet (100
sq. ft.), or hydraulic compressed rigid sheets not less than
seven thirty-seconds inch (7/32") thick, composed of Port-
land cement and asbestos fibers. The aforesaid felt may be
omitted when the compressed shingles are placed over an
existing roof covering.
3. Asphalt -saturated mineral -surfaced prepared composi-
tion shingles laid so there are not less than two thicknesses
227
'0NIIrORM BUILDING 006r
Z
'Ala
0
rz4oa
go
04 t- to Cs 0
0,0".0
a
0
HE
R
EGD j
cow
i.. FN
01
I& N
?gy-01
2.
4A i
MAU-
to
E.
WPx 0
:3=0 -9 0
.01.2 14
"a
UZI
Aoo,"
$2. o.
ZEM
FtSc
HM V-Cq
Mite
0
W
UGIT
228
EDONspaseett" spa
any point, The combined weight of such shingles shall Rod
not less than 200 pounds to one hundred square feet C*v~
(GOVIVIL)
sq. ft.) of completed roof area.
4. Concrete slab or concrete tile roofs, constructed as
401, liked in Chapter 26 without additional roof covering.
Metal roof covering of corrugated, standing seam or
4
t typeof not less than No, 3o u. s. gauge metal. All flat
.,petal roof. coverings shall be laid on solid sheathing. Cor -
led or standing seam metal roof covering shall be
xdssiSned to
support the required live load between supper.
members.
6, slate shingles securely fastened with copper nails or
-with copper nails and No. 14 B. & S. gauge copper wire
with nails of such lengths as to provide not less than three -
h ($A") of penetration Into the nailing strips or
fourths Inc shingles at
Underalpha
l such theshall be pla
as al
one layer of asphalt-situmted feltre weighing notceless
than 30 pounds to one hundred and eight square feet (108 sq.
{ tiV ft
7 Clay roof tile securely fastened with copper nails or
copper wire; provided that for roofs not exceeding a rise of
eight inches (g") in twelve Inches (121), galvanized iron
nails may be used, and provided further that tile with projec-
lion lugs need not be nailed or wired in place. Wire shall
be not smaller than No. 14 B. & S. gauge. Nails shall
v
construction not less than �
penetrate the supporting roof
three-fourths Inch
Roofing tile other than flat pan tile with or without flanges,
or flat shingle tile, or flat decorative tile, shall satisfy the
following strength requirements:
When supported on the
turned -down edges at points six Inches (61) each side of
the center of the tile, giving four points of support and a
span of twelve inches (12") and loaded with EL concentration
at the center, the average breaking load per tile for five
representative tile tested shall be not less than 400 pounds
and the breaking load for any individual tile tested shall be
not less than 350 pounds.
ot absorb more than 15 er cent of the
Roof tile shall n -hour immersion test.
dry weight of the tile during a 48
Under all burned clay units, there shall be placed not less
than two layers of asphalt -saturated rag felt, each layer
weighing not less than 14 pounds to one hundred square
feet (100 sq. ft.), solidly mopped between and surfaced with
, asphalt.
(f) Ordinary Roofings. "Ordinary" roofing shall be any
roof covering which meets the requirements specified for
the following roofings:
1. Composition roofing, Any composition roofing or any
built-up composition roofing consisting of layers of roofing
felt, roll roofing, felt membrane, or gravel, the sum of whose
are -retardant values as set forth in Table No. 32-A equals
not less than 10.
229
VNI[P'p>� 81ltLDIN(1 ivDDE
Section am
TANX NO. 32 B—WOOD sAIN(#ITO.1G
MA IIlI3 EXPOSURE Poop WEATUM ftt G
PITCII OF ROOF SRMGLE LENGTH
Rise R 16 -inch iii -inch 24 -inch
3" to less than 4"
S" to less than 5" 12 3%: 4%: 5�
more 12 5"
$% 7%
COVOthm Bud 2' Asphalt shingles. Asphalt shingles laid in one or more
layers; or shall be any rooting meeting the Class C specidca-
( 6 tions of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc,
3. Roofings for Group d occupancies, On buildings hous-
ing Group J, Division I occupancies, any compositian six, as
Mon roofing
A a fire -retardant value equal to not less th
set forth in Table No. 32-A, may be used, .Wiese otherwise
required because of location as specified in Parts IV and V
of this Code,
4' Wood shingles. All wood shingles for roofs shall con-
form to U.B.C. Standard No. 32-1-58, and shall bear the label
of an approved inspection bureau or agency guaranteeing
compliance with U.B.G. Standard No. 32-1-58.
All wood shingles shall be laid with a side lap of at least
one and one-half inches (1%") in adjacent courses, and
three-fourths inch (%") in alternate courses with at least
two courses of solid wood protecting each side joint.
Every wood shingle shall be laid not less than one-eighth
Inch (fig") or more than three-eighths inch (%") from any
adjacent shingle, and shall be nailed to the sheathing with
two No. 14 gauge hot -dipped galvanized, zinc, cadimium
Plated, umi
alnum, or copper nails penetrating into the
sheathingat least three-fourths inch (%"),
The exposure to the weather of wood shingle roofs shall
not exceed the amount set forth in Table No. 32-B.
Shingles shall not be installed on a roof having a pitch less
than four inches (4") to twelve inches (121), unless provided
with an underlay.
5. Nand -split shakes. All hand -split shakes shall be of
Western Red Cedar or Redwood conforming to U.B.C. Stand-
ard No. 32-2-58, and shall bear the label of an approved in-
spection bureau or agency guaranteeing compliance with
U.B.C. Standard No. 32-2-58.
Shakes shall be laid with one -and -one-half inch (1112")
minimum side lap between joints in adjacent courses. Shakes
shall be laid in straight or staggered courses with eighteen -
inch (18") wide strips of 30 -pound minimum saturated felt
shmgled in between each course with the lower edge of the
felt positioned above the butt a distance equal to twice the
shake weather exposureDouble course at the eaves, and
the underlay course can be eighteen -inch (18") shakes or
shingles, or twenty -four -inch (24") shingles.
Sections 3US-3296
shake shall be fastened with two rust -resistant Haile Roof Covering
uate length to penetrate into sheathing at least three- (CORM-)
inch M").
•.alleys shall be underlaid with 30 -pound minimum satu-
felt extending at least ten inches (10") on each side of
^` 'r line. Sheathing at crown of hips and ridges shall be
with 30 -pound minimum saturated felt at least
ve inches (12") wide.
M$heathing may be either spaced or solid, except that in
` areas sheathing shall be solid and covered with un-
:turated building paper, unless the roof pitch is eight inches
to twelve inches (12") or steeper.
"Exposure to weather shall not exceed eight and one-half
Triches (8112"), ten inches (10"), and thirteen inches (13") for
- #ghteen-inch (18"), twenty -four -inch (24"), and thirty-two-
, Inch (32") shakes, respectively; except that weather ex-
., passe of eighteen -inch (18") and twenty -four -inch (24")
,straight -split or barn shakes shall not exceed five and one
.,half inches (5x/12") and seven and one-half inches (7%"), re -
I `•,apectivety. Edges shall be parallel within one inch (1").
'Shakes shall not be installed on roots having a pitch less
than four inches (4") to twelve inches (121) except that
"loofa of porches or attached garages, or roofs over clipped
v 41,";
ceilings having an area act exceeding 20 per cent of the
'""total roof area, may have a pitch of not less than three
t r' inches (3") to twelve inches (12").
See. 3204, The use of cork, fiberboard, and other cos- Roof
bustible roof insulation shall be permitted in all types of Insulation
construction provided it is covered with approved roof
coverings applied directly thereto.
Sec. 3205. All buildings shall have access provided to the Attlee:
attic space by means of a stairway or permanent ladder or a Access a"
scuttle. The openings provided through the ceiling for such Areae
access into the attic space shall be not Hess than twenty-two
j inches by thirty inches (22" x 301) and shall be located in
i the hallway or corridor of all Type III and V buildings
three stories or more in height.
Type Ili or V buildings, one or two stories in height,
shall have scuttle holes into the attic space which are not
'�. less than eighteen inches (181) square.
"a In wood frame roof construction where ceilings occur the
„•,. attic spaces or spaces between ceilings and the underside
E.::. of roofs shall be divided into horizontal areas of not more
•• than twenty-five hundred square feet (2500 sq. ft.) with tight
V one -inch (11) partitions of matched wood, one-half inch
thick exterior type plywood, or approved incombustible
materials. All openings through these partitions shall be
protected by self-closing doors of the same thickness and
materials as the partition.
EXCEPTION: Where the attic is fully equipped with
,;i•" an automatic fire -extinguishing system the divided hori-
zontal area may be tripled.
231
1
Sections 7
` UN"Dat NURSING CODE
roof bottomthCiwrall d of trusses, in trussed roofs, between
twenty thousand equare feean buildings exceeding
of
Such draft stops shall divide the under roof nto0sect area,
not to exceed twenty thousand square feet (20,000 eq. ft.).
Itself ge'-' Drainage 8206. The water from the roof of all buildings which
bwould flow by gravity over a public sidewalk shall be carried
arb imeans the of conductors under the sidewalk gutter. Overfiaws and through the
low point of the roof to hall be Installed at each
wwhich the water drains. Conceal
roof drainage pipe shall be installed ed
as required for soil,
waste, or vent piping.
EXCEPTION: Buildings of Group I or j occupancies,
the walls of which are ten feet (10') or more from the
street Property line, need not comply with the above.
Flashing
. 3207. At the juncture of roof surfaces with parapet
walls, chimneys, penthouses, and similar vertical projections,
flashing and counternashing shall
Section 1707 M. be provided as requiredIn
0
�n
1, iry
EDITION section 31101
s CHAPTER M—STAIR$, EXITS, AND
OCCUPANT LOADS
(
(a) Purpose. The purpose of this Chapter is to Genersi
termine occupant loads and to provide minimum standards
egress facilities for occupants of buildings.
(b) scope. Every building shall be provided with exits as
wired by this Chapter. Where there is conflict between a
eral requirement and a specific requirement for an indi-
.r.
„ dual occupancy, the specific requirement shall be applicable.
xx?'y (c) Definitions. OCCUPANT LOAD is the total number of
Lei persons actually occupying a building or portion thereof at
s"'Any one time, but shall never be assumed to be less than the
f„'sasult obtained by dividing the floor area by the square feet
,r occupant set forth in Table No. 33-A for the occupancy
used therein. When the square feet per occupant is not
given for a particular occupancy it shall be determined by
Building Official, based on the area given for the occu-
pancy which it most nearly resembles.
PANIC HARDWARE is a bar which extends across at
a least half the width of each door leaf, or is a floor plate below
�Wthe full width of each door opening; either of which will open
the door if subjected to pressure.
(d) Room Capacity. The occupant load of a room or build -
Ing shall be the actual number of seats but not less than
TABLE NO.38-A—AVAH,ABLE SQUARE FEET
PER OCCUPANT
_.. _.
SQUARE FEET
OCCUPANCY
PER
OCCUPANT
Assembly Areas
7
Classrooms
20
Dance Floors
7
Dining Rooms
15
Dwellings (Group I)
300
Gymnasiums
15
Homes for Children and Aged
50
Hospitals and Sanitariums
100
Hotels and Apartments
200
Parking Garages (Open)
200
Sales—Retail
Basement
20
First Floor
30
Upper Floors
50
School Shops and Vocational Rooms
50
Skating Rinks
15
Storage Garages and Storage Warehouses 300
All Others
100
800116115
3891-396« UNIFORM BUILD
aeomw the result obtained by diva ING Ct)111;
(Ooard.) feet per occupant set forth dividing
Nor �A by to saaare
(e) Beahm Where benches or pews are
of seats shall be based on one trod to ni,;,;ber
person for each eighteen in hes
(181) of length of the pews or benches.
(f) Mtxed Oeeupaseky, The capacity of a building ,_•�,n.
taining mixed occupancies shall be determined by adding'he
number of occupants of the various portions as set tozu:;
Table No. 33-A.
(g) Mere Tb -0 -or building which is raced for diff The capacity of
Pimp shall be determined t Wren! occuparmiss at differ,^
the est number of �raona,by occupant load which i es
(h> ExttOWr_U- No
to required width of an exit obstruction shall be place:] in
(t) Room capacity PNted
ity shall be conspicuously posted b the
hm eOwnemum term ca;;;,.;! -
tog by means of durable signsY owner h to hcJd.
room. auditorium, or room placed in each se wj ,
fixed is are not used fors similar a unlawful ul;.� o
remove or deface such notice pr tit shah be unlawful s
legal number of perms within such space. more than this
(j) Changes In Elevation. Changes in elevation of less
than twelve inches (12"), along any means of egress within a
building, shall be by means of ramps, except for occupant
loads of less than 10.
Sec 33M (a) Number of Persons. The number of persons
Required Permitted in any building or portion thereof shall not exceed
thoseset forth in Table No. 33-A, except that where addi-
tional exit facilities are provided the occupancy load may
be increase in accordance with Section 3302 (b) and (r).
'bi Number of Exits. Not less than two exits shall Aa
nrnrided from buildings or portions thereof housing Groan
li ii: H and I occupancies having an occupant load of mare
tan 10; or housing Group F occupancies having an occupant
of more than 30; or housing Group A, B, G and G
"'�+tranries having an occupant load of more Chan 50. Group
h. v' 'n"tt le sthan two remotely located ncles more than one storinexits fromeeach flht oor.
I;1111dings, or portions thereof. havingan occupant load of
`fro to 989 shall have not less than three p
exits.
Buildings, or portions thereof, having an occupant load ��0
1Dpp or mr,re shall have not less than four exits.
Palen, '�
bld or cellars used for other than service of tlic
dI have not les than two exits.
"` e) {{irishe total
width of exits in feet shall be not
u
less total occupant load served divided by 50. Such
=its shall be divided approximately equally among
Th, -h
of exits from any story of a building shall be
to 834
n=
t`EUlTiONsectional 1110112-31111011
lifted from the occupant load in that story plus onshalf Exifa
tributary occupant load in the story next above or below. Required
tided the resulting width is not how than that required for (CoipMl,
...upper story considered separately. The maximum exit
It required for any story shall be maintained =in egress
rovided from the structure.
1) Arrangement of Exits. If only two exits are required
shall be placed a distance apart equal to not less than
AM of the perimeter of the room. Where three or more
I are required they shall be arranged a reasonable dis-
a apart so that if one becomes blocked others will be
a building not equipped with an automatic Are-extin-
king system, no point shall be more than one hundred
fifty feet (150•) from an exterior exit, a horizontal exit,
t enclosed stairway, measured along the line of travel.
a building of Type I or Type II construction, or where
building is equipped with a complete automatic Are-
iguishing system, the above distance from exits may be
used to two hundred feet (200').
Bee. 3303. (a) Genera! This Section shall apply to every Door
Will: door serving an occupant load of more than 10, and
serving hazardous rooms or areas, except as set forth in
B_ubsectlon (d) and (h).
(b) Swing. Exit doors shall swing in the direction of exit
"•travel when serving any hazardous area and when serving
AM occupant load of 50 or more. Plate glass doors shall
have a center bar, or shall be sufficiently decorated to make
door plainly visible.
•' (c) Operation. Exit doors shall be openabie from the inside
without the use of key or any special knowledge or effort.
(d) Width. The required width of a door opening shall not
he reduced more than three inches (3") by any projections.
No required doorway shall be less than thirty-six inches
(36") in width.
EXCEPTION: Exit doors serving areas housing one or
more bedridden patients shall be not less than three feet
six inches (3'6") in width.
(e) Door Leaf Width. No leaf of an exit door shall exceed
four feet (4') in width.
,., (f) Special Doors, Revolving, vertical sliding, and over-
head rolling doors shall not be used unless exit doors of
-,; required width are installed adjacent thereto.
' (g) Egress from Door. Every door shall open Into a cor-
ridor, enclosed stairway, exterior stairway where permitted
as a required exit, exterior exit court, or public way. i
E(h) Doors Opening into Stairway. Regardlessof the occu-
pant
nt load every door in Group A through I occupancies open-
ing into a stairway shall open on a landing within two inches
(2") of the floor level. The width of the landing shall not 7i
235 �l
19
Sections 336CM0 UNIFOR11t BUILDING CODE
be reduced more than six inches (6") by the door when fully
open. See Section 3306 (d),
CoreAM Sec. 3304 (a) General. This Section shall apply to oery
�.
public corridor serving as a required exit for an occupant
load of more than 10.
(b) Width. Every required corridor shall be not lesa in
width than forty-four inches (441).
EXCEPTION: Regardless of the exemption in Subsec-
tion (a), corridors serving any area housing a bedridden
other than in Group I occupancies, shalt be not
t
patient,
less than eight feet (&') in width.
(c) Projections. The required width of corridors shall be
unobstructed.
EXCEPTIONS: 1. Trim and handrails may Project
three and one-half inches (334").
2. Doors, when fully open, may project eht inches. t3")
(d) Access to Exits. When more than one exit is required.
exits shall be arranged so that it is possible to go in either
direction from any point in a corridor to an exit or stair.
EXCEPTION: Dead-end corridors not longer than twelve
or door may be permitted
feet (12') beyond the exit stair
when serving an occupant load of 10 or less.
(e) Walls. Regardless of the provisions of Subsection W
corridors shall be not
of this Section, walls and ceilings of
less than one-haur fire -resistive construction.
EXCEPTION: Public corridors of a one-story building:
and private tor-
-:
housing Group F or Group G occupancies,
ridors serving an occupant load of less than 30.
(f) Openings. Where corridor walls are required to h^
fire -resistive, doors shall be Class "C' or steel n
1�
one-hour
a one and three-eighths inch (1%") solid -core wood door
-fourth -inch
and other interior openings shall be of one
frames. Such doors shall
(14") wire glass set in steel
automatic or self-closing. Openings, other than doors, shall
the corridor walls.
not exceed 25 per cent of the area of
Mks S 3345. (a) Width. Stairways serving an occupant ]ord
SM forty -fou
+:.
of more than 50 shah be not less in width than
inches (441).
Stairwaysserving an occupant load of 50 or less may
be thirty -sic inches (36") wide.
Stairways serving an occupant load of 10 or less may
be thirty inches (301) wide.
Trim and handrails may project three and one-half inches
(334") into the required width of any stairway.
in a
rise -,half e (7% ), d the
Rise and Wis. nd
shall not exceed seven aone inches
run shall be not less than ten inches (10").
4 236
7
7 UNWORN BUILDING CODE
i
Sections 33074
(Caat'd.)
2. Openings adjacent to a stairway in buildings not ex,EDITION
ceeding two stories in Group H and I occupancies
Areas. A horizontal exit shall lead into a
may be
unprotected if there is provided another fully co
stairway. mplying
c) Discharge
r area having capacity or an occupant load not less
occupant load served by such exit. The capacity
(i) Stairway Coastructle
shall be constr9toted n --Intortor. Interior stairways
as specified in part V
be determined by allowing three square feet (3 eq_ ft.)
net clear floor area per occupant. The area into which the
be with exits as required
of this Code
Stairs serving a
g egress from corridors which are re aired
to one-hour fire -resistive construction
�:
r'
ntai exit leads shall provided
Section 3302, at least ons of which shall lead directly to
11 in Section 3301 rea
sand
shall have watts and soffits of one-hour fire -resistive
public way.
structdon. ron
Where there is enclosed usable space under stairways of
wood or unprotected metal, the
`
Bee 81 • (s) General. Every interior stairway, ramp, or Exit es
be enclosed as specified in this Section.
soffits of the stairs shall be
Protected as required for one-hour fire -resistive construction
for shall
EXCEPTIONS: 1. In occupancies other than Group D.
(j) Stairway Constnwtlon--Exterior. Exterior stairs shalt
be of incombustible material except that
`an enolosure will not be required for a stairway, ramp, or
i _.
xy escalator serving only the second floor and not connected
on buildings not
exceeding two stories in height they may be of wood
with corridors or stairways serving floors above the second
not
less than two inches (21) in nominal thickness,
floor.
Exterior stairs shall be enclosed and protected as req uired
for exterior walls due to location
2. In buildings of Type I construction housing Group F
and equipped with automatic fire -
on lot, as set forth in Parts
IV and V of this Code.extinguishing
and G occupancies,
systems, enclosures are not required for
(k) Stalrway to Roof. In every building more than two
stories in height, one stairway shall extend to the roof
escalators.
3. Stairs in Group I occupancies need not be enclosed.
sur-
face unless the roof has a slope greater than four in twelve
(b) Enclosure Construction. Enclosure walls shall be of
(1) Headroom Every required stairway shall have hexa-
clearance of not less
not less than two-hour lire -resistive construction in build -
not
Ing more than four stories in height and abaci be of not
.s.
than six feet six inches MV
measured vertically from the nearest nosing to the nearest
r,, :
-IS
less than one-hour ere -resistive construction elsewhere.
RampsSec•
soffit.
(c) Openings into Enclosures. There shall be no openings
except exit doorways and openings in
3308• (a) General. A ramp conformitig to the require-
To of this Section may be used as an exit.
into exit enclosures
exterior wails. Every exit door in an exit enclosure shall be
door. Every opening in an
(b) width. The width of ramps shall be as required for
corridors,prnteeted
i '.
a self-closing Class S'" fire
exterior wall forming part of an exit enclosure shell be
"E" 'F" fire door or window unless
by a Class or
opening into a public way at least sixteen feet (18') wide.
(c) Slope. The slope of a ramp shall not exceed one foot
{P) in eight feet (3'),
i
{d) Ezteht Of Enclosure. Stairway and ramp enclosures
{d} HandraRr. A ramp with slope
shallinclude landings and parte of floors connecting stair-
also include a corridor on the ground
exceedingshall
one foot W)
in ten feet (101) shall have handrails as required for stair-
ways.
way flights and shall
floor leading from the stairway to the exterior of the build -
are not required
(e) Construction Ramps shall be constructed as required
for
Ing. Enclosed corridors or passageways
from unenclosed stairways -
stairways.
(f) Surface. The surface of ram p s shall be roughened or
shall be of nonslip
=
See, 3309' (a) General. A smokeproof enclosure shall con salskeproof
MuclGIAMew
gist of a continuous stairway enclosed from the highest
Horizontal
material.
SM
Sec. 3387• (a) Definition. A "horizontal
_
to the lowest point by walla of two-hour fire -resistive
construcr reae supive orting
tion tarsi frame shall be o
Exits
,.."
exit" is a horI-
zontal passageway or ramp into another building or into
our-houfire-Constru
$ , ,
another section of the same building through a "One -Hour
Fire-.t;.e gtive Occupancy Separation."
(b) where Begnlred. In buildings five stories or matt in
the exits shall be a smokeproof
(b) Used ss a Required
height, one of required
enclosure -
nclosure.rishms
vi Exit. If conforming to the pro-
shmsof this Chapter, a horizontal exit may be considered
(c) Construction. Stairs in smokeprnof enclosures shall
£:
as a required exit.
be of incombustible construction.
288
239
Sections SUDIM
UNIFORM RU1LpINc GOffiE
ere sha be
Interior A f the pu
oll no opening directly into the
open to the aitaide havIriA shad h, through a vestibule
the building and an exit d n exit from the interior of
encloenclosure. In lieu of a vestibule, leading to the amokeproof
sure' open balcony of incombustible mate abs way of an
(e) Doors Exit doors to amokeproof enclosures shall be
self -*loll ig Class '13" Are doors.
Public way or Into a passageway
(f) out A smokeproof enclosure shall exit into a
Ile leading to a public way.
have Wa Passageway two h aul be without other openings and shalt
of two -hair gee resistance. Sze resistance and floors and ceilings
(g) A amokeproot enclosure stair shall not con -
anus below the grads level exit unless a barrier s provided
i
at the ground floor level to prevent persons from continuing
on into the basement.
Sec 3310. Every exit shall discharge into a public way or
exit court.
Sir. 1311. (a) Discharge. E
into a very exit court shall discharge
passageway ssage way
shalal passageway leading to a public way.
l be without other openings and shall
have walls, floors, and ceilings of the same Period of fire
resistance as the walls, ceilings, and floors of the rio din but
shall be not less than one-hour fire -resistive theconbuilding
(b) tion
Wldtb. Every exit court shall be not less in width
than the required total width of the tributary
pe of exit courts she), (c) Slope. The slope o�exceed one
In ten.
(d) openings. Openings betwe
Pan a Group A and 8 accu-
ncy and an exit court less than sixteen feet (18') wide
shall be Protected by Class "E" or "Ir" fire doors or windows.
abveCth1le mNf �'ngmoan twenty feet
(2p')e court may, be unprotected.(e) Obstructions.
The rewidth of exit courts shall
quired unobstructed except for x
and handrails which may
project not more than three and one half inches 3
the required width. (}t ") into
At any point where the width of an exit court is reduced
from any cause, the reduction in width shall be effected
gradually by a guard rail at least three feet (31) high. The
guard rail shall make an angle of not more than 30 degrees
With the axis of the exit court.
Exit 13ec 3112. g
aM Jm Exit IUamination. Exits shall be Illumi-
nated at all limes with light having an intensity of not less
. ` than one foot candle at floor leve�
b) Exit gas. At evel.
Otherwise
ry exit doorway, and wherever
erwise reququired to clearly indicate the direction of egress,
240
1
UNHieRM DUUMING CODE 4& 1858 EDITION
Urow Able& when aisles terminate In a cross aisle
-)
Mo a foyer, the width of the eras aisle shall be not
e plus 50
per that o the total width ofthe vim of the widththe remaining aof the widest isles leading
thereto.
(f) Vemitorb"U Vomitories connecting the main exit with
the crow aisles shall have a l width not less than the
total
per cent o the total widthus 50
sum of the width ofdotthe les
ng aisles ldinthereto eading
thereto.thereto.
(g) Slope, The slope of aides shall not exceed one -fat
(1') fall in eight feet (IM
Sec, 9914, (a) Spacing, The spacing of rows of eats from
back to back shall be not less than thirty-three inches (33"),
nor less than twenty-seven inches (27") plus the sum of the m
thickness of the back and inclination of the back.
EXCEPTION: In Group B, Division 4 occupancies, the
spacing of rows of seats without backs may be twenty-
two Inches (22")•
(b) WHIM The width of any seat shall be not less than
eighteen Inches (18')•
See. 3315- Rollaway, telescoping, and fold -up bleacher
sats without backs shall conform to the requirements of
this Section.
Bleacher sections shall contain not more than 20 rows
of seats.
Spacing of seats back to back shall be not less than
twenty-two inches (22").
Bleacher sections shall be provided with aisles.
EXCEPTION: Bleachers with not more than it rows
of seats need not be provided with aisles if the vertical
distance between s does not exceed twelve inches (IV).
Aisles shall be not less than three feet six inches (3%
in width.
There shall be not more than nine seats between any
sat and an aisle.
The width of cross aisles and aisles to exitways shall be
as specified in Section 3313.
Where bleacher sections are placed on platforms abov,,
the main floor, a cross aisle and guard railing shall b..:.
provided at the front of such sections.
Open end sections shall be provided with railings for
that portion above the fourth row of seats. Where the back
of a bleacher section is not placed against a wail, a railing ,
shall be provided at the back of the section.
Any increase o occupant lad because of the addition
of bleachers shall require additional exit facilities.
See, 3316. (a) main Exit. Every Group A occupancy shall
be provided with a main exit.
The main exit shall be of sufficient width to accommods'te
once -half the total occupant load but shall be not less than the
242
sections 9316-3318
total required width of all aisles and stairways leading Exits:
thereto and shall connect to a stairway or ramp leading to a Group A
public way. Occupancies
Steps may be used if separated from the main exit by a (Cent 'd.)
landing not less in area than the foyer.
(b) Side Exits. Every auditorium and balcony of a Group
A occupancy shall be provided with exits on each side. The
exits on each side of the auditorium or balcony shall be of
sufficient width to accommodate one-third of the total occu-
pant load served. Side exits shall open directly into an exit
court or a ramp leading to an exit court, except that side
exits from a balcony may lead to a stairway, and side exits
from balconies above the first balcony shall be by way of a
stairway or ramp in a smokeproof enclosure. Side exits shall
be accessible from a cross aisle or a side aisle.
(e) Panic Hardware. An exit door from a Group A occu-
pancy having an occupant load of more than 50 shall not be
provided with a latch or lock unless it is panic hardware.
Sec. 3317. (a) Group B, Divisions 1 and 2. Divisions 1 and Exits:
2 occupancies shall have exits as required by Section 3316. Group B
(b) Group B, Divisions 3 and 4. An exit door from any Occupancies
Group B occupancy, Divisions 3 and 4, having an occupant
load of more than 50, shall not be provided with a latch or
lock unless It is panic hardware.
Sec. 3318. (a) Corridors. The width of a corridor in a Exits:
Group C occupancy shall be the width required by Section Groin C
3302 plus two feet (2'), but no corridor shall be less than six Occupancies
feet (61) wide.
Corridor walls and ceilings shall be of not less than one-
hour fire -resistive construction.
There shall be no change of elevation of less than two
feet (21) in a corridor unless ramps are used.
(b) Corridors Serving Auditoriums. An exit serving both
as auditorium and other rooms need provide only for the
Capacity of whichever requires the greater width if the
rft ditorfum is not to be used simultaneously with the other
(e) Stairs. Each floor above or below the ground floor
vat shall have not less than two exit stairs and the required
dt width shall be equally divided between such stairs,
+ovlded that no stair serving an occupant load of more
tan 100 shall be less than five feet (5') in width exclusive
rails.
EXCEPTION: This Subsection does not apply to rooms
used for maintenance, storage, and similar purposes.
(d) Doors. The width of exit doors from corridors, halls,
nd stairs shall be not more than two feet IT) narrower
tan the required width of such corridors, halls, or stairs.
Exit doors in schoolrooms shall swing in the direction of
243
UNIFORM BUII.DINGt CODE
Sections 3111111-M
(e) Extertw Exit. Any room, the floor of which is below
grade and which to used by PUP" shall have at least one
exit leading directly to the exterior of the building, and such
agg gat half the required
width of exits from such room.
(f) Self -Releasing Device, Exit doors from rooms having
an occupant load of more than 100 and from corridors shall
not be provided with a latch or lock unless it is panic hard -
Ways.
Manor Sec. 5319. (a) Separate Exits. Every room in a Group D
p occupancy shall have access to at least two approved means
of egress from the building without passage through inter.
vening rooms other than corridors or lobbies. All required
exterior exit doors and all corridor doors shall open in direc.
tion of exit travel. Sliding doors and rolling shutters shall not
be used as exit doors.
(b) Corridors. There shall be no change of elevation of
less than two feet (2') in a corridor unless ramps are used.
For corridor width see Section 3304 (b).
(c) Basement Exits. One exit from every room below
grade shall be to the exterior.
(d) Ramps. Every portion of a Group D occupancy, Divi-
sion 2, in buildings of Types II, III, IV, and V housing
bedridden patients, shall have access to a horizontal exit or
a ramp leading to the exterior.
(e) Locks. No exterior door shall be lockable from the
inside, except in sanitariums for mental patients.
(f) Places of Detention. No requirements of this Chapter
shall be so construed as to prohibit the construction of cell
blocks in jails or prevent the use of any locks or safety
devices in buildings conforming to the provisions of this
Code where it is necessary forcibly to restrain the inmates.
(g) Exceptions. Where construction meets the require-
ments of Section 902 (b), the exterior doors may be fastened
with locks, provided that room doors shall not be fastened
by other means than doorknobs or similar devices which
can be opened readily from the corridor side without the use
of keys.
RxItst See. 3320. Every portion of a Group E occupancy having a
areap E floor area of two hundred square feet (200 sq. ft.) or more
Vencles shall be served by at least two separate exits.
In Divisions I and 2, no part of any room shall be more
than seventy-five feet (751) from an exit.
Sec. 3521. (a) Boiler Rooms. Every boiler room and every
mmords room, except in Group I occupancies, containing an oil -fired
furnace or incinerator shall be provided with at least two
means of exit, one of which may be a ladder.
(b) Cellulose Nitrate Handling. Film laboratories, Pro-
jection rooms, and nitrocellulose processing rooms shall
have not less than two exits.
2"
asd Sm, W9L Construction of walls and floors in bay and
ortei windows shall conforin to the construction allowed for
exterior walls and ftoors of the type of construction of the
building to which they are attached. The roof covering of a
bayg o � maionw� oif conformbuil a requirements for
rooawkenta $oo, 3SM Exterior balconies attached to or supported by
andparebwwalls required to be of masonry ehali have brackets or
beams constructed of incombustible material. Railings for
balconies or porches shall be not less than three feet (T) in
height above the floor of such balcony or porch.
porches and exterior balconies may be constructed of
the rnateriahr allowed for the building to which they are
attsched, but structural steel or iron members need not
be fire protected.
2"
UNIFORM BUDDING (
,GIIApTF.s s7� �' vEikLA
See 3701. (a) General, Chimneys, flues, vents, and
places, and their connections, carrying products of e6m
tion shall conform to the requirements of this Chapter.
(b) IrpOfpmeat sod Appliances. Equipment and ap
aces sc.hall be of approved types and shall be install+d
limitations iofcuse, and he manufactureese with the condions ofainsttrructianset
(e) Definitions. APPLIANCES, MOB -HEAT, are ai
installation or equipment in which the temperature of ti
flue gases as they enter the flue to be1500'lt e Dull`
measured at the outlet of the appliance or
at of the daft hood attached to the appliance.
APPLIANCES, LOW -HEAT, are any installation or equip
ment in which the temperature of the flue gases is up ti
be
measured at the outlet of the the outlet of the draft ood attached to the applianciance or at
e.
APPLIANCES. MEDIUM -HEAT, are any installat;oo or
equipment in which the temperature of the flue gases as
they enter the flue is from 564' r. to
lar 1 Pthe be ro s
ured at the outlet of the appliance of
the draft hood attached to the appliance.
CHIMNEYS, FLUES, or VENTS are conduits
or pa. age -
ways, vertical or nearly so, for conveying p
bastion to the outer air.
1. Type A. Chimneys, flues, or vents of mane mrp, re-
inforced concrete, metal smokestacks and appro. d special
flues
2. Type B. Flues or vents of incombustible, : orro. on
resistant material of affivaUty to avoid excesc tmD'raal
area, and heat -insulating quality
tun on adjacent combustible material and ce-':fiea by a
nationally recognized agency.
3 Type C. Flues or vents o sheet copper rf nra Iegs
than No. Unic
. S. Standard gauge or of galva,<,d
not less than No. 20 U. S. Standard gauge o other
approved corrosion -resistant material.
FIREBRICK is any refractory fire -clay brick which meets
the requirements of U.B.C. Standard No. 374-58, Aue of To"
FLUE LINING to flue lining
terials conforming to the definition of fire clay as set forth
in U.B.G. Standard No. 37-2-58• ne, t;rg a
FLUE OR VENT CONNECTOR is the pipe
low -heat appliance with the flue or vent.a medu z figh-
PMEE is the pipe connecting
heat appliance with the flue or vent.
See .,Chimneys, Flues, or Vents,"
248 €?
UNIFORM RUILDING CODE 1958 EDITION
part of the building within ten feet (10') of the chimney.
(CORM The Building Official may approve a chimney of lesser height
installed with an approved vent cowl having a spark arrester
whom opening stall be not less than six feet (8') from any
part of the building measured horizontally. For altitudes
over two thousand feet (20001) the Building Official shall be
consulted in determining the height of the chimney.
(f) Corbeling. No chimney shall be corbeled from a wall
more than eix inches (0"); nor shall a chimney be cor-
beled from a wall which is less than twelve inches (121) in
thickness unless It projects equally on each aide of the wall.
In the second story of a two-story building of Group I oc-
cupancy, corbeling of chimneys on the exterior of the en-
closing walls may equal the wall thickness. In every case
the corbeling shall not exceed one -inch (1") projection for
cash course of brick.
(g) Change in Size or Shape. No change in the size or
shape of a chimney where the chimney passes through
the roof shall be made within a distance of six Inches ($")
above or below the roof joists or rafters.
(h) Separation of Chimney Liners. When more than one
Hue or vent is contained in the same chimney, masonry
separation at least four inches (4") thick bonded into the
masonry wan of the chimney ahall be provided to separate
Hues In pairs or singly.
(1) IaRts. Every inlet to any chimney shall enter the
aide thereof and shall be of not less than ane -eighth -inch
thick metal or five -eighths -inch (3b") thick refractory
material.
(j) Clearance. Combustible material shall not be placed
within two inches (2") of smoke chambers, or chimneys
when built entirely within a structure, or within one inch
(1") when the chimney is built entirely outside the struc-
ture. For special conditions covering fireplaces see Section
3733.
Types Of See. 3703. (a) Low -Heat Appliances. Masonry chimneys
serving low -heat appliances shall meet the requirements
Requi" specified In Section 3702.
(b) Heat Appliances, Masonry chimneys serving
medium -heat appliances shall meet the requirements epeci
-
Bedin Section 3702.
(c) H*h-Hest Appliances. Masonry chimneys serving
high -heat appliances shell be built with double walla, each
not less than eight inches (8") in thickness with an air space
Of nthan two inches (2") between them. The ins!
M de
of the interior walls shall be of firebrick not less than four
inches (41) in thickness laid in fire -clay mortar or refrac-
tory cement.
(d) Special Conditions. Chimneys of cupola furnaces,
blast furnaces, and similar devices hereafter erected, shall
4R 250
Sections $703-37"
extend at least twenty feet (20') above the highest point of Types of
any roof within a radius of fifty feet (50') thereof. No Chimneys
woodwork or other combustible material or construction, Required
whether protected or unprotected, shall be erected or placed (Coat'd.)
within three feet (3') of any part of such chimney.
(e) Incinerators. Masonry chimneys for incinerators in
buildings of Group I occupancy shall be lined with fire-elay
flue lining and shall have walls of not less than four inches
(41) of solid masonry or reinforced concrete. Chimneys for
incinerators using the fine as a refuse chute where the hori-
zontal grate area of combustion chamber does not exceed
nine square feet (9 sq. ft.) shall have walls of solid masonry
or reinforced concrete, not less than four inches (4") thick
with a flue lining as specified in Subsection (c) of this Sec-
tion. If the grate area of such an incinerator exceeds nine
square feet (9 sq. ft.), walls shall be not less than four
Inches (4") thick and shall be lined with not less than four
inches (4") of firebrick, except that higher than thirty feet
(3(Y) above the roof of the combustion chamber, common
brick alone, eight inches (8") in thickness, may be used.
Chimneys for commercial and industrial type incinera-
tors of a size designed for not more than 250 pounds of
refuse per hour and having a horizontal grate area not
exceeding nine square feet (9 sq. ft.) shall have walls of
solid masonry or reinforced concrete not less than four
Inches (4") thick, with lining of not less than four inches
(4") of firebrick, which lining shall extend for not less than
forty feet (4(') above the roof of the combustion chamber.
If the design capacity or grate area of such an incinerator
exceeds 250 pounds per hour and nine square feet (9 sq. ft.)
respectively, walls shall be not less than eight inches (8")
thick, lined with not less than four inches (4") of firebrick
extending for the full height of the flue.
All incinerator chimnevs shall terminate in a substantially
constructed spark arrester having a mesh not exceeding
three-fourths inch (%-).
Sea 3704. (a) Design. Metal smokestacks shall be de- Metal
signed and constructed as specified in Chapter 27. Smokestacks
(b) Construction and Support. Metal smokestacks shall
be properly riveted or welded and, unless structurally self-
supporting, shall be guyed securely, or firmly anchored to or
otherwise supported by the building or structure served
thereby.
Metal smokestacks used for high -heat appliances shall be
lined with four inches (41) firebrick laid in fire -clay mortar
extending not less than twenty-five feet (25') above the
amoke pipe entrance.
(c) Height. Metal smokestacks shall extend to a height
of not less than ten feet (101) above the elevation of any
part of a roof within twenty-five feet (25').
(d) Cleanouts. Cleanout openings shall be provided at the
base of every metal smokestack. 0 ;
251.
SM -3706 UNIFORM BUILDING. C01)F,
Udd (e) 11h4allor Stacks. Metal smokestacks, or parts there.
Of, erected on the exterior of a building Shall have a clear-
( ) ance of twenty-four inches (241) from combustible walls
and four inches (4") from incombustible walls. No such
stack shall be nearer than twenty-four inches (24") in any
direction from a door, window, or other wall opening or
from an exit.
of,( in Interior
building r thatn smokestacks,
aone-story uildinthere-
of, shallbe
enclosed above the story in which the appliance served
thereby is located, in walls of incombustible construction
having a fire -resistance rating of not less than one hour,
with a apace on all aides between the stack and the enclosing
walls sufficient to render the entire stack accessible for
examination and repair.
The enclosing wails shall be without openings, except
doorways equipped with approved self-closing fire doors of
Class '°B" type or better at various floor levels for inspec-
tion purposes. Where such a stack passes through a roof
constructed of combustible materials, it shall be guarded
by a galvanized -iron ventilating thimble extending not less
than nine inches (911) below and nine inches (9") above
such roof construction. Such thimbles shall be of a size to
provide a clearance on all sides of the stack of not less than
eighteen inches (18"); provided that for stacks of low -
heat appliances, the clearance may be reduced to not less
than six inches (8"). Smokestacks shall not be carried up
irside of ventilating ducts unless such ducts are constructed
as required by this Section for smokestacks or smoke flues
and such stacks or flues are used solely for venting the
room or space in which the appliance served by the smoke-
stack is located.
Type A See. 3703. Type A flues or vents shall consist of chimneys.
Naas or metal smokestacks, and approved special flues. Type A flues
Von" or vents shall be required for (1) solid- and liquid -fuel -burn-
ing heating equipment, and (2) gas -burning equipment
which produces flue -gas temperatures in excess of 550° F.
at the outlet of the appliance or the draft hood when burn -
Ing gas at the input rating specified by the manufacturer of
such equipment.
Type B Sec. 3708. (a) Material, Type B flues or vents shall con-
Fftes or Net of approved vent piping of incombustible, corrosion -
Vel" resistant material of sufficient thickness, cross-sectional area,
and heat -insulating quality to avoid excess temperature on
any ad)acent combustible material as determined by tests
mace by a recognised testing laboratory.
(b) Use. Type B flues or vents may be used only to vent
111wilred appliances approved for maximum flue -gas tem-
perature of fes" F. at the outlet of the appliance or the draft
hood- (See Chapter 51, Appendix.)
(c) InstAllistba 1. Jdiats. Type B flues or vents shall be
a
252
FM
UNIFORM BUILDING COM
Seo. 8707. (a) Um Where Type A or B flues or vents are
not required, Type C Sues or vents may be used provided
they mat the limitations of use as specified in this Section.
(b) General. Type C flues or vents shall be used only
for runs directly from the space in which the appliance is
located through a roof to the outer air without passing
through any, attic, concealed space, or floor. No such vent
shall extend more than three feet (31) above the roof
through which it passes.
(c) Clea=Dcm Requirements shall be as follows:
1. Clearances between Type C flues or vents and com-
bustible material shall be not less than six inches (6") when
used with approved appliances except warm -air heating
furnaces,
2. Clearances between Type C flues or vents and com-
bustible material shall be not less than nine inches (9")
when used with untested appliances or warm -air heating
furnaces.
3. Combustible walls, partitions, and roofs through whish
Type C flues or vents pass shall be protected at the point
of passage by one of the following methods:
A. By metal ventilated thimbles not less than six inches
(6") larger in diameter than the flue or vent pipe.
B. By metal thimbles not less than four inches (4")
larger in diameter than the pipe with the annular
space filled with mineral wool or other approved in-
combustible insulating material.
(d) Angle. A single portion of any flue or vent may extend
at an angle of not more than 60 degrees from the vertical.
See. 870& (a) General. Special Type "A" flues or vents
shall be of approved types and shall be installed in full com-
pliance with the conditions of approval, special limitations of
use, and the manufacturer's instructions.
(b) Terra -Cotta Chimneys. Subject to the approval of
the Building Official, tens -cotta chimneys may be installed
in buildings of Group I occupancy and shall comply with the
requirements of this Section.
1. Construction. Terra-cotta chimneys erected on the
exterior of a building shall be not less than six inches
(6") from all combustible material, except that when en-
,ased in an incombustible casing they shall be not less than
two inches (2") from combustible materials, as specified in
Subsection (b) 4. Such chimneys shall be exposed to view
for the full length, and if erected in the interior of a building
shall be encased in an incombustible casing so arranged as
to provide not leas than one inch (1") air space between the
:bimneya and the casing. Such air space shall have venti-
lating openings top and bottom.
2. Ameborage. Terra-cotta chimneys shall be anchored
six feet (6') of their height. Such anchorage shall be
to withstand a load of not less than 200 pounds
ht any direction.
a y
6717E-S7y8
VNWORM BVXDL,,
(e) cone
Which enter flues or vents
o V SRue or vent cornecton
side of buildings shalll icon seated h exterior walls
or out,
atmospheric conditions y means of tees, tt'here
condensate shall l Provision for rennoval
Icd
ratedprovid Any of
vertically by not less than two inlets shall be
inlet. a
diameter of the lrger
,,
co(f) Cilears"M Clearances between Type C flue ar vent
and combustible material shall be not less
for Type
Sthos (C�cified than
C flues or vents in Subsection
1 and 2.
Clearance'asrbetweenrn
be not less s hose Type B flue or vent connectors shall
Subsection 37n6 (c)specified for Type B flues or
Inter
paragraph S. vents in
-
of Vests
Sm 37111. No flue or vent connector from a
ance shall be interconnected with
connector,
any other flueaor1venht
smoke pipe, or flue, unless Ruch gas appliances
are equipped with an automatic device
to prevent the escape
of unburned gas at the main burner or burners. Where a
gas-aPPliance flue or vent connector is
join
Pipe from an appliance burned wih a smoke
ing some other type of fust for
connection into a single flue opening,
by
they shall be Joined
a F -fitting located as Close as practicable to the shim•
to grevith ltige Peu the automatic device
esueficape unburned
rns as shall off the
Pilot light as well as the wain burner or burns
Rut
beAll aged appliances lconnected to the common vent shall
he same story of the building,
Heater
>
Sec. 3712. Every gas water heater shall have an entirely
separate and independent vent, except that not more than
four gas water heaters
ma
manifold y be connected to a common vent
requirements of this Secconstructed and installed in accordance with the
tion.
(a) Location. All water heaters connected to the common
vent shall be located in the same story of he building.
ofVent vent connectorani is wired. If more than three feet (3'.
the red to connect
rewater
common vent, the a pt
heater shall
vent manifold be connected tos
'
manifold Length of Vent Manifold. The length of the vent
shall be not
of the vertical vent to which tconnect75 Of the
itater
s. norer shall he lent
gth
of the vent manifold exceed fifteen feet (15').
(d) Slope. The vent manifold and vent connector shall
Rive up at a rate
of not less than one-half inch (%-) per
toot of length• The vent manifold shall be Iocated as high
as the structure will
Permit.
}
(e) Connection. The connections between Individual water
111110 and the vent aianlfolde shall be as direct as
possible
�
Illative 37113 UNIFORM BUILDING CObt
the structure. Combustible materials shaII not be placed
( ) within six inches (fi") of the fireplace opening. No such
combustible material within twelve inches (12") of the
fireplace opening shall project more than one-eighth inch
(%") for each one -loch (r) clearance from such opening.
(f) Areas of Flues, Throats, and Dampers. The net cross•
sectioned area of the flue and of the throat between the
firebox and the smoke chamber of a fireplace shall be not
less than as set forth in Table No. 37-A. Where dampers
are used, damper openings shell be not leas in ares, when
fully opened, than the required flue area.
(g) Idntel. Masonry over the fireplace opening shalt be
supported by an incombustible lintel.
(h) Hearth. Every fireplace shall be provided with a brick,
concrete, stone, or other approved incombustible hearth
slab at least twelve inches (12") wider on each side than the
fireplace opening and projecting at least eighteen inches
(18") therefrom. This slab shall be not less than four inches
(4") thick and shall be supported by incombustible materials
or reinforced to carry its own weight and all imposed loads.
Combustible forms and centering shall be removed.
(1) Fire -Stopping. Fire -stopping between chimneys and
wooden construction shall meet the requirements specified
in Section 2512.
(j) Nonconforming Fireplaces, Imitation and other fire-
places not conforming to the other requirements of this
Section shall not exceed six inches (8") in depth. Gas -
burning appliances may be installed in such nonconforming
fireplaces provided that compliance is made with the re-
quirements of this Chapter on flues or vents and clearances
from combustible materials in Chapter 51, Appendix.
(k) Support. Fireplaces shall be supported on founda-
tions designed as specified in Chapters 23, 24, and 28.
a]
Sectio 3861-3862
98—FUtE'E30I4G U%MNG
SYSTEMS
e 880E Standard automatic fire -extinguishing systema Antomatm
Fire -
(be installed as specified in this Chapter fn the follow- 1l:xtlotniaMag
piss: System:
':'In every story, basement or cellar of a building when the Where
r area exceeds fifteen hundred square feet (1500 sq- Seg
ed
.,;there is not provided at least twenty square feet (20 sq.
Of opening entirely above grade in each fifty lineal feet
ftJ or fraction thereof of exterior wall in the story
basement or cellar on at least one side of the building.
wings shalt have a minimum dimension of not less than
rty inches (30").sement, or cellar are provided
Aba
hen openings in a story, site wall of such story, base-
!oniy one side and the oppo
)rt, or cellar is moty five feet (75') from such
re went a or cellar shall be p ovided
e dings, the story, 'fire -extinguishing system or
th an approved automatic fire-extingu' g Ysat least
entrigs as specified above shall be provided ont or
,0 aides of the exterior walls of the story, basemen
Sar.
table space cellars
In a cellar or base mentcupaneies and in all
3. In the following locations in Group A occupanciesstage o
,visions 1 and 2, Group B occupancies having
aclosed platform: and atoxe
A In all dressing -room sections, workshops,
rooms gridiron, stage floor,
g, where there is a stage; under the
tie and fly galleries, and in all places back of the
proscenium wall.
of more than
C. Over enclosed platforms having an ate) and over any
one thousand square feet (100o sq.
usable apace under such platforms. in Group S, C and D
4. In any enclosed occupied apaceere the
occupancies below or over a stairway, I or II put dings,
entire construction is as required for Type
and in all portions of basements or cellars used for storage
or maintenance work rooms. cies having ui
5. In Divisions I and 2, Group E occupancies having
area of more than fifteen hundred square feet (a�b rea ofmoremore
in Division 3, Group E occupancies having), and in Divi -
than three thousandan quareafeet( 000 story in height.
s)on 4, Group
Sec, 3802. Required automatic fire -extinguishing systema 111011111
Detailed is
shall comply in all respects with the regulations set forth in
U.B.C. Standards No. 38-1-58 or No. 38-2-58.
258
Sections 3M-""
betanedl
Requb-wntg
(Ceard.)
UNIFORM BUI MMIP CO01
EXC""ONSo 1. A single water supply equal to he
Primary supply required by such regulations may le
accepted as complying with the requirements of this Code.
In no case where a connection to a public -utility water
main constitutes the source of supply shall such chore,
tlon be less than four inches (4^) In diameter.
3. Automatic fire -extinguishing systems required in
paragraph 5, Section 3801, may be supplied from the domes
Ile water system and need not comply with the provisions
of this Section except as to pipe sizes and spacing of heads,
provided that where the domestic water supply has a prey.
sure less than 15 pounds per square inch, an approved
automatic chemical extinguisher may be used in lieu of
the automatic fire -extinguishing system.
3. The alarm valve required for a standard automat!c
fire -extinguishing system shall not be required in the
cellars of Group B, C, D, E, F, G, and H occupancies
where the area of such cellar is less than three thousand
square feet (3000 sq. ft.).
Dry
S
Sec. WOL Every buildingfour or more stories in height
shall he equipped
with one r more dry standpipes.
Dry
83 t
See- SM. (a) Construction. Dry standpipes shall be of
wrought iron or galvanized
Requirements
steel and together with fittings
and connections shall be of sufficient strength to withstand
30O pounds of water pressure to the
square inch when reads
for service, without leaking at the joints, valves, or fittings
Tests shall be conducted by the owner or contractor in the
Presence of a representative of the Fire Department when
ever deemed necessary and ordered by the Building CffldI
The tests shall be applied at the top and bottom conneetions
Of such standpipes and the
owner or contractor sh:,11 be
responsible for any damage caused by breakage or!* it
installation while such tests are being
conducted. After such
standpipes have been tested, the owner or contractor shall
remove all water therefrom.
(b) Size. Dry standpipes shall be of such a size as to
be capable of delivering 250 gallons
per minute from each of
any three outlets simultaneously under the pressure created
by one fire engine or pumper, based
on the existing city
equipment available. No part of a dry -standpipe system
other than hose connections shall be less than three inches
(3^) in diameter.
(c) Number Required. Every building four or more stores
in height where the area of any floor
above the third floor is
ten thousand square feet (10,000 eq. ft.) or less shall be
equipped with not less than
one dry standpipe and an addi-
tional standpipe shall be Installed for each additional tin
thousand square feet (10,000
sq. ft.) or fraction thereof.
(d) Location. Standpipes shall be located
within stairw ,v
closures or as near such stairways as possible or shall be
on the outside of, embedded
within, or immediately inside -.f
260
Sectim 3M
BIIILD1vG cane
wet pipe Is attached to
an automatiic�Ilr
as set forth in U,B,C. Standard N guishrng agsten ;
Any approved
p basic m� which determines Fife sizes on a x
P y be used to determine pipe
wet standpipe cystoma.
apes f. .;
Thg Building Official may sizesf-
e� pressure teats on
re completed wet standpipe eye, :µ
Approving such systems.
c
(c) Ns R"Rked. Wet xtandpl
that Any Portion of the buildinP" shall be so located t
with a hose not exceedingcan be reached therehu, ..
sevenn ty-five feet (75')
in length
(d) Lecatlon, In Group A and B occupancies outleTs sha
be located as follows:
On each side of the stage,
auditorion each side of the rear of the
um, and on each aide of the rear of the balconies
Where occupant loads
are
locations noted above may less than 500 the Hamner of
be reduced upon the approve;
Of the Buildin
Official. In Group C, D, E,
F, G, and H
be apoved by the lthetBuildingion Of lOfcialr wet standpipes sha
�prog
(e) Outlets. All interior wet standpipes shall be equipped
with a one and one-half inch (lag") valve
Including
1
in each story,
the basement or cellar of the building, and locateh
not less than one foot (1') nor more than five feet
the 't
floor. (5') aboxe
(f) Threads. All hose threads in connection with the
Installation of such standpipes,
Including valves and redua
ing fitthaga, shall be uniform with that
11- department. used by the local
)
}
(g) Water Supplies All interior wet standpipes shall be
connected to a street water main not less than four inches
(41) In diameter, or when the
water pressure is Insufficient to
maintain 30 pounds pressure at the highest hose outlet such
atoPshalbe connected to
k
t a pressure tank, gravity
P p. Such supply shall be sufficient 0 furnish
at least 30 pounds
pressure at the topmost standpipe outlet.
When more than one interior
is
wet standpipe is required in
the building, such standpipes shall be connected at their
bases or at their tops by
pipes of equal size.
(h) Pressoro and Gravity Tanks Tanks shall have a
capacity sufficient to furnish
at least 250 gallons per minute
for a period of not less than 10 minutes. Such tanks shall be
located so as to Provide
not less than 25 pounds pressure
at the topmost hose outlet for its entire supply. Discharge
Pitres from pressure tanks
shall extend two inches (2")
Into and above the bottom of such tanks. All tanks shall be
equipped with a manhole, ladder
and platform, drain pipe.
water and Pressure gauges. Every pressure tank shall he
tested in Place after installation and
proved tight at a hydro-
static Pressure 50 Per cent In excess of the working pressure
1 required. Where such tanks are
used for domesticur oses
the supply PIPe for such purposes shall be located at or
above the center line
of such tanks. Incombustible supports
Yea
3381 UNIFORM BUMMING COpE
CHAPM 39--4BTAGES AND PLATFORMS
Ser' 3881. There shall be one or more ventilators con.
structed of metal or other incombustible material near the
center
ed above ov stage highest part of any working stage
Loge roof and having a total ventilation
area equal to at least five per cent of the floor area %,ithin
stagethe walls. The entire equipment shall conform to the
following requirements or their equivalent:
1- Ventilators shall open by spring action or force of
gravity sufficient to overcome the effects of neglect, rust,
dirt, frost, snow, or expansion by heat or warping of the
framework.
2. Glass, if used in ventilators, must be protected against
falling on the stage. A wire screen, it used under the glass,
must be so placed that if clogged it cannot reduce the
required ventilating area or interfere with the operating
mechanism or obstruct the distribution of water from the
automatic fire -extinguishing systems.
3. Each ventilator shall be arranged to open instantly
after the outbreak of fire, by the use of an approved auto-
matic fusible link which will fuse and separate at not more
than 165 degrees Fahrenheit. A manual control shall be pro-
vided by a cord running down to the stage at a point desig-
nated by the Building Official,
4. The fusible link and cord shall hold the ventilator closed
tending o0 force of open theevent least
30-pound
T he fusible link temeight
shall be
placed in the underside of the ventilator at or above the roof
line and shall be so located as not to be affected by the
operation of fire -extinguishing systems.
Grilurefts See. 3888. Gridirons, BY galleries, and pin -rails shall be
constructed of incombustible materials and fire protection
of steel and iron may be omitted. Gridirons and By galleries
shall be designed to support not less than 75 pounds live load
per square foot.
The main counterweight sheave beam shall be designed
to support a horizontal and vertical uniformly distributed
live load equal to not less than five pounds per square foot
over the area of the gridiron directly back of the prosceniuni
Opening.
Be Six. 388L 1n buildings having a stage, the dressing -room
sections, workshops, and storerooms shall be located on the
to $fie stage aide of the proscenium wall and shall be separated
from each other and from the stage by not less than a "Two -
Hour Fire -Resistive occupancy Separation.,
Sec. 3864. A stage as defined in Section 420 shall be com-
pletelY separated from the auditorium by a proseenium wall
_ _ 264
cad, lei UNWORN avuAlso cont
all iRtch stairs shall be �" induct (26') C aide and
17te +Lairs required in thea 8eetkat seed Pecidw enc o ed.r 33
A Protecting hood shall be
gull length of the stage switchboard Provided over Ue
See* 3999. No combustible wene
tions, or other combustible a etsrstt be' ProPs, decora.
ago dosed Platform unless it u Placed on am
ms�ve Are -retardant solution and maintainede inxan on:
flammable condition as APProved by the true Department.
Paris aw
to the shutters in strength and lire BUUZl-N41 CODE
shall be equipped with
(
a 263 degree $hreeite.
Each se uttel
which when fused by neat WiII cause closure
by gravity. There
also be a of the shutter
the upper magasine h fusible link located
each
will close all the snuffers. In Projector, which u ov$
v(ded suitable n, therepShallpbe hn
table means for
manually closing all shutters sim il.
the projeYctionany Projector head and from a
room
point isithin
near each exit door. Shutters cn o
Ings not in use shall be kept closed, pen.
Ventilation
i 4. (a) Inlet. A
the building not lens than o� huudair ired annlet d f rthe exterior of
inches (144 sq. (n.)
and protected with wire netting shall
installed within two inches (2") Of the floor in every.
room,the source
OtherProjectionOut of which shall be remote from
Other outside vents ar Hues.
mechanicalexhaustsysteation ms Provided one or more
each are housing shall draw air from
and from one or more points rear the
Systampems
ceiling. Systema shall exhaust t0 outdoors either directly
or through a noncombustible
flue used for no other purpose.
(�5 a�rcapnort Shall be not lees than fifteen cubic
feet
minute for each are lamore wn fifty cubic feet (50 Cu. ft.) per
In. ft.) per minute for the plus two hundred cubic feet (200
trolled room itself.
from within Systems shall be con•
indicate o the enclosure and have pilot lights to
operation, The exhaust
tion system serving the projec-
room may be extended to cover rOOma associated there-
with such as rewind rooms.
No dampers shall be installed
in such exhaust systema.
Ventilation of these
roOma shall not be connected in any
way with ventilating or air-conditioning systems serving
other portions Of the building.
tiblematerial, Ba�t Duch l�xhaust ducts shall be of incombus�
and shall either be
combustible
kept one inch (r) from
material or covered with one-half inch
of Incombustible heat -insulating
material.
��' (a) Shelves
t
and and Fixture& All shelves, fixtures,
of incombuustibleent in a projection room
materia shall be constructed
(b) FU_ All fibra not In actual
use -hall be tz,,d in
metal cabinets having individual compartments for reels
Cor shall be In I.C.C. shipping containers. Metal used in the
onstdard gauge, ruction of cabinets shall be not less than No. 2s U. s.
netnslder shag be used in the construction
of such metal cabi
liec' 4007' EverY Projection room shall be provided with
an unenciesed water closet and lavatory.
260
4103-419!
one-half inch (1 UNBORN B111LD1VG CQDE
inga over forty feet OW) batten
width that the te�bottom battm. For gen°pen.
( ) be not leas than two and one
'Tice battens shall half inches (2%-) in diameterl
dneti (32") sectional ofrei forced at the joints with twelve•
The cartaln shall be Pipe
e d took and riveted.
Pockets with substantial rouse steel guides in the smoke
the side hem, not more than Her grips
riveches ayg r bolted to
Each roller grip shall be fastened rtthe curtain on not Center,
less than three bolts or rivets to
No. 19 U. S. gauge galvanized metal shall be bent and
Placed vertically along each side hem of the curtain mate-
Tial, so that both faces of the hem are covered not less than
six inches (0")- This metal
side hem with edging shall be fastened to the
on center. rivets spaced not more than six inches (I.)
The top of the curtain shall have a smoke stop fitted
to make it as smoke -tight as practicable. The bottom of
the curtain shall have a yielding pad e
material not of incombustible
less than three inches
seat against the floor, (3") thick to form e
zqukme;t
See. 4104. Smoke grooves which
curtain shall protect the sides of the
leas than anbe of structural steel shapes and plates not
-tie inch (") thick. These grooves shah
than be not less an fourteen inches (14") deep and six inches
(0") wide and shall be net back from, the face of the arch
at least six inches (tl"). Grooves shall extend from the stage
floor to a point three feet (31 above the top of the raised
curtain, and shall be securely bolted to the proscenium wall.
Details of the grooves shall be submitted to the Building
Gfllcial and Fire Chief for approval.
Steel tracks shall be built into the smoke grooves upon
which shall travel the roller curtain guides, and shall be
operate sen Qtly in Place and so that roller guides will
requited with Y Safe support and smooth operation are
over the entire areanof thecurtaiof n pound ger square foot
in hupport for the curtain shall be by means of one-fourth-
(%") flexible steel cables for curtains forty feet (40')
or less in width, and three -eighths -inch W) flexible steel
cables for curtains over forty feet (40') in width. These
cables shall be spaced not more than twelve feet (12') on
center, and the end overhang shall be not more than fifteen
Inches (15")- Supporting cables shall be tied to the top
batten with a clove -hitch and the end secured with two iron
rage clips, A substitute method of attachment will be
allowed if approved by the Building
gridiron and over to The Supporting cables shall Pass through sheaves in the
fasten to the counterwei ht ounterweight guides and shall
turnbuckles with Ic ave-htteheanand cables Of eltpaTurnh
buckles shall be locked to Prevent backing out. Weight of
the curtains shall be evenly divided on the cables.
There
shall be safety stay chains of straight welded link
270
Seolleft '120#-4106
One set of Control uNIEFOR i lau"MiNe Milt
t the proacmifum: open Pb hl be installed on each
t Sid e of
ing the direencilm ctio �cli marked. lain y whir an uarrol al operation
nb
For man all operation
less than s-h W) diameter
secured incoperating hand line shall be not
to the topmanila rope
andbottomof the Counterweight arbor.
and shall block, ad
not lens
able for tension, of
than twelve-inch (12') diameter.
bottom Counterweight
shallThe �topoand
sections of the arbor
safely the loads,at iron' suHiotentlY heavy to accommodate
The top and bottom
netted with sectionfourth,s shall be con.
diameter, with (me tienot iea
inch
Plateeffor every
There to get q'it of rod
There shall hs smooth grooves on the ends of the top and
bottom weighs which
dilate engage the steel guides. Interne•
on top of the lowhts er be cast Iran, grooved to drop into place
r
nee ting the au carrYinB weight. The turnbuckles con,
attached to eyebbooiite pa cables to the top weight shah be
Counterweight Passing through the top weight,
angles, Properly tied togde ether and securely anehoredshall be structural To the
Proscenium wall. All joints
q
f
where the counterweight travels i
shah be ground smooth and a liberal coating of grease shall
be applied to the tracks.
A
t,
1
the These guides shall extend from
7 gridiron a length equivalent to the length of the arbor,
fled of the
curtain, Plus five feet (5'). The speci-
length
fied shall be considered as the minimum. A struc-
tural -steel stop shall be
provided at the bottom of the arbor.
For Proacentum curtains in which th
excess
h
of 150 pounds, an e overbalance 19 In
approved adjustable checking device s
shall Installed to check the speed
%
{
of fall during the last
et (5') of travel and an alarm shall be installed at the i
center of the top of the Proscenium
arch, which will sound
release. curtain is descending through the emergency
Moot Ser- 4100- The complete Installation of eve proscenium
curtain shall be subjected to operating
y-stheater
Inteats and
whichto such proscenium curtain is placed -shall not be
opened performances
until after the proscenium
has been
curtain accepted and a y
OIDcial, approved b the Build,,-
saw&ftd
Des/ps of other
not obviously�Curtains designs and materials, when
this Chapter, greater fire resistance than specified is
pter, shall before
standard acceptance be subjected to e
ng partitions >eei8ed in Chapter 43, as applicable to
a
a
tined roily for aexcept that such tests shall be co
pe;[od of five minutes unless failure aha"
occurred previously.
s
shall The unexposed face of the curtaj 1
not glow within aeri
be an P od of five minutes nor shall thea
rw%Y Passage of smoke
or Hama through the curtain.
Z:
f' 272
,t.
Section 4M
UNWORK BIIILDING
TAUX
NO. 434=VL Mz.M.Xz W CLCA851FICATIO\
Liii by:
NEL TEST FEDERAL STANDARD0-25 Class A
26-75 Class B or C
76-225 Class D*
•Class Yti material wbea fsated under U.B.C. Staralard No. a2.2.:3 sF.aii
bs a 7stte+l to the aamcresistarne etat of this Stallard. If the flame ,im,
not reach the angle frame at any point witbin five minute. or teas, thr m" I
rsal .hail be considered as approvtd Clam III mate Hal.
TABLE NO. 421—MINWUX INTERIOR -FINISH
OL"8IFIOATIONB
OCCUPASCYj ENCLOSED
1'ERTICAL OTHER RU03I5 OR
GROUP EXITWAyS EXYTWAYS
- A AREAS
A.., I ._ .__. N --
B I IIL
C 11 I II III
D II III
I II IIS*
E j I
F jf I � III*
G II SII
I II III
H I I II III*
I INO RESTRICTIONS
J NO RESTRICTIONSI
'Over two stories shall 6e of Class lT.
Class lI matrocerial uui hteh personal liberties of ' y
y may he used. inmates are forcibly
rest:ac:o�'..
ppileation
A2. When walls and ceilings are required by any provision
bawler
in this Code to be of fire resistive construction, the finish
vbdm material of any class shall be applied directly against such
fire -resistive construction or to furring strips not exceeding
(Osral9a) one and three-fourths inches (1%") applied directly against
such surfaces. The intervening spaces between such furring
strips shall be filled with inorganic or Class I material or
3• Wheere
re
shall be re stopped as specified in Section 2512 of this Code.
Walls and ceilings are required to be of fire -
resistive construction and walls are set out or ceilings are
dropped distances greater than specified in paragraph 2 of
rx74" this where elfin Class I finish materials shall be used except
tomatic ex materials are protected on both sides by au -
f' incambu bje k rig orgoarr or are attached to an
find in paragraph 2. The hangers andstri�asaembly� memas bers
such dropped ceilin
T e shall be of inemnp stab t are below the main ceiling
materials. The construction
294
Ubb M16 4&A
ten"° m Sun wo cont
TSbla No. 43-A (Coard.)
UNIFORM RUILmNG co.,
286
sections 4304M
1958 EDITION
cinders, or a mixture of any of these aggregates with Revs
aggregates for Grade A concrete.
Grade C concrete is any concrete not classed as Grade ��)
A or B.
Where the classification is in doubt, concreteshe be
assumed to be Grade C unless tests on the aggregates
all approved agency prove otherwise.
(f) Pneumatically Placed Concrete. Pneumatically shall be aplaced
concrete without coarse aggregate
as
Grade A, B, or C concrete in accordance with the aggregate
used.
Sm 1.
ckness of
ro- PrOteet][On
tection.4303. (a) Protective The thickness of fire -resistive materials for protec- 8 of
tion of structural members shall be not leas than that set Members
forth in Table No. 43-A except as modified in this Section.
The figures shown sball be the net thicknessof tow he protect-
ing materials and shall not include any
ce back
of the protection.
2. Unit masonry protection. Unit masonry protection for
metal columns shall have metal ties embedded in each trans-
verse joint, where joints are more than sixteen inches (16")
apart, and shall be spaced not more than sixteen inches
(16") in other cases. Soffit tile protecting beam and girder
flanges shall be tied to the flange. Ties shall have a cross-
sectional area equal to that of No. 8 gauge wire.
3. Reinforcement for east -in-place protection. Cast -In-
place protection for metal structural members shall be
reinforced at the edges of such members with wire or mesh
with a maximum spacing of six inches (6") wound around
or attached to the member. The sum of the cross-sectional
area in each direction shall be not less than 0.025 square
inches per foot.
4. Embedment of pipes. Conduits and pipes shall not be
embedded in required fire protection of structural members.
5. Column jacketing. Where the
rving vcovering
ton
columns is exposed to injury om mo
he
handling of merchandise, or by other means, it shall be
Jacketed
sed to a minimum adequate protective coht f six feet (6') from the floor
it
6. Ceiling protection. Where a ceiling is used to fire
protect floors or roofs of incombustible construction, the
constructions and their supporting structural members
(beams and girders) need not be individually fire protected
except where such members support loads from more than
one floor or roof. Ceilings shail be continuous, but may have
openings for incombustible pipes, ducts, and electrical out-
lets, provided the areas of such duct and outlet openings
through the ceiling aggregate not more than one hundred
Square
Sq. in.) in each one hundred square feet
(100 sq. inches 6t.) ofco
ellUng area. All duct openings in such
ceiling shall be protected by approved fire dampers.
281
-
N
14
"M
NO"
X
Oz
kz—
L
O
M
N
N
N N
ei Wt
N
ei
ei
ei N ei
Wt
Ot
,y
Z
V
Y
s�pat ?
z
eiNN
NN
NNS
MH ,y
i yw
�s:
Y
htoaaw
N
C4 M
to
MN
NMN
H
N
N
N N
HNei
of
M
Y
O
�
O
V
Oq
pVp,
a
h
>
o
oR
d
a
a
r
•mi +w'
R
v -a,
o A
oad
$
� o
a 1C+ $�
$saw
a�a���aaa
Y
oso$'3�cx�^os,o°a
Y
®�Owwas+�'o�?r�Ya��a
4UdUoa2
0
Y
Y
p a
� 65�a�
,wowawwys
V
� �
Vlw
❑aa
tiOtl
:UwWxW`F'
.s„L
1?w
Ur?t?f7.`tEw
5UC7
2W
4
qp.:r
m ."�
beO
O
�+
�
a
'O
R
,rC
K
tlyI
-�•
'co"
aR
W'a'
,yo
In
�8E+c�
M
O�
GG
Og'gl O�
Lp,�. ffi
C a
.O
�am Rw
we.�
00
3o
98b 48
idaaEH
aw
286
sections 4304M
1958 EDITION
cinders, or a mixture of any of these aggregates with Revs
aggregates for Grade A concrete.
Grade C concrete is any concrete not classed as Grade ��)
A or B.
Where the classification is in doubt, concreteshe be
assumed to be Grade C unless tests on the aggregates
all approved agency prove otherwise.
(f) Pneumatically Placed Concrete. Pneumatically shall be aplaced
concrete without coarse aggregate
as
Grade A, B, or C concrete in accordance with the aggregate
used.
Sm 1.
ckness of
ro- PrOteet][On
tection.4303. (a) Protective The thickness of fire -resistive materials for protec- 8 of
tion of structural members shall be not leas than that set Members
forth in Table No. 43-A except as modified in this Section.
The figures shown sball be the net thicknessof tow he protect-
ing materials and shall not include any
ce back
of the protection.
2. Unit masonry protection. Unit masonry protection for
metal columns shall have metal ties embedded in each trans-
verse joint, where joints are more than sixteen inches (16")
apart, and shall be spaced not more than sixteen inches
(16") in other cases. Soffit tile protecting beam and girder
flanges shall be tied to the flange. Ties shall have a cross-
sectional area equal to that of No. 8 gauge wire.
3. Reinforcement for east -in-place protection. Cast -In-
place protection for metal structural members shall be
reinforced at the edges of such members with wire or mesh
with a maximum spacing of six inches (6") wound around
or attached to the member. The sum of the cross-sectional
area in each direction shall be not less than 0.025 square
inches per foot.
4. Embedment of pipes. Conduits and pipes shall not be
embedded in required fire protection of structural members.
5. Column jacketing. Where the
rving vcovering
ton
columns is exposed to injury om mo
he
handling of merchandise, or by other means, it shall be
Jacketed
sed to a minimum adequate protective coht f six feet (6') from the floor
it
6. Ceiling protection. Where a ceiling is used to fire
protect floors or roofs of incombustible construction, the
constructions and their supporting structural members
(beams and girders) need not be individually fire protected
except where such members support loads from more than
one floor or roof. Ceilings shail be continuous, but may have
openings for incombustible pipes, ducts, and electrical out-
lets, provided the areas of such duct and outlet openings
through the ceiling aggregate not more than one hundred
Square
Sq. in.) in each one hundred square feet
(100 sq. inches 6t.) ofco
ellUng area. All duct openings in such
ceiling shall be protected by approved fire dampers.
281
Taw xo. 43.3 UNWORN BURMIN'a COD,
Table No. 43-B (ooftm)
y
E
;"II°������IIP-R-1, w
v!
BUILDING
c
e
«� V:5 o
R
ao v
L a8''
�=
EES, °..gam°�
9'3
xv d�
3
baa
b) Combustible Members Combustible members framed
their ends by not less than
t�
284
UNIFORM
m
BUILDING
c
e
sectio4303406
('oi)E 1959 EDWOY
(b) Protected Members i. Attached metal members The Structural at
brackets, rivets, and bolt heads attached to stra¢tersd
edges of lugs, extend to within one inch (1") Cont'
structural members may
Of the surface of the fire protection.
S. Reinforcing• Thickness of protection for concrete or
masonry reinforcement shall be measured to the outside of
the reinforcement, except that stirrups anttiies may pro
intoo tion -
ject not more than one-half inch (%,,)
3. Steel studs and joists. Steel studs and joists are not
required to have individual protection when part of an
assembly which has a fire -resistive rating.
(c) Fire Protection Omitted. Fire protection may be
omitted from the bottom flange of lintels, shelf angles, or
plates that are not a part Of the structural frame.
walls and partitions P �O ns
R
ao v
L a8''
�=
a
Sec. 4304. (a) General• Fire -resistive
shall have the ratings set forth in Table No. 43-8.
b) Combustible Members Combustible members framed
their ends by not less than
M
�e
a g b c
fan
nto a wall shall be protected at
suc
one-half the required fire -resistive thickness of h wall.
s
yp a
as
v VP
a; 2 i
6 z-,�
8 v e a
See. 4305. (a) General Fire -resistive floors or ceilings Floors
forth in Table No. 43-C. egad Ceilings
a
a
be88 v
Ra(a d
a
v q_�
, 8
shall have the ratings set
(b) Celllngs. where a ceiling of lath and plaster as
as specified
E C°
Sm A
a pC-
approved for one-hour fire -resistive construction
in this Chapter is used below slabs or structural members
a ceiling, the
a aR
mar
w» B
not otherwise required to be protected by such
thickness of slab and fire protection of structural
�r
d d °
o $ °
required
m embers ma be reduced one-half inch (1/,") but in no case
shall the slab thickness be less than two inches (2").
(c) Unusable Space Above or Below. In one-hour fire -
be omitted over on -
ss 8
u CV
d e g w
8 a c ti
a vv 8
aT •6 $M }
resistive construction the ceiling may
usable space and flooring may be omitted where unusable
space occurs above.
o `o
a°O�
rye
a°= tn.
° ° d
Fire-Bmletive
Sec 4306. (a) where Bequired. Class "A" fire doors shall Assemblies for
in Sections 503 (c), 505 (c), and
of
a `oo
c W
be installed when required rroteetlen
3904. in of openings
doors ),3305
IIRII ac) 330ll be 8 (she 309 required nd
1 06 (are
Sections 503 (e),
m
3704 (f).
Class "C" lire doors shall be installed when required in
Sections 503 (c), 1308, 3304 (g), and 4003.
in
Class "D" fire doors shall be installed when required
n�lti o°
z
Section 505 (e).
Class "E" or "F" fire doors shall be installed when required
o in Sections 668, 708, 808, 1008, 1706 (a). 1803 (b). 1903 (b),
2003 3305 (h), 3308 (c), and 3311 (d).
8 (b),
Fire doors and windows arenot
el�where fifire-resistive
this Code.
N walls or partitions unless specified
285
R
43-C
I
UNWORM 4803
BUILDING Coot
for M ScoM Fire doors and windows wherever s0e
it, this Code shall meet the req
prouwtsm alrOments of this secti,eifid
at , n.
(c) CU"Ificalde's of OP'slag- Openings requiring r,
(COBVIL) doors or windows shalt be classified as follows:
"Clan 'A' openings,, an openings in
Resistive Occupancy Separations.,, "Three Hour Fire.
"Class Ir openings" are openings In 'TWO-HOUY Fire.
Resistive Occupancy Separations,, and
tical shafts. in enclosures t,> V'ar-
"Claw 'C' Openings" are openings In "One -Hour i',r,.
,
esiative Occupancy Separations"; corridor walls which are
required to be of one-hour fire-restative construction; and
room Partitions, See Section 3304
r�.ior walls. M for openings in
"Class 'D,' T' and IF, openings,, are in exterior walls
which have -v;6, moderate, or light are exposure, res,,(_
rely.
(d) C18M --A- Openings, Class "A" openings shall be pro•
tected by two automatic class "A" lire doors, one on each
aide of the opening and Interconnected.
Each Class "A" fire door shall have a fire -resistance tine
Period of three hours and shall be without glazed openings,
(a) Claw "B" Openings. Class "B" Openings shall be pro-
tected by one automatic or self-closing Class "B" lire door.
A Class '13" lire door shall have a fire -resistance time
Period of one and one-half hours
Glass Panels in a Class 'IV, lire door shall be limited to
one observation Panel not exceeding twelve Inches (12") in
width or height and one hundred square Inches (100 sq. In.)
In area. Where doors are hung on each jamb of a Class "B"
openinoog. rsan observation panel may be installed In each of the
two d.
(f'Cin" "C" OPW-giL Class "C" openings shall be pro-
tected by one
A Claw self-closing Class "C" fir. door,
"C" fire door shall have a fire -resistance time
Period of one hour, except that doors with glass panels larger
than one hundred square inches (100 sq. In.) may have a fin : --
resistance shitance time Period of 45 minutes.
Individual glass lights in glazed openings shall be limit?d
in area to twelve hundred and ninety-six square Inches (1296
sq. in.).
(g) Class
"0" Opening- Class "D" openings shall be
Protected by one automatic Closing Class "D" Are door.
Class D11 Are
doors shall have a fire -resistance time period
of one and one
half hours and shall have no glazed openings.
(h) ChM '%- and "r, Openings. Clans,
I "E" and "Y' open -
r, Ings shall be protected by a Class "E" or 'IF" fire door or
fire window- Self-closing devices shall not be required.
Class
"E" and "V' fire doors and fire windows shall have
a fire-resistijace time
pend of 45 minutes.
288
Beaus" 49"4M UNUMM
BOLIAIN(1 IX)Dd
EM
t..
(m) Doom If constructed as set forth in U.B.c.
Standard No. 43-3-58, tin -clad fine dam shall be considered
aseeati $gam label
of this Section, provided each
door the approved inspection agency allow-
ing the classification thereof.
(n) bmtkUstkNL Fire doors and fire windows shall be
installed as set forth In U.B.C. Standard No. 43.4-58.
(0) 81gas. A sign or plaque shall be permanently dis-
played near or on each required fire door in letters not less
than one inch (1") high to read as follows:
FIRE DOOR
DO NOT OBSTRUCT
See. 4307. Fire -resistive roof coverings shall be as speci-
fied In Section 3208.
0
Sections 4401-4402
1938 I:TDfI'TON
PART IX
REGULATIONS FOR USE OF PUBLIC
STREETS PROPERTY S OVER
CHAKER 44—PROTEM014 OF PEDESTRIANS
DURING] CONSMUCTION OS DEMOLITION
See. 4401. No person shall place or store any material or (leaeral
e work under a building permit
equipment necessary for th
on a street, alley, or public sidewalk, nor small any work
performed except in accordance with the provisions of this
s
chapter. work on any building or
xo person shall perform any pedestrians on the
structure, if by so doing hrtyendangers unless the pedestrians
street that abuts the Props Y
Chapter -
are protected as specified in this'occupying Public
Any material or structure temporarilyshall be adequately
property, including fences and walkways
lighted between sunset and sunrise-
porary
See. 4402. Material or equipment necessary for the blle rk IIse Of
under a building permit may be placed or stored on p Stets and
property in the following locations: Alleys
4a) 1n Front of the Building Site. In the one-third portion
t that
adjacel
front,
for the buIt the curb in
ilding site whichi
of the tof the a permit hasobeen issued:
provided that no material or equipment shall be placedv Y
stored within five feet M of any rail or any street
track.
(b) In Front of the Adjoining Site Irt the roadway of the
street adjoining the building site for which a permit has
been Issued to the same extent and under the same restric-
tions as specified in Subseetfon (s).
s On
A due waiver of claim against the cit obi of ed from
account owner
such placement and fid ed In the office of the
the owner of such Property may
Building Official before such materials or equipment
be placed or stored.
(c) in the Alley. In the alley adjoining the building site
for which a permit has been issued, Provided that a clear and
unobstructed roadway not less than ten feetbui ding site.
width
is maintained through such alley along
ite. on any
po14) rtion ofthepubesidewalkin ninofronttlofdtgh ebuilding site
for which a permit has been issued, except on the walkway
required to be maintained.
281
Sections 4403-4406
UNIFORM BUILDING Colpg
Restrictions
Sec. 4465. Material and equipment necessary for we - t,
to Storage
be done under a permit shall not be placed or stop ;❑
on paw
public property so as to obstruct free and eonv ,,t
Property
approach to any fire hydrant, fire or police alarm box, to !tp
Felice and Campy
box, catch basin, or manhole, or so an to interfere witY +.;,e
Six feet or mare and
free flow of water in any street or alley gutter.
Mixing Motor
See. 4464. The mixing of mortar or concrete on 1, r
an Public
property shall be done In a mechanical mixer or in a c t
Propem
box in such a manner as to prevent dripping or spla.,O
n
on the public property.
Protection Of
Sec. 4405. A substantial protective frame and boar!
utilities
ll be built around and over every areet lamp, utli�r9
box, fire or police alarm box, fire hydrant, catch basin, -=.d
manhole that may be damaged by any work being daac
under the permit. This protection shall be maintair, -.
while such work is being done.
Protection of Sec. 4406. (a) Walkway. A walkway not less than Vvir
Pedestrians feet (41) wide with a railing on the street side shall t,
on Public maintained on the sidewalk in front of the building sitz
Property during construction, alterations, or demolition.
(b) Type of Protection Required. Protection shall be pro-
vided far pedestrians as set forth in Table No. 44-A, and t;,
constructed as specified in this Chapter.
Such protection shall be maintained in place and kens.
In good order for the entire length of time pedestrians or:
the street that abuts the property line may be endangered
and shall be completely removed as soon as such construe
tion work permits.
(c) Construction of Railings. Railings shall be substan-
tially built and not less than three feet (T) high.
TABLE NO. 44-A—TYPE OF PROTECTION REQUIRFI)
FOR PEDESTRIANS
HEIGHT OF
CONSTRUCTION
DISTANCE FROM N
OTECTIO
CONSTRUCTION TO REQUIRED pROTECTIO
WALKWAY
Risk fed a Im
Las than six &et
Railinr
Six feet or sure
Nom 1
Lesa than six feet
Felice and Campy
Six feet or mare and
Mora than alaht feet�fonrth
heixht of
eomnnctioa or Ie»
Fe -e aad Campy
!,
" .,.
Six feat or inure am
fosW s o Iwf
hefaht of eonatr 6Dn
Fame
n
Six feet ae mura and at
last owlaif heishf
of ewetrarupa
Nom
seettem 4"14M UNWORN NUUMING Milli
CHAPTER 45—PERMANENT OCCUPANCY OF
PUBHO PROPERTY
See, 4501. No part of any structure or any appendage
thereto, except signs, shall project beyond the property
line of the building site, except as specified in this Chapter.
Structures or appendages regulated by this Code shall be
constructed of materials as specified in Section 1710 and
Chapter 85.
The projection of any structure or appendage shall be the
distance measured horizontally from the property line to
the outermost point of the projection.
Projection See. 4502. No part of any structure or any appendage
into Alleys thereto shall project into any alley.
A curb or buffer block may project not more than nine
inches (9") and not exceed a height of nine inches (9") above
grade.
Footings located at least eight feet IN) below grade may
project not more than twelve inches (12").
Sec. 450& The space adjoining a building below a side -
below walk on public property may be used and occupied in connec-
Sidewalk with the building for any purpose not inconsistent with
this Code or other laws or ordinances regulating the use
and occupancy of such spaces on condition that the right so
to use and occupy may be revoked by the city at any time
and that the owner of the building will construct the neces-
sary walls and footings to separate such space from the build -
Ing and pay all costs and expenses attendant therewith.
Footings located at least eight feet (81) below grade MY
project not more than twelve inches (12").
Balconies Sec, 4504. Oriel windows, balconies, unroofed porches,
and cornices, and belt courses, and appendages such as water -
A tables, sills, capitals, bases, and architectural projections
may project over the public property of the building site a
distance as determined by the clearance of the lowest paint
of the projection above the grade immediately below, as
follows:
Clearance above grade less than eight feet (8')—no pro-
jection is permitted.
Clearance above grade over eight feet (81) --one inch (1")
of projection is permitted for each additional inch of
clearance, provided that no such projection shall exceed
a distance of four feet (4').
See. 4506. (a) General. For the purpose of this Section a
marquee shall include any object or decoration attached
to or a part of said marquee.
(b) Projection and Clearance. The horizontal clearance
between a marquee and the curb line shall be not less than
two feet (2).
2%
47014UNMRM BUILDING ("It
PART X
PLASTER AND WALLBOARD
CHAPTER 47 LATHING, PLASTERING AND
INSTALLATION OF WALLBOARD
Se¢, 4701. Lathing and plastering and installation of ifi-
board shall be done in the manner and with the materials
specified in this Chapter, and when required for fire prtcr-
tion shall also comply with the provisions of Chapter 43.
No piaster shall be applied until the lathing has been in-
spected and approved by the Building Official.
The Building Official may require that test holes be made
in the wall for the purpose of determining the thickness
and proportioning of the plaster, provided the permit holder
has been notified 24 hours in advance of the time of making
such test.
Materials Sea 4702. Materials shall conform to the following
standards:
V.H.C.
MATERIALS
DESIGNA i [ �'ti
Aggregate.
Sand. Shall be washed and when used with
Portland cement for scratch -coat plaster-
ing the amount of sand retained on a No.
8 sieve shall be not less than 10 per cent
or more than 30 per cent.
47-15s
Perlite. Ali perlite containers shall be
marked indicating that the perlite con-
tained therein conforms to U.B.C. Stand-
ard No. 47-1-58.
47-1.55
Vermiculite. All vermiculite containers shall
be marked indicating that the vermiculite
contained therein conforms to U.B.C.
Standard No. 47-138.
4-714k
Gypsum Piaster.
47-2-5,
Lime.
Special Finishing Hydrated Lime
(auto-claved)
47-3-5k
Quicklime for structural purposes
24-16-58
(Lime putty shall be made from quicklime
or hydrated lime and shall be prepared in
sn approved manner.)
Seeae's Cement.
Portland Cement.
47-4-58
Type I, II, or M.
26-1-58 i
A
208
lhdft No. 47-A UNWOBM BUILDING CODE
TAB=O$SUPPOR47-ATSE LAOD—NEM$PAC11O
NOTES:
1. Gypsum lath shall be applied to wood supporta with joints broken in
each Bourse except that and joints may fall on one support when sta'pptd wttb
three inches (3") of metal or wire lath. Joints between walls and ceilings sbah
be staggered. Lath shall be butted together. lath shall be inured to horn
scutal or vertical mesal supports by clean, of approved clips.
2. End joiaH c
of fiber insulation lath, except in ieterhxking�4pe lath, shall
be it 1e,s than thresixtrenths inch, (3/16') wide Shiphtpped, mngued and
anxisol, car interlocking edges shall b• fitted to moderate contact.
S. Metal and wire lath shall be lapfpead at least case meab at aides and ends.
w. vvetwed wast cacced ove erti l m Vog" to ao n rat to ""oil nix -knell (b') spaciached ng with nM tees
v.. t N. 18 U.S. stxl wire gauge, galvanized annealed win, or an equiva-
lent a
Sixteen -inch (16") spacing for clip, giving continuous support to lath.
2"
WOOD SUPPORTS
I MAXI
SPACING OF
SpAC,
SPACING
METAL
TYPE OF
SUPPORTS
(lecher)
SIZE AND
INO
S
SUPPORTS
I.ARI(
TYPE OF
NAIL
NAILS
(laches)
Vere. 33oris,
Surface
(tache)
Vat. Ho..e:
So'_
1 S6' 13 ga.
_
Si" Dat. gypsast
16
16
19/641 had
S
16
16-
bOs
blued nail
�tgtt8 gyperaw
16
16
I S{' 13 ga.
19/64" dill. head
S
16
16
blued us,]
lacht
16
16
i ld gas
#'
head
3
16
---
16
oia.
bit
1 y,{" 13 ga.
K" plain gypsum
24
24
19J6N die, head
4
24
ib
lath-
blued nail
wood lath
16
16
3d fins 16 ga.
_
blued nails
;5" fiber iasula.
—
16
—
16
nye" fiberboard
is or 4th box
�—
4%
—_
tion laHts
-11.
i' fiber loan]..19'
16
16
fiberboard
nails or 6d bat
4%
--
tion laths
nails
_
See
Metal and wise
Table
4th eotnalon nails
6
See Table
lath-
N.
(bent over)
No. 47-B
47-B
Metal and wire
—
See
Table
lys" 11 P.
7/16" this, head
_
6
See Table
laths
No.
47-B
barbed nail
No. 47-B
NOTES:
1. Gypsum lath shall be applied to wood supporta with joints broken in
each Bourse except that and joints may fall on one support when sta'pptd wttb
three inches (3") of metal or wire lath. Joints between walls and ceilings sbah
be staggered. Lath shall be butted together. lath shall be inured to horn
scutal or vertical mesal supports by clean, of approved clips.
2. End joiaH c
of fiber insulation lath, except in ieterhxking�4pe lath, shall
be it 1e,s than thresixtrenths inch, (3/16') wide Shiphtpped, mngued and
anxisol, car interlocking edges shall b• fitted to moderate contact.
S. Metal and wire lath shall be lapfpead at least case meab at aides and ends.
w. vvetwed wast cacced ove erti l m Vog" to ao n rat to ""oil nix -knell (b') spaciached ng with nM tees
v.. t N. 18 U.S. stxl wire gauge, galvanized annealed win, or an equiva-
lent a
Sixteen -inch (16") spacing for clip, giving continuous support to lath.
2"
,. � . ... .... .
(/TaW No. r<
UNARM sUummn
�
NUMBER OF
COATS
COATS
DAMP, LOOSE
SAND
(Poon%
YERMICR!LI'iE
E PICaUl E
(Cubic LIT
f
SOCtIon 4M
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
TABIC NO 47-D—REQUIRED TR[CXNESS OF'
Two -Coat
INTERIOR PLASTER
250
2%
Work
Tflf ESSS:,r
PLASTER INCU DING
BACKING FINISH COAT
FROM FACE (i
(Double -up
PLASTER hA
Metal or Wire LathOuthtr)
% minimum°
Method)
All other t YPes lowed % mintmum'
Unit my and Concrete W % minimum
Monolithic Concrete Ceilings 'fi minimum—
% maximum
'Plasterthickness when measured from the back Plane of metal b,N:, c _
sire cf ribs, shall be three,fourths•inch (Y4') minimum.
380
TABLE NO. 47-F.—GYPSUM OR BARDWALL PLASTPR
NUMBER OF
COATS
COATS
DAMP, LOOSE
SAND
(Poon%
YERMICR!LI'iE
E PICaUl E
(Cubic LIT
gas Cwt OA
Two -Coat
lam
250
2%
Work
Basest
(Double -up
masonry
Method)
(except over
monolithic
concrete)
380
3
First (scratch)
Three -Coat
Coat on lath
First (scratch)
200*
2•
Work
coat on
masonry
300
3
All second
(brown) coats
300*
3.
pavuds of gkine eutiottinster mctnot mbre ththe an proporti.mt may be 1
pounds f d:tmtp, h�
sand, o two and one-half cubic feet (2!y cu. ft.) E vermiculite r Peri,��
Provided this proportioning is used for both scratch and brown coats.
Lmlerior
Sea 4707. (a) Base Costa. 1. Gypsum or hardwall pteste:.
• The prOPort)on of sand, vermiculite, or perlite to 100 pounds
a" MIXI09 g Of gypsum neat plaster shall not exceed the values set forth
in Table No, 47-E.
2. Wood -fiber gypsum piaster. On lath, mix with water
OWY, On masonry, mix in proportions of 100 pounds of
Plaster to not more than 100 pounds of sand.
3. Lha Plaster. The proportioning of lime, Keene'L.
cement, and fiber to one cubic yard of sand shall be not lew
than the values set forth in Table No. 47-F.
4. POTUasd cement plaster. The first two onto shall be
as required for the first two coats of exterior work.
(b) Coats for Gypsum, Lime, and Interior Portland
Plaster- The finish coats shall be mixed, propor-
end applied in an approved manner.
802
Sections 4704710 UNIFORM 8UJIMINO CODE
4. The ftM mat for interior Portland cement plastering
Plastering: shall be applied in the same manner as required for me
Application third cont of exterior Portland cement plaster.
M PlasterS. V se to intsh coat shat) be applied over a bacoat
( d) which )s zami-grecs. Thickness shalt be from ate -sixteenth
inch (1/16") to one-eighth inch (%-).
(c) Plaster on Moonlit Concrete, Musolithle concrete
surfaces shall be dean, free from offloremonce, damp, and
sufficlently rough to insure adequate bond
Gypsum plaster applied to monolithic concrete ceilings
shall be specially prepared bond plaster for use on concrete,
to which water only shall be added. Gypsum plaster on
monolithic walls and columns shalt be applied over a seratcn
coat of bond plaster before it has set. The brown coat shat)
be brought out to grounds, straightened to a true surface
and left rough, ready to receive finish coat.
Lime plaster applied to concrete walls shall be as specified
in Section 4707.
Portland cement plaster applied to interior concrete waits
or ceilings shall conform to requirements for application to
exterior concrete wails as specified in Section 4711 (c).
interior Sec. 4708. Staff shall be soaked before sticking. Lugs
shall be of pure fiber and plaster of Paris. Rust -resistive
SUR fastenings of sufficient strength to anchor the staff to the
support shall be not less than No. 14 B. & S. gauge
copper wire.
Exterior See, 4710. (a) Backing, Studs shall be sheathed, or wire
Phuderlug: of not less than No. 1S U. S. steel wire gauge shall be
Backing stretched taut horizontally at intervals not exceeding six
inches (B") on center vertically and securely fastened ir.
Place. This shalt not be required with metal lath or paper -
backed win fabric.
1668 -EDITION Sections 4716-4711
TABLE NO. 47-G—EXTERIOR PLASTER
RE)(NFOR,CEMENT
TYPE OF MINIMUM MINIMUM wE1GHT
REINFORCEMENT GAUGE (Pounds pe+ Square Yard)
Expanded Meta] 1.8
Metal Lath 3.4
Welded or Woven 1.4
Wire Netting i8 1.6
Welded Wire Fabric 16
TABLE No. 47-11—EXTERIORPLASTER PORTLAND CEMENT
(b) Weather Protection Weather protection shall be as
specified In Section 1707 (a).
IM
(c) Metal Reinforcement. Exterior plaster, except when
ME OF
VOLUt
applied to concrete or masonry, shall be reinforced with one
MINIMUM
of the materials having a rust -resistive coating as set forth
COAT
i i Table No. 47-G.
MINIMUM
THICKNESS
'` Metal reinforcement shall be furred out from the backing
APPLICATION OF
SUCCEEDING
at least one-fourth inch (',") by an approved furring
CEMENT
method, and shall be nailed with galvanized nails or ap-
CURING
proved furring devices driven to at least three -fourths -
First or
inch (%') penetration which shall be spaced not more then
rh" •
sic inches (B") apart vertically and,::.Witteen inches (16")
48 hm*-'
apart horizontally. Metal reinforcement shall be lapped at
least one full mesh at all joints. When on sheathing to
all vertical joints shall be made at the studs, and
'misontat joints where expanded metal or metal lath it
(1st & 2nd
used shall have at least one tie between studs, made with
5
No. 18 U. S. steel wire gauge galvanized annealed tie wire.
48 hours
304
1668 -EDITION Sections 4716-4711
TABLE NO. 47-G—EXTERIOR PLASTER
RE)(NFOR,CEMENT
TYPE OF MINIMUM MINIMUM wE1GHT
REINFORCEMENT GAUGE (Pounds pe+ Square Yard)
Expanded Meta] 1.8
Metal Lath 3.4
Welded or Woven 1.4
Wire Netting i8 1.6
Welded Wire Fabric 16
TABLE No. 47-11—EXTERIORPLASTER PORTLAND CEMENT
'Measured from backing to crest of scored plaster.
..Approved prepared finish coats tet 'ring not tens than -,bird by
weight of Portland cement may he isd.
"'Tn insure suction there should be adrying p,6A after the moist curing
period.
(d) Exterior Corner Beads. The use of metal corner
beads on exterior plaster is prohibited.
See. 4711. tat General. Exterior cement plaster Shall be Exterior
portland cement plaster meeting the requirements of Table Plastering.
No. 47-11, except when applied over concrete or masonry. Application
(b) Plasticity Agents Plasticity agents shall be of ap-
proved types and when added is the mixing of plaster shall
be used in an amount not exceeding 1.0 per cent of the vol-
ume of portland cement. When added in the manufactur-
ing process conforming to the requirements of Section 4702.
no later additions shall be made.
(c) Application. 1. General. Except when applied to con-
crete or masonry, and except as otherwise provided for
pneumatically applied piaster, exterior cement plastering
materials shall be mixed by machine methods for not less
than two minutes. and shall be applied in three costa as set
forth in Table No. 47-H.
The first coat shall be forced through all openings in the
reinforcement so as to solidly fill all spaces. It shall then be
scored horizontally with a scratcher having one -eighth -inch
(") clipped teeth and grooves not more than one-half inch
(34") deep.
The second coat shall be rodded and water floated, with
no variation greater than one-fourth inch (14") in any
direction under a five-foot (61) straightedge.
--
IM
ME OF
VOLUt
MINIMUM
INTERVALEFORE
B
COAT
SAND PER
VOLUME OF
MINIMUM
THICKNESS
PERIOD
MOIST
APPLICATION OF
SUCCEEDING
CEMENT
CURING
COAT
First or
4
rh" •
48 hours
48 hm*-'
scratch
(1st & 2nd
Second or
5
coats)
48 hours
7 days
brown
�•"
finish
'Measured from backing to crest of scored plaster.
..Approved prepared finish coats tet 'ring not tens than -,bird by
weight of Portland cement may he isd.
"'Tn insure suction there should be adrying p,6A after the moist curing
period.
(d) Exterior Corner Beads. The use of metal corner
beads on exterior plaster is prohibited.
See. 4711. tat General. Exterior cement plaster Shall be Exterior
portland cement plaster meeting the requirements of Table Plastering.
No. 47-11, except when applied over concrete or masonry. Application
(b) Plasticity Agents Plasticity agents shall be of ap-
proved types and when added is the mixing of plaster shall
be used in an amount not exceeding 1.0 per cent of the vol-
ume of portland cement. When added in the manufactur-
ing process conforming to the requirements of Section 4702.
no later additions shall be made.
(c) Application. 1. General. Except when applied to con-
crete or masonry, and except as otherwise provided for
pneumatically applied piaster, exterior cement plastering
materials shall be mixed by machine methods for not less
than two minutes. and shall be applied in three costa as set
forth in Table No. 47-H.
The first coat shall be forced through all openings in the
reinforcement so as to solidly fill all spaces. It shall then be
scored horizontally with a scratcher having one -eighth -inch
(") clipped teeth and grooves not more than one-half inch
(34") deep.
The second coat shall be rodded and water floated, with
no variation greater than one-fourth inch (14") in any
direction under a five-foot (61) straightedge.
1100*01011 471I4m UNRIORM DUHMING CGDE
2 or eonerete. The masonry sur-
face on which plaster is to be applied shall be clean, free of
damp, and auffleientlyy rough to insure proper
bond. Mixtures specified for the second goat in this Section
eBay be applied directly to masonry.
Macifte Soo. 4712. (a) Machines. Machines for the placing of plas-
Applied ter shall be manufactured to meet the following general
Pbudw requirements:
1. Plaster and aggregate shall be mixed in a plaster mixer
and transferred from the mixer to a hopper.
2. Plaster shall then be Projected into, and conveyed
a flexible tube to the nozzle at the end of the
conveyor and deposited by air pressure in its final position
ready for finishing by hand.
(b) Preporttons. 1. Gypsum and cement plaster. Machine -
placed plaster shall consist of a mixture as required by
this Chapter. Plasticity agents in cement plaster may be used
as approved by the Building Official.
2. Application. Plaster shall be applied of the same thick-
nand in the same number of coats as specified in Sub-
section (c), Section 4711.
3. Acoustic and other plaster finishes. Acoustic and other
plaster finishes shall be mixed and handled by machines
according to the manufacturer's specifications.
Pneumatically Sea 471& Pneumatically placed cement plaster shall be
Passed a mixture of Portland cement and sand, mixed dry, conveyed
by air through a pipe or flexible tube, hydrated at the nozzle
at the end of the conveyor, and deposited by air pressure in
Its final position.
Rebound material may be screened and reused as sand in
an amount not greater than 25 per cent of the total sand in
any batch.
Pneumatically placed cement plaster shall consist of a
mixture of one part cement to not more than five parts
sand. Plasticity agents may be used as specified in Section
4711 (b). Except when applied to concrete or masonry, such
plaster shall be applied in not less than two coats to a mini-
mum total thickness of seven -eighths inch (%"). The first
coat shall be rodded as specified in Section 4711 (c) for the
second coat. The curing period and time interval shall be
as set forth in Table No. 47-H.
Sec. 4714. Portland cement plaster not less than one and
seat one-half inches (1%") in thickness reinforced in two direc-
af" tions with not less than 0.3 per cent of steel may be con-
sidered to act with the studs to resist bending and shear
under horizontal forces when said reinforcement is anchored
to the stud In such a manner as to resist effectively the
stresses developed. The unit stresses for such reinforced
Plaster shall be not more than 50 per cent of those allowed
for concrete set forth in Table No. 26-K based on a com
p ve strength of such plaster of 1500 pounds per square
inch.
Section 4715
I90 EDITION ESS OF _
TMAR IIM SPACING NO OAF SUPPORTS, METHOD
OF ATTACHMENT
Tn1Cx- SPACING OF NAILS SPACING
NESS OF (Inches) or
OYPBUM SIZE AND TYPE OF NAIL � SUPPORT
W,t7,L- WALLS CEILINGS (Inelres/
nOAED
IincaMi
5d. 131laflgt head ldia-
15/64"
mond-point nail or .098
ga. 1t/a" long, yi" Blight- 7 16
IA. ly countersunk head, me- 6 to 8 5 to
ilium diamond point with
annular threads slightly
tapered, bright, non-
coated.
6d. 13 ga. Sys" long, tla"
" flat head, diamond -point 6 to 8 5 to 7 16
NOTE' Spacing of twenty -tour inches (24) may be allowed for ceilings
where no fire -resistive construction is requireeadilhW here shall be app ed rwirh
exceed sixteen inches (16"} on center RYPs members with all
the long dimension d the board at right angio to f,ing adhesive'
joints covered with joint rein
Gypsum
tape an
See. 4715. Gypsum wallboard shall comply with U.B.C. GYPSUM
St1,an�datrhdiek;.It -8-58, a and
shall be 110 lyy nailedeto framing memss than bers
nch Wallboard
(%-)
as set forth um bwallboard 47-1.topanels are to be nailed
When gypsum
or furring, these members shall have a
to erose strapp g
minimum cross section of two inches by two inches (2"x
(nominal).
In single -layer application, all edges and ends of gypsum
wallboard shall occur overnailing members, except that this
is not required for treated joints at right angles to framing
members when the board is appliedwalorizontlboardalllall be applied
In two-ply application, gypsum
pby Building in accord with
themanufOfficb"acturer's recommendation when
807
€F,
a`e
CMptera 48-60
1868 EDITION
PART %I
SPECIAL SUBJECTS
CHAPTER 49 --PUM STORAGE
Sem 4MI, 433 snd 4808. Where it is desired to regulate PDO'
film storage, completeprovisions
slid X-ray nitrocellulose films may $fand orage
storage of photographic
48.
be found in Appendix
CHAPTER 49—MECHANICAL REFRIGERATION
Secs. 4901 and 4902. Where it is desired to regulate the Refrdgeration
type and installation of mechanical refrigeration49. Complete
provisions may be found in Appendix
CHAPTER
50.—CONSTRUGFAB CATER
Sec. 5001. (a) purpose. The purpose of this Chapter is to
General
regulate materials and establish methods of safe construetion
where any structure or portion thereof is wholly or partially
prefabricated.
(b) SCope. Unless otherwise specifically stated in this
Chapter, ail prefabricated construction and all materials
used therein shall conform to all the requirements of this
Code. (See Section 105.)
(c) he inttiomegral
partsabricated of which have assembly"
been built up oruass--
sem
mat'
the integral ga
ambled prior to Incorporation in the building.
Ste, 5M. Every approval of a material not specifically Tests of
mentioned
ind and umberIn sofG�tests tolbenmade during prefabrication.
rate as a proviso the Mated
See. 5008. The Building omeial may require special tests Tests of
to be made on assemblies to determine their durability and
Assemblies
weather resistance.
assemblies shalt be capable dofidevel ping the stred to connect ength of the Connections
members connected, except in the case of members forming
part of a structural frame designed as spectfied in Chapter
23. The connection device shall be designed as required by the
other Chapters in this Code. Connections between roofs and
the supporting walls shall be capable of withstanding an up-
lift equal to five pounds per square foot of roof.
Sec, 0005. In structural design, due allowance shall be made Pipes and
for any material to be removed for the installation of pipes, Conduits
conduits, or other equipment.
see
SNOOD 39" VNI som BIIB.OING CODE 1958 EDITION $eetlOA 5291
SON UK (a) MOtOrlahl. Materials and the assembly
"d thereof shall be inspected to determine compliance with
this Code. Every material shall be grade marked or labeled
where required elsewhere In this Code.
(b) Certificate. A certificate of approval shall be furnished
with every prefabricated assembly. except where the assem-
bly is readily accessible to Inspection at the site. The cer-
tificate of approval shall certify that the assembly in ques-
tion has been Inspected and meets all the requirements of
this Code. When mechanical equipment Is Installed so that
It cannot be inspected at the site, the certificate of approval
shall certify that such equipment complies with the lave
applying thereto.
(e) CwUfyft Agency. To be acceptable under this Code,
every certificate of approval shall be made by an approved
(d) Field Erection. Placement of prefabricated assem-
blies at the building site shall be Inspected by the Building
Official to determine compliance with this Code.
(e) Continuous Inspection. If continuous inspection Is re-
quired for certain materials where construction takes place
on the site, it shall also be required where the name materials
are used In prefabricated construction.
EXCEPTION: Continuous inspection win not be re-
qufrsd during prefabrication if to approved agency cer-
tifies to to construction and furnishes evidence of com-
pliance.
CHAPTER 51—HEAT-PRODUCING
APPLIANCE$
(See Appendix, Page 329)
E10
CHAPTER 52 — PLASTICS
See. 5201 (a) Scope• Plastic materials may be of any General
class as defined in this Section. Before any plastic material
is approved for use, the manufacturer of such plastic ma-
as'mayabe Aon
siderederelevaitoffithe proposed useaofdthe
plastic material. These data shall include: physical prop-
erties of material, including section modulus, moment of
inertia, and allowable stresses in tension, compression, and
flexure; chemical composition and properties, weather re-
sistance. electrical properties, burning and dome spread char-
acteristics, as determined by U.S.C. Standard No. 42-1-58;
products of combustion, and coefficient of expansion.
Upon review of data furnished, the Building Official shall
determine the adequacy of the material offered and if it is
found that the material :s satisfactory for the use Intended,
he may approve the material subject to -the limitations spe-
cified in this Chapter and for interior finish and trim subject
to the provisions of Chapter 42.
Each plastic material shall be identified by the manufac-
turer by a number, trade name designation, or other means
of identification satisfactory to the Building Official.
Plans and specifications submitted to the Building Official
specifying the use of a plastic material shall identify by
the accepted designation the plastic material specified.
There shall also be flied with the Building Official a cer-
tifleate from the manufacturer of each type of Plastic
material certifyingrothe
isued byte Building Officialastic material l
complies with the approval
together with installation details sufficient to chow the
proposed method of installation if these details are not given
in the architectural or engineering drawings submitted for
a building permit.
Each sheet, roll, or piece of plastic employed in struc-
tures for dentified witca mah a rk or decal t is ssatsfactoryred ito the be dBuilding
t shown
byfficialte�certificatewhich land asfthat shy the own on the pianterial used as s ortspecifi-
cations.
b) Definitions.
ll efitions. PLASTICSTIC MATERIALS
andardized are lisd and
teDefinitions
s
whollyy from
described in U.B.C. Standard No. 52-1-58.
APPROVED PLASTIC material is one which the Building
Official has found to be suitable functionally for the pur-
pose for which it is offered, which bums no faster than two
and one-half inches (2.5") per minute in sheets sixty -thou-
sandths of an inch (0.060") in thickness when tested in ac-
cordance with Standard Specifications for "Standard Method
of Flammability of Plastics over Fifty-tbousandths of an
Inch (0.0501) in Thickness" (U.B.C. Standard No. 52-2-58),
or which is not consumed in less than two minutes when test-
ed in accordance with Standard Specifications for "Standard
Method of Test for Flammability
Fifty-thou-
sandths of an Inch (0.0511") and Underfiplastics
n Thickness"
811
atesulard _----�' aa3Ard J[NG Ctilit;
to be No )> thethicknessof the plastic ma,; r;a;
d byfU.B.C.
f are no more text(!
5in P "'''.•f
Concentration
similar condi them thou of wood az Paper burned
(c) na Theu
ions is to Proms a Purpose Of the following ciz :",,;.
Oquiremens for minimum space and
plastics. and maximum area allowances for end u
tire hazard classifications shall not be construed a ,
be those c Station. 1. Cld or unrainf ass A Plastic materials
terials which arereif extingu chorced eep w enr vee astic
ante l
wil) teat
(b) ae. Procedures described in Section
bov
2. Class B plastic materials s�.
Plastic materials which are reinforced) withi glaassaffiber nr
other incombustible material amounting to not less
1.5 ounces per square foot and not less than 20 per rcrt
by weight of the plastic panel or sheet.
8. Class C Plastic materials shall be those approved plastic
materials which are reinforced with glass fiber or other �:,
combustible material amounting to not less than 10 per tela
y weight of the plastic panel or sheet,
4, Class D Plastic materials shall be those approve:'.
Plastic materials other than Class A, B, or C, which me„t
the requirements of Section 5201 (b),
Sec. 5202. (a) General, In addition to the provisions speci-
°n8ed in this Chapter, all installations of approved plasties, for
om the” s interilight-tor ttingpurposes, as well as ceiling
as interior trim, "hall comply with the provisions of
Chapter 42.
(b) Fastenings. Fastenings shall be adequate to withstand
design loads as prescribed elsewhere in this Code. Proper
allowance shall be made for expansion and contraction of
coefficientmaterials
in ntof th ce with accepted data on
in conjunction wihich it Ieemplo dl and any material
(c) Strneturat Requirements. All approved plastic ma-
terials and their assemblies shall be of adequate strength and
durability to withstand the design loads as prescribed else-
where in this Code. Sufficient and substantial technical data
shall be submitted to the Building Official by the manufac-
turer or an approved testing agency to establish working
e
maximum unsupported spans, and such other infor-
fortthe va ous be thicknesdeeses and fforrmtsecessary yused.the Building Official
ed) Arra I,fnddtatione, Plastics used as interior finish or
trim "hail comply with all the provisions of Chapter 42.
Plastics used as interior finish and trim shall
with all of the provisions of Chapter 42.
S12
1458 EDITION
F,,c. 5204. (a) General. Exterior wall panels shelf mean Exterior W&H
plastic sheets used as a light -transmitting medium in exPanels
-
terior walls.
ib) Class A and B Plastica. Clam A and B plastic sheets
?nag be used in wall panels in Types IM IV, and V build -
I gs except in occupancy Groups A, B, D, and E, provided:
1. The wall in which such panels are installed is so
':•ated that openings are not required to be fire -protected,
2. The total area of plastic panels in the plane of any
,me exterior wall in any story shall not exceed 30 per cent
of the total area of that wall.
3. No section of plastic panels shall exceed one hundred
feet (100') in length, twelve feet (12') in height, or six
hundred square feet KM sq. ft.) in area in any one story.
•i. In Types III and IV buildings, sections up to forty feet
40') in length shall be separated longitudinally by a
section of the required exterior wall construction equal in
width to 20 per cent of the length of the section or four
feet (4'), whichever is greater. Sections over forty feet
(40') in length shall be separated by a section of the required
exterior wall construction at least eight feet (8') in width.
5. In Types III and IV buildings, parallel sections shall
be separated vertically by a section of the required exterior
wall construction at least eight feet (81) in height.
(c) Chess C and D Plastics. Class C and D plastics may
be used as exterior wall panels in locations and subject to
the conditions specified for Class A and B plastics, provided
the area of such panels does not exceed 20 per cent of the
wall area in any one story of the structure and no section of
such panels is over fifty feet (50') in length or eight feet
(8') in height.
Bee. 5205. Doors, sash, and framed openings In exterior Glazing of
walls may be glazed or equipped with transparent or translu- Unprotected
cent approved plastics subject to the requirements of Section Openings
5204.
Sec. 5206. (a) General. Regardless of the requirements for Roof
fire -retardant rooting materials, transparent or translucent Panels
lighting panels of approved plastics may be used in pitched
roofs, the structure of which is not required to have a fire.
resistive rating, except roofs over Group A, B, D, and E oc-
cupancies, subject to the following installation requirements
and subject to the limitations set forth in Tables No. 52-A
and No. 52-B.
(b) Installation Requirements. 1. Panels shall conform
to the slope of the roof which shall be at least four inches
(4") in twelve inches (12"), or shall be. installed In accord-
ance with the requirements of Section 5207.
2. Each section of plastic panels aver twenty-five square.
feet (25 sq. ft.) in area shall be separated from every other
section of plastic panel by at least eight feet (8`) laterally
and ten feet (10') along the slope of the roof.
$13
880100101 UNRIPWON,
BUUJH G CODE
1100 TABLE NO. =8 A—INnALLATION IN ROOF VMM
( g} PrLTU OF 4INCHES IN 12 INCHES
TYYP YA;. ARLA BIWCLL TOTAL ALEI ix TERMt
TLABrac a:rnox nor um or ra tier w rLogR
A LLB Lel IM-11iq RT 1-1
A 150 sq. ft. 25%
sq
25 Sq.. tkft. IZ
C & D 150%
TABLE NO. 52-B.—INSTALLATION IN ROOF WH)TH
JUNIM" PITCH OF IXSS S IN 12
INCHES BUT NOT LESS THAN 44IINNCHES IN12INCHES
Each Section of plastic panel under twenty-five square feet
(25 sq. ft.) in area shall be separated from every other
section by at least four feet (4') laterally and five feet (51)
along the slope of the roof.
3. An plastic roof panels shall be attached directly to the
roof framework or shall be mounted individually in steel or
other approved metal frames.
4. No panel shall be installed within the distance from
the lot line within which openings in walls are required to
be fire -protected.
5. Corrugated panels shall be pitched in the direction of
the corrugation.
6. Exposed edges of plastic panels shall not project over
the side wall of the structure.
(c) Area and Size Limitations. Area and size limitations
shall conform to the requirements set forth in Tables No.
52-A and No. 52-B.
Sec, 52®7. (a) General. Regardless of the provisions of
Chapter 34, approved plastics may be used in skylights in-
stalled on roofs, he structure of which is not required to
have a fire -resistive rating in Group B, Divisions 3 and 4,
C, F, G, H, I and J occupancies, and in all areas requiring
automatic fire -extinguishing systems, except for Groups A
and B, Divisions 1 and 2, D and E occupancies. Approved
~fee may be used in skylights of an approved fire -venting
type where venting is required.
The plastic shall be mounted on an incombustible or
metalelad curb rising at least six inches (8") from he top
surface of the roof covering, if Installed over C, H, I, and J
and at least twelve inches (12") if installed
aver an other occupancies. and the plastic shall have metal -
S14
1858 EDITION
Sectk+a 5207
enclosed or metal -protected edges. There shall be a distance Skylights
of not less than five feet (51) between skylight units, and (Coutd.)
such units shall not be located within the distance from the
lot line within which openings in walls are required to be
fire -protected.
(b) Area Uraltatious. Installation, and Pitch Require-
ments.
ing of skylights ghts by eanlastics s otahedrthaned l
glazingon cfram-
ing sash shall
be limited and installed as follows:
1. Class A plastics. Class A plastic sheets or domes may
be employed in skylights provided:
A. That flat or with a pitch of corrugated
gleast fouriinchests are (V) inntwelve
inches (12"); corrugated sheets shall be pitched in
the direction of the corrugations.
B. That the total area enclosed within the curb of a
unit equipped with flat or corrugated plastic sheets
does not exceed one hundred and fifty square feet
(150 sq. ft.).
C. That the total area enclosed within the curb of a
single dome-shaped unit does not exceed one hundred
square feet (100 sq. ft.) and the maximum dimension
of the inside curb of such unit is ten feet (10').
D. That the plastic, if dome-shaped, rises above the
mounting flange a minimum distance equal to 10
per cent of its maximum span or five inches (5"),
whichever is the greater.
E That exceedh25aperecent ofgate ethe floor area a of all such nofsshall
the room
sheltered by he roof in which the units are installed.
2. Class B plastics. Class B plastic sheets or domes may
be employed in skylights under the same conditions as
allowed in Subsection 1, except that the aggregate area of
all such units shall not exceed 20 per cent of the floor area
of the room sheltered by the roof in which he units are
installed.
3. Class C and D plastics. Class C and D plastic sheets
or domes may be employed in skylights under the same
conditions as allowed in Subsection 1, except that the
maximum area enclosed within the curb of units equipped
with flat or corrugated plastic sheets shall not exceed one
hundred square feet (100 sq. ft.), and the aggregate area
of all such units shall not exceed 15 per cent of the floor area
of the room sheltered by the roof in which the units are
installed.
(c) Area Imitations. Installation, and Pitch Require-
ments for Plastic Glazing of Skylight Sash. Plastic panels
may be installed as glazing in the sash of skylights equipped
with metal or wood sash in sections up to three hundred
square feet (300 sq. ft.) in area if of Type A or B plastic, and
in sections up to one hundred square feet (100 sq. ft.) if
of Type C or D plastic, provided:
$15
TYDL
YAR. RHEA .—ITOTAL
AREA IN TERM.
61MTIC
RTC_ qr '
LMT..50
Or PR CPMT qr rL00R
ME.
ARLA BYP BY tOOY
17%
B
50 sq. ft.
17%
C & D
12 sq. ft.
12%
Each Section of plastic panel under twenty-five square feet
(25 sq. ft.) in area shall be separated from every other
section by at least four feet (4') laterally and five feet (51)
along the slope of the roof.
3. An plastic roof panels shall be attached directly to the
roof framework or shall be mounted individually in steel or
other approved metal frames.
4. No panel shall be installed within the distance from
the lot line within which openings in walls are required to
be fire -protected.
5. Corrugated panels shall be pitched in the direction of
the corrugation.
6. Exposed edges of plastic panels shall not project over
the side wall of the structure.
(c) Area and Size Limitations. Area and size limitations
shall conform to the requirements set forth in Tables No.
52-A and No. 52-B.
Sec, 52®7. (a) General. Regardless of the provisions of
Chapter 34, approved plastics may be used in skylights in-
stalled on roofs, he structure of which is not required to
have a fire -resistive rating in Group B, Divisions 3 and 4,
C, F, G, H, I and J occupancies, and in all areas requiring
automatic fire -extinguishing systems, except for Groups A
and B, Divisions 1 and 2, D and E occupancies. Approved
~fee may be used in skylights of an approved fire -venting
type where venting is required.
The plastic shall be mounted on an incombustible or
metalelad curb rising at least six inches (8") from he top
surface of the roof covering, if Installed over C, H, I, and J
and at least twelve inches (12") if installed
aver an other occupancies. and the plastic shall have metal -
S14
1858 EDITION
Sectk+a 5207
enclosed or metal -protected edges. There shall be a distance Skylights
of not less than five feet (51) between skylight units, and (Coutd.)
such units shall not be located within the distance from the
lot line within which openings in walls are required to be
fire -protected.
(b) Area Uraltatious. Installation, and Pitch Require-
ments.
ing of skylights ghts by eanlastics s otahedrthaned l
glazingon cfram-
ing sash shall
be limited and installed as follows:
1. Class A plastics. Class A plastic sheets or domes may
be employed in skylights provided:
A. That flat or with a pitch of corrugated
gleast fouriinchests are (V) inntwelve
inches (12"); corrugated sheets shall be pitched in
the direction of the corrugations.
B. That the total area enclosed within the curb of a
unit equipped with flat or corrugated plastic sheets
does not exceed one hundred and fifty square feet
(150 sq. ft.).
C. That the total area enclosed within the curb of a
single dome-shaped unit does not exceed one hundred
square feet (100 sq. ft.) and the maximum dimension
of the inside curb of such unit is ten feet (10').
D. That the plastic, if dome-shaped, rises above the
mounting flange a minimum distance equal to 10
per cent of its maximum span or five inches (5"),
whichever is the greater.
E That exceedh25aperecent ofgate ethe floor area a of all such nofsshall
the room
sheltered by he roof in which the units are installed.
2. Class B plastics. Class B plastic sheets or domes may
be employed in skylights under the same conditions as
allowed in Subsection 1, except that the aggregate area of
all such units shall not exceed 20 per cent of the floor area
of the room sheltered by the roof in which he units are
installed.
3. Class C and D plastics. Class C and D plastic sheets
or domes may be employed in skylights under the same
conditions as allowed in Subsection 1, except that the
maximum area enclosed within the curb of units equipped
with flat or corrugated plastic sheets shall not exceed one
hundred square feet (100 sq. ft.), and the aggregate area
of all such units shall not exceed 15 per cent of the floor area
of the room sheltered by the roof in which the units are
installed.
(c) Area Imitations. Installation, and Pitch Require-
ments for Plastic Glazing of Skylight Sash. Plastic panels
may be installed as glazing in the sash of skylights equipped
with metal or wood sash in sections up to three hundred
square feet (300 sq. ft.) in area if of Type A or B plastic, and
in sections up to one hundred square feet (100 sq. ft.) if
of Type C or D plastic, provided:
$15
UNIFORM BUnDING CODE
Skylights 1. The sash is installed at a pitch of at least four inches
(' d.) (4") in twelve inches (12") and the length 'of'the section
along the pitched slope does not exceed four feet (41);
2. No individual panel of plastic glazing is in excess of
six square feet (5 sq. ft.) in area;
3. The aggregate area of all such units does not exceea
the percentage of floor area for the type of plastic involve(:
specified in Subsection (b) above.
Ugkt-Trars-See. 5209. (a) General. Where a fire -resistive rating is not
rattling Pands required for the roof structure, approved plastics may be
used with or without sash as the light -transmitting medium
wal Sawtooth in monitors and sawtooth roofs. The lower edge of the plastic
material shall be at least six inches (8") above the surface
of the adjoining roof surface. The areas of such plastic
panels shall be separated from each other by a section of in-
combustible material or by a section of the roofing material
of the structure, said section to be equal in length to one-
tenth of the length of the plastic section, or five feet (5'),
whichever is greater.
(b) Class A and B Plastics. Class A and B plastics may
be used provided that the maximum length of a section of
plastic panels shall not exceed one hundred feet (100'),
and the distance between the upper and lower edges shalt
not exceed ten feet (10').
(c) Class C and D Plastics. Class C and D plastics may
be used provided that the maximum length of a section
of plastic panels shall not exceed fifty feet (50') and the
distance between the upper and lower edges shall not exceed
eight feet (8').
(d) Limitation of Aggregate Area The total area of
plastics used in monitors and sawtooth glazing shall not
exceed the following percentages of the Boor area of the
room or occupancy sheltered: 30 per cent for Class A
plastics, 20 per cent for Class B plastics, and 10 per cent for
Class C plastics.
Pinson Lk" Sec. 5209• (a) Definition. As used in this Section plastic,
In light diffusers shall mean flat plastic panels, formed plastic
CVMDV panels, and any grid system or egg crate formed or fabri-
cated from plastics, installed in ceilings or as ceilings below
lighting sources for the purpose of diffusing light throughout
a room or space, and supported directly or indirectly from
floor or roof construction.
(b) Installation Requirements. 1. Electrical work, All
electrical work in connection with the installation of plastic
light diffusers, including lighting equipment, fixtures, wir-
ing, and installation of same, shall comply with the require-
ments of the Etectrteai Code.
&stalled
2. Sprinkler protection, Plastic light diffusers may be in conjunction with automatic fire -extinguishing
stems, provided the installation of the plastic light diffuser
... IM,
918
1958 EDITION
does not interfere with the effective operation of the auto-
matic fire -extinguishing system. Plastic light diffusers shall
not be located between the sprinkler head and the area to be
protected thereby unless tests by an approved testing agency
have established that the proposed installation will not inter-
fere with the effective operation of the automatic fine -ex-
tinguishing system.
3. Supports. In Types I, II, III, and IV buildings, all
hanging supports and fastenings shall be of incombustible
material. Hangers shall be at least No. 12 U. S. Standard
gauge galvanized wire, or equivalent.
4. Maximum operating temperature. The maximum antici-
pated service temperature in the space between the diffusers
and the ceiling shall not exceed the manufacturer's recom-
mended maximum operating temperature for the plastics
employed in the diffusers.
(c) Area and Occupancy Restrictions. 1. Plastic light
diffusers shall not be installed in required fire exits cr
corridors or in Group A, B, D, and E occupancies, provided,
however, that plastic light diffusers made from an approved
Class A plastic having a flame -spread rating of 25 or less,
when tested in accordance with U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1-58,
and so installed or designed as to remain in place when
subjected to an ambient temperature of 300" F. for a
period of 25 minutes may be installed in the following area:
In the rooms and assembly areas of places of public
assemblage having an occupant load of less than 1,000 per-
sons.
In office spaces only of hospitals, sanitariums, and insti-
tutional -type occupancies.
In corridors of occupancies other than hospitals, sani-
tariums, and institutional -type occupancies, but not to exceed
25 per cent of the width of the corridor, provided, however,
that where breaks of two feet IT) or more in width are
provided at points not more than eight feet (8') apart.
the percentage of coverage may be increased to 35 per cent
of the width of the corridors.
2. Plastic light diffusers installed in rooms in Group C
occupancies, in which exterior exits opening directly to the
outside are not provided, shall conform to the requirements
set forth above for assembly areas having an occupant load
of less than 1,000 persons.
3. Plastic light diffusers made from approved plastics
having a flame -spread rating of 25 or less when testet in
accordance with U.H.C. Standard No. 42-1-58 may he In-
stalled in rooms in Group C occupancies equipped with exits
opening directly to the outside and in areas in (Group F, tl, it,
I, and J occupancies not subject to the installation requtro-
ments of Subsection (c) 1. Plastic light diffusera made from
other approved plastics may be installed In such occupancies
if the area in which they are Installed in fully protected by
an approved automatic fire -extinguishing system, or may
be installed in such occupancies regardless of such are
extinguishing system if the total area of plastic Insinitat
as plastic light diffusers does not exceed hi per cent of
the ceiling area. If the area of plastic in in excaap of 10
919
Section 5209
Plastic
Light
Diffusers
(Costa.)
u UNMFOM 1tUILDIPIG . CODE
plasse Par t of the calling area, no plastlUNINk C tlght;cUlfuser bruin
Bubmw* Shana twelve aq greater
t than (3Y eighteen inches (18-)
( ) t- ft-Yiu area, Such
shall be installed between Sections of
the required M material having a minimum :'dimension
and total area at east equal to the minimum dimension
and total area of the plastic light diffuser.
(d) Ske and Weight of DiSaers. It' the aggregate area
of the plastic light diffusers exceeds 30 per cent of the cell -
Ing am and the diffusers are so installed .that they will
fall from their mountings within 25 minutes, or lase, at an
ambient temperature of 800• F., or less, the length of the
Plastic light diffusers shall not exceed twenty-five feet (25')
if the weight of the plastic material is lea than two ounces
Per square foot. The length, of the plastic light diffusers in
such lultallotiMB shall not exceed ten feet (101) if the weight
of the Plastic, material exceeds two ounces per square foot.
In RO cue shall the weight of the plastic material exceed
eight ounces per square foot.
(a) Plastic Materials In Calling Flxtarac If the aggregate
8Tea of the plastic diffusers of electrical' fixtures: (installed in
such a manner that the edges of the: diffusers are in or above
the plane of the ceiling) exceeds 30 per cent of the ceiling
area. the diffusers shall be plastic light diffusers within the
meaning of this Section and shall comply with the require-
ments of this Section.
pwtium Set 5210. (a) Construction, Where partitions are not re-
qutred to be of incombustible or fire -resistive construction,
Clam A plastics may be used for the construction of the
entire partition.
(b) Ught-Trsnamitdng pads of plwUc in Partitions,
Approved plastica may be used to provide the light-trans-
Itthtg medium in partitions where plain glass is permitted,
Provided the area of plastic so installed does not exceed in
tt�agggrregate one-third of the area of the partition in which
Approved Plastics may also be installed in openings in
movable partitions wade of metal or other incombustible
material, Provided the area of plastic m Installed does not
In whicheed ithealagg gate one-half of the area. of the partition
Kxkdar See. UIL Approved plastics may be attached to a backing
Verses of masonry, concrete, or cement plaster in accordance with
applicable requirements, provided;
L That and plastic veneer shall be attached to any exterior
wall to a height greater than thirty -live feet (35,) above
grade, but shall be Permitted only on the first 'story of
buildings located in FSre Zones No. 1 and No. 2. "
Z No section of Type A plastic panels exceeds one hun-
dred and 'fifty Square feet (150 sq. ft.) in area, and no section
Of Type B, C, or D plastic panels exceeds fifty square feet
(58 sq. ft.) in area, with no dimension of any type panel
masocess of fifteen feet (15').
SIE
186& EDMON Sections 5211-8214
EXCEPTION: Outside Fire Zones No. i and No. 2 the
maximum area of sections may be increased by 50 per cent.
3. Each panel of plastic shall he separated three feet (31)
laterally and six feet (0') vertically from every other panel
by sections of the required exterior wall construction.
Sec. 5212. Class A and B plastics may be used in awnings Awnings and
and canopies, and all such awnings and canopies shall be Canopies
constructed in accordance with provisions governing projec-
tions and appendages as provided in Section 4506.
Sec. 5213. Approved plastics may be used in lieu of plain Greenhow
glass in greenhouses in Fire Zone No. 3.
Sec. 5214. The use of plastics in signs, fences, and similar Signa. Fences,
structures shall be governed by the sections of this Code ap- and Similar
plicabe to these structures. structures
318
'U�p ie< BUIWING conisaes
Section
Enrr>:ox
PART $Q
-- -- Uniform
__
Building
U. Re
Code
r��*�* �
La9Vtja
LWISLATM
STD.
AND TITLE
BASED ON: standards
I
SEC.
NO.
(Contd.)
C �—mm"UVFi
V&Nft
22 038 C riceetBricko Building
Standard Specifications C55.55
of the American Society for
See. �alG if any section, sub2sgUOn, sentence, C19USC, or
Testing Materials
Pbreas of this Ordiaani ls, for any reason, held to be uc,
Standard4Por
eonsULUtiotlal, Such decision shall not affect the validity cf
24038 HoConcr to Masonryllow
American Society
the remaining portions 'Ph
Of this Ordinance. e City Council
Units
Testing Materials
hereby declares that it would have pawed this Ordinance, and
24-5.58 Solid Load -Bearing
Standard Specifications C145-
Society
each section, subsection, clause, or phrase thereof, trrespec-
2403 Concrete Masonry
52 ofAmerican
forals
tive of the fact that any one or more sections, subsections,
Units
C129 -
Sentellces, clauses, and phrases be declared unconslUtittle,
24-6.58 Hollow Non -Load-
Standard Specifications
Society
volt l
San' Oft The UX.C. Standards which are referred to in
2443 Masonry Units Bearing Concreto
foroTesting Mate Lhe ala
Caft
vatiOull parts of Ordinance shall be �hereb UniformBuilding
1958
Clay Load-
L24038
Standard for
ican Par
Code Standards, Edition, and areY to
Structural
Bearing Wall Tile
Society
ty
me Ja'ieiy
be a part of this Ordinance.
T tin Materia
Tearing Materials
24-8-58 Structural
mil
Soft he Aard meriflantiSociety6tor
Load Bearing Ttle
Testing Materials
RTD.
AND TITLE BASED ON;
SEC.
24-9-58 Structural Clay Floor
2403 Tile
Standard Specifications C57-52
of the American Society for
4
24-10-58 Gypsum
Testing Materials
Standard Specifleations C22.50
of the American Society for
CHAPTER 4
2403
Testing Materials
4d-58' Incombustible Material) I.C.B.O. Specifications
410 —Tests
24-11-58 Gypsum Partition Tile Standard Specifications C52-54
the Society for
2403 or Block
of
r
Testing Materials
CHAPTER 0
84088 I Flammable Liquids National Board of Fire Under-
24-12-58 Beinforced Gypsum
bt, x d St at ions, Cat:
p tit„ i t 317
writers Pamphlet 30 {June.
(
2403 Concrete
for Testi, g Mat", ml
1957)
Specification
CHAPTER 10
24-13-58 Cast Stone
ericanConcrete Institute
10-1-58 Claw III Dry -Cleaning Standards for Dry Cleaninc
2403
Standard Specifteationa CY75-
1001 Systems
y Plants of the National Boar:
24-t4-58 Air -Entraining
6 of the I+meriean Society
of Fire Underwriter,
2403 Portland Cement
for Testing Materials
{Pamphlet 2E-1968}
Standard Specifications C91-53
10-2-58 Blower and Exhaust .National Board of Fire Under-
1008
24-15-58 Cement, Masonry
2403
of the American Society [or
Materials
Systems for Dust, writers Pamphlet 91 (No-
Stock and Vapor vember, 1948)
Testing
Standard Spoclfications C5-2
Removal
24-16-58 Quicklime for Strue-
Purposes
tip the Amert"n Society for
CHAPTER 22
22-1-58 Fiberboard; Insulating Federal Specifications LLL -F•
2403 tural
24-17-58 Hydrated Lime for
Testing Materm. a
Standard Specitteationa 1207-
the American Society
2202 8216-42
2403 Masonry Purposes
49 of
for Testing Materials
22-2-58 Gypsum Sheathing (Standard Specifications C79-54
2202 Board of the American Society for
2 18-58 Sfort it for ALasonrY
q-
Standard Spe.,f. tion» C'61-
4iT atnd C2,0 ,. 4T K the
Testing Materials
2403 Other than Gypsum
American S i i ty for Teat -
mg Mater,ais
24-1-58 BuildingBrie CHAPTER 24
O(fade Standard Specifications C62-50
24-19-58 Aggregate far
Tentative Specifications C144-
62T of the American Society
2405 from Clay fir 36a1e) of the American Society for
2403 Masonry Mortar
for Testing Matetata
Testing Materials
24-2.68 Sand -Lime Bult8ing
24-20-58 Sampling and Testing
Standard Methods C67 -50
the American Society f r
Standard S
2402 Brick Specifications 178.51
of the AmsHcan Society for
2405 Bicic
Testing Materials
TestiMaterials
821
3"
Sedin IM
Unuarns
U. Re
STD.
AND
SEC.
() xa
21240758
25-1-58
2501
25-2-58
2501
5-3-58
2501
25-4-5$
2501
25-5-58
2501
25-6-58
2501
25-7-58
2501
25-8-58
2501
25-9-58
2501
25-30-58
2501
25-11-58
2501
25-12-58
2501,
2602
UNIFOBI[ BUIWING CODE
rITLE BASED ON:
i
Testing Gyppsum and
Gypsum Produeta
CHAPT
Guide to the Grading
Of A"
Speciea of
Lumber and Deter.
urination of Work-
ing Stresses
Cypresa--Tidewater
Red
Dun
glas Fir, Coact
Region
Douglas Fir, lniand
(Western Plne)
Region
Hemicek, Eastern
Hemlock, West Coast
Larch
Oak, Red and White
Pine, Southern
Redwood
Douglas Fir Plywood
and Softwood
All Other Species and
(;rade. (See Table
No. 26-E)
S"
Standard Specifications C -Y+;
56 of the American Society
for Testing Materials
ER 26
Standard Specification$ D245
67Tof the American Society
for Testing Materials; S'u
n-
slified Practire R—m c,
dation 16-53 of the 1'. S. Irc
partment of Ci
mmerea P:,-
real
of Standard.; and
Standard Grading Rutes of
Various Associations
Standard Specification of th<
Southern CYPreas Manufa-
turera' Aasoefation (Supe i:,.
1953)
Standard Grading and Di, r1 -
Ing Rules No. 15 of the Rest
Coast Lumbermen's A.—)
ation (March 15, 1956)
Standard Grading Rules of th,
Western Pine Association
(May 15, 1956)
Official Grading Rules of th,
Northern Hemlock and
Hardwood Manufacturers'
Association (November 1�.
1960)
Standard Grading and Dress-
ng Rules No. 15 of the
»tion (March 15, 1958)
Standard Grading Rulers of
Western Pine Aasoeiatim:
(May 15, 1956)
Standard Specilleation.. for
Structural Stress -Grades of
Hardwoods and Cypress c*
the National Hardivoud
Lumber Aasoeiatlon (1943)
1956 Grading Rules of the
Southern Pine Inspection
Bureau (June 1, 1956)
Standard Specifications of the
California Redwood A"Oel,
atfon (November, 1955)
Commercial Standards CS45-
55 and CS122-56 of the U. S.
Department of Commerce,
Bureau of Standat a
EDITION
26.13-58
2503
25-14-56
2603
25-15.58 I
2503 I
25-16-58
2503
25-17-58
2502,
2808
25-18-58
2502
2504
2808
25-19-58
2504
2808
25-20-58
2605
25-21-58
2595
25.22-58
2506
25.23-5E
2606
25-24-51
2508
sem OW
II>dtorm
Building
BASED ON: COde
Standards
(Costa.)
Structural Glued Lam-
Technical Bulletin 1069 of the
Products Laboratory.
Hated Wood—Ali
Species of Lumber
Forest
ri-
M( `bruarY,
cult re 1854}
3truetural Glued Lam-
Standard Specifications for
mated Wood—Doug•
SDe gt rui G1 ed =TI td
las Fir
Lumber of the West Coast
Lumber. a n'a ASsa-iation
1957
Structural Glued Lam-
Standard SPecifications Cor
I, dLum tof
mated t4'ood—
8outih ural
bier
Southern Pine
the Southern Pine Asaocfa
tion (May 1, 1957)
Structural Glued Lam-
btDesign dandpFabrication far
of
inated Waod—
Hardivoud Glued laminated
Hardwood
Lumber
Treat-
St d.rd P�4iltCitinna
Preservative
me=t of Piles by
to the
ood Preservers
Pressure 1'roce.seu
Association;
Wood Poles
Speeifi atf is and Dimensions
for Wood Poles of theAiner-
as Associat;nn
(anri,:I9194s
Round Timber Piles
Tentative Specifications D25-
Society
foroTesting Material
Spaced Columna
Wood handbook ca the Forest
Departme=ta ofraAgii-Itue
(1955)
Flexural and Axial
111thm ' Desi radenei,u tuber
for
Loading
and its Fastenings 0f the
7) e
turers'aAsaoclation5(195
The material in this tandard
Timber Connectors
is based on Part I of the
fil—
�I,--
do]ofori Sttress Grade um
of
her and Its I lisn"nings
her
National Lumber Manu-
the
facturer»' Association (1057)
The material in this Standarhd
Bolts
is based on PartNatVi of te
nal sGrignx i e,i�iiru
U.. for St -ss
her and Its Fasten,n¢s
i.um her Manu
the Nat haat
factirera' As$oeiaton (19,57)
Drift Bolt and Wood
The material in this Standard
Port
Serewe
Nathobas-I Dem gn on
Sill'flt�s-
tlon far Stad"Lulri-
SW
M
SwAlm UM UNUMUM BUUZINQ CODE 1958 EDITION
Uniform,
80"V.B.C,
STD. TITLE BASED ON:
URC
CAND olin TITLE BASED ON: STD. AND
Stwid&T& SEC.
NO. SEC
NO.
bar anfl IleP on,u
the ,aried Xi4gbaingo a,
Manu- 26-7.158 Cold -Drawn Steel Standard Specifleatt.n A82-34
facturers, Association (1957). 2604 Wire for Concrete of the American Society for
25`R;58 Lag Screws Reinforcement Testing Materials
The material 1pla�llo Standard 1E,"
. rt V, '
Ih 26-9.59 Axle -Steel Bar. for Tentative Specification. A160-
National Design Sincifica2604 Comer to Reinforce- 54T of the American Society
tion for Sir ment for Testing Materials
bar and It.aXj%C.tr.anlrg`.`sj
the NoI
lonal Lumber Man,, 26.9-58 Deformed Steel Bars Tentative gDeelfleationz A305-
for Concrete 3
facturers' Association (1957) 2604 5 T of the American Society
25-26-58 Flat Panels with Pamphlet R1220 of the Forest
Reinforeement for Testing Material.
2512 Stressed Coverings Produetes Laboratory, U. 2-10-58 Making and Curing Standard Method (7192-55 Of
Department
at of Agriculture 60Concrete Connures- the American Society for
(July, 1946) cion andPIexu
Flexure Testing Materials
cbmena in
2513
Teat
-58 Adhesives pn S. Federal Government the Lalrora t a r y
25-27
cification C.G.456 of the
(July 8,1941)26-:-59 Test for COM too8Ivo Standard method C39 -56T of
I 4 26N Strength 7M.13 ad the n Society for
Joint M1litaqSpe6ficatio. Concrete Cylinders Testing American
. Ing Materials
MIL-A.397B . , he U. S. Fed-
eral Government (February -12-58 3aking and Curing Standard Method C31-40 of the
3, 1953} 26 2606 '7oncrote Curtness. America. Society for Test -
Joint Military Specification
'Jon and Flexure Ing Materials
MIL -A -5534A of the U. S_ post Specimens in
Federal Government (June the Field
15, 1951) 26-13-5 Ready -Mixed Concrete Tentative Specification.,, C94 -
S
25-18-58 Test for Glue Joints Standard Method of Testing C94-
2807 55T 65T of the American Society
al
2913 In, Testing Motor 1 1
Societ53 of the American
y for Testing Materials 26-14- Way Slabs A,C.1, Building Cod. .".Ire-
25-Y9-5$
".Ire25-29-58 Plank and Bea
2609 menta for Reinforced Can -
2515 Construction Wood Utilization Data No. 3 creta rn It
American
CI 318-51) Of the
of the National Lumber Amer Concrete Institute
a
Manufacturers Association
(1940) -C-1. Building Cofd.e,,Requdre
26-15-59 Flat g1flul Ratio ind Con-
crete menta
(ACT318-51) of the
CHAPTER 26 American Concrete Institute
26-1-58 Portland Cement Standard Speciffeationx C156- CHAPTER 27
2604 56 of the American Society
Specifications A7 -
tell
for Testing Materials 27.1-58 Steel for BrIdget,"d Tentative S,
2701, Buildings ;.6T a, th�.A;;l.rIc.;m
0 r Testing
as I. Materials
26-2-59 Concrete Aggregates Tentative Specifications C33- 2808
* Tentative Speelfteations A246 -
for
66T of the American Society
27-2-58 Heavy an
2111: Gauge Structural 62T, A246 -62T, and A303 -52T
for Testing Materials r Otur.1
7til 'It,
2716 Quality Flat a of the American Society for
26-3-69 Lightweight Aggre- Tentative Specifications C330- 3104 Rolled rho Testing Materials
2604 gates for Structural 53T of the American Society sheets
Concrete for Testing Materials 27j3.1!8 Design of Light Gauge SpeMeation of the American
0 at
28-4-58 Lightweight Ag re Tentative Specifications C332- 4 2 Steel Structural Iron ind Steel Institute
states Or Insulating I�g 54T of the American society "'A 2715 Members
Concrete for Testing Materials
27.4-58 Welded and Seamless Tentative
26-5-58 Billet -Steel Bars for Tentative Specifications A15- 2701 Steel Pipe 55T of the American S. -letY
2904 Concrete Reinforce. 64T of theAmerican Society for Testing Materials
bent for Testig Material.
27-5.58 Mild- to Msdlura- Tentative Specifications A27-
26-6-59 Radl-Steel Bars for Tentative Specifications All- 2701 Strength Carbon- 55 of the American
2604 Concrete Reinforce- steel Castings
54T of the Ainertcan Society 1, far for Testing Materials
General Applications
Most for Testing Materials
574
sectim sm
Uniform
Oodo
Standsivile
((MIV,L)
203 a ss
32-2-b8
3203 Hand -Split Shakes
f8 Flre- CHAPTER 87
370x Clay Retractorlse Standtrd Speclfiealttons C27-5�
37-2 b8 rt the Aing mertcanSoeiety to
3?01 Term.
to. IftuindardPestSpy ification. C71.5(
of the Amarlcan Society fa
Teatm Matertahi
38-2-58 Installatbn or C�°PTER 88
3802 Sprinkler a...ei-. Pamphlet x8 of the National
"2 Board of Fire Underwriters
38-238 Carbr� ,Dtozida (August, 1955}
3802 Fire-Extingnlshi,g Pamphletmf12 of Ude National i Systema
(July, 1957)
42-1-58 Teat Method f CHAPTER 42
4202 of Building Matetfie. 0
Building 11 $ 2a aUnderivrtitei' -`I ora!
ria! tor)as, Inc. (August, 1950)
�Q
Uniform
Building
BASED ON: Code
Standards
(c"v4L)
EUII.DIDi{} OODL
U. R. C
Federal Specideation SS -A.
STD.
118b, U. S. Federal Govern-
8LC TITLE
ment (August, 1954)
NO.
RASED ON:
27-i•58 Gray Tton
2701 Castings
Standard Specification.
27.7-5g
2701 Structural Rivet g
A48.58
of the Americanla Society for
Testing Materla
tNi
Tentative aDeelfieationa Ai+i-
bbT at the Amarlcan
Aaaemhi Y of $true-
.Society
for Testing Material
=40g,
8otorsi Joints Using
fa Strength $tee!
Specifienttons of the American
tfonitute of 1 Cou.tr a
279.58 Are and Gas Welding
(pehrna i9b+)
1 1: 111-
2710
27-10-b8
Standard `1 ;fpr A,, one
Gas Weldittie Amer)
can Weidia
MilSisal Ate-
2701
c6etY (19¢
Welding Electrodes
Tentative $pehtdeationa
Inge In Walls and
Partitions Against
65T offfix the Amxlean
(A.S.T.M. A
21g7ni58 Welded an
Steel pipe p jalesa
2808
bbT)SOcietY
Standard gpec;9ca
ttore A2FT-
b5 of the Amerl $oeic(y
for Testing M
lals
21-
3 +58 I Damper, CHAPTER 80
300
Pamphlet 00 =
Board of Fite Un trwrit,`sl d
(August, 1962) `4
t2-1.58 Wo CHAPTERi 111 •�.
g Wood Shin 1
203 a ss
32-2-b8
3203 Hand -Split Shakes
f8 Flre- CHAPTER 87
370x Clay Retractorlse Standtrd Speclfiealttons C27-5�
37-2 b8 rt the Aing mertcanSoeiety to
3?01 Term.
to. IftuindardPestSpy ification. C71.5(
of the Amarlcan Society fa
Teatm Matertahi
38-2-58 Installatbn or C�°PTER 88
3802 Sprinkler a...ei-. Pamphlet x8 of the National
"2 Board of Fire Underwriters
38-238 Carbr� ,Dtozida (August, 1955}
3802 Fire-Extingnlshi,g Pamphletmf12 of Ude National i Systema
(July, 1957)
42-1-58 Teat Method f CHAPTER 42
4202 of Building Matetfie. 0
Building 11 $ 2a aUnderivrtitei' -`I ora!
ria! tor)as, Inc. (August, 1950)
�Q
Uniform
Building
BASED ON: Code
Standards
(c"v4L)
CHAPTER 47
*47-1.58 organic Aggregate. Tentative Speelfieptlos nC35-
4701 Infor Use in Interior 53T of the American Society
Plaster for Testing Material.
47-248 Gypsum Plasters Standard Specification. C28-60
4701 of the American Society for
Testing Materials
47.3-58 Special Finishing Standard Specill—tio.ts (1206-
- 4701 Hydrated Lime 49 of the American Society
for Testing Materials
7.4.58 Keene's Cement Standard Specifications C51-50
._.4701 or the American Society for
Testing Materials
47-5.58 Wood Lath Standard Specifications for
4701 Gypsum Plastering (A42.4-
1950) of the American Stand-
ards Association
47.6-58 Gypsum Lath Standard Specifications C37-54
4701 of the American Society for
Testing Materials
47.7.58 Metal and Wire Lath Standard Specificationsfor
4701 Gypsum Plastering (A42.4-
1950) of the American Stand-
ards Association
47-8-58 Gypsum Wallboard Standard Specifications C36-55
4701 of the American Society for
Testing Materials
CHAPTER 48
48-1.68 Storage and Handling Pamphlet 41 of the National
4802 of Photographie and Board of Fire Underwriters
X -Ray Nitrocellulose (July 15, 1930)
Films
48.2.58 Nitrocellulose Motion Pamphlet 40 of the National
4803 Picture Film Board of Fire Underwriters
(1953)
3"
brleated Acousti-
Federal Specideation SS -A.
IIn[ta Standard
'f',$ire
118b, U. S. Federal Govern-
Testa
ment (August, 1954)
' CHAPTER 43
Fire Tests of Building Standard Methods E119.55 of
Construction and
the American Society for
.: Materials
Testing Materials
Fire Teats of Door
Standard Methods E152.56T of
Assemblies
the American Society for
Testing Material.
Tin -Clad Fire Doors
Standard Subject la(A), of
and Shutters
Underwriters' Laboratories.
Inc., January, 1956
Protection of Open •
Pamphlet 80 of the National
Inge In Walls and
Partitions Against
Hoard of Fire Underwriters
(1941)
Fire
CHAPTER 47
*47-1.58 organic Aggregate. Tentative Speelfieptlos nC35-
4701 Infor Use in Interior 53T of the American Society
Plaster for Testing Material.
47-248 Gypsum Plasters Standard Specification. C28-60
4701 of the American Society for
Testing Materials
47.3-58 Special Finishing Standard Specill—tio.ts (1206-
- 4701 Hydrated Lime 49 of the American Society
for Testing Materials
7.4.58 Keene's Cement Standard Specifications C51-50
._.4701 or the American Society for
Testing Materials
47-5.58 Wood Lath Standard Specifications for
4701 Gypsum Plastering (A42.4-
1950) of the American Stand-
ards Association
47.6-58 Gypsum Lath Standard Specifications C37-54
4701 of the American Society for
Testing Materials
47.7.58 Metal and Wire Lath Standard Specificationsfor
4701 Gypsum Plastering (A42.4-
1950) of the American Stand-
ards Association
47-8-58 Gypsum Wallboard Standard Specifications C36-55
4701 of the American Society for
Testing Materials
CHAPTER 48
48-1.68 Storage and Handling Pamphlet 41 of the National
4802 of Photographie and Board of Fire Underwriters
X -Ray Nitrocellulose (July 15, 1930)
Films
48.2.58 Nitrocellulose Motion Pamphlet 40 of the National
4803 Picture Film Board of Fire Underwriters
(1953)
3"
Ordinances Sec. 809& Ordinance No . ....... and all ordi-
R.epealed nances amendatory thereto, and all ordinances or parts of or-
dimocesin conflict with this Ordinance are hereby repealed.
Date Seo, 6004. This Ordinance shall be, and is hereby declared
to be in full force and effect, from and after 30 days from its
date of final passage and approval.
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Vanessa
Z'.
Code
I ,
tiD
TITLE
BASED ON:
bF rda
SEC.
(CoOYd.)
NO.
CHAPTER 48
481.58
Mhil Rfrigera-
ecancao
Standard Safety Code (1E -5s1
4841 I
tion I
of the American Society of
Refrigerating Engineers
CHAPTER 61
51-1-58
5101
Storage and
Handling of
Pamphlet 58 of the National
Fire Protection Aasorbuten
Ltpueded Petroleum I
(May, 1854)
(lases
CHAPTER 52
5"-1.58
Technical Data on
Specifications of the Ma
5201
Plastica
tur ing Chem,to Ass,, 1
i
tion, Inc.
u
- "-56 i
Flammability of
Standard Specifications
5201 I
Plastica Over Fifty-
thousandths of nn
44 of the American
for Testing Materials
Inch (0.050") In
Thickness
523-58
Flammabllity of
Standard Specifications 1);
5201
Plastics Fifty-
thousandths of an
43 of the Amerlean Socia.
for Testing Materials
Inch (0-050") and
Linder in Thickness
52-4-58
Thickness of Solid
Standard Speclfications
5201
Electrical insulation
42 of the American 8111-'
for Testing Materials
Ordinances Sec. 809& Ordinance No . ....... and all ordi-
R.epealed nances amendatory thereto, and all ordinances or parts of or-
dimocesin conflict with this Ordinance are hereby repealed.
Date Seo, 6004. This Ordinance shall be, and is hereby declared
to be in full force and effect, from and after 30 days from its
date of final passage and approval.
Section Il
UNnnimM BURZINGCK&PTIM is
CDDE
ex"awEXISTING 8UUzWG$
Sec. 1889. (a) p
Provide a reasonable degree The Purpose of this Section is to
sleeping In apartment ho f safety to persons living and
for alterations to such existing and hotels throe
with the minimum safetyu bullets f do not conform
(b) requirements of this Code.
exclusio existing oneontoe provisions f this Section shall apply
I than two stories bei rming Group Ii occupancies
ve
(c) Effective Date, E ght.
date of this Section, evehtecn months after the
shall be vacated rY building falling within its scope
Of this Section. until
made to conform to the requirements
(d) Number Of Exit., Every apartment and every other
sdesping room shall have access to not less than
two exits
Sre escape as specified heroin may be ..ad A�.
as one required
(e) Stair Construction. All stairs shall have a minimum
run of nine n,,,- (9») and a maximum rise of eight inches
inch 80 )- E�� width exclusive of handrails of thirty
rail. A 30") ry stairway -hall have at least one hand.
arty inches 3 having a minimum horizontal dimension of
to the stairway. shall be Provided at each
point of access
(f) Interior all of 11 Every interior etairway shall be
enclosed with wally of not less than one-hour fire -resistive
COnetrnCLiOn.
where existing partitions
sure, wood lath and plastform part of a stairwell enclo-
er in good condition will be
�reFttale in lieu Of one-hour fire -resistive construction.
Class ,B„ such enclosures shall be protected by self-closing
Bre doors or solid wood doors not lase than one and
three-eighths inches (1%") thick Enclosures shall include
Public i�'oomneen Bights and any corridors, passageways, or
the building,
necessary for continuous exit tc the exterior of
The stairway need not be enclosed in a continuous abaft
If cut off at each story by the fire -resistive construction
required by this Subsection for stairwell enclosures.
extin
Eneeuls shall not be required If an automatic fire -
Shing system is
ing except bedrooms, apartments,aanarr000msfaecessory
thereto.
($) Exterior Stairways, Exterior stairs shall be incom-
bustible or of wood Of not leas Ulan two_tnch {2») nominal
thickness with solid treads and risera.
(h) Fie Escape, Fire sa
Of °green, it the pitch dose ca
not ex pe$ my 8p used as one means
In
not Is= than eiglttecn degrees the wth
Inches (18»), the tresila are not
Soo
I9t3E°1IITION motions 1809 and 291111
Ie.r,than four inches (41) wide, and they extend to the Existing
-�
or am provided with counterbalanced stairs reaching Buildings
to the ground. Access shall be by an opening having a (Cenrd.)
sum dimension of twenty-nine inches (29") when open.
T)ta-aD shall be not more than thirty inches (30") above
tie Boor and landing.
f1) Doors and Openings. Exit doors shall swing in the
direction of exit travel, shall be self-closing, and shall be
operable from the inside without the use of key or any
special knowledge or effort. Doors shall not reduce the
required width of stairway more than six inches (61)
when open. Transoms, and openings other than doors, from
corridors to rooms shall be fixed closed and shall be covered
with a minimum of three -fourths -inch (%") plywood.
(j) Exit Signs. Every exit doorway or change of direc-
tion of a corridor shall be marked with a well -lighted exit
sign having letters at least five inches (5") high.
(k) Enclosure of Vertical Openings. Elevators, shafts,
,ducts, and other vertical openings shall be enclosed as re-
quired for stairways in Subsection (f) or by wired glass set
in metal frames. Doors shall be incombustible, or as regu-
lated in Subsection (f).
(1) Separation of Occupancies. Occupancy separations
shall be provided as specified in Section 503. Lobbies, and
public dining rooms not including cocktail lounges, shall not
require a separation if the kitchen is so separated from the
dining room. Boiler rooms or heater rooms containing a
< central heating plant using solid or liquid fuel shall be
separated from the rest of the building by a "Four -Hour
Fire -Resistive Occupancy Separation.'
(m) Alternates. No alternate method of obtaining the fire
protection and safety required by this Section may be used
unless the Board of Appeals, including as a voting member
for this purpose the Chief of the Fire Department, finds
that such alternate method provides protection and safety
equivalent to that required herein.
CHAPTER 23
Refer to Sec. 2301.
WEIGHTS OF BUILDING MATERIALS
Lbs. Per Weights of
i Cu. Ft. Building
Brick, common ... .. 125 Materials
z`. Brick, common, laid 3fi" joints . .. ._._ 120
Brick. pressed ........_..._ .................. ..... ..... ......,_.........._. 150
x' Brick, soft, laid" joints ................ .. _._ 100
Castiron ......................................... .. ......._ 450
Cinders, dry, bituminous, in bulk ........... 45
Concrete—
Cinder, structural ........._..................... . _.__ _ ___ 110
Stone or gravel .............................. 144
Concrete building tile, 60 per cent solid &7
Concrete building tile, 55 per cent solid _..._._... 79
331
Section 23►1
weights ofUZMOXK mmbirjG CODE
nwbfts Lbs. Per
Cu.Materials Earth— Ft.
( ay Common loam, dry and loose .......................................... 76
Clay and gravel, dry and loose .................................... i0o
Common a4rth, dry and packed .........................
Wet mud ..._ .............................. ....-..... 100
•.......................... ........ ........ 120
GGhip...................................... ........................ 157
ranite ................................................... ................ 170
Granite masonry. dreamed .................
Granite mason _................ 165
Gravel masonry, rubble .......» ........................................... 155
dry............._............................................................... 120
Limestone masonry, dressed .............................................. 182
Marble masonry, dressed .................................................... 170
Mortar, hard, cement.......................................................... 135
Mortar, hard, lime
................................. .........................._.. 105
dry
Sana................................................................................ 100
............................................................... ... 120
Slag (bleat furnace) ............................................................ I30
Steel_.........»................»...._..................................................... 490
Terra cotta filled with brickwork ...............
120
Terra cotta, Dennison interlock tile, laid 65
Timber
�: dr........._.................................................................... 32
..................................................................... 44
Oak ......._ ................................. 46
water, fresh at 80 de ...............
grace Fahrenheit ......................... 62}j
Lbs. Per
C7eiliags-_ Sq. Ft.
Wood lath and plaster .................................................... 8
Metal lath and plaster suspended ........... ............ 10
Partitions --
2' x 4' studs, plaster board, %- plaster, both sides 16
2' x 4" studs, wood lath, %- plaster, both sides ...... 16
Channel studs, metal lath, cement plaster,
solid 2" thick ........................ 20
Plaster on hollow clay the (one side) ......................... 5
2" hollow clay file ...................... 13
3' hollow clay tie ..................................
".:. 4' hollow ..........
........ 28
clay tile ....................._................................ 18
5' hollow clay tile ..._....» ............................................. 20
6' bellow clay tale ........................... ................ 25
8" hollow clay tie ................ .. ......
.......................................... 30
12" hollow clay the ...---.....•---..
` Plaster on Plaster -block ....................._-............ 45
Partitions (one side) ............ 5
2` plaster blocks ._._...» ........................................... 7
23f' Plaster blocks ......................... ................. 8.5
3' Plaster blocks _ .................. 10.5
4` Plaster blocks »..................»..
Plaster blocks .......„_...._.._»........»..........._. 15
6' Plaster blocks ........... _..._. ..._........._............... 18
Plaster blocks ..._...._..._...-_. ... _...................... 22
332
EDITION
Wood shingles ......................................
Slate 3/16" ...... - .................
Slate'k" ................. ........ - -
Tile and clay shingles .........................
Roman tile, clay ................................
Spanish tile, clay ................................
Ludowlci tile, Spanish ............. ........-.
Tile roof laid in mortar, add ............
Copper (if no weight is specified) ..
Tin..............._.........................................
Corrugated iron .................................
Tar and gravel ..............................---
Prepared composition ........................
Skylights, metal -covered, wire glass
Section$ 2861 and 2312
Lbs. Per Weights of
Sq. Ft. Building
..... 3 Materials
7 (Cont'a)
10
11 to 14
...------ 12
19
10
10
.......... 13§
.......... 2
.......... 6
.--....... 5
s.,.' LATERAL BRACING
Refer to Sec. 2312. The following provisions are aug- Lateral
Bested for inclusion in the Code by cities located within an Bracing
area subject to earthquake shocks: (Earthquake
Sec. 2312. (a) General. Every building or structure and Regulations)
every portion thereof, except Type V buildings of Group I
occupancy which are less than twenty-five feet (251) in
height, and minor accessory buildings, shall be designed and
constructed to resist stresses produced by lateral forces as
provided In this Section. Stresses shall be calculated as the
effect of a force applied horizontally at each floor or roof
level above the foundation. The force shall be assumed to
come from any horizontal direction.
¢. Ali bracing systems both horizontal and vertical shall
transmit all forces to the resisting members and shall be of
sufficient extent and detail to resist the horizontal forces
provided for In this Section and shall be located symmetri-
cally about the center of mass of the building or the building
shall be designed for the resulting rotational forces about
the vertical axis.
(b) Horizontal Force Formula. In determining the hori-
zontal force to be resisted, the following formula shall be
used:
FoCW
WHERE
"F" equals the horizontal force in pounds,
"W" equals the total dead load, tributary to the point
under consideration.
EXCEPTIONS: 1. For warehouses, "W" shall equal the
total dead load plus 50 per cent of the vertical design
live load tributary to the point under consideration.
2. For tanks, "W" shall equal the total dead load plum
the total live Iona
338
Cantilever parapet and other
cantilever wall.,, except re- 1.00
action 2312 UNIFOaM BUIMINO CODE
F
TABLE NO. 23-C—UORMNTAL FORCE FAC'TORs
atnw
of wall
Exterior and Interior orna-
Any
Cettttl.) PART OR PORTION VALUE
DIRECTION
OF "Co,
OF FORCE
Floors. roofs, columna, and 16
bracing in any story of a
Any
{
building or the structure Nt+4%
direction
horizontally
as a whole*
horizontally
Tanks, elevatedtanks smoke-
Exterior bearing and non-
stacks, standpipes, and
Any
bearing walls, interior bear-
direction
Ported by a building. I
ing walls and partitions with a rubs
'See Mop on inside back rover Eur .ones. The valves given "C" are rtis(-
mom and "until be adopted in lunar, rmt subject to frequent seismic die
rorWnnaa as soca'° iu Zone 1.
For leentious in Zone 2, C" shall he
- d ideations in Zone 3. "C" ahall be multiplied hr 4.
'W'here wind load forth
interior non-bearing walls imum of
Normal to
N -bail be cull dte number of stories con -
[°'curing onw.
and partitions over ten feet five pounds
surface
(10') in height, masonry Peraguare
of wall
fences over six feet (6r) in foot
height.
Cantilever parapet and other
cantilever wall.,, except re- 1.00
Normal to
taltting walls
surface
of wall
Exterior and Interior orna-
Any
mentations and appendage., 1.00
direction
horizontally
When connected to or a part
Of a building: towers, tanks,
Any
towers and tanks plus con-
direction
.20
tents, chimneys, smoke-
horizontally
stacks, and penthouses.
Tanks, elevatedtanks smoke-
stacks, standpipes, and
Any
similar structures not sup. .100
direction
Ported by a building. I
horizontally
'See Mop on inside back rover Eur .ones. The valves given "C" are rtis(-
mom and "until be adopted in lunar, rmt subject to frequent seismic die
rorWnnaa as soca'° iu Zone 1.
For leentious in Zone 2, C" shall he
- d ideations in Zone 3. "C" ahall be multiplied hr 4.
'W'here wind load forth
as set in Section 2307 would produce higher st,=ex
tots land dull he mad in lien of the factor above.
iN is mer of -WAea ah, the -tmy under consideration, rortdcd that
ine .,ems or om'iagtW bracing,
N -bail be cull dte number of stories con -
[°'curing onw.
Machinery or other fixed concentrated loads shall be con-
sidered a., Part of the dead load.
23:C' equals a numerical constant as shown in Table No.
C.
(c) FOuRWIVIR Ti— In the design of buildings of Types L
n. and III, where the foundations rest on piles or on soil
having a safe bearing value of less than 2000 pounds per
square foot, the foundations *ball be completely inter-
connected in two directions approximately at right angles to
each other, aaeb such interconnecting member shall be
334
EDITION
section 2312
' bible of transmitting by both tension and compression at Lateral
k',,
' t 10 per cent of the total vertical load carried by the Bracing
vier only of the footings or foundations connected. The (Cont'd.)
mum gross size of each such member if of reinforced
ttrete shall be twelve inches by twelve inches (12" x 12")
shall be reinforced with not less than the minimum re-
*orcement specified in Section 2620. If the interconnecting
members are of structural steel, they shall be designed as
*rovided in Section 2702, and encased in concrete. A rein-
forced concrete slab may be used in lieu of interconnecting
its members, providing the slab thickness is not less than
one forty-eighth of the clear distance between the connected
foundations: also providing the thickness is not less than
six inches (6").
Interconnecting slabs shall be reinforced with not less
than eleven -hundredths square inch (.11 sq. in.) of steel
per foot of slab in a longitudinal direction and the same
amount of steel in a transverse direction. The bottom of
such slab shall be not more than twelve inches (12") above
the tops of at least 80 per cent of the piers or foundations.
The footings and foundations shall be tied to the slab in such
a manner as to be restrained in all horizontal directions.
(d) Pians and Design Data. With each set of plans filed,
s brief statement of the following items shall be included:
1. A summation of the dead and live load of the building,
floor by floor, which was used in figuring the shears for
which the building is designed.
2. A brief description of the bracing system used, the
manner in which the designer expects such system to net,
and a clear statement of any assumptions used. Assumption
as to location of all points of counterflexure in members
must be stated.
3. Sample calculation of a typical bent or equivalent.
(e) Detailed Requirements. 1. Bonding and tying. Cor-
nices and ornamental details shall be bonded in the structure
so as to form an integral part of it. This applies to the
interior as well as to the exterior of the building.
2. Overturning moment. In no case shall the calculated
overturning moment of any building or structure due to the
forces provided for in this Section exceed two-thirds of the
moment of stability of such building or structure. Moment
of stability shall be calculated using the same loads as used
In calculating the overturning moment.
3. Additions. Every addition to an existing building or
structure shall be designed and constructed to resist and
withstand the forces provided for in this Section. and In any
can where an existing building or structure is Increased in
height all portions thereof affected by such increased height
shall be reconstructed to resist and withstand the forces
provided for in this Section.
4. Alterations. No existing building or structure shall be
altered or reconstructed in such a manner that the resistance
336
Islas
JIM and =141 UNIFORIII DIMING CODE
ral to the ford Provided for in thin Section will be less than
409 that before such alteration or reconstruction was made; pr,
d d) vided, however, that this provision shall not apply to ncn-
ttiioansngwhhiichltiorm and shall area Made in ao mannerpply �satisfactoryother r totEtim
Building Department.
5• BuI11111189 separations. All Portions of buildings and
structures shall be designed and constructed to act as an
Integral in resisting lateral forces unless structurally sepa-
rated by a distance of at least one inch (1"), plus one-half
Inch (%") for each ten feet (109 of height above twenty
feet (201).
The details of sliding fragile joints shall be made satis-
factory to the Building Official.
(f) Intention or Interpretation of Lateral Force Pm-
vialmm These lateral force requirements are intended to
make buildings earthquake -resistive. The provisions of this
Section apply to the buildings as a unit and also to a)1 parts
thereof, including the structural frame or walls, floor and
roof systems, and other structural features.
The Provisions Incorporated in this Section are general
and, in specific cases, may be interpreted or added to as to
detail by rulings of the Building Official in order that the
Intent shall be fulfilled.
CHAPTER 25
TERMITE PROVISIONS
no Refer to Sec, 2516. The following precautions are recom-
Mons mended for territories where foundation timber is subject to
special hazard of decay and termite damage:
1. Before any new building Is erected all stumps and roots
shall be removed from the soil to a depth of at least twelve
inches (121) below the surface of the ground in the area in
be occupied by the building.
2. All wood members used to support permanently a load
Of any kind, In buildings over four hundred square feet (400
sq. ft.) in area, shall be of the grade and kind of lumber
specified in Section 2805 when any part of such member is
Placed within eighteen inches (181) of any earth, either
natural ground or earth fill. Minimum clearance under gird-
ers shall be twelve inches (12").
3. Wood Posts or columns shall not extend through or be
Places directly on concrete floors. They shall be supported
on concrete footings extending at least two inches (2")
above the finished floor or may be placed on a corrosion -
resisting metal plate at least one -sixteenth inch (1/36")
thick and not smaller than the base of the post or column.
Such Plate may be flush with the concrete floor.
4. When timbers extend into a masonry wall at a point
below the level of the ground outside of the wall, metal wall
3"
4881 VNIFOItI[.]RUUMING CODE
CHAPTER a
1LEb8iOMATION SYSTEM,
systalas t
Rates to Chapter 48- Where it is desired to regulate the
Installation or alteration of refrigeration systems, the fol-
lowing provisions aro recommended for inclusion In the Code:
Sea ME, It Shall be unlawful for any person, firm, ar
corporation to install or alter or cause to be'installed
altered, any system or refrigeration, unless such system is
an approved type and is installed in accordance with the
PrOViRicing set forth in U.B.C. Standard No. 48-1-58.
B -P Sec. 499L
tions of this
all tion Mems hereafter innsstpalled and l topaltera.
tins of and additions to such existing systems,
f;
V
in
y
1868 EDITION station 5161
CHAPTER 51—SEAT-PRODUMG
APPLIANCES
See. 6181. (a) General. Heat -producing appliances other
than electrical shall conform to the requirements of this japtsUstjon
Chapter. snd
(b) Approvals. Each heat-producingrnlmaw
appliance and ac- IPei'lo
cessory shall be of a type complying with applicable na-
tionally recognized standards as determined by an approved
testing agency.
Where no such standards exist, approval of the Building
Official shall be obtained before the appliance or accessory
is installed.
(c) Type of Fuel. Each appliance shall be designed for
use with the type of fuel to which it will be connected. No
appliance shall be converted from the fuel specified on the
rating plate for use with a different fuel without consulting
the manufacturer for complete Instructions and securing
reapproval from the Building Official,
(d) Insta➢stion. The installation of heat -producing ap-
pliances covered by this Chapter shall conform to the condi-
tions of approval as specified in the manufacturer's instruc-
tions pertaining to safety and to the requirements of this
Chapter. The installer shall leave the manufacturer's in-
structions attached to the appliance for the benefit of the
Building Official.
Appliances Installed in garages or other areas where they
may be subjected to mechanical damage shall be suitably
guarded against such damage by being installed behind pro-
tective barriers or by being elevated or located out of the
normal path of a vehicle using such garage.
(e) Fuel Connections. Requirements shall be as follows:
1. All gas and liquid fuel -burning heat -producing appli-
ances shall be rigidly connected to the fuel piping outlet
with standard I.P.S. (iron pipe size) pipe, except as here-
inafter provided.
2. Before any additional fuel connections may be made to
existing fuel supply lines, pipe sizes shall be verified through
the proper administrative authorities, If such piping is
found to be inadequate, separate or adequate fuel lines shall
be installed from the source to the heating appliance.
3. Type K semi-rigid seamless copper tubing may be used
to connect any oil -burning appliance to the source of fuel
supply. The maximum length of such tubing shall be three
feet (T) and it shall be of an approved type. The capacity
of such tubing shall be that required by the appliance. Such
tubing shall not be concealed in, or pass through, any wall,
floor, or partition.
4. Gas appliances burning not more than 100,000 B.t.u.'s
per hour may be connected with semi-rigid seamless metal
tubing connectors complying with the following require-
ments:
$39
Such a= "hell UNMRM JIMMING CODE
U.= 51.1-58 comply with UAC- Standard No.
MAd contain no, more than 75 par cent copier.
pwbnmaw* it *"hall have an over- length of not to exceed three feet
.
(31), except cooking range connectors, which
may be not
more than six feet (6,) In jar,
It $W not depend on separate ferrules, washers, gasket,,
I other detachable parts for gas -tightness.
No Portion Of such tubing shall extend through, or be con-
cealed in, any wail, partition, floor, or ceiling.
It Man be not left than two inches (2') from, masonry
or concrete, Or six inches (6") from earth.
It shall at no time have a nominal diameter less than that
of the inlet connection to the appliance as provided by the
manufacturer of the appliance, except that gas appliances
burning not more 000 B-t-U.'Ij per hour may be con-
nected with app metal tubing connectors having a
nominal diameter of three-eighths inch and an over-
all length not to exceed eighteen inches
5. A readily accessible approved type shutoff cock stall
be Installed in the fuel Piping Outside Of each appliance and
ahead of the union connection thereto, In addition to any
valve On the appliance. Such shutoff cock shall be of the
same size as the fuel supply line to the appliance and have
a fuel Passageway equivalent in area to the a
Inliance tub -
g connector. pp
Such shutoff cock shall be within three feet (31) of the
appliance, except for range connector.
EXCEMON: Shutoff valves may be accessibly located
inside or under appliances when such appliance can be re-
moved without removal of the gas Shutoff valve.
b16' All electrical connections and wiring shall be made
accordance with the electrical code. This shall not apply
to enclosed wiring which Is an integral Part of any approved
electrically controlled device. Gas piping shall not be used
for an electrical ground or in lieu of wiring.
(f) Cl-raum& Clearances Of heat -Producing appliances
from combustible material shall be an specified In this
Chapter or as set forth In Table No. 51-A.
Fndk-
AirSUOPAY
Sec. 5102- (a) Air supply for Combustion. All fuel -
for b unaing appliances shall be assured a sufficient supply of
fresh air for Proper fuel combustion and ventilation of the
Csissimstim appliance enclosure.
(b) Space. Provisions shall be made to supply freshair
to the space in which fuel -burning appliances are located if
the volume In cubic feet Of this space is less than:
Of L One -twentieth Of the maximum rated Input in B.t.u.'s
all gas -burning appliances in such space.
2. One-tenth Of the maximum rated Input In B.t.u.'s of
all appliances burning solid and liquid fuel in such space.
3"
1058 EDITION
Table No. 51-A
M
z 0
Q
P4
one
i '�'
� �`oyal
,o w w w w N I I
z
M
was
F
tea:
.0
z
09-
P
V4 E
0
E�
O
Z 5'11 �R
M
U.B,C, STANDARD 26-1548 UNUPORM; BUUMIN(i CODE
by Sec. 26.1510. (a) General Usaltations. Flat slab construc-
tion may be designed by the empirical provisions of this Sec.
-method tion when they conform to all of the limitations on continuity
and dimensions given herein.
The construction shall consist of at least three continuous
panels in each direction.
The ratio of length to width of panels shall not exceed 1,33.
The grid pattern shall consist of approximately rectangular
panels. The successive span lengths in each direction shall
differ by not more than 20 per cent of the longer span. With-
in these limitations, columns may be offset a maximum of
10 per cent of the span, in direction of the offset, from either
axis between centerlines of successive columns.
The calculated lateral force moments from wind or earth-
quake may be combined with the critical moments as de-
termined by the empirical method, and the lateral force
moments shall be distributed between the column and middle
strips in the same proportions as specified for the negative
moments in the strips for structures not exceeding one
hundred and twenty -five -feet (1251) high with maximum
story height not exceeding twelve feet six Inches (12'6").
(b) Columns. The minimum dimension of any column
shall be ten inches (10"). For columns or other supports of
a flat slab, the required minimum average moment of inertia,
fr, of the gross concrete section of the columns above and
below the slab shall be determined from the following form-
ula. and If there shall
no column above the slab, one theatinches
of the column
below shall be twice that given by the formula with a mini-
mum of one thousand inches (1,000"),
t'H
f=............................
......._...................- .................(7)
Wn
0.5 + —
where t need not be taken greater than i, or t, as determined
in Section 26.1510, H is the average story height of the
columns above and below the slab, and Wf is the greater
value of any two adjacent spans under consideration.
Columns supporting flat slabs designed by the empirical
method shall be proportioned for the bending moments de-
vekiped by unequally loaded panels, or uneven spacing of
columns. Such bending moment shall be the maximum value
derived from
1
—
r
G and L. being length of the adjacent spans (L, = 0 when
considering an exterior column) and f is 30 for exterior and
40 for interior columns.
This moment shall be divided between the columns immedi-
ately above and below the floor or roof line under consider-
ation in direct proportion to their stiffness and shall be ap-
342
VOL. M-1856 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 26-15-66
piled without further reduction to the critical sections -of the Design
Ruspirical
columns. Method
(c) Determination of "c" (Effective Support Size). Where (ConVd.)
column capitals are used, the value of c shall be taken as the
diameter of the cone described in Section 26.1505 measured at
the bottom of the slab or drop panel.
Where a column is without a concrete capital, the dimen-
sion r shall be taken as that of the column in the direction
considered.
Brackets capable of transmitting the negative bending
and the shear in the column strips to the columns without
excessive unit stress may be substituted for column capitals
at exterior columns. The value of c for the span where a
bracket is used shall be taken as twice the distance from the
center of the column to a point where the bracket is one and
one-half inches (1%") thick, but not more than the thickness
of the column plus twice the depth of the bracket.
Where a reinforced concrete beam frames into a column
without capital or bracket on the same side with the beam,
for computing bending for strips parallel to the beam, the
value of c for the span considered may be taken as the width
of the column plus twice the projection of the beam above
or below the slab or drop panel.
The average of the values of c at the two supports at the
ends of a column strip shall be used to evaluate the slab
thickness t, or r, as prescribed in Section 26.1510.
(d) Slab Thickness. The slab thickness, span L being the
longest side of the panel, shall be at least (in the formulas
under Subsection (d) of this Section, t, and r, are in inches
and L and c are in feet):
L/36 for slab without drop panels conforming with Section
26.1510, or where a drop panel is omitted at any corner
of the panel, but not less than five inches (5") nor t, as
given below.
L/40 for slabs with drop panels conforming to Section
26.1510 at all supports, but not less than four inches
(4") nor /, as given below.
The total thickness, t„ in inches, of slabs without drop
panels, or through the drop panel if any, shall be at least
2c u'
t, = 0.028L 1 — + 1?$ ................__.(8}
3L f v f,'/2000
The total thickness, t,, in inches, of slabs with drop panels.
at points beyond the drop panel shall be at least
2, u'
t, = 0.024L 1 — — \! ---- -)- 1 _........_............(9i
3L J " f,'/2000
Where the exterior supports provide only negligible re-
straint to the slab, the value of t, and t, for the exterior panel
shall be increased by at least 15 per cent.
343
U.B.C. STANDARD 36.1$.88 UNUOM BUILDING CODE
a,�
,i
<I
Sal
r
IM
w
' a� .Q}mic,
V I
him iuid�m!o d m U
d m
U
d m
U
>a
k
VOL. 11
ON U.B.C. STANDARD 28-18-58
K�a I { m1U
k0.n (dlm 1 u d miU id lm �c:ld ica'u
i l l
I -i I iw
app _ M
� I
w T.Eww^�X`°x ii lii a
1�
sas
a,�
,i
Sal
k0.n (dlm 1 u d miU id lm �c:ld ica'u
i l l
I -i I iw
app _ M
� I
w T.Eww^�X`°x ii lii a
1�
sas
I'JLC. STANDARD 26-13-M UNWORM BUILDING} CODE
346
v.
In—ION EDITION U.B.G. STANDARD 26-15-58
347
- -
---------
my
I
A l'—k c
3"
� a
_ �
i N
a
� y
t
346
v.
In—ION EDITION U.B.G. STANDARD 26-15-58
347
U.B.C..%TA-%DARD S6-ls-gli UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
s e s Drop Panels. The maximum total thickness at the
Design by
drop panel used in computing the negative steel area for Via
Method
column strip shall be L5i
The side or diameter of the drop panel shall be at least 0.33
tomes the span in the parallel direction.
The minimum thickness of slabs where drop panels at wall
colunms are omitted shall equal (t, -I- 1,)/2 provided the value
a£ ; used in the computations complies with Section 26.1510.
s f i Bending Moment Coefficients. The numerical sum of
the positive and negative bending moments in the direction of
either side of a rectangular panel shall be assumed as not less
than
2,
0.09 11 -LF 1 — ........._ ............. (10)
3I, 3
in which F --:: 1.15 — <'L but not less than 1.
Unless otherwise provided, the bending moments at the
critical sections of the column and middle strips shall be at
least these given in Table No. 26-15-13.
The average of the values of r at the two supports at the
ends of a column strip shall be used to evaluate M,, in deter-
mining bending in the strip. The average of the values of Mm
as determined for the two parallel half column strips in a
panel, shall be used in determining bending in the middle
strip.
Bending in the middle strips parallel to a discontinuous
edge shall be assumed the same as in an interior panel.
For design purposes, any of the moments determined from
Table No. 26-15-B may be varied by not more than 10 per
cent, but the numerical sum of the positive and negative mo-
ments in a panel shall be not less than the amount specified.
(g) Length of Reinforcement. In addition to the require-
ments of Section 26.1508, reinforcement shall have the mini-
mum lengths given in Tables No. 26-15-C and No. 26-15-13.
Where adjacent spans are unequal, the extension of negative
reinforcement on each side of the column centerline as pre-
scribed in Table No. 26-15-C shall be based on the require-
ments of the longer span.
)h) Openings in Flat Slabs. Openings of any size may be
provided in a fiat slab in the area common to two inter-
secting middle strips provided the total positive and negative
steel areas required in Section 26.1510 are maintained.
In the area common to two column strips, not more than
one-eighth of the width of strip in any span shall be inter-
rupted by openings. The equivalent of all bars interrupted
shall be provided by extra steel on all sides of the openings.
The shearing unit stresses given in Section 26.1508 shall not
be exceeded.
In any area common to one column strip and one middle
i
strip, openings may interrupt one-fourth of the bars in either
strip. The equivalent of the bars so interrupted shall be pro-
vided by extra steel on all sides of the opening.
1:
Any opening larger than described above shall be analyzed
t
by accepted engineering principles and shall be completely
framed as required to carry the loads to the columns.
848
cot. M-1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 27-1-M
u'NMRM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 27-1-M
Steel for Bridges and Baiidings
Bowl on Tentativs Speelseations A7 -56T of
the American Societyfor Testlng Materials
See sections 2701 and 2708oMo Uniform Bundhtg Code,
1
pe
plates es and bars of structural quality for use in the constrcification covers carbon -steel ue off
construc-
tion of bridges and Wildfires and for general structural
purposes.
Sao. 4. (a) Unless otherwise specified, plates used as bear- glow"
ing plates for bridges shall be subjected to mechanical tests Plates
and shall conform to the tensile requirements of Section 7. and Anchor
Belts
(b) Unless otherwise specified, mechanical tests shall not
be, required for plates over one and one-half inches (lids°) in
thickness used as bearing plates in buildings and for general
structural purposes, subject to the requirement that they
shall be open hearth or electric furnace steel containing 0.20
to 0.33 per cent carbon by ladle analysis, that the chemical
composition shall conform to the requirements of Section 9,
and that a sufficient discard shall be made from each ingot to
secure sound plates.
(c) Unless otherwise specified, all plain and threaded bars
used for anchorage purposes shall be subjected to mechanical
tests and shall conform to the tensile requirements of See -
tion 7.
Sec. 6. tai The steel, except as may be specified in Process
Paragraph (b), shall be made by either or both of the fol-
lowing processes: open-hearth or electric -furnace.
(b) Steel for plates and shapes seven sixteenths inch
(7/16") and under in thickness, and bars (other than those
for rivets) seven -sixteenths inch (7/16") and under in thick-
ness or diameter, intended for use in those parts of struc-
tures which are not subject to dynamic loads, may be made
by the acid-bessemer process, unless otherwise specified.
Acid-bessemer steel shall not be used for bridges.
Sec. 6. (a) When subjected to the ladle and check anal- Chemical
yses, respectively, the steel shall conform to the requirements Composition
as to chemical composition prescribed in Table II, except
as specified in Paragraph (c) of this section.
(b) For bessemer steel a carbon and manganese deter-
mination shall be made of each blow, and a copper de-
termination when copper steel is specified; and determin-
ation of phosphorus and sulfur shall be made at intervals
not greater than each ten blows and the next previous
determination may be reported.
(c) Check analysis is not required for bar -size shapes or
flat bars one-half inch (ih") and under in thickness.
349
Vim STANDARD 37-1-M U.B.C. STANDARD 26-15.58
(d) When tension tests are waived in accordance with Sec-
tion
I (b) chemistry consistent with the mechanical proper -
it" must be applied.
Tensile Sm 7. (a) The material as represented by the test spec!.
projecriles mens, extent as specified in Section 4 and Paragraph (b)
(C wd.) of this section, shall conform to the requirements as to tensile
properties prescribed in Table III.
(b) Shapes less than one square inch (I sq. in.) in cross.
Section, and bars, other than flats, less than one-half inch
TABLE II—CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
TABLE III—TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
Ladle
Analysis
Phosphorous, max., per cent:
Tensile strength. Pat..........._ .............
60.000 to 72,000•
hearth or electric -
OPen-rnace:
33,000
Elongation In 3 in., min, per cent
Acid__..... ........ .... ....................
0.06
4.478
Basic . .......................... ._........
0.04
0.06
Aeld-bass caner ... .»»......... .........
0.11
4.138
Suitor, max., per rent (open-
_.
I;y
hearth or electric -furnace}
0.06
0.063
Copper, when -, er steel la
_.
3
apeelfied, min.Per cent.._
0.20
0.18
TABLE III—TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
- The upper limit of 72,000 psi. may be increased by 3,000 psi. for
material over 1% In. in thickness.
° Sec Se U— 7rci and (d)
see Section
TABLE IV—REND TEST REQUIREMENTS
Plates.. Shapes
Ratio of Bend
and Bars
Tensile strength. Pat..........._ .............
60.000 to 72,000•
Yield point, min., psi, ......_......... ......-..._...._...
33,000
Elongation In 3 in., min, per cent
Elongation in 2 in., min., per Genf ....�....�.�)
>2�
- The upper limit of 72,000 psi. may be increased by 3,000 psi. for
material over 1% In. in thickness.
° Sec Se U— 7rci and (d)
see Section
TABLE IV—REND TEST REQUIREMENTS
350
VOL, III -1888 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 27-2-M
(%-) in thickness or diameter need not be subjected to ten- Tensile
sion tests by the manufacturer. Properties
(c) For material under five -sixteenths inch (5/18") in (Coat'd.)
thickness or diameter, a deduction from the percentage of
elongation in eight Inches (8") specified in Table III of 1.25
per cent shall be made for each decrease of one thirty-second
inch (1/32") of the Specified thickness or diameter below
five -sixteenths inch (5/10").
(d) For material over three-quarters inch (341) in thick-
ness or diameter, a deduction from the percentage of
elongation In eight inches (8") specified in Table III of 0.50
per cent shall be made for each increase of one-eighth inch
(1/8") of the specified thickness or diameter above three-
quarters inch (3/41). This deduction shall not exceed 3
per cent.
(e) For material Aver three and one-half inches (3%1)
in thickness or diameter, a deduction from the percentage of
elongation in two inches (2") specified in Table III of 0.50
per cent shall be made for each increase of one-half inch
(1k") of the specified thickness or diameter above three and
one-half inches (W). This deduction shall not exceed 3
Der cent.
Sec. & The bend test specimen shall stand being bent cold Heading
through 180 deg, without cracking on the outside of the Properties
bent Portion to an inside diameter which shall have the
relation to the thickness of the specimen as prescribed in
Table IV
Sec. 0. Two tension and two bend tests shall be made Number of
from each heat or blow, unless the finished material from Tata
a heat or blow is less than 30 tons when one tension teat
and ane bend test will be sufficient. If, however, material
from one heat or blow differs three-eighths inch (%") or
more in thickness, one tension test and one bend test shall
be made from both the thickest and the thinnest material
rolled, regardless of the weight represented.
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 27-2-38
Heavy and Light (huge Structural Quality Flat
Hot -Rolle$ Carbon -Steel Sheets
Based on Tentative Speelaesdiens A245 -32T,
AUS -52T and A303 -52T M the American Society
for Testing Materials
See Sections 2701, 2715, 8104, of the Uniform Building Code,
Volume I
Part I
Heavy Gauge Structural Quality Plat Hot -Rotted Carbon -
Steel Sheets (A245 -52T)
Sec- L These Specifications cover flat hot -rolled carbon- So 0
Sheets intended for structural purposes where mechan-
at tat values are required.
351
Ratio of Bend
Thiekness of Sfaterial, in.,
Diameter to
SpPecimens for
Ptates Shapes
ani Bars
�. and ands .. _..._ _....
.....
Over " to 1 red ....... .... ._..
...... _..
1
Over 1 to Vi. mri .. .. ......
_.
I;y
Orer P,. to 2 incl .. .,,..,
214
Ov— 2 in. . .. -. ..
_.
3
350
VOL, III -1888 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 27-2-M
(%-) in thickness or diameter need not be subjected to ten- Tensile
sion tests by the manufacturer. Properties
(c) For material under five -sixteenths inch (5/18") in (Coat'd.)
thickness or diameter, a deduction from the percentage of
elongation in eight Inches (8") specified in Table III of 1.25
per cent shall be made for each decrease of one thirty-second
inch (1/32") of the Specified thickness or diameter below
five -sixteenths inch (5/10").
(d) For material over three-quarters inch (341) in thick-
ness or diameter, a deduction from the percentage of
elongation In eight inches (8") specified in Table III of 0.50
per cent shall be made for each increase of one-eighth inch
(1/8") of the specified thickness or diameter above three-
quarters inch (3/41). This deduction shall not exceed 3
per cent.
(e) For material Aver three and one-half inches (3%1)
in thickness or diameter, a deduction from the percentage of
elongation in two inches (2") specified in Table III of 0.50
per cent shall be made for each increase of one-half inch
(1k") of the specified thickness or diameter above three and
one-half inches (W). This deduction shall not exceed 3
Der cent.
Sec. & The bend test specimen shall stand being bent cold Heading
through 180 deg, without cracking on the outside of the Properties
bent Portion to an inside diameter which shall have the
relation to the thickness of the specimen as prescribed in
Table IV
Sec. 0. Two tension and two bend tests shall be made Number of
from each heat or blow, unless the finished material from Tata
a heat or blow is less than 30 tons when one tension teat
and ane bend test will be sufficient. If, however, material
from one heat or blow differs three-eighths inch (%") or
more in thickness, one tension test and one bend test shall
be made from both the thickest and the thinnest material
rolled, regardless of the weight represented.
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 27-2-38
Heavy and Light (huge Structural Quality Flat
Hot -Rolle$ Carbon -Steel Sheets
Based on Tentative Speelaesdiens A245 -32T,
AUS -52T and A303 -52T M the American Society
for Testing Materials
See Sections 2701, 2715, 8104, of the Uniform Building Code,
Volume I
Part I
Heavy Gauge Structural Quality Plat Hot -Rotted Carbon -
Steel Sheets (A245 -52T)
Sec- L These Specifications cover flat hot -rolled carbon- So 0
Sheets intended for structural purposes where mechan-
at tat values are required.
351
U.IM STANDARD 274-M UNIFORM nunmING CODE
Flat -ro11ed carbon steel may be slot welded In the
Not -r removedccondition,
obut
for
o best results the oxide or scale
ah
see, & The steel shall be made by any of the following
processes: open-hearth, electric -furnace, or acid-bessemer.
� The steel ical composition: l shallcoonfor to the following require-
ments as to OtxmHeanh
and Electric Acid -
furnace 8eaeem!!
Carbon, maximum, per cent _.. 0.25+ 010
Phosphorus, maximum. per cent 0.04 o.11
sulfur. maximum, per cent ....__ 0.05 0.05
CoRper, when topper steel is
specified, minimum, per cent_.. 0.20 0.10
-As carbon increases shore 0.15 par cent spot welding
becomes iatreasmafy difficult,
Sec, 5. For all grades, an analysis of each heat of open-
hearth or electric -furnace steel shall be made by the manu-
facturer to determine the percentages of carbon, manganese,
phosphorus, and sulfur; also copper when copper steel is
specified. A carbon determination and a copper determina-
tion, when copper steel is specified, shall be made of each
blow of bessemer steel. The phosphorus and sulfur deter-
minations for bessemer steel can be made at intervals of
each 10 blows and the next previous determinations for
phosphorus and sulfur can be reported. This analysis shall
be made from a test ingot taken during the pouring of the
heat or blow. The chemical composition thus determined
shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 4.
Sec- & For grades A, B, and C, an analysis may be made
by the purchaser from finished material representing each
heat or blow or each lot of 10 tons. The carbon, phos-
phorus and sulfur content thus determined shall not exceed
that specified in Section 4 by more than 25 per cent When
copper steel is specified, 'the copper content thus deter-
mined shall not be less than 0.18 per cent.
Sec. 7. (a) The material shall conform to the require-
ments as to tensile properties prescribed in Table L
(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of
the beam or halt in the gauge of the testing machine, or by
the divider method.
See. S. Commercial Grade. The bend test specimen shall
stand being bent at room temperature, flat on itself in any
direction without cracking on the outside of the bent por-
tion
Grade A. The bend test specimen shall stand being bent
at room temperature, flat on itself in any direction without
cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
Grade IL The bend test specimen shall stand being bent
at room temperature, in any direction through 180 degrees
852
)'01.. 111--1838 EDITION C.B.('. STANDARD 21.1-58
TABLE I--TENSME REQUIREMENTS Tensile
Y
roperties
(Cont'd. )
TABLE 1I -PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS OF SHEETS
FROM ORDERED GAUGE WEIGHT
I,PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS^ FROM
SPECIFIED GAUGE WEICIIT FOR
ALL E.
SPECIFIED GAiiGE ! OVERhOR E DER, GAt'Ga^ PERI AND
WEIGHT (pounds per
square foot)
! 2U 20 to 3 1 3 co 1 i Under
Iotas
time., ( ton, ° 1 t, n
orer'r Joel. 1 lm'..
1,875 and heavier... ...j 3.5 j 5 ' 7.5 10
-For sheets 72 inches or over In width, 2 ehell tis added to the
pera entd ges -hiiwn in the tat"'.
The tonnage ardared for stdpnent to one pplace at one hme
i termines tha praducer'e reeponsibility for weight varlahan far
dict tonnage. Any partial shipment against that tannage should not
vary more then the percentage gareu In the ruble cur Ii,, :user
amount.
around one thickness of the material, without cracking on
the outside of the bent portion,
Grade C. The Beni .est specimen shall stand being bent
at room temperature in any direction through 180 degrees
around one and one-half thicknesses of the material, with -
Ill cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
'.Sec. 9. tai Test specimens shall be pr--pare,l
terial in the finished nxadiCon. Te'wi
Ill Tension test specimens shall be to - tr ,.,nkit+ i Till!,; SSl,#,imena
c 1 the sheet as roiled and shall be of the full thickness
.rt 353
A
-
mermol t Grade Gra 3e 3 Grade
Grade
Crade +� A ( R C
j 48 000 52 000'.. 55 000
Tensile strength, min, psi
Yield point, min„ psi..........
Subject i 25 000 30 000 33 000
to bend '..
Elongation in 2 inches,
test
min., per cent:
only
0.2299 to 0.1450 inches,
Inc]., in thic:kness.......
( � 2Z0 i 26.) i 23.5
0.1449 to 0.0890 inches,
..
incl., in thickness..._._
24,5 23.0 21.5
0.0889 to 0.0620 inches,
incl., in thickness.__..
23.0 I 21.5 20.0
0.0609 to 0.0449 inches,
incl., in thickness.......
21.0 20.0 18.5
Elongation in 8 inches,
min., per cent:
0.2299 to 0.1450 inches,
incl., in thickness...._
200 18.5 175
0.1449 to 0.0890 inches,
incl., in thickness....._
18,0 17.0, 15.5
roperties
(Cont'd. )
TABLE 1I -PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS OF SHEETS
FROM ORDERED GAUGE WEIGHT
I,PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS^ FROM
SPECIFIED GAUGE WEICIIT FOR
ALL E.
SPECIFIED GAiiGE ! OVERhOR E DER, GAt'Ga^ PERI AND
WEIGHT (pounds per
square foot)
! 2U 20 to 3 1 3 co 1 i Under
Iotas
time., ( ton, ° 1 t, n
orer'r Joel. 1 lm'..
1,875 and heavier... ...j 3.5 j 5 ' 7.5 10
-For sheets 72 inches or over In width, 2 ehell tis added to the
pera entd ges -hiiwn in the tat"'.
The tonnage ardared for stdpnent to one pplace at one hme
i termines tha praducer'e reeponsibility for weight varlahan far
dict tonnage. Any partial shipment against that tannage should not
vary more then the percentage gareu In the ruble cur Ii,, :user
amount.
around one thickness of the material, without cracking on
the outside of the bent portion,
Grade C. The Beni .est specimen shall stand being bent
at room temperature in any direction through 180 degrees
around one and one-half thicknesses of the material, with -
Ill cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
'.Sec. 9. tai Test specimens shall be pr--pare,l
terial in the finished nxadiCon. Te'wi
Ill Tension test specimens shall be to - tr ,.,nkit+ i Till!,; SSl,#,imena
c 1 the sheet as roiled and shall be of the full thickness
.rt 353
A
U.B.C. STANDARD 27-2-58 UNI1rORM BUILDING CG1fi: VOL. II[ -1958 EDITION U.A.C. STANDARD 27-2-58
-Number
Of Tests
,.- a6akdijr '3 i1De8dawa6Mps --t*A b:*
r
s ( w+ROD'rrRR4ri• i »'•RbOR'3R�' �' w.RRRi'MRR>S"
lSaAiAr) Raddad5'ta3• E
m d"Mfn.
Y+I6iafma plAfakia{
fYadr•6nrdaitFivrfiwEnst aFAm4as+S�riian ffifrtdla
�awMwg anSiaswDe��andTs.nyD6lmsrwasadws.fpaslsu.
Mg. 1. Standard Rectangular Tension Test
SperhOM with Tw0-loch Gauge Length
Porollel Seaton_ About
"noi less thou 9''
00/�` 3-1
Paroffel s MO 0"
------------
.fl 812001"Gogetength ^T7o3*
for Mecsurvng Etongotion Rodi.$
offer Fracture
APPrai,m Wy 2•
Fig. 2. Standard Rectangular Tension Test
Specimen a9th Eight -Inch Gauge 14pngth
of the material. Test specimens may be machined to the
form and dimensions shown in Fig. 1 or Fig. 2 as specified,
where applicable.
tci The edges of the bend test specimen shall be practi-
cally free of burrs: filing or machining to remove burrs being
permissible.
See. 10. tai Two tension tests of grades A, B, and C, and
two bend tests of all grades shall be taken from each heat or
blow or from each lot of 50 tons. When the amount of
finished material from a heat or blow or lot is less than 30
tons, only one tension test, if required, and one bend test
shall be made. When material rolled from one heat or blow
differs 0.050 inches or more In thickness one tension test,
if required, and one bend test shall be made from both the
thickest and thinnest material rolled regardless of the weight
represented.
(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or
develops flaws it may be discarded and another specimen
substituted.
(c) Cracks developing at the edge of the specimen or
coarse grain developing at the line of bend shall be dis-
regarded.
(d) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test
specimen is less than that specified in Table I and any part
of the fracture is outside the middle half of the gage length,
as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen
351
before testing, the test shall be discarded and a retest shall
be allowed.
(e) If one test fails, two more tests shall be run from the
same lot, in which case both tests shall conform to the re-
quirements prescribed in these specifications, otherwise the
lot under test shall stand rejected.
Sec. 12. No particular identification shall be required in
M M
connection with the material of the commercial grade. Ma-
g
terial of grades A. B. and C shall be identified by having the
grade designation and the heat number of open-hearth or
electric -furnace steel or the blow or lot number of bessemer
steel legibly stenciled on the top sheet of each lift or shown
on a tag attached to each coil or shipping unit.
Sec. 13. The surface of cut lengths shall be free from in-
Pla1W
jurious imperfections consistent with the surface finish
specified.
Part II
Light Gauge Structural Quality Flat Hot -Roiled Carbon -
Steel Sheets (A240 -52T1
Sea & The steel shall be made by either of the follow-
proms
ing processes: open-hearth, electric -furnace, or acid-bessemer.
Sec. 4. The steel shall conform to the following require-
Chandeal
menta as to chemical composition:
Composition
On- Hearth
and F.ircrno Acid
Furnace Bessemer
Carbon, maximum, per cent....... 0.25 0.10
Phosphorus, maximum, per cent. 0.06 0.11
Sulfur, maximum, per cent_.. 0.05 0.06
Copper, when copper steel Is
specffted, minimum, per cent_ 0.70 0.20
See. 5. For all grades, an analysis of each beat of open- Ladte
hearth or electric -furnace steel shall ne made by the manu- Analysts
facturer to determine the percentages of carbon, manganese,
phosphorus, and sulfur; also copper when copper ateel is
specified. A carbon determination and a copper determina-
tion, when copper steel is specified, shall be made of each blow
of bessemer steel. The phosphorus and sulfur determinations
for bessemer steel can be made at intervals of each 10
blown and the next previous determinations for phos-
phorus and sulfur can be reported. This analysis shall be
made from a test ingot taken during the pouring of the
heat or blow. The chemical composition thus determined shall
conform to the requirements specified ih Section 4.
Seo. & For grades A, B and C, an analysis may be made Cbeek
by thepurchaser from finished material representing each Analysis
heat or blow or each lot of 10 tons. The carbon, phosphorus
and sulfur content thus determined shall not exceed that
rein Section 4 by more than 25 per cent. When copper
eel is specified, the copper content thus determined shall
t be less than 0.18 per cent.
&k#
IS.R.C. ST.V.:�iB.IRD 2T-o..;iK UNUPORgi BUILDING CODE
TABLE I--TEtitlILE REQUIREMENTS
C", i
rceMW
::rade
a
)
Grady
B
Grade
C
Grade !
specified. A carbon determination and a copper determina-
tion, when copper steel is specified, shall be
made of each blow
Of bessemer steel The phosphorus and sulfur determinations
for beseemer steel can be made at intervals of each 10 blows
Tensile strength i
45 400
511000
82 000
minimum Pst S
`
tine pouring of the heat or blow,
Thechemical composition thus determined sho)1 conform to
the requirements s;;erifie,) in Section 3,
Ytetd point 1 S tb, t
See. 5. For grades A, B, and C. an analysis only be made
by the pnrcltaser from material aterial representing each
Cheek
Analysis
heat or blow or each lot of 10 tons. The carbon, phosphorus
minimum psi.- to bend
25000
30000
33000
Elongation in test
shall not he less than 0.18 per cent.
See. 6. (a) The material shall conform to the requirements
&a to tensile properties prescribed in Table 1.
inches, ram. j only
(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of
Properties
:he beam or halt in the gage of the testing machine, or by
mum, per cent..;It
25
23
18'
decreasing t per cent for each
number below No. IS gauge,
per rat acr w gauge,.
See, 7. tai The utateAlid shall conforn, to the requir—
ments as to tensile properties prescribed in Table I.
(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of
the beam or halt in the gauge of the testing machine, or by
the divider method.
:sec, 8. Conautercial Grade: The bend test specimen shall
stand being bent at room temperature, flat on itself in any
direction withbut cracking on the outside of the bent por-
tion.
tirade A: Tile bend tr_ t si+seises shall stand being bens:
at room temperature, flat on itself in any direction, with-
out cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
Grade B: The bend test specimen shall stand being bent
at room temperature, in any direction tbrough 180 degrees
around one thickness of the material, without cracking on
the outside of the bent portion.
Grade C: The hand test speeira,n shall stand being bent
at room temperature in any direction through 180 degrees
around one and one-half thicknesses of the material, without
cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
Sec. 12. 1d,i }articular identiheatic;t shall be required ill
connection with the material of the cv,,craerciat grade. Ala-
teral of grades A, B, and C shall tie identified by having
the grade designation and tae heat number of open-hearth
or electric- furnace steel or the blow or lot number of besse-
mer steel icg:biy stenciled on the tr,p sheet of each lift, or
sh.rv<-n on a tag attached to each coil or Shipping unit
!tee. 13- 'phi surface of cut lengths shall be free from in-
jurious with the sarfaee finish
specified.
Part III
Strurturai (tuaiity Hot -Rolled Corium -Steel Strips
iAS03-52T)
ilei. 1. Te -c sp: fie. on, t Fit diel rash r, -steel
strip, Wended f:r s r ;.t,:ral 1 .rlscs whrie mechanical
'..tmdvalues are required.
a54
i
VOL. EIt--1A58 EDIT3ON G.R.C. STANDARD 27-2.58
Flat hot -rolled carbon steel allay be spot v:ehled in the
"hot -rolled" condition, but for best results the oxide or
scale should be remove@ before welding,
Sec. 2. The steel Shall be made by either of the following Process
processes: open-hearth, electric -furnace, or acid-bessemer.
Sec. S. The steel shall conform to the following require- Chemical
mems as to c• h plical composition- Composition
,Jnend[c,rd. 1c•d.
+nd F,lectric- ar=srm.�r
Carbon, max., per cent_ .. 0.25^ _ 0.10
Phosphorus, max., per cent 0.04 0.11
Sulfur, max., per cent..... _._ 0.05 006
Copper, when coppte steel is
specified, min.., per cent - 0.20 0.20
diAi�cule rx... _ ab„e off rmx ,n,..tm.
Sec. 4. For all graces, an analysis of each heat of open- Ladle
hearth
or electric-furrace steel shall be made by the manu-
facturer to dete-rcaine the
Analysis
percentages of carbon, his agnese,
phosphorus, and sulfur: also copper when copper steel is
specified. A carbon determination and a copper determina-
tion, when copper steel is specified, shall be
made of each blow
Of bessemer steel The phosphorus and sulfur determinations
for beseemer steel can be made at intervals of each 10 blows
and the next previous determinations for phosphorus and
sulfur can be reported. This analysis shall be made from a
test ingot taken during
tine pouring of the heat or blow,
Thechemical composition thus determined sho)1 conform to
the requirements s;;erifie,) in Section 3,
See. 5. For grades A, B, and C. an analysis only be made
by the pnrcltaser from material aterial representing each
Cheek
Analysis
heat or blow or each lot of 10 tons. The carbon, phosphorus
and sulfur content tins determined shall not exceed that
specified in Section 3 by liters than
25 per cent. When
copper steel is specified, the copper content thus determined
shall not he less than 0.18 per cent.
See. 6. (a) The material shall conform to the requirements
&a to tensile properties prescribed in Table 1.
Tenatts
(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of
Properties
:he beam or halt in the gage of the testing machine, or by
:he divider method.
Sec. 7. Commercial Grade.—The bend test specimen shall
stand being bent at room temperature, flat
Bristling
on itself in any
direction without cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
Properties
(trade A: The bendtest specimen shall stand being bent
1t:,room temperature, flat on itself in any direction without
eking on the outside, of the bent portion.
B: The bend test specimen shall stand being bent
temperature, in cn,y direction through 180 degrees
it
331,
I%WC. STANDARD 27-2-b8 VNEFORM. BtMMING CODE
TABLE L -TENSILE REQUuticMENTet
Gm rnde
Grade
C B e
are
Tensile strength,
min., psi..._..__.._..
48000
52000
55000
Yield point, min., Subject
psi ........................... to bend
25 000
30 000
33 000
Elongation in 2 in., test
(Fig. 1), min., per only
cent:
0.2299 to 0.1450 in.,
incl., in thickness
27.0
25.0
23.5
0.1449 to 0.0890 in.,
Incl., in thickness
24.5
23.0
21.5
0.0889 to 0.0810 in.,
incl., in thickness
23.0
21.5
20.0
0.0809 to 0.0430 in.,
incl., in thickness
21.0
20.0
18.5
0.0409 to 0.0255 in.,
incl., in thickness
19.0
18.0
17.0
Elongation in 8 in.,
(Fig. 2)•, min.,
per cent:
0.2299 to 0.1450 In.,
incl., in thickness ,
20.0
18.5
17.5
0.1449 to 0.0890 in"
incl., in thickness ( i
18.0
17.0
15.5
around one thickness of the material, without cracking on
the outside of the bent portion.
Grade C: The bend test specimen shall stand being bent
at room temperature in any direction through 180 degrees
around one and one-half thicknesses of the material, without
cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
Sac. 1L No particular identification shall be required in
cormectian with the material of the commercial grade.
iitateriai of grades A, A and C shall be identified by having
the heat number and grade designation marked on a tag
attached to each coil or each shipping unit.
See. 12. The surface of cut lengths shall be tree from in-
jurious imperfections consistent with the surface finish
specified.
Sec. 13. The inspector representing the purchaser shall
have free entry at all times while work on the contract of
the purchase is being performed, to all parts of the manu-
facturer's work that concern the manufacture of the material=t
ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is
being furnished in accordance with these specifications. All
I
III -1958 EDITION C.R.C. STANDARD 27.3-58
etion and tests (except check analysis) shall be made
to shipment at the manufacturer's works, and such
etion or sampling shall be made in conjunction with,
to the extent of, the producers regular inspection
I;-
NIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 27-3-58
Design of Light Gauge Steel Structural Members
Based on the American Iron and Steel Institute
Specification Manual (January, 1950)
See Sections 2701 and 2715 of the Uniform Building Code,
Volume I
GENERAL PROVISIONS
Sec. 27.301. This Standard shall apply to the design of Scope
structural members cold formed to shape from sheet or strip
steel less than three -sixteenths -inch G;Ill) thick and used for
load -carrying purposes in buildings.
See. 27.302. Except as otherwise provided herein, steel shall Material
conform to the following U.B.C. Standards.
Heavy Gauge Structural Quality Flat Hot -Rolled Carbon -
Steel Sheets, U.B.C. Standard 27-248
Light Gauge Structural Quality Flat Rolled Carbon -Steel
Sheets, U.B.C. Standard 27-2-58
Hot -Rolled Carbon -Steel Strip of Structural Quality,
U.B.C. Standard 27-2-58
The terms C, B, and A when used herein to designate grades
of steel refer to grades provided by the above -listed U.B.C.
Standard 27-2-58.
Steel of higher strength than is covered by the U.B.C.
Standard 27-2-58 may be used at the unit stresses hereinafter
specified for "other" grades of steel provided the design is
based upon the published minimum properties of such higher
strength steel as certified by the manufacturer's test reports.
It is the intent of this Standard to permit the use of special
high-strength steels of suitable properties for purposes com-
ing within the scope of this Standard, but not to permit the
use of carbon steels at unit stresses higher than those speci-
fied in this Standard for Grade C material unless the steel is
produced to and identified with a published Standard which
specifically establishes its qualifications and properties.
DESIGN PROCEDURE
See. 27.303. All computations for safe load, stress, deflee- Proredure
m and the like shall be in accordance with conventional
ethods of structural design except as otherwise specified
27.304. Where the following terms appear in this Definitions
Y they shall have the meaning herein indicated.
359
t_ X, STANDARD 27-3-.i8 UNIFORM BVILDIN(i (I)DE
Elfeethr
Sec, 27,30:. Where the flat width, w, of an element is re-
Ursign
:ince 1 for design purposes, the reduced design width, b, is
} Wth
termed the "effe=,tive width," or the "effective design width."
34.6
This "effeeGve design width" is determined in accordance
$2.6
with Sctions 27.311 and 27.315.
Fiat -\width
See. 27.31nt. The flat -width ratio, w/t, is the ratio of the
Rath)
flat width, w, exclusive of edge fillets, of a single flat element
to the thickness. t, of such element. In the case of sections
25.6
such as I-, T-. channel- and 2 -shaped sections, the width, w,
24.533.3
23.1
is the whhh of the flat projection of flange from web, exclu-
21.9
sive of fillets and of any stiffening lip that may be at the outer
20.0
edge of the flange In the case of multiple -web sections such
19.0
as hat-. C-, or box -shaped sections, the width, w, is the flat
width ,,t flange between adjacent wells, exclusive of fillets.
Nultipie- See. 27.307. A multiple -stiffened element is an element that
Miffem+d is stiffenef between webs. or between a web and an edge, by
Element means of intermediate stiffeners which are parallel to the
dir—tmn of stress and which conform to the requirements of
Ston 2;.312. A sub -element is the portion between adjacent
stiffeners or between web and intermediate stiffener or be-
tiveen rilge and intermediate stiffener.
Stiffened See. 2".308, The term "stiffened compression elements"
It ompres..ion shall mean flat compression elements ti,e., plane compression
Elements flanges of flexural members and plane webs and flanges of
compress.on mendierst of which both edges parallel to the
direction of stress are stiffened by connection to a stiffening
means ii.e., web, flange, stiffening lip, intermediate stiffener,
or the like, conforming to the requirements of Section 27,312.
Un,43ffrned Sec. 27.309. Anv flat element which is stiffened at only one
Compression edge parallel to tate direction of stress shall be considered an
Elwnenta "unstiffened" element.
Properties See. 27.310. Properties of sections (cross-sectional area.
of Sections moment of inertia, section modulus, radius of gyration, etc. i
shall be determined in accordance with conventional methods
of structural design. Properties shnll be based on the full
cross-section of the members (or net section where the use
of a net section is customary) except where the use of a
reduced cross-section, or "effective design width," is requirea
by the provisions of Sections 27.311 and 27.315 of this
Standard.
Prollertift of Sec. 27.311. (a) Effective Design Width, In computing
stllfened properties of sections of flexural members and in computrg
Cavprnsion values of "Q" (Section 27.322) for compression members, Ste
M flat width, w, of any stiffened compression element having a
flat -width ratio larger than (wit ,,,,, as hereinafter defir,i
shall be considered as being reduced for design purposes to sr,
effective design width. "b" or "b';' determined in accordA-
with the provisions of Section 27.311 (a) or (b), whicheve
applicable. and subject to the limitations of Section 2731'
,. where applicable. That portion of the total width wh, I, is
360
06L, In —1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 27-3-58
ered removed to arrive at the effective design width Properties of
,be located symmetrically about the center line of the Stiffened
t. (See Note, this Section.) Compris"lon
)" Elements Without Intermediate Stiffeners. The effec- Elements
.;,design widths of compression elements which are not (Courd.)
t to the provisions of this Section governing multiple -
ed elements shad be determined from the following
'ulas: (See Note, this Section.)
load determtnation:
Flanges are fully effective
(b = w) up to (w/t)., 3790/ ✓ if
(Table No. 27-3-A lists values of (w/t) m.)
For flanges with w/t larger than (w/On.
b 7590 1900
t= ✓ f 1
1w/t) ✓ If
For deflection determination: _
Flanges are fully effective up to (w/t),,,„ = 5160/1/ f
For flanges with w/t larger than (w/t),,.
b 10320 2580
Lf C 1 (w/t) ✓ t F
In the above,
w/t = Rat -width ratio
b = effective design width
f = actual unit stress in the compression element
computed on the basis of the effective design
width.
NOTE: Table No. 27-3-B shows effective design width for
a unit stress of 18,000 p.s.i. It is to be noted that where the
flat -width ratio exceeds tw/t) „m the properties of the sec-
tion must frequently be determined by successive approxi-
mations, since the unit stress and the effective design width
are interdependent.
TABLE NO. 27-3-A
Maximum WidthiThickness Ratios (wit)—, at Which
C mnression Elements are Fully Effective (6/t=wit)
48.9
66.6
42.4
67.7
37.9
51.6
34.6
47.1
$2.6
44.4
30.9
29.6
40.2
28.2
39.5
36.6
25.6
34.8
24.533.3
23.1
31.4
21.9
29.8
20.0
27.2
19.0
26.9
3790/ V t 6160/ V t
361
C.B.C. STANDARD 2i -3 -
III -1958 EDITION
-
list to the direction of stress by a web, lip, or other stiff- Stiffener,, for
g means, having the following minimum moment of } 1 mlent % i"n
Lia: (Cont'd. )
1.83t' w; t t' -- 144 1 See Table No. 27-3-C)
ERE:
w/t = flat -width ratio of stiffened element, and
minimum allowable moment of inertia of
stiffener (of any shapes about its own cen-
troidal axis parallel to the stiffened element.
ere the stiffener consists of a simple lip bent at right
les to the stiffened element, the required over-all depth of
h lip may be determined with satisfactory accuracy by the
owing formula:
6 w
d = 2.8tt 1_144
(See Table No. 27-3-C)
►. simple lip shall not be used as an edge stiffener for any
ment having a flat -width ratio greater than 60.
,)}1 Intermediate Stiffeners. In order that a flat compres-
s element may be considered a "multiple stiffened ele-
nt," it shall be stiffened between webs. or between a web
d an edge, by means of intermediate stiffeners parallel to
direction of stress, and the moment of inertia of each
eh intermediate stiffener shall be not less than twice the
nimum allowable moment of inertia specified for edge stiff-
ers in this Section- The following limitations also shall
ply:
1. If the spacing of stiffeners between two webs is such
at the flat -width ratio (Section 27.311) sub -element
onlytttitioi intermedi-
larger than (w/t),,,,,
e stiffeners (those nearest each web) shall be considered
rective.
2. If the spacing of stiffeners between a web and an edge
.iffener is such that the flat -width ratio of the sub -element
�tween stiffeners is larger than (wJ),,,,, (Section 27.311)
sly one intermediate stiffener shall be considered effective.
3. If intermediate stiffeners are spaced so closely that the
at -width ratio between stiffeners does not exceed (wt),,,,.
Section 27.311) all the stiffeners may be considered effective.
S computing the flat -width ratio of the entire multiple-stiff-
ned element, such element shalt be considered as replaced by
n el, ment without intermediate stiffeners whose width n•, is
RT'ES OF
STIFFENERS FOR CO MPRF SION FALE No. 27-3-CAIINIMUM FLF3tENTR
uvt I
d xa I
-o 93.3 7.tt
12 or less 0 0 or5 409t 2st
'9.4t A.St
13 9.2N 4 Rt YO 51) 4V
94
14 13.2t' BAt 6 2t n 69.oP ]o.2t
16 InAt . ]0.9t
1H 1 24.6N O
6 ,t 60 ]i+;fit'
rer 60 1.64t'w
363
UNIFORM BUILDING CODEI-.B.C.
STANDARD V -S -SR
of
TABLE ND. 27-3-B
of StStiffenedI'ropertbes
DesigWidth to Thiet" n
Stiffened
Ratio h t of Effective
C liion E�
Compr
IteJtPotlnd9
Fleparate,
{Cant'd.)
b/t FOR
b,'t FOR D_
D EC- µ/t LOAD ON
LOAD TIONI- II -
: DETERMI- NATION
DFTTFRMI- NATION
NATION NATION
�- 29.8 120 49.9 64.6
28.2' 29.2
Spit 140 60.3 66.4
29-9 51.6 67.7
333 35.0
fi 1180 52.1 68.7
a'' 25.8
T'i5... 69.5
40 5 38.9 44 200 53.0
45 47.3 260
28A 40.5 44.0 1225 663 ?15
275
5 42.0 50.0 53.9 72.0
60 43.2 52.3 3050 54.3 72.7
55.8 73.2
-0 45.1 64.6
46.9 58A 450,8 73.6
65.0 74.0
100 48 6 62.1 500
•(a.rt)for Inas d,termination, see Section 27.311. ;
detemunouon. see Section 27.31Y.
•rtw-t, for deflection
(e i ""t tiple-Stiffsnsd Elements. Where the flat -width ratio
not
of a aub-element of a multiple-stiffenedelement sudoes
b, ofsuch
exceed 60, the effective design width,
shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of this
Section, where such f thetsubelement shall be de0termined fron,
b',
design width,
the following formula:
///
b' b (w-60
0.10
= _ _.
t t t
WHERE:
ment
width ratio ofudthsdet determined in accordance
w/t = flat width
design
= effective
with the provisions of this Section
design width of subelement to be used in
b' = effective
design computations
the effective structural properties of a
For computing
member having multiple -stiffened elements, the area of any
reduced to an effect-
intermediate stiffener shall be considered
intermediate
ive area as given by the expression
A—= Ann, (b/w), or
i
A.rr=Amu (b'jtv),
In the above expressions, A., and
whichever is applicable.
A,,,;, refer only to the area of the stiffener section, exclusive
of any portion of adjacent elements.
is to be considered located at
The centroid of the stiffener
the centroid of the full area of the stiffener, and the moment
central" axis shall
of inertia of the stiffener about its own
be that of the full section of the stiffener.
I#iBemrs for flee. 27.312. (a) Edge Stiffeners. In order that a Hatt com
may be considered a "stiffened comp ression
C pression element
element" it shall be stiffened along each longitudinal edge
b"
362
C.B.C. STANDARD 2i -3 -
III -1958 EDITION
-
list to the direction of stress by a web, lip, or other stiff- Stiffener,, for
g means, having the following minimum moment of } 1 mlent % i"n
Lia: (Cont'd. )
1.83t' w; t t' -- 144 1 See Table No. 27-3-C)
ERE:
w/t = flat -width ratio of stiffened element, and
minimum allowable moment of inertia of
stiffener (of any shapes about its own cen-
troidal axis parallel to the stiffened element.
ere the stiffener consists of a simple lip bent at right
les to the stiffened element, the required over-all depth of
h lip may be determined with satisfactory accuracy by the
owing formula:
6 w
d = 2.8tt 1_144
(See Table No. 27-3-C)
►. simple lip shall not be used as an edge stiffener for any
ment having a flat -width ratio greater than 60.
,)}1 Intermediate Stiffeners. In order that a flat compres-
s element may be considered a "multiple stiffened ele-
nt," it shall be stiffened between webs. or between a web
d an edge, by means of intermediate stiffeners parallel to
direction of stress, and the moment of inertia of each
eh intermediate stiffener shall be not less than twice the
nimum allowable moment of inertia specified for edge stiff-
ers in this Section- The following limitations also shall
ply:
1. If the spacing of stiffeners between two webs is such
at the flat -width ratio (Section 27.311) sub -element
onlytttitioi intermedi-
larger than (w/t),,,,,
e stiffeners (those nearest each web) shall be considered
rective.
2. If the spacing of stiffeners between a web and an edge
.iffener is such that the flat -width ratio of the sub -element
�tween stiffeners is larger than (wJ),,,,, (Section 27.311)
sly one intermediate stiffener shall be considered effective.
3. If intermediate stiffeners are spaced so closely that the
at -width ratio between stiffeners does not exceed (wt),,,,.
Section 27.311) all the stiffeners may be considered effective.
S computing the flat -width ratio of the entire multiple-stiff-
ned element, such element shalt be considered as replaced by
n el, ment without intermediate stiffeners whose width n•, is
RT'ES OF
STIFFENERS FOR CO MPRF SION FALE No. 27-3-CAIINIMUM FLF3tENTR
uvt I
d xa I
-o 93.3 7.tt
12 or less 0 0 or5 409t 2st
'9.4t A.St
13 9.2N 4 Rt YO 51) 4V
94
14 13.2t' BAt 6 2t n 69.oP ]o.2t
16 InAt . ]0.9t
1H 1 24.6N O
6 ,t 60 ]i+;fit'
rer 60 1.64t'w
363
U.B.C. %iMANDARD 17-3.515 UNIFORM BUILDING CODI.
the whole width between webs or from web to edge stiffener,
and whose equivalent thickness, t„ is determined as follows.
3F2 I,
t1 V 'Lt W.
where I, _. moment of inertia of the full area of the multipic-
stiffened element, including the intermediate stiffeners, abow.
its own centroidal axis.
ximum Sm. 27.313, Maximum allowable overall, flat-width ratio.
Allowable w:2, disregarciing intermediate stiffeners and taking as t the
Fiat-Width actual thickness of the element, shall be as follows:
Rathw 1. Stiffened compression element having one longitudi-
nal edge connected to a web or flange element, the
other stiffened by:
Simple lip bent at right angle to the element............ 6(i
Any other kind of stiffener.............................................. 90
2. Stiffened compression element with both longitudi-
nal edges connected to a web or flange element (U-
type or box-type sections __............._..............._.......... 50u
3. Unstiffened compression element.............. 60
NOTE: Unstiffened compression elements that have flat-
width ratios exceeding approximately 30 and stiffened com-
pression elements th-t have flat-width ratios exceeding
approximately 250 are likely to develop noticeable defama-
tion at the full allowable working stresses, without detri-
ment to the ability of the member to carry design loads.
Stiffened elements having flat-width ratios larger than
500 may be used with safety to support loads, but substan-
tial deformation of such elements under load may occur
and may render inapplicable the design formulas of this
Standard.
4. Unusually Wide Flanges: Where a flange of a flexural
member is unusually wide and it is desired to limit the
max'—mum amount of curling or movement of the flange
toward the neutral axis, the following formula applie.
to compression and tension flanges, either stiffened of
unstiffened:
w,,,a i soo 600tn loo c
f.. x
h
WHERE:
«'..., the width, in inches. of flange projecting beyond
the web; or half of the distance between webs for
box- or U -type beams,
t thickness of flange in inches.
h = depth of beam in inches.
c = the amount of curling in inches.
f.. = the average stress in the full, unreduced flange
width. [Where members are designed by the
effective design width procedure, the average
stress = the maximum stress x (the ratio of the
effective design width to the actual width).]
NOTE: The amount of curling that can be tolerated will
vary with different kinds of sections and must be estab-
lished by the designer. Amount of curling in the order of
364
IH -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 27-3-58
ve per cent of the depth of the section is usually not
msidered excessive.
Be. 27.314. The ratio h/t of the webs of flexural mem- Maximum
I shall not exceed.....__ ............................................. 150 Allowable
ERE: Web Depth
h — clear distance between flanges, inches.
t = thickness of web, inches.
'here a web consists of two or more sheets, the h,,t
a of the individual sheets shall not exceed ---------- 150
)c. 27.315. Where the span of the beam is less than 30w' Unusually
as defined below) and it carries one concentrated toad, or Short Spans
gyral loads spaced farther apart than 2 w', the effective Supporting
gn width of any flange, whether in tension or compression, Concentrated
1 be limited to Table No. 27-3-D, Leads
-. L = full span for simple spans; or the distance between
inflection paints for continuous beams; or twice the
length of cantilever beams.
' `-w' = width of flange projection beyond the web for I-
beam and similar sections or half the distance be-
tween webs for box- or U -type sections.
1tui flanges of I -beams and similar sections stiffened by lips
�• -at the outer edges, w' shall be taken as the sum of the flange
;;*ojection beyond the web plus the depth of the lip.
ALLOWABLE DESIGN STRESSES
-Sec. 27.316. The maximum allowable unit stresses to be General
.used in design shall be as specified in Sections 27.316 to Provtsions
>t"27.325.
'-Sec. 27.317. Tension on the net section of tension members, Basic
d tension and compression, f,,, on the extreme fibers of flex- Deslgn Stress
members shall not exceed the following specified values
cept as otherwise specifically provided herein.
$ ; GRADE, OF MIN. YIELD POINT (I.103 PER
STEEL (LBS. PER SQ. IN.)
C 33.000 18.000
B 30.000 16.500
A 25,0M 13,500
Other fh = Specified minimum yield point/1.85
<" For special provisions for members resisting wind or earth-
uake loads see Section 27.324, Wind or Earthquake Stresses.
TABLE NO. 27-3-D—SHORT, WIDE FLANGES
Maximum Allowable Ratio of Effective Design
Width to Actual Width
L/w, T- RATIO
� � L/w' RATIO
30 Loo I 14 0 R2
25 0.96 12 0.7s
j 20 0.91 10 1173
18 6-8fl 8 0.67
16. _.. 0.86 I 6 0.55
365
t'.B.C. STANDARD 27-3-58 UNIFORM BUILDING CODF.
I<. L, III-1958 EDITION_
U.B.C.L'BCSTANDARD 3-58
C sec. ;':.318. Compression f... in pounds per square inch, on
' arch members shall not exceed the allowable stress as
I
on I'nstutra dflat unstitfened elements:
; ifled in Sections 27.317 or 27.318 nor the following maxi-
E 1. For w t not greater than 12, f, = f„
:. um stresses:
2. For w t greater than 12 but not over 30:4
` i, For I- or channel-shaped sections • f G = 250,000,000
f, _tiA7f,,---5430)'---(1/18)(f„-8150)w/t
Values of f, in accordance with formula are given in Table
r 125,000,000
No. 27-3-&i
2. For Z-shaped sections: f” _ -
3. For w t over 30 but not over 60:(L/r,)'
fi:WHERE:
For Angle struts: f,. = 7,330,000/ (w/t)'
For All Other Sections: f, =12,600 — 148,5 (w/t)
i.
L = the unbraced length of the member, and
In the above formulas, w/t — flat-width ratio as defined in
;. rr = the radius of gyration of the entire section of the
Section 27.306.
member about its gravity axis parallel to the web.
NOTE: L'nstiffened compression elements having ratios
` See. 27,326. (a) Shear Stresses in Webs. The maximum Allowable
of w exceeding approximately 30 may show noticeable dis-
•.'average shear stress, v, in pounds per square inch, on the Stresses in
toetion of the free edges under allowable compressive stress
� gross area of a flat web, shall not exceed: Webs of
without detriment to the ability of the member to support
64 p00,000 Beams
load.
t' v = - (111A -- with a maximum of 2/3 f,,,
For ratios of w t exceeding approximately 60 distortion
„.also•', WH EftE
of the flanges is likely to be so pronounced as to render the
t =web thickness, inches.
section structurally undesirable unless load and stress are
h = clear distance between flanges, inches.
limited to such a degree as to render such use uneconomical
fe = basic working stress as specified in Section 27,317,
Laterally See. 27.319. To prevent lateral buckling, the maximum
stress P„ in per square inch, on extreme
p•s•l.
Where the web consists of two or more sheets, each sheet
:
Unbraced compression pounds
single Web fibers of compression flanges of laterally unsupported straight
shall be considered as a separate member carrying its share
Beams I-, Z. or channel-shaped flexural members (not including mul-
tiple-web deck, L'- and closed box-type members and curved
of the mean'
(Values in accordance with the above formula are given in
TABLE NO. 27-3-F ALLOWABLE DESIGN STRESSES
„';Table No. 27-3-G.)
(b) Bending Stress In Webs. The compressive stress f,. in
"pounds per square inch in the flat web of a beam due to bend-
ON CNSTIFFENF.D ELEMENTS--SECTION 303-2
ing in its plane, shall not exceed fe nor shall it exceed:
ASTM A245, A246, and A303 Grades of Steel
520,000,000
- For wj Ratios From 12 to 30
f„ =
,x t GRADE C GRADE B GRADE A
l__.__..
= where It = clear distance between flanges, inches.
...
12 1a (") Fs,50o 13,5oo
(c) Combined Bending and Shear Stress in Webs. For webs
14 is 91u f5,580 j 12.910
. subject to both bending and shear stresses, the member shall
16 15 x10 14,650 12.310
14 23.720 11,720
. ,' bi! so proportioded that such stresses do not exceed the allow-
";able
20 30
20 13 630 12.790 11.130 (�(
` values specified in this Section and that the quantity
P
1 530 11,960 10,530 j
:. 9,940
'. (fn/f0I + (v;'v)' does not exceed unity,
'4 11440 10.940
zs 10340 10.010 9.340 €
� WHERE:
9.250 9.080 8.750
I 30 1.150 8,150 8,150
5__20,000,000
f„ _ (h),
TABLE NO. 27-3-F—ALLOWABLE DESIGN STRESSES
y = 64.000,000
(h/t)'
ON CNSTIFFENED ELEMENTS
For w. t Rattus from 30 to 60 (Ail Grades of Steel)
^(`'' •.`
1 f% = actual compressive stress at junction of flange and
!.ALLOWABLE t FOR-A—LLOWABLF f FOR
web, p.s.i.
_ averageactual shear i.e., shear force per
RATIO An1.l.- Ot! r j RATIO Angle other
s.i.
.„;,y' web dl ded byWeb area, pe
t st ut. S t ms �/t Struts Sections
.' tۥ.
39 8150 8150 46 3460 5770
Sec. 27.321 (a) General. To avoid crippling of flat webs of Web Crippling
322 160 7850
6340 so 09� 8190
beams, concentrated loads, and reactions shall not exceed the of Beams
34 5 '.
36 5160
?values of P,,,,,,. given below.
38 50"o 6960 54 2510 4530
40
(b) Reams of Grade C Steel. Beams of Grade C steel hav-
45x,0 3660 s 234042 42so
6.160
ing single unreinforced webs with inside corner radius equal
44 8790 4 o 60 220080 5890
to or less than the thickness of the sheet:
366
367
U.B.C. ST.4NlDRAD 27-3-M U=NUMRM BUILDING CODE
Web Crippling 1. For eras reactions or for concentrated loads on the outer
of ends of cantilevers
(COWIL) P„,„_l00t' (980+42t8/t)---0.22(B/t) (h/0-0.11 (h/t))
For other grades of steel and other comer radii, the value
P®„ given by the above formula is to be multiplied by
k(1.15-- 0.15n) (1.33-0.33k)
2. For reactions of interior supports or for concentrated loads
located anywhere on the span
P—,= loot, [3050 + 23(B/t) —0.09(B/t) (h/t)-5(h/t)1
For other grades of steel and other comer radii, the value
P"„ given by the above formula is to be multiplied by
it 11.06-0.06n) (1.22— 0.22k)
w I -Beams. For I -beams made of two channels connected
back to back or for similar sections which provide a high
degree of restraint against rotation of the web, such as I -
sections made by welding two angles to a channel:
1. For end reactions or for concentrated loads on the outer
ends of cantilevers
P,,,,, — t'f„ (7.4 -i- 0.93 ✓ BA)
2 For reactions of interior supports or for concentrated loads
located anywhere on the span
P,,,,=t'f,(11.1+2.41 VE%t)
In all of the above P,,,, represents the load or reaction for
one solid web sheet connecting top and bottom flanges. For
webs consisting of two or more such sheets, P,,,, shall be com-
puted for each individual sheet and the results added to obtain
the allowable load or reaction for the composite web.
For loads located close to ends of beams, Subsections (a)
and (b) of this Section apply, provided that for cantilevers
the distance from the free end to the nearest edge of bearing,
and for a load close to an end support, the clear distance from
edge of end bearing to nearest edge of load bearing, is larger
than 1.5 h. Othenvise Subsections (a)-1 and (b)-1 of this Sec-
tion apply.
In the above formulas,
P_ = allowable concentrated load or reaction, pounds.
t = web thickness, inches.
B -- actual length of bearing, in inches, except that in
the above formulas the value of "B" shall not be
taken greater than "h".
TABLE NO. 27-3-G—MAXLMUM ALLOWABLE SKEAB
IN FLAT WEBS
64.00
0.0
v =—(hn�,- with maximum of 2/3 f,
h't ---
60 17.780
v
70 _ 13.060
73
80 10 0901) (maximum for Grade M
700 90
7.800
120
6.400
40
410 5.290
130 a 74400
140 3.270
150 2.&40
368
VOL. III -1858 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 27-3-58
h = clear distance between flanges, inches.
f, = basic allowable design stress, p.s.i. (Section 27.317)
k = fp/18,000
n = Ratio of inside bend radius divided by web thickness
See. 27.322. (a) Unit Stress. The average axial stress, Axially
P/A, in compression members, shall not exceed the values of Loaded
F„ as follows: 4See NOTE) Compression
For Grade C Steel Nembery
L/r equal to or less than 132/ ✓Q_ :
F. = 15,300Q -- 0A37Q'(L/r)'
L/r equal to or greater than 132/,/— ;
134,000,000
For other Grades of Steel
L/r equal to or less than-24,OOC
k ✓fr ✓Q
2Q '
F, = 0.464Qf, - 100,0 0
L/r equal to or greater than 24,060
'/f, vQ
134,00,00
-----
(L/r)'
--.
¢ in the above formulas,
P = total load, pounds;
A = full, unreduced cross-sectional area of the member,
inches';
F. = maximum allowable average axial stress in compres-
sion, p.s.i.;
L = unsupported length of member, inches; (See NOTE)
r = radius of gyration of full, unreduced cross-section,
inches;
f = yield point of steel, p.s.i;
4 = a factor determined as follows:
1. For members composed entirely of stiffened elements,
"Q" is the ratio between the effective design area, as deter-
mined from the effective design widths of such elements, and
the full or gross area of the cross-section. The effective design
area used in determining Q is to be based upon the basic
design stress f, as defined in Section 27.317.
NOTE: For continuous compression chords of trusses
with rigid welded connections at panel points, the value of
L to be used in computing L/r in the plane of the truss is
three-fourths the distance between panel points.
2. For members composed entirely of unstiffened elements,
"Q" is the ratio between the allowable compression stress f,
for the weakest element of the cross-section (the element hav-
ing the largest flat -width ratio) and the basic design stress f„;
where f� is as defined in Section 27.318 and f„ is as defined in
Section 27.317.
3. For members composed of both stiffened and unstiffened
elements the factor "Q” is the product of a stress factor Q.
369
V.wi% STANDARD 27-3-38 i'NIFORM BUILDING CODE
Axialiv
computed as outlined in this Section and an area factor Q.
(' n
computed as outlined in paragraph numbered 1 above, except
that the stress upon which Q is to be based shall be that
vlvmbcrs
value of the unit stress f, which is used in computing Q,; and
icent'd,)
the effective area to be used in computing Q. shall include the
.050
.060 1
full area of all unstiffened elements.
(b) Maximum Slenderness Ratio. The maximum allowable
.094
ratio L/r of unsupported length, L, to radius of gyration, r, of
.109
compression members shall be as follows:
x25
155
1. Columns, and other primary compression members,
.1853:100
i
except as provided otherwise in this Section...... ............ 120
The slenderness ratio L/r of a main compression
member may exceed 120, but not 200, provided its
unit stress under full design load does not exceed
the following fraction of that stipulated under this
Section
1.6 — (L/200r)
2. Iniad -bearing wall studs .................................................... 160
The slenderness ratio L/r of a load-bearing wall
stud may exceed 160. but not 200, provided its unit
stress under full design load does not exceed the
following fraction of that stipulated under this
Section
2.6 — (L/100r)
3. Secondary members.............................................................. 200
Exception: During construction only, L/r may ex-
ceed the foregoing limits but shall not exceed 300.
If members which are temporarily unbraced during construc-
tion are to act as permanent load -carrying members in the
completed structure they must be so braced prior to com-
pletion of the structure as to reduce the I/r ratio to a value
not exceeding that given in paragraphs numbered 1, 2 or 3
above, whichever may apply.
Combined
Sec. 27.323. Members subject to both axial compression
Axial and
and bending stresses shall be so proportioned that the quantity
StressesF
F'i shall not exceed unity,
WHERE: s
F, = i��aximum axial unit stress in compression that is
permitted by this Specification where axial stress
only exists. (Section 27.322.)
F„ = maximum bending unit stress in compression that is
permitted by this Specification where bending stress
only exists. (Sections 27.317 and 27.318.)
f, — axial unit stress = axial load divided by full cross -
P
sectional area of member, A
Y, — bending unit stress = bending moment divided by
section modulus of member, M. noting that for mem-
S'
hers having stiffened compression elements the sec-
tion modulus shall be based upon the the effective
design widths of such elements.
Wind or
Sec. 27.324. (a) Wind or Earthquake Only. Members and
Earthquake
assemblies subject only to stresses produced by wind or earth-
.q'IMS1
quake forces may be proportioned for unit stresses 331h per
,
370
VOL. III -1858 EDITION C.R.C. STANDARD 27-3.58
cent greater than those specified for dead and live load
stresses. A corresponding increase may be applied to the
allowable unit stresses in connections and details.
(b) Combined Forces. Members and assemblies subject to
stresses produced by a combination of wind or earthquake
and other loads may be proportioned for unit stresses 331s
per cent greater than those specified for dead and live load
stresses, provided the section thus required is not less than
that required for the combination of dead load and live load.
A corresponding increase may be applied to the allowable trait
stresses in connections and details.
See. 27.325. The ratio. D/t, of mean diameter to wall thick- Cylindrical
ness of a cylindrical tubular, compression member shall not Tubular
exceed 3,300,000,£,. For such members, the allowable unit Compression
stress P/A under axial load shall be as prescribed by Section Members
27.322, with Q = 1.
CONNECTIONS
See. 27.326. Connections shall be designed to transmit the General
maximum stress in the connected member with proper regard Provisions
for eccentricity. In the case of members subject to reversal of
stress, except if caused by wind or earthquake loads, the con.
nection shall be proportioned for the sum of the stresses.
See. 27.322 (a) Fnision Welds. For all grades of steel, Welds
fusion welds shall be proportioned so that the unit stresses
therein do not exceed 13.600 p.s.i. in shear on the throat of
fillet or plug welds. The allowable unit stress in *ension or
compression on butt welds shall be the same as prescribed for
the base metal being joined, provided that weld penetrates 100
per cent of the section. Stresses due to eccentricity of Ioading,
if any, shall be combined with the primary stresses; and the
combined unit stresses shall not exceed the values given
above.
Stresses in a fillet weld shall be considered as shear on the
throat for any direction of the applied stress. Neither plug
nor slot welds shall be assigned any value in resistance to any
stresses other than shear.
(b) Resistance Welds. In sheets joined by spot welding,
the design strength per spot shall conform to Table No. 27-
3-H.
TABLE NO. 27-3-H
.010
.020
125 25
.030
.040
450
350
.050
.060 1
525
?25
10:5
.094
1375
.109
1650
x25
155
2000
.1853:100
i
371
C.BC. STAND.#RD 27 -3 -tit UNIFORM BUILDING CODr:
waft See, ,!iMs. The required tension strength of welds connect-
Cung two channels to form an i -beam shall be determined from
Two Cbauoelr the following formula: — mqs
to an S' ® it
I.. for
Gstasa WifFRE.
S„ = required strength of ureld in tension, pounds.
s = longitudinal spacing of welds, inches.
c -= vertical distance between the two rows of welds near
or at top and bottom flanges, inches.
q intensity of load, on beam, pounds per linear inch.
i For method of determination, see below.)
in — distance of shear center of channel from mid-plane
of the web. inches.
For simple channels without stiffening lips at the
outer edges,
_ w'
m 2w + h/3
For C-shaped channels with stiffening lips at the
outer edges,
in = 4I t [wh -[- 2d (h — d) J
w projection of flanges from inside face of web, inches.
(For channels with flanges of unequal width, w shall
be taken as the width of the wider flange.)
h = depth of channel or beam, inches.
d = depth of lip, inches.
1, = moment of inertia of one channel about its centroidal
axis normal to the web, inches'.
The intensity of load, q, is obtained by dividing the magni-
tude of concentrated loads or reactions by the length of bear-
ing or by longitudinal spacing of welds, s, whichever is larger.
For beams designed for "uniformly distributed load," the
intensity. q, shall be taken equal to three times the intensity
of the uniformly distributed design load.
The required strength of welds depends upon the intensity
of the load directly at the weld. Therefore, if uniform diam-
eter and spacing of welds are used over the whole length of
the beam, the necessary strength of the welds shall be deter-
mined at the point of maximum local load intensity. In cases
where this procedure would result in uneconomically close
spacing either one of the following methods may be adopted:
1. the weld spacing may be varied along the beam according
to the variation of the load intensity; or 2. reinforcing cover
plates may be welded to the flanges at points where concen-
trated loa,!s occur. The required strength in shear of the welds
connecting these plates to the flanges shall then be determined
from the formula for S. specified herein but ",:" shall then
represent the depth of the beam.
Sparug of See. 27.329. The spacing, in line of stress, of welds, rivets,
Connections or bolts connecting a compression cover plate or sheet to a
in non -integral stiffener or other element shall not exceed:
Coesprevdan 1. That which is required to transmit the shear between the
connected parts on the basis of the design strength per con-
nection specified elsewhere herein; nor
372
VOL. III -1958 EDITION C.R.C. STANDARD 27-3-5$
2. s = 6000t/s/f, where s is spacing in inches, t is the
thickness of the cover plate or sheet in inches, and f is the
design stress in the cover plate or sheet in pounds per square
inch; nor
3. Three times the total flat width, w, of the narrowest un -
stiffened compression element in that portion of the cover
plate or sheet which is tributary to the welds. but need not
be less than thirty-six times the thickness of such element
unless closer spacing is required by paragraphs numbered 1
or 2 of this Section.
In the case of intermittent fillet welds parallel to the direc-
tion of stress the spacing shall be taken as the clear distance
between welds plus one-half inch (!=" ). In all other cases the
spac±ng shall be taken as the center distance between con-
nections.
EXCEPTION: The requirements of this Section do not
apply to cover sheets which act only as sheathing material
and are not considered as load -carrying elements.
Sec. 27.330. (a) Minimum Slracing and Edge Distance in Requirements
Line of Stress. The clear distance between bolts which are For Bolted
arranged in rows parallel to the direction of force, also the Connections
distance from the center of any bolt to that end or other
boundary of the connecting member towards which the pres-
sure o1 the bolt is directed, shall not be less than 1% d nor
less than P/fat
WHERE
d = diameter of bolt, inches.
P — force transmitted by bolt, pounds.
t = thickness of thinnest connected sheet, inches.
f� = basic design stress, as defined elsewhere, p.s.i.
(b) Tension Stress on Net Section. The tension stress on
the net section of a bolted connection shall not exceed f, nor
shall it exceed
(0.1 + 3d/s)f„
WHERE
s = spacing of bolts perpendicular to line of stress, inches.
In the case of a single bolt, s — width of sheet.
d and f,, are as previously defined.
(c) Bearing Stress in Bolted Connections. The bearing
stress on the area (d x t) shall not exceed 3.5 f,,.
(d) Shearing Stress on Bolts. The allowable value for shear
on unfinished bolts is 10,000 pounds per square inch.
BRACING REQUIREMENTS
Sec. 27.331. The safe load -carrying capacity of a stud may Wall Studs
be computed on the basis that wall material or sheathing
(attached to the stud) furnishes adequate lateralsupport to
the stud in the plane of the wall, provided the wall material
and its attachments to the stud comply with the following
requirements:
1. Wall material or sheathing must be attached to both
faces or flanges of the studs being braced.
373
U.N.C. STANDARD 27-3-69 UNIFORM BUILDING CODs;
\Vas Studs 2. The maximum spacing of attachments of wall materia)
( Costa.) to the stud being braced shall not exceed "a„,,," as determined
from the formula:
a...=3EI,k
A
where k is the test value as defined in paragraph numbered 4
of this Section and the other terms are as defined in the fol.
lowing paragraphs numbered 3 and 4.
The slenderness ratio of the stud between attachments, a/r„
shalt not exceed L/2r,. Therefore, the spacing of attachments
shall not exceed that specified above nor shall it exceed:
L r,
WHFRRE: am„ = 2 r,
L = length of stud, inches.
r, = radius of gyration of stud about its axis paral-
lel to wall -_ VI,jA, inches.
r, = radius of gyration of stud about its axis per-
pendicular to wall = /1,jlt, inches.
3. The minimum modulus of elastic support, k, to be ex-
erted laterally by the wall material and its attachments in
order to brace the stud, shall be not less than --
4.5 a A -
for Steel of Grade C: k – -1 -- ;
3.7aA'
for Grade B: k = -- I, ;
2.6 a A'
for Grade A: k = ---I-- ;
for steel of grade other than A, B, and C:
f,' a A'
k = 240.000.000 Z,
WHERE:
f, = yield point of steel in the studs, p.s.i.
a = actual spacing of attachments of wall material to
stud measured along the length of stud, (a = Ifor
continuous attachment), inches.
A = area of cross section of stud, inches'.
I, = moment of inertia of cross section of stud about its
axis perpendicular to wall, inches'.
k = spring constant or modulus of elastic support of wall
material ron each [one] side of stud) plus attach-
ment, i.e-, k --- F!y where "F" is the force in pounds
which produces an elongation of "y" inches of a strip
of wall material of width "a" and of length equal to
the distance between adjacent studs, pounds per inch.
4. The lateral force. "F," which each single attachment of
the wall material shall be capable of exerting on the stud in
the plane of the wall (in order to prevent lateral buckling of
the stud) shall not be less than:
kelp
2 r'Eix/a — P
374
VOL. III -1963 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 27-3-53
WHERE
It = modulus of elastic support of the wall material and
its attachments as determined from tests, i.e., the
value of "k" used in the formula to determine the
maximum allowable spacing of attachments in "b",
pounds per inch.
_ stud length in inches
a — V 240
P= design load on stud, pounds.
Ir = moment of inertia of stud about its axis perpendicu-
lar to the wall, inches'.
a = actual spacing of attachments measured along stud,
inches.
(a = one inch (111) for continuous attachment.)
E = Modulus of Elasticity = 29,500,000 p.s.i.
Sea 27.332 (a) General. The following provisions for the Channel and
bracing, against twist, of channel and Z -sections used as Z -Sections
beams apply only when neither flange is connected to deck or Used as Beams
sheathing material in such a manner as to effectively restrain
lateral deflection of the connected flange and such members
are loaded in the plane of the web. Seo NOTE at end of this
Section.
(b) Spacing of Braces. Braces shall be attached both to
the top and bottom flanges of the sections at the ends and at
intervals not greater than one-fourth of the span length in
such a manner as to prevent tipping at the ends and lateral
deflection of either flange in either direction at intermediate
braces. If one-third or more of the total load on the beams is
concentrated over a lengthof one -twelfth or less of the span
of the beam, an additional brace shall be placed at or near the
center of this loaded length.
te) Design of Braces. Each intermediate brace, at top and
bottom flange, shall be designed to resist a lateral force P„
determined as follows:
1. For a uniformly loaded beam, P„ = 1.5 K times the load
within a distance 0.5a each side of the brace.
2. For concentrated loads P„ = 1.0 K times the concen-
trated load. "P" within a distance 0.3a each side of the brace,
plus a force "F" determined from the following formula, for
each such concentrated load "P" located farther than 0.3a but
not farther than "a" from the brace:
F=Q!' (1—$ ) PK
In the above formulas:
For channels:
K = m/h, where
m = distance from shear center to mid-plane of the web,
as specified in Section 37.329, inches.
h = depth of channel, inches.
For Z -sections:
K = I.II„ where
I,y = product of inertia of full section about centroidal
axes parallelandperpendicular to web, inches'.
I, = moment of inertia of full section about centroidal
axis perpendicular to web, inches'.
375
it -
UNtI+'DR1H BUILDING COM.
l Ol.. tll--)9aR F,DITIDti F.R.C. STANDARD
4alC gTANHARD 27-4-3R
open-hearth, electric -furnace, or acid-bessemer, except that Iraw".es
Far channels and Z- sections:
- distance from concentrated load "P" to brace,
steel for grade B bessemer pipe shall be killed steel made (Cant"d.)
by the deoxidized acid bessemer process (Note), and electric-
by
x
of bracing interval, inches.
pipe one-eighth inch (?/s"') and one-quar-
inch (?i") in character shall be made front open-hearth
a —length
End braces shall be designed for halt of the above forces.
so as to avoid local Crippling at
ter
steel. The steel for furnace -welded pipe shall be of soft
furnace -welded
Braces shall be designated
to the member.
weldable quality.
the points od attachment
(d) AllowAble Stre"es, For channel and Z -beams inter-
braced according to the requirementso Section that
Note: Deoxidized bessemer steel for seamless pipe is an
acid bessemer steel which has bad a considerable portion of
mediately
27.333, the maximum comp
that the length of the brae-
dissolved oxygen removed as a gas by treatment in the ves-
in the ladle to develop a silicon con-
speciRed in Section 27.319, except
interval, .o.' shall be used instead of the length, "L;' in
sel and further treated
tent of 0.10 to 0.30 per cent and with sufficient aluminum,
ing
the formulas of that Section.
or its equivalent to insure practically no evolution of gases
lateral deflection ge is connected to a deck or
;()TIS: R'hen only one flan
during solidification.
Killed bessemer steel may also be deoxidized by treat -
sheathing material to effectively reattain
of the connected flange, bracing may or may not be needed
the member, depending upon the
mint in the ladle with sufficient aluminum or its ego di-
d uring solidi
lent to insure practically no evolution of gases -
to prevent twisting of
of the member and span and upon whether the
fication.
dimensions
flange is in compression or tension.
(b) Furnace -welded pipe four inches, (4") and under in
unconnected
For closed box -type. sections used as beams
nominal diameter may be butt -welded, unless otherwise
specified. Furnace -welded pipe over four inches (4") in nomi-
iateratly See,. 27,333• L, to the nils-
Laeaeed the ratio of the laterally unsupported length,
shall not exceed 75.
nal diameter shall be lap -welded.
Box B� tance between the webs of section
The steel shall conform to the requirements as to rhem
ret a>atpositicn prescribed in Table 1.
CODE STANDARD 274-58
rt of itiu Analysis
tiwr. 4. itu An analysis of to pipes framyearh purchaser.
Drillings fractionreof be
kenafrom seieralcpo nts y
UNIFORM BUILDING
Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe
r. around each pipe selected for analysis. The chemical coni-
conform to the requirements
Basad on Tentative sAbs-bbT of
- position thus determined shall
prescribed in Table 1.
ty for Testi
the AriM[leangarlety far Testing Mat6elals0n
i If the atuik 4 -. �•f either pipe dr nor •.nit ri. to the
3, e sh dl 1 ru id«
Sea Seet/oa 2701, of the Uniform Building Code. Volume 1
requirements Specified in Se. ti n analyse
on additional pipe¢ �f doubie the origuiti n anh�i f n- the
SaoW Sec. 1. (a) These specifications cover black and hot
for the fol
same int, each of which shall "'If err' t 111c i q i7ements
dipped -galvanized welded and seamless steel pipe
.specified.
-'f . Tee
lowing purposes:
1. Pipe ordered under these specifications is noralbal
-Sac• tai The material shall conform t,) the require-
) ?ysents ass to tensile properties prescnh.d UITani¢ Il. Properpor tiae
(average) wall and is intended for coiling bending, Hang-
and is suitable for welding
.. ,
`(bi The yield point shun be mined b} the A-1, �f ter•
ing, and other special purposes,
Pipe or.
-welded p pe
.,=beam, by the halt in the gauge of the to uirg m,i+him- . tt he
meth I=. wh i lennite
2. When seamless or electric -resistance
dared for close coiling, cold bending, and for forge welding
use of dividers, or by other app roved
id int is not exbinited, the Field sa en g th + + i --p n�ling
grade A should be specified, as grade 8 is not intended for
to a permanent offset of 0.2 ler rent f t is gain _ le. g.h at
these purposes•
the specimen. or t i t dal erten ion t 1" per .it "f the
length under:- :,)not shall be determined,
3. Butt -welded pipe is not intended for hanging-
the is intended should be
,fauge
, The test
muni tli
wile ens iestrength
4. The purpose for which pipe
stated in the order.�x
ya notless than thernum
strength
rifled for the grade of pipe or lered This test "il mit be
(b) Galvanized Pipe. When pipe ordered under theca aped-
be the tension, flattening, and
}.)•squired for pipe ""'ter eight m+ he= � h in � utsi ie Mini:+iter
`�a;tlect
hof
facations is to galvanized,
bend tests shall be made on the base material before gal•
r a°sufipicientLlength pipe shallistand N,ingibent Prop"
.,
vanizing.
pipe,
`$ through 90 drgrees around a cylindrical mandrel, the
eter of which is 12 times the nominal d.ameicr of the
Ser, 2. (a) The steel for both welded and seamless
the following processes:
be made by one or more of
shall377
370
fig
IALC STANDARD l74 -aa uvwmm sunjuNG coDy
C T. L
4'
G I)
TABLE II.—TENSILE. RF.oTifRRURVmw
iSEAMLESS
FURNAE-
WELl
i
OR
ELECTRIC-
RESISTANCE-
WELDEDv
min., per cent
(inclbs)
4'—phorm, mar„
Grade B
B+r* r�'nl
txr tent
m e pi
Grade A
Grade B
p•n besetn ......
Lxs... .......
....
o.nax
0.1i
F- Idad pipe
${}2.�__......._._....
Y........._....._
Tensile strength, min., psi.
...............
45 000
0.13
t.�mv tne-rs� AArice-
m�a3de3 rleen-heann _.
r. i
0.030
TABLE II.—TENSILE. RF.oTifRRURVmw
Dtpe 9G and inches in dlametW " `_ _ """ """`" x-wemeu
Gauge distnncea [or measwtng elongation on furnace -welded pipe
at aomtaal aian x lath and =4 er shall be as follows:
Nominal size Ga a Length
(inches) (inches)
% and %...... .__._........... .... _.............._...._......._. __....._ 6
?t and 3i_._._ . _ __......._......_..._v....._....____._._.._...... 4
% -- ..._........_......_.._..... _.......... _. . .. . 2
• The following table gives the computed minimum values:
.3:8
VOL III -1838 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 27-1-58
-........._..._
iSEAMLESS
FURNAE-
WELl
i
OR
ELECTRIC-
RESISTANCE-
WELDEDv
min., per cent
(inclbs)
Grade A
Grade B
(0.812)-........... .........
�Acid-
Bassemer
Ha'O1 or
Electric-
Grade A
Grade B
78.50
29.00
02 91
Furnace
25.50
24.00
${}2.�__......._._....
Y........._....._
Tensile strength, min., psi.
50 000
45 000
48 000
60 000
Tield point, min., psi.__..
...
Elongation in 8 in.,
30 000
26 000
30 000
35 000
per cent ...... ............. ..........
19"
20^
Elongation In 2 in., min.,
per cent:
Basic minimum elonga-
tion for
walls ,4 in.
and over in thickkness,
longitudinal striy testa,
for
and all amali sizes
tested in full section....
When standard round
..__..
.._...
35
30
2 -in. gauge length
test specimen is used....
.___.
30
28
22
For longitudinal strip
tests a deduction for
each !hon, decrease
I- wall thickness be.
gbaasic minimums lone
ingi Percentagefoliow-
........
........
x.95•
x.btN
Dtpe 9G and inches in dlametW " `_ _ """ """`" x-wemeu
Gauge distnncea [or measwtng elongation on furnace -welded pipe
at aomtaal aian x lath and =4 er shall be as follows:
Nominal size Ga a Length
(inches) (inches)
% and %...... .__._........... .... _.............._...._......._. __....._ 6
?t and 3i_._._ . _ __......._......_..._v....._....____._._.._...... 4
% -- ..._........_......_.._..... _.......... _. . .. . 2
• The following table gives the computed minimum values:
.3:8
VOL III -1838 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 27-1-58
-........._..._
Elongation in 2 inches.
WALL THICKNESS
min., per cent
(inclbs)
Grade A
Grade B
(0.812)-........... .........
95.00
80.00
(0.281)..._ ................
(<0.250)____..._..__....
33.25
31.50
78.50
29.00
02 91
28.00
25.50
24.00
${}2.�__......._._....
Y........._....._
.75
2
(0.082)
.00
s.M
Tensile
Requfremrnt.
(Cont'd. )
Note. The above table gives the computed minimum elongation
values for each dr -Inch decrease is wall thickness. When the wall
thickness lies between two values shown above, the minimum elonga-
tion value shall be determined by the following formula:
Grade FormWa
A-..... ......_._ ......................... P s 66 t 19.50
B_:*-"---.-'-- .........a.._............._................................... E = 98 t -F 15.00
where:
E ® elongation in 2 inches In per cast, and
I : actual thickness of specimen, In inches.
pipe, without developing cracks at any portion and without
opening the weld. When ordered for close coiling, the pipe
shall stand being bent cold through 180 degrees around a
cylindrical mandrel, the diameter of which is eight times the
nominal diameter of the pipe, without failure. Double extra
strong pipe over one and one-quarter inch (11.") in diame-
ter need not be subjected to the bend test.
Sec, 7. (a) The flattening test shall be made on standard Flattening
weight and extra strong pipe over two inches (2") in nomi- Test
nal diameter. It shall not be required for double extra strong
pipe.
(b) For lap -welded and butt -welded pipe the test section
shall be four inches (4") to six inches (6") in length and the
weld shall be located 43 degrees from the line of direction
of the applied force.
7 c 3 For electric -resistance -welded pipe both crop ends from
each length of pipe shall be flattened between parallel plates,
rye- with the weld at the point of maximum bending, until oppo-
site walls of the pipe meet. No opening in the weld shall take
§s. place until the distance between the plates is less than two-
thirds of the original outside diameter of the pipe. No cracks
or breaks in the metal elsewhere than in the weld shall occur
until the distance between the plates is less than one-third of
the original outside diameter of the pipe, but in no case less
`'. than five times the thickness of the pipe wall. Evidence of
,'. lamination or burnt material shall not develop during the
entire flattening process, and the weld shall not show in-
jurious defects.
(d) For seamless pipe the test section shall not be less
"•:' than two and one-half inches (224") in length,
(e) The test shall consist in flattening a section of pipe
parallel plates until the opposite walls meet. For
8.8
C.tt.('. fiT.Al4iAMlt °'e -t 38 UNIFORM HVIUMNG C't?tr),
Flattening
welded pipe, no opening in the weld shall take place uer,i
Test
the distance between the plates is less than three-fourir.
(C'nnt'd.)
of the original outside diameter for butt -weld, or two thirds
the tnitside diameter for Iap-weld and electric -resistance
weld, and rni cracks or breaks in the metal elsewhere that:
in the weld shall occur until the distance between the plates
is less than shown below. For seamless pipe no breaks of
crarkiin the metal shall occur until the distance betwe,-
the pintos is ass than that shown below.
Fuld of ripe Distance Between Plates
Feu butt welded pipe - .....60 per cent of outside diameter
For lap-weicied Nps, .--one-tfutd the outside diameter
For et®cLrre-[Cw{Abitif. ldpl
pipe, grades A and S. ._.. _...one-third the outside dtameter
Fur sears 1 ss pipe, Rr des
A sot :r .... _. ... ... .... _._to the distance "if" developed by th,.
following formula:
N it -#- r)r
r-rlU
wFZEF F:
Rete plates In Inches,'
t 11 tbn
i--tad-I wall 4hr ni a of pipe in inches,
of p
Z+ --tad ds de is et. r pipe Ina inches, and
e b er n i u ri per x I .n07 ti (constant for a Ricen grade of rte,'
+iS f .oae ? o„ ",A7 for grade B).
Nydrostatte Sec•. 8. (a) Each length of pipe shall be tested at the cwt'1
Teat for the required hydrostatic pressures. The hydrostatic tta
may he applied nt the discretion of the manufacturer on pipe
with plain ends, with threads only, or with threads and
couplings. Welded pipe two inches (2") and larger shall b,
jarred rear one end while under test pressure,
ib- The ntosuuuni hydrostatic test pressure shall no:
exceed 27:00 p_sj. for nnininal sizes three inches (3") aml
under. 284) p.s.i. for all nominal sizes over three inches
13't. The hydrostatic pressure shall be maintained for not
less than five seconds for all sizes of seamless. In.p-welded,.
and el• t i •-welde4i pine.
W®rkrttaowlsip See. 15. Unless otherwise specified, pipe shall conform to
the following regular practice:
(a) Ends, Each end of standard weight welded pipe shall
be threadrd. Extra strong welded pipe and standard weight
and extra strong seamless pipe and all double extra strong
Pipe shall be furnished With plain ends.
(b) Threads. All threads shall be in accordance with the
gauging practice of the American Standard for Pipe Threads.
The variation from the standard, when tested with the
standard working gauge, shall not exceed one and one-half
turns either way.
(c) Couplings. Each length of threaded pipe shall be pro-
vided with one coupling, the threads of which shall be in
accordant's with tee gauging practice of the American
Standard for Pipe Threads. The coupling shall be applied
handling -tight, if so s(reci6ed couplings will be applied
po-rer-t ght- +)ouplirgs snap' be wrought iron or steel. Taper
q 380
sol- 111-1958 EDITION t'.li.a'. SFANDAKt) 27-5-58
Ius
readed pipe two and o eehalfrnished on inches (211,'))Isi Ic larger. of
See. 16. The finished pipe shall be reasonably stialgnt and
ee from injurious defects. All burrs at the ends of tee Int e
all be removed.
IrNihl)RM BUILDING i;ODE, STANDARD 27-5 5S
Mild- tai Medium -Strength Carlioit-Ste=el Cl *tings for
General Application
hosed on TeataNwe up etfirat)outi 927 'aT of
the American Society for Tasting Atateriak
Schierl 2701, of the Vulform flnilding f'+.rhe, Yolutac t
See, 1. (a) These specifications co,-er mild -strength to Scope
medirini-strength carbon -steel castings for general applica-
tion as distinguished from carbon -steel and alloy -steel cast-
ings requiring a tensile strength in excess of 70,000 psi.
Note t. The grade:: ccrer,d 1" ti t. spa cil ation5 except
grades :F-3 and fen -30 reps •. ent mat -.rials that are rc gnizad
as readily weldable, but these limitations do not imply tear
material of emnl,r�iiaon iitfering from th p
weldable ulith the I— of proper [eehnigln
Note n Thr tern;-li.hle a "let"' to -tae'
dcas not rnply that ,,, special precaatior rcid Illtza a. to
t eldirig rn er all icy of Al
the i n ':f ant st I ca n r oti t, -el
part of it tr a sh l)z f r tl� war ii F, r i`
may me Sit t s7 i w' -Mme
,Tonsidered n,=_es r fa. thea "ldv,+,
taymntpti• at f rn .
(b) Eight gr do 1 steel-
eated bel
The b4 de cicnuet sha,i Y 1 vified n t
u chaser
n �:$tteda N d r.e,t pn od L fie t ici: n.calh i, t i its: itnlan
it treated ^xrej,t as eonditionanid
a pre ed.
7`Grades N- and 'x 3, not required to be m<st : ail:
ted but. required to ne he.Y treated as pi, :.led In
7,---
n 3.
,t Grade i b'i 30, r,,41dild to to ueci)ati I1,; t +!'J eu(
" t regmi -n tc bo )...at treated ;cpt as cond,tio- a ly in'n
ed.
-; Grades 60-30, 65-30 653'35, a .d 70 -S6, r Fined t t t -at
ated as pro6ded in Section 3 ai:d to be mill +i uaily°
stsd.
h rte 3 li
di_atin„ui,hed in their Krale 1,
respundin to tt c b ihn�ant i a i Lt i no i
all,- str.,agth .nag y„l,i );-,..t. r<:
:inl
U.R.C. STANDARD 2141-3i{ 1'NDPORM RUILDINtI CODE
calls for a minimum tensile strength and yield point of 60,000
and 30.000 psi., respectively.
Sec. 2. The steel shall be made by one or more of the
following processes: open-hearth, electric -furnace, converter,
or crucible.
Sec. & Ali castings of grades N-2, N-3, 60-30, 65-30,
65-35, and 70-36 shall be heat treated, either by full anneal-
ing, normalizing, normalizing and tempering, or quenching
and tempering.
Sec. 4. Furnace temperatures for heat treating shall he
effectively regulated by the use of pyrometers.
Sm 8. The steel shall conform to the requirements as
to chemical composition prescribed in Table I.
See. S. An analysis of each heat of steel shall be made
by the manufacturer to determine the percentages of the
elements specified in Table I. The chemical analysis shall
be made from drillings taken not less than one-quarter inch
(14") beneath the surface of the test ingot made during
the pouring of the heat. The chemical composition thus
determined shall conform to the requirements prescribed
in Table I and when specified in the inquiry, contract, or
order shall be reported to the purchaser or his representa-
tive.
Sec. 7. (a) An analysis may be made by the purchaser
from a broken tension test specimen or from a casting rep-
resenting each heat. Drillings for analysis shall be taken
not less than one-quarter inch (U") beneath the surface,
and in such manner as not to impair the usefulness of any
casting selected for such check analysis. The chemical
composition thus determined shall conform to the require-
ments specified in Table I.
(b) As unspecified alloying elements are unavoidable in
steel, the following restrictions shall be placed on their con-
centration in the welding grades, the determination of which
shall be a matter of agreement between the manufacturer
and the purchaser, and must have been specified in the
inquiry. contract, or order:
Copper, max, per cent ................................ 0.30
Nickel, max. per cent........... ..................... 0.50
Molybdenum, max, per cent. ................. . 0.20
Chromium, max, per cent ........................ 0.20°
j a ^ For each ,d -um of tee per cent carbon uml,r them specified�mrrel,
If 204 per cent chromium shove the maximumaspecified will he
is rehe hr.
cotmm4endednonthe .,herS. o[ chem strs uornthe -elf
carhon4mangane et retitian tmt,
See 8. (a) Steel used for castings of the grades that are
required to be mechanically tested shall conform to the re-
quirements as to tensile properties prescribed in Table It.
When specified in the inquiry, contract, or order, the prop-
erties obtained shall be reported to the purchaser or his
representative.
(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the
382
VOL HI lM EDITION U.R.C. STANDARD 27-5..0
beam or halt in the gage of the testing machine, or by
the used of dividers, or by an extensometer, at a cross-
head speed not to exceed one-eighth inch (tA") per min.
Where a definite yield point is not exhibited, the yield
strength corresponding to a limiting permanent offset of
0.2 per cent of the gage length of the specimen shall be
used instead and reported as yield strength. The tensile
strength shall be determined at a speed of head not to
exceed one and ore -half inches per minute.
Sec. 8. (a) Test coupons from which tension test speci- Test
mens are prepared shall be attached to the castings where specimens
practicable. If, in the opinion of the manufacturer, the
design of the casting is such that test coupons should not
be attached thereon, test coupons shall be cast attached
to separate cast blocks. The test coupons from which test
specimens are to be prepared shall remain attached to the
castings or blocks they represent until submitted for inspec-
tion, and shall be heat treated with the castings. Test
coupons shall be provided in sufficient number to furnish the
specimens required in Section 10.
(b) Tension test specimens shall be machined by the man-
ufacturer and shall conform to the dimensions shown in
Fig. 1.
See. 10. (a) One tension test shall be made from each heat Number
in each lot.- of Tests
(b) if any test specimen shows defective machining or
develops flaws, it may be discarded; and another specimen
substituted from the same lot,*
(e) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test
specimen is less than that specified in Table II and any
part of the fracture is more than three-fourths inch (%")
from the center of the gage length, as indicated by scribe
scratches marked on the specimen before testing, a retest
shall be allowed.
TABLE I -CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
GAADE
Carbon=
max., per
cent
neseega^ Silicon,
max., per max, per
3uifur, Phoe-
max., r phorus.
max, per
cent
cent
cen
cent
Grade N -L........__
Grade N-2 .............
0.25
0.35
0.75
0.60
0.80
0.80
0.06
0.05
GradeN-3...........
Grade U-60-30......
0.25
1.00
0.75
-
0.06
0.06
0.05
005
Grade 60-30..._.._..
0.30
0.60
0.80
0.80
0.06
0.06
0.05
0.05
Grade 65-30..._.....
Grade 65-35..........
._..
0.20
0.T0
0.80
00066
005
Grade 70.36..._.___
0.35
0.70
0.80
0.06
0.05
'For each reduction of 0.01 per cent carbon below the maximtun
specified, an Increase of 0.04 per cent manganese shave the maximum
specified will be permitted to a maximum of 1.00 per cent.
' The term 'gut" xhnil Le nn*idered as :di -,u
the same heattr<atinu pr,n-edvre.
38.9
I`.Ft.i;. FTANIi:1liU :!S_i-5!i
VNIhriH3r Iti7l.D1Nu..
"P , :ser n agreed npon by the maaufacturer
=3;e J, '-h:..... and after acceptance Y for one or more orders,
of F-nsecuts~:c nests used for making castings of enc
°n• e a te. the n:annfac3ar'er may assemble the rastsng
frnYu rua.�.dfr:g melts in groups of five heats each, T},•:
crsUng" ,rr each eu�h kernrp shall be accepted on the bass
r sj a err taken from every fifth heat.
tha f len: i nvh'4 of ail the heats in the group
:.t r tf • ra R statht ned
by the first 10 ennseeut",
r �3 all . rbs,.r;uent heats that arc.
i r' a raptable. If this test fail a physic ih
L.r the heat this
b rehearing.
other heats by f.uled spr
7h ':mre hr t- rn the group shall be to ,r..
n. r 10 treating prneedure used fur the
r'°'int heats stall hey used for all subse
shall be. establisha uet,rers for each grad-
�..
T
t
ti
f
.`vtan:fa rd Rnrad 'r'ensiun
'rest specimen ,rich
rr,tr-;nr•h rx"i c;ange L.mgtl,
TABLE rT--TP;NSifI,E
"WIREMENTS
'C [u
fr9 .fl f
a
ie 3c fig` 22 o
2A 35
30 9D0
j{
r t°- n 36 i ?5 Uq 3500. I 20 30
®55
.� i 35 000 ; 22 3D
tl ,l
} ec sere d upor t t r r tP rt arer ang theme••-----�•_.a.._
rs rs
sttan dui err 7.urch r, aad
r5
,( 3 I
hail n� 3,,'n;xi a Purchaser, the yletd nnt
p.nurds F"'antis Per agnare
P.. egr+are inch. Yn h in-
'rkl
ti
i BG Av4DARD 27 UNEMUM RUHMIING MbE
t to have toted is tension test specimen machined frvin
end of the transvem test bar. It this tension speci-
such confurms to the requirements Of the specified elms, as
given in Section 2. the clan requirement shad -
wed
as having been mat, irrespective, of the transverse ll be co
or
Sexure breaking "&
see. S. Test bars shall be sizes of transverse cast seWLtelY from re test bars
the caqt-
TestDA" jag, Three st&ndjLrd or ftexu
are available under these specifies;tIons as shown in Fig. 1.
Tension test shall be machined from the transverse
text ban to %Vgren:0"no she— in Fig. I
Correlation &C L (a) The manufacturer and the purchaser shall
and lose, =UI:n the controlling section of the casting. Then the
and Casting hug test bar "I be used as follows:
Nominal
Diameter
of Test Bar
Contro,99, Section Test Bar %Ztl
I . inches
0.50 and An 0.576
I: WD
0.61 to
1.01 t &y be used or
a �ext bar C -
Over s larger test bar may be used by
=,ge-tmgbestvreen the manufacturer
..r.
(b) The, correlation in Paragraph (a) is only approxi-
mate and may need modification for complicated castings,
and for castings with sections thinner than 0.50 inches. The
test bar size for a given casting may then be determined V,
agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
(c) When the controlling section is very heavy in com-
to other sections of the casting and if maximum
is sought in the controlling section, it is possibie
that chilled spots may be found in the light sections. 1r.
such cases it may be necessary to (1) use a lower strength
class for the controlling section, or (2) modify the design
W provide more section uniformity.
Moldft and Son, 7. Unless otherwise agreed upon by the manufacturer
and the purchaser, test bars shall be made under the ma' -if,
send conditions as the castings. The bars shall be poured
from ladles of iron used= the Castings. The test bane
shall receive the same treatment as the castings
in the ewe of heat treatment, the test bars shall be treated
adjacent to the castings they represent.
monaw Elan. 10. (a) The manufacturer shall prepare and furnish
OfTests, all test ban as agreed upon. Two or more test bars shall be
cast
(b) If any test specimen shows detective machining or
obvious lack of continuity of metal, it shall be discarded and
replaced by another specimen.
Sm IL (a) In ewe of failure of a test bar to conform to
these specifications, a retest may be made. If the retest
3M
M-1958 EDITION
U.B.C. (4TANDARD 2741-58
Wa
aw 5
W*4
d
A z
387
STANDARD 27-0-M
T'NIFQRM BUILDING C01w
—o
�----___---- ------------------
Distance
Snptweenn
Transeet
Baies)ic
Dimensions
gth
Transverse
(inches) (inch")
nr
(inches)
A .........................
0.875 15
12
B __
1.20 21
18
C..............................
2.00 2T
24
Fig. 1—Traneverse or Flexure Test Bars
r - Rddids -,
k------------------- k-------------- ----�
Dimensions of Tension Test Specimens, (inches)
Dimension Specimen A Specimen B Specimen C
b__....._............ ................... 1
c_........_.._-----
............................. 5.606 A 11.26
d_......._............__._ .................... Ice 1.00 2.00
V __......._._......_........._..._........._ Shall be equal or greater
than a (diameter)
f_._.._..__......._ ............._............... 1.00 1.00 1%
.............. .... ............... "__.... 0.25 0.25
...min.......__ ..................._...._--. 1.25 1.50 2t
i............_......__._..._ .................... 0.26 0.25 1
. min..._ ................................._. 3.75 4.00 6%
'Length of parallel.
F* 2—Ton11913 Teat Specimens Machined from Transverse
or Flexure Tait Bars.
fails, the castings shall be rejected, except as specified in
Paragraph (b).
(b) As provided for in Section 4 (d), when the transverse
or flexure test bar fails to conform to the specified require-
ments, a tension test specimen may be machined from a
broken end of the transverse test bar. if this tension sped -
men conforms to the requirements of the specified class, the
castings shall be accepted
Chemical Sea 12. It is the intent of these specifications to subordi-
nate chemical composition to physical properties. The quan-
388
III -1858 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 27-7-58
of any chemical elements in the cast iron may be speci-
y agreement between the manufacturer and the pur-
See. I.S. The castings shall conform svbstantially to the Workman -
mansions on drawings furnished by the purchases or to shipaad
to dimensions predicated by the pattern supplied by the Fluish
irchaser, if no drawing has been provided. The castings
mil be free from injurious defects. Surfaces of the castings
tall he free from burnt -on sand and shall be reasonably
nooth. Runners, risers, fins, and other cast -on pieces shall
s removed. In other respects the castings shall conform to
hatever points may be specially agreed upon between the
.anufacturer and the purchaser.
Sea 15. Upon request of the purchaser, the manufacturer Carthfication
mil be prepared to certify that his product conforms to the
iquirements of these specifications.
Note 1-401asses Nos. 20, 25, and 30 cover the ordinary Explanatory
rades of gray cast iron. Classes Nos. 35, 40, 50, and 50 would Notes
i considered high-strength irons, particularly in medium
ul heavy sections.
Note 2—The higher strength irons are usually more ex-
medve to produce and machine.
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 27-7-158
Structural Rivet Steel
Tentative Specification A141 -55T of the American
Society for Testing Materials
See Seotton 2701 of the Uniform Building Code, Volume I
Seoe, 1. Tbis specification covers soft carbon steel for riv- Soopo
ets for structural purposes.
Sec. 3. The steel shall be made by either or both of the fol- Process
lowing processes: open-hearth or electric -furnace.
See. C The steel shall conform to the following require- Cbsmiesi
ments as to chemical composition, as evidenced by the speciComposition
-
fied ladle and check analyses respectively.
Ladle Check
Analysis Analysis
Phosphorus, max., per cent:
Acid.......... ............... ............... - ......... -........... 0.06 0.015
Basic.............................................................. 0.04 0.05
Sulfur, max.. per cent ............... ..................... 0.05 0.063
Copper, when copper steel is specified,
min., per cent .............................................. 0.20 0.18 Trsde
Sec. 5. The material as represented by test specimens
388
U.B.C. STANDARD 27448 UNIFORM BUIId)ING Cope:
shall conform to the following requirements as to tensile
properties:
Tensile strength, psi ........................................ 52,000 to 62,0m
Thdd point, min., psi .................................... 28,000
Elongation In 8 in., min., per cent _ 24
OsadMg Sec. 0. The bend test specimen shall stand being bent cold
through 180 degrees flat on itself without cracking on the
of the bent portion.
e1406 See. 7. (a) Test specimens shall be of the full diameter of
the bars as rolled.
(b) Tension and bend test Specimens for rivet bars which
have been cold -drawn shall be normalized before testing.
Menobar Bee. L One tension test and one bend test shall be made
Sd700118 from each hest; except that if bars from one heat differ
three-eighths Inch (%') or more in diameter, one tension
and one bend test shall be made from both the greatest and
leaf diameters rolled.
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 27-5-58
Assembly of Structural Joints Using High Strength
Steel Bolts
Based on Specifications (February, 1954)
of the American Institute of Steel Construction
See Slctioas 2101 and 2709 of the Uniform Building Code,
Volume I
1. Scope Is) This specification covers recommended practices for
the assembly of structural steel joints using high strength
steel bolts tightened to a high tension. The bolts are used
in clearance holes of larger diameter than the nominal bolt
size.
(b) Bolts of the same nominal diameter may be substi-
tuted in any joint for rivets of quality conforming to the
requirements of U.B.C. Standard 27-7-58.
(c) Construction shall conform to the provisions specified
in Chapter 27, Volume I of the Uniform Building Code, 1958
Edition. for riveted structures, except as otherwise provided
herein.
2. befta, (a) Material. Bolts, nuts, and washers shall conform to
Nuts and the requirements for Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts
wadwo and Studs with Suitable Nuts and Plain Washers as specified
in Appendix B. Bolts manufactured to this specification are
Identified by marking on the top of the head with 3 radial
Uses.
(b) Balt Dhneasioas. Bolt dimensions shall conform to the
requirements for Regular Semifinished Hexagon Bolt as
specified in Appendix A.
� .... Soo
2L, HI -1058 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 27-848
In determining bolt lengths, the grip (total thickness of
2. Bone
nneeted material) shall be calculated the same as for
Nuts and
vets, and the values shown in Table I shall be added
Washers
ereto. These compensate for thickness of nut, two flat
(Cont'd.)
fishers, and bolt point. The total length shall be adjusted
i
the next one-fourth inch W) increment up to five -inch
I iVa
") length and to the next longer one-half inch ('h") in-
1%
ement for lengths over five inches (5").
]S/IR
If other than the standard thickness of circular washer
1
11i
given in Table II is used, the necessary bolt length shall
2!q 8 1a( 8175 1.6
2!¢ a 23{ S11R 1:8
adjusted accordingly. Where beveled washers of the
i jt
mansions given in Table II are used, an additional one-
ghth inch (till") shall be added for each such beveled
(c) Nut Dimensions. Nut dimensions shall conform to re-
drements for Heavy Semifinished Hexagon Nuts as awl -
ed in Appendix A.
(d) Washer Dimensions. Circular washers shall be flat
A smooth and their dimensions shall be not less than the
.lues set forth in Table II. Where clearance is necessary,
sabers may be clipped on one side to a point not closer
an 7/g of the bolt diameter from the center of the washer.
Where bearing faces of the bolted parts have a slope of
Dre than 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt
TABLE I—BOLT LENGTHS
' BOLT SIZE: ADD TO GRIP
(Inches) (Inches)
t
i
BOLT
laeida
%
1 �s
Dia.
ig�
irk
i
lttk
I iVa
i
1%
TABLE If—WASHER DIMENSIONS (Inches)
391
�QCARE BEVELED ANDARWASHERS
FOR A31F.RND STANDARD
CIRCULAR WASBERfi 1 REAW AND CHANNELS
BOLT
laeida
(Outside Thwknes ---- '--'•fear —
SIZE
Dia.
Dia. Gauge Va. Width Thiekneffi ':: Slope
8116
1% 12 1
y
77!18
72!78
I±i 10 ty' St76 1:6
2 9 1% S'IR ):6
Ii
]S/IR
2yy 8 !% Si7R ).8
1
11i
1 1/t6
1
2!q 8 1a( 8175 1.6
2!¢ a 23{ S11R 1:8
l#
i jt
S 8 24 3178 1:8
391
U.B.C. STANDARD 27-8.38 UNIFORM BUILDING C()111;
4. Assembly
axis, smooth beveled washers shall be used to compensate
for the lack of parallelism.
All washers adjacent to the bolt head and nut shalt hm
hardened in accordance with the requirements as specincd
in Appendix B.
(a) Material. This specification contemplates that th=
bolted parts shall consist of wrought iron, soft steel, .or
medium steel of a type commonly used in bridges, buildings,
and like structures.
(b) Dimensions. Surfaces of bolted parts in contact with
the bolt head and nut shall be parallel; except that they
may have a slope of not more than 1:20 with respect to,a
plane normal to the bolt axis if the requirements of Article
4(a) are observed. Bolted parts shall fit solidly together
when assembled and without interposition of gaskets or
any other flexible material. Holes may be punched, sub -
punched and reamed, or drilled, as required by the applicable
specifications, and shall be of a diameter not more than one
sixteenth inch (1/161) in excess of the nominal bolt diameter.
(c) Finish. The contact surfaces, when assembled,shall
be bare, descaled or carrying the normal mill scale. Contact
surfaces shall be free of paint, lacquer, dirt, oil, loose scaie,
burn, pits, and other defects that would prevent solid seat-
ing of the parts or would interfere with the development of
friction between the parts.
(a) Bolts shall be assembled with a hardened washer
under the bolt head and nut as described in Article 2. Fiat
wasters may be used if the abutment surfaces adjacent to
the bolt head and nut do not have a slope of more than 1:20
with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis; provided
that, In all cases of non -parallel abutment surfaces, the nut
shall be torqued against a non -sloping surface.
TABLE III—BOLT TENSION AND TORQUE VALUES
'Apprn*ipmteiy IS per cent in exttss of the reyurreei minimum iron ten
S on.
•' Eywi to 90 per cent ret theminim m proof load of holt. There is nc
recommgolnl mipimum 1.11 trrmlon.0
Eq -1 to O0167 11,. ft. per in iron diameter per ib, tensmn for n
1 bnepted "ores pad nuts. Values given are a*IKnmental ipproximatwns.
If torque rasher than tension is to Ix measured, the toryueaension ratio,
*tail he determiped to' rhe actual camiiHons of the application.
392
ID -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 27-8-58
All nuts shall be tightened to give at least the re- 4• Assembly
minimum bolt tension values given in Table III on (Cont'do
tion of the joint.
Note I—Wrenches should be set to induce a bolt tension
2 excess of the required minimum bolt tension as given in
'able III. Because of the varying relation between torque
nd'induced tension, it is suggested that wrenches be set to
(duce the recommended bolt tension for calibrating wrenches
a given in Table III.
Note 2—In using a power wrench, the recommendations of
Is wrench manufacturer should be consulted in its opera -
on, and care should be taken that the machine is main -
tined in proper working condition and proper calibration.
Note 3—In using a manual torque wrench, the required
trque can be read from the wrench dial, or in other types
' wrenches, the torque may be indicated by a release of the
tench. Care should be taken that the wrench is properly
thbrated. Nuts shall be in motion when torque is measured.
Note 4—In using manual plain wrenches, a ratchet wrench
'length consistent.with the man -effort available should be
led so that the product of the effective u rench length in
et times the man -effort in pounds exceeds the equivalent
rque required.
The Building Official shall establish the inspection pro-
dure in order to obtain compliance with Table III for bolt
nsion and torque values.
Appendix A
lasie Dimensions of High Strength Bolts and Nuts
HEAP YppNINB
{.—r�.l �H.L.90Lt LENGTH On
NOMINAL 1
BOLT
i
i N(T DIMENSOnn
APPROXIMATE—
Width A,-
RE ED•
REp.'iVIRED
EQUIVALENT
TORQUE FOR
&.ilt
it, T.,_
FOHi �ALiN_T'N
MINBOMLTMM
MIhiNUM
SIZE
WRENCHES
TENSION
BOLT TENSION
(m.)
t16.)
____________
(I6.)
db. ft.l
'22'Al
20;�
________._
10.250
—_____—__._.
io
i
29.000
95.800
3 0
/ I
37 ODD
52,400
479
i
49.000 I
71.00
42.500
50.900
710
980
1
toxo
1380
'Apprn*ipmteiy IS per cent in exttss of the reyurreei minimum iron ten
S on.
•' Eywi to 90 per cent ret theminim m proof load of holt. There is nc
recommgolnl mipimum 1.11 trrmlon.0
Eq -1 to O0167 11,. ft. per in iron diameter per ib, tensmn for n
1 bnepted "ores pad nuts. Values given are a*IKnmental ipproximatwns.
If torque rasher than tension is to Ix measured, the toryueaension ratio,
*tail he determiped to' rhe actual camiiHons of the application.
392
ID -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 27-8-58
All nuts shall be tightened to give at least the re- 4• Assembly
minimum bolt tension values given in Table III on (Cont'do
tion of the joint.
Note I—Wrenches should be set to induce a bolt tension
2 excess of the required minimum bolt tension as given in
'able III. Because of the varying relation between torque
nd'induced tension, it is suggested that wrenches be set to
(duce the recommended bolt tension for calibrating wrenches
a given in Table III.
Note 2—In using a power wrench, the recommendations of
Is wrench manufacturer should be consulted in its opera -
on, and care should be taken that the machine is main -
tined in proper working condition and proper calibration.
Note 3—In using a manual torque wrench, the required
trque can be read from the wrench dial, or in other types
' wrenches, the torque may be indicated by a release of the
tench. Care should be taken that the wrench is properly
thbrated. Nuts shall be in motion when torque is measured.
Note 4—In using manual plain wrenches, a ratchet wrench
'length consistent.with the man -effort available should be
led so that the product of the effective u rench length in
et times the man -effort in pounds exceeds the equivalent
rque required.
The Building Official shall establish the inspection pro-
dure in order to obtain compliance with Table III for bolt
nsion and torque values.
Appendix A
lasie Dimensions of High Strength Bolts and Nuts
HEAP YppNINB
{.—r�.l �H.L.90Lt LENGTH On
NOMINAL 1
BOLT
BOLT DJINIFNIBlosll
i N(T DIMENSOnn
AND
Width A,-
width A 1—
N TT
SIZE
r4"
lir,ahc
Flats
Tb } ,`•
F
H
w
T
%
15 fi
'22'Al
i
lit32
1,7'11
/ I
i 5/19
oS,tBi
7 ;:tin
5.5'1;
F
!4
3904
73'19
25,32
Z
I,
393
U.B..C. STANDARD 27-8-M UNIFORM BUILDINo CODE
Appendix B
Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs
With Suitable Nuts and Plain Washers
Based on Tentative Speeiacatlona A325 -53T of the
American Society for Testing Materials
Scope
1. (a) These specifications cover chemical and mechanical
requirements of quenched and tempered steel bolts, studs,
and similar externally threaded parts three inches (31) and
under in diameter, usually made of medium carbon steel
and for applications where high strength is required. Suit.
able nuts and plain washers also are covered by these speci-
cations.
(b) Where the term `bolt" is used in these specifications,
reference is intended also to studs and similar externally
threaded fasteners.
ess
2. la) Steel for the manufacture of bolts shall be made
by either the open-hearth or electric -furnace process.
(b) Steel for the manufacture of nuts shall be made by
the open-hearth, electric -furnace, or acid-bessemer process.
(c) Steel for the manufacture of washers shall be made
by the open-hearth or electric -furnace process.
Fabrication
3. is) The bolts shall be heat treated under uniform con-
ditions. The bolts shall be quenched in a liquid medium and
shall then be tempered by being uniformly reheated to a
minimum temperature of 300 F.
(b) Threads of bolts may be cut or cold formed.
I c i Nuts need not be heat treated.
id) Washers shall be either quenched and tempered, or
carburized, quenched and tempered.
Chemical
4. (at Bolts, nuts, and washers shall conform to the re-
omposition
quirements as to chemical composition prescribed in Table I.
(b7 Check analyses may be made by the purchaser from
finished material representing each lot of bolts, nuts, or
washers not carburized. The chemical composition thus de-
termined shall conform to the requirements prescribed in
TABLE I—CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
WASHERS
Quenched and
Hai TIS \CTS Carberued i Tempered
two per rent 0.80 .... 025 maz. ...
mt 0.30 n I 1.00 maR.
t R O.018
0,13 0.019 0.046
005h 0.23 ' nose a.ose
' 1
494
YOU III -1858 EDITION U.B.C- STANDARD 27-3.53
Paragraph (a), except that resulfurized material is not
subject to rejection based on check analysis for sulfur.
(c) Bolts, nuts, and washers are customarily furnished
from stock, in which case individual heats of steel cannot
be identified.
5. (a) Bolts shall meet the hardness requirements speer Mechaalcel
fied in Table II. This shall be the only requirement for bolts Properties
which are too short or which have insufficient threads for
tension testing or which have drilled or under -size heads
that are weaker than the threaded section of the bolt.
(b) Bolts, other than those excepted in paragraph (a),
shall he subject to a tension test in addition to the hardness
test:
(1) Bolts 4/ inch and under in diameter shall meet the
requirements for proof load of bolts and ultimate load of
bolts specified in Table II and Sections 8 (b) and 7 (b) or
7 (c).
(2) Bolts %s to lys Inch In diameter, incl., shall meet the
requirements for proof load of bolts specified in Table II and
Sections T (b) or 7 (c). They shall preferably also meet the
:requirements for ultimate load of bolts specified in Table II
Wand Section 3 (b) but when equipment of sufficient capacity
for test of the ultimate load is not available they shall meet
the requirements for reduced dimension test specimens apeci-
Sed in Table II.
(3) Bolts ]y to 11/1 inch in diameter, Loci., shall prefer-
ably meet the requirements for proof load of bolts and ulti-
mate load of bolts specified in Table II and 8 (b) and 7 (b)
or 7 (c) but when equipment of sufficient capacity for such
tests is not available they shall meet the requirements for
reduced dimension tests specimens specified in Table II.
(4) Bolts larger than lye inch In diameter shall meet the
requirements for reduced dimension test specimens specified
In Table II.
(c) Nuts, except jam, slotted, and castellated nuts, shall
be subjected to a proof load or to a hardness test:
(1) Nuts I% inch and under in diameter shall meet the
proof load of nuts specified in Table II,
(2) Nuts I% to lye inch In diameter, Ines., shall preferably
asset the requirements for proof load of nuts specified in
cable II but when equipment of sufficient capacity for this
xat is not available they shall be subject to a hardness test
)fid their hardness shall not be less than 121 Brinell (70
tockwell B).
(3) Nuts larger than lye Inch In diameter shall be sub -
acted to a hardness test and their hardness shall not be less
ban 121 Brinell (70 Rockwell B).
"(d) Carburize(] washers shall have a hardness of 88 to 75
tockweli A, and shall be carburized to a minimum depth
0.015 inch. Quenched and tempered (non-carburizedt
fashera shall have a hardness of 35 to 45 Rockwell C.
fDARD 17-8-M
UNIFORM BHILDINO 0,0D1:
396
\c�
Elm
1—
E
VOL. M-1868 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 27-8-5$
6. (a) Proof Load of Bolts. Proof load of bolts shall be Tension
determined with a straight full-size threaded bolt specimen. Tests
The bolt shall be placed in a suitable self -aligning fixture
(Fig. 1) with the threaded end of the belt in a threaded
grip or in a nut. The bolt shall be screwed into the thread
run -out and then unscrewed six full threads. If the method
of determination of proof load described in Section 7 (b) is
ueed, the bolt shall be subjected to the proof load of bolts
specified in Table II and the load then released. If the
alternate method of determination described in Section 7 (c)
is used, the bolt shall be subjected to load at a testing
machine crosshead speed (free running) not greater than
one-eighth inch (%") per minute, until the specified proof
load offset is attained and the load shall be released.
(b) Ultimate Load of Bolts. Ultimate load of bolts shall
be determined with the same bolt and testing fixture used
for the proof load test. The bolt shall be placed in the fixture
with a 10 -degree wedge conforming to the dimensions listed
in paragraph (d) under the head. The bolt shall be screwed
into the threaded grip or nut to the thread run -out and then
unscrewed six full threads. The bolt head shall be so placed
that no corner of the hexagon or square takes bearing load;
that is, a flat of the head shall be aligned with the direction
of uniform thickness of the wedge. The bolt shall be sub-
jected to load at a testing machine croashead speed (free
running) not greater than one inch (1") per minute until
fracture of the bolt occurs. Fracture shall be in the body
or threads of the bolt without any fracture at the junction
of the head and body. If failure occurs by stripping of
threads, the individual test shall be discarded and another
specimen substituted.
(c) Reduced Dimension Test Specimens. Reduced dimen-
sion test specimens for bolts seven -eighths inch (°%") to one
and three-eighths inch (1%") in diameter, incl., shall be
made by machining the shank of the bolt to the dimensions
of a standard one-half inch (1/2") round tension test speci-
men. The specimen shall be concentric with the axis of the
bolt but shall leave the head and at least six full threads
intact. They shall be tested in the fixture used for tests of
the proof load of bolts [paragraph (a)]. Specimens for bolts
larger than one and three-eighths inches (1%") in diameter
shall be the standard one-half inch (ii") round tension test
Fig. 1—Tension testing full-size bolt.
397
F
Y ;
G�.
42 .
�'.
IgE'
—
Fy =
•-
RF'_
M 3
--
FY i
Fye �
E
396
\c�
Elm
1—
E
VOL. M-1868 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 27-8-5$
6. (a) Proof Load of Bolts. Proof load of bolts shall be Tension
determined with a straight full-size threaded bolt specimen. Tests
The bolt shall be placed in a suitable self -aligning fixture
(Fig. 1) with the threaded end of the belt in a threaded
grip or in a nut. The bolt shall be screwed into the thread
run -out and then unscrewed six full threads. If the method
of determination of proof load described in Section 7 (b) is
ueed, the bolt shall be subjected to the proof load of bolts
specified in Table II and the load then released. If the
alternate method of determination described in Section 7 (c)
is used, the bolt shall be subjected to load at a testing
machine crosshead speed (free running) not greater than
one-eighth inch (%") per minute, until the specified proof
load offset is attained and the load shall be released.
(b) Ultimate Load of Bolts. Ultimate load of bolts shall
be determined with the same bolt and testing fixture used
for the proof load test. The bolt shall be placed in the fixture
with a 10 -degree wedge conforming to the dimensions listed
in paragraph (d) under the head. The bolt shall be screwed
into the threaded grip or nut to the thread run -out and then
unscrewed six full threads. The bolt head shall be so placed
that no corner of the hexagon or square takes bearing load;
that is, a flat of the head shall be aligned with the direction
of uniform thickness of the wedge. The bolt shall be sub-
jected to load at a testing machine croashead speed (free
running) not greater than one inch (1") per minute until
fracture of the bolt occurs. Fracture shall be in the body
or threads of the bolt without any fracture at the junction
of the head and body. If failure occurs by stripping of
threads, the individual test shall be discarded and another
specimen substituted.
(c) Reduced Dimension Test Specimens. Reduced dimen-
sion test specimens for bolts seven -eighths inch (°%") to one
and three-eighths inch (1%") in diameter, incl., shall be
made by machining the shank of the bolt to the dimensions
of a standard one-half inch (1/2") round tension test speci-
men. The specimen shall be concentric with the axis of the
bolt but shall leave the head and at least six full threads
intact. They shall be tested in the fixture used for tests of
the proof load of bolts [paragraph (a)]. Specimens for bolts
larger than one and three-eighths inches (1%") in diameter
shall be the standard one-half inch (ii") round tension test
Fig. 1—Tension testing full-size bolt.
397
i' E:c. STAN
Testa
( 4.)
DARD $7.g Sg
UNIFORM HLTII.DLYG ('QOh:
apecimans taken from the shank of the bolt with the axis
ace ofthe bolt flee center of the bolt and the outsideshansu«.
shall be subjMt loaaeadtttCaedtdimensionaehine aroash�a
speed (trea running) not greater than one-eighth inch (i,",
Per minute until the yield strength is determined. Thee,
s� ex
tot ceed one inch (1") per minute while the tespteeis;
being continued to fracture of the specimen.
(d) Wedge for Ulthuste Load of Holt►. The wedge speci-
fied to be used in testing the ultimate load of bolts shall have
an Included angle of 10 degrees between its faces and shall
have a thickness of one-half the nominal bolt diameter at
the short side of the hole. The hole in the wedge shall have
the clearance over the nominal size of the bolt and its edges,
top and bottom, shall be rounded to the maximum radius
Prescribed in Table III.
7. (a) Proof load of bolts may be determined by either of
the methods described in paragraphs (b) or (c), at the
Option of the manufacturer. The method specified in para-
graph (b) shall be used as the referee method if there is dis-
agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
(b) Measurement of the specimens subjected to the proof
load of bolts shall, except when the method described in
Paragraph (c) is used, be performed in the following man-
ner: The over-all length of the bolt aha11 be measured at its
true centerline withan instrument capable of measuring
0.00
changes in of 0.0001 inch with an accu001
inch in any 0.001-m. 0.0001
range. After loading racy of 0.0the bolt as
aPecified in Section 6 (a) its length shall be again measured.
There so pe
stance of rmanent elongation of the bolt. A tol-
of *O .00 0g inch will be allowed as the difference
between the measurement made before loading and that
made after loading, The preferred method of measuring the
length is measurement between conical centers on the center -
lane of the
and bolt with mating centers on the measuring anvils
with the head or Shank
aof the bolt marked so that it
can be Placed in the same position for all measurements.
(c) The following method may be used as a measurement
of proof loadof bolts alternate to that described In para-
graph (b). An autographic record shall be made of the load
TABLE I M _WXDGE DIMENSIONS
BOi.7 SIZE,
NOMINAL
47nchea)
CLEARANCE I
IN' H ULE
MAXIMUM
RADIUS UN
I
1
CORNEA
OF HOLE
34 to ah ....................
a to ;i ....................)
0.50 030
%2
t4 1 ..........
0.0
1% to -I%
o0.03to-I%......._.......�
l ib to 1
0.083
%
0.094
EM
III -1958 EDMON U.H.C. STANDARD 2741.58
' and the total elongation of the bolt or the elongation of any
'part of the bolt which includes the exposed six full threads.
The load at an offset from the load elongation line which is
x.'1.2 per cent of the thread pitch* shall be not lass than the
following:
00r.T DIAMETER MINIMUM LOAD
and under . - - -- - -- -- - _ ........ 88,000
°!s to 1, incl. ...._ 81,000
1% to 11/2, incl. .. .....................----- 77,000
(d) Yield strength of reduced dimension test specimens
shall be determined by the offset method. Yield strength
shall be the stress at 0.2 per cent offset.
S. (a) The hardness of bolts, unless otherwise agreed be- Hardness
�.tween the manufacturer and the purchaser, shall be deter- Test
mined on a transverse section through the threaded portion
of the bolt at a point one-quarter of the nominal diameter
from the axis of the bolt. This section shall be taken at a
'r distance from the end of the bolt which is equivalent to the
i-, diameter of the bolt.
(b) Rockwell hardness of nuts shall be determined on the
;top or bottom face of the nut. Brinell hardness shall be
:`determined on the side of the nuts. Either method may be
"used at the option of the manufacturer.
9. (a) Proof load of nuts shall be determined by assem- Proof
bling the sample nut on a hardened, threaded mandrel or Load of
on a bolt conforming to these specifications. A load axial Nuts
with the mandrel or bolt and equal to the proof load of nuts
;specified in Table 11 shall be applied against the nut. The
nut shall resist this load without damage. If the threads
`' of the mandrel are damaged during the test, the individual
test shall be discarded.
(b) The mandrel shall be threaded to American Standard
class 3 tolerance except that the major diameter shall be the
minimum major diameter with a plus tolerance of 0.002 inch.
10. (a) Three bolts shall be selected for the hardness test Number
and three for the tension test from each lot of bolts. of Tests
(b) Three nuts shall be selected for test from each lot
of nuts.
let Three washers shall be selected for the hardness teat
and in the case of carburized washers, for measurement of
depth of carburization.
(d) A lot of bolts, nuts, or washers shall consist of the
following:
DIAMETER
(inches) NXNIBER OF I'IECES IX IAT
14 to %, incl. ...._..._........_............ 25,000 or fraction thereof
% to ss, incl, .................................. 15,000 or fraction thereof
% to 1, incl ...... .._.. _._................... 5,000 or fraction thereof
Over 1 ... .............._........................ .... 2,500 or fraction thereof
' This is 0,2 per cent of the length of the bolt xeupied b7 six.fuil threads
399
UAV, STANDARD 27-9-58 UNIFOR.II BUILDING Ct)pl1
RM -1, It. Should any specimen fail to meet the requirements c -t
a specified test, an additimb
onal sample of double the nul'r
�,f specimens from the same lot shall be tested, in whirr:
case all of the additional specimens shall meet the speci-
fications.
)larking 13. Bolt heads shall be marked with three radial lire;
120 degrees apart and shall also be marked to identify th�-
manufacturer. Markings may be either raised or depresses:'.
at the option of the manufacturer, who may also use ad&
tional marking for his own use. Nuts for use with bolts
ordered t" th'sr xpeeifirations are riot required to be marked.
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 27-9-58
Are and Gas Welding
Based on Standard Cale for Are and Gas Welding
(1946) of the American Welding Society
Sep Sections 2701 and 2710 Of the Uniform Building Cale,
Volume I
Section 2—Design of Welded Connections
Part 1: Article 201. Plana and Drawings, (a) Full and complete
Cwneral information regarding location, type, size and extent of all
Requirements welds shall be clearly shown on the plans or detail drawings,
The plans or detail drawings shall clearly distinguish be-
tween shop and field welds.
(b) Note shall be made on the detail drawings of those
Joints or groups of joints in which it is especially important
that the welding sequence and technique of welding be
carefully controlled to minimize shrinkage stresses and
distortion.
(e) Weld lengths called for on the drawings shall be the
effective lengths.
Article 202. Rivets and Bolts. (a) In new work, rivets or
bolts in combination with welds shall not be considered as
sharing the stress, and welds shall be provided to carry
the entire stress for which the connection is designed.
(b) In making alterations to structures, existing rivets
fmaY be utilized for carrying stresses resulting from existing
dead loads, and welding shall be provided to carry all addi-
tional stress.
Part Ift Article 203. General, Unit stresses specified herein are for
Perftissfide d re -
Unit Stresses welded stralnt Ofipaa Parts duts In ring cooliresidng havebeenbeen properlys due to cgontrolled
and kept as low as possible, by using. a planned sequence and
Procedure of welding as prescribed in Article 403.
Article 20C Unit
ints con-
Strueted v the basses ma erial ain nd 81tefilter rmetal ed porescribed
In this Standard, shall be proportioned so that the stresses
Caused therein by the loads specified in the building code
shall nct exceed the following values:
400
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 27-9-58
PERMISSIBLE UNIT Permissible
82ND OF STRESS STRESS. POUNDS PER Unit Stress"
Tension on section through throat Same ads corrrespoad ng al- (Contd.)
of butt geld Towable stress for base
metal
Compresatoa on section through Same as corresponding s1-
tbroat of hart! weld Towable stress for base
metal
Shear on section through throat Same as corresponding al -
of butt weld lowable stress for base
Shear on section through throat metal
of fillet weld, or on faring sur-
face area of plug or slot weld 13,600
(b) Fiber stresses due to bending shall not exceed the
values prescribed above for tension and compression, re-
spectively.
(c) Stress in a fillet weld shall be considered as shear on
the throat, for any direction of the applied stress.
(d) Plug or slot welds shall not be ascribed any value in
resistance to stress other than shear,
Article 205. Combined Stresses. In the case of fillet welds
subjected to both shear and bending stresses, the maximum
unit stress resulting from the combination shall not exceed
,.that allowed for shear in Article 204,
Article 206. Increased Unit Stresses. When the building
code permits the use of increased unit stresses for stresses
due to combinations of loads, or to secondary or erection
stresses, a corresponding inereae shall be applied to the
allowable unit stresses in welds.
Article 207. Effective Areca of Weld Metal. (a) The ef-
fective area of butt and fillet welds shall be considered as
the effective length of weld times the effective throat thick-
ness.
(b) The effective shearing area of plug and slot welds
shall be considered as the nominal cross-sectional area of
the hole or slot, in the plane of the toying surface.
(c) The effective area of fillet welds in holes and slots
shall be computed as specified in Article 207 (a) for fillet
welds, using for the effective length, the length of center
line of the weld through the center of the plane through
the throat. However, in the case of overlapping fillets, the
area thus computed shall not exceed the nominal cross-sec-
tional area of the hole or slot.
(d) The effective length of a fillet weld shalt be the over-
all length of full size fillet including returns.*
(e) The effective length of a butt weld shall be the width
of the part joined, when the ends of the weld are made
as specified in Article 406 (e). A transverse skewed butt
weld shall not be assumed in computations to be longer
than the width of the joint or piece perpendicular to the
direction of stress.
(f) The effective throat thickness of a fillet weld shall be
the shortest distance from the root to the face of the dia-
* See Article 211 (f).
401
U.B.C. I TANDARD 27-9-58 UNIFORM BUDAING CODE
11
grammatic weld. (The effective throat thickness of an equal.
leg, 45 -degree fillet weld is 0.707 times the normal leg of -
of the weld.)
Ig) The effective throat thickness of a complete -penetra-
tion butt weld shall be the thickness of the thinner part
joined.
(h) The effective throat thickness of an incomplete-pene.
tration butt weld shall, for design purposes, be considered
as reduced in accordance with the provisions of Article 210.
Article 208. Qualification ofJoint Types The types of
joints described In Articles 209, 210, 211 and 212 may be used
without procedure qualification tests if the welding pro.
cedures conform in all respects to the provisions of Sections
2,3and 4.
Article 209. Complete -Penetration Butt Welds. (a) com.
plote-penetration butt welds shall be those having thorough
fusion of weld and base metal throughout the entire depth
of the joint, A11 other butt welds shall be considered incom.
plete-penetration welds,
tb) Complete -penetration butt welds in the following joints
are exempt from procedure qualification teats:
thee. ge h (A") tthick,joints iwe d d in the S tn material not opositire on only.
on both aides, with separation of joint edges not less
than one -bait the thickness. Gouging or chipping out the
back side of the initial layer before depositing welds on
the other side, prescribed in Article 400 (d) for complete -
penetration welds, may be omitted.
Single -vee butt joints with included angle not less than
60 degrees, and single -bevel butt joints with included
angle not less than 45 degrees; welded both sides with root
face not exceeding one-eighth inch OV) and root open-
ing not less than one -sixteenth inch (Ire").
Single -vee sad single -bevel butt joints with included
angIs not less than 45 degrees; welded one side onto a
bee oo�a
and roott
openingn lwithoute material, less than three -sixteenths -sixteenths inch
(I4").
Double -vee butt joints with included angle not lose
than 60 degrees, and double -bevel butt joints with in-
cluded angle not less than 45 degrees; with root face not
exceeding one -sixteenth inch (A-) and root opening not
less than one-eighth inch (%').
Single -3 butt joints welded both sides, and double-J
butt joints; both having included anglesnot less than 45
degrees, if made in the horizontal position and not less
than 25 degrees if made in the other positions; with root
radius not lea than one-half inch (%"), root face one-
ih inch (x4"), to three-sixteentha inch (fy'), and
root opening not exceeding one-eighth Inch (%-),
Sillggie-11 butt joints welded both sides, and double -U
butt joints; both with included angle not less than 45
degrees if made in the horizontal position and not less
402
VOL III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 27-9-58
than 20 degrees if made in other positions; with root Deism of
radius not lees than one-quarter inch (%"), root face one- Welded
sixteenth inch W) to three -sixteenths inch (,fel) and Joints
root opening not exceeding one-eighth inch W). (Coned.)
Single -bevel, double -bevel, single -J and double-J butt
joints, having included angles, root faces, root radii and
root openings as described herein, may be used for join-
ing a grooved part to an extended surface disposed
approximately at right angles thereto. All such joints
shall be welded from both sides except that the single.
bevel and single -J joints may be welded from one side only
if completely fused to a backing of the specified base
materiel.
(c) I= single -bevel„ double -bevel, single -J and double-J
butt joints, made in the horizontal position the square, or un-
prevared, edge shalt be on the bottom part joined.
Article 2i9. gaoemplete Peswtration Batt Welds. (a) In.
complete penetration butt welds may be used in the follow.
ing joints, but only at points where their failure would not
In any way endanger the structure. They 'shall be made as
newly complete penetration w the method of welding will
permit, but where they are used to carry calculated stress,
the effective throat area shall be deemed to be no more than
as hereinafter provided:
S�gqowe-edge butt Joints in material not more than one-
eighth inch (%') thick, welded from one side. The effective
throat thiCknesa shall be deemed to be only one-half the
thickness of the parts joined, unless the abutting edges are
separated by more than one-half the thickness of the
thinner part joined.
Square -edge butt joints in material not more than one.
quarter inch (%") thick, welded from both sides with the
abutting edges separated not more than one -sixteenth
inch QV). Gouging or chipping out the back side of the
initial layer before depositing welds on the other aide
may be omitted. The effective throat thickness shall be
deemed to be three-fourths of the thickness of the thinner
part joined.
Square -edge butt joints in material not more than one.
quarter inch (%') thick welded from one side, with abut-
ting edges separated by not leas than one-half the thick-
ness of the thinner part joined. The effective throat thick-
ness shall be deemed to be only three-fourths the thick-
ness of the thinner part joined.
Single -vee butt joints welded from one side only with
included angle of not leas than 60 degrees; root face riot
exceeding one-eighth inch (%*); and root opening not las
than three thirty-seconds inch (fill. The effective throat
thickness shall be deemed to be three-fourths the thickness
of the thinner part joined.
Single -bevel butt joints, welded from one side only with
included angle of not lose than 45 degrees; root face not
exceeding one-eighth inch (%*); and root opening not
lea than three thirtY-seconds inch tfi"). The effective
103
U.B.C, `;TANDARD t'< 9-A LNWORM BUILDING CODE
0
throat thickness shall be deemed to be three-fourths the
thickness of the thinner part joined.
(b) Incomplete penetration butt welds, made from one
side, between square edged parts, or in single vee or single
bevel grooves, shall not be used to carry calculated tensile
stress, even on the basis of the prescribed reduced effective
throat thickness, unless the joint is restrained to prevent any
rotation which might result from the eccentricity of the weld
with respect to the welded parts.
Article 21L Fillet Welds. (a) Fillet welds may be used
without procedure qualification tests, but shall conform
to the requirements prescribed in this Article and Article
404.
(b) Size. The relation between weld size and the maxi-
mum thickness of material on which various sizes of strength
fillet weld may be used shall be in accordance with the fol-
lowing table:
SIZE OF FILLET WELD MAXIMUM THICKNESS OF
(inches) PART (inches)
r3.....................................................
?5 ................ ........... ..... .._......--, . sa
?�.................................................... 2
}$.................. ............... ................. .. 6
56....................................................Over 6
The maximum nominal size of fillet weld applied to a nomi-
nally square edge of a plate or section shall be one -sixteenth
inch CA") less than the nominal thickness of the edge,
and the nominal size of fillet weld used along the toe of
an angle or the edge of a rounded or sloping flange shali
not exceed three-fourths the nominal thickness of the angle
leg or three-fourths the nominal edge thickness of the slop-
ing flange; except that when required by the design con-
ditions and specially designated on the drawings, fillet welds
equal in size to the edge of a plate or rolled section may be
used, provided that the weld is built out in such a manner as
to insure full throat thickness, full fusion area, and no in-
jury to the base metal that will reduce its thickness adjacent
to the weld.
(c) Length and Spacing. The minimum effective length of
a strength fillet weld shall be not less than four times the
nominal size, or else the size of the weld shall be considered
not to exceed one-fourth of its effective length. (See Article
207 (d).) If longitudinal fillet welds are used alone in end
connectins, the length of each fillet weld shall be not leas
than the perpendicular distance between them. The trans-
verse spacing of longitudinal fillet welds used in end con-
nections, shall not exceed eight inches (W), unless end trans-
verse welds or intermediate plug or slot welds are used.
(d) Intermittent Fillet Welds. Intermittent fillet welds
may be used to transfer calculated stress across a joint or
faying surfaces when the strength required to less than that
developed by a continuous fillet weld of the smallest prac-
tical size. The effective length of any segment of inter -
lot
VOL III -1988 tDITION L.B.C. STANDARD 27-9-58
mittent fillet welding shall be not less than four times the Details of
weld size with a minimum of one and one-half inches (I%'). Welded
The clear spacing between the effective lengths of such Joint*
segments at the edges of plates and the unsupported edges (Cont'd.)
of rolled shapes carrying calculated stress shall not exceed
the following number of times the thickness of the thinner
part joined:
16 times for compression
24 times for tension
and shall in no case be more than twelve inches (12"). The
effective length of longitudinal fillet welds at the ends of
built-up members shall be not Iess than the width of the
component part joined.
(e) Lap Joints. The minimum width of laps, on lap joints,
shall be five times the thickness of the thinner part joined
and not less than one inch (11). Lap joints joining plates or
bars subjected to axial stress shall be double fillet welded,
excerestrained where
inedto Prev ntnof the Opening laped Of parts
thejont under maxi-
mum
mum loadng.
(f) End Returns (Boxing), Side or end fillet welds termi-
nating at ends or sides, respectively, of parts or members
shall, whenever practicable, be returned continuously around
the corners for a distance not less than twice the nominal
size of the weld. This provision shall apply to side and top
fillet welds connecting brackets, beam seats and similar con-
nections, at the tension side of such connections, on the plane
about which bending moments are computed. End returns
shall be indicated on the design and detail drawings.
(g) Fillet welds in holes or slots may be used to transmit
shear in lap joints or to prevent the buckling or separation
of lapped parts. Such fillet welds may overlap, subject to
the provisions of Article 207 (c).
1111 Article 212. Plug and Slot Welds. (a) Plug or slot welds
may be used in plates not more than one inch (1") thick,
where subjected principally to shearing stresses or where
needed to prevent buckling of lapped parts.
' (b) The transverse spacing between slots shall not ex-
ceed eight inches (S") unless the design otherwise prevents
excessive transverse bending in the connection.
(c) If the material is not over five-eighths inch (%") in
thickness, the hole shall be filled with weld metal approxi-
mately flush with the surface of the part; if the material
is over five-eighths inch (%") in thickness, the hole shall
be filled with weld metal at least to five-eighths inch
in depth.
(d) Holes for plug welds shall be circular. The diameter of
the hole shall be not less than the thickness of the part con-
taining the hole plus five -sixteenths inch ( *"),rounded to the
next greater odd sixteenth. It shall not be greater than three
times the thickness of the weld metal.
(e) The width of slot shall be not less than the above-
specified diameter for plug welds. The maximum length of
slot shall not exceed 10 times the thickness of the part con-
fairing the slot
105
C.B.C. STANDARD 27.9-58 UNIFORM BUILDING Com
) The ends of slots shall be Semicircular or Shan have
the COMM sounded to a radius not less than the thickness
of the part containing the slot.
Article 218, Eceentrlcity. In designing welded joints, ade-
gnate provision shall be made for bending stresses due to
eccentricity, if any, in the disposition and section of base
metal parts and in the location and types of welded joints.
Arm 214, Combinations of Welds. If two or more of the
general types of weld (butt, fillet, plug, slot) are combined
in a single joint, the effective capacity of each shall be
separatein orders to determine the allowablted with reference e pathe rity of thego
com-
bination.
Put 1V: Article 215. Stitch Weida If two or more plates or rolled
shapes are used to build up a member, sufficient stitch weld.
Details ing (of the fillet, plug or slot type) to make the parts act in
unison shall be provided as follows exceptwhere transfer
of calculated straw between the parts joined requires closer
(1) For plats, the longitudinal clear spacing between
stitch welds shall not exceed the provisions of Article
211 (d) and the transverse spacing shall not exceed 32
times the thickness of the thinner plate joined.
(2) For members composed of two or more roiled
shapes, in contact one with another, the longitudinal spac-
ing of Stitch welds shall not exceed twenty-four inches
(24") or the limits prescribed in (3),
(3) For members composed of rolled shapes, sepa-
rated one from the other by a gusset plate, the com-
ponent parts shall be stitched together at intervals such
that the critical ratio, 11r, for each component between
stitching shall not exceed three-fourths the critical ratio
for the whole member,
le
noers fgtieor-
tioby their mm moments oin e_ Butt -welded sers shall plices shall
be made with complete -penetration butt welds. If the flanges
we spliced, the splices shall either develop the full effective
strength of the material or they shall develop the strength
required by the total stresses, calculated on the assumption
that all live and impact loads are increased 15 per cent, but
in no case Shall such strength developed be less than 50 per
cent of the effective Strength of the materia) spliced.
Article 217. Connections of Tension and Compression main -
ben
compsesson members in connections
shaalll eiither deds vf tension or
elop the full
effective strength of the material or they shall develop the
strength 1410that luired l live and impact loae total ds are increasedd on 4he
15
per cent, but in no case shall such strength developed be
Iess than 50 per cent of the effective strength of the mste-
r)al connected.
Article 218. Killed Joists In Compression Members. (a)
406
voL. III -1858 EDITION C.B.C. STANDARD 27-9-58
ii'here compression members are in full -milled bearing on
base plates, and where full -milled tier -building columns are
spliced, there shall be sufficient welding to hold all parts se-
curely in place.
(b) Where other compression members are spliced by full -
milled bearing, the splice material and its welding shall be
arranged to hold all parts in line and shall be proportioned
for 50 per cent of the computed stress.
(c) But all the foregoing joints shall be proportioned to
resist any tension that would be developed by specified
wind forces acting in conjunction with 75 per cent of the
calculated dead load stress and no live load, If this condition
of loading will uroduce more tension than with full dead
load and live load applied.
Article 219. Filler Plates. Fillers of less than one-quarter
inch (ala") thickness shall not be used to transfer stress,
but shall be trimmed flush with the welded edges of the
stress -carrying element and the sizes of the welds along the
edges shall be increased over the required sizes by an
amount equal to the thickness of the filler.
Section 8—Filler Metal
Article 801. General. (a) All are -welding electrodes shall Filler MOW
be suitable for the positions and other conditions of intended
use.
(b) With each container of electrodes the manufacturer
shall furnish instructions giving recommended voltage and
amperage (and polarity if direct current) for all uses and
welding positions for which the electrode is suitable.
(c) All gas welding rods shall be suitable for the condi-
tions of intended use.
19-1,1
Article 802. Old Work. Filler metal to be used In the re -
,....,1} pair or strengthening of old structures, or for joining new
parts to existing steel members, shall be adapted to the
materials to be welded and may depart from the foregoing
requirements.
Section 4—Workmanship
Article 401. Preparation of Material for Welding. (a) Worknumship
Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag,
rust, grease, paint and any other foreign material, except
that mill scale which withstands vigorous wire brushing
may remain. A light film of oil or rust inhibitive coating
without pigment may be disregarded. Joint surfaces Shall
be smooth, uniform and free from fins, tears end other de -
facts which adversely affect proper welding.
(b) Surfaces which are to be welded after erection prefer-
ably shall not receive any shop paint. If painted before erec-
tion, the paint on surfaces adjacent to joints to be welded
shall be thoroughly removed to expose clean steel for a dis-
tance of at least two inches (2") on either side of the joint.
(c) Preparation of edges by gas cutting shall, wherever
practicable, be done with a mechanically guided torch.
Edges shall be left free of slag.
S ",s .407
t7. t', SMANDARD 'I`.-9-38 V 41FORM RUMDING COI31
Worionsamblp Article 408. Asseatbly. (a) The parts to be joined by
(Ctsam) fillet welds shall be brought Into as close contact as pray
ticable, and in no event shall be separated more than three.
sixteenths inch (iV), u the separation is one -sixteenth inert
(A') or greater, the size of the fillet weld shall be increased
by the amount of the separation. The separation between
laying surfaces of lap joints and of butt joints landing on a
backing structure shall not exceed one -sixteenth inch (A"),
The fit of joints produced by contact surfaces which are not
scaled by welds throughout their length shall be sufficiently
close to exclude water after painting.
(b) Abutting parts to be joined by butt welds shall be care-
fully aligned. Where the parts are effectively restrained
against bending duc to eccentricity in alignment, a maximum
offset of 10 per cent of the thickness of the thinner part
joined, but in no case greater than one-eighth inch (%"),
may be permitted as a departure from the theoretical align-
ment. In correcting misalignment in such cases, the parts
hall not be drawn in to a greater slope than two degrees
(A inch in 12 inches).
(c) Members to be welded shall be held in correct posi.
tion by bolts, clamps, wedges, guy lines, struts, other suitable
devices or by tack welds until welding has been completed.
Such fastening devices as may be used shall be adequate to
insure temporary safety. Suitable allowances shall be made
for warpage and shrinkage.
d) Tack
(made shall subject oewheres located
t same qual final t
y requirementsas
be
the final welds. Where tack welds are encountered in the
final welding they shall be cleaned and fused thoroughly
with the final weld. Defective, cracked or broken tack welds
shall be removed before final welding.
Article 408. Control of Distortion and Shrinkage Stresses.
(a) The work shall be positioned for flat welding whenever
Practicable.
(b) in assembling and joining parts of a structure or of
built-up members and in welding reinforcing parts to existing
members, the procedure and sequence of welding shall be
such as will avoid needless distortion and minimize residual
shrinkage stresses. A back -step or wandering sequence shall
be used where necessary to avoid these conditions.
In so far as practicable, long parallel lines of welding on
a part or member shall be executed concurrently, and all
welds shall be deposited in a sequence that will balance
the applied heat of welding on various sides as much as
possible while the welding progresses.
(c) Before the commencement of welding on a member
or structure in which welding is likely to result in locked -up
stresses or distortion, a complete program for welding se-
quence shall be given to the welding operators. Such a pro-
gram shall be required in all cases of making butt welds in
material greater than one and one-half inches (%") in thick-
ness and in all cases of making butt -welded splices in sec-
tions other than rectangular in cross-section, such as roiled
sections and built-up girders and columns.
468
U.B.C. STANDARD t74-38 UNUMRM BUILDING toiq
Wwkmanmblp The maximum permitted sire of electrode shall be thn c.
( ) sixteenths inch (,%"), except that for horizontal fillet we;
it may be one-quarter inch (V), and, in fiat position we:, -
Ing, for the passes following a root pass it may be fi"
sixteenths inch (,%").
The maximum thickness of weld metal that may be built
up behind the advancing are shall be one-eighth inch (%,,
except that a root pass of a butt weld may be one-quarter
Inch (141), and except that a single pass fillet weld, or the
root pass of a multi -pass fillet weld, may be made up to the
maximum size permitted in the next paragraph.
The maximum size of fillet weld that may be made in one
pass shall be five -sixteenths inch (A"), except that, for
vertical welds made upward the maximum size made in
one pass shall be one-half inch (%'),
Each time the are is started the electrode travel shall
be delayed until base metal fusion at the starting point is
assured. At the completion of a pass, the electrode travel
shall be delayed sufficiently to fill the are crater.
After every interruption of the arc except at completion
of a pass, the arc shall be restarted ahead of the previous
deposit and then moved back to fill the crater; or such
alternative technique shall be used as will equally well in-
sure complete filling of the crater, complete fusion between
the new and old deposits and the base metal at the point of
junction, and complete resultant continuity of weld.
Before welding over previously deposited weld metal, all
traces of slag shall be removed from the deposit, by chipping
if necessary, and the deposit and adjoining base metal shall
be wire -brushed until clean at all points. This requirement
Shall apply not only to successive layers, but alio to suc-
cessive beads and to the overlapping area wherever a junc-
tion is made on starting a new electrode, but it shall not
�
t potion making of plug and Slot welds deposited in the
In making plug and slot welds the metal may be de-
posited by a continuous manipulation of the electrodes which
will keep the slag molten and floating on the top of the pool.
The technique used shall be one which will insure the deposi-
tion of sound weld metal free from any slag inclusions and
shrinkage cracks.
(b) Automatic arc welding may be used subject to pro-
cedure qualification tests comparable In scope to those pre-
scribed for manual are welding.
Arm 405. Technique of Gas Welling. (a) The weidiM
flame +hall be either neutral or alightly reducing, as ap-
propriate for the work.
The size of the inner cone or cones shall be regulated to
Mgt the thickneaS of base metal, the criterion being heat
Production at a rate which maintains a quiet pool of molten
acetal and causes fusion of the filler metal with both base
/"'\ "• ` m I Thall times. ome orifice of the welding tip ahall be clean
Shall be taken as evidence that thor unsymmetrical needs cleaning or
repair.
(b) The size of welding rod shall be suited to the base
#10
U.B°C. STANDARD 57-9.58 UNIMR31 BUILDING CODs.
Waidoaaaablp method is employed, the length of each step need only be suf.
( d,) ficient to provide a solid foundation of weld metal for tl.e
superimposed layer, except that if annealing of the underly-
ing layers is desired, the length of each step shall be suf-
ficient so that the starting end thereof will cool to at least
a black heat before metal is deposited thereon.
Article 40L Details of Weida. (a) Exposed faces of welds
shall be made reasonably smooth and regular, shall conform
as closely as practicable to design requirements and shall
not at any place be inside the intended cross-sections. Weld
dimensions in excess of design requirements will be per-
mitted unless they involve serious malformation or cause
serious deformation or shrinkage stresses.
(b) The faces of fillet welds may be slightly convex, flat
or slightly concave. In no case except at outside corners shall
the convexity exceed the value 0.13 + 0.03 inch, where S is
the actual size of the fillet weld in inches.
(c) Butt welds shall be provided with only sufficient sur-
face convexity to insure full cross-sectional area at the joint.
The height of reinforcement shall not exceed one-eighth
Inch (?5").
(d) All complete -penetration butt welds, except when pro-
duced with the aid of backing material or welded from
both sides in square -edge material not more than five -
sixteenths inch (A") thick with root opening not less than
one-half the thickness of the thinner part joined, shall have
the root of the initial layer gouged or chipped out on the
back aide before welding in started from that side. Butt
welds made with the use of a backing of the same mate-
rial as the base metal shall have the weld metal thoroughly
fused with the backing material. Backing strips may be
removed by means of gas cutting, after welding is completed,
provided no injury is done to the base and weld metal and
the weld surface is left flush or slightly convex with full
throat thickness.
(e) To insure soundness the ends of butt welds carrying
stresses approaching the maximum allowable working stress
shall be extended past the edges of the parts joined, by
means of short extension bars providing a similar joint
preparation and having a width not less than the thickness
of the thicker part joined. If extension bars are removed
upon completion of the weld, the ends of the weld shall be
left smooth and flush with the edges of the abutting parts.
Where the metal is not more than three-quarters inch (%"'.
in thickness the extension bars may be omitted if the ends
of the butt weld are chipped or cut down to solid metal,
and side welds are applied to fill out the ends to the same
reinforcement as the faces of the weld.
Article 407. Quality of Welds. (a) Weld metal shall be
solid throughout except that very small gas pockets and
mlall inclusions of oxide or slag may be overlooked if well
dispersed.
(b) There Mall be complete fusion between the weld metal
and the base metal and between successive passes through-
out the joint.
412
Vol„ III -1858 EDITION L'.B.C. STANDARD 57-9-M
(e) Welds shall be free from overlap and the base metal (Wooufr14
free from undercutting.
(d) All craters shall be filled to the full cross-section of
the welds.
Article 488. Corrections. (a) Where the following require-
ments prescribe the removal of part or all of the weld, or
a portion of the base metal, such removal shall be effected
by chipping, grinding, gas cutting or gas gouging.
Gas cutting shall not be performed on a member while
under stress, except that detail cutting to correct minor
errors may be done if the removal of metal does not reduce
the strength below design requirements.
(b) Defective or unsound eweldhall bas followed either
by removing and replacing
Excewlve convexity—Reduce to size by removal of excess
weld metal
ters, blow -
Shrinkage cracks, cracks 1nbase ousmetal, ct�ive ins
boles and excessive porosity—
of base and weld metal down to sound metal, and deposit
additional weld metal
Undercutting, undersize and excessive concavity—Clean
and deposit additional weld metal.
overlapping and lack of fusion—Remove and replace the
weld.
slag Inclusions—Remove those parts of the weld contain-
ing slag, and fill with weld metal.
Removal of adjacentse metal
etaaddi Tonal eld metal can
aweldnd form hildepositingl size by
(c) Wherever corrections necessitate the depositing of
additional weld metal, an electrode or welding rod of a size
not exceeding five thirty-seconds inch OV) shall be used.
(d) A cracked weld shall be removed t throughout it
length, unless by the use of acid etching, magnetic
tion or other equally positive means, the extent of the crack
can be ascertained to be limited, in which case sound weld
metal two inches (2") or more beyond each end of the crack
need not be removed.
(a) In removing defective parts of a weld, the gas goug-
ing chipping o grinding shall not extend into the base
metal any substantial amount beyond the depth of weld
penetration unless cracks or other defects exist in the base
metal. The weld or base metal shall not be nicked or under-
cut in chipping, grinding or gas gouging.
(f) Where work performed subsequert to the making of
a deficient weld has rendered the weld inaccessible or has
caused conditions which would make the correction of the
deficiency dangerous or ineffectual, said conditions shall be
sary befoated re making theremoval of welds correcti ns, ormembers or else theif neces-
deficiency
shall be compensated by additional work according to an
approved revised design.
(g) Caulking of welds shall not be done.
413
UAC, sTA\DABD 27-10.38
(h) Before adding weld metal or reweld M the aurfaoes
shall be cleaaed thoroughly.
(I) Improperly fitted and misaligned parte may be cut
apart and rewelded, Members distorted by the heat of weld•
ing may be straightened by mechanical y #h,
means or b.
carefully supervised application of a limited amount b heat.
Such heated areas shall not exceed 1200 degrees F, re
dull rad color}. Under no
tions circumstances shall heated por.
be quenched, s to be heated for straightening aha!]
be sPart
ubstantially unloaded at the time.
Article 400. Peening Where required, muitip}e-layer welds
may be Peened with light blows from a power hammer, using
an elongated roand-nose tool. Peening shall be done after
the weld hes cooled to a temperature warm to the hand.
Care shall be exercised to prevent scaling, flaking or rup-
turing of weld and base metal from over -peening,
Article 410. Cleaning and Protective Coatings, Painting
Shall not be done until after the work has been inspected and
approved. The surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned of
spatter, rust, loose scale, oil and dirt. Slag and flux deposit
shall be cleaned from all welch
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 27-10-58
Mild Steel Are -Welding Electrodes
Baftd on Tentative of
the American Welding Socciiety A. T M. A2cations 33-33T)
see Section 2701 of the Uniform Building Coda, Volume 1
Sen. 1. These specifications cover light -coated and covered
metal arc -welding electrodes for the welding of carbon and
low -alloy steels of weldable quality.
;Part I—CiaselAeatloa and Acceptance
Sec. 2. (a) The electrodes are classified in Table I on the
basis of the tensile strength of the deposited weld metal.
type of coverin
Of the electrodes. g, and type of current and welding positions
(b)Any ele
not be%y classified under one classification shah
ssified under any other classification.
will Sec. L The electrodes may be madproducte by any methods that
"eccieeatioOeld aDS. conforming to the requirements of these
Sec, 4. The electrodes shall not be required to comply witb
any imitations on the chemistry of electrode or of deposited
see. S. (a) The following tests are prescribed to demon-
strate the mechanical propertiesan
herein: d soundness of the de.
Posited metal and the usability of the electrodes classified
�o
r�
.O.y COQ�Y~
w
m
pimp+
H
a7� G
HOT., qY
��'��"`+.,
F
Z
yz
°
m
y°zy
�v���Y. a
�Qgog.,� d
I
n
pp
p�
IN $
"y
p�
Rt
Rium�{ 'Ai
sR7 n u=s
�Q
a
y
Ci
.0
��
i{ti tS ii ti ti�C�u
oi�ioi fro
ko�
pN
F5a
�p�gy g►glygit@�yp�'r���
a$
m
x
O
a}�g
tg
6o
gozz,
g
xxxxxx�,
dixxxxxOe
«7,Ury, <
COpty FO
�
a
K
�p
OOOOOm
ssHSI a
88rY%�io 0
'.�-� Ho k
P E
o
8 ;E
fi�K�ss�
EVER
adz
i
iI�(
dG
I
Iffil
nJ)INO, CODE
�Y
iU
,� YFF1
i�
d^�
VOL III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 27-10.58
[.�
dvv Vc vvv ve u do TIT�o i11 v � . a
p
ooaoc
EtFv ZEE tE ZEE 4E!ez atE!
E�ppw:°�' � � r°.
iHGz
C7
petE
pCOCG CFqCCCCCOp ra an cacao
aWA
E Em 'O sI 9 9 t"�y1 9 Y d CEJ O 'C t'CL'O'O
0 O o a SO a 7 5
`: g x wY xp x a � I
CSC G C> C p Cp C C G C a ..=a
p2m
xd ex ax $ e 3 m z
Irl
O O
O�
7 7 p a
5wH
�gwe4 �wLa4w tlw�s4w Ew�ww ��w
t7
a�L°n cy a c� F C G C p
'd�H
3 a a a S B a B
H
pp pp
0
a-", J
wm n^
a
b
<
:v e�
o
y°
mdm iL9upmo.: a r
iSBG u uOR vqO pC utl
Y slJ m C q �
(yG1
!!i
M; Hill
i
oepH
ii
U
417
I
U.B,C. STANDARD 27-1038 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Ail -Weld -Acetal Tension Test
Gadded -Bend Test
Fillet -Weld Test
(b) Tests shall be performed when and as prescribed by the
electrode manufacturer.
(c) At the Option and expense of the purchaser any or all
Of the foregoing tests may be used as a basis for acceptance
Of electrodes.
Mdboft of See. S. Test specimens shall be prepared in kind and in
Test number as specified in Table n and testa shall be conducted
in accordance with Section 17 of these specifications.
Test See. 7. In order to be classified under these specifications
Railialreesents an electrode shall be capable of yielding the following re-
sults:
(a) The all -weld -metal tension test specimens shall con-
form to the requirements prescribed in Table M.
(b) Guided -bend test specimens, after bending, shall show
no crack or oth r open defect exceeding one-eighth inch
('A") measured in any direction. Cracks occurring on cor-
ner) of a specimen during testing shall not be considered.
(c) The fillet -weld test specimen shall upon examination
be free from cracks or other open defects affecting its
strength. Upob examination of the face that has been pol-
ished and etched as prescribed, it is required that:
(1) Each fillet weld shall have penetrated to or beyond
the junction of the plate edges,
(2) The difference in length of both legs of each fillet weld
shall be not more than three -sixty-fourths inch (3/64")
for a five -thirty-seconds inch (5/3211) fillet weld, plus
ane -sixty-fourth inch (1,16411) additional for each addi-
tional one -thirty-second inch (1,3211) of fillet weld size.
(3) The convexity (of convex fillet welds) shall be not
more than three sixty-fourths inch (s}") for a one-
eighth inch (%") fillet weld, plus one sixty-fourth
inch (,(a"1 additional for each additional one-eighth
inch OV) of fillet weld size,
(4) The welds and the base metal shall be free from
cracks, and
(5) The weld shall be reasonably free from undercutting,
overlap, trapped slag and porosity.
Retests Sec. 8. If any specimen fails, one additional test assembly
shall be welded and tested in accordance with the require-
ments of Section 7.
I7arevvre See. 10. (a) The diameter of the core wire shall not vary
s" more than plus or minus 0.002 inch from the standard size
specified. The length shall not vary more than plus or minus
ane -quarter inch ('.a") from that specified.
(b) The covering on covered electrodes of all sizes shall
be concentric to the extent that the maximum core -plus -
one -covering dimension shall not exceed the minimum aore-
pluswne-covering dimension by more than three per cent.
The concentricity shall be measured by any suitable means.
418
III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 27-10-.0
-!'- (c) Core wire and coverings shall be free of defects which
.would interfere with uniform performance of the electrodes.
Sec. 11. (a) Covered electrodes for manual welding shall Exposed
be bare or free from covering for a distance of about three- Core
quarters inch (3'a"), but not more than one and one-quarter
inches (I !V') for making contact with the holder.
(b) The are end of each electrode shall be sufficiently bare
to permit easy striking of the arc. The distance from the
are end to the first point where the full cross-section of the
covering prevails shall not exceed the diameter of the core
wire. However, for electrodes larger than one-eighth inch
0.") the core wire shall not be exposed around more than
one-half the circumference at a distance of one-eighth inch
(%") or more from the arc end.
See. 12. Standard sizes and lengths of electrodes are shown Standard
in the following table. In all cases, standard size refers to the Sisal sad
diameter of the core wire. Lengths
standard Sires, Standard
Diameter of npgsttyh
Core Wire (inches) Lengths
1}.........._........................................ .... ........... 9 or 18.
J% and h- ..... ........................... ..._............. .. 12 or 18,
}(<-dig ......................................................... 14
rjt..................................................................... 14 or 18
ars. %, $ and % ..................... ..... ....... ........... 18
- Electrodes may also be provided in coils or reels.
s In the case of IS -Inch lengths of *.and 1f, -Inch electrodes.
mater-gripfiing of the electrodes is standard. In all other cases. and.
gripping fs Standard.
Sec. 18. Electrodes shall be packaged as follows: Padta(tiag
(S) Bundles or boxes, not exceeding 50 pounds net weight,
or
TABLE M — hiINIl" TENSILE STRENGTH AND
DUCTH.ITY REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL -WELD -METAL
TENSION TEST IN THE AS -WELDED CONDITION -
ELECTRODE
TENSILE
11Ei.D 101\1
Et ONC i.
tttt.N iti Z
CLASSIFICATION
STRENGTH
111, I
C, 111\.
NUMBERnil\.,
p. s. i.
J
PER CEVI
E4510 ..................
E4520 ................
45 000
45 000
sot spec fi 3
not "M ified
5
'
E6010 ............ .....
62 000
SO 000
22
E6011:::::::::::::::::
62 000
so 000
22
E6012 ..................
E6013 ..................
67 000 1
67 000
58 000
55 000
1;
17
E601S ................')
67 000
000
1
E6016 ........ ..........
67 000
55 000
22
E6020 ................
E6024 ................
62 000
67 000
50 0005
55 nae
I-
E60a7............... ::�
E6030 ..................
62 000
62 000
s0 000
S0 000
2;
2=
a Sea Table A Nor slaw to be tested.
419
1'.B.C. STANDARD 21-1138 CNIFIIRM BUILDING CODE
(b) Calla or reels, not exceeding approximately 200 pounds
net weight.
See. 14. All bundles, boxes, coils, or reels shall be legibly
marked with the following information:
(a) classification,
(b) Manufacturer's name and trade designation,
W Slee and net weight, and
(d) Guarantee.
Sec. 16. The manufacturer shall guarantee that the elec-
trodes in all sizes and classifications conform to these speci-
fications and each container shall be so marked. The manu-
facturer's responsibility shall be limited to replacement of
any electrodes which do not conform to the requirements of
these specifications.
Part II—DetaBs of Tests
See. 17. The tests specified in Sections 5, 6 and 7 shall be
conducted in accordance with the requirements of Table II
for each size and classification of electrodes using the posi-
tions of welding and types of current shown.
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE. STANDARD 27-11-58
Welded and Seandess Steel Pipe Mlles
Based on Standard Specifications A252-55 of the
American Society for Testing Materials
See Sections 2701 and 2808, Uniform Building Code, Volume I
seope Sec. L These specifications cover nominal (average) wall
furnace -welded, electric -welded, and seamless steel black
pipe piles of cylindrical shape. They apply to piles in which
the steel cylinder acts as a permanent load -carrying mem-
ber, or alternatively acts as a shell to form cast -in-place
concrete piles. These specifications are not intended to apply
to pipe for general structural purposes.
Process Sec. 2. The steel shall be made by one or more of the
following processes: open-hearth, electric -furnace, or acid-
bessemer.
Tensile See. 3. (a) The material shall conform to the require -
Properties ments as to tensile properties prescribed in Table I.
(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of
the beam, by the halt in the gauge of the testing machine,
by the use of dividers or other approved method.
Test Sea 4. (b) Tension test specimens shall be cut longitudi-
Speclasesm from the pipe pile and not flattened between gauge
marks. By agreement between the manufacturer and the
purchaser, the tension test specimen may be taken from
420 4E,s
W,
t
I1I-1858 EDITION C.B.C. STANDARD 27-11-58
the skelp. The width of the specimens within the gauge
;length shall be one and one-half inches (1%'). At the option
sof the manufacturer, the specimens shall be either the two-
inch (2") or eight -inch (8") gauge lengths indicated in Table
L The sides of the specimens shall be parallel between gauge
marks.
(c) All specimens shall be tested at room temperature.
(d) On welded pipe piles, the test specimens shall be taken
at a point 00 degrees from the weld.
See. 5. (a) One tension test shall be made on one length Number of
of pile from each lot of 200 lengths or fraction thereof of Tests
each size.
(b) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test
specimen is less than that prescribed in Table I, and any
part of the fracture is more than three-quarters inch (%")
from the center of the gauge length of a two-inch (2")
specimen, or is outside of the middle third of the gauge
length of an eight -inch (8") specimen, as indicated by scribe
scratches marked on the specimen before testing, a retest
shall be allowed. If a specimen breaks in an inside or outside
surface flaw, a retest shall be allowed.
(c) If any test specimen shows defective machining or
develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen
substituted.
See. 6. If the results of the mechanical tests of anp lot do Retests
not conform to the requirements prescribed in Table I, re-
tests shall be made on additional lengths of double the
original number from the same lot, each of which shall
conform to the requirements specified.
Sea. 0. (a) Unless otherwise agreed upon between the
manufacturer and the purchaser, material shall be ordered
in single or double lengths, and shall be furnished in accord-
ance with the following regular practice:
Single random lengths...._.. 16 to 25 feet, incl.
Double random lengths...... over 25 feet with a minimum
average of 35 feet,
(b) Lengths which have been spliced at the mill by weld-
ing shall be acceptable as the equivalent of unspliced lengths
provided tension test specimens cut from sample splices con-
form to the tensile strength requirements prescribed in Table
L The welding bead shall not be removed for this test. Such
specimens shall be made in accordance with the provisions
specified in Sections 4, 5, and 6.
Sea 10. Unless otherwise specified, material shall be for-
rdahed with plain ends. All buns at the ends shall be re-
moved. Plain end material for welding, unless otherwise
specified, shall be beveled to an angle of 30 degrees with a
tolerance of plus 5 degrees. minus 0 degree, With a width of
flat at the eras of the pipe of A t is loch.
Sea 11. (a) The finished pipe piles shall be reasonably Flablb
straight and shall not contain imperfections in such number
421
UA(% "MIliNDARD '17-114511 UNIFORM BUILDING CODF
V10L. W-1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 30-1-58
TABLE I—TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
I Gra1de
Gra2de
Grade
a
;isude strength, min,. psi
50000
60000
75000
Yield point. min., Pei ...........
30000
35000
45000
Basic raimmum, elongation fari
19.00
(0.250)_
27.00
walls ;a� inch and over in,
18.00
(0.219)_ ..........
25.50
thickness:
17.00
A MISS)- .
24.00
Elongation in 8 inches, mini-
16-00 1
mum, per cent __
is
14
Elongation in 2 inches, mini-
mum, per cent. -
30
25
20
For walls less than 19 inch in
thickness a deduction for
each is -inch decrease in
wall thickness below 41,
inch from the basic mini-
mum elongation of the fol.
-lowing percentage.
1.50-
1.25-
1 1.0-
-The following table gives the computed minimum values;
WALL THICKNESS
(inch")
ELONGATION IN 2 INCHES,
MIN.. PER CENT
Grade I
Grade 3
?v (0.312) .............
30.00
25.00
20.00
28.50
23.15
19.00
(0.250)_
27.00
22.50
18.00
(0.219)_ ..........
25.50
21.25
17.00
A MISS)- .
24.00
20.00
16-00 1
Nott. The above table gives the calculated minimum elongation
values for each A -inch decrease in wall thickness. Where the wall
thickness 11" between two values shown above the minim=
elongation value shall be determined by the following formula:
Grade Formula
1—...._._..___._...__.........__..._......._-._....._... f = 48t + 15.00
2.......__..._...._...__._.__..._ . ........... . E = 40t + 12.50
where: _ B = 32, + 11100
E elongation in 2 in. In per cent, and
=actual
thickness of specimen, In Inches.
See- 11. (a) The finished pipe piles shallbe reasonably
straight and shall not contain imperfections in such number
Or of such character asto render the pipe unsuitablefor
Pipe PueL
M Surface defects the depth of which does not exceed 25
Per cent of the nominal wall thickness shall be permitted.
AM
AMM may be explored by grinding or filing to establish
de^
(c) Surface defects the depth of which exceeds 25 per cent
CC the nominal Wall thickness may be considered injurious.
422
Ing of injurious defects may be permitted when the
I of defect does not exceed 33% per cent of the nominal
thickness. Before welding, defects shall be completely
Sed out.
a. 12. Each length of pipe pile manufactured in accord- Marking
with these specifications shall be legibly marked, either
penciling, stamping, or roiling, with the manufacturer's
ite identifying mark together with the size, weight,
X wall thickness, and the words "Grade 1 (2 or 3)
�UNIFORM RULDING CODE STANDARD 30-158
Dampers
Based on the National Board of Fire Underwriter;
Pamphlet No, 90A (dune, 1957)
See Section 3004, Uniform Building Code, Volume I
See, 30.101. This Standard applies to automatic fire doors Scope
and dampers in systems other than residence type.
See. 30.102. The following terms shall be construed as speei- Definitions
fled in this Standard.
See. .30.103. FIRE DA31PER. A damper arranged to auto-
matically seal off air flow through a part of an air duct
system, preventing the passage of beat and smoke.
See. 30.104. FIRE PARTITION. A fire partition is a parti-
tion for the purpose of restricting the spread of tire or to
provfile an area of refuge, but not necessarily continuous
through all stories nor extended through the roof.
See. 30.105. FIRE WALL. A wall for the purpose of sub-
dividing a building or separating buildings to restrict the
spread of fire and which starts at the foundation and extends
continuously through all stories to and above the roof, except
r semi -fireproof and the wall is
where the roof is fireproof 0
carried up tightly against the underside of the roof slab.
See. 30.106. Ducts shall not be built into a building in such Provisions
a way asto impair the effectiveness of the fireproofing for Ducts -icing through
around steel or iron structural members, such as placing
I
ducts between the fireproofing and the members protected, Fire We)si
except in the case of beams or joists protected by a fire-
r"Ntaace ceiling.
Where ducts installed above a fire -resisting ceiling are pro-
vided with openings in the ceiling, it is important that such
openings be limited in size and adequately protected to pre-
serve
reserve the required fire -resistance. Such openings shall have
approved means for protection.
if access doors are necessary in a required fire -resisting
423
U-B.G• STANDARD WX1 M UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
PrWANINW ceiling, they shall be limited to a maximum size of four
for Duch hundred square inches (400 sq. in.) and be of construction
through equivalent in fire resistance to the ceiling.
Fire Wates
(Cont'd.) Sec. 30.107. The passing of ducts through fire walls shall
be avoided wherever possible. When ducts or the outlets from
or inlets to them pass through fire walls, they shall be pro-
vided with approved automatic fire doors on both sides of
the avails through which they pass. On small openings not
exceeding eighteen inches (1811) in diameter, three -eighths -
inch (3x") steel plates may be used in lieu of fire doors. Suit-
able hand hole openings shall be provided to make all fire
doers and tire dampers in ducts accessible for inspection and
servicing.
See. 30.108. Fire dampers, installed in the system, as required
at other than fire wall openings, shalt be No. 16 U.S. gauge
steel in ducts up to eighteen inches (18") in diameter or
greatest width, No. 12 U.S. gauge on diameters up to thirty.
six inches (36") or greatest width and No. 7 U.S. gauge on
ducts above thirty-six inches (36") in diameter or greatest
width. Louvered type fire dampers may be constructed of
No. 18 U.S. gauge steel, provided the individual louvers are
not over six inches (6") in width and are stiffened by formed
edges. One -half-inch (%") approved rigid asbestos sheet
material may be used at points where steel dampers are
specified, when permission of the Building Official is granted.
Sec. 30.108. Fire doors and fire dampers shall be arranged to
close automatically and remain tightly closed, upon the
operation of an approved fusible link or other approved heat
actuated device located where readily affected by an ab-
normal rise of temperature in the duct. Fusible links should
have a temperature rating approximately 50 degrees F. above
the maximum temperature that would normally be encoun-
tared with the system in operation or shut down. Hinged
dampers shall be equipped with spring catches and pins of
hinges shall be of corrosion -resistant material.
Sec. 30.110. An approved fire damper shall be provided on
It opening through a required fl% partition. Approved
damPere shall be provided as follows:
1. Serving two or more Roars. Where duct systems serve
two or more Sours, approved fire dampers shall be required
either (1) at each direct outlet or inlet and in each branch
duct at its junction with the main vertical duct or (2) at
each point where a floor is pierced. Dampers are not required
at room openings in branch ducts except as specified in Sec-
tion 30.106. Dampers are not required in branch ducts having
a eters-sectional area of less than twenty square inches (20
sq. in.) which only air dis
air at not over fouryfeet (4r) above the oninfloor.its Damperrs may
be omitted In small buildings with unprotected floor openings
subject to approval by the Building Official.
2, IN systems of eves fifteen thousand cable feet (15,800
cu, ft. i. In systems of over fifteen thousand cubic feet (15,000
CtL ft.) per minute capacity, serving areas where large num-
1110111 Of people congregate or areas having valuable contents
424
IH -1958 EDITION' U.B.C. STANDARD 30-1-58
particularly subject to smoke damage, except when system Installation
In located on the same floor that it serves, it is recommended of Approved
that approved smoke dampers be installed in the main supply Fire
duct and main return duct. Such dampers should be arranged Dampers
to close automatically when the system is not in operation (Cont'd.)
and also by the operation of the smoke detecting apparatus
Corby the manual emergency motor stop.
'3. Exhaust of air to outside. Fire dampers provided in
._,ducts used solely for exhaust of air to the outside, shall be
installed in such a way that they will not interfere with the
'. flow of air in the main duct. No dampers are required in a
system serving only one floor and used only for exhaust of
"air to the outside. Dampers should be designed to close in
,",the direction of air flow. Where direction of exhaust air flow
":'.. is upward. subducts at least twenty-two inches (22"1 in
length may be carried up inside the7 main duct from each
_< inlet, in lieu of dampers.
4. Aluminum ducts. Aluminum ducts which pass through
C :fire -resistive floors, unless incased; shall have approved auto-
, ` matie fire dampers at the floors.
See. 30.111. Fresh air intake shall be protected with approved Fresh Air
automatic fire doors or dampers except where permission to Intakes
omit them, because of light exposure, is granted by the Build-
ing Official. When deemed necessary by the Building Official
approved heat -actuated devices shall be installed at intake
openings to shut fans down in case of exposure fires.
See. 30.112. Fire doors at openings through fire walls and Protective
fire dampers at fire partitions shall be so arranged that the Arrangement
disruption of the duct will not cause failure to protect the
opening.
NOTE: This may be accomplished by locating the fire
door or damper in a collar securely fastened to the wall.
(N.B.) -Duets which pass through floors of "fireproof eosetruetum", "semi.
fireproof construction" or heavy timber construction, in which vertical open-
fgs are gen—ally protected, shall be .ne sed m four inch (4"1 U+.!I�.w 0, ttle,
amagch (d) gypsum block or their equivalent. Such construction, however,
dull not be required for branches which are cut off frwn the main portion of
the duet by approved fire dampers.
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 32-1-58
Wood Shingles
Based on the 17. S. Department of Commerce, National
Bureau of Standards
Commercia. Standard "1-52 (October, 1952)
See Section 3203, Uniform Building Cade, Volume I
See. 32.101. This quality Standard provides a minimum spe- scope
cification for the highest commercial grade of sawn wood
shingles of the three species known as "No. 1 grade." It covers
length, width, thickness, grain, characteristics and color for
these requirements, plus definitions, specifications and inspec-
tion.
425
STANDARD 32-2-58 _
UNIFORM BUILDING COPT.
U.B,C, w'TANDARD 30'-1-58
V •. U.B.C.
tri M-1958 EDITION of these }
color j
Q 3':.162. For the purpose of this Standard, the followiri;
the
• ,(d):fColor, Variation diiRerences in thehdens density natural
are caused by found that the
terms shall be construed as herein specified.
a�ieoies et been
filtrations. No evidence has
has any influence upon ;
32103 CROSS GRAIN. A condition that should
`
..0010r ie
eilbr of tha heartwood of any species
resistance. Consequently. color dif-
Sae that
e n, and that
be confused with the terms "Rat" or "edg grain,
be termed "cross fiber; `since it is a deviation cf
+rength or the decay
are not considered defects. ration-:
shalt be sixteen Sgeatfih
might better
the wood fibers from the true parallel of the shingle. It is a
face of the shingle to the other
lengih Width.
in addition to sixteen -inch Lengt
i' e= 32.110. (a) Length. Minimum addition Thickness
lengths,
defect when it runs from one
a longitudinal distance of three inches (3") or less ,n
'(16"). The usual and twenty-four
are eighteen inches (18") will be
one inchipment.
'^i. shingles,("),
.within
that portion measured six inches (6") from the butt.
where tt«e
r1 A minus tolerance of Shin-
: 'ed in not more than 10 per cent of any P
may be one-fourth
Sec, 32,104. DIAGONAL GRAIN. A Condition
of the wood does not run parallel to the edges of the
diverges or
. ..cut from equalized blocks or rebutted
';(i/ ^) less than the standard length. (14
,-rain
shingle. It is considered a defect when the grain
in width in twelve inches (12'!
: -b) Width. Mahes
.. ximum width shall inchese(16-) up to but
alants two inches ( 2") or more
,, um width for shingles, three
inches (24") long, shall
of length.
32.103. FEATHER Tip,• A feather lig or shim is ;:.
"' .'including twenty-four r
"as (3"). Minimum width for shingles twenty-four inches
r" four inches (4"). In sixteen -men
Sir.
condition of manufacture found on the thin ends of some-
the saw came out of the piece prematurely,
„) and longer shall be
,...6„) and eighteen -inch 118") shingles those less than four
constitute more than 10 per
Shingles where
pr a thin, flimsy, featherlike edge. The tip ends safhe
be uniformly thin and produce a thoroughly
,. (4") in width shall not
of any shipment. Shingles shall of uniform in width; t a
�' t tolerance of one inch (ii")
shingle may
factory roof. but when they are uneven or with corners sawn
the will not lay ug evenly.
_
.w "with parallel aides. A
i
nation in the width shall be allowed.
are measured for thickness at the
off, shingles
GRAIN. A condition in shingles or lumber where
an d Shingles
to the number of pieces
= '(c) ends
it ends and designated according
of thickness. For exam-
FLAT to edge-
the growth rings are flat, or horizontal, as opposedecessary
material where the growth rings are
to constitute a specific unit
le, 4/2 indicates that four shingles measure two inches f2").
measure two and one -
grained. or quartered,
on edge, or vertical to the surface.
.
.=tijrhile 5/2'.i means that five shingles
i m thickness. Shingles shall be uniforn- in
inches (2 i") is allowable
See. 32.106. SHLri. See Feather Tips.
fourth
=.,thickness, but a minus tolerance of three per cent
the difference in shrinkage encountered in
of
SQ[ :4RF. PACK. A unit providing sufficient shingles for
feat (00 sq.
n .,:to compensate for
'f •-zktln drying. This tolerance is based on the total thickness
- the coverage of an area of one hundred square
ft.. when the shingles are laid at any spacifled exposure
she bundle. both in car InvPertfon
of woad shingles,
lite weather.
Rec. 3'..107, TORN FIRER. This condition may also be re -lots
.gas 32111. The inspection
at destination or at customary inspection points. shall
inspection.
be made on the basis of the usual unit reof. Because
fen•ed to as "torn gram;' a fuzzy or whiskered appearance
(, „ordinarily
is eight bundles per canoed or hs, fraction ercenta gees shall
- widths, percentages
casualty caused by a dull saw.
WAVES. Irregularities on the face of a shingle
.which
;r.of the wide variation in shingle
,. , be calculated on the basis of running inches. r
See. 32408.
ialso referred to as "washboards") usually caused by a web-
the saw on its arbor.
CODE STAND ARD 3«-2-58
bhng of
-sward
"WORM BUILDING
C Rrc. 32.109. (a) General. All commercial
g shingles shall be of 100 per cent heartwood, mdanufacd-
with or exceed
Hand -Split Shakes
mrnta: Grain tured and neatly packed; they must comply
herein established for quality.'Baacd
Packing Ride!+ for Hand -Split Red Cedar
(19a' )
('ba the specifications
u . , Cott ab i Grain. All commercial -standard shingles shall be
thin lines
on Grading ,tad
Shakes of the Red Cedar Shingle Bureau
Volume I
strictly vertical, or edge -grained; that is, the
when
t' or growth rings, shall be vertical when the
section 3203. form Building Cote,
Sea ' Rralm
toting the annual,
shingle is laid flat, as in use. Edge grain is synonymous with
i- flooring, and the condi-
a01 Hand-sPlit shakes shall be mamafactured and
their
eUniform5
quartered or quarter -sawed lumber or
,. sloe
fulfilled when no portion of the grain P
Sec.3°
tChapter 32 d and
the
in acnordancrovi
tion is considered
exceeds 45 degrees from the perpendicular,
governed by the p visions of
Code. 1938 Edition.
4lefinit am
act Characteristics. Knots, wormholes, decay, shakes,
and sapwood constitute
$ttild.19
- du eRARER have
HARD-5p1.1T A�D-are by amain,
checks, crimps. flat grain, cross grain,
natural charaMeristics that are not admissible. Refects m
charas diagonal grain,
See. 32.202• produced
pr
, 'Split faces and sawn backs. and are p
manual including shims, feather tips,
likewise not admissible.
427
z
waves• and torn fiber are
426
r
V.B.C. STANDARD 2-58
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
d
428
VOL. M-19.58 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 32`2-M
cedar blanks or boards of proper thickness diagonally through
a -handsaw to produce two tapered shakes from each blank.
TAPERSPLIT SHAKES are produced by hand, using a
sharp -bladed steel froe and a wooden mallet. A natural shin-
gle -like taper, from butt to tip, is achieved by reversing the
block, end -for -end, with each split.
' STRAIGHT -SPLIT SHAKES are manufactured in the same
.'manner as taperspiit shakes, except that the splitting is done
from one end of the block only, producing shakes which are
the same thickness throughout.
Sec. 82.203. Shakes shall be 100 per cent clear, graded from Quality
the split face in the case of hand-split-and-resawn shakes and Standards
from the best face in the case of tapersplit and barn shakes.
Shakes shall be 100 per cent heartwood, free of bark and
sapwood.
Tapersplit shakes and barn shakes shall be 100 per cent
edge -grain; hand-split-and-resawn shakes may include not to
exceed 10 per cent of flat -grain in the lineal inches of any
bundle.
Curvatures in the sawed face of hand-split-and-resawn
shakes shall not exceed one inch (1") from a level plane in
the length of the shake. Excessive grain sweeps on the split
face shall not be permitted.
Sec. 32.204. (a) Length. Nominal shake lengths shall be Size
eighteen inches (181), twenty-four inches (24"), and thirty-
two inches (32"), within a minus tolerance of one-half inch
A variation, including shims or feathertips, of one inch
(1") from these nominal lengths shall be permitted in live per
cent of the lineal inches of shakes in any bundle. See Table
No. 32-2-A.
(b) Thickness. Shake thickness shall be determined by
measurement of the area within one-half inch (%/ ) from each
edge. I£ corrugations or valleys exceed one-half inch 0(,") in
depth, a minus tolerance of one-eighth inch (%") is per-
mitted in the minimum specified thickness.
(c) Width. Shakes shall be of random widths, none nar-
rower than four inches (411). Hand-split-and-resawn shakes
shall have a maximum widtn of fourteen inenes (14").
(d) Edges. Edges of shakes shall be parallel within one
inch (1"1.
See. 32.205. Shakes shall be packed in straight courses in Parking
regulation frames twenty inches (20") wide. Shakes must
average not less than eighteen inches (18") of wood per
course, when green. See Table No. 32-2-A.
Sea 32.200. In case of reinspection 10 or more bundles Inspection
selected at random shall constitute a fair sampling of the
shipment. Shakes shall be adjudged off -grade if the total
lineal inches of defective shakes exceed seven per cent of the
total lineal inches. See Table No. 32-2-A.
428
U.B.C. STANDARD 3111-1-U I'NEPORM BUILDING CODE
a
VOL 111--1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 37-1-514
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 37-1-58
Fire -Clay Refractories
Based on Standard Specification C27-56 of the
American Society for Testing Materials
See Section 3701 of the Uniform Building Code, Volume I
See. 37.101. This Standard pertains to machine -made fire- Scope
clay refractory brick, and its purpose is to set forth the vari-
ous classes and types of these materials in accordance with
their normal and characteristic properties which are im-
portant in their use.
Sec. 37.102. Fire -clay refractory brick are classified under Chisse and
the following six headings: super duty, high duty, semi -silica. the Properties
medium duty, low duty, and alumina-diaspore. The super Required
duty, high duty and alumina-diaspore classes are divided
further Into three types under each class. The properties
required for compliance with a class or type under a given
class are given in Table No. 37-1-A,
See. 37.103. Testing for compliance with this classification Test
shall be carried out on nine -inch (9") by four and one-half- gpeelmens
inch (4%") by two and one -half-inch j2l_-1 or three-inch
(31) rectangular brick as made, or on specimens of either size
cut from larger units having dimensions not more than three
inches (3-) in thickness, six and three-fourths inches i6%")
in width, and thirteen and one-half inches (1372") in length.
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 37-2-58
Terms Relating to Refractories
Based on Standard Specifications No. C 71-55 of the
American Society for Testing Materials
See Section 3701 of the Uniform Building Code, Volume I
MATERIALS
See. 37.201. This Standard consists of standard definitions SeoPc
of terms relating to refractories, For the purpose of this
Code, certain terms, phrases and words shall he construed as
specified in this Standard.
Sm. 37.202. AIR-SETTV NG REFRACTORY MORTAA M Definition.composition of finely ground materials, marketed in either a
�
wet or dry condition, which may require tempering with
water to attain the desired consistency and which is suitable
• for laying refractory brick and bonding them strongly upon
drying and upon subsequent heating at furnace temperatures,
BOND FIRE CLAY. See Plastic or Bond Fire Clay.
See. 37.203. CARBON REFRACTORY. A manufactured re-
fractory comprised substantially or entirely of carbon On.
eluding graphite).
CARBON -CERAMIC REFRACTORY. A manufactured re-
fractory comprised of carbon (including graphite i and one or
more ceramic materials such as fireclay and silicon carbide,
431
d e5
E E E
_5
V
E
E
E
430
VOL 111--1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 37-1-514
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 37-1-58
Fire -Clay Refractories
Based on Standard Specification C27-56 of the
American Society for Testing Materials
See Section 3701 of the Uniform Building Code, Volume I
See. 37.101. This Standard pertains to machine -made fire- Scope
clay refractory brick, and its purpose is to set forth the vari-
ous classes and types of these materials in accordance with
their normal and characteristic properties which are im-
portant in their use.
Sec. 37.102. Fire -clay refractory brick are classified under Chisse and
the following six headings: super duty, high duty, semi -silica. the Properties
medium duty, low duty, and alumina-diaspore. The super Required
duty, high duty and alumina-diaspore classes are divided
further Into three types under each class. The properties
required for compliance with a class or type under a given
class are given in Table No. 37-1-A,
See. 37.103. Testing for compliance with this classification Test
shall be carried out on nine -inch (9") by four and one-half- gpeelmens
inch (4%") by two and one -half-inch j2l_-1 or three-inch
(31) rectangular brick as made, or on specimens of either size
cut from larger units having dimensions not more than three
inches (3-) in thickness, six and three-fourths inches i6%")
in width, and thirteen and one-half inches (1372") in length.
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 37-2-58
Terms Relating to Refractories
Based on Standard Specifications No. C 71-55 of the
American Society for Testing Materials
See Section 3701 of the Uniform Building Code, Volume I
MATERIALS
See. 37.201. This Standard consists of standard definitions SeoPc
of terms relating to refractories, For the purpose of this
Code, certain terms, phrases and words shall he construed as
specified in this Standard.
Sm. 37.202. AIR-SETTV NG REFRACTORY MORTAA M Definition.composition of finely ground materials, marketed in either a
�
wet or dry condition, which may require tempering with
water to attain the desired consistency and which is suitable
• for laying refractory brick and bonding them strongly upon
drying and upon subsequent heating at furnace temperatures,
BOND FIRE CLAY. See Plastic or Bond Fire Clay.
See. 37.203. CARBON REFRACTORY. A manufactured re-
fractory comprised substantially or entirely of carbon On.
eluding graphite).
CARBON -CERAMIC REFRACTORY. A manufactured re-
fractory comprised of carbon (including graphite i and one or
more ceramic materials such as fireclay and silicon carbide,
431
UJLC. STANDARD 37-2-58 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
CHROME. BRICK. A refractory brick manufactured sub -
(C Cd•) stantially or entirely of chrome ore.
CHROME -MAGNESITE BRICK. A refractory brick, which
may be burned or unburned, manufactured substantially of a
mixture of refractory chrome ore and dead -burned magnesite
in which the chrome ore predominates by weight.
ties- 37.204. DEAD -BURNED MAGNESITE. The granular
Product obtained by burning ifiringi magnesite or other sub-
stances convertible to magnesia, upon heating above 1450 C
long enough to form dense, weather -stable granules suitable
for use as a refractory or in refractory products.
DIASPORE CLAY. A rock consisting essentially of dia-
spore bonded by fire clay.
DOUBLE -SCREENED GROI,'vD REFRACTORY MATE-
RIAL. A refractory material that contains its original
gradation of particle sizes resulting from crushing, grinding.
or both. and from which particles coarser and finer than two
specified sizes have been removed by screening.
Sec- 37.205. FIRE CLAY. An earthy or stony mineral ag-
gregate which has as the essential constituent hydrous sili-
cates of aluminum with or without free silica, plastic when
sufficiently pulverized and wetted, rigid when subsequently
dried, and of suitable refractoriness for rise in commercial
refractory products.
FIRECLAY PLASTIC REFRACTORY. A fireclay mate-
rial tempered with water and suitable for ramming into place
to form a monolithic furnace lining that will attain satisfac-
tory physical properties when subjected to the heat of fur-
nace operation.
FLINT FIRE CLAY. A hard or flint -like fire clay occur-
ring as an unstratified massive rock, practically devoid of
natural plasticity and showing a cone oidal fracture.
Sec. 37-206. GROG FIRECLAY MORTAR. Raw firclay
mixed with calcined fire clay, or with broken fireclay brick,
GUND
or both, all ground to suitable fineness.
CLAY
claysthatt haveg
e
been subj. Fire
tola treatment or a mixture
offire
than
grinding or weathering, or both.
Sec. 37.207 MAGNESITE BRICK, A refractory brick man-
ufactured substantially or entirely of dead -burned magnesite.
MAGNF,SITE-CHROME BRICK. A refractory brick.
which may be burned or unburned, manufactured substan-
tally of a mixture of dead -burned magnesite and refractory
chrome ore in which the dead -burned magnesite predominates
by weight
3IULLITE REFRACTORIES. Refractory products con-
sisting predominanth' of mullite t3A1,0,-2Si0.,i crystals
formed either by conversion of one or more of the sillimanite
group of minerals or by synthesis from appropriate materials
employing either melting or sintering processes,
432
VOL, ffi-1838 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 37-2-58
Sec. 37.208. NODULAR FIRE CLAY. A rock containing
aluminous or ferruginous nodules, or both, bonded by fire
clay.
NOTE: In some districts such clays are called "bur-
ley" or "burley hint" clay.
See. 87.208. PLASTIC OR BOND FIRE CLAY. A fire clay
of sufficient natural plasticity to bond nonplastic materials.
See. 37.210. REFRACTORIES, n. Materials, usually non-
metallic, used to withstand high temperature.
REFRACTORY, adj. Resistant to high temperature.
REFRACTORY CHROME ORE. A refractory ore consist-
ing essentially of chrome -bearing spinel with only minor
amounts of accessory minerals and with physical properties
that are suitable for making refractory products.
See. 37.211. SILICA FIRE CLAY. A refractory mortar
consisting of a finely ground mixture of quartzite, silica
brick, and fire clay of various proportions.
NOTE: Sometimes called silica cement by the trade.
SILICON CARBIDE REFRACTORIES, Refractory prod-
ucts consisting predominantly of silicon carbide.
SINGLE -SCREENED GROUND REFRACTORY MATE-
RIAL, A refractory material that contains its original
gradation of particle sizes resulting from crushing, grinding,
or both, and from which particles coarser than a specified
size have been removed by screening.
PROPERTIES
see. 37.212. ABRASION OF REFRACTORIES. Wearing Definitions
away of refractory surfaces by the scouring action of moving
solids.
sec. 37.213. BURNING (FIRING) OF REFRACTORIES.
The final heat treatment in a kiln to which refractory brick
and shapes are subjected in the process of manufacture for
the purpose of developing bond and other necessary physical
and chemical properties.
See. 37.214. CALCINING OF REFRACTORY MATERI-
ALS. The heat treatment to which raw refractory materials
are subjected, preparatory to further processing or use. for
the purpose of eliminating volatile chemically combined con-
stituents and producing volume changes.
CORROSION OF REFRACTORIES. Destruction of re-
fractory surfaces by the chemical action of external agencies.
See. 37.215. EROSION OF REFRACTORIES. Wearing
away of refractory surfaces by the washing action of moving
liquids.
See. $7.216. MECHANICAL SPALLING OF REFRAC-
TOR7ES. The spoiling of a refractory unit caused by stresses
resulting from impact or pressure.
Sec. 37.217. PYROMETRIC CONE EQUIVALENT
(P.C.E.). The number of that Standard Pyrometric Cone
433
U.I.C. STANDARD 38-1-68
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
whore to will' a eeof thecrefracto yomategriala ue simult legated
when tested in accordance with the Method of Test for Pyro-
metric Cone Equivalent (P.C.E.I of Refractory Materials
°ASTM Designation: C 24).
NOTE! The terms ,fusion point,,, "softening point,"
„deformation point," and "melting point„ have hereto.
fore been loosely used for "pyrometric cone equivalent,,,
Sec. 37.2111. SGGG
chemical react on betweenn Ofracories and 1E8- Destructive agentive
at high temperatures, resulting in the formation of a liquid.
SPALLINO OF REFRACTORIES. The cracking or rup.
turfing of a refractory unit, which usually results in the de.
tschment of a portion of the unit.
&TRU otTURALrefractory caused
slialbuffIANO O
REFRACTORIES. s
Oe
from differential changes in the structure of the unit.
See. 37.215. THERMAL SPALLING OF REFRACTORIES.
The spailing of a refractory unit caused by stresses resulting
bran nonuniformdimensional changes of the unit produced
by a d38erente in temperature.
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 35.1.58
Installation of Automatic Fire -Extinguishing
Systems
Rased on the National Board of Fire Underwriters
Pamphlet No. 13, August, 1886
See Section 3802, Uniform Building Code, Volume I
ScopeSCOPE AND CLASSIFICATIONS
Sea 38.101. These Standards provide the minimum require-
ments for the installation of automatic fire -extinguishing
an ,specified in Volume I Of the Uniform Building
72wae Standards cover automatic fire -extinguishing
teas of the types described in Section 38.102sys-
.
es are classified by degree of hazard in accord-
ance with Section 38.104.
38.182. (a) Wet Pipe System. A system employing auto-
�rinklers attached to a piping system containing
w' and connected to a water supply so that water dis-
dwges from sprinklers opened by a fire.
autnmatc
�rinklersPressurattached Pipe to ap i in ssetem stemencornta ruing under
ease of which as from the ol
nipermits the water pressure to open a valveng3aux�cn�aa a
434
VOL. III -1868 EDITION
U.B.C. STANDARD 38.1_53
dry Pipe valve." The water then flows into the piping system Clas
and out of the opened sprinklers. ifiration
(c) Preactton S of Sprinkler
rprc) Prs attached Seo a' A system employing automatic 'N"temn
May piping system ressure, with containing air that ("I'd-)
responsive may
of geneunder ral? more sensitive pcharacteristiiccs
than the automatic sprinklers themselves, installed in the
Jame areas as the sprinklers; actuation of the heat respon-
sive system, as from a fire, opens a valve which permits
water to now into the sprinkler piping system and to be
discharged from any sprinklers which may be open,
attached oga Sing system connected stem to employing
supply
through a valve which to opened by the operation of a heat
responsive systeen m installed in the same areas as the sprin-
III water
system and discharges valveopens.
sprinklersuattached ths into the erein.
(e) Combined Dry Pipe and Preaction Sprinkler System.
A system employing automatic sprinklers attached to a pip-
ing system containing air under pressure with a supplemen-
tal heat responsive system of generally more sensitive char-
acteristics than the automatic sprinklers themselves, in-
stalled in the same areas as the sprinklers; operation of the
heat responsive system, as from a fire, actuates tripping
devices which open dry pipe valves simultaneously and with-
out loss of air pressure in the system. Operation of the heat
responsive system also opens approved air exhaust valves at
the end of the feed main which facilitates the filling of the
system with water which usually precedes the opening of
sprinklers. The heat responsive system also serves as an
automatic fire alarm system.
(f) Limited Water Supply System. A system employing
automatic sprinkles and conforming to these standards but
supplied by a pressure tank of limited capacity.
See. 38,103. Sprinkler systems employing limited water sup. Special Types
Plies, reduced pipe sizes and other departures from the re. or Sprinkler
quirements for standard systems, shall not be classified as Systems
standard sprinkler systems.
See. 38.104. (a) Light Hazard Occupancies: This class in.
eludes buildings housing occupancies such as Cia.sidcatlon
of
Apartments HospitalsOccupanrlet
Asylum"
Office Buildings
y Hotels Prisons
Churches Institutions Public Buildings
Clubs Libraries Rooming Houses
Colleges
Schools
Dwell torics Nu sings Convalescent Tenements
Dwellings and Care Homes
ha and rules
Occupanc est installation
apply sprinkler
all systemsin
of i i light
the
occupancies listed above or similar light hazard occupancies..
except that in certain sections of the above occupancies such
as attics, basements, kitchens, laundries, storage areas, and
436
UJLC. CT.CNDARD 98-1-M UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
VOL. III -1988 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 38-1-58
work rooms, ordinary hazard spacing with light hazard pipe
of sizing and water supplies shall be required.
Where hazards in those buildings or portions of buildin s
g g° g Classification
of the above occupancies are severe as determined by the of
The rules for installation of sprinkler systems in light
ffont'd) 8
Building Official, extra hazard rules shall apply
g A Occupancies
h rd occupancies apply in small stores and similar
occupancies incidental to the properties listed above, pro-
(c) Extra Hazard Occupancies. This class, includes only (Contd.)
vided such occupancies do not individually exceed three
those buildings or portions of buildings housing occupancies
where the hazard is severe as determined by the Building
thousand square feet (3,OOo sq. ft.) in floor area in any one
Official. These include oeeupancies such as:
store in any floor and provided floor openings are properly
Aircraft Hangars
protected'
Chemical Works—Extra Hazard
Sprinkler systems designed for light hazard occupancies
Cotton Picker and Opening Operations
shall not be installed in any building, the occupancy of
Explosives and Pyrotechnics Manufacturing
which is likely to be changed subsequently to a classification
Linseed Oil Mills
not so listed,
Linoleum and Oilcloth Manufacturing
(b) Ordinary Hazard Occupancies: This class includes
Oil Refineries
Paint Shops
buildings housing occupancies such as:
Pyroxylin Plastic Manufacturing and Processing
Abrasive Works Lithographing
Shade Cloth ManufacturingSolvent Extracting
Automobile Garages, Sales Macaroni Factories
Varnish works
and Service Machine Shops
Bakeries Meat Packing and Curing
and other occupancies involving processing, mixing, stor-
age, and dispensing of volatile flammable liquids.
Beverage Manufacturing Mercantilea
Metal Working
Where severe hazards are net otherwise adequately pro -
y p
Boller
Boiler Houses Millinery Manufacturing
BottlingWorks
tected, the Building Official shall be consulted for special
ruling regarding water supplies, types of equipment, supple-
Mining Properties
Breweries Paper and PulpMills
)
"
mentary systems if required, pipe sizes, types of sprinklers.
Brick Tile and Clay Products Pharmaceutica
'
and sprinkler spacing.
Canneries ManufacturingSee.
Cement Plants
58.106. Before an equipment is installed or remodeled, Preliminary
Layouts
Piers and Wharves
Cereal Mills
plans shall be submitted for approval to the Building Official.
Power Plants
Chemical Works—Law Printing and Publishing
Hazard
See. 88.106. Where sprinklers are installed in buildings in Sprinkler
Restaurants
Chemical Works—Ordinary Rope, Cordage and Twine
locations subject to recurring floods, special attention shall Systems in
be given to: 1. Arrangement of piping and location of valves Buildings
Hazard Factories
so that valves will be accessible during high water. Subject
Clothing Factories Shoe Factortes
2. Location of alarm devices and equipment for keeping to flood
Cold Storage Warehouses Slaughter Houses
-
as much as possible operable during high water.
Confectionery Products Smelters
Manufacturing
3. Location androtection of
p pumps and air compres-
Steel Mills
Cotton and Woolen Mills Sugar Refining
sora and their power supply to provide every reasonable
safeguard against interruption.
Dairy Products Manu- Tanneries
facturing and Processing Textile Knitting and
Distilleries
See. 38.107. Branches from underground mains to inside Flushing of
Weaving Mille
Dry Cleaning
sprinklers shall be flushed out thoroughly before connecting Underground
Theatres and Auditoriums
Dyeing and Print Works
the sprinkler riser. A flow sufficient to produce water velo- Connections
five feet
Tire Manufacturing
Electric Generating Stations Tobacco Products
cities of (51) to six feet (61) per second is needed to
move the larger obstructing materials from underground
Feed bills Manufacturing
Flour Mills
piping. To establish these velocities the following flows in
Warehouses and Storage
Foundries
,
gallons per minute will be needed:
' Fur Processing Buildings
. g General
Glass Glass Products
.
�;
6" Pipe __...... . ..... 500 gallons per minute
8" pipe........................ 1000 gallons per minute
Household Furniture
P Tobacco
*'
,,
10" pipe._.................1500 gallons per minute
12"
Grain Elevators, Tanks and Watch and Jewelry
pipe......................2000 gallons per minute
Warehouses Manufacturing
See. 88.108. All new systems including yard piping shall be Hydrostatic
Ice Manufacturing Waterworks and Pumping
tested hydrostatically at not less than 200 pounds per square Tests
Laundries Stations
inch pressure for two hours, or at 50 pounds per square inch
. Go
Leatherod odsWineries
in excess of the maximum static pressure when the maxi-
is in
mum static pressure excess of 150 pounds.
4"
437
U.D.C. STANDARD 38-1-5N
LIN1FOItRt H"MDING CODE:
The amount of leakage in
VOL. III -18b8 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 38-1-58
ands
measured at the specified test press b d piping shall be
calibrated container, y Pumping from
than 15 pounds under the roof, allowing only for loss of pres-
a
Le�
Leakage should not exceed the following;
Ptpe site
sure due to height of roof above the hydrant.
(c) Extra Hazard Occupancy. (See Section 38.112.) Connec-
8-ineh 8 -inch 10 -inch 12 -inch 16 -inch
Leakage,
tions shall be made to street mains not smaller than six
quarts per
inches (6"). Connections to dead end mains shalt be avoided.
10 joints Per hour 2? 3 r 4
Where meters are used they shall be of approved type.
To determine the value of public water as a supply for
5 gt`
Tests of Dry,
*e- 38.1 &1 New dry standpipe systems shall be tested by-
drosta Y as
automatic sprinkler systems it is necessary to make a flow
test to determine how much water can be discharged at a
$ygt
specified in Section 38.108 except during sea-
sons of the year when u•aker-testing is not feasible
be
residual pressure sufficient to give 15 pounds under the roof,
e., a pressure equivalent to the height of the building plus
they shall
tested for hvo hours with at least 50 pounds per square
inch air pressure. The clapper of a differential- q
15 pounds•
The proper method of making such test is to use two hy-
1
valve shall be held off its seat during an type dry pipe
in excess of 50 pounds per square tach any
prevent pressure
the valve. injuring
drants in the vicinity of the property. The static pressure is
measured on the hydrant in front of or nearest to the prop -
hydrant nextIn
?
an air pressure
hail
erty and the water allowed to flow from the
nearest the property; preferably the one farthest from the
r.
stems
square inch; of 40 pounds r
Pumped u per
and all leaks which allow a loss of 2one
source of supply if main is fed only one way. The residual
pressure will be that indicated at the hydrant where water is
.°
one-half pressuretoverand
and
Pounds for the 24 hours shall be stopped.
`"
not !lowing.
Tests atSer•88.110.
Frahm
Tests of drainage facilities shall be made by
opening the main drain valve while the control
open
t"'
See. 38.114. Where a pump constitutes the sole sprinkler Pumps
supply, it shall be provided with supervisory service from an
R
valve is wide
approved central station system or from an approved pro-
91
Tit of
esu
Sec 38.111. All tests shall be
y
prietary system or their equivalent, with provision for Pnsi-
cation at office that the op
made in Presence of the chief
of the Fire Department when ordered bytheBuilding
crated normal! 14linirtmumtrel uirements are as folio s?�
y q
I
Ofiiciai,
1. Light hazard occupancy. Pump capacity not less than
WATER SUPPLIES AND
FIRED FPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
250 gallons per minute. where supplying hydrants as well as
sprinklers, not less than 500 gallons per minute.
f.
TypeSad.
3&112. (at
system shall have Requirements. Eve
t least pprply }of
Pump capacity not less
2. Ordinary hazard mate. Where
than gallons per minute. Where supplying hydrants as
*.
y,
one automatictxateresprinkler
adequate pressure, capacity and reliability.
well as sprinklers, not less than 750 gallons per minute.
s s
(bl Determination of Su
3. Extra hazard occupancy. See Section 38.112. Pumps sup-
]c
supply needed for extra 'hazard oDeterminatioshaof
upon four the
plying sprinklers only shall furnish rated capacity at a pros-
sure under the roof of at least 15 pounds. Where supplying
3
factors: 1. li based
• Number of sprinklers that may
2. Amount y operate'
hydrants as well as sprinklers, the pump pressure shall be
R
or rate of discharge needed from each sprin-
kler.
.,
determined by the chief of the Fire Department.
3. Required time of
Sec. 3&115. An elevated tank is acceptable as a single sup- Gravity
s
sprinkler discharge.
4. Amount of water
ply. Minimum requirements are as follows: Tanks
streams. needed simultaneously for hose
Capacity net less than 5,000
Light hazard onot
Where the occupancy
11.l
gallons with bottom not less than thirty-five feet (35') above
less t
presents a Possibility of intense fires
requiring extra heav
tamed Y sprinkler discharge, this may be ob•
by an increase in
P
the underside of the root.
2. Ordinary hazard occupancy;. Capacity not less than
the pressure and volume of the
water ation
or by a closer spacing
combination
5,000 allona with bottom not less than thirty-five feet (35')
o of sprinklers or by a
of the two methods.
��;..
above the underside of the roof for a primary or single sup-
a
ply, and twenty feet (20') above the underside of the roof
to Watev
B&113 to Light Hazard
Sallee' outside hydrant shall provide Occupancy. rpancy. A flow test from
hydrant when residual
for a secondary supply.
3. Extra hazard occupancy. See Section 38.112.
Warps.
SY*tempressure
delivering 250 pressure at the
leas than 15 a gallons per minute, to give not
due Pounds under the roof, allowing only
to height
See. 38. A pressure tank supply is acceptable a single Press
means Pressure
for loss of
of roof above the hydrant.
ve
supply. Where the tank is provided with approved
uPP Y• he
on
(b) hrdinary hazard Oce"
a
for automatically maintaining the required air pressure
low
outside ane
hydrant shall provide a y' A flow test from an
drant
the tank and an approved trouble alarm to indicate air
are as
when delivering residual pressure at the by-
g 500 gallons per minute
pressure and low water level, minimum requirements
to give not less
follows:
438
439
U.D.C. STANDARD 88.1.58 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
VOL. M-1958 EDITION U.B.O. STANDARD 38-1-58
Sec- 88.120. (a) Quantity. One or more fire department con- Fire
nections shall be provided. Department
(b) Size. Pipe size shall be not less than four inches Connections
(4") for fire engine connections and not less than six inches
(8") for fireboat connections, except that three-inch (3")
pipe may be used to connect a single hose connection to a
three-inch (3") or smaller riser.
(e) Arrangement. On wet pipe systems with a single
riser the connection to the system shall be made on the sys-
tem side of gate, check and alarm valves in the riser.
On dry pipe systems with a single riser the connection to
the system shall be made between the gate valve and the dry
pipe valve.
r,. On systems with two or more risers the connection to the
s" system shall be made on the system side of all shut-off valves
controlling other water supplies, but on the supply side of the
riser shut-off valves so any one riser off the connection will
feed the remaining sprinklers.
An approved straightway check valve shall be installed in
each fire department connection, located as near as practi-
cable to the point where it joins the system.
There shall be no shut-off valve in the lire department con-
nection.
Fire department connections shall be properly supported.
i' (d) Drainage. The piping between the check valve and
the outside hose coupling shall be equipped with an approved
automatic drip arranged to discharge to a proper place.
y PIPING
.` Sec. 38.121. All pipe used in sprinkler systems shall be de- Scope
signed to withstand a working pressure of not less than 175
Pounds.
See. 38.122. For the purpose of this Code, certain terms Designations
shall be construed as specified in this Standard.
Sec. 38.123. BRANCH LINES. Lines of pipe in which the
sprinklers are placed are designated "branch linea."
Sec. 38.124. CROSS MAINS. Pipe directly supplying the
lines in which the sprinklers are placed are designated "erose
mains."
f See. 38,125. FEED MAINS. Bulk mains supplying risers or
cross mains are designated "feed mains."
Sec. 38.126. RISERS. The vertical pipes supplying the sprin-
kler system are designated 'risers."
See. $8.127. (a) General Provisions. The number of auto- Pipe
uratic sprinklers on a given size pipe on one floor of one fire Schedules
section shall not exceed the number given in the following
schedules for a given occupancy.
In buildings having mezzanine floors, large platforms, or
large openings between floors which cannot be closed or sat-
isfactorily cut off, the possibility that all or most of the
sprinklers might be opened by a single fire shall be consid-
ered in determining the size of risers. Where occupancy and
construction are exceptionally good, and where there is little
441
L Light hazard oecupaney. Amount of available water not
less than 2,004 gallons.
2. Ordinary
y hazard
3' `mount of available water
not less than gallons.
3. Extra hazard occupancy, See Section 38.112.
Unless otherwise approved by the chief of the Fire De-
partment, the pressure tank shall be kept two-thirds full of
water, and an air pressure of at least 75 pounds by the gauge
shall be maintained. When the bottom of the tank is located
below the highest sprinklers served, the air pressure by the
gauge shall be at least 75 pounds plus three times the pres-
sure caused by the column of water in the sprinkler system
above the tank bottom.
NOTE: Pressure tanks shall not be used to supply
other than sprinklers and hand hose attached to sprin-
kler piping.
ete.
See. 3&117. Water supply connections from penstocks,
flumes, rivers or lakes shall be arranged to avoid
mud and
sediment.
Provisions for Water
Sec. 3&11& Piping from water supply to sprinkler riser
shall be at least as large as the riser. See Section 38.127
SuPPJY
Connections
(b),
In private underground piping systems for buildings of
other than light hazard occupancy, any dead
end pipe
which supplies both sprinklers and hydrants shall be not less
than eight inches (8") in size.
Connections for domestic use shall not be taken from the
Are protection piping.
All main water supplies shall be connected with the
sprinkler system at the base of riser, except
where a gravity
or pressure tank or both constitute the only automatic source
of water supply.
water S®iH+iy
Test
See. 38.119. (a) Location and Installation. Test pipes, which
may also be used as drain be
pipes, shall provided at loca-
tions which will permit flowing tests to be made to ascertain
whether equipment is in order. Such test pipes shall be not
leas than two inches (2") in size,
and equipped with a shut-
off valve. They shall be installed so the valve may be opened
wide for a sufficient time to assure proper tests without caus-
ing water damage.
(b) Gauge Connections. At or near each test pipe a pres-
sure gauge shall be installed with a connection not smaller
than one-fourth inch (14") made to the
main pipe. This
gauge connection shall be equipped with a shut-off valve and
with a petcock for draining. A
plugged outlet one-fourth inch
W) in size shall be located between each valve and gauge
for the Purpose of installing
the inspector's gauge.
(c) Gauges, The required pressure gauges shall be of ap-
proved type and shall have a maximum limit
not less than
twice the normal working pressure at the point where in-
stalled. They shall be installed to permit easy
removal and
located where they will not freeze.
440
VOL. M-1958 EDITION U.B.O. STANDARD 38-1-58
Sec- 88.120. (a) Quantity. One or more fire department con- Fire
nections shall be provided. Department
(b) Size. Pipe size shall be not less than four inches Connections
(4") for fire engine connections and not less than six inches
(8") for fireboat connections, except that three-inch (3")
pipe may be used to connect a single hose connection to a
three-inch (3") or smaller riser.
(e) Arrangement. On wet pipe systems with a single
riser the connection to the system shall be made on the sys-
tem side of gate, check and alarm valves in the riser.
On dry pipe systems with a single riser the connection to
the system shall be made between the gate valve and the dry
pipe valve.
r,. On systems with two or more risers the connection to the
s" system shall be made on the system side of all shut-off valves
controlling other water supplies, but on the supply side of the
riser shut-off valves so any one riser off the connection will
feed the remaining sprinklers.
An approved straightway check valve shall be installed in
each fire department connection, located as near as practi-
cable to the point where it joins the system.
There shall be no shut-off valve in the lire department con-
nection.
Fire department connections shall be properly supported.
i' (d) Drainage. The piping between the check valve and
the outside hose coupling shall be equipped with an approved
automatic drip arranged to discharge to a proper place.
y PIPING
.` Sec. 38.121. All pipe used in sprinkler systems shall be de- Scope
signed to withstand a working pressure of not less than 175
Pounds.
See. 38.122. For the purpose of this Code, certain terms Designations
shall be construed as specified in this Standard.
Sec. 38.123. BRANCH LINES. Lines of pipe in which the
sprinklers are placed are designated "branch linea."
Sec. 38.124. CROSS MAINS. Pipe directly supplying the
lines in which the sprinklers are placed are designated "erose
mains."
f See. 38,125. FEED MAINS. Bulk mains supplying risers or
cross mains are designated "feed mains."
Sec. 38.126. RISERS. The vertical pipes supplying the sprin-
kler system are designated 'risers."
See. $8.127. (a) General Provisions. The number of auto- Pipe
uratic sprinklers on a given size pipe on one floor of one fire Schedules
section shall not exceed the number given in the following
schedules for a given occupancy.
In buildings having mezzanine floors, large platforms, or
large openings between floors which cannot be closed or sat-
isfactorily cut off, the possibility that all or most of the
sprinklers might be opened by a single fire shall be consid-
ered in determining the size of risers. Where occupancy and
construction are exceptionally good, and where there is little
441
U.EC. STANDARD 38-13$ UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
live likelihood of a fire spreading beyond the vicinity of its origin,
the size of the feed main shall be based
on the total number
IC 'd-) of sprinklers in the main area plus half the
anew not cut o8. number in the
Buildings having slatted floors,or large unprotected floor
openings without approved stops, shall be treated as one
mom with reference to the
pipe sizes, and the feed main or
riaers shall be of the size required for the total
sprinklers. number of
(b I Schedule for Light Hazard Oecupanele&
Branch lines shall not exceed eight sprinklers on
either side
of a cross main. Pipe sizes shall be as follows:
Iinch pipe ..........................._....--"-...... 2 sprinklers
13 inch pipe
'
--.................
1% inch i .-...._............._. 3 sprinklers2
pipe ......................................._... 5 sprinklers
,
inch
2?§ umh pipe ........ ".'._....._. 10 sprinklers
pig
........... ............" ......... 30 sprinklers
3 inch pipe
._.........................._....... 60 sprinklers
3% inch
rs
4 inch pipe ......_._.._......_._.._.......... NO Limits --See Note
NOTE: Each large area requiring more than 100
sprinklers and without subdividing
partitions shall be
supplied by feed mains or risers sized for ordinary ha-
zard Occupancies.
Where sprinklers are installed in
a space above a ceiling
and such sprinklers are supplied from the same
piping which
supplie sprinklers under the ceiling, pipe sizes up to and
g two and one-half
inches (21¢") shall be as follows:.
I inch pipe ........... ..... 2 sprinklers
inch pipe .............
.........., p .
...... 4 sprinklers
1}$ inch pipe ---
..................._......_.......... 7 sprinklers
2 inch pipe
:
......._._.........._..._ ............... 15 sprinklers
2?� inch pipe ...._ p
....
Where the total number of50 sprinklers
sprinklers above and below the
ceiling exceeds 50, the pipe supplying more
than 50 sprin-
klers shall be sized by the pipe schedule of this Subsection
for the number of
`
sprinklers above or below
whichever is largerthe ceiling,
.
Connections to such systems from underground mains shall
be not less than four inches
(V" in size.
Schfor OrdinaryHazard Occupancies. Branch
l shall enooteexceed ht
lines
g sprinklers
cross main. Pi on either side of a
pe sizes shall be as follows except as modified
by this Subsection.
`�..
I inch pipe ._........_--
...................._..... 2 sprinklers
1% inch pipe .---._
................."---- ...-.._... 3 sprinklers
inch pipe ...........-........._
2 inch .................... 5 sprinklers
pipe -_------___
..................._..._. 10 sprinklers
2? inch pipe .,.._.
.......
3 inch i . _........................... . 20 sprinklers
pipe ....................'�-
•,
3" inch pipe _.............. ......._............. 40 sprinklers
_z
- 4 inch 3 .-....---................ 65 sprinklers
pipe ...----....---....................100
'1
_.., 5 inch pipe ' sprinklers
a
, -
'' 6 inch pipe ""' ' .160 sprinklers
t................ .275 sprinklers
""
t 8 inch pipe ............... .... .400 Sprinklers`
,i 442
1AL
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 38-1-58
Where the distance between sprinklers on branch lines ex- Pipe
Md. twelve feet (12') or the distance between branch lines Schedules
exceeds twelve feet (12'), the number of sprinklers shall be (Contd.)
as follows for given sizes of pipe.
21z inch pipe .....__._.._ ......................_-_ 15 sprinklers
3 inch pipe ...... 30 sprinklers
3% inch pipe .. ........... 60 sprinklers
Where sprinklers are installed in a space above a ceiling
and such sprinklers are supplied from the same piping which
supplies sprinklers under the ceiling, pipe sizes up to and
including three-inch (3") shall be as follows:
I inch pipe .........._.. ..... ........................ 2 sprinklers
Sy4 inch pipe .__..._ ............. .. 4 sprinklers
I% inch pipe ........._....__._..---.._.-.-_....-. 7 sprinklers
2 inch pipe ... ........... 15 sprinklers
21, inch pipe ..............................._........... 30 sprinklers
3 inch pipe ... _.........__ ..._. ._. 60 sprinklers
Where the total number of sprinklers above and below the
ceiling exceeds 60, the pipe supplying more than 60 sprinklers
shall be sized by the pipe schedule of this Subsection for the
number of sprinklers above or below the ceiling, whichever
is larger.
(d) Schedule for Extra Hazard Occupancies. Branch lines
shall not exceed six sprinklers on either side of a cross main.
The following pipe schedule is given only as a guide for
installations having no unusual features
1 inch pipe ..... .. ... .. ..... 1 sprinkler
13/4 inch pipe ..... ............ ....... 2 sprinklers
I3/ inch pipe ..._.._._......__............__.__. 5 sprinklers
2 inch pipe .._ - ... - _._.. _ - ...-__.. 8 sprinklers
2?Z inch pipe _....____-.._.._._._..._._. _.._ 15 sprinklers
3 inch pipe ..._ .........................._............ 27 sprinklers
31l inch pipe ... .. .. 40 sprinklers
4 inch pipe .. _. -.. _ ... 55 sprinklers
5 inch pipe .. .._.... . ..... 90 sprinklers
6 inch pipe ... ....._. .. ......150 sprinklers
For open sprinkler and deluge system pipe schedule see
Section 38.198 (b).
For unusually severe conditions of occupancy or area, the
above pipe schedule is inadequate and it is recommended that
pipe sizing be figured hydraulically on the basis of certain
factors, namely:
1. Number of sprinklers which may be expected to operate
from a fire in any area or section.
2. Water application rate (density gal. per min. per sq.
ft.) for sprinklers expected to operate.
3. Water supply pressure available.
Friction loss in steel pipe shall be calculated using Hazen
and Williams coefficient C-120 and obstruction losses due to
change of direction of water through fittings shall be figured
in terms of equivalent feet of pipe.
(e) Special Conditions. Branch line feed mains shall sup-
ply as follows: 1. Where cross mains supply more than 10
branch lines of only two sprinklers each, they shall be cen-
traily supplied, as the conditions approach those of long sin -
448
U.B.C. STANDARD 38-1-M UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Pipe gle branch lines. Branch lines up to 14 may be fed from one
M. end, provided that two -and -one -half-inch (2yr' ") pipe does
(Cont'd.) not supply more than 16 sprinklers.
2. Not more than 14 branch lines shall he allowed on
either side of the riser or feed main.
3. Where more than eight sprinklers on a branch line are
necessary, lines may be increased to nine sprinklers by mak-
ing the two end lengths one inch (1") and one and one-
fourth inch (11/4") respectively and the sizes thereafter
standard.
4. Where the construction or conditions introduce unusu-
ally long runs of pipe or many angles, in risers or feed mains,
an increase in pipe size over that called for in the schedules
shall be required to compensate for increased friction losses.
5. Where piping on wet pipe systems is concealed with
sprinklers installed in a pendent position below a ceiling, the
sprinklers shall be connected, where practicable, to the top:,
of branch lines by means of U -bends, in order to avoid ac.
cumulation of sediment in the drop nipples. In new systems
the U-bend pipe and fittings shall be one inch (1") in size.
In revamping existing systems, where it is not necessary to
retain sprinklers in the concealed space, one -half-inch
close nipples inserted in the existing sprinkler fittings may
be used with one -inch (1") pipe and fittings for the other
portions of the U-bend.
Size and
Location
Sec. 38.128, Each system riser shall be of sufficient size to
of Risers
supply all the sprinklers on the riser on any one floor of one
fire section as determined by the standard schedules
of pipe
sizes. There shall be one or more risers in each building and
in each section of the building divided by fire walls. Where
the conditions warrant, the sprinklers in
an adjoining build-
ing or section cut off by fire walls may be fed from a system
riser in another fire section or building.
"Center
central" or "side central' feed to sprinklers is
recommended. The former is preferred especially where
there are over six sprinklers on a branch line.
Stairs, towers or other such construction with incomplete
floors, if piped on independent
risers, shall be treated as one
area with reference to pipe sizes, i.e., feed main shall be of
sufficient size to accommodate
the total number of sprinklers.
Piping in
Concrete
Sec. 3&123. Piping in concrete provisions are as follows: 1.
Where piping is installed in
cinder concrete it shall be
placed in properly constructed ducts
or thoroughly encased
In Portland cement or its equivalent. In
no case shall the
piping system be installed to form a part of the floor arch
reinforcement.
2. Dry Pipe underground placements, under air pressure,
shall be constructed of wrought steel
or wrought iron and
Protected against corrosion. See Section 38.136.
Provision for
See. 38.136, provisions shall be made to facilitate flushing
of systempiping by providing Hushing
synk-Flawking
stem
connections consisting
capped nipple four inches (4") long on the end of cross
mains terminating in one and
one-fourthdneh (I%t ) or
444
M-1958 EDITION
I7.B.C. STANDARD 38-1-58
larger pipe. The nipples shall be the same diameter as the
end pipe but not larger than two inches (2").
NOTE: Flushing connections will ordinarily not be
required for concealed piping systems.
Sec. 3&131. (a) Pitching of Piping for Drainage. All sprin- Drainage
kler pipe and fittings shall be installed so the system may
be thoroughly drained. Where practicable, all piping shall be
arranged to drain to the main drain valve.
Pipe shall be straightened before installation to prevent
pockets which would interfere with proper drainage.
On wet pipe systems sprinkler pipe shall be pitched not
less than one-fourth inch (?a") in ten feet (10').
On dry pipe systems sprinkler pipe on branch lines shall be
pitched at least one-half inch (iz") in ten feet (10') and the
pipe of cross and feed mains shall be given a pitch of not
less than one-fourth inch (4") in ten feet (10'). A pitch of
three-fourths inch OV) to one inch (1") shall be provided
for short branch lines and one-half inch (i_") in ten feet
(10') for cross and feed mains in refrigerated areas and in
buildings of light construction where floor may settle under
heavy loads.
Where settling may occur and deprive a dry pipe system
of drainage, ends of lines shall not be raised to violate Sec-
tions 38.185 to 38.193.
(b) Drain Connections and Drain Valves. Provisions shall
be made to properly drain all parts of the system -
On all risers four inches (4") or larger, two-inch (2"1
drain pipes and valves shall be provided.
On risers two and one-half inches (21_") to three and rne-
half inches (31,J"), drain pipes and valves not smaller that)
one and one-fourth inch (14") shall be provided.
On smaller risers, drain pipe and valves not smaller than
three-fourths inch (?i") shall be provided.
All sectional control valves shall have a drain valve of
suitable size located to drain that portion of the system con-
trolled by the cut-off valve.
The test valves required by Section 38.119 may be used
as the main drain valves.
See. 38.132. (a) General. Auxiliary drains shall be provided Auxiliary
to drain all low or trapped points of systems. Drain.
(b) Wet Pipe Systems. Auxiliary drains on wet pipe sys-
tems shall be not smaller than as follows:
2 -inch and smaller supply pipe _......__ ?4 -inch drain
2% -inch supply pipe .............................. 1 -inch drain
3 -inch and larger supply pipe ........_._.1;a -inch drain
All trapped sprinklers in excess of five shall be provided
with drain valve and composition plug or nipple and cap:
where in excess of 20, sprinklers shall be provided with drain
valve and drain connection. For five or less sprinklers a suit -
8 le drain plug or nipple and cap shall be provided.
(c) Dry Pipe Systems. Auxiliary drains on dry pipe sys-
shall be as follows:
445
4,
MM
U.B.C. STANDARD 38-1-58
invitLtry
( Cwtt'd j
Discharge of
Drain Valves
System Test
rilles
UNIFORM BIIILDIN(, CODE
1. Where three or less sprinklers are trapped, a one -half-
inch i 1, °•i renewable disc drain valve, plugged with a com-
position plug or with a nipple and cap, shall be installed.
2. Where more than three sprinklers are trapped, a 'two.
valve drum drip shall be installed, if possible in a warm
location.
3. Where more than 20 sprinklers are trapped, a two -valve
drumtrip and a one -an -one -fourth -inch (Iii,") draw -off
valve shall be provided with drain properly piped toeliminate
Possibility of causing water damage.
4. Drum drip shall be of approximately one-half gallon
capacity and provided with either a three -fourths -inch (a4")
gate, globe or angle valve on each side of the drum drip.
Lower valve on the drum drip shall be plugged with a com-
position plug or with a nipple and cap.
NOTE: Pipe sizes for branch line tie-in drains shall be
one inch (1") for 20 or less sprinklers, and one and one-
fourth inch ilii") for more than 20 sprinklers with one
and one -fourth -inch (ill") drop to one and one -fourth -
inch tItj,,) or larger branch line pipe on floor below.
drain valves: 1.hEach drain pipeisions shall disehargedout discharge
the
building at a point visible from the drain valve and free
from causing water damage. Where it is not possible to dis-
charge outside the building wall, the drain shall be piped to
a sump, which in turn shall discharge by gravity or be
Pumped to a waste water drain or sewer. Direct interconnec-
tions shall not be made between sewers and sprinkler drains
of systems supplied with public water. The drain discharge
shall be in conformity with any local health or water depart-
ment regulations, or sanitary code. The drain connection
shall be large enough to carry off water from open drains
while they are discharging under normal water pressures.
2. Where drain pipes are buried underground, either cast
iron or galvanized pipe shall be used.
3. Drain pipes shall not terminate in blind spaces under
the building.
4. Drain pipes, when exposed, shall be fitted with a hood
or down -turned elbow to prevent obstruction.
5. Drain pipes shall be arranged to eliminate sprinkler
system exposure to frost. All drains shall have at least four
feet (4'1 of pipe beyond the valve, in a warm room.
6. Approved angle valves shall be used on all main drains.
Wherever possible, drains shall be located in a warm place.
Sec. 38.134. On wet systems a test pipe ofnot less than one -
inch 14" ) diameter terminating in a smooth bore corrosion -
resistant outlet giving a flow equivalent to one sprinkler
shall be provided. This test pipe shall be provided for each
main riser through a pipe not less than one inch (1") in
diameter, in the upper story. The discharge shall be at a
Point where it readily can be observed. The test valve shall
be located at an accessible point, not aver seven f
above the Boor. cot ('
The control valve on the test connection shall be local I
at a point not exposed to freezing. ,
i
446
EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 38-1-58
%,dry -pipe systems a oneanch (I") inspector's test with
loath bore corrosion -resistant outlet giving a flow equi-
at to one sprinkler shall be installed on the end of the
f distant sprinkler line in the upper story and be equip-
Irith a one -inch (1") shut-off valve and composition plug.
F 38.135. Where supply pipes or risers pass through low, Protection
sited basements or open spaces under buildings exposed Against
oat, they shall be properly protected. Freezing
here necessary to extend feed mains of wet pipe systems
ugh an open area or through cold rooms, passageways or
r areas exposed to frost, the pipe shall be adequately
acted against freezing by insulating coverings, frostproof
igs, or other suitable means.
e. $8.136. Where corrosive conditions exist, consideration Protection of
I be given to the use of types of pipe, fittings; and hang- Pipe Against
designed to resist corrosion, also protective coatings, all Corrosion
riding on the severity of and kind of corrosive conditions.
material and protective coating to be used shall be ap-
ed by the Building Official.
See. 38.137. (a) Flexibility. Flexibility shall be provided in Protection of
the sprinkler system in order to prevent damage due to Pipe Againvt
'earthquake forces, Damage,
Earthquake
(b) Sway Bracing. Feed and cross mains shall be braced
to prevent excessive oscillation. The tops of risers shall be
secured against drifting in any direction. Branch tines will
not require bracing.
Sec. 38.138. Sprinkler piping passing through floors of eon- Sleeves for
crete or waterproof construction shall have properly de- Pipe Rttierc
signed substantial thimbles or sleeves projecting three inches
(31) to six inches (6") above the floor to prevent possible
floor leakage. The space between the pipe and sleeve shall be
caulked with oakum or equivalent material. If floors are of
cinder concrete, thimbles or sleeves shall extend all the way
through to protect the piping against corrosion.
See. 38.133. Sprinkler piping shall not be used in any way 17se of
for domestic water service. Circulation of water in sprinkler Sprinkler
pipes is objectionable, owing to increased corrosion, deposit piping
of sediment, and condensation drip from pipes.
See. 38.140. Hand hose, to be used for fire purposes only. Hand 11r"e
may be attached to sprinkler pipes within a room subject to Connections
'.`-.the following restrictions:
i r`. 1. Piping and hose valve shall be one -inch (1").
2. Hose shall be not larger than one and one -half-inch
'. 3. Nozzle shall not be larger than one -half-inch (t-,")
* -:nominal discharge capacity.
4. Haas shall not be connected to any sprinkler pipe
, i,"Iler than two and one-half inches (212") and never at-
> shedto a dry -pipe system.
447
STAl�i1)ARD 38158 UNWOR31 BUILDIti(. CODE
VALVES, PIPE FITTINGS AND HANGERS
1 Sec. 38.141, tai General provlslons, All valves on connec-
"�` tions to water supplies and in supply pipes to sprinklers
shall be approved outside screw and yoke or approved in_
equiPPedtyu,'thtapproednindgate :Gator elves of approved type
requirement. Post comply with this
Drain valves and test valves shall be of approved type,
Check valves shall be of approved straightway type,
(b) Valves Controlling {Vater Supplies. Each system
shall be provided with a gate valve located to control all
sources of water supply except fire department connections
when arranged as specified in Section 38.120.
At least one gate valve shall be installed in each source of
coater supply except lire department connections,
Where there is more than one source of water supply, a
check valve shall be installed in each connection, except that
where cushion valves are used with automatic fire pumps no
check valve is required in the cushion tank connection.
ere is but
vallve shallhere hbe installed if therne e is likelihoodconnectionofto a check
Ilan. or if there is a fire department beconn ction on c the
system.
Where a system having only one dry -pipe valve is supplied
with city water and fire department connection, it will be
satisfactory to install the main cheek valve in water supply
connection in a vertical position immediately inside of the
building; in case there is no outsde control the system gate
shall be placed at the wall flanged ahead of all fittings. Such
an arrangement eliminates a pit and in most cases one addi-
tional cast-iron socket quarter bend.
Where either a wet or dry pipe sprinkler system is sup-
plied by city water and a fire department connection and has
more than one riser with outside screw, and yoke gate valve
in each, and the whole system is controlled by one outside
Post indicator valve, i
check valve in the t will be satisfactory to install the main inside building. See Sewater supply connection immediately
ction 38.120.
Where a wet pipe sprinkler system is supplied by cityh only one riser
water and a fire department connection wit
the alarm valve will be considered as a check valve and riser
additional check valve will not be required ,.
A gate valve shall be installed on each side of each check
valve under conditions other than described in this Section,
except that in the discharge pipe from a pressure tank or a
gravity tank of less than 15,000 gallons capacity no gate
valve need be installed on the tank side of the check valve.
Where a gravity tank is located on a tower in the yard, the
gate valve on the tank side of the check valve shall be of
outside screw and yoke type; the other shall be either an
outside screw and yoke valve or an indicator post valve.
Where a gravity tank is located on a building both gate
valves shall be of the outside screw and yoke type; and il
fittings inside the building, except the drain tee and heatear
connections, shall be under the control of a gate valve.
448 A
See. 38.143. Floor control valves shall be required in special Floor Control
cases where area or height, or number of tenants is exces- valve»
sive, both in manufacturing and mercantile buildings, or
where contents are more than ordinarily susceptible to
damage. Floor valves shall be located where they are readily
accessible.
Sec. 35.144. Indicator posts for gate valves are as follows: Indicator
I. Outside control shall be provided wherever possible. posts for
2. Where sprinklers are supplied from a yard main, an Gate valves
approved outside indicator post gate valve shall be placed in
the connecting pipe at a safe distance from the building.
3. Indicator post valves shall be located not less than
forty feet (409 from buildings; but where necessary to
place a valve close to a building, it shall be located at a
blank part of the wall.
4. When a building has no basement, and outside post
indicator control cannot be furnished, short post indicator
may be installed in a horizontal position in riser with hard -
wheel Projecting outside of wall.
Sea, 38.145. pits shall be of ample size to permit easy access Underground
to the valves for examination and repairs. Valves
440
FOU III -1958 EDITION L'.B.C. STANDARD 38-1-$8
In a city connection serving as one source of supply,the Tye of
pity valve in the connection may serve
e
Vas one of the red Valvto
alves. An outside screw and yoke valve or an indicator ssedde 6e
valve shall be installed on the system
o
Halve. side of the check (Contd.)
A connection from public water system shall not extend
Otto or through a building unless such
connection is under
the control of an outside indicator post or outside
screw and
yoke gate valve or under the control of an inside outside
;eerew and yoke gate valve located near
'r
.building. outside wall of the
When a pump, located in a combustible pump house or ex-
posed to danger from fire or falling
wails, or a tank, dig-
(charges into a yard main fed by another supply, either the
check valve in the connection shall be located
in a pit or the
gate shall be of the indicator post type located a safe dig.
tanee outside of buildings.
Check valves on tank or pump connections when located
underground may be placed inside of buildings
and at a safe
distance from the tank riser or pump, except in cases where
the building is entirely of one fire area,
when it is ordinarily
considered satisfactory to locate the check valve overhead in
the lowest level.
All gate valves controlling water supplies for sprinklers
shall be located where readily accessible.
,.
;
Where valves are not within easy access from ground or
floor level, permanent ladders, clamped treads
on risers,
chains and wheels, or other accepted means shall be provided.
See. 38.142. In large plants the fire main system shall have Sectional
sectional control valves located to provide an acceptable Valves
?t
$
degree of reliability for sprinkler equipments and water
supplies.
...
See. 38.143. Floor control valves shall be required in special Floor Control
cases where area or height, or number of tenants is exces- valve»
sive, both in manufacturing and mercantile buildings, or
where contents are more than ordinarily susceptible to
damage. Floor valves shall be located where they are readily
accessible.
Sec. 35.144. Indicator posts for gate valves are as follows: Indicator
I. Outside control shall be provided wherever possible. posts for
2. Where sprinklers are supplied from a yard main, an Gate valves
approved outside indicator post gate valve shall be placed in
the connecting pipe at a safe distance from the building.
3. Indicator post valves shall be located not less than
forty feet (409 from buildings; but where necessary to
place a valve close to a building, it shall be located at a
blank part of the wall.
4. When a building has no basement, and outside post
indicator control cannot be furnished, short post indicator
may be installed in a horizontal position in riser with hard -
wheel Projecting outside of wall.
Sea, 38.145. pits shall be of ample size to permit easy access Underground
to the valves for examination and repairs. Valves
440
C.B.C. STANDARD 38-1.36 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
1er'n)ing her. 38.14& All gate valves in supply pipes to automatic
sprinklers, whether or not of indicator or post pattern, shall
be sealed open in a satisfactory manner.
Identification .Tier. 38.14:. All control, drain, test and alarm valves shall be
Provided with identification signs of the standard design
adopted by the automatic sprinkler industry, or their equi-
valent.
Fittings, Ser. 36.148. Fittings shall be of a type specificallyapproved
for use in sprinkler systems. PP
If fittings are of cast iron, extra heavy pattern shall be
used in sizes larger than two inches (2") where the normal
Pressure in the piping system exceeds 175 pounds.
If fittings are of malleable iron, standard weight pattern
will be acceptable in sizes up to six inches )6") inclusive
th
when e normal pressure in the pipe system does not exceed
300 pounds.
Fittings made of materials other than cast iron or mal.
leable iron and specifically approved for use in sprinkler
systems may be used at piping system pressures up to the
working pressure limits specified in their approval.
All inside piping shall be installed by means of screwed or
flanged fittings or by other approved means. Welding of
joints in risers and large feed mains may be allowed in spe-
cial cases. Permission for this work must be obtained from
the Building Official. Welding should preferably be done in
the shop. When done in the field, the fire hazard of the pro-
cess shall be suitably safeguarded,
Where risers are three inches (3") in size or larger, a
flange joint shall be used at the riser at each floor.
Where change is made in pipe size, this shall not be ef-
fected by means of reducing flanges.
Couplings See. 38.148. Couplings shall not be used except where pipe is
and Colons more than twenty feet (20') in length between fittings.
Screwed unions shall not be used on pipe larger than two
inches ( 2"). Couplings of other than screwed type shall be of
types approved specifically for use in sprinkler systems.
bemused whereverea aece Changeuis made ifittinnn theosizes)of pipe•
Bushings introduce a point of weakness and shall be used in
reducing the size of openings of fittings only when standard
fittings of the required size are not available.
The use of bushings is subject to further provision as
follows:
1. Bushings shall be of the face or flush pattern.
2. Bushings are not permitted in elbow fittings.
3. Bushings are not permitted when the reduction in size
of the outlet is less than one-half inch
4. Bushings are not Permitted for more than one outlet of
SAY tee fitting or two outlets of any cross fitting,
450
EDITION C.S.C. STANDARD 38-1-58
38.151. All fittings and pipe shall have threads cut to Joining of
x& Care shall be taken that the pipe does not extend Pipe and
#ing sufficiently to reduce the waterway. Fittings
) shall be properly reamed after cutting to remove all
uid fins.
t compound shall be applied to the threads of the pipe
it in the fitting.
'Sea 3&152. Sprinkler piping shall be substantially sup-
ported from the building structure. In all cases, sprinkler
1d61hg ashall be supported independently of the ceiling sheath-
_!fg_ . Dngers shall be of the approved type.
See. 38.156. In concrete construction, approved inserts set
in the concrete shall be installed for the support of hangers.
The use of wood plugs is not permitted.
Hangers shall be installed without regard to the support
of the sleeves where pipes are run through concrete beams.
Such sleeves shall not normally be used for the support of
pipes.
Holes for shields in the side of concrete beams shall ordi-
narily be above the center line of the beam and always well
above the bottom reinforcement.
Where pipes are run through concrete beams, sleeves at
least two sizes larger than the piping shall be used.
See. 38.154. (a) Branch Lines. On branch lines there shall
be at least one hanger for each length of pipe with one hanger
?. within thirty inches (3(") of the end sprinkler. Where
lengths of pipe up to and including one and one-fourth inches
�+ (1%") are over twelve feet (12') long, hangers along these
pipes shall be spaced not over twelve feet (121) apart. On
larger size pipe where lengths are over twelve feet (i2')
long, hangers along these pipes may be spaced up to fifteen
feet (151) apart. Where one hanger for each length of pipe
would require hangers closer than six feet (6') apart, hang-
ers may be spaced not to exceed twelve feet (121) apart.
Where starter lengths are less than six feet (6') long, hang-
ers may be omitted except at end branch lines and where
Intermediate cross main hangers are omitted. Hangers shall
be provided for one -inch (1") pipe offset more than twelve
Inches (12") from branch line. Hangers shall be provided on
U -bends for pendent sprinklers when offset more than twelve
inches (12") from branch line.
(b) Special Cases. In special cases it may be necessary
to make provisions to take care of the thrust of branch lines
In a steeply pitched roof, especially where there is a long
nipple between the cross main and the branch. This may be
done by installing a clamp on the pipe just above the lower
hanger.
(c) Cross Mains. On cross mains there shall be one
"s hanger between each two branch lines. Where cross mains
are supported from roof or floor framing members (steel or
451
Hangers
Hangers in
Concrete
Location of
Hangers
UJLC. STANDARD 35.1-58 UNWORN BUILDANQ CODE
Location, wood beam or trusses), those hangers needed for cross
of Hangers main piping between branch lines coming within the truss or
tC�td)girderbays shall be ordinarily a trapeze type of steel angle
or pipe fastened to the purlins or joists, In lieu thereof, addi-
tional branch line hangers attached to the purlin and located
thereon as cls to the cross main as purlin location permits
together with a trapeze hanger on the end length of the cross
main or extending the cross main to the necessary framing
member, shall be acceptable. When cross mains are sup-
ported from wood framing members, by hangers, other than
U -type, having only one screw attachment such as "Side
Beam Hangers" or "Eye Rod Hangers," a hanger shall be
required on each side of the wood beam or truss.
(d) Feed Mains. On feed mains there shall be at least one
hanger for each fifteen feet (15') of pipe.
(e) Sprinkler Yipia& Where sprinkler piping must be
supported from roof framing members,as in the case of
gypsum or steel deck roofing, and the unsupported length
between the end sprinkler and beam hanger would be greater
than thirty-six inches (36"), the pipe shall be extended be-
Yond the end of sprinkler to the next beam for support. If
one -and -one -fourth -inch (I%') pipe is used for the end piece,
(he unsupported length may be up to forty-eight inches
(f) "Semi -NW Construction. Under "semi -mill" con-
stMellon, where sprinklers are located under the center line
Of beams, hangers may be used on the side of these beams
Provided the beams are of such width that hangers will not
be closer than three inches (3") to the sprinkler. Where
beams are less than six inches (6") in width, offset hangers
rosy be used or the hangers located twelve inches (121) to
eighteen inches (18") from sprinklers.
NOTE: Hangers shall not be near enough to sprin-
klers to obstruct distribution of water. They shall not be
nearer than twelve inches (12"), except in the case of
round iron hangers, wherea space of not less than three
inches (3") may be permitted.
Support a4 Sec- 38155. Risers shall be adequately supported by attach -
Risen ments direct to the riser or by hangers located on the hori-
zontal connections close to the riser.
SPRINKLERS
General See, 38.156. The following provisions shall apply to Sections
lrrevisisne 3&156 to 38.162: 1. Sprinklers shall be of approved makes
and types.
Z Automatic sprinklers with nominal one -half-inch
discharge orifice and of the ordinary degree temperature rat.
ings will usually be required,
3• The Building Official shall be consulted in every case in-
volving special use of sprinklers as contemplated by this
section Of the Standard.
Sec. 38.157. The following table shows the discharge capaci-
Capacities ties of sn having
orifice its equivalent idischarge, nch up toOo
pounds.
452
IF ■
III -1958 EDITION
T. 11—
�ot.ne
TABLE NO. 38-1-A
'.SSURE ATDISCHARGE
1.25°.tV)°-76o°dfi5°
Ifl°?i°O
�,ir°-:zui°-'Pi,°
325°-3* .36°
4010-415"
45D°
;,o°
PRESSURE AT
RINKLEA
LER
PER SQ. IN.
GAL. PER MIN.
PER
.It PER SQ. IN
10
18
15
22
50
20
25
75
25
28
100
TABLE NO. 38-1-B
U.B.G. STANDARD 38-1-58
Discharge
Capacities
DISCHARGE. (Cent'd.)
GAL. PER MIN.
41
50
58
reu,c.0
g,rivr.
'The 135 degree aprinklery of sonic m:maf:"•Unvru ore
thef hl,,,
-knd tfxcif o..... Lured. The ii: d. Fri•,• unrini:Ieru of
. tri,tn.a,,- seu"rr.
Automatic sprinklers of capacities less than that of stand-
ard one -half-inch (ifs") sprinklers shall be of nominal three-
eighths inch (%") or one-fourth inch (14") size with capa-
cities one-half and one-fourth that of the standard one -half-
inch (1Iz") sprinkler respectively.
Three -eighths -inch (%") and one -fourth -inch (iH") sprin-
klers shall have a pintle extending above deflector for identi-
fication purposes.
Sec. 38.158. The standard temperature ratings of automatic Temperature
sprinklers are as follows. (The frame arms only are colored Ratings
to show temperature rating,)
Where higher temperature sprinklers are necessary to
meet extraordinary conditions, special sprinklers as high as
600 degrees F. are obtainable.
See, 38.159. (a) Use- Sprinklers of ratings higher than ordi- High
nary shall be used only when necessary. The use of high tem- Temperature
perature sprinklers shall be in accordance with maximum Sprinklers
ceiling temperatures as given in Table No. 38-1-B.
(b) Determination for Installation. Information regard-
ing the highest temperature that may be encountered in any
location in a particular installation shall be obtained by use
of a thermometer that will register the highest temperature
encountered, which shall be hung for several days in the
questionable location with the plant in operation.
453
I
T. 11—
�ot.ne
e�,rr'At � r,
too=F.
Ind°F-
.F°F.
3ixi°F_
;%
tai°F.
475°F.
nrdinar •
I trm,elliatc
High
Extra High
Very Extra High
1.25°.tV)°-76o°dfi5°
Ifl°?i°O
�,ir°-:zui°-'Pi,°
325°-3* .36°
4010-415"
45D°
;,o°
l', •dond'
NVItire°
.flue
It'd
(1,
Ilra,tRC
orange
'The 135 degree aprinklery of sonic m:maf:"•Unvru ore
thef hl,,,
-knd tfxcif o..... Lured. The ii: d. Fri•,• unrini:Ieru of
. tri,tn.a,,- seu"rr.
Automatic sprinklers of capacities less than that of stand-
ard one -half-inch (ifs") sprinklers shall be of nominal three-
eighths inch (%") or one-fourth inch (14") size with capa-
cities one-half and one-fourth that of the standard one -half-
inch (1Iz") sprinkler respectively.
Three -eighths -inch (%") and one -fourth -inch (iH") sprin-
klers shall have a pintle extending above deflector for identi-
fication purposes.
Sec. 38.158. The standard temperature ratings of automatic Temperature
sprinklers are as follows. (The frame arms only are colored Ratings
to show temperature rating,)
Where higher temperature sprinklers are necessary to
meet extraordinary conditions, special sprinklers as high as
600 degrees F. are obtainable.
See, 38.159. (a) Use- Sprinklers of ratings higher than ordi- High
nary shall be used only when necessary. The use of high tem- Temperature
perature sprinklers shall be in accordance with maximum Sprinklers
ceiling temperatures as given in Table No. 38-1-B.
(b) Determination for Installation. Information regard-
ing the highest temperature that may be encountered in any
location in a particular installation shall be obtained by use
of a thermometer that will register the highest temperature
encountered, which shall be hung for several days in the
questionable location with the plant in operation.
453
I
>li&C. STANDARD MI -ft UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Sec. 38.169. (a) Special Purpose Sprinklers. Sprinklers used
for the special purposes and locations described in this Sec•
tion shall be of types specifically approved for such use.
Open sprinklers may be used to protect special hazards, for
protection against exposures, or in other special locations.
Approved corrosion -resistant or special coated sprinklers
aW be installed in locations where chemicals, moistureor
other corrosive vapors exist sufficient to cause corrosion of
such devices.
For small enclosures and other special locations or condi-
tions not requiring as much water as is discharged by a
nominal one -half-inch (U") orifice sprinkler, sprinklers
having smaller discharge orifices may be used.
In situations involving special problems of water distribu-
tion, sprinklers having a discharge other than that which is
Characteristic of the ordinary types may be used. These will
usually have special deflectors.
NOTE: Sprinklers having special discharge charac-
teristics may be required where either a fine spray or
directional discharge of water is needed.
(b) Sidewall Sprinklers. Sidewall sprinklers are special
Purpose sprinklers and the Building Official shall be consulted
where sidewall sprinklers are to be used.
Oufads and Sec. 3&181. For protection of sprinklers in the following
Sidebb locations, guards and shields shall be used: 1. Sprinklers
which are located where subject to mechanical injury (in
either upright or pendent position) shall be protected with
approved guards.
2. Sprinklers under the gridiron of theaters shall be pro-
vided with metal shields.
Pghmng Sec. 3&18$. When the sprinkler piping is given any kind of
a coating, such as whitewash or paint, care must be exercised
to see that no portion of the automatic sprinklers is covered.
LOCATION AND SPACING OF SPRINKLERS
shy See 3&163. The Building Official shall be consulted in every
case as to location and spacing of sprinklers for the protec-
th in of buildings and contents.
BW#C See. 38.154. The basic fundamentals for providing proper
protection by sprinklers are, namely: 1. Definite maximum
Protection area per sprinkler.
2. Minimum interference to discharge pattern by beams,
bracing, girders, trusses, piping, lighting fixtures and air
conditioning ducts.
3. Correct location of sprinklers with respect to ceilings,
or beams and wood joists to obtain suitable sensitivity.
Fnshdbdim sec- 3&165. (a) Scope. Sprinklers shall be installed through-
out the premises, including basements, lofts and all of the
locations herein specified.
Sprinklers shall be installed under stairs, inside elevator
wells, in belt, cable, pipe, gear and pulley boxes, in cold stor-
age rooms, and coolers in other occupancies, inside small en -
Closures, such, as drying and heating boxes, tenter and dry -
454 i. .
III -1988 EDITION 1'.R.C, STANDARD 38.1-58
Jrig room enclosures, chutes, combustible air ducts, conveyor Installation
ia^unks, bucket elevator enclosures and in all bins, hoppers, Througbout
,lockers, cupboards and closets unless they have tops entirely Prv"'Wc
open and are so located that sprinklers can properly spray (Contd.)
#herein.
(b) Enclosures. Enclosures with cloth, paper or other simi-
lar flammable ceiling shall be sprinklered. Sprinklers above
':unsprinklered enclosures will ordinarily restrict a fire to the
"."enclosure and immediate vicinity but shall not be considered
::as protection for the enclosure and its contents. Many sprin-
klers may open in such a fire involving water damage over a
7large area.
(c) Stairways. Stairways shall be sprinklered underneath
'whether risers are open or not.
(d) Incombustible Stair Shaft«:. Incombustible stair shafts
ordinarily will require sprinklers only at the top and lower
tiers except when serving two or more separate fire sections
when sprinklers will also he required at each landing.
(e) Conveyor Enclosures. Dryers, etc. The general rules
for the spacing of sprinklers will, in most cases. suggest the
proper arrangement for boxed machines, dryer enclosures,
large beltways, and similar locations. Special treatment is,
however, necessary for picker trunks. or small belt and con-
veyor enclosures where there is no room inside the enclosure
for pipes or sprinklers.
For small beltways and conveyor enclosures, pipes shall be
run outside the enclosures and sprinklers installed in dome-
shaped covers about ten inches UO"l in diameter. Where
sprinklers can be,nippled into the boxing without forming an
obstruction, this shall be done and dome-shaped covers
omitted.
(f) Picker Trunks. Sprinklers in picker trunks shall be
not over seven feet (Ti apart, except in wide trunks, requir-
ing more than one line, where sprinklers may be spaced eight
feet (8') apart.
(g) Paper Machines, etc. Sprinkler piping may be run
above hoods over paper machines, dry cans, and similar
equipment where dripping of condensation from sprinkler
piping must be avoided, and the sprinklers nippied through.
The lower sprinklers under the hoods shall be located just
outside of the line of the cylinders or rolls_ If hoods are in-
combustible, a line of sprinklers over the bearings at each
side will give satisfactory protection.
(h) Economizers. Automatic sprinkler protection is
needed in certain types of economizers such as used in paper
mills. Where economizers are subject to freezing tempera-
tures special types of sprinkler protection shall be provided.
(il Special Cases. Special instructions shall he obtained
relative to placing sprinklersinside show windows, telephone
booths, boxed machines, metal air ducts, ventilators and con-
cealed spaces, and under large shelves, benches, tables, over-
head storage racks, platforms and similar water sheds, and
over electrical generating and transforming apparatus and
switchboards.
(j) Generator and Transformer Rooms. Sprinkler protec-
tion shall be provided in generator and transformer rooms.
455
U STJ 38-1-M UNVORM SUMMING CODE
A DL. III -1858 EDITION U.R.C. STANDARD 38-1-58
Hoods or shields to protect generators, switchboards and
other important electrical equipment shall be incombustible
and ahalt be arranged to minimize interference with sprinkler
protection. where walls, floor and ceiling are of fire- esistive
construction, sprinklers may be omitted.
(k) Blind Spaew Sprinklers shall be installed in all
blind spaces enclosed wholly or partly by combustible con-
struction, as in walls, floors and ceilings, except as modified
by this Subsection. In spaces formed by studs or joists, sprin-
kler protection shall be provided where there is a six-inch
(6") or more clearance between the inside or near edges of
the studs or joists, which form the opposite sides of the
space. In bar joist construction, sprinklers shall be installed
wherever the total depth of the space exceeds six inches (6")
between roof or floor deck and ceiling. The spacing of sprin-
klers may be on the basis of light hazard classification.
Permission may be given to omit sprinklers from combus-
tible blind spaces where the following conditions prevail:
1. where the ceiling is attached directly to the underside
of the supporting beams of a combustible roof or floor
or otherwise installed to make the installation of sprink-
lers impracticable.
2. where concealed space is entirely filled with an incom-
bustible insulation. In solid joisted construction the in-
sulation need fill only the space from the ceiling to the
bottom edge of the joist of the roof or floor deck.
3. where a concealed space exceeds six inches (e") be-
tween structural members but is very limited in area
and does not extend to another fire area provided fire
or draft stops are installed to subdivide the areae. Such
fire or draft sly a shall be provided at each floor levet
for vertical and at approximately fifty -foot (50') inter-
vals for horizontal divisions or at closer intervals if
required by the Building Official,
(1) Spaces Under Ground Floors. Sprinklers shall be in-
stalled in all spaces below combustible ground floors, except
that by special permission sprinklers may be omitted where
all of the following conditions prevail:
1. The space is not accessible for storage purposes or
entrance of unauthorized persons and is protected against
accumulation of wind-borne debris.
2. The space contains no equipment such as steam pipes,
electric wiring, shafting, or conveyors.
3. The floor over the space is tight
4. No flammable liquids are used on the floor above,
(m) Decks. Sprinklers shall be installed under decks and
galleries unless they do not exceed four feet (4') in width,
with at least a six-inch (6") clearance from the well or
partition and with arrangements to keep all stock a similar
distance from the wall or partition.
(n) Duets. Sprinklers shall be installed under ducts
which are over four -feet (41) wide, and under ducts of less
width if distribution from ceiling sprinklers is obstructed.
(a) Fixtures, Sprinklers shall be installed in all stock
456
R I -f rtures which exceed five feet (5') in width, also in those Installation
"itrhich are less than live feet IT), but more than two and Throughout
.Me -half feet (2%') in width unless bulkheaded with tight Premises
tions. Sprinklers shall be installed in any compartments (Contd.)
Ute h{ch are larger than five -feet (5') deep, eight -feet (8') long
three -feet (3') high.
i k..; (p) Tabtes. Sprinklers shalt be installed under cutting,
dr�: resing, sewing machine and other work tables wider than
,z=„„11ve and one-half feet (5�6i'), also under tables less than five
and one-half feet {5i_') but wider than four feet (�') unless
„F .provided underneath with tight vertical garti tions of galvan-
k
--:Yzed iron or other incombustible material net over ten feet
'r Partitions shall be full width of table, extend from under-
Wside of table to floor and from front edge to back edge of
table, shall be substantially fastened to the underside of tabir•
°and to floor; and shall be reinforced with angle or channe:
Iron uprights.
The outer edges of each partition shall be smoothly finisheC.
(rounded if of metal) so as to prevent injury to employees.
t Special instructions shall be obtained relative to the instal-
lation of "stops" under tables of unusual construction.
(q) Exterior Docks and Platforms. Sprinklers shall be in-
stalled under awnings or roofs over outside platforms except
where construction is incombustible and the platform is not
used for storage.
Sprinklers shall be installed under exterior docks and plat-
forms of combustible construction unless such space is closed
off and protected against accumulation of wind-borne debris.
Sec. $8,166. Subject to the approval of the Building Official, Permissible
sprinklers may be omitted in rooms or areas as follows: 1. Omissions
Where sprinklers are considered undesirable because of the
nature of the contents, or in rooms or areas of incombustible
construction with wholly incombustible contents and which
are not exposed by other areas- Sprinklers shall not be
omitted from any room merely because it is damp or of fire -
resistive construction -
2. It is not advisable to install sprinklers where the ap- r
plication of water or flame and water to the contents may tri.
constitute a serious life or fire hazard, as in the manufac-
lure or storage of quantities of aluminum powder, calcium
carbide, calcium phosphide, metallic sodium and potassium,
quicklime, magnesium powder, and sodium peroxide, The ai
manufacture and storage of such materials shall be confined
to specially cut-off, unsprinklered rooms or buildings of fire -
resistive construction.
3. Safe deposit or other vaults of fire -resistive construe -
tion
)
tion will not ordinarily require sprinkler protection when z
used for the storage of records, files and other documents,t
when stored in metal cabinets or on metal shelving.
Sprinkler
S Sec. 38167, (a) General Provisions. The term "smooth coil- Sliming:
g" construction as used in this Section includes: I. Mush- Cinder Smooth -
om, flatslab, pan -type or joisted type reinforced concrete- ('oiling
2. Continuous smooth bays formed by wood or steel beams Construction
457
V-1147. STANDARD 39-13$ UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
MAXIM 17M AL1 oWAHLY DIS -
TO SIDE OF BEAM
spaced more than seven and one-half feet (7!.'.') on canters,
D ITTOM OF REAM
beams supported by columns, girders or trusses.
0 ts.
.... ...... I to.
F"s"'istia"th
c*i*w
3. Smooth roof or floor decks supported directly on girders
2 ft. 6 in. to less than 3 ft
3 ft.to Lt. ft. 6 in:
.............
Goa,tnsvtlloa
or trusses spaced more than seven and one-half feet (71 on
6 in.
Ktalffrfl.)
centers.
4 ft. 6 in. to 1-i than ft. _ ..........
S ft. to IeqS than 5 ft. 6 m
I ..... 9 in.
11 io.
4. Smooth monolithic ceilings of at least three-fourths
..........
_ - _ 14 in
inch (34') of cement plaster, fibered gypsum plaster, perlite
or vermiculite plaster on metal lath or equivalent or ether
materials or combination of materials of equivalent fire -
resistive rating attached to the underside of wood or bar
joists,
NOTE: In Items 2, 3 and 4 the roof and floor decks
may be incombustible or combustible. Item 2 would in-
clude standard mill construction.
(b) Light Hazard Occupancy. With construction as de-
scribed in this Section the protection are allotted per sprin-
kler shall not exceed two hundred square feet (200 sq. ft.i.
The maximum allowable distance between lines and between
sprinklers on lines is fifteen feet (15'). Sprinklers need not
be staggered.
(c) Ordinary Hazard Occupancy. With construction as
described in this Section, the protection area allotted per
sprinkler shall not exceed one hundred and thirty square feet
(130 sq. ft.) of incombustible ceiling and shall not exceed one
hundred and twenty square feet (120 sq. ft.) of combustible
ceiling. Under metal lath and plaster ceiling, the protection
area allotted per sprinkler shall not exceed one hundred and
thirty square feet (130 sq. ft.) of ceiling attached to hot,
joists supporting an incombustible roof or floor deck and
shall not exceed one hundred and twenty square feet (120 sq.
fL) of ceiling attached to wood joists or to bar joists support-
ing a combustible roof or floor deck.
The maximum allowable distance between lines and be-
tween Sprinklers on lines is fifteen feet (15'). Sprinklers on
alternate lines shall be staggered if the distance between
lines or the distance between sprinklers on lines exceeds
twelve feet (12').
(di Extra Hazard Occupancy. With construction Its de-
scribed in this Section, the protection area allotted per
sprinkler shall not exceed ninety square feet (90 sq. ft.) Of
incombustible ceiling and shall not exceed eighty square
feet (80 sq. ft.) of combustible ceiling. The maximum allow-
able distance between lines and between sprinklers on lines
is twelve feet (121). Sprinklers on alternate lines shall be
staggered if the distance between sprinklers on lines exceeds
eight feet (81).
staneb
See. 39.168. Under mushroom flat -slab and pan -type rem -
Liam
forced concrete and smooth metal lath and plastered ceilings,
branch lines may be run in either direction. It is desirable to
treat each space between columns as a unit; that is, installing
the same number of lines in each space.
Under jousted type reinforced concrete ceilings, branch
lines shall be run at right angles to or across the joists; they
shall be placed midway, between the girders if the distance
between girders is great enough to require more than one
line of sprinklers,
458
VOL. HI -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 39-1-58
In continuous smooth bays formed by wood or steel beams Branch
spaced more than seven and one-half feet (71;,') on centers Lines
and supported by columns, branch lines shall be placed mid- (Cont'd.)
way between the beams in each bay or shall be uniformly
spaced between beams if the distance between beams is
great enough to require more than one line per bay. Branch
lines may be placed across the beams and sprinklers may be
spaced without regard to the location of beams provided the
maximum allowable distance from the ceiling to the deflector
will not be exceeded and provided the location of sprinkler
deflectors, if above the bottoms of beams, will be at sufficient
distance from the beams to avoid obstructions to distribu-
tion, as specified in Section 38,184 (bi.
In continuous smooth bays formed by wood or steel beams
spaced more than seven and one-half feet (714') on centers
and supported onhaters or trusses, branch lines may be
9
placed across the beams and sprinklers may be spaced with-
: out regard to the location of beams provided the maximum
allowable distance from the ceiling to the deflector will not
be exceeded race Section 38.194 (01; and provided the loca-
tion of sprinkler deflectors, if above the bottoms of beams,
will be at sufficient distances from the beams to avoid ob-
structions to distribution, as specified in Section 38.184 (b).
In no case shall branch lines be closer than three feet, nine
inches (3'911) to girders or trusses. The branch line piping
may also be run in the continuous smooth bays but sprinklers
shall be at least three feet, nine inches 13'9,,; from girders or
trusses in order to avoid obstructions to the spray distribu-
tion by the structural members.
Sprinklers may be located directly above girders or trusses
no more than eight -inches (8") wide providing the deflector
is at least six inches (6") above the top of the girder or truss.
Under smooth ceilings supported directly on girders or
trusses, branch lines shall be placed midway between the
girders or trusses in each bay or shall be uniformly spaced
between girders or trusses if the distance between girders
or trusses is great enough to require more than one line
per bay. The branch line piping may also be run through
the trusses.
The distance from the wall to the end sprinklers shall not
exceed one-half the allowable distance between sprinklers On
TABLE NO. 98-1-C—POSITION OF DEFLECTOR WHEN
LOCATED ABOVE BOTTOM OF BEAM
DISTANCE FROM SPRINKLER
MAXIM 17M AL1 oWAHLY DIS -
TO SIDE OF BEAM
TANCE DEFLECTOR ABOVE
D ITTOM OF REAM
Less than II I. .....
to l_ than .....::: *. .'
0 ts.
.... ...... I to.
2 ft, to k,11 than 2 ft. 6 in.........
... .... ... 2 in.
2 ft. 6 in. to less than 3 ft
3 ft.to Lt. ft. 6 in:
.............
in.
..... In.
3 ft. 6 '. , th.. 4 ft.
,!—I. less than
6 in.
4 ft. to less than 4 ft6 in. .__
............ 7 in.
4 ft. 6 in. to 1-i than ft. _ ..........
S ft. to IeqS than 5 ft. 6 m
I ..... 9 in.
11 io.
_ ....
$ ft. 6 in. to In. than 6 fL ...........
..........
_ - _ 14 in
459
U.B.C. STANDARD 38-1-311 UNIFORM BUDDING CODE
the branch line. The distance from the wall to the end branch !
line shall not exceed one-half the allowable distance between
Sprinkler
Spacing:
Under Beach
mld Girder
Construction
branch lines.
Beams or trusses forming narrow pockets of combustible
construction along walls, when of a depth which will obstruct
the spray discharge pattern, may require additional sprink-
lers. See Table No. 38-1-C showing Maximum Allowable Dis-
tance Deflector Above Bottom of Beam.
see. 38.169. (a) Beam and Girder Construction. The term
-beam and girder construction" as used in this Section in-
cludes incombustible and combustible roof andfloor decks
supported by, namely:
1. Wood beams of four inches (4") or greater nominal
thickness or steel beams spaced three feet (3') to seven and
pne-half feet (7€2') on centers and either supported on or
framed into girders. (When supporting a wood plank deck
this includes semimil) and panel construction and when sup-
porting (with steel framing) gypsum plank, steel deck, con-
crete rile or similar material would include much of the
so-called "incombustible" construction.]
2. Bar joists or light steel trusses spaced three feet (3')
to seven and one-half feet (71") on centers.
ib) Light Hazard Occupaney. With construction as de-
scribed in this Section the protection area allotted per
sprinkler shall not exceed two hundred square feet (200 sq.
ft. ) of either incombustible or combustible roof or floor deck.
The maximum allowable distance between lines and between
sprinklers on lines is fifteen feet (15'). Sprinklers on alter-
nate lines shall be staggered.
(e) Ordinary Hazard Occupancy. With construction as de-
scribed in this Section the protection area allotted per
sprinkler shall not exceed one hundred and thirty square
feet (130 sq. ft.i for incombustible and not exceed one hun-
dred and twenty square feet (120 sq, ft.) for combustible,
roof or floor deck. The maximum allowable distance between
lines and between sprinklers on lines is fifteen feet (IT).
Sprinklers on alternate lines shall be staggered.
id) Extra Hazard Occupancy. With construction as de-
scribed in this Section the protection area allotted per sprin-
kler shall not exceed ninety square feet (90 sq. ft.) for in-
combustible, and not exceed eighty square feet (80 sq. fL)
for combustible, roof or floor deck, The maximum allowable
distance between lines and between sprinklers on lines is
twelve feet (12'). Sprinklers on alternate lines shall be
staggered.
Bralach See. 38.110. With framing described in Section 38.169,
L1wss branch lines shall be run at right angles to the beams and
supported from them. Branch lines shall be placed midway
between girders in each bay or shall be uniformly spaced
between girders if the distance between girders is great (
enough to require more than one line per bay. In no case shall
branch lines be closer than three feet, nine inches (3'9') to '+t
girders or trusses.
460
I It
VOL, M-1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 38-1-5£;
With framing as described in Section 38169, sprinklers may Branch
be spaced alternate beam, alternate bay, or without regard L[nes
to location of beams provided the maximum allowable dis- (Contd.)
tance from roof or floor decks to deflector of sprinklers [Sec-
tion 38.184 (d)] is not exceeded and provided the location of
deflectors, if above the bottom of beams will be at sufficient
distance from sides of beams to avoid obstruction to the dis-
charge pattern as specified in Section 38.184 (b) and Table
No. 38-1-C. In order to utilize the heat baffling action of the
girders, the deflectors of sprinklers in the bays shall be
located not lower than the girders.
NOTE: Beam a ,d girder construction by definition
is limited to bays not over seven -and -one -half -feet (71.,')
wide. For the purposes of this paragraph, bays in panel
construction may be wider if the panel does not exceed
three hundred square feet (300 sq. ft.) in area.
With framing as described in Section 38.169 branch lines
shall be run at right angles to the bar joists and either
beneath them or through them so that the maximum allow-
able distance from roof or floor deck to sprinkler deflector
[Section 38.184 (d)] will not be exceeded. Branch lines shall
be spaced uniformly between girders. Sprinklers may be
located without reference to the bar joists, but shall be
staggered on alternate lines.
The distance from the wall to the end sprinklers shall not
exceed one-half the allowable distance between sprinklers
on the branch lines. The distance from the wall to the end
branch line shall not exceed one-half '.he allowable distance
between branch lines.
Girders and trusses forming narrow pockets of combus-
tible construction along walls when of a depth which will
obstruct the spray discharge pattern may require additional
sprinklers. See Table No. 38-1-C showing Maximum Allow-
able Distance Deflector above Bottom of Beam.
Sec 38.171. (a) Wood Joist Construction. The term "wood Sprinkler
joist construction" refers to wood boards or planks on Spacing:
wooden beams spaced less than three feet (3') on centers. Under Open
Wooden beams less than four inches (4"I nominal thickness %{'oqd Joiet
spaced more than three feet (3') on centers are also con- Construeliou
sidered as joist construction.
(b) Light and Ordinary Hazard Occupancy. Under open
finish joist construction without fire stops, the protection
area allotted per sprinkler shall not exceed ninety square
feet (90 sq. ft.), and not exceed one hundred square feet (100
sq. ft.) if joist channels are fire stopped at not over forty -
foot (40') intervals. The maximum allowable distance be-
tween lines and between sprinklers on lines is twelve feet
(IT). Sprinklers on alternate lines shall be staggered if the
distance between sprinklers on lines exceeds eight feet (8'):
otherwise sprinklers need not be staggered.
Bays twelve feet one inch (121") to fourteen feet six
inches (14'6") in width require two Imes of sprinklers except
where numerous bays of this width prevail, in which case
two and one lines may be installed in adjoining bays with
,two lines in bays next to side or end walls. With this arrange -
461
U -&C. W&NDARD 88-I-38 UNH?ORM RUILDING CODE.
Sprinkler
ment, neither the maximum allowable distance between
' k1:r- on lines nor the maximum allowable protection
t°
per spr nkler (within each bay) shall be exceeded. In
Joist
the bays containing two branch lines, the lines shall be
Construction
located at the quarter point and not closer than three feet
(Cost'd.)
(3') to the girders.
(c) Extra Hazard Occupancy. Under open finish joist con-
struction without fire stops, the protection area allotted per
sprinkler should not exceed seventy square feet (70 sq. ft.)
and not exceed eighty square feet (80 sq, ft.) if joist chan-
nels are fire stopped at not over forty -foot (40') intervals.
The maximum allowable distance between lines and between
sprinklers on lines is ten feet (10'). Sprinklers on alternate
lines shall be staggered.
Branch lines shall be run at right angles to, or across, the
joists. Branch lines shall usually be placed midway between
girders in each bay or shall be uniformly spaced between
girders if the distance between girders is great enough to
-,j'"
require more than one line per bay.
Where the joists are framed into supporting girders, the
girders may be disregarded in the spacing of the branch lines
providing sprinkler deflectors are at such elevation that the
girders offer no obstruction to the spray discharge pattern.
The distance from the wall to the end sprinklers shall not
exceed one-half the allowable distance between sprinklers
on the branch lines.
Where there are two sets of joists under a roof or ceiling
and there is no flooring over the lower set, sprinklers shall
be installed above and below the lower set of joists where
there is a clearance of from six inches 16" 1 to twelve inches
(12") between the top of the lower joist and bottom of the
upper joist.
VOL. III -1958 EDITION
U.B.C. STANDARD 38-1-58
sprinklers on lines exceeds eight feet 18'i, otherwise sprink-
lers need not be staggered.
A protection area of one hundred and thirty square feet
(130 sq, ft.) per sprinkler may be allotted for sprinklers
under an incombustible suspended ceiling and one hundred
and twenty square feet (120 sq. ft.) per sprinkler under a
combustible suspended ceiling provided there is a full com-
plement of sprinklers immediately above such ceilings and
the attic space is unfloored and unoccupied. The maximum
allowable distance between lines and between sprinklers on
lines is fifteen feet (15'). Sprinklers on alternate lines shall
be staggered if the distance between lines or between sprink-
lers on lines exceeds twelve feet (12'f,
(d) Extra Hazard Ocenlnncy. Where joist construction is
sheathed with sheathing other than described in Section
38.167, the protection area allotted per sprinkler shall not
exceed eighty square feet (80 sq, ft.). The maximum allow-
able distance between lines and between sprinklers on lines
is twelve feet (12'). Sprinklers on alternate lines shall be
staggered.
Sec. 38.173. (a) Bar Joist Constniction. The term "bar joist Sprinkler
construction" refers to construction employing joists con- Spacing
sisting of steel truss -shaped members formed of rads or Under Open
small steel shapes. Bar Joist
This Section includes incombustible and combustible roof Construction
and floor decks supported on bar joists or light steel trr.sser
spaced less than three feet (3') on cente^s. For sprinkler
spacing under similar construction with bar joists or light
steel trusses spaced three feet (3') to seven and one-half
feet MV) V) on centers see Section 38.160.
Roof and floor decks consisting of poured gypsum or con-
crete on combustible form board supported on top of steel
bar joists or long span steel beams shall be considered in-
combustible.
(b) Light Hazard Occupancy. With construction as de-
scribed in this Section the protection area allotted per
k sprinkler shall not exceed one hundred and sixty-eight square
feet (168 sq. ft.) of incombustible or combustible roof or
floor deck. The maximum allowable distance between lines
and between sprinklers on lines is fifteen feet 115:'1.
(c) Ordinary Hazard Occupancy. With construction as de-
scribed in this Section the protection area allotted per
sprinkler shall not exceed one hunched and twenty square
feet (120 sq. ft.) for incombustible, and not exceed one hum-
- Bred and ten square feet (110 sq. ft.) for combustible roof
or floor deck. The maximum allowable distance between lines
and between sprinklers on lines is fifteen feet (15'k.
(d) Extra Hazard Occupancy. With construction as de-
scribed in this Section the protection area allotted per
sprinkler shall not exceed ninety square feet (90 sq. ft -i for
incombustible and not exceed eighty square feet 180 sq. ft.I
for combustible roof or floor deck. The maximum allowable
distance between lines and betweeh sprinklers on lines is
twelve feet (12').
Sprinklers may be located without reference to the bar
IN 4:11 -joists but shall be staggered on alternate lines.
463
Sec. 38.172. (al Joist Construction, For joist construction
sheathed with metal lath and plaster or other ceiling de -
Under Waal
scribed in Section 38.167, the spacing requirements under Sec -
or Bar Joint
tion 38.167 apply.
C Construction
*"
(b) Light Hazard Occupancy. Where joist construction fs
sheathed with plaster board, metal, wood lath and plaster,
ss
Ceiliwood,
fiberboard or other combustible sheathing, the pro-
tection area allotted per sprinkler shall not exceed one hun-
dred and sixty-eight square feet (168 sq. ft.). The maximum
allowable distance between lines and between sprinklers on
lines is fourteen feet (IT). Sprinklers need not be staggered.
(c) Ordinary Hazard Occupancy. Where joist construction
is sheathed with plaster board, metal, wood lath and plaster,
the protection area allotted per sprinkler shall not exceed
one hundred square feet (100 sq. ft.). The maximum allow-
able distance between lines and between sprinklers on lines
is twelve feet 112'1. Sprinklers need not be staggered.
Where joist construction is sheathed with wood, fiber-
board or other combustible sheathing, the protection area
-,j'"
allotted per sprinkler shall not exceed ninety square feet (90
sq. M). The maximum allowable distance between lines and
between sprinklers on lines is twelve feet (121). Sprinklers
on alternate lines shall be staggered if distance between
46R
VOL. III -1958 EDITION
U.B.C. STANDARD 38-1-58
sprinklers on lines exceeds eight feet 18'i, otherwise sprink-
lers need not be staggered.
A protection area of one hundred and thirty square feet
(130 sq, ft.) per sprinkler may be allotted for sprinklers
under an incombustible suspended ceiling and one hundred
and twenty square feet (120 sq. ft.) per sprinkler under a
combustible suspended ceiling provided there is a full com-
plement of sprinklers immediately above such ceilings and
the attic space is unfloored and unoccupied. The maximum
allowable distance between lines and between sprinklers on
lines is fifteen feet (15'). Sprinklers on alternate lines shall
be staggered if the distance between lines or between sprink-
lers on lines exceeds twelve feet (12'f,
(d) Extra Hazard Ocenlnncy. Where joist construction is
sheathed with sheathing other than described in Section
38.167, the protection area allotted per sprinkler shall not
exceed eighty square feet (80 sq, ft.). The maximum allow-
able distance between lines and between sprinklers on lines
is twelve feet (12'). Sprinklers on alternate lines shall be
staggered.
Sec. 38.173. (a) Bar Joist Constniction. The term "bar joist Sprinkler
construction" refers to construction employing joists con- Spacing
sisting of steel truss -shaped members formed of rads or Under Open
small steel shapes. Bar Joist
This Section includes incombustible and combustible roof Construction
and floor decks supported on bar joists or light steel trr.sser
spaced less than three feet (3') on cente^s. For sprinkler
spacing under similar construction with bar joists or light
steel trusses spaced three feet (3') to seven and one-half
feet MV) V) on centers see Section 38.160.
Roof and floor decks consisting of poured gypsum or con-
crete on combustible form board supported on top of steel
bar joists or long span steel beams shall be considered in-
combustible.
(b) Light Hazard Occupancy. With construction as de-
scribed in this Section the protection area allotted per
k sprinkler shall not exceed one hundred and sixty-eight square
feet (168 sq. ft.) of incombustible or combustible roof or
floor deck. The maximum allowable distance between lines
and between sprinklers on lines is fifteen feet 115:'1.
(c) Ordinary Hazard Occupancy. With construction as de-
scribed in this Section the protection area allotted per
sprinkler shall not exceed one hunched and twenty square
feet (120 sq. ft.) for incombustible, and not exceed one hum-
- Bred and ten square feet (110 sq. ft.) for combustible roof
or floor deck. The maximum allowable distance between lines
and between sprinklers on lines is fifteen feet (15'k.
(d) Extra Hazard Occupancy. With construction as de-
scribed in this Section the protection area allotted per
sprinkler shall not exceed ninety square feet (90 sq. ft -i for
incombustible and not exceed eighty square feet 180 sq. ft.I
for combustible roof or floor deck. The maximum allowable
distance between lines and betweeh sprinklers on lines is
twelve feet (12').
Sprinklers may be located without reference to the bar
IN 4:11 -joists but shall be staggered on alternate lines.
463
U.R.C. STANDARD 38-1-58 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Branch lines shall be run at right angles to the bar joists
and either beneath them or through them so that the maxi-
mum allowable distance from ceiling to sprinkler deflector
will not be exceeded [see Section 38.184 (f) 1. Branch lines
shah be spaced uniformly between girders.
The distance from the wall to the end sprinklers shall not
exceed one-half the allowable distance between sprinklers on
the branch lines. The distance from the wall to the end
branch line shall not exceed one-half the allowable distance
between branch lines.
Sprinkler
Ser. 38.174. Under pitched roofs having in excess of one foot
Spacing:
(1') in three feet (3') and where branch lines are run parallel
Under
to the peak, one line of sprinklers shall be located in the
Pitched lWafs
peak of the roof or a line of sprinklers shall be located on
each side down from the peak a distance not greater than
one-half the distance between branch lines. Where branch
lines are run up the slopes, the end sprinklers on branch
lines on one slope shall be located in the peak, or end sprink-
lers on branch tines on both slopes shall be located down
from the peak a distance not greater than one-half the allow-
able distance between sprinklers on the branch lines. In any
case the deflectors of the highest sprinklers shall be not
more than three feet (T) vertically below the peak. See Sec-
tion 38.184 (k).
The spacing of sprinklers shall be in accordance with the
type of construction as outlined in Sections 38.1$7 to 38.173
inclusive. The distances between sprinklers on branch lines
shall be measured on a line parallel with the roof.
In sawtooth roofs, the end sprinklers on the branch lines
shall be not over three feet (3') from the peak of the saw-
tooth.
Sprinkler See. 38.175. Under curved roofs and Quonset -type buildings,
sprinklers shall be spaced in accordance with the foregoing
Under requirements for the closest comparable type of ceiling con-
ed struction. Where roofs are curved down to the floor line, the
Ids horizontal distance measured at the floor level from the side
wall or roof construction to the nearest sprinklers shall not
be greater than one-half the allowable distance between
sprinklers in the same direction.
Under curved roof of steel with ribs six -inches 0") deep
spaced four feet (4') on centers, the protection area allotted
per sprinkler for light and ordinary hazard occupancy shall
not exceed one hundred and twenty square feet (120 sq. ft.:
of the ceiling area. The maximum allowable distance between
lines and between sprinklers on lines is twelve feet (12'), with
the sprinklers staggered on alternate lines.
Where curved roofs of steel are sheathed with a com-
bustible sheathing, see Section 38.172 for spacing of sprin-
klers.
Deflectors of sprinklers shall be parallel with the curve
of the roof or tilted slightly toward the peak of the roof.
The distance of deflectors of sprinklers from ceiling shall be
as specified in Section 38.184 (h).
Where extra hazard occupancy spacing of sprinklers is
used under pitched or curved ceilings of other than fire -
484
VOI., III -1858 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 38-1-58
resistive construction, as in aircraft storage or servicing
areas, the spacing as projected on the floor shall be not
wider than required for extra hazard occupancies, but in no
case shall the spacing on the roof or ceiling be wider than
required for ordinary hazard occupancies.
Sec. 38.176. The distance from wall or partition to first Distance
sprinkler shall not exceed one-half the allowable distance be- from
tween sprinklers in the same direction. Additional sprinklers Walls
may be required in narrow combustible pockets formed by
bay timbers or beams with walls or partitions.
See. 38.177. Timbers, uprights, hangers, piping, lighting fix- Obstructions
tures, ducts, etc., are likely to interfere with the proper dis-
tribution of water from sprinklers. Therefore, sprinklers
shall be so located or spaced that any interference is held to
a minimum. This will ordinarily mean a distance of at least
twelve inches (12") from such members, except for lighting
fixtures and ducts. See Section 38.184 (b).
See. 38.178. Lighting fixtures of the pendent type offer no Lighting
appreciable obstruction to the discharge from sprinklers Fixtures
except when located at a level less than three inches (3"1
below the deflectors of sprinklers in the upright or pendent
position. Fixtures of the surface type (attached to ceiling
without pendants) may offer obstructions to the discharge
from sprinklers. Recessed lighting fixtures offer no obstme-
tions to sprinkler discharge. See Section 38.184 (b I .
Branch sprinkler lines shall be run parallel to and between
lines of fixtures and should be sufficient in number to pro-
vide proper floor and ceiling coverage. Pendent type fixtures
located at a level less than three inches (3") below the de-
flectors of sprinklers and surface type fixtures usually make
necessary additional branch lines.
See. 38.179. The installation of open grid 'louver" or "egg Open (,rid
crate" ceilings of two -inches by two -inches (2"x2") or Ceilings
larger openings below sprinklers restricts the sidewise travel
of the sprinkler discharge but protection as a whole is not
adversely affected in buildings of light hazard occupancies.
A minimum clearance of eighteen inches (18") shall be pro-
vided between the sprinkler deflectors and the upper surface
of the louver type ceiling. If this is not possible, the pro-
tection area per sprinkler shall not exceed eighty square feet
(80 sq. ft.) to ninety square feet (90 sq. ft.) with maximum
distance between lines and between sprinklers on lines not
greater than ten feet (10').
Sec. 38.180. Within vertical shafts having combustible sides. Proteetion of
::;..sprinklers shall be provided for each two hundred square feet Vertical
.'�: (200 sq. ft.) of combustible surface, in addition to sprinklers Shafts
,,gt tops of shafts. Such sprinklers shall be installed at each
door when practicable, and always when shaft is trapped.
Where practicable, sprinklers shall be staggered at alter-
nate floor levels, particularly when only one sprinkler is
installed at each floor level.
C.D.C. STANDARD 38-1-58 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Where vertical openings are not protected by standard
enclosures, sprinklers shall fully cover them. This necessi-
tates placing sprinklers close to such openings at each floor
level.
Pretecom of tier. 38.181. Sprinklers in for storage vaults shall be located
rvault% centrally over the aisles between racks and shall be spaced
not over five feet (v) apart along the aisles.
Where sprinklers are spaced five feet (5') apart along the
sprinkler branch lines, pipe sizes may be in accordance with
the following schedule:
1 inch pipe __...__ ................._....._._._. 4 sprinklers
illi inch pipe ..._._....__.. ...... 6 sprinklers
15, inch pipe ._..._......... __........._ _.._ 10 sprinklers
2 inch pipe ._._._._....___._...._.__.._.... 20 sprinklers
22y inch pipe _...._....___ .. ..... .................. 40 sprinklers
3 inch pipe . .... ...................._.. 80 sprinklers
Sprinklers shall be of approved old type having orifice sizes
selected to provide as closely as possible but not less than
20 gallons per minute per sprinkler, based on the water pres.
sure available.
Sidewag See. 38.182. Location of sidewall sprinklers shall be as fol-
--
lows: 1. Sidewall sprinklers shall be located not more than
Location ten feet 110') apart on walls for ordinary hazard occupan-
cies and not more than fourteen feet (14') apart for light
hazard occupancies. Deflectors shall be at a distance from
walls and ceilings not exceeding six inches (6") and never
less than four inches IV). The installation of sidewall
sprinklers other than beneath smooth ceilings will require
special rulings.
2. Rooms having widths in excess of fifteen feet (15') up
to thirty feet (30') shall have sprinklers on two opposite
walls with spacing as above required and sprinklers regu-
larly staggered. Where rooms are over twenty feet (201) in
width special consideration shall be given to additional
sprinkler protection required to supplement the protection j
given by the sprinklers along the sidewalls.
3. Special consideration shall be given to placing sidewall
sprinklers so that they will be favored to the greatest pos-
sible extent in receiving the heat from a fire and at the
same time most effectively distribute the water discharged
by them. This is likely to be particularly important where
heavy decorative molding is encountered near the junction
of walls and ceilings.
4. Where the ceiling above and the wall to the rear of
sidewall sprinklers are smooth and at right angles to each
other, good results are obtainable with the sprinklers placed
strictly vertically.
5. Where the ceiling contour is sloping or there is other
reason for greater than ordinary ceiling protection due to
construction, occupancy, etc., increased coverage is obtain
able by tilting the sprinklers to conform with the slope of
the ceiling. (See Section 38.160.)
LM"
VOL. III -1858 EDITION C.B.C. STANDARD 38-1-a8
See. 38.185. (a) Light Hazard Occupancy. With ineombus- Sidewafl
tible smooth ceiling, the protection area allotted per sprinkler Sprinklers:
shall not exceed one hundred and ninety-six square feet (196 Spacing
sq. ft.) with the distance between sprinklers on lines not in
excess of fourteen feet (141).
With combustible smooth ceiling sheathed with plaster-
board, metal, or wood lath and plaster, the protection area
allotted per sprinkler shall not exceed one hundred and sixty-
eight square feet (168 sq, ft.) with the distance between
sprinklers on lines not in excess of fourteen feet (14'). Where
sheathing is combustible such as wood, fiberboard or other
combustible material, the protection area allotted per sprin-
kler shall not exceed one hundred and twenty square feet
(120 sq. ft.) with the distance between sprinklers on lines
not in excess of fourteen feet (14').
(b) Ordinary Hazard Occupancy. With incombustible
sanooth ceiling, the protection area allotted per sprinkler
shall not exceed one hundred square feet (100 sq. ft.) with
the distance between sprinklers on lines not in excess of ten
feet (101).
With combustible smooth ceiling sheathed with plaster-
board, metal, wood lath and plaster, wood, fiberboard or
other combustible material, the protection area per sprinkler
shall not exceed eighty square feet (80 sq, ft.) per sprinkler
with the distance between sprinklers on lines not in excess
often feet (MY).
(c) Extra hazard Occupancy. Installation of sidewall
sprinklers in, extra hazard occupancy will require special
Permission and recommendations by the Building Official.
See. 38.184. (a) Upright or Pendent. The character of the Poshfonof
discharge of sprinklers is such that it is necessary to use tw'o Sprinklers
distinct designs --one approved for the upright and the other
for the pendent position. Sprinklers shall be installed with
the frame parallel to the branch line pipe to reduce to mini-
mum the obstruction of the discharge pattern.
(b) Position of Deflectors. Deflectors of sprinklers shall
be parallel to ceilings, roofs, or the incline of stairs, but when
Installed in the peak of a pitched roof they shall be horizontal.
Where branch lines run across the beams, the deflectors of
sprinklers located in the bays, shall preferably be located
above the bottom of the beam and in no case more than four
inches (4") below the bottom level of the beams.
It is essential that if deflectors of sprinklers in the bays
are above the bottom of beams, they be at sufficient distances
from the beams, as shown in Table No. 38-1-C.
(c) Smooth Ceiling, Construction. (As defined in Section
38.167.)
Deflectors of sprinklers in bays shall be located not less
than three inches (3") below ceilings, and not more than ten
inches (10") below combustible ceilings or twelve inches
(12") below incombustible ceilings.
Deflectors of sprinklers under beams shall be located one
(1") to four inches (4") below beams, and not more
fourteen inches (14") below combustible ceilings or not
48i
Uxe. STANDARD 38-138 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
more than sixteen inches (16-) below incombustible ceilings.
Position d
of s4winklers when sprinklers approved for pendent use are installs in
(Cont'd.) the pendent position under smooth ceilings the deflectors
shall be not less than two andone-half inches (2%*) from
ro
telling. Special appved type pendent sprinklers (flush type,
ceiling typel may have deflectors nearer the ceiling.
'd) Beam and Girder Construction. (As defined in Section
38.169.) Deflectors of sprinklers in bays formed by beams
spaced less than five feet (5') on centers and supported on
girders shall be located not less than three inches (3") below
nor more than sixteen inches (JV) below combustible or
incombustible floor decks or roofs.
Deflectors of sprinklers under beams spaced less than five
feet (T) on centersand supported on girders shall be one
inch (I") to four inches t4") below beams and not more than
sixteen inches (16") below combustible nor more than eigh-
teen inches (19") below incombustible roof or floor decks.
Deflectors of sprinklers in bays formed by beams spaced
five feet IT) to seven and one-half feet (7"s')on centers and
supported on girders shall be located not less than three
inches (3") below and not more than twelve inches (12")
below combustible nor more than fourteen inches (14")
below incombustible roof or floor decks.
Deflectors of sprinklers under beams spaced five feet (S')
to seven and one-half feet (7%') on centers and supported on
girders shall he located one inch (1") to four inches (4")
below beams and not more than sixteen inches (1611) below
combustible nor more than eighteen inches (18") below in-
combustible roof or floor decks.
Deflectors of sprinklers in bays formed by beams framed
into girders resulting in panels up to two hundred square feet
(200 sq. ft.) shall be located not less than three inches (3")
below, and not more than sixteen inches(16") below com-
bustible nor more than twenty inches (20', ) below incombus-
tible roof and floor decks.
Deflectors of sprinklers in bays formed by beams framed
into girders resulting in panels two hundred and one square
feet (201 sq. ft.) to three hundred square feet (300 sq. ft.)
shall be located not less than three inches (3") below, and
not more than twelve inches below, combustible, nor more
than eighteen inches (18") below Incombustible, roof and
floor decks.
Deflectors of sprinklers under beams framed into girders
forming panels up to two hundred square feet (200 sq. ft)
shall be located one inch (I") to four inches (4") below
beams, and not more than twenty-two inches (22") below
combustible and incombustible roof and floor decks.
Deflectors of sprinklers under beams framed into girders
f et (201 ft )
7
M-1058 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 38-1-58
. Where bar joists or light steel trusses are spaced three position of
Jeet (T) to seven and one-half feet (Vil) on centers sprin- Sprinklersskiers shall be located with deflectors' not less than three (Cont'd.)
inches (3"), and not more than ten inches (10") below com-
'Anistible nor more than twelve inches (12") below incombus-
tible, roof or floor decks.
i (a) Joist Construction. (As defined in Section 38.171.) In
Open Joist construction, sprinklers shall be located with
deflectors one inch (1") to not more than six inches (6")
below the bottom of the Joists. Under joist construction with
sheathed or plastered ceilings, sprinklers shall be located
with deflectors three inches (311) to ten inches (10") below
the ceilings.
(f) Bar Joist Construction. (As defined in Section 38.173, )
Deflectors of sprinklers shall be located not less than three
inches (3") below and not more than ten inches (10") below
combustible, nor more than twelve inches (12") below in-
combustible, roof or floor decks.
(g) Pitched Roof Construction. Interference with the dis-
charge pattern may result where sprinklers are located in
peaks of a steeply pitched roof. To minimize this interfer-
ence, the distance from peak to deflectors may be increased
over that specified in Section 38.174. It is desirable to main-
tain a horizontal clearance of not less than two feet (2').
(h) Curved Roofs (Quonset Type Buildings). Deflectors
of sprinklers shall be located as described for beam and
girder construction or for the closest comparable type of
ceiling construction,
(I) Raffles. Baffles shall be installed wherever sprinklers
are less than six feet (6') apart to prevent the sprinkler first
opening from wetting adjoining sprinklers, thus delaying
their operation. Baffles shall be located midway between
sprinklers and arranged to baffle the actuating elements.
Baffles may be of sheet metal, about eight inches (V) wide
and six inches (6") high. When placed on branch line piping,
the top of baffles shall extend two inches (21) to three inches
(S") above the deflectors,
DRY -PIPE SYSTEMS
Sec. 38.185. Dry -pipe systems shall comply with all other General
rules except as modified in the following Sections, Provisions
See. 38.186. A dry -pipe system shall be installed only where purpose
a wet -pipe system is impracticable, as in rooms or buiIdings
which cannot be properly heated. The use of an approved
dry -pipe system is, however, far preferable to entirely shut -
Ung off the water supply during cold weather.
forming panels two hundred and one square a -e -
to three hundred square feet (300 sq. ft.) shall be located one See. 3&187. Where it is necessary to have but 25 per cent or Limitations
less of the total number of sprinklers on a dry -pipe system,
inch (I,') to four inches (4") below beams, and not more only such sprinklers shall be thus piped; the remainder shall
than eighteen inches (18") below combustible, nor more than
twenty inches (20") below incombustible, roof and floor be placed on wet system. This may require small dry -pipe
sirsterna or preaction systems for show windows, blind attics
decks. Other minor portions exposed to freezing. No sprinklers
NOTE: Nailing strips to two inches (2-) nominal be shut off in cold weather without the consent of the
thickness on beams only will not prevent the use of the Official, and In no case shall the number of sprinklers
panel area credit.
+Alut off exceed 10.
465 469
J J
J
U,,ILC, STANDARD 39-1-58 UNUVRM SUaBILNG CODE
net"
,. 39,1$9, Sprinklers shall be installed in the upright Post
Of
lovits"U"
t, Sprinklers installed in the pendent position shall be of
that.
the approved dry pendent type -
Sp Where two or more dry -pipe valves are used,
of Sy
-189.
lyhed"v,dedhorizontally.
preferably
systemshall r eerb"bs"large
d dsia ng
requiredthe udfig0McaIinlan
asagire%asl xs invs,-.rgsheds, fdcar shops,
large attics, an� curtains preferably
we=c.i.stad ug down twenty-four inchesor
epro"f , to sprinkler
a , III.,
systems or subdivide areas.
Size of
38.190. Not more than 600 Sprinklers nor 750 gallons
be controlled by one dry -pipe valve.
,-%Y"—
system capacity shall
Where an eight -inch 18") riser is employed in connection
with a dry -pipe System, a six-inch (6") dry -pipe valve and a
may be used.
six-inch ('fill i gate valve between taper reducers
Quick-
S -r. 38.191. Provisions for quick -opening devices are as fol -
opening
tows: 1. Each standard dry -pipe valve controlling more than
having system capacity of more than 500
Revives
400 sprinklers or
gallons shall be provided with an approved quick -opening
device.
2. The quick -opening device shall be located as Close as
Protection of the restriction
possible to the dry -pipe valve.
orifice and other operating parts of the quick -opening device
against submergence necessitiates that the connection to the
riser shall be at a point above which water (printing water
and back drainage) is not to be expected when the dry -pipe
valve and quick -opening device are set, except where design
features of particular quick -opening devices make these re-
quirements unnecessary.
NOTE: In the case of dry -pipe valves having rela-
tively small priming chambers and in which the normal
quantity of priming Water fills, or nearly fills, the entire
chamber, the object contemplated by this rule
priming
will be met by requiring connection of the quick -opening
device at a point on the riser above the dry -pipe valve,
which will provide a capacity measure between the
normal priming level of the air chamber and the con-
nection of one-half, two and three gallons for four-ineb
(4"), five -inch (5-) and six-inch (6") risers, respectively.
Making the connection twenty-four inches (24") above
the normal priming water level will ordinarily provide
this capacity.
3. A soft disc globe or angle valve shall be installed in the
connection between the dry -pipe sprinkler riser and the
quick -opening device provided to accelerate operation of dry -
pipe valve.
4. A globe or gate valve shall also be installed in the con-
nection between the quick -opening device and the interme-
diate chamber of the dry -pipe valve whenever necessary to
prevent the escape of water it the dry -pipe valve should trip
the -opening device disconnected. A check valve
with quick
may be used Instead of a gate valve whenever it will serve
the mane purpose.
470
EDITION V.D.C. STANDARD 38-1-58
iAM'-38;182.
2 Th dry -pipe _SJv hall he located in an acres- Location and
near ry; pP.`eticS1e1: to the sprinkler system it Protection of
Is. It shall be property protected against freezing and Dry -Pipe
ical injury. Avoid low space under floor to protect Volvo
0 y pipe from frost.
,oil
',Mere exposed to cold, the dry -pipe valve shall be located
iii an approved valve room or closet and, where this is impos-
sible, in an underground pit acceptable to the Building Of-
ficial. Room shall be of sufficient size to give at least two and
one-half feet (21/§') of free space at the sides and in front of,
also above and below, the dry -pipe valve or valves, and this
room, if feasible, shall not be built until the valve is in posi-
tion.
Size of enclosures shall be governed by the number and
arrangement of dry -pipe valves, so as to give ready access to
these devices.
Valve room shall be well lighted by electric light and prop-
erly heated by steam, electric heater, gas or lard oil lantern.
If fire beat is used, some ventilation will be necessary to
supply the air for combustion.
Latches for doors shall be arranged to hold door tight to
frame. Latches similar to those used on refrigerators are
recommended.
NOTE: The supply for the sprinkler protection in the
dry -pipe valve enclosure shall be from the dry side of
the system.
Sec. 39.193. Antifreeze solutions may be used for maintain- Antifrecze
ing automatic sprinkler protection in small unheated areas Solutitins
which would otherwise be shut off and drained during freez-
ing weather. Antifreeze solutions are recommended only for
systems not exceeding 20 sprinklers. The cost of refilling the
system or even of replenishing small leaks makes it more
advisable to use small dry valves where more than 20 sprin-
klers are to be supplied.
PREACTION AND DELUGE SYSTEMS
See. 38.194. Preaction and deluge systems are normally Description
without water in the system piping and the water supply is
controlled by an automatic valve operated by means of heat -
responsive devices and provided with manual means for op-
eration which are independent of the sprinklers.
Systems may have equipment of the following types fsee
Sections 38.197 and 38.198 (a) J:
1. Automatic sprinklers with both sprinkler piping and
heat -responsive devices automatically supervised.
2. Automatic sprinklers with sprinkler piping and heat -
responsive devices not automatically supervised.
3. open sprinklers with only heat -responsive devices aoto-
matteally supervised.
4. Open sprinklers With heat -responsive devices not auto-
matically supervised.
5. Combination of open and automatic sprinklers With
heat -responsive devices automatically supervised.
6. Combination of open and automatic sprinklers with
heat -responsive devices not automatically supervised.
471
U.B.C. STANDARD 38-1-6i1
7. Open head systems operated by both heat -responsive
devices of the rate of temperature rise and fixed temperature
types in combination, in which case the heat -responsive de-
vices should be automatically supervised.
8. Outside sprinklers
for protection against exposure Ares;
the heat -responsive devices should be automatically super -
viand if more than 20 sprinklers on the system.
See. 38.196, Where required by the Building Official, sprin-
kler systems shall be of the preaction or deluge type, Pre-
action
reaction and deluge systems shall comply with all other rules
except as modified by this Section.
Conditions of occupancy or special hazards may require
quick application of large quantities of water and in such
cases deluge systems are likely to be needed.
Care shall he exercised to select heat -responsive devices
having an adjustment to assure proper operation and to
4 against premature operation of the system from
guard fluctuating temperatures.
In locations where temperatures, at ceilings, are likely to
be high from sources of heat other than fire conditions, such
as manufacturing processes, boiler rooms and dry kilns, it is
necessary to give special consideration to the selection of
heat -responsive devices operating normally at higher than
ordinary temperatures and which are capable of withstand-
ing the normal high temperatures for long periods of time.
Where corrosive conditions exist that may affect the beat -
responsive devices or systems, consideration shall be given to
the use of types of materials or protective coatings designed
to resiat corrosion.
Stock of extra fusible elements of heat -responsive devices,
not less than two of each temperature, shall be maintained
on the premises for replacement purposes.
see. 38.196. (a) General. Spacing of heat -responsive devices
shall be in accordance with their listing by nationally recog-
nized testing laboratories, unless conditions indicate the need
for a closer spacing.
(b) Distance Between Devices and Wells. Where ceilings
are level one-half the distance allowed between rows of beat -
responsive devices.
With sloping ceilings, slope more than one and one -half -
inches (1%") per foot, lowest row of heat -responsive devices
two-thirds the distance allowed between rows of heat -respon-
sive devices. Distance may be measured horizontally for both
level and sloping ceilings.
In areas requiring only a single row of heat -responsive
devices the distance between the end device and the end wall
shall be one-third the allowable distance between heat -re-
sponsive devices.
(c) Ceiling Heighte, Where ceiling heights exceed thirty -
Ave feet (35') the heat -responsive devices shall be so spaced
that the area covered by each device will not exceed 75 per
cent of the area normally covered.
(d) Special Hazards. In occupancies involving unusual-
hazardswhere it is necessary to discharge water through
open sprinklers on the Are instantaneously, special arrange.
UT
NVORM RUHI)ING CODE
472
VAM,1111:-1958 EDMON
U.B.C. STANDARD 38-1-58
lm 14 heat -responsive devices shall be made in accord. location and
Anow-With, recognized good Practice for such hazards.
Spacing Of
B -WZiWo or More Systems. Where there M two or more
in one area controlled by separate systems of beat, BesponsIve
ve devices, the heat -responsive devices on each sys. Devices
spaced.iirittl be up to the dividing line between systems (Cont!d.)
I or partition or draft stop.
Mosi4ars. FIA or sloping Surfaces between monitors
require heat -responsive devices, except when their
is auch Khat the distance between rows of heat-respon.
'Jdve devices in adjoining monitors or between wall and rows
of host -responsive devices in adjoining monitors exceed the
allowable distance, in which case heat -responsive devices
I bo itustalled under the flat or sloping sections in accord-
ance with the provisions governing the shape of ceiling and
type of construction.
'K (g) Decks Inside Buildings. Decks, nit enclosed and not
more than ten feet (10') in width, shall not ordinarily re-
quire the installation of heat -responsive devices.
(h) Stair Towers, Elevator Shafts and Other Enclosures.
Where sprinklers are installed in stair towers, elevator shaft
and other enclosures, heat -responsive devices shall be in-
stalled In each such enclosure.
Sec. 38.191, Not more than 1,000 closed sprinklers shall be prenction
controlled by any one preaction valve. System.
Where there are over 20 sprinklers, or where required by
the Building Official, both sprinkler piping and heat -respon-
sive devices shall be automatically supervised.
NOTE: See Section 38.127 for Pipe Schedules.
SM 38.198. (a) Valve Control. The number of open head Deluge
sprinklers controlled by any one deluge valve shall be as Systems
follows:
1% Inch valve ........... . ..... 5 sprinklers
2 inch valve 10 sprinklers
21/2 inch valve 27 sprinklers
3 inch Valve 40 sprinklers
4 inch valve .............. 75 sprinklers
6 inch valve ........................__....__._...150 sprinklers
Where there are over 20 sprinklers or where required by
the Building Official, the heat -responsive devices or systems
shall be automatically supervised.
(b) Pi Schedule for Deluge Systems. The following
pipe el!ecrule is given only as a guide for installations having
no unusual features:
The pipe schedule for deluge systems ( one-half inch i
Y orifice sprinklers or equivalent discharge) is as follows:
I inch pipe .... I sprinkler
4
1 'A inch pipe ............. ........................ 2 sprinklers
1}f inch pipe 5 sprinklers
pipe
2 inch pipe ................. 8 sprinklers
2% inch pipe ............... 15 sprinklers
3 inch pipe 27 sprinklers
3 %
inch pipe 40 sprinklers
473
U.R.C. STANDARD 38-1-M UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
DdW 4 inch pipe,. 55 sprinklers
S . 5 inch pipe ...................... ... 90 sprinklers
(Cout*&) 6 inch pipe ... _. .. ._. ...... .... .__.._150 sprinklers
Deluge systems are usually applied to severe conditions of
occupancy. In designing the piping system, the water supply
shall be based on not less than an average discharge of 15
gallons
per minute per sprinkler. Adjustment in pipe sizes to
provide uniform sprinkler discharge shall be based on a
maximum variation of 15 per cent from the assumed average
discharge per sprinkler. Where practical to obtain the re-
quired degree of uniformity of discharge by sizing of piping
this shall be done rather than by using sprinklers having
orifices smaller than one -half-inch ( %-).
Pipe sires shall be adjusted according to detailed friction
loss calculations. These calculations shall show the relation
between the water supply and demand. These calculations
shall be submitted to the Building Official.
Friction loss in steel pipe of deluge systems shall be cal- ,(
culated using Hazen & Williams coefficient C-120 and ob. i$
struction loxes due to change of direction of water through
fittings shall be figured in terms of equivalent feet of pipe.
Where change is made in pipe sizes this shall not be ef-
fected by means of reducing flanges.
Where eight -inch (8"1 piping is employed to reduce fric-
tion losses in a system operated by heat -responsive devices, a
six-inch (6") preaction or deluge valve and six-inch (6"1
gate valve between taper reducers may be used.
('eats Valves Ser. 38.199. There shall be a separate gate valve installed to
control the water supply to each preaction or deluge valve.
In hazardous locations, the gate valve and manual means
for operation of preaction or deluge valve shall be installed
EDITION
U.B.C. STANDARD 38-1-U
rty with each installation. Where explosive
. ;materials are present, hot water, steam or other
of testing shall be used.
Gauges. Approved pressure gauges con -
o Section 38.119 (c) shall be installed as follows:
've and below preaction valve and below deluge
air supply to preaction and deluge valves.
INED DRY -PIPE AND PREACTION SYSTEMS
`38,199.8. Combined dry -pipe and preaction systems shalt General
y with all other rules except as modified by Sections
.3 to 38.199.12. [See Section 38.102 (c),J Provisions
38.199,4. Combined dry -pipe and preaction systems may Purpow
installed where wet -pipe systems are impractical. They
itttended for use but not limited to structures where a
bar of dry -pipe valves would be required if a dry -pipe
,,yatem were installed.
See. 38.199.5. Combined automatic dry -pipe and preaction Construr.tiin
Systems shall be so constructed that failure of the heat -
responsive system shall not prevent the system from properly
functioning as a conventional automatic dry -pipe system.
Combined automatic dry -pipe and preaction systems shall
be so constructed that failure of the dry -pipe system of auto-
matic sprinklers shall not prevent the heat.responsive system
from properly functioning as an automatic fire alarm system.
Provision shall be made for the manual operation of the
heat -responsive system at locations requiring not more than
two hundred feet (200') of travel.
a so- distance away from the preaction and deluge valve Sec. 88.199.6. Where the system consists of more than 600
and where access to the control valves is not likely to be sprinklers or has more than 275 sprinklers in any fire area, Control
Prevented under fire emergency conditions. the entire system shall be controlled through two six-inch
In case of deluge systems, the deluge valve shall be located (6") dry -pipe valves connected in parallel and shall feed into
as Close as possible to the hazard protected, consistent with a common feed main. These valves shall be checked against
safety. preferably in an enclosure outside any fire or explo- each other.
cion hazard area. Each dry -pipe valve shall be provided with an approved
tripping device actuated by the heat -responsive system. Dry-
tr Sec. 38.189.1. All new preaction or deluge systems shall be PIPe valves shall be cross -connected through a one -inch t P' i
Test tested hydrostatically as specified in Section 38.108. In testing Pipe connection to permit simultaneous tripping of both dry.
deluge systems, plugs shall be installed in fittings and re- Pipe valves. This one -inch (1") pipe connection shall be
placed with open sprinklers after the test is completed, or equipped with a gate valve so that either dry -pipe valve can
automatic sprinklers shall be installed and the links, etc., be shut off and worked on while the other remains in service,
knocked out after test is completed. The check valves between the dry -pipe valves and the eom-
mon feed main shall be equipped with one -half-inch (U.
Deviess for Sec. 38.199.2. (a) Accessibility Requirements. When heat-by-passaso that a loss of air from leakage in the trimmings
Text responsive devices installed in circuits are located where not '"`,of a dry -pipe valve will not cause same to trip until the pres-
Purposes readily accessible, an additional heat -responsive device shall •:'sure in the feed main is reduced to the tripping point. A gate
asst Testiag be provided on each circuit for test purposes at an accessible ``valve shall be installed in each of these by-passes so that
location and shall be connected to the circuit at a point Flier dry -pipe valve can be completely isolated from the
which will assure a proper test of the circuit. ' riser or feed main and from each other.
(b) Nat and Safety Control. Suitable testin a aratus r. more approved air exhaust valves of two-inch 12"r
g Pp .see size controlled by operation of a heat -responsive
°. capable of producing the heat necessary to operate any nor" , .. shall be installed at the end of the common feed roam
mal beat -responsive device shall be furnished to the owner air exhaust valves shall have soft seated globe or angle
t
s 474 475
f� r
U.B.C. STA 35-1-W UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
valves in their intakes, also approved strainers shall be in-
StWW these globe valves and the air exhaust valves.
Each combined dry -pipe and preaction system shall be
Provided with approved quick opening devices at the dry -
pipe valves,
Where more than 275 sprinklers are required in a single
Are area, the system shalt be divided into sections of 275
sprinklers or less by means of check valves. If system is in -
led in more than one Are area or story, not more than 888
sprinklers shall be supplied through any one check valve.
Each section shall have a one and one -fourth -inch (1%-)
Z
on the system side of each check valve supplemented
by a dram drip.
Section dein lines and drum drips shall be located in
heated areas or inside of thermostatically controlled elec-
tricxUy and
cabinets of sufHcielit size to enclose drain
valves and deem drips for each section. Drum drips shall also
be provided for all low points except that heated cabinets
need not be required for 28 sprinklers or less. Air exhaust
valves at end of feed main shall also be protected against
freezing.
The sprinkler system shall be so constructed and the num-
ber of sprinkler heads controlled shall be so limited that
water shall reach the furthest sprinkler within a period of
time not exceeding one minute for each four hundred feet
(408') of common feed main from the time heat -responsive
Lysystem operates. Maximum time permitted not to exceed
res minutes.
The end section shall have an inspector's test connection as
required for dry -pipe systems.
SPRINKLER ALARMS
Definition Sec. 38.188.7. A local alarm unit is an assembly of appara-
tus approved for thy�service and so constructed and installed
that any flow of wlter from a sprinkler system equal to or
greater than that from a single automatic sprinkler will
result in an audible alarm signal on the premises.
Installations Sec. 38.189.& Water flow alarms shall be provided on all
sprinkler installations. Central station water flow alarm serv-
lee is desirable but central'station water flow alarm service
does not necessarily waive the local alarm reouirement.
Either outdoor water motor or electric alarm gongs shall
be installed in every case where there is no watchman with
watch service or where sprinkler system is not provided with
approved water flow alarm to a central station.
Under conditions where central station water flow alarm
service is not available, it is advisable to connect electrical
alarm units to public Fire Department headquarters or near- T
est Fire Department station or other suitable place where '}3
aid may be readily secured.
Type of `lei'. 3&189.9. (a) Wet -Pipe Systems. The alarm apparatus
for a wet -pipe system shall consist of an approved alarm
Alarses check valve or other approved water flow detecting alarm
device with the necessary attachments required to give an
alarm.
a 478
U.B.C. STANDARD 58-1-58
rimn
$ystems. The alarm apparatus for a dryconsistof approved alarm attachments to
e. When a dry -pipe valve is located on the
n alarm valve, the actuating device of the
y -pipe valve may be connected to the alarms
stem.and Deluge systems. The alarmappara-
and deluge systems shall consist of ap-
larm attachments, actuated by a thermo-ependently of flow of water in the system.
arm (water motor gong) may also be re-
TOTE: Water flow indicators (paddle type) shall not
installed in dry -pipe, preaction or deluge systems as
surge of water when valve trips would seriously
nage the device.
We
38.199.i0 (a) General. An alarm unit shall include an Attachments
"roved mechanical alarm, horn or siren, or an approved
atherproof electric gong, bell, horn or siren on the outside
the building or approved electric gongs, bells, horns, or
sirens inside the building, or a combination of such devices,
as required by the Building Official.
All alarm apparatus shall be so located and installed that
all parts are readily accessible for inspection, removal, and
me-
chanical or and electriall cally operated bells shall be of weather-
proof and guarded type.
Where alarm check valves are used under conditions of
variable water pressure, a retarding device shall be installed.
Suitable valves shall be provided in the connections to re-
tarding chambers, to permit repair or removal without shut-
ting off sprinklers; these valves shall be so arranged that
they may be locked or sealed in the open position.
Dry -pipe, pre -action and deluge valves shall be fitted with
a test connection for electric alarm switch or water motor
gong. This pipe connection shall be made on the water side
of the system and provided with a control valve and drain for
the alarm piping. A check valve shall be installedina pipe
connection to the intermediate chamber of the dry -pipe valve.
It is not advisable to test a water motor alarm in ex-
tremely cold
;. ass �where sare ud a pere
valved pipe by-pma compre ed air spply may be
*;
.provided for test purposes.
A control valve shall be installed in connection with pres-
iure-type contactor and water -motor -operated alarm de-
'1``.,idees and such valves shall be of the type which will clearly
:-Andicate whether they are open or closed and be so con -
xstructed that they may be locked or sealed in the open posi-
,:,tion. The control valve for the retarding chamber on alarm
check valves of wet -pipe systems will be accepted as com-
,cplying with this paragraph.
s=ry Approved pressure gauges conforming to Section Y,8.119 d c t
be installed in sprinkler risers, above and trelow each
rm cheek valve.
„-.,.(b} Attachments—Mechanicaily Operated �i'ater-motor-
e.
="o- erated devices shall be located as near the alarm p�ac.
- r`Y-pipe valve or other waterflow detecting device as p
477
17.&C. STAN"" 3a-1-88
Attachment,UNIEO"I BUILT INN Cont
(It d l ticable in order to avoid long runs or many Iittin
( Pipe to th
e water -motor -operated device, The total a In the
the pipe should not exceed seventy-five feet 75, length ll
the water -motor -operated device be located Over twenty fnor eet
120') above the alarm device or dry -pipe valve. if absolutely
necessary to exceed seventy-five feet (75'), the pipe line to
the water -motor -operated device shall be increased one or
more sizes to compensate for loss of pressure due to hydrau-
land Shall
ic friction. Such devices shall be protected from the weather,
out of ad bbestmeperlynt aligned and so installed as not to get
piping to these devices shall be
vanized or brass of a size not less than rich
as "), and larger for long runs of pipithree_tourths
ng or where pressures
are low. Piping shall be arranged to drain properly through a
brass bushed orificenot larger than one-eighth Inch (%,,),
Drains shall be conducted to a proper place. (See Section
38.133 and 38.199.12.1
No single mechanical alarm device shall be connected to
more than three alarm check or dry -pipe salves and the sys-
tems controlled by the valves shall be in the same fire area.
ie) Attachmnt_Electrically Operated. Water -flow de-
vices controlling electric alarm Circuits shall be provided
with means for testing the electrical supply, circuits, connee-
tiona, and devices, An actual water flow, through the use of
inspector's test connection, shall be the method employed for
testing the reliability of the sprinkler alarm unit as a whole.
Short-circuiting switches for alarm test purposes shall not
be installed in the alarm circuit from alarm or dry -pipe
valve.
trical Some conditions it may be advisable to connect elec-
nearest fire rm units to public fire department headquarters or
y be readily secured
aid may department house or other suitable place where
.
Outdoor electric alarm devices shall be of a type species_
tally approved for outdoor use and for sprinkler alarm se;y_
ice, and the outdoor wiring shall be in approved conduit,
Properly protected from the entrance of water in addition to
the requirements of this Section.
See. 38.199.11 It is desirable and often essential to provide
approved identification signs for outside alarm devices. The
111911 shall be located near the device in a conspicuous position
and shall be worded as follows, "Sprinkler Fire Alarm—
when alarm sounds call fire or police department."
�. 38-199.12. Where vents are necessary for satisfactory
electric alarm switch operation, such venta shall a properly
Piped to a drain.
Drains from alarm devices shall be so arranged that there
obe no danger of freezing, and so that there will be no
rHawmg at the alarm apparatus,
pressureat domestic connections
or
elsewhere with the sprinkler drains wide open and under
.
Drain from retarding chamber and electric alarm switch
shall Preferably discharge through an open cone and s run
separately from main system drains to a safe and visible point
of free barge or to sewer or ground drain. Drain from
oPerated alarm device may run separately tom
478
u.B.r. srA:�D. 38-2-58
Ser' `l"0g, (a) GeneralUsft SSW systems are. Oar RM BUII.DiNG fN3DE
LiSaftstis" panelgu;shng flues useful within the Iimitsi it'
}Iiia Oxhle$ re-extingu aid
Pawn s where inert hazard$ or Standard in ext#n_
essential or d u inert electrically nenonduenet and m occu-
a Problem, esirabla, where Clear of other media medium ;s
systems usin where there more economical t install g other mad
flaz
Protect include: gnu$ equipment and If carbon dioxide sS stems
brieal transformers, o;]
brealte�s such as q amenable materials; elec-
and othermid rotating equipment: ,sw#thea, and circuit
Paper, flammable fuels; ant' engines as,
Wood and textiles. and ry Utilizing Moline
(C) I'hattatiohs. hazardous mous. such as
gufah fires #rrvolvin Carbon dioxide shall not be used to
aupPly such as Ing ch emicalsnitrate-cont aining their own ox Hn-
sodium, Potaas;urn, magnesium, reactive Ygen
and metal hydrides. kltan;um, and such as
zh'coniuri;
Stern ee. sa29z (stsa) Total Floodin
connected to i fixed ag supply of carbon dioxide normally
g Systems. A total flooding
carbon dioxide Int piping
lose nozzles arranged
hazard. This type oP s enclosed space or enclosure to diacharge
rustically or Yatem shall be aur about the
the hazard,
in by those normally to operate autoe
rntaily in the vicinity of
cot(..) of $Application Sy to A local
°ectad to fixed PPIy of carbon dioxiapplication system
bon dioxide PjPmg with nozzles arranged to dl ch
directly on scharor ge car -
system Shall Extended ran urning material. Th.
e by those renal q d the to Operate
utomatie Ity or me of
no
hazard.system C . D1
Of the
connected si is Of as f o�CauYPte°f A.
ended discharge
rat 3 ohelthigh rate fall" f Piping arra° efl discharge
normallmity
(d) Ham er tial flood- flose Ing or local ap an tended jca 1- e at o lover
netted to a system supply ofConsisti; Of I Line ic * A hand hose line system
of Bxed piping on dioxide normally con -
cation by those nn��ai1Y either for total ,and. hose lines that
Y be u iii
(eJ S oMally in the vicinity Booing or local a
system y of the hazard, PPIu-
bndiox d�rCrrap b o?P e. consis and st Supply. A
conn m a mobile su ItandP,pe
or h a system of g 9uieklY moved to Pply o car -
local
to
ose lines that ma fixed Pr ing su Position and
taPPlication b Y be used or eitherlYung Bxed nozzles
other qualified Personnelbrigade. Bredepartmentiotal flooding or
personnel or
large
hazards�uPeraonnebondiox"dePCiso of The dIseharge of
on to ex lsh fire Y
v;sibiulrigty Fire -extinguish, such g o carbon III deflcimi Y and reduced ere
to
dilut'
Y render atmospheres unlivable. TotaOXIde l BOOds
460
Types
systaft
Em
VOL. W-1956 EDrrlox
L'.S.f'. STA
;ng, or the drifting and settling of any large volume discharge
may Produce such atmospheres. Prompt removal and revival
of persons rendered unconscious generally leaves no perma-
nent;ll effects.
(b) Safety Requirements. Safeguards shall be provided for
prompt evacuation and prevention of entry into ary atmos-
pheres where Proposed use of carbon dioxide may discharge
hazardously. Such saf
signs, dety items as personnel training, warning
dl alarms, pre -discharge a alarms and breathing
apparatus shall be Considered,
tricall
located to maintain standard electrical cal clearstem ancestfrom dive
parts.
See. 36.209. (a) Methods of Actuation. Systems shall be
Classified as manual or automatic in accordance with the
method of actuation.
A manual system ;s one in which human agency is required
to actuate, although it may have some automatic features,
An automatic system is one actuated by automatic means.
Such systems shall also have means for manual actuation,
duce)firree Detection
detected bs. yrvisu al ornbyions automat likely to means
An adequate and reliable source of energy shall be used in
detection systems,
Visua
on
used
ermission of the
building l official, except inomanually a actuwith ated stems where
Bre or conditions which produce fire are easily detected
visually.
Automatic detection may be by any listed or approved
method or device capable of detecting and Indicating heat,
flame, smoke, combustible vapors, etc,
(e) operating Desdces, Operating devices include carbon
dioxide releasing devices or valves, discharge controls and
shut -down equipment, all of which are necessary for success-
ful performance of the system.
operation shall be by listed or approved mechanical, elec-
trical or pneumatic means. An adequate and reliable source
of energy shall be used.
All devices shall be designed for the service they will meet
and shall not be susceptible to accidental operation or readily
be rendered inoperable. Devices shall be designed to function
Properly from minus 20 degrees F. to 150 degrees F. or
marked to indicate temperature limitations.
0All devices shall be located, installed or suitably protected
0 that they are not subject to mechanical, chemical, or other
damage which would render them inoperative.
u•The normal manual control for actuation shall be located
krhere it is easily accessible at all times including the time of
1'(lire. This control shall cause the complete system to operate
',•;ts normal fashion.
,All automatically operated valves controlling the release
Wdistribution of carbon dioxide shall be provided with
„: ved independent means for emergency manual operation.
-means for manual actuation of the system required in
Rection provides approved positive operation independent
481
xDARD 56-2-513
Operation and
Control of
S
C.B.C. STANDARD 38-2-38
UNIFORM BITtLDING CODE
ani of the automatic actuation, it may be used as an emergency
Central of means. The emergency means, preferably mechanical, shall
Systems be easily accessible and located close to the valves controlled.
(CauVd,) The system shall be designed so that emergency actuation can
be accomplished from one location. This does not apply to
secondary high pressure cylinders.
Manual controls shall not require a pull of more than 40
pounds (force)nor a movement of more than fourteen inches
i 14") to secure operation.
Where gas pressure from cylinders is used as a means for
releasing remaining cylinders and the supply consists of more
than two cylinders not less than two cylinders shall be used
for such operation.
All shut -down devices shall be considered integral parts of
the system and shall function with the system operation.
Ail manual operating devices shall be identified as to the
hazard they protect.
(d) Alarms and Indicators. Alarms or indicators may be
needed to indicate the operation of a system, hazard to per-
sonnel or failure of any supervised device or equipment. Such
devices shall be of such a type and shall be provided in such
numbers and at such locations as are necessary to accomplish
satisfactorily their purpose subject to approval of the Build-
ing Official. They may be audible, visual or olfactory.
A positive Alarm or indicator shall be provided to show that
the system has operated and must be reserviced.
An alarm shall be provided to indicate the operation of
automatic systems in case an immediate personnel response
is desired.
Alarms shall be provided to give positive warning of a dis-
charge where hazard to personnel may exist. Such alarms
shall function to warn against personnel entry into hazardous
areas as long as such hazards exist or until such hazards are
properly recognized. See Section 38.208.
Alarms indicating failure of supervised devices or equip-
ment shall give prompt and positive indication of any failure
and shall be distinctive from alarms indicating operation or
hazardous conditions.
Carbon See, 35.210. (a) Quantities. The amount of carbon dioxide
DlexNe in the system shall be at least sufficient for the largest single
Supply hazard protected or group of hazards which are to be pro-
tected simultaneously.
Where hand hose lines may be used on a hazard protected
by a fixed system, separate supplies shall be provided unless
sufficient carbon dioxide is provided to insure that the fixed
protection for the largest single hazard upon which the hose
lines may be used will not be jeopardized. See Sections 38.227
to 38.232.
Where continuous protection is required, the reserve quan-
tity shall be as many multiples of these minimum amounts as
the Building Official considers necessary.
Both primary and reserve supplies for fixed storage shall be
permanently connected to the piping and arranged for easy
change -over, except where the Building Official permits an
unconnected reserve.
1 + 482
rk
EDITION C.B.C. STANDARD W2-58r,;rOy, III -1958 ED
(b) @uapta', The carbon dioxide shall be of good comm. Carbon
:,•.tial grade sufficiently free of water to prevent the formation Supply
(Cont'd.)
.
of water ice in the discharge.
(c) Replenishment. The time needed to obtainssts to eboperatinn
Calto ion shall be ctonsidered shment asraa major estore facto in determining
the
reserve supply needed.
(d) Storage Conta. Storage containerstion, testing,
and accessories
iners
. Shall be located and arranged so that inspec
recharging and other maintenance is facilitated and suspen-
Sion of protection is held to a minimum. possible to
protect, but they shalt not be
Storagedcort finers shall be located as near as
the bars
located where they will be exposed to a fire or explosion in
these hazards.
ubject
Storage containers shall not be located er as to be ani
ditions or be sub
to severe weather cont to mechanical,
chemical or other damage.ex
mtic orrs a
When excessive cliardsaor enciosurinechesnshall be ovi
areare ex -
petted, suitable gu
bon
1 shall be stored in rechargeable containergned to
Ts designed es des( dioxide
(e) High Pressure storage Containers.
supe Yuid for
hold pressurized carbon dioxidtoi al�nomina pressure -in at atmospheric
850
temperatures, corresponding
p...5. at 70 degrees F. cylinders shall be constructed,
High pressure containers or
ecifications. Charged cylinders shall he
tested and marked in accordance with the Interstate o
merce Commission sp
th an
tested for tightness before shipment in accordance devlce to
approved procedure. ravided with a
Each cylinderreshall be safety d advance of the rated cylin-
relieve excess p in frangible safety discs shall
der test pressure. I.C.C. app uatel mounted
be accordingly fitted.
When manifolded, cylinders snail rbovided for the purpose
and suitably supported in a rack p
ravided to prevent
including facilities for convenient individual servicing or con -
including means shall be p stem is
tent Nveighing
the loss of carbon din imderr ins remo ednforl 8 int nif the ance.
operated when any y
andard weight
Individual cylinders shall be used hounns of tc carbon d5ox de
S ?5, or too p ,city cylinders
capacity such as 35. 50, hndera of one selected
content. For very small systems smaller cap
may be used. Only
interchangeable cy' provide the re-
a)ze shall be manifolded within a system to
quired total supply. temperatures shall not exceed 130
General ambient storageF. pomp
degrees F. nor be less than 32 degrees compensating
cylinder
methods are provided by special engineering.
chargings and markings or by the use of suitable external
cooling or heating devices.
(f) Low Pressure storage Containers. Low pressure carbon o
designed to 'maintain theaorrespnrd-
age containers shall be gn degrees re
dioxide supply ata nominal pressure of zero
temperature of approximatelq�aero tt it approved.
ing to a temp
The pressure container shall be m
483
"KC- STANDARD 3R SH
carbon
DI-Meand
t'NIFORM BUILDINo CODE
&NDPPed marked in
Supply
accordance with the current a
satins ofetheP em_ ic u�iety of Mechanical Erigineera
for Unfl PectR-
I
shin ad it resat 325 P.s.i.ssels. The design working Pressure
sure
Izi addition to the
colo
gauge. tainer shag be equipped with requirements
level g h Pressure con -
g and a pressure age, a
approximately
an
315 and 230 pervisory alarm act at
addition to code requirementsp may Penial relpro ief valve tin
R at a
Valve.
valve. rolled
pressure below the setting Of the main safety
The pressure container
shall if insulated and egyt;PAed with
refrigeration or heating means if insulated, Heating need
be Provided false known in
occurrence
not
of ambient temperatures which
data indicates the
tents of the tank sufficiently to reduce the
230 p,s.;, is wf11 cool the eon•
Aproximately
minus 10 degrees P. Pressure below
zero degrees refrigeration system shalt be capable of
F. in the
pressure container under tlhe halving
expected ambient temperature, Operation shall
sally controlled within ighest
The Practical be autoniat-
heating limits,
whe
owning zero degrees F, in threquired shall be capable of main_
et expected he Pressure
Iystem"tbn
ambient t container under the
automatically controlled within practic
�p iifation shall be
system"
ti �c 38.211- (a) Pepe and �
l� gs Shalt be galvanized malleable'—ttgon?'hreaded pipe and fit -
out. Copper
or equnalentiy corrosion galvanized steel, cop-
Aper tubing with suitable protected Inside and
ccan also be used. Black steel flare ba rayed connections
orrosion ere the atmosphere is filet ye] used with welded
resistant materials shall be used Y noncorrosive. Special
ex urea. PIP'
Ing shall be incombustible and ghai7 rrosive atmos-
pected temperatures without deformation. Because of low
be madetof the ou ntered �n these systems, investigation Proposed temperature characteristics Ligation shall
Cast iron pipe and fittings Of the piping
have
systemmusing high pre sure supplynot , pipe and fittings e a mini
steel Pipe, standard w bursting press b oP 3000 8's shall
three-fourths_hich (%') weight y be used in sizes u he case throughof
ler g ma
an ex a
iron bandedhRtt: ree fon mha nch (fin") n'SeSta 8 11 byre, used �
a )IPS. Extra hea °used nP through three-fourths-
alllargerthrong—lb u°-Dnch (2'�) IPS•12ane r
djforg steel fittings be sin System' using low Pressurei
11 ve
tee' piping t is bursting pr ssure of11800P . and fittings shall
a min'
recommended that for 00 P•s.f. In the case of
tings Pressure extra heavy Pipe be used wwiri g under continu-
ahal7 be extra betty the master valve god steel Rt -
fittings or Stand Vhi�Y using 300 pound malleable lector
-eight i vales
standard wei ht Welded
PIN with welded conn screwed
connections may e7ded fittings. On open end �1ons using
Mold malleable it n fittings. standard weight pipe
and 300
ed
MI
VOL, IQ -1868 EDITION
U.B.t'. STANDARD 38-2-58
(b) Arrangement and Installation of Piping and Fittings,
All piping shall be laid out to reduce friction losses to Distribution a Systems
reasonable minimum and care shall be taken to avoid possible (Cont'd. )
restrictions due to foreign matter or faulty fabrication.
The piping system shall be securely supported with due
allowance for expansion and contraction and shall not be
subject to mechanical, chemical, or other damage, where
explosions are possible, the piping system shall be hung from
supports that are least likely to be displaced.
Pipe shall be reamed and cleaned before assembly, and
after assembly the entire piping system shall be blown out
before nozzles or discharge devices are installed.
In systems where valve arrangements introduce sections of
rel of de vices or the . such valvesshah beedeesjlp� o Pr pressure
ent an -
trapment of liquid carbon dioxide. The pressure re!iefvdevices
shall operate between 2400 and 3000p.s.i
with high pressure storage . on systems supplied
, and at 450 p.s.i. on systems sup-
plied by low pressure storage, Where pressure operated cylin-
der valves are used, a means shall be provided to vent any
cylinder gas leakage from the manifold but which will prevent
loss of gas when the system operates.
All pressure relief devices shall be of such design and so
located that the discharge of carbon dioxide therefrom will
not injure personnel or be otherwise objectionable.
(c) Valves. Valves shall not be subject to mechanical,
chemical or other damage; those used in high pressure sys-
tems shall have a minimum
those bursting pressure of 6,000 g.s.i,;
not under constant pressure shall have a
bursting pressure of at least 5.0oo pminimum
s.i. Valves used in low
pressure storage systems shall withstanda hydrostatic test
to 1,800 p.s.D. without permanent distortion,
Release devices of containers used for high pressure stor-
age,
ningluding the suff tient tonnector to discharge 5e perncentd�of thshalle carboonn
dioxide in the cylinder in not more than 30 seconds, at a
temperature of 70 degrees R. nor at a rate less than one and
one-half pounds per second for the first 85 Per an
of the
container contents.
(d) Discharge Nozzles. Discharge nozzles shall be of ade-
quate strength for expected working pressures; of corrosion -
resistant material or corrosion -protected inside and out; shall
Withstand normal mechanical, chemical or other damage and
expected temperatures without deformation; shall be of In-
combustible materials; and shall be connected and supported
so they will keep in adjustment. Nozzles shall be permanently
and discernably marked to show the equivalent single orifice
diameter, regardless of shape and number of orifices, with
reference to its ndividual flow rate and orifice discharge nozzles shall be diameter.
provided with frangibled scs where
clogging may occur.
TOTAL FLOODING SYSTEMS
See. 38.212. (a) Description. A total flooding system con- General
sists of a fixed supply of carbon dioxide permanently connected Provisions
r
483
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
to fixed Piping with fixed nozzles arrangedOL
dioxide into an enclosed s to discharge carbon
III-11)58 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 38-238
pace or enclosure about the hazard,
(er Uses, This type of system may be used where there
enclosure
where forced air ventilating systems are involved, they Hazard
be hrthe
�ously
is
about the hazard that is ad
e able the
enable the required concentration to be built u equate to
maintained for the p. and
withall
perilieations
start of the carbon dioxide urge orladde- Specifications
tionai com g gas be provided. See Section a or
mp compensating P
to be
complete and required period extinguishment to insure the
Permanent extinguishment re
Section and
of the Bre
Specific combustible materials involved. the
NOTE: Examples
(c) T YPes of Fires. Fires which can be extinguished by
total flooding methods may be
of laza
protected by total flooding systems inciudebroomaessfull
enclosed vaults
machines, ovens,
divided into two categories:
surface fires involving flammable liquids, gases and solids, and
deep seated fires involving solids subject
thereof. contalnera, and the contents
to smoldering.
Surface tires are the most common
(c) General
designed, installed, tested Total flooding systems
kested
hazard particularly
adaptable to extinguishment by total flooding systems. They
are subject to prompt extinguishment when
shall be
thea and maintained in accordancequickly
applicable requirements in this Standard. with
Itafard
carbon dioxide is
introduced into the enclosure in sufficient quantity to
overcome leakage and provide an
See. 38.213• (a) EnelOsure. Under this
tfsas a well-enclosed
extinguishing concentration
for the Particular materials involved.
Spec class of r
of the extin e is assumed in order protection
the
quisling medium. The area of allowab
openings depends eable
For deep seated fires, the required extinguishing concentra-
tion must be maintained for a sufficient period of time
eize
upon the t
For dash or surface t type of combustibles involved.
flammable liquids, the type fires such as will be
to
allow the smoldering to be extinguished and the material to
cool to a point at which reignition will not occur when the
inert
present with
openings shall not exceed quare foot area of es e t with 1
volume of the three per cent of
the
atmosphere is dissipated. It is necessary to inspect the
hazard immediately hereafter to make certain that extin-
s the cubic foot I
area of all space or 10 per cent Of the total
IS top and bottom foot
guishment is complete and to remove any material involved
in the fire.
smaller. These of the enclosure, whichever
for by additional carbon
openings shall be compensated
d
If this arbors dioxide as specified in Section
exceeded
`-m. 38.214. (a) General. The quantity of carbon dioxide Carbon
for surface type
Proper perform 38.214,
the system shall be tested to assure
rmance.
For deep seated
fires is based on average conditions assuming Dioxide
fain prompt extinguishment.
y p p A reasonable allowance for ftequErements
normal leakage is
fires such
unclosable openin as will be involved with solids,
Openings shall be
included in the basic volume factors but for Surface
corrections must be made for the type of material involved Flies
or in the ceiling restricted to small openings near
are involved, %' If any other openings than ceiling
the system
and any other special conditions.
performance. shall be tested to assure propgerr
To be ad egrt
given toot he determinatable ion of nsider cent shall be
design concentration of
shall be 'protected by carbon dioxide,
enclosure or rranged that the Are will the enclosure
be
carbon dioxide required for the type of flammable material
involved in the hazard. The design concentration is deter-
confined within the
protection shall be
hazards which may for
mined by adding a suitable safety factor (20 per cent) to the
be possible rei nitided such adjacent
The discharge of carbon int n sources.
minimum effective concentration.
Table
Cause dioxide
egress of flammable v a closed space may
venting to atmos vapors and
No. 38-2-A gives the theoretical minimum carbon
dioxide concentration and the suggested minimum design car-
gases and their safe
fire hazards or oleic without their spreading to adjacent
venting workareas shall be Considered,
g Of
bon dioxide concentration to Prevent ignition of some common
liquids and gases.
such as in where safe
fh� 8a0 oP vapors and gases cannot be realized,
external local application cess and storage tanks the use of
Isanon Systems
is required.
given
For materials notxid in Table rat n aha, the minimum
theoretical carbon dioxide concentration shall obtained
Section Outlined in this Standard
for this latter t • details the carbon dioxide re
yPe
from some recognized source or determined by test. If max!-
st
mum residual oxygen values are available, the theoretical
r
of hazard. quire-.
(b)
(D) Leakage and Ventilation.
carbon dioxide concentration may be calculated by the fol-
's
Since the
systems depends Upon efficiency of carbon
quisling concentration maintenance
}awing formula:
of carbon ioxlde xtin-
the space shall be kept to a f anfrom
al'Plying extra minimum and com
{21-0,}
%CO== 21 X 1tl0
gas. Pensated for by
'openings such
OftII be arraPossnged to an doorways,
ottwarranged el windows, etc„
Y with the star ore automatically before or simultane
tion 38,214ith and t of the carbon dioxide discharge,the
Section
(e) Volume Factor. The volume factor used to determine
basic y
quantity of carbon dioxide to protect an enclosure
38.215 shalt be followed. or Sec-
containing a material requiring a design concentration up to
.. 488f
35 per cent shall be in accordance with Table No. 38-2-B.
487
LAW. STANDARD 3162.58
U.B.C. STANDARD 38-2-38
Carbon
I715IFORM
BUILDING CODE
Disable TABLE NO. 38.
WN DI XWE
Roquirestents CONC2-A-11[INIII>(UM CARBON E.WTRATION$ FOR
R
FXTIN
THEORETICAL
NIT
CC �,}
MTN. CO:
CONTr
MINIMUM
DESIGN
MATERIAL
—_. _. ____..__.
TRATION
(per CENT}
_
RATIOCONCE_
TRACEN
a
_.. ___._..�
(PERCENT)
A"tore "
Bpnxol. Benzine
65
26'
as
Brandies.
Butane
Carbon Disulphide
34
29
87
,u
Carbon Monoxide
Coal or Natural Cas
55
Its
31
41
06
PretoRRrropane
31.
64
64
rth.ir nu
Ethyl Ether
31
33
37
46
Alcohol
Ehyleneso
33.
40
,H
ElEthyl
thylras Dichloride
EO>yienr Oxide
41
21
43
49
Gasoline
Hexane
44
26
25
53
Nptlroaen
IL uume
29
62
34
36
Iterosese
Methane
W.
28
8744
Methyl Alcohol
Pentane
25
26
34
30
ProPane
nL
29
61
35
Qurneh ubs Oils
30
36
NATE: The theoretical
err fur the above
a- WaRi r p 26
36
34
materials, we
n 303. Thrace marked • rs obxtinaulshing concentration, in
a.yg,
oxy, rained from Bureau of Mines,
sera slues. sere calculated from
aece ted
F residual
TABLE NO.
38-2.8_-.yOLUME
FACTORS
(A
OF I
VOLME VOLUME F
SPACE ACTOR CALCULATED
(CU. FT. (Cu. Ft( - _.__ QUAM
TNCL.) Lb. } (Lb. CO:! NOT
LL LESS
LP to 190 _ Cu. Ft.)
141 - L0D 14 --- THAN
501 - 1.600 15 .072
1.6T11 - 4,500 16 ,063 10
4.501 -504 O' is 35
Oxer 5o.00o .� 100
2,�
Irl figuring the net cubic cagacit to
ante May be made for permanent non rembe vable Protected, due allow -
structures Inateriaily reduc;ng the volume. permeable
Aa the average smallapace has proportionately more bound-
ary area per enclosed volume than a larger space, greater pro -
graded pq7L;°Hate leakages are anticipated and accounted for by the
The volume factors in Table No. 38-2-33
Phleast Baa quantities for the smallest volumes are tabu_
i;b a to clarifY the intent of Column B and thu
pp1TW at borderline Volume,. s avoid
488
i
VOL. IU -1958 EDITION
U.B.C. STANDARD 38-2-38
TABLE NO. 38-2-0—FL00DING FACTORS
FOR
SPECIFIC HAZARDS
Carbon
R
Require
Requirements
(Cu'CO:!
for Surface
LJ SPECIFIC HAZARD
Fires
3 -------------
Dnp electrical genera insula_0
77ik
{ConL'd.}
tion hazards a general.Small e
machines, wire en-
u
closures. under ter) ea ft. Record (Bulk paper}
dust ce.
Far storuae mutts, dust col-
lectors.
TABLE NO. 38 -2 -D --SUPPLY PIPING SIZES FOR
HIGH PRESSURE Qinovr v rx.o�....._..
(d) Material Conversion Factor, For materials requiring a
design concentration over 34 per cent, the basic quantity of
carbon dioxide calculated from the volume factor given in
this Section shall be increased by multiplying this quantity by
the appropriate conversion factor given in Figure No. 38-2d.
(e) Special Conditions. Additional quantities of carbon di-
oxide shall be provided to compensate for any special condition
that may adversely affect the extinguishing efficiency.
Any openings that cannot be closed at the time of extin-
guishment shall be compensated for by the addition of one
pound of carbon dioxide per square foot. For ventilating sys-
tems which cannot be shut down the additional carbon dioxide
shall be based upon the volume of air moved in one minilte
and the same volume factor as used to determine the basic
quantity of gas needed. This shall be multiplied by the mate-
rial conversion factor (determined in this Section) when the
design concentration is greater than 34 per cent. This amount
of carbon dioxide may be applied through screening nozzles if
desired or it may be applied through the regiilar distribution
system. See Section 38.213.
489
U-R,C. STANDARD 58-2-58 UNIFORM RUILMINO CODE
For applications where the normal temperature of the en-
closure is above 210 degrees F., a one per cent increase in the
calculated total quantity of carbon dioxide is recommended
for each additional five degrees F. above 200 degrees F.
For applications where the normal temperature of the en-
closure is below zero degrees F., a one per cent increase in the
calculated total quantity of carbon dioxide is recommended
for each degree below zero degrees F.
Under normal conditions, surface fires are usually extin-
guished during the discharge period. P'rrcept for unusual
conditions, it will not be necessary to rrovide extra carbon
dioxide to maintain the concentration.
Carbon See. 38.215. (a) General, The quantity of carbon dioxide
Dioxide for deep-seated type tires is based on fairly tight enclosures
for Deep. Rellubnorents, because the concentration must be maintained for a substan-
tedres tial period of time to assure complete extinguishment. Any
possible,Arsleakage must be given special consideration since no
allowance is included in the basic flooding factors.
I b i Combustible Materials. For combustible materials ca-
pable of producing deep-seated fires, the required carbon
dioxide concentration cannot be determined with the same
accuracy possible with surface burning materials. The extin-
guishing concentration will vary with the mass of material
present because of the thermal insulating effects. Flooding
factors have, therefore, been determined on the basis of prac-
tical test conditions.
Theflooding factors in Table No. 38-2-C have been estab-
lished for specific hazards under average use and storage
conditions.
Flooding factors for other deep-seated fires shall be justified
to the satisfaction of the authority having jurisdiction befor
Proper e
ria.l to be Protectedrbecause the rate cooling is
the thermal insulating effects. reduced by
(c) Volume Consideration. The volume of the space shall
be determined in accordance with Section 38.214. The basic
quantity of carbon dioxide required to protect an enclosure
shall be obtained by treating the volume of the enclosure by
the appropriate flooding factor given in this Section.
(d) Special Conditions. Additional quantities of carbon
dioxide shall be provided to compensate for any special con-
dition that may adversely affect the extinguishing efficiency.
See also Section 38.214.
Any openings that cannot be closed at the time of extin-
guishment shall be compensated for by the addition of carbon
dioxide equal in volume to the expected leakage volume dur-
ing the extinguishing period. If leakage is appreciable, con-
sideration shall be given to an extended discharge system as
covered in Sections 32.221 to 38.225. At— — o_
�
Distributf--
system
11
Plying carbo6. n dioxide General
to encloseddistribution
zards shall be design a
with due consideration for the materials involved and the
nature of the enclosure since these items may require various
discharge times and rates of application.
(b) Rate of Ap Iieatl
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.R.C. STANDARD 38-2-58
MINIMUM OE51GN COZ CONCENTRATION -7.
Figure No. 38-2-1. Material conversion factors,
oxide shall be applied at a rate that will achieve the design Distribution
concentration within two minutes. For deep-seated fires the System
carbon dioxide shall be applied at a rate that will achieve the (Cont'd.)
design concentration within seven minutes.
Since the releasing devices of high pressure cylinders includ-
ing manifold connections are required to conform to Section
38.211 and since this may be accomplished by varied valve and
manifold connection designs, a factor of 0.0022 square inches
per pound of carbon dioxide required shall be used to deter-
mine the nominal cylinder outlet area, (i.e.. 0.110 square
inches for 50 pounds of carbon dioxide; 0.165 square inches
for 75 pounds of carbon dioxide; 0.220 square inches for 100
pounds of carbon dioxide). This nominal area or the area of
the supply pipe line as tabulated in this Section, whichever is
smaller, shall be used to determine the required nozzle area.
On systems of low pressure supply, the releasing devices on
containers, including manifold connections, shall have a free
flow area equivalent to the supply pipe area. Nozzle discharge
outlets have pressures and flow rates depending on the length
and size of piping, as shown in this Section. Nozzle sizes can
be determined on the basis of desired discharge rates.
Example: One square inch of nozzle outlet area at 150 p.s.t.
discharges 600 pounds CO- per minute; at 125 p.s.i., 500 pounds
per minute; etc.
(e) Piping for Systems with High Pressure Supply. The
size of supply piping shall conform to Table No. 38-2-D. Sev-
eral small pipes can be used in lieu of pipe size specified when
aggregate proportionate areas are provided based on the
correct areas tabulated. The number of nozzles that may be
P on. For surface fires the carbon di- supplied by any branch line of a system is determined by the
490 491
Dist
S1
(Con
STANDARD 88-$-38
tier total orifice UN"Dam $UlmING CODE
pipe. The total a nozzles supplied by the
rd.)
branch i
ilia bran h piular branch
ereshall ct exceed thee' the e area Of the pies supplied by
the system as dei rmt ed lin tthhiss Sect. nozzle-Ol itfiee ratios o
Table NoOf
. 38-2-D applies to Pipe runs of under t
and fifty feet. Pipe sizes for larger runs or ed
rates shalt require greater ° hundr
For surface special consideration, discharge
and gam. or � au shallow as these involving flammable liquids
Column E in Table No. 38-2-D shall "ombustible mat
and G. used with Columnsateririals,
For deep-seated Hes. such as those involving slow burnt
combustible materials (dust collectors, silos, record and flugr
storage vaults), Column H in Table No. 38-2-1 Shan
ro!fu Columns F and G except this
provided in this Sectimaterial on. The
oussible since the sauced PIPs sizes listed for this class be used
accomplished by rest rtegctIprolonged discharge pea- ls
Per.
the necessity for Is g nozzle outlets thereb
Column E shall begusr piping. Y eliminating
ung materials to allow no for 9 site quantities of slow burn_
excess ant and also a rniat fiOW rates for flash fire extin-
excess gas for the desired«iified prolonged discharge
Column E °eking and cooling of the
used f extinguishment maybe
are desaeeedp"seated then period
Id) PI flash fire
fors ms for Systems with Lew Pressure 8n
accordance with low pressure supply shalt be determined
Piping
involved. eeble No a required rate of flow and length
terniined in
Proper pipe else for the average be used as a guie Indicate
Pipe
In using Table No. 38- system.
at as the 2-E, the len
Isgth
hazard in 1vera ,e pipe leu Of run should be esti-
gthe 111 the storage to
suppI y Pipe can then be determined The size of the amain
The total branch line from the table.
Of the main su area• shall be at least
PAIy Pipe. equal to the area
(o) Yhzzle Slying sled Dlstribatton. Nozzles used
tion total Houdin
Pressure ppt shalt g system in connec-
intended pu Y of tee t with either high or low
beat esulisri'Ose. and shall be prop most suitable for the
The t Y located to achieve the
liquids
[hal ezi d,scha selected
will notand
their Placement shall be
'inquids °r a If clouds that unduI
the"Plosion, might extend the firash �meatie
the enclosure. rotherwise
t er be vise advetselY affect teristica ary in less the contents of
for the use intended selected on the b�n discharge
f charge charae-
For systems with high their adequacy
9Qa. the total area Of all demure supply protecting
85 let cent nor be less than arge outlets shall surface
Outlet area as determined 35 Per cent of not
exceed
zea of the supply pi w Ill this Section, o the release
Protecting deep-seated hfa, Cher is the smaller[ For or Area, the total area of all discharge
492
W--1958 EDITION U.B.O. STANDARD 38_2"58
'E NO. 38-2-E._TYPICAL CARBON DIOXIDE FLOW Distribution
RATE (LBS -/MM ) FOR PIPING FOR LOW
PRESSURE CARSON DIOXIDE SYSTEMS# 8"tem
lA iCont'd.)
-- LENGTH OF RITN
HV, 50. 17+0 200 >:� FT FT 700
200
63
366
250 105
1% 610 510 195
7'+4 SAO 405 345
2 1550 leo ll� 515
2'h 2300 2050 17rg) 7980 g8�p 800
3 3400 28 2Si10 1370 1270
4 7000 5300 485[1 33,80 20fi0
3200 3000
5 1168 IoRoo 6400 �� 00 4700 4400 4100 3870
160M 14500 134IX1 12500 7700 7200 5800
• These yaln- are typical for the Bow rate arts'liquidcarb�n 168doo
filmrna» the disch;rgo nozzles, Re" liquid carbon dioxide reaeho»
the discharge nozzles the vapor average di»charge rate is less. The
time qMu
required for liquid anrbon dioxide to reach the discharge noz-
zle» is a function of the amhient temperature, and the piping size
and wmght.
f These aloes are based on extra heavy steel pipe with screwed fit-
tings and two globe tvpe rnh'es The flow rates are influenced t'y
Dare taken int ¢i•aaingtrestr rtionse and number of fittings, and the
TABLE NO. 38-2-F—RATIOS OF DISCHARGE OUTLET
AREA TO RELEASE OUTLET AREA
TYPES OF FIRES
Surface Ores in liquids attd gases RATIO
Surface Ores in solids 05 — 85 per cent
Deep-seated fires � — 55 per cant
3 — 10 per cent
TABLE NO. 38-2-G STRENGTH AND ALLOWABLE
PRESSURES FOR AV' C, P, ENCLOSURES
CONSTRUCTION WINDAGE
PRESSURE
Light Building 100 MPH - -
Normal Building 140 MPH 5U Ib.jsrgl, f 7 5 •17b
Vault Bu (ding 200 MPH Igo
ib30 ,3,5
/sq.. ft. 20 .70
" Venting sash remains closed.
t Venting sash designed to open freely.
TABLE NO. 38-2-If—CARBON DIOXIDE REQUIREMENTS
PER UNIT AREA
S4. FT.JLR. LR.JSQ. 111.
Liquid Surfaces - -" -
56
Coa[ed Surfaces U.y.5
vapor Exits j: 1.7
2.0
493
U.R.C. STANDARD 38-2-88 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Dbitribution outlets shall not exceed 85 per cent of the supply pipe area as
System determined in Column H of Table No. 38-2-D nor be leas than
(court) three per cent of the total release outlet area as determined
in this Section.
NOTE: A minimum nozzle design pressure of 125 p.s.i.g.
is recommended for outlet nozzle delivery of approximately
500 pounds per minute per square inch.
For systems of high pressure supply, recommended ratios
for best performance on various types of fires are included in
Table No. 38-2-F.
For systems with low pressure supply, the total equivalent
orifice area of any nozzle or group of nozzles shall not be
greater than the area of the pipe supplying it.
For systems with low pressure supply, the flow rate through
each nozzle may be estimated at 500 pounds per minute for
each square inch of orifice area. This is based on a minimum
nozzle pressure of 125 p.s.i. Nozzles that are closer to the
source of supply will have a higher pressure and therefore a
higher discharge rate.
Venting Sec. 38.217. (a) General. The venting of flammable vapors
ComMeration and pressure build-up from the discharge of quantities of
carbon dioxide into closed spaces should be considered. Vent-
ing of flammable vapors is covered in Section 38.213. The
pressure venting consideration involves such variables as
enclosure strength and injection rate.
(b) Pressure Relief Venting. Porosity and leakages such
as at doors, windows and dampers, though not readily appar.
ant or easily calculated have been found to provide sufficient
relief for the normal carbon dioxide flooding systems without
need for additional venting. Record vaults, refrigerated
spaces, and duct work have also been found to need no
additional venting when tested under their average system
conditions.
For very tight enclosures, the area necessary for free vent-
ing may be calculated from the following formula, assuming
the expansion of carbon dioxide to be nine cubic feet (9 cu.
ft.) per pound.
X= RA
1,3 i/ P
where: X = Free venting area in square inches.
R = Rate of injection in pounds per min-
ute per square inch of orifice area.
P = Allowable strength of enclosure in
pounds per square foot.
A .— Total nozzle orifice area in square
inches.
For average discharge systems, a rate of 600
pounds of CO, per minute per square inch may
be obtained while for special high rate systems
a maximum of 2640 pounds per minute per
square inch may be obtained.
In many instances, particularly when hazardous materials
are involved, relief openings are already provided for explos-
ion venting. These and other available openings often provide
adequate venting.
494
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 38-2.58
General construction practices provide the guide in Table
No. 38-2-G for considering the normal strength and allowable
Pressures of average enclosures.
LOCAL APPLICATION SYSTEMS
See. 38.218, (a) Description. A local application system General
consists of a fixed supply of carbon dioxide permanently con- Provisions
nected to a system of fixed piping with nozzles arranged to
discharge directly into the fire.
(b) Uses. Local application systems may be used for the
extinguishment of surface fires in flammable liquids, gases.
and shallow solids where the hazard is not enclosed or where
the enclosure does not conform to the requirements for total
flooding.
Examples of hazards that may be successfully protected by
local application systems include dip tanks, quench tanks.
spray booths, oil -filled electric transformers, vapor vents, etc.
(c) General Requirements. Local application systems shall
be designed, installed, tested and maintained in accordance
with the applicable requirements in previous Sections and
with the additional requirements set forth in Sections 38.218
to 38.221 of this Standard.
Sea 38.219. (a) Extent of Hazard, The hazard must be so Hazard
isolated from other hazards or combustibles that fire will not Specifications
spread outside the protected area. The entire hazard must be
('. protected. The hazard shall include all areas that are or may
become coated by combustible liquids or shallow solid coatings
such as areas subject to spillage, leakage, dripping. splashing,
or condensation, and all associated materials nr equipment
such as freshly coated stock, drain boards, hoods, ducts, etc.,
that might extend fire outside or lead fire into the protected
area.
(b) Location of Hazard. The hazard may be indoors, partly
sheltered, or completely out of doors. It is essential that the
carbon dioxide discharge be such that winds or strong air
currents do not impair the protection.
See. 38.220. (a) General. The carbon dioxide required for Carbon
local application systems may be determined by two basic Dioxide
methods, area method and volume method. This quantity may Requirements
then be adjusted due to other factors discussed in subsequent
sections but in no case shall less than 10 pounds be used for
any individual hazard. The area method should be used except
for special cases involving three-dimensional objects such as
oil-fllled''electric transformers.
(b) Aril -Method. In this method, the amount of carbon
dioxide asbased upon the area of the surfaces of flammable
liquids,' iWid surfaces wetted with flammable liquids, or area
of flammablevapor exits, and is particularly adaptable to flat
surfaces',which can be easily calculated. The factors used to
calculate the amount of carbon dioxide required to protect
surfaeas„bt flammable liquids existing in depth such as in dip
tanks,;pr3a�i.and vats; to protect coated surfaces such as
drain iollers, and freshly coated stock; and to protect
flamrmib&';;Wri Nits such as vents and hatches are shown in
495
U.B.C. STANDARD 38-2-M
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Carbon TABLE NO. 33F2-1—SUPPLY PIPING SUES FOR HIGH
PRESSURE SUPPLY SYSTEMS
(CwWd.)
TABLE NO. 38-2.4—CUBIC FEET PROTECTED FOR
DECELERATION TIMES
LBS.
5
10
MAXIMI dI
QLI'
NOMINAL
IARERNggAggL PTFE
& me
PINCHESIPE EOENCHE$ARE
COs
REQUIRED
IN
MIN. MIN.
_.r-..__._..._.._.__.�
100
aidt.
.304
225
3:" std. WL
.533
300
7" stir. hey.
.719
990
114" xtr. hvy.
1.282
800
71h" xtr. hvy.
1.767
1400
2" xte. hvy.
2.953
2000
nth" xtr. hvy.
4.238
3406
3" xtr. hvy.
6.605
TABLE NO. 38-2.4—CUBIC FEET PROTECTED FOR
DECELERATION TIMES
LBS.
5
10
16 20
30
40
50
60
COs
MIN.
MIN.
MIN. MIN.
MIN.
MIN.
MIN.
MIN,
100
1200
IIXIO
900 000
590
460
390
200
150
18007500
0
1200 1000
750
600
500
40D
2 60
2400
1950
1600 1390
1000
850
650
500
250
3360
2450
2900 1650
1300
1050
800
600
300
4600
3100
2400 2000
1650
1300
1000
700
350
6100
4100
3000 2500
200D
1650
1200
900
400
7"00
6400
3800 3150
2500
2000
1600
1200
450
9250
6800
4900 4000
3100
2600
2100
1600
500
10800
8100
610o 5900
3900
3300
2800
2200
550
12300
95M
7400 6100
4900
4200
3600
3100
600
13900
10900
8600 7200
6000
5200
45M
3900
650
15900
12300
9850 8300
7050
6200
5500
4800
Trp
16900
13600
11190 9400
8100
7200
6400
5699
-50
I&W
15000
12356 19560
9150
8200
7300
"see
800
20000
16400
13600 11600
10200
9200
8200
7300
850
21500
17750
14854 12700
11300
10200
9100
8100
904
2300D
19100
16100 13800
12350
11200
10050
9000
950
246aD
2VM
17350 14900
13400
12200
11000
9890
I000
26100
219M
18600 16000
145M
13200
11000
10700
1050
27600
233M
19900 17100
15600
14200
12850
11500
1100
29100
24660
21050 18200
16600
15200
13750
12400
1150
30600
260M
22300 19300
17700
16200
14700
13200
1200
32200
27300
23550 20400
18800
17200
15600
14100
1250
33700
28700
248M 21500
19850
18200
165(0
14900
1.."
35300
30100
26M 26650
20900
19200
17450
15800
1.350
36800
31400
27300 23750
22000
20200
18400
16650 -
No0
38404
32400
28550 249M
23100
21200
19350
17500
1450
39000
34290
29800 26000
24200
22200
20300
18359
1500
41406
35600
31oto 27100
25250
23200
21200
19200
TABLE 38-2-K—DISCHARGE RATES FOR
SMALL NOZZLES
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.A.C. STANDARD 38-2-5x
Coated stock hanging not more than two feet (2') above a Carbon
liquid or coated surface and not containing crevices or inden- Dioxide
tations which will hold substantial amounts of flammable Requirement,
liquid may be considered as included within the protection (Cont'd.)
based on the main hazard surface.
If coated stock is hanging more than two feet (2') above a
liquid or coated surface or is of such a nature as to hold sub-
stantial amounts of flammable liquids, the protection shall be
extended to include those parts, and additional carbon dioxide
shall be added on the basis of either the area or volume
method.
When coated rollers or lengths of coated materials are
involved, the developed wetted area shall be used regardless
of possible duplication by contacting or close proximity
surfaces.
A minimum dimension of two feet (2') shall be used in
calculating the area of a given hazard even though an actual
dimension may be less.
(e) Volume Method. In this method the amount of carbon
dioxide is based upon an assumed enclosure that would sur-
round the entire hazard. The assumed walls and ceiling of this
enclosure shall be at least two feet (2') from the hazard and
shall enclose all areas of possible leakage, splashing or spill-
age. No deductions shall be made for objects within this
volume.
A minimum dimension of four feet (41) shall be used in
calculating the volume of the assumed enclosure.
The amount of carbon dioxide required shall be five -tenths
pound per cubic foot of the assumed volume.
(d) Partial Enclosures. When the volume method is used,
partial enclosures will aid in confining and holding the carbon
dioxide about the hazard, and the following reduction in
carbon dioxide requirements may be made where the floor or
base is closed and the enclosing walls are permanent. and
extend at least two feet (2') above the highest point in the
hazard.
The carbon dioxide requirements for percentage of the peri-
meter of the hazard continuously enclosed are as follows
EENCLOSED
R CENT
RIMFTER 75 IN,
IN1;0PSLY 50 PERCENT PRP. CENT I ER t^F,FT
rcu. ft
Reduiremeni 0331b,1eu Sk 0.2.5 Ib ;cu�ft 10.15Ih
Any openings in the walls shall be limited to 10 per cent of
tion of one pound of carbothe entire wall area and shn dioxide per square foot 11 be comensated forof t110,r? nig.
re) Windage Factor. The possible effects of air c rrents.
winds and forced drafts shall be carefully studied for the
pf.rUcular hazard and proper consideration shall be gi, in these
effects.
`.,-here the hazard is subject to winds or drafts fr,, zero
t+ miles per hour, no increase in the basic amount of 1 arbon
ri!onde is necessary.
• NozAe carie number as suggested in Section 38.211. 497
496
DISCHARGE
NOZZLE
ORIFICE
AREA
RATE
NO.
DIAM. IN.
SQ. IN.
LRS./MIN.
V160
.07
:00386
10.2
.078
0
.081
6/081
.00515
13.6
153
3/32
.906900
18.2
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.A.C. STANDARD 38-2-5x
Coated stock hanging not more than two feet (2') above a Carbon
liquid or coated surface and not containing crevices or inden- Dioxide
tations which will hold substantial amounts of flammable Requirement,
liquid may be considered as included within the protection (Cont'd.)
based on the main hazard surface.
If coated stock is hanging more than two feet (2') above a
liquid or coated surface or is of such a nature as to hold sub-
stantial amounts of flammable liquids, the protection shall be
extended to include those parts, and additional carbon dioxide
shall be added on the basis of either the area or volume
method.
When coated rollers or lengths of coated materials are
involved, the developed wetted area shall be used regardless
of possible duplication by contacting or close proximity
surfaces.
A minimum dimension of two feet (2') shall be used in
calculating the area of a given hazard even though an actual
dimension may be less.
(e) Volume Method. In this method the amount of carbon
dioxide is based upon an assumed enclosure that would sur-
round the entire hazard. The assumed walls and ceiling of this
enclosure shall be at least two feet (2') from the hazard and
shall enclose all areas of possible leakage, splashing or spill-
age. No deductions shall be made for objects within this
volume.
A minimum dimension of four feet (41) shall be used in
calculating the volume of the assumed enclosure.
The amount of carbon dioxide required shall be five -tenths
pound per cubic foot of the assumed volume.
(d) Partial Enclosures. When the volume method is used,
partial enclosures will aid in confining and holding the carbon
dioxide about the hazard, and the following reduction in
carbon dioxide requirements may be made where the floor or
base is closed and the enclosing walls are permanent. and
extend at least two feet (2') above the highest point in the
hazard.
The carbon dioxide requirements for percentage of the peri-
meter of the hazard continuously enclosed are as follows
EENCLOSED
R CENT
RIMFTER 75 IN,
IN1;0PSLY 50 PERCENT PRP. CENT I ER t^F,FT
rcu. ft
Reduiremeni 0331b,1eu Sk 0.2.5 Ib ;cu�ft 10.15Ih
Any openings in the walls shall be limited to 10 per cent of
tion of one pound of carbothe entire wall area and shn dioxide per square foot 11 be comensated forof t110,r? nig.
re) Windage Factor. The possible effects of air c rrents.
winds and forced drafts shall be carefully studied for the
pf.rUcular hazard and proper consideration shall be gi, in these
effects.
`.,-here the hazard is subject to winds or drafts fr,, zero
t+ miles per hour, no increase in the basic amount of 1 arbon
ri!onde is necessary.
• NozAe carie number as suggested in Section 38.211. 497
496
U.B.C. sVrANDARD 38-2-58
UNIFORM BUILDING CGDE
Where the hazard is subject to winds or drafts over 15 miles
per hour, the basis amount of carbon dioxide shall be increased
by 16 per cent for each additional five mites per hour.
(f) Cooling Factor. Where it is possible that metal Or Other
ature
material will become heated above the ignition temper
d
of the fuel or fuels involved before the carbon diox[e is
applied to the fire, additional carbon dioxide will be needed.
The amount of carbon dioxide needed for cooling shalt be
increased, if necessary, to maintain the rate of discharge for
the time necessary to cool heated materials to a point where
reignition will not occur. The chief of the Fire Department
shall be consulted.
Distributlon gee. s8,221. (a) General. The system shall be designed to
Syprovide an effective discharge of carbon dioxide promptly
before excessive amounts of heat can be absorbed by mate-
rials within the hazard. The carbon dioxide supe 1y shall be located as near the
hazard as possible, and yet not exposed to the fire, and the
in
Orderlinen
to get carbondirect
dioxidewith
minimum
t thefire p promptly es
of turns es ti
The system shall be desigi.ed for automatic operation unless
manual operators are on hand to insure prompt application. 1
(b) Rate of Discharge. The system shall be designed to dis-
charge all the carbon dioxide within one minute except that
needed for additional cooling. PP y 3
(c) piping for Systems with High Pressure Su t The
supply piping shall conform to Table No. 38-2-I. Several small
pipes can be used in lieu of pipe specified when aggregate
proportionate areas are provided based on the correct areas
tabulated. The number of nozzles that may be supplied by any
branch line of a system is determined by the total orifice area
Of the nozzles supplied by the particular branch pipe. The
total orifice area of the nozzles supplied by any branch pipe
shall not exceed the cross sectional area of the particular.
branch pipe times the "nozzle -orifice ratio' of the system as
determined in this Section. `..
Table No. 38-2-I applies to pipe runs of under one hundred
and twenty-five feet (1251). pipe sizes for larger runs or
greater discharge rates shall require special consideration.
(d) piping for Systems with Low Pressure Supply. Table
No. 38-2-E shall be used to
determine
Section . sizesfor systems
with low pressure supply.
(e) Nozzle Distribution and Sizing. The nozzles used shall
be listed or approved for capacity or rate of discharge, pat-
tern, effective range and nozzle coverage.
The nozzles selected and their location shall be such that all
surfaces being protected will he subject to the required cover-
age by the discharge; the discharge will not splash liquids or
create dust clouds that would extend fire or cause an explos-
ion, or otherwise adversely affect the contents of the protected
area; the dischargend theil not di charge will aspirate
to ber into the
held about
protected area;;
the hazard.
Nozzles vary in design and discharge characteristics which
498
t
HAND HOSE LINE SYSTEMS
General See. 38.221. (a) Description. Hand hose line systems con -
Provisions sist of a hose reel or rack, hose, and discharge nozzle assembly
500
U.B.C. STANDARD 38-2-M UNWORM RURMING CODE
(c) Extended Discharge. The quantity of carbon dioxide
for the extended discharge shall be determined on the basis
of the estimated leakage rate from the enclosures and the
xtinguish-
desired concentration at the end of the extended extinguish-
ing
i FFor rotating electrical equipment, the concentration at the
end of the deceleration period shall be at least 30 per cent. In
any case, this concentration shall be maintained for at least
20 minutes. Table No. 38-24 may be used as a guide to
estimate average requirements for enclosed recirculating ma-
chinery. The quantity is based on the internal volume of the
machine and the deceleration time assuming average leakage.
For dampered, nonrecirculating type machines add 35 per
cent to the indicated quantities.
Application Sec. 38.22& (a) Application of Initial Discharge. The ini-
isjOwbon tial discharge shall be applied at the rate required in Sections
Dioxide 38.212 to 38.217.
(b) Application of Extended Discharge. The extended dis-
charge shall be applied at a rate that will maintain the desired
concentration throughout the extinguishing period.
Special Sec. 38.226. (a) Intermittent Discharge. When the ex -
Equipment tended discharge is provided by means of an intermittent
Requirements discharge, the piping provided for the initial discharge may
be used. The initial discharge piping shall be installed in
accordance with Section 38.216.
The system shall be designed so as to avoid any possibility
of freezing up because of repeated discharges and the accumu-
lation of carbon dioxide snow.
(b) Continuous Discharge. When the extended discharge is
provided by means of a continuous discharge a separate pipe-
line shall be used.
The initial discharge piping may be used for the extended
discharge if suitable valves are provided to close surplus dis•
charge outlets. The initial discharge piping shall be installed
in accordance with Section 38.216.
Extended discharge piping shall contain no pipe smaller
than one -half-inch (1/y") size. For systems with high pressure
supply the area of the pipe shall not be less than three times
the total area of all outlets supplied by such piping.
(c) Discharge Outlets. A minimum number of discharge
outlets, consistent with proper distribution, and the desired
discharge rate shall be used in order to reduce the possibility
of blockage during a long or intermittent discharge.
For the average system, a discharge rate of 600 pounds per
minute per square inch can be used for estimation. For sys.
tems using small sized nozzles which are adequately supplied,
a discharge rate of 2640 pounds per minute per square inch
can be used. Such small nozzles are shown in Table No. 38-
2-x.
HAND HOSE LINE SYSTEMS
General See. 38.221. (a) Description. Hand hose line systems con -
Provisions sist of a hose reel or rack, hose, and discharge nozzle assembly
500
VOL III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 38-2-58
connected by fixed piping to a supply of carbon dioxide. A General
separate carbon dioxide supply can be provided for hand hose Provisions
line use or carbon dioxide can be piped from a central storage (Contd.)
unit which may be supplying several hose lines or fixed man-
ual or automatic systems. See Section 38.210.
(b) Uses. Hand hose line systems may be used to supple-
ment fixed fire protection systems or to supplement firat-aid
Are -extinguishers for the protection of specific hazards for
which carbon dioxide is a suitable extinguishing agent. These
systema shall not be used as a substitute for other fixed car-
bon dioxide fire -extinguishing systems equipped with fixed
nozzles, except where the hazard cannot adequately or eco-
nomically be provided with fixed protection. The decision as
to whether hose lines are applicable to the particular hazard
shall rest upon the chief of the Fire Department.
(c) General Requirements. Hand hose line systems shall
be installed and maintained in accordance with the applicable
requirements of this Standard except as outlined below. Pip-
ing shall be installed in accordance with Sections 38.210 and
38.221.
Sec. 88.228. Hand hose line systems may be used to combat Hazard
fires in all hazards covered under Sections 32.101 to 32.111, Specifications
except those which are inaccessible and beyond the scope of
manual firefighting.
See. 38.229. (a) Location. Hand hose line stations shall be Location and
so placed that they are easily accessible and within reach of Spacing
the most distant hazard which they are expected to protect.
In general, they shall not be so located that they are exposed
to the hazard.
(b) Spacing. If multiple hose stations are used, they shall
be spaced so that any area within the hazard may be covered
by one or more hose lines.
See. 88.280. (a) Rate and Duration of Discharge. The rate Carbon
and duration of discharge and consequently the amount of Dioxide
carbon dioxide shall be determined by the type and potential Requirements
size of the hazard. A hand hose line shall have a sufficient
quantity of carbon dioxide to permit its use for at least one
minute.
(b) Provision for Use by Inexperleneed Personnel. The
possibility of these hose lines being used by inexperienced
personnel must be considered and adequate provision made
so that there will be a sufficient supply of carbon dioxide to
enable them to effect extinguishment of the hazards they are
likely to encounter.
(c) Simultaneous Use of Hose Lines, Where simultaneous
use of two or more hose lines is possible, a sufficient quantity
of carbon dioxide shall be available to supply the maximum
number of nozzles that are likely to be used at any one time
for at least one minute.
Sec. 38.231. (a) Hose. Hose lines on systems with high Equipment
pressure supply shall have a minimum bursting pressure of Specification
5,000 p.s.i., and hose lines of systems with low pressure supply
shall have a minimum bursting pressure of 1,800 p.s.(.
501
U.&C. ;STANDARD 38.2.58 ..,,. .....
Equipment (b) Discharge Nozzle Assembly. Hose lines shall be
Speetfloations equipped with a discharge nozzle assembly which can be
(Cent d)ngiishut oft vahandled lve a ntoman
controll thee flow contains
carbon dioxide d
through the nozzle and a suitable handle for directing the
discharge. The attachment of the discharge nozzle assembly
to the hose by means of a swivel connection is desirable for
providing more ease of manipulation.
(c) Hose Line Storage. The hose shall be coiled on a
hose ml or rack so that it will be ready for immediate use
without the necessity of coupling and may be uncoiled with a
minimum of delay. If installed outdoors it shall be protected
against the weather.
id) Charging the Hose Une. operation of hand hose line
systema depends upon manual actuation and manual manipu-
is, therefore, essential for sucnozzle cessful extinguishment. and of ration
All controls for actuating the system shall be located in the
immediate vicinity of the hose reel.
The carbon dioxide supply shall be located as close to the
hose reel as possible so that liquid carbon dioxide will be sup-
plied to the hose line with a minimum of delay after actuation.
Except when in actual use, pressure shall not be permitted
to remain in the hose tine.
Training
Neoral
Provisions
see. 38.232. Successful extinguishment of fire with hand
hose lines is dependent upon the individual ability and tech-
nique of the operator. All personnel likely to use this equip-
ment shall be properly trainee in thts is s operation pment, and in
fie -fighting techniques app
STANDPIPE SYSTEMS AND MOBILE SUPPLY
See. 38.233. (a) Description. A standpipe system is a fixed
lation, or hand hose
stem
woithoutooding, local aa permanently con )
nected carbon dioxide suppline y. The
carbon dioxide supply is mounted on a mobile vehicle which
can be towed or driven to the scene of a fire and quickly
coupled to the standpipe system protecting the involved
hazard. Mobile supply is primarily fire brigade or lire depart-
ment equipment requiring trained personnel for effective use.
(b) Uses. Standpipe systems and mobile supply may be
used to supplement complete fixed fie -protection systems or
may be used alone for the protection of the specific hazards
onay be used a
erve
supplementoutlined) awfixedbslpjy
pP Y•u pM bile s pply may alsosbe o tp
lilted with hand hose lines for the protection of scattered
hazards. These
c
Theshief msshall be installed of the Fire Department only with the
approval of
(c) General Requirements. Standpipe systems and mobile
supply shall be installed and maintained in accordance with
the requirements in this Standard. Piping shall be for installed in
the ystem
accordance with the requirements app'
If a permanently
conne led lelswere
liai
able
length$ ofPping on the portable supply taken into
account.
VOL. HF -1858 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 38-2-58
See, 38.834. Standpipe systems and mobile supply may be hazard
used to protect hazards, included in this Standard, where Speddcati—
extinguishment will not be adversely affected by the delay
in obtaining effective discharge of carbon dioxide while the
mobile supply is being brought to the scene and coupled to
the standpipe system.
See. 38.235. The supply piping of standpipe systems shall Standpipe
be equipped with quick -change couplings and shall terminate Requirements
in an easily accessible and well marked location for connection
to the mobile supply. This location also shall be marked with
the amount of carbon dioxide required and the required dura-
tion of discharge.
Sec. $8.238. (a) Capacity. The mobile supply shall have a Mobile Supply
capacity in accordance with the provisions of this Standard. Requirements
Extra quantities may be required to compensate for delay in
getting mobile supply to the hazard.
(b) Coupling. The mobile supply shall be provided with
suitable means for transferring carbon dioxide into the stand-
pipe system. Quick -change couplings shall be provided to
permit these connections to be made as rapidly as possible.
(c) Mobility. The storage container or containers of carbon
dioxide shall be mounted on a movable vehicle which may be
brought to the scene of the fire by manual means, by a separ
rate motor vehicle, or under its own power. The means of
transporting the mobile supply shall be dependable and capa-
ble of getting to the fire with a minimum of delay.
(d) Location. The mobile supply shall be kept close at hand
to the hazards it Is intended to protect in order that tire
extinguishment may be started as soon as possible after the
fire breaks out.
(e) Accessories. Mobile supply for standpipe systems may
be provided with hand hose lines as accessory equipment for
the protection of small scattered hazards, or as a supplement
to standpipe systems or other fixed protection. Since mobile
supply is generally lire brigade or fire department equipment,
self-contained breathing apparatus and other accessories may
be carried.
see. 38.237. The effectiveness of fire protection provided by Training
standpipe systems and mobile supply depends upon the effi-
ciency and ability of the manpower handling the mobile
supply. It is imperative that those persons assigned to the
units be properly trained in its use and maintenance. Gen-
erally, this equipment is in the category of fire brigade or fire
department equipment requiring a regularly assigned crew.
EM
U.R.C. STANDARD 42-1-58 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 42-1-58
Test Method for Fire Hazard Classification
of Building Materials
Baw41on Subject 723 (August, 1950) of Al"*
Underwriters' la tm,ratorte!s, lnc.
See tieetion 4201. Uniform Building Code, Volume I
LimethodhtaBinn
t any typeoildingmarialwhichby its inherent
or by the manner in which it is applied,
structural qualities,
purpose14
capableis icft
atrn
to determine the ccompartivebuingcharacteristicss
material the rate of flame spread
Its surface, the fuel contributed d by its combustion, and
ver
the density of smoke developed when it is attacked by an
Description
Test
exposing Eire.
S. The test equipment is installed in an air-conditioned
in which the, temperature is maintained at 70 F, 5 F,
of
Equipment
space
and the relative humidity between 35 and 40 per cent. The
large to accommodate the storage of a
specs, is sufficiently
quantity of test samples which shall be conditioned uniform- 5
ly before fire -exposure tests are conducted.
of a
insideThe twidthcof eighteen inches (ls" anlduct
inside
Chamber
hawing an
depth of twelve inches (121), and an inside length several
than the test sample. The sides and base of the
feet longer
duct are of noncombustible material and are insulated. One
windows which afford obser-
side is equipped with nineteen
vation of the behavior of the test sample. The removable
insulated structural framework
tap or roof consists of an
twenty-five feet (251) long and twenty inches (20") wide
surface, which is fitted to
forming a flat noncombustible
the top of the duct in such a manner as to preclude air
its edges into the test structure. The material
leakage around
in team manner aso the under face of this it will be applied in actual use.framework
3
the
6. One end of the chamber, designated as the 'fire end,"
which direct flames vertically
is equipped with gas ports
upward against the surface of the test sample about one
its These ports consist of two three-
foot (11) from end.
quarter -inch (14") pipe elbows threaded Into a tee fitting.
The flow of gas is controlled by a manually operated valve
installed in the gas piping below thefloorof the fire -test
chamber. The gas is ighted by igniters located adjacent toach
port adjustable
the velocity installed
the edIncoming fit this eai
the
clambernto
d The opposite end of the chamber, designated as the
to a vent pipe in which a manually
"vent end," is connected
operated damper, controls the velocity of air travel through
of air may be produced by induced
the chamber. Movement
draft or by a variable -speed auction fan.
7. Thermocouples are inserted through the floor of the
recorded by one, the ftp of
-;
chamber. The temperatures
504
Vol- III -1838 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 42-1-58
which is Meted in the flame of the igniting -fire, aid the
operator in controlling the flame temperature. The tips of
the others are set one inch (1") from the exposed surface
of the sample undergoing test. one foot from the "vent end"
of the chamber (24 feet from the "tire end" of the sample),
a thermocouple provides temperature readings for Computa-
tion of the fuel contributed by the test sample.
S. The smoke measuring device consists of a photoelectric Smoke
tail. A light source mounted opposite the photoelectric cell
projects a beam of light along the vertical diameter of
pipe. This beam is received on the photoelectricF be
is connected to a suitable microammeter.
of a type from which the current out. is Ain'•
tional to the light intsantY-
a r-wediately preceding a series of tests, the top is Test
removed from the fire test chamber and the opening is procedure
covered with noncombustible material. The furnace is pre-
heated to establish conditions comparable to those which
exist after one or more fire -exposure tests have been con-
ducted. The chamber is then uncovered and permitted to
cool for a period of several minutes before a fire -exposure
test is started.
10. Following the preconditioning period, the removable
top of the test chamber with the test ample attadned to its
under face to placed in position and all joints sealed against
the infiltration of air. The draft -regulating damper and the
inlet -air shutter are adjusted to establish an air velocity
of 240 fpm, t 5 fpm, measured in the full cross section of
the duct at the "vent end," the corresponding reading on a
draft gauge is noted, and this reading is maintained through-
out the test by manual adjustment of the vent -pipe damper.
11. The Igniting -fire is lighted and then adjusted in the
following manner. The flame shall be such that under the
above-deacribed controlled conditions a test sample of select
j Grade A red oak will become involved in flame throughout
its entire length in approximately five and one-half minutes.
(This will require the equivalent of an Igniting -fire the full
width of the duct, about four and one-half feet (4%') long,
and burning approximately six cubic feet (8 rm. ft.) of 800
Btu gas per minute.) The test shall be continued for a 10.
minute period unless the sample is completely consumed in
the fire area before that time, in which case the test shall
be ended after complete combustion occurs.
12. When the test Is ended, the gas supply is shut-off, and
flaming, smoldering, and other conditions within the fire -
test chamber are observed before the test sample is removed
for further examination.
13. The test sample shall be truly representative of the Preparation
material for which classification to desired, and shall be of Sample
assembled under conditions that are representative of actual Submitted for
practice followed In building construction. The physical Classification
properties of the materials or ingredients, or both, used In
the test sample shall be determined and recorded.
505
U.B.C. STANDARD 42-1-58 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
It The test sample shall be conditioned before the test
until constant conditions have been reached at the tempera-
ture of 70 F, t S F, and at a relative humidity of 85 to
40 par cent (see paragraph 8). It shall be attached to the
removable top of the test structure in the same manner
and using the sane materials for attachment as are recom-
mended in the marufacturer's Instructions for application
and use.
15. The-fhme'spread clasaifteation is determined by com-
paring the length of time in which flame reaches the far
of the sample {if it does) with that required for red
Zt flame travels only paM way along the length of the
pie, then ceases to advance or recedes, the comparison
!s made on the ratio of tt a distance traveled, measured imm
the downstream end of the igniting-rim to the extreme
flame travel.
Note; If flame reaches the and of the sample in three
minutes as compared to six minutes for red oak, the cl uist-
-: ` flcation is 200. If flame extends one-half the distance from
the down-stream end of the igniting-fire to the end of the
sample, then ceases to advance or recedes, the classification
is 50.
18. Temperature readings obtained by the thermocouple
located near the vent end of the fire test chamber during
the fire-exposure test are plotted, versus time, ocoordinate
ce
Mr as was done in the tests employing
board and red oak. Comparison made of the ansa under
the respective curves will establish a numerical classification
by which the performance of the material (fuel contributed)
may be compared with that of asbestos-cement board and
select Grade A red oak which has been arbitrarily established
as zero and 100, respectively.
17. The density of smoke developed during the teat is
determined by recording the reduction of light that is caused
by the smoke passing between the light source and the
photoelectric cell. The characteristics of the photoelectr.'`:
cell circuit are such that the reduction of current outp
may be considered as directly proportional to the reductio.:
In light intensity. By plotting the curve of the reduction
of photoelectric-cell-current readings, versus time, and by
integrating the area under the curve, values are developed
that can be considered as proportional to the light reduction
caused by the smoke.
18. To compare the density of smoke developed by various
materials during the test period, scale values of 100 for red
oak and zero for asbestos-cement board are assigned as the
basis of a numerical classification.
Aissly19. If desired, the toxicity of the products of combustion
*Ipro u can be determined by withdrawing samples for chemical
M� tion analysis from the vent pipe during the progress of the test.
500
l',WC, -MAXI)ARD 41-2-58 UNIFORM BUILDIN(i (,(u ;
few,etaterstme TABLE NO. 42-2-A—NEIN FOR BMNlNa
aw TIME -TEMPERATURE CURVEUfa
Ti",
TEMPERATURE
TIME
(.met-)
TIME
(minutes)
C.
X
Initial -,a 21
21......_..
1472
I .266 124
22
I-
I482
2 442 228
23- ..........149,
3 M 331
2A
4 Sul 434
25
151"
low 538
261___-
151! SiG
3090 SM
7 1162 62828-
...... ..... .
8 .. . . ....... 1219 650
29....._.. ....
1264 684
30
g§,
1300 704
31-- ...........
lg,,
rm 720
32...._............_...
15C.4
E151 733
33 . .......
1571 155
13.-__. ..... 1370 743
34_ - ..........
;59
14 1386 762
35.........-.
1584
15 13.99 759
36 ............. __
159t,
16 . ....... ....1412 767
37.................
1696
17 1425 774
3s._................
i6o2
is141S 781
.
39___ .........
DIOS �T6
IV 14;� 788
40-1--
Ian
20_._.._.............. 1462 794
Te be—Ad-ed . rand test, the temperature.
within —
the f.11ing Wc-rec":
,,, InbW -admv. 30' F. and —10° F.
(21 ,, �r firet minute and each minute thereafter. ± be' T.
1*31 Th� ttierape t—I)eraturr shall be within ± 30' Y f
;tV, of the tabu at,d values for both the Me— 4�,-
minute, tests.
ant units or portions thereof shall remain in place , r1:1 the
end of the prescribed flame exposure period. Ex�)l IS
made fur burned, charred, or disintegrated maten�. ' :all:rg
in pieces having an area smaller than fifty sqwz, nci:eF
150 sq. in.). No glow during or after the test sh-nX j i -r
to the edge of the thirty -six-inch by thirty -sit -ii. ,l.36"x
W) specimen at any point.
508
VOL' HI -1958 EDITION
C.B.C. STANDARD 43.1-58
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 43-1-58
Me Tests of Building Construction and Mate iah
Based on Standard 3lethods E119-5,5 of the
American Society for Tenting .M
aterials
See Section 41102 of the Uniform Building Code, Volume I
Seo 1. (a) These methods of &a tests are Applicable to Scope
assemblies of MeS0M`Y Units and to composite assemblies of
Structural Materials for buildings,
Including bearing and
other walla and Partitions, columns girders, beams, stabs,
and Composite Slab and beam assemblies for fours and roofs.
They are also applicable to other assemblies and structural
units that constitute permanent integral parts Of a Amished
building.
(b) It is the intent that cluSnifications shall register per-
formance during the period of exposure and shall not be
Construed as having determined suitability for use after
fire exposure.
Control of Fire Tests
Sec, 2. The conduct of fire tests of materials and con- Time-
struction shall be controlled by the standard time -tempera- Temperate"
Lure curve shown in Fig. 1. Curve
Sec. 3. (a) The temperature fixed by the curve shall be Furnace
deemed to be the average temperature obtained from the Temperatures
readings of not less than nine thermocouplesfor a floor,
roof, wall, or partition and not less than ight thermo-
couples for a structural column symmetrically disposed
and distributed to show the temperature near all parts of
the sample, the thermocouples being enclosed in scaled por-
celain tubes three-quarters inch OV') in outside diameter
and one-eighth inch (tA") in wall thickness, or, as an alter-
native in the case of base metal thermocouples, enclosed
in sealed, standard -weight one-half inch (1, 1') black wrought
steel or black wrought iron pipe. The exposed length of the
pyrometer tube and thermocouple in the furnace chamber
shall be not less than twelve inches ill"). Other types
of protecting tubes or pyrometers may be used that, tinder
test conditions, give the same indications as the above
standard within the limit of accuracy that applies fur
furnace-teMperature measurements. For floors and columns,
the Junction of the thermocouples shall be placed twelve
inches (12') away from the exposed face of the sample at
the beginning of the test and, during the test, Shan not touch
the Sample as a result of its deflection. In the case of wells
and Partitions, the thermocouples shall be placed six inches
(W) away from the exposed face of the Sample at the be-
Silanduff Of the test, and shall not touch the sample during
the test, in the event of deflection.
(b) The temperatures shall be read at intervals not exceed -
.g 5 minutes during the first 2 hours and thereafter the
.intervals may be increased to not more than 10 minutes.
509
t-..y.c.. STANDARD 43-1.58 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
(c) The accuracy of the furnace control shall be such
that the area under the time-temperature curve, obtained
by averaging the results from the pyrometer readings, is
within 10 per cent of the corresponding area under the stand.
ard tou temperature curve shown in FIC. 1 for fire tats
of one hour or less duration, within 7.5 per cent for those
one not two n within 5
cent for testsand
perrung tre wo hours idursttion
Tempamliur"
see- A. (a) Temperatures at unexposed surfaces shall be
rneasured with thermocouples or thermometers' placed under
K
Unexposed
flexible, oven-dry, felted asbestos pads six inches (6 4 square,
Surfaces of
0.4 inch in thickness, and weighing not less than 1.0 nor
more than 1.4 pounds per square foot. The pads shall be
Waven and
sufficiently soft so that, without breaking, they may be
pwduow
shaped to contact over the whole surface against which
they are placed. The wire leads of the thermocouple or the
stem of the thermometer shall have an immersion under the
pad and be in contact with the unexposed surface for not
less than, three and one-half inches (3%'). The hot junction
of the thermocouple or the bulb of the thermometer shall
be placed approximately under the center of the pad. The
oulmde diameter of protecting or insulating tubes, and of
thermometer steins, shall be not more than five-sixteenths
against the su
inch (&'). The pad shall be held firmsur-
face, and shall fit closely about the thermocouples or ther-
face,
mometer stems. Thermometers shall be of the Partial-
immersion type, with a length of stem, between the end of
the bulb and the immersion mark, of three inches (r).
The wires for the thermocouple in the length covered by
the pad shall be not heavier than No. 18 B. & S. gauge
11
(0.04 inch) and shall be, electrically insulated with heat-
resistant and moisture-resistant iwatfugb.
(b) Temperature readings shall be taken at not leas than
rine points on the surface. Five of these shall be symmetri-
calh* disposed. one to be approximately at the center of the
specimen, rind four at approximately the center of its quarter
=e '1')ns. The other four shall be located at the discretion
,f the Building Official to obtain representative informs-
I
.i on cn the performance of the construction under test. None
MR4 be ieeated opposite or on top of beams, girders, pilas-
ters, er other structural members if temperatures at such
Pmts will obviously be tower than at more representative
i=�:atintt9.
(c) Temperature readings shall be taken at intervals not
exceeding 15 minutes until It reading exceeding 212 F. (100
C.) has peen obtained at any one point. Thereafter the read-
ings may be taken more frequently at the discreti611 of the
body, but the intervals need not be less ',ban five
Whem the conditions of acceptance place a
surface, c = the rse of temperature of the
unexpos�
shelf
--,,tW",a r-nd point of the fire endurance period
s. o,rr•r•.c...rrd by the average of the measurements taken at
1-41 tons It.'Heade to use
nun be une&fe oral
1
Ste
VOL. III -19" EDITION
U.B.C. STANDARD 43-1-58
1300 Tb -
Tmperature
1200 cone
z S 4 a
Time, hours.
Pig 1—Time-Temperature Chtt've.
-1100
-1000
-90
- 700 e,
v
- 600
-500
t='
-400
- 300
- 200
too
-0
individual points; except that if a temperature rise 30 per
cent in excess of the specified limit occurs at any one of
these points, the remainder shall be ignored and the fire
endurance period judged as ended.
Classification as Determined by Test
Sec. b. (a) Results shall be reported in accordance with Repertof
the performance in the tests prescribed in these methods. Result&
They shall be expressed in time periods of resistance. to the
nearest integral minute. Reports shall include observations
of significant details of the behavior of the material or con-
struction during the test and after the furnace fire is cut off,
including information on deformation, spoiling, cracking,
burning of the specimen or its component parts, continuance
of flaming, and production of smoke.
511
11
I
I
z S 4 a
Time, hours.
Pig 1—Time-Temperature Chtt've.
-1100
-1000
-90
- 700 e,
v
- 600
-500
t='
-400
- 300
- 200
too
-0
individual points; except that if a temperature rise 30 per
cent in excess of the specified limit occurs at any one of
these points, the remainder shall be ignored and the fire
endurance period judged as ended.
Classification as Determined by Test
Sec. b. (a) Results shall be reported in accordance with Repertof
the performance in the tests prescribed in these methods. Result&
They shall be expressed in time periods of resistance. to the
nearest integral minute. Reports shall include observations
of significant details of the behavior of the material or con-
struction during the test and after the furnace fire is cut off,
including information on deformation, spoiling, cracking,
burning of the specimen or its component parts, continuance
of flaming, and production of smoke.
511
I BA', STANDARD 43-1-5ll UNIFORM BUILDING CeDE
Report of
(b) When the indicated resistairm period is one bait hour
oe over, and determined by the average or maximum tem.
,Ccat'd.)
pasture rias on the unexposed surface or within the test
sample, or by failure under load, a correction shall be
applied for variation of th't furnace exposure from that
pre.
scribed where it will affect the classification by multiplying
the indicated period by two-thirds of the difference in area
between the curve of average furnace temperature and the
standard curve for the first three-fourths of the period
and dividing the product by the area between the standard
curve and a base line of 68 F. (20 C.) for the same part
of the indicated period, the latter area increased by 84
Fahrenheit -hours or 30 Centigrade -hours (5240 Fahrenheit.
minutes or 1800 Centrigrade-minutes), to compensate for
the thermal lag of the furnace thermocouples during the
first part of the test. For fire exposure in the test higher
than standard, the indicated resistance period shall be
increased by the amount of the correction and be similarly
decreased for fire exposure Below standard (Note).
Note: The correction can be expressed by the following
formula:
91(A—A.)
C.
whert: J(A.+L)
C =correction in the same units as 1,
I ® indicated Are -resistance period,
A v area under the curve of indicated average furnace tem-
perature for the first three-fourths of the indicated
A.= area under the standard furnace curve for the same p
part of the indicated period, and
L=lag correction in the same units as A and A. (54 Fahr. -
hr. or 30 Cent. -hr. (3240 Fahr. -min. or 1800 Cent
nus.) ).
Test Sample
Test
Sample
SeK•. e. a Th,- tr=t sample shalt be truly representative
of the construction for which classification is desired, as to
materials, workmanship, and details such as dimensions
of parts, and shall be built under conditions representative
of those obtaining as practically applied in building con-
struction and operation. The physical properties of the mate-
rials and ingredients used in the test sample shall be deter-
mined and recorded.
(b) The size and dimensions of the test sample specified
herein are intended to apply for rating constructions of
dimensions within the usual general range employed in build.
ings. If the conditions of use limit the construction to
ama)ler dimensions, a proportionate reduction be
may made
In the dimensions of the samples for a test qualifying them
for such restricted use.
Fire
Conduct of Fire Tests
E
Keo. i. The fire endurance test on the sample with its
applied load, if any, shall be continued until failure occurs,
Test
or until the sample has withstood the test conditions for a
:r12
VOL. 111-1958 EDITION U.R.C. STANDARD 43-1-58
Period equal to that herein specified in the conditions of
acceptance for the given type of construction.
Sec. S. (a) Where required by the conditions of accept- Hose
ance, a duplicate sample shall be subjected to afire exposure Stream
test for a period equal to one half of that indicated as the Teat
resistance period in the fire endurance test, but not for more
than one hour, immediately after which the sample shall be
subjected to the impact, erosion, and cooling effects of a hose
stream directed first at the middle and then at all parts
of the exposed face, changes in direction being made slowly.
(b) Examptlon. The hose stream test shall not be required
in the case of constructions having a resistance period, indi-
cated in the Are endurance test, of leas than one hour.
(c) Optional Program. The submitter may elect, with the
advice and consent of the testing body, to have the hose
stream test made on the sample subjected to the lire en-
durance test and immediately following the expiration of
the Are endurance test.
(d) Stream Equipment and Details. The stream shall be
delivered through a two and one -half-inch (2%") hose dis.
charging through a Nations! Standard Flaypipe of corre-
sponding size equipped with a one and one-eighth-ineb
(1%") discharge tip of the standard -taper smooth -bore pat-
tern without shoulder at the orifice. The water pressure and
duration of application shall be as prescribed in Table L
(e) Nozzle Distance. The nozzle orifice shall be twenty
feet (20') from the center of the exposed surface of the
test sample if the nozzle is so located that when directed
at the center its axis is normal to the surface of the test
sample. If otherwise located, its distance from the center
shall be less than twenty feet (20') by an amount equal
to one foot (11) for each 10 degrees of deviation from the
normal.
Sec. 9. The material or construction shall not be tested Timeef
until a large proportion of its final strength has been at- Testiw
tained, and, if It contains free water, until the excess has
been given off. Whenever practicable, the material or con-
struction shall be weighed at intervals during the period of
drying and the weights on successive days recorded. Weigh-
ing shall be continued until the weight shall have remained
fundamentally constant for not less than five successive days
under favorable drying conditions of the open room of the
laboratories. If weighing of the total material or construc-
tion of the test specimen is not practicable, a suitable sample
designed to give an accurate estimate of the condition of
dryness of the complete sample shall be selected or fabri-
cated and subjected to weighing as specified above for the
complete test specimen. Artificial drying at temperatures
not injurious to the material or construction to be tested
may be used.
Tests of Dearing Walts and Partitions
See. 10. The area exposed to fire shall be not less them Sizeof
one hundred squafe feet (100 sq. ft.), with neither dimen- Sample
513
U•\[FORH BUILDING CODE
ilii i. l' R ROSE STREAM TEST
:.e.s..=-.he
til\DITIONS �{i. 4-^ DURATIONor
PRESMIRU E APPLICATION,AT SASE � g.. P R3tSTm::�E PER45
IOD NQ ZLE, EXE P,D_®.___ ..........s and oi•er-.....les than 5rs and over if less ,�ars_..._........._._....._t»e 30 Rifers end over it lea9 thanours and over if less 30r. 2 hours.....ig'less than 30 1ar and over I30, hours ...................... than 1 hour. if desired .
The test specimen shall not
Sion leas than lune feet W�>•
be restrained on its vertical edges. hose stream
the fire endurance 2 lfied to construe -
During d load Sligo be aPP theoretically, as
Loading tests a superimpose eulated to develop contemplated
tion in a manner cal working stresses
nearly as practicable, he
by the design• regarded as successful if the fol -
The
Lest shall be rega lined the applied
fi of lowing conditions are met'. have s°at
the fire endurance test will wastes Passage of
(s) The wall or Partition shall to cotton
load dor g to iga gasification is desired.
Esme or gases hot enough clew ed he applied
period equal to that for whichtest snecifted In
(b) The wall or partition shall have sustain
load during the fire and hose stream axes hot eandnough
rection 5, without passage of flame, e t r
to igni site
after its Completion hp,,iicceathe
us
to cotton waste, or of the hose strewn'
cooling but within 12 hours
tain the dead load of specified
test Constructiow l or partition
super+mgosed load sp We been such as
(ci Transmission of heat through the surface more
during the* Are endurance test shall not ha ra
to raise the temperature
C )ature n its niUha t�Pa lure.
then 250 F. ( lPactittora
Testa Of Naah—in walls Ono
see. I3. Tuare,-,a , pos d tc fift•) shall be not less tin enssion
of hundred sy With �ll be restrained
less than nine feet 9'). The teat specimen she
on all four edges. successful if the
See, 14. The test shalt be regarded as the fire
following conditions are met: have eaea hot enough
en(a) The wall durance testwithoutorpartition
Balli Acme or withstood which
to ignite cotton waste, for a period equal to that
c)assifiewum is desire.
r 514
U,B.C. STANDARD 43-1-58
VOL. 11I-1958 EDITION have
withstood the fire and
(b) The wso or partition shall haS without passage of
specified IT, Se Wittor of the
on vn�ata.
hose stream test as apse
hAgigne,ow sof gas" hot enough
to ignite (c) Tram imiasion of ,,at through the wall or partition
ave been such - to
during the $ie endurance
a iia shall unexposed surface more than
raise he temperatureabove its initial temperature.
250 F. (139 C.)
Testa of Columns
ll, Size Of
gee. 15. The length T the colo ex!clearclearosed to elength 8-06
ximacan-
contemplated by the design, and for building c d + of conshall n --
The Contemplated
be applied aceord-
not less ,hen nine and heirfProt etion if any. Mice.
ing io the methods of acceptable field p
ing to
1g (a) During the fire endurance test the column ng
es;ansas nearly as prae-
ahaii be exposed to Are on art sides and shall be loaded in a
stresses contemplated by the design•
manner caleui ork ted to develop theoretically, matting the load to the ex-
ticabie, the working increasing he
provision shell be made far trans
posed portion of the column without undulyb' jointly so de
(b)
column length. a testing three-quarters
(b) If the submitter and th
Gide, the column may be subjected to one and fire en
load before the rase endurance
the
times its designed working had S. deleterious en made
test fs undertaken. The fac hag each
shall not be construed 83 h8 manes• tpndttion of
the lire endurance test p
he load during the fir' endurance test ACMP"OCe
SM 17. The teat shall be regarded as successful if the C.1-
umn sustains the app
re
for a period eoluai•to that for which Structural
steel ion aColumns
Alternate Test of Protection for gtruetutuk
gee• 18. This test proction of the
edure does not require column load- Application
Ing at any time and may be used at the di rotections that
testing IaboratorY to evaluate steel caolumof the column load'
are not required by design to carry an
See. 19. (a) The size of the steel column used shaft at such Rise and
as to P, acterot
and workmanship for which classifies- gampie
provide a test specimen that ie truly representative of
the design, materials, rotection shall be applied according to
Of acceptable field practice. The length Of the
tion fs desired. The P
the mehods protection
and dur-
protected column shall & ahcetion o the p (8) •The Column
shall he vertical exposure.
PP restrained against
frig the Are exp of
(b) The applied Protection shall be ter than
orce aconcrete
longitudinal temperature expansion gree
steel column by rigid sleet prates or ieinbe f
attached to the en c size of atheiplates or th
tection is applied,
The to Provide direct bearing
adeties ShSI1 bee area of he ptotecttoa
515
U.&C ST<ivDARD 43.1-M UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
(C) The ends of the specimen, Including the means for re-
straint. shall be given sufficient thermal insulation to prevent
appreciable direct heat transfer from the furnace.
Tgnal,ftlum See. 20. The temperature of the steel in the column shall
baraswimarst be measured by at least three thermocouples located at each
of four levels. The upper and lower levers shall be two feet
(2') from the ends of the steel column, and the other two in-
termediate levels shall be equally spaced. The thermocouples
at each level shall be so placed as to measure significant
temperatures of the component elements of the steel section.
Couditlow of See. 25. The test shall be regarded as successful if the fol-
Acceptaxice conditions are met:
(a) The construction shall have sustained the applied load
during the fire endurance test without passage of flame
or gases hot enough to ignite cotton waste, for a period equal
to that for which classification is desired.
,bI Transmission of heat through the construction during
the fire endurance test shall not have been such as to raise
the temperature on its unexposed surface more than 250 F.
i 1392 i above the initial temperature.
Alternate Test of Protection for Solid Structural Steel
Beams and Girders
Application Sec. 26. This test procedure does not require loading at
any thus of beams or girders and may be used at the discre-
it= of the testing laboratory to evaluate steel beam and
girder protections that are not required by design to resist
stresses from applied loads.
516
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 43-1-58
Sec. 27. (a) The size of the steel beam or girder shall be Size and
such as to provide a test specimen that is truly representa. Character of
tive of the design, materials, and workmanship for which Sample
classification is desired. The protection shall be applied
according to the methods of acceptable field practice and
the projection below the ceiling, If any, shall be representa-
tive of the conditions of intended use. The length of beam
or girder exposed to the fire shall be not less than twelve
feet (121) and the member shall be tested In horizontal
position. A section of a representative floor construction
not less than five feet (51) wide, syipmetrically located with
reference to the beam or girder and extending its full length,
shall be included in the test assembly and exposed to fire
from below. The rating of performance shall not be applic-
able to sizes smaller than those tested.
(b) The applied protection shall be restrained against
longitudinal expansion greater than that of the steel beam
or girder by rigid steel plates or reinforced concrete attached
to the ends of the member before the protection is applied.
The ends of the member, including the means for restraint,
shall be given sufficient thermal insulation to prevent apprec-
iable direct heat transfer from the furnace to the unexposed
ends of the member or from the ends of the member to the
outside of the furnace.
Sec. 28. The temperature of the steel in the beam or girder Temperature
Shall be measured with not less than four thermocouples at Measurement
each of four sections equally spaced along the length of the
beam and symmetrically disposed and not nearer than two
feet (21) from the inside face of the furnace. The thermo-
couples at each section shall be symmetrically placed so as
to measure significant temperatures of the component ele-
ments of the steel section.
Sec. 29. The test shall be regarded as successful if the Conditions of
transmission of heat through the protection during the Acceptance
period of fire exposure for which classification is desired
does not raise the average (arithmetical) temperature of
the steel at any one of the four sections above 1000 F., or
does not raise the temperature above 1200 F. at any one
of the measured points.
Tests of ceiling Constructions
Sec. $0. The area exposed to fire shall not be less than one Size of
hundred eighty square feet (180 sq. ft.), with neither dimen- Sample
sion less than 12 feet (12'), grid the ceiling surface at its
edge$ shall be in contact with the test furnace structure.
See. $1. The test ceiling construction shall include all Test
structural members and details including hangers, if any, Construction
but not walkways. Above the ceiling during the test, there and
shall be provided a tight flat-topped enclosure, the under- Enclosure
side of the covering material of which shall be thirty-six
inches (36") above the top of the joists or beanut support-
ing and protected by the ceiling. The top of the enclosure
517
Sec. 21. During the fire endurance test the specimen shall
m
be exposed to fire on all aides for its full length.
Comfiftas of
See. 22. The test shall be regarded as successful if the
Acceptanea
on of heat through the protection during the period
of Are exposure for which classification is desired does not
raise the average (arithmetical) temperature of the steel at
any one of the four levels above 1000 F., or does not raise
the temperature above 1200 F. at any one of the measured
points,
Tests of Floors and Roofs
(The following contemplates application of fire exposure to
the under side of constructions.)
SIM of
See. 23. The area exposed to fire shall be not less than
Sample
one hundred eighty square feet (180 sq. ft.), with neither
dimension less than twelve feet (12'). Beams or girders, if
a part of the construction under test, shall Be within the
combustion chamber and have a clearance of not less than
eight inches W) from its walls.
Loading
Sec. 24. During the fire endurance test a superimposed
load shall be applied to the construction in a manner calcu-
lated to develop theoretically, as nearly as practicable, the
working stresses in each member contemplated by the design.
Couditlow of See. 25. The test shall be regarded as successful if the fol-
Acceptaxice conditions are met:
(a) The construction shall have sustained the applied load
during the fire endurance test without passage of flame
or gases hot enough to ignite cotton waste, for a period equal
to that for which classification is desired.
,bI Transmission of heat through the construction during
the fire endurance test shall not have been such as to raise
the temperature on its unexposed surface more than 250 F.
i 1392 i above the initial temperature.
Alternate Test of Protection for Solid Structural Steel
Beams and Girders
Application Sec. 26. This test procedure does not require loading at
any thus of beams or girders and may be used at the discre-
it= of the testing laboratory to evaluate steel beam and
girder protections that are not required by design to resist
stresses from applied loads.
516
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 43-1-58
Sec. 27. (a) The size of the steel beam or girder shall be Size and
such as to provide a test specimen that is truly representa. Character of
tive of the design, materials, and workmanship for which Sample
classification is desired. The protection shall be applied
according to the methods of acceptable field practice and
the projection below the ceiling, If any, shall be representa-
tive of the conditions of intended use. The length of beam
or girder exposed to the fire shall be not less than twelve
feet (121) and the member shall be tested In horizontal
position. A section of a representative floor construction
not less than five feet (51) wide, syipmetrically located with
reference to the beam or girder and extending its full length,
shall be included in the test assembly and exposed to fire
from below. The rating of performance shall not be applic-
able to sizes smaller than those tested.
(b) The applied protection shall be restrained against
longitudinal expansion greater than that of the steel beam
or girder by rigid steel plates or reinforced concrete attached
to the ends of the member before the protection is applied.
The ends of the member, including the means for restraint,
shall be given sufficient thermal insulation to prevent apprec-
iable direct heat transfer from the furnace to the unexposed
ends of the member or from the ends of the member to the
outside of the furnace.
Sec. 28. The temperature of the steel in the beam or girder Temperature
Shall be measured with not less than four thermocouples at Measurement
each of four sections equally spaced along the length of the
beam and symmetrically disposed and not nearer than two
feet (21) from the inside face of the furnace. The thermo-
couples at each section shall be symmetrically placed so as
to measure significant temperatures of the component ele-
ments of the steel section.
Sec. 29. The test shall be regarded as successful if the Conditions of
transmission of heat through the protection during the Acceptance
period of fire exposure for which classification is desired
does not raise the average (arithmetical) temperature of
the steel at any one of the four sections above 1000 F., or
does not raise the temperature above 1200 F. at any one
of the measured points.
Tests of ceiling Constructions
Sec. $0. The area exposed to fire shall not be less than one Size of
hundred eighty square feet (180 sq. ft.), with neither dimen- Sample
sion less than 12 feet (12'), grid the ceiling surface at its
edge$ shall be in contact with the test furnace structure.
See. $1. The test ceiling construction shall include all Test
structural members and details including hangers, if any, Construction
but not walkways. Above the ceiling during the test, there and
shall be provided a tight flat-topped enclosure, the under- Enclosure
side of the covering material of which shall be thirty-six
inches (36") above the top of the joists or beanut support-
ing and protected by the ceiling. The top of the enclosure
517
I .ry.t:. rT..9ND311D 43-1-58
shall be made of cement -asbestos board one-quarter inch
(? "} in thickness under asbestos mWboard One-half inch
( ^) in thickness, and the aide walls of eightinch W)
commou brick, or it shall be of a construction having
equi nt heat conductivity and heat capacity. Where use
Of the ceiling under a combustible cOnstmetion is tontem-
at least five fifteen -inch (15") square o!
P (11) pine boards shall be attached to the under-
side of the toof theboIt surface of themepanela shall be measnel "re. The ured. on the
See. 32. The test shall be regarded as successful if the
following conditions are met:
(a) The ceiling stroll have withstood the fire endurance
test without the passage of flame or ignition of combustible
members or materials forming part of the construction
above the ceiling as evidenced by glow or flame.
(b) Transmission of heat through the ceiling during the
Ere endurance test shall not have been such as to raise the
average temperature above the tat ceiling more than in-
dicated in the following Items (1), (2), and (3). The limit-
ing temperatures shall be the average of those taken at not
less tely
at the center, ave points,
nd ! ur a approximof which ately the cbe enters of the
quarter sections.
(1) With combustible supports or other combustible ma-
terial in contact with the ceiling, the temperature increase at
the points of contact shall not exceed 250 F.
(2) With combustible supports or m
other e combustible
b stiblet ma-
terial not in contact with the ceiling, temperature in-
crease on the surface of any combustible members, pine
panels, or combustible material adjacent to the ceiling
shall not exceed 250 F. The temperature on the exposed
surface of combustible members not in contact with the
ceiling shall be measured under a sheet of mica approxi-
mately 0.002 inch in thickness.
(3) With no combustible material above the ceiling con-
attuction, the average temperature measured on the lower
surface of the main structural supporting members (barns
or slabs) shall not exceed 1200 F. and the average tem-
perature of the top and bottom of the beams, when used,
shall not exceed 1000 F.
Tats of Protection for Combustible Framing, or for Com-
bustible Facings on the Unexposed )aide of Walls,
Partitions, and Floors
Sec. 33. Test panels carrying wall, partition, or floor pro-
tection shall be finished with the protections which are the
object of the test, except that where the finish on the un-
exposed side is not the subject of the test and is not specifi-
cally indicated, the testing authority shall apply a finish
Judged suitable for the purpose. In case a floor construction,
as installed for actual use, is to have no finish on the un-
exposed it shall be to tested.
See. 34. The area exposed to fire shall be, for tests of wall
and partition protection, not less than one hundred square
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 43-2-58
feet (100 sq. ft.) with neither dimension less than nine feet
(9'): for tests of floor protection, not less than one hundred
eighty
square
ua feet effet (180 s4. ft.) with neither dimension less
See. 35. The test shall be regarded as successful if the Conditions at
following conditions are met:
Accept—
(a) The protection shall have withstood the lire endur-
ance test, without ignition of the materials protected, for a
period equal to that for which classification is desired.
(b) Transmission of heat through the protection during
the fire endurance test shall not have been such as to raise
the memberseratures at Its or facings of the contact
est panelmorethan 250 F.tected (13structural
C.) above the initial temperatures at these points, except that
for members closely embedded on three sides in masonry,
temperature or other Incombustible materials the p Bible
rise may be 325 F.(181 C.).
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 43-2-58
Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
Based on Standard Methods E152 -56T of the
American Society for Testing Materials
See Section 4306, Uniform Building Code. Volume I
See. 43.201. (a) Method of Test. These methods of fire test Scope
are applicable to door assemblies of various materials and
types of construction, for use in wall openings to retard the
passage of fire.
(b) Limitation. Tests made in conformity with these test
methods will register performance during the test exposure;
but such tests shall not be construed as determining suitabil-
ity for use after exposure to fire.
(C) Purpose It is the intent that tests made in Conformity
with these test methods will develop data to enable regulatory
bodies to determine the suitability of door assemblies for use
in locations where fire -resistance of a specified duration is
required.
Sec. 43.202. The fire -exposure of door assemblies shall be Time.
arditimedtto emperat re curve shown in Fiicable gure No. on 4the
jet tend- Temperaturery
See. 43.203. (a) Test Exposure. The temperatures of the Furnace
test exposure shall be deemed to be the average temperature Temperature
obtained from the readings of not less than nine thermocouples
symmetrically disposed and distributed to show tire tempera-
ture near all parts of the test assembly. The thermocouples
shall be protected by sealed porcelain tubes having three-
fourths -inch (%11) outside diameter and one -eighth -inch t 1. )
wail thickness, or, as an alternate, in the ease ofbas
e metal
thermocouples, protected by one -half-inch ( - wrought steel
or wrought iron pipe of standard weight. The junction of the
519
U.B,C. STAN 43-2-58 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
thermocouples shalt be six inches (6") from the exposed face
or the test assembly or from the masonry in which the assem-
bly is installed during the entire test exposure.
ib) Reading Interval, The temperatures shall be read at
intervals not exceeding five minutes during the first two
hours, and thereafter the intervals may be increased to not
more than 10 minutes.
(c) Aceorsey of Control. The accuracy of furnace control
shall be such that the area under the time- temperature curve,
obtained by averaging the results from the thermocouple
readings, is within 10 per cent of the corresponding area
under the standard time -temperature curve for fire tests of
one hour or less duration, within 7.5 per cent of those over one
hour and not more than two hours, and within five per cent
for tests exceeding two hours in duration.
Temperature See. 43.204. (a) Determination of Temperatures. If unex-
et U posed -surface temperatures are recorded, they shall be deter -
Surface mined in the following manner:
of Dears 1. Unexposed -surface temperatures shall be taken at not
less than three points with at least one thermocouple in each
sixteen -square -foot (16 sq. ft.) area of the door. Thermocou.
Pies shall not be located over reinforcements extending
through the door, over vision panels, or nearer than twelve
inches (12" 1 from the edge of the door.
2. Unexposed -surface temperatures shall be measured with
thermocouples placed under flexible, oven -dry, felted asbestos
pads six inches W) square, four -tenths inches (0.411) thick,
and
we', ng not less than one pound, nor more than one and
four -tenths pounds, per square foot. The pads shall be held
firmly against the surface of the door and shall fit closely
about the thermocouples. The thermocouple leads shall be
immersed under the pad for a distance of not less than three
and one-half inches (3!2") with the hot junction under the
center of the pad. The thermocouple leads under the pads
shall. be not heavier than No. 18 E and S gauge (0.04") and
shall be electrically insulated with heat -resistant and moist-
ure -resistant coatings.
3. Unexposed surface temperatures shall be read at the
same intervals as those for furnace temperatures in Subsec-
tion 43.203 (a).
Test Sec. 43.205. (a) Construction and Size. The construction
Amweablise and size of the test door assembly, consisting of single doors
or doors in pairs, shall be representative of that for which
classification or rating is desired. The materials and construc-
tion of the door and frame, and the details of the installation—
hardware, trim, finish, and clearance or lap --shall be recorded
to assure positive identification or duplication in all respects.
(b) Sills. A sill shall be provided as part of the opening to
be protected, except where such sill interferes with the opera-
tion of the door. The sill shall be of incombustible material
and project into the furnace to a distance approximately twice
the thickness of the test door.
Sec. 43.206. (a) General. Swinging doors shall be mounted
so they open into the furnace chamber. Sliding and rolling
doors shall be mounted on the exposed side of the opening in
520
VOL. 111-1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 43-2-58
the wail closing the furnace chamber. The mounting of all
doors shall be such that they fit snugly within the frame,
against the wall surface or in guides, but such mounting shall
not prevent free and easy movement of the test door.
(b) Clearances for Swinging Doors. Clearances for swing-
ing doors shall be as follows, with one -sixteenth -inch
variation: three -thirty-seconds inch (A") at the top, three -
sixteenths inch (-A") at the bottom, and three -thirty-seconds
inch (A") between the door and hinge and lock jams.
See. 43.207. Masonry settings shall be allowed to dry at Time of
least three days before tests are made. Testing
Sec. 43.208. (a) Pressure, The pressure in the furnace Fire
chamber shall be maintained as nearly equal to the atmos- Endurance
pheric pressure as possible. Test
(b) Length. The test shall be continued until the exposure
period of the desired classification or rating is reached unless
the conditions of acceptance set forth in Section 43.211 are
exceeded in a shorter period.
Sm 43.209, Immediately following the fire -endurance test, Hose Stream
the test assembly shall be subjected to the impact, erosion, Test
and cooling effects of a hose stream directed first at the mid-
dle and then at all parts of the exposed surface, changes in
direction being made slowly.
The hose stream shall be delivered through a two -and -one-
half -inch (2!z") hose discharging through a National Stand-
ard Playpipe of corresponding size equipped with a one -and -
one -eighth -inch (VA"i discharge tip of the standard -taper
smooth -bore pattern without shoulder at the orifice. The
water pressure at the base of the nozzle and duration of appli-
cation in minutes per one hundred square feet (100 sq. ft.) of
exposed area shall be as prescribed in Table No. 43-2-A.
The tip of the nozzle shall be located twenty feet (20') from,
and on a line normal to the center of, the test door. If impos-
sible to be so located, the nozzle may be on a line deviating
not to exceed 30 degrees from the line normal to the center
of the test door. When so located, the distance from the center
shall be less than twenty feet (20') by an amount equal to
one foot (1`) for each 10 degrees of deviation from the normal.
Sm 43.210. Results shall be reported in accordance with Report
the performance in the tests prescribed in these test methods.
TABLE NO. 43-2-A—WATER PRESSURE AT BASF; OF
NOZZLE AND DURATION OF APPLICATION
521
Water
Duration of
DESIRED RATING
Pressure
at S we of
AFlplicu[ion.
Mlmtt sp�'r
Aozzle
100 al. ft.
Exposed_.
Area
3 hr ................... .....................................
45
5
% hr. and over, if less than 3 hr._ .................
36
2i"
1 hr. and over, if less than 1% hr.___._.._...
30
Y._
Less than 1 hr..-_ ..............
30
1
521
t.ttt. t;TAlD,%RD t314A UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
The report shall show the performance under an exposure
period chosen from the following: 20 -minute. 30 -minute, 45-
annute, one-hour, one -and -one-half hours, or three hours. The
report shall include the temperature measurements of the
fezrnaee and. if determined, of the unexposed side of the test
ax-embhy. It shall also contain a record of all observations
having a bearing on the performance of the test assembly.
Conitni ni% of ter. 11211. A door assembly shall be considered as meeting
Acceptance the renv:irements for acceptable performance when it remains
in the opening during the fire -endurance test and hose -stream
test within the following limitations:
1. The eolges of seeing doors shall not move from the origi-
nal1",Aion more than the thickness of the door during the
lust half of the classification period, nor more than one and
,,nr ha f times the thickness during the entire classification
rwroot Including the hose stream.
2 An assembly consisting of a pair of swinging doors shall
not separate more than three-fourths inch (%,") or equal to
the thruu of the latch bolt at the latch location.
3. An assembly consisting of a single swinging door shall
not separate more than one-half inch (1/2") at the latch
locatmn.
4, fcxrs mounted on the face of the wall shall not move
from the wall sufficiently to develop a separation equivalent
to the thickness of the edge of the door at the point of
separation.
5. Doors mounted in guides shall not release from guides
and guides shalt not loosen from fastenings.
6. The test assembly shall have withstood the fire -endur-
ance test and hose -stream test, without developing openings
anywhere through the assembly, except that small portions of
glass dislodged by the hose stream shall not be considered a
weakness.
522
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.S.G. STANDARD 43-3-58
TABLE NO. 43-3-A—THREE-PLY DOORS_
tlethat 03 ,,[.Axl.11 t'\t ti12F. tIF oPENINC TYPE 1{DEI. --
j Operation Area,Width Height Rating "remh rise
I Sq Ft Ft Ft 30 Stm.
single slue 120 i 12 12
Slide in Pairs 120 12 12 3 Hrs (Al 250° F \faa
Single Swing G 1?
Swing in Pairs In 12
TABLE NO. 43-3-B—TWO-PLY DOORS
Afethad Id \TAXI IU%t ILE or oc NINC: T1M L.IBEi
-- —
pperation SneFt eeFt j IlFt Rat g J T—I Rise
Single Slide 80 10 10 1 1 , H T.
Single Swing; g d � lir (DI250° F M...Fa
Swing in Fairs so 10 10 30 hl .
Single Slide so 14 10 $ H (C)
Single Swing ( 6 IO Y Hr (I,)
Swing in Pans 80 IO l0 t
iperatnre ruse til, a ,hof 650 degr— Fron the un -I. ed s de IInil30 no notes.
Sec. 43.802. A door conforming to these specifications con- Requirements
sists essentially of a core made up of layers of boards nailed
to each other, encased in terne or zinc plates jointed together
at their edges and nailed through the seams to the core. The
building official shall be consulted before installation.
See. 43.303. Doors exceeding the sizes in Table No. 43.3-A Size and
and Table No. 43-3-B have not been subjected to standard fire hating
tests, and certificates on such doors indicate that the units
conform to construction requirements of this Standard ex-
cept for size.
MATERIALS
See. 43.304. ( a) Kinds and Condition. The following soft Lumber and
woods may be used, provided only one kind of lumber is used Specifteatica s
in the assembly of a single core:
Cedars—All Classes Northern White Pine Sitka Spruce
Cypress—All Classes Redwood Yellow Poplar
Douglas Fir Eastern Spruce Tupelo Gum
Western White Pine
Other kinds of lumber may be added to the foregoing list
upon application from a fire door manufacturer and provided
investigation indicates that the kind of lumber proposed has
the properties desired. including low resin content, light
weight, resistance to fungus and decay, and ability to with-
stand nailing without splitting or splintering.
Lumber used shall be well seasoned so that it has reached
its normal moisture content, as specified by the Forest
Products Laboratory for its kind. In all cases, stocks of
lumber shall be stored under cover in the premises of the fire
door manufacturer for at least one month before used in the
523
■
I-,E,t'. STANDARD 53.3.38 UNWORN BUILDING CODE
VOL, III -1858 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 43-3-58
manufacture of fire door cores, and while in storage shall Lumber
be piled in such a manner that the air has free access to all Specifications
surfaces of each board. Kiln drying will be accepted for the (Contd.)
30 -day air -drying period.
(b) Specifications. The boards shall be nominal one -inch
(I"1 lumber, surfaced two sides and matched and without
beading, beveling, painting (or other treatment), free from
wane (bark), decay, knot or other holes, loose knots, unsound
knots or knots exceeding two inches (2") in any dimension.
Actual thickness of the boards shall not be less than three-
fourths inch (%"), and nominal width not less than three
inches (3") nor more than eight inches (8").
The nominal width (or stock width) is usually slightly
greater than the width over the tongue and groove.
See. 43.305. (a) General. The plates shall have straight Metal
edges and square corners. A deviation of ane -thirty-second- Covering
inch (1/32") per foot from square shall be accepted provided
the door manufacturer is able to obtain true, straight joints
and to avoid parching the rows of sheets in the covering.
(b) Terne Plate. Prime terve plate only shall be used. (For
the purpose of this Code, "terne" shall indicate an alloy for
the coating of tin and lead in the proportion of not less than
20 per cent of tin.)
The plate shall be I. C. base weight (107 pounds), or
heavier, classified as being of a "20 pound weight."
The term "20 pound coating" is understood to include a
range in weight of coating from 15 pound minimum ("case"
package) on the basis of the average of the averages from at
least five sheets taken from as many different users' stocks
at approximately the same date.
Each "case" package of terne plate of 112 sheets, twenty
inches by twenty-eight inches (20" x 28") shall have a nomi-
nal net weight of not less than 226 pounds with a plus or
minus tolerance of approximately four per cent.
Each "base box" package of terne plate of 112 sheets
fourteen inches by twenty inches (14" x 20") shall have a
nominal net weight of not less than 113 pounds with a plus or
minus tolerance of approximately four per cent.
Each plate shall be identified as to the actual manufacturer
by means of name or registered trade -mark and the words
"Fire Door Standard," "I. C. 20 pounds." This identification
shall be stamped in the sheet. In addition, private brand
names or marks may be shown if desired.
(c) Zinc Plate. Zinc plates shall be thoroughly and un)-
formly coated on both sides of No. 30 gauge sheet steel [not
less than ten -thousandth -inch (0-010") thick]. The zinc coat-
ing shall not crack or flake when formed. The protective
coating of zinc shall be such that zinc plates taken at random
from the users' stocks will not show a fixed deposit of copper
after two one -minute immersions.
Finished doors and shutters shall be painted with a good
grade of corrosion -resisting paint before shipment.
Sec. 43.306. Core nails shall be cut nails of the clinch type. Nails
For three-ply cores the nails shall he not less than rico and
seven -eighths -inches (27/8") nor more than three -inches (3")
525
VJLC- STANDARD 43-3-b8 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Nwh long. For two-ply cores the nails shall be not less than one -
and -seven -eighths inches 417K") nor more than two inches
12") long.
Nails for applying the metal covering shall be wire nails
with flat heads. The shank of the nails shall be not less than
ninety -one -thousandth -inch (0.091") nor more than one -hun-
dred -and -nine -thousandth -inch (0.109") in diameter.
The nails for three-ply cores shall be two -inches (2") long
and for two-ply cores shall be not less than one -and -one-
fourth inches (1)_i") nor more than one -and -one-half inches
)i)_") long.
CONSTRUCTION
Bitaild Ser. 43.307. (a) Stock Specifications and Assembly. Only
one stock width of board shall be used in any one core, except
that the edge boards may differ in width from the stock
board.a. Edge boards shall finish not less than three inches
43"1 in width, and the exposed edges shall not be tongued or
grooved.
Boards shall be not less than one foot (1') in length with
ends cut square. Not more than two pieces shall be used in
any continuous strip in any outside layer of a two-ply or
three-ply core, nor more than three pieces in any middle
layer strip of a three-ply core. At least alternate strips in
outside layers shall be full length boards.
Outside layers in a three-ply core and one layer of a two-ply
core shall be vertical, and the other layer horizontal. The
several boards in each layer and the ends of pieces of boards
in strips shall make tight joints at edges and ends of boards.
The top edge for a sliding door designed to close be
gravity shall conform to an incline of three-fourths inch
('a"). The minimum face width of the top horizontal board
of a core having the top edge inclined shall be not less than
three inches i3").
fb) With Glass Panels. If panel opening is such size that
the distance between opening and edges of door is less than
two feet IT), all boards bordering vertical edges of opening
may be laid vertically and all boards bordering horizontal
edges of opening may be laid horizontal.
Boards in normally vertical layers bordering sides of panel
opening shall be continuous from top to bottom of door, and
boards in normally horizontal layer bordering top or bottom
of panel opening shall be continuous from side to side of door.
Distance between panel opening and side of door shall be
not less than seven inches (7").
Nawng of Sec. 43.308. The boards shall be nailed so that the several
Cariegi layers are fastened tightly together with the points of the
nails turning back and clinching thoroughly in the face of the
core and with no portion of the nails projecting beyond the
surfaces of the core. See Table No, 43-3-C.
See. 43.309. A finished three-ply core shall be not less than
core two and one-fourth inches 1214") nor more than two and five-
eighths inches 42=+„"1 in thickness, and a finished two-ply
core shall be not less than one and one-half inches
528
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 43-3-58
nor more than one and three-fourths inches (la") in thick-
ness.
The cores shall have true corners. All edges shall be fin-
ished smooth and square, excepting that meeting edges of
swinging doors may be beveled one-fourth inch (Ij") snot
rabbeted).
Sec. 43.310. Face plates shall be not larger than the four- Size and
teen -inch -by -twenty -inch (14" x 20") size. Corner plates Forming
shall be not over fourteen inches 114"r wide and of any of Plates
length that will avoid joints with edge plates coming under
miter fold.
Edge plates (excepting "cap" plates) shall be of the same
width as corner plates and of any convenient length. Cap
plates shall be of any convenient length and equal in width
to thickness of core plus three and one-half inches (31�"i.
Face plates excepting the face plates used in the row
forming the closure shall have one vertical edge turned five-
eighths inch (%") and the other vertical edge doubled under
one and three -sixteenths inches (1-3/16") and the doubled
edge then turned up five-eighths inch t§`,") from cut edge.
Face plates, excepting face plates forming top horizontal
seams, shall have both horizcntal edges turned five-eighths
inch (") to lock with edge and other face plates. Face
plates forming top horizontal seams, excepting seams formed
with a cap, shall have the lower horizontal edge turned five-
eighths -inch ( rii ) to lock with other face plates, and the
other horizontal edge doubled tinder one and three -sixteenths
inches (1-3/16") and the doubled edge then turned up five-
eighths inch (fij ") from cut edge. Face plates forming top
horizontal seams with a cap shall have both horizontal edges
turned up five-eighths inch (jW") to lock with cap and other
face plates.
Corner plates shall have all edges turned five-eighths inch
( §; ") so as to lock with edge and face plates.
Edge plates, excepting cap plates, shall have all edges
turned five-eighths inch (x, "I so as to lock with corner, face,
and other edge plates. Cap plates shall have edges forming
seams with other cap plates turned five -eighths -inch (-,,").
Cap plates shall have edges forming top horizontal seams
with face and edge plates doubled under one and three -six-
teenths inches (1-3/16") and the portion next to the cut edge
then turned down five-eighths inch (`++,.") so as to lap the
edge and face plates.
Sec. 43.311. The plates shall fit the core as flatiy and tightly Application
as practicable and shall be locked together not less than of Plates
one-half inch (;6"), Both faces of the core shall be covered
with plates laid with their longer sides vertical, except that
the plates in one vertical row on each face of the core may
be laid horizontally. Vertical seams formed with face plates
shall be hook seams with the upper plate having a. fold for
covering the heads of the nails in the seam.
Horizontal seams formed with face plates, excepting top
horizontal seams, shall be hook seams. Top horizontal seams,
excepting seams formed with a cap, shall have a fold for
527
VJ&C' SMAN RD UNMR31 BUILDING CODE
AVIrlies"Rxs Covering the heads of the nails in the seam. Top horizontal
of Plallies seams formed with a cap shall be lock seams with the lock -
(C ) ing portion of the cap having a fold for covering the heads of
the nails in the seam.
The upper ends of vertical seams shall be covered by the
doubled edges of the top horizontal seams,
Each bottom comer of the core shall be covered with a
plate bent over the edges of the core and lapped an equal
distance on both faces of the core, making a miter fold
iwithout cutting) on each face, the folds on a door for use
at an opening in an exterior wall being arranged to shed
water. Each upper corner shall be covered the same as bot-
tom comers if a cap is not used for covering the top edge of
the core.
The bottom edge and the vertical edges of the core shall
be covered with plates bent over the edges of the core and
lapped an equal distance on both faces. The plates shall be
joined to each other and to the corners with hook seams, the
seams being made so as to shed water when the door is for
use at an opening in an exterior wall.
The top edge of the core shall be covered the same as the
bottom and vertical edges if a cap is not used. The top edge
of the core shall be covered with a cap when the door is for
use at an opening in an exterior wall or when the door has a
segmental head. The cap shall be formed of plates joined to
each other with hook seams.
NOTE: When glass panels are provided and band or
angle iron reinforcement for glass grooves is used, the
vertical edges of the panel openings shall be covered
with terve plate or zinc -coated steel secured to the face
plates by vertical seams. The covering at the horizontal
edges of the opening shall be cap seams.
Naning ofSee. 43.312. The nails shall pass straight into the core as
near as possible through the center of the lock in the seams.
Full-sized face plates shall. be held to the core by 18 nails in
the seams, with nails near but not at the corners, and with
four nails along each short side and five along each long side
of each plate. Face plates smaller than the fourteen -inch by
twenty -inch 114" x 20") size shall be held to the core by nails
in the seams placed near but not in the corners, with at least
two nails along each side and with nails spaced not over three
inches (3") apart in horizontal seams and not over four
inches (4") apart in vertical seams.
Vertical seams formed with face plates shall have nails
through two thicknesses of each plate.
Horizontal seams formed with face plates, excepting top
horizontal seams, shall have nails through two thicknesses of
lower plate and one thickness of upper plate forming the
seams.
Top horizontal seams, excepting seams made with a cap,
shall have nails through two thicknesses of each plate form-
ing the seams. Top horizontal seams formed with a cap shall
have nails through one thickness of each plate forming the
seams.
Each corner plate shall be held to the core with two nails
on each side near the edge of the core..;
828 J'..:..
VOL. HI -1933 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 4&3-38
NOTE: When glass panels are provided and band or
angle iron reinforcement for glass grooves is used, nails
securing seams between face plates and strips covering
edges of panel opening shall be spaced at irtervals not
exceeding three inches (3") in horizontal seams and four
inches (4") in vertical seams, with one nail near but not
in each corner.
See. 43.313. Heads of nails shall be covered as follows: 1. In protection of
vertical seams formed with face plates, by the doubled edges Nail Heads
of face plates.
2. In horizontal seams formed with face plates, excepting
top horizontal seams, by the face plates.
3. In top horizontal seams formed with face plates, by the
doubled edges of face plates or cap.
4. In corner plates, by the miter fold.
See. 43.314. The vent hole shall be cut through one of the Vent Hole
plates near the middle of the exposed side of the completed
door. Care should be exercised not to injure the cme when
cutting the hole.
The hole shall have a diameter of three inches (3"l for a
door having an area of not more than fifty square feet (50 sq.
ft.) and a diameter of four inches (4") for a door having an
area of not more than one hundred and twenty square feet
(120 sq, ft.). For doors having an area greater than one
hundred and twenty square feet (120 sq. ft.), the vent hole
shall be six inches {6") in diameter.
The plate -around the vent hale shall be secured with nails,
spaced about one inch (I") apart, and the exposed wood
thoroughly painted.
NOTE: In many cases the vent' hole should be made
after the door is installed. In such cases it is not neces-
sary to cut the vent hole at the factory.
See. 43.313. Swinging doors to be mooted in pairs shall be Astragal
provided with at least one astragal extending the full height
of the doors. Sliding doors to be mounted in pairs shall be
provided with only one astragal extending to within four
inches (4") of the top and bottom of the doors. Astragals
shall be of steel not less than three -sixteenths -inch (3116")
thick and three inches (3") wide. The astragal shall be
fastened to the door, when installed, by not less than one-
fourth -inch 11/4") carriage or stove bolts spaced at intervals
not exceeding twelve inches (12"). Top bolts shall be not
over five inches (5") from the end of the astragal and bot-
tom bolts not over three inches (3"). Bolts shall pass through
astragal and be secured by nuts on the oposite side of the
door. Washers shall be used under nuts. Bolt holes in astragal
and door shall be so located that astragal will extend at least
three-fourths inch i.1i") bevond the edge of the door to
which it is attached.
In case the astragal is to be attached in the field, it will
not be necessary to drill the door for the bolts at the factory.
See. 43.316. In all doors provided'with grooves constructed Glass Groove
of angles, the opening shall be reinforced either by means of Reinforeemant
a ban&iron strip nut less than one -eighth -inch in thick -
329
U.R,C. STAN 15-3.38 UN"RM BUILDING CODE
Of one-eighth-inchtin width to byonethand three�eighthsOf einch bre y seven -
eighths -inch 4 ){," x 1%" x ,?¢i") angles bolted together
thl the door.
The band -iron strip shall he secured to the inner edges of
the panel opening by not less than two wood screws and shall
be provided with threaded holes for receiving the bolts which
secure the angles forming the glass grooves.
The one -eighth -inch by one and three-eighths inch by
seven -eighths -inch ((s" x 1%" x 7{s") angles shall be bolted
together through the door by three-sixteenth-ineh (3/16")
stove bolts spaced at intervals not exceeding twelve inebes
(12") and not more than two inches (21) from each end.
They shalt be provided with threaded holes for receiving the
bolts which secure the angles forming the glass groove.
GINN Grooves: See. 45.317. The angles used in forming the glass grooves
shall be not less than one-eighth inch (t,.") in thickness and
C48011VUBILIft of other dimensions to provide a groove not less than three -
fourth -inch M-) deep by three -eighths -inch (%") wide.
Rivets or screws used to secure the groove angles to the
reinforcement shall be spaced at intervals not exceeding
twelve inches (12") and not more than two inches (2") from
each end.
G Grooves: See. 43.318. Grooves of this type shall be formed of a single
F-n"d$beet piece of No. 24 gauge steel galvanized or terne plate and
I shall be not less than three -fourths -inch (4") deep by three.
OINNUMCCIOU eighths -inch (%") wide. The edges of this formed strip shell
be secured to the face plates of the door by vertical seams r.t
the vertical edges of the opening and by cap seams at the
horizontal edges of the opening.
In the case of glass openings employing only one light, the
reinforcing strip shall be one -eighth -inch (W') band iron
and shall be continuous either for the full length of the
groove or consist of individual reinforcing strips not less
than one inch (1") long for each screw securing the remov-
able molding. The reinforcing strip shall be secured to the
Axed part of the glass groove by rivets or screws, indepen-
dent of the screws fastening the removable molding. Rivets
or screws used to secure the reinforcing strip or the remov-
able molding shall be spaced at intervals not exceeding
twelve inches (12") and not more than two inches (2") from
each end.
Nails securing seams between molding strips and face
Plates shall be spaced at intervals not exceeding three inches
(3") in horizontal seams and four inches (4") in vertical
seams, with one nail near but not in each corner.
See. 33.818. In all cases, fixed parts of muntins shall be
firmly secured to glass moldings at ends and at intersections
with each other. Rivets, screws, welds, or clips may be
employed. Rivets, screws, etc., shall be spaced at intervals
not exceeding twelve inches (12").
When muntins are formed of sheet metal, the reinforcing
Plate Mall be one -eighth -inch (%") band iron which may be
either continuous for the full length of the muntin or maconsist y
of individual reinforcing strips not less than one -inch
5"
VOL. III -1858 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 43-3-58
(1") long for each screw securing the removable part of the
muntin.
See 43.320. Screw sizes shall be: three -sixteenths -inch Screws and
(3/16") (10-24) spaced ten inches (10") on centers; one. Rivets
eighth inch 0„") (either 6-32 or 8-32) spaced eight inches
(8") on centers. Rivets shall be not less than one-eighth inch
('A") in diameter.
Sec. 43.321. Individual lights in doors bearing the label Glass
reading "Rating: 3i Hr. (Ci" shall not exceed one thousand Sizes
two hundred and ninety-six square inches (1,236 sq. in.) in
exposed area or fifty-four inches (54") in either dimension.
Individual lights in doors bearing the label reading "Rat-
ing: 14 Hr. (E)" shall not exceed seven hundred and twenty
square inches (720 sq. in.) in exposed area, fifty-four inches
(54") in height, or forty-eight inches 448"1 in width.
Total area of exposed glass lights in doors bearing the
label reading: "Rating: 11z Hr. (B), Temp. Rise -30 Min. --
250° F. Max." shall not exceed one hundred square inches 1100
sq. in.), neither length nor width to exceed twelve inches
(12") when one light is employed per opening. When two
lights are employed per opening, the combined area of the
exposed glass light shall not exceed one hundred square
inches (100 sq, in.), neither length nor width to exceed twelve
inches (12").
See. 43.322. When doors are made in sections to he assem- Splicing of
bled as a single unit in the field, each section shall he con- Sectional-
structed in accordance with the requirements for a completed Assembly
door. Doom
The sections (not more than two) shall be joined together
vertically by attaching to each face of the completed door a
strip of not less than No. 16 gauge galvanized sheet steel, not
less than six inches (6") in width and of a length correspond-
ing to the height of the door. The splice plates shall be at-
tached to each section of the door by not less than one-
fourth inch (?b") through bolts spaced on not more than
twelve -inch (12") centers not to exceed three inches (3")
from the top and bottom edges of the door. Through bolts
shall extend through both splice plates and the door body and
shall thread into nuts.
Sections over ten feet (10') in height (not more than two)
may be joined together vertically by attaching to each face
of the completed door not more than two strips of at least
No. 10 gauge sheet steel, painted on both sides or galvanized,
not less than six inches (6") in width and of a length cor-
responding to the height of the door. The meeting edges of
such splice plates on one side of the door section shall be at
least two feet IT) higher or lower than those on the opposite
side.
On three-ply doors, two-inch by two-inch by three -six-
teenths -inch (2" x 2" x 3/16") angles or two -and -one-half
inches by five-eighths inch by three -sixteenths inch (21z" x
%" x 3/16") channels shall be attached horizontally across the
width of the door not to exceed eighteen inches (18") from
the bottom edge and the lowest corner of the top edge by not
less than three-eighths inch (%") through bolts spaced on
531
VAr- STANDARD 04-n
111NIEY)BA[ BUiiDLNO CODE
notmore then, eighteen -inch
alit inches (6" h ( � and not more than
two Ply doors, two-inch edge of one andassembled door. On
teeetths-inch (2" x 1%" x 3116") angles bor one -and
x inch b3 8ve-eighths-inch by three -sixteenths inch
channels shall be attached in a like
Plates And shipped channet iron reinforcements and both splice
shall to them before shipment Both sectbut �oneoofthaSecured door
tachmentbed at the factory to receive through bolts for at.
f entL Splice plates and angle and channel iron rein -
MARKING
SoC. 8. Each door shall be marked either with the
name Of the manufacturer or with some identifying symbol
agreed upon with the Laboratories.
If a manufacturer produces doors at more than one fac-
tory, each door shall have a distinctive marking, which may
be In code, by which it may be identified as the product of a
Particular factory.
When the marking is stamped in one of the face plates, the
Of the letters shall he rounded and the letters spaced as
far apart as practicable to avoid injury to the plates. When
tbe marking is in the form of an attached metal name plate,
the name plate shall be securely riveted to one of the face
UNIFORM BUEW'NGr CODE STANDARD 434-58
Of ���� nd Partilolet
Based on Pamphlet 80 (1941) of the
National Board of Fire Underwriters
$es Seegon 4306. Uniform Building Code. Volume I
GLASS A—Pestoetton of OPmiags in Division Walls
Bswe- SeP roti Buildings or Sections
of BnOdhip
1gwowd 1101RUM 110L Type. of Doors. The types of doors shown in Table I
when of Standard construction are considered suitable for
EsIn fira Walla at (Class A situations).
Rise L Thw Sias On Present in force are given in Table
tp the product of � manufacars cttu who hject to ags satisfactoe as rily
by tests that his particular construction will
give the required fire protection when made in large Sixes.
IUE. at Wali OPeuinp. (a) Wan shall be plumb
asid'trim and present smooth masonry surfaces without com-
buxtible trim at openings.
(b) Where swinging tin -clad or sheet metal fire doors shut
Into a brick or concrete rabbet in wan, rabbet shall be at
VOL. BI -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 43.4-58
TABLE I-45IZE LIMITATIONS FOR OPENINGS IN General
FIRE WALLS
(oaara�
iHAX1MUffi $ O1r OPENING
TOPE or DOOR NOT TO EXCEED:
Area 111'r
11' bt Widal
(sq. it.) ( if At (teeq
*Hollow Metal, swinging, in
Pat- .. » ..._._..._....----------
».
10
8
*Hollow Metal, Swinging,
Single ....»__..»..». .._......
»
10
4
Sheet Metal, Sliding, -Ingle_
120
12
12
Sheet Metal, Sliding, in
» »»» » »
Im
12
12
Sheet Metal,
hal. Swinging,
In pairs ........ _...................
......
12
10
Sheet Metal, Swinging,
single ............»..»..»..»...»...
12
6
Steel, Rolling and Lift -Up
..... ........._....
Tin » 2-Piy,
120
12
12
S)tding..»....
Tt'i"Cpplad, 3 -Fly, Swinging,
120
12
12
aim
Tin Qac $-Ply, swinging.
_..
12
10
single ...._»....».. »....._._.».
»..
12
6
-When 117 4 hrued and labeled for vse to Claes A
iioriaontat and verUW slidin- doors and e�h B.A.doors " are mounted on the face of the wall, shall ovarlsp •td
to of opening at least four inches.
roar
em t' cAonaWe ah a �oke1A.itewn atte k tht. shouldD1ehemSMnNdeiad is
selecdng coofe for hoapuale, stair tower, etc.
least three by four inches (3"x4"), and have true Sides
and angles so that door will close snugly.
1109. Slits. (a) In buildings with non-twlnbnseble floors
no special sill construction is necessary if the floor struc-
ture is extended through the opening.
(b) Sills shall he made of non-combustible Material ex-
tending six inches (6") Past the edge of the opening on each
Side and at least tour inches (4") out from the face of the
wail.
(c) Concrete for sills shall be of a good grade and shall be
at least four inches (411) in thickness where used in con-
struction not provided with a steel tread; where a steel tread
is used concrete to be not less than three and one-half inches
(3%") in thickness. Steel treads if used shall be adequately
secured. Z -bars or angles to extend six inches (6") past the
opening on each side and to be securely fastened together
through the watt.
1107. Lintels. Brick or concrete arches are preferable, but
lintels made of steel, cast iron or reinforced concrete may be
used. Stone or tin -clad wooden lintels are not approved.
538
U.B.C. STANDARD 434,58 UNIFORM BUILDIN(i roar:
General The Constructions ad below are acceptable and are
given as a guide when preparing openings in old walls and
( D the construction is not under the supervision of a com-
Patent architect. or engineer.
(a)Standardsteel sections securely riveted or bolted to.
ther. protected crete yat least fe lashes (alecmor brick fushwith the of
vl on ah aideand
Providedwith a full header course of brick or concrete
Just above the steel work- Spaces between sections shall be
filled Bond with brickwork, concrete or grout.
Note: The gra doors on each side of the wall afford suffi-
seotio cient Protection to the lower exposed portions of heavy steel
masonry.dded in
(b) Cast iron tee sections
inot less than one inch (1") in
the this protected by not leas than four inches (4")
of sono brickwork flush with the face of the wall on each
sic
(c) Bond reinforced concrete the fun thickness of the
wan. Reinfordhg members to be protected by at least one
d one-half inches (I%-) of concrete on exposed faces.
1108(A). Wan Frames --Angle Type, Steel wall frames
are of particular value where swinging tin -clad doors are
mounted Bush with the face of the wall, and for mounting
Steel Bre doors. They provide for a tight -fitting door, serve
to protect the brickwork from Injury, furnish a secure fasten-
ing for the hardware, and are neat in appearance.
thor-
ough
installation of frames of any type demands a rporation with the masonry of the wall. Voids be-
tween the sin and masonry detract from the efficiency of the
devices as a fire stop and permit distortion of the frame
structure from the weight of the door.
Frames should be carefully plumbed, leveled and braced
against distortion before masonry backing is applied.
Where used they should be either standard listed frames
beW-ng inspection manifest or else constructed and In.Stalled accordance with the followinR rules:
(a) Frames for tin -clad or sheet metal doors shall be
8 de o "three-inch by three-inch by one-quarter inch
at aides and top onn steel ea h sideles met iofthebbets Wall. iAngles hill be
securely fastened together at upper corners, shall extend
into the an at least three inches (3") and be fastened
in Position by one and one-quarter inch by one-quarter Inch
(11Q"x',t") bars spaced not exceeding twenty-four inches
(24") apart and provided with three-quarter inch by three-
quarter inch (%'•x3, —) stops attached by three-eighths inch
(°)b") rivets, spaced not exceeding twelve inches (12") apart.
Bars Should be fastened to angles by two three-eighths inch
W) countersunk rivets or bolts at each end. Catches for
the latches and hinge pins or pin blocks shall be of malleable
Iron or heavy steel properly secured to the frame by at
least two three-eighths inch (%") rivets. Catches shall have
one and one-half inch (1?s") face width.
Note: Where the frames are mounted during the con-
atn°etion of the wall tile connecting bars should be attached
534
VOL. III -1058 EDITION IT.B.C. STANDARD 43-4-38
to the legs of the angles to which the catches and pin blocks General
are attached
(b) Wali frame used to protect the masonry from injury
shall be made of three and one-half by three and one-half
by one-quarter inch (3%"x3}§"xi4") or three and one-half
by three and one-half by one-half inch (3%'x3% x%')
steel angles at skies and top of the opening on each side of
the wan.
Frames shall be held in position as described in Rule (a)
or provided with plate finers on the face of the jambs se-
curely riveted to the angles on each side of the wall.
Note: Angles extending only part way up on the sides of
the wan opening prevent the fire doom from forming a tight
closure at the upper portion of the wall opening and are not
approved.
Standard frames are designed to extend three inches (3")
into the floor structure if jambs are tied together at bottom
by metal tie strips. They are designed to extend three inches
(3") into floor structure or are provided with angle for
fastening to floor structure when angles are not fastened to-
gether at the bottom.
1108(8). Walt Frames,--Chaund Type. Structural steel
channel frames may be used for mounting Swinging fire
doors Frames may be shipped assembled or knocked down
when attachments for securing frames in position are pro-
vided.
Standard structural steel channel frames are designed
for mounting Swinging fire doors not exceeding ten feet
(101) in width and twelve feet (17) in height.
Note: The inspection manifest on standard steel channel
frames certifies to the construction of the frame and covers,
jambs, heads, anchors for holding the frames in walls and
door stops, but does not cover the other hardware which may
be attached, or provision made for its. attachment, before
shipment.
1212. Mounting Tlu-clad Doors. The doors should be com- Rule I=:
pletely tinned before the hardware is attached and only TIu-GLd
such hardware as has been found satisfactory after ex- Mrs Dom
amination and test should be used. Inspection manifest sp-
pnes to door only. Hardware is covered by separate mani-
fest.
ilio. Snding Tin -clad Doors 122L Size and Shape of
Doors. Doors shall be designed for openings not exceeding
one hundred twenty square feet (120 sq. ft.). Doors shall
overlap sides and top of wall opening four inches (4").
Where steel lintels are used, doors shall overlap the masonry
four inches (41) above upper edge of steel unless such lintels
are fireproofed in a manner satisfactory to the inspection
department having jurisdiction Top of door shall conform
to incline of track, three-quarters inch (%-) to one foot
(11), when intended to close by gravity. The top of the door
shall be horizontal when pulled to the closed position by
weights.
Note: Where the binders are set back on account of pos-
535
UNIFORM BUHMINO CODE
92-90018 tba#door be corTsapentingIM�
lthe lap on
(see raft 1944(*).)
'M WOOOMW MOW»lams. (a) Mounting
Int Trask. Length of track shall be equal tT o twice
the the wall opening, Plus twenty-one inches (211).
wv The length of the track is given In terms of the
twelve inches r) being allowed for the lap
And of O the door, eight inches (8") for attaching fronand backt
dDery Pers, ami inch (1') for clearance when the
open.
dirWail belts Mall be !o spaced that one bolt will be located
ch"te each hanger the trate back bumpers when the door is cued, and
the track in Position should be notlleess than three.
through the q Wall.
In diameter and should be in
have an
to Track 21MM ore foot W) When mounted. if doOf or is intendeduarteft hto roll
by gravity to the closed position.
1401e1 Nevar attach trach to wood frame even if frame is
tla'e1ad, and never u= wood or lead plugs in the wall to
support wall bolts. (See (1).)
2MosadhWBouad Track. When round track Is used,
the number of brackets Provided should be such that
one bracket In located directly under ekch hanger when
the door is closed: one at each end, and at points between
brackets net exceeding twenty-four inches (24") apart.
ORB Securing (� quarter= inch
M") Position
diameter and should uld not be sbetlin
stalled through the wall.
M Shull � Provided or O ening$ six feet (81 and less in
width in exec= of six feet (e') Shall hawo veadditionalhangerns openings
Table IL)
(c) Binders. At least two binders are required, the upper
binder to be Placed about twenty-four inches (24") from
the top of the door, and the lower binder about eighteen
(18") above the sill. Bolts for fattening the binders
to extend through the wall and Should be not less than three-
guarte= arch (!i") diameter.
Moto: Where there in danger of injury to those posing
throughinchm { Opening, bac� wthe aders edge
uld be met of the door about two
AM the door made correspondingly wider. (See Rule 1221.)
Cars Xbould be taken not to make -the bolt holes unnec es.
sarily large. In Some casco it may be necessary to net the
binders In cement when they are belted to the wall.
(d) Attaching
Roll. Starshould
met in flush
with the Surface f wall and sill Set the partsewith cement,
K necessary. and bolt firmly to well. When the door is closed
adjust the roller against the Wedge At the end of the
536 k IL
VOL. HI -1958 EDITION U.BC. STANDARD 43-4-58
ch�tp so that the door will be held close to, but Tin -Glad
g Y against the wail, Flre Doors
Note: The masonry should be chipped out, and the stay roil (Contd.)
fitted to the wall before the door is in position. It can then
be more easily installed after the door is hung. The stay rolls
are bolted to the steel work of the sill, and are recommended
for new work.
(a) Attaching Chafing Strips. Half oval chafing Stripa are
required an the hack of door, with flat companion strips on
the front of the door. Also a flat strip on the front of the
door near the bottom.
Two half -oval chafing strips are required on doors not
exceeding eight feet (81) in height. In doors exceeding that
dimension three are required. The half -oval strips shall be
placed ane -third the distance from the top of the door and
about twenty-four inches (24") from the bottom. When three
strips are used the middle strip shall be placed midway
between the other two. The lengths of strips shall be four
inches (4") less than the door opening. Strips shall be
parallel with the door track and bolted through the door to
flat strips on the front of the door.
Strip on the front of the door shall be parallel with the
door track and so placed as to take the wear of the stay
roil. Strip shall be five inches (5") less than the width of the
door and fastened to the door by wood screws.
(f) Attaching Wedge. Shell be placed back of the stay
roll when the door is closed and be fastened to the door by
wood screws.
(g) Attaching Bumper Shoes. Four are necessary, one
opposite each bumper and one opposite each binder; fastened
to the faces and edges of the door by wood screws.
Note: The front and back bumpers are mounted with the
track. (See Rule (a).)
(h) Attaching Handles. Flush pull on the back of the door
shall be countersunk flush with the surface of the door.
Heavy bowshaped handles shall be bolted together through
the door or otherwise securely attached.
(i) Bolts and Washers. Bolts for track, binders and stay
roll shall extend through the wall, and be provided with
standard washers on opposite side of wail.
Note: Where the above members are bolted together
through the wall, washers are unnecessary.
Stay roll shall be securely fastened to steel work of sill
(j) Assembling of Sectional Door Units. It may be some-
times necessary to ship large tin -clad .doors in sections.
Sectional doors are provided with cover plates for the joint
between the sections and reinforcing angles or channels
running horizontally across the door. When shipped both
cover plates are attached to one section of the door, being
bolted together through the door. The edge of the adjacent
section should be inserted in the groove formed by these
cover plates and secured in a like manner by through bolts.
Reinforcing angles or channels to be secured by through
bolts or lag screws.
.5.47
t�. ,- STAN i)NIFORM BITILDING CODE
Ftlebens
(k) of Doers The door should hang and operate
() the Wall is unusually rough and uneven it may be
to it oEao as to remove an obstructions
,
on
f the tin b
The it1 (h, o cf thin Plates (% i ch)gbetweenthe
Wall and the *Peuft brackets on the portion of the track at the side of
Will sometimes remedy the defects due to slight
unevenness in the Wali.
The holes for the track bolts should be drilled with suffi-
cientaccuracyso that the door will not
on the ei11. If the door dig >m8' and chafe
Should be installed under the track boltsoSubstantial as o raise the
dorlet0 (tlY o prevent chafing, Short length of three-
quarters d%") gas pipe around the track bolts will often
remedy this (1) Matted Framework. When necessary a framework of
Pipe or slats with not more than two inches (2") between
be built outside of sliding doors to prevent piling
Of sock, etc., against the doors, and the possibility of the
doors being held by Panicky crowds in cases of emergency.
(m) Fretectlon of Covering. When the front edge of door
is liable to injury from trucks, etc., a continuous U-shaped
strip made of not lees than No. 14 U. S. gauge steel, and ex-
t high enough to prevent injury should be installed.
Stripa should lap the sides of the door four inches (4")
atnd should be securely fastened. The above strip will render
the k)wer bumper shoe unnecessary.
1 Tw3bRad Track. The automatic closing mechanism for
sliding doors mounted on an inclined track generally con-
sists of the attachment of a counterbalance weight sus-
pended over a pulley so that the door will remain stationary
in any position Of its travel. At time of fire the action of a
heat actuated device or the melting of a fusible link dis-
engages the counterbalance and the door roils shut of its
own weight. The heat actuated devices or fusible links
should be located at the top of opening and at the ceiling,
preferably on both sides of the wall, so interconnected that
the operation of the device on either side of the wall will
operate the door. The actuating device of the quick closing
mechanism may be located on one side only and near the
ceiling. When doors are installed on both sides of the open-
ing they should preferably be so interconnected that the
operation of the device on either side will close both doors.
2. Horizontal Track. When sliding doors are mounted on
a horizontal track the arrangement is similar to the ar-
rangement
for the inclined track except that weights must
be provided to pull the door shut after the heat actuated
device has disengaged the counterbalance. The weight used
to close the door shall be enclosed in a suitable boxing for
the entire length of its travel.
Nate. For other suitable methods of automatic operation
consult the inspection bureau having jurisdiction.
IZW Swh3gft Tin -clad Doors. 1261. Size and Shape of
boom Swinging doors mounted singly shall not exceed size
asitabile for wall openings six feet (6') in width or twelve
536
VOL. I11-1958 EDITION P.B.C. STANDARD 43-4-58
feet (12') in height, shall shut into rabbets in wall, into Tin -Clad
approved wall frame, or, when acceptable to inspection de- Fire Doors
partments having jurisdiction, doors may overlap top and (Cont'd.)
sides of wall opening as required for sliding doors. (See
Rules 1104, 1108.)
Single swinging doors in pairs shall not exceed sizes
suitable for wall openings ten feet (10') in width and
twelve feet (12') in height, shall shut into rabbets in wall,
into approved wall frame, or, when acceptable to inspec-
tion department having jurisdiction doors may overlap top
and sides of wall opening as required for sliding doors.
(See Rules 1104, 1108.)
1232. Mounting Single Swinging Doors. (a) Attachment
of Hinge Wail Strips and Catch Wall Strips. Shall be bolted
together through the wall when each side of the wall is
provided with a swinging tin -clad door, otherwise bolts pass
through the wall and thread into nuts on the opposite side of
TABLE IH—NUMBER OF HINGES AND LATCHES
FOR DIFFERENT SIZE. DOORS
Width of Door
lncl.�
-2'0
(incl.)
2'0'-
310'
(met.)
3'0"-
410'
{Incl.)
5'0'
(Incl.)
5101-
610"
Height of
No. of
No. of
No, df
No. of
No. of
No. of
Door
Latches
Hinges
hinges
Hinges
Hinges
Hinges
0' to Wit'
2
2
2
2
2
2
5'0" to 6'6'
2
2
2
2
3
3
64" to 8'6"
3
2
2
3
3
4
8'6" to 10'6"
4
3
3
3
4
4
10'6" to 12'0"
5
4
4
4
4
4
TABLE IV—LENGTH OF HINGES AND LATCHES
FOR DIFFERENT WIDTHS OF DOORS
Width of Door
-Length
of HSngea
(inches)
No. of Holes
in Hinge
Length of
Latches
(inches)
1'6" to 1'9" (incl.)..........
16
2
1'9" to 2'0".__
19
2
2'0" to 2'4. ......................
22
3
2'4" to 218"__
25
3
2'8" to 3'0"...- ... _........ ....
28
3
3'0" to 3'4" ......................
31
3
3'4" to 3'8 .......................
34
4
Not less
3B" to 4'0"......._ .......... ...
37
4
than
4'0" to 4'4"......._ .............
40
4
14%
4'4" to 4'8" ......................
43
4
4'8" to 5'0" ......................
46
5
5'0" to 54"..-
49
5
5'4" to 5'8'% ..........
52
5
5'8" to 6'0 ...... .............
55
I 5
"The intermediate hinge straps (when three or more are used)
may be not to exceed eight inches shorter than is indicated.
589
U. STAN 43.438 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Nuts &all be provided with standard wasbera,
( ) beis an Provided, approved frame hinges my(,) to the frames. Not I—
thantauartm inch
bolts shall be used for
bolts for thr—
tim; An deli atrid not a than one-half n(y-) y
Pa
(b) Number and Length of Binges and Latches for Tin.
Glad Dears, Number of hinges and latches shall
comply with Tables Ill
Which 18(c) of mages Hinges are united to pintle
o riveted to wall straps; wall straps shall be se.
a to the wan by one bolt for each hinge phitie. Upper
(8») mors than all be spaced not less than eight eehheess
Of the door. rteen laches (14") from the top and
be(Spaced d) A of Latchm Upper and lower latches Shan
fourt— inches not is= than eight Inches (S") nor more than
(1from and bottom of
Latches
shall be Operated f�t ther side of the door so as
not to
Ing through he�doorr. Latches snail be fastened by colt-
Note
The bar
the latches
ao that:it win not lift the hatches b exp should headjustedheated.
at.
by when heated,
freely on Operation of Door. The door Should Swing easily and
their pivots �griide7UP the inclines oonlatches Should otthhescatcheryaon
nd
PIntoPosition when the door I. slammed but or closed
moderate force.
(f) Automatic Door. Swinging doors are satisfactorily
arranged to close automatically at time of fire by the
attachment of a cable or chain so arranged over pulleys
that the operation of a heat actuated device or the melting
Of a fusible link drops a weight which being connected to
the fir, palls it shut. The weight used to close the doors
shall be enclosed in a Suitable boxing for the entire length
Of Its travel.
The fusible links or heat actuated devices should prefer.
shly be located at the top of the opening and at the cen-
mg: Preferably on both aides of the wan so inter-comrected
that the operation of the device on either side of the wall
will operate the doors The actuating device of the quick
closing mechanism may be located on one side only and
near the ceiling.
SwingingAutomatic
mcairs shall be afa arranged thestanding must close and latch before theSwinging
door. This requires the use of an automatic stop
or trigger which will hold the swinging door in the open
Position until standing door bas closed.
Note: For other suitable methods of automatic operation,
consult the Inspection bureau having jurisdiction.
123& Mounting Swinging Doors in Pairs. The rules for
mounting single doors apply to doors in pairs with the
fOHOWIng additions:
VOL. III -1968 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 43-438
(a) Door Botta The standing door of the pair shall be
Provided with Is steel or malleable iron spring -operated bolt Mrs Dom
at the top and bottom. Both bolts shall enter substantial (Congd,)
strike platen or catches securely fastened into lintel and
Bill.
Note: The door bolts should be located far enough from
the edge of the door to clear the astragal.
(b) Catches should be bolted to door using through bolts
and plates on back of door.
(c) Astragal. An astragal shall be provided for one door
of each pair of swinging doors mounted in pairs. The astragal
shall be a sleet strap not less than three -sixteenths inch (*-)
thick and three inches (3") wide and shall extend the full
height of the door. The astragal shall be fastened to the door
r less
than
sp etcarriage
ostove bolts, ed one-quarter itervals not exceeding twelve inches
(12").
Top bolts shall be not over live inches (6") from the end
Of the astragal and bottom bolts not over three inches (a").
Bolts shall pass through the astragal and be secured by
nuts on the opposite side of the door.
When attached in place, the astragal shall extend at least
one inch (1") beyond the vertical edge of the door tp which
it is attached,
(d) Doors shall be provided with an approved interference
device to prevent the wrong door from closing first. This
device shall be securely bolted to the wail.
Note: This is important for if device becomes loose it may
prevent doors closing.
1240. Verticil Sliding Ttn-clad Doors, 1241. Size and Shape
of Doors. Doors shall be designed for openings not exceed-
ing one hundred twenty square feet (120 sq. ft.) in area or
twelve feet (12') in either dimension. Doors shall overlap
sides and top of wall opening four inches (4"). When steel
lintels are used, doors shall overlap masonry four inches
(4") above upper edge of steel, unless such lintels are fire-
proofed in a manner satisfactory to the inspection depart-
ment having jurisdiction.
1242. Mounting Vertical Door. (a) Guides shall be bolted
through wan with washers on back of wall. Proper precau-
tion shall be taken to care for expansion during Are con-
ditions.
(b) Palley, and Counterweights. Doors of more than four
feet (4') in vertical dimensions and doors at openings
through which persons will pass, shall be provided with two
counterweights and a counterbalance.
Doors less than four feet (4') in vertical dimension and
doors at openings through which there can be no passage
of persons — such as ducts, conveyors, etc. — may be pro.
vided with a single counterweight and a counterbalance in-
stead of double counterweights and a counterbalance.
540 1 "I
U.10'. STANDARD 43-4-58 UNIFORM RVILDINt; CODE
The total weight of the counterweights should be suffi-
cient to prevent the door from dropping suddenly, but not
sufficient to prevent It from closing in a positive manner
when the auxiliary counterbalance used in connection with
the automatic device is released. The two permanent coun-
terweights shall be of equal weight so that there will be
no tendency of the door to cock or bind in the guides.
Itale 1384* 1301. Plate steel fire doors when made of not less than
12 gauge plate and properly reinforced with angles ars sub-
l"stantial in construction and practicable under some con-
ditions. They are somewhat difficult to install, Doors on both
sides of the wall furnish a high degree of resistance to fire,
a sufficiently high resistance to the transmission of hest
for many situations and resist fire streams well. They are
non-combustible, durable if protected against corrosion and
easy to inspect and maintain. As they are normally mounted
on both sides of the wall and are equipped with heavy hard-
ware, they are somewhat difficult to operate and there-
fore objectionable as enclosures for emergency exits,
few ey are not at present available with inspection mani-
1311. Setting Wall Frames. Plate steel fire doors shall
be mounted on steel will frames, which should be set per-
fectly level and plumb and concreted or bricked into well. If
the frame is installed in an old wall, the opening should be
cut larger than the frame and the masonry built up to the
frame and well bonded to the wall, using cement mortar and
thoroughly pointing up around the frame. (See Rule 1108
for the construction of wail frame.)
1820. Sliding Plate Steel Doone. 1821. Size of Door. Doors
shall be designed for openings not exceeding eighty square
feet (80 sq. ft.) in area or twelve feet (121) in either dimen-
sion. Doors in excess of four feet IV) in width shall over -
We sides of wall frame at least two inches (2") and at
one inch (1") at top. Angle at bottom of sliding door
shall extend at least one inch (1") into groove at mill. The
angle at bottom of. door and groove in sill may be omitted
for doors four feet (4') and less in width.
1322. Top and Bottom Channels. (a) Doors shall operate
in channels or grooves at top and bottom. The groove at bot-
tom may be omitted for doors four feet (4') and less in width.
Length of upper channel shall be equal to twice the width
of the opening in the wall frame plus eight inches (8").
Upper ehanna] shall be provided with a one-half by one -
inch {}s"x}x") steel strip to serve as a track for the
wheels of the door hangers. Lower channel or groove, where
used, shall extend beyond the wall frame at least twelve
inches (12") on the side toward which the door opens.
(b) Upper and lower channels shall be attached to wall
fra$ne b three-eighths inch (%") rivets or bolts spaced not
exceeding twelve inches (12").
84?
is k
VOL. III -1988 EDITION U.S.C. STANDARD 434-58
Upper channels shall be attached to well by three-quarter Plate Steel
Inch (%') through bolts spaced not exceeding fourteen Fire Doors
Inches (141). (Cont'd.)
1323. Mounting Sliding Doors. (a) Door should slide freely
and should be forced close to the wall frame by the binders
when closed and latched.
Note: Plate steel doors should be practically completed be-
fore they leave the shop. The binders and catches should be
attached to the wail frame and holes provided for the attach-
ment of the channels at the top and bottom of the frame.
The hangers and latch should be attached to the door.
(b) When necessary a framework of pipe or slats should
be built outside of sliding doors to prevent piling of stock,
etc., against them,
1820 Automatic Sliding Doors. Automatic door closing de-
vice to be installed as described for tin -clad doors
1930. Swinging Plate Steel Doors. 1331. Size of Doors.
(a) Single swinging doors shall not exceed sizes suitable for
openings four feet (4') in width or ten feet (10') in height.
Door plates shall overlap the sides and top of wall frame
at least one inch (1").
(b) Single swinging doors in pairs shall not exceed sizes
suitable for openings eight feet (8') in width or ten feet
(10') in height. Door plates shall overlap the sides and top
of wall frame at least one inch (1") and the swinging door
shall overlap the standing door at least one inch (1") where
they come together.
1332. Mounting Single Swinging Doors. Doors should turn
easily and freely on the hinges. The latches should operate
freely and ride up the inclines on the catches and snap into
position when the door is slammed shut or closed with mod-
erate force.
Note: Plate steel doors are provided with at least three
hinges and at least three latches working together. The doors
and frames are completed and the hardware attached at the
factory.
1333. Mounting Swinging Doors In Pairs. The rules for
mounting single doors apply to doors in pairs. Standing door
of the pair shall be provided with spring bolts at top and
bottom which enter substantial strike plates or catches at
head and sill.
Note: The wall frames and doors, including the attach-
ment of the hardware and astragal, are completed before
they leave the factory.
1334. Automatic Swinging Doors. Automatic door closing
devices shall be metalled as described for tin -clad doors. ( See
Rule 1232 (f).)
1401. Standard sheet metal fire doors are fairly substantial Rule 1400:
in construction, practical under most conditions and easy Sheet Metal
to install. Doors on both sides of wall furnish a high degree F1re Doors
of resistance to fire. and a sufficiently high resistance to
the transmission of heat for many situations. They resist fire
843
t',B('.'STAlDARD 43-4-58 UNEMRM BUILDING CODE
Shoet Metal streams well, are non-combustible, durable and easy to main.
Fin Dean tain. As they are normally mounted on both sides of the
( A) wall and are are Borne.
what difficult equipped orate land therefore objectionable as clog.
ores for emergency exits.
Ins tion manifest applies to doors only.
1410 Shoot Metal Doors. 141L Size and Shape of
Boom Doors shall be designed for openings not exceeding
one hundred twenty square feet (120 s% ft.) in area or twelve
feet (12') in either dimension. Doors shall overlap sides and
top of wall openings four inches (4"). Where Steel lintels
are used, doors shall overlap the masonry four inches (4")
above upper edge of steel unless such lintels, are fireproofed
in a manner satisfactory to the inspection department having
jurisdiction. "Top of door shall conform to incline of track
three-quarters inch (F.") to one foot (1').
141L Mounting Sliding Doors. (a) The rules for mounting
sliding tin -clad doors should be followed except as specified
in the following rules:
Note: Parts of the hardware for mounting sheet metal
doors are especially designed, and members such as chafing
strips, bumper shoes, handles and necessary reinforcements
may be installed before the doors leave the shop.
(b) Mounting Track. The space between the top of the
door and the track shall be at least three-quarters inch
(%') to allow for the upward expansion of the door when
heated.
Note: Sheet metal doors are provided with track binders
or lugs which engage the track and hold the door in position
in case the hanger wheels are lifted from the track by expan.
sion.
(c) Attaching Dangers. Hangers shall be bolted to door
when in position
Note: Sheet metal doors may be provided with bolt holes
and any necessary reinforcements for the attachment of
the hangers before they leave the shop.
(d) Attaehft Binders. Track binders shall lap the track
at least one-half inch (W), and be located two inches (2")
to one side of the center line of the wall bolts when the door
U
Note: The track binders are located to one side of the
track bolts m that they will clear the track brackets when
the door expands upward.
Doors not exceeding eight feet (8') in height shall be
Provided with two front binders an specified for tin -clad
doors. Doors ex•:ceding eight feet (8') in height shall be
threeProvided with
located midwaybetween the t p and bottombinders. Slid-
ing doors Bra also to be provided with one rear binder for
openings up to ten feet (30') In height and two binders for
airs exceeding ten feet (10') in height, in addition to the
j front binders ani stay roll as Specified for tin -clad doors.
i
Such rear binders shall be equally distributed between top
and bottom of door and attached by through bolts, as speci-
fied for front binders.
544
VOL. 131-1853 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 43-1-58
1420. Swinging Sheet Metal Doors 1421. Size and Shape Sheet New
of Doors. (a) Single swinging sheet metal doors shall not FU'D'M
exceed sizes suitable for wall openings six feet (81) in width (OMVI .)
or twelve feet (121 in height; shall shut into rabbets in
walls, into approved wall frames or when acceptable to in-
spection departments having jurisdiction, doors may overlap
as required for sliding doors.
(b) Single swinging doors in pairs shall not exceed sizes
suitable for wall openings twelve feet (12') in either dimen-
sion or one hundred twenty square feet (120 sq. ft.) in area;
shall abut into rabbets in walls, into approved wall frames or
when acceptable to inspection departments having juris-
diction, doors may overlap top and aides of wall openings
as required for sliding doors.
1422. Mounting Slagle Swinging Doors. (a) Rules for
mounting swinging tin -clad doors apply to sheet metal doors
except that the number and length of hinges and latches
may vary with the product of different manufacturers, as
swinging fire door hardware for doors of this type is de-
signed for each manufacturer's particular pattern of doors.
(See Rules 1282 and 1233.)
(b) Astragal. An astragal Shall be provided for one door
of each pair of swinging doors mounted in pairs. Construc-
tion of title astragal may vary, as each manufacturer has
tested doors of his own design In all cases astragal shall
extend the full neight of the door and when in place, shall
extend at least one inch (1") beyond the vertical edge of
the door to which it is attached.
1501. Standard rolling steel fire doors are substantial in Rale lbw:
construction and practical under most conditions, but are Rolling Steel
somewhat difficult to install. Doors on both sides of the wall Fire Doors
furnish a high degree of resistance to fire for long periods
and a sufficiently high resistance to the transmission of heat
for many situations. They resist fire streams well, are in-
combustible, durable if protected against corrosion and
fairly easy to maintain. They are capable of being installed
in locations where space limitations prevent the installa-
tion of other types of doors. Some types of rolling doors are
difficult to operate after they have closed automatically.
Doors of this type should be used only for openings not
intended for emergency exits. The type and use of these
TABLE V—NUMBERS OF LATCHES AND HINGES FOR
SHEET METAL DOORS
Height of Door
No, of latches
I No. of Hinges
0' to 51"
2
2
5'4" to 813"
3
3
$14" to 10'3"
4
F
4
10'4" to 12'3"
5
4
12'4" to 14'4"
5
5
Note: For heights in fractional inches, we next higher full inch.
545
U.B.C. STANUARII 434-Sag UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Xd"CSial doors in any given case should be considered in its rela.
tion to the effect upon hazard to life,
( ) Inspection manifest applies to door, hardware and guides.
ML ftd of Doors. (a) Doors subject to damage from
fading materials at time of fire shall be mounted in reveal
of wall 50 that no portion projects beyond the face of the
wall.
=Note. The brackets and hood of roiling steel doors
mounted on the face of the wall project materially from he
wall and are especially subject to damage by failing mate-
rial at time of fire.
(b) Doors not subject to damage from falling materials at
time of fire may be mounted on the face of the wall, Inspec-
tion department having jurisdiction should be consulted
before installation.
Note. Doors mounted on the face of fire wails should
usually be confined to fireproof buildings where there is
little if any danger of the collapse of the building and injury
to the door from falling materials.
1512. Size and Shape of Doors, Doors shall be designed
foropenings not exceeding eighty square feet (80 sq.dt.)
in area or twelve feet (121) in either dimension. Curtain shall
enMe must fitgctloselydes reagaiinnst thto e lintels,or wes of the hereopening.
he door
mounted on the face of the wall the hood shall be placed
above the top of file opening so that bottom of the curtain
will be flush with or above the top of the opening when the
door Is fully open
1513. Mounting Rotting Doors. Roilingsteel doors are com-
plicated in construction and not easily installed by work -
men unfamiliar with them. Their installation should be under
the supervision of the manufacturer. Specifications and blue
prints should be furnished covering the details of installation.
Rotting steel doors mounted between jambs or in reveals
shall be provided with steel or iron plates above and below
the mechanism, and at ends, or with an enclosed metal box
on the outside of the bracket in order to prevent the loose
masonry from interfering with the normal operation of the
door )orGuidtes. SShau be plumb, with Proper clearance for ex-
tudon allowed shall
bee bolted together through thea wall using tween the guide andethree-sill.-eeighth Inch
(%') through bolts and special washers.
shall)be boltedw to thew ll by ackets not less thaon n twace of the wall
o one-half inch
(',s") through bolts to each bracket. Brackets mounted be-
tween jambs shall be secured at the steel lintel by not less
than two half-tach (%-) machine screws to each bracket.
Rule-166Hr 2601. Standard Class A hollow metal fire door are sub-
NOROWMeW stantial An construction, practical under most conditions,
Fft-Haas fairly easy to install and permit the use of concealed hard-
ware. Mounted on both sides of the wall they furnish a high
degree of resistance to Are and a fair degree of resistance
to the transmission of heat for long periods of exposure.
They resist fire streams well, are durable, easy to operate
t and easy to maintain. Except for the fact that they are nor-
,� �•..,.F.; 516
VOL. 111-1658 EDITION U.&C. STANDARD 43-4-58
mally mounted on both sides of the walla, they are unobjec. SoUowMetal
tionable as closures for emergency exits, plre Doors
Inspection manifest covers door and hardware. (Cont'd.)
1620. Swinging hollow Metal Doom. ML Size and Shape
of Doors. (a) Single swinging doors shall not exceed four
feet (4') in width or ten feet (10') in height. They shall shut
into rabbets formed by the stops on the wall frame and At
the opening closely.
(b) Single swinging doors in pairs shall not exceed eight
feet (8') in width or ten feet. (101) in height and shall shut
into rabbets formed by the stops on the wall frame, shall fit
the opening closely, and be provided with an astragal.
1622. Mounting Single Swinging Doors. (a) Shall be
mounted in standard wall frames properly installed in the
wail.
(b) Doors not exceeding four feet (4') in width or Ave feet
(5') in height shall be provided with at least two hinges.
Doors in excess of five feet (5') in height shall be provided
with one hinge for each two and one-half feet (2%1) of
height or fraction thereof.
(c) Shall be equipped with three-point locking mechanism.
The latch bolts shall engage catches in the jamb of the wall
frame at least five-eighths inch (%"),
1623. Mounting Swinging Doors in Palm. (a) Doors shall
be mounted in standard wall frame properly Installed in
wall.
(b) Each door shall be provided with hinges an specified
for single doors. (See Rule 1622 (b).)
(c) The active door of the pair shall be provided with an
approved three-point locking mechanism as specified for
single doors. The latch bolts shall engage catches in the
stile of the opposite door at least five-eighths inch (%,).
(d) The standing or normally stationary door shall be
provided with an approved two-point locking mechanism
engaging catches in the head and sill at least five-eighths
inch (%").
(e) Doors shall be equipped with an approved interfer.
ence device to prevent the wrong door from closing first.
162L Operation of Doom. Doors shall be mounted in such
a manner that they will swing easily and freely on their
hinges and close accurately against the stops on the wail
frame, fitting the opening snugly but without binding. The
latch bolts should operate easily and register properly with
the catches securely fastening the door when closed easily
or with considerable force.
Note: Doors installed in new buildings may require several
readjustments of the locking mechanism to insure proper
operation of locks and engagement of the latches, as slight
settlements in new buildings are practically unavoidable and
sometimes disarrange the proper registration of the latch
bolts.
Constant operation of the door causes the hinges to wear.
and this wear may in time be sufficient to cause the door
to bind in the frame. Hinges should, therefore, be examined
at fairly frequent intervals, and repaired or replaced when
necessary.
M
1 .B.(`. STANDARD 43-1-68 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
T LIMITAMKWS Folt 0PENIIVG8IN
TYPE of DOOR
_
XA
SIZE' OF Q ENINO
Ares list aht Width
(in (feet) (feet)
'Hollow Metal. Sliding_ .......
......
a
g
Hollow Meta), Swinging, in
pairs................... _............. .....
......
10
8
Hollow Metal, Swinging,
single................_......................
......
10
4
Metal Clad, Paneled, Swing-
ing, in pairs..................... -.-.....
......
8
8
Metal Clad, Paneled Swing-
ing, single ........... ....................
8
4
Sheet Metal, Sliding, single......
120
12
12
Sheet Metal, Sliding, in pairs....
120
12
12
Sheet Metal, Swinging, in
Pairs................ _................ ........
....
12
10
Sheet Metal, Swinging, single..
......
12
0
Steel, Counterbalanced....._ .......
......
10
8
Steel, Bolling and Lift -Up
Type .........................
120
12
12
Tin -Clad, 2 -Ply, Counter
balanced .............._....................
»....
10
8
Tin -Clad, 2 -Ply, Sliding,
single .................. ........ .......
Tin -Clad, 2 -Ply, Swinging,
80
10
10
in pairs .............._».._.._..........
Tin -Clad, 2 -Ply, Swtnging,
so
10
10
single...... ...............................
......
10
8
*When spedally designed and labeled for use in Class B openings.
CLASS B—Protection of Openings to Enclosures to Vertical
Conttnnntcationa Through Balldings.
Auk 2100: +lot, Types of Doors. Types of doors as shown In Table
General VI when of standard construction are considered suitable
for openings in vertical shafts (Cissa B situations) with size
limitations at present in effect as given in the tables
Note: Fire doors containing wood, cork or similar mate-
rials may emit considerable smoke when heated; this should
be considered when selecting doors for hospitals, stair -
etc.
2101 Magoay at Wan Openings. (s) Wall shall be plumb
bUstibie trim al openings.
and true. and present smooth masonry surfaces without exim-
(b) Where swinging tin -clad or sheet metal fire doors
shut into masonry rabbets, rabbets shall be at least two by
three inches (21x3"), and have true sides and angles so that
door will close snugly into same.
2100- Sins. (s) In buildings with non-combustible floors
no gPecind Bin construction is necessary
struc-
tureis extended through the openinnit the Boor
348
VOL III -1888 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 434-M
(b) Shall be Substantial freta) threshold plates, prefer- Genera(
ably with anti -slip surface and extending into the masonry Regulations
at each side of the opening or anchored to the masonry (Coad'd.)
beneath thein.
Note: Where the threshold plates specified above are used
in connection with metal frames, they may be attached to
such frames in lieu of projection into the masonry at the
sides of the openinga.
2107. Direction of Operation. (a) Doors at openings to
stairways shall be of the swinging type where practicable,
and open in the direction of exit travel in such manner
as not to obstruct the passage or the operation of the other
doors.
Note: Properly installed swinging doors are easier to
operate, especially under emergency conditions than any
other type and offer less resistance to rapid and emergency
egress.
(b) Horizontally sliding doors may be used at openings to
stairways where conditions prevent the use of swinging
doors. They shall open in such manner as not to obstruct
the passage or the operation of other doors.
Note: Horizontally sliding doors are more difficult to
Operate than swinging doors, especially at times of emer-
gency, but are less objectionable at exits then vertical -sliding
or rolling doors.
(c) Vertically sliding doors and rolling doors shall not
be used at openings to stairways or openings intended for
emergency exits.
Note: Doors of this type are usually difficult to operate,
and the method of operating them is not obvious or as well
understood as the methods of operating swinging or hori-
zontally sliding doors. They may be safely employed at open-
ings in enclosures to vertical shafts that are not used as
emergency exits.
210L Ltntols. Any of the lintels specified in Rule 1107
for Class A openings may be used in shaft openings.
2108. Wall Frames. (a) Any of the frames specified in
Rule 1108 for Class A openings may be used in shaft
openings.
(b) Frames shall be made of substantial structural steel
channels at the sides and top of the opening. Channels shall
be securely fastened together at the upper corners and
to the sill, or threshold plate where used: In case no sill is
used channels at sides of opening shall extend into or be
secured to the floor structure as specified for Class A. Jambs
shall be securely anchored to masonry at sides of opening.
Where swinging doors are used, head and jambs shall be
provided with metal door stops projecting at least five.
eighths inch (%') and securely fastened to the frame
members. These stops may be formed of special sheet metal
channels overlapping the structural steel channels.
Where channel iron frames do not overlap both sides of
648
1•'.Bd`. STANDARD 134-58 UNIFORM BUILDIN(i Com;
the wall, anchors shall extend back is such a manner as
Btgubdm to engage the masonry at the middle of the wall,
(~d.) (e) Standard channel iron or sheet metal frames furnished
complete by manufacturer and bearing inspection manifest.
2114L Measurement for Size of Fire Doom Openings in
wails shall be carefully measured before doors are built and
maximum dimensions used in determining overlap of doors.
Where wail frames are employed the size of the door is
determined by the opening in the frame.
Note: Openings in walls frequently vary from the sizes
gv- en on plans. It is important, therefore, that the opening
be measured before the doors are built. The size and shape
of the opening in wall frames are frequently altered by dis-
torta-n incidental to shipment and erection.
2111. Closing of Doors. Doors at openings to enclosures
to vertical communications through buildings shall be of
the normally closed or automatic types. Doors shall not be
provided with attachments that will prevent the operation
of the closing devices.
Note: Normally closed doors are doors arranged to close
by gravity, or doors equipped with an approved door check
or device to insure proper closing after the door has been
opened, Automatic doors are doors equipped to close by the
action of heat if left open.
2201. Standard Class B hollow metal fire doors in moder-
ate sizes are substantial in construction, practical under
most conditions, fairly easy to install, and permit the use
of concealed hardware. Mounted on one side of vertical
shaft walls, they furnish a high degree of resistance to fire
and a fairly high degree of resistance to the transmission of
heat for fairly long periods of exposure. They resist fire
streams well, are durable and easy to operate, and fairly
easy to maintain.
They are incombustible and suitable as closures for emer-
gency exits.
Rule 2200: 2202. Inspection manifest for swinging hollow metal doors
UWIGW Metal applies to door including reinforcements for hardware.
Fire Doors Frames provided with separate manifest.
Inspection manifest for sliding hollow metal doors applies
to door assembly and frame. A ,separate manifest is applied
to hangers and also to closers.
2210. Sliding Hollow Metal Doors. 2211. Size of Doors.
Sliding hollow metal door assembly shall be designed for
openings not exceeding eight feet (8') in width and eight feet
t8') in height, no one section of the assembly shall ex-
ceed four feet (C) in width and eight feet (8') in height.
2212. Mounting Sliding Hollow Metal Doors. (a) The
doors shall be installed in frames specially designed for each
type of door assembly.
(b) The jambs and head of the frame and door shall be
provided with binders and the door shall close into pockets
in the jamb.
(c) The door shall move in grooves in the sill.
5:N1
VOL, HI -1858 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 43444
(d) Each jamb and head of the frame shall be provided Hollow MaW
with anchors. Fire Doors
(e) Center parting doors shall interlock where they come (CoaVd.)
together at the center of the opening.
(f) Each door section shall be provided with two hangers.
(g) The door shall be closed and held in a closed position
by closers operated manually, by air, or by electricity.
(h) Chain operated center -parting doors to have center
lock either on the hanger or closing mechanism, in order to
hold the door section in position at the center in case of
failure of the chain, or of the chain slipping from position on
the sprockets.
2213. Operation of the Doors. The doors shall be mounted
so as to slide easily and freely on their hangers and close
accurately without binding in the frame.
Note: Normally closed doors are preferable where the na-
ture of the business is such that they are not likely to be
blocked open.
2220. Swinging Hollow Dfetal Doors. 222L Size of
Doors. (a) Swinging doors shall not exceed four feet (4')
in width or ten feet (101) in height, and shall shut into
rabbets formed by stops on the wall frame and fit the
opening closely.
(b) Single swinging doors in pairs shall not exceed eight
feet (8') in width or ten feet (1(Y) in height, and shall shut
into rabbets formed by the stops on the wall frame. They
shall fit the opening closely and be provided with rabbeted
edges or an astragal where they come together.
2222. Mounting Single Swinging Doors. (a) Shall be
mounted In standard wall frames properly installed in the
wall.
(b) Doors not exceeding four feet (41) in width or five feet
(5') in height shall be provided with at least two approved
hinges. Doors in excess of live feet (5') in height shall be
provided with one hinge for each two and one-half feet (2%')
of height or fraction thereof,
(c) Doors not exceeding eight feet (8') in height shall be
equipped with a standard three-point locking mechanism or
a rugged mortise or unit lock having a throw of not less
than three-quarters inch (%"). Doors exceeding eight feet
(8') in height shall be equipped with a standard three-point
locking mechanism.
2223. Mounting Swinging Doors In Pairs. (a) Shall be
mounted in standard wall frames properly installed in wall.
(b) Each door shall be provided with approved hinges as
specified for single doors.
(c) The active door of the pair shall be equipped with
single or three-point locks as specified for single doors.
(d) The standing or normally stationary door shall be
equipped with approved door bolt at top and bottom and
with catches for the latches on the active door.
(e) Doors shall be provided with an approved interfer-
ence device to prevent the wrong door from closing first.
531
V.B.0 STANDARD 48.4.58 UNDrORM BUILDING CODE
et Doors. Doors atoll be mounted sb es
L74
the door is slammed shut or closed with moderate
force.
2711. She. (a) Counterbalanced doors shag not exceed
Counter- ei— suitable for openings eight feet (81 in width and ten
balanced feet (lo') in height, and shall lap the openings at least two
Elevator inches (2") on the sides, at least three inches (81) at the top
Dean and at least two inches (21) at bottom, or shall At the gill
closely when not designed to lap it.
(b) boor sections shall engage the guides on each side
at least one inch (1") with half-inch W) clearance in
each guide for lateral expansion.
271$. Mounting Counterbalanced! Elevator Doors. Counter-
balanced elevator doors are not easily installed by work-
men unfamiliar with them. Their installation should be
under rise anpervtsion nf the manufacturer. Specifications
and bl. eehP to should be furnished covering the details of
installation sod elevators should be available during erec-
tion.
(a) Mounting Wali Guides. Guides should be plumb, with
attachments on each guide directly opposite each other on
a horimntsi line and fastened to the wall with through bolts
and washers.
NOW: The guides are assembled at the shop in unit lengths
approximately equal to story heights, space being allowed
between units for clearance and expansion. The guides are
Provided with one round hole in each unit. Ali other holes
being slotted.
(b) where the doors are mounted on non-standard enclos-
ing walls, the ends of the wail guides should be securely
tanchored to the floor structure at floor levels.
I lVOk- If securely attached to the floor, the wall guides
serve as structural supports to both door and wall,
Wall guides may be attached to the standard steel channel
frames by bolts. (See Rules 1108 and 2109.)
152
t
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 48-4-58
2820. Swingiag Metal -Clad Doors. 2821. Size of Doors. (a) Rule 2M:
Swinging doors shall not exceed four feet (41) in width or Metal -Clad
eight feet (81) in height, and shall shut into rabbets formed Doors
by stops on the wall frame and fit the opening closely,
(b) Single swinging doors in pairs shall not exceed eight
feet (81) in width or eight feet (81 in height, and must shut
into rabbet formed by the stops on the wall frame. They
shall At the opening closely and be provided with an astragal.
(c) Locke and hinges of the mortise type shall be secured
to steel reinforcements secured to the inner face of the
metal covering of the rails and stiles.
2822. Mounting Single Suinging Doors. (a) Shall be
mounted in standard wall frames properly installed in the
wall.
(b) Doors not exceeding four feet (4') in width or five
feet (59 in height shall be provided with at least two ap.
Proved hinges fastened to the door by through bolts or to
reinforcements installed in the stile. Doors in excess of
five feet (5') in height shall be provided with one hinge
for each two and one-half feet (2%1) of height or fraction
thereof.
(c) Doors not exceeding eight feet (8') in height shall
be equipped with a standard three-point locking mechanism
or rugged mortise or unit lock having a throw of not less
than three-quarters inch (R"). Doors exceeding eight feet
(8') in height shall be equinued with standard three-point
latching mechanism, installed as nearly as possible in the
manner specified for Swinging tin -clad fire doors.
2828. Mounting Swinging Doors in Pairs. (a) Shall be
mounted in standard wail frames properly installed in the
well.
(b) Each door shall be provided with approved hinges as
specified for single doors.
(e) The active door of the pair shall be equipped with
single or three-point latch as specified for single doors.
(d) The standing or normally stationary door shall be
equipped with approved door bolt at top and bottom with
catches for the latches on the active door.
(e) Doors shall be provided with an approved interfer-
ence device to prevent the wrong door from closing first.
2824. Operation of Doors. Doors shall be mounted so as
to awing easily and freely on their hinges and close accu.
rately against the stops on the wall frame without bind-
ing. The latches should engage positively with the catches
when door is slammed shut or closed with moderate force.
CLASS C—Protection of Openings in Corridor and Boom
Partitions.
The types of doors shown in Table VII, when of standard Rum 3100.
construction, are suitable for openings in corridor and room General
partitions (Class C situations) with the size limitations at Stwoolards
present in effect as given in the table.
558
241L General. The rules covering vent holes, shape of
doors and mounting sliding and swinging pass A tin -clad
Fire Dom
doors apply to two-ply tin -clad fire doors for Clews B situa-
tions
Two-ply doors shall be designed openings not exceed-
greed for
ing
ing eighty square feet (80 sq. ft.) in area or ten feet (10')
in either dimension (See Rules 1212 to 1242, inclusive.)
Raw SM:
230L The rules covering the installation of sheet metal
fire doors in Claes A situations apply here. (See Section
FIre Berea
1400.)
Bab 38W.
2612. MouRUM ROMW Doom The rules for mounting
Relling Steel rolling steel doors at openings In fire walls shall be fol -
Elevator
10 -ed, except that doors are installed only on one aide of
Dom
wall. (See Rule 1518.)
2711. She. (a) Counterbalanced doors shag not exceed
Counter- ei— suitable for openings eight feet (81 in width and ten
balanced feet (lo') in height, and shall lap the openings at least two
Elevator inches (2") on the sides, at least three inches (81) at the top
Dean and at least two inches (21) at bottom, or shall At the gill
closely when not designed to lap it.
(b) boor sections shall engage the guides on each side
at least one inch (1") with half-inch W) clearance in
each guide for lateral expansion.
271$. Mounting Counterbalanced! Elevator Doors. Counter-
balanced elevator doors are not easily installed by work-
men unfamiliar with them. Their installation should be
under rise anpervtsion nf the manufacturer. Specifications
and bl. eehP to should be furnished covering the details of
installation sod elevators should be available during erec-
tion.
(a) Mounting Wali Guides. Guides should be plumb, with
attachments on each guide directly opposite each other on
a horimntsi line and fastened to the wall with through bolts
and washers.
NOW: The guides are assembled at the shop in unit lengths
approximately equal to story heights, space being allowed
between units for clearance and expansion. The guides are
Provided with one round hole in each unit. Ali other holes
being slotted.
(b) where the doors are mounted on non-standard enclos-
ing walls, the ends of the wail guides should be securely
tanchored to the floor structure at floor levels.
I lVOk- If securely attached to the floor, the wall guides
serve as structural supports to both door and wall,
Wall guides may be attached to the standard steel channel
frames by bolts. (See Rules 1108 and 2109.)
152
t
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 48-4-58
2820. Swingiag Metal -Clad Doors. 2821. Size of Doors. (a) Rule 2M:
Swinging doors shall not exceed four feet (41) in width or Metal -Clad
eight feet (81) in height, and shall shut into rabbets formed Doors
by stops on the wall frame and fit the opening closely,
(b) Single swinging doors in pairs shall not exceed eight
feet (81) in width or eight feet (81 in height, and must shut
into rabbet formed by the stops on the wall frame. They
shall At the opening closely and be provided with an astragal.
(c) Locke and hinges of the mortise type shall be secured
to steel reinforcements secured to the inner face of the
metal covering of the rails and stiles.
2822. Mounting Single Suinging Doors. (a) Shall be
mounted in standard wall frames properly installed in the
wall.
(b) Doors not exceeding four feet (4') in width or five
feet (59 in height shall be provided with at least two ap.
Proved hinges fastened to the door by through bolts or to
reinforcements installed in the stile. Doors in excess of
five feet (5') in height shall be provided with one hinge
for each two and one-half feet (2%1) of height or fraction
thereof.
(c) Doors not exceeding eight feet (8') in height shall
be equipped with a standard three-point locking mechanism
or rugged mortise or unit lock having a throw of not less
than three-quarters inch (R"). Doors exceeding eight feet
(8') in height shall be equinued with standard three-point
latching mechanism, installed as nearly as possible in the
manner specified for Swinging tin -clad fire doors.
2828. Mounting Swinging Doors in Pairs. (a) Shall be
mounted in standard wail frames properly installed in the
well.
(b) Each door shall be provided with approved hinges as
specified for single doors.
(e) The active door of the pair shall be equipped with
single or three-point latch as specified for single doors.
(d) The standing or normally stationary door shall be
equipped with approved door bolt at top and bottom with
catches for the latches on the active door.
(e) Doors shall be provided with an approved interfer-
ence device to prevent the wrong door from closing first.
2824. Operation of Doors. Doors shall be mounted so as
to awing easily and freely on their hinges and close accu.
rately against the stops on the wall frame without bind-
ing. The latches should engage positively with the catches
when door is slammed shut or closed with moderate force.
CLASS C—Protection of Openings in Corridor and Boom
Partitions.
The types of doors shown in Table VII, when of standard Rum 3100.
construction, are suitable for openings in corridor and room General
partitions (Class C situations) with the size limitations at Stwoolards
present in effect as given in the table.
558
1:,R,C, sTANRILRD 434-M UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
General TABLE LIMITATIONS FOR OPENINGS JX
stamim4a CORRIDORS AND ROOM PARTITIONS
t4 d.l
TYPE OF DOOR
SIZE OF OP]X
Area Height
width
(sq. ft.) (fest)
(ret)
*Hollow Metal, Sliding ................
...... 8
8
Hollow Metal, Swinging,
in pairs ....- -.... -- - --
10
8
Hollow Metal, Swinging,
single.. ..... _..... ............ .............
...... 10
4
Metal (lad, Paneled, Swing-
ing, in paha_*........................._
•---. 8
8
Metal Clad, Paneled, Swing-
ing, single ................................
...... 8
4
tPlate Steel, Swinging, single....
10
4
Sheet Metal Sliding, in pairs..
120 12
12
Sheet Metal, Sliding, single....
120 12
12
Sheet Metal, Swinging,
in pairs _..... ..............................
12
10
Sheet Metal, Swinging, single..
...... 12
8
Steel, Rolling and Lift -Up
Type ..--- ...... ............._..............
120 12
12
Tin -Clad, 2 -Ply, Sliding, single_.
So 10
10
Tin -Clad, 2 -Ply, Swinging,
I.pairs...._.....................-.-......
80 10
10
Tin -Clad, 2 -Ply, Swinging,
single_........_........_ ............._...
...... 10
6
*wlmn specially designed and labeled for Class C oDsel
'For on at doorways into compartments not exceetling SdW cubic
(eet In warehouses need for storage of household furniture and
Similar effects.
'!seta: Fire doors containing wood cork or similar materials maY
In seleccttiingr corridor and mhenom tdoom forarhospitas � similar
in umuc.
3102. Threshold Plates. Shall be made of non-combustible
material with upper surface preferably treated to prevent
slipping.
3109. Lintels. Lintels shall be of non-combustible mate-
rial capable of safely sustaining the superimposed loads,
or partitions so constructed that the frame will not be sub-
jected to material stress.
3104• A'all Frames. (a) Shall consist of structural or
sheet steel channels of sufficient width to lap the aides of
the partition.
(b) Shan be securely anchored to partition, and where
they extend from Poor to ceiling securely anchored at top
and bottom.
3106. Finish at Openings. The casing and trim at openings
be of mon-combustible material, and no wood or other
combustible material should pass from side to side of the
wall at the door opening.
551
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 48-4-58
8210. Swinging Doors. 3211. Size of Door. (a) Single- General
swinging doors shall not exceed four feet (4') in width or Standards
ten feet (10') in height, and shall Pt the opening closely. (ConCd.)
(b) Single -swinging doors in pairs shall not exceed eight
feet (8') in width or ten feet (10') in height. They shall Pt
the opening closely, and shall be provided with an astragal.
3212. Mounting Swinging Doors. (a) Shall be mounted
in standard wall frames properly installed in the wall or
partition.
(b) Doors not exceeding four feet (4') in width or live
feet (5') in height shall be provided with at least two
approved hinges. Doors in excess of live feet (5') in height
shall be provided with one hinge for each two and one-half
feet (21,g') in height or fraction thereof.
(c) Doors not exceeding eight feet (8'; in height shall be
equipped with the ordinary heavy surface latches or unit
locks or a mortise lock with three-quarters inch (3A") throw
Of bolts.
(d) Doors exceeding eight feet (8') in height shall be pro-
vided with standard three-point locking mechanisms.
(e) Doors shall be mounted in such a manner that they
will swing easily and freely on their hinges and open and
close without binding.
CLASS D—Protxdon of Openings In Exterior Walls Subject
to Severe Fire Exposures.
4112. Masonry at wall Openings. wane shall, be plumb Rule 4100;
and true and present smooth masonry surfaces without com- General
bustible trim at openings. Stene
4118. $ills. (a) Shall be of non-combustible material suit-
able for the service intended, and provided with any7grooves,
holes or recesses necessary for the proper installation of the
Pre retardants used to protect the openings.
(b) Must be firmly embedded in mortar, and securely
bonded or anchored to the masonry.
4110 Lintels. Shall be of non-combustible material and de-
signed for the proper installation of the Pre retardants used
to protect the openings.
Note: The lintels speciPed for openings in Pre walls may
be used for openings in exterior walls, particularly for door
openings. (See Rule 1107.)
4115. Wall Frames. Wall frames for exterior door open-
ings shall conform in all essential particulars with the re-
quirements for openings in Pre walls or vertical communi-
cations through buildings. (See Rules 1108 and 2108.)
4211. Size and Shape of Shutters. (a) Single -swinging Rule 4200:
shutters shall not exceed sizes suitable for openings four Tln-Chad
feet (4') in width or ten feet (10') in height. Shutters
(b) Single -swinging shutters in pairs shall not exceed
sizes suitable for openings six feet (6') in width or ten feet
(10') in height.
(c) Shutters shall Pt snugly into or overlap sides and
top of window opening. Bottom of shutters shall At the sill
555
USC. STAN-DARD 434-M IINmax SUILDINo CODE
it is not practicable to lap it. Shutters in pairs
at closely where they come together in the middle.
(shattm A) Nem: Shutters in pairs do not furnish as reliable protec-
tion as Angie abutters. Joints between shutters may be pro-
tected by a ter by two and three-quarter inch (s.4" x
2L%") steed sairegal bolted to one shutter by carriage bolts
ed 10
car"ym teninches essured before the shutters az btiilst should be
4221$ Mounting abutters.. (a) Attachment o1 Pin or Eye
Shall be securely set in wall or bolted through wall.
(b) Attachiment of Hinges. Shutters in excess of seven
feet (71) in height shall be provided with three hinges'
Hinges shall be secured by bolts passing through the shut-
ter,
rs under bolt heads. The rules for attach-
ing binges to tin -clad fire doors should be followed as far
as possible. (See Rule 1232.)
( least two steel bars or wosecured
8 latches utters shall
to
attogether and
spaced about one-fourth the distance from top and bottom
of the window opening. Latches shall pivot on three-eighths
inch (iia") bolts through the shutters.
(d) Attacking Catches. Shall be securely set in wall.
rovided with a figre
Catches for
tIn tehhbe rnd attached to the shutter bshall
wo thee-alghth inch W)
through bolts. Hooks or gravity catches securely attached to
wall shall be provided to hold the shutter in position when
open.
(e) operation. At least one shutter in three on each story
above the first and below the seventh, and shutters next to
fire escapes and above adjoining buildings shall be con-
structed so that they can be operated from both inside and
outside, and appropriately stenciled on the outside so that
the fire department can identify these window&
4213. Sliding mutters. Sliding shutters shall not be used
outside if avoidable. If used on the outside, metal shields
should be provided to prevent accumulation of snow and
ice on track.
Nota: Inspection department having jurisdiction shell be
consulted regarding the use of sliding shutters.
Rule 4309: 4311. !fie sad Shape of Shutters
R (a) Single swinging shutters shall not exceed sizes suitable
oeigoopenings four feet (4') in width or ten feet (16') in
(b) Single swinging shutters in pairs shall not exceed
adzes suitable for openings six feet (61) in width or ten.feet
(19') in height
ings)attlleastt oneeaand onepsides and top of window Open -
half inches (i%s) or close into
the opening. Sottem of shutter shall fit the Bill closely
where it is not practicable to lap it. Shutters in pairs ahall
lap each other at least, one and one-half inches (1%") where
they come together at the middle.
! Net: The window openings should be carefully measured
before the abutters are built
366
vol. III -1968 EDITION U.S.C. STANDARD 43.4.88
43M Construction of Plate Steel Shutters. The following Plate Sted
construction or its substantial equivalent is recommended. Shutters
sofas too To
the wait at least of No. 14 one and one-half inchese sheet iron or e(13h") l and (C�Nd.)
all around. The bottom of the shutter to fit the Bill closely
if it is not practical to lap it
(b) Frames to be of one and one-half inch by one-quarter
inch (1%"X%,) angle iron with not less than two cross
bars of the same material. Shutters over six feet (6') in
height to have cross bars not exceeding two feet (2') apart.
Frame to enter wall opening when shutter is closed.
Continuous welded frames and cross bars of one and one-
half by one-half inch WVxW) iron are often used, but are
not considered the full equivalent of the angle iron frame.
The welded frame is often necessary when folding shutters
are used.
(c) To have not less than two latches of one and one-half
by three-eighths inch (1%" x %") iron, and where over six
feet (6') in height, latches not to exceed two feet (2') apart.
Latches to work together by five-eighths inch W) con-
necting
and fasten Into proper substantial e
shutoto f nngsnthrickWan if the
shutters are single.
Latches to extend at least one-third of the distance across
the opposite shutter when double shutters are used.
(d) Hinges to be of two by one-quarter inch (2"x%')
iron extending at least three-fourths of the way across the
shutter. Binges not to exceed two feet (21) apart, when the
shutter is over six feet (61) in height.
(e) Pin blocks or shutter eyes to be securely set in brick
wall, preferably while building. On finished buildings pin
blocks or eyes should be firmly set in holes drilled in brick,
and fastened with iron wedges and cement. Pins to be of
half-inch (rbc") round iron.
(f) Rivets to be of iron at least five -sixteenths inch W)
in diameter and spaced not exceeding six inches (6") apart.
(g) Hooks or gravity catches in wail to be provided to
hold shutters in position when openwith two coats of
(h) Shutters to be thoroughly painted,
iron oxide and boiled oil, or equivalent.
4313. Monnting Shutters. (a) Attachment of Pin or Eye
Blocks. Shall be securely set in wall or bolted through wall
(b) Attachment of Hinges. Hinges all" not exceed thirty-
six inches (36') apart when shutter is in excess of six feet
(61) in height. Set the shutters in position with ends of
hinges in position on pin or eye blocks. Shutters should turn
easily and freely on the hinges.
Note: The hinges are attached to solid steel and sheet
metal shutters at the shop.
(c) Attaching Latches. Shutters shall be provided with
at least two latches and where more than six feet (61) in
height, latches shall not be more than twenty-four inches
(24") apart. Latches shall work together and be installed
before the shutter is mounted. Latches shall extend at least
867
vTANDARD 43-4-M UNIFORM BUILDING cODI:
one-third the distance across the opposite shutter when
shutters in pairs are used.
(d) Attaching Catches. Shan be securely set in wail, or
where shutters are in pairs, securely riveted to the stand.
ing shutter of the pair. Hooks or gravity catches securely
attached to wan shall be provided to hold the shutter in
position when open.
(e) Operation. At least one shutter in three on each story
shove the first and below the seventh, and shutters next to
fire escapes and above adjoining buildings, shall be con-
structed so that they can be operated from both inside ano
outside.
Rum 4160: 4411. Position of Shutters. Shutters shall be mounted on
Rolling Steel the face of wail or coil may be mounted in the wall when
Fire Shutters the shutter is so designed that the curtain protects the
window frame erhen the shutter is closed.
441?. Size of Shutters. Shutters shall not exceed sires suit-
able for window openings one hundred square feet (100 sq.
ft.) in area or twelve feet (121 in either dimension, and
shall overlap openings at the sides and top. Hood shall be
placed above the top of the opening, or in the wall over the
opening so that the bottom of the curtain will be flush with
or above the top of the opening when the shutter is full
Open.
Note: Shutters may be arranged for automatic operation.
4413. Mounting Rolling Shutters. Roiling steel shutters are
complicated in construction and not easily installed by work-
men unfamiliar with them. Where possible, their installation
should be under the supervision of the manufacturer. Specifi-
cations and blueprints should be furnished covering the de-
tails of installation.
The rules for mounting rolling steel fire doors shall be
followed in mounting roiling shutters, except that shutters
are installed only on one side of the wall.
4414. Testing Roiling Shutters. Shutters shall be tested
after installation, and adjustments altered, if necessary, to
make them operate freely.
Note: Roiling shutters should be provided with approved
attachments for conveniently testing their operation from
the inside of the building, and with approved safety attach-
ments to prevent their operation while windows are being
washed. These attachments to be so designed that the shut-
ters cannot be left in in inoperative condition, (See Rule
1513.)
CLASS E—Protection of Openings in Exterior Walls Subject
to Moderate Fire Exposure.
Asia 5100: 5I03. Sills and Lintels. Shall be of non-combustible mate -
General suitable for the service intended, designed for the proper
installation of the retardants used to protect the openings,
V" and firmly embedded in matter and securely bonded or
anchored in position.
Note: The sills and lintels specified for openings in fire
558
VOL. III -1958 EDITION C.B.C. STANDARD 43-4-33
walls may be used for openings in exterior walls when suit- General
able. (See Rules 1106 and 1107.) Regulations
5104. wan Frames for Doors. Door frames specified for (Costa.)
openings in Cieae A and B situations may be used for door
openings in exterior walls.
610, Mailleas. (a) Bearing mullions shall be of masonry
or of structural steel protected by at least two inches (2") of
fireproofing material on all sides.
(b) Non-bearing mullions and horizontal division mem-
bers shall be securely fastened in place and capable of re-
sisting an wind stresses and other stresses to which they
are normally subject, and exposure to fire without the for-
mation of openings or the introduction of other defects that
will seriously detract from the weathering or fire retardant
properties of the windows they support.
5104L Can and Maintenance. Fire retardants at exterior
openings sliail be kept well painted to prevent deterioration,
and kept clean of everything that would be likely to ob-
struct or interfere with their free operation, and shalt be
frequently tested and maintained in perfect working order.
5211. Mae of Piro Windows. Metal frames containing the Rule 6200:
sash or glass shall not exceed seven feet by twelve feet pin
(TIxIforced at eeverryry pointpof division by mullionssor horizontal ll be rein- ���
members as specified in Rule 5105.
Note: The passage of radiant heat is an approximately
direct function of the area. The height of openings with a
than ental topgshould
line f be
arch. measured from the crown, rather
5212. Size of Glass for pare Windows. Area of wired glass
between supports shall not exceed seven hundred twenty
square inches (720 sq. in.), and the longer dimension of the
glass shall not exceed fifty-four inches (54").
5218. Installation of Pin Windows. (a) Sills formed of
sheet steel having a thickness less than 16 gauge shall be
filled with non-combustible material capable of preventing
distortion.
(b) Frames shall be set upon a bed of mortar and sup-
ported by shims or wedges to be removed after masonry is
completed. Vertical members shall be plumb and true, and
horizontal members level. Frames shall be securely braced
in position until held by the masonry or other attachments.
(c) Frames installed before the sashes are in position
shall be securely cross -braced to prevent distortion while
the wan is being built.
(d) Masonry shall be set close to walling -in flanges, weight
pockets or extending portions of the window frame, and
wall anchors shall be properly set into the masonry as the
work progresses. Joints between the frame and wall shall be
carefully pointed up on both sides of the window.
(e) Arches or lintels shall be set with reference to ex-
tending frame members and at least quarter -inch (M)
clearance allowed so as not to subject the frame to loads
359
J.
VjLU. STANDARD 434-58 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Fin by shallsettieseents. Joints between frame and Sri* Or HAW
be filled with mortar and made tight by pointing.
(Coard.) Note: New masonry is liable to settle slightly and distort
the frame if proper allowances are not made in setting.
(f) Frames set in old openings shall be firmly secured
to the wall structure, first wetting old masonry to Prevent
the rapid absorption of moisture in mortar. Ali joints be.tween
and wall shall be filled with mortar and made
tight by pointing.
(g) Window frames shall be thoroughly protected by box-
ing if window opaning is used for the introduction of build-
ing
(h) Special directions for installation shall be obtained
for windows to which these published installation ruler do
not apply.
5314. Glazing Fire Windows. (a) Windows shall be glazed
with standard quarter -inch (%-) wired glass fitting the pro-
vided glass opening as closely as possible. The clearance be-
tween the edges of the glass lights and the metal forming
the glass opening usually varies between one -sixteenth Inch
(ii") and one-eighth inch (%") depending on the size of
the glass. Glass shall be held in place and be mechanically
secure without depending on the putty which is for weather-
p-ofing only.
(b) Glass shall be well embedded in suitable putty and
all exposed joints between metal and glass shall be struck
and pointed so that moisture cannot enter.
(c) All broken glass shall be replaced as soon as possible
and all sash members removed for glazing replaced and
properly secured.
CLASS F—Protection of openings In Exterior Walla Subject
to Light Fire Exposure.
8311. Stu of VIre Windows. Metal frame containing the
Fern sash or glass shall not exceed seven feet by twelve feet
Whwlaws (rx12') between supporta. Frames for larger openings shall
be reinforced at every point of division by mullions or hori-
zontal members constructed as specified in Rule 8105.
Note: The height of openings with a segmental top should
be measured from the crown, rather than the spring line of
the arch,
5212. Size of Glass.. Size of wired glass lights shall not ex-
ceed fifty-four inches (54") in either direction.
GEIS. Installation, Glazing and Testing. The correspond-
ing rules for fire windows for moderate exposure apply to
windows of this class.
585
VOL III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 47-1-58
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 47-1-513
Inorganic Aggregates for Use in Interior Plaster
Based on Tentative Specification C35 -53T of the
American Society for Tenting Materials
See Section 4701, Uniform Building Code, Volume I
Sec. 1. These specifications cover those aggregates most Scope
commonly used in interior piaster, which include perlite,
sand (natural and manufactured), and vermiculite. Other
aggregates may be employed, provided tests have demon-
strated them to yield plaster of satisfactory quality.
See. 2. (a) Perlite Aggregate is a siliceous, volcanic glass Definitions
properly expanded by heat.
(b) Sand Aggregate: Natural Sand is the fine granular
material resulting from the natural disintegration of rock
or from the crushing of friable sandstone.
Manufactured Sand is the fine material resulting from the
crushing and classification by screening, or otherwise, of
rock, ,gravel, or blast furnace slag.
(c) Vermiculite Aggregate is a micaceous mineral prop-
erly expanded by heat.
Sec. 8. (a) Sieve Analysis. The aggregate, except as pro- Grading
vided in paragraph (b), shall be graded within the following
(b) For natural or manufactured sand, not more than
50 per cent shall be retained between any two consecutive
sieves shown in paragraph (a), nor more than 25 per cent
between the No. 50 and No. 100 sieves.
(c) For natural or manufactured sand, the amount of
material finer than a No, 200 (74 -micron) sieve shall not
exceed 5 per cent.
See. 4. (a) The weight of perlite aggaegate shall be not Wright of
less than 71/s nor more than 15 pounds per cubic foot. Light%vOght
(b) The weight of vermiculite aggregate shall be not less •lggregates
than 711 nor more than 10 pounds per cubic foot.
See. 5. (a) Water-soluble impurities in sand shall not
exceed 0.15 per cent by weight.
(b) Sand, when subjected to the colorimetric test for or-
ganic impurities, shall develop a color no darker than the
561
PERCyEAtE RETAINED -
ON IEVE
SIEVE SIZE
by vol-
life, by
Sand,
by
aomm
.<ipb[
Sfax.o i<
Sim,
Diaz. Min,
Aisx.
Sim
Yo. 4 (4750 -micron)....
0
S
- 0
0
10
0
0
5
0
Vo. 812390.micron i..
10. I6 11790-, ieranron).....
45
10
15
40
65
30 (
65
5
3o
No. 30(590-mic). ..
NS
95
as
7s
95
98
b
95
65
50(297-mrcron) -..
No. 100049-m�cmn)....
100
etl
100
90
too '
90
(b) For natural or manufactured sand, not more than
50 per cent shall be retained between any two consecutive
sieves shown in paragraph (a), nor more than 25 per cent
between the No. 50 and No. 100 sieves.
(c) For natural or manufactured sand, the amount of
material finer than a No, 200 (74 -micron) sieve shall not
exceed 5 per cent.
See. 4. (a) The weight of perlite aggaegate shall be not Wright of
less than 71/s nor more than 15 pounds per cubic foot. Light%vOght
(b) The weight of vermiculite aggregate shall be not less •lggregates
than 711 nor more than 10 pounds per cubic foot.
See. 5. (a) Water-soluble impurities in sand shall not
exceed 0.15 per cent by weight.
(b) Sand, when subjected to the colorimetric test for or-
ganic impurities, shall develop a color no darker than the
561
-,B.C. STANDARD 41-12-58 UNBFMM BUILDING CODE
standard, unites it is established by adequate tests that the
impurities causing the color are not harmful in plaster.
see. 6. (a) For bagged aggregates, at least one bag shall
be taken at random for from each 100 bags,
not less than six bags from each shipment of 100 bagsbut or
more, and for smaller shipments not leas than 6 per cent of
gbags alorein
baselected shall be secured Representative
of a suitable sampling
thief tube. The sampling tube shall be inserted the full
distance between diagonally opposite corners of the bag with
the bag lying in a horizontal position. The portions so
obtained shall be combined to produce a composite sample
having a volume of at least one cubic foot (i cu. ft.). At
least one composite sample shall be prepared and tested
separately for each 2,000 bags of aggregate used.
ib) samples secured in accordance with paragraph (a)
shall be reduced by quartering or riffling to obtain samples
of proper size for individual tests.
ht
tes
p of only the following modifications o shall apply: The sample
pie
shall consist of approximately 500 -milliliter bulk volume.
Where a mechanical sieving device is used, the sieving time
shall be 5 minutes, The volume of each sieve fraction shall
be measured in a 250 -milliliter graduated cylinder. The
aggregate shall be poured loosely into the graduate without
tamping or shaking, the surface leveled with a spatula, and
the volume read within -t 2 milliliters. The volumes of
the individual sieve fractions shall be expresed as percent-
ages of the sum of the volumes of all fractions. The per-
centage retained on each designated sieve shrill be calculated
by summing the individual percentages of all fractions
larger than that sieve.
b ) Water -Soluble Impurities. Weigh accurately a 10 -gram
sample of sand. Transfer to a 250 -milliliter beaker. Add
100 milliliters of distilled water. Heat to boiling and allow
to simmer on a hot plate for five minutes. Filter through
a fine paper into a tared evaporating dish. Wash with hot
distilled water until the volume of filtrate is about 125
milliliters. Evaporate to dryness. The temperature of the
dish shall not exceed 250 Fahrenheit, during final drying.
Coni in a desiccator, weigh, and calculate the weight of
residue to percentage of water-soluble impurities.
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 47-2-58
Gypsum Plasters
Based on Standard Speeifleatlon C28-55 of the
American Society for Testing Materials
See Section 4701. I7niform Building Code, Volume I
Scope Sec. L These specifications cover four gypsum plasters:
amely,
Gypsum ready -mixed plaster
Gypsum neat plaster,
t562
VOL. III -1058 EDITION C.B.C. STANDARD 47-2-58
Gypsum wood-fibered plaster, and
Gypsum gauging plaster for finish coat.
See. 2. The calcined gypsum plaster in these specifications Calcined
shall have a purity of not leas than 66.0 per cent by weight Gypsums
Of CaSO; %%O.
GYPSUM READY-311)(ED PLASTER
Sec. S. Gypsum ready -mixed plaster is calcined gypsum Description
plaster, mixed at the mill with mineral aggregate and other
ingredients to control working quality and getting time.
Sas, 4. Gypsum ready -mixed plaster shall contain not more Composition
than 3 cu. ft. of mineral aggregate per 100 ib. of calcined
gypsum plaster, to which may be added fiber and material
to control working quality and setting time. However, when
prepared for application to porous masonry bases, it may
contain not more than 4 cu. ft. of mineral aggregate per
100 ib. of calcined gypsum plaster.
Sec. 5. Gypsum ready -mixed plaster shall have a time of Time of
set of not less than 1' f§ nor more than 8 hr. Setting
See. 6. Gypsum ready -mixed plaster, when dry, shall Compressive
have a compressive strength of not less than 400 pat. How- 82rength
ever, this strength requirement does not pertain to piasters
prepared for application to porous masonry bases.
GYPSUM NEAT PLASTER
Sec. 1. Gypsum neat plaster is calcined gypsum plaster Description
mixed at the mill with other Ingredients to control working
quality and setting time. Neat piaster may be Abated or
unfiltered. The addition of aggregate is required on the job.
Sec. 8. Gypsum neat plaster shall contain not less than Composition
66.0 per cent by weight of CaSO; %H2O.
Sec. 0. Gypsum neat plaster, when mixed with three parts Time of
by weight of standard sand, shall set in not less than 2 nor Setting
more than 32 hr.
Sec. 10. Gypsum neat plaster, when tested with two parts Compressive
of standard Ottawa sand, shall have a compressive strength Strength
of not less than 750 psi.
GYPSUM WOOD-FDIERED PLASTER
Sec, 11. Gypsum wood-fibered piaster is a gypsum plaster Description
in which wood fiber is used as an aggregate.
Sec. 12. Gypsum wood-fibered plaster shall contain not
less than 66.0 per cent by weight of CaSO4. %H2O and not
less than 1.0 per cent by weight of wood`fiber made from a
nonstaining wood.
See. 13. Gypsum wood-fibered piaster shall set in not less
than life nor more than 16 hr.
Sec. 14. Gypsum wood-fibered plaster, when dry, shall
have a compressive strength of not less than 1200 psi.
GYPSUM GAUGING PLASTER FOR FINISH COAT
See. 15. Gypsum gauging plaster is prepared for mixing
563
U.B.C. STANDARD 47-3-58 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 47-3-58
with lime putty for the finish coat. It may contain materials
Special Finishing Hydrated Lime
to control setting time and working quality.
Composition
See. li. Gypsum gauging plaster for finish coat shat con-
American Snooty for Testing Materials
tain not less than 66.0 per cent CaSO; %H2O by weight.
See Section 4701, Uniform Building Code, Volume I
See. 17. Gypsum gauging plaster for finish coat shat all
Sec. 1. These specifications cover one type of finishing
4 ) sieve
pass a No. Ulan 60
sieve
hydrated lime which Is suitable for use in the scratch,
r centt shall pass a No. 100(149-micron)
Per
Time Of
s, 16. Gypsum gauging plaster for the finish coat, when
setting
not retarded, shall set in not less than 20 nor more than 40
under these specifications shall be designated type S—
min., and, when retarded, shall set in not less than 40 min.
Camis,swve
Se*. 19. Gypsum gauging plaster for finish coat shall
Strength
have a compressive strength of not less than 1200 psi.
from type N—normal finishing hydrate, in that a limitation
Packing and Marking
Packing and
See. 23. (a) Gypsum plaiders shall be dry and free from
Mwkft
kimps, and shall be shipped in packages.
VOL. M-1958 EDITION U.H.C. STANDARD 47-4-W
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 47-4-58
Keene's Cement
Based on Standard Specifications for C61-50 of the
American Society for Testing Materials
See Section 4701, Uniform Building Code, Volume I
Seo. 1. These specifications cover Keene's cement, anhy- Scope
drous calcined gypsum the set of which is accelerated by
the addition of other materials.
Sec, 2. Keene's cement shat set in not less than 20 min. Time of
nor more than 6 hr. Setting
Sea S. Keene's cement shall have a compressive strength Compressive
of not less than 2500 psi. Strength
See. 4. The cement shall all pass a No. 14 (1410 -micron) Fhteness
sieve, not less than 98 per cent shall pass a No. 40 (420 -
micron) sieve, and not less than 80 per cent shat pass a
No. 100 (149 -micron) sieve.
Sea 5. The cement shall not show' a combined water Combined
content of more than 2 per cent. Water
Sea 9. (a) Keene's cement shall be dry and free from Packing
lumps and shall be shipped in packages. and Marking
(b) Wizen shipped for resale, the following information
shall be legibly marked on each package or on a tag of
suitable size attached thereto:
Name of manufacturer,
Brand,
Description, and
Net and gross weights of package.
Sec. 10. inspection may be made either at the point of Inspection
shipment or ab the point of delivery. The inspector represent-
ing the purchaser shall have free access to the carriers
being loaded for shipment to the purchaser. He shall be
afforded all reasonable facilities for inspection and sampling,
which shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily
with the loading of the carriers.
Sec. 11. Any rejection shat be based upon the specific Rejection
cause of failure to conform to the requirements of these
specifications and shall be reported to the seller within 30
working days from the receipt of the shipment by the
purchaser.
Sea 12. Claims for rehearing shall be valid only if made Rehearing
within 20 working days from receipt of notice of specific
cause for rejection.
Appendix
Field Test for Keene's Cement
In many instances it is desirable to have a simple test
whereby Keene's cement may be identified. Such a test will
not indicate the quality of the cement, which should be
865
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 47-3-58
Special Finishing Hydrated Lime
Bnsetl an Standard Specifications (206-49 of the
American Snooty for Testing Materials
See Section 4701, Uniform Building Code, Volume I
scope
Sec. 1. These specifications cover one type of finishing
hydrated lime which Is suitable for use in the scratch,
brown, and finish coats of plaster, for stucco, for mortar,
and as an addition to portland-cement concrete. Lime sold
under these specifications shall be designated type S—
special hydrate.
Note. Type S—special finishing hydrate is differentiated
from type N—normal finishing hydrate, in that a limitation
of the amount of unhydrated oxides is specified for type S
hydrate only and the plasticity requirement for type S
hydrate may be determined after soaking for less than 16 hr.
chemical
Sec. 2. Type S—special finishing hydrate shat conform
Composition
to the following requirements as to chemical composition:
Calcium and magnesium oxides (nonvolatile basis), min.,
percent._._...._...» .......... __... ........ _.__.__Ob
................__...._...._....._..
Carbon diozide (sa- ived basis), max., per cent:
If is
aampia
an at the place of manufactureit _.......»»_...._...._ b
other
oxldas
ITnkydrated (s.6-r�eived but*), max., pertxat_r ..... a
See. 3. The percentage residue of type S—special finishing
hydrate shall conform to the following requirements:
RIMue retained on No. 99 (590 -micron) sieve, max., per cent 0.5
11sidue retained on No. 200 (74 -micron) sieve, max., per cent ib
Residue
Sec. 4. Type S—Special finishing hydrate shall show no
pops or pits when tested.
popping and
°. 5. The putty made from type S—special finishing
hydrate shall be accepted if it develops a plasticity figure
of not less than 200 when tested or retested after soaking
r
for any period not exceeding 24 hours.
564
VOL. M-1958 EDITION U.H.C. STANDARD 47-4-W
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 47-4-58
Keene's Cement
Based on Standard Specifications for C61-50 of the
American Society for Testing Materials
See Section 4701, Uniform Building Code, Volume I
Seo. 1. These specifications cover Keene's cement, anhy- Scope
drous calcined gypsum the set of which is accelerated by
the addition of other materials.
Sec, 2. Keene's cement shat set in not less than 20 min. Time of
nor more than 6 hr. Setting
Sea S. Keene's cement shall have a compressive strength Compressive
of not less than 2500 psi. Strength
See. 4. The cement shall all pass a No. 14 (1410 -micron) Fhteness
sieve, not less than 98 per cent shall pass a No. 40 (420 -
micron) sieve, and not less than 80 per cent shat pass a
No. 100 (149 -micron) sieve.
Sea 5. The cement shall not show' a combined water Combined
content of more than 2 per cent. Water
Sea 9. (a) Keene's cement shall be dry and free from Packing
lumps and shall be shipped in packages. and Marking
(b) Wizen shipped for resale, the following information
shall be legibly marked on each package or on a tag of
suitable size attached thereto:
Name of manufacturer,
Brand,
Description, and
Net and gross weights of package.
Sec. 10. inspection may be made either at the point of Inspection
shipment or ab the point of delivery. The inspector represent-
ing the purchaser shall have free access to the carriers
being loaded for shipment to the purchaser. He shall be
afforded all reasonable facilities for inspection and sampling,
which shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily
with the loading of the carriers.
Sec. 11. Any rejection shat be based upon the specific Rejection
cause of failure to conform to the requirements of these
specifications and shall be reported to the seller within 30
working days from the receipt of the shipment by the
purchaser.
Sea 12. Claims for rehearing shall be valid only if made Rehearing
within 20 working days from receipt of notice of specific
cause for rejection.
Appendix
Field Test for Keene's Cement
In many instances it is desirable to have a simple test
whereby Keene's cement may be identified. Such a test will
not indicate the quality of the cement, which should be
865
tF.Isrl STANDARD 47.5.86 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
ITT—,=
determined by the laboratory tests enumerated
P in we y
oft specifications, but is Of especial value
material dealers, and superintendents
The following procedure is satisfactory for this purpose:
Take a cupful of the material, mix with water to the
consistency of a thick paste, and pour upon a plate or piece
of g Let stand until fairly firm and definite signs of
set having began are manifest. This will be some time less
than 2 hr„ depending on climatic conditions.
Divide the sample, allowing one half to remain Undis-
turbed. Take the other half and break it down adding a
little water, remix, and then allow it to "set up" again on
the plate or glass.
If the material is Keene's cement, the remixed portion
will, within .a few thous,nbbecot to's a quite as hard and strong
as the portion
UNIFORM BtiILDING CODE STANDARD 47-5-58
Wood Lath
Barred on Standard Specifications for Gypsum Piastering
(A42.4-1959) of the American Standards Association
See Section 4701, Uniform Rbffding Code, volume I
evenly manufacturedland free of detrimental defects.ade, reasonably clear,
A few
holes, small pitch pockets, well set or firm
knots, not more thane three-quarters inch (5611) in diameter
and not bunched, and wane not more than one-third the
thickness and one-third the width for one-third the length on
one side of the lath, or its equivalent otherwise located,
when not in combination with any other defect, shall be per-
mitted.
Wood lath shall conform to the following dimensional
requirements:
7MInim.mMaximum
Thickness __.._.Width.___......_._.156 in.48 in.
Length ............._32 in.
566
VOL III -1638 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 47-6-M
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 47-6-58
Gypsum Lath
Based on Standard Specifications C37-54 of the
American Society for Testing Materials
See Section 470L Uniform Building Code, Volume I
See. L These specifications cover plain, perforated, and Scope
insulating types of gypsum lath, designed to be used as a
base for the reception of gypsum plaster.
Sec. 2. (a) Composition. Gypsum lath shalt consist of an Phan
incombustible core, essentially gypsum, with or without Gypsum
fiber but not exceeding 15 per cent of fiber by weight, and Lath
surfaced with paper firmly bonded to the core.
(b) Flexural Streugth. When tested, either face up or
face down, the breaking load of specimens taken from the
,gypsum lath shall be not less than the following:
Load, 1b,
Bearing Edges Soaring Edges
Across Fiber Para tsi to
Thickness, of Surfacing Fiber of Sur -
fn. facing
36 60 J 2T
to 100 40
See. 5. Perforated gypsum lath shall meet the require. Perforated
ments for plain gypsum lath except that it shalt have per- Gypsum
forations not less than three-quarters inch (%") in diameter Lath
with one perforation for not more than sixteen square inches
(16 sq. in.) of lath, and except that the breaking loads when
tested with the bearing edges parallel to the fiber of surfac-
ing shall be not less than 20 pounds for three-eighths inch
(56") thickness and not less than 30 pounds for one-half
inch (%") thickness.
See. 4. (a) Insulating gypsum lath shall meet the require- Insulating
menta for plain gypsum lath except that in addition the Gypsum
back surface shalt be covered with a continuous sheet of Lath
pure bright finished aluminum foil.
(b) When tested the permeance of insulating gypsum lath
shall not exceed 0.30 perm for the condition of 50 per cent
relative humidity on Side I, the face of the lath, and 0 per
cent relative humidity on Side II, the foil -covered back of
the lath.
Sec. 5. (a) Thickness. The nominal thickness of gypsum Dimensions,
lath shall be three-eighths inch (% ) or one-half inch (1,j"), Weights, and
with permissible variations in the nominal thickness of plus Permissible
or minus one -thirty-second inch (1/32"), and with permissible Variations
local variations of plus or minus one -sixteenth inch (1/16")
from the nominal thickness.
567
tT:tN1 AHA 47.6-M UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
(b) W141M The nominal width of gypsum lath shall be
sixteen inches (16"), sixteen and one-fifth inches (161;5"),
twenty-four inches (24"), or thirty-two inches (32"), with
permissible variations of three-siXteenths inch (8/16") under
and one-eighth inch (%,) over the specified width.
(c) Length. The nominal length of gypsum lath shall
be thirty-two inches (32"), thirty-six inches (361), or forty-
eight inches (48") with permissible variations of one-quarter
Inch (%") under and one-eighth inch (t¢") over the specified
length. Lengths up to twelve feet (12') are available.
(d) squareyfeeett (1000 sq.eight Shagill conform torthe llowning
requirements:
Thickness. Weight per IM sq. ft.. lb.
in, Minimum Maximum
:K, _............_.._..._..... 1350 isoo
1800 2500
(e) Perforated Gypsum Lath.—Perforated gypsum lath
shall meet the requirements for plain gypsum lath except
that it shall have perforations not less than three-quarters
inch (%") in diameter with one perforation for not more
than sixteen square inches (16 sq. in.) of lath.
Finish Ser. S. (a) The surfaces of gypsum lath shall be such that
they will readily receive and retain gypsum plaster. The
edges and ends shall be straight and solid. The corners shall
be square with a permissible variation of one-quarter inch
( a") in the full width of the lath. Gypsum lath shall be
free of cracks and imperfections that will render them
unfit for use
(b) Gypsum lath that have corners burred or broken shall
be considered acceptable provided that the broken portion is
not more than one inch (i") along either dimension.
U13
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 47-7-58
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 47-7-58
Metal and Wire Lath
Based on Standard Specifications No. 42.4-1955 of the
American Standards Association
See Section 4701, Uniform Building Code, Volume I
SCOPE AND REQUIREMENTS
Seo. 47.701. (a) Metal Lath. Metal lath, expanded, ribbed lath Types
and sheet, shall he of copper -hearing steel, coated with rust- and
inhibitive paint after cutting, or cut from zinc -coated steel Specifications
sheets.
(b) Wire lath. Wire lath shall be not lighter than No. 19
W. & M. gauge wire, two and one-half meshes per inch,
coated with zinc or rust -inhibitive paint.
(e) V -Stiffened Wire Lath. V -stiffened wire lath shall be
not lighter than No. 20 W. & M. gauge wire, two and one-half
meshes per inch, with No. 24 U. S. gauge V -rib stiffeners
spaced not to exceed eight inches (8") apart, coated with
zinc or rust -inhibitive paint.
(d) Paper -Backed Wire Fabric.. Paper -backed wire fabric
shall be not lighter than No. 16 W. & M. gauge, zinc -coated
wire, with not to exceed two-inch by two-inch (2" x 2")
mesh, with stiffening ribs spaced not to exceed five inches
(5") center to center, and absorptive paper backing securely
attached to metal by not less than No. 17 W. & M. gauge
stitch wires two inches (2") on centers in such a manner as
to provide full embedment of at least one-eighth inch ('s")
of plaster for at least one-half of the total length of the
strands and one-half of the total weight of the metal. The
design shall be such as to provide a mechanical bond and
continuous metallic reinforcement, in both directions, for
plaster.
(e) Metal Accemories. Metal accessories such as corner
beads, base screeds, concealed picture molds, eta, shall be
not lighter than No. 26 U. S. gauge steel, zinc -coated, with
perforated or expanded flanges or clips shaped so as to per-
mit complete embedment in the plaster.
Sec. 47.702. All lath shall be applied with the long dimen- Lathing
sion at right angles to the supports, except that lath fur-
nished in rolls may be applied with the long dimension paral.
lel to the supports.
Corner bead shall be used over all types of lath to protect
all external vertical corners and to establish grounds, and
shall be attached securely in such manner as to assure proper
alignment during application of plaster.
NOTE: Wood sub -purlins or furring strips to be fur-
nished and installed by others, and to which lath is to be
attached for ceiling construction, shall be secured to sup-
porting purlins, joists or trusses by adequate nailing, lag
screws, or by wire loops.
569
T-%Ntr%KD 47-`.-58 UNIFORM BUILDING CODI
iPtokuli o �•. 47.703. ,aa Diamond Mesh. Application of diamond
...._ ; =+tat e�aanded, metal lath or wire lath shall be started
°-sew wrt ,t%,,ay from a corner and be bent into or around
can nc: ;end carried on to the support on the abutting sur_
fart: shall first be applied to ceilings, and the sheets
rlci,�d dnvcn sA inches r6"i onto the walls and partitions. If
rs n<,t )seed on ceilings. the lathing may be started at the
.e w d! and may be bent and carried six inches (6",
+ t -Gr:s, mlAs. Wherever possible, the ends of th
� +• i -. , 'hall be staggered. Ribbed and sheet lath. stif.
i erred •.lac lath, and fabric shall be butted at internal corner,.
?4i Comcrite. Cornente shall be provided at all interior
.nr,(;les a2rorf' ribbed or sheet lath, stiffened wire lath, ol-
fahr= is used. It shall be fastened only sufficiently to retain
[x%niU„r. during plastering.
NOTE: :)'here end laps occur between supports, ends
+ar-shcl"' Sha=1 be laced or adequately tied with No. 1E
ge.uge g:,I:*arized annealed wire.
Stndbmq s„hd `i+'r. 4: ',u4. R'hsre metal lath is used for studless solid
1'arfitinas t:e.long dimension of the sheet shall be vertical.
t'lrtai Luh L,On a 11i r,_ 5ec;ued to ceiling runners or to ceiling lath by
sed ire ..c. ..,.aced not more than six inches (6") apart, and
Plaster) �ha!i be ssit,tbl•r anchored to floor runners or base. At verti.
a! <orners. metal lath shall be bent and returned six inches
vn shutting 111"faces. Flat expanded metal lath shall be
hpl,- ono -half-inch (+:e"i at sides, and rib metal lath by
nest) ;g. aml -11 side laps shall be wire -tied at not to exceed
:slur-fi rcir
19"l intervals.
NOTE: 4ecia) systems of studless solid partitions of
metal Lath and plaster shall be erected in accordance
with the recommendations of the manufacturer.
Furred, and S"+ 4",.:(t:5. ,a, Rangers. Hangers shall be of ample lengi.h.
ttnsnendrd flange's f �vitooul. inserts) shall be secured to steel reinforce-
fnitfnge mint in rune rete with cinder a
(:itetal be
lath i"';red tr; steel remforeementoo looped and emreate and beddedeither ittwo
Construc•tlan; ]ncl+e-c �2", in concrete with other types of aggregates.
Ih+ lmerts. Inserts shall develop the full strength of the
hankers 1moh are attached to them. Inserts used in cinder
concrete or the arch construction shall be toggled with
seeen-inch 17"t ernes pieces hearing on top of reinforcing
steel in cinder concrete or on top of tile arch construction. In
concrete vfth ;.ggregates other than cinders, inserts shall be
secure;l to steel reinforcement or looped and embedded two
:nchs , 2"r in the ,. oncrete,
(ci Support Attachments. Hangers for suspended ceilings
urde- "'! ran:,tructinn shall be attached to supports by one
of the tolig methods; 1. Inserted in holes drilled a
minimum of three niches 13") above bottom of joists and
itself. th the upc,er end of tihe hanger twisted three times around
t
3..4ttache,; t^ 3n=i rails driven on a downward slant into
sides "jf joists ",h not less than three inches (3") penetra-
t• Yion and at lent :;re inches !a") from bottom edges, not over
t thin v -six inches ;.',6"' on centers and with the upper end of
Ly" hanger in I,— i, case twisted three tines around itself.
579
VOL. III -1858 EDITION C.B.C. STANDARD 47-7-58
3. Secured with four one -and -one-half inch (7+;.") No. 9 purred.and
gauge wire staples driven horizontally or on a downward suspended
slant Into sides of joists, three near the upper end of the CeWngs
loop, and the fourth to fasten the Inose end. (Mem
4. When purlins exceed four feet 44'1 on centers, one -and- Lath
one -half-inch I1+;,"i No. O screw eyes or equal max, be Construction)
fastened into heavy wood flooring at not over three feet (3 + (Coned.)
on centers so that they will support an area not over nine
square feet (9 sq, ft.), the upper end of the hanger to be
inserted in the screw eye and in each case twisted three times
around itself.
5. Flat hangers, if used, shall be spiked to sides of joists
with two 12d nails driven through holes drilled in the hanger
and clinched at least three inches 13") above bottom of joists.
Id) Materials, Wire shall be zinc -coated igalvanizedi.
Rods and flats shall be of mild steel. Gauges and sizes speci-
fied are the minimum permissible.
(e) Construction. Where one -inch by three -sixteenths -inch
(1" x 3/16") inserts are used, seven -sixteenths -inch (716",
diameter holes shall be patched on the center line at the lower
ends,
which shall project a sufficient distance below the bot-
tom of the concrete or tile arch construction to permit the
attachment of the hangers.
Flat steel hangers shall be bolted to one -inch by three -
sixteenths -inch 0" x 3/16") inserts with three -eighths -inch
(%") diameter round -head stove bolts.
Wire or rod hangers shall be saddle -tied or wrapped
around main runners so as to prevent turning or twisting of
the runners and to develop the full strength of the hangers.
Lower ends of flat hangers shall be bolted to main runners.
or bent tightly around runners and bolted to the main part
of the hanger; bolts to be three -eighths -inch (ib"i diameter
round -head stove bolts.
Holes in both inserts and hangers shall not be nearer to
the ends than three-eighths inch (%").
The nuts of bolts shall be drawn up tight.
Main runners shall not be let into nor come in contact
with abutting masonry or reinforced concrete walls or parti-
tions. A main runner shall be located within six inches f6")
of the paralleling walls to support the ends of the cross fur-
ring. The ends of main runners at walls shall be supported by
hangers located not more than twelve inches (12") from such
ends.
When main runners are spliced, the ends shall be over-
lapped not less than twelve inches (12") (with flanges of
channels interlocked) and securely tied near each end of the
aphce with double loops of No. 16 gauge wire.
Cross furring shall be securely saddle -tied to main runners
with double No. 16 gauge galvanized wire, with special clips,
or equivalent attachments.
When furring members are spliced, the ends shall be over-
lapped not less than eight inches f8") (with flanges of chan-
nels interlocked) and securely tied nehr each end of the splice
with double loops of No. 16 gauge wire.
Cross furring dull not be let into nor come in contact with
abutting masonry or reinforced concrete walls or partitions.
$71
t'.B.C. sTASDARD ii 1.58 17NIFORM Bt71LDING (IOIH
Apple+atl<ae .cam. 47,703. tae Diamond -Stesh. Application of diamond
t t a. c\, anded t metal lath or wire lath shall be starte,i
aray floin a corner and be bent into or aroumt
-s-e - ae i i carried on to the support on the abutting sur-
;. 1.c-0- imll !list be applied to ceilings, and the sheets
lzcW,l :(-n is in ti s t6"a onto the walls and partitions. If
s i d on ceilings, the lathing may be started at the
f
0tt, w,lll ;and tidy be bent and carried six inches (6"
the cy;Fint; heists. Wherever possible, the ends of th,
' al -. h Miall be staggered. Ribbed and sheet lath, stif-
ri a1,r ,.:;, a.id fabric shall be butted at internal corner,.
:Psi Corocrite. Cornerite shall be provided at all interior
- ng?es crhere ribbed fir sheet lath, stiffened wire lath, of
:a'reo is cased. It shall be fastened only sufficiently to retain
curing plastering.
XOTE: A'her•e end laps occur between supports, ends
t streets -,hall be laced or adequately tied with No. i),
tauge galvanized annealed wife,
ziteuile-s ootid Set'. 17.791, where inetal lath is used for studless solid
f'artitbm„ rtr+ems, the,long dimension of the sheet shall be vertical.
lMetal Latie lath .N1 311 he securcd to ceiling runners or to ceiling lath b1
ami "He ties spaced not noire than six inches t6") apart, and
plamer) %hall be sE;iueb)•: anchored to floor runners or base, At verti-
oai corners, meta! loth shall be bent and returned six inches
on abutting s;n•faces. Flat expanded metal lath shall be
tipped "re -holt -inch 0r"1 at sides, and rib metal lath by
r-e.=.ting, :end all side laps shall be wire -Lied at not to exceed
nine -inch 49"a intervals.
NOTE: Special systems of studless solid partitions of
metal lath and plaster shall be erected in accordance
+ th tha- recommendations of the manufacturer.
Furred, end tier•. 4 ;9.i. - � Haangers. Hangers shall be of ample length.
.tin.e-nded fl:.angrrs. iwithout insertse shall be secured to steel reinforce-
t'cihngs ment in e nerete •.vith cinder aggregate and shall be either
I.NI �tal i.at11 secured to steel reinforcement or looped and embedded two
Conetrua•tian: inche=s a•_^� in concrete with other types of aggregates.
ibInserts. lnserts shall develop the full strength of the
h"ngers v'hli�h are attached to them. Inserts used in cinder
e lv(rett' yr the arch construction shall be toggled with
sere^ -;eel: a cross pieces bearing on top of reinforcing
steel ua cinder concrete or on top of tile arch construction. In
concrete flh aggregates other than cinders, inserts shall be
secnrcd t+, steel reinforcement or looped and embedded two
inch, e2' in the concrete.
tet Support Attachments. Hangers for suspended ceilings
under •,ywei construction shall be attached to supports by one
of the !'o!§;.eif:g methods: 1. Inserted in holes drilled a
minimum of three inches t3") above bottom of joists and
with the upper end of the hanger twisted three times around
itself.
2. Attached tr, 30d nails driven on a downward slant into
sides of joists with not less than three inches (3") penetra-
,, tion and at least five inches f 5" 1 from bottom edges, not over
thirty-six inches +36"1 on centers and with the upper end of
the hanger in each case twisted three times around itself.
576
VOL. III -19:18 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 47--758
3. Secured with four one -and -one-half inch (la"i No. 9 Furred and
gauge wire staples driven horizontally or on a downward Suspended
slant into sides of joists, three near theupper end of the Ceilings
loop, and the fourth to fasten the loose end. ( Metal
4. When purlins exceed four feet l4') on centers, one -and- Lath
one -half-inch flat") No. O screw eves or equal maybe Construction)
fastened into heavy wood flooring at not over three feet 13 r (Contd.)
on centers so that they will support an area not over nine
square feet (9 sq, ft. i. the upper end of the hanger to be
inserted in the screw eye and in each case twisted three times
around itself.
5. Flat hangers, if used, shall be spiked to sides of joists
with two 12d nails driven through holes drilled in the hanger
and clinched at least three inches (3"i above bottom of joists.
(d) Materials. Wire shall be zinc -coated Igalvanizedl.
Rods and flats shall be of mild steel. Gauges and sizes speci-
fied are the minimum permissible.
(e) Construction. Where one -inch by three -sixteenths -inch
(1" x 3/16") inserts are used, seven -sixteenths -inch (1 16"1
diameter holes shall be puched on the center line at the lower
ends, which shall project a sufficient distance below the bot-
tom of the concrete or the arch construction to permit the
attachment of the hangers.
Flat steel hangers shall be bolted to one -inch by three -
sixteenths -inch (1" x 3/16") inserts with three -eighths -inch
(%") diameter round -head stove bolts.
Wire or rod hangers shall be saddle -tied or wrapped
around main runners so as to prevent turning or twisting of
the runners and to develop the full strength of the hangers.
Lower ends of flat hangers shall be bolted to main runners,
or bent tightly around runners and bolted to the main part
of the hanger; bolts to be three-eighth.4-inch ('4,") diameter
round -head stove bolts.
Holes in both inserts and hangers shall not be nearer to
the ends than three-eighths inch (%").
The nuts of bolts shall be drawn up tight.
Main runners shall not be let into nor come in contact
with abutting masonry or reinforced concrete walls or parti-
tions. A main runner shall be located within six inches f6" 1
of the paralleling walls to support the ends of the cross fur-
ring. The ends of main runners at walls shall be supported by
hangers located not more than twelve inches (12" 1 from such
ends.
When main runners are spliced, the ends shall be over-
lapped not less than twelve inches (12"a (with flanges of
channels interlocked) and securely tied near each end of the
splice with double loops of No. 16 gauge wire.
Cross furring shall be securely saddle -tied to main runners
with double No. 16 gauge galvanized wire, with special clips.
or equivalent attachments.
When furring members are spliced, the ends shall be over-
lapped not less than eight inches f8") (with flanges of chan-
nels interlocked) and securely tied near each end of the splice
with double loops of No. 16 gauge wire.
Cross furring shall not be let into nor come in contact with
abutting masonry or reinforced concrete walls or partitions.
571
V,R.0STANDARD 47-8.58 UNIFORM BUILDING CODy,
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 47-8-58
LOAD (P mds)
Gypsum Wallboard
Based on Standard Specification C36-33 of the
Waring Edges
Pnrnllito Fiber
American Society for Testing Materials
See Section 4701, Uniform Building Code, Volume I
Scope
Sec. 47.801. This Standard covers gypsum wallboard, de-
signed to he used without the addition of plaster, for walls,
24
4
ceilings, or partitions.
compo.ftism
Sec. 47.802. Gypsum wallboard shall consist of an incom-
45
bustible core, essentially gypsum, with or without fiber, but
not exceeding 15 per cent of fiber by weight, and surfaced
with paper firmly bonded to the core. The back surface of
insulating gypsum wallboard shall, in
addition, he covered
with aluminum foil. "Type X" (Special Fire -Retardant) desig-
nates gypsum wallboard with a specially formulated core that
provides greater fire -resistance than
regular gypsum wall-
board of the same thickness.
Flexural
Strength
Ser. 47.803, Gypsum wallboard shall carry not less than the
loads set forth in Table No. 47-8-A without
showing a break-
ing of the bond between the surfacing and the core.
Sampling
Sec. 47.804. At least 0.25 per cent of the number of gypsum
wallboards in
a shipment• but not less than three boards, shall
be selected to represent the shipment, and shall constitute
sample for tests. a
Dime
Weights, and
See. 47.800. (a i Thickness. The nominal thicknesses of gyp-
slim wallboard shall be one
Ph;
Variations
-fourth -inch three -eighths -
one -half-inch ( 2"), and five -eighths -inch (%")
with permissible local
variations of plus or minus one -thirty-
second -inch 1;,-i. Edges of three -eighths -inch ("),
half
one-
-inch i1_•), o -end five -eighths -inch (sqµ") board may be
either plain, recessed• or tapered to receive a joint
-reinforcing
strip. The average thickness of the edge of recessed- or
tapered -edge
wallboard shall be at least 0.010 inch less than
the average thickness of the wallboard.
' b i Width. The nominal widths of gypsum wallboard shall
be sixteen
inches U0"), twenty-four inches (24"1, thirty-two
inches 132•
1, and forty-eight inches (48"), with a permissible
variation of three -thirty -seconds -inch (y3z•),
mil
I
TABLE NO. 47-8-A—LOAD CAPACITY FOR
GVPSI :M WALLBOARD
VOL. III -1938 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 47-8-58
TABLE NO. 47-8-B-31INIML'M AND MAXIMUM
WEIGHTS OF GYPSUM WALLBOARD
PER 1000 SQUARE FEET
WEIGHT PER I(W SQ, FT. (Pounds)
THICKNESS
tInches) Minimum Maximum
°h 1 1300
W ISM
3154
(c) Length. The nominal length of one -fourth -inch (19••)
gypsum wallboard shall be from four feet (4'1 to twelve feet
(12'); and, for three -eighths -inch (R••), one -half-inch (12"),
and five -eighths -inch (§;,"1 board, from four feet i4•) to
fourteen feet (14') inclusive, with permissible variations of
plus or minus one-fourth inch (I:,").
(d) Weight. The weight of gypsum wallboard per one thou-
sand square feet (1,000 sq. ft.) shall conform to the require-
ments in Table No. 47-8-13.
See. 47.806. The surfaces of gypsum wallboard shall be Finish
true and free from imperfections that would render the wall-
board unfit for use with or without decoration. The edges and
ends shall be straight and solid. The corners shall be square
with a permissible variation of one-eighth inch 11."1 in the
full width of the board.
Sec. 47.807. Insulating gypsum wallboard shall meet all the Insulating
requirements, specified in this Standard and, in addition, the Gypsum
back surface shall be covered with pure bright -finished ah)mi- Wallboard
num foil.
The permeance of insulating gypsum wallboard shall not
exceed 0.30 permeance at 50 per cent relative humidity on the
face of the board, nor at zero per cent relative humidity on
the foil -covered back of the board.
See. 47.808. When shipped, gypsum wallboard shall be Packing and
kept dry and free from moisture. Marking
When shipped for resale, the name of the manufacturer and
the brand shall be legibly marked on each board or package.
573
LOAD (P mds)
THICKNESS
Cinches}
F
A a Frher
of Snrt
Waring Edges
Pnrnllito Fiber
uin
of Su facing
_
50
24
4
!
10so
195
45
692
VOL. III -1938 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 47-8-58
TABLE NO. 47-8-B-31INIML'M AND MAXIMUM
WEIGHTS OF GYPSUM WALLBOARD
PER 1000 SQUARE FEET
WEIGHT PER I(W SQ, FT. (Pounds)
THICKNESS
tInches) Minimum Maximum
°h 1 1300
W ISM
3154
(c) Length. The nominal length of one -fourth -inch (19••)
gypsum wallboard shall be from four feet (4'1 to twelve feet
(12'); and, for three -eighths -inch (R••), one -half-inch (12"),
and five -eighths -inch (§;,"1 board, from four feet i4•) to
fourteen feet (14') inclusive, with permissible variations of
plus or minus one-fourth inch (I:,").
(d) Weight. The weight of gypsum wallboard per one thou-
sand square feet (1,000 sq. ft.) shall conform to the require-
ments in Table No. 47-8-13.
See. 47.806. The surfaces of gypsum wallboard shall be Finish
true and free from imperfections that would render the wall-
board unfit for use with or without decoration. The edges and
ends shall be straight and solid. The corners shall be square
with a permissible variation of one-eighth inch 11."1 in the
full width of the board.
Sec. 47.807. Insulating gypsum wallboard shall meet all the Insulating
requirements, specified in this Standard and, in addition, the Gypsum
back surface shall be covered with pure bright -finished ah)mi- Wallboard
num foil.
The permeance of insulating gypsum wallboard shall not
exceed 0.30 permeance at 50 per cent relative humidity on the
face of the board, nor at zero per cent relative humidity on
the foil -covered back of the board.
See. 47.808. When shipped, gypsum wallboard shall be Packing and
kept dry and free from moisture. Marking
When shipped for resale, the name of the manufacturer and
the brand shall be legibly marked on each board or package.
573
VOL. M-1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 48-1-58
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE. STANDARD 48-1-58
Storage and Handling of Photographic and X-Ray
Nitrocellulose Films
Based on Pamphlet 41 (duly 15, 19811) of the
National Board of Fire Underwriters
See Section 4802, Uniform Building Code, Volume 1
Fiha of slow-burning or safety base (cellulose acetate) General
does not have a fire hazard characteristic of nitrocellulose
film. The use of film of slow-burning or safety base (cellu-
lose acetate) is recommended for hospitals and similar insti-
tutions, doctors" offices, X-ray laboratories and the like. The
cellulose acetate Sim (safety flim) is in a class with ordinary
newsprint paper in similar form and quantity in respect to
the hazard to life of its smoke and fumes in a fire. Where
large amounts are stored, the use of steel tiling cabinets is
recommended.
Where both kinds of film are used or stored at the same
location in any building the requirements for nitrocellulose
film shall apply.
These regulations based on available knowledge and field
experience prescribe such methods for protection against the
hazards of handling and storage of photographic and X-ray
nitrocellulose films as are judged to be of practicable appli-
cation in types of buildings and occupancies where such haz-
ards are encountered, but it should be recognized that in the
event of Are involving the decomposition of such quantities
of films as it is contemplated may be stored in vaults, cab-
inets or containers covered by these regulations, a hazard
to life remains depending upon the care and supervision
exercised, and the precautions taken in the handling of the
film.
Safety photographic and X-ray film (cellulose acetate
base) may be identified by the marking on the edge of the
film. This marking shows plainly before and after develop-
ing. Where Aim is not so marked it should be inspected to
determine whether it is of the safety acetate or nitrate type.
These regulations do not apply to:
(a) Film for amateur, photographic use in original pack.
ages of 'roll" and "film pack" films.
(b) Safety Alm (cellulose acetate base).
(c) Dental X-ray film.
(d) Establishments manufacturing photographic films and
storage incident thereto.
L General Storage of Unexposed Flims
See. 11. (a) When unexposed film in I.C.C. shipping con- Stores,
tainers exceeds in the aggregate five hundred cubic feet (500 Warehouses
CU. ft.), the room shall be protected by automatic sprinklers. and
(b) Where shelving used for storage of individual pack- Wholesale
ages not in I.C.C. shipping containers exceeds fifty cubic feet
Storage
(50 cu. ft.) in capacity the room shall be equipped with
automatic sprinklers.
(c) Storage not in I.C.C. shipping containers in any fire
section equipped with automatic sprinklers may be permitted
up to an aggregate of Ave hundred cubic feet (500 cu. ft.).
'1'• 579
t .aa,t. tvt\1)A1tD #!i 1•aii VNII+'ORM BUtLDINO COOL,
Portrait sAd
Sec. 12. Storage of unexposed films shall be in unopened
C
l.C.C, shipping containers, in cabinets or fililtg drawers (or-
tiftufiaa
dinary wooden or metal filing saes permitted), on shelves
Sac. 21. (a) Storage of film negatives in basements ie
Prohibited.
located at least two feet (2') above the floor or in vented stor-
(b) Film negatives in storage or in process of handling
shall be kept in heavy manila envelopes, not exceeding 12
age vaults or outside storage houses, Where storage exceeds
fifty cubic feet (50 cu ft.), the room shall be equipped with
to an envelope. Expanding envelopes shall not be used.
Sec. 22. Film negatives shall be kept
automatic sprinklers, Where the aggregate not in I.C.C. ship.
in approved vented
cabinets (see Section 24) or in vented storage vaults or out-
side storage houses. Not
ping containers
shall be in exceeds
ented storage vault 1none hundred cubic feet
accordance
more than 250 pounds shall be
stored in any single cabinet. Where the flim stored exceeds
it ventedd
with
Section 25, or in an outside storage hone in accordance with
Section 26.
Hospitals and
See. 13. Storage of unexposed films shall be in unopened
Imumnook
I C.C. shipping containers or in approved cabinets vented to
the outside air or in vented storage vaults or
Na. of gf2e Approximate
NegWt a (Inches) Weight
(pound")
outside storage
houses. Only one,I.C.C, shipping container of each size shall
and X-ray
be opened at one time. Where the total aggregate exceeds
fifty cubic feet (50 cu. ft.), Storage shall be in
(Other sins is propoortion to area.) 40
Sec. 28. All film negatives shall be stored in approved
vented cabinets in
a vented
storage vault in accordance with Section 25, or in an outside
accordance with Se houses Aectlon 24 or in outside
vetdent to X-ray be
cabinets s se.
storage house in accordance with Section 26.
VOL. R1-1858 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 48-1-58
Notet Under average conditions of storage of film in Vented
manila envelopes (six films to envelope), one cubic foot (I Cabinets
cu. ft.) of storage represents approximately 20 pounds of (Contd.)
film, due allowance being made for space not occupied by
film. Actually, one cubic foot (1 cu. ft.) of film negatives in
envelopes weighs from 60 to 64 pounds.
(c) Cabinets shall be equipped with at least one automatic
sprinkler in each compartment (unit) unless specifically ap-
proved for use without automatic sprinklers.
(d) Each cabinet shall be provided with a vent to the
outside of the building. For a cabinet of ten cubic feet (10
cu. ft.) inside volume the vent opening shall be not less than
fifty-six square inches (56 sq. in.). For smaller cabinets the
vent area shall be in proportion to the volume, except that
no cabinet shall have a vent area of less than fourteen
square inches (14 sq. in.). The vent of the cabinet'shall be so
constructed or protected by a substantial metal grid as to
prevent stoppage of vent in case of combustion or decolopo-
sWon of film contents.
The vent areas given in these regulations are based upon
a vent area for a pipe length of ten feet (HY). For longer
lengths due allowance shall be made for friction loss and
turns in pipe.
The outlet of each vent shall be above roof and at least
twenty-five feet (25') from doors, windows, other openings or
Are escapes.
Vent flues shall be of construction equivalent to that re-
quired for chimneys, or of riveted sheet metal not thinner
than No. 18 U.S, gauge; if inside the building they shall be
covered with one inch (1") of approved heat insulating
material and not nearer than nine inches (0") to any com-
bustible material.
See. 25. (a) No vault shall exceed seven hundred fifty cubic Vented
feet (750 cu. ft.) in actual storage capacity, including aisles. storage
(b) The floor and walls of every vault shall be made of Ind )
brick at least eight inches (8") thick; or of reinforced con-
crete at least six inches (6") thick. In fireproof buildings the
building floor may be used as the floor of the vault if equiva-
lent in fire resistance to the requirements given above. vaults
shall be supported by masonry or steel of sufficient strength
to carry the load safely. Beams shall rest at both ends
on steel girders, iron or steel columns, or walls or piers of
masonry. The supports shall afford at least four hours' pro-
tection as determined by U.B.C. Standard No. 43-1, for Fire
Tests of Building Construction and Materials. Hollow Mile
shall not be used for foundation walls.
Note: Where the design of the buildings is such that an
excessive floor load would result from having the film vault
filled with water, the film vault shall be provided with one
or more scuppers, giving a total area of outlet equal to three
square inches (3 sq, in.) for each sprinkler head installed
in the film vault. A depth of ten feet (10') of water will
result in a floor load of 626 pounds per square foot.
(c) The roof of vault if inside the building shall be an inde-
pendent reinforced concrete roof at least six inches (6")
577
2. Storage of Flim Negatives
(The following paragraphs apply only to film negatives
[deve?)ped film), for unexposed films
paragraphs 11 to 13
Apply
Clenerall
Sac. 21. (a) Storage of film negatives in basements ie
Prohibited.
(b) Film negatives in storage or in process of handling
shall be kept in heavy manila envelopes, not exceeding 12
Portrait and
to an envelope. Expanding envelopes shall not be used.
Sec. 22. Film negatives shall be kept
CsmmereW
S
in approved vented
cabinets (see Section 24) or in vented storage vaults or out-
side storage houses. Not
more than 250 pounds shall be
stored in any single cabinet. Where the flim stored exceeds
it ventedd
25)x, oorriin detacunds
heee Section
structure or roof vault (se Section 26).
Note: The following table
may be used as a guide in com-
puting the weight of film.
Na. of gf2e Approximate
NegWt a (Inches) Weight
(pound")
l 14 x 17
low 10 x 12 Ss
and
(Other sins is propoortion to area.) 40
Sec. 28. All film negatives shall be stored in approved
vented cabinets in
accordance with Se houses Aectlon 24 or in outside
vetdent to X-ray be
cabinets s se.
Onkes,
rooms for currentrOved
of 500 Pounds Of film Storage in excess
In
shall. be
and -ray
an outside
accordance with Section storage lilocated on
hous
the roof. Vaults shall not be located
Vented
within the building.
Sec. 24. (a) No single cabinet
Cabinets
shall exceed ten cubic feet
(10 cu, ft.) capacity. Not over 250 pounds of film shall be
kept
any single cabinetNoe.
fI Each insulated vented unit is considered as a single
cabinet.
(b) All cabinets shall be of approved insulated construction.
576
VOL. R1-1858 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 48-1-58
Notet Under average conditions of storage of film in Vented
manila envelopes (six films to envelope), one cubic foot (I Cabinets
cu. ft.) of storage represents approximately 20 pounds of (Contd.)
film, due allowance being made for space not occupied by
film. Actually, one cubic foot (1 cu. ft.) of film negatives in
envelopes weighs from 60 to 64 pounds.
(c) Cabinets shall be equipped with at least one automatic
sprinkler in each compartment (unit) unless specifically ap-
proved for use without automatic sprinklers.
(d) Each cabinet shall be provided with a vent to the
outside of the building. For a cabinet of ten cubic feet (10
cu. ft.) inside volume the vent opening shall be not less than
fifty-six square inches (56 sq. in.). For smaller cabinets the
vent area shall be in proportion to the volume, except that
no cabinet shall have a vent area of less than fourteen
square inches (14 sq. in.). The vent of the cabinet'shall be so
constructed or protected by a substantial metal grid as to
prevent stoppage of vent in case of combustion or decolopo-
sWon of film contents.
The vent areas given in these regulations are based upon
a vent area for a pipe length of ten feet (HY). For longer
lengths due allowance shall be made for friction loss and
turns in pipe.
The outlet of each vent shall be above roof and at least
twenty-five feet (25') from doors, windows, other openings or
Are escapes.
Vent flues shall be of construction equivalent to that re-
quired for chimneys, or of riveted sheet metal not thinner
than No. 18 U.S, gauge; if inside the building they shall be
covered with one inch (1") of approved heat insulating
material and not nearer than nine inches (0") to any com-
bustible material.
See. 25. (a) No vault shall exceed seven hundred fifty cubic Vented
feet (750 cu. ft.) in actual storage capacity, including aisles. storage
(b) The floor and walls of every vault shall be made of Ind )
brick at least eight inches (8") thick; or of reinforced con-
crete at least six inches (6") thick. In fireproof buildings the
building floor may be used as the floor of the vault if equiva-
lent in fire resistance to the requirements given above. vaults
shall be supported by masonry or steel of sufficient strength
to carry the load safely. Beams shall rest at both ends
on steel girders, iron or steel columns, or walls or piers of
masonry. The supports shall afford at least four hours' pro-
tection as determined by U.B.C. Standard No. 43-1, for Fire
Tests of Building Construction and Materials. Hollow Mile
shall not be used for foundation walls.
Note: Where the design of the buildings is such that an
excessive floor load would result from having the film vault
filled with water, the film vault shall be provided with one
or more scuppers, giving a total area of outlet equal to three
square inches (3 sq, in.) for each sprinkler head installed
in the film vault. A depth of ten feet (10') of water will
result in a floor load of 626 pounds per square foot.
(c) The roof of vault if inside the building shall be an inde-
pendent reinforced concrete roof at least six inches (6")
577
.'TANDARD 48.148 I'NIFOR31 BUILDING CODE
van" thick: in fireproof building, where the floor above is equiva-
storage lent to this. it may serve as the roof if side walls are rigidly
VAUDS tied into it: in construction of this type, a false ceiling con-
(. ) struction of metal lath and cement plaster one inch (1")
it d.) track, or the equivalent, and with no openings to the con-
cealed space above, may be used to limit the total interior
vault space to seven hundred fifty cubic feet (750 cu. ft.).
Vent may extend through this false ceiling and concealed
space.
(df Vadis shall not be. provided with skylights or glass
windows other than as specified under vents.
(el Proximity to boilers, stacks, or other sources of heat
shall be avoided. Where heating is necessary to prevent
freexmg. coils shall be provided at the ceiling over aisle
space. Pipes and radiators shall be so screened that film can -
riot come within two feet IT) of them. Only hot water or
low pressure steam heating shall be allowed, with automatic
control limiting pressure to 10 pounds per square inch and
temperature to not in excess of 100° F. No indirect heating,
nor arrangement employing fans for air circulation, shall
beemployed.
(f) Door openings in vault shall be protected by an ap-
proved vault door of four-hour or longer classification. It
shall be kept closed except when in use.
In lieu of the above, door opening may be protected on each
side by an approved fire door suitable for use in Class B
intuatinns. The interior door shall be automatic. The outer
ej,,er shall be of the saving type and close into an approved
fmn:t It shall be self-closing, and if fastened open shall be
arranged to dose automatically in case of fire originating in
or out of vault.
'Note: A vault door, while not certain of being kept shut,
veill provide superior protection against the passage of fumes.
+g, Films in vaults shall be stored upon shelves, or in
cabuets which are designed to permit the effective distri-
buti,'n of water from automatic sprinklers and are speci-
fically approved for use in vaults. Ordinary filing cabinets
s ;all not be used in vaults. If wooden shelving is used this
shall be of slatted construction, with slats not over four
inches ;,1"r wide and spaced at least one inch (111) apart.
If steel shelving is used, the shelves shall be perforated, to
the amount of at least 20 per cent of the shelf area. Shelves
of iron pipe, angles or similar construction shall have open
spaces to the amount of at least 20 per cent of the shelf
area. Vertical incombustible partitions, equivalent in heat in-
sulation and durability to three -eighths -inch (3's") hard
asbestos, shall be provided to divide shelving into sections
not over three feet (3') wide and so placed as not to obstruct
distribution from sprinkler heads.
(hi Each vault shall be equipped with approved automatic
sprinklers or with an open head sprinkler system controlled
by heat actuated devices, the system to be approved for this
{ pirt;—lar a-. Sprinklers shall be arranged according to
!'.B.C. Standard No. 38-1-58 in so far as applicable. The area
t„ b•- , ver,•d by each sprinkler head shall not exceed fifteen
square. feet +15 sq. ft,1 of floor area. Proper baffles shall be
pro d,d between heads.
,j.... .578
l :
VOL. III -1958 EDITION I.B.C. STANDARD U-1-58
Substantial metal grids of approximately two-inch (2") Vented
mesh shall be installed to prevent clogging or stoppage of Storage
vent and piling of film above the top of the shelving or Vaults
cabinets higher than two feet (2') below the sprinklers, and (Inside)
thus interfering with distribution of water. (Cont'd.)
(I) Each vault shall separately vent to the outer air, with
a vent having a minimum effective sectional area of one
hundred fifty square inches (150 sq. in.) per 1,000 pounds of
film capacity. For a standard vault of 750 cubic feet ( 750 cu.
ft.) containing 10,000 pounds of film the vent opening shall be
not less than fifteen hundred square inches (1500 sq. in.).
The outlet of each vent shall be above roof and at least
twenty-five feet (25') from doors, windows, other openings,
or fire escapes.
(j) All horizontal or vertical flues inside of the building
shall be of five -inch (5") reinforced concrete or of a con-
struction equivalent to that of chimneys.
Exterior metal flues shall be of a construction equivalent
to that of smokestacks.
(k) Each vent opening directly through an exterior wall
shall be protected against the weather by single thickness
glass (one -sixteenth inch (,�") thick), painted a dark color,
or by other incombustible fragile material, in a sash ar-
ranged to open outward automatically in case of fire by the
use of an approved releasing device placed inside the film
storage, The area of the glass shall be of the effective
sectional area of the vent opening. No pane of glass shall
be smaller than two hundred square inches (200 sq. in.).
A light wire screen not coarser than one -eighth -inch ( rls"1
mesh shall also be placed over each vent, so arranged as not
to interfere with the automatic operation of the sash. Bars'
or screen, if used to prevent burglary or injury to contents,
shall not have a mesh of less than four -inch (4"), shall be
located inside the light wire screen, and shall give a net
opening equal to that called for under paragraph W.
See, 29. (a) Buildings should preferably be located at least Outside
one hundred feet (100') away from any other building, or Storage
combustible material. If on a roof, or within one hundred feet Houses
(100') of any other building or combustible material stored
in the open, the building shall have all walls equivalent in
fire resistance to four inches (4") of concrete, or three -cell
eight -inch (8^) tile. Door openings in such walls shall be pro-
tected by approved fire doors suitable for use in Class B situ-
ations. Skylights shall be protected in such a manner as to
prevent radiated heat or flying brands from igniting the
contents of the building.
(b) Buildings exceeding seven hundred fifty cubic foot
(750 cu. ft.) capacity shall be divided into sections of not
over seven hundred fifty cubic feet (750 cu.ft.l by unpierced
walls of construction equivalent to that required for the
exterior walls.
(c) In hospitals access to the outside storage rooms shall
be by means of a balcony or vestibule oven to the outside
air, with no direct communication between the room and the
building.
579
U.BC. STANDARD 48.2.38 UVIFORM BUILDING CODE
VOL. HI -1938 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 48-2-58
air, with no direct Communication between the mom and the
See. 48.202. This standard provides reasonable provisions Scope
building.for
Storage25, para-
(d) Heating shalt be is accordance with Section
the storage and handling of nitrate motion picture film,
based on minimum requirements for safety to life and
( d) d) (e).
property from fire and gives general provisions regarding
(a) Interior equipment shall be in accordance with Section
the storage and handling ofo film and special provisions for
such occupancies as motion picture theaters, exchange;,
as. patagt aph (8)•
laboratories, and studios which apply in addition to any and
Of 7f the atot'ag's house is located within one hundred feet
all of the general provisions which may also be applicable.
(100') of any other building, automatic sprinkler protection
The grouping of the special provisions under the heading
shall be provided in accordance with Section 25, paragraph
of special occupancies is merely for convenience in the appli-
W.
cation of these standards. Any particular process or opera -
(g) Vents shall be in accordance with Section 25, para-
tion in any type of occupancy shall be governed by the pro -
graph (1). 3. General
visions given for that process or operation, whether under
(Applies to both unexposed films and film negatives.)
the heading of that occupancy or any other heading, unless
Sea iL (b) Only incandescent electric lights shall be per-
otherwise specifically provided herein. For example, any
process in a studio, which from the standpoint of the author.
mitted. In storage rooms these shall be protected with either
ity enforcing these standards is similar to some process
substantial wire guards or vapor -proof globes, or both.
covered under laboratories, shall be governed by the provi-
(c) The use of portable lights on extension cords in any
sions for that process given under laboratories.
storage room or vault is prohibited,
(d) Muninstors shall be so built that the diffusing glass
See. 48.203. Wherever used in this Standard, the following Definitlon�
does not become overheated. There shall be no unnecessary
words shall be construed as having the following meanings:
display of negatives in lighted illuminators.
Sec. 38. Smoking shall be prohibited in moms where film
See. .APPROVED. "Approved" refers to approval by
is handled or stored. Conspicuous "No Smoking" sigma shall
Building
the Building OfCAB
ARCHIVAL CABINET. A cabinet designed for the storage
be posted in prominent places.
of high value or other permanent record flim in which indi-
Sec. SL No films shall be stored within two feet (29 of
vidual reels are placed in insulated compartments.
steam pipes, radiators, chimneys, or other sources of heat.
ARCHIVAL FILM. Film of value for record purposes
Sec. St. Film driers, if used, shall be of approved type,
which will be kept in permanent storage.
ARCHIVAL RACKS. Racks intended for use in archi-
See. 35. First aid fire appliances of types using water or
val vaults for the storage of high value or permanent record
water solutions shall be provided for the protection of all
film. Such racks are constructed so that individual roils or
rooms containing film.
groups of two rolls are placed in insulated compartments.
Note: The following types of extinguisher are considered
In certain cases a maximum of three rolls in a single con -
suitable: soda -acid, pump tank, calcium chloride, and loaded
tainer may be placed in an insulated compartment.
stream. Small hose equipment is likewise suitable.
Sec. 4CABINET. A cabinet constructed and equipped
See. SO. Discarded film shall be stored and handled in the
e with the requirements of Section 48.216.
in accordance
same manner as other film until removed from the premises.
CELLULOSE NITRATE FILM. Motion picture or sound
recording film coated on a support or base consisting es
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 48-2-58
sentially of cellulose nitrate. The terms "cellulose nitrate
"niUu-
film" or "nitrate film" are preferable to the term
Nitrocellulose Motion Picture Film
cellulose." However, for practical purposes, the terms are
Based on the National Board of Fire Underwriters
synonymous. This film may be in the form of unexposed film.
Pamphlet No. 40 (November, 1953)
positives, negatives, scrap, or used film.
See Section 4803, Uniform Building Code, Volume I
See. 48.206. DECOMPOSITION VENT. A vent to permit
GENERAL PROVISIONS
Application See. 48.201. This Standard applies to storage and handling
escape of gases resulting from partial burning or decom-
position of film,
of cellulose nitrate motion picture film, hereafter referred
to as "nitrate film," in all places except establishments
manufacturing such film and storage incident thereto. It is
48.207. EXCHANGE RACKS. Packs intended for use
distribu-
not intended to apply to the storage and handling of film
in vaults for the storage of cellulose nitrate film in
tion and for theater use, for projection. and other film es -
r having a cellulose acetate or other approved slow -burning
base nor to photographic and X-ray film. (See separate
change purposes. In such racks film is stored in curs placed
not be
regulations on Photographic and X-ray film; U.B.C. Standard
on edge and racks are so constructed that there ti�iL
more than a three-foot B' i interval between �•ertucA baruiers.
48-1-58 }
EXPLOSION VENT. A vent to relieve explosion pres-
t ' 580
fr
581
I:'.B.C, STANDARD 48-2-M UNIFORM BUILDING CODE.
sures resulting from ignition of a mixture of decomposition
gases and air.
Save. 48.208. PARTITION. Except where some other form of
construction is specified, a partition constructed in accordance
xith the specifications given in Section 48.211.
tiec.
U-2.10. STANDARD ROLL. A roll of film 35 mm. [one
and three -eighths -inches )lav,") wide and one thousand feet
� 1.((00', long, weighing approximately five pounds], used as a
unit in calculating the weight of film.
NOTE: This definition is intended to establish a meas-
ure of length and weight and is not designed to prohibit
the use of double rolls (two thousand feet (2,0001)) of
film in theaters and exchanges.
Ser. 48.210. VAULT. A vault constructed and equipped in
accordance with the requirements of Sections 48.218 or
4.4.219.
VOL. M-1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 48-2-S8
in existing rooms or vaults used for storage and handling Buildings:
STORAGE AND HANDLING
•
tier. 48.211. (a) Storage. Nitrate motion picture film shall
CuMitruction
be stored or handled only, in buildings of fire -resistive con-
sul
struction. Refer to Sections 48.21.9 and 48.219 for film vault
Arrangement
construction.
1b, Partitions. All rooms in which nitrate motion picture
film is stored or handled, except motion picture projection
rooms and film wauits, shall be separated from each other
and from all other parts of the building by partitions of
suitable stability and having at least one-hour fire -resistive
rating as determined by the Standard Method of Fire Tests
of Building Construction and
43-1-581. Materials iL'.B.C. Standard
Partitions shall be continous from floor to ceiling and
securely anchored to Walls, floor and ceiling.
Openings in partitions shall be protected by approved fire
doors of a type suitable for use in Class "C" situations.
(e1 Flits. It is essential that all rooms in which film is
handled be provided with adequate aisle space and safe
Electrical
means of egress. Aisle space shall not be less than thirty
Equipment
inches i 3o" 1 clear wherever walking is necessary. Rooms in
which film is handled and in which more than two persons
weak shalt have two or more exits, remote from each other.
Doors shall swing in direction of travel. Every exit shall
be marked "Exit" by an illuminated sign with letters not
lees than six inches (6"1 high.
4d, Explosion Venting. Explosion vents shall be provided
for roorns or vaults used for storing and handling nitrate
film. except projection rooms, rewind rooms (Section 48.221)
cr rooms where the total quantity of film not in vented
cabinets will not exceed 20 standard rolls.
Explosion vents shall consist of approved explosion vent-
ing sash or equally effective vent construction acceptable
to the authority having jurisdiction. Vents shall be pro-
vided in rhe ratio of one square foot (i sq, ft.) of vent area
for each fifty <atble feet 150 cu. ft.) of room or vault volume.
Wherever practicable, explosion vents shall be provided
t „
saz
VOL. M-1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 48-2-S8
in existing rooms or vaults used for storage and handling Buildings:
of nitrate film.
('enstruction
(e) Space for Workers. There shall be at least thirtand
y-
five square feet (35 sq, ft,) of floor area for each worker in
Arrangemern
every room. Not over 15 persons shall work at one time ro
any one room (not including the stage of motion patn,e
studios) in which nitrate film is handled.
(f) Tables and Racks. Tables and racks used in conne,-
tion with the handling of film (joining, inspection, and a,_
sembling tables, for example) shall be incombustible, nr
shall be of wood construction with no member less than one
and one-half inch (1?") in least dimension, It is desirable
that they be kept at least four inches (4'•1 away from any
radiator or heating apparatus. Tables shalt not he pro%idel
with racks or shelves underneath them, which might be used
for keeping film or other materials.
See. 48.212. (a) Artificial Illumination. In not, room of
Electrical
vault where film is handled or stored, artificial illumination
Equipment
shall be restricted to incandescent or fluorescent electric
lights, except that are lights or other forms of electric lights
may be used in studios.
(b) Incandescent Light Fixtures. Light fixtures shall be
firmly set in place and provided with guards or located to
avoid mechanical injury. Incandescent lights shall be In -
tected by guarded globes or other protection :which will
prevent contact of film with the light bulb or heated meta).
All lights shall be equipped with keyless sockets and operatr,i
by wall switches.
(c) Fluorescent Tubes. Fluorescent tubes shall be pro-
vided with a glass plate below the tube and located at ceiling
height well away from contact with film. If the glass plait
type of fixture is not used, wire guards or other incombus-
tible devices shalt be provided to prevent breakage and keep
the tubes in place.
(d) Exit Signs. Exit signs shall be placed at the exits
of all darkrooms and shall comply with the requirements of
Section 48.211,
(e) Portable Lamps. Portable electric lights on extension
cords shall not be used in any room in which film is handlod
or stored, other than the stage of motion picture stiah—
except that in emergency such portable lamps may be user,
if equipped with approved keyless sockets, heavy glass
globes, and metal protective lamp guards, and having ort,
of the Hard Service (type S) or Junior Hard 5erv1 e ctyp«�
SJ) varieties, with suitable locking plugs. Such lights =h:al
operate at surface temperatures not in excess of 160
degrees F,
(f) Motors, Motors shall be of dust -tight type or .hall be
of a totally enclosed type and located or arranged so alm
cannot come in contact with them.
(g) Projectors. Motion picture projectors and other as-
sociated electrical equipment shall be of approved type and
safeguarded in accordance with the requirements of the 1, ca'.
Electrical Code.
583
U.&C. STANDARD 48-238 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Heating
S,P- 4&213- (a+ Types. Artificial heating in any building or
tetu at
room, other than a vault, in which motion picture film is used,
handled, or stored, shall be restricted to steam not exceeding
I5 pounds pressure or hot water, provided, however, that this
shall not be construed as prohibiting the installation of an
indirect system employing high pressure steam, when the
radiators or heating coils of such
system are not located in
the room or rooms to be heated. Heat -generating apparatus
shall be in a separate room.
EXCEPTION: Approved electric steam radiators oper-
ated at not to exceed 15 pounds pressure and protected
with wire mesh guards as required below may be used,
provided installation is of the fixed (nonportable) type.
a b n Piping and Radiators. All steam pipes within six feet
(6'r of the floor, and where passing through partitions or
racks or near woodwork, shall be covered with adequate
approved pipe covering. All radiators, heating coils, and
pipes and returns that are near the floor or are so located as
to permit any combustible material, waste or dirt to
come in
contact therewith shall be guarded and protected by means
of one-fourth inch (%,,) mesh galvanized steel wire cloth
(hardware cloth) No. 20 B. & S. gauge, or by its equivalent.
The bottoms of such guards shall be arranged
so as to lift
up for cleaning purposes and the tops to slope so that guards
cannot be used as shelves. Guards shall be so constructed
that no film can come within four inches (4")of
the heating
surface, and shall be made with a substantia] metal frame-
work which will prevent the
wire mesh being forced against
the radiator or pipes.
(c) Duet Systems. Air conditioning, warm air heating,
air cooling and ventilating systems employing ducts shall
be installed in accordance with U,B.C. Standard 30-1-58,
Dampers. In addition to the fire dampers required by said
standard, automatic fire dampers
shall also be located at such
Points as may be necessary so that, as far as the duct system
is
concerned, each room in which film is handled is cut off by
dampers from ever), other room. Any system used for air
con -
it finning a film vault shall be entirely independent, with no
duct connecting to any other vault
or room except that con-
ditioned air may be supplied to a film vault from a central
source through a fire -resistive check valve or swing damper
in the supply air pipe. This valve
or damper shall he located
within the vault wall or the pipe insulated so that fire within
the vault will be confined. Such
a system shall have supply
air only without return.
NOTE: This does not prohibit a unit conditioner sup•
plying only a single vault with both
supply and return
ducts, such unit conditioners to be outdoors or other safe
location immediately adjoining the vault.
Fire
Protection
Sec, 48.214. ia) Automatic Sprinklers. Every room where
nitrate film is stored or handled in
quantities greater than 50
pounds (10 standard rolls), except in motion picture booths
f
or rooms and rewinding rooms connected therewith, shall be
equipped with an approved
system of automatic fire -extin-
guishing systems installed in accordance with requirements
for extra hazard occupancies as set forth in U.B.C. standard
35-1-58. Buildings or sections
t
of buildings used as exchanges,
`
1
584
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 48-2-58
laboratories, or studios shall be equipped with automatic fire- Fire
extinguishing systems, as provided under Sections 48.222, Protection
48.223 and 48.224. It is recommended that buildings used (Cont'd.)
for the storage or handling of film (except small areas pos-
sessing no fire hazard and so located that there is little op-
portunity of combustible gases entering the areal be com-
pletely equipped with auomatic sprinklers.
NOTE: While this provision does not require auto-
matic fire -extinguishing systems in projection rooms,
.fire experience indicates that they do provide desirable
protection, and their use is advised.
Protection for other than film cabinets and vaults may
utilize automatic sprinklers of the regular type or auto-
matic spray sprinklers. Protection for film cabinets and
vaults (archival or other than archival) may utilize regular
sprinklers, automatic spray sprinklers, or spray type fixed
nozzles of the open or automatic type. The requirements set
forth in U.B.C. Standard 38-1-58, shall apply where open
sprinklers or sealed sprinklers are used with preaction or
deluge systems.
(b) Sprinkler Spacing. The area protected in sections
where nitrate film is handled shall not exceed sixty-four
square feet (64 sq. ft.) per sprinkler, with sprinklers and
lines not over eight feet l8') apart; provided, that in the
stage section of motion picture studios the spacing of sprin-
klers shall be such that the area protected shall not exceed
eighty square feet (80 sq. ft.) per sprinkler. In existing build-
ings where spacing of sprinklers exceeds that specified above,
the Building Official may require the installation of additional
sprinklers wherever the hazard of some machine, process. or
accumulation of film warrants such protection.
(c) Water Supplies for Sprinklers. Water supply shall
be provided acceptable to the Building Official.
Water supplies for automatic sprinklers shall be based
on 20 gallons a minute per sprinkler for 20 minutes for the
total number of sprinklers in one vault, plus 25 per cent if
the number of sprinklers in the communicating fire area.
(d) First -Aid Fire Appliances. Every room in which ni-
trate film is stored or handled, except film vaults, shall be
provided with first-aid fire appliances of types using water
or water solutions, In certain situations, first-aid fire appli-
ances may be omitted in particular areas where remaining
to fight a fire would result in a severe life hazard, Instruc-
tions should be posted regarding the types of fire that should
be handled by first-aid fire appliances. The Building Otficigl
shall be consulted.
NOTE: Small hose equipment is recommended, and the
following types of extinguishers are considered suitablo:
soda acid, cartridge -operated water, anti -freeze, pump
tank, and loaded stream.
See. 4821:5. Nitrate motion picture film, not in process or Film Storage
being worked on, shall be stored as follows: 1. Except as Requirements
provided in this Section, amounts in excess of 25 pounds i five
standard trolls), but not in excess of 1,000 pounds (200
standard rolls), shall be kept in approved cabinets or vaults.
2. Amounts in excess of 1,000 pounds shall be keptin
vaults.
585
U. R. C. STANDARD 418-2-58 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
3. Unexposed nitrate film enclosed in the original, un-
broken, shipping cases, conforming to I,C.C. regulations
shall be kept in a sprinklered room. If the amount exceeds
7W pounds ;150 standard rolls 1, it shall be stored in a mors
used for no other purpose. Sprinkler spacing shall provide
not less than one sprinkler for each sixty-four square feet
64 sq, ft, ),
4. Archival nitrate film shall be stored in archival cab-
inets or vaults tinder the limitations in this Section.
Film See. 48.216, sa) General. Cabinets provided with self-clos-
C s: Ing doors used in connection with theaters and exchanges or
similar non -archival use shall be insulated or hollow metal
construction, including doors, or may be built into the build-
ing with a type of construction complying with requirements
for partitions Is" Section 48.2111 if otherwise conforming
to the requirements of this Standard. Doors shall be self-
closing and provided with three-point locks.
(b) Capacity. Cabinets shall have a capacity not in ex-
cess of 375 pounds (75 standard rolls).
(cI Shelves. Shelves in the cabinet shall be of incombus-
tible insulating material not less than three-eighths inch
?k I in total thickness or of hardwood not less than one -
inch (11i thick.
Shelvcabinet. Theerrelshall tightly
a clearan clearance to the
of at least one sides
the
(11)
between front of shelf and inside of door.
Shelves shall be one inch (1") wider, with the tolerance
of one -fourth -inch 04") than the diameter of the largest
roll stored in the cabinet. Stops or bars shall be provided
so that film cans shall not be stored with the front edge
less than three-fourths inch (%") from the front edge
of the shelf. There shall be no thumbholes or other indenta-
tion in the shelves which will allowany part of the con-
tainers to project forward of the front edge of the shelf.
`d" Decomposition Vents. Each cabinet having a capacity
of over 50 pounds of film 410 standard rolls) shall be pro-
vided with a vent to the outside of the building. The vent
shall have a minimum effective sectional area of fourteen
sForquare inches (14 sq. ns of ,) Per 100 pounds of film capacity.
to take calenre friction osis and urnser iin the pipnecessary
Vent flues shall be of construction equivalent to No. 18
U. S. gauge riveted sheet steel, and where inside the building
shall be covered with one inch (1") of approved heat
lating material. insu-
)e) Sprinklers. Cabinets holding over 75 pounds of film
Ifs standard rolls) shall be provided with at least one auto-
matic sprinkler; provided, however, that a cabinet con-
structed so that each roll is in a separate compartment and
will hum out without communicating fire to film in any other
compartment need not be p
sprinkler. rovided with an automatic
Cabinets of not over 125 Pounds capacity for use in
Projection booths and rewinding rooms only, may have the
required sprinkler connected to the house supply by not less
5"
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 58-2-58
than one -inch (1") pipe, provided the water pressure at that
elevation be not less than 15 pounds, and is sufficient to
supply not less than 15 gallons a minute.
(f) Storage in Cabinets. Film in cabinets shall be in in-
dividual roll containers or in I.C.C. shipping containers.
Materials other than film shall not be stored in the same
cabinet with film. Where cabinets are provided with indi-
vidual insulated compartments for each roll, the individual
rolls stared therein need not be in cans or other containers.
Film cans, if placed on edge, shall be limited to not more
than 25 cans on a single shelf.
Film cans, if placed flat, shall be piled not more than
five cans high, with not more than three such piles on a
single shelf.
See. 48.217. (a) General. Archival cabinets shall be pro- Film Cabinets
vided with individual drawers or compartments, each hold- Archival
ing not more than two thousand feet ( 2,000') of film. Indi-
vidual compartments shall be separated by three-eighths
inch ($e") incombustible insulating material [three-eighths
inch (?¢") gypsum board is acceptable]. Each compartment
shall be provided with a hinged damper or equivalent device
to allow release of decomposing gases into the cabinet vent.
Such cabinet need not be provided with automatic sprinklers.
NOTE: For the storage of three -color separation film
the three roils may be in a single container in a com-
partment and shall not exceed a total of three thousand
feet (3,000') of film in each compartment.
(b) Vents, Each cabinet having a capacity of over 50
pounds of film 110 standard rolls shall be provided with a
vent to the outside of the building. The vent shall have a
minimum sectional area of fourteen square inches (14 sq, in. I
per 100 pounds of film capacity. For long lengths of vent
pipe a larger size may be necessary to take care of friction
loss and turns in the pipe.
Vent flues shall be constructed equivalent to No. 18
U. S. gauge riveted sheet steel, and where inside the building
shall be covered with one inch it") of approved heat insu-
lating material.
NOTE: Where the word "vault" is used in the follow-
ing paragraphs it shall mean a vault used for storage of
film in a film exchange for theater use or distribution.
See. 48.218. (a) Construction. Vaults shall be constructed in Vaults:
accordance with plans submitted to and approved by the Other than
Building Official. Archival
Vaults shall not exceed seven hundred and fifty cubic
feet (750 cu. ft.) in inside volume except archival vaults,
Section 48.219. Where the height of the vault ceiling results
in a vault having a volume greater than seven hundred and
fifty cubic feet (750 cu. ft.), a heavy wire screen of not less
than two-inch (2") mesh or its equivalent shall be installed
below the ceiling to limit the interior vault space to seven
hundred and fifty cubic feet (750 cu. ft.).
Walls and floor shall be constructed of not less than
eight inches (8") of brick, eight inches (8") of hollow ma-
sonry units plastered both sides or filled solidly, or of six
587
t'.B.C. RTA-NDARD 48.2-58 UNWORM BUILDING CODE
Va ,r
inches 46") of reinforced concrete, or twelve inches (12")
Other than
of hollow tile. where the masonry units used may contain
Arehivai
cracks or holes, the surface shall he plastered on both sides
(Cent'd.)
with a cement plaster to a thickness of at least one-half inch
Oz'). Equivalent construction which will provide equal fire
resistance and prevent escape of gases through wall cracks
may be used.
Vaults shall be supported by masonry or steel of sufficient
strength to carry the load safely. Beams shall rest at both
ends on steel girders, iron or steel columns, or walls or
piers of masonry. The supports shall afford at least four
hours protection as determined by U.B.C. Standard 43-1-58,
or be of a design approved by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory as affording equivalent fire resistance.
Where the ceiling of a vault is a bearing floor, it shall
be reinforced concrete at least six inches (8") thick,
or of equivalent construction. Where the roof of the build-
ing is the ceiling of the vault, and where dislodging parts
of the roof by explosion will not create an undue hazard to
surrounding buildings or be apt to cause personal injury, the
roof may be of lightweight incombustible construction such
as asbestos cement board or gypsum plank and may serve
as an explosion vent.
NOTE: Where this light type of roof construction is
used, parapets and wing walls shall be provided where
needed to prevent transmission of fire from vault to
vault or to another part of the building by roof failure.
A wing wall or parapet extending three feet (3') above
the roof will provide this protection.
Vaults shall be provided with suitable drains or scuppers
to the outside of the building or to corridors where extending
to outdoors is impractical.
Proximity to stacks and other sources of heat shall be
avoided.
ib) Doors. Door openings shall be protected with ap-
proved fire doors, one on each face of the wall except in the
case of openings directly to the outdoors.
NOTE: Vaults may have two door openings. Such an
arrangement is often a great convenience, as in labor-
atories, where the vault is located between rooms and
used for the temporary storage of film in process.
Doors shall be of the type suitable for use in Class "B"
situations. The interior door shall be a sliding fire door ar-
ranged for automatic operation. The outer door shall be
of the swinging type and close into an approved frame or
be otherwise made tight to prevent the passage of flame
around the edges. It shall be self-closing, and if fastened
open shall be arranged to close automatically in case of fire
originating in or out of the vault. Approved quick -operating
devices for closing vault doors are recognized as having ad-
vantages over the fusible link, and their use is recommended.
(c) Decomposition Vents. Each vault shall be provided
with an independent vent having a minimum effective sec-
tional area of two hundred square inches (200 sq. in.) per
1,000 pounds of film capacity [equivalent to one square inch
rt ) for each standard roll] except that in construction
d with explosion vents (see Section 48.211), the
588
VOL. I11-1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 48-2-58
decomposition vent may be omitted. Existing vaults shall Vaults
have an effective minimum sectional area of at least one Other than
hundred and forty square inches (140 sq. in.) per 1,000 Archival
pounds of film capacity. The vent area for a standard seven (Contd.)
hundred and fifty cubic foot (750 cu. ft.) vault of new con-
struction shall be not less than two thousand square inches
(2,000 sq. in.).
NOTE: In determining the proper vent opening, allow-
ance must be made for the window frame and sash, as
the area of the glass is considered the effective sectional
area of the vent opening.
Vent flues inside the building shall be constructed of
five inches (5") of reinforced concrete or of a construction
equivalent to that required for smoke chimneys. Exterior
flues shall be of a construction equivalent to that of smoke-
stacks for solid or liquid fuel.
If it is necessary to construct such vents longer than
twenty-five feet (25') proper allowance shall be made for
frictional loss and the area increased progressively to insure
adequate venting. Such cases shall be regarded as special
and subject to approval of the Building Official.
The outlet of each vent shall be above the roof and
where vents discharge horizontally, a deflector wall or other
device shall be provided to deflect gases upwards. Vents
shall be located at least fifty feet (50') horizontally from
any window or other opening exposed thereby and a distance
of at least twenty-five feet (25') from any fire escape on
the same or higher level.
Vaults, especially those having a vent in the form of a
window, shall be arranged in some manner which will protect
the film in the vault against ignition by rays of the sun.
whenever the film in the vault is exposed to direct rays of
the sun entering through the vent. This may be done by
painting the glass in the vent opening a dark color. Film in
vaults shall also be protected against ignition by radiated
heat entering through the vent opening, as from an exposure
fire, whenever the vent is severely exposed by buildings or
storage of combustible material, or by other openings in
the same wall.
Each vent shall be protected against the weather by single
thickness glass one -sixteenth -inch (1/16") thick, in a sash
arranged to open automatically in case of fire by the means
of an approved releasing device placed inside the vault or
by a hinged hollow metal or insulated vent panel equipped
with an approved releasing device placed inside the vault.
The use of approved quick operating devices is recommended.
The vents shall be arranged to open by both temperature
operation and by internal pressure of five pounds per square
foot. The area of the glass or of the insulated panel shall be
the effective sectional area of the vent opening. No pane of
glass shall be smaller than two hundred square inches (200
sq. in.). Protection equivalent to the above may be accepted
in lieu thereof.
A light wire screen not coarser than one -eighth -inch i'H")
mesh may be placed in each vent. No bars or screens other
than this light insect screen shall be placed in vent openings.
589
VJLC, STANDARD 48.2-M UNWORM BUILDING CODE
vauft
Where there is a possibility of fire being transmitted from
001'" than
one vault to another, or to another building, through open
A
skylights. glass windows, light roof panels, or venting de-
Woa4`d.)
vices, adequate provision shall be made to prevent this pos-
sibility. This may be done by the provision of extended wing
walls or roof parapets between such openings.
Vaults shall be provided with suitable drains or scuppers
to the outside of the building or to corridors where extending
to outdoors is impractical.
) it ) Pardo Racks in new film vaults shall be of hardwood
or incombustible insulating material and shall consist of
shelves tightly fitted to walls and vertical baffles. Vertical
baffles shall be of incombustible insulating material at least
three -eighths -inch i %") thick, spaced so as to divide racks
into sections not over three feet 43') wide. The shelves shall
be at least one inch 11") wider than the diameter of the
largest container stored. Metal supports may be used to keep
containers in place. Open racks shall not be used in new
construction except for vaults intended for the storage of
film in standard I.C.C. containers or in insulated boxes.
+e) Sprinklers. In new, vaults fire protection shall be
provided by means of a standard wet pipe sprinkler system,
or where speed of operation is important a deluge system
may be used if it will be adequately maintained.
Sprinkler protection utilizing regular automatic sprinklers
or open sprinklers of the regular pattern shall be calculated
on the basis of not less than one sprinkler for each sixty-two
and one-half cubic feet (62t_ cu. ft.) of the total interior
volume of the vault. The minimum number of sprinklers re-
quired for a standard seven hundred and fifty cubic feet (750
cu. ft.) vault shall be not less than 12. Sprinklers shall be
arranged to provide adequate coverage over the tops and
fronts of shelving. Where sealed sprinklers are used baffles
shall be installed between each sprinkler. Baffles shall be of
sheet steel of at least No. 24 U.S. Standard gauge or may be
of other acceptable incombustible material. Baffles shall be
of substantial construction rigidly fastened in place and shall
extend from the ceiling to a level at least four inches (4")
below the deflectors of sprinklers. Where open sprinklers are
p' used baffles shall not be required. For water and arrange-
ment requirements for sprinkler protection utilizing automa-
tic spray sprinklers or spray -type fixed nozzles, the building
official shall be consulted. Sprinklers or nozzles shall be or.
ranged to provide adequate coverage over the tops and fronts
' of shelving. Nozzles shall be stagger -spaced where necessary
£ to avoid interference of spray patterns.
NOTE: The arrangement of sprinklers to give good
distribution over the face of shelving is a matter requir-
ing knowledge of sprinkler patterns and location and
shall be done only by properly qualified men familiar
with the particular type of sprinklers employed. When
properly arranged, the use of automatic spray sprinklers
t or spray -type fixed nozzles should provide better protec-
tion than the use of standard sprinklers uniformly ar-
ranged at the ceiling.
if) Lights. All lights in film vaults shall be at the ceiling
s and of the fixed type. Incandescent lights shall be enclosed
590
VOL. III -1968 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 48-2-58
and with guarded globes. A glass panel shall be installed
below the tubes of fluorescent lights or, in lieu thereof. wire
guards or other incombustible devices shall beprovided to
keep the tubes in place. All wiring shall be in rigid conduit.
All switches shall be outside the vault and provided with
pilot lights to indicate whether vault lights are on or off.
(g) Heat. Heating, when required to prevent sprinkler
pipes from freezing, shall be by hot water or low pressure
steam with automatic control limiting steam pressure to 10
pounds and the vault temperature to not in excess of 70 de-
grees F. Radiators shall be placed at the ceiling, over aisle
space with pipes and radiators protected with wire guards so
arranged that no film can be placed within twelve inches
(12") of such pipes or radiators.
(h) Storage In Vault. All film in vaults shall be in con-
tainers either in single or double roll containers, cardboard
boxes conforming to I.C.C. Specifications, or I.C.C. shipping
containers.
Sec. 48.219. (a) Construction. Vaults shall be constructed in Archival
accordance with plans submitted to and approved by the Vaults*
Building Official.
Archival vaults shall not exceed one thousand cubic feet
(1,000 cu. ft.) in inside volume but where conditions of ex-
posure to surrounding buildings result in little hazard, this
volume may be increased with permission of the Building
Official.
Walls and floors (except floors in contact with the grounds
shall be constructed of not less than eight inches (8") of
brick, eight inches (8") of hollow masonry units, six inches
(6") of reinforced concrete or twelve inches (12") of hollow
tile. Where the masonry units used may contain cracks or
holes, the surface shall be plastered on both sides with a
cement plaster to a thickness of at least one-half inch i t2").
Equivalent construction which will provide equal fire resis-
tance and prevent escape of gases through wall cracks may
be used.
Unless resting directly on the ground, vaults shall be sup-
ported by masonry or steel of sufficient strength to carry the
load safely. Beams shall rest at both ends on steel girders,
iron or steel columns, or walls or piers of masonry. The sup -
Ports shall afford at least four hours protection as deter-
mined by U.B.C. Standard No. 43-1-58, or be of a design ap-
proved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory as af-
fording equivalent fire resistance. Hollow tile shall not be
used for foundation walls or for walls of other than the top
vault where vaults are superimposed.
Where the ceiling of the vault is a bearing floor, it shall be
reinforced concrete at least six inches (6") thick or equi-
valent construction. Where the roof of the building is the
ceiling of the vault and where dislodging parts of the roof by
explosion will not create an undue hazard to surrounding
buildings or be apt to cause personal injury, the roof may be
Of lightweight incombustible construction such as asbestos
"Vaults intended for the storage of archival flim hall be a _t + -+
cordon¢ with this Section. Archival film i, defined in Seri+a 4.... 4.
591
U.B.C• STANDARD 49.2-M UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
vaults
(C:ost'd.)
cement board or gypsum plank and may serve as an explo-
sions vent. where the volume of the vault may be in excess of
one thousand cubic feet (1,000 cu. ft.) or in excess of the
volume agreed upon by the Building Official, a heavywire
screen of not less than two-inch (2') mesh may be installed
below the ceiling to limit the interior vault space.
NOTE: where this light type of roof construction is
used. parapets and wing walls shall be provided where
needed to prevent transmission of fire from vault to
vault or to another part of the building by roof failure.
A wing wall or parapet extending three feet (3') above
the roof will provide this protection.
Vaults shall be provided with suitable drains or scuppers
to the outside of the building or to corridors where extending
to outdoors is impractical.
Proximity to stacks and other sources of heat shall be
avoided.
(b) Doors. Door openings shall be protected with ap-
proved fire doors, one on each face of the wail except in case
of openings directly to the outdoors.
Doors shall be of the type suitable for use in Class B situa-
tions. The interior door shall be a sliding fire door arranged
for automatic operation. The outer door shall be of the
swinging type and close into an approved frame or be other-
wise made tight to prevent the passage of flame around the
edges. It shall be self-closing, and if fastened open shall be
arranged to close automatically in case of fire originating in
or out of the vault. Approved quick -operating devices for
closing vault doors are recognized as having advantages over
the fusible link, and their use is recommended.
(c) Decomposition Vents. Each vault shall be provided
with vents as prescribed in Section 48.218. The vent area
for a standard one thousand cubic -foot (1,000 cu. ft.) vault
shall be not less than two thousand six hundred and seventy
square inches (2,670 sq. in.).
(d) Racks. Archival vaults shall be provided with hori-
zontal shelves and vertical baffles spaced so that not more
than two containers, each containing one thousand feet
(1.000') of film, may be placed on each shelf. The space
between shelves shall be arranged so that the container
covers may lift approximately one-half inch ('i") but cannot
be lifted entirely off the container. In the case of three -color
separation negatives a maximum of three standard rolls in
a single container may be placed on shelves designed for this
purpose and arranged so that the container cover may not
be lifted off completely.
The shelves shall be separated by vertical barriers so that
not more than one container may be placed between vertical
baffles.
Vertical baffles shall be of incombustible insulating ma-
terial at least three -eighths -inch (%") thick Igypsum wall-
board is acceptable) or of hardwood construction measuring
not less than one inch (I") in thickness. Shelves shall be
of incombustible insulating material not less than three-
eighths -inch (?g") thick or of hardwood not less than one -
inch (1") thick and both vertical baffle and shelving shall
be fitted tightly to the vault wall. Each shelf and baffle
892
VOL. M-1988 EDi WN
IrALC, a`TANUARD 0-12--A
" of 'he
shall be of such width that at iK �"-� tach +:
shelf or baffle shall extents beY-d the -v""hcr. C.x:tsWA:,
shall be placed on shelves in contact1 Ah tar 'k w. =.
There shall be no thumb hoses which Wlla re` 5"e th's
inch (1"11 clearance. Racks atiall be so .de_.ri-ned uto the sprinkler
structure shall be�adequstern that
ely- cove- by ater
water .a luso
sprinkler systems.
(e) Sprinklers. In new vaults. fire
gtmec`-ys shalt be here
vided by means of a Wet pipe sprinkler sy-.-ten:. or wisest
speed of operation is important a deluge s}`strn: may be
used if it will be adequately maintained.
Sprinkler protection shall be prod ded as prescr-tb d in
Section 48.218, except that sprinklers shall be Pnovided to a
ratio of one head to each one hundred and -wenty cubic feet
(120 cu. ft.) of vault volume. Vaults of one titolasand cubic
feet (1,000 cu. ft.) volume shall have eight sprinklers. Mth
approval of the Building Official deluge or sprinkler a-^'3n9e-
ments providing adequate coverage with a la.+er ratio of
sprinklers per cubic foot of vault volume may be used,
MOTE: The arrangement of sprinklers to give gtxo<:
distribution over the face of shelving is a matter req=-
ing knowledge of sprinkler patterns and location and
shouldbe done only by properly qualified ase. fang lar
with the particular type of sprinklers employed. ti`her
properly arranged, the use of automatic spray sprinklers
or spray -type fixed nozzles should provide better pro-
tection than the use of standard sprinklers uniformly
arranged at the ceiling.
(f) Lights. All lights in film vaults shall be at the ceiling
and of the fixed type. Incandescent lights shall be enclosed
and with guarded globes. A glass panel shall be installed
below the tubes of fluorescent lights or, in lieu thereof. wire
guards or other incombustible devices shall be provided to
prevent breakage and to keep the tubes in place. All •a-iring
shall he in rigid conduit. All switches shall be outside the
vault and provided with pilot lights to indicate whether
vault lights are on or off.
(g) Heat. Heating, when required to prevent sprinkler
Pipes from freezing, shall be by hot water or low pressure
steam with automatic control limiting steam pressiure to 14
pounds and the vault temperature to not in excess of 70 de-
grees F. Radiators shall be placed at the ceiling, over �isie
space with pipes and radiators protected with wire guaruvc
so arranged that no film can be plar_eflxiln, txelve inch*
(12") of such pipes or radiators.
(h) Storage in Vault. All film in vaults shall beit �c,
tainers either in single or double roil containers. cardlx,nrl
boxes conforming to I.C.C. Specifications, or I.C.C. Ahippin�
containers. The use of round cans is preferred to sq+:are •::Ams.
In any case the cover of the container used shall not lift Af
when the container is properly placed in the. raA:k. P.rr. f,tf
containers may be used for blocking the rovers •,f %;n;.ilt nils
if necessary.
{ra^hh*i
\ amdt�
t t'S�coi'd.
Sec. 49.226. (a) Containers Requirad. All mtraf„ fslrr, +half Nltrato, 1,11"Ibe kept in closed containers except during +.tie :u:'�rai t;?n,: 3(. tixandling
593
U.R.C. STANDARD: 4&2-38 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Nitrate is Wr`n worked upon or examined. This is very essential from
F the standpoint of fire hazard and safety to life. Individual
Handling metal cans for each roll of film are acceptable.
(Cow4L) I.G.C, containers, either the shipping container or the card-
board are recommended.
ibi 141slehifing Prohibited Nitrate film shall not be placed
or kept under benches, tables, or other surfaces which would
shield it from the discharge of sprinklers.
i c P Scrap Film. Scrap nitrate film shall be kept separate
from waste paper, safety film, and other rubbish, and shall
be kept under water at all times. It shall be collected from
workrooms at least once daily, and removed to a room used
for no other purpose, where it shall be kept under water in
steel drums or metal containers with tight covers. Film shall
be disposed of at frequent intervals. Discarded film in full
or part rolls shall be kept in containers in vaults, Scrap film
shall not be baled or burned.
NOTE: Nitrate film in the torn of clippings and short
lengths is in a very hazardous form. Safe precautions in
the handling of such scraps are most essential. Bailing
and burning of film are processes offering a distinct fire
hazard. Sending film to a central reclaiming plant in
lieu of burning is recommended.
Idi Transportation. Nitrate motion picture film shall not
be transported in any vehicle, aircraft, or other public con-
veyance used for the transportation of passengers, unless
complying with I.C.C. shipping regulations and other ap-
plicable regulations.
Nitrate film shall not be allowed in any underground sub-
way train or station unless under the jurisdiction of the
Interstate Commerce Commission and conforming to the
regulations thereof.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR SPECIAL OCCUPANCIES
Occupancies Sec. 48.221. tai Enclosure for Projectors. Motion picture
UshW Motion projectors shall be installed in an enclosure in accordance
pirtare with Section 48.211.
Piojeethrs ibi Rewinding. Rewinding of nitrate films shall be per-
formed either in a special rewind room at an approved loca-
tion, or in the projection room. If done in the projection
room, approved enclosed -type rewind machines should be
used. An approved can for scrap film having a self-closing
hinged cover shall be provided.
Rewind rooms used for nitrate film shall be at least eighty
square feet (80 sq. ft.) in area, with walls and doors in
accordance with the requirements of Section 48.211 (a) and
with ceiling of equivalent fire -resistance, and shall have a
vent to the outside of the building of not less than twenty-
seven square inches (27 sq. in.).
(c) Care and Use of Film. Nitrate motion picture film used
in connection with the projection of motion pictures (as in
theaters, motion picture theaters, screening or projection
i rooms, sound recording studios, television studios, and motion
picture titling studiosi shall be limited and kept as follows:
The quantity of nitrate film in any projection room or re -
594
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 48-2-58
winding room not equipped with an approved system of auto-
matic sprinklers shall be limited to that given below. It
equipped with an approved automatic fire -extinguishing sys- Oceupancles
tem, double the quantity specified may be permitted. Using 3fotion
In a projection room, constructed of brick, hollow tile, Picture
concrete, or other approved masonry, not exceeding 125 Projection
pounds [twenty-five thousand feet (25,000') of 35 mm. film]. (Cont'd.)
In a rewinding room constructed of brick, hollow tile, can.
crete, or other approved masonry, separated from projection
room with openings thereto protected with approved fire
doors, not exceeding 125 pounds [twenty-five thousand feet
(25,000') of 35 mm. film].
In a projection booth constructed of metal frame overlaid
with asbestos board or sheet iron, not exceeding 75 pounds
[fifteen thousand feet {15,000'1 of 35 mm. film].
In a special room constructed and vented as required for
rewinding rooms, when approved by the Building Official, not
exceeding 125 pounds may be kept in lieu of the amount per-
mitted in either the projection room or the rewind room. The
total quantity in the three rooms shall not exceed 250 pounds
I fifty thousand feet (50,0001) of 35 mm. film 1.
The above quantities of film shall be kept as follows: up to
40 pounds [eight thousand feet (8,0001) of 35 mm. film may
be kept in I.C.C. shipping containers, or approved cabinet in
each room; or, if the amount of film on hand exceeds 40
pounds, an approved cabinet shall be provided, in which the
amount of film in excess of 40 pounds shall be kept.
(d) Flammable Liquids. No collodion, amyl acetate, or
other similar flammable cement or liquid in quantities greater
than one pint shall be kept in the projection booth or room
or rewind room.
(e) Splleing. Splices in film shall be made on mechanical
cutting and splicing machines.
(f) Location. The number and location of nitrate motion
Picture projection rooms or booths in any unsprinklered
building shall be subject to the approval of the Building
Official.
shall be operated byoand on be in cicture harge of qualifieectors d projectiorate n
ists, who shall not be minors.
(h) Procedure in Case of Fire. In the event of film fire in
a projector or elsewhere in a projection at, rewind room, the
projectionist shall immediately shut down the projection
machine and are lamps, operate the shutter release at the
nearest point to him, turn on the auditorium lights, leave
the projection room, and notify the manager of the theater
or building.
NOTE: It is the intent of the standards to permit the
use of two thousand -foot (2,000') rolls of 35 mm. film in
theaters and exchanges only when handled and stored as
prescribed. The limitations on quantities permitted are
based on weight.
Motion
See. 48.222. is) Sprinkler Protection. Areas of buildings f leture
used for exchange purposes shall be equipped with an auto- Film
matie fire -extinguishing system. Exchanges
5915
tP >fi t STVNDAJtt 38 838 UNIFORM BtJILDiNG CODE
VOL. III -1958 EDITION
Models Picture
ebs Rom Requiretiftents. Exchanges shall be provided with
U.B.C. STANDARD 48-2-59
is at least six feet (6'). Separating
FUM
one or more independent rooms to be used exclusively for
receiving delivering film,
partitions shall be con- Motion
structed of three -eighths -inch (%�) hard asbestos board
i
Exciss"It"'
)IL)
and and also one or more separate
rooms for the purpose of inspecting, examining, and repair-
or Picture
its equivalent in heat insulation and durability, and shall Film
extend from the floor to at least three feet
(
Ing film. Posters, advertising, and packing materials shall
in a part of the building separate from the film han-
(3') above the top Laboratories
of the film on machines. If partitions carried to this height (Cont'd.)
gpt
area'
would extend higher than two feet (2') below sprinkler de.
flectors, they shall be built up to the ceiling,
'
let Shipping Room. One or more vaults or cabinets shall
be provided in connection with the receiving and shipping
If partitions
are extended to the ceiling, one sprinkler head shall be
located in each of the sections thus formed. In
room of exchanges into which all film shall be placed and
kept except during such time as is necessary for checking,
any event,
sprinklers shall be so arranged that not more than two,;
machines are dependent upon
p
(..
sorting, and shipping. All film outside of the vaults and
the protection afforded b
any one sprinkler head. y
=' a
r•
cabinets, except while actually being handled, shall be kept
in I.C.C. containers.
(d) Drying. Drying machines of the cabinet t shall
•e
NOTE: With the enforcement of the above general
be of metal and wired glass. Heating units shall be located
outside the cabinet, and shall be
principles of operation, the total quantity of film, Inelud-
ing that which is in I.C.C. containers, in the
provided with thermostatic
control so that the temperature in the cabinet shall not
"
receiving
and shipping room of an exchange should ordinarily not
exceed 120 degrees F.
fir£
r
exceed 100 to 150 standard rolls or 50 to 75 double rolls,
with a maximum limit, which should never
(e) Waxing. Waxing film shall be done in a se
Waxingseparate room.
Processes which require the waxed film
t'
exceed 300
standard rolls or 150 double rolls or 1,500 pounds,
to be lett
exposed to dry shall be in a room used for no other purpose
id) Quantity of Film, In inspection, projection, rewinding,
g.
and ocher rooms thrift including shipping room) there
and not over five such machines shall be located in one room.
Not over 25 standard rolls or twenty-five thousand feet
shall
not be in excess of 16 standard rolls or eight double roils for
(25,000') of film shall be exposed at one time.
r
each person handling film in such rooms, of which not in
if) Projectors. Not more than five motion
excess of two standard rolls or one double roll for each person
shall be exposed outside of closed containers. All film in
picture pro-
jectors shall be located in one room, unless the projectors
are of a type using incandescent
excess of this quantity shall be kept in cabinets or vaults.
electric lights of not over
25 watt size; then not more than 10 projectors shall be
NOTE: See Sections 48.211 to 48.220 which also apply.
located in one mom.
The provisions in this Section apply to these portions f
exchanges in which nitrate film
(g) Shipping Room. The shipping room shall be separated
'
may be handled. Until
the use of nitrate film for motion pictures has been en-
from the rest of the building by partitions constructed in
accordance with the provisions of Section
tirely eliminated, these provisions apply to all exchanges
for professional (35 mm.) film. These
201 (a). No other
process than packing of film shall be conducted in the ship-
provisions do not
apply to exchanges where only safety film is handled.
ping room,
Not over 500 standard rolls of film shall be in
"
Picture
Ser. 48.223. 4 a Automatic Sprinklers. All buildings used
the shipping
room at one time, of which the quantity not in shipping
cases shall not exceed 250 standard rolls face Section 48.2201.
Laboratories Few
for, or housing, a nitrate motion picture film laooratory shall
be equipped throughout with an automatic fire -extinguishing
NOTE: The provisions of this Section apply to motion
system.
picture studios in multi -storied buildings or located in
1 b) Quantity of Film. In all the various work rooms in
which nitrate film is handled, including
built-up areas. They are not intended to apply to large
single -story sets in open locations or motion picture lots
'
not shipping rooms,
the quantity of film not in containers shall not exceed two
except that where such sets are not fire -resistive, auto -
uratic sprinklers are recommended
standard rolls per person handling film; this shall not be
construed, however, as restricting the quantity of film which
and the provision
regarding quantity of film, Section 48.224, shall also
apply. It is also recommended that
•
may be m process on printing, developing, or drying ma-
chines to two standard rolls. There shall be
where possible com-
bustible fabrics and screen shall receive fire -retarding
treatment
not more than
10 standard rolls of film not in approved cabinets for each
periodically.
Person working in such room; provided, however, that in
developing rooms there shall not be more than
20 standard
V0113 of film not in approved cabinets for each developing
unit. All film in excess of the above
See. 48.224. (a) Automatic Sprinklers. Buildings housm notion
motion picture studios shall be completely equipped with Picture
r.
d,
t
quantities shall be kept
in cabinets or vaults.
automatic sprinklers, except that upon specific approval of Studios
the Building Official, sprinklers may be omitted in
a •'
1
(c) Printing. On all future installations, printing machines
shall be separated from each other by incombustible parti-
tions
rooms of a
construction having a fire -retardant classification of not less
than one hour and used only for housing valuable electricalke
l'1,
unless the machines are so spaced that the distance
from the film on any machine
equipment and in which no film or other hazardous materials
handled
,.:•
to that on any, other machine
are or stored.
i
586
587;:
.
U.B.C. STANDARD 49-2 38 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
slot.
ibv Quantity of Fnm. On the studio stage there shall be
f lure
no film except in the magazines of camera or sound -recording
Studl_
apparatus, of which there shall not exceed two magazine
ICout'd.)
units for each camera or recording apparatus. In other sec-
tions of a motion picture studio the quantity of film not in
containers shall not exceed one standard roll per person
handling such film.
Fxtra loaded magazines may be kept in a special maga.
zine room. The number of loaded magazines in one such room
shall not exceed 50. They shall be kept on solid hardwood or
insulated incombustible shelves. Such rooms shall be used
for the loading and storing of magazines only.
In all sections of a motion picture studio other than the
stage and magazine rooms, the quantity of film in a room
shall not exceed 10 standard rolls per person handling film,
in addition to what may be kept in cabinets.
All film in excess of the quantities permitted above shall
be kept in cabinets or vaults.
ico Location of Vaults and Studios. Vaults or cabinets
shall be located in a section separated from the studio stage
by partitions isee Section 38.221).
(di laboratories. Sections of a studio in which the work
is of the same general character as that in a laboratory shall
he governed by the provisions of Section 48,223, Motion Pic -
fare Fiim Laboi:atories.
!e) Carpenter Shops, Property, Costume, and Dressing
Rooms. Carpenter shops, property storage rooms, costume
moms, and dressing rooms shall be separated from the studio
stage by fire partitions constructed of eight inches (8") of
brick. or of some other construction of incombustible ma-
terials and suitable stability, having a fire -retardant classi-
fication of not less than two hours as determined by U.B.C.
Standard 43-1-5s.
Only such openings as are necessary shall be provided in
such fire partitions and shall be protected by approved fire
doors of a type suitable for use in Class "B" situations; open-
ings of larger than standard size may be provided when
necessary if protected by approved oversize fire door,
l f � Interior Finish, Materials constituting a permanent
finish of interior surfacing on ceilings, permanent partitions,
and walls, and used to reduce the reflection or transmission
of sound, shah, if not incombustible, be treated so as to be of
an approved slow -burning composition or character.
igi Combustible Fabrics and Scenery. All fabrics of
monk's cloth, canvas, muslin, burlap, silk, satin, velvet,
velour, or similar material suspended from ceilings
or grid-
irons or hanging against walls or partitions, and all back
drops, cycloramas, and other theatrical appurtenances con-
structed in whole or in part of muslin, canvas, burlap, and
all artificial or natural trees, shrubbery, gross
hay. and similar combustible material hall
betspainted,
sprayed, or saturated with fire -retarding or flameproofing
material or otherwise rendered safe against fire provided.
however. that furnishings of silk, satin, velvet, and velour
which are used in sets and included in the photographing of
scenes need not be so treated.
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 19.1-58
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 49-1-58
Mechanical Refrigeration
Based on Standard Safety Cale IS -53 of the
American Society of Re.frigeratlon Engineers
See Section 4901, Uniform Building Code, Volume I
1.1 Scope. The application of this Code is intended to
insure the safe design, construction, installation, operation,
and inspection of every refrigerating system employing a
fluid which is vaporized and is normally liquefied in its
refrigerating cycle, when employed under the occupancy
classifications listed in Section 3. The provisions of this
Code are not intended to apply to the use of water or air
as a refrigerant nor to refrigerating systems installed on
railroad cars, motor vehicles, motor -drawn vehicles or on
shipboard.
1.2 Purpose. This Code is intended to provide reasonable
safeguards to life, limb, health, and property; to correct
certain practices which are inconsistent with safety; and
to prescribe standards of safety which will properly influence
future progress and development in refrigerating systems.
Equipment listed by an approved, nationally recognized
testing laboratory, as defined in 2.3.1, is deemed to meet the
design, manufacture, and factory test requirements of this
Code or equivalent, for the refrigerant or refrigerants for
which such equipment is designed.
1.8 Application. This Code shall apply to refrigerating
systems installed soption and to parts
rpla ed or ddd to subsequent
installed
prior or subsequent
to its adoption. In cases of practical difficulty or unnecessary
hardship, the authority having jurisdiction may grant excep-
tions from the literal requirements of this Code or permit
the use of other devices or methods, but only when it is
clearly evident that equivalent protection is thereby secured.
2.1 Absorber (Adsorber) is that part of the low side of
an absorption system used for absorbing (adsorbing) vapor
refrigerant.
2.2 Absorption system—see 2.48.1.
2.3 Approved means acceptable to the authorities having
jurisdiction.
2.3,1 An Approved Nationally Recognized Testing Lalora-
tory is one acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction,
that provides uniform testing and examination procedures
under established standards, is properly organized, equipped
and qualified for testing, and has a follow-up inspection
service of the current production of the listed products.
2.4 Brazed Joint, for the purpose of*this code, is a gas-
tight joint obtained by the joining of metal parts with alloys
which melt at temperatures higher than 1000 F. but less
than the melting temperatures of the joined parts.
2.5 Brine is any liquid, used for the transmission of heat
without a change in its state, having no flash point or a
flash pont above 150 F.
2.6 Compressor is a specific machine, with or without
598 599
1
Section 1:
Scope and
Purpose
Section 2:
Definitions
f.ANDARD 49-1-M
UNWORM Bun DING CODE
acessearies. for Compressing a given refrigerant vap-.
2:7 Compressor Unit is a Condensing unit law the con-
deaser liquid receiver.
2:8 condenser is a vend or armApment of pipe or
tubing in which vaporised refrigerant to liquefied by the
removal of beat.
2.9 condensing Unit is a specific refrigerating machine
coin for a given refrigerant, consisting of one or
morepower-driven compressors, cwtdensers, liquid receivers
(whenrequired), and the regularly furnished acceeeorles.
?.to Container is a cylinder for the transportation of
2.11 Department Store Is the entire space occupied by
tenantcan or more than one tenant in an individual store
whom more than 100 persons commonly assemble on other
than the -level floor for the purpose of buying personal
wearables and other merchandise.
2.12 Design Working Pressure is the maximum allowable
working pressure for which a specific part of a system is
2.18 Direct System—see 4.2.
2.14 Double Indirect Vented Open -Spray System -nee 4.8.4.
2.15 (or Secondary) Refrigerant Systew—see 4.4.
2.16 Duct 1p a tube or conduit used for conveying or
encasing purposes as specifically defined below:
a. Air duct Is a tube or conduit used for conveying air.
(The air passages of self-contained systems are not
to be construed as air duets.)
IL Pipe duct is a tube or conduit used for encasing pipe.
c. Wire duet is a tube or conduit used for encasing either
moving or stationary wire, rope, etc.
2.17 Entrance Is a confined passageway immediately ad-
jacent to the door through which people enter a building.
2.18 Evaporator is that part of the system In which liquid
refrigerant is vaporized to produce refrigeration.
2.19 Exit is a confined passageway immediately adjacent
to the door through which people leave a building.
2 Expansion Coil is an evaporator constructed of pipe
octubing.
2.21 lissible Plug is a device having a predetermined -
temperature fusible member for the relief of pressure.
2.22 Generator is any device equipped with a heating
element used in the refrigerating system to increase the
pressure of refrigerant in its gas or vapor state for the
purpose of liquefying the refrigerant.
2.23 Hallway is a corridor for the passage of people.
under High Side means the parts of a refrigerating system
condenser pressure.
2.25 Occupied Space is a space normally fre-
quented or occupied by people but excluding machinery
rooms and walk-in coolers used primarily for refrigerated
storage.
2.26 Closed -Surface System—see 4.3.2.
900
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 49-1-58
2.27 Indirect Open -Spray Systems—see 4.3.1. Definitions
2.28 Indirect System -wee 4.3. (Cont'd.)
2.29 Indirect Vented Closed -Surface System—see 4.3.3.
2.30 Liquid Receiver is a vessel permanently connected to
a system by inlet and outlet pipes for storage of a liquid
refrigerant.
2.81 Lobby is a waiting room, or large hallway serving as
a waiting room.
2.32 Low Side means the parts of a refrigerating system
wider evaporator pressure.
2.35 Machinery is the refrigerating equipment forming a
part of the refrigerating system including any or all of the
following: compressor, condenser, generator, absorber (ad-
sorber), liquid receiver. connecting pipe, or evaporator.
2.84 Machinery Room, as required by Section 6, is a room
in which a refrigerating system is permanently installed and
operated but not including evaporators located in a cold
storage room, refrigerator box, air cooled space, or other
enclosed space. Closets solely contained within, and opening
only into, a room shall not be considered machinery rooms,
but shall be considered a part of the machinery room in
which they are contained .or open into. It is not the intent
of this definition to cause the space in which a self-contained
system is located to be classified as a machinery room.
2.86 Machinery Room, Class T, as required by Section 6,
is a room having machinery but no flame -producing ap-
paratus permanently installed and operated and also con-
forming to the following:
a. Any doors, communicating with the building, shall be
approved self-closing, tight -fitting fire doors.
b. 'Walls, floor, and ceiling shall be tight and of not less
than one-hour fire -resistive construction.
c. It shall have an exit door which opens directly to the
outer air or through a vestibule -type exit equipped with
self-closing, tight -fitting doors.
d. Exterior openings, if present, shall not be under any
fire escape or any open stairway.
e. All pipes piercing the interior walls, ceiling, or floor
of such room shall be tightly sealed to the walls,
ceiling, or floor through which they pass.
f. Emergency remote controls to stop the action of the
refrigerant compressor shall be provided and located
Immediately outside the machinery room.
g. Mechanical means shall be provided for ventilation.
(See 8.11.3.)
h. Emergency remote controls for the mechanical means
of ventilation shall be provided and located outside the
machinery room.
2.36 Manufacturer is, for the purpose of this code, the
company or organization which evidences its responsibility
by affixing its name or nationally registered trade -mark or
trade name to the refrigeration equipment concerned.
2.37 Mechanical .1olut, for the purpose of this code, is a
gas-tight joint, obtained by the joining of metal parts
through a positive -holding mechanical construction.
601
U.B:C. sTANDARII 46.1-33 UNIFORM BUILD114G CODE
beftiusm 288 Nompealthre Displacement Compressor is a compressor
( d ) changingout
which increase In the internal volume pressure
compression chamber.
2.36 Piping means the pipe or tube mains for inter-connect-
ing the various parts of a refrigerating system.
8.40 Positive Dklpiacement Compressor is a compressor
in which increase in vapor pressure is attained by changing
the internal volume of the compression chamber.
$At Imposing Element is any device or portion
of the equipment used for the purpose of increasing the
refrigerant vapor pressure.
L42 Uniting Device is a pressure-responsive
mechaniam designed to automatically stop the operation of
the pressure-imposing element at a predetermined pressure.
2.46 Pressure-Relief Device is a pressure-actuated valve
or rupture member designed to automatically relieve exces-
sive pressure.
2.44 Pressure-Bellef Valve is a pressure-actuated valve
held closed by a spring or other means and designed to
automatically relieve pressure in excess of its setting.
2.45 Pressure Vessel is any refrigerant-containing recep-
tacle of a refrigerating system, other than evaporators, each
separate section of which does not exceed one-half cubic
foot (% cu. ft.) of refrigerant-containing volume, expansion
coils, compressors, controls, headers, pipe, and pipe fittings.
2.40 Receiver—sec 2.30
2.47 Refrigerant is a substance used to produce refriger-
ation by its expansion or vaporization.
2.48 Refrigerating System Is a combination of intercon-
nected refrigerant-containing parts constituting one closed
refrigerant circuit in which a refrigerant is circulated for
the purpose of extracting heat. (See Section 4 for classifi-
cation of refrigerating systems by type.)
2.4&1 Absorption System is a refrigerating system in
which the gas evolved in the evaporator is taken up by an
absorber or adsorb r.
2.48.2 Sealed Absorption System is a unit system for Group
2 refrigerants only in which all refrigerant-containing parts
are made permanently tight by welding or brazing against
refrigerant loss. (This is a restrictive definition for the
Purposes of this code as used in 6.1.2 and 6.3.1),
2.48.3 Setf-Contalned System is a complete factory-made
and factory tested System in a suitable frame or enclosure
which Is fabricated and shipped in one or more sections and
in which no refrigerant-containing parts are connected in
the field other than by companion or block valves.
2ASA Unit System is a self-contained system which has
oven assembled and tested prior to its installation and which
is installed without connecting any refrigerant-containing
partsA unit system may include factory-assembled com-
Pardon block valves.
602
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 19-1-58
2.46 Rupture Member is a device that will rupture at a
predetermined pressure.
2.50 Shall. Where "shall' or "shall not" is used for a
provision specified, that provision is intended to be manda-
tory.
2.51 Should. "Should" or "it is recommended" is used to
indicate provisions which are not mandatory but which are
pointed out here as recommended good practice.
2.52 Sealed Absorption System—see 2.48.2.
2.58 Self -Contained System—see 2.48.3.
2.54 Soldered Joint, for the purpose of this code, is a
Vag -tight joint obtained by the joining of metal parts with
metallic mixtures or alloys which melt at temperatures
below 1000 F. and above 400 F.
2.55 Stop Valve is a shut-off for controlling the flow, of
refrigerant.
2.56 Tenant, as herein used, shall be construed as a person,
firm, or corporation possessed with the legal right to occupy
premises.
2.57 Unit System --see 2.48.4
2.58 Welded Joint, for the purpose of this code, is a gas-
tight joint, obtained by the joining of metal parts in the
plastic or molten state. Section 3:
&I Locations governed by this code in which refrigerating Building
systems may be placed are grouped by occupancy as follows: Occupancy
3.2 Institutional Occupancy shall apply to that portion Classification
of a building in which persons are confined to receive
medical, charitable, educational, or other care or treatment,
or in which persons are held or detained by reason of public
or civic duty, including among others, hospitals, asylums,
sanitariums, police stations, jails, court houses with cells,
and similar occupancies.
3.3 Public Assembly Occupancy shall apply to that portion
of the premises in which persons congregate for civic, polit-
ical, educational, religious, social, or recreational purposes;
including among others, armories, assembly rooms, auditor-
iums, ball rooms, bath houses, bus terminals, broadcasting
studios, churches, colleges, court houses without cells, dance
halls, department stores, exhibition halls, fraternity halls,
libraries, lodge rooms, mortuary chapels, museums, passen-
ger depots, schools, skating rinks, subway stations, theaters,
and similar occupancies.
3.4 Residential Occupancy shall apply to that portion of
a building in which sleeping accommodations are provided
for more than two families, including among others, club
houses, convents, dormitories, hotels, lodging houses, multiple
story apartments, studios, tenements, and similar occupan-
cies.
3.5• Commercial Occupancy shall apply to that portion of
e building used for the transaction of business; for the
rendering of professional services; for the supplying of food,
drink, or other bodily needs and comforts; for manufacturing
purposes or for the performance of work or labor (except
as included under 3.6 Industrial Occupancy) Including among
603
U.B.C. STANDA 1.38 UNIFOB31 BUILDING CODE
fur stwage, laboratories, loft buildia
mutate, office bulkiftD, professional buildings, restaurants,
ShOr" Other than department AtOrell, and similar occupancies,
3A fadustrW Occupancy shall apply to an entire building
or to that portion of a building used for manufacturing,
or storage of materials or products, including
among others, chemical, food, candy, and ice cream factories,
ice making plants, meat packing plants, refineries, perishable
food warchootses. and similar occupancies, provided the entire
building is occupied by a single tenant.
&7 MIxed Occupancy shall apply to a building occupied
or used for different purposes In different parts. When the
occupancies are cut off from the rest of the building by
L ti9ors, and cet(iags and protected by a -
o
g d forfliites portion of the obuildingt For example, the
d a in ntaii frown food
'hotels, and
Ont stares in buildings occupied by a single tenant
might be el 'fled under Industrial Occupancy, whereas
r 'ons of the buildings would be daasifted under other
u ea. When the oeeuganeies are not so separated, the
occupancy carrying the more stringent requirements shall
govern.
4.1 Refrigerating Systems (see 2.48) shall be divided into
ClaXOWL descriptive of the method employed for extracting
heat as follows in 4.2 to 4.4, inclusive. The direct and
various indirect systems referred to are illustrated in
Figure 1.
4.2 Direct System is one in which the evaporator is in
direct contact with the material or apace refrigerated or is
located in air circulating passages communicating with such
spaces.
4.8 Indirect System is one in which a liquid, such as brine
or water, cooled by the refrigerant, is circulated to the
material or space refrigerated or is used to cool air so
Circulated. Indirect systems which are distinguished by the
type or method of application are as given in the following
paragraphs;
4.a.1 Indirect Open -Spray System is one in which a liquid,
such as brine or water, cooled by an evaporator located in an
enclosure external to a cooling chamber, is circulated to
such cooling chamber and is sprayed therein.
43.2 Indirect, Closed -Surface System is one in which a
HqUid, such as brine or water, cooled by an evaporator
in an enclosure external to a cooling chamber, is
circulated to and through such a cooling chamber in pipes
or other closed circuits.
4X3 Indirect Vented Closed -Surface System is one in
which a such as brine or water, cooled by an evapor-
ator
in a vented enclosure external to a cooling
R circulated to and through such cooling chamber
in Pipes or other closed circuits.
444 Double Indirect Vented Open -Spray System is one
In which a liquid, such as brine or water. cooled by an
evaporator located in a vented enclosure, is circulated
VOL. ID -1858 EDITION
aEfalcEaANT- .
B I FIETORaIGIMAW nkU
BRINE os, WATER
V .!
SRIN��� COOI.tD
BRINE OR WATER
BRINE os, WiTER GDOLED
y� Br REfaiGFAANT
BR,NE oR wATEa
U.B.C. STAND
Inc. i
DIRECT SYSTEM
aO1aECT
OPEN SPRAY SYSTEM
INDIRECT
CU___ IRM CESYSTIM
iNDiasCT vENr[0
CLOSED SURFACE SYSTEM
OWSLE INDIRECT
VENTED OPEN
SPRAY SYSTEM
COOLING CHANSON
through a closed circuit to a second enclosure where it cools
another supply of a liquid, such as brine or water, and this
liquid in turn is circulated to a cooling chamber and is
sprayed therein.
4.4 Double (or Secondary) Refrigerant System Is, one in
which an evaporative refrigerant is used in a secondary
circuit. For the purpose of this code, each system enclosing
a separate body of an evaporative refrigerant shall be con-
aidered as a separate direct system.
5.1 General. Refrigerants are, for the purposes of this
code, divided into groups as follows:
5.1.1 Group 1
Carbondioxide .... ................. ___ ........................... ............_CO,
Dichlorodifluoromethane (Freon -12) ......................MY,
Dichlorodifluoromethane, 73.8%.................._......._..._CC1,F,
and Ethylidene Fluoride, 26%- ..........____..._..._CH, -CHF,
(Carrene No. 7)
Dichloromethane (Carrene No. 1)
(Methylene chloride)..........................................CH,CI,
Dichlommonofluoromethane (Freon -21) ................CHC1,F
Dichiorotetrafluoroethane (Freon -114) ... ............ ...C,CI,F,
Sot 1 605
t'A1a,C, STANDARD #9-1-312 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
maccobloradmiloromethana (Freon -22) ..._...........CHC1F,
Trichlorassimofluoromethane (Freon -11)
(Cairene No. 2)......._.............................................My
Trichlo trifluoroethane (Freon -113) .................. ... CXV.
3.1.2 Group 2
Ammonia -1.11 _ ............. ........................... ..... ............. .......... N$
Dichloroethylene .......................... _............ __.... ......... C,H,C1.
Ethylchloride ......... ............... .................... ........... CACI
Methyl chloride....._ ................ .............................. _....... .CHAT
Methyl formate ...................................... ............. ...HCOOCH,
Sulphur dioxide....................................................................S O.
8.1.3 Group 3
Butane................................ .................. ..... _....................... C.Hu
Ethane........... -........................................... C %
Ethylene.......... ....................................... ....................... ......C.H,
Isobutane........................................................ ..........(CH,).CH
Propane_ ................ ............. ........................... _................. ..CA
CIA Public Stairway, Stair Landing, Entrance, or Exit.
No refrigerating system shall be installed in or on a public
stairway, stair landing, entrance, or exit.
6.12 Public Hallway or Lobby. No refrigerating system
shall interfere with free passage. No Group 2 refrigerant
shall be permitted in public hallways or lobbies of Institu-
tional or P(ibiic Assembly Occupancies. Refrigerating sys-
tems installed in a public hallway or lobby shall be limited to:
a- Unit Systems containing not more than the quantities
of a Group 1 refrigerant specified in Table 1, or
b. Sealed Absorption Systems containing not more than
3 pounds of Group 2 refrigerant when in Residential and
Commercial Occupancies.
6.1.3 Refrigerant Piping Through Floors. Refrigerant pip-
ing shall not be carried through floors except as follows:
a. It may be carried from the basement to the first floor
or from the top floor to a machinery penthouse or
to the roof.
b. For the purpose of connecting to a condenser on the
roof, it may be carried through an approved, rigid and
tight continuous fire -resisting pipe duct or shaft having
no openings on intermediate floors, or it may be car-
ried on the outer wall of the building provided it is not
located in an air shaft, closed court, or in other
similar open spaces enclosed within the outer walls
Of the building.
c. In systems containing Group 1 refrigerants, the refrig-
erant piping may also be carried through floors, inter-
mediate between the first floor and the top floor,
provided it is enclosed in an approved, rigid, and tight
continuous fire -resisting pipe duct or shaft where It
Passes through any intermediate space. Where the
refrigerating system serves an air conditioning system,
the piping need not be enclosed where it passes through
air conditioned spaces served by that system. The pipe
duct or shaft shall be vented to the outside or to a
space served by the air conditioning system.
VOL. III -1988 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 49-1.58
TABLE I. MAXIMUM PERM SSIBLE QUANTITIES OF
GROUP 1 REFRIGERANTS FOR DIRECT SYSTEMS
' Volatile charge in a rnnml shall not he cen.idarad as refrigerant.
6.2.1 Direct Systems. The maximum permissible quantity 6.2 Group 1
of a Group 1 refrigerant In a direct system is specified in Refrigerants
Table 1 except Institutional Occupancies where further
limited by 6.2.1.1.
6.2.1.1 Direct Systeme in Institutional Occupancies shall
be limited to unit systems each containing not more than 20
pounds of Group 1 refrigerants, except in kitchens, labora.
tories, and mortuaries. (See 6.2.4.)
6.2.1.2 When the refrigerant -containing parts of a system
are located in one or more enclosed spaces, the cubical con.
tent of the smallest enclosed humanly occupied space other
than the machinery room, shalt be used to determine the
permissible quantity of refrigerant in the system. Where a
refrigerating system has evaporator coils serving individual
stories of a building the story having the smallest volume
shall be used to determine the maximum quantity of refrig-
erant in the entire system.
6.2.1.3 When the evaporator is located in an air duct sys-
tem, cubical content of the smallest hufnanly occupied en.
closed space served by the air duct system shall be used to
determine the permissible quantity of refrigerant in the sys-
tem; however, if the air flow to any enclosed space served
by the air duct system cannot be shut off or reduced below
one-quarter of its maximum, the cubical contents of the
entire space served by the air duct system may be used to
determine the permissible quantity of refrigerant in the
system.
607
g9maximum
In
REFRIGERANT NAME
Chemical
formula
i%rut
ca tf. a[
humaai
oecupipace"
Carbon dioxide ........._ ....................... .
CO,
11
Dichlorodifluoromethane _ .._..(Freon•t2)
CC4r,
si
Dichlorodifluoromethane-73.8'7CCOFa
and Ethylidene Fluoride -28.2% .....,...
(C.- No. 7) "
CHrCHF.
26
Dichloromethane (Methylene chloride),
WarrensNo. 1) .................. .............. _..... _.._
CHXh
8
Dichloromononuommethane ......_(Freon -21)
CHCiaF
1$
Dichlorotetrafluoromethane ..__;Freondli)
C.CI,F,
44
Monochlomduluoromethane ........;Freon -92)
CHCln
22
Trichloromonofluoromethane _....(Freon-lfy
CC1,F
25
Trichlorotrifluomethane ......_....(Freon -11$)
CXIan
24
' Volatile charge in a rnnml shall not he cen.idarad as refrigerant.
6.2.1 Direct Systems. The maximum permissible quantity 6.2 Group 1
of a Group 1 refrigerant In a direct system is specified in Refrigerants
Table 1 except Institutional Occupancies where further
limited by 6.2.1.1.
6.2.1.1 Direct Systeme in Institutional Occupancies shall
be limited to unit systems each containing not more than 20
pounds of Group 1 refrigerants, except in kitchens, labora.
tories, and mortuaries. (See 6.2.4.)
6.2.1.2 When the refrigerant -containing parts of a system
are located in one or more enclosed spaces, the cubical con.
tent of the smallest enclosed humanly occupied space other
than the machinery room, shalt be used to determine the
permissible quantity of refrigerant in the system. Where a
refrigerating system has evaporator coils serving individual
stories of a building the story having the smallest volume
shall be used to determine the maximum quantity of refrig-
erant in the entire system.
6.2.1.3 When the evaporator is located in an air duct sys-
tem, cubical content of the smallest hufnanly occupied en.
closed space served by the air duct system shall be used to
determine the permissible quantity of refrigerant in the sys-
tem; however, if the air flow to any enclosed space served
by the air duct system cannot be shut off or reduced below
one-quarter of its maximum, the cubical contents of the
entire space served by the air duct system may be used to
determine the permissible quantity of refrigerant in the
system.
607
VJLC. `NAND. I3 i -M UNIFOI M BUILDING CODE
Group I 24• In Institutional and Public Assembly Occupancies,
80dhw-t expansion coils or evaporators used for air condition.
tCling, and located downstream from, and in proidmity to, a
heating roti, or located upstream within eighty inches
416') of a heating coil, shall be fitted with a relief device
discharging to the outside of the building in an approved
immune; except that such a relief device shall not be re.
quirad on unit or self-contained systems if the internal
volume of the low side of the system which may be shut
off by velves, div!ded by the total weight of refrigerant
in the system less the weight of refrigerant vapor contained
in the other party of the system at 110 F., exceeds the
specific volume of the refrigerant at critical conditions of
temperature and pressure.
Va
shall be more than V.a
Wa W.
where V, low aide volume, cu. ft.
V.. =specific volume at critical conditions of tem-
perature and pressure, cu. ft. per lb.
W, ® total weight of refrigerant in system, lbs.
W. =weight of refrigerant vapor (lbs) at 110 F,
in V. or
V.
specific volume of refrigerant,
in cu. ft, per lb., at 110 F.,
where V. ®total volume of system
less V„ cu. ft.
8.2,2 Indirect Systems. A system containing more than
the quantity of a Group 1 refrigerant allowed in Table 1
shall be of the indirect type with all refrigerant -containing
parts, excepting parts mounted outside the building and pip-
ing installed in accordance with Paragraph 6.1.3, installed
in a machinery room used for no other purpose than for
mechanical equipment.
6" OPIUM Flames In Machinery Rooms. No open flame
Or apparatus
to produce an open flame shall be installed
In a machinery room where any refrigerant other than
carbon dioxide is used unless the flame is enclosed and
vented to the open air. The use of matches, cigarette light -
tern, halide leak detectors, and similar devices shall not be
considered a violation of this paragraph or of 6.2.4.
.4 Ofaca Flamm in Institutional and Public Assembly
In Institutional and Public Assembly Occu-
when more than 1 pound of a Group 1 refrigerant,
Other than carbon dioxide, is used in a system any portion
Of which is in a room where there is an apparatus for
Producing an open flame, then such refrigerant shall be
clmwd to Group 2 unless the flame -producing apparatus is
Provided with a hood and flue capable of removing the
Products Of combustion to the open air.
"Grmwx 6,3.1 Direct Systems. Direct systems containing Group 2
refrigerants shall not be used for air conditioning for human
Comfort. For othef applications, the maximum permissible
quantity of Group 2 refrigerants In a direct system is shown
in Table 2.
603
VOL. III -1988 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 49-1-53
TABLE NO. 2—KAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE QUANTITIES 6.3 Group 2
OF GROUP 2 REFRIGERANTS FOR DIRECT SYSTEMS" Refrigerente
(Cont'd.)
T ype of -
relriperatiriy
aystam
Maxfnum
Pounds for various occapanoies
Inatitu-
tweai
Public
assembly
Rai-
dentias
Com-
mercial
sealed Absorption
$vatem6:
a. In yyublic hallways
or lobbies ..._.,.„._...
0
0
3
3
b. In other than pub.
lic ”"' or
lobbies .................„...
o•
6
6
20
3a11 -Contained or
Unit systema:
a. Inpubife hallways
or bbies ............. -1
0
0
0
0
b. In other than pub-
lic hallways or
lobbies .._..----- „„.
0 1
0.
6
510
niortuaiounds allowed when installed in kitchens, laboratories, and
8.3.2 indirect Systems. The maximum permissible quantity
Of Group 2 refrigerant in an indirect system is shown in
Table 3. Such systems shall be of the following type:
a. Institutional and Public Assembly Occupancies—Indir-
set vented closed -surface, or double indirect vented
open -spray.
b. Residential and Commercial Occupancies—indirect
vented closed -surface, or double indirect vented open -
spray, or primary circuit of double -refrigerant type.
8.3.2.1 Machinery Rooms for indirect Systems, Group 2
Refrigerants
8.3.2.1.1 Indirect systems using Group 2 refrigerants not
in excess of the quantities shown in Column 1 of Table 3
shall have all refrigerant containing parts, excepting parts
mounted outside the building and piping installed in accord-
ance with Paragraph 6.1.3, installed in a machinery room
used for no other purpose than for mechanical equipment.
6.3.2.1.2 Indirect systems using Group 2 refrigerants not
in excess of the quantities shown in Column 2 of Table 3
shall have all refrigerant -containing parts installed in a
Class T machinery room.
6.3.2.1.3 Flame -Producing Devices, Hot Surfaces, and
Electrical Equipment in Machinery Rooms. Where a machin-
ery room is required by this code to house a refrigerating
system containing any Group 2 refrigerant other than
609
t' KC, •TAXDARD 49-1,18
Section ?:
fm' tritil
UNIFORM BUILDING CODF.
TABLE 8—MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE QUANTITIES OF
GROUP 2 REFRIGERANTS FOR INDIRECT SYSTEMS
sulphur dioxide, no flame -producing device or hot surface
above 800 F. shall be permitted in such room and all elec-
trical equipment in the room shall conform to the require-
ments of Hazardous Locations Class I of the local Electrical
Code. The use of matches, cigarette lighters, halide leak
detectors, and similar devices shall not be considered a viola-
tion of this paragraph.
8.4.1 Group 8 refrigerants shall not be used in Institutional
Public Assembly, Residential, or Commercial Occupancies
except in laboratories for Commercial Occupancies. In such
laboratory installations only unit systems containing not
more than •6 pounds shall be used unless the number of
persons does not exceed one person per one hundred square
feet (100 sq. ft.) of laboratory floor area, in which case the
requirements for Industrial Occupancy shall apply.
7.1 General. There shall be no restriction on the quantity
or kind of refrigerant used in an Industrial Occupancy,
except as specified in 7.2 and 8.10.
7.2 Number of Persons. When the number of persons
in a refrigerated space, served by a direct system, on any
floor above the first floor (ground level or deck level) exceeds
one person per one hundred square feet (100 sq. ft.) of floor
area, the requirements of Commercial Occupancy shall apply
person per one hundred square feet (100 sq. ft.) of floor area
unless that refrigerated space containing more than one
above the first floor is provided with the required number
of doors opening directly into approved building exits. Such
refrigerated space shall be cut off from the rest of the -build-
ing by tight construction with tight -fitting doors.
Note: The above does not prohibit openings for the pas-
sage of products from one refrigerated space to souther
refrigerated space.
8.1 Foundations and Supports for condensing units or
compressor units shall be of substantial and noncombustible
construction when more than six inches (6") high. (See 8.3.)
8.2 Moving Machinery should be guarded in accordance
with accepted safety standards.
8.3 Clear Space adequate for inspection and servicing of
condensing units or compressor units shall be provided.
8.4 Condenser Units or Compressor Units with Enclosures
shall be readily accessible for servicing and inspection.
file
VOL. 1II-1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 49-1-58
8.6 Water Supply and Discharge Connections should be Installation
made in accordance with accepted safety and health stand- Requirements
ards. (Cont'd.)
8.5.1 Discharge water lines shall not be directly connected
to the waste or sewer system. The waste or discharge from
such equipment shall be over and above a trapped and vented
plumbing fixture.
8.6 Illuminatlon adequate for inspection and servicing of
condensing units or compressor units should be provided.
8.7 Electrical Equipment and Wiring shall be installed
In accordance with accepted safety standards.
8.8 Gas Fuel Devices and Equipment used with refriger-
ating systems shall be installed in accordance with accepted
safety standards.
8.9 Open Flames. When the quantity of flammable refrlg-
erant in any one refrigerating system exceeds the amount
given in Table 4 for each one thousand cubic feet (1000 cu.
ft.) of room volume in which the system or any part thereof
is installed, then no flame -producing device or hot surface
above 800 F. shall be permitted in such mom and all elec-
trical equipment in the mom shall conform to the require-
ments of Hazardous Locations Class I of the local Electrical
Code.
TABLE 4—MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE QUANTITIES OF
FLAMMABLE REFRIGERANTS
Name
Chemical
formula
Maximum Quantity
in lbs. per 1000 cu.
ft. of room volume
column 1
Column 2
Occupancy i
iac2.3iu) ftmary o. t6.ar.
CR MT m2.3t35"
21h
Ethyl chloride
AfOX110 lbs.
Institutional ......p
0
Not more than 600 Ib.
Public Assembly
0
Not more than 1000 ib.
Residential .... _ ..E
Not more than W ib.
No limit
('ommerdai .......... Not more than 600 lb.
No limit
sulphur dioxide, no flame -producing device or hot surface
above 800 F. shall be permitted in such room and all elec-
trical equipment in the room shall conform to the require-
ments of Hazardous Locations Class I of the local Electrical
Code. The use of matches, cigarette lighters, halide leak
detectors, and similar devices shall not be considered a viola-
tion of this paragraph.
8.4.1 Group 8 refrigerants shall not be used in Institutional
Public Assembly, Residential, or Commercial Occupancies
except in laboratories for Commercial Occupancies. In such
laboratory installations only unit systems containing not
more than •6 pounds shall be used unless the number of
persons does not exceed one person per one hundred square
feet (100 sq. ft.) of laboratory floor area, in which case the
requirements for Industrial Occupancy shall apply.
7.1 General. There shall be no restriction on the quantity
or kind of refrigerant used in an Industrial Occupancy,
except as specified in 7.2 and 8.10.
7.2 Number of Persons. When the number of persons
in a refrigerated space, served by a direct system, on any
floor above the first floor (ground level or deck level) exceeds
one person per one hundred square feet (100 sq. ft.) of floor
area, the requirements of Commercial Occupancy shall apply
person per one hundred square feet (100 sq. ft.) of floor area
unless that refrigerated space containing more than one
above the first floor is provided with the required number
of doors opening directly into approved building exits. Such
refrigerated space shall be cut off from the rest of the -build-
ing by tight construction with tight -fitting doors.
Note: The above does not prohibit openings for the pas-
sage of products from one refrigerated space to souther
refrigerated space.
8.1 Foundations and Supports for condensing units or
compressor units shall be of substantial and noncombustible
construction when more than six inches (6") high. (See 8.3.)
8.2 Moving Machinery should be guarded in accordance
with accepted safety standards.
8.3 Clear Space adequate for inspection and servicing of
condensing units or compressor units shall be provided.
8.4 Condenser Units or Compressor Units with Enclosures
shall be readily accessible for servicing and inspection.
file
VOL. 1II-1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 49-1-58
8.6 Water Supply and Discharge Connections should be Installation
made in accordance with accepted safety and health stand- Requirements
ards. (Cont'd.)
8.5.1 Discharge water lines shall not be directly connected
to the waste or sewer system. The waste or discharge from
such equipment shall be over and above a trapped and vented
plumbing fixture.
8.6 Illuminatlon adequate for inspection and servicing of
condensing units or compressor units should be provided.
8.7 Electrical Equipment and Wiring shall be installed
In accordance with accepted safety standards.
8.8 Gas Fuel Devices and Equipment used with refriger-
ating systems shall be installed in accordance with accepted
safety standards.
8.9 Open Flames. When the quantity of flammable refrlg-
erant in any one refrigerating system exceeds the amount
given in Table 4 for each one thousand cubic feet (1000 cu.
ft.) of room volume in which the system or any part thereof
is installed, then no flame -producing device or hot surface
above 800 F. shall be permitted in such mom and all elec-
trical equipment in the mom shall conform to the require-
ments of Hazardous Locations Class I of the local Electrical
Code.
TABLE 4—MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE QUANTITIES OF
FLAMMABLE REFRIGERANTS
Name
Chemical
formula
Maximum Quantity
in lbs. per 1000 cu.
ft. of room volume
Butane
C.H.
2%
Ethane
C.14.
21h
Ethyl chloride
CACI
6
Ethylene
C:H.
2
Isobutane
(CH.).CH
2%
Methyl chloride
CH,CI
10
Methyl formate
HCOOCH.
7
Propane
C.H.
2%
8.10 Flammable Refrigerants as listed in Table 4 shall not
be used in a refrigerating system in excess of 1000 pounds
unless approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
8.11 Machinery Room Requirements. (See Definitions 2.34
and 2.35.)
8.11.1 Each refrigerating machinery room shall be pro-
vided with tight -fitting door or doors and have no parti-
tions or openings that will permit the passage of escaping
refrigerant to other parts of the building.
8.11.2 Each refrigerating machinery room shall be pro-
vided with means for ventilation to the outer air. The ven-
all
VJLC STANDARD 49-1.558 UNDORM BUILDING CODE
Installation TABLE 5--3VDWWM AIR DUCT AREAS AND OPENMGS
( d.)
Weight of
Mechanicalscharge
Open window
refrigerant
Duct _
or door
in system, lbs. odfair
sq, tt
area, sq. ft.
up to 20
150
4
50
250
3i
6
100
400
10
150
550
%12%
200
680
250
800
1
15
300
900
1
17
409
1,100
1l4
20
500
1,275
11A
22
600
1,450
1%
24
700
I,630
1%
26
6o
1,800
2
29
9W
11950
2
30
1,000
2,050
2
31 '..
1,250
2,250
2%
38
1,500
2,500
2%
37 '
1,750
2,700
23A
38
2,000
2,900
23A
40
2,500
3,300
2%
43
3,000
3,700
3
48
4,000
4,600
3%
55
5,000
51500
4%
62
6.000
6,300
5
68
81000
8,000
5%
80
9,000
8,700
6%
85
10,000
9,500
g
go
12,000
10,900
7
100
14,000
12,200
7%
109
16,000
13,300
7%
118
18,000
14,300
8
125
20,000
15,200
8%
130
25,000
17,000
8%
140
30,000
18,200
9
145
35,000
19,400
914
150
40,000
20,500
9%
155
45,000
21,500
9%
186
illation shall consist of windows or doors opening to the
outer air, of the size shown in Table 5, or of mechanical
means capable of removing the air from the room in accord-
ance with Table 5. The amount of ventilation for refriger-
ant removal purposes shall be determined by the refrigerant
content of the largest system in the machinery room.
8.11.8 Mechanical Ventilation, when used, shall consist of
one or more power -driven exhaust fans, which shall be
capable of removing from the refrigerating machinery room
the amount of air specified in Table 5. The inlet to the fan,
or fans, or air duct connection shall be located near the
refrigerating equipment. The outlet from the fan, or fang,
612
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 49-1.58
or air duct connections shall terminate outside of the build-
ing in an approved manner. When air ducts are used either
on the inlet or discharge side of the fan, or fans, they shall
have an area not less than specified in Table 5. Provision
should be made for the inlet of air to replace that being
exhausted.
8.11.4 Ulm T Machinery Rooms in basements or sub-
basements (see Definition 2.35) shall have, as specified in
Table 5, mechanical ventilation operating continuously.
8.12 Air Duct Systems of air conditioning equipment for
human comfort using mechanical refrigeration should be
installed in accordance with accepted safety standards.
9.1 General. Refrigerant piping, valves, fittings, and re-
lated parts used in the construction and installation of
refrigerating systems shall conform to the American Stand-
ard Code for Pressure Piping.
9.2 Metal Enclosures or Pipe Ducts for Soft Copper Tubing.
Rigid or flexible metal enclosures shall be provided for soft,
annealed copper tubing used for refrigerant piping erected
on the premises and containing other than Group 1 refriger-
ants. No enclosures shall be required for connections be-
tween condensing unit and the nearest riser box, provided
such connections do not exceed six feet (61) in length.
9.3.1 Standard wail wrought steel or wrought iron pipe
may be used for design working pressures not exceeding 300
psig, provided lap -welded, electric resistance welded, or
seamless pipe is used for sizes two inches (2") and larger,
and extra strong wall pipe is used for liquid lines for sizes
one and one-half inches (1%") and smaller.
9.3.2 Standard iron pipe size copper and red brass (not
less than 80 per cent copper) pipe and tubing may be used.
9.3.3 Watertube size hard copper tubing used for refriger-
ant piping erected on the premises shall conform to types
X or L for dimensions and specifications, except that copper
tubing with outside diameters of one-fourth inch (14") and
three-eighths inch (%") shall have a minimum nominal
wall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch and 0.032 inch,
respectively.
9.3.4 Soft annealed copper tubing used for refrigerant
piping erected on the premises shall not be used in sizes
larger than seven -eighths inch (%") outside diameter [three-
fourths inch (%") nominal]. Minimum nominal wall thick-
nesses of soft annealed copper tubing shall be as follows:
OUTSIDE WALL
DIAMETER THICKNESS
(Inches) (Inches)
....._.._.... _..........................__ . _. 0.030
_............ _.......... _... _.. _.... _...... _............ 0.032
......._._ ....................._.._-_........ _. _... _. 0.032
.............._.....--.............._._....____.._ _. 0.035
.....___.......___.._...._._.......___ O.042
.................__.__...........___...._.._ __.. _. 0.045
613
Section 9:
Refrigerant
Piping, Valves,
Fittings, and
Relates Farts
9.3 Specific
Minimum
Requirements
for
Refrigerant
Pipe and
Tubing
U.B.C. RTANDARD 49-1-38 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
9.34 Sweat joints on copper tubing used in refrigerating
systems containing Group 2 or Group 3 refrigerants shall be
brazed joints. Soldered joints shall not be used in such
refrigerating systems.
9.4 Joints and Refrigerant-Contslning Parte in Air Dneta,
Joints and all refrigerant -containing parts of a refrigerating
system located in an air duct of an air conditioning system
for human comfort shall be constructed to withstand, with.
out leakage, a temperature of 1000 F.
8 5 Exposure of Refrigerant Pipe Joints. Refrigerant pipe
joints erected on the premises shall be exposed to view for
visual inspection prior to being covered or enclosed.
9.8 9.8,L General Requirements. All systems containing more
Values than 50 pounds of a Group 1 refrigerant or 6 pounds of ae
Group 2 or 3 refrigerant, other than systems utilizing non -
positive displacement compressors, shall have stop valves
Installed as follows:
a. Each Wet of each compressor, compressor unit, or
condensing unit;
b. Each discharge outlet of each compressor, compressor
unit, or condensing unit, and of each liquid receiver.
9.8.2 Systems Containing 100 Pounds or More of Refriger-
ant. All systems containing 100 pounds or more of a re-
frigerant, other than systems utilizing nonpositive displace-
ment compressors, shall have stop valves, in addition to
those in 9.6.1, on each inlet of each liquid receiver and
each branch liquid and suction line except that none shall
be required on the inset of a receiver in a condensing unit
nor on the inlet of a receiver which is an integral part of
a condenser.
9.8.3 Stop valves used with soft annealed copper tubing
or hard drawn copper tubing three-quarter inch (%") nom-
inal size or smaller shall be securely mounted, independent
of tubing fastenings or supports.
9.6.4 Stop valves shall be suitably labelled if it is not
obvious what they control. Numbers may be used to label
the valves provided a key to the numbers is located near
the valves.
9.of D1 9.7.1 Refrigerant piping crossing an open space which
Piping Ref affords passageway in any building shall be not less than
ag seven and one-half feet (7%,) above the floor unless against
the ceiling of such space.
9.7.2 Free passageway shall not be obstructed by refriger-
ant piping. Refrigerant piping shall not be placed in any
elevator, dumbwaiter, or other shaft containing a moving
Object, or in any shaft which has openings to living gdar-
ters or to main exit hallways. Refrigerant piping shall not
be placed in public hallways, lobbies, or stairways, except
that such refrigerant piping may pass across a public hall-
way if there are no joints in the section in the public hall-
wav, and provided nonferrous tubing of one inch (1") nom-
inal diameter lone and one-eighth inch (I 'A") outside roam-
. eter) and smaller be contained in a rigid metal pipe.
614
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 49-1-58
10.1.1 Every part of a refrigerating system, with the ex-
Section 10.
ception of pressure gages and control mechanisms, shall be
Design and
designed, constructed, and assembled to be capable of with-
Construction
standing a test pressure not less than the minimum refrig-
of Equipment
erant leak field test pressure specified in Table 6 without
10.1 General
being stressed beyond one-third of its ultimate strength.
Note: This paragraph establishes a minimum design work-
ing pressure in terms of the field test pressure so that the
minimum refrigerant leak field test pressure, specified in
Table 6, can be safely applied. Rules governing pressure.
relief devices, pressure -limiting devices, etc., shall be based
on the design working pressure selected.
10.1.2 All materials used in the construction and installa-
tion of refrigerating systems shall be suitable for conveying
the refrigerant used. No material shall be used that will
deteriorate because of the refrigerant, or the oil, or the
combination of both.
Note: Many refrigerants are corrosive to tl:e usual mater-
lals when moisture or air, or both, are present and it is
assumed in approving these materials that the system will
be charged and operated in accordance with accepted prac-
tice, to prevent or minimize this corrosion.
10.1.3 Aluminum, Zinc, or Magnesium shall not be used
In contact with methyl chloride in a refrigerating system.
Magnesium alloys shall not be used in contact with any
Freon refrigerant.
10.2 Minimum Test Pressures. Every refrigerant -contain-
ing part of every system, including pressure gages and
control mechanisms, shall be tested and proved tight by
the manufacturer at not less than the minimum refrigerant
leak field test pressure, specified in Table 6. (See 10.3.)
10.2.1 The test pressure applied to either the high or Iow
side of each refrigerating system shall be equal to the design
working pressure of the pressure vessels in the high or low
side of the system, respectively, or to the setting of the
pressure relief device protecting the respective pressure
vessels, whichever is lower, but not less than the minimum
refrigerant leak field test pressures specified in Table 6. Any
components connected to said pressure vessels shall be of
sufficient strength to conform to the design requirements of
Par. 10.1.1.
10.3 Equipment listed by an Approved Nationally Recog-
nized Testing Laboratory having a follow-up inspection ser-
vice shall be deemed as meeting the intent of the require-
ments of 10.1 and 10.2. (See 1.2 and 2.3.1.)
10.4.1 Pressure-limtting devices shall be provided on all 10.4 Pressure -
systems containing more than 20 pounds of refrigerant and limiting
operating above atmospheric pressure, and on all water Devices
615
1%J1,C. STANDARD 10-I-68 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
1 systems so constructed that the compressor or gener-
ator is capable of producing a pressure in excess of the
Devices test pressure; except water cooled unit systems containing
(Gomm) not more than 3 pounds of a Group 1 refrigerant, providing
the operating pressure developed in the system with the
water supply shut off does not exceed one-fifth the ultimate
strength of the system, or providing an overload device will
stop the action of the compressor before the pressure exceeds
one-fifth the ultimate strength of the system.
10.4.2 The maximum setting to which a pressure limiting
device may readily be set by use of the adjusting means
provided shall not exceed 90 per cent of the setting of the
pressure -relief device, 90 per cent of the refrigerant leak
field test pressure actually applied, or 90 per cent of the
design working pressure of the high side of the system,
whichever is smallest, The pressure limiting device shall
stop the action of the pressure -imposing element at a pres.
sure no higher than this maximum setting. In determining
this maximum setting for systems erected on the premises
and field leak tested in accordance with 14.1.1, 90 per cent
of the leak test pressures in Table 6 may be utilized in lieu
of the 5eld test pressure actually applied. (See 14.1 and
14.1.1 for minimum refrigerant leak field test pressures.)
10.4.3 Pressure-Iimtting devices shall be connected, with
no intervening stop valves, between the pressure -imposing
element and any stop valve on the discharge side.
10.6 Liquid Level Gage Glasses, except those of the bull's-
eye or reflex type, shall have automatic closing shut-off
valves, and such glasses shall be adequately protected against
injury.
10.6 Dial of a Pressure Gage, when the gage is perma-
nently installed on the high side of a refrigerating system,
shall be graduated up to approximately double the operating
pressure, but in no case less than 1.2 times the design
working pressure.
10.7 Nameplate. Each separately sold condensing unit and
each compressor or compressor unit sold for field assembly
in a refrigerating system shall carry a nameplate marked
with the manufacturer's name, nationally registered trade-
mark or trade name, identification number, and the name
of the refrigerant for which it is designed.
Section 1.2: 12A General. Every refrigerating system shall be protect -
NOW ed by a pressure -relief device unless so constructed that
In General pressure due to fire conditions will be safely relieved by
soldered joints, lead gaskets, fusible plugs, or other parts
of the system.
12.1.1 No stop varve shall be located between any auto-
matic pressure -relief device or fusible plug and the part or
parts of the system protected thereby, except when the
parallel relief devices mentioned in 13.2 are so arranged
that only one can be rendered inoperative at a time for
.. testing or repair purposes.
818
VOL, III -1888 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 48-1-68
18.1.8 All pressure -relief devices shell be connected as section 12:
nearly as practicable directly to the pressure vessel or other Relief Devloes
parts of the system protected thereby, above the liquid In General
refrigerant level, and installed so that they are readily (Cont'd.)
accessible for inspection and repair and so that they cannot
be readily rendered inoperative. Fusible plugs may be locat-
ed above or below the liquid refrigerant level.
12.1.3 The seats and discs of pressure -relief devices shall
be constructed of suitable material to resist refrigerant
corrosion or other chemical action caused by the refrigerant.
Seats or discs of cast iron shall not be used.
12.1.4 The rated discharge capacity of a pressure -relief
valve for a refrigerant -containing vessel, expressed in pounds
of air per minute, shall be determined at a pressure at the
Inlet of the relief valve equal to 110 per cent of the valve
setting.
12.1.6 The rated discharge capacity of a rupture member
or fusible plug in pounds of air per minute shall be determin-
ed by the following formulas:
C = OAP,d' (1)
or
d = 1.28 —
P,
where C = minimum required discharge capacity, In lbs.
of air per min.
d = minimum diameter of bore of fusible plug or
Internal diameter of Inlet pipe to rupture mem-
ber in inches
For rupture members:
P, = bursting pressure, equal to design working
pressure, except that for 13.7 the bursting prew
ure equals 1.20 times design working pressure,
Fell;
For fusible ¢lugs:
P, = saturation pressure, corresponding to the
stamped temperature melting point of the fus-
ible plug or the critical pressure of the refrlg-
erant used, whichever is smaller, psig
Note: This paragraph is not intended to apply to gas bulk
storage tanks that are not permanently connected to a re-
frigeration system.
12.1.8 All pressure -relief devices (not fusible plugs) shall
be directly pressure -actuated'
12.1.7 The size of the discharge pipe from the pressure -
617
C.B.C. STANDAHD 49.1-38 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Section 12: relief device shall be not lees than the size of the relief
Relld Devices device outlet. The discharge from more than one relief
to General device may be run into a common header, the area of
(Cont -4L) which shati be not less than the aum of the areas of the
pipes connected thereto.
12.1.8 The length of discharge piping permitted to be
Installed on the outlet of a relief valve, rupture member, or
fusible plug shall be determined as follows:
3 P d+1r
C = (2)
V/1
or
d = s
where O = minimum required discharge capacity in the. of
air per min.
d = internal diameter of pipe in in.
L = length of discharge pipe in ft.
P = 0.25P, (P, Is defined under Equation 1.)
(See Table 9 for computations derived from the preced-
ing formula.)
12.2 Pressure -Relief Devices for Positive Displacement
Compressors. Positive displacement compressors operating
above 15 pounds per square inch gage and having a displace-
ment exceeding fifty cubic feet (50 cu. ft.) per minute,
shall be equipped by the manufacturer with a pressure -relief
device of adequate else and pressure setting to prevent
rupture of the compressor, located between the compressor
and stop valve on the discharge side. The discharge from
such relief device may be vented to the atmosphere or Into
the low pressure side of the system.
12.3 Discharge of Pressure -Relief Devices and PStsible
Plugs on an systems containing more than 6 pounds of
Group 2 or Group 3 refrigerants shall be to the outside of
the building in an approved manner. Discharge of pressure,
relief devices and fusible plugs on all systems containing
more than 100 pounds of Group I refrigerants, unless in-
stalled in a Machinery Room used for no purpose other than
to house mechanical equipment and complying with the pro-
visions as specified in Paragraph 8.11, shall be to the outside
of the building in an approved manner.
12.3.1 Pressure relief devices may discharge into the low
side of the system, provided the pressure relief devices are
of a type not appreciably affected by back pressures and
provided the low side of the system is equipped with pressure
relief devices. The relief devices on the low side of the sys-
tem shall have sufficient capacity to protect the pressure
4 . vessels that are relieved into the low side of the system, or
to protect all pressure vessels on the low side of the system,
whichever relieving capacity is the largest, as computed by
618
4
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 49-1-58
the formula in Paragraph 13.5. Such low side pressure relief Section 12:
devices shall be set in accordance with Paragraph 13.6 and Relief Devices
vented to the outside of the building in an approved manner. in General
'd.)
12.4 Ammonia Discharge, where ammonia is used, the (Cont
discharge may be into a tank of water which shall be used
for no purpose except ammonia absorption. At least 1 gallon
of fresh water shall be provided for each pound of ammonia
in the system. The water used shall be prevented from
freezing without the use of salt or chemicals. The tank
shall be substantially constructed of not less than one-eighth
inch (%•) or No. 11 U.S. gage iron or steel. No horizontal
dimension of the tank shall be greater than one-half the
height. The tank shall have hinged cover, or, if of the
enclosed type, shall have a vent hole at the top. All pipe
connections shall be through the top of the tank only. The
discharge pipe from the pressure -relief valves shall discharge
the ammonia in the center of the tank near the bottom.
12.5 Sulphur Dioxide Discharge, where sulphur dioxide is
used, the discharge may be into a tank of absorptive brine
which shall be used for no purpose except sulphur dioxide
absorption. There shall be 1 gallon of standard dichromate
brine (2% pounds sodium dichromate per gallon of water)
for each pound of sulphur dioxide In the system. Brines
made with caustic soda or soda ash may be used in place
of sodium dichromate, provided the quantity and strength
give the equivalent sulphur dioxide absorbing power. The
tank shall be substantially constructed of not less than one-
eighth inch (?J") or No. 11 U.S. gage iron or steel. The
tank shall have a hinged cover, or, 4f of the enclosed type,
shall have a vent hole at the top. All pipe connections shall
be through the top of the tank only. The discharge pipe
from the pressure -relief valve shall discharge the sulphur
dioxide in the center of the tank near the bottom.
13.2 Pressure Vessels Over 3 Cubic Feet. Each pressure
Section 13:
vessel containing liquid refrigerant with internal gross vol-
Relief Devices
ume exceeding three cubic feet (3 cu. ft.) except as speci-
for Pressure
fled in 13.4, and which may be shut off by valves from all
Vessels
other parts of a refrigerating system, shall be protected by
a pressure -relief device having sufficient capacity to prevent
the pressure from rising more than 10 per cent above the
setting of the pressure relief device. (See 13.5.)
13.2.1 Pressure Vessels Over 3 Cubic Feet, but Less Than
10 Cubic Feet. Under conditions specified in 13.2, a single
relief device (relief valve or rupture member) may be used
on pressure vessels having less than ten cubic feet 410 cu.
ft.) gross volume.
13.2.2 Pressure Vessels of 10 Cubic Feet or Over. Under
conditions specified in 13.2, a pressure relief valve in parallel
with a rupture member or second pressure relief valve shall
be provided on pressure vessels having a gross volume of 10
cubic feet (10 cu. ft.) or over. Each pressure relief valve or
rupture member shall have sufficient capacity to prevent the
pressure in the pressure vessel from rising more than 10 per
cent above the setting of the pressure relief device.
619
UJLV, STANDARD 49.1-58 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Swideals. 13.ttl PAW Valves Discharging into Low Side of the
IWWD"lm System Under conditions permitted in 12.3.1, a single relief
far Prousione valve (not rapture member) of the required relieving eapac-
V ity may be used on vessels of ten cubic feet (10 cu. ft.) or
(Comm) over.
I&U Relief Devices in Parallel on Large Vessels. In cases
where large pressurev Is containing liquid refrigerant
except as specified in 13.4, require the use of two or more
Pressure-rellef devices in parallel to obtain the capacity
required by 13.5, the battery of pressure -relief devices shall
be considered as a unit, and therefore as one pressure -relief
device.
I&$ Pressure Vessels with Gross Volume of 8 Cable Feet
or Mae. FAch pressure vessel having a gross volume of three
cubic feet (3 cu. ft.) or less, containing liquid refrigerant,
except as specified in 13.4, and which may be shut off by
valves from all other parts of a refrigerating system, shall
be protected by a pressure -relief device, or fusible plug. A
fusible plug is permitted only on the high side of a refrig-
erating system. Pressure vessels of less than three -Inch (3")
I.D. are exempt from these requirements.
18.8.1 Belief Valves on Pressure Vessels with Gross Vol-
ume of 8 Cubic Feet or Less. If a relief valve or rupture
member is used to protect a pressure vessel, the ultimate
bursting pressure of the pressure vessel so protected shall
be at least 2?t times the pressure setting of the pressure
relief valve or rupture member.
18.8.2 Fusible Plugs on Pressure Vessels with Gross Vol-
nme of 3 Cubic Feet or Less. If a fusible plug is used, the
ultimate bursting pressure of the pressure vessel so pro-
tected shall be at least 2% times the refrigerant saturation
pressure, paig, corresponding to the stamped temperature
on the fusible plug, or at least 2% times the critical pressure
of the refrigerant used, whichever is smaller.
18.4 RAW Devices for Pressure Vessels Used, as, or as
Part of, Evaporator. Pressure vessels having internal diam-
eters greater than six inches (6") used as, or as part of,
evaporators insulated or installed in insulated space, and
which may be shut o3 by valves from all other parts of a
refrigerating system shall be protected by a pressure relief
device in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 13.2
and 13.3 except that the provisions of Paragraph 13.2.2,
requiring a second parallel relief device, shall not apply.
Pressure vessels used as evaporators, having internal diam-
eters of six inches (6") or less, are exempt from pressure
relief valve requirements.
185 Required Capacity. The minimum required rated dis.
clierge capacity of the pressure -relief device or fusible plug
for a refri t- istaming, vessel shall be determined by
the following formula:
620
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 49-1-58
C = IDL (3) Sectlin is:
where C = minimum required discharge capacity of the Belief Devices
relief device in lbs. of air per min. for Pressure
D = outside diameter of the vessel in ft. vessels
L = length of the vessel in ft.
J = factor dependent upon kind of refrigerant, as
follows:
Kind of refrigerant Value of /
Ammonia 0.5
Freon -12, Freon -22, and Carrene-7 1.6
All other refrigerants 1.0
18.6 Pressure -Relief Device Setting. Except as permitted
in 13.3.1 all pressure -relief devices shall be set to start to
function at a pressure not to exceed the design working pres-
sure of the pressure vessel as determined by the manufac-
turer and stamped on the pressure vessel or system.
18.7 Rupture Member Setting When Used in Parallel with
Relief Valves. Rupture members used in parallel with press-
ure -relief valves on refrigerant -containing vessels shall func-
tion at a pressure not to exceed 20 per cent above the design
working pressure of the vessel.
13.8 Other Rupture Member Setting. All other rupture
members used in lieu of, or in series with, a relief valve
shall function at a pressure not to exceed the design work-
ing pressure of the vessel.
13.9.]. All pressure -relief valves for refrigerant -containing
vessels shall be set and sealed by the manufacturer.
14.1 General. Every refrigerant -containing part of every
system that is erected on the premises, except compressors,
condensers, evaporators, safety devices, piessurd gages, and
control mechanisms, that are fau.ory tested, shall be tested
and proved tight after complete installation, and before
operation, at not less than the minimum refrigerant leak
field test pressures shown in Table 6, or in accordance with
14.1.1.
14.1.1 Systems erected on the premises using Group 1 re-
frigerant and with copper tubing not exceeding five-eighths
inch (%") O.D., with all thickness as required by paragraphs
9.3.3 and 9.3.4 may be tested by means of the refrigerant
charged into the system at the saturated vapor pressure of
the refrigerant at 70 F. or higher.
14.2 Test Medium. No oxygen or any combustible gas or
combustible mixture of gases shall be used within the
system for testing.
14.2.1 The means used to build up the test pressure shall
have either a pressure limiting device or a pressure reducing
device and a gauge on the outlet side.
621
13.9 Marking
of Relief
Devices
Section 14:
Field Tests
UJLC_ STANDARD 49-I-58 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
seetka I 143of Te. A dated declaration of test should
be providedmr all systems containing 50 lbs. or more of
(' d.) refrigerant, -hare required by 14.1. The declaration should
be mounted is a frame, protected by glass, and posted in
the machinery
refrigerant and the field refrigera
nt Bleak test p oresfsu es
Applied to the high side and the low side of the system.
The tion of test should be signed by the installer and,
if an tinspectair is present at the teats, he should also sign
the declariation. When requested, copies of this declaration
shall be furatshed to the enforcing authority.
The leak test pressure requirements of Table 6 are not
intended to apply to gas bulk storage tanks that are not
Permanently connected to a refrigeration system.
TABLE 8-111MUMM REFB1OZRANT LEAH FIELD
TEST PRESSURES
R°Jnperaat acme
Che.abat
formula
HiltisaLLm field
rs rtperant
eat9
eLLTa, pai
Mph Low
res-
ours sussre
side aide
Ammonia ..-.-.-.-.---..._.-.-.....---..--......
NH,
300
150
Butane .. -...._-------------...................•
C.H.95
50
Carbon dioxide ...................................
CO,
1500
1000
Diehlorodifluorometbane
(Br4ga-12)...........I................. ........
CCI:F,
235
140
Dichlorodifluoromethane 73.87.....
CCI; F,
285
150
and Ethylidene Fluoride 26.21 ...
CH, -CHF,
285
150
tCarrene No. 71
Dfchloroethylene ... ......_............ ..
C,H,Cl,
So
30
Dichloromethane (Carrene No. 1)
(Methylene chloride) ...................
CH,CI,
3o
30
Dichloromonofluoromethane
(Freon -21) ................. ..........
CHCI,F
70
40
Dichtorotetrafluoroethane
(Freon -114) ...................................
gCI.F.
50
50
Ethane .....................
CA
1200
700
Ethyl chloride ...................................
C,H.Cl
50
50
Ethylene ..._ ........................................
C:II.
1800
1200
Isobutane ...-.-._ ..... .......... ..................:
(C$)aCH
130
70
Methyl chloride ...............................
CH,CI
210
120
...
Methyl formate ..........._................-
HCOOCH,
50
50
Monochiordifluoromethane
(Freon -22) ...............»......._....»---
CHCIF,
Soo
150
Propane .............--- .............. ..........._..-
C,H.
300
150
Sulphur dioxide ..............._................
SO,
170
85
Trichloromonofluoromethane
(Freon -11) .................................
CL%F
30
30
Tri chlorotrifiuoroethane
(Freon -113) ..................................
C,C1,F,
30
30
VOL. M-1958 EDITION' U.B.C. STANDARD 49-1-58
a. For refrigerants not listed to Table 6 the test pressure for the
high pressure side shall be not less than the saturated vapor pressure
of the refriCrant at 150 F. The test pressure for the low pressure
side shall De not less than the saturated vapor pressure of the
refrigerant at 110 F. In no case shall the test pressure be less than
30 pats. D
}ire urs anhen d die harge r Into the uction line southern systlem
the booster cons ressor is considered s rt of the tow side. ma
the values hated under the low side column In Table 6 shall be
used for both high and low side of the booster comppressor yrovlded
that a low yresesure stage compressor of the posltive displacement
type shall have a pressure relief valve.
a In field testing systems using nonposittve displacement com-
pre°sora, the entire system shall ba considered for field tat par.
poses as the low side pressure.
15.1 Signs. Each refrigerating system erected on the Section 15:
premises shall be provided with an easily legible permanent Instructions
sign securely attached and easily accessible, Indicating
thereon the name and address of the installer, the kind and
total number of pounds of refrigerant required in the system
for normal operations, and the refrigerant leak field test
pressure applied.
15.2 Metal Signs for Systems Containing More Than 108
Pounds of Refrigerant. Systems containing more than 100
pounds of refrigerant shall be provided with metal signs
having letters not less than one-half inch (%-) in height
designating the main shut-off valves to each vessel, main
steam or electrical control, remote control switch, and
pressure -limiting device. On all exposed high pressure and
low pressure piping In each room where installed outside
the machinery room, shall be signs, as specified above, with
the name of the refrigerant and the letters "HP" or "LP."
15.3 New Sign for Changed Refrigerant. When the kind
of refrigerant is changed as provided in 15.7 ( Substitution
of Refrigerant), there shall be a new sign, of the same type
as specified in 15.2, indicating clearly that a substitution
has been made, and stating the same information for the
new refrigerant as was stated in the original.
15.4 Charging and Discharging Refrigerants. When re-
frigerant is added to a system, except a unit system requir-
ing less than 0 pounds of refrigerant, it shall be charged
Into the low pressure side of the system. Any point on the
downstream side of the main liquid line stop valve shall be
considered as part of the low pressure side when operating
with said stop valve in the closed position. No service
container shall be left connected to a system except while
charging or withdrawing refrigerant.
15.5 Refrigerants Withdrawn from Refrigerating Systems
shall be transferred to approved containers only. No refrig-
erant shall be discharged to a sewer.
15.8 Containers Used for Refrigerants Withdrawn from a
Refrigerating System shall be carefully weighed each time
they are used for this purpose, and the containers shall
not be filled in excess of the permissible filling weight for
such containers and such refrigerants as are prescribed In
the pertinent regulations of the Interstate Commerce Com-
mission
623
C.B.C. STANDARD 49.1-58
UNIFORM BUILDING (;DDE
Section 25t 15 T of Hind of Refrtgerant in a system shall
not be trade without the permission of the stem shall
( d.) authority. the user, and the matters of the the approvingnal equi
meat and due observance of safety requirements, including:
a The effects of the substituted refrigerant on materials
in the system;
b.
shouldOPosssiib liilit of more erloathan i g the liquid receiver which
per cent seof It
C. The liability of exceeding moor horsepower, des
working pressure, or any other element the would
violate any of the provisions of this code;
d. The Proper size of refrigerant controls;
e. The effect on the operation and setting of safety
devices;
f. The Possible hazards created by mixture of the original
and the substituted refrigerant;
f. Effect of the classification of the refrigerant as pro_
vided in this standard.
15.8 Refrigerant Stored in a Machinery Room shall be not
MO
re than 20 per cent of the normal refrigerant charged
nor more than 300 Pounds of the ref)rerant,in addition to
the charge In the system and the refrigerant at red in a
Permanently attached receiver, and then only in approved
storage containers.
15.9 Masks Or One
or helmet shall be
ts
Provided at a locaattioln eco6een ent okthe machinery room
ihien an amount Of a Group 2 refrigerant between 100 and
of a Group 21 refrigerant are employed, more
st leasttwomaun
sksor helmeta shall be provided.
15.9.1 Only complete helmets or masks marked as
ed by the Bureau of Mines of the United States Deparaptmentprov-
of the interior and suitable for the refrigerant employed
shall be used and theyshall be kept in a suitable cabinet
immediately outside the machinery room or other approved
accessible location.
15.8.2 Canisters or cartridges of helmets or masks shall
be renewed immediately after having been used or the seal
broken and, if unused, must be renewed at least once every
two years. The date of filling shall be marked thereon.
15.10. Maintenance All refrigerating systems shall be
maintained by the user in a clean condition, free from accu-
mulations of oily dirt, waste, and other debris, and shall be
kept readily accessible at all times.
15.11 Ilespot(sibility as to Operation of the System. It shall
be the duty of the person in charge of the premises on which
a refrigerating system containing more than 50 pounds of
refflgerant is installed, to place a card conspicuously as near
( fo Practicable to the refrigerant compressor giving directions
for the operation of
o the system, including precautions to be
rued in case of a breakdown or leak as follows:
624
.,.:$.. � .:,.�-....,,.... - :gib,...... _, ..._ .. ........ : �,
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 49-I-58
a. Instruction for shutting down the system in ease of Section IS:
emergency; Instructions
b. The name, address, and day and night telephone num- (COard.)
here for obtaining service;
c. The name, address, and telephone number of the muni-
cipal inspection department having jurisdiction, and
TABLE 7 -LENGTH: OF DISCHARGE PIPING FOR
BELIEF VALVES OR RUPTURE MEMBERS OF
VARIOUS DISCHARGE CAPACITIES
sgWe.
teaptb of
dtechar a
Wge. �•
(L) %
INacharps capcctty in lb. o/ air ger min. (G)
standard mall Bon Vigo sBee, in.
ii 1 1!( lift 2 2% 2
RELIEF DEVICE SET AT 25 PSIG (P,)
50
0.81
1.6
2.9
5.9
8.7
16.3
25.3
43.8
75
0.67
1.4
2.4
4.9
7.2
13.3
20.9
35.8
100
0.58
1.2
2.1
4.2
6.2
11.5
18.0
30.9
150
0.47
0.95
1.7
34
5.0
9.4
14.6
25.3
200
0.41
0.8
1.5
2.9
4.4
8.1
12.6
21.8
300
0.33
0.67
1.2
2.4
3.6
6.6
10.5
17.0
RELIEF DEVICE SET
AT 50 PSIG (P,)
50
1.6
3.3
5.9
11.9
17.4
32.5
50.6
87.6
75
1.3
2.7
4.9
9.7
14.3
26.5
41.8
71.5
100
1.2
2.3
4.2
8.4
12.3
23.0
36.0
61.7
150
0.94
1.9
3.5
6.9
10.0
18.7
29.2
50.6
200
0.81
1.6
2.9
5.9
8.7
16.3
25.3
43.7
300
0.06
1.3
2.5
4.9
7.1
13.3
21.0
35.7
RELIEF DEVICE SET
AT 75 PSIG (P,)
50
2.4
4.9
8.9
17.9
26.1
48.7
75.9
131.5
75
2.0
4.1
7.3
14.6
21.4
39.8
62.6
107.0
100
1.7
3.5
6.4
12.6
18.5
34.4
54.0
92.6
150
1.4
2.8
5.2
10.3
15.0
28.0
43.8
75.9
200
1.2
2.5
4.4
8.9
13.1
24.4
37.9
65.6
300
0.9
2.0
3.7
7.3
10.7
19.9
31.5
53.5
RELIEF DEVICE SET
AT 100 PSIG (P,)
50
3.2
6.6
11.9
23.8
34.8
65.0
101.2
175.2
75
2.7
5.4
9.7
19.4
28.6
53.0
83.6
143.0
100
2.3
4.6
8.5
16.8
24.6
45.9
72.0
123.6
150
1.9
3.8
6.9
13.7
20.0
37.4
58.4
101.2
200
1.6
3.3
5.9
11.9
17.5
32.5
50.6
87.6
300
1.3
2.7
4.9
9.7
14.2
26.5
42.0
71.4
625
U.B.C. STANDARD 19.1-38 UNIFORM mlynZIN
Q CODE
Section M. TABLE N0. 7 (Continued)
( ) FO&
e oteasa�Mq»b. t�f air ev1 fsVICE SETAT150PSIGp,)
.9 35,7 52,3 97.5 151,8 262.8
.6 29,242.979.5 125.4 214.5.7 25.2 36,9 68,9 108.0 135.4
150 2,8 5-7 10.4 20.6 30.0 56,1 87.6 15LS
200 2.4 4.9 8.9 17.8 26.2 48.7 76,9 131.4
300 1.9 4.0 7.4 14.6 21.1 $9.7 63,0 107,1
RELIEF DEVICE SET AT 200 PSIG (P.)
50 6.5 13.2 29.8 47,6 69.7 130.0 202,4 350,4
75 5.3 10.8 19.4 38,9 87.2 106,0 187.2 Zgg,p
100 4.6 9.2 16.9 33.6 49.2 81,8 144.0 247.2
200 3.8
l00 3.8 7.6 13.8 27.4 40.0 74.8 116.8 2024
6.5 11.8 23S 34.9 64,8 101.2
2:6 5.3 9.8 19.4 2&4 529 84 175.2 142.8
RELIEF DEVICE SET AT 250 PSI(; (P,)
50 8.1 16.5 29.8 59.6 87.1 162.5 253.0 487.0
?5 8.7 13.5 24.3 48.6 71.5 132,5 209.0 357.5
100 5.8 11.6 21.2 42.0 61.6 114.8 180.0 909.0
150 4.7 8.5 17.3 34.3 50.0 93,5 146,0 253,0
200 4.1 8.2 14.8 29.7 43,7 81.2 126.5 219.0
300 3-3 6.7 12.3 24,3 55.5 66,2 10&0 178.5
RELIEF DEVICE SET AT 306 PSIG (P.)
50 9.7 19.8 35.7 71.4 104.5 195,0 863,8 525,8
106 6.9
75 7.9 16,2 28,1 58.3 85.8 159.0 250.8 429.0
13.9 25.4 50.4 73.9 137.7 216.0 370.8
150 5.6 11.3 20.7 41.1 60.0 112.2 175.2303.6
200 4.9 9,8 17.8 35.6 52.4 97.4 151.8 262,8
3.9 7,9 14.7 29.1 42.6 79.4 126,0 214,2
instructions to notify said departin
case of emergency. department immedlatel Y
X15.12 rP�steaa" should be checked for accuracy prior
unusually high pressure, either b comparisonediately tevery occasion of
911803 or by setting the pointer by
derine by master dead
weight pressure gage tester.
626
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 51-1-58
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 51-1-58
Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases
Based on the National Fire Protection Association
Pamphlet No. 58, (May, 1957)
See Section 5101, Uniform Building Code, Volume i
GENERAL PROVISIONS
See. 51.101. The following Standard applies to the design, Scope
construction, location and operation of liquefied petroleum
gas installations. This Standard does not apply to marine or
pipe terminals, natural gasoline plants, refineries or tank
farms; nor does it apply to chemical plants where specific
approval of construction and installation plans is obtained
from the Building Official, provided such approval is based on
substantially equivalent requirements.
NOTE: For industrial installations utilizing storage con-
tainers of over 2,000 gallons capacity, plans shall he sub-
mitted to the Building Official before construction.
Sec. 51.102. (a) Application. The term, "Basic Rules," ap- Application
plies to all Sections of this Standard except Sections 51.130 to and
51.132, and unless noted in "Basic Rules." Definitloms
Sections 51.115 to 51.120-- "bottled gas" --apply to installa-
tions utilizing containers constructed in accordance with
Interstate Commerce Commission specifications.
Sections 51-121 to 51.129 apply to installations utilizing con-
tainers other than those constructed in accordance with Inter-
state Commerce Commission specifications.
Sections 51.130 to 51.132 apply to the storage of containers
not installed for use at final utilization point.
(b) Definitions. The term "liquefied petroleum gas (gases),"
or "LPG (LP -Gas)," as used in this Standard shall mean and
include any material composed predominantly of any of the
following hydrocarbons or mixtures of them; propane, propy-
lene, butanes (normal butane of iso -butane), and butylenes.
When reference is made to gas in this Standard, it shall
refer to liquefied petroleum gases in either the liquid or gas-
eous state.
The term "containers" includes all vessels such as tanks,
cylinders or drums used for transportation or storing liquefied
petroleum gases.
The term "systems" as used in this standard refers to an
assembly of equipment consisting essentially of the container
or containers, major devices such as vaporizers, relief valves,
excess flow valves, regulators and piping connecting such
parts.
The abbreviations "p.s.i.g." and "ps.i.g." as used in this
standard refer to pounds per square inch gauge and pounds
per square inch absolute, respectively.
The abbreviation ICC refers to the Interstate Commerce
Commission.
BASIC RULES
Sec. 51.103. (a) ICC Containers. Each system utilizing ICC Approval of
containers shall have their container Valves, connectors, mani- Equipment
fold valve assemblies, and regulators (bases, hoods or cabinets and Systems
if desired):
627
I.B.C. STANI/ARD 51-1-38 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Approvals of I. Tested and listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or,
andS 2. Tested and listed by a nationally recognized testing labo-
(ConVd.) ratory, or,
3. Inspected and approved by the Building Official
(b) Contslners other than ICC. Each system for domestic
or commemiai use utilizing containers of 2,000 gallons or less
water capacity, other than those constructed in accordance
with ICC specifications, shall consist of a container assembly
and one or more regulators, and may include other parts. The
system as a unit or the container assembly as a unit, and the
regulator or regulators, shall be individually:
L Tested and listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.,
or,
2. Tested and listed by a nationally recognized testing tabs
oratory, or,
3. Inspected and approved by the Building Official.
(c) Systema Utilizing Containers of Over 2,000 Capons.
In systems utilizing containers of over 2,000 gallons water
capacity, each regulator, container valve, excess flow valve,
gauging device and relief valve installed on or at the con-
tainer, shall have its accuracy in design, construction, and
Performance determined by:
I. Testing and ]sating by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.,
or,
2. Testing and listing by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory, or,
3. Inspected and approved by the Building Official.
Construction Sec. 51,104- Containers used with systems embodied in this
and Tests Standard shall be designed, constructed and tested in accord-
ance with nationally recognized standards.
CMarkings
os See. 51.105. Each container or system covered in Sections
51.121 to 51.129 of this Standard shall be marked with a
marking identifying compliance with, and other markings
required by the rules of the code under which the container
is constructed.
'3ee. 51,106. Containers and first stage regulating equipment
shall be located outside of buildings other than buildings
especially provided for this purpose, except small ICC con-
tainers and regulating equipment may be used indoors under
the following conditions: if temporarily used for dernonstra-
Aon Purposes and the container has a maximum water capa-
city of 12 pounds; if used with a completely self-contained gas
hand torch or similar equipment, and the container has a
maximum water capacity of two and one-half pounds; and as
Provided in this Standard.
Each individual container shall be located with respect to
the nearest important building or group of buildings or line
Of adjoining property which may be built on in accordance
with Table No. 51-1-A.
No containers while installed for use shall be stacked one
above the other.
628
VOL. III -1958 EDITION
TABLE NO. 51-1-A
U.B.C. STANDARD 51-1-58
In cases of bulk storage In heavily populated or congested
areas, the Building Official shall determine restrictions of
individual tank capacity, total storage, and distance to line of
adjoining property which may be built on and other reason-
able protective methods.
In industrial installations Involving containers of 150,000
gallons aggregate water capacity or more.. where serious
mutual exposures between the container and adjacent proper-
ties prevail, the Building Official may require fire walls
designed and constructed in accordance with good engineer-
ing practice.
In the case of buildings devoted exclusively to gas manufac-
turing and distributing operations the above distances may be
reduced provided that in no case shall containers of water
capacity exceeding 500 gallons be located closer than ten feet
(101) to such gas manufacturing and distributing buildings.
Any container used in domestic or commercial service,
where transfer of liquid is made from such containers into
portable containers such as on tractors, skid tanks, or similar
applications shall be located not less than fifty feet (50') from
nearest important building. Special attention shall be given to
maintaining the above distances on such transferring in
trailer camps with respect to any trailer.
Readily ignitable material such as weeds and long dry grass
shall be removed within ten feet (10') of any container.
The minimum separation between liquefied petroleum gas
containers and flammable liquid tanks shall be twenty feet
(209 and the minimum separation between a container and
the center line of the dike shall be ten feet (101. The fore-
going provision shall not apply when LP -Gas containers of
125 gallons or less capacity are installed adjacent to Class III
flammable liquid tanks of 275 gallons or less capacity. (See
U.B.C. Standard 9-1-58.)
Suitable means shall be taken to prevent the accumulation
of flammable liquids under adjacent liquefied petroleum gas
containers, such as by diking, diversion curbs or grading.
When dikes are used with flammable liquid tanks, no lique-
fied petroleum gas containers shall be located within the
diked area.
Location. of
Containers
and
Regulating
Equipment
(Cont'd.)
See. 51.107. All valves, fittings and accessories connected Container
directly to the container including primary shut-off valves, Valves and
shall have a rated working pressure of at least 250 p.,;A g., Accessories
and shall be of material and design suitable for LP -Gas serv-
629
MINIMUM DISTANCES
WATER CAPACITY
CONTAINERS
BETWEEN
PER
PER CONTAINER
ABOVE-
GROUND
ABOVE-
CON
GROUND
GROUND
TATNER8
Leas than 126 gallons........
10 feet
Nene
None
126 to 50(1 gallons...........__
501 to 2.000
10 feet
10 feet
3 feet
gailona...........
Over 2,000 gallons_......_...
25 feet
50 feet
25 feet
60 feet
3 feet
b feet
In cases of bulk storage In heavily populated or congested
areas, the Building Official shall determine restrictions of
individual tank capacity, total storage, and distance to line of
adjoining property which may be built on and other reason-
able protective methods.
In industrial installations Involving containers of 150,000
gallons aggregate water capacity or more.. where serious
mutual exposures between the container and adjacent proper-
ties prevail, the Building Official may require fire walls
designed and constructed in accordance with good engineer-
ing practice.
In the case of buildings devoted exclusively to gas manufac-
turing and distributing operations the above distances may be
reduced provided that in no case shall containers of water
capacity exceeding 500 gallons be located closer than ten feet
(101) to such gas manufacturing and distributing buildings.
Any container used in domestic or commercial service,
where transfer of liquid is made from such containers into
portable containers such as on tractors, skid tanks, or similar
applications shall be located not less than fifty feet (50') from
nearest important building. Special attention shall be given to
maintaining the above distances on such transferring in
trailer camps with respect to any trailer.
Readily ignitable material such as weeds and long dry grass
shall be removed within ten feet (10') of any container.
The minimum separation between liquefied petroleum gas
containers and flammable liquid tanks shall be twenty feet
(209 and the minimum separation between a container and
the center line of the dike shall be ten feet (101. The fore-
going provision shall not apply when LP -Gas containers of
125 gallons or less capacity are installed adjacent to Class III
flammable liquid tanks of 275 gallons or less capacity. (See
U.B.C. Standard 9-1-58.)
Suitable means shall be taken to prevent the accumulation
of flammable liquids under adjacent liquefied petroleum gas
containers, such as by diking, diversion curbs or grading.
When dikes are used with flammable liquid tanks, no lique-
fied petroleum gas containers shall be located within the
diked area.
Location. of
Containers
and
Regulating
Equipment
(Cont'd.)
See. 51.107. All valves, fittings and accessories connected Container
directly to the container including primary shut-off valves, Valves and
shall have a rated working pressure of at least 250 p.,;A g., Accessories
and shall be of material and design suitable for LP -Gas serv-
629
VXC. STANDARD 51-1-313 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
4"aslafiserlee. Cast iron shall not be used for container valves, fittings,
Val"", a". and accessories. This does not prohibit the use of container
A - valves made of malleable or nodular iron.
Wow4w All connections to containers, except safety relief connec-
tions, liquid level gauging devices and plugged openings, shall
have shut-off valves located as close to the container as prat_
ticabie (except as provided in this Section).
Excess flow valves where required by this Section shall
close automatically at the rated flows of vapor or liquid as
specified by the manufacturer. The connections or line includ-
ing valves, fittings, etc., being protected by an excess flow
valve shall have a greater capacity than the rated flow of the
excess flow valve.
Liquid level gauging devices which are so constructed that
outward flow of container contents shall not exceed that
passed by a No. 54 drill size opening, need not be equipped
with excess flow valves.
Oanowrce fittings
directly
an to pressure gaugconnectionismade need
be equipped with shut-off or excess flow valves if such open-
ings are restricted to not larger than No. 54 drill size opening.
Excess flow and back pressure check valves where required
Iry this Standard shall be located inside of the container or at
a point outside where the line enters the container; in the
bitter case. installation shall be made in such manner that any
undue strain beyond the excess flow or back pressure check
valve will not cause breakage between the container and such
valve.
Excess 1101A,
ves shall be
not
exceed a No. 601drill size opening to aled low equalizationioto
f
Pressures.
Sec. 51.108. (a) General. Piping shall be wrought iron or
'robing 4011 steel iblack or galvanized), brass or copper pipe; or seamless
Futbw%: copper, brass, steel or aluminum tubing. All piping or tubing
Dements shall be suitable for a working pressure of not less than 125
Pounds per square inchCopper tubing may be of the stand-
' and grade K or L or equivalent and shall have a minimum wall
thickness of thirty -two -thousandths inch (0.032^). Aluminum
tubing shall not be used in exterior locations or where it is in
contact with masonry or plaster walls or insulation.
(b) With Pressureless Liquid Gas. In systems where the
gas in liquid form without pressure reduction enters the
building (see Section 51.111) only heavy walled seamless brass
or copper tubing with an internal diameter not greater than
three -thirty-seconds inch (.t:") and a wall thickness of not
less than three -sixty-fourths inch {�a") shall be used.
EXCEPTION: This requirement shall not apply to re-
search and experimental laboratories, buildings or separate
fire divisions of buildings used exclusively for housing inter-
nal combustion engines, and to commercial gas plants or
( bulk stations where containers are charged, nor to indus-
trial Vaporizer buildings.
(c) Joints. Pipe joints may be screwed, flanged, welded,
soldered or brazed with a material having a melting point
680
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 51-1-58
excelling 1,000 degrees F. Joints on seamless copper, brass, Piping,
steel or nonferrous gas tubing shall be made by means of Tubing and
approved gas tubing fittings, or soldered or brazed with a Fittings:
material having a melting point exceeding 1,000 degrees F. R"alrements
(d) Operating Pressures of Fittings. For operating pres- (cont'd.)
sures of 125 p.s.i.g, or less, fittings shall be designed for a
pressure of at least 125 p.s.i.g. For operating pressures above
125 p.s.3.g., fittings shall be designed for a minimum of 250
p.sl'g.
NOTES: 1. The use of threaded cast iron pipe fittings
such as ells, tees, crosses, couplings and unions is pro-
hibited.
2. Strainers, regulators, meters, compressors. pumps, etc.,
are not to he considered as pipe fittings. This does not pro-
hibit the use of malleable, nodular or higher strength gray
iron for such equipment.
(e) Quality. All materials such as valve seats. packing.
gaskets, diaphragms, etc., shall be of such quality as to be
resistant to the action of liquefied petroleum gas under the
service conditions to which they are subjected.
(f) Flexible Hose. Approved flexible hose may be used on
the low pressure side of the system as follows:
1. Only appliances which are necessarily portable or which
have to be moved from place to place or which require a vibra-
tion joint, may be connected with flexible hose. On such appli-
ances the shut-off shall be in the solid connection of piping
only, and not at the appliance end of the hose; industrial
equipment is exempt from this provision.
2. Only approved hose of proper design and good quality
shall be used, and it shall be securely attached to each end.
3. The key of the shut-off on an independent connection
shall not be within six inches (6") of the key of any other
shut-off. In such an installation the keys shall be in directions
perpendicular to each other so that the possibility of the acci-
dental turning on of the gas at the wrong shut-off will be
lessened.
4. Where flexible hose is used, a shut-off shall not be placed
close to the floor or in any other position where it may be
turned on by accident.
5. A wall outlet to which an appliance is to be connected
with flexible hose shall be so placed as to reduce to a mini-
mum the passing to and fro across the hose. Where flexible
hose is used, it shall be of the minimum practicable length.
Extending hose from one room to another is prohibited.
6. Where an appliance, such as a gas iron for industrial
work, is always used in the same location, but its operation
demands a flexible hose, the flexible hose shall be permanently
attached at the supply end by a threaded or other secure
metal connection, and the appliance end shall be provided
with a secure metal joint, which can be conveniently made
and separated, in preference to a rubber slip end.
7. Where the hose is likely to be subjected to excessive
temperatures, either through accident or because of the spe-
631
U.B.C. STANDARD 51-1-58 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
cial nature of the appliance, only hose properly protected or
made up of noncombustible material shall be used.
(g) Tests. All piping, tubing, or hose shall be tested after
assembly and proved free from leaks at not less than normal
operating pressures. After installation, piping and tubing of
all domestic and commercial systems shall be tested and
Proved free of leaks using a manometer or equivalent device
that will indicate a drop in pressure. Test shall not be made
with a flame.
(h) Expansion, Etc. Provision shall be made for expan-
sion, contraction, jarring and vibration, and for settling. This
may be accomplished by flexible connections.
(1) Protection of Piping. Piping outside buildings may be
buried, above ground, or both, but shall be well supported and
protected against physical damage. Where soil conditions
warrant, all piping shall be protected against corrosion.
Where condensation may occur, the piping shall be pitched
back to the container, or suitable means shall be provided for
revaporization of the condensate.
Rose See. 51.109. Hose shall be fabricated of materials that are
Specifications resistant to the action of liquefied petroleum gases in the
liquid phase.
Hose subject to container pressure shall be designed for a
burstingsure of therproduct at 100 degessure of ot less rhees F. fors which the containerhan five tmes the vapor
was designed. Hose connections when made shall be capable
of withstanding a test pressure of twice the vapor pressure of
the product at 100 degrees F. for which the container is
designed.
Hose and hose connections located on the low pressure side
of regulators or reducing valves shall be designed for a burst-
ing pressure of not less than 125 p.s.i.g. but not less than five
times the pressure setting of the safety relief devices protect-
ing that portion of the system. All connections shall be
designed so there will be no leakage when connected.
Where hose is to be used for transferring liquid from one
container to another, wet hose is recommended. Such hose
Shall be equipped with suitable shut-off valves at discharge
end. Provision shall be made to prevent excessive hydrostatic
pressure in the hose.
Elm
Ls,3YI.Y��'f
Ser. 51.110. Every container except those constructed in ac-
cordance with ICC specifications and every vaporizer (except
motor fuel vaporizers and except vaporizers described in Sec-
tion 51.124 ( d) whether heated by artificial means or not, shall
be provided with one or more safety relief valves of spring-
loaded or equivalent type. These valves shall be arranged to
afford free vent to the outer air with discharge not less than
five feet (5') horizontally away from any opening into the
building which is below such discharge.
Container and vaporizer safety relief valves shall be set to
start to discharge in accordance with Table No. 51-1-B with
relation to the design working pressure of the container.
Safety relief devices used with systems employing contain-
ers other than those constructed according to ICC speciflea-
632
VOL. 111-1958 EDITION
U.S.C. STANDARD 51-1-58
TABLE NO.
51-1-B
Safety
Devices
CONTAINERS
MINIMUM
MAXIMUNP
{Cont'd.l
A.S.M.E. Code: Par. 17-68. U-69-
1949 and e1 Iter editi...
11011
125%
A.S M.E. Code; Pa, U-200, U-201--
edition...__.___........_. ......_.__.
88
1001949
A.S.M.E. Code -1950. 1952 mod 1956
100
editions. ......_„......_.__......-....-..._.... .... -
A.P.I.-A.S.M.E. Code—Ail Elliti—
88
88
100
ICC..... ...... ........... _......______.....-.As approved by Bureau
of Explosives
-Note: A plus tolerance of 10 per cent is permitted
tions shall be so constructed as to discharge at not less than
the specified rates before the pressure is in excess of 120 per
cent of the maximum (not including the 10 per cent referred
to in this Section) permitted start to discharge pressure
setting of the device.
In certain locations sufficiently sustained high temperatures
prevail which will require the use of a lower vapor pressure
product to be stored or the use of a higher designed pressure
vessel in order to prevent the safety valves opening as the
result of these temperatures. As an alternative, the tanks may
be protected by cooling devices such as by spraying, by
shading or other effective means.
Safety relief valves shall be so arranged that the possibility
of tampering will be minimized; if pressure setting or
adjustment is external, the relief valves shall be provided
with approved means for sealing adjustment.
No shut-off valves shall be installed between the safety
relief valves and the container except that a shut-off valve
may be used where the arrangement of this valve is such as
always to afford full required capacity flow through the relief
valves.
NOTE: The above exception is made to cover such cases
as a three-way valve installed under two safety relief
valves, each of which has the required rate of discharge
and is installed to allow either of the safety relief valves to
be closed off but does not allow both safety valves to be
closed off at the same time. Another exception to this
may be where two separate relief valves are installed with
individual shut-off valves. In this case the two shut-off valve
stems shall be mechanically interconnected in a manner
which will allow full required flow of one relief valve at all
times.
Safety relief valves shall have direct edmmunication with
the vapor space of the container.
Each container safety relief valve used with systems cov-
ered by Sections 51.121 to 51.129 shall be plainly and perma-
nently marked with the following: "Container Type" of the
pressure vessel on which the valve is designed to be installed;
the pressure in p.s.i.g. at which the valve is set to start to
discharge; the actual rate of discharge of the valve in cubic
feet per minute of air at 60 degrees F. and 14.7 ps.i.a.: and
633
U.B.C. STANDARD 51 -t -M UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
i EMM
the manufacturer's name and catalogue number, for example:
T200-250-4050 AIR --vindicating that the valve is suitable for
use on a Type 200 container, that it is set to start to discharge
at 250 p.sa.g.; and that its rate of discharge is four thou-
sand and fifty cubic feet (4.050 cu. ft.) per minute of air.
Safety relief valve assemblies, including their connections,
shall be of a size to provide the rate of flow required for the
container on which they are installed.
A safety relief valve shall be installed between each pair of
shut-off valves on liquefied petroleum gas liquid piping so as
to relieve into a safe atmosphere. The start -to -discharge pres-
sure setting of such relief valves shall not be in excess of 500
p.s.l.g. The minimum setting on relief valves installed in pip-
ing connected to other than ICC containers shall not be lower
than 140 per cent of the container relief valve setting and in
piping connected to ICC containers not lower than 400 p.s.i.g.
The discharge from the safety relief device of a stationary
container shall not terminate in any building except relief
devices on containers covered by Section 51.106; nor beneath
any building.
o gas in the
anyybbuilding forYfuel purposeliquid except theeshall be following piped 1. Builltdo
ings devoted exclusively to housing equipment for vaporiza-
tion, pressure reduction, gas mixing,
distribution. gas manufacturing or
2. Buildings, or separate fire divisions of buildings, used
exclusively for housing internal combustion engines.
3. In domestic installations no liquid or gas shall be piped
into a building at more than 20 p.s.i.g. pressure. The initial
Pressure reducing devices shall be installed outside the
building.
4. Buildings, or in separate fire divisions of buildings, used
exclusively for research and experimental laboratories.
See. 51.112. Open flames or other sources of ignition shall
not be permitted in vaporizing houses except those housing
direct fired vaporizers, pump houses, container charging
rooms, or other similar locations. No direct fired vaporizers
shall be permitted in pump houses or container charging
rooms.
Liquid Level See. 51.113. Containers, including ICC cylinders, with water
Gauge capacity less than 200 pounds shall be charged by weight.
Each container, except containers charged by weight, shall
be equipped with a liquid level gauging device of approved
design.
Approved Sec. 51.114. New domestic and commercial gas -consuming
appliances shall not be installed unless their accuracy in
dealgn, construction and performance the flowing: is certified by one of
L Determined by a nationally recognized testing ageney
adequately equipped and competent to perform such services
and shall be evidenced by the attachment of its seal or label
to such gas appliances.
2. Approval by the Building Official.
Any appliance that was originally manufactured for opera-
tkm with a gaseous fuel other than LP -Gas and is in good
634
r
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.R.C. STANDARD 51-1-58
condition may be used with LP -Gas only after it is properly
converted, adapted and tested for performance with LP -Gas
before the appliance is placed in use.
CYLINDER SYSTEMS
.See. 51.115. (a) Application. Sections 51.115 to 51.120 ap- Application
ply specifically to systems utilizing containers constructed in and
accordance with ICC specifications. Basic rules apply unless Description
otherwise noted in Sections 51.103 to 51.114.
(b) Description. Systems described in Sections 51.115 to
51.120 shall include the container base or bracket, containers,
container valves, connectors, manifold valve assembly, regu-
lators and relief valves.
See. 51.116. All containers shall be marked in accordance Marking
with the Interstate Commerce Commission regulations. Addi- Containers
tional markings not in conflict with the Interstate Commerce
Commission regulations may be used.
See. 51.117. Containers shall not be buried below ground. Location of
However, this shall not prohibit the installation in a compart- Containers
ment or recess below grade level, such as a niche in a slope and
or terrace wall which is used for no other purpose, providing Regulating
that the container and regulating equipment are not in con- Equipment
tact with the ground and the compartment or recess is drained
and ventilated horizontally to the outside air from its lowest
level, with the outlet at least three feet away from any
building opening which is below the level of such outlet.
Except as provided in Section 51.110, the discharge from
safety reliefs shall be located not less than three feet horizon-
tally away from any building opening which is below the level
of such discharge. Discharge from any safety relief device
shall not terminate in any building, nor beneath any building
unless such space is well ventilated to the outside.
Containers shall be set upon firm foundation or otherwise
firmly secured: the possible effect on the outlet piping of
settling shall be guarded against by a flexible connection or
special fitting.
See. 51.118. Valves in the assembly of multiple container Container
systems shall be arranged so replacement of containers can Valves and
be made without shutting off the flow of gas in the system. AceessoAes
NOTE: This provision is not to be construed as requiring
an automatic change -over device.
Regulators and low pressure relief devices shall be rigidly
attached to the cylinder valves, cylinders, supporting stand-
ards, the building walls or otherwise rigidly secured, and shall
be installed so the elements will not affect their operation.
NOTE: The use of other than frangib 'e shank type locks
is not desirable because it prevents access to gas controls
in case of emergency.
See. 51.119. Containers shall be provided with safety de- Safety
vices as required by the Interstate Commerce Commission Devices
regulations.
Sec. 51.120. Containers shall not be reinstalled unless they Reinstallation
are requalified in accordance with currently effective regula- of Containers
tions of the Interstate Commerce Commission.
635
VAX, STANDARD 51-1-M uNnrortm BURMING CODE
TABLE NO. 51-1-0
•New storage cent inera of the 89 type have not been authorized since
December 31. 1947.
ontainor type may be increased by
inerementa oC 25. The minimum
design working pressure of containers a " be 100 per cent of the
container type designation when constructed under 1899 or earlier
inions of the A.5.M.F.. Code (Par. U-68 and U 697 The min!mum
design working pressure of containers shalt be 125 per cent of the
container type designation when constructed under: (1) the 1949
A.S.M.E Code'Par. U-200 and U_201),(21 195(7. 1952 and 1956 edi-
tions of the A. S.M. E. Code, and l37 all editions of the A.P.L-
A. s. M. E. Code.
SYSTEMS UTILIZING CONTAINERS
(Other Than ICC)
See. 31.121. Sections 51.121 to 51.129 apply specifically to
systems utilizing storage containers other than those con-
structed in accordance with ICC specifications. All basic rules
apply unless otherwise noted in Sections 51.103 to 51.114.
Sec. 51.122. Storage containers shall be designed and classi-
fied to Table No. 51-1-C.
NOTE: Because of low soil temperature usually encoun-
tered, and to insulating effect of the earth, the average
vapor pressure of products stored in underground contain-
ers will be materially lower than when stored aboveground.
This reduction in actual operating pressure therefore pro-
vides a substantial corrosion allowance for these containers
when installed underground.
The shell or head thickness of any container shall not be
less than three -sixteenths -inch (p -).
CAmbaftser
MINIMUM DESIGN WORKING
PRESSURE OF CONTAINER
Lis. PER SQ. IN. GAUGE
Valves and
shall not be located inside a building. For containers with a
1949 EDITION
water capacity of 125 gallons or more, such terminals shall
Filter Pipes
OF A.S. ME.
and eSection 51.106), and preferably not less than five feet (5')
CODE (PAR.
FOR GASES
housing built for the purpose.
The filling connection shall be fitted with one of the follow-
U-299. U-201);
1959, 1952 AND
WITH VAPOR
PRESS. NOT
1949 AND
EARLIER
1958 EDITIONS
OFA.S.M.E.
TO EXCEED
EDITION OF
CODE; ALL
LS. PERA,RXE.
CONT IN. GAUG
CODE
(PAR. U-88,
EDITIONS OF
.P.I.-A.S.M.E.
TYPE AT 110' R
U-89)
CODE
M i75
M
IN
150 250
�
1�
187
•
�
•New storage cent inera of the 89 type have not been authorized since
December 31. 1947.
ontainor type may be increased by
inerementa oC 25. The minimum
design working pressure of containers a " be 100 per cent of the
container type designation when constructed under 1899 or earlier
inions of the A.5.M.F.. Code (Par. U-68 and U 697 The min!mum
design working pressure of containers shalt be 125 per cent of the
container type designation when constructed under: (1) the 1949
A.S.M.E Code'Par. U-200 and U_201),(21 195(7. 1952 and 1956 edi-
tions of the A. S.M. E. Code, and l37 all editions of the A.P.L-
A. s. M. E. Code.
SYSTEMS UTILIZING CONTAINERS
(Other Than ICC)
See. 31.121. Sections 51.121 to 51.129 apply specifically to
systems utilizing storage containers other than those con-
structed in accordance with ICC specifications. All basic rules
apply unless otherwise noted in Sections 51.103 to 51.114.
Sec. 51.122. Storage containers shall be designed and classi-
fied to Table No. 51-1-C.
NOTE: Because of low soil temperature usually encoun-
tered, and to insulating effect of the earth, the average
vapor pressure of products stored in underground contain-
ers will be materially lower than when stored aboveground.
This reduction in actual operating pressure therefore pro-
vides a substantial corrosion allowance for these containers
when installed underground.
The shell or head thickness of any container shall not be
less than three -sixteenths -inch (p -).
CAmbaftser
Sec. 51.123. (a) Filler Pipes. The filling pipe inlet terminal
Valves and
shall not be located inside a building. For containers with a
Accessories,
water capacity of 125 gallons or more, such terminals shall
Filter Pipes
be located not less than ten feet (10') from any building (see
and eSection 51.106), and preferably not less than five feet (5')
from any driveway, and shall be located in a protective
housing built for the purpose.
The filling connection shall be fitted with one of the follow-
ing: 1. Combination back -pressure check valve and excess
flow valve.
696
VOL. IR• -1858 EDITION UjLC. STANDARD 51-1-58
check . Container
2. Ap double
shut-off or two svalve,le inco junction with either an Valves
3. A post
internal back -pressure valve or an internal excess Sow valve. kilter Pipes
(b) Container Openings. All openings In a container shall and Discharge
be equipped with approved automatic excess flow valves Pipes
except in to following: filling connections as provided in (Cont'd.)
this Section; safety relief connections, liquid level gauging
devices as provided in Sections 51.107 and 51.113; pressure
gauge connections as provided in Section 51.113.
(c) Valves. No excess flow valve is required in the With-
drawal
it-
draw iled with:
1. Such system' total water capacithe ty does not eng are xceed 2,000
U. S. gallons.
2. The discharge from the service outlet is controlled by a
suitable manually operated shut-off valve: threaded directly
into
a substantial fitting threaded into et
or on the integral part
ofservice outlet
01, the or threaded
into
threaded Into or directly
on the service outlet of to container. fiting
3. The shut-off valve is equipped with an attached hand -
wheel or the equivalent.
4. The controlling orifice between to contents of the con-
tainer and the outlet of to shut-off valve does not exceed
five -sixteenths -inch in and one -eighth -inch )e in for
for rawal
systemsquid
withdrawal systems.
5. An approved pressure -educing regulator is directly at-
ta,ched to the
and is
supported, or that an approved pressure Vreduc' g regulator is
attached to the outlet of the shut-off valve by means of a
suitable flexible connection, provided the regulator is ade-
quately supported and properly protected on or at to tank.
See Section 51.127 (e).
(d) Labels. All inlet and outlet connections except safety
relief valves, liquid level gauging devices and pressure gauges
on containers of water
any contatim used to supply fueli directly to an internal com-
bustion engine, shall be labeled to designate whether they
communicate with vapor or liquid space. Labels may be on
valves.
(e) Internal Valve. In lieu of an excess flow valve: open-
ings may be fitted with a quick -closing internal valve which
except during operating periods shall remain closed. The
Internal mechanism for such valves may be provided with a
secondary control which shall be equipped with a fusible plug
(not over 220 degrees F. melting point) which will cause to
internal valve to close automatically in case of fire.
(f) Limitation. Not more than two plugged openings shall
he permitted on a container of 2,000 gallons or less water
capacity.
Sec. 51.124. (a) General. All safety devices shall complpfe
ty
with the following: Devices
637
U.S.C. STANDARD 31-1-58 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
,Safety
1. All container safety relief devices shall be located on
vlees
the container and shall have direct communication with the
(C t'd.)
vapor sp:•ce of the container.
2 In industrial and gas manufacturing plants, discharge
pipe from safety relief valves on pipe lines within a building
shall discharge vertically upward and shall be piped to a
point outside a building.
3. Safety relief device discharge terminals shall be located
to provide protection against physical damage and such dis-
charge pipes shall be fitted with loose raincaps. Return bends
and restrictive pipe fittings shall not be permitted.
4. If desired, discharge lines from two or more safety relief
devices located on the same unit, or similar lines from two or
more different units. may be run into a common discharge
header. provided that the cross-sectional area of such header
be at least equal to the sum of the cross-sectional area of the
individual discharge lines, and that the settings of safety
relief valves are the same.
3. Foch storage container of over 2,000 gallons water capa-
city shall be provided with a suitable pressure gauge.
6. When the delivery pressure from the final stage regula-
tor is not more than five p.s.i.g., the low pressure side shall be
equipped with a relief valve, set to start to discharge at not
less than two times, and not more than three times the deliv-
ery pressure, but not more than five p.s.i, in excess of the
delivery pressure. When the delivery pressure is more than
five p.s.i.. the relief valve shall be set to not less than one and
one-fourth times and not more than two times the delivery
Pressure . This requirement may be waived on liquid feed sys-
tems utilizing tubing specified in Section 51.108 (b). When a
regulator or pressure relief valve is installed inside a building,
the relief valve and the space above the regulator and relief
valve diaphragms shall be vented to the outside air with the
discharge outlet located not less than five feet (5') horizon-
tally away from any opening into the building which is below
such discharge. (These provisions do not apply to individual
appliance regulators when protection is otherwise provided.
In buildings devoted exclusively to gas distribution purposes,
the space above the diaphragm need not be vented to the
outside.)
Z Discharge from any safety relief device shall not termi-
nate in any building; nor beneath any building unless such
space is well ventilated to the outside.
tb) Aboveground Containers. Safety devices for above-
ground containers shall be provided as follows:
1. Containers of 1.200 gallons water capacity or less which
may contain liquid fuel when installed aboveground, either
Permanently or temporarily, shall have the rate of discharge
specified in Appendix A provided by spring-loaded relief valve
or valves, or by a combination of such relief valves and suit-
able fuse plugs; provided the total discharge area of the fuse
plugs in each container does not exceed twenty -five -hun-
dredths square inches 40.2.5 sq. in. ), andthe spring-loaded
relief valve provides at least 30 per cent of the required rate
t
of discharge.
2. The fusible metal of the fuse plugs shall have a yield
temperature of 208 degrees F. minimum and 220 degrees F.
638
VOL, III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 51-1-58
maximum. Relief valves and fuse plugs shall have direct com- Safety
munication with the vapor space of the container. Devices
3. On a container having a water capacity greater than (Coat'd.)
125 gallons, but not over 2,000 gallons, the discharge from the
safety relief valves shall be vented away from the container
vertically upwards and unobstructed to the open air in a
manner to prevent any impingement of escaping gas upon the
container; loose fitting rain caps shall be used. Suitable pro-
vision shall be made for draining condensate which may
accumulate in the relief valve or its discharge pipe (see
Section 51.110).
4. On containers of 125 gallons water capacity or less, the
discharge from safety relief devices shall be located not less
than Ave feet (51) horizontally away from any opening
to
the building below the level of such discharge.
5. On a container having a water capacity greater than
2,000 gallons, the discharge from the safety relief valves shall
be vented away from the container vertically upwards to a
point at least seven feet (7') above the container, and unob-
structed to the open air in a manner to prevent any impinge-
ment of escaping gas upon the container; loose fitting rain
caps shall be used. Suitable provision shall be made so that
any liquid or condensate that may accumulate inside of the
relief valve or its discharge pipe will not render the valve
inoperative. If a drain is used, a means shall be provided to
protect the container, adjacent containers, piping or equip-
ment against impingement of flame resulting from ignition of
product escaping from the drain (see Section 51.110).
(c) Underground Containers. On all containers, which are
installed underground and which contain no liquid fuel until
buried and covered, the rate of discharge of spring-loaded
relief valve installed thereon may be reduced to minimum of
30 per cent of the specified rate of discharge. Containers so
protected shall not be uncovered after installation until the
liquid fuel has been removed therefrom. Containers which
may contain liquid fuel before being installed underground
and before being completely covered with earth are to be
considered aboveground containers when determining the rate
of discharge requirement of the relief valves.
On underground containers of more than 2,000 gallons
water capacity, the discharge from safety relief devices shall
be piped vertically and directly upward to a point at least
seven feet (T) above the ground.
Where there is a probability of the manhole or housing
becoming flooded, the discharge from regulator vent lines
shall be above the highest probable water level. All manholes
or housings shall be provided with ventilated louvers or their
equivalent, the area of such openings equalling or exceeding
the combined discharge areas of the safety relief valves and
other vent lines which discharge their content into the man-
hole housing.
(d) Vaporizers. Safety devices for vaporizers shall be pro-
vided as follows:
1. Vaporizers of less than one quart total capacity, heated
by the ground or the surrounding air, need not be equipped
with safety relief valves provided that adequate tests certified
639
UB,C. STANDARD 31-1-58 UNIMRM BUILDING CODE
by any of the authorities listed in Section 51103, demonstrate
that the assembly is safe without safety relief valves.
2. No vaporizer shall be equipped with fusible plugs.
3. In industrial and gas manufacturing plants, safety relief
valves on vaporizers within a building shall be piped to a
point outside the building and be discharged upward.
Remstaltation See. SLIM Containers installed underground may be rein -
of C'ontalners stalled underground or aboveground if they do not show evi-
dence of harmful external corrosion or other damage. Where
containers are reinstalled underground, the corrosion -resistant
coating shall be put in good condition. See Section 51.127 (c);
see also Section 51.124 for relief valve requirements.
Capacity of
Liquid
Containers
Installation
of Storage
Containers
See. 56126. No liquid storage container shall exceed 30,000
standard U. S. gallons water capacity.
See. 51.117. 4a) Aboveground. Containers installed above-
ground except as provided in this Section shalt be provided
with substantial masonry or incombustible structural sup.
ports on firm masonry foundation.
Aboveground containers shall be supported as follows:
Horizontal containers shall be mounted on saddles in such a
manner as to permit expansion and contraction. Every con-
tainer shall be supported to prevent the concentration of
excessive loads on the supporting portion of the shell. Struc.
tural metal supports may be employed when they are pro-
tected against fire in an approved manner. Suitable means of
preventing corrosion shall be provided on that portion of the
container in contact with the foundations or saddles.
Containers of 1.200 gallons water capacity or less may be
installed with unprotected ferrous metal supports if mounted
on concrete pads or footings, and if the distance from the
cutside bottom of the container shell to the ground does not
e::ceed twenty-four inches 42411).
Any container may be installed with unprotected ferrous
metal supports if mounted on concrete pads or footings, and
if the distance from the outside bottom of the container to the
ground does not exceed five feet (5'), provided the container
is in an isolated location and such installation is approved
by the Building Official.
For aboveground containers secure anchorage or adequate
pier height shall be provided against possible container flota-
tion wherever sufficiently high flood water might occur.
(b) Partially Buried. Containers may be partially buried
P
roviding the following requirements are met:
1. The portion of the container below the surface and for a
vertical distance not less than three inches (311) above the
surface of the ground is protected to resist corrosion, and
the container is protected against settling and corrosion as
required for fully buried containers. See Section 51.127 (c).
2. Spacing requirements shalt be as specified for under-
ground tanks in Section 51.106.
3. Relief valve capacity shall be as required for above-
ground containers.
4. Container is located where it shall not be subject to
vehicular damage, or is adequately protected against such
damage.
�. 646
t
VOL. M-1958 EDITION
U.B.C. STANDARD 51-1-58
(c) Underground. Containers buried underground shall be I
;laced so that the top of the container is not less than six
inches (6") below grade. Where an underground container
might be subject to abrasive action or physical damage due
to vehicular traffic or other causes, then it shall be Placed not
less than two feet (2') below grade, or otherwise protected
:against such physical damage.
It will not be necessary to cover the portion of the con-
tainer to which manhole and other connections are affixed;
ai
however, where necessary, protection shall be provided
vehicular damage. When necessary to prevent floating, con-
tainers shall be securely anchored or weighted.
Underground containers shall be set on a firm foundation
I firm earth may be used) and surrounded with soft earth or
sand well tamped in place. As a further means of resisting
corrosion, the container, prior to being placed underground,
shall be given a protective coating satisfactory to the Building
official. Such protective coating shall be equivalent to hot dip
galvanizing, or to two preliminary coatings of red lead
container erowed bthushcoated shall be ascoating of o ownr or er d into placenasthe
to
prevent abrasion or other damage to the coating.
(d) Skid Tanks. Containers with foundations attached
(portable or semi-portable containers with suitable steel
"runners" or "skids" and popularly known nid and in the industry
as "skid tanks") shall be designed,used
accordance with these rules subject to the following pro-
visions:
1. If they are to be used at a gives[ general location for a
temporary period not to exceed six months they need not have
fire -resisting foundations or saddles but shall have adequate
ferrous metal supports.
2. They shall not be located with the outside bottom of the
container shell more than five feet (5') above the surface of
the ground unless fire -resisting supports are provided.
3. The bottom of the skids shall not be less than two inches
(2") or more than twelve inches (12^) below the outside hot.
tom of the container shell.
4. Flanges, nozzles, valves, fittings and the like, having
communication with the interior of the container shall be
Protected against physical damage.
NOTE: It is recommended that such containers should
have outlets only in the heads.
5. When not permanently located on fire -resisting founda-
tions, piping connections shall be sufficiently flexible to
minimize possibility of breakage or leakage of connections if
container settles, moves, or is otherwise displaced.
6. Skids, or lugs for attachment of skids, shall be secured
to container in accordance with the code or rules under which
the container is designed and built (with a minimum factor of
safety of four) to withstand loading in any direction equal to
four times the weight of the container and attachments when
filled to the maximum permissible loaded weight.
NOTES: 1. Field welding where necessary shall be made
only on saddle plates or brackets which were applied by
manufacturer of tank.
641
nstattation
of Storage
Containers
ConVd.)
U.B.C. STANDARD 51-1-58 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
Container
Charging
plan
2. When permanently installed containers are intercon-
nected, provision shall be made to compensate for expan-
sion, contraction, vibration and settling of containers and
interconnecting piping. Where flexible connections are used,
they shall be of an approved type and shall be designed
for a bursting pressure of not less than five times the
vapor pressure of the product at 100 degrees F. The use of
nonmetallic hose is prohibited for interconnecting such
containers.
(e) Protection of Tank Accessories, Grounding. Valves,
regulating, gauging and other tank accessory equipment shall
be protected against tampering and physical damage. Such
accessories shall also be so protected during the transit of
tanks intended for installation underground.
NOTE: The use of other than frangible shank type locks
is not desirable because it prevents access to gas controls in
case of emergency.
All connections to underground containers shall be located
within a substantial dome, housing or manhole and with
access thereto protected by a substantial cover.
Aboveground containers exceeding 2,000 gallons water ca-
pacity shall be electrically grounded in an effective manner.
If 1 Drily: for Condensed Gas. Where vaporized gas on low-
pressure side of system may condense to a liquid at normal
operating temperatures and pressures, suitable means shall
be provided for revaporization of the condensate,
091 instructions. For installations which require opera-
tion of equipment by the user, instructions shall be furnished
to the personnel responsible for the operation of the system.
h' Damage from Vehicles. When damage to LP -Gas sys-
tems from vehicular traffic is a possibility, precautions
against such damage shall be taken.
ii( Pits and Drains. Every effort should be made to avoid
the use of pits, except pits fitted with automatic flammable
vapor detecting devices. No drains or blow -off lines shall be
directed into or in proximity to sewer systems used for other
Purposes.
Sec. 51.128. The container charging room shall be located
not less than ten feet (10' 1 From bulk storage containers and
twenty-five feet 42.5'1 from line of adjoining property which
may be built upon.
Tank truck filling station outlets shall be located not less
than twenty-five feet (25'1 from line of adjoining property
which may be built upon and ten feet (10') from pumps and
compressors if housed in one or more separate buildings.
NOTE: Distances given may be reduced when approved
by the Building Official.
The pumps and compressors may be located in the con-
tainer charging room or building but if they are housed in one
or more separate buildings they shall be located not less than
ten feet (10'1 from bulk storage tanks, twenty-five feet (25')
from line of adjoining property which may be built upon and
tweaty-flue feet (25') from sources of ignition.
Where a part of the container charging building is to be
642
i OL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 51-1-58
.,sed for a boiler room or where open flames or similar sources
•:,f ignition exist or are employed, the space to be so occupied
,i:all be separated from container charging room by a par-
tition wall or wails of fire resistant construction continuous
irom floor to roof or ceiling. Such separation walls shall be
,sithout openings and shall be joined to the floor, other walls
and ceiling or roof in a manner to effect a permanent gas
tight joint.
Sec. 51.129. (a) Painting. Aboveground containers shall be Containers
mance of
kept properly painted.
(b) Lighting. At the discretion of the Building Official,
industrial installations shall be illuminated.
STORAUSE AT OF OFNAL UTIL ZAATIONNOT SFOR
POT
!lee. 51.130. Containers stored or in the process of charging Limitations
or handling at container charging plants with permanently
located bulk storage tanks or at plants devoted primarily to
the storage and distribution of other petroleum products are
not covered by the provisions of Sections 51.130 to 51.132.
Sec. 51.131. Containers on the premises of users that are Storage on
not in use or connected for use shall be stored according Premises
to the requirements applying to containers connected for use of User
in Section 51106, except that portable ICC containers on the
premises of industrial users may be stored as follows:
1. Cylinders, stored inside a building, except those in
actual use or attached ready for use, shall be limited to a
total capacity of two thousand cubic feet (2,000 cu. ft.). For
storage in excess of two thousand cubic feet (2,000 cu. ft.)
total gas capacity, cylinders shall be kept outside or in a
separate room or compartment or in a special building.
2. Containers carried as a part of service equipment on
highway mobile vehicles should not be considered in the total
storage capacity in paragraph numbered 1 of this Section
when such vehicles are stored in private garages, and are
limited to one container having a capacity of not over 100
pounds of LP -Gas on each vehicle. Container valves shall be
closed.
3. Cylinders may be stored in the open provided valves and
safety devices are protected against accumulation of ice and
snow. Cylinders permitted inside of buildings shall be stored
away from highly combustible materials and in locations
where they are not liable to excessive rise in temperature,
physical damage or tampering by unauthorized persons.
Empty cylinders shall have their valves closed in storage and
when shipped.
4. Where cylinders are stored inside buildings, they shall
be enclosed in a separate room or compartment of ample size.
The walls or partitions, floor and ceiling of such room or
compartment shall be of one of the types of construction
listed as follows or other construction equivalent in strength
and fire resistance; wails or partitions shall be continuous
643
1'JLC. STANDARD 31-1-58
Storage on
of User
it-oard.)
Storage for
UNWGRM BUILDING CODE
from floor to ceiling and shall be securely anchored. At least
one wall of an inside cylinder storage room shall be an
exterior wall.
Gypsum or cement plaster at least three -fourths -inch { y
thick on metal lath on each side of a stud partition.
Expanded metal lath encased in solid cement plaster not
less than two and ane -half -inches (2%1) thick.
Reinforced concrete.
Brick.
We. gypsum or concrete block [cement plaster on each side
to a thickness of one -fourth -inch (}¢.^) ].
Openings from a cylinder storage r000m or compartment to
other parts of the building shall be protected by a fire door
classified and labeled as suitable for use in Class B situations.
The door shall be of the swinging type and close into a
rabbet or otherwise be made tight to prevent passage of flame
around edges: it shall be self-closing, and if fastened open,
shall be arranged to close automatically in case of fire origi-
nating inside or outside of the cylinder storage room or
compartment. Windows, if provided in partitions, shall be
wired glass in approved metal frames.
Special buildings, rooms or compartments shall have no
open flame for heating or lighting and shall be well ventilated.
Empty cylinders shall be stored with valve end up, and cylin-
der cap in place.
Sec. 51.132. If containers other than ICC contain any gas
they shall be stored according to the requirements applying
to such containers when connected for use in Section 51.106.
ICC containers may be stored in a building, a separate
room or compartment used exclusively for storing gas con-
tainers. Such room or compartmentshall not be below ground
level and shall have no openings communicating withother
occupancies. The space below the floor shall be of solid fill or
properly ventilated to open air. The building or compartment
or room shat] be vented top and bottom to the outside only
and the outlet from such vents shall be at least five feet (5')
horizontally from any other opening into any building. Such
storage of containers shall not be adjacent to a school, church,
hospital, athletic field or other points of public gathering.
Containers may be stored in the open provided they are
stored within a suitable enclosure where necessary to prevent
tampering. Containers shall not be stored adjacent to a
school, church, hospital, athletic field or other points of public
gathering. The valves and safety devices shall be protected
against accumulations of ice and snow. Protective caps shall
be deemed adequate.
Where the storage exceeds 10,000 pounds of gas at one stor-
age location, such storage shall be located at least twenty-five
feet i 25'from important buildings, or regularly busy main
thoroughfares.
Readily combustible material shall not be piled within ten
feet { 10'r of containers, in storage. A warning, to keep open
flames and fire away, shall be conspicuously posted.
Containers containing LP -Gas shall not be stored inside a
stole or place of business frequented by the public. However,
644
III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 52-1-58
specification containers having a maximum water caps,-
;.ty of two and one-half pounds each, such as those used with
;ompietely self-contained hand torches and similar app lica-
;inns, may be stored or displayed in such buildings. This
,!'mage shall be limited to a total of 24 such units.
NOTES: 1. Containers in storage shall have valves
closed even though they may be empty.
2. Containers which require valve protecting caps shall
have such caps in place hand tight while in storage.
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 52-1-58
Plastic Materials,
Based on Technical Data on plastics of the
Manufacturing Chemists Association
See Section 5201, Uniform Building Code, Volume I
See. 52.101. This Standard describes the basic components Scope
of the different groups of plastic materials described in Sec-
tion 5201 of Volume I of the Uniform Building Code.
Sec. 52.102. The following materials are described by this Plastic
Standard. Materials
ta) Acrylic Plastics. Thermoplastic molding powders, ex-
truded sections and sheets, and cast sections and sheets, pro-
duced by the polymerization of the monomeric derivatives of
acrylic acid.
(b) Alkyd Molding Materials. Alkyd molding compounds
consist essentially of unsaturated polymerizable alkyd type
resins combined with mineral or glass fillers. Widely used
fillers include: granular -mineral; putty -mineral; glass fiber.
(e) Allyl and Polyester Plastica A group of resins used
in low pressure laminating, contact pressure laminating and
impression molding. Allyl resins are materials based solely
on allyl esters. Polyester resins are formulated from reactive
alkyd resins using styrene or allyl resin or acrylic resin
monomer.
(d) Cast Phenolic Resins. Cast resins made by combining
phenol, formaldehyde, and one or more of a variety of cata-
lysts plus additives including color, which in liquid form is
poured directly into straight draw molds, split molds or
cored molds.
(e) Cellulose Acetate Butyrate Molding Compositions. A
combination of cellulose acetate butyrate, plasticizers, pig-
ments and dyes supplied as granules and pellets for fabrica-
tion by injection, extrusion, blowing or compression molding.
(f) Cellulose Acetate Molding Compositions. Basically the
same as sheet prepared in a form suitable for molding.
645
I%R.C. STAND
tic
Materials
(Conl'd. )
ARD 5!4_58 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
(g) Cellulose Acetate Sheets. Thermoplastic sheets made
from cellulose acetate, plasticizers, pigments and dyes. Cellu-
lose acetate is produced by esterifying alpha cellulose with
acetic acid and anhydride in the presence of a catalyst.
th) Cellulose Nitrate Group Plasties. Thermoplastic sheets
and flakes made from cellulose nitrate, plasticizers, pigments
and dyes. Cellulose nitrate is made through nitration of cellu-
lose accomplished by immersing a measured quantity of
purified cellulose in a mixture of nitric and sulphuric acids
and water. Camphor is the standard plasticizer.
(i i Cellulose Proplonate Molding Compositions. A molding
composition consisting of cellulose propionate, plasticizers,
pigments and dyes. Cellulose propionate is made by eater-
ifying purified cellulose with propionic acid and anhydride
with or without acetic acid present, in the presence of a
catalyst.
(j) Epoxy Resins. A wide class of condensation polymers
made by reacting epichlorohydrin with polyhydric com-
pounds, such as phenols, glycols and novolacs.
(k) Ethyl Cellulose Plastics. Thermoplastic molding pow-
der or sheet consisting of ethyl cellulose, plasticizers, pig-
ments and dyes. The ethyl cellulose is the ethyl etherof
cellulose made by etherifying alkali cellulose with ethyl
chloride.
(1) Foamed Plasties. Any one of a number of high mole-
cular weight plastics expanded by the use of a foaming
agent to produce a sheet or block having either unit cells
which are hollow spheres or interconnected cells.
(m) Laminated Thermosetting Product9. Consist essential-
ly of fibrous sheet materials, such as cellulose paper, asbestos
Paper, cotton fabric or mat, asbestos fabric or mat, wood
veneer, nylon fabric, glass fabric, etc., which are impregnated
or coated with a thermosetting resin binder and consolidated
under high temperature and pressure into hard solid products
of high mechanical strength.
in) Melamine -Formaldehyde Molding Materials. Heat
hardening melamine -formaldehyde resin compounds incor-
porating one or another of the following fillers: alpha cellu-
lose -filled; mineral -filled; chopped fabric -filled; cellulose -
filled; glass fiber -filled; cellulose -mineral -filled.
(o) Nylon. Any one of a number of long -chain polyamides
which are the linear condensation products of dibasic acids
with diamines or of amino acids.
forlhcolfus. aipnol-
makde and urfralaldehyde-phenolmoldngmate-
rials, usually combined with one or more of the following
fillers: woodflour; cotton flock; chopped paper; fabric or
cord; asbestos; mica; silica
(q) Plastic Films. The film form of compositions based
on thermoplastic resins or polymers having a thickness no
greater than 0.010".
(r) P013rethylens Plastics. A thermoplastic resin made by
the polymerization of ethylene with crystallinity ranges in-
cluding low, medium and high density.
648
VOL. W-1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD fi -St
(a) Polyvinyl Formal and Butyral Plastics. These materi- Plastic
als are the product of hydrolysis of polyvinyl acetate and Materials
reaction with formaldehyde or butyraldehyde. (Cont'd.)
(t) Silicone Molding Materials. Heat -hardened silicone
resins combined with chopped glass fiber and,'or other tillers
such as titanium dioxide or diatomaceous earth.
(u) Styrene Plasties. Thermoplastics made from styrene
monomer either polymerized alone or copolymerized with
other monomers.
(v) Tetrailaoroethylene Resin and Chlorotrifluorcethylene
Resin. 1. Tetrafluoroethylene resin is a highly crystalline
linear polymer, unique among organic compounds in its
chemical inertness, resistance to change at high teroprra-
tures, and extremely low dielectric loss factor. The material
is available in sheets, tape (both sintered and unsintered I,
tubes, rods, coated glass fabric tapes and laminates. finishes,
wire enamels, molded shapes and specially fabricated articles.
2. Chlorotrifluoroethylene resin is a high molecular weight
thermoplastic to which fluorine contributes a high order cf
thermal and chemical stability while chlorine provides rigid-
ity. Available as high and low density, plasticized and un -
Plasticized molding powders, sheets, rods, tubes, tank linings
and a variety of custom molded shapes. Closely related
materials are available as elastomers, latexes, oils, waxes.
greases, printing inks and surfactants.
(w) Urea-Formaidehde Group of Molding Materials. Heat
hardening molding compounds consisting essentially of urea -
formaldehyde resin combined with cellulose fillers.
(x) Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Plasties. Ther-
moplastic materials which include polyvinyl chloride and
copolymers which are predominantly vinyl chloride. The
principal copolymers contain vinyl acetate and vinylidene
chloride. The flexible compositions are mixtures of vinyl
resins with stabilizers, lubricants, colorants and plasticizers
such as high -boiling liquids, soft resins or elastomers.
(y) Vinylidene Chloride Plasties. Thermoplastic materials
made from unsymmetrical diehlorethylene which is converted
to monomeric vinylidene chloride and susequently poly-
merized or copolymerized.
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 52-2-58
Flammability of Rigid Plastics
over 0.050 Inch in Thickness
Based on Standard Specification D 625-5)6 T of the
American Society for Testing Materials
See Section 5201, Uniform Building Code. Volume I
Sec. $2.201. This Standard covers a laboratory procedure Scope
for determining the relative flammability of rib d-pinstic
sheets or molded bars over 0.050" in thickness.
See. 52.202, Test Chamber—A laboratory hood, totally en- .-lipparatus
647
UJI.C, RTAtiDARD 52-2-58 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
closed, with a heat -resistant glass window for observing the
test. The exhaust fan is turned off during the test and turned
on immediately following the test in order to remove products
of combustion which arty be toxic when testing some ma-
terials.
RhM 5tassi--A 'aboratory ring stand with two small
clamps adjusts ble to any angle by means of a check nut.
Test See. 52.203. At least 10 t,Sl. specimens, five inches (51,) in
Specluums length by 0.5" in widt4 as a of the thickness of material nor-
mally supplied, shall be "_t from sheet or molded from each
of the samples to 1* tested. Ordinary 0.251, by 0.5" by 5 -
injection -molded >,r 0.5" by 0.5" by 5" compression -molded
liars make satisfactory test specimens.
The specimens shau no,: .^tly be tested in the as -received
condition. Special precondhiormg may be agreed upon by the
purchaser and the seller.
Each test specimen shall be marked by scribing two lines,
one line one inch (1"), and the other four inches (411), from
one end of the specimen.
The edges of the test specimens shall be smooth. In case
of sawed edges, these should be fine sanded to a smooth finish.
See. 52.204. Clamp the specimen on one end in a support
with its longitudinal axis horizontal and its transverse axis
inclined at 45 degrees to the horizontal. Under the test speci-
men, clamp a piece of 20 -mesh Bunsen burner gauze, about
four inches (4") square, in a horizontal position three-eighths
Inch (%") below the edge of the specimen, and with about
one-half inch (%") of the specimen extending beyond the
edge of the gauze (see Figure No. 52_2-1). Any material re-
maining on the screen from the previous test must be burned
oft, or a new screen used for each test. A pan of water shall
be placed on the floor of the hood in position to catch any
burning particles which may drop during the test.
Adjust a standard three -eighth -inch (%") diameter Bunsen
burner, with air ports open, to produce a blue flame approxi-
mately one inch (1") high. For each attempt to ignite the
specimen, place the burner so that the tip of the flame comes
in contact with the end of the test specimen. At theend of
3o seconds remove the flame and place it at least 18 inches
(18") from the specimen to reduce the effects of drafts in
the hood while the specimen is allowed to burn. In case the
Plastic does not continue to burn after the first ignition, place
the turner in contact with the free end for a second period
Specamn
45'
OT -
V., Goure Gauxe lower Ed"
FIGURE NO. 52-2-1. APPARATUS FOR
Fl A.X.HABILPPY TEST
i
........ .. ...
648
VOU III--islis EDMON U.B.C. STANDARD 52-2-58
of 30 seconds immediately after the specimen ceases to burn.
Extinguish the burner flame after the second application and
close the hood door for the remainder of the test.
The extent of burning is measured along the lower edge
of the test specimen. If the specimen does not ignite on two
attempts, the result is judged to be "nonburning by this
test." If the specimen continues to burn after the first or
second ignition, start the stop watch when the flame along
the lower edge reaches the mark one inch (111) from the free
end, and measure the time "t" (in seconds) until the flame
reaches the mark four inches (4") from the free end. A speci-
men that burns to the four -inch (4") mark is judged to be
"burning by this test," and its burning rate is equal to 180rt"
per minute. If a specimen does not burn to the four -inch (4" i
mark after the first or second ignition, it is judged to be
"self -extinguishing by this test" and four inches (4") minus
the unburned length (in inches) from the clamped end, meas-
ured along the lower edge, is its extent -of -burning.
See. 52.205. Testing to discontinued as soon as three burn- Judging
ing specimens have been found. In this case the sample is Samples
judged to be "burning by this test" if, of the 10 specimens
tested, two have been found to be burning. In this case, the
burning rate of the sample is equal to the average of the
burning rate of the two burning specimens.
If, among the 10 specimens tested, one, and only one. has
been found to be burning, and one or more have been found
to be self-extingutahing, the sample is judged to be "self -
extinguishing by this test." In this case, the extent -of -burning
is equal to the average of the extent -of -burning of the self -
extinguishing specimens, including the burning specimen
which is assigned an extent -of -burning of three inches (3").
If, among the 10 specimens tested, one, and only one, has
been found to be burning with the balance nonburning, start
testing a second series of 10 specimens. As soon as a burning
or self -extinguishing specimen is found in the second set,
testing shall be discontinued. In case of a burning specimen
the sample is judged to be "burning by this test" with a rate
of burning equal to the average of the rates of the burning
specimens. In case of a self -extinguishing specimen, the
sample is judged to be self -extinguishing. In this case, the
burning specimen is assigned an extent -of -burning of three
inches (311), and this value is averaged with the extent -of -
burning of the self -extinguishing specimen to give the extent -
of -burning of the sample. In case all 10 specimens of the
second set are found to be nonburning, the sample shall be
judged to be "nonburning by this test."
If, among the 10 specimens tested, two or more are fount
to be self -extinguishing with the balance nonburning, the
sample shall be judged to be "self -extinguishing h this tea_"
The extent -of -burning of the sample is in this case equal to
the average of the extent -of -burning of the self -extinguishing
specimens.
If, among the 10 specimens tested, one, and only Inc. has
been found to be self -extinguishing with the balance non-
burning, start testing a second series of 10 sl ecirr rs. As
soon as a burning or self -extinguishing specimen is frond in
the second set, testing shall be discontinued. In "as, of .,
burning or self -extinguishing specimen the sample s11'7 im
Rift
VAC. STANDARD 52-3-38 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
judged to be "self -extinguishing by this test." The burning
simple. if any, shall be assignesJ7 an extent -of -burning of
three inches e3"), and the extent -of -burning of the sample
:shall be the average of the two extents -of -burning. In ease all
10 specimens of the second set are found to be nonburning,
the sample shall be judged to be "nonburning by this test."
If all 10 specimens are found to be nonburning, the sample
shall be judged to be "nonburning by this test."
15T45R7t€'lf1
Procedure
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 52-3-58
Flammability of Plastics 0.050 Inch
and under in Thickness
Based on Standard Specifications D 568-56 T of the
American Society for Testing 'Materials
See Section 5201, Uniform Building Code, Volume I
See. 52.301. This Standard covers a procedure for compar-
ing the flammability of plastic sheets or films, 0.050" and
less in thickness.
Sec. 52.302. Shield—A shield constructed of sheet metal or
other fire-resistant material, having inside dimensions 12
inches (12") in width, by 12 inches (1211) in depth, by 30
inches (3011) in height, and open at the top. The shield shall
have an opening for ventilation around the bottom, approxi-
mately one inch (111) in height, and shall also have a viewing
window in one side, of sufficient size and in such a position
that the entire length of the specimen under test may be
observed. One side of the shield shall be hinged (or otherwise
suitably constructed) so that the shield may be readily
opened and closed.
Clamp—A spring type of paper clamp for holding the test
specimen in position. The clamp shall be attached to the
shield rigidly and in such manner that when the specimen
is clamped therein it is centered within the shield and is
facing the viewing window.
Burner—Bunsen burner and gas supply.
Tuning Device --Stop watch or other timer reading in sec-
onds.
See. 52.303. Three test specimens, one inch (1") in width
by 18 inches (18") in length, shall be cut in both machine
and transverse directions from each of the materials being
tested. The thickness of the specimens shall be determined
in accordance with Method B of the Methods of Test for
Thickness of Solid Electrical Insulation (U.B.C. Standard
52-4-58).
Gauge marks shall be drawn across the specimens three
inches (3") from each end, defining twelve -inch (12") gauge
length over which the burning rate is to be measured.
Sec. 52.304. Place the specimen in the clamp vertically so
that seventeen inches (17") are exposed below the clamp.
Place the shield in a hood, with the ventilating fan turned off.
Adjust the Bunsen burner to provide a flame about one inch
(1^) in total height.
®50
VOL. III -1958 EDITION U.B.C. STANDARD 52.4-58
Apply the flame to the end of the specimen until it is
ignited but not longer than 15 seconds. The flame mar be
momentarily withdrawn as needed to establish that- the
specimen is ignited.
If the -specimen ignites, start a timer when the charred
edge reaches the lower gauge mark, and stop the timer when
the charred edge reaches the upper gauge mark. Record the
elapsed time.
if the flame is extinguished before reaching the upper
gauge mark, stop the timer and note the apparent cause, such
as melting and dripping, smothering, etc.
See. 52.305. Calculate the burning rate in square inches per Calculations
minute by dividing the area above the lower gauge mark
that is burned, charred, or melted off, by the time in min-
utes, as determined above.
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 52-4.58
Thickness of Solid Electrical Insulation
Based on Standard Specifications D 374-42 of thr
American Society for Testing 3lateriats
See Section 5201, Uniform Building Code, Volume I
Sec. 52.401. This Standard covers three methods for deter- Scope
mining the thickness of solid insulating materials.
Method A makes use of an adjusted ratchet micrometer
together with a definite manipulative procedure by which
the pressure exerted on the specimen is controlled.
Method B, known as the "feel" method, makes use of a
machinist's micrometer without a ratchet. Pressure on the
specimen is controlled by stopping closure of the micrometer
when it is first observed that the specimen resists movement
between the instrument surfaces.
Method C makes use of a dead-weight dial micrometer.
which is so constructed that measurements made with it
are practically the same as those made with the Method A
ratchet micrometer. Instruments described in Methods A
and C may be interchanged.
See. 52.402. Methods A and C are preferred as refe,010-
standard methods for use in cases of dispute. They are also
preferred for the measurement of compressible material!z.
such as untreated paper and fabrics, as well as for the
measurement of rigid materials. The maximum error (instru-
mental plus manipulative) of Methods A and C is approxi-
mately 0.0003'•.
Method B may be used on rigid materials or o11.
materials when it is necessary to measure the specinioll ith
Practically no compression or deformation. The nu:mun'
error of Method B is approximately 0.0005', ex( cat on un-
usually compressible materials, where the error will to some-
what greater.
?i
U.B.C. STANDARD 524-M
Qi
UNIFORM BUILDING CODE
METHOD A.
MACHINIST'S MICROMETER WITH RATCHET
See: 5x.493. The instrument used for determining thickness
by Method A shall be a one -inch (1") machinist's type mi-
crometer a locking device. It shall be constructed
with a vernier reading to 0.1 mil (0.0001") and with a ratchet
or similar mechanism for controlling measuring pressure, and
shall have anvil and spindle surfaces 0.250 t 0.001" in diam-
The micrometer shall be tested and calibrated period -
Y
Sec. 52.404. Before starting measurements of thickness,
close the micrometer on the specimen at a location outside
the area to be measured. Then open the micrometer not more
than four or five mils (0.004" or 0.005") and move it into the
area selected for measurement. Using the ratchet, close the
micrometer surfaces so slowly on the specimen that the mil -
scale may be easily counted as they move past the
reference mark, or at a rate of about two mils (0.002") par
second, Continue closing at the same rate until the ratchet
has clicked three times, and then read the thickness by means
of the vernier.
In moving from one measurement location to another this
operation shall be repeated, never opening the micrometer
more than four or five mils (0.004" or 0.005") more than the
specimen thickness.
In taking a measurement, all points on the peripheries of
the micrometer surfaces shall be at least one-fourth inch
(14") from the edges of the specimen.
METHOD B.
MACHINIST'S MICROMETER WITHOUT RATCHET
See. 52.405. The instrument used for determining thickness
by Method B shall be a one -inch (11) machinist's type mi-
crometer without a locking device. It shall have a vernier
reading to 01 mil (0.0001") and with anvil and spindle sur-
faces 0.250 4, 0.001" in diameter. The micrometer shall be
tested and calibrated periodically.
Sec. 5x.400. In the determination of thickness, slowly close
the micrometer on the specimen until contact is made with-
out appreciable distortion of the specimen. The criterion of
contact is the initial development of frictional resistance to
morement of the specimen between the micrometer surfaces.
Then read the thickness by means of the vernier.
In moving from one measurement location to another this
operation shall be repeated, never opening the micrometer
more than four or five mils (0.004" or 0.005") more than the
specimen thickness.
In taking a measurement, all points on the peripheries of
the micrometer surfaces shall be at least one-fourth inch
(%") from the edges of the specimen.
METHOD C. DEAD-WEIGHT DIAL MICROMETER
See. 52.407, The micrometer shall be a dead-weight dial -
type micrometer, having two ground and dapped circular sur -
952
VOL. W-1958 EDITION U.B.C.
faces, each 0.250 t 0.001" in diameter, and shall h
capacity of not less than 0.1701.
The surfaces shall be parallel to within 0.0001" ani
move on an axis perpendicular to themselves.
The pressure exerted on the specimen shall be with
lim_ts of 23 and 27 p.s.i.
The dial spindle shall be vertical and the dial shall
least two inches (2") in diameter. It shall be contin
graduated to read directly to 0.00011• and shall be eq
with a telltale hand, recording the number of complet(
lotions of the large hand. The dial indicator mechanisr
be Puri -jeweled.
The micrometer shall be capable of repeating its re
to 0.00005" at sera setting or on a steel gauge block.
Measurements made on standard steel gauges at
within the following tolerances:
Permissible Deo
of Reading ft
Actual Thickn<
Standard St
INTERVALS Gauge
0 to 0.01"................................................................ 0.0001,.
Over0.011 ...................... ..._......... ............................ 0.0005"
Deviations, for the parts of the scale corresponding
paper thickness measured, shall be applied as correct
the thickness reading.
The frame of the micrometer shall be so rigid that <
pound load applied to the dial housing, out of conta
either the weight or the presser -foot spindle, will pr<
deflection of the frame not greater than 0.0001", as in
on the micrometer dial.
853